Vol-i.pdf

AGENDA & APPENDICES FOR THE 59th MEETING OF THE ACADEMIC COUNCIL 09th JUNE 2018 VOLUME - I

PSG COLLEGE OF TECHNOLOGY Coimbatore 641004 Phone: 0422 – 4344777, 2572177, 2572477 Fax: 0422 – 2573833 Email: [email protected] Website: http://www.psgtech.edu

Government Aided Autonomous College Affiliated to Anna University Chennai ISO 9001:2008 Certified

CONTENTS VOLUME I Appendix No

I

Department Name

Programmes

AGENDA ME/MTech (Full Time & Part Time) Regulations Automobile Engineering ME Automotive Engineering (FT) ME Structural engineering (FT & PT) Civil Engineering ME Infrastructure Engineering (FT) ME Computer Science & Engineering (FT) Computer Science and Engineering ME Software Engineering (FT) ME Applied Electronics (FT & PT) ME Power Electronics & Drives (FT) Electrical and Electronics ME Embedded and Real-Time Systems (FT) Engineering ME Electrical Machines (PT) ME Communication Systems (FT) Electronics and Communication ME VLSI Design (FT) Engineering ME Wireless Communications (FT) Instrumentation and Control ME Control Systems (FT) Systems Engineering ME Engineering Design (FT) ME Industrial Engineering (FT & PT) Mechanical Engineering ME Computer Integrated Manufacturing (FT) ME Lean Manufacturing (FT) ME Energy Engineering (FT) Metallurgical Engineering

Production Engineering

Information Technology Electronics and Communication Engineering Biotechnology

Page. No. i-xxxv 1-15 16 40 56 65 81 95 116 137 156 172 187 204 219 232 249 265 276 285

ME Industrial Metallurgy (FT & PT)

299

ME Manufacturing Engineering (FT) ME Production Engineering (PT) ME Product Design & Commerce (FT) ME Virtual Prototyping & Digital Manufacturing (FT) ME Biometrics and Cyber Security (FT)

323 325 348

MTech Nano Science and Technology (FT)

382

MTech Biotechnology (FT)

396

359 368

VOLUME II I II III

IV

Information technology Textile Technology BSc Regulations

MTech Information Technology (FT) MTech Textile Technology (FT & PT)

409 422 448

Applied Science Applied Mathematics and Computational Sciences MSc Regulations Applied Mathematics and Computational Sciences Applied Mathematics and Computational Sciences Applied Mathematics and Computational Sciences

BSc Applied Science

458

BSc Computer System and Design

471 512

MSc Software Systems

526

MSc Theoretical Computer Science

582

MSc Data Science

640

MSc Regulations

696

V Apparel and Fashion Design

MSc Fashion Design and Merchandising

MCA Regulations

709 756

VI Computer Applications VII

Automobile Engineering

VIII a & b

Computer Science and Engineering

IX X

MCA Master of Computer Applications

Electrical and Electronics Engineering Electronics and Communication Engineering

XI

Information technology

XII

Textile Technology

XIII

Applied Science

XIV

Applied Mathematics and Computational Sciences

XV

Apparel and Fashion Design

XVI

Fashion technology

One Credit Course for BE Automobile Engineering Professional Elective Course for BE Computer Science and Engineering Professional Elective Course for ME Software Science Engineering One Credit Course for BE Electrical and Electronics Engineering One Credit Course for BE Electronics and Communication Engineering Professional Elective Courses for BTech Information Technology One Credit Courses for BTech Textile Technology Open Elective Courses for All BE/BTech (Regular & Sandwich) Degree Programmes One Credit Course for five year MSc Software Systems and Five Year MSc Theoretical Computer Science Open Elective Courses for All BE/BTech (Regular & Sandwich) Degree Programmes Special Elective Course for All PhD (FT and PT) Degree Programmes

770 779 780 781 782 783 784 786 787 790 791 793

VOLUME III MBA Regulations (Full Time)

794

XVII Management Sciences

MBA Master of Business Administration

MBA Regulations (Part Time)

805 854

XVIII Management Sciences

MBA Master of Business Administration

865

XIX

Members of the Academic Council for the Period 2016-18

911

XX

List of External Members of Various Boards of Studies for the Period 2016-18

914

PSG COLLEGE OF TECHNOLOGY, COIMBATORE 59th Meeting of the Academic Council Venue: F201

Date: 09.06.2018

Time: 9.45 am

AGENDA 1. Welcome and Introductory remarks by the Chairman. 2. The Boards of Studies in Automobile Engineering, Civil Engineering, Computer Science & Engineering, Electrical & Electronics Engineering, Electronics & Communication Engineering, Instrumentation & Control Systems Engineering, Mechanical Engineering, Metallurgical Engineering, Production Engineering, Biotechnology, Information Technology and Textile Technology recommended the regulations, courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for ME/MTech (Full Time & Part Time) degree programmes of 2018 regulations under choice based credit system. The Standing Committee recommends and Dr K Prakasan will move (i) that the regulations, scheme and syllabi for the following ME/MTech (Full Time & Part Time) degree programmes of 2018 regulations namely ME Automotive Engineering ME Structural Engineering (FT & PT) ME Infrastructure Engineering ME Computer Science & Engineering ME Software Engineering ME Applied Electronics (FT & PT) ME Electrical Machines (PT) ME Power Electronics and Drives ME Embedded and Real Time Systems ME Communication Systems ME VLSI Design ME Wireless Communications ME Biometrics and Cyber Security ME Control Systems ME Engineering Design ME Industrial Engineering (FT & PT) ME Computer Integrated Manufacturing ME Lean Manufacturing ME Energy Engineering ME Industrial Metallurgy (FT & PT) ME Manufacturing Engineering ME Product Design and Commerce ME Virtual Prototyping and Digital Manufacturing ME Production Engineering (PT) MTech Nanotechnology MTech Biotechnology i

MTech MTech

Information Technology Textile Technology (FT & PT)

as in Appendix I [pages 1 - 447] be approved and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in 2018 – 2019 and subsequently under 2018 regulations. 3. The Board of Studies in Applied Science recommended the regulations, courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for 1st & 2nd semesters for BSc degree programme of 2018 regulations. The Standing Committee recommends and Dr S C Murugavel will move (i)

that the regulations, scheme and syllabi for the following BSc degree programme of 2018 regulations namely BSc

Applied Science

as in Appendix II [pages 448 - 470] be approved and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in 2018 – 2019 and subsequently under 2018 regulations. 4. The Board of Studies in Applied Mathematics & Computational Sciences recommended the regulations, courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for BSc degree programme of 2018 regulations. The Standing Committee recommends and Dr N Geetha will move (i)

that the regulations, scheme and syllabi for the following BSc degree programmes of 2018 regulations namely BSc

Computer Systems and Design

as in Appendix III [pages 471 - 511] be approved and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in 2018 – 2019 and subsequently under 2018 regulations. 5. The Board of Studies in Applied Mathematics and Computational Sciences recommended the regulations, courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for Five Year Integrated MSc degree programmes of 2018 regulations. The Standing Committee recommends and Dr N Geetha will move (i) that the regulations, courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for the following Five Year Integrated MSc degree programmes of 2018 regulations namely MSc MSc

Software Systems Theoretical Computer Science ii

MSc

Data Science

as in Appendix IV [pages 512 - 695] be approved and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in 2018-2019 and subsequently under 2018 regulations. 6. The Board of Studies in Apparel and Fashion Design recommended the regulations, courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for Five Year Integrated MSc degree programme of 2018 regulations. The Standing Committee recommends and Dr D Vijayalakshmi will move (i) that the regulations, courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for the following Five Year Integrated MSc degree programme of 2018 regulations namely MSc

Fashion Design and Merchandising

as in Appendix V [pages 696 - 755] be approved and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in 2018-2019 and subsequently under 2018 regulations. 7. The Board of Studies in Computer Applications recommended the regulations, courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for 1st & 2nd semesters for MCA Programme of 2018 regulations. The Standing Committee recommends and Dr A Chitra will move (i) that the regulations, courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for for the following programme of 2018 regulations namely MCA

Master of Computer Applications

as in Appendix VI [pages 756 - 778] be approved and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in 2018 – 2019 and subsequently under 2018 regulations. 8. The Board of Studies in Automobile Engineering recommended the following The Standing Committee recommends and Dr S Neelakrishnan will move (i) that the introduction of the following One credit course namely 15AF20

Core Tools of IATF 16949 – SPC and MSA

for BE Automobile Engineering of 2015 Appendix VII [page 779] be approved and

regulations with syllabus as in

(ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2015 – 2016 and subsequently under 2015 regulations. iii

9. The Board of Studies in Computer Science and Engineering recommended the following The Standing Committee recommends and Dr G Sudha Sadasivam will move a.

(i) that the introduction of the following professional elective course namely 15Z024

Multi-tier Computing

for BE Computer Science and Engineering of 2015 regulations with syllabus as in Appendix VIII (a) [page 780] be approved and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2015 – 2016 and subsequently under 2015 regulations. b. (i) that the introduction of the following professional elective course namely 15ZS41

Machine Learning

for ME Software Engineering of 2015 regulations with syllabus as in Appendix VIII (b) [page 781] be approved and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2017 – 2018 under 2015 regulations. 10. The Board of Studies in Electrical and Electronics Engineering recommended the following The Standing Committee recommends and Dr M C Bhuvaneswari will move (i)

that the introduction of the following one credit course namely 15EF18

Industrial Drives for Automation

for BE Electrical and Electronics Engineering (Regular & Sandwich) of 2015 regulations with syllabus as in Appendix IX [page 782] be ratified and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2015 – 2016 and subsequently under 2015 regulations. 11. The Board of Studies in Electronics and Communication Engineering recommended the following The Standing Committee recommends and Dr S Subha Rani will move (i) that the introduction of the following one credit course namely 15LF21

ASIC Flow for Mixed Signal VLSI Design

for BE Electronics and Communication Engineering of 2015 regulations with syllabus as in Appendix X [page 783] be approved and iv

(ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2015 – 2016 and subsequently under 2015 regulations 12. The Board of Studies in Information Technology recommended the following The Standing Committee recommends and Dr K Umamaheswari will move (i)

that the introduction of the following elective courses namely 15I020 15I021 15I022 15I023

Secure Coding Human Computer Interaction Computer Vision Cyber Physical Systems

for BTech Information Technology of 2015 regulations with syllabus as in Appendix XI [page 784 - 785] be approved and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2015 – 2016 and subsequently under 2015 regulations. 13. The Board of Studies in Textile Technology recommended the following The Standing Committee recommends and Dr G Thilagavathi will move (i) that the introduction of the following one credit courses namely 15TF26 15TF27 15TF28

Fabric Sourcing Speciality Fabric Sourcing Home Textiles

for BTech Textile Technology degree programme of 2015 regulations with syllabus as in Appendix XII [page 786] be approved and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2015 – 2016 and subsequently under 2015 regulations. 14. The Board of Studies in Applied Science recommended the following The Standing Committee recommends and Dr S C Murugavel will move (i)

that the introduction of the following open elective courses namely 15OH95 15OH96 15OH97 15OH98

Composites Materials Ceramic Materials Nano Magnetism and Spintronics Financial Engineering

for all BE/BTech Degree Programme (Regular & Sandwich) of 2015 regulations with syllabus as in Appendix XIII [page 787 - 789] be approved and

v

(ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2015 – 2016 and subsequently under 2015 regulations. 15. The Board of Studies in Applied Mathematics and Computational Sciences recommended the following The Standing Committee recommends and Dr N Geetha will move (i) that the introduction of the following elective course namely 12XWAP/12XTEL

Deep Learning

for Five Year MSc Software Systems and Five Year MSc Theoretical Computer Science of 2012 regulations with syllabus as in Appendix XVIII [page 790 ] be approved and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2014 – 2015 and subsequently under 2012 regulations. 16. The Board of Studies in Apparel and Fashion Design recommended the following The Standing Committee recommends and Dr D Vijayalakshmi will move (i) that the introduction of the following open elective courses namely 15FOD1 15FOD2 15FOD3 15FOD4

Theatre and Film Costumes Elements and Principles of Fashion Design World Art and Craft Fashion Journalism

for all BE/BTech Degree Programme (Regular & Sandwich) of 2015 regulations with syllabus as in Appendix XIV [page 791-792] be approved and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2015 – 2016 and subsequently under 2015 regulations. 17. The Board of Studies in Fashion Technology recommended the following The Standing Committee recommends and Dr P Kandhavadivu will move a. (i) that the introduction of the following course of study as prescribed by Anna University (PhD 2015 regulations, under the category of special elective) namely 15RM02

Field work

for PhD (FT & PT) programme of 2015 regulations with syllabus as in Appendix XV (a) [page 793 ] be ratified and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2017 – 2018 under 2015 regulations.

vi

b. (i) that the introduction of the following course of study as prescribed by Anna University (PhD 2015 regulations, under the category of special elective) namely 18RM02

Field work

for PhD (FT & PT) programme of 2018 regulations with syllabus as in Appendix XV (b) [page 793 ] be approved and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in 2018 – 2019 and subsequently under 2018 regulations. 18. The Board of Studies in Management Sciences recommended the courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for MBA degree programme of 2018 regulations. The Standing Committee recommends and Dr V Thilagam will move (i) that the regulations, courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for the following programme of 2018 regulations namely MBA

Master of Business Administration

as in Appendix XVI [pages 794-853] be approved and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in 2018-2019 and subsequently under 2018 regulations. 19. The Board of Studies in Management Sciences recommended the courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for the PART TIME MBA degree programme of 2018 regulations. The Standing Committee recommends and Dr V Thilagam will move (i) that the regulations, courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for the following programme of 2018 regulations namely PART TIME MBA

Part Time Master of Business Administration

as in Appendix XVII [pages 854-910] be approved and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in 2018-2019 and subsequently under 2018 regulations.

vii

20. The Standing Committee recommends and Dr K Prakasan will move a. (i) that the modification in the clause 4 (vi) in 2015 regulations of BE (Regular & Sandwich) / BTech, degree programmes be ratified as under Existing

Revised

4 (vi)

4 (vi)

Online courses: Students can register and earn

Online courses: Students can register and earn

credits for online courses approved by department

credits for online courses approved by department

committee

Programme

committee consisting of HoD, Programme Coordinator,

Coordinator, Tutor and Subject Expert. Students who

Tutor and Subject Expert. Students who complete

complete online courses successfully to a maximum

relevant online courses successfully to a maximum of 6

of 6 credits may obtain exemption from studying two

credits may obtain exemption from studying two

Professional Electives. The list of online courses is to

Professional

be approved by Chairman Academic Council on the

complete relevant online courses successfully to a

recommendation of HoD at the beginning of the

maximum of 6 credits may obtain exemption from

semester if necessary, subject to ratification in the

studying two Open Electives. The list of online courses

next Academic council meeting. The Committee will

is to be approved by Chairman Academic Council on

monitor the progress of the student and recommend

the recommendation of HoD at the beginning of the

the grade or evaluate the candidate in 100%

semester if necessary, subject to ratification in the next

Continuous Assessment (CA) pattern, if necessary.

Academic council meeting. The Committee will monitor

Candidates may do online courses

fifth

the progress of the student and recommend the grade

regular

or evaluate the candidate in 100% Continuous

semester

consisting

to

seventh

of

HoD,

semester

from

for

Electives.

Similarly,

students

who

programmes and from fifth semester to ninth

Assessment (CA) pattern, if necessary.

Candidates

semester for sandwich programmes.

may do online courses for exemption from studying professional elective from fifth semester to seventh semester for regular programmes and from fifth semester to ninth semester for sandwich programmes. However, the relevant online courses for exemption from open electives can be registered and credits can be earned from third semester onwards and are to be completed before the pre final semester of the respective programmes.

(ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2015 – 2016 and subsequently under 2015 regulations. 21. The Board of Studies in Mechanical Engineering recommended the following The Standing Committee recommends and Dr K Natarajan will move viii

(i) that the change in course code of the following elective namely S.No. 1

Existing Course Code and Title 12M041 Advanced Heat and Mass Transfer

Revised Course Code and Title 12M043 Advanced Heat and Mass Transfer

for BE Regular/Sandwich Mechanical Engineering Degree Programme of 2012 regulations be ratified and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students of BE Sandwich Degree Programme admitted in 2014 – 2015, under 2012 regulations. 22. The Board of Studies in Applied Mathematics & Computational Sciences recommended the following The Standing Committee recommends and Dr N Geetha will move (i) that the change in course title of the following elective namely S.No. 1

Existing Course Code and Title 15SA76 Mathematical Programming under Uncertainty

Revised Course Code and Title 15SA76 Mathematical Modelling under Uncertainty

for 2 Year MSc Applied Mathematics Degree Programme of 2015 regulations be ratified and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in the year 2016 and subsequently under 2015 regulations. 23. The Board of Studies in Physics recommended the following The Standing Committee recommends and Dr M D Kannan will move (ii) that the change in course code of the following elective namely S.No.

Existing Course Code and Title

1

15OH30 Quantum Mechanics 15OH31 MEMS Sensors and Actuators for Industrial Applications

2

Revised Course Code and Title 15OH18 Quantum Mechanics 15OH19 MEMS Sensors and Actuators for Industrial Applications

for All BE/BTech Degree Programme (Regular & Sandwich) of 2015 regulations be approved and (iii) that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in 2015-2016 and subsequently under 2015 regulations.

ix

24. Any other matter. The Standing Committee recommends and Dr K.Prakasan will move (i) that the following SWAYAM based online courses for all (UG & PG) degree programmes be ratified as under

Sl No

Subject Code

Course Code (PSG Tech)

Course Title

Credits

1

noc18_bt03

15Q301

Demystifying The Brain

1

2

noc18-bt04

15Q302

Introductory Mathematical Methods for Biologists

2

3

noc18_bt08

15Q303

Medical Biomaterials

2

4

noc18_bt10

15Q304

Interactomics

2

5 6

noc18_bt12 noc18_ce01

15Q305 15Q306

Bio-Electrochemistry Applied Environmental Micro Biology

1 3

7*

noc17_ce02

15Q307

Hydration, Porosity and Strength of Comentitious Materials

2

8 9

noc18_ce03 noc18_ce06

15Q308 15Q309

Digital land Surveying and Mapping Energy Efficiency, Acoustics And Day Lighting In Buildings

2 3

10

noc18 _cs02

15Q310

Social Networks

3

11 12 13

noc18 _ cs03 noc18_cs06 Noc18_cs07

15Q311 15Q312 15Q313

Introduction to Modern Application Development VLSI Physical design Cryptography and Network Security

2 3 3

14

noc18 _ cs08

15Q314

Introduction to Internet of Things

3

15 16

noc18 _ cs12 noc18 _ cs16

15Q315 15Q316

Real Time Operating System Cloud Computing

1 2

17

noc18_cs21

15Q317

Programming, Data Structures And Algorithms Using Python

2

x

Department BioTechnology BioTechnology & BioMedical Engg BioTechnology

Civil Engineering

IT & CSE EEE MCA MCA, CSE & EEE IT & CSE CSE Mechanical Engineering

*18

noc17_cs22

15Q147

Introduction to Internet of Things

3

19

noc18 _ cs23

15Q318

Introduction to Human Computer Interactions

2

20

noc18 _ cs26

15Q319

Introduction to Machine Learning

3

21

noc18_cs27

15Q320

Reinforcement Learning

3

22

noc18 _ cs28

15Q321

Data Science for Engineers

2

*23

noc17_ec06

15Q135

Design of Photovoltaic System

3

24

noc18 _ ec08

15Q322

Electronics Enclosures Thermal Issues

2

*25

noc17_ec15

15Q125

Analog Circuits and System Through SPICE Simulation

2

26

noc18_ee12

15Q323

Industrial Automation and Control

3

*27

noc17_ee20

15Q106

Design of Internet of Things

2

28 29 30

noc18_ge01 noc18_ ge05 noc18_ ge08

15Q324 15Q325 15Q326

Digital and the Everyday: From Codes to Cloud MATLAB Programming for Numerical Computation Virtual Reality Engineering

1 2 3

Robotics and Automation Engineering

31

noc18_me03

15Q327

Introduction to Composites

3

Mechanical Engineering

32 33

noc18_me04 noc18_me08

15Q328 15Q329

Product Design & Manufacturing Basics of Finite Element Analysis – I

2 2

Textile Technology

34

noc18_me09

15Q330

Transport Phenomena in Materials

2

35

noc18_me11

15Q331

Introduction to Mechanical Micro Machining

3

Metallurgy Mechanical Engineering

xi

IT Robotics and Automation Engineering MCA, IT, CSE & EEE IT & Robotics and Automation Engineering CSE & Robotics and Automation Engineering EEE Robotics and Automation Engineering EEE

36

noc18 _me12

15Q332

Machinery Fault Diagnosis and Signal processing

3

37

noc18_me14

15Q333

Metal cutting and Machine Tools

1

38

noc18_me27

15Q334

Theory of Production Processes

3

39

noc18_me36

15Q335

Surface Engineering of Nanomaterials

2

40

noc18_me37

15Q336

Introduction to Mechanical Vibration

2

41

noc18_me38

15Q337

Modeling and Simulationof Dynamic Systems

2

42

noc18_mg03

15Q338

Management of New Products and Services

1

43 44

noc18_mg08 Noc18_mg12

15Q339 15Q340

Project Management Financial Statement Analysis and Reporting

2 3

45

noc18-mg17

15Q341

Consumer Behaviour

2

46

noc18_mm01

15Q342

Physics of Materials

3

47 *48

noc18_mm03 noc17_mm14

15Q343 15Q121

Fundamentals of Electronic Materials and Devices Refrigeration and Air Conditioning

2 2

*49

noc17_mm15

15Q122

Spur and Helical Gear Cutting

1

50

noc18_oe02

15Q344

Water Economics and Governance

3

(ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2015 – 2016 and subsequently under 2015 regulations.

xii

Robotics and Automation Engineering Automobile Engineering & Mechanical Engineering Mechanical Engineering Textile Technology Mechanical Engineering Textile Technology Robotics and Automation Engineering Textile Technology Fashion Technology Metallurgical Engineering Automobile Engineering Civil Engineering

PSG COLLEGE OF TECHNOLOGY: COIMBATORE 59th MEETING OF THE ACADEMIC COUNCIL ATTENDANCE SHEET

Venue: F 201

Date: 09.06.2018

xiii

Time: 9.45 am

xiv

xv

xvi

PSG COLLEGE OF TECHNOLOGY: COIMBATORE 59th MEETING OF THE ACADEMIC COUNCIL ATTENDANCE SHEET

Venue: F 201

Date: 09.06.2018

Time: 10.00 am

Minutes of the 59th Meeting of the Academic Council held at 10.00 am on Saturday, 9th June, 2018 at Hall F201. The following members were present. S.No. 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Name of the Member Dr R Rudramoorthy

Chairman & Principal

Dr S Selladurai Professor, Department of Physics, Anna University, Chennai –600 025. Dr S Srinivasalu Professor, Institute for Ocean Management, Anna University, Chennai – 600 025. Dr L S Jayagopal Consultant, No.1, Jawahar Nagar, Alagesan Road, ASHS Post, Coimbatore – 641 043. Mr V V Deshmukh, Flat 301, A9, Latis Cooperative Housing Society Limited, Near Nutan Polytechnic, Talegaon Chakan Road, Talegaon Daphade, Pune – 410 507, Maharastra. Dr P V Mohanram Principal, PSG Institute of Technology & Applied Research, Neelambur, Coimbatore – 641 062 Prof. B Ramamoorthy Advisor – Academic PSG Institutions, Coimbatore- 641004

8.

Mr V C Thangavel

9.

Dr S Neelakrishnan

Designation

University Nominees

Engineering Expert

Industry Expert

Education Expert

Special Invitee Controller of Examinations HoD, Dept. of Automobile Engineering

xvii

10.

Dr R Vidhyapriya

11.

Dr G Sankarasubramanian

12.

Dr G Sudha Sadasivam

13.

Dr M C Bhuvaneswari

14.

Dr S Subha Rani

15.

Dr J Arunshankar

16.

Dr J Krishnamoorthy

17.

Dr K Prakasan

18.

Dr B Vinod

19.

Dr M Ananthasubramanian

20.

Dr P Kandhavadivu

21.

Dr K Umamaheswari

22.

Dr G Thilagavathi

23.

Dr D Vijayalakshmi

24.

Dr S C Murugavel

25.

Dr M Kumaravel

26.

Dr A Chitra

27.

Mr S P Suresh Kumar

28.

Dr V Santhi

29.

Dr M D Kannan

HoD, Dept. of Biomedical Engineering HoD, Dept. of Civil Engineering HoD, Dept. of Computer Science and Engineering Head In-charge, Dept. of Electrical and Electronics Engineering HoD, Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering HoD, Dept. of Instrumentation and Control Systems Engineering HoD In-Charge, Dept. of Metallurgical Engineering Dean - Autonomous Functioning & HoD, Dept. of Production Engineering Head In-charge, Dept. of Robotics & Automation Engineering HoD, Dept. of Biotechnology HoD, Dept. of Fashion Technology HoD, Dept. of Information Technology HoD, Dept. of Textile Technology HoD, Dept. of Apparel & Fashion Design HoD In-Charge, Dept. of Applied Science HoD, Dept. of Chemistry HoD, Dept. of Computer Applications Head In-Charge, Dept. of English Head In-Charge, Dept. of Humanities Head In-Charge, Dept. of Physics

xviii

33.

Dr J V Ramasamy Dean - Academic Dr A Kandaswamy Dean - Industrial Research & Development Dr N Geetha Professor, Dept. of Applied Mathematics & Computational Sciences Dr R Sreenivasan

34.

Dr K Natarajan

Dean-Student Affairs

35.

Dr P Narayanasamy

Dean, Computing and Networks

36.

Dr S Saravanan

Member Secretary

30. 31. 32.

37. 38. 39.

40.

41. 42. 43. 44.

Mr D Muralidhar Training Manager PSG Industrial Institute Dr P Gopalakrishnan Professor, Department of Metallurgical Engineering Dr C K Shashidharan Nair Professor, Dept. of Applied Science Dr P Visalakshi Professor, Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering Dr J Kanchana Professor, Department of Mechanical Engineering Dr S Kanthalakshmi Professor, Department of Electrical and Engineering Dr M Kalpana Associate Professor, Department of Humanities Dr V Thilagam Associate Professor, PSG Institute of Management

xix

Four teachers of the college representing different categories of the teaching staff

Dean - Educational Technology

Special Invitees

Special Invitees

The following members expressed their inability to attend the meeting due to their preoccupation. S.No.

1.

2.

Name of the Member Dr T Ramesh Babu Professor, Department of Industrial Engineering, Anna University, Chennai – 600 025. Mr R Nandakumar Manager – Legal Affairs, Sri Karthikeya Spinning & Weaving Mills Pvt. Ltd., 484, Kamaraj Road, Upplipalyam Coimbatore 641 015.

Designation

University Nominee

Law Expert

3.

Dr P R Thyla

HoD, Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

4.

Dr R Nadarajan

HoD, Dept. of Applied Mathematics & Computational Sciences

5.

Dr R Nandagopal

Director, PSG Institute of Management

6.

Dr R Arumuganathan

HoD, Dept. of Mathematics

7.

Dr V Ramamurthy Professor, Dept. of Biotechnology

One of the teachers of the college representing different categories of the teaching staff

8.

Prof R Ragupathy

Dean - Administration

9.

Dr R Venkatesan

Dean-Placement

10.

Dr C Lakshmi Deepika Professor, Department of Electronics & Communication Engineering

Special Invitee

xx

MINUTES OF THE 59TH MEETING OF THE ACADEMIC COUNCIL Chairman extended a warm welcome to the gathering and presented the background with which the new PG regulations, Scheme of assessment and subjects of study (PG - 2018 under CBCS) are prepared. This is aimed at improving Placement opportunities, research activities and motivating PG students to pursue careers in teaching. Some of the important changes introduced are as follows: (a) In CA tests – average of marks secured by the student in two tests will be considered and the practice of considering best two scores out of three CA tests is discontinued. (b) Practicals have final examination component and it will have a weightage of 50% instead of 100% CA evaluation. (c) More laboratories are introduced as Professional Core instead of theory courses to enhance research capabilities in PG programmes which are research oriented. The courses have 4 outcomes listed in general so that achievement of course outcomes can be computed easily. The experts suggested the following: Prof. Srinivasulu: Suggested that self learning can be introduced with a maximum credit of 3. Online courses can be permitted with suitable checks for credit transfer. These options are available in 2015 and 2018 PG regulations. Prof. Selladurai: Opined that innovation projects can be introduced. There are options for such open ended activities in PG curriculum under several laboratories, but these opportunities are to be used carefully by students. Mr.V V Deshmuk: Indicated that the employability of PG students is not appreciable and electives are like day to day requirements. Courses are to be taught in such a way that applications are always kept in focus while learning courses. After the companies conclude their placement activities, the feedback from the company is to be analyzed on the performance of students. This will help in Mid-term corrections. A major shift in thinking is needed in preparing the curriculum. Chairman Academic Council indicated that these points will be further discussed with the chairmen- Boards of Studies. Dr.L S Jayagopal: The contents of the PG courses are to be at a lighter level and outcomes have to come from the external world and not from the teacher. Students are to be prepared to learn by themselves. Application of fundamentals are to be stressed. Prof. Srinivasulu: Weightage can be given to every learning activities like home work, assignments/tutorials and presentations. Assessments must be designed in such a way that they reflect the learning process.

xxi

Dr. P V Mohanram: Principles of pedagogy and methods of teaching can be imparted to PG students as many of them take up teaching positions. Courses on IIOT & cost management can be included in PG education. Prof. B Ramamoorthy: Suggested the need for activity based learning and experiential learning. He also suggested to introduce courses on communication skills, ethics & research methodology. A comprehensive viva voce will be very helpful towards learning in depth. Plagiarism is to be eliminated in research and software is needed to check plagiarism professionally. The contents of curriculum can be compared with other universities from abroad and IITs wherever possible. Two audit courses will be introduced in this regard. Plagiarism is checked using licensed software. He also suggested reduction in courses of study so that more research activities can be taken up. The Chairman provided necessary clarifications wherever it was feasible and the rest of the suggestions will be implemented after deliberations with the chairmen of various boards. The Chairman thanked all the members and appreciated their contributions for the improvement of the curriculum. The term of the nominated members of all the Boards of Studies and Academic Council is ending with this meeting. New members will be nominated as per University Grants Commission (UGC) norms. 2. The Boards of Studies in Automobile Engineering, Civil Engineering, Computer Science & Engineering, Electrical & Electronics Engineering, Electronics & Communication Engineering, Instrumentation & Control Systems Engineering, Mechanical Engineering, Metallurgical Engineering, Production Engineering, Biotechnology, Information Technology and Textile Technology recommended the regulations, courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for ME/MTech (Full Time & Part Time) degree programmes of 2018 regulations under choice based credit system. The Standing Committee recommends and Dr K Prakasan moved (i) that the regulations, scheme and syllabi for the following ME/MTech (Full Time & Part Time) degree programmes of 2018 regulations namely ME Automotive Engineering ME Structural Engineering (FT & PT) ME Infrastructure Engineering ME Computer Science & Engineering ME Software Engineering ME Applied Electronics (FT & PT) ME Electrical Machines (PT) ME Power Electronics and Drives ME Embedded and Real Time Systems ME Communication Systems ME VLSI Design ME Wireless Communications ME Biometrics and Cyber Security xxii

ME ME ME ME ME ME ME ME ME ME ME MTech MTech MTech MTech

Control Systems Engineering Design Industrial Engineering (FT & PT) Computer Integrated Manufacturing Lean Manufacturing Energy Engineering Industrial Metallurgy (FT & PT) Manufacturing Engineering Product Design and Commerce Virtual Prototyping and Digital Manufacturing Production Engineering (PT) Nanotechnology Biotechnology Information Technology Textile Technology (FT & PT)

as in Appendix I [pages 1 - 447] be approved and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in 2018 – 2019 and subsequently under 2018 regulations. Dr S C Murugavel seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried 3. The Board of Studies in Applied Science recommended the regulations, courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for 1st & 2nd semesters for BSc degree programme of 2018 regulations. The Standing Committee recommends and Dr S C Murugavel moved (i)

that the regulations, scheme and syllabi for the following BSc degree programme of 2018 regulations namely BSc

Applied Science

as in Appendix II [pages 448 - 470] be approved and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in 2018 – 2019 and subsequently under 2018 regulations. Dr D Vijayalakshmi seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried 4. The Board of Studies in Applied Mathematics & Computational Sciences recommended the regulations, courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for BSc degree programme of 2018 regulations. The Standing Committee recommends and Dr N Geetha moved (i)

that the regulations, scheme and syllabi for the following BSc degree programmes of 2018 regulations namely

xxiii

BSc

Computer Systems and Design

as in Appendix III [pages 471 - 511] be approved and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in 2018 – 2019 and subsequently under 2018 regulations. Dr K Prakasan seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried 5. The Board of Studies in Applied Mathematics and Computational Sciences recommended the regulations, courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for Five Year Integrated MSc degree programmes of 2018 regulations. The Standing Committee recommends and Dr N Geetha moved (i) that the regulations, courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for the following Five Year Integrated MSc degree programmes of 2018 regulations namely MSc MSc MSc

Software Systems Theoretical Computer Science Data Science

as in Appendix IV [pages 512 - 695] be approved and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in 2018-2019 and subsequently under 2018 regulations. Dr S Neelakrishnan seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried 6. The Board of Studies in Apparel and Fashion Design recommended the regulations, courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for Five Year Integrated MSc degree programme of 2018 regulations. The Standing Committee recommends and Dr D Vijayalakshmi moved (i) that the regulations, courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for the following Five Year Integrated MSc degree programme of 2018 regulations namely MSc

Fashion Design and Merchandising

as in Appendix V [pages 696 - 755] be approved and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in 2018-2019 and subsequently under 2018 regulations. Dr A Chitra seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried

xxiv

7. The Board of Studies in Computer Applications recommended the regulations, courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for 1st & 2nd semesters for MCA Programme of 2018 regulations. The Standing Committee recommends and Dr A Chitra moved (i) that the regulations, courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for for the following programme of 2018 regulations namely MCA

Master of Computer Applications

as in Appendix VI [pages 756 - 778] be approved and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in 2018 – 2019 and subsequently under 2018 regulations. Dr G Sudha Sadasivam seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried 8. The Board of Studies in Automobile Engineering recommended the following The Standing Committee recommends and Dr S Neelakrishnan moved (i) that the introduction of the following One credit course namely 15AF20

Core Tools of IATF 16949 – SPC and MSA

for BE Automobile Engineering of 2015 Appendix VII [page 779 ] be approved and

regulations with syllabus as in

(ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2015 – 2016 and subsequently under 2015 regulations. Dr M C Bhuvaneswari seconded the motion.The motion was put to vote and carried 9. The Board of Studies in Computer Science and Engineering following

recommended the

The Standing Committee recommends and Dr G Sudha Sadasivam moved a.

(i) that the introduction of the following professional elective course namely 15Z024

Multi-tier Computing

for BE Computer Science and Engineering of 2015 regulations with syllabus as in Appendix VIII (a) [page 780] be approved and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2015 – 2016 and subsequently under 2015 regulations.

xxv

b. (i) that the introduction of the following professional elective course namely 15ZS41

Machine Learning

for ME Software Engineering of 2015 regulations with syllabus as in Appendix VIII (b) [page 781] be approved and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2017 – 2018 under 2015 regulations. Dr S Subha Rani seconded the motion.The motion was put to vote and carried 10. The Board of Studies in Electrical and Electronics Engineering recommended the following The Standing Committee recommends and Dr M C Bhuvaneswari moved (i)

that the introduction of the following one credit course namely 15EF18

Industrial Drives for Automation

for BE Electrical and Electronics Engineering (Regular & Sandwich) of 2015 regulations with syllabus as in Appendix IX [page 782] be ratified and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2015 – 2016 and subsequently under 2015 regulations. Dr K Umamaheswari seconded the motion.The motion was put to vote and carried 11. The Board of Studies in Electronics and Communication Engineering recommended the following The Standing Committee recommends and Dr S Subha Rani moved (i) that the introduction of the following one credit course namely 15LF21

ASIC Flow for Mixed Signal VLSI Design

for BE Electronics and Communication Engineering of 2015 regulations with syllabus as in Appendix X [page 783] be approved and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2015 – 2016 and subsequently under 2015 regulations Dr G Thilagavathi seconded the motion.The motion was put to vote and carried 12. The Board of Studies in Information Technology recommended the following The Standing Committee recommends and Dr K Umamaheswari moved

xxvi

(i)

that the introduction of the following elective courses namely 15I020 15I021 15I022 15I023

Secure Coding Human Computer Interaction Computer Vision Cyber Physical Systems

for BTech Information Technology of 2015 regulations with syllabus as in Appendix XI [page 784 - 785] be approved and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2015 – 2016 and subsequently under 2015 regulations. 13. The Board of Studies in Textile Technology recommended the following The Standing Committee recommends and Dr G Thilagavathi moved (i) that the introduction of the following one credit courses namely 15TF26 15TF27 15TF28

Fabric Sourcing Speciality Fabric Sourcing Home Textiles

for BTech Textile Technology degree programme of 2015 regulations with syllabus as in Appendix XII [page 786] be approved and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2015 – 2016 and subsequently under 2015 regulations. Dr P Kandhavadivu seconded the motion.The motion was put to vote and carried 14. The Board of Studies in Applied Science recommended the following The Standing Committee recommends and Dr S C Murugavel moved (i)

that the introduction of the following open elective courses namely 15OH95 15OH96 15OH97 15OH98

Composites Materials Ceramic Materials Nano Magnetism and Spintronics Financial Engineering

for all BE/BTech Degree Programme (Regular & Sandwich) of 2015 regulations with syllabus as in Appendix XIII [page 787 - 789] be approved and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2015 – 2016 and subsequently under 2015 regulations. Dr M D Kannan seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried xxvii

15. The Board of Studies in Applied Mathematics and Computational Sciences recommended the following The Standing Committee recommends and Dr N Geetha moved (i) that the introduction of the following elective course namely 12XWAP/12XTEL

Deep Learning

for Five Year MSc Software Systems and Five Year MSc Theoretical Computer Science of 2012 regulations with syllabus as in Appendix XVIII [page 790 ] be approved and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2014 – 2015 and subsequently under 2012 regulations. Dr M Kumaravel seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried 16. The Board of Studies in Apparel and Fashion Design recommended the following The Standing Committee recommends and Dr D Vijayalakshmi moved (i) that the introduction of the following open elective courses namely 15FOD1 15FOD2 15FOD3 15FOD4

Theatre and Film Costumes Elements and Principles of Fashion Design World Art and Craft Fashion Journalism

for all BE/BTech Degree Programme (Regular & Sandwich) of 2015 regulations with syllabus as in Appendix XIV [page 791-792] be approved and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2015 – 2016 and subsequently under 2015 regulations. Dr M Ananthasubramanian seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried 17. The Board of Studies in Fashion Technology recommended the following The Standing Committee recommends and Dr P Kandhavadivu moved a. (i) that the introduction of the following course of study as prescribed by Anna University (PhD 2015 regulations, under the category of special elective) namely 15RM02

Field work

for PhD (FT & PT) programme of 2015 regulations with syllabus as in Appendix XV (a) [page 793] be ratified and

xxviii

(ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2017 – 2018 under 2015 regulations. b. (i) that the introduction of the following course of study as prescribed by Anna University (PhD 2015 regulations, under the category of special elective) namely 18RM02

Field work

for PhD (FT & PT) programme of 2018 regulations with syllabus as in Appendix XV (b) [page 793] be approved and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in 2018 – 2019 and subsequently under 2018 regulations. Dr J Arunshankar seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried 18. The Board of Studies in Management Sciences recommended the courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for MBA degree programme of 2018 regulations. The Standing Committee recommends and Dr V Thilagam moved (i) that the regulations, courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for the following programme of 2018 regulations namely MBA

Master of Business Administration

as in Appendix XVI [pages 794-853] be approved and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in 2018-2019 and subsequently under 2018 regulations. Dr R Vidhyapriya seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried 19. The Board of Studies in Management Sciences recommended the courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for the PART TIME MBA degree programme of 2018 regulations. The Standing Committee recommends and Dr V Thilagam moved (i) that the regulations, courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for the following programme of 2018 regulations namely PART TIME MBA

Part Time Master of Business Administration

as in Appendix XVII [pages 854-910] be approved and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in 2018-2019 and subsequently under 2018 regulations. xxix

Dr K Prakasan seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried 20. The Standing Committee recommends and Dr K Prakasan moved a. (i) that the modification in the clause 4 (vi) in 2015 regulations of BE (Regular & Sandwich) / BTech, degree programmes be ratified as under Existing

Revised

4 (vi)

4 (vi)

Online courses: Students can register and earn

Online courses: Students can register and earn

credits

credits for online courses approved by department

for

online

department

courses

committee

approved

consisting

of

by HoD,

committee

consisting

of

HoD,

Programme

Programme Coordinator, Tutor and Subject

Coordinator, Tutor and Subject Expert. Students

Expert. Students who complete online courses

who complete relevant online courses successfully

successfully to a maximum of 6 credits may

to a maximum of 6 credits may obtain exemption

obtain exemption from studying two Professional

from studying two Professional Electives. Similarly,

Electives. The list of online courses is to be

students who complete relevant online courses

approved by Chairman Academic Council on the

successfully to a maximum of 6 credits may obtain

recommendation of HoD at the beginning of the

exemption from studying two Open Electives. The

semester if necessary, subject to ratification in

list of online courses is to be approved by

the

Chairman

next

Academic

council

meeting.

The

Academic

Council

on

the

Committee will monitor the progress of the

recommendation of HoD at the beginning of the

student and recommend the grade or evaluate

semester if necessary, subject to ratification in the

the candidate in 100% Continuous Assessment

next Academic council meeting. The Committee

(CA) pattern, if necessary. Candidates may do

will monitor the progress of the student and

online courses from fifth

semester to seventh

recommend the grade or evaluate the candidate in

semester for regular programmes and from fifth

100% Continuous Assessment (CA) pattern, if

semester

necessary. Candidates may do online courses for

to

programmes.

ninth

semester

for

sandwich

exemption from studying professional elective from fifth semester to seventh semester for regular programmes and from fifth semester to ninth semester for sandwich programmes. However, the relevant online courses for exemption from open electives can be registered and credits can be earned from third semester onwards and are to be completed before the pre final semester of the respective programmes.

xxx

(ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2015 – 2016 and subsequently under 2015 regulations. Dr J Krishnamoorthi seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried 21. The Board of Studies in Mechanical Engineering recommended the following The Standing Committee recommends and Dr K Natarajan moved (i) that the change in course code of the following elective namely S.No. 1

Existing Course Code and Title 12M041 Advanced Heat and Mass Transfer

Revised Course Code and Title 12M043 Advanced Heat and Mass Transfer

for BE Regular/Sandwich Mechanical Engineering Degree Programme of 2012 regulations be ratified and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students of BE Sandwich Degree Programme admitted in 2014 – 2015, under 2012 regulations. Dr B Vinod seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried

22. The Board of Studies in Applied Mathematics & Computational Sciences recommended the following The Standing Committee recommends and Dr N Geetha will moved (i) that the change in course title of the following elective namely S.No. 1

Existing Course Code and Title 15SA76 Mathematical Programming under Uncertainty

Revised Course Code and Title 15SA76 Mathematical Modelling under Uncertainty

for 2 Year MSc Applied Mathematics Degree Programme of 2015 regulations be ratified and (ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in the year 2016 and subsequently under 2015 regulations. Dr P Kandhavadivu seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried 23. The Board of Studies in Physics recommended the following The Standing Committee recommends and Dr M D Kannan will moved

xxxi

(ii) that the change in course code of the following elective namely S.No.

Existing Course Code and Title

1

15OH30 Quantum Mechanics 15OH31 MEMS Sensors and Actuators for Industrial Applications

2

Revised Course Code and Title 15OH18 Quantum Mechanics 15OH19 MEMS Sensors and Actuators for Industrial Applications

for All BE/BTech Degree Programme (Regular & Sandwich) of 2015 regulations be approved and (iii) that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in 2015-2016 and subsequently under 2015 regulations. Dr D Vijayalakshmi seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried

xxxii

24. Any other matter. The Standing Committee recommends and Dr K.Prakasan moved (i) that the following SWAYAM based online courses for all (UG & PG) degree programmes be ratified as under

Sl No

Subject Code

Course Code (PSG Tech)

Course Title

Credits

1

noc18_bt03

15Q301

Demystifying The Brain

1

2

noc18-bt04

15Q302

Introductory Mathematical Methods for Biologists

2

3

noc18_bt08

15Q303

Medical Biomaterials

2

4

noc18_bt10

15Q304

Interactomics

2

5 6

noc18_bt12 noc18_ce01

15Q305 15Q306

Bio-Electrochemistry Applied Environmental Micro Biology

1 3

7*

noc17_ce02

15Q307

Hydration, Porosity and Strength of Comentitious Materials

2

8 9

noc18_ce03 noc18_ce06

15Q308 15Q309

Digital land Surveying and Mapping Energy Efficiency, Acoustics And Day Lighting In Buildings

2 3

10

noc18 _cs02

15Q310

Social Networks

3

11 12 13

noc18 _ cs03 noc18_cs06 Noc18_cs07

15Q311 15Q312 15Q313

Introduction to Modern Application Development VLSI Physical design Cryptography and Network Security

2 3 3

14

noc18 _ cs08

15Q314

Introduction to Internet of Things

3

15 16

noc18 _ cs12 noc18 _ cs16

15Q315 15Q316

Real Time Operating System Cloud Computing

1 2

17

noc18_cs21

15Q317

Programming, Data Structures And Algorithms Using Python

2

xxxiii

Department BioTechnology BioTechnology & BioMedical Engg BioTechnology

Civil Engineering

IT & CSE EEE MCA MCA, CSE & EEE IT & CSE CSE Mechanical Engineering

*18

noc17_cs22

15Q147

Introduction to Internet of Things

3

19

noc18 _ cs23

15Q318

Introduction to Human Computer Interactions

2

20

noc18 _ cs26

15Q319

Introduction to Machine Learning

3

21

noc18_cs27

15Q320

Reinforcement Learning

3

22

noc18 _ cs28

15Q321

Data Science for Engineers

2

*23

noc17_ec06

15Q135

Design of Photovoltaic System

3

24

noc18 _ ec08

15Q322

Electronics Enclosures Thermal Issues

2

*25

noc17_ec15

15Q125

Analog Circuits and System Through SPICE Simulation

2

26

noc18_ee12

15Q323

Industrial Automation and Control

3

*27

noc17_ee20

15Q106

Design of Internet of Things

2

28 29 30

noc18_ge01 noc18_ ge05 noc18_ ge08

15Q324 15Q325 15Q326

Digital and the Everyday: From Codes to Cloud MATLAB Programming for Numerical Computation Virtual Reality Engineering

1 2 3

Robotics and Automation Engineering

31

noc18_me03

15Q327

Introduction to Composites

3

Mechanical Engineering

32 33

noc18_me04 noc18_me08

15Q328 15Q329

Product Design & Manufacturing Basics of Finite Element Analysis – I

2 2

Textile Technology

34

noc18_me09

15Q330

Transport Phenomena in Materials

2

35

noc18_me11

15Q331

Introduction to Mechanical Micro Machining

3

36

noc18 _me12

15Q332

Machinery Fault Diagnosis and Signal processing

3

Metallurgy Mechanical Engineering Robotics and

xxxiv

IT Robotics and Automation Engineering MCA, IT, CSE & EEE IT & Robotics and Automation Engineering CSE & Robotics and Automation Engineering EEE Robotics and Automation Engineering EEE

37

noc18_me14

15Q333

Metal cutting and Machine Tools

1

38

noc18_me27

15Q334

Theory of Production Processes

3

39

noc18_me36

15Q335

Surface Engineering of Nanomaterials

2

40

noc18_me37

15Q336

Introduction to Mechanical Vibration

2

41

noc18_me38

15Q337

Modeling and Simulationof Dynamic Systems

2

42

noc18_mg03

15Q338

Management of New Products and Services

1

43 44

noc18_mg08 Noc18_mg12

15Q339 15Q340

Project Management Financial Statement Analysis and Reporting

2 3

45

noc18-mg17

15Q341

Consumer Behaviour

2

46

noc18_mm01

15Q342

Physics of Materials

3

47 *48

noc18_mm03 noc17_mm14

15Q343 15Q121

Fundamentals of Electronic Materials and Devices Refrigeration and Air Conditioning

2 2

*49

noc17_mm15

15Q122

Spur and Helical Gear Cutting

1

50

noc18_oe02

15Q344

Water Economics and Governance

3

(ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2015 – 2016 and subsequently under 2015 regulations. Dr M Kumaravel seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried xxxv

Automation Engineering Automobile Engineering & Mechanical Engineering Mechanical Engineering Textile Technology Mechanical Engineering Textile Technology Robotics and Automation Engineering Textile Technology Fashion Technology Metallurgical Engineering Automobile Engineering Civil Engineering

APPENDIX I

Regulations, Courses of Study, Scheme of Assessment & Syllabi for ME(FT & PT)/MTech Programmes

2018 Regulations

PSG COLLEGE OF TECHNOLOGY, COIMBATORE - 641 004 (Autonomous college affiliated to Anna University, Chennai) 2018 REGULATIONS OF ME/ MTech DEGREE PROGRAMMES (For the batches of students admitted in 2018-2019 and subsequently under Choice Based Credit System) NOTE:

The regulations hereunder are subject to amendments as may be made by the Academic Council of the College from time to time. Any or all such amendments will be effective from such date and to such batches of students (including those already in the middle of the programme) as may be decided by the Academic Council.

1. a. PRELIMINARY DEFINITIONS AND NOMENCLATURE In the following Regulations, unless the context otherwise requires i.

“Programme” means Degree Programme, that is ME/MTech Degree Programme

ii.

“Branch” means specialization or discipline of ME/MTech Degree Programme, like Industrial Engineering, Nano Technology etc.

iii. “Course” means a theory or laboratory course that is normally studied in a semester. iv. “University” means Anna University, Chennai. b. CONDITIONS FOR ADMISSION i.

Students for admission to the first semester of the ME/MTech degree programme of Anna University, Chennai will be required to satisfy the eligibility qualification for admission in section 3 or any other examination of any recognized University or authority accepted by Anna University, Chennai as equivalent thereto. The students shall also be required to satisfy all other conditions of admission thereto prescribed by the University and Government of Tamil Nadu.

ii.

Part-time students should satisfy other conditions regarding experience, sponsorship, place of work, etc. that may be prescribed by the University from time to time, in addition to satisfying requirements as in section 1b(i).

2. DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME i.

Minimum Duration: The programme will extend over a period of two academic years in the case of full-time and three academic years in the case of part-time leading to the Degree of Master of Engineering (ME)/ Master of Technology (MTech) of the University, an academic year being divided into two semesters. Each semester shall normally consist of 90 working days including examination days.

ii.

Maximum Duration: The student shall complete the ME/MTech degree programme in 2 years (4 semesters) in case of full-time programme, and 3 years (6 semesters) in case of part-time programme; but in any case not more than 4 years in case of full-time programme or 5 years in case of part-time programme; these durations are to be reckoned from the commencement of the semester to which the student was first admitted to the programme.

3. QUALIFICATIONS FOR ADMISSION The various ME / MTech degree programmes offered and the eligible qualifications for admission to the respective programmes are listed below:

1

Department

CIVIL ENGINEERING

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

ME/MTech Degree Programme offered ME - Structural Engineering

Full-time (FT)/ Part-time (PT)

Eligible Qualification for Admission (Note 1)

FT & PT

ME - Infrastructure Engineering

FT

ME - Engineering Design

FT

ME - Industrial Engineering

FT & PT

ME - Computer Integrated Manufacturing

FT

ME - Lean Manufacturing

FT

ME - Energy Engineering

FT

ME - Electrical Machines

PT As per ANNA UNIVERSITY norms

ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

INSTRUMENTA TION AND CONTROL ENGINEERING

ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATI -ON ENGINEERING

ME - Applied Electronics

FT & PT

ME - Power Electronics & Drives

FT

ME – Embedded and Real-Time Systems

FT

ME - Control Systems

FT

ME Communication Systems

FT

ME - VLSI Design

FT

2

Minimum Latest Credits (Note 2)

Department

ME/MTech Degree Programme offered

ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

ME – Wireless Communications

METALLURGICAL ENGINEERING

ME - Industrial Metallurgy

AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING

PRODUCTION ENGINEERING

COMPUTER SCIENCE & ENGINEERING

ME - Automotive Engineering

Full-time (FT)/ Parttime (PT) FT

FT & PT FT

ME – Manufacturing Engineering

FT & PT

ME - Product Design & Commerce

FT

ME- Virtual Prototyping & Digital Manufacturing

FT

ME - Computer Science & Engineering

Eligible Qualification for Admission (Note 1)

FT

ME – Software Engineering

FT

ME – Biometrics & Cyber Security

FT As per ANNA UNIVERSITY norms

INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY

TEXTILE TECHNOLOGY

MTech Information Technology

MTech - Textile Technology

FT

FT & PT

BIOTECHNOLOGY

MTech – Biotechnology

FT

ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGG

MTech – Nano Science and Technology

FT

Note :

Eligible Qualification is subject to amendments as may be made by the University from time to time.

3

Minimum Credits (Note 2)

4. STRUCTURE OF PROGRAMMES i. The course work of the odd semesters will normally be conducted only in odd semesters and that of the even semesters only in even semesters. ii.

Curriculum: The curriculum for each programme includes courses of study and detailed syllabi. The courses of study include nine core (Theory or Laboratory) courses, six elective (Theory or Laboratory) courses, an industry visit & technical seminar, three laboratory courses, Project Work I and Project Work II as given in section 13 infra. The hours / week listed in section 13 infra for each of the course refer to periods/week, each period being of 50 minutes of duration as specified in section 2(i) supra. Full-Time Programme: Every full time student will normally undergo the courses of his / her programme given in section 13 in various semesters as shown below: Semester 1: Semester 2: Semester 3: Semester 4:

Five core courses, one laboratory course Four core courses, two elective courses, one laboratory course and (Industry Visit & Technical Seminar) Four elective courses, one laboratory course and Project Work I Project Work II

Part-Time Programme: Every part time student will normally undergo the courses of his / her programme given in section 13 in various semesters as shown below:

iii.

Semester 1: Semester 2: Semester 3:

Three core course(s) and one laboratory course Three core courses, and one laboratory course Two core courses, one elective course and one (Industry Visit and Technical Seminar)

Semester 4: Semester 5: Semester 6:

One core course, two elective courses and one laboratory course Three elective courses and Project Work I Project Work II

Core Courses: Every student shall undergo nine core courses (Theory/Libratory),six elective courses, as given in section 13 infra. Every student shall opt for electives from the list of electives relating to his/her degree programme as given in section 13 in consultation with the tutor, Programme Co-ordinator and the HoD. Minimum number of credits to be earned for courses under the category „„Professional Electives” is 18.However, a student may be permitted to take a maximum of two electives from the list of elective courses of other ME / MTech degree programmes with specific permission from both the Head of Department of student and the Head of the Department offering the programme. “Special Elective” means any theory subject/laboratory/field work specific to the area of research designed by the Supervisor, recommended by the Doctoral Committee and approved in the Board of Study and Academic Council (Anna University PhD Regulations 2015). This special elective is applicable only for the Course work of research scholars.

iv.

Laboratory Courses: Every student shall opt for three laboratory courses from the list of laboratory courses as given in section 13 relating to his / her degree programme. Every laboratory course shall be evaluated based on conduct of experiments / exercises / mini projects / development of software packages and report submitted.

v.

Audit Courses: These are the courses for the purposes of self-enrichment and academic exploration. There is no requirement on minimum number of credits to be earned for this category of courses but a pass is mandatory. The students will be evaluated by a committee of the faculty members of the department and the Pass/Re4

appearance (RA) will be transferred to grade sheet. Assessment includes presentations on literature review from reputed journal papers, preparation of review papers, presentation of technical reports and viva voice. However, this is not included in the computation of CGPA. vi.

Project Work: Every student shall undertake the Project Work I during the third semester (fifth semester in the case of part-time programme) and the Project Work II during the fourth semester (sixth semester in the case of part-time programme). The Project Work I or II shall be undertaken in an Industrial / Research Organization or in the College in consultation with the faculty guide and the HoD. In case of Project Work at Industrial / Research organization, the same shall be jointly supervised by a faculty guide and an expert from the organization.

vii.

Industry Visit & Technical Seminar: In the case of full-time students, a minimum of two industry visits are to be arranged as part of the course and the students are expected to make a presentation based on their learnings on product, design, technology and manufacturing processes in the industry visits. In the case of part-time students, the students shall choose an industry preferably where they are working / where they choose to interact and make a presentation of their learnings about its products & processes. Every student (full-time / part-time), shall make presentations on technology review from international journals / patents relevant to the technology used in the organization of his/her choice of industrial visit. The above student shall also submit a report highlighting the summary of the presentations in an appropriate format at the end of the semester.

viii.

Online courses: Students can register and earn credits for online courses approved by department committee consisting of HoD, Programme Coordinator, Tutor and Subject Expert. Students who complete online courses successfully to a maximum of 6 credits may obtain exemption from studying two Professional Electives. The list of online courses is to be approved by Chairman Academic Council on the recommendation of HoD at the beginning of the semester if necessary, subject to ratification in the next Academic council meeting. The Committee will monitor the progress of the student and recommend the grade or evaluate the candidate in 100% Continuous Assessment (CA) pattern, if necessary. Candidates may do online courses during the second semester and third semester for full time programmes from third semester to fifth semester for part time programmes.

ix.

Self Study Courses A student can opt for Self Study of a Professional Elective on specific approval of HoD provided the student does not have current arrears. The students shall study on their own under the guidance of a faculty member approved by the Head of the Department who will be responsible for the periodic monitoring and evaluation of the course. No formal lectures would be delivered. The self study course can be considered as equivalent to studying one professional elective course.

x.

One Credit Courses: Students can also opt for industry oriented one credit courses of 15 hours duration which will be offered by experts from industry / other institution / our faculty on specialized topics apart from the prescribed courses of study of the programme. Students can complete such one credit courses during the semester two and three (two to five in the case Part Time)as and when these courses are offered by the Department. A student will also be permitted to enroll for the one credit courses of other departments provided the student has fulfilled the necessary pre-requisites of the course being offered subject to approval by both the Heads of Departments. However, the grades earned by the students in one credit courses will not be included in the computation of CGPA.

5

xi.

Course Enrollment and Registration a) Each student, on admission shall be assigned to a Tutor who shall advise and counsel the student about the details of the academic programme and the choice of courses considering the student‟s academic background and career objectives. b) Each student on admission shall register for all the courses prescribed in the curriculum in the student‟s first semester (first and second semester for Part Time) of study. c) From second semester onwards, (third semester in the case of Part Time) a student has the option to drop a maximum of two theory courses (one theory course in the case of Part Time) except Professional Core Courses in a semester and a student has the option to study additionally two theory courses (one theory course in the case of Part Time) which shall be only professional electives. However the maximum number of credits the student can register in a particular semester cannot exceed 30 credits (21 credits in the case of Part Time) including courses for which the student has registered for redoing. d) In case of a student dropping a course of study (other than professional core courses) in one semester, he/she shall register for that course in the next given opportunity and earn necessary attendance in that course exclusively to become eligible to appear for the semester examination in that course. e) The courses to be offered in a semester for candidates who need to reappear (as per 5 (vi) infra) or having attendance shortage etc., will be decided by HoD. f) After registering for a course, a student shall attend the classes, satisfy the attendance requirements, earn Continuous Assessment marks and appear for the End Semester Examinations. The enrollment for all the courses of the Semester II will commence 10 working days prior to the last working day of Semester I. The student shall confirm the enrollment by registering for the courses within the first five working days after the commencement of the Semester II. The enrollment for the courses of the Semesters III to IV (III to VI in the case of Part Time) will commence 10 working days prior to the last working day of the preceding semester. The student shall enroll for the courses with the guidance of the Tutor. If the student wishes, the student may drop or add courses subject to eligibility within five working days after the commencement of the concerned semester and complete the registration process duly authorized by the Tutor.

xii.

Credit assignment: Each course is assigned certain number of credits based on the following: Contact Period per week Credits 1 Lecture Period 1 2 Tutorial Periods 1 2 Practical Periods(Laboratory 1 / Seminar / Project Work I & II/ etc.) Audit Courses No Credits The Contact Periods per week for Tutorials and Practical can only be in multiples of 2. The exact number of credits assigned to the different courses is shown in section 13.

xiii. Minimum Credits: For the award of the degree, the student shall earn the minimum number of credits as shown in section 3 by passing the prescribed number courses of study as shown in section 13. The prescribed credit range for the curriculum of various programmes is as in para 3 infra. 6

xiv. Medium of Instruction: The medium of instruction, examinations, project report etc. shall be English. 5. REQUIREMENTS OF ATTENDANCE AND PROGRESS i.

A student will be qualified to appear for end semester examinations in a particular course of a semester only if a) he / she has satisfied the attendance requirements as per the norms given below:  Shall secure not less than 75% attendance in that course  If a student secures attendance 65% or more but less than 75% in any course in the current semester due to medical reasons (hospitalization / accident / specific illness) or due to participation in the College / University / State / National / International level Sports events with prior permission from the Chairman, Sports Board and Head of the Department concerned, the student shall be given exemption from the prescribed attendance requirement and the student shall be permitted to appear for the end semester examination of that course. b) his / her academic progress has been satisfactory c) his / her conduct has been satisfactory.

ii)

A student shall normally be permitted appear for End semester examination of the course if the student has satisfied the attendance requirements (vide Clause 5(i) supra) and has registered for examination in those courses of that semester by paying the prescribed fee.

iii)

a) Students who do not satisfy clause 5(i) supra will not be permitted to appear for the End-semester Examination / Evaluation of that course. The student has to register and redo that course in a subsequent semester when it is offered next, earn necessary attendance and CA mark and appear for end semester examinations. b) For both Full-Time & Part-Time If the total number of “Redo” courses at the end of any even semester is more than ten, the student will not be eligible to register for the next immediate odd and further semester courses. Such students will be permitted to register for those semester courses only when offered next, subject to fulfillment of the above condition.

iv)

A student who has already appeared for a course in a semester and passed the examination is not entitled to reappear in the same course for improvement of letter grades / marks.

v)

In respect of students who complete a part of the academic programme either one or two semesters under the student exchange scheme in approved foreign Universities, the transfer of credits of equivalent courses completed by them in the foreign university will be approved; and in the case of the remaining courses of the respective semester(s) which they have not studied in the respective regulation, they shall register for those courses within the next two or subsequent semesters on a self-study basis. Such an appearance of the student in those courses will be treated as first appearance for the purpose of classification. (Vide sections infra 10 (A, B, C & D)).

6. DISCIPLINE i)

Every student is required to observe disciplined and decorous behavior both inside and outside the college and not to indulge in any activity which will tend to bring down the 7

prestige of the college. The Head of the Institution shall constitute a disciplinary committee to enquire into acts of indiscipline and notify the punishment. ii)

If a student indulges in malpractice in any of the examinations, he / she shall be liable for punitive action as decided by the Board of Examiners.

7. PROCEDURE FOR REJOINING THE PROGRAMME A student who desires to rejoin the programme after a period of discontinuance or who upon his/her own request is permitted by the authorities to repeat the study of any semester, may join the semester which he/she is eligible or permitted to join, only at the time of its normal commencement for a regular batch of students and after obtaining the approval from the University and Commissioner of Technical education. No student will however be enrolled in more than one semester at any time. 8. ASSESSMENT AND PASSING REQUIREMENTS i.

Assessment: The assessment will comprise of Final Examination (FE) and/or Continuous Assessment (CA), carrying marks as specified in the scheme in section 13 infra. The CA marks will be awarded on assessing the student continuously during the semester as per guidelines 8(x) infra. The assessment for theory courses with CA and FE components will be done by relative grading system. The other courses will be assessed by absolute grading system. However, for the purpose of reporting the performance of a student, letter grades and grade points will be awarded as per grading norms stipulated in section 8(vi).

ii.

Final Examinations: Final examinations will normally be conducted during October / December and during April / May of each year. Supplementary examinations may be conducted at such times as may be decided by the college. A student will be permitted to appear for the final semester examination in a course only if he/she has completed the study of that course.

iii.

Project Work I: Every student shall submit a report on Project Work I on dates announced by the department through the faculty guide to the HoD. If a student fails to submit the report on Project Work I on or before the specified date, he/she is deemed to have failed in it. The student shall also present seminars about the progress of the Project Work I during the appropriate semester. The seminars shall be presented before a review committee constituted by the HoD. The Project Work I will be evaluated based on the seminars, report and a viva voce examination. The viva voce examination will be carried out by a team of faculty appointed by the HoD and the internal examiner.

iv.

Project Work II: Every student shall submit a report on Project Work II on dates announced by the Principal through the faculty guide to the HoD. If a student fails to submit the report on Project Work II on or before the specified date, he/she is deemed to have failed in it. The student shall also present seminars about the progress of the Project Work II during the appropriate semester. The seminars shall be presented before a review committee constituted by the HoD. The Project Work II will be evaluated based on the seminars, report and a viva voce examination. The viva voce examination will be carried out by a team consisting of an internal examiner, usually the supervisor, and an external examiner, appointed by the Principal. 8

v.

Industry Visit & Technical Seminar: Every student will be evaluated based on two presentations (i) technical/research papers (ii) industry visits. A technical report submitted by the student will also be evaluated by a committee nominated by the Head of the department. There will be a viva voce examination on the dates announced by the department to verify the depth of understanding of the student in both the technical topic and the industry visits.

vi.

Grade and Grade Point: Each student, based on his / her performance, will be awarded a final grade and grade point as given below for each course at the end of each semester by following relative grading system and absolute grading system.

a. Relative Grading System In this system, the grades are awarded to the students based on their performance relative to others in Theory courses having Continuous Assessment (CA) and Final Examination (FE) components. For each theory course, the total mark M [ie., the sum of Continuous Assessment marks (CA) and Final examination marks (FE)] is computed for every candidate. The statistical parameters Mean () and Standard Deviation () of the distribution of marks are arrived at as given below: n

n

1   M j n j 1 where,



 ( Mj   )

2

j 1

n

th

Mj - Total mark of the „j‟ student in the course n – Number of students who appeared for the examination in that particular course.

The students who secure the total mark M as detailed below are first declared as fail (RA) in a course. M < minimum of (  – 1.8, 50) (or) Marks in FE less than 50% of maximum of final examination marks for theory courses

RA

(or) M less than 50% in total marks for theory and laboratory courses with 100% continuous assessment component Note: 

“RA” denotes reappearance in a course

After omitting the marks (M) of all failed candidates, revised  and σ are computed for the marks secured by the remaining candidates (passed), letter grade and grade point to each student are awarded based on the revised  and σ as detailed below.

9

Total Mark, M secured by the student (CA +FE)

Grade

Relative Grade Point, g

M ≥ [ (µ+1.5σ)]

O

µ+0.52σ ≤ M < µ+1.5σ

A+

µ − 0.25σ ≤ M < µ+0.52σ

A

µ –1.08σ ≤ M < µ−0.25σ

B+

M < µ – 1.08σ

B

Withdrawal from examination

W

0

Reappearance

RA

0

Shortage of Attendance

SA

0

10 9 8 7 6

Note:  If the total number of candidates passed is less than 10, the grades shall be awarded as per Absolute Grading System otherwise Relative Grading System may be followed.  No „O‟ grade shall be awarded if scored mark is less than 80. 

If the maximum marks awarded in a course is greater than or equal to 95% and if the number of candidates getting „O‟ Grade is less than 7% of the total number of candidates, then some candidates with A+ grade may be awarded „O‟ grade. In such a case some candidates having „A‟ grade may be awarded „A+‟ grade and some candidates having „B+‟ grade may be awarded „A‟ grade in order to ensure that a minimum of 23% of the candidates are awarded „A+‟ grade and 30% of the candidates are awarded „A‟ grade.



The Performance Analysis Committee chaired by Principal consisting of Controller of Examinations and all the Heads of the Departments will by collective wisdom, normalize the marks secured by the students so as to ensure that the clustering, grading decisions have been made in a reasonable manner for all the courses.

b. Absolute Grading System In absolute grading system, the letter grade and grade points are awarded to each student based on the percentage of marks secured by him/her in all courses like Laboratory courses, Industry visit & Technical Seminar, One Credit courses, Project Work I and II, etc. except theory courses having CA and FE components, as detailed below. Range of percentage of total marks 90 to 100 80 to 89 70 to 79 60 to 69 50 to 59 0 to 49 or less than 50% in final examination Withdrawal from examination Shortage of Attendance

Letter grade O A+ A B+ B

Grade Point g 10 9 8 7 6

RA

0

W SA

0 0

 "RA" denotes Reappearance in a course. The grades RA and SA will not figure in the grade sheet. 10

c. For online courses the following grading pattern is applicable in case of credit transfer and CGPA calculations. Range of percentage of total marks 90 to 100 76 to 89 60 to 75 50 to 59 40 to 49

Letter grade O A+ A B+ B

Grade Point g 10 9 8 7 6

vii. Cumulative Grade Point Average: After the completion of the programme, the Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) from the first semester to final semester is calculated using the formula.

 g i Ci CGPA =  Ci th

where gi is Grade point secured for i course th Ci is Credit allotted for i course viii. Passing a course: a. A student shall be deemed to have passed a theory course with CA and FE components, if i. he/she secures at least 50% in the final examination paper and ii. the total marks secured by him/her(CA and FE put together) is at least (µ−1.8σ) or 50%, whichever is lower, where µ is the average mark of the students registered for the course and σ is the corresponding standard deviation. A student is deemed to have passed in any course carrying only continuous assessment marks (like Laboratory course, Industry visit & Technical Seminar, Project Work I etc.) if the total mark secured by him/her is at least 50%. A student is deemed to have passed in Project work II if he/she secures at least 50% in the final examination and the total mark secured by him/her is at least 50% b. A student who is absent or has failed in the end semester examinations in any theory course is permitted to appear for supplementary examination either by retaining the CA marks already earned or with the re-earned CA marks in the next one attempt of his/her choice. For further attempts he/she will be solely assessed by the final examination marks only. c. A student who after having earned necessary attendance, is absent for final end semester examination or has failed in any course carrying only continuous assessment marks (like Lab, Project work I, summer term courses etc.) will register for the supplementary examination immediately at the beginning of the next semester and solely assessed in the final examination carrying the entire marks of that course. d. A student who has earned necessary attendance in the course Project work II but does not submit the report on Project Work II on or before the date specified by the college / department, he/she shall be deemed to have failed in the Project work II and awarded grade RA and will have to register for the same at the beginning of the subsequent semester, redo and submit the project report at the end of that semester and appear for the final examination, the CA mark earned afresh. e. A student who has earned necessary attendance in the course Project work II but whose project report is not accepted for reasons of incompleteness or other serious deficiencies will be treated as „absent‟ and will have to register for the same at the 11

beginning of the subsequent semester, redo and submit the project report at the end of that semester and appear for the final examination, the CA mark earned afresh. f. A student who has submitted the report on Project Work II, but could not appear for the final examination on the scheduled date, shall be deemed to have failed in the Project work II and awarded grade RA. g. If a student is absent or has failed in an elective course, he/she may register for the same course as detailed in viii(b) or for any other elective course in the subsequent semester. h. A student who is not eligible to write the end semester examination in any course due to lack of attendance, will be awarded grade SA and the student has to register for that course again, when offered next, attend the classes and fulfill the attendance requirements as per section 5 supra. If the course, in which the student has lack of attendance, is a Professional Elective the student may register for the same or any other Professional Elective course in the subsequent semesters. i. A student after registering for a course may withdraw his / her registration between first & second CA Test on valid reasons. j. Out of the required six Professional Electives to be studied, the student shall study a minimum of four Professional Electives from the list of Professional electives prescribed in their scheme of examinations without fail and can study the remaining two Professional electives either from the list of electives prescribed in the scheme or as online courses / special courses by obtaining equivalence. In the case of the student completing more than six Professional electives totally four Professional Electives with highest grade among all Professional Electives studied under the scheme and the two courses with next highest grade among all remaining courses will be considered for calculation of CGPA; however the grades obtained in all other left over courses will also appear in the grade sheet. k. If a student who has registered for a one credit course does not clear the same successfully, it will be treated on par with a course „withdrawn‟ by a student; One credit courses will be evaluated by the course instructor / department faculty concerned and will carry a total of 100 marks for continuous assessment; out of which 75 marks will be for final test to be scheduled by the course instructor / department faculty concerned. l. A student who is absent in the final semester examination of a course after registering for the same will be considered to have appeared and failed in that examination and awarded grade RA. ix. Supplementary Examinations: a. For Supplementary Examinations/ Examinations for any course under REDO category, absolute grading will be followed irrespective of whether the grading was originally under Relative Grading System or Absolute Grading System. b. The candidate can apply for Revaluation in any theory course (for regular and supplementary Examinations) directly (or) for Retotalling first and after perusal may apply for Revaluation.

12

x.

Scheme of Evaluation a. Theory Courses (CA: 50% + FE: 50%) 

CA Distribution:



(i) Assignment Presentation (ii) Mini project / Tutorials (Minimum 2) (i) Internal Tests:(Average of two tests)  Test I 20 Marks  Test II 20 Marks Final Examination (FE)

Total: 100 Marks 15 Marks 15 Marks 20 Marks

50 Marks

b. Laboratory Courses (CA : 50% + FE : 50%) 

Total : 100 Marks

CA Distribution: (i)I Cycle  

Design of Experiment/Algorithm/Modeling Individual Report

10 Marks 15 Marks

(ii) II Cycle  Testing/Simulation/Analysis/Implementation  Individual Report (iii) Final Examination a) Presentation/Demonstration/Final Report b) Viva Voce

10 Marks 15 Marks 50 Marks 30 Marks 20 Marks

c. Industry Visit & Technical Seminar (CA : 50% + FE : 50%) 

CA Distribution:

(i) Test/Report/Presentation  Minimum of two visits to a particular industry  Minimum of two Presentations by the students.  Final Examination (i) Report (ii) Viva Voice d. Project Work I (CA : 50% + FE : 50%) 

50 Marks

50 Marks 30 Marks 20 Marks Total : 100 Marks

CA Distribution: (i) Review - I  Guide 10 Marks $  Committee 10 Marks (ii) Review – II  Guide 15 Marks $  Committee 15 Marks (iii) Final Examination Project Report Evaluation & Viva Voce  Guide 25 Marks $  Committee 25 Marks

20 Marks

30 Marks

50 Marks

e. Project Work II (CA: 50% + FE: 50%) 

Total: 100 Marks

Total : 100 Marks

CA Distribution: (i) Review - I  Guide

10 Marks 5 Marks 13

 Committee (ii) Review - II  Guide $  Committee (iii) Review III  Guide $  Committee $



5 Marks 20 Marks 10 Marks 10 Marks 20 Marks 10 Marks 10 Marks

Final Examination (FE)

50 Marks

 External 25 Marks  Thesis Evaluation 10 Marks  Presentation & Viva Voce 15 Marks  Internal 25 Marks  Thesis Evaluation 10 Marks  Presentation & Viva Voce 15 Marks f. Audit Course/Field Work (CA: 100%)

Total: 100 Marks

(i) Phase - I

50 Marks

(ii) Phase – II

50 Marks

$ - In respect of Project Work I&II carried out and reviewed in the departments, the reviewing committee shall comprise of atleast three senior faculty nominated by the Head of the Department. In respect of Project Work II carried out in industry, the committee nominated for the second review at industry shall include one faculty deputed by the department and one mentor from respective industry.

9. QUALIFICATION FOR THE AWARD OF DEGREE A student will be declared to have qualified for the award of the ME/MTech degree provided i. the student has successfully completed the course requirements and has passed all the prescribed courses of study of the respective programme listed in section 13 infra within the duration specified in section 2(ii) supra and earned the total number of credits as specified in the curriculum of the respective programme of study. However, if the student wishes, he/she may be permitted to earn more than the total number of credits prescribed in the curriculum of his/her programme. ii.

no disciplinary action is pending against the student.

10. CLASSIFICATION OF DEGREE A) FIRST CLASS WITH DISTINCTION:

A student who satisfies the following conditions shall be declared to have passed the examination in First class with Distinction. * Should have passed the end semester examination in all the courses of all the four semesters in his/her First appearance within 3 years, (4 years in the case of PT)which includes authorized break of study of one year. Withdrawal from examination (vide clause 11) will not be considered as an appearance. * Should have secured a CGPA of not less than 8.50. * Should not have been prevented from writing end semester examination due to lack of attendance in any of the courses. B) FIRST CLASS:

A student who satisfies the following condition shall be declared to have passed the examination in First Class. 14

* Should have passed the end semester examination in all the courses of all four (six for PT) semesters within 3 years, (4 years in the case PT) which includes one year of authorized break of study (if availed) or prevention from writing the end semester examination due to lack of attendance (if applicable) * Should have secured a CGPA of not less than 7 C) SECOND CLASS :

All other students (not covered in clauses A and B) who qualify for the award of the degree shall be declared to have passed the examination in Second class. D) RANK :

A student shall be eligible for award of ranking only if he/she has passed the examination in first class or first class with distinction in the first available chance (i.e., first attempt in all the courses). Those who have availed the provision of break of study / withdrawal will not be eligible for ranking. 11. WITHDRAWAL FROM EXAMINATION i.

A student may, for valid reasons, be granted permission to withdraw from appearing for the examination in any course or courses of only one semester examination during the entire duration of the degree programme, if he/she does not have any history of arrears at the time of request for withdrawal. Prior permission for withdrawal from semester examinations is to be obtained from Principal. Also, only one application for withdrawal is permitted for that semester examination in which withdrawal is sought.

ii.

Withdrawal application shall be valid only if the student is otherwise eligible to write the examination and if it is made prior to the commencement of the semester examination or on the day of the examination of a course / set of courses and also recommended by the HoD and the Principal.

12. TEMPORARY BREAK OF STUDY i.

Under Choice Based Credit System, students will have the provision to take a break of study at the beginning of a semester to re-do and complete the arrear courses of previous semesters or on valid reasons (such as accident or hospitalization due to prolonged ill health) and rejoin the programme in a semester which he/she is eligible and he/she shall apply to the Principal through the Head of the Department stating the reasons therefore.

ii.

A student permitted for break of study shall rejoin the programme at the respective semester as and when it is offered after the break subject to the approval of Commissioner of Technical Education and Anna University, Chennai and shall be governed by the rules and regulations in force at the time of rejoining.

iii.

The duration specified for passing all the courses for the purpose of classification (vide section 10 supra) shall be increased by the period of such break of study permitted.

iv.

The total period for completion of the programme reckoned from the commencement of the semester to which the student was first admitted shall not exceed the maximum period specified in section 2 (ii) supra irrespective of the period of break of study in order that he/she may be qualified for the award of the degree.

v.

If any student is detained for want of requisite attendance, progress and conduct, the period spent in that semester shall not be considered as permitted 'Break of Study' and section 12 (iii) supra is not applicable for such cases.

15

59th ACM

09.06.2018

13. Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment ME AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERING Course Course Title Code I SEMESTER 18AE01 Computational Mathematics 18AE02 Automotive Systems 18AE03 IC Engines and Emissions 18AE04 Automotive Electronics 18AE05 Vehicle Development Process 18AE51 Automotive Engineering Laboratory 18AE81 English for Research Paper Writing Total 23 Hrs. II SEMESTER 18AE06 Vehicle Dynamics 18AE07 Engine Component Design 18AE08 Automotive Embedded Systems 18AE09 Linear Control Systems 18AE__ Professional Elective 1 18AE__ Professional Elective 2 Automotive Computer Aided Engineering 18AE52 Laboratory 18AE61 Industrial visit and Technical Seminar 18AE82 Research Methodology and IPR Total 28 Hrs. III SEMESTER 18AE__ Professional Elective 3 18AE__ Professional Elective 4 18AE__ Professional Elective 5 18AE__ Professional Elective 6 18AE__ Elective Laboratory 18AE71 Project Work I Total 20 Hrs. IV SEMESTER 18AE72 Project Work II Total 28 Hrs. ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES (Six to be opted) Automotive Safety 18AE10 Electric Drives and Storage systems 18AE11 Automatic and Automated Manual Transmission 18AE12 Automotive Infotronics 18AE13 Automotive Ergonomics and Safety 18AE14 Autonomous Vehicles 18AE15 Automotive Safety Systems 18AE16 Electronic Engine Management 18AE17 Sensors and Actuators 18AE18 Vehicle Diagnostics 18AE19 Automotive Electricaland Electronic Systems Design Engineering 18AE20 Finite Element Analysis 18AE21 Aerodynamics of Road Vehicles 18AE22 Computational Fluid Dynamics 18AE23 Automotive System Design and Simulation 18AE24 Design for Manufacture and Assembly 18AE25 Automotive Power Train Design Automotive Manufacturing 18AE26 Advanced Manufacturing Process 18AE27 Lean Manufacturing 18AE28 Lean Six Sigma 18AE29 Automotive Materials and Metallurgy

(2018 REGULATIONS) (Minimum No. of credits to be earned: 70*) Hours/Week Maximum Marks Credits CAT Lecture Tutorial Practical CA FE Total 2 3 3 3 3 0 0 15

2 2 0 0 0 0 0 4

0 0 0 0 0 4 ** 4

3 4 3 3 3 2 Grade 18

50 50 50 50 50 50 0 300

50 50 50 50 50 50 0 300

100 100 100 100 100 100 0 600

PC PC PC PC PC PC MC

3 3 3 3 3 3

0 2 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

3 4 3 3 3 3

50 50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100 100

PC PC PC PC PE PE

0

0

4

2

50

50

100

PC

0 0 18

0 0 2

4 ** 8

2 Grade 24

50 0 400

50 0 400

100 0 800

EEC MC

3 3 3 3 0 0 12

0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 2 6 8

3 3 3 3 1 3 16

50 50 50 50 50 50 300

50 50 50 50 50 50 300

100 100 100 100 100 100 600

PE PE PE PE PC EEC

0 0

0 0

28 28

14 14

50 50

50 50

100 100

EEC

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE

3 3 3 3 3 3

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

3 3 3 3 3 3

50 50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE PE PE

3 3 3 3

0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0

3 3 3 3

50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE

16

59th ACM

18AE30 18AE31 18AE32 18AE33 18AE34 18AE35 18AE36 18AE37 18AE38 18AE39 18AE40 18AE41 18AE42 18AE43 18AE44 18AE53 18AE54 18AE55

09.06.2018

Thermal Engineering Emission, Noise, Vibration and Harshness Control Advanced Heat Transfer Alternate Fuels Automotive HVACR Fuels and Combustion Simulation of IC Engines Instrumentation for Thermal Systems Thermal Management of Hybrid Systems Fuel Cell Vehicles Aerodynamics of Road Vehicles Others Special Vehicles Vehicle Testing Optimization Techniques Automotive PLM Automotive Ergonomics ELECTIVE LABORATORY COURSES (One to be opted) Automotive Styling and Design Laboratory Automotive Embedded Systems Laboratory Modeling and Simulation Laboratory

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PE

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE

3 3 3 3 3

0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0

3 3 3 3 3

50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE PE

0 0 0

0 0 0

2 2 2

1 1 1

50 50 50

50 50 50

100 100 100

PC PC PC

* Indicated is the minimum number of credits to be earned by a student. ** - 60 hrs in I semester and 90 hrs in II semester; Grade: Completed / Not Completed CAT – Category; PC – Professional Core; PE - Professional Elective EEC – Employability Enhancement Course; MC- Mandatory Course

List of One credit Courses ( 15 hours each) 1. 2. 3. 4.

18AK01 18AK02 18AK03 18AK04

Model based Development Robotics Integrated Development Environment Driveline Matching for Special Purpose Vehicles

17

59th ACM

09.06.2018 I SEMESTER 18AE01 COMPUTATIONAL MATHEMATICS 2203

NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF SYSTEM OF EQUATIONS: Solving system of linear equations – Gauss Jacobi and Gauss Siedel methods, successive over relaxation method, system of non-linear equations – Newton’s method. Interpolation: cubic spline interpolation, Bezier curves and B-spline curves, least squares approximations. (8+7) NUMERICAL SOLUTION TO ODE: Initial value problem: Runge Kutta method, Milne’s method. Boundary value problem: Finite Element Method - Rayleigh-Ritz method, Collocation and Galerkin methods. (8+7) NUMERICAL SOLUTION TO PDE: Finite difference method: Liebmann’s method for Laplace equation and Poisson equation, explicit method and Crank-Nicolson method for parabolic equations, explicit method for hyperbolic equations. (8+7) MODELLING AND SIMULATION: Simulating deterministic behaviour, area under a curve, generating random numbers, simulating probabilistic behaviour, inventory model: gasoline and consumer demand. (8+7) Total L:32 + T:28 = 60 REFERENCES: 1. John H Mathews and Kurtis D Fink, Numerical Methods using MATLAB, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2018. 2. Steven C Chapra and Raymond P Canale, Numerical Methods for Engineers, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2017. 3. Frank R Giordano, William P Fox and Steven B Horton, A first course in Mathematical Modeling, Cengage Learning, New Delhi, 2014. 4. Curtis F Gerald and Patrick O Wheatly, Applied Numerical Analysis, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2013. 5. Douglas J Faires and Richard Burden, Numerical Methods, Cengage Learning, New Delhi, 2013.

18AE02 AUTOMOTIVE SYSTEMS 3204 FRAME AND BODY: Introduction, Vehicle classification, frame types-conventional, integral construction – ladder chassis, sub frames, functions and requirements, chassis lay out types, Loads acting on chassis, chassis members selection, frame materials, types of bodies, features of body, body structural requirements ,body structural elements ,design for body bending, design for body torsion, design for crashworthiness, design for vibration, design for vehicle and styling integration, material selection and mass estimation in preliminary design. (11) STEERING AND SUSPENSION SYSTEM: Introduction, Functions and requirements, axles-live and dead axles, front axle and its types, stub axle and its types, steering mechanisms, arrangement of steering system, over steer and under steer, steering ratio calculation, steering gear box types, turning radius, center point steering, stub axle types, Wheel alignment, hydraulic power steering. SUSPENSION SYSTEM-Introduction, Functions, characteristics of good suspension system, suspension spring types-, types of suspension system, dampers, types, telescopic shock absorbers, air suspension, hydro elastic suspension, hydro-pneumatic suspension system, active suspension system. (11) TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: Clutch- role - types of clutches, single plate clutch, coil spring type and diaphragm spring type, multiple plate clutch, centrifugal clutch, calculation of torque transmission, over running clutch. Gear Box- Need for a gearbox, types of gear boxes, sliding mesh, constant mesh and synchromesh gear boxes, calculation of gear ratios, overdrives, transfer case and transaxles. propeller shaft drive, Hotchkiss drive, Torque tube drive, universal joints, trunnion type, ring type, flexible disc type, constant velocity joint types, Final Drive and Differential- need for final drive and differential, types of final drives, single reduction and double reduction final drives, differential and its types, conventional and non-slip differentials, rear axle and its types, fully floating, semi- floating and three quarter floating axles. (11) BRAKE SYSTEM, WHEELS AND TYRES: Introduction, principle, classifications, requirements, drum brake, disc brake, stopping distance calculations, weight transfer calculations, braking efficiency calculations, mechanical brake, hydraulic brakes, vacuum servo brakes, air brakes, air assisted hydraulic brakes, introduction to Anti-lock braking system. Wheels and Tyresbasic construction of wheel, hub and tyres, tyre requirements, interchangeability, passenger car and commercial vehicle requirements, bias ply and radial ply tyres, tubeless tyres, wheel balancing, tyre inflation, tyre wear and tyre rotation, quick change wheels, special wheels, run flat tyre. (12) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Heister,Heinz., “Vehicle and Engine Technology”, SAE International, 1999. 2. Bosch,Robert., “Automotive Electrics Automotive Electronics”, Professional Engineering Publication, 2004. 3. Bosch,Robert., “Automotive Hand book”, 2004. 4. Garret,T.Kenneth.,Newton,Kenneth. and Steeds,William.,” The Motor Vehicle”, Butterworth-Heinemann Limited, 2001.

18AE03 IC ENGINES AND EMISSIONS 3003 ENGINE BASIC THEORY AND COMBUSTION: Engine types – otto, diesel, dual operating cycles – Fuel air cycle and actual cycles – Engine design and operating parameters - Two and four stroke engines - Typical performance curves for automobile engines - performance and pollution aspects. Combustion and combustion chambers- Introduction to combustion in SI and CI

18

59th ACM

09.06.2018

engines. Stages of combustion. Combustion chemistry and emission formation. Ignition and injection timing Knock, detonation and control. Combustion chambers for SI and CI engines. Direct and indirect injection combustionchambers.Importance of swirl, squish and turbulence. Factors controlling combustion chamber design. (11) FUEL SYSTEMS, COOLINGAND LUBRICATING SYSTEM: Introduction and fuel system circuit.Air fuel ratio requirements. Working of a carburetor and MPFI. Gasoline direct injection systems. Diesel fuel injection systems-Jerk pumps, distributor pumps, types of nozzles, Unit injector and CRDI systems. Engine governor. Need for cooling, types of cooling systems- air and liquid cooling systems. Water cooling circuit, radiator, water pump and cooling fan. Properties of coolants and additives. Requirements of lubrication systems. Types-mist, pressure feed, dry and wet sump systems. Properties and chemistry of lubricants. (11) EMISSIONS FROM SI AND CI AND ITS CONTROL: Emission formation in S.I. engines - Hydrocarbons, Carbon monoxide, Oxides of Nitrogen, Polyneculear Aromatic Hydrocarbon. Effects of design and operating variables on emission formation in Spark Ignition engines Controlling of pollutant formation in engines Exhaust after treatment, Charcoal Canister Control for Evaporative Emission Control, emissions and drivability, Positive crank case ventilation system for UBHC emission reduction.Chemical delay, intermediate compound formation, Pollutant formation on incomplete combustion, Effect of design and operating variables on pollutant formation, Controlling of emissions, emissions and drivability, Exhaust gas recirculation, exhaust after treatment. Emission effects on health and environment. (12) NEW ENGINE TECHNOLOGY: Lean Burn engine – Different approaches to lean bum – LHR engine – Surface ignition concept – catalytic ignition – homogenous charge compression ignition – variable valve timing – turbo and super charging -Multi Port Injection System - Gasoline Direct Injection – Common Rail Direct Injection – Recent Trends. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Ganesan, V., “Internal Combustion Engines”, Tata McGraw Hill Book Co, Eighth Reprint, 2005. 2. Crouse, W.H. and Anglin, A.L., “Automotive Emission Control’, McGraw Hill Book Co, 1995. 3. Mathur, M. L., Sharma, R. P., "Internal Combustion Engines", Dhanpat Rai Publication, 2005. 4. Crouse, William., Anglin, Donald., "AUTOMOTIVE MECHANICS", Tata McGraw Hill Book Co, 2006.

18AE04 AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS 3003 OVERVIEW OF VEHICLE ELECTRONICS: Need for Electronics in Automotive Systems - Performance (speed, power, and torque), control (emission, fuel economy, drivability, and safety) & legislation (environmental legislation for pollution & safety norms). Overview of Vehicle Electronic Systems Basic electrical components and their operation in an automobile - power train subsystem (starting systems, charging systems Ignitionsystems, electronic fuel control), chassis subsystem (ABS, TCS, & ESP) – Comfort and safety subsystems (night vision, airbags, seatbelt tensioners, cruise control, Lane-departureWarning, parking). (12) ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS: Concept of an electronic engine control system, electronic fuel injection - throttle body fuel injection, multi point fuel injection, gasoline direct injection, common rail direct injection, electronic ignition control, engine mapping, on-board diagnostics – engine control module and power train control module. (11) SENSORS AND ACTUATORS: Classification of sensors, sensor for speed, throttle position, exhaust oxygen level, manifold pressure, crankshaft position, coolant temperature, exhaust temperature, air mass flow for engine application. Solenoids, stepper motors and relay. (11) COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS: Introduction to control networking – Communication protocols in embedded systems – SPI, I2C, USB. Vehicle communication protocols – Introduction to CAN, LIN, FLEXRAY, MOST, KWP2000. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Bosch, Robert., “Bosch Automotive Electrics and Automotive Electronics: Systems and Components, Networking and Hybrid Drive” Springer Vieweg, Plochingen, Germany, 2014. 2. Ribbens, William. B., “Understanding Automotive Electronics- An EngineeringPerspective”, the Boulevard, Langford Lane, Kidlington, Oxford, 2014. 3. Holembeak, Barry., “Automotive Electricity and Electronics”, Delmar Publishers, Clifton Park, USA, 2010. 4. Halderman, James. D., “Automotive Electricity and Electronics”, Prentice Hall, USA, 2013.

18AE05 VEHICLE DEVELOPMENT PROCESS 3003 VEHICLE DEVELOPMENT PROJECTS: An Overview, Categories of vehicle development projects, Platforms and model lines, The product evolution process (PEP), Vehicle project management, Aspects of international development projects. Cars that topped and cars that flopped, Factors of success in the automotive industry. Phases of the product evolution process.Initial phase, concept phase, series development phase, series support and further development. (12) VIRTUAL CAR PROCESS: Building virtual cars, Geometric integration, further functional geometry evaluation, Virtual build groups. E/E system development: From machinery to E/E systems, Systems engineering processes. (11) MANAGEMENT PROCESSES FOR COMPLETE VEHICLE DEVELOPMENT: Target management, Design problem management, Release and change management, Quality management. (11)

19

59th ACM

09.06.2018

CUSTOMER RELEVANT COMPLETE VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS: Registrability, Total vehicle costs, Design appeal, Cabin comfort, Infotainment, Agility, Passive safety, Theft deterrence, Reliability, Sustainability. Secondary complete vehicle characteristics, Production Integration, Service Integration. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Weber, Julian., “Automotive Development Processes", Springer, 2009. 2. Sörensen,Daniel., "The Automotive Development Process", Springer, 2006. 3. Stark,John., “Global Product: Strategy, Product Lifecycle Management and the Billion Customer Question”, Springer Publisher, 2007. 4. Lewin,Tony. andBorroff,Ryan., “How to Design Cars Like a Pro”, Motor Books International, 2010.

18AE51 AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERING LABORATORY 0042 In this practical course students will be provided with an insight into Automotive Systems and their functionalities using the following experiments. After this, students are expected to formulate and complete an activity of industrial relevance. The details like background, problem definition, state of technology/knowledge in that area are to be arrived based on a good literature review (5 latest papers). Results from the experiments and their interpretation with respect to the assumptions/background and a formal conclusion are expected in the report which is to be submitted at the end of the semester. The work is evaluated for the credit assigned. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Measurement of engine components and compression and vacuum test Ignition system troubleshooting and onboard diagnosis Servicing of clutches and gear boxes with Gear ratio calculation Servicing of brake systems and brake bleeding Servicing of Steering system and Ackermann steering verification Chassis measurement and Servicing of suspension system Wheel balancing & Wheel Alignment Battery testing and Head light alignment Servicing and testing of Starter motors and alternator. Performance test on IC engines and emission measurement Total P: 60

REFERENCE 1.

Manual prepared by the Department of Automobile Engineering, 2015.

II SEMESTER 18AE06 VEHICLE DYNAMICS 3003 INTRODUCTION: Earth and vehicle coordinate system. Longitudinal, lateral and vertical vehicle dynamics. Dynamic axle loads. Road loads - Aerodynamic forces and moments, viscosity effects, separation and its control; aerodynamic lift and its control, ground effect, styling for minimum drag. Rolling resistance, grade loads. (11) PERFORMANCE MODE: Acceleration - Free body diagram of accelerating vehicle, maximum transferable tractive force, gradability, Deceleration - free body diagram of decelerating vehicle, maximum decelerating rates, stopping distance, maximum braking force. Vehicle performance. (11) RIDE MODE: Pitch and bounce motion, oscillation centers, active and semi active suspension, orthogonality of mode shapes, modal analysis. Spring System - Requirements, sprung mass and un-sprung mass, wheel hop, shimmy, wheel wobble, choice of suspension spring rate, calculation of effective spring rate. Tyres - mechanics, stability of vehicle on slope, on curve and banked road. Quartet car and Half car modeling. (12) HANDLING MODE: Vehicle control-low speed cornering and static steering-Ackerman steering geometry, steady-state cornering -steering factors, vehicle control parameters (under steer, neutral steer and over steer), roll steer, compliance steer, ride steer, slip angle steer, steady state handling-lateral acceleration gain, characteristic speed, yaw velocity gain, critical speed, effect of braking on vehicle handling. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Gillespie, Thomas. D., “Fundamentals of Vehicle Dynamics”, SAE USA 2010. 2. Rao,Singiresu. S., “Mechanical Vibrations”, Pearson Education Publication, 2009. 3. Giri, N. K., “Automobile Mechanics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2006. 4. Wong, J. Y., “Theory of Ground Vehicles”, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2012.

20

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18AE07 ENGINE COMPONENT DESIGN 3204

REQUIREMENTS FOR ENGINE DESIGN:Arriving at the engine capacity from vehicle performance requirements – Design of Parts Working under alternating loads - Engine balancing- kinematics of crank mechanism- Forces acting on crank mechanism. (11) DESIGN OF PISTON ASSEMBLY: Introduction- design of crown thickness- Empirical relationships- Design of CI and SI engine pistons-Compression ring design for CI and SI engine pistons- piston pin design for CI and SI engines.- Design of connecting rod I section. (11) DESIGN OF CRANK SHAFT:Introduction- Design of Journals and Crankpins- Design of Crankwebs- Design of In-Line Engine crankshaft - Design of V type Engine crankshaft. (11) DESIGN OF ENGINE SYSTEMS: Design of lubrication system elements- oil pump- oil cooler- design of cooling system components- water pump- cooling fan and radiator- computation air cooling surface. (12) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Kolchin, A.I., Demidov, V., “Design of Automotive Engines”, MIR Publishers press, 1988. 2. Hoag, Kevin. L.,“Vehicular Engine Design”, Springer, 2012. 3. Shigley, Joseph., Mischke, Charles. and Brown, Thomas. H., “Standard Handbook of machine Design”,McGraw-Hill Professional, 2004. 4. Heywood, John., “Internal Combustion Engine Fundamentals”, McGraw Hill, 2017.

18AE08 AUTOMOTIVE EMBEDDED SYSTEM 3003 INTRODUCTION: Embedded Systems Definition - Components of embedded systems - Hardware Module - Microprocessor, microcontrollers, ARM Processor, on-chip peripherals - Program memory(PM), Data memory (DM), parallel port structures, timer, input capture & output compare units, ADC, PWM. (11) INTEGRATED SYSTEMS: Introduction to an embedded board, Software module - IDE- Getting Started - Creating new project, creating new files, adding files to project, compile, build, debug and simulation of a project. Embedded system programming Up-loaders, ISP, ROM emulators, in-circuit emulators. Debug Interfaces - BDM and JTAG. (11) EMBEDDED RTOS: Comparison of conventional OS with RTOS. Tasks & task states (Pre-emptive & Non-pre-emptive, scheduler, interrupt – Interrupt latency and context switch latency) – Task, multi-tasking, task synchronization, inter-task communication, shared data problem and its prevention - Features of a typical embedded RTOS (µC/OS-II). (12) ADVANCED APPLICATIONS: Body electronics – Infotainment systems – Navigation systems – System level tests – Software calibration using engine and vehicle dynamometers – Environmental tests for electronic control unit - Application of Control elements and control methodology in automotive System. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Denton, Tom.,” Automobile Electrical and Electronic Systems”, Elsevier Jordan Hill, Oxford, 2010. 2. Bosch, Robert.,” BOSCH Automotive Handbook”, Bentley Publications, Massachusetts Avenue, London, 2010. 3. Knowles, Don., “Automotive Electronic and Computer Controlled Ignition Systems”, Prentice Hall Publications, New Jersey, 2009. 4. Jurgen, Ronald. K., “Automotive Electronics Handbook”, McGraw Hill Publications, Columbus, 2009. 5. Navit,Nicholas., “Automotive Embedded System Handbook”, CRC Press Publications, New Delhi, 2008.

18AE09 LINEAR CONTROL SYSTEMS 3003 INTRODUCTION AND MATHEMATICAL MODELLING: - Introduction to control systems, differential equations of physical systems, dynamics of robotic mechanisms, transfer functions, block diagram algebra, signal flow graphs, feedback and nonfeedback systems, reduction of parameter variations, control over dynamics, control effects of disturbances signals, linearizing effects, regenerative feedback- linear approximation of nonlinear systems, stepper motor and hydraulic systems. (14) TIME RESPONSE AND STABILITY IN TIME DOMAIN: Standard test signals, time response of first order systems, time response of second-order systems, steady state errors and error constants, effects, effects of adding zero to systems, design specification of second order systems, design consideration for higher-order systems, performance indices, robotic control systems, state variable analysis, approximation of higher order systems by lower order systems, concept of stability, necessary conditions, Routh stability criterion, relative stability analysis. (11) FREQUENCY RESPONSE ANALYSIS AND STABILITY IN FREQUENCY DOMAIN: - correlation between time domain and frequency response, polar plots and bode plots, all-pass and minimum pass systems, experimental determination of transfer functions, log magnitude versus phase plots, Nyquist stability criterion, assessment of relative stability, closed loop frequency response, sensitivity analysis. (10)

21

59th ACM

09.06.2018

INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN AND STATE VARIABLE ANALYSIS AND DESIGN: -P, PI and PID controllers, cascade compensation in time domain and frequency, feedback compensation and robust control systems design- Concepts of state, state variables and state model, state models for linear continuous –time systems, state variables and linear discrete –time systems, solutions of state equations, concepts of controllability and observability, pole zero placement by state feedback. (10) Total L:45 REFERENCES: 1. Nagrath, I. J. and Gopal, M., “Control Systems Engineering”, New Age International Publishers, 2014. 2. Ogatta, K., “Modern Control Engineering”, Pearson/ Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2013. 3. Nise,Norman. S., “Control Systems Engineering”, John Wiley and Sons Inc., 2012. 4. Umez-Eronini,Eronini., “System Dynamics & Control”, PWS Publishing Company, 1999. 5. Astrom,Karl. J., “Advance PID Controller Control”, Instrumentation Society of America, 1995.

18AE52 AUTOMOTIVE COMPUTER AIDED ENGINEERING LABORATORY 0042 In this practical course students will be provided with a comprehensive practical exposure to Automotive Computer Aided Engineering and its functionalities using the following experiments. After this, students are expected to formulate and complete an activity of industrial relevance. The details like background, problem definition, state of technology/knowledge in that area are to be arrived based on a good literature review (5 latest papers). Results from the experiments and their interpretation with respect to the assumptions/background and a formal conclusion are expected in the report which is to be submitted at the end of the semester. The work is evaluated for the credit assigned. 1. 2. 3.

Modeling of Automotive Component and Assemblies Analysis of Automotive Component and Assemblies Simulation of Automotive Component and Assemblies

Automotive Analysis 1. Engine Components 2. Cooling System 3. Power train 4. Steering System 5. Brake System 6. Suspension System 7. Chassis Frame 8. Aerodynamic forces 9. Structural analysis 10. Safety Analysis Total P: 60 REFERENCE: 1. Manual prepared by Departmentof Automobile Engineering, 2015.

18AE61 INDUSTRIAL VISIT AND TECHNICAL SEMINAR 0042 The student will make at least four one or half day Industry visits and technical presentations. The same will be assessed by a committee appointed by the department. The students are expected to submit a report at the end of the semester covering the various aspects of his/her presentation together with the observation in industry visits. A quiz covering the above will be held at the end of the semester. Total P: 60

III SEMESTER 18AE71 PROJECT WORK I 0063      

Identification of a current industry problem in thrust areas Developing a mathematical model for solving the above problem Finalization of system requirements and specification Proposing different solutions for the problems based on literature survey Future trends in providing alternate solutions Consolidated report preparation of the above Total P: 90

22

59th ACM

09.06.2018 IV SEMESTER 18AE72 PROJECT WORK II 0 0 28 14

The project work involves the following:  Preparing a project brief proposal including  Problem identification  A statement of system / process specification proposed to be developed (Block diagram / concept tree)  List of possible solutions including alternative and constraints  Cost benefit analysis  Time Line of activities  A report highlighting the design finalization (based on functional requirements & standards (if any))  A presentation including the following:  Implementation Phase (Hardware / Software / both)  Testing & Validation of the developed system  Learning in the Project  Consolidated project report preparation Total P: 420

ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES AUTOMOTIVE SAFETY STREAM 18AE10 ELECTRIC DRIVES AND STORAGE SYSTEMS 3003 BATTERIES: Batteries Types and Battery Packs-Basic Battery Operation-Basic Electrochemistry-Lifetime and Sizing Considerations-Battery Pack Discharge Curves and Aging-Battery Management System-Battery Models-Simple Novel Curve Fit Model for BEV Batteries-Voltage, Current, Resistance, and Efficiency of Battery Pack-Determining the Cell/Pack Voltage for a Given Output\Input Power-The Fuel Economy of a BEV Vehicle with a Fixed Gear Ratio. (13) ENERGY SOURCES FOR ELECTRIC AND HYBRID VEHICLES: plug-in hybrid electric vehicle, and electric vehicle Li-ion batteries- Cell designs- Battery pack design- Safety requirements- Components of HV battery packs- Requirements of HV battery packs- Testing procedures for EV batteries (12) BATTERY CHARGING STRATEGIES FOR ELECTRIC VEHICLES: Introduction-Charging algorithms for a single batteryBalancing methods for battery pack charging-Charging infrastructure. (11) BATTERY MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS: Topology of BMS-BMS representation - Data management and network- SoC and SoH - Battery balancing- Safety aspects of BMSs-BMS standard. (9) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Hayes, John. G., “Electric Powertrain- energy Systems, Power electronics and drives”. First Edition, John Wiley, New Jersy, United States,2017. 2. Chau, K.T. (edited), “Energy Systems for Electric and Hybrid Vehicles”, The Institution of Engineering and Technology, United Kingdom, Published 2016. 3. Wang, Miao., “Mobile Electric Vehicles: Online Charging and Discharging (Wireless Networks)”, Springer, Berlin, 2015. 4. Scrosati, B., Garche, J. and Tillmetz, W.,"Advances in Battery Technologies for Electric Vehicles",Woodhead Publishing Series in Energy-Elsevier 2015.

18AE11 AUTOMATIC AND AUTOMATED MANUAL TRANSMISSION 3003 HYDRODYNAMIC DRIVES: Principle of fluid coupling, construction, operation and characteristics, fluid coupling with conventional gear boxes. Introduction to torque converters, comparison between fluid coupling and torque converters, performance characteristics, slip, principles of torque multiplication, types of torque converters. (12) HYDRO-MECHANICAL DRIVES: Major components, principle of planetary gear trains, actuating mechanism, controls system – Types - Manual, governor, throttle and hydraulic control systems. Principle of automatic gear shifting, Typical automatic transmissions. (11) HYDROSTATIC DRIVES: Principles of hydrostatic drives, different systems of hydrostatic drives, fixed displacement pump and fixed displacement motor, variable displacement pump and fixed displacement motor, fixed displacement pump and variable displacement motor, variable displacement pump and variable displacement motor, applications, plunger type pump and

23

59th ACM

09.06.2018

plunger type motor, advantages and limitations, typical hydrostatic drives.

(11)

AUTOMATED MANUAL TRANSMISSION (AMT):Introduction- advantages – Transmission control unit (TCU) - Single-stage 6speed AMT with range-change unit- Applications -Semi-Automated Manual Transmissions- System structure of an automated manual transmission-Examples of Commercial Vehicle AMT’s. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Erjavec,Jack., “Automatic Transmissions”, Delmar Publishers, 2005. 2. Tucker, H.F., “Automatic Transmission”, Van Nostrand Reinhold Company, 1980. 3. Naunheimer,Harald., Bertsche,‎dnreB. and ‎Ryborz, Joachim., “Automotive Transmissions- Fundamentals, Selection, Design and applications”, Springer Publishers ,2010. 4. John, J.P. and Tyler, G.H., “Industrial Hydraulics”, MGH Published, 1980.

18AE12 AUTOMOTIVE INFOTRONICS 3003 INTRODUCTION: Driver information, driver perception, driver convenience, driver monitoring, general vehicle control, longitudinal and lateral control, collision avoidance and vehicle monitoring. (11) SAFETY SYSTEMS: Active and passive safety, airbags, seat belt tightening system, forward collision warning systems, Radar monitoring system, Ultrasonic sensor, child lock, anti lock braking systems, EBD, ESP, traction control system and lane departure warning system. (11) COMFORT & SECURITY SYSTEMS: Adaptive cruise control system, active suspension system, power steering, collapsible and tiltable steering column and power windows, Adaptive lighting system, Security - Anti theft technologies – mechanical, electromechanical and electronic immobilizers, alarm system, stolen vehicle tracking system, remote keyless entry, smart card system and number plate coding. (12) New car Assessment Program: Body parts shell for safety–NCAP and Global Norms, Frontal and offset frontal Crash requirements, Safety for seating and seat belt anchorages; Head impact and Injury prevention. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Vlacic,Ljubo., Parent,Michel. and Harashima,Fumio., “Intelligent Vehicle Technologies”, Butterworth-Heinemann publications, Oxford, 2001. 2. Bosch,Robert., “Automotive Hand Book”, SAE, 2000. 3. Jurgen,Ronald. K., “Navigation and Intelligent Transportation Systems – Progress in Technology”, Automotive Electronics Series, SAE, USA, 1998. 4. Broy, Manfred., Krüger,Ingolf. andMeisinger,Michael.,”Automotive software”, Springer ,2014

18AE13 AUTOMOTIVE ERGONOMICS AND SAFETY 3003 INTRODUCTION: Definition, human technological system, multidisciplinary engineering approach, human – machine system, manual, mechanical, automated system, human system reliability, conceptual design, advanced development, detailed design and development, human system modeling. INPUT: Input and processing, text, graphics, symbols, codes, visual display of dynamic information, auditory, tactual, displays, speech communications. biomechanics, biothermodynamics and bioenergetics. (12) VEHICLE ERGONOMICS: Introduction, seating dimensions, interior ergonomics, ergonomics system design, seat comfort, suspension seats, split frame seating, back passion reducers, dash board instruments, electronic displays, commercial vehicle cabin ergonomics, mechanical package layout, goods vehicle layout. (11) ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: Illumination, heat ventilation and air conditioning, noise, motion, speed and acceleration, sound, vibration. (11) HUMAN FACTORS APPLICATIONS: Human error, accidents, human factors and the automobile, organizational and social aspects, steps according to ISO/DIS6385, OSHA’s approach, virtual environments. SAFETY: Seat belt, air bag, collapsible steering, warning systems, ABS braking system, collision safety systems, global safety standards in automotive applications. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Bridger, R. S., “Introduction to Ergonomics”, Taylor and Francis, London, 2003. 2. Phillips,Chandler. Allen., “Human Factors Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2000. 3. Helandar,Martin., “A Guide to Ergonomics of Manufacturing”, Taylor and Francis, 1996. 4. Mark, S. S., “Human Factors in Engineering and Design”, McGraw Hill, New York, 1993. 5. Fenton,John., “Hand Book of Automotive Power Train and Chassis Design”, SAE, 1998.

24

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18AE14 AUTONOMOUS VEHICLES 3003

INTRODUCTION: Advance driver assistance systems, LIDAR, RADAR, Image processing, Navigation (GPS& GIS) systems, Adaptive cruise control systems, lane departure warning systems, automatic emergency braking systems- night vision systemsautopilot-SAE international level of driving automation- V2V, V2I, Nokia Here digital maps- Communication protocols overviewcase study-DARPA and google waymo. (14) CONNECTED FLEET SYSTEMS: Platoon, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi connectivity, Information, Advisory and Warning, Li-fi connectivity, automated highway systems-aerodynamics performance, fleet testing and evaluation project. (11) NONLINEAR CAMERA: Artificial intelligence and expert systems- GNSS-Aided INS for Fixed-Wing UAV, Machine Vision, Optical Flow, From Optical Flow to Body Velocity, Kalman Filter-Observed System and Filter Equations, Stability of the EKF. (10) AUTOPILOT & IOTS IMPACT ON MOBILITY: Liability- vehicle intelligence- vehicle internet security- Crash Imminent Brakingcommunication Standard-Distributed System Architecture of Autonomous Vehicles and Real-Monocular camera, Real time perception control (Neural Network), disagreement notification- temporal difference input to neural network. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Jurgen,Ronald. K. (edited), “ Autonomous Vehicle for Safer Driving”, SAE International, Warrendale Pennsylvania, USA,2013. 2. Fossen,Thor. I., Pettersen,Kristin. Y. and Nijmeijer, Henk., "Sensing and Control for Autonomous VehiclesApplications to Land, Water and Air Vehicles" Springer International Publishing AG 2017. 3. Fridman, Alex., Jenik,Benedikt., Reimer, Bryan., “Arguing Machines: Perception- Control system Redundancy and edge case discovery in real- world autonomous driving”,ArXiv,2017. 4. Maurer, Markus., Gerdes, ‎naitsirhC‎.J. and ‎zneL‎, Barbara., "Autonomous Driving- Technical, Legal and social aspects", Springer Daimler und Benz- Stiftung, Ladenburg 2015.

18AE15 AUTOMOTIVE SAFETY SYSTEM 3003 INTRODUCTION: Driver information, driver perception, driver convenience, driver monitoring, general vehicle control, longitudinal and lateral control, collision avoidance and vehicle monitoring. (11) SAFETY SYSTEMS: Active and passive safety, airbags, seat belt tightening system, forward collision warning systems, child lock, anti lock braking systems, EBD, ESP, traction control system and lane departure warning system. (11) COMFORT & SECURITY SYSTEMS: Adaptive cruise control system, active suspension system, power steering, collapsible and tiltable steering column and power windows, Adaptive lighting system, Security - Anti theft technologies – mechanical, electromechanical and electronic immobilizers, alarm system, stolen vehicle tracking system, remote keyless entry, smart card system and number plate coding. (12) NEW CAR ASSESSMENT PROGRAM: Body parts shell for safety–NCAP and Global Norms, Frontal and offset frontal Crash requirements, Safety for seating and seat belt anchorages; Head impact and Injury prevention. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Vlacic,Ljubo., Parent,Michel. and Harashima,Fumio., “Intelligent Vehicle Technologies”, Butterworth-Heinemann publications, Oxford, 2001. 2. Bosch,Robert., “Automotive Hand Book”, SAE, 2000. 3. Jurgen,Ronald. K., “Navigation and Intelligent Transportation Systems – Progress in Technology”, Automotive Electronics Series, SAE, USA, 1998. 4. William, B. R., “Understanding Automotive Electronics”, Butter worth Heinemann Woburn, 1998.

18AE16 ELECTRONIC ENGINE MANAGEMENT 3003 INTRODUCTION: Purpose of electronic engine management system - Business & Engineering Need: Meet market specific need and legislative norms (Emission & Safety).Improve the engine performance (Torque and Speed characteristics), fuel economy and driving comfort. Software Architecture - Overview for Engine Management System, Overview of Safety standards (ISO26262 ASIL), AUTOSAR overview, Diagnostic and Monitoring System overview. (12) SENSORS, ACTUATORS AND CONTROL UNIT: Sensors for measuring crankshaft speed, camshaft position, Mass air flow (MAF),exhaust gas oxygen, throttle plate angular position, coolant temperature, intake air temperature, manifold absolute pressure (MAP),differential exhaust gas pressure, Nitric Oxide, Actuators for controlling EGR,Fuel Injection Quantity (Injector Solenoid and Piezo),Air control via throttle control,EGR control via EGR valve, variable valve timing and lift control, Turbocharger control via waste gate control. (11)

25

59th ACM

09.06.2018

ENGINE CONCEPTS FOR PERFORMANCE AND EMISSION CONTROL: Gasoline Engine: MPFI and GDI System–Working of MPFI and GDI systems, Lambda control with three-way catalyst, Throttle control, Variable valve timing and lift control, Engine Downsizing via Turbo & Compressor Control, NOx control (NOx storage catalyst and Selective Catalytic Reduction),Particulate control (Particulate Trap and Regeneration). (11) DIESEL ENGINE: CRDI System – Fuel Injection control for engine performance optimization (Speed, Torque, Vibration and Noise),NOx control via Injection control,EGRcontrol,NOx storage catalyst, Selective Catalyst Reduction. Particulate control via particulate trap and regeneration. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Ronald, K. J., “Automotive Electronics Handbook”, McGraw Hill Book Co, 1999. 2. William, B. R., “Understanding Automotive Electronics”, SAE Publications 2004. 3. Bosch,Robert., “Diesel Engine management” Bentley Publishers, Cambridge, 2004. 4. Bosch,Robert., “Gasoline Engine management” Bentley Publishers, Cambridge, 2004.

18AE17 SENSORS AND ACTUATORS 3003 AUTOMOTIVE SENSORS: Introduction to sensors and variables to be measured in an automotive measurement and control applications. Airflow Rate Sensor, Pressure Measurement –Strain gauge MAP sensor. Engine Crank Position sensor-Magnetic reluctance, Hall effect and optical crank position sensor, Throttle angle sensor, Temperature Sensor. Sensors for Engine feedback control – EGO sensor, EGO characteristics, Magneto strictive principle and Knock sensor. (11) AUTOMOTIVE ACTUATORS:Introduction to actuators and variables to be controlled, Engine control actuators, Pulse width Modulated signal and H-bridge device for speed and direction control. Electric motor actuator –DC motor, Brushless DC Motor, Stepper Motor and Servomechanism. Engine control actuators-Fuel injector (solenoid, Piezo electric type), Ignition coil operation, EGR Actuator, Electric actuators- Relays, Reed switch. (12) OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER:OP-Amp: Introduction, Basics, Ideal OP-AMP, Open Loop and feedback in OP-AMP operation, Inverting and non-inverting amplifier, Voltage follower and Differential amplifiers. Difference mode, Common mode gain, CMRR, Operation amplifier internal circuit, Example of OP-AMP IC’s (IC 741), OP-Amp D.C characteristics. - Operational Amplifier Applications. (11) WAVEFORM GENERATORS, A/D AND D/A CONVERTORS: Comparator and its application, Regenerative comparator and square wave generator (Astablemultivibrator), Basic DAC techniques –Weighted resistor, R-2R ladder and inverted R-2R ladder, ADC-Direct Type ADC’s –Flash ADC, Successive approximation ADC. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Ribbens,William. B., “Understanding Automotive Electronics”, 7th Edition Butterworth-Heinemann publications, 2012. 2. Choudhry,D. Roy. andJain,Shail., “Linear Integrated Circuits”, New Age International Pvt. Ltd., 2000. 3. Jurgan,Ronald. K., “Automotive Electronics Handbook”, 2ndEdition , McGraw-Hill, Inc., 1999. 4. Franco,Sergio., “Design with Operational Amplifiers and Analog Integrated Circuits”, 3rd Edition, Tata Mc Graw-Hill, 2007.

18AE18 VEHICLE DIAGNOSTICS 3003 ON AND OFF -BOARD DIAGNOSTICS: Introduction to fault diagnosis and oscilloscope diagnostics, mechanical and electrical diagnostic techniques, sensors and actuators associated with oscilloscope diagnostics, faults Codes, Scanners/Fault Code Readers, Engine Analysers, On-board diagnostics various perspectives, Petrol/Gasoline On-board diagnostics, On-board sensors and actuators. (11) ENGINE SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS: Introduction to engine systems diagnostics, engine operation and fuel system, ignition system and emission system, fuel injection, starting and charging system, power flow control and energy efficiency analysis, engine management and fault-finding information, air supply, exhaust system, cooling and lubrication system. (11) CHASSIS AND BRAKE SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS: Introduction to chassis diagnostics, anti-lock braking system diagnostics, traction control system diagnostics, steering and tires, transmission systems diagnostics, diagnostics on steering and tires.(11) ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS DIAGNOSIS: Introduction to electronic components and circuits, multiplexing and de multiplexing, lighting system faults and auxiliary faults, in-car entertainment security and communications implementation, body-electrical systems, instruments system faults, heating ventilation and air conditioning cruise control, air bags and belt tensioners. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Denton,Tom., “Advanced Automotive Fault Diagnosis”, Routledge, 2011. 2. Denton,Tom., “Automotive Electronics Handbook”, McGraw-Hill Publishing Co.; 2nd revised edition 1999. 3. Denton, Tom., “Automobile Electrical and Electronic Systems”, Routledge,4th edition, 2012. 4. Jurgan,Ronald. K. “Automotive Electronics Handbook”, 2nd Edition , McGraw-Hill, Inc. 2008

26

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18AE19 AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS 3003

BATTERIES AND IGNITION SYSTEM: Lead acid and alkaline batteries, construction and working, battery rating, battery charging methods, testing and maintenance. Ignition system-Introduction - Construction and working of magneto coil and battery coil ignition systems, spark plug types, spark advance mechanisms, electronic ignition systems - Transistorized ignition system, solid state ignition systems, capacitor discharge ignition system and distributor less ignition system. (11) STARTING SYSTEM AND CHARGING SYSTEM - Principle, construction and working of starter motor, working of different starter drive units CHARGING SYSTEM: Alternators – Principle, construction and working – Regulators, Introduction to Start / Stop system, integrated starter generator (ISA/ISG) (11) SENSORS AND ACTUATORS: Mass air flow (MAF), exhaust gas oxygen, throttle plate angular position, crankshaft angular position/rpm, coolant temperature, intake air temperature, manifold absolute pressure (MAP), differential exhaust gas pressure, vehicle speed, pickups sensors, exhaust gas recirculation sensors, electric fuel pump motor characteristics, piezoelectric stack injectors and solenoids for injection systems. (11) ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROL - Electronic diesel control -Comparison indirect and direct injection- mechanical and hydraulic actuated EDC - In-line fuel-injection pumps, helix and port controlled axial piston distributor, solenoid valve control, unit injectors, common rail systems, data processing, lambda closed loop control, torque-controlled EDC systems, control and triggering of actuators. Electronic gasoline control: Battery ignition system-open loop and closed loop systems, mono point, multi point, gasoline direct injection systems, air assisted systems, principles and features of Bosch jetronic systems, idle speed, knock and spark timing control, magnetostrictive ignition, capacitor discharge ignition, solid state and transistor ignition, distributor less ignition. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Bell,Joseph., “Diesel Engineering: Electricity and Electronics”, Cengage Learning, New Delhi, 2007. 2. Bosch,Robert., “Automotive Hand Book” SAE, 2000. 3. Bosch,Robert.,“Automotive Electrics Automotive Electronics”, GmbH, 2004. 4. Denton, Tom., “Automobile Electrical and Electronics systems”, Routledge Taylor & Francis Group London & New York, 2002.

DESIGN ENGINEERING STREAM ELECTIVES 18AE20 FINITE ELMENT ANALYSIS 3003 INTRODUCTION: Historical background, Concept of finite element method, boundary, initial and eigen value problems, Finite element formulation starting from governing differential equations – Weighted residual method, Finite element formulation based on stationary of a functional. Review of static analysis using 1D elements. (10) STATIC ANALYSIS AND DYNAMIC ANALYSIS: Triangular and quadrilateral elements, Isoparametric formulation, problems using 2D elements, shape functions for axisymmetric and 3D elements, shape functions for higher order elements. Introduction to plates and shells. Equations of motion for dynamic problems. Consistent and lumped mass matrices. Formulation of element mass matrices. Free vibration problem formulation, Solution of Eigen value problems using 1D elements, Time dependent onedimensional bar analysis. (12) HEAT TRANSFER ANALYSIS: Basic differential equations of heat transfer, one dimensional and two-dimensional finite element formulation using variational and Galerkin’s method, one dimensional steady state heat transfer problems involving conduction and convection. Analysis of tapered fin, Formulation of thermal stress problems and examples, transient thermal analysis. (11) NON-LINEAR ANALYSIS: Introduction, Non-linear differential equation, Solution procedures for non-linear problems, Linearization and directional derivative, Material non-linearity-analysis of axially loaded bars, Geometric non-linearity-Basic continuum mechanics concepts, Governing differential equations and weak forms, Introduction to contact problems. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Chandrupatla, T. R. and Belegundu, A. D., “Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2007. 2. Logan, D. L., “A First Course in the Finite Element Method”, Thomson Learning, 2007. 3. Rao, S. S., “The Finite Element Method in Engineering”, Elsevier, 2005. 4. Cook, R. D., Malkus, D. S. and Plesha, M. E., “Concepts and Applications of Finite Element Analysis”, John Wiley and Sons, New Delhi, 2003.

18AE21 AERODYNAMICS OF ROAD VEHICLES 3003 AERODYNAMIC DRAG OF CARS: Introduction: Fundamentals of fluid mechanics, flow phenomenon related to vehicles, external and internal flows. Cars as a bluff body, flow field around car, air flow to passenger compartment, drag force, types of

27

59th ACM

09.06.2018

drag force, analysis of aerodynamic drag, drag coefficient of cars, strategies for aerodynamic development, low drag profiles. (12) SHAPE OPTIMIZATION OF CARS: Front end shape modifications, front and rear wind shield angle, A and C pillar, front and rear spoilers, Roof modifications, rear end shape modifications - boat tailing, hatch back, fast back and square back, dust flow patterns at the rear, effects of gap configuration, effect of fasteners. (11) VEHICLE HANDLING: Origin of forces and moments on a vehicle, lateral stability, methods to calculate forces and moments vehicle dynamics under side force and winds, steady and cornering effect - steering angle and slip angle, under steer and over steer gradient, suspension effects on cornering, roll moments on front and rear axles, dirt accumulation on the vehicle, wind noise, drag reduction in commercial vehicles. (12) WIND TUNNELS FOR AUTOMOTIVE AERODYNAMICS: Introduction, principle of wind tunnel technology, limitation of simulation, stress with scale models, full scale wind tunnels, measurement techniques, equipment and transducers, road testing methods, numerical methods. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Hucho, W. H., “Aerodynamic of Road vehicles ", Butterworth Co. Ltd., 1997. 2. Pope, A., “Wind Tunnel Testing ", John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1974. 3. “Automotive Aerodynamic: Update SP-706”, SAE, 1987. 4. “Vehicle Aerodynamic”, SP-1145, SAE, 1996. 5. McCallen, R., Browand, F. and Ross, J., “The Aerodynamics of Heavy Vehicles: Trucks, Buses, and Trains”, Springer, 2004.

18AE22 COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS 3003 INTRODUCTION: Application areas of CFD, Basic concepts of fluid flow - governing equations, conservation of mass, momentum and energy – Navier-stokes and energy equation for Newtonian fluid, Mathematical classification of flow hyperbolic, parabolic, elliptic and mixed flow types. (10) DISCRETISATION: Finite difference method - forward, backward and central difference schemes, Explicit and implicit methods: Numerical solution for heat transfer and fluid flow problems for steady state and transient conditions, Stability analysis and error estimation. Grid generation: Choice of grid, grid oriented velocity components, cartesian velocity components, staggered and collocated arrangements. (12) CFD TECHNIQUES: Lax - Wendroff technique - MacCormack’s technique, Relaxation technique. ADI technique, Pressure correction technique, SIMPLE algorithm. Fluid flow and convection problems: Upwind scheme, Stability criteria. (11) TURBULENCE MODELING AND CASE STUDIES: Turbulence energy equation- one-equation model, the k-ω model, the k- ε model. Modeling and analysis of heat transfer, fluid flow and automobile components using CFD packages. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENECES: 1. Muralidhar, K. and Sundararajan, T., “Computational Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer”, Narosa Publications, New Delhi, 2003. 2. Chung, T. J., “Computational Fluid Dynamics”, Cambridge University Press, London, 2002. 3. David, C. Wilcox., “Turbulence Modeling for CFD”, DCW Industries, Inc., 1993. 4. Versteeg, H. K. and Malalasekara, W., “An Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics - The Finite Volume Method', Longman, 1995.

18AE23 AUTOMOTIVE SYSTEM DESIGN AND SIMULATION 3003 Principles of mathematical modeling of mechanical systems: Introduction-Mathematical Modeling- Bars Under Axial Vibration- Bars Under Torsional Vibration Beams Under Flexural Vibration- Systems Governed by Second-Order PDEsProperties of the Laplace Transform- Time Response via the Laplace Transform- The Inverse Laplace Transform- The Finaland the Initial-Value Theorems. (12) Vibration Analysis of Two-DoF Systems: Constitutive Equations of Mechanical Elements- springs and dashpots – series and parallel arrays –Hysteric Damping- Coulomb damping-Introduction-The Derivation of the Governing Equations-Equilibrium States-Linearization of the Governing Equations- Lagrange Equations of Linear Mechanical Systems. Introduction-Natural Frequencies and the Natural Modes-The Zero-Input Response of Two-DoF Systems-Damped Two- DoF Systems. (11) Steering system and Road modeling: Steering system forces and moments calculation- EPS motor torque requirement and influence different parameters – parking torque estimation- dynamics of rack and pinion steering – concept of road modeling Deterministic Profiles –Random profiles. (11) Suspension and tire modeling: Quarter car model - Kinematics of a Double Wishbone Suspension - Modeling Aspects Constraint Equations - Spring Damper in Series tire modeling- – Pacejaka magic formula- brush and Dugoff modelIntroduction to full car model with 16 DoF. (11)

28

59th ACM

09.06.2018

Total L: 45 REFERENCES : 1. Angeles,Jorgge.,” Dynamic response of linear Mechanical systems -Modeling,Analysis and Simulation”, Elsevier press, 2008. 2. Rill, Georg.,” Road vehicle dynamics- Fundamentals and modeling”, CRC press,2009. 3. Nazar, Reza. N., “Vehicledynamics: Thoery and application”,Springer, 2008. 4. Maurer, Markus. and Winner, Hermann.,”Automotive Systems Engineering”, Springer, 2013,

18AE24 DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURE AND ASSEMBLY 3003 DFMA TOOLS: Traditional design and manufacture vs concurrent engineering, poka-yoke, lean principles, six sigma concepts, DFMA as the tool for concurrent engineering, Process capability, process capability metrics, Cp, Cpk, cost aspects, Design for assembly (DFA), Design for the Environment (DFE) - environmental objectives, global issues, regional and local issues-basic DFE methods-design guidelines-example application. (12) TOLERANCE ANALYSIS: Geometric tolerancing for manufacture as per Indian standards and ASME Y 14.5 standard, surface finish, review of relationship between attainable tolerance grades and different machining processes. Cumulative effect of tolerances, dimensional chain analysis -equivalent tolerances method, equivalent standard tolerance grade method, equivalent influence method. Limits and fits, interchangeable part manufacture. Selective assembly. (11) DATUM SYSTEMS AND TRUE POSITION THEORY: Degrees of freedom, grouped datum systems - different types, two and three mutually perpendicular grouped datum planes; Grouped datum system with spigot and recess, pin and hole; Grouped datum system with spigot - recess pair and tongue - slot pair - computation of translational and rotational accuracy, geometric analysis and applications. True position theory - comparison between coordinate and conventional method of feature location tolerancing and true position tolerancing, virtual size concept, floating and fixed fasteners, projected tolerance zone, zero true position tolerance, compound assembly. Functional inspection techniques using CMM and paper layout gauging. (11) REDESIGN, TOLERANCE CHARTING: Redesign of castings based on parting line considerations, minimising core requirements, redesigning cast members using weldments, design guidelines for welding. Redesign of components to facilitate machining. Tolerance charting - operation sequence for typical shaft type of components, preparation of process drawings for different operations, tolerance worksheets and centrality analysis, examples. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Bralla,James. G. , “Design for Manufacturability Handbook”, McGraw Hill Professional, 1999 2. Boothroyd, G., Dewhurst, P. and Knight, W., “Product Design for Manufacture and Assembly”, Marcell Dekker, 1994. 3. Graedel,T. E. and Allenby,Braden. R. , “Design for environment”, Prentice Hall, 2007 4. Poli, Corrodo., “Design for Manufacturing – A structured Assembly”, Elsevier, 2009.

18AE25 AUTOMOTIVE POWERTRAIN DESIGN 3003 CYLINDER AND PISTON: Materials for cylinder and piston. Analysis of forces. Design procedure for cylinder, piston, piston rings and piston pin. (11) CONNECTING ROD: Materials for connecting rod and crank shaft. Analysis of forces. Design procedure for connecting rod small end, big end bearings and middle portion. Design procedure for crankpin, web and main bearing of crank shaft. (12) VALVE AND VALVE ACTUATING MECHANISM: Materials. Design of inlet and outlet valves, valve springs, rocker arm, tappet, Cam, camshaft. (11) FLYWHEEL AND CLUTCH: Requirements of flywheel. Design procedure for flywheel. Design of single and multi-plate clutches. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Kolchin, A. and Demidov, V., “Design of Automotive Engines”, MIR Publishers 1998. 2. Hoag, Kevin.and Dondlinger, Brian.,” Vehicular Engine Design”,Springer, 2015. 3. Fenton,John., “Gasoline Engine analysis for CAD”, MEP, London, 1986. 4. Crolla, David. anfMasadi, Bahrooz.,” Vehicle Power train Systems”, John Wiley and Sons -2011.

Automotive Manufacturing Stream Electives 18AE26 ADVANCED MANUFACTURING PROCESSES 3003 SURFACE TREATMENT: Scope, Cleaners, Methods of cleaning, Surface coating types, and ceramic and organic methods of coating, economics of coating. Electro forming, Chemical vapour deposition, thermal spraying, Ion implantation, diffusion coating, Diamond coating and cladding. (11)

29

59th ACM

09.06.2018

NON-TRADITIONAL MACHINING: Introduction, need, AJM, Parametric Analysis, Process capabilities, USM –Mechanics of cutting, models, Parametric Analysis, WJM –principle, equipment ,process characteristics , performance, EDM – principles, equipment, generators, analysis of R-C circuits, MRR , Surface finish, WEDM. (11) LASER BEAM MACHINING: Principle of working, equipment, Material removal rate, Process parameters, performance characterization, Applications. Plasma Arc Machining – Principle of working, equipment, Material removal rate, Process parameters, performance characterization, Applications. Electron Beam Machining - Principle of working, equipment, Material removal rate, Process parameters, performance characterization, Applications. Electro Chemical Machining – Principle of working, equipment, Material removal rate, Process parameters, performance characterization, Applications. (11) PROCESSING OF CERAMICS: Applications, characteristics, classification .Processing of particulate ceramics, Powder preparations, consolidation, Drying, sintering, Hot compaction, Area of application, finishing of ceramics. Processing of Composites: Composite Layers, Particulate and fiber reinforced composites, Elastomers, Reinforced plastics, MMC, CMC, Polymer matrix composites. Fabrication of Microelectronic devices: Crystal growth and wafer preparation, Film Deposition oxidation, lithography, bonding and packaging, reliability and yield, Printed Circuit boards, computer aided design in micro electronics, surface mount technology, Integrated circuit economics. Manufacturing, nanotechnology, and micromachining, High speed Machining. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Kalpakijian., “Manufacturing Engineering and Technology” ,Adisson Wesley, 1995. 2. Lindburg, R. A.,”Process and Materials of Manufacturing” , 4th edition, PHI 1990. 3. Liu, Chang.,” Foundation of MEMS” ,Pearson, 2012. 4. Jain, V.K.,” Advanced Machining Processes”, Allied Publications,2012.

18AE27 LEAN MANUFACTURING 3003 INTRODUCTION: History - Objectives - Implications of lean. Traditional vs. mass production vs. lean manufacturing vs. smart manufacturing. Single variant vs. flexible mixed model support. Lean Culture. Paper Lean vs. IT based Lean. LEAN CONCEPTS: Five Key principles - Value creation - 3M - Takt time. (9) LEAN METHODS: Value Stream Mapping: - Detailed process map - Use of VSM software. Group Technology - Machine cell design - Facility layout optimization - Quality at source - 5S principles – One piece flow - Pull vs Push - JIT - Kanban. Information technology aids – Smart manufacturing. Case Studies from various industries. (10) LEAN TOOLS: Standard work - SOP. Spaghetti diagram – Process Map. Visual controls - Marquee - Andon - Vision system Score board. Total Integrated Automation - TPM - OEE - TQM - SMED - FMEA - Line balancing - Poka-yoke/ Error mistake proofing - Information technology aids. Case Studies from various industries. (20) LEAN IMPLEMENTATION: Road map to implement lean project - Hoshin planning. RECONCILING WITH OTHER SYSTEMS: Lean six sigma - PDM, ERP, ERP II and PLM – Lean with ISO9001:2000. Industry 4.0/5.0. (6) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Liker,Jeffrey. and Convis,Gary. L., "The Toyota Way to Lean Leadership: Achieving and Sustaining Excellence through Leadership Development", McGraw Hills, 2012. 2. Askin, R. G. and Goldberg, J. B., “Design and Analysis of Lean Production Systems”, John Wiley and Sons Inc., 2003. 3. George,Michael. L., Rowlands,David. T. andKastle,Bill., “What is Lean Six Sigma”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2004. 4. Robinson,Alan., “Continuous Improvement in Operations”, Productivity Press, Portland, Oregon, 1991. .

18AE28 LEAN SIX SIGMA 3003 INTRODUCTION: Background - Six sigma definition – Six sigma vs. TQM – Traditional project vs. Lean six sigma project. CONCEPT: Four keys, Five laws – COPQ – Total quality cost – Importance of Value stream mapping – Types of Lean six sigma: DMAIC vs DFSS. Industry culture. Selection of team members. Characteristics of team members. (14) DMAIC PROJECT: DEFINE: Problem statement - VOC – CTQ – Affinity process – Pareto diagrams – BRD – Project charter – High level process map – Project team – SIPOC. MEASURE: Types of measures – Types of data. Collect data from "As is" model. Carry out Cause and effect diagrams – Line, bar, stacked bar graphs – Pie chart – Histograms. Six sigma measurements: COPQ – QLF - Process capability study. ANALYSE: Process capability analysis – Correlation analysis DOE/ANOVA, Chi square test. IMPROVE: Process redesign, generating alternatives for improvement. Conduct pilot experiments - Cost/benefit analysis – Implementation plan – Risk analysis and mitigation. (22) DESIGN FOR SIX SIGMA (DFSS) PROJECT: DFSS methodologies - QFD - Theory of Inventive Problem Solving (TRIZ) FMEA - Design for XDFX – Robust design and process. (6) LEAN SIXSIGMA IMPLEMENTATION: Roadmap to implement or execute a lean six sigma project. Software tools available for DMAIC and/or DFSS. (3)

30

59th ACM

09.06.2018

Total L: 45

REFERENCES: 1. Feo,Joseph. De. andBarnard,William., “Juran Institute’s Six Sigma Breakthrough and Beyond”, The McGraw-Hill Companies, 2004. 2. Ehrlich,Betsiharris., “Transactional Six Sigma and Lean Servicing”, St. Lucia Press, 2002. 3. Arthur, Jay., “Lean Six Sigma – Demystified”, Tata McGraw Hill Companies Inc, 2007. 4. George,Michael. L., Rowlands,David. T. and Kastle,Bill., “What is Lean Six Sigma”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2004.

18AE29 AUTOMOTIVE MATERIALS AND METALLURGY 3003 METALLIC MATERIALS AND THEIR PROCESSING: ferrous and non ferrous materials properties, alloying elements and their effects, characteristics of metallic materials such as castability, machinability, hardenability, formability, weldability, etc. Processing of metallic materials – casting, forming, fabrication and heat treatments. Micro alloyed, high strength low alloy steel - High strength Steels (HSS), Advanced High Strength Steels (AHSS), Ultra high strength Steels (UHSS), and developments in non ferrous alloys for automotive industry. (11) NON METALLIC MATERIALS AND THEIR PROCESSING:Polymers, elastomers – types, properties and applications. laminated&heat treated glass, adhesive bonding. Electrical insulating materials. Gaskets, automotive glasses, Sound insulating materials, Protective coating materials - Paints, primers, varnishes, enamels. Processing of polymers and elastomers. Automotive applications of non metallic materials. (11) ADVANCED MATERIALS AND THEIR PROCESSING: composite materials – type, application, properties and processing of composite materials. Composites for automotive industry. Light weight materials Carbon fiber composites, Natural fibers, refractory metals, SMART Materials - shape memory alloys (SMA), Piezo-electric materials, MEMS, Metallic glass‐Quasi crystal and Nano crystalline materials, metal foams, etc., Advanced processing of materials – Powder metallurgy (hot isostatic & cold isostatic), Hydroforming, Laser welding techniques, Induction heating, etc., (12) MATERIALS FAILURES AND DESIGN: Materials behaviour under mechanical loading - Plastic deformation ‐ Strengthening mechanisms ‐ Griffith's theory of failure modes –‐ Damping properties of materials ‐ fracture toughness ‐ Initiation and propagation of fatigue cracks ‐ Creep mechanisms environmentally induced degradation and preventive solutions. Automotive component failure analysis and case studies, types of failures, fracture mechanisms, types of defects in metals & cracks, types of fatigue, importance of endurance life. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Yamagata,H.,” The Science and Technology of Materials in Automotive Engines”, Woodhead Publishing Ltd, Cambridge, United Kingdom, 2005. 2. “Pistons and engine testing”, second edition, MAHLE, 2011. 3. Courtney,Thomas.H.,“Mechanical Behavior of Materials”, McGraw Hill,2000. 4. Budinski,Kenneth. G. and Budinski,Michael. K. “Engineering Materials” Prentice-Hall of India Private Limited, 4th Indian Reprint 2002.

Thermal Engineering Stream Electives 18AE30 EMISSION, NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS CONTROL 3003 Emission: Introduction - Types and causes of emission –SI and CI emission - Formation mechanisms- chemistry of emissionemission testing methods- engine design and operating parameters on emission- emission standards. (10) Noise fundamentals and Instrumentation techniques: Sound propagation, quantification of sound - frequency and wave length, sound pressure level, sound intensity level, vehicle noise specifications & standards, noise induced hearing losses. Exterior noise sources, Interior noise sources. Microphones & calibrators, Excitation devices, frequency analysis, sound pressure measurement, sound intensity measurement, sound intensity probes, data acquisition system, digital signal processing, semi-anechoic rooms. (12) Noise analysis and control methods: Transfer Path Analysis: single source structure-borne noise transmission path analysis, multiple reference transmission path analysis, Impedance modelling, modal analysis: definition of modal properties, modal analysis theory, passive noise control methods: ducts & mufflers -types of mufflers, performance parameters – acoustics and backpressure, reactive and absorptive silencers, helmholtz resonators and side branch resonators. (10) Vibration fundamentals and Instrumentation techniques : Introduction, elements of vibration, source of vibration, types of vibration, transient and steady state response of one degree of freedom system applied to vehicle systems, multi degree of freedom system (MDOF), Undamped& damped vibrations, Vibration transducers, FFT analyser. (13)

31

59th ACM

09.06.2018

Total L: 45 REFERENCE: 1. Harrison,Matthew., “Vehicle Refinement: Controlling Noise and Vibration in Road Vehicles”, SAE International, 2004. 2. Munjal, M.L., “Acoustic Ducts and Mufflers”, John Wiley, 1987 3. Rajamani,Rajesh., “Vehicle Dynamics and Control”, 2nd edition, Springer, 2011. 4. Wang,Xu., “Vehicle noise and vibration refinement”, Wood head publishing Limited, 2010.

18AE31 ADVANCED HEAT TRANSFER 3003 INTRODUCTION TO MODES AND LAWS OF HEAT TRANSFER: Simultaneous Heat Transfer Mechanism, Steady and Transient Heat Transfer, Multidimensional Heat Transfer, Thermal Conductivity, Thermal diffusivity, Various Boundary and Initial Conditions, General Heat Conduction Equation, Thermal Resistance, Generalized Thermal Resistance Networks, Thermal Contact Resistance. (11) TRANSIENT HEAT CONDUCTION AND FLUID FLOW AND CONVECTIVE HEAT TRANSFER: Lumped capacitance and its validity, General lumped capacitance analysis, spatial effects. Problems related with conventional geometries. Concept of velocity and thermal boundary layers: Laminar and Turbulent flow. Navier stokes equations and convection equation. Boundary layer approximations and special conditions. Boundary layer similarity. The normalized convection transfer equations. Dimensionless parameters & physical significance. (12) CONVECTION: External forced convection: Parallel flow over Flat plates, Flow across cylinders, Flow across tube banks. Internal forced convection: Entrance region, Constant surface heat flux, Constant surface temperature, Laminar and Turbulent flow in tubes. Natural Convection: Physical Mechanism, Equation of motion and Grashof Number, Natural Convection over surfaces. (11) BOILING AND CONDENSATION: Boiling modes, the boiling curve, modes of pool boiling, correlations. Forced convection boiling. Two phase flow. Condensation: Physical mechanisms, laminar film condensation on a vertical plate. Turbulent film condensation, film condensation on radial systems, film condensation in horizontal tubes, on banks of tubes, Dropwise condensation correlations. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Incropera, Dewitt.,”Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer” , John Wiley and sons., 2001. 2. Cengel, Yunus. andGhajar, Afshin.,”Heat and Mass Transfer” , Tata Mc Graw Hill., 2007. 3. Ozisik, M.N.,”Heat transfer - A basic approach”, Mc Graw Hill Int., 2011. 4. Bejan, A.,”Convective Heat transfer”, John Wiley and sons, 2003.

18AE32 ALTERNATIVE FUELS 3003 NEED FOR ALTERNATIVE FUELS: An introduction to hydrocarbon fuels, estimate of petroleum reserve and availability, Petroleum refining process, Physio-chemical characteristics of fuels, fuel additives, Need for alternative fuels, applications, types, study of availability, manufacture, storage, handling and dispensing, safety aspects. (11) ENGINE PERFORMANCE AND EMISSION CHARACTERISTICS: Principle of combustion, Engine performance parameters, Operating variables that affect SI and CI engine performance, efficiency and emissions, Emission formation in SI and CI engines - UBHC, NOx, CO, CO2, Particulate emissions, Aldehydes, SOx. Emission effects on health and environment, Emission Norms. (11) TYPES OF ALTERNATIVE FUELS: Alcohol fuels - ethanol & methanol, Vegetable oils, Fuel composition, Fuel induction techniques, Blending and fumigation of fuels, applications to engines. LPG and LNG, CNG, Producer gas, components, mixtures and kits, fuel supply system, Hydrogen combustion characteristics, safety aspects and system development, HCNG, Fuel cells, Introduction to Synthetic fuels: GTL, BTL. (12) BIOFUELS: Oxygenated fuels, Biodiesel formulation techniques, Transesterification, Application in diesel engines, DME (Dimethyl ether), DEE (Diethyl ether), properties, fuel injection consideration. Biomass: generation, characterization, use as energy source, Biogas: aerobic and anaerobic bio-conversion processes, microbial reactions, purification, properties of biogas (composition and calorific value), Storage and enrichment. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Haywood,John. B., “Internal Combustion Engine Fundamentals”, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 2001. 2. Bechtold,Richard. L., “Alternate Fuels – Transportation Fuels for Today and Tomorrow”, Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) – 2002. 3. “Alcohols as Motor Fuels”, SAE, 2012 4. Watson, E.B., “Alternative fuels for the combustion engine”, ASME, 2011.

32

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18AE33 AUTOMOTIVE HVACR 3003

FUNDAMENTALS: Terminology, design factors and concepts related to air conditioning & refrigeration systems - Construction and Working principles of Thermostatic Expansion valve and Orifice tube-based system- Heating system types -detailed study of HVAC components like compressor, evaporator, condenser, TXV, orifice tube, Receiver-drier, heater core etc. Location of air conditioning components & refrigeration components in a vehicle. (11) REFRIGERANTS, AIR MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SYSTEMS: Refrigerants: Temperature and pressure relation, Properties of R-12 and R134a- refrigerant oil. Simple problems -Containers - Handling refrigerants - Tapping into the refrigerant container - Ozone Layer Depletion. Air management system: Air routing for manual, semi and automatic systemcases and ducts- Air distribution, control head and doors- Defrost system Block diagram - types of Sensors and Actuators, Control Logic Electrical wiring diagram of manual and automatic system - multiplexing between BCM and PCM- control of compressor clutch, blower motor etc.- diagnostics tools and features. (12) DESIGN OF AIR-CONDITIONING COMPONENTS: Modeling of Fixed and variable Displacement type compressor, evaporator modeling – heat transfer correlations for the fluids inside the evaporator, analysis of evaporator frosting- condenser modeling improvement of refrigerant flow control method. (11) DIAGNOSIS AND SERVICES: Air conditioning & refrigeration system diagnosis based on temperature and pressure measurements, sight glass, sound etc. -refrigerant leak detection- Trouble shooting and Servicing of compressor, evaporator, condenser, heater core. Air routing system service. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Birch,Tom., “Automotive Heating and Air Conditioning” Pearson Education Inc., 2003. 2. Dwiggins,Boyce. H., Erjavec,Jack., “Automotive Heating and Air-Conditioning”, Delmer publisher.,2009. 3. Crouse,William. H. and Anglin,Donald. L., “Automotive air conditioning”, McGraw - Hill Inc., 2010. 4. Daly,Steven., “Automotive Air Conditioning and Climate Control System”, Butterworth Heinemann, 2006.

18AE34 FUELS AND COMBUSTION 3003 COMBUSTION PRINCIPLES: Thermodynamics - concepts of combustion – combustion equations - heat of combustion theoretical flame temperature - chemical equilibrium and dissociation, equilibrium constant for ideal gas mixture. Chemical thermodynamics, chemical reaction, fuels and combustion, enthalpy of formation and enthalpy of combustion, 1st law analysis of reacting systems, adiabatic flame temperature of different fuels. (11) FUELS AND CHEMICAL KINETICS: Flame stability, combustion mechanisms of solid liquid and gaseous fuels. Theories of combustion - pre-flame velocities - reaction rates - laminar and turbulent flame propagation in engines- reaction mechanisms of hydrogen and hydrocarbon combustion. (12) COMBUSTION IN SI ENGINES: Initiation of combustion - flame velocities – flame propagation - normal and abnormal combustion - knocking combustion - pre-ignition - knock and engine variables – features and design consideration of combustion chambers - stratified charge combustion - concepts of lean burn engines - heat release correlations. Flow visualization and modeling, concept of combustion quality, ignition and its effect. (11) COMBUSTION IN CI ENGINES: Various stages of combustion - vaporization of fuel droplets and spray formation – air motion swirl measurement - delay period correlations and affecting variables, diesel knock and engine variables, features and design considerations of combustion chambers - swirl, squish and tumble Flow visualization and modelling. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Ganesan, V., “Internal Combustion Engines”, Tata McGraw Hill Book Cop.,2005 2. John, B. Heywood, “Internal Combustion Engine Fundamentals”, McGraw Hill Book, 2008. 3. Mathur M. L., and Sharma, R. P., “A Course in Internal Combustion Engines”, Dhanpat Rai Publications Pvt. New Delhi, 2007. 4. Obert, E. F.,” Internal Combustion Engine and Air Pollution”, International Text Books Publishers, 2000.

18AE35 SIMULATION OF IC ENGINES 3003 INTRODUCTION TO MODELLING: Advantages of computer simulation, Classification of engine models. Intake and exhaust flow models – Quasi steady flow - Filling and emptying - Gas dynamic Models. Thermodynamic based in cylinder models. Step by step approach in SI engine simulation. (11) COMBUSTION AND STOICHIOMETERY: Reactive processes, Heat of reaction, measurement of URP, measurement of HRP. Introduction -combustion equation for hydrocarbon fuels. Calculation of minimum air, excess air and stoichiometric air required for combustion. Conversion of volumetric analysis to mass analysis. Introduction, complete combustion in C-H-N-O systems, constant volume adiabatic combustion, constant pressure adiabatic combustion, calculation of adiabatic flame temperature, isentropic changes of state. (11)

33

59th ACM

09.06.2018

COMPUTER SIMULATION OF SI ENGINE WITH FUEL AIR CYCLE: SI Engine simulation with air as working medium, deviation between actual and ideal cycle. Fuel air cycle analysis - Temperature drop due to fuel vaporization, full throttle operation, work output and efficiency calculation, part-throttle operation, engine performance at part throttle, super charged operation. SI Engines simulation with progressive combustion. Wiebe’s law combustion analysis. , validation of the computer code, engine performance simulation, pressure crank angle diagram, brake power, brake thermal efficiency, effect of speed on performance. (12) COMPUTER SIMULATION OF CI ENGINE: Zero, one and multizone models for diesel engine combustion. Double Wiebe’s Law analysis for diesel combustion. Heat release model and different heat transfer models. Equilibrium calculations. Parametric studies on simulated engine performance. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Ganesan, V., "Computer Simulation of spark ignition engine process", Universities Press (I) Ltd, Hyderbad, 1996. 2. Heywood, John. B., ’Internal Combustion Engines’", Tata McGraw Hill Co., Newyork, 1988. 3. Ramoss, A.L., "Modelling of Internal Combustion Engines Processes", McGraw Hill Publishing Co.,1992. 4. Campbel, Ashley., "Thermodynamic analysis of combustion engines", John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1986.

18AE36 INSTRUMENTATION FOR THERMAL SYTEMS 3003 MEASURMENT CHARACTERISTICS: Instrument Classification, Characteristics of Instruments – Static and dynamic, experimental error analysis, Systematic and random errors, Statistical analysis, Uncertainty, Experimental planning and selection of measuring instruments, Reliability of instruments. (11) MICROPROCESSORS AND COMPUTERS IN MEASURMENT: Data logging and acquisition – use of sensors for error reduction, elements of micro computer interfacing, intelligent instruments in use. (11) MEASURMENT OF PHYSICAL QUANTITIES: Measurement of thermo-physical properties, instruments for measuring temperature, pressure and flow, use of sensors for physical variables. (11) MEASURMENT TECHNIQUES AND ANALYSERS: Shadowgraph, Schlieren, Interferometer, Laser Doppler Anemometer, Hot wire Anemometer, heat flux sensors, Telemetry in measurement. Orsat apparatus, Gas Analysers, Smoke meters, gas chromatography, spectrometry. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Holman, J.P., “Experimental methods for engineers”, McGraw-Hill, 2012 2. Barnery.,” Intelligent Instrumentation”, Prentice Hall of India, 2011. 3. Prebrashensky, V., “Measurements and Instrumentation in Heat Engineering, Vol. 1 and 2”, MIR Publishers, 2007 4. Raman, C.S., Sharma, G.R. and Mani, V.S.V., “Instrumentation Devices and Systems”, Tata McGraw- Hill, New Delhi, 2001.

18AE37 THERMAL MANAGEMENT OF HYBRID SYSTEMS 3003 INTRODUCTION: First Law of Thermodynamics for open and closed systems; internal energy, enthalpy, and specific heat Second Law of Thermodynamics for closed systems; Thermodynamic equations, Gibbs function - Fluid mechanics: laminar vs. turbulent flow, internal flow relationships, Navier Stokes equations - Heat transfer: simple conduction, convection, and radiation relationships; Nusselt number relationships for convective heat transfer; energy equation. (12) THERMAL MANAGEMENT OF MOTORS: Motor Sizing vs Heat Generation - Operational Temperature Limitations of Electrical Insulation - Design concepts for Heat Extraction in Motors for xEV systems - Modelling and simulation of heat transfer in motors - Rendering of Heat extraction solutions - Sensors and Protection solutions. (11) THERMAL MANAGEMENT FOR BATTERIES AND POWER ELECTRONICS: Introduction - Thermal control in vehicular battery systems: battery performance degradation at low and high temperatures - Passive, active, liquid, air thermal control system configurations for HEV and EV applications - Battery Heat Transfer - Introduction to battery modeling: tracking current demand, voltage, and State of Charge as functions of time for given drive cycles - Development of thermodynamic relationships for cell heat generation - Lumped cell and pack models for transient temperature response to drive cycles - Model parametric study results (11) THERMAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS: Overall energy balance to determine required flowrates - Determination of convection and friction coefficients for air and liquid systems in various geometric configurations: flow around cylinders, flow between plates, flow through channels - Development of a complete thermal system model and parametric study results - Temperature control and heat transfer using phase change materials - Thermal Management of Power Electronics. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Nag, P.K., “Engineering Thermodynamics”, 5th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi, 2013.

34

59th ACM 2. 3. 4. 5.

09.06.2018

Sergent,Jerry. andKrum,Al., “Thermal Management Handbook: For Electronic Assemblies Hardcover”, McGraw- Hill. 2005. “Vehicle thermal Management Systems Conference Proceedings, 1st Edition”, Coventry Techno Centre, UK, 2013. Shabany, Younes.,” Heat Transfer: Thermal Management of Electronics Hardcover”, CRC Press. 2010, Obidi,T. Yomi., “Thermal Management in Automotive applications”, SAE International, 2015.

18AE38 FUEL CELL VEHICLES 3003 Introduction and Thermodynamics of fuel cells: Introduction-working and types of fuel cell-Low, medium and high temperature fuel cell. Enthalpy change of a reacting system, systematic Gibbs free energy, Ideal efficiency of the energy conversion, energy balance in fuel cells. First and second law of thermodynamics for fuel cells. (10) Electrochemistry of fuel cells: Nernst equation, relation of the fuel consumption versus current output, stoichiometric coefficients and utilization percentages of the fuel and oxygen, mass flow rate calculation for fuel and oxygen in single cell and fuel cell stack, total voltage and current for fuel cells in parallel and serious connection, over-potential and polarizations, generous issues -water flooding and water management. (11) FUEL CELL COMPONENTS AND FUELING: Material for conventional and new catalysts for MEA, Gas diffusion layer - Types and significance, various flow field design and their impact on performance. Fuel cell performance characteristics Current/voltage, voltage efficiency and power density, Ohmic resistance, Kinetic performance, mass transfer effects, fuel cell stacks, bi-polar plate, humidifiers and cooling plates. Hydrogen generation and storage technologies - various methods and their influences. (12) Fuel Cell Vehicle architecture: Hybrid Vehicle configurations – Parallel, Series and Parallel-Series, Fuel cell Vehicle Drives, Recent developments in battery technology for automobile applications, Modeling, Simulation, and Control of Hybrid fuel cell vehicles, Advanced heating and cooling systems for hybrid fuel cell vehicles. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Babir, Frano., "PEM FUEL CELLS: Theory and Practice", Elsevier Academic Press, USA, 2005. 2. Viswanathan, B. and Scibioh, Aulice. M., "Fuel cells: Principles and Applications", University Press, 2006. 3. Mench,M. M., “Fuel cells Engines”, John Wiley and Sons, 2008. 4. Ehsani, Mehrdad., Gao,Yimin., Gay,Sebastien. E. and Emadi,Ali., "Modem Electric, Hybrid Electric and Fuel cell Vehicles", Fundamental, Theory and design “, CRS Press, 2004.

18AE39 AERODYNAMICS OF ROAD VEHICLES 3003 INTRODUCTION: Scope, historical developments, fundamentals of fluid mechanics, flow phenomenon related to vehicles, external and Internal flow problem, resistance to vehicle motion, performance, fuel consumption and performance potential of vehicle aerodynamics, engine cooling requirement, air flow to passenger compartment, duct for air conditioning, cooling of transverse engine and rear engine. (12) AERODYNAMIC DRAG OF CARS: Cars as a bluff body, flow field around car, drag force, types of drag force, analysis of aerodynamic drag, drag coefficient of cars, strategies for aerodynamic development, low drag profiles. Front end modification, front and rear wind shield angle, boat tailing, hatch back, fast back and square back, dust flow patterns at the rear, effects of gap configuration, effect of fasteners. (11) VEHICLE HANDLING: Origin of forces and moments on a vehicle, lateral stability problems, methods to calculate forces and moments – vehicle dynamics under side winds, the effects of forces and moments, characteristics of forces and moments, dirt accumulation on the vehicle, wind noise, drag reduction in commercial vehicles. (11) WIND TUNNELS FOR AUTOMOTIVE AERODYNAMICS: Introduction, principle of wind tunnel technology, limitation of simulation, stress with scale models, full scale wind tunnels, measurement techniques, equipment and transducers, road testing methods, numerical methods. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Hucho, W. H., “Aerodynamic of Road vehicles ", Butterworth Co. Ltd., 2003. 2. “Vehicle Aerodynamic”, SP-1145, SAE 2006. 3. Pope, A., “Wind Tunnel Testing ", John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2001 4. “Automotive Aerodynamics: Update SP-706”, SAE, 2004.

OTHER ELECTIVES 18AE40 SPECIAL VEHICLES 3003 TRACTORS AND GRADERS: Tractors - General description, specification and functions, light, medium and heavy wheeled tractors, crawler tracks mounted / wheeled - Bull dozers, tilt dozers and angle dozers, front end loaders, factors affecting efficiency of output of tractors, simple problems, merits and demerits.Graders -Description, specification of tractor towed

35

59th ACM

09.06.2018

graders and motor graders, classification and functions of graders, functional details of spreading, mixing, ditching, bank sloping, snow removal, stripping, scarifying, and finishing, elementary details of transmission system (coupling, clutches, gear box, driving axles, propeller shafts), running gear and operating equipment air braking system; hydraulic system and its components, steering system of lights, medium and heavy graders, merits and limitations of graders. (12) ROOTERS, SCARIFIERS AND SCRAPERS: General description, specification and functions, tractor towed rooters and scarifiers - Heavy duty, light duty. General description, specification and functions, tractor towed and motorized scrapers, scraper work in cutting, cambering, side hill cutting, spreading on embankments, compaction of fill merits and demerits. (10) CRANES, EXCAVATORS AND COMPACTION VEHICLES: General description, specifications and functions, excavator mounted cranes, mobile cranes with strut and cantilever type jibs, tractor towed and tractor mounted cranes. General description, specification and functions, classification based on attachments, face shovel, drag shovel, hoe, drag-line and grab or clam shell, advantages and limitations, Compaction Vehicles -: General description, specification and functions, smooth wheeled rollers, pneumatic tired rollers, agricultural Rollers, sheep’s foot rollers, vibrating compactors. (13) HAULAGE VEHICLES AND LIFT TRUCKS: General description, specification and functions, self-propelled and tractor towed haulage vehicles and pneumatic – tires, dumpers – front tipping; trucks – rear tipping, tractor towed semi-trailers and trailers (rear and side tipping, bottom dumping). General description, specification and functions, fork lift trucks, alternative front-end equipment (attachments) – Jib arm, shovel bucket, squeeze clamp, boom, fork extensions, barrel forks. Scissors lift trucks Applications in industry, advantages and disadvantages. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Peurifoy, R.L., “Construction Planning, Equipment and Methods”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2002. 2. Graham,Ian., “Off-Road vehicles”, Heinemann Library, 2008. 3. Wong, J. “Terramechanics and Off-Road Vehicle Engineering”, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2009. 4. Roninson,E.G., “Motor Graders”, MIR Publications, Moscow, 2005.

18AE41 VEHICLE TESTING 3003 RIDE, VIBRATION AND BODY TEST: Vibration measurement instrument – accelerometer and signal conditioning, graphical presentation. Dynamic simulation sled testing, methodology, vehicle acceleration measurement and documentation. Dolly roll over test, dolly role over fixture, photographic / video coverage, instrumentation. Vehicle roof strength test – test procedure and test measurements. Door system crush test –procedure and measurements- wind tunnel selection and Reynolds number capability, model requirements, model details, model mounting, test procedure. (11) SUSPENSION AND STABILITY FOR DIRECTIONAL CONTROL: Measurement of dimensional and geometric characteristics, measurement of centre of gravity position, measurement of moments and products of inertia, measurement of suspension kinematic characteristics, measurement of suspension elastic and coulomb friction characteristics, measurement of shock absorber characteristics. (11) STEERING AND BRAKING SYSTEM TESTING: Analysis of constant radius test, constant steer angle test, constant speed variable radius test, constant speed variable steer angle test, response gain test. Dynamic cornering fatigue, dynamic radial fatigue tests – procedure, bending moment and radial load calculations. Impact test – road hazard impact test for wheel and tyre assemblies, test procedures, failure criteria and performance criteria. Bumpers - types of tests, pendulum test, fixed collision barrier test, procedure, performance criteria. Air and hydraulic brake test, air brake actuator, valves test, performance requirements. (11) VEHICLE SIMULATION AND TESTING: Fault insertion testing in system model - brake fluid leakage test in from single to all wheels – steering – vehicle in loop testing – braking test on split  conditions. Traction loss and roll instability simulation. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Crouse, W. H. and Anglin, D. L., “Automotive Mechanics”’ Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, 2004. 2. Rangan, Mani and Sharma, “Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishers, New Delhi, 2004. 3. “SAE Hand book, Vol. 3”, SAE Publications, 2009 4. Stockel, M. W., “Auto Mechanics Fundamentals”, Good Heart-Wilcox Co., Inc., 2008

18AE42 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES 3003 Network Analysis: Maximal flow problems-Shortest Route Problems-Minimal Spanning Tree Problems-Minimum Cost Capacitated Flow problem- PERT and CPM including crashing. (10) Advanced Topics in Linear Programming: Revised Simplex Method- Integer programming- Traveling salesman problemGoal programming. (10) Dynamic Programming: Concepts-Mathematics description- Deterministic Dynamic Programming (Examples: Facilities selection problem, Cutting stock problem, Inventory control problem) Problems-Nonlinear Programming problem- FormulationSolution Methodology- Problem (Curse) of Dimensionality in Multi State Variables Problem. (12)

36

59th ACM

09.06.2018

Nonlinear Programming (Unconstrained and Equality, inequality Constraints): Basic Concepts-Taylor’s Series expansions- Fibonacci and Golden Section search- Hooks and Jeeves search- Gradient Methods with equality constraints.Khun concept- Khun Tucker conditions- Quadratic Programming-Complementary Algorithm- Separable Programming- Concept of non-derivative search techniques: GA, SAA & TS. (13) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Taha,Hamdy. A., “Operations Research- An Introduction”, MacMillan Co., Seventh Edition 2003. 2. Ravindran,A., Phillips,Don.T., and Solberg,James. J., “Operations Research- Principles and Practice”, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, Copy right 2011. 3. Srinath, L.S., “PERT and CPM Principles and Applications”, Affiliated East West Press Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2005. 4. King, J.R., “Production Planning and Control”, Pergamon Press Oxford, 2009

18AE43 AUTOMOTIVE PLM 3003 MOTIVATION AND INTRODUCTION: e-commerce, B to B, B to C forms of business, extended enterprise, concepts in PDM product life cycle, business objects, work flows, versions, views, product structure, change processes, work list, information flow model in product development, engineering bill of materials and manufacturing bill of materials. (12) COMPONENTS OF PLM SOLUTIONS: Object oriented approach in product development solutions, phase gate process in product design - disparate databases and connectivity, use of EAI technology (middleware) - cases for preparation of combined BOM and other reports. Component supplier management and sourcing. (11) PRODUCT VISUALISATION: CAD neutral environment and visualization of products, standard softwares, use of visualization in several stages of lifecycle, reviews, mark up - case studies. Role of PLM in industries: (like auto, aero, electronic) - other possible sectors, ten step approachto PLM, benefits of PLM. (11) Details of Module:Details of modules in a PDM/PLM software, basics on customization and implementation of automotive PDM/PLM software. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Wang,Lihui. and Andrew, Y. C. N., “Collaborative Design and Planning for Digital Manufacturing”, Springer-Verlag London Limited, 2009. 2. Stark,John., “Global Product: Strategy, Product Lifecycle Management and the Billion Customer Question”, Springer Publisher, 2007. 3. Grieves,Michael., “Product Life Cycle Management”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006. 4. Stark,John., “Product Lifecycle Management: 21 Century Paradigm for Product Realization”, Springer Publisher, 2005.

18AE44 AUTOMOTIVE ERGONOMICS 3003 INTRODUCTION: Definition, human technological system, multidisciplinary engineering approach, human – machine system, manual, mechanical, automated system, human system reliability, conceptual design, advanced development, detailed design and development, human system modeling. INPUT: Input and processing, text, graphics, symbols, codes, visual display of dynamic information, auditory, tactual, displays, speech communications. biomechanics, biothermodynamics and bioenergetics. (12) VEHICLE ERGONOMICS: Introduction, seating dimensions, interior ergonomics, ergonomics system design, seat comfort, suspension seats, split frame seating, back passion reducers, dash board instruments, electronic displays, commercial vehicle cabin ergonomics, mechanical package layout, goods vehicle layout. (11) ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: Illumination, heat ventilation and air conditioning, noise, motion, speed and acceleration, sound, vibration. (11) HUMAN FACTORS APPLICATIONS: Human error, accidents, human factors and the automobile, organizational and social aspects, steps according to ISO/DIS6385, OSHA’s approach, virtual environments. SAFETY: Seat belt, air bag, collapsible steering, warning systems, ABS braking system, collision safety systems, global safety standards in automotive applications. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Bridger, R. S., “Introduction to Ergonomics”, Taylor and Francis, London, 2003. 2. Phillips,Chandler. Allen., “Human Factors Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2000. 3. Helandar,Martin., “A Guide to Ergonomics of Manufacturing”, Taylor and Francis, 2006. 4. Mark, S. S., “Human Factors in Engineering and Design”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2001.

37

59th ACM

09.06.2018 ELECTIVE LABORATORY COURSES 18AE53 AUTOMOTIVE STYLING AND DESIGN LABORATORY 0021

Description: In this practical course students will be provided with a comprehensive practical exposure to Automotive Styling and Design Laboratory and their functionalities using the following experiments. After this, students are expected to formulate and complete an activity of industrial relevance. The details like background, problem definition, state of technology/knowledge in that area are to be arrived based on a good literature review (5 latest papers). Results from the experiments and their interpretation with respect to the assumptions/background and a formal conclusion are expected in the report which is to be submitted at the end of the semester. The work is evaluated for the credit assigned. Expected hours needed for this work is 20 hours. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Automotive sketching Automotive packaging design Automotive class A modeling Automotive Exterior design Automotive Interior design Total P: 30

REFERENCE: 1. Manual prepared by the Department of Automobile Engineering, 2015.

15AE54 AUTOMOTIVE EMBEDDED SYSTEMS LABORATORY 0021 Description: In this practical course students will be provided with a comprehensive practical exposure to Automotive Embedded Systems Laboratory and their functionalities using the following experiments. After this, students are expected to formulate and complete an activity of industrial relevance. The details like background, problem definition, state of technology/knowledge in that area are to be arrived based on a good literature review (5 latest papers). Results from the experiments and their interpretation with respect to the assumptions/background and a formal conclusion are expected in the report which is to be submitted at the end of the semester. The work is evaluated for the credit assigned. Expected hours needed for this work is 20 hours. 1. Study of an Integrated Development Environment 2. Simulation of Automotive Sensors and Actuators 3. Interfacing of Sensors and Actuators 4. Code conversion and Waveform (square and rectangle) generation 5. Simulation of automotive lighting system. Total P: 30 REFERENCE: 1. Manual prepared by the Department of Automobile Engineering, 2015.

18AE55 MODELING AND SIMULATION LABORATORY 0021 Description: In this practical course students will be provided with a comprehensive practical exposure to Modelling and Simulation Laboratory and their functionalities using the following experiments. After this, students are expected to formulate and complete an activity of industrial relevance. The details like background, problem definition, state of technology/knowledge in that area are to be arrived based on a good literature review (5 latest papers). Results from the experiments and their interpretation with respect to the assumptions/background and a formal conclusion are expected in the report which is to be submitted at the end of the semester. The work is evaluated for the credit assigned. Expected hours needed for this work is 20 hours. Experiments: 1.Tire characteristics modeling usingPacejaka’s Magic formula 2. Quarter Car suspension system modeling 3. Dynamics of a Simple Steering System Model 4. Double Wishbone Suspension Kinematic Analysis 5. Nonlinear Damper Characteristics simulation 6. Piston speed and acceleration simulation 7. Simulation of engine kinematic forces 8. Simplified model for Four cylinder CI engine torque 9. Simplified model for Four cylinder SI engine torque 10. Roll centre variation simulation Total P: 30 REFERENCE: 1. PSG Tech Lab Manual. 2. Crolla, David. and Masahadi,Behrooz.,”Vehicle Power train systems”,John Wiley and sons Publication -2012 .

38

59th ACM 3.

09.06.2018

Rill, Georg.,“Road Vehicle dynamics -Fundamentals and Modeling”, CRC Press_2013.

One Credit Courses 18AK01 Model Based Development

1001 Introduction- Automotive system modeling using simulink – Control system modeling using Stateflowvalidation of models-Functional and implementation models –AUTOSAR-Autocode generation.

verification and (15)

Total L: 15 References: 1. Kugele,Stefan. M. ,”Model-based Development of Software-intensive Automotive Systems”,Springer , 2012. 2. Navet,Nicolas. andSimonot-Lion,Francoise.,”Automotive Embedded Systems Handbook”, CRC press 2014. 3. Zander,Justyna., Schieferdecker,Ina. andMosterman,Pieter. J.,”Model-Based Testing for Embedded Systems”, CRC press 2011.

18AK02 Robotics

1001 Introduction-components- types and classification of robots - representation of joints and links using D-H parameters- direct and inverse kinematics of manipulators - examples of kinematics of some common manipulator configurations- Purpose and types of sensors, displacement sensors, velocity sensors, force sensors and vision, necessity of actuators, different kinds of actuators – stepper motors, DC servo and brushless motors, programming of robots. (15) Total L: 15 References: 1. Morecki, Adam. and Knapczyk, Jozef.,”Theory and Components of Manipulators and Robots”, Springer ,2011. 2. Dinwiddie, Keith.,“Basic Robotics”, Cengage learning ,2009.

18AK03 Integrated Development Environment (IDE) Fundamentals of KEIL – basics programming ant interfacing with hardware . Fundamentals of Code Warrior programming ant interfacing with hardware.

– basics (15) Total L: 15

Reference : Manual prepared by Automobile Engineering Department.

18AK04 Driveline Matching for Special purpose vehicles Off- Road Vehicle : Performance requirements- selection of engine and tyres- driveline matching and the parameters affecting the same. (8) Motor sports Vehicle : Performance requirements- selection of engine and tyres- driveline matching and the parameters affecting the same. (7) Total L: 15 Reference : Manual prepared by Automobile Engineering Department.

AUDIT COURSES 18AE81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP81

18AE82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP82

39

59th ACM

09.06.2018

13. ME – STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING – 2018 Regulations Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment (2018 REGULATIONS) (Minimum No. of credits to be earned:72*) Hours/Week Maximum Marks CAT Course Course Title Credits Code Lecture Tutorial Practical CA FE Total I SEMESTER 18CS01 Applied Statistics and Reliability 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC 18CS02 Advanced Concrete Technology 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC 18CS03 Reinforced Concrete Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC 18CS04 Computer Analysis of Structures 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC 18CS05 Foundation Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC 18CS51 Structural Engineering Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC 18CS81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC Total 22 Hrs 14 4 4 18 300 300 600 II SEMESTER 18CS06 Structural Dynamics 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC 18CS07 Applied Elasticity and Plasticity 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC 18CS08 Structural Steel Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC 18CS09 Prestressed Concrete Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC 18CS_ Professional Elective 1 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS_ Professional Elective 2 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS52 Symbolic and Numerical Computation Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC 18CS61 Industry Visit and Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 EEC 18CS82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC Total 28 Hrs 18 2 8 23 400 400 800 III SEMESTER 18CS_ Professional Elective 3 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS_ Professional Elective 4 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS_ Professional Elective 5 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS_ Professional Elective 6 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS53 Computer Aided Structural Analysis and Design PC 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 Laboratory 18CS71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 EEC Total 22 Hrs 12 0 10 17 300 300 600 IV SEMESTER 18CS72 Project Work II 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 EEC Total 28 Hrs 0 14 50 50 100 0 0 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES (Six to be opted) 18CS21 Bridge Engineering 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS22 Finite Element Method 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS23 Aseismic Design of Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS24 Behaviour and Design of Tall Buildings 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS25 Structural Stability 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS26 Optimization Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS27 Maintenance and Rehabilitation of Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS28 Shell and Spatial Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS29 Experimental Techniques and Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS30 Soil Structure Interaction 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS31 Theory of Plates 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS32 Industrial Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS33 Mechanics of Composite Materials 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS34 Soft Computing In Structural Engineering 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS35 Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS36 Design of Steel Concrete Composite Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS37 Prefabricated Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS38 Ground Improvement Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS39 Smart Materials and Smart Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS40 Structural Health Monitoring 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE * Indicated is the minimum number of credits to be earned by a student. ** - 60 hrs in I semester and 90 hrs in II semester; Grade: Completed / Not Completed CAT – Category; PC – Professional Core; PE - Professional Elective EEC – Employability Enhancement Course; MC- Mandatory Course

40

59th ACM

09.06.2018

ME (PART TIME) – STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING – 2018 Regulations Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment (2018 REGULATIONS) (Minimum No. of credits to be earned: 72*) Hours/Week Maximum Marks CAT Course Course Title Credits Code Lecture Tutorial Practical CA FE Total I SEMESTER 18CS01 Applied Statistics and Reliability 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC 18CS02 Advanced Concrete Technology 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC 18CS03 Reinforced concrete Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC 18CS51 Structural Engineering Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC 18CS81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC Total 14 Hrs 8 4 11 200 200 400 2 II SEMESTER 18CS04 Computer Analysis of Structures 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC 18CS05 Structural Steel Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC 18CS06 Structural Dynamics 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC 18CS61 Industry Visit & Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 EEC 18CS82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC Total 17 Hrs 9 4 4 13 200 200 400 III SEMESTER 18CS07 Applied Elasticity and Plasticity 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC 18CS08 Foundation Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC 18CS53 Computer Aided Structural Analysis and Design 0 0 PC 4 2 50 50 100 Laboratory 18CS52 Symbolic and Numerical Computation Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC Total 14 Hrs 6 0 8 10 200 200 400 IV SEMESTER 18CS09 Prestressed Concrete Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC 18CS_ Professional Elective 1 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS_ Professional Elective 2 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS_ Professional Elective 3 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE Total 12 Hrs 12 0 0 12 200 200 400 V SEMESTER 18CS_ Professional Elective 4 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS_ Professional Elective 5 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS_ Professional Elective 6 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 EEC Total 15 Hrs 9 6 12 200 200 400 VI SEMESTER 18CS72 Project Work II 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 EEC Total 28 Hrs 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES (Six to be opted) 18CS21 Bridge Engineering 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS22 Finite Element Method 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS23 Aseismic Design of Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS24 Behaviour and Design of Tall Buildings 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS25 Structural Stability 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS26 Optimization Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS27 Maintenance and Rehabilitation of Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS28 Shell and Spatial Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS29 Experimental Techniques and Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS30 Soil Structure Interaction 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS31 Theory of Plates 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS32 Industrial Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS33 Mechanics of Composite Materials 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS34 Soft Computing In Structural Engineering 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS35 Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS36 Design of Steel Concrete Composite Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS37 Prefabricated Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS38 Ground Improvement Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS39 Smart Materials and Smart Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18CS40 Structural Health Monitoring 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE * Indicated is the minimum number of credits to be earned by a student. ** - 60 hrs in I semester and 90 hrs in II semester; Grade: Completed / Not Completed

41

59th ACM

09.06.2018

CAT – Category; PC – Professional Core; PE - Professional Elective EEC – Employability Enhancement Course; MC- Mandatory Course

I SEMESTER 18CS01/18CN01 APPLIED STATISTICS AND RELIABILITY 2203 REGRESSION AND CORRELATION: Curve fitting, method of least squares - inferences based on the least squares estimator correlation - curvilinear regression - multiple regression. (8+7) STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL: Statistical process control – chance and assignable causes of quality variation, statistical basis of control charts - control charts for variables - , R and s charts - control charts for attributes – p, np ,c and u charts. (8+7) ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING: Lot-by-Lot acceptance sampling for attributes – single sampling plans for attributes, double, multiple and sequential sampling plans, acceptance sampling by variables - chain sampling, continuous sampling , skip-lot sampling plans. (8+7) RELIABILITY: Failure distribution - reliability function, mean time to failure, hazard rate function, bathtub curve, conditional reliability, constant failure rate model – exponential reliability function, failure models, time dependent failure models - Weibull and normal distributions - serial configuration, parallel configuration, combined series parallel systems, system structure function, minimal cuts and minimal paths, state dependent systems . (8+7) Total L:32 + T:28 = 60 REFERENCES: 1. Richard A Johnson, Irwin Miller and John Freund‟s, “Probability and Statistics for Engineers”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2018. 2. Charles E Ebeling, “An Introduction to Reliability and Maintainability Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2017. 3. Eugene L Grant, Richard S Leavenworth, “Statistical Quality Control”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2016. 4. Trivedi K S, “Probability and Statistics with Reliability, Queueing and Computer Science Applications”, John Wiley & Sons, New Delhi, 2016. 5. Douglas C Montgomery, “Introduction to Statistical Quality Control”, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2009.

18CS02/18CN05 ADVANCED CONCRETE TECHNOLOGY 3003 CONSTITUENTS OF CONCRETE: Composition and properties of Portland cement –hydration of cement – structure of hydrated cement paste-gel theories –Effect of cement characteristics on strength and heat of hydration- physical properties – acceptance criteria – types of cements and applications – aggregates – fine aggregate characteristics and significance – mechanical properties of coarse aggregates – acceptance criteria – influence of aggregate properties on strength of concrete- alkali-aggregate reaction – grading requirements. (11) PROPERTIES OF CONCRETE: Microstructure of concrete – nanometer scale –C-S-H structure – transition zone and micro cracking -Workability - Factors affecting workability - Tests for workability -segregation - bleeding - Modern trends in concrete production , placement, compaction and curing –- Vacuum dewatering and underwater concreting – special formwork - Factors affecting strength of concrete - Maturity of concrete – Rheological properties of concrete - Shrinkage - Creep of concrete - Factors affecting creep and shrinkage of concrete – Compression, Split Tension, Flexure ,Bond strength - IS code provisions - Factors affecting strength test results - Accelerated strength tests - Stress strain characteristics - Determination of modulus of elasticity – Non-destructive evaluation of reinforced concrete– load test on structural components . (12) DURABILITY ASPECTS AND MIX DESIGN: Permeability-causes of concrete deterioration- Chemical attack - Sulphate attack Quality of water - Marine environment – effect of fire- frost action- thermal properties of concrete - fire resistance and corrosion protection - Methods to improve durability- Mix design- Basic considerations – frequency of sampling – nominal and design mixes – quality control and acceptance criteria -Factors in the choice of mix proportions - Mix design methods - ACI method, IS method - Mix proportions for weigh batching and volume batching - correction for moisture content and bulking - yield of concrete – design of high strength concrete (Shacklok and Entroy) (11) ADMIXTURES AND SPECIAL CONCRETES : Classification of admixtures- uses of chemical and mineral admixtures-influences of admixtures on properties of concrete- Light weight concrete - Fibre reinforced concrete - Polymer concrete - High Performance Concrete and future trends– Pumpable concrete – Self compacting concrete- tests for key properties and aspects of mix designpreplaced concrete – smart concrete – geo polymer concrete – concrete using industrial, agro and construction & demolition waste materials – sprayed concrete- reactive powder concrete – ready mixed concrete – high toughness and ductile concrete -concrete composites. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Neville A M and Brooks J J, “Concrete Technology”, Pearson Education Asia Pvt. Ltd, 2013. 2. Mehta P K, Pauls J M and Monteiro, “Concrete: Micro Structure, Properties and Materials”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private limited, NewDelhi, 2006. 3. Zongjin Li, “Advanced Concrete Technology”, John-Wiley & Sons inc, New York, 2012. 4. Jayant D Bapat, “Mineral Admixtures in Cement and Concrete”, CRC Press, New Delhi, 2013. 5. Malhotra V M and Carino N J, “Handbook on Non-destructive Testing of Concrete”, CRC Press, 2014.

42

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18CS03/18CN03 REINFORCED CONCRETE DESIGN 3003

DESIGN OF SPECIAL RC ELEMENTS: Design of slender columns - design of shear walls - Design of corbels and deep beams Tie and strut model - arch analogy – design of gird floors. (11) FLAT SLABS AND DESIGN OF CHIMNEYS: Design of flat slabs and flat plates according to IS and ACI method. Design for shear reinforcement and spandrel beams: Design of RC chimneys for combined effect of self load, wind load and temperature. (11) BUNKERS AND SILOS: Introduction – Janssen‟s theory, Airy‟s theory – Design of bunkers and silos.

(11)

INELASTIC BEHAVIOUR OF CONCRETE BEAMS AND SLABS: Principles of moment - rotation curves, moment redistribution and Baker's method of plastic design – yield line theory of slabs RC members for fire resistance and ductile detailing: Introduction – Classification – Effects of high temperature on steel and concrete - Effects of high temperature on different structural members – Structural detailing – Ultimate moment capacity Ductile Detailing: Concepts of ductility – factors influencing ductility – design principles and codal provisions – beam to column junction. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Punmia B.C, Ashok Kumar Jain and Arun Kumar Jain”Limit state design of reinforced concrete”,Laxmi Publications ,New Delhi 2016 2. Gamphir M L, “Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures”, PHI Learning Private Ltd., NewDelhi 2011. 3. Varghese P C, "Advanced Reinforced Concrete", Prentice-Hall of India Ltd., New Delhi, 2009. 4. Varghese P C, "Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete", Prentice-Hall of India Ltd., New Delhi, 2008. 5. McGregar G J and James K Wight, “Reinforced Concrete Mechanics and Design”, INC Pub., 2006. 6. Krishna Raju N and Pranesh R N, "Advanced Reinforced Concrete Design", New Age International Publishers, New Delhi, 2005.

18CS04/18CN04 COMPUTER ANALYSIS OF STRUCTURES 3204 FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS: Introduction – Forces and Displacement Measurements – Principle of superposition – Methods of Structural Analysis – Stiffness and Flexibility matrices of the Elements – Springs system- Strain energy – Betti‟s Law and its applications - Transformation of system force to element forces – Element flexibility to System flexibility – system displacement to element displacement – Element flexibility to System flexibility - Transformation of forces and displacement in general – Normal and orthogonal transformation. (11+6) FLEXIBILITY METHOD: Choice of redundants – ill and well conditioned equations – Automatic choice of redundants – Rank technique– Flexibility method – Flexibility analysis due to loads, settlement of supports, Lack of fit and Thermal expansion– Application to pin jointed plane truss – continuous beams - frames and grids - Transformation of one set of redundants to another set. (11+8) STIFFNESS METHOD: Development of stiffness method – Difference between flexibility and stiffness – stiffness analysis due to Loads, thermal expansion, lack of fit – Application to pin-jointed plane and space trusses – Continuous beams – frames and grids – Space frames. (11+8) SPECIAL TOPICS: Static condensation Technique – Substructure Technique – Symmetry & Anti symmetry of structures – Reanalysis Technique - Direct stiffness approach – Application to two and three dimensional pin-jointed trusses - plane frames – Grids. (12+8) Total L: 45 + T: 30 REFERENCES: 1. Madhu B Kanchi, “Matrix Methods of Structural Analysis”, New Age International, New Delhi, 2016. 2. Godbole P N, Sonparote R S and Dhote S U, “Matrix Methods of Structural Analysis”, PHI, New Delhi, 2014. 3. Nelsm J K, Nelson K James and Mc Cormac J C, “Structural Analysis Using Classical and Matrix Methods”, John Wiley & Sons, 2002. 4. Mcguire and Gallagher R H, “Matrix Structural Analysis”, John Wiley, 2001. 5. Rajasekaran S and Sankarasubramanian G, “Computational Structural Mechanics”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2001.

18CS05/18CN23 FOUNDATION STRUCTURES 3003 CHOICE AND SIZING OF SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS AND STRUCTURAL DESIGN OF PILES INCLUDING PILE CAP: Choice of shallow foundations for different situations – Proportioning of foundations for equal settlement, Sizing of foundations based on bearing capacity – strip, isolated, combined and strap footing - Provisions of IS 2911 (Part 1 and Part 3) on structural design of piles - Structural design of straight and underreamed piles including grade beam - Different shapes of pile cap - Structural design of pile cap. (13) WELL FOUNDATIONS: Different types based on shape in plan – Grip length – Load carrying capacity based on SPT results – Thickness of steining and bottom plug – Forces acting on the well – Stability of well subjected to lateral load by Terzaghi‟s approach – Methods to rectify tilt of well foundation. (9) SHEET PILE WALL AND ANCHORED BULKHEADS: Different types of sheet pile – Cantilever sheet pile wall in granular soils, in cohesive soils with granular backfill – Anchored bulkhead- Free earth and Fixed earth support methods – in cohesive soils, in cohesive soil with cohesionless backfill . (10)

43

59th ACM

09.06.2018

INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN OF MACHINE FOUNDATIONS AND SOIL-STRUCTURE INTERACTION PROBLEMS: Fundamentals of soil dynamics – Determination of dynamic properties of soil based on Block Vibration Test and Cyclic plate load test – Barkan‟s method of design of block foundation subjected to vertical vibrations – Vibration Isolation – Transmissibility – Methods of Isolation - Modulus of subgrade reaction – Winkler model – Analysis of infinite beams resting on elastic medium and subjected to point load, uniformly distributed load and moment. (13) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Kurian K P, “Design of Foundation Systems”, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 2014. 2. Varghese P C, “Foundation Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Ltd., New Delhi, 2013. 3. Bowles J E, “Foundation Analysis and Design”, McGraw-Hill International Editions, 2013. 4. Selvadurai A P S, “Elastic Analysis of Soil Foundation Interaction”, Elsevier, 1979.

18CS51/18CN51 STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY 0042 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Study on properties of concrete ingredients – concrete mix design Tests on fresh and hardened concrete Study on structural behaviour of RC beams and RC columns Study on structural behavior of steel beams Study on accelerated curing of concrete, RCPT, permeability of mortar and concrete Study on Non destructive tests – Rebound hammer, Ultrasonic Pulse velocity

Students should conduct selected quality control tests on aggregates and cement, design concrete mix, cast RCC Beam & Column, calculate the theoretical load and conduct experiment on the RCC specimens, steel beam, measure load, deformation and strain, plot load deformation curve, moment curvature relationship and discuss. Students should also study the strength and ductility characteristics of concrete by conducting experiments. Total P: 60

II SEMESTER 18CS06 STRUCTURAL DYNAMICS 3204 SINGLE DEGREE OF FREEDOM SYSTEM: Introduction - vibration studies and their importance to structural engineering problems - elements of vibratory systems - simple harmonic motion - vibration with and without damping - constraints - generalized mass D`Alembert's principle - Hamilton's principle - degree of freedom - equation of motion for single degree of freedom (SDOF) system damped and undamped free vibrations - undamped forced vibration - critical damping - logarithmic decrement - response to support motion - response of SDOF system to harmonic excitation damped or undamped - evaluation of damping resonance - band width method to evaluate damping - force transmitted to foundation - vibration isolation. (12+8) RESPONSE TO GENERAL DYNAMIC LOADING: Fourier series expression for loading - response to general dynamic loading (blast or earthquake) - Duhamel's integral. Numerical Evaluation: Newmark‟s method - Wilson θ method – recurrence formula. GSDOF system: Expression for generalised system properties - vibrational analysis with Rayleigh's variational method – RayleighRitz method. (11+8) MULTIDEGREE FREEDOM SYSTEM: Response to free and forced vibration of undamped and damped systems – application of Hamilton‟s principle - Lagrange equations coupling - evaluation of structural property matrices - natural vibration - solution of the eigen value problem - iteration due to Stodola - Holzer method - Transfer matrix method - Rayleigh - Ritz and Dunkerley approximation - orthogonality and normality principles of natural modes. (12+8) DISTRIBUTED PARAMETER SYSTEM: Differential equation of motion - analysis of undamped free vibration of simply supported and cantilever beams - effect of axial loads - numerical evaluation of modes - frequencies and response system - vibration analysis using finite element method for beams and frames. Idealisation of multi-storied frames for dynamic analysis- modal analysis - time history analysis - wind induced vibration of structures - moving load, impact & blast loading. (10+6) Total L: 45+T: 30 REFERENCES: 1. Anil K Chopra, "Dynamics of Structures - Theory and Applications to Earthquake Engineering", Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2014. 2. Paz M, “Structural Dynamics - Theory and Computation", Springer, 2007. 3. Craig R R, "Structural Dynamics - An Introduction to Computer Methods", John Wiley & Sons, 2006. 4. Clough R W and Penzien, "Dynamics of Structures", McGraw Hill Book Co. Ltd, 2003. 5. Thomson W T, "Theory of Vibration", Prentice Hall of India, 2003.

18CS07 APPLIED ELASTICITY AND PLASTICITY 3003 ANALYSIS OF STRESS, STRAIN, STRESS STRAIN RELATIONS FORMULATION OF PROBLEMS: Analysis of stress (two and three dimensions) - Body force, surface forces and stresses, uniform state of stress - principal stresses - stress transformation laws - Differential equations of equilibrium. Analysis of Strain (two and three dimensions) - strain and displacement relation - compatibility equations - state of strain at a point - strain transformations - principle of superposition. - stress strain relation - generalised Hooke's law - Lame's constants- Formulation of Problems - Methods of Formulation - Equilibrium equations in terms of displacements Compatibility equations in terms of stresses - boundary value problems (11) TWO DIMENSIONAL PROBLEMS IN CARTESIAN COORDINATES: Plane Stress problem, Plane Strain Problem – Formulation-

44

59th ACM

09.06.2018

Boundary condition - examples - Airy's stress function - polynomials - Direct method of determining Airy's stress functions - solution of Bi-harmonic equation - St.Venant`s principle - Two dimensional problems in Cartesian co-ordinates - bending of a cantilever loaded at end. (11) TWO DIMENSIONAL PROBLEMS IN POLAR COORDINATES & TORSION OF CYLINDRICAL BARS: General equations in polar co-ordinates - stress distribution symmetrical about an axis - pure bending of curved bars - strain components in polar co-ordinates displacements for symmetrical stress distribution - bending of a curved bar - effect of a circular hole on stress distribution – Thick cylinder - Forces on wedges - a circular disk with diametric loading - Torsion of prismatic bars - General solution of the problem by displacement (warping function) and force (Prandtl`s stress function) approaches-Torsion of shafts of circular and non circular (elliptic, triangular and rectangular) cross sectional shapes only-Torsion of thin rectangular section and hollow thin-walled sections. (12) INTRODUCTION TO PLASTICITY & ELASTO PLASTIC PROBLEMS: Introduction to stress strain curve - ideal plastic body criterion of yielding - Rankine`s theory - St.Venant`s theory - Tresca criterion - Beltrami`s theory - Von Mises criterion - Mohr`s theory of yielding - yield surface - Flow rule (plastic stress - strain of relation) - Prandtl Reuss equations - Plastic work - stress strain relation based on Tresca - Plastic potential- Elastic plastic problems of beams in bending- thick hollow spheres and cylinders subjected to internal pressure - General relation - plastic torsion - perfect plasticity - bar of circular cross sections - Nadai`s sand heap analogy - Failure criteria and fracture - fracture toughness – stress intensity factor. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Sadhu Singh, "Theory of Elasticity", Khanna Publications, NewDelhi, 2000. 2. Timoshenko S and Goodier J N, "Theory of Elasticity", McGraw Hill Book Co., 1988. 3. Chen WP and Henry D J, "Plasticity for Structural Engineers", Springer Verlag, New York, 1988. 4. Chakrabarty, “Theory of Plasticity”, McGraw Hill Book Co., 1987. 5. Mendelson A, "Plasticity:Theory & Applications", Macmillan Co., New York, 1968. 6. Chow PC and Pagono NJ, "Elasticity Tensor Dynamic and Engg. Approaches", DVan Nostrand Co., Inc., 1967.

18CS08/18CN24 STRUCTURAL STEEL DESIGN 3003 CONNECTIONS & TENSION MEMBERS: Concept of design methodologies -Philosophies of Limit State Design, Working stress design, LRFD, Welded and bolted connections – framed connection – seated connection – moment resistant connection Introduction of Tension members – net sectional area for concentrically and eccentrically loaded members – tension splices bending of tension members – stress concentrations. (12) COMPRESSION MEMBERS & LOCAL BUCKLING OF THIN PLATE ELEMENTS: Introduction – practical end conditions and effective length factors – elastic compression members – restrained compression members – torsional buckling - built up compression members with lacings and battens – column splices. Plate elements in compression –shear – bending – bending and shear – bearing – design against local buckling. (11) FLEXURAL MEMBERS & BEAM – COLUMNS: Introduction – Inplane bending of beams – elastic analysis of beams – bending stresses – shear stresses – strength design – serviceability design – lateral buckling of beams – restrained beams – cantilever& over hanging beams- braced and continuous beams – mono symmetric beams – non uniform beams. Inplane behaviour of isolated beam-column – flexural torsional buckling – biaxial bending. (11) FRAMES & TORSION MEMBERS: Introduction – triangulated frames – two dimensional frames – three dimensional frames- semi rigid frames- braced frames. Uniform torsion – non uniform torsion – torsion design – torsion and bending – distorsion. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Subramanian N, “Design of Steel Structures Limit state method”, Oxford University Press, New Delhi 2016. 2. Trahair N S , Brandford M A , Nethercot D M, and Gardner L , “The Behaviour and Design of Steel Structures EC3”, Taylor and Francis, London and Newyork, 2008. 3. Englekirk R, “Steel Structures: Controlling Behaviour through Design”, John-Wiley &Sons, Inc, 2003. 4. William.T.Segui, “Design of Steel Structures”, Cengage learning,2011.

18CS09/18CN25 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE STRUCTURES 3003 ANALYSIS AND DESIGN FOR FLEXURE: Principles - types - prestressing - materials definition of Type I, Type II and Type III structures – requirements - behaviour of PSC elements - force transmitted by pretensioned and post tensioned systems- analysis service loads - methods - losses - ultimate strength-Design For Flexure And Deflection: Philosophy - limit states - concepts collapse and serviceability - service load - basic requirements - stress range approach - Lin's approach - Magnel's approach - cable layouts. Deflection - importance - short and long term deflection of uncracked and cracked members. (11) DESIGN FOR SHEAR AND TORSION: Shear and principal stresses - limit state shearing resistance of cracked and uncracked sections - design of shear reinforcement by limit state approach. Behaviour under torsion - modes of failure - design for combined torsion, shear and bending. Transfer of prestress: Transmission of prestressing force by bond in pretensioned members Transmission length - Factors affecting transmission length - check for transmission length - transverse tensile stresses - end zone reinforcement. Anchorage zone stresses in post-tensioned members - Magnel's method - Calculation of bearing stress and bursting tensile forces - code provisions - Reinforcement in anchorage zone. (11)

45

59th ACM

09.06.2018

COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION OF PRESTRESSED & INSITU CONCRETE: Need - types of composite construction - behaviour analysis for flexural stresses - shear - differential shrinkage - design for flexure and shear- Tanks And Pipes: Circular prestressing in liquid retaining tanks - analysis for stresses - design of tank wall. PSC pipes - types - design of non cylinder pipes (11) STATICALLY INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES: Methods of achieving continuity - assumptions in elastic analysis - pressure line linear transformation - concordant cables - Guyon's theorem - analysis and design of continuous beams.-Other Structures: Design of prestressed concrete columns, sleepers, poles and tension members - Methods of achieving partial prestressing - Advantages and disadvantages - use of non-prestressed reinforcement. (12) Total L : 45 REFERENCES: 1. Rajagopalan N, "Prestressed Concrete", Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 2002. 2. Krishna Raju N, "Prestressed Concrete", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi 1995. 3. Lin T Y and Ned H Burns, "Design of Prestressed Concrete Structures", John Wiley and Sons, Newyork, 1982.

18CS52 SYMBOLIC AND NUMERICAL COMPUTATION LABORATORY 0042 This laboratory is concerned with the use of symbolic computation and numerical methods to study phenomenon governed by the Principle of Mechanics. After 5 to 6 hours of introductory lectures to the use of available computer programs / packages, the students are advised to follow the list of tasks. 1. Students should make a mathematical model of a physical phenomenon. 2. Understand the assumptions made. 3. Express the natural or engineering system in terms of partial or total differential equations. 4. Mathematical equations are converted to a form suitable for digital computation. Convert partial or total differential equations to algebraic equations. 5. Computer programs are made to solve discretized equation by direct or iterative methods. 6. The mathematical model, numerical procedures and the computer code are verified with experimental results or simple methods for which exact analytical solution is available. Problems: Preliminaries – Symbolic data structures – Multi precision arithmetic – Polynomial algorithm – Solving system of equations – Mathematical function – Differentiation and Integration – Power series – Two or three dimensions Graphics – Differential equations – Curve fitting – minimization – Linear programming. Examples: 1. Free and forced vibration of damped and undamped systems. 2. Numerical methods -Newmarks – Wilson Theta methods. 3. Extracting frequencies and mode shapes. 4. Vibration of beams and strings. 5. Finite Element method. 6. Response spectrum. 7. Problems of base excitation. Total P: 60

18CS61/18CN61 INDUSTRY VISIT AND TECHNICAL SEMINAR 0042 The students will make atleast two technical presentations on current topics related to the specialization. The same will be assessed by a committee appointed by the department. The students are expected to submit a report at the end of the semester covering the various aspects of his/her presentation together with the observation in industry visits. A quiz covering the above will be held at the end of the semester. Total P: 30

III SEMESTER 18CS53 COMPUTER AIDED STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS AND DESIGN LABORATORY 0042 ANALYSIS - DISCRETISATION: Matrix methods of Structural Analysis - programs for semi automatic techniques for flexibility and stiffness approaches -- Direct Stiffness approach by MATLAB and EXCEL. STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS – Modelling – loads and load combinations – calculation of deflections – stress resultants. STRUCTURAL DESIGN: Design of RC and Steel members – concepts – design principles as per IS codes GENERAL PURPOSE PACKAGES: Analysis & Design of Steel, RC & Pre-stressed Structures using commercially available software packages. Introduction to neural network & genetic algorithm application to structural engineering problems – concepts and case studies from literature. Total P: 60

46

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18CS71 PROJECT WORK – PHASE I 0063

* * * * * *

Identification of thrust areas Developing a mathematical model for solving the above problem Finalisation of system requirements and specification Proposing different solutions for the problem based on literature survey Future trends in providing alternate solutions Consolidated report preparation of the above

IV SEMESTER 18CS72 PROJECT WORK – PHASE II 0 0 28 14 The Project work involves the following: *

Preparing a project – brief proposal including Problem Identification Methodology specifying the process/specifications/parameters List of alternate methodology if available Justification for the methodology adopted Time line of activities

*

Carrying out experimental/theoretical work as per the specified time line of activities.

*

A presentation including all the above along with final results and conclusions.

*

Consolidated report preparation.

ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES 18CS21/18CN22 BRIDGE ENGINEERING 3003 HYDRAULIC DESIGN OF BRIDGE AND SUBSTRUCTURE: Definition and components of a bridge – layout and planning of a bridge – classification – investigation of a bridge – preliminary data collection – choice and type of a bridge – hydraulic design of a bridge. Piers and abutments – bridge bearings – steel rocker and roller bearings – reinforced concrete rocker and roller bearings – elastomeric bearings. (10) REINFORCE CONCRETE BRIDGES: Traffic design – loading – highway and railway loading – specification- Straight and curved bridge decks – decks of various types – slab hollow and voided slab – beam – slab box – reinforced concrete slab bridges – load distribution – Pigeaud‟s theory – skew slab deck – RC tee beam and slab bridge – Balanced Cantilever bridge – rigid frame bridge – box girder bridge. (13) PRESTRESSED CONCRETE AND STEEL BRIDGES: Pre-stressed concrete bridge – Composite beam bridge– Analysis and Design for static, moving and dynamic loading. Plate girder bridge – box Girder Bridge – truss bridge – influence lines for forces in member– Analysis for static, moving and dynamic loading. (13) CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE: Construction methods – short span – long span – false work for concrete bridges – construction management – inspection and maintenance – lessons from bridge failures – rehabilitation of a bridge – load testing of bridge (9) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Johnson Victor D, “Essentials of Bridge Engineering”, Oxford & IBH publishing co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1999. 2. Krishna Raju N, “Design of Bridges”, Oxford Publishing co Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1998. 3. Raina V K “Concrete Bridge Practice”, Tata McGraw-Hill publishing co, New Delhi, 1991. 4. Bakht B and Jaeger L G, “Bridge Deck Analysis Simplified”, McGraw-Hill, International Students‟ edition, Singapore, 1987. 5. Ponnuswamy S, “Bridge Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill Pub co., New Delhi, 1986. 6. Taylor F W, Thomson S E and Smulski E, “Reinforced Concrete Bridges”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1955.

18CS22 FINITE ELEMENT METHOD 3003 INTRODUCTION: Concepts - Two dimensional truss element – algorithm to generate stiffness matrix – Assembly & Boundary conditions - NUMERICAL METHODS – Gaussian elimination method – band and skyline form of storage – band solver – interpolation – Lagrangian and Hermitian – Numerical integration using Gaussian quadrature. - ENERGY PRINCIPLES AND METHOD OF WEIGHTED RESIDUAL: Variational principles - Rayleigh Ritz method - Method of collocation - Subdomain method Galerkin`s method - Method of least squares - CONVERGENCE & COMPATIBILITY REQUIREMENTS: Properties of single element - assumed displacement field - various element shapes - Pascal triangle - Melosh criteria. (12) TRIANGULAR, RECTANGULAR AND ISO PARAMETRIC ELEMENTS: Constant strain triangle - Element stiffness matrix -Various methods of evaluating element stiffness - Higher order triangular elements - comparison of different methods - rectangular element serendipity family - Lagrangian family - Hermitian family - ISO PARAMETRIC ELEMENTS- sub- iso – super parametric elements –

47

59th ACM

09.06.2018

shape functions mapping – linear Iso-parametric quadrilateral. – Simple problems

(11)

THREE DIMENSIONAL ELEMENTS & PLATE SHELL ELEMENTS: Tetrahedron element family - Hexahedron element familyZIB8 and ZIB 20 elements – comparison. Axi symmetric stress analysis - PLATE/SHELL ELEMENTS: Triangular and rectangular elements - BFS element – Concepts of Shell elements - Degenerated shell elements – Introduction to Finite Strip Method (11) NONLINEAR ANALYSIS: Types of non-linearities - solution techniques - stability analysis - Load deformation response considering geometric, material and both non-linearities – Newton Raphson and Riks Wempner methods - eigen value analysis.- APPLICATION TO FIELD PROBLEMS: Finite Element Modelling - Field problems such as seepage - torsion etc - programming organization of finite element schemes - mesh generation aspects, adaptive mesh refinement- software packages - Introduction to meshless methods – principles-applications. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Rao S S, “The Finite Element Method in Engineering”, Elsevier, 2005. 2. Bhatti M A, “Fundamental Finite Element Analysis and Applications (with mathematica and MATLAB Computations)”, John Wiley & Sons, 2005. 3. Cook R D, Malkus D S, Plesha M E and Witt R J, “Concepts and Applications of Finite Element Analysis”, John Wiley & Sons, 2004 . 4. Rajasekaran S, "Finite Element Analysis in Engineering Design", S Chand & Co., 2003. 5. Zienkiewicz O C and Taylor, R L, “The Finite Element Method”, Butterworth and Heimann, Vol.1 The basis, Vol.2 Solid mechanics and Vol.3 fluid dynamics , 2000. 6. Krishnamoorthy C S, “The Finite Element Analysis – Theory and Programming”, Tata McGraw-Hill Book Co, 1987.

18CS23 ASEISMIC DESIGN OF STRUCTURES 3003 BASIC CONCEPTS AND ANALYSIS: Elements of Engineering Seismology - Indian Seismology - earthquake history - catastrophes - failures - lessons learnt in past earthquakes - time history and response spectrum method - modal analysis - earth quake response to linear systems - response spectrum characteristics - ground motion parameters - construction of design spectrum - lumped mass system - shear building - symmetrical and unsymmetrical buildings - multiple support excitation - introduction to deterministic earth quake response to continuous systems on rigid base. (12) STRUCTURAL DESIGN CRITERIA: Principles and design criteria for structures as per IS 1893 - modal response contribution modal participation factor - response history - spectral analysis - problems - design and construction of buildings as per IS 4326 general principles - special construction features - types of construction - building categories - construction of masonry walls precast floors and roofs - guidelines for earthquake resistant of low strength masonry buildings as per IS13828 - behaviour and design of masonry structures - behavior of masonry infills in RC frame - guidelines for improving earthquake resistance of earthen buildings as per IS 13827 - guidelines for repair and seismic strengthening of buildings as per IS 13935. (13) BEHAVIOUR OF RC STRUCTURES: Capacity design - design and detailing as per IS 13920 - behavior of RC structures - cyclic load - shear wall frame system - Khan and Saboronis method - Coupled shear wall system - Rosman‟s method - ductility requirements in concrete structures - beam column junction - push over analysis. (10) BEHAVIOUR OF STEEL STRUCTURES: Behaviour of steel under cyclic load - behavior of flexural members under cyclic loading steel bracing systems - behavior and design aspects - ductile design of frame members - frame members subjected to axial compression and bending - beam column joints - detailing of steel connections - retrofitting and strengthening of steel frames analysis for lateral loads - base isolation techniques. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Anil K Chopra, "Dynamics of Structures - Theory and Applications to Earthquake Engineering", Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2014. 2. Duggal S K, “Earthquake Resistant Design of Structures”, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2013. 3. Agarwal P and Shrikande M, “Earthquake Resistant Design of Structures”, Prentice Hall of India, 2006. 4. Englekrik R, “Seismic Design of RC and Precast Concrete Buildings”, John Wiley and Sons, 2003. 5. Chen W F and Scawthorn, “Earthquake Engineering Hand Book”, CRC press, 2003. 6. Naeim F, "The Seismic Design Hand Book", Kluwer Academic Publishers, London, 2001.

18CS24 BEHAVIOUR AND DESIGN OF TALL BUILDINGS 3003 LOADING AND STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS: History-Design Philosophy - Strength and Stability - Stiffness and Drift - Creep, Shrinkage and Temperature-Fire-Settlement. Loading – Gravity loading, wind loading, Earthquake loading and combinations of loading. Structural Forms - Floor Systems – RCC and Steel.Modelling for Approximate and Accurate Analysis – Reduction Techniques. (10) BEHAVIOUR OF FRAMED SYSTEMS: Braced Frame-Behaviour of Bracing and Braced bents - Member Force Analysis – Drift Analysis. Rigid Frame – Behaviour- Approximate Analysis for Gravity and Lateral Loading. Drift Analysis – Flat Plate StructuresReduction Techniques. In-filled Frame – Behaviour - Forces – Design of infill, Frame and Horizontal Deflection. (12) BEHAVIOUR OF SHEAR WALL SYSTEMS: Shear Wall-Behaviour - Proportionate and Non proportionate - Twisting and Non Twisting - Effects of Discontinuity - Stress Analysis Coupled Shear Wall - Behaviour-Continuous Medium Method – Frame Analogy MethodWall-Frame – Behaviour - Approximate analysis-Solution for UDL and Alternative Loading- Analysis using Graphs . (12) OUTRIGGER STRUCTURES AND STABILITY OF TALL BUILDINGS: Outrigger Braced – Analysis of Forces and Horizontal Deflections – Generalized Solutions – Optimum Locations – Performance Stability – overall buckling analysis of Frames, Wall frames. Second - Order Effects – P-Delta Analysis – Translational - Torsional instability - Out of Plumb Effect Concepts and

48

59th ACM

09.06.2018

Behaviour of Core and Tubular Structures. Behaviour of Connections - Rigid and Semi rigid-Beam and Beam - Column Connections - Connections for ductility (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Smith B.S. and Coull A., “Tall Building Structures Analysis and Design”, John Wiley and Sons, Inc, 2011. 2. Bangash M.Y.H., “Prototype Building Structures – Analysis and Design”, Thomas Telford, 1999. 3. Beedle L.S., “Advances in Tall Buildings CBS Publishers and Distributors, Delhi, 1996. 4. Taranath B.S., “Analysis and Design of Tall Buildings”, McGraw Hill co, 1988. 5. Fintel M., “Hand Book of Concrete Engineering”, Van Nostrand Reinhold co 1985.

18CS25 STRUCTURAL STABILITY 3003 CONCEPTS OF STABILITY AND COMPRESSION MEMBERS: Introduction – Stability Criteria – Equilibrium, Energy and dynamic approaches - South well Plot – Stability of link models. Higher order Differential equations – Analysis for Various boundary conditions – Behaviour of imperfect column – Initially bent column – Eccentrically loaded column - Energy method - Rayleigh Ritz, Galerkin methods – Numerical techniques – Newmark‟s method – Finite Element Method. (13) INELASTIC BUCKLING AND BUCKLING OF THIN-WALLED OPEN & CLOSED SECTIONS: Introduction – Double modulus theory (reduced modulus) – Tangent modulus theory – Shanley‟s theory – Determination of double modulus for various sections. Torsional buckling – Torsional flexural buckling – Equilibrium and Energy approaches. (10) LATERAL STABILITY OF BEAMS AND BEAM-COLUMNS: Differential equations for lateral buckling – Lateral buckling of beams in pure bending – Lateral buckling of cantilever and simply supported ‘I’ beams. Beam-columns with concentrated lateral loads – Distributed loads – Effect of axial loads on bending stiffness – Stability of frames – Stability functions – PΔ effect. (11) STABILITY OF PLATES AND ELEMENTS OF NON LINEAR THEORY OF BUCKLING: Governing Differential equation – Equilibrium, Energy concepts – Buckling of plates of various end conditions – Finite Difference Method – Post-buckling strength – Finite Element Method. Perfect Systems – Imperfect Systems – Imperfection in-sensitive and sensitive systems – Symmetric and Asymmetric Bifurcation – Non-linear analysis of shell and spatial structures – Basic concepts. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Timoshenko, S.P. and GereJ.M., “Theory of Elastic Stability”, 2nd Ed. McGraw-Hill, 2010. 2. Alfutov N. A., “Stability of Elastic structures”, Springerverlay, 2000. 3. El Naschie M. S., “Stress, Stability and Chaos in Structural Engineering: An Energy Approach”, McGraw Hill International Editions, 1992. 4. Iyengar N.G.R., “Structural Stability of Columns and Plates”, Affiliated East West press Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 1988. 5. Chajes A., “Principles of Structural Stability Theory”, Prentice Hall, 1974.

18CS26/18CN27 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES 3003 CONCEPTS OF OPTIMIZATION AND LINEAR PROGRAMMING: Introduction – Engineering applications of optimization – statement of an optimization problem - classification of optimization problems. Standard form of a Linear Programming Problem – plastic design of frames – Graphical method – Simplex method – Basic solution – computation – maximization and minimization. Duality in Linear Programming – General Primal – Dual relations – Dual simplex method – Transportation problem – Assignment method. (13) NONLINEAR PROGRAMMING: One dimensional minimization methods – Dichotomous search, Fibonacci method and Golden section method. Unconstrained optimization techniques – Classification – Direct search, Pattern search, Cauchy‟s steepest Descent method, Conjugate Gradient method and Davidon Fletcher Powell method – Constrained function of a single variable – several variables. (13) DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING: Bellman‟s principle of optimality - Multistage decision processes – representation and types – concept of sub optimization problems using classical and Tabular methods – conversion of a final value problem into an initial value problem – Linear Programming as a case of dynamic Programming. (10) GENETIC ALGORITHM, EVOLUTION STRATEGIES AND ANT COLONY OPTIMIZATION: Introduction – Representation of design variables, objective function and constraints – Choice of population – Genetic operators – survival of the fittest – generation – generation history – application to trusses. Probability – finding the shortest path – pheromone trail – travelling salesman problem – Application to structural engineering problems. (9) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Rajasekaran S. and Vijayalakshmi Pai G. A., "Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic Algorithms", Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2013. 2. K. Deb, “Multi – objective Optimization using evolutionary algorithms”, John Wiley and Sons, 2009. 3. Goldberg D.E., “Genetic Algorithms in Search, Optimization and Machine Learning”, Pearson Education, 2008. 4. Iyengar.N.G.R and Gupta.S.K, “Structural Design Optimization”, Affiliated East West Press Ltd., New Delhi, 1997. 5. Rao S.S. “Optimization Theory and Applications”, Wiley Eastern, 1995. 6. Fox R.L. “Optimization Methods for Engineering Design”, Addison Wesley, Rading, Mass, 1971.

49

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18CS27/18CN28 MAINTENANCE AND REHABILITATION OF STRUCTURES 3003

DIAGONOSIS AND CONDITIONAL ASSESSMENT OF EXISTING STRUCTURES: Types of maintenance – Routine maintenance works in buildings – Inspection – Structural appraisal. Crack – principal sources for crack formation- Durability aspects. Conditional survey – visual inspection – field and laboratory testing stage – concrete strength assessment (11) SELECTION OF REPAIR MATERIALS & DEMOLITION TECHNIQUES: Construction chemicals – repair chemicals – epoxies – polymers and latex – acrylic polymers – polyester resins - corrosion inhibitors as admixture – bonding coats for reinforcement – shrinkage compensating compounds - water proofing compounds. Special materials for construction and repair of buildings and special methods of placing concrete – Demolition Technique (11) REPAIR OF STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS & NON STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS: Repair against rising dampness and efflorescence in masonry wall, repair of cracks in masonry wall and concrete member. Repair against rainwater leakage in building, renovation of water proofing works of RC flat roofs against rain, repair of valley gutters of sloping roof, leakage of bathing area of toilets, sunken floors of toilets in multistoreyed building. (11) STRENGTHENING OF EXISTING STRUCTURES: Strengthening of superstructure - Conversion to composite construction – Post stressing – Jacketing – Bonded overlays – Addition of reinforcement – Strengthening of substructure – Underpinning – Structural Health Monitoring (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Poonam I. Modi & Chirag N Patel,” Repair and Rehabilitation of Concrete Structures”, PHI, Delhi 2016. 2. Varghese P.C, “Maintenance, Repair and Rehabilitation& Minor works of Buildings”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., Delhi, 2014. 3. Malhotra V.M., “Handbook on Non- Destructive testing of Concrete”, CRC Press, 2014. 4. Guha P.K., “Maintenance and Repairs of Buildings”, New Central Book Agency (P) Ltd., Kolkata, 1998. 5. Allen R.T.L and Edwards S.C., “The repair of Concrete Structures”, Thompson Press (India) Ltd., Delhi.

18CS28 SHELL AND SPATIAL STRUCTURES 3003 THEORY OF SHELLS AND SPATIAL STRUCTURES: Definition - Historical development - Types - Materials - practical difficulties construction - support conditions - cladding - aesthetics - Structural behaviour of thin shells - General specification of shells Analysis of shells - Membrane theory of shells - Edge disturbances - classification of shells - methods of generating the surface of different shells like conoid, hyperbolic and elliptic paraboloid - formex data generation of space structure. (11) DESIGN OF CYLINDRICAL AND HYPERBOLIC PARABOLOID SHELLS: Surface definition - Design of cylindrical shells with edge beam using theory for long shells - Design of cylindrical shell with ASCE manual coefficients - Detailing of reinforcement in shells and edge beams. Geometry of hypar shell - Analysis of membrane forces and moments - Determination of forces in the edge members - types of hyperbolic paraboloid roofs - Design of hypar shell roof of the inverted and tilted inverted umbrella types. (12) SINGLE AND MULTI-LAYER GRIDS AND DOMES: Advantages - cladding - water drainage - progressive collapse and composite space trusses - Network domes - geodesic domes - double dome - ice dome - erection - connectors - ORS: Classification - ball joint systems - socket joint - plate joint - slot joint - shell joint - modular system - composite system - prefabricated systems. (12) STRESSED SKIN - CABLE SUSPENDED STRUCTURES: Stressed skin steel buildings - stressed skin grids - cable suspended roofs - design of cable roofs - erection of cable roofs - Finite element analysis of skeletal structures - approximate methods - optimal design of space structures - Failure of shell and space structures - case histories. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Ramaswamy G.S, "Design and Construction of Concrete Shell roofs", CBS Publishers & Distributors, New Delhi, 2005. 2. Ramaswamy G. S., Eekhout M. and Suresh G. R., “Analysis, Design and Constructions of Space Structures”, Thomas Telford, 2002. 3. Subramanian N., “Principles of Space Structures”, Wheeler Publishing, 1998. 4. Bairagi N. K., “Shell Analysis”, Kanna Publishers, 1990. 5. Chatterjee B.K., "Theory and Design of Concrete Shells", Chapman and Hall Ltd., London, 1990. 6. Billington D.F., "Thin Shell Concrete Structures", Mc Graw Hill Book Company, 1982.

18CS29/18CN30 EXPERIMENTAL TECHNIQUES AND INSTRUMENTATION 3003 FORCES AND STRAIN MEASUREMENT: Measurement system: purpose system and elements - characteristics of measurement system - accuracy, precision, repeatability, Errors in measurements - Strain gauge, principle, types, performance and uses. Photo elasticity - principle and applications - Hydraulic jacks and pressure gauges - Electronic load cells - Proving Rings - Calibration of Testing Machines - Long term monitoring-vibrating wire sensors - fiber optic sensors - Introduction to structural modeling. (12) MEASUREMENT OF VIBRATION AND WIND FLOW: Characteristics of Structural Vibrations - Linear Variable Differential Transformer (LVDT) - Transducers for velocity and acceleration measurements. Vibration meter - Seismographs - Vibration Analyzer - Display and recording of signals - Cathode Ray Oscilloscope – wind tunnels-flow meter-venturimeter - Digital Data Acquisition Systems. (10) DISTRESS MEASUREMENTS AND ITS CONTROL: Diagnosis of distress in structures - crack observation and measurements – corrosion of reinforcement in concrete-Half cell, construction and use-damage assessment - controlled blasting for demolitiontechniques for residual stress measurements - structural health monitoring. (11)

50

59th ACM

09.06.2018

NON DESTRUCTIVE TESTING METHODS: Load testing on structures, buildings, bridges and towers-Rebound Hammer - acoustic emission - ultrasonic testing principles and application - Holography - use of laser for structural testing - Brittle coating - Advance NDT methods - ultrasonic pulse echo, impact echo, impulse radar techniques, advanced rebar corrosion rate determination system, ground penetrating radar (GPR) - Applications of NDT for quality assessment and damage detection of structures and materials, probability application in NDT, statistical quality control. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Sadhu Singh, "Experimental Stress Analysis", Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2006. 2. Ganesan T P, “Model analysis of Structures”, University Press 2000. 3. Dalley J W and Riley W F, "Experimental Stress Analysis", McGraw Hill Book Company, N.Y.1998. 4. Srinath et.al L.S, "Experimental Stress Analysis", Tata McGraw Hill Company, New Delhi, 1998. 5. Sirohi R S, Radhakrishna H C, "Mechanical Measurements", New Age International (P) Ltd., 1997. 6. Bray D E and Stanley R K, "Non-destructive Evaluation", McGraw Hill Publishing Company, N.Y.1989.

18CS30 SOIL STRUCTURE INTERACTION 3003 SOIL-FOUNDATION INTERACTION: Introduction to soil-foundation interaction problems – Soil behaviour, Foundation behaviour, Interface behaviour, Scope of soil foundation interaction analysis, Soil response models, Winkler, Elastic continuum, two parameter models, Elastic plastic behaviour, Time dependent behaviour . (10) BEAM ON ELASTIC FOUNDATION-SOIL MODELS: Infinite beams, two parameters, Isotropic elastic half space, Analysis of beams of finite length, Classification of finite beams based on their stiffness. (11) PLATE ON ELASTIC MEDIUM: Infinite plate, Winkler, Two parameters, Isotropic elastic medium, Thin and thick plates, Analysis of finite plates, rectangular and circular plates, Numerical analysis of finite plates – Simple solutions. (11) ELASTIC ANALYSIS OF PILE: Elastic analysis of single pile, Theoretical solutions for settlement and load distributions, Analysis of pile group, Interaction analysis, Load distribution in groups with rigid cap. Load deflection prediction for laterally loaded piles, Subgrade reaction and elastic analysis, Piled raft system, Solutions by influence charts. (13) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. ACI 336, “Suggested Analysis and Design Procedure for Combined Footings and Mats”, American Concrete Institute, Delhi, 1988. 2. Scott R.F., “Foundation Analysis”, Prentice Hall of India, 1981. 3. Poulos H.G. and Davis, E.H. “Pile Foundation Analysis and Design”, John Wiley, 1980. 4. Selvadurai A.P.S., “Elastic Analysis of Soil Foundation Interaction”, Elsevier, 1979.

18CS31 THEORY OF PLATES 3003 ELEMENTS OF PLATE - BENDING THEORY AND BENDING OF ISOTROPIC RECTANGULAR PLATES: General behaviour of plates - Small deflection theory of thin plates - Governing differential equation for deflection of plates - Boundary conditions – Kirchoff‟s theory - Navier solution for an all - round simply supported rectangular plate subjected to uniformly distributed load, sinusoidal load and Patch load - Levy's solution for a rectangular plate with different boundary conditions and subjected to uniformly distributed load. (13) BENDING OF CIRCULAR PLATES: Symmetrical bending of circular plates - Simply supported solid circular plate subjected to an uniformly distributed load, an end moment and partially distributed load. (11) NUMERICAL METHODS: Finite difference method - Isotropic Rectangular plates - Boundary conditions - All round simply supported square plate and fixed square plate subjected to uniformly distributed load. Plates of various shapes - Rectangular plate All round clamped square plate subjected to an uniform load. (12) ANISOTROPIC PLATES: Bending of anisotropic plates - large deflection theory of plates - Plates on elastic foundation.

(9) Total L: 45

REFERENCES: 1. Timoshenko S. and Kreiger S.W., "Theory of Plates and Shells", McGraw Hill Book Company, India, 2010. 2. Chandrashekhara, K., "Theory of Plates", Universities Press (India) Ltd., Hyderabad, 2001. 3. Ansel C. Ugural, "Stresses in Plates and Shells", second edition, McGraw Hill International Editions, 1999. 4. Szilard R., "Theory and Analysis of plates - Classical and Numerical Methods", Prentice Hall Inc., 1995. 5. Bairagi N. K., “A text book on Plate Analysis”, Kanna Publications, 1986.

51

59th ACM

18CS32 INDUSTRIAL STRUCTURES

09.06.2018 3003

PLANNING AND FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS: Classification of Industries and Industrial Structures – planning for layout requirements regarding lighting, ventilation and fire safety - protection against noise and vibration – guidelines from factories act – material handling systems - structural loads. (10) SINGLE STOREY INDUSTRIAL STRUCTURES: Types of roofing – roofing sheets – purlins – light gauge sections – built-up sections – roof trusses – pre-engineered structures. Foundations for industrial structures (13) MATERIAL HANDLING SYSTEMS: Design Philosophy and practices - Cranes – Types design of EOT over head travelling cranes, zib cranes and Goaliath cranes. Design of Gantry girders for over head cranes. Conveyor systems – Supports for conveyor systems. (10) INDUSTRIAL STORAGE & ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL STRUCTURES: Silos, Bins and Bunkers – Design of supporting system for storage hoppers and bunkers - Electro Static Precipitators - Wet and dry Scrubbers – Chimneys – Self supporting, Guyed and Braced chimneys. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Shiyekar M R, “Limit State Design in Structural Steel”, PHI Learning private limited, New Delhi, 2017. 2. Subramanian N, “Design of Steel Structures”, Oxford university press, New Delhi, 2016. 3. Karuna Moy Ghosh, “Analysis and Design Practice of Steel Structures”, PHI Learning private limited, New Delhi, 2014. 4. Sai Ram K S, “Design of Steel Structures”, Pearson, New Delhi, 2013. 5. Alexander Newman, “Metal Building Systems – Design and Specifications”, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2004. 6. Dunham, “Planning Industrial Structures”, McGraw Hill Book Company, 1980.

18CS33 MECHANICS OF COMPOSITE MATERIALS 3003 BASICS AND MACROMECHANICS OF COMPOSITES: Classification – polymer - metal – ceramic – carbon-carbon – recycling of fiber reinforced composites – mechanics terminology – advantages Stess and strain – Hooke‟s law - Engineering Constants of angle lamina - Hygrothermal stresses. (12) MICROMECHANICAL ANALYSIS OF A LAMINA: Volume and mass fraction – density – evaluation of elastic moduli – semiempirical models – elasticity approach – ultimate strength of uni-directional lamina – coefficients of thermal expansion. (10) MICROMECHANICAL ANALSYSIS OF LAMINATE: Introduction – laminate code – stress – strain for a laminate – in-plane and flexural modulus of a laminate – hygrothermal effects – warpage of laminates. (12) FAILURE, ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF LAMINA & LAMINATES: Special cases of laminates – symmetric – cross-ply, angle –ply, antisymmetric, Balanced, Quasi-isotropic – strength failure theories – Tsai – Hill failure theory – Tsai –Wu failure theory – failure criterion - design of a laminated composite (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Kollar L.P. and Springer G.S., “Mechanics of Composite Structures”, Cambridge University Press, 2003. 2. Reddy J.N., “Mechanics of Laminated Composite Plates - Theory and Analysis”, CRC Press, USA, 2001. 3. Jones R.M., “Mechanics of Composite Materials”, McGraw Hill Koghkusha Internation Students, 1999. 4. Kaw A.K., “Mechanics of Composite Materials”, CRC Press, 1997, USA. 5. Iyengar N.G.R. and Gupta S.K., “Structural Design Optimisation”, Affiliated East – West Press Pvt. Ltd., 1997.

18CS34 SOFT COMPUTING IN STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING 3003 NEURAL NETWORKS, ASSOCIATIVE MEMORY AND ADAPTIVE RESONANCE THEORY: Basic Concepts - Artificial Neural Network (ANN) Architecture - Learning Methods - Back Propagation Network (BPN) - Single layer ANN - Multilayer ANN - Learning Method of Effect of tuning parameters. Kosko's Discrete (Bi-directional Associative Memory) BAM - input normalization - Evolution Equation - vector quantization - Architecture of ART1 and ART2 - Application to structural engineering problems. (13) FUZZY LOGIC: Fuzzy sets and relations – Fuzzy sets and Crisp sets - Predicate logic - Fuzzy quantifiers - Fuzzy Rule based systems – Fuzzification and Defuzzification methods - Application to controllers- Application to structural Engineering problems. (11) GENETIC ALGORITHMS: Basic concepts – Representation of design variables, objective function and constraints - Genetic operators - reproduction - selection - cross over - mutation – Choice of population – Survival of the fittest – generation – generation history - convergence of GA - optimal design using GA - Application to structural engineering problems. (12) HYBRID SYSTEMS AND SUPPORT VECTOR MACHINES: Neuro - Fuzzy Hybrids - Fuzzy genetic hybrids - Neuro genetic hybrid Fuzzy BPN - Fuzzy Art Map - Fuzzy controlled GA. Support vector regression – Classifications. (9) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Rajasekaran S. and Vijayalakshmi Pai G. A., "Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic Algorithms", Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2017. 2. Goldberg D. E., "Genetic Algorithms in Search Optimization and Machine Learning", Addison Wesley, Rading Mass, USA, 2006. 3. Gunn S. R., “Support Vector Machines for Classification and Regression”, Technical Report ISIS-I-98 - University of Southampton, 1998.

52

59th ACM

09.06.2018

4. Tsoukalas H. L. and Uhrig E. R., "Fuzzy in Neural Approaches in Engineering", John Wiley and Sons, USA, 1997. 5. Adeli H. and Hung S. L., "Machine Learning, Neural Networks, Genetic Algorithms and Fuzzy Systems, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1995. 6. Zadeh, Loffi A, "Fuzzy Sets", Information Control, Vol.8, pp.338-353, 1965.

18CS35 GEOTECHNICAL EARTHQUAKE ENGINEERING 3003 ELEMENTS OF EARTHQUAKE SEISMOLOGY AND DYNAMIC SOIL PROPERTIES: Mechanism of earthquakes, causes of earthquake, earthquake fault sources, elastic rebound theory, seismic wave in earthquake shaking, definition of earthquake terms, Quantification of earthquakes – Dynamic soil properties – Representation of state of stresses by Mohr circle, Measurement of soil properties – Field and laboratory tests (12) LIQUEFACTION AND DYNAMIC ANALYSIS OF SOLID WASTE LANDFILLS AND LINING SYSTEMS: Liquefaction and its related phenomena, Evaluation of liquefaction hazards, Liquefaction susceptibility – Historical, geologic, compositional and state criteria – Initiation of liquefaction, Effects of liquefaction – Alteration of ground motion, sand boils, settlement and instability. Performance of solid waste landfills during earthquakes, Analysis of solid waste landfills stability during earthquakes, Monitoring and safety control of landfills, Safety and risk analyses (13) SEISMIC SLOPE STABILITY: Types of earthquake induced landslides, Earthquake induced landslide activity, Evaluation of slope stability. Review of static slope stability analysis, Seismic slope stability analysis – Analysis for inertial and weakening instability (10) SEISMIC DESIGN OF RETAINING WALLS: Review of calculation of static pressures on retaining walls, Dynamic response of retaining walls, Seismic pressures on retaining walls – Yielding and non yielding walls, Effect of water, finite element analysis, Seismic displacements on retaining walls, seismic design considerations. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Swamisaran, ”Soil Dynamics and Machine Foundations”, Galgotia Publications Pvt.Ltd.,NewDelhi,2012. 2. Prasad B. B., “Fundamentals of Soil Dynamics and Earthquake Engineering”, PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2009. 3. Ansal A., “Recent Advances in Earthquake Geotechnical Engineering and Microzonation", Kluwer Academic Publishers, The Netherlands, 2004. 4. Kramer S. L., “Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering", Pearson Education (Singapore) Private Ltd. (Indian Branch), New Delhi, 2003. 5. IS 1893, Indian Standard Criteria for Earthquake Resistant Design of Structures.

18CS36 DESIGN OF STEEL CONCRETE COMPOSITE STRUCTURES 3003 CONNECTIONS: Introduction – limit states of composite sections – Design philosophies - codes of practice - shear connectors – types of shear connectors – degree of shear connection – partial and complete shear connections – Load bearing mechanismstrength of shear connectors - standard tests for shear connectors. (10) COMPOSITE BEAMS: Elastic behavior of composite beams - Ultimate load behavior - Full shear connection and partial shear connection - Types of Profile steel sheeting - Design of composite beam – simply supported and continuous beams – beam with profile sheeted deck slab - Analysis and design of composite beams without profile sheet. (10) COMPOSITE SLABS: Introduction of composite floors - shear transferring mechanism in profile deck system – resistance to longitudinal shear - resistance to vertical shear - Bending resistance of composite slab - Design considerations of composite floor profiled sheeting – sheeting parallel to span – sheeting perpendicular to span – analysis and design of composite floor system - limit state of serviceability. (13) COMPOSITE COLUMNS AND COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION: Types – design of composite columns – Relative slenderness resistance to axial, uniaxial and biaxial loading - Transverse and longitudinal shear - in-filled and encased columns - Design Philosophy. Case studies on steel concrete composite construction in buildings- beam column joints - classification of joints - Effects of Temperature, shrinkage, creep and vibration on composite beams. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Qing Quan Liang,” Analysis and Design of Steel and Composite Structures”, CRC Press, Taylor and Francis Group, 2015. 2. Johnson R.P, “Composite Structures of Steel and Concrete”, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd, India, 2013. 3. Sai Ram K S, “Design of Steel Structures”, Pearson Education, 2010. 4. Oehers D.J. and Bradford M.A., “Composite Steel and Concrete Structural Members, Fundamental Behaviour”, Permagon Press, Oxford, 1999. 5. Teaching resource material for, “Structural Steel Design,” Volume 2 of 3, Institute for Steel Development and Growth (INSDAG), 2002. 6. Narayanan R, “Composite Steel Structures – Advances, Design and Construction”, Elsevier, Applied Science, UK, 1987.

18CS37/18CN32 PREFABRICATED STRUCTURES 3003 DESIGN PRINCIPLES: Road to industrialization in buildings – History - Standardization and Components - Types of prefabrication – Prefabrication systems - Disuniting of structures - IS Code Specifications - Construction principles – Manufacture of prefabricated

53

59th ACM

09.06.2018

components – Transport and Erection of structural components – Finishing and Fitting -up operations – Dimensional deviation and Tolerance – Principles of structural design of prefabricated components (11) ROOF, FLOOR UNITS AND WALL PANELS: Roofing slabs – Large slab type roof components – Floor units – Structural design of roof and floor units – Manufacture of roof and floor units – Dimensional variations – General consideration on external wall construction - Types of wall panels - Load bearing walls – Wind bracing (shear wall) – Curtain walls – Window panels – Connections and joints for wall panels – External wall panel examples – Manufacture, transport and erection of wall panels – Structural design and problems. (12) INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS: Structural Systems - Single bay - Multi-bay buildings - Low rise buildings - Applications - Design and Detailing - Crane track beams - Columns – Frames - Structural Connections - Execution of construction work – Structural design and stability problems. (10) SPECIAL STRUCTURES: Design and Detailing, Construction, Stability conditions and Design of plates and shells – Lattice structures – Arches – Pipe bridges and Conveyor bridges - Concrete poles – Silos - Inelastic behavior of externally prestressed continuous composite box-girder bridge with prefabricated slabs - Cyclic behavior of prefabricated circular composite columns with low steel ratio - Seismic performance of prefabricated steel beam-to-column connections. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Handbook on Precast Concrete Buildings, Indian Concrete Institute, 2016. 2. PCI Design Handbook, Precast/Prestressed Institute, Eighth Edition, 2015. 3. PCI Connections Manual for Precast & Prestressed Concrete Construction, First Edition, 2008. 4. Koncz T, “Manual of Precast Concrete Construction”, Vol I, II & III, Bauverlag, GMBH, 1971. 5. Sebestyen G, “Large Panel Buildings”, Akademiai Kiado, Publishing House of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences, Budapest, 1965. 6. Mokk L, “Prefabricated Concrete for Industrial and Public Structures”, Akademial Kiado, Budapest 1964.

18CS38/18CN38 GROUND IMPROVEMENT TECHNIQUES 3003 INTRODUCTION AND MECHANICAL MODIFICATION: Need for ground improvement - methods of ground improvement geotechnical problems in alluvial and black cotton soils – selection of suitable ground improvement techniques based on soil conditions; Methods of compaction, principles of soil densification, properties of compacted soil, dynamic compaction. (12) SOIL NAILING AND MICROPILING: Introduction – functions and applications of soil nailing – methods of construction of soil nailed cut – components of sail nail system; Reinforcing mechanism of micropile – installation of micropile. (11) GEOSYNTHETICS AND DEWATERING SYSYTEMS: Introduction – functions of geosynthetics – types of geosynthetics properties of geosynthetics and its applications; Dewatering techniques- well points – vacuum and electroosmatic methods. (11) GROUTING TECHNIQUES AND SOIL STABILIZATION: Types of grouts, grouting equipment and machinery, injection methods, grout monitoring – applications of grouting; Lime stabilization - Base exchange mechanism, Pozzolanic reaction, lime-soil interaction, Design of Foundation on lime columns. Cement stabilization: Mechanism, amount, age and curing. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Satyendra Mittal, "An Introduction to Ground Improvement Techniques", Scientific International Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2013. 2. Nihar Ranjan Patra, "Ground Improvement Techniques", Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2012. 3. Purushothama Raj P, “Ground Improvement Techniques”, University Science Press, 2009. 4. Sivakumar Babu.G.L., “Introduction to Soil Reinforcement and Geosynthetics”, Universities Press, Hyderabad,2009. 5. Manfired R.Hausmann, “Engineering principles of ground modification, McGraw-Hill Pub,Co.,1990.

18CS39 SMART MATERIALS AND SMART STRUCTURES 3003 INTRODUCTION AND MEASURING TECHNIQUES: Properties of smart materials - mechanisms – instrumented structures functions and response sensing system – self diagnosis – signal processing consideration – actuation systems and effectors. Strain measuring techniques using electrical strain gauges, types – resistance-capacitance – inductance - wheatstone bridges - pressure transducers - load cells - temperature compensation – strain rosettes. (13) SENSORS AND ACTUATORS: Sensing technology – types of sensors – physical measurement using piezo electric strain measurement – inductively read transducers – LVDT – fiber techniques - fiber optic strain sensors - Actuator techniques – Actuator and Actuator materials - piezo electric and electro resistive material – magneto structure material – shape memory alloys electrorheological fluids (ER) – electromagnetic actuation – role of actuators and actuator materials. (12) SIGNAL PROCESSING AND CONTROL SYSTEMS: Data Acquisition and processing – signal processing and control for smart structures – sensors as geometrical processors – signal processing – control system – linear and non linear. (9) INTRODUCTION TO STRUCTURAL HEALTH MONITORING (SHM): Definition and characters of SHM, SHM and bio mimetics, SHM as a part of system management, Passive and Active SHM, NDE, SHM and NDECS – basic components of SHM – Applications – SHM of a bridge – applications for external post tensioned cables, monitoring historical buildings. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Gauenzi, P., “Smart structures”, Wiley, 2009.

54

59th ACM 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

09.06.2018

Hand Book on Seismic Retrofitting of Buildings, Published by CPWD & Indian Building Congress in Association with IIT, Madras, Narosa Publishing House, 2008. Daniel Balageas, Claus - Peter FritzenamI Alfredo Guemes, Structural Health Monitoring, Published by ISTE Ltd., U.K. 2006. Brain Culshaw, “Smart Structures and Materials”, Artech House, London, 2000. L.S.Srinath, “Experimental Stress Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1998. Cady,W.G, “Piezoelectricity”, Dover Publication.

18CS40 STRUCTURAL HEALTH MONITORING 3003 INTRODUCTION AND VIBRATION BASED TECHNIQUES FOR SHM: Definition and characters of SHM, SHM as a way of making materials and structures smart, SHM and Biomimetics, Process and pre-usage monitoring as a part of SHM, Passive and active SHM, NDE, SHM and NDECS. Basic vibration concepts for SHM, Local and global methods, Damage diagnosis as an inverse problem, Model-based damage assessment, Mathematical description of structural systems with damage, General dynamic behavior, State-space description of mechanical systems, Modeling of damaged structural elements, Damage identification in nonlinear systems. (13) FIBER-OPTIC SENSORS : Classification of fiber-optic sensors, Photoelasticity in a plane stress state, Structures with embedded fiber Bragg gratings, Orientation of the optical fiber optic with respect to the reinforcement fibers, Ingress/Egress from the laminate, Fiber Bragg gratings as damage sensors for composites, Measurement of strain and stress variations, Examples of applications in civil engineering, (10) SHM WITH PIEZOELECTRIC SENSORS: The use of embedded sensors as acoustic emission (AE) detectors, Experimental results and conventional analysis of acoustic emission signals, Algorithms for damage localization, Algorithms for damage characterization, New concepts in acoustic emission, State of the-art and main trends in piezoelectric transducer-based acousto-ultrasonic SHM research, Acousto-ultrasonic signal and data reduction methods. (9) SHM USING ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE and LOW FREQUENCY ELECTROMAGNETIC TECHNIQUES: Composite damage, Electrical resistance of unloaded composite, Percolation concept, Anisotropic conduction properties in continuous fiber reinforced polymer, Influence of temperature, Composite strain and damage monitoring by electrical resistance, unidirectional and Multidirectional laminates, Damage localization. Theoretical considerations on electromagnetic theory, Maxwell„s equations, Applications to the NDE/NDT domain and SHM domain, General principles, Magnetic method, Electric method and Hybrid methods. (13) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Douglas E Adams, “Health Monitoring of Structural Materials and Components-Methods with Applications”, John Wiley and Sons, 2007. 2. Victor Giurglutiu, “Structural Health Monitoring with Wafer Active Sensors”, Academic Press Inc, 2007. 3. Daniel Balageas, Claus-Peter Fritzen, Alfredo Güemes, “Structural Health Monitoring”, Wiley-ISTE, 2006. 4. J.P. Ou, H.Li and Z.D. Duan, “Structural Health Monitoring and Intelligent Infrastructure”, Vol-1, Taylor and Francis Group, London, U.K, 2006.

AUDIT COURSES 18CS81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP81

18CS82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP82

55

59th ACM

09.06.2018 ME –INFRASTRUCTURE ENGINEERING – 2018 Regulations Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment

Course Code 18CN01 18CN02 18CN03 18CN04 18CN05 18CN51 18CN81

18CN06 18CN07 18CN08 18CN09 18CN_ 18CN_ 18CN52 18CN61 18CN82

(2018 REGULATIONS) (Minimum No. of credits to be earned: 71*) Hours/Week Maximum Marks CAT Course Title Credits Lecture Tutorial Practical CA FE Total I SEMESTER Applied Statistics and Reliability 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC Pavement Analysis Design & Evaluation 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC Reinforced Concrete Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC Computer Analysis of Structures 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC Advanced Concrete Technology 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC Structural Engineering Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC Total 22 Hrs 14 4 4 18 300 300 600 II SEMESTER Construction Project Management 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC Traffic Engineering and Transport Planning 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC Geographic Information Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC Design of Urban Water Supply and Waste 0 0 PC 3 3 50 50 100 Treatment Systems Professional Elective 1 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE Professional Elective 2 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE Computer Aided Project Planning and Scheduling 0 0 50 PC 4 2 50 100 Laboratory 0 0 EEC Industry Visit & Technical Seminar 4 2 50 100 50 Research Methodology and IPR Total 28 Hrs

0 18 III SEMESTER 18CN_ Professional Elective 3 3 18CN_ Professional Elective 4 3 18CN_ Professional Elective 5 3 18CN_ Professional Elective 6 3 18CN53 Geographic Information System Laboratory 0 18CN71 Project Work I 0 Total 22 Hrs 12 IV SEMESTER 18CN72 Project Work II 0 Total 28 Hrs 0 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES (Six to be opted) 18CN21 Environmental Impact Assessment 3 18CN22 Bridge Engineering 3 18CN23 Foundation Structures 3 18CN24 Structural Steel Design 3 18CN25 Prestressed Concrete Structures 3 18CN26 Infrastructure Management 3 18CN27 Optimization Techniques 3 18CN28 Maintenance and Rehabilitation of Structures 3 18CN29 Modern Materials for Construction 3 18CN30 Experimental Techniques and Instrumentation 3 18CN31 Financial Management and Accounting 3 18CN32 Prefabricated Structures 3 18CN33 City Planning and Urban Design 3 18CN34 Organizational Behavior 3 18CN35 Geosynthetics in Infrastructure Projects 3 18CN36 Corrosion in Reinforced Concrete 3 18CN37 Remote Sensing 3 18CN38 Ground Improvement Techniques 3

0 2

** 8

Grade 23

0 400

0 400

0 800

MC

0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 4 6 10

3 3 3 3 2 3 17

50 50 50 50 50 50 300

50 50 50 50 50 50 300

100 100 100 100 100 100 600

PE PE PE PE PC EEC

0 0

28 28

14 14

50 50

50 50

100 100

EEC

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE

* Indicated is the minimum number of credits to be earned by a student. ** - 60 hrs in I semester and 90 hrs in II semester; Grade: Completed / Not Completed CAT – Category; PC – Professional Core; PE - Professional Elective EEC – Employability Enhancement Course; MC- Mandatory Course

56

59th ACM

09.06.2018

I SEMESTER 18CN01 APPLIED STATISTICS AND RELIABILITY vide Structural Engineering 18CS01

18CN02 PAVEMENT ANALYSIS, DESIGN AND EVALUATION 3003 PRINCIPLES OF PAVEMENT DESIGN: Types of pavement - flexible and rigid - Components of pavement and their functions, Provisions of IRC Guidelines for each component, Comparison between highway and airport pavements, Factors influencing pavement stability: Vehicle and traffic factors-ESWL and Wheel Load Factor - Moisture and climate, soil-CBR, Hveem stabilometer method, Plate Bearing method for finding modulus of subgrade reaction and North Dakota Cone method - and stress distribution factor - Boussinesq and Burmister theories. (10) DESIGN OF FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT: Empirical method based on arbitrary strength - CBR method - Provisions of IRC 37 - Plate Bearing method (US Navy method for airfields), Theoretical and semi - theoretical methods - Kansas and Texas triaxial methods, IRC guidelines for design of flexible rural roads. Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) method (Recommended by International Civil Aviation Organization) (10) DESIGN OF RIGID PAVEMENT: Stresses in rigid pavement due to wheel load-Older, Westergaard, Bradbury and Kelly theories Stresses due to change in temperature - warping stress - theory by Bradbury - Stress due to subgrade restraint, Critical combination of stresses. Modulus of Rupture of concrete, Design of airport pavement - Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) method (Recommended by International Civil Aviation Organization) - Design of rigid highway pavement - IRC 58 method - IRC guidelines for design of rigid rural roads. Types of joints, Types of rigid pavement based on reinforcement, Design of reinforcement in longitudinal and transverse direction, tie bars and dowel bars. (13) PAVEMENT EVALUATION AND REHABILITATION: Distresses in flexible and rigid pavements - condition surveys - Types of roughness - present serviceability index - skid resistance - structural evaluation – Benkelman deflection method – Design of overlays both for highway and airport pavements - flexible overlay over flexible pavement, rigid overlay over rigid pavement, flexible overlay over rigid pavements – Methods suggested by IRC, FAA and Asphalt Institute. Stabilisation with special reference to highway pavements, Chemical and mechanical stabilisation, Use of Geosynthetics in roads. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Sharma S. K., "Principles, Practice and Design of Highway Engineering", S Chand and Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2014. 2. Wright P.H and Dixon K.K., “Highway Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 2009. 3. Yoder E. J. and Witezak M. W., "Principles of Pavement Design", John Wiley and Sons Inc., New York, 2008. 4. Croney P and Croney D., “Design and Performance of Road Pavements”, HMO Stationary Office, 2008. 5. Kadiyali L.R., “Principles and Practice of Highway Engineering”, Khanna Tech. Publications, New Delhi, 2004.

18CN03 REINFORCED CONCRETE DESIGN vide Structural Engineering 18CS03

18CN04 COMPUTER ANALYSIS OF STRUCTURES vide Structural Engineering 18CS04

18CN05 ADVANCED CONCRETE TECHNOLOGY vide Structural Engineering 18CS05

18CN51 STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY vide Structural Engineering 18CS51

II SEMESTER 18CN06 CONSTRUCTION PROJECT MANAGEMENT 3204 PLANNING: Management objectives and concepts as a blend of art and science – Functions of management – Opportunities and threats to project managers – Application of management principles and tools to construction projects – Importance of applying management concepts in construction industry. Importance of planning in the overall project management – Periods of planning – Pre tender, Pre contract and contract period planning – Data collection, analysis, design, Activity – time scheduling, charts for labour, material, staff and plant requirements – BOQ and cost estimates – Master Programme Chart. (11) PROJECT SCHEDULING: Activity break down – Bar chart scheduling – its merits and shortcomings; Inter dependencies of activities – CPM/PERT network diagram – Forward and Backward pass – Critical period and critical path analysis – Float – Three time aspects for PERT activities and their identification based on statistical data – Probability of achieving desired time targets for construction projects. (11)

57

59th ACM

09.06.2018

RESOURCE AGGREGATION, LEVELING & TIME COST OPTIMIZATION: Optimal use of resources – Aggregation as per early start time of activities and initial histogram – Leveling of resources by manipulating activity start time with respect to float availability and late finish time of activities and final histogram. Direct cost and Indirect cost, and their influence on project duration – Normal and Crash duration of activities and their corresponding costs – Crashing of network to optimize cost and duration of projects – Simple Operation Research techniques to optimize assignment of tasks to groups of workmen, and transport of materials from quarries to sites. (11) TECHNICAL PROCEDURES & COST CONTROL: Tenders – aim, importance and tender documents; tender process – Invitation, submission, opening, scrutiny, negotiation, acceptance and award. Contract – definition, types of contracts, their merit and suitability – contract agreement – Principal clauses and conditions; Payment for works – Measurements, Running Bills, deductions. Aims and scope of cost control – use of estimates, data, unit rate and standard rate as tools for cost monitoring – systems of cost control based on accounting details of spends and periodicity of cost comparison. Mass Haul Diagram – features and characteristics – balancing cut and fill and optimizing haul distances and quantities. (12) Total L: 45+T:30 REFERENCES: 1. Shrivastava U. K., “Construction Planning and Management”, Galgotia Publications Pvt. Ltd., 3rd Edition, New Delhi, 2015. 2. Ghattas R. G and Sandra Mckee, “Practical Project Management”, Pearson Education (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2003. 3. Punmia B. C. and Khandelval K. K., “Project Planning and Control with PERT and CPM”, Laxmi Publications, 2002. 4. Srinath L. S., “PERT/CPM Principles and Applications”, Affiliated East West Press (P) Ltd., 2002.

18CN07 TRAFFIC ENGINEERING AND TRANSPORT PLANNING 3003 TRAFFIC AND TRAFFIC STREAM CHARACTERISTICS: Physical, Physiological, Psychological, environmental characteristics of Road user ,vehicle characteristics and their relations; Fundamental parameters and relations of traffic flow: speed, density, volume, travel time, headway, spacing, time-space diagram, time mean speed, space mean speed and their relation, relation between speeds, flow, density, fundamental diagrams; Traffic stream models: Green shield‟s model, Greenberg‟s logarithmic model, LighthillWithams theory, shock waves. (11) TRAFFIC SURVEYS STUDIES AND QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES IN TRAFFIC ENGINEERING: Measurement at a point: Traffic volume measurement, equipment for flow measurements, data analysis, concepts of ADT, AADT; Measurement over a short section: Speed measurements, 15th and 85th percentile speeds, design speed, speed distributions; Moving observer method: Concepts and derivation, illustration, Measurement along a length of road: Density measurement, travel time measurement; Automated traffic measurement: GPS devices, loop detectors, video analysis, and other technologies. Specialized traffic studies: Parking studies, Accident studies, Congestion studies. Quantitative techniques: Probability distributions, significance testing and linear regression models. (11) TRAFFIC INTERSECTION CONTROL OPERATION AND MANAGEMENT: Principles of traffic control: Requirements, basic driving rules, priority movements, principles of traffic control, intersections conflicts; Traffic signs and road markings: Regulatory, warning, and information signs; longitudinal, transverse, and object marking; Channelization: channelizing devices, geometrical aspects, turning radius ;Traffic rotary: Conflict resolution in a rotary, geometric layout, design elements, capacity of rotary; Grade separated intersection: Road over bridges, under pass, overpass, trumpet interchange, diamond interchange, fully and partial clover leaf intersection. Elements of traffic signal, Design principles of a traffic signal, Evaluation of a traffic signal, coordinated traffic signal. (12) TRANSPORTATION PLANNING AND TRANSPORT ECONOMICS: Transportation system and planning process - System approach in transport planning - Interdependence of land use and traffic - transportation survey. Conventional and four stage modeling process - trip generation and trip distribution, model spilt, and land use transport model. Transport planning strategies, TSM, TDM, Traffic calming, road pricing and ITS. Economic evaluation of transport plans - accident cost - traffic congestion, restrain and road pricing, EIA. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Kadiyali L. R., "Traffic Engineering and Transportation Planning", Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 2005. 2. Partha Chakroborty and Animesh Das, "Principle of Transportation Engineering", Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2003. 3. Khanna K. and Justo C. E. G., “Highway Engineering”, Khanna Publishers, Roorkee, 2001. 4. Nicholas J. Garben and Lester A. Hoel, "Traffic and Highway Engineering", PWS Publication, 1999. 5. Taylor M.A.P and Young W., “Traffic Analysis - New Technology and New Solutions”, Hargreen Publishing Company, 1998. 6. Jason C.Yu, “Transportation Engineering: Introduction to Planning”, Design and Operations, Elsevier, 1992.

18CN08 GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION SYSTEMS 3003 GIS TECHNIQUES, DATABASE AND DATA STRUCTURES: Map – Types of map - Map analysis, Digital Cartography and Evolution of GIS, Components of GIS - Software, Hardware and organization - Types of Map Projections and Coordinate conceptsDatums, ellipsoids, geoids, Type of data - spatial and non spatial data, Various Sources of data - Conceptualization of real world in GIS, georeferencing, vector and raster data structure, database concepts, E-R Model, Geodatabase, Object Oriented Database (11) DATA INPUT, DATA OUTPUT AND ERROR ANALYSIS: Digitizer, scanner, files and data formats, Collection of Data using GPS Data transfer from other spatial data sources, GIS flow chart for projects, Edge matching, rubber sheeting. Types of output data, Map Design, source of errors, types of errors, elimination, accuracies. Data quality and data standards: Concepts – Definition and assessment of data quality, Multimedia GIS, 3D GIS, meta data, Open source GIS and OGC standards. (11) ADVANCED ANALYSIS: Spatial Analysis, data retrieval, query, simple analysis, spatial statistics, Topology, Measuring distance, area and connectivity, buffering and neighbourhood functions - Raster and Vector overlay method - Reclass, Recode, vector data analysis, raster data analysis, Modeling in GIS, digital Elevation Model, DTM, Cost and path analysis, Spatial interpolation - Analysis

58

59th ACM

09.06.2018

of surfaces - Network analysis - shortest path problem, traveling salesman problem, location and allocation of resources. Artificial Intelligence and expert system, Multicriteria analysis, Analytical Hierarchy process. (11) GIS APPLICATIONS: GIS for water distribution network, sewer network, transportation network, telecom network, power network and other utilities, Site selection for larger projects based on GIS analysis, Remote Sensing data integration, Navigtion and tracking using GPS and GIS, GIS database for buildings, Emergency planning, Internet GIS. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Demers M. N., “Fundamentals of Geographical Information Systems”, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2008. 2. Chang K. T., “Introduction to Geographical Information Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007. 3. Elangovan K., “GIS: Fundamentals, Applications and Implementation”, New India Publishing Agency, New Delhi, 2006. 4. Chrisman N. R., “Exploring Geographic Information Systems”, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2001. 5. Clarke K. C., “Getting Started with Geographic Information Systems”, Prentice Hall, 2001. 6. Burrough P. A., “Principles of GIS for Land Resources Management”, Oxford Publication, 2000.

18CN09 DESIGN OF URBAN WATER SUPPLY AND WASTE TREATMENT SYSTEMS 3003 WATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS: Quantity of water - population forecasting- per capita consumption - fluctuation in consumption rate - design period. Purification of water - screening - aeration - plain sedimentation - sedimentation with coagulation - filtration slow sand filter, rapid sand filter, pressure filter - disinfection of water - optional treatment methods - design aspects - storage reservoir types and design. (11) WATER DISTRIBUTION AND SEWERAGE SYSTEMS: Classification - layout of distribution system - residual pressure - analysis of distribution system - leakage / waste prevention - appurtenances in distribution system Water carriage system - types - quantity of sewage - self cleansing velocity - non-scoring velocity - shapes of sewers-sewer materials-design of sewers-construction of sewers testing-plumbing systems - sewer appurtenances - sewage pumping. (11) WASTE WATER TREATMENT AND DISPOSAL: Sewage characteristics - BOD- COD- population equivalent - relative stability designing of waste water treatment units - screens - grit chamber - skimming tank - sedimentation- biological treatment methods trickling filters - activated sludge process - oxidation pond - rotating biological contactors - design of septic tank and final disposal unit - disposal of sludge - disposal by dilution - oxygen sag curve - standards of dilution - self-purification process - zones of pollution - standards of waste water for irrigation - irrigation methods - percolation test. (11) SOLID WASTE AND AIR POLLUTION MANAGEMENT: Solid wastes - composition - generation and factors influencing - collection systems - processing, component separation - volume reduction methods - size reduction - recovery of material - disposal methods, composting, land filling, anaerobic digestion. Effect of air pollution on human health, plants, animals, properties - air quality and emission standards - particulate removal - removal of gaseous pollutants - stack design - sampling techniques. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Santhosh Kumar Garg, "Environmental Engineering Volume - I and II", Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 2015. 2. Punmia B C, Ashok Kumar Jain and Arun K Jain, "Environmental Engineering Volumes I and II", Laxmi Publications, Jodhpur, 2014. 3. Peavy H S, Rowe D R and Tchobanoglous G, "Environmental Engineering", McGraw Hill Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2013. 4. MetCalf and Eddy, Inc. "Wastewater Engineering Treatment, Disposal, Reuse", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2012. 5. Rao M N and Rao H V N, "Air Pollution", Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2011. 6. "Manual on Solid Waste Management", Central Public Health and Environmental Engineering Organisation, Ministry of Urban Development, New Delhi.

18CN52 COMPUTER AIDED PROJECT PLANNING AND SCHEDULING LABORATORY 0042 OVERVIEW AND STRUCTURING PROJECTS: Optimize the project plan, Understand data structures, Create a project, Create a Work Breakdown Structure, Add activities, View calendars, Create relationships, Schedule the project, Assign constraints, Format schedule data, create reports CUSTOMISING THE PROJECTS: Working with layouts, grouping, sorting, and filtering data; Customising layouts printing layouts and reports, Publishing a project on the web RESOURCE MANAGEMENT AND RISK ASSESSMENT: Roles and Resource, Assigning Roles, Assigning Resources, Analyzing Resources, Optimizing the Project Plan, UPDATING AND MANAGING THE SCHEDULE: Managing the Baselines, updating, scheduling and leveling, sumarising projects issues and thresholds, managing risks, Project Execution and Control, Reporting Performance, Apply a risk assessment to a project schedule, resources and costs, comparing actual with schedule comparison. Total P: 60

18CN61 INDUSTRY VISIT & TECHNICAL SEMINAR vide Structural Engineering 18CS61

59

59th ACM

09.06.2018

III SEMESTER 18CN53 GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION SYSTEM LABORATORY 0042 DATA, FILES AND DATABASE: Input of data – Scanning, Manual and automatic digitization, use of GPS for data collection, for utilities, use of digitiser, type of data - database, Files, Methodology of GIS data creation and analysis. DATA MANIPULATION: Sources of errors, cleaning of errors, topology building, raster cell resolution, edge matching, georeferencing, satellite image processing SIMPLE ANALYSIS: Reclass, Recode, Buffering, area, distance, perimeter measurement, Database initiated analysis, Simple overlay, raster and vector data analysis ANALYSIS IN GIS: Weighted overlay - proximity analysis - DEM, DTM, TIN, Perspective view - network analysis - GIS application in resource management - cartographic design of maps - multicriteria evaluation. DATA OUTPUT: Multimedia - GIS Maps, images, Texts, Graphs, Cartographic symbolism EXERCISES: 1. Onscreen digitisation for points. lines and polygons in a map. 2. GPS data collection for utilities and integration of data from various sources 3. Cleaning up the data, error removal , topology building, georeferencing and map projection 4. Classifications of spatial data, layer and symbol concept using a GIS software. 5. Satellite image processing to produce landuse / landcover maps 6. Attribute data query on maps, simple analysis 7. Simple overlay and weighted overlay 8. Network analysis in GIS. 9. Creating DEM, TIN, slope, aspect, hill shade and perspective view maps 10. Site selection of projects using GIS. 11. Output generation and cartographic design of maps. Total P: 60

18CN71 PROJECT WORK – PHASE I * * * * * *

Identification of thrust areas Developing a mathematical model for solving the above problem Finalisation of system requirements and specification Proposing different solutions for the problem based on literature survey Future trends in providing alternate solutions Consolidated report preparation of the above

IV SEMESTER 18CN72 PROJECT WORK – PHASE II The Project work involves the following: *

Preparing a project – brief proposal including Problem Identification Methodology specifying the process/specifications/parameters List of alternate methodology if available Justification for the methodology adopted Time line of activities

*

Carrying out experimental/theoretical work as per the specified time line of activities.

*

A presentation including all the above along with final results and conclusions.

*

Consolidated report preparation.

ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES 18CN21 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT 3003 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT (EIA) OBJECTIVES AND NEED: Impact of Civil Engineering development projects on environment – International scenario of environment protection – Environmental protection methods – Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) – Objectives and need - Environmental Impact statement (EIS) – EIA capability and limitations – Legal provisions

60

59th ACM

09.06.2018

on EIA – Indian legislation to protect environment - environmental clearance procedure - Guidance for Industrial licensing (11) EIA METHODOLOGIES - PREDICTION AND ASSESSMENT: Methods of EIA – Checklists – Matrices – Networks – Cost-benefit analysis – environmental pricing – analysis of alternatives - case studies. Assessment of Impact on land, water and air, noise, social, cultural flora and fauna - Mathematical models - public participation. (12) ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN: Plan for mitigation of adverse impact on environment – options for mitigation of impact on water, air and land, flora and fauna; Addressing the issues related to the Project Affected people - Rapid EIA - ISO 14000 - EIA in India – Environmental guidance for infrastructure projects and river valley projects – Legislations and Institutional support – International cooperation . (11) EIA FOR INFRASTRUCTURE PROJECTS: Case studies on bridges – power plants – highways – dams – urban development – water supply and drainage projects. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Anji Reddy M, “Environmental Impact Assessment: Theory and Practice”, BS Publications, Hyderabad, 2017. 2. Barthwal RR, “Environmental Impact Assessment”, New Age International P Ltd, New Delhi, 2014. 3. Charles H Eccleston, “Environmental Impact Assessment: A Guide to Best Professional Practices”, CRC Press, 2011. 4. Judith Petts, “Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Vol. I & II”, Blackwell Scientific Publications, London 2005. 5. Peter Morris and Rikki Therivel, “Methods of Environmental Impact Assessment”, SPON Press, London, 2003. 6. Canter R.L., “Environmental Impact Assessment”, McGraw Hill Inc., New Delhi, 1996.

18CN22 BRIDGE ENGINEERING vide Structural Engineering 18CS21

18CN23 FOUNDATION STRUCTURES vide Structural Engineering 18CS08

18CN24 STRUCTURAL STEEL DESIGN vide Structural Engineering 18CS02

18CN25 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE STRUCTURES vide Structural Engineering 18CS09

18CN26 INFRASTRUCTURE MANAGEMENT 3003 OVERVIEW OF INDIAN INFRASTRUCTURE ASSETS: Infrastructure – Definition - Infrastructure management-Importance of infrastructure management. Urban Infrastructure, Roads, Railways, Ports, Airports, Energy - social Infrastructure - education, health care - Infrastructure deficiencies – Smart cities – MRTS. (12) ASSET MANAGEMENT & RURAL INFRASTRUCTURE: Design service life - Built infrastructure issues - Report card Infrastructure Inspection - Sustainable Infrastructure - Alternate construction materials, village ponds, village transportation, Sanitation (11) PROJECT IMPLEMENTATION: Tender Document – Terms and Conditions – Bidding Process – Contracts – Terminology in Contracts – Types of Contracts – BOO, BOT, DBOT, DBOOT, BOOT, EPC & Turnkey – Project Planning – Mobilization of resources - Work Flow Execution – Construction & Maintenance during Defect Liability Period - Arbitration. (11) PRIVATE SECTOR PARTICIPATION & PPP: Private Sector participation in Infrastructure Development Projects – Public Private Partnership Projects - Technology Transfer and Foreign Collaboration – Scope of Technology Transfer - Case study (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Narindar Jethi K, “Infrastructure Development In India”, New Century Publications, 2007. 2. 3i Network, “India Infrastructure Report 2007 : Rural Infrastructure”, Oxford University Press, 2007. 3. 3i Network, “India Infrastructure Report 2006 : Urban Infrastructure”, Oxford University Press, 2006. 4. Joshi P, “Law Relating to Infrastructure Projects”, Taxmann Publishers, 2001. 5. Raghuram G, “Infrastructure Development and Financing : Towards a Public Private Partnership”, Macmillan , 2001.

18CN27 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES vide Structural Engineering 18CS26

18CN28 MAINTENANCE AND REHABILITATION OF STRUCTURES vide Structural Engineering 18CS27

61

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18CN29 MODERN MATERIALS FOR CONSTRUCTION 3003

MICROSTRUCTURE AND MATERIAL BEHAVIOUR: Introduction to the physics and chemistry of materials, Focusing on chemical bonding, crystal structure, mechanical properties, phase transformation, Energy in building materials and building, Green and climate responsive buildings (11) STRUCTURAL MATERIALS: Criteria for selection of structural materials: Ceramics and Glass, Metals, Polymers, Fibre reinforced polymers, Fire proofing materials, Bituminous materials, Typical agro waste and other biomass resources. (11) NON-STRUCTURAL MATERIALS: Criteria for selection of non construction materials: PVC, EPOXY, Thermocole, Geotextile, Acoustics, Thermal and sound insulation materials, Green building materials, special paints for Road marking. Construction chemicals – sealants, engineering grouts, mortars, admixtures and adhesives. (11) SPECIAL CONCRETE: High strength and high-performance concrete - FRP - Fibre reinforced polymer composite - Lightweight concrete - vacuum concrete - silica fume concrete – ferro cement and ferro concrete – concrete for off shore structure, Bacterial concrete, self curing and self healing concrete: Non destructive testing methods for concrete. Scope, type and application of Smart and Intelligent materials in buildings. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Shan Somayaji, “Civil Engineering Materials”, Second Edition, Prentice Hall Inc., 2001. 2. Mamlouk M.S, Zaniewski J.P., “Materials for Civil and Construction Engineers”, Prentice Hall Inc., 1999. 3. Aitkens, “High Performance Concrete”, McGraw Hill, 1999. 4. Neveille A.M and Brooks J J., “Concrete Technology”, Longman, 1999. 5. Metha P.K and Montreil P.J.M., “Concrete Microstructure Properties and Materials”, Indian Concrete Institute, 1997. 6. Edwar Nawy E G., “Concrete Construction Engineering Handbook”, CRC press, New York, 1997.

18CN30 EXPERIMENTAL TECHNIQUES AND INSTRUMENTATION vide Structural Engineering 18CS29

18CN31 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT AND ACCOUNTING 3003 BASIC ACCOUNTİNG, BALANCE SHEET & MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING: Meaning of Accounting - Definition and objectives.Need for accounting- Internal and external users of accounting information-Branches of Accounting - Accounting Information system - Accounting Cycle – Accounting Concepts, Conventions and Principles - The Corporate Balance Sheet – Format of Balance sheet – Balance Sheet as per company law and annexure to it– Generally Accepted Accounting Principles Financial Accounting vs. Management Accounting. (11) FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ANALYSIS & MARGINAL COSTING: Characteristics – limitations - Ratio Analysis (Including Dupont Model): Interpretation - Difference between Cash flow and Fund flow - Meaning of a cash flow statement – classification of cash flows – Preparation and Interpretation of Cash Flow Statement - Direct Cost - Overheads – Cost Sheet – Cost - volume profit analysis – Break Even Point - Application of marginal costing techniques to Managerial Decision making. (11) FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT & TIME VALUE OF MONEY: An overview – Nature & scope - Finance functions - goals of financial management - Financial manager‟s role - agency problems ,agency cost - Long term finance - ordinary shares, right issue of equity shares, preference shares, debentures, term loan, asset based financing-hire purchase, leasing, venture capital financing. Short term finance - trade credit, bank credit, bill discounting, commercial paper - Time value of money - Concept - future value - present value – single cash flows, annuity, uneven cash flows, multi period and continuous - yield calculation, applications : bond's valuation and yield - valuation of preference shares - valuation of ordinary shares. (11) COST OF CAPITAL & RECEIVABLES MANAGEMENT: Concept - determining component cost of capital - weighted average cost of capital - weighted marginal cost of capital - Capital budgeting decisions - Evaluation of capital budgeting - discounted & non discounted cash flows methods – simple problems - Principles and concepts of working capital – operating cycle - determinants of working capital - policies for financing current assets - Inventory management and cash management – basic concepts only. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: nd 1. Sudarsana Reddy, “Financial Management”, 2 Revised Ed., Himalaya PH, 2010 2. Pandey, I M., “Financial Management”, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi, 10th Ed, 2010. 3. Chandra Prasanna, “Financial Management: Theory and Practice”, Tata McGraw, New Delhi, 2010. 4. Jonathan Berk, “Financial Management”, Pearson Education, 2010. 5. Ehrhardt, Michael and Brigham, Engene F, “Corporate Finance: A Focused Approach”, Cenage Learning, Australia, 2009. 6. Bhat and Sudhindra, “Financial Management: Principles and Practice”, Excel books, ND, 2007.

18CN32 PREFABRICATED STRUCTURES vide Structural Engineering 18CS37

18CN33 CITY PLANNING AND URBAN DESIGN 3003 CITY AND METROPOLITAN PLANNING: Evolution of cities; principle of city planning; type of cities &new towns; Indian cities and metropolises constraints and prospects, Polarization of economic socio cultural and administrative activities: Distribution of

62

59th ACM

09.06.2018

urbanization process; National settlement polices; eco city concept; sustainable development. Metropolitan plan making processes, metropolitan plans in India, Metropolitan planning strategies. (11) TECHNIQUES OF PLANNING: Planning survey techniques; Conducting survey; statistical methods of data analysis; report presentation ; application of GIS and remote sensing techniques in urban and regional planning ; decision making models. (11) DEVELOPMENT ADMINISTRATION AND MANAGEMENT: Scope and content of master plan and structure plan, integrated urban development plans and IDSMT and urban development projects; Planning laws ; development control and zoning regulations; law relating to land acquisition; development enforcements, urban land ceiling, scope and content of zonal development plans, detailed town planning schemes, area development plans, action plans and subject plans. Land management techniques; planning and municipal administration; disaster mitigation management; 73rd and 74th constitutional amendments; public participation and role of NGO & CBO. (12) URBAN DESIGN: Definition of urban design , scope of urban design under Indian context and its integration with urban planning; Historical development and approach to urban design; urban form; Urban structure and design rational linter - relationship between economic activities, public organization , communication system, urban conservation and land-use structure. Organization of space. Review and designing of urban renewal and redevelopment projects for old and new towns. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Urban Raw M, “Urban Planning and Practice”, CBS Publisher, 2005. 2. Simon Eisner, Arthur B Gallion, “Urban Pattern City Planning and Design, CBS Publisher, 2004. 3. Peter Hall, “Urban and Regional Planning”, Taylor and Francis, 2003. 4. Sundaram K.V, “Urban and Regional Planning in India”, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2000. 5. Cliff Moughlin, Rafael Cuesta, “Urban Design Method and Techniques”, Butterworth, 1999. 6. Harold Maclean Lewis, Wrigley J S, “Planning the Modern City”, Vol .I and Vol. II, John-Wiley, 1998.

18CN34 ORGANISATIONAL BEHAVIOUR 3003 IMPORTANCE OF OB & PERSONALITY: Definition, Meaning and Importance of OB, Historic developments of OB, Hawthorne experiment, Basic OB Model, Different approaches to OB, Contributing disciplines to OB, Scope of OB, Significance of OB - Origin of the word Personality, Determinants of Personality, Theories of Personality (Psychoanalytic theory, Self theory, Holland‟s personality theory, Myers Briggs Type Indicators and Big 5 personality theory), Attributes of personality. (11) EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE & MOTIVATION: Definition and Meaning, Categories of intelligence, EI Dimensions, Physiology of EI, OB applications of emotions – Characteristics of Motivation, Process of Motivation, Theories of Motivation (Maslow‟s need theory, ERG theory, Hertzberg theory, Expectancy theory, Theory X & Y, McClelland‟s theory of needs, Goal setting theory, Equity theory), Incentives for Motivation. (12) LEADERSHIP & GROUP DYNAMICS: Definition and Meaning, Styles of leadership, Theories of leadership (Trait theory, Ohio state theory, Managerial grid, Contingency theory, Path goal theory, Leader Member Exchange(LMX), Transactional & transformational leadership theory, Charismatic and Visionary leadership theory) - Difference between Group and Team, Groups in Organisation, Team Effectiveness model, Troubles with team, Social loafing. (11) ORGANISATIONAL CULTURE & ORGANISATIONAL CHANGE: Meaning and Definition, Characteristics of Organisational culture, Elements of Organisational culture, Organisational sub culture, Artifacts for Organisational culture, Bicultural audit, Strategies to merge different organisational culture. - Factors of Organisational change, Lewin‟s forced field model, Human reactions to change, Resistance to change, Strategies for reducing change, Ethical issues in Organisational change. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Fred Luthans, “Organisational Behaviour”, New York, McGraw Hill, 2011. 2. Stephen P. Robins, “Organisational Behaviour”, Pearson Education, 2011. 3. Edwin Gerlof, “Organisation Theory and Design”, McGraw Hills, 2011. 4. Danial C. Fieldman and Hugh Arnold, “Managing Individual and Group Behaviour in Organization”, McGraw Hills, 2010. 5. Robrt Kreitener and Angelo Kinieki, “Organisational Behavior”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2008.

18CN35 GEOSYNTHETICS IN INFRASTRUCTURE PROJECTS 3003 GEOSYNTHETIC MATERIALS AND THEIR PROPERTIES: Basic descriptions of geosynthetics, types, functions, materials, manufacturing processes, properties and testing, Concepts and mechanism of reinforced soil, Factors influencing behaviour and performance. (12) REINFORCED SOIL RETAINING WALLS AND SLOPE STABILITY: Components of reinforced soil walls, Principles of design – Internal and external stability – Design – Slope stabilization. (11) ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL, FILTRATION AND DRAINAGE: Liners for ponds and canals, covers and liners for landfills, material aspects and stability considerations; Applications, Geotextile filter requirements, boundary conditions, drain and filter properties, design criteria. (11) EMBANKMENTS IN SOFT SOILS AND PAVEMENT: Embankment in soft soils - Analysis, Influence of reinforcement extensibility, deformation in foundation, Overall stability with respect to bearing. Pavement applications, Role of subgrade conditions, Design – The Giroud and Noiray approach, Geotextile serviceability, Application in pavement overlays. (11)

63

59th ACM

09.06.2018

Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Sivakumar Babu, G.L., “Introduction to Soil Reinforcement and Geosynthetics”, Universities Press, Hyderabad, 2009. 2. Mandal J N, “Geosynthetics World‟, New Age International (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2007. 3. Robert M Koerner, “Designing with Geosynthetics”, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2005. 4. Braja M Das, “Shallow Foundations: Bearing Capacity and Settlement”, CRC Press, New York, 1999.

18CN36 CORROSION IN REINFORCED CONCRETE 3003 BASICS OF CORROSION: Theoretical Concepts of Corrosion of Steel in Concrete Structures. Mechanism of Chloride induced and carbonation induced Corrosion - parameters influencing rebar corrosion (11) FORMS OF CORROSION & CORROSIVE ENVIROMENTS: Galvanic Corrosion, Crevice Corrosion, Pitting Corrosion, Integranular corrosion, Erosion and hydrogen embrittlement. Mineral Acids, Organic Acids, Atmosphere Corrosion, sewage water treatment plants. (11) CORROSION MEASUREMENT & EVALUATION: Weight Loss method, Half cell potential Technique – Linear Polarization Resistance, Galvanostatic Pulse Technique – Electrochemical Impedance Spectroscopy, Cyclic Polarisation and Voltammetry and Corrosion Sensors for field monitoring. (11) CORROSION PREVENTION: Materials Selection: Metals & Alloys - Metal purification, Alteration of Environment changing mediums - Electrochemical techniques - Cathodic & Anodic protection, Sacrificial Anode. Coatings: metallic & other Inorganic coatings Organic coatings - Corrosion inhibitors. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Amir Poursaee, “Corrosion of Steel in Concrete Structures”, First Edition, Elseiver, Wood Head Publishing, 2016. 2. Luca Bertolini et al, “Corrosion of Steel in Concrete, Prevention, Diagonisis, Repair”, Second Edition, Wiley Publishing, 2014. 3. Mars G. Fontana, “Corrosion Engineering”, Third Edition, McGraw Hill Book Company, New York 1988. 4. Hans Bohni, “Corrosion in Reinforced Concrete Structures”, Woodhead Publishing Limited, Cambridge England, 2005.

18CN37 REMOTE SENSING 3003 REMOTE SENSING SYSTEM: Elements of EMR - wavelength regions – energy interaction in atmosphere – scattering atmospheric windows – terrestrial interaction – spectral reflectance curves – Planck„s blackbody law – displacement law and emissivity effects - heat capacity, thermal property of objects – Radar interaction with Earth surface and vegetation, Surface scattering theory - active and passive remote sensing - platforms. Sensors used in remote sensing - types of resolutions (11) SATELLITE DATA PRODUCT AND INTERPRETATION OF SATELLITE IMAGERIES: Thermal sensors - thermal image interpretation, Radar principles and applications – SRTM and its application -Types of data product - software and hardware requirement for data processing - Elements of visual image interpretation - Digital Image processing techniques, Landuse / landcover classification. (11) CHARACTERISTICS OF SATELLITES AND THEIR APPLICATIONS: GOES, NOAA, METEOSAT, INSAT - Land observation satellites: LANDSAT, SPOT, IRS, IKONOS, GEOEYE, QUICKBIRD, WORLDVIEW – SEASAT, SIRA, SIRB, ERS, JERS, RADARSAT and other currently available satellites. (12) REMOTE SENSING APPLICATIONS: Urban land use planning – urban sprawl - cadastral mapping - site selection for various infrastructure projects - resource management - mapping of infrastructure facilities and planning - integration of satellite imageries in GIS (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Lillisand T, Kiefer R. W and Chipman J., “Remote Sensing and Image Interpretation”, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2015. 2. Jensen, John R., “Remote Sensing of the Environment: An Earth Resource Perspective”, 2nd Ed., Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2007. 3. Sabins F F, "Remote Sensing - Principles and Interpretation", 3rd Edition, Waveland Press Inc., 2007. 4. James B. Campbell, “Introduction to Remote Sensing”, Taylor & Francis, London, 1996. 5. “American Society of Photogrammetry, Manual of Remote Sensing”, 2nd Edition, American Society of Photogrammetry, Falls Church, Virginia, 1983.

18CN38

GROUND IMPROVEMENT TECHNIQUES vide Structural Engineering 18CS38

AUDIT COURSES 18CN81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP81

18CN82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP82

64

59th ACM

09.06.2018

13. Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment ME COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING Course Code

Course Title

I SEMESTER Applied Mathematics For Computer Science 18ZC01 Engineering 18ZC02 Advanced Data Structures and Algorithms 18ZC03 Database Management Systems 18ZC04 Advanced Computer Architecture 18ZC05 Analysis and Design of Software Systems Advanced Data Structures and Algorithms 18ZC51 Laboratory 18ZC81 English for Research Paper Writing Total 22 Hrs II SEMESTER 18ZC06 Data Intensive Computing Systems 18ZC07 Advanced Operating Systems 18ZC08 Advanced Computer Networks 18ZC09 Embedded Systems 18ZC__ Professional Elective 1 18ZC__ Professional Elective 2 18ZC52 Data Intensive Computing Systems Laboratory 18ZC61 Industry Visit & Technical Seminar 18ZC82 Research Methodology and IPR Total 28 Hrs III SEMESTER 18ZC__ Professional Elective 3 18ZC__ Professional Elective 4 18ZC__ Professional Elective 5 18ZC__ Professional Elective 6* 18ZC53 Software Development Laboratory 18ZC71 Project Work I Total 20 Hrs IV SEMESTER 18ZC72 Project Work II Total 28 Hrs ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES Group I 18ZC21 Cloud Computing 18ZC22 XML and Web Services 18ZC23 Semantic Web Technology 18ZC24 Agile Software Development 18ZC25 Internet of Things Group II 18ZC26 Compiler Design 18ZC27 Evolutionary Computing Techniques 18ZC28 Information Retrieval 18ZC29 Natural Language Processing 18ZC30 Virtualization 18ZC31 Programming Paradigms 18ZC32 Cryptography and Network Security 18ZC33 Cellular Network Engineering 18ZC34 Adhoc and Sensor Networks 18ZC35 Memetic Algorithm 18ZC36 Computer Vision

(2018 REGULATIONS) (Minimum No. of credits to be earned: 72*) Hours/Week Maximum Marks Credits CAT Lecture Tutorial Practical CA FE Total 2

2

0

3

3 3 3 3

0 2 0 0

0 0 0 0

3 4 3 3

0

0

4

2

0 14

0 4

** 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 0 0 0 18

0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 2

3 3 3 2 0 0 11

PC

50

50

100

50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100

PC PC PC PC

100

PC

Grade 18

0 300

0 300

0 600

MC

0 0 0 0 0 0 4 4 ** 8

3 3 3 4 3 3 2 2 Grade 23

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 0 400

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 0 400

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 0 800

PC PC PC PC PE PE PC EEC MC

0 0 0 2 0 0 2

0 0 0 0 4 6 10

3 3 3 3 2 3 17

50 50 50 50 50 50 300

50 50 50 50 50 50 300

100 100 100 100 100 100 600

PE PE PE PE PC EEC

0 0

0 0

28 28

14 14

50 50

50 50

100 100

EEC

2 2 2 2 2

2 2 2 2 2

0 0 0 0 0

3 3 3 3 3

50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE PE

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE

65

59th ACM 18ZC37 18ZC38 18ZC39 18ZC40 18ZC41

Cognitive Computing Theoretical Computer Science Advanced Algorithms Software Defined Networks Machine Learning

09.06.2018 3 3 3 3 3

0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0

3 3 3 3 3

50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50

* Indicated is the minimum number of credits to be earned by a student. ** - 60 hrs in I semester and 90 hrs in II semester; Grade: Completed / Not Completed CAT – Category; PC – Professional Core; PE - Professional Elective EEC – Employability Enhancement Course; MC- Mandatory Course

66

100 100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE PE

59th ACM

09.06.2018 SEMESTER I 18ZC01 APPLIED MATHEMATICS FOR COMPUTER SCIENCE ENGINEERING 2203

NUMBER THEORY: Divisibility: properties of divisibility, fundamental theorem of arithmetic, division algorithm, Euclidean algorithm, extended Euclidean algorithm. Arithmetical functions - Möbius function, Euler totient function. Congruence - basic properties of congruence, residue classes and complete residue system, linear congruences, Euler-Fermat theorem, simultaneous linear congruences, Chinese remainder theorem. (8+7) APPLICATIONS OF NUMBER THEORY: Pseudo random bit generators: linear congruential generator, Blum Blum-Shub generator. Primality testing-Legendre and Jacobi symbols, the solovay -strassen algorithm, the Miller- Rabin algorithm. Classical cryptography – the shift cipher, the substitution cipher, the affine cipher.Public key cryptography - RSA cryptosystem. (8+7) GRAPH THEORY: Graphs - directed and undirected, subgraphs, graph models, degree of a vertex, degree sequence, handshaking lemma, walk, trail, path, connectedness, distance and diameter. Common classes of graphs – regular, complete Petersen, cycle, path, tree, bi-partite, hypercube, mesh - Isomorphic graphs. Representations of graphs – adjacency list, incidence list, adjacency matrix, incidence matrix, Eulerian graphs – Chinese postman problem and its solution – Hamiltonian graphs – travelling salesman problem – nearest neighbour algorithm. (8+7) STOCHASTIC PROCESSES: Classification, Markov chain: transition probability matrices – Chapman Kolmogorov equations classification of states, limiting probabilities, Poisson process - continuous time Markov chains: Kolmogorov equations, limiting probabilities, birth-death processes. (8+7) Total L:32 + T:28 = 60 REFERENCES: 1. Douglas R Stinson, “Cryptography: Theory and Practice”, Chapman Hall”, New York, 2017. 2. Saeed Ghahramani, “Fundamentals of Probability with Stochastic Processes”, Pearson, New Delhi, 2016. 3. Trivedi K S, “Probability and Statistics with Reliability, Queueing and Computer Science Applications”, John Wiley & Sons, New Delhi, 2016. 4. Yellen J and Gross J, “Graph Theory and its Applications”, Chapman & Hall, New York, 2006. 5. Tom M Apostol, “Introduction to Analytic Number Theory”, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 1998.

18ZC02/18ZS02 ADVANCED DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS 3003 ALGORITHM ANALYSIS: Analysis of iterative and recursive Algorithms – Asymptotic notations – Parallel Algorithms:IntroductionScalar Product of two vectors- Matrix multiplication. (10) TREES: Search Trees – Balanced Search Trees: AVL, RBT, Splay-Heaps: Binary heap, leftist heap, binomial heap, Fibonacci heap, Multi-dimensional data structure: kd tree (15) GRAPHS: Representation – Shortest path algorithms: Unweighted shortest path, Dijikstra’s algorithm, Graphs with negative edge costs, Acyclic graphs, All pairs shortest path – Network Flow problems – Activity Networks – DFS applications: Biconnectivity, Euler Circuits (10) DISJOINT SETS AND HASHING: Disjoint Sets: Representation – Union and find operations - Hashing: Static hashing – Dynamic hashing - Overflow handling - Bloom filters - Locality sensitive hashing (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Thomas H Cormen, Charles E Leiserson, Ronald L Rivest and Clifford Stein, “Introduction to Algorithms”, PHI learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2010 2. Venkatesan R and Lovelyn Rose S, “Data Structures”, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2015. 3. Mark Allen Weiss, “Data structures and Algorithm Analysis in C++”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2013. 4. Ellis Horowitz, SartajSahni, Susan Anderson-Freed, “Fundamentals of Data Structures in C”, Universities Press, Hyderabad, 2012. 5. Peter Brass, “Advanced Data Structures”, Cambridge University Press, New York, 2008.

18ZC03/18ZS03 DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS 3204 RELATIONALDATABASE:Relational database Design - ERDiagram, Extended ER Diagram, Reduction to relational schemas, Normalization- Functional Dependencies, Normal Forms,SQL (12+8) QUERY OPTIMIZATION: Algorithms for Query Processing – external sorting, SELECT and JOIN operation, PROJECT and set operation, aggregate operation and OUTER JOINs, Heuristics of Query Optimization, Cost Based Query Optimization. (11+7)

67

59th ACM

09.06.2018

TRANSACTION AND SECURITY: Properties of Transaction, Serializability, Concurrency Control – locking, timestamp, validation based protocols, Deadlock – prevention, detection, recovery, Database security – issues, access control. (12+7) TRENDS IN DATABASE: Introduction to NoSQL databases - Key-Value Stores – Columnar Stores – Document Stores, Graph database - The Power of Graph Databases - Options for Storing Connected Data -Data Modeling with Graphs-Building a Graph Database Application - Case Study - Neo4J. (11+8) Total L: 45 +T: 30=75 REFERENCES: 1. Thomas Connolly and CarlolynBegg, “Database Systems, A Practical Approach toDesign, Implementation and Management”, Pearson Education,Harlow,2015. 2. Sadalage, P. & Fowler,”NoSQL Distilled: A Brief Guide to the Emerging World of Polyglot Persistence”, Pearson Education,USA,2013 3. R. Elmasri, S.B. Navathe, “Fundamentals of Database Systems”, Pearson Education,USA,2016. 4. Redmond, E. &Wilson, “Seven Databases in Seven Weeks: A Guide to Modern Databases and the NoSQL Movement”,Prsgmatic Programmers, LLC,USA,2012. 5. Ian Robinson, Jim Webber, Emil Eifrem, Graph Databases, , New Opportunities for Connected Data, O'Reilly Media,USA, 2015

18ZC04 ADVANCED COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE 3003 DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF PROCESSOR AND MEMORY: Instruction Set Principles - Review of Memory Hierarchy - Pipelining – Quantitative design and analysis of Processor - Memory Hierarchy Design (12) INSTRUCTION LEVEL PARALLELISM: Pipelining and Handling Hazards - Instruction Scheduling - Static and Dynamic Branch Prediction - Hardware Based Speculation - Limitations of ILP. (11) DATA LEVEL PARALLELISM: Vector Architecture - SIMD Instruction Set - GPU Architecture - Detecting and Enhancing Loop Level Parallelism. (11) THREAD LEVEL PARALLELISM: Symmetric and Distributed Shared Memory Architectures - Performance Issues Synchronization - Models of Memory Consistency case studies of multi-core - Introduction to Domain Specific Architecture. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. John L Hennessey, John M Doe and David A Patterson, “Computer Architecture A Quantitative Approach”, Morgan Kaufmann, USA, 2017. 2. Randal E. Bryant, Davie Richard O'Hallaron, “Computer Systems: A Programmer's Perspective” , Pearson, 2016. 3. David A. Patterson, John L. Hennessy, “Computer Organization and Design MIPS Edition: The Hardware/Software Interface”, Morgan Kaufmann,2014. 4. Abraham Silberschatz, Peter B. Galvin, Greg Gagne, “Operating System Concepts”, Wiley Global Education, 2012.

18ZC05/18ZS05 ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF SOFTWARE SYSTEMS 3003 SOFTWARE ENGINEERING CONCEPTS: Software Characteristics –Software Myths – Software life cycle models – The Linear Sequential Model - The Incremental Model - The RAD Model - Evolutionary Software Process Models - The Prototyping Model Spiral Model –Agile Methods- Requirement Engineering - Requirement Engineering Tasks. (12) SYSTEM ANALYSIS: Requirement Analysis – Analysis Modelling Approaches – Data Flow Oriented Modelling – Context diagram, Data flow diagrams – Elements of Analysis Model - Data Modeling – Objects and Classes – Object Identification – Relationship among objects – classification . (11) UML MODELING: Unified Software Development Process – Scenario Based Modeling – Class Based Modeling – Behavioral Model – CASE tools. (11) SYSTEM DESIGN: Design Process – Design Concepts – Modularity – Functional Independence - Modular Design – Coupling – Cohesion – Refactoring – Design Model – Architectural Design - Component Level Design Element – Deployment Level Design – Architectural Styles and Patterns – IEEE Standard for Software Design Descriptions. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Roger Pressman S, “Software Engineering: A Practitioners”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2014 2. Booch G, Maksimchuk R A, Engel M W, Young B J, Conallen J, Houston K A, “Object Oriented Analysis and Design with Applications”, Addison-Wesley, USA, 2007. 3. Booch G, Rumbaugh J and Jacobson I, “The Unified Modeling Language User Guide”, Addison Wesley Professional,USA, 2005. 4. Ian Sommerville, “Software Engineering”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2011.

68

59th ACM

09.06.2018

18ZC51/18ZS51 ADVANCED DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS LABORATORY 0042 The students will design, analyse and implement suitable data structures like Arrays, linked lists, stacks, queues,Search Trees,Heaps,kd Tree, Graph Algorithms, Sets,Hashing for real world problems. Total P: 60

SEMESTER II 18ZC06/18ZS06 DATA INTENSIVE COMPUTING SYSTEMS 3003 . INFRASTRUCTURE: Cloud, Data intensive systems and Industry 4.0 – Cloud Architecture – Virtualisation – Data Virtualisation – Storage Virtualisation – Network Virtualisation: SAS,SAN – File Systems – Big Data Characteristics – Use cases – Data Analytics Life cycle – Case study. (12) STORAGE PLATFORMS: NoSQL – Key-value store - Hadoop Architecture – Map Reduce programming – Examples - Spark; Column-oriented stores – HBase architecture, Hive; Document stores – MongoDB architecture – examples ; Graph stores – Neo4j architecture – examples; Realtime Processing – Storm (11) THEORY AND METHODS-I: Preprocessing – Statistical measures – Hypothesis testing – ANOVA - feature selection – PCA Regression – linear, logistic – LDA – Association Rule Mining – Text Analysis (11) THEORY AND METHODS-II: Clustering – partitioning and hierarchical approaches – Classification – KNN, Decision trees, Naive Bayes, SVM– Time Series Analysis – ACF, AR, MA, ARMA, ARIMA – Stream Analysis (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. EMC Education Services, “Data Science and Big Data Analytics: Discovering, Analyzing, Visualizing and Presenting Data Big data science & analytics : a hands-on approach”, Wiley, 2015. 2. Jared Dean, “Big Data, Data Mining, and Machine Learning: Value Creation for Business Leaders and Practitioners”, Wiley, USA, 2014. 3. Gareth James, Daniela Witten, Trevor Hastie and Robert Tibshirani, “An Introduction to Statistical Learning with Applications in R”, Springer, USA, 2013. 4. Nathan Marz and James Warren, “Big Data - Principles and Best Practices of Scalable Realtime Data Systems”, MEAP Began, USA, 2012. 5. Venkata Josyula, Malcolm Orr & Greg Page, “Cloud Computing: Automating the Virtualized Data Center”, CISCO Press, USA, 2011.

18ZC07/18ZS33 ADVANCED OPERATING SYSTEMS 3003 PROCESS SCHEDULING & PROCESS SYNCHRONIZATION: Overview, Process scheduling, Operations on process, Inter process communication, Process scheduling criteria, process scheduling algorithms. Process Synchronization: Background, Hardware Support to Process Synchronization, Semaphores, Monitors - Memory Management Techniques. Case study: process scheduling in Linux. (12) DISTRIBUTED OPERATING SYSTEMS: Issues in Distributed Operating System – Architecture – Communication Primitives – Lamport’s Logical clocks – Causal Ordering of Messages – Distributed Mutual Exclusion Algorithms – Centralized and Distributed Deadlock Detection Algorithms – Agreement Protocols - Case Study: Remote Procedure call in Distributed Computing Environment. (11) DISTRIBUTED RESOURCE MANAGEMENT: Distributed File Systems – Design Issues - Distributed Shared Memory – Algorithms for Implementing Distributed Shared memory–Issues in Load Distributing – Scheduling Algorithms – Synchronous and Asynchronous Check Pointing and Recovery – Fault Tolerance – Two-Phase Commit Protocol – Non blocking Commit Protocol – Security and Protection. (11) REAL TIME AND MOBILE OPERATING SYSTEMS: Basic Model of Real Time Systems – Characteristics - Applications of Real Time Systems – Real Time Task Scheduling - Handling Resource Sharing - Mobile Operating Systems –Micro Kernel Design Client Server Resource Access – Processes and Threads - Memory Management - File system – case study - iOS and Android: Architecture and SDK Framework - Media Layer - Services Layer - Core OS Layer - File System. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Mukesh Singhal, Niranjan Shivaratri, “Advanced Concepts in Operating Systems”, McGrawHill,2011 2. William Stallings, “Operating Systems – Operating System: Internals and Design Principles”, Prentice Hall, 2014. 3. Nancy A Lynch, “Distributed Algorithms”, Morgan Kaufmann Series, Elsevier, 1996.

69

59th ACM 4. 5.

09.06.2018

Hagit Attiya, Jennifer Welch, “Distributed Computing: Fundamentals, Simulations and Advanced Topics”, McGraw-Hill, 2004. Rajib Mall, “Real-Time Systems: Theory and Practice”, Pearson, 2006.

18ZC08/18ZS34 ADVANCED COMPUTER NETWORKS 3003 INTERNET ROUTING, QOS ANALYSIS AND MULTICASTING: Internet Architecture - IP service Model – Routing Domains and Autonomous Systems – Intra Domain Routing Algorithms - Inter Domain-Routing: BGP - BGP Traffic Engineering. Routing Convergence.Need for QoS - End to End QoS - QoS Levels - Performance Measures: Bandwidth - Delay and Jitter - Packet Loss Throughput. Routing Overheads .Multicast: Address Assignments - Multicast Routing – DVMRP- Protocol Independent Multicasting. (12) TCP PERFORMANCE MODELING: TCP Segment format - TCP Sliding Windows - Congestion Control and Queuing - TCP Congestion Control - Analysis of TCP: Buffer Sizing - Throughput - Fairness - Random Early Detection Gateways for Congestion Avoidance. - Congestion Control for High Bandwidth - Delay Product Networks - Variations of TCP. (11) HIGH SPEED NETWORKS: Packet Switching Vs Cell Switching - ATM Networks: ATM Protocol Architecture - Logical Connections - ATM Cells - Service Categories - ATM Adaptation Layer - Traffic and Congestion Control In Frame Relay and ATM Networks. High-Speed LANS - Fast Ethernet - Gigabit Ethernet. (11) WIRELESS NETWORKS: Wireless Networks: Cellular Networks: GSM - UMTS - 3G and 4G Networks – IEEE E 802.11 - Bluetooth - WIMAX -.. WSN- Characteristics - Architecture – Applications- Network Virtualization and Software Defined Networking (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. James F Kurose, Keith W Ross, “Computer Networking - A Top-Down Approach Featuring the Internet”, Pearson Education, India, 2012. 2. Larry L Peterson and Bruce S Davie, “Computer Networks: A systems approach”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers Burlington, USA, 2011. 3. Andrew S Tanenbaum, “Computer Networks”, Prentice Hall, USA, 2010. 4. William Stallings, “High-Speed Networks and Internets: Performance and Quality of Service”, Pearson Education, India, 2002. 5. HolgerKarl , Andreas Willig, “Protocol and Architecture for Wireless Sensor Networks”, John Wiley Publication, 2002.

18ZC09 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS 3204 BASICS OF EMBEDDED SYSTEMS: Introduction - Fundamental Components of Embedded Systems - Challenges for Embedded Systems - Architecture of Embedded Systems - Embedded Design Life Cycle - Selection Process - Hardware Software Partitioning decision - Programming Embedded Systems. Memory Management: Memory Access Procedure - Memory Interfacing -- Memory Management Methods - Interrupts - Interrupt Latency – Re-entrancy - Interrupt Priority - Programmable Interrupt Controllers Interrupt Service Routines (13+8) COMMUNICATION INTERFACES: General Purpose Input Output(GPIO) interface - A/D and D/A converters - Serial Communication Interfaces - RS232/UART - RS422/RS485 – Mod bus - CAN bus - Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Interface - SPI Interface - USB - IrDA - Ethernet Interface – Wireless Communication - IEEE 802.11 – Bluetooth. (11+7) REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEMS: Real-Time Concepts – Real-time Task Management – Real-time Task Scheduling - Clock Driven Scheduling - Event Driven Scheduling - Resource Sharing and dependencies – Priority Inversion - Priority Inheritance Protocol - Priority Ceiling Protocol – Task synchronization - Mutex - Semaphores - Inter Task Communication - Message Queues – Signals - Timers - Commercial RTOS (11+7) VALIDATION AND DEBUGGING: Host and Target Machines - Validation Types and Methods - Host Testing - Host-Based Testing Setup – Toolchain - Cross-compilers -Target Testing - Remote Debuggers and Debug Kernels - ROM Emulator - Logical Analyzer Background Debug Mode – JTAG - In-Circuit Emulator CASE STUDY: RFID Card Verification System - GPS Navigation System - Development of Protocol Converter

(10+8)

Total L: 45 +T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Rajib Mall, ”Real-time systems: Theory and Practice”, Pearson Education India, 2009 2. Sriram V Iyer and Pankaj Gupta, “Embedded Real-time Systems Programming”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2006 3. Arnold S Berger, “Embedded Systems Design - An Introduction to Processes, Tools and Techniques”, CMP Books, USA, 2002. 4. Prasad K V K K, “Embedded/Real-Time Systems: Concepts, Design and Programming - The Ultimate Reference”, Himal Impressions, New Delhi, 2003. 5. Michael Barr, “Programming Embedded Systems in C and C++”, O'Reilly, 1999.

70

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18ZC52/18ZS52 DATA INTENSIVE COMPUTING SYSTEMS LABORATORY 0042

The students will learn to use data intensive computing platforms like Hadoop, Spark, Hbase, MongoDB, Neo4j and R for techniques like MapReduce, Machine Learning, Data Visualization, Regression, Clustering, Association Rule Mining, Classification, Time Series Analysis etc and are then applied to solve a data intensive problem. Total P: 60

18ZC61/18ZS61 INDUSTRY VISIT & TECHNICAL SEMINAR 0042 The student will make at least two technical presentations on current topics related to the programme. The same will be assessed by a committee appointed by the department. The students are expected to submit a report at the end of the semester covering the various aspects of his/her presentation together with the observation in industry visits. Total P: 30

SEMESTER III 18ZC53/18ZS53 SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT LABORATORY 0042 The student will demonstrate the ability to design research methodology that adequately addresses the following:  Idea generation and Concept Selection     

Design 



Identification of real time problem in the field of computers. Comparing and contrasting different types of research methods. Patent search for foolproof concept selection Time line of activities

Conceptualizing a research design and propose an innovative solution for the problem identified.

Development and Testing  

Model/prototype development Validation and testing

Report submission and presentation Total P: 60

18ZC71/18ZS71 PROJECT WORK I 0063       

Identification of a real world problem. Conduct literature survey Formulate a solution for the problem based on literature survey. Implementation of the modules Compare the results with existing solutions Write a technical report on the work done Publish the work in reputed national / international conferences Total P: 90

SEMESTER IV 18ZC72/18ZS72 PROJECT WORK II 0 0 28 14      

Problem Identification. Define the scope and objectives of the problem Develop a mathematical model with realistic assumptions. Propose a novel and original solution for the identified problem Implementation of the modules Interpretation and validation of results using formal research methods

71

59th ACM  

09.06.2018

Comparison with existing solutions Publish the work in refereed national / international journals Total P: 420

ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES 18ZC21 CLOUD COMPUTING 2203 INTRODUCTION TO CLOUD COMPUTING: The Vision of Cloud Computing - Defining a Cloud- A Cloud Computing Reference Model –Cloud Deployment Models: Public, Private, Community, Hybrid Clouds - Cloud Delivery Models: IaaS, PaaS, SaaS Characteristics and Benefits - Challenges Ahead - Historical Developments - Computing Platforms and Technologies. (8+7) VIRTUALIZATION: Introduction - Hypervisors – Challenges of X86 Architecture-Main Categories of Virtualization: Full, Para Levels of virtualization: Hardwrare, Programming language, Application, Operating system, Storage, network, desktop, Application Server - Benefits of Virtualization - Cost of Virtualization - Virtualization Drawbacks – Xen-KVM. (7+8) CLOUD TECHNOLOGIES : infrastructure as a service: Amazon EC2 - Platform as Service: Google App Engine, Microsoft Azure Amazon AWS , Aneka – Software as a service : RESTFul Web Services – SLA- Cloud Storage: MapReduce, GFS, HDFS, Hadoop Framework-Cloud container: Docker. (7+8) CLOUD SECURITY Infrastructure Security: Network level, Host level and Application level –Data Security- Identity and access Management: Architecture and Practices - Security Management in the Cloud – Availability management- access Control (8+7) Total L: 30 + T: 30=60 REFERENCES: 1. RajkumarBuyya, Christian Vecchiola and ThamaraiSelviS, “Mastering Cloud Computing”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited,New Delhi,2013. 2. Diane Barrett and Gregory Kipper, “Virtualization and Forensics: A Digital Forensic Investigators Guide to Virtual Environment”, Elsevier, USA,2010. 3. David S Linthicium, “Cloud computing and SOA convergence in your enterprise”, Pearson, USA,2010. 4. Tim Mather, SubraKumarasamy and ShahedLatif,“Cloud Security and Privacy: An Enterprise Perspective on Risks and Complainace”,O'Reilly, USA,2011. 5. Dimitris N. Chorafas, “Cloud Computing Strategies”CRC Press,2010 6. Sébastien Goasguen , “Docker in the Cloud -Recipes for AWS, Azure, Google, and More”, O’Reilly Media ,2016.

18ZC22 XML AND WEB SERVICES 2203 XML TECHNOLOGY: Benefits – XML Documents - Well-Formed XML – Validation - DTD – XML Schemas - Relax NG – Schematron (8+8) XMLPROCESSING: Parsing XML – Updating XML – Extracting Data from XML – XPATH – Xquery – XSLT.

(7+7)

WEBSERVICES AND IMPLEMENTATION: Architecture – Messaging – Service Description – Service Discovery – Service Transport Security – SOAPProtocol – WSDL – UDDI – Web Service Clients and Service Invocation – WS -* Standards. (8+8) REST BASED WEB SERVICES: Principles - Comparison with SOAP-XML Based Web Services – Design and Implementation of REST Services – Resource Oriented Architecture – best practices. (7+7) Total L: 30 + T: 30 = 60 REFERENCES: 1. KalinM, “Java Web Services: Up and Running”, O'Reilly Media, USA, 2013. 2. Fawcett J, Ayers D, Liam and REQ, “Beginning XML”, Wrox, 2012. 3. Richardson L and Ruby S, “Restful Web Services”, O'Reilly, USA, 2008. 4. Hansen MD, “SOA Using Java Web Services”, Prentice Hall, USA, 2007

18ZC23 SEMANTIC WEB TECHNOLOGY 2203 SEMANTIC WEB VISION: Introduction to syntactic web and semantic web-Evolution of web - Semantic Web Technologies Recommended Layered Architectures. Structured web documents - The XML Language: Structuring - Namespaces - Addressing and Querying XML Documents - Processing. (8+8)

72

59th ACM

09.06.2018

RESOURCE DESCRIPTION: RDF- RDF Schema: Axiomatic Semantics for RDF and RDF Schema - Direct Inference System for RDF and RDFS, Querying in SPARQL. (7+7) ONTOLOGY ENGINEERING AND WEB ONTOLOGY LANGUAGE: OWL Language - Ontology Examples - OWL in OWL - Future Extensions to OWL - Ontology engineering: Constructing Ontologies Manually - Reusing Existing Ontologies - Using Semiautomatic Methods - On-To-Knowledge Semantic Web Architecture. (8+8) INFERENCE RULES, TOOLS AND APPLICATIONS: Rules - Monotonic Rules: Syntax - Semantics - Representing Family Relationships. Non monotonic Rules: Syntax - Brokered Trade as an Example - Monotonic and Non monotonic Rule Markup. Development tools for semantic web - Jena Framework - Semantic Wikis-Semantic web service, Horizontal Information Products at Elsevier - Data Integration at Audi - Skill Finding at Swiss Life. (7+7) Total L: 30 + T: 30 = 60 REFERENCES: 1. Ducharme B, “Learning SPARQL”, O’Reilly Media, USA, 2018. 2. John Hebeler, Matthew Fisher, Ryan Blace and Andrew Perez-Lopez “Semantic web programming”, Wiley, 2009. 3. Antoniou Gand Van Harmelen F, “Semantic Web Primer”, MIT press, USA, 2008. 4. Davies J, Studer R and Warren P, “Semantic Web Technologies: Trends and Research in Ontology-based Systems”, Wiley, USA, 2006. 5. Daconta, MC, J Obrst L and SmitKT,“The Semantic Web: A Guide to the Future of XML, Web Services, and Knowledge Management”, Wiley, USA, 2003.

18ZC24/18ZS22 AGILE SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT 2203 AGILE PRINCIPLES AND MODELING: Introduction - Traditional, IID and Agile Methodologies – Comparison - Need - Manifesto – Values and Practices – Agile Modeling Values, principles and practices – Agile modeling with RUP (8+8) EXTREME PROGRAMMING: Life Cycle – User Stories – Architecture – Planning – Iteration – Testing – Release – XP Values – XP Practices – Planning – Coding – Pair Programming Model – Refactoring – Agile Modeling and XP – case study (7+7) SCRUM: Introduction – Practices - Applying Scrum – Need – Scrum Values - Practices- Tools in Agile Software Development – Case Study – Applying Scrum for IoT projects, Applying Scrum for Big Data Projects (7+7) OTHER AGILE DEVELOPMENT METHODOLOGIES: FDD – DSDM - Lean and Kanban Software development – Comparison of agile approaches - Case Studies - Defining Data Warehousing Projects for Iterative Development – User stories – agile estimation Adapting Iterative Development for Data warehousing Projects. ` (8+8) Total L: 30 + T: 30 = 60 REFERENCES: 1. Robert Martin, “Agile Software Development: Principles, Patterns, and Practices”, Pearson Education Ltd., 2014. 2. Jim Highsmith, “Agile Data Warehousing Project Management”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2012. 3. Alistair Cockburn, “Agile Software Development: The Cooperative Game”, Pearson Education, USA, 2006. 4. Scott Ambler, “Agile Modeling: Effective Practices for eXtreme Programming and the Unified Process”, Wiley Computer Publishing, 2002. 5. Ken Schwaber and Mike Beedle, “Agile Software Development with Scrum”, Prentice Hall, USA, 2001.

18ZC25/18ZS23 INTERNET OF THINGS 2203 IOT ARCHITECTURE: Introduction to IoT - M2M Architecture - Design Principles for Connected Devices - Definitions and Functional Requirements – Sensors and Actuators IOT Architecture - IETF Architecture for IoT - OGC Architecture - Communication Model (8+6) COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS: Protocol Standardization for IoT – Efforts – M2M and WSN Protocols – SCADA and RFID Protocols – Unified Data Standards – Protocols – IEEE 802.15.4 – BACNET Protocol – MODBUS – Zigbee Architecture – 6LOWPAN – LoRA-COAP - MQTT (8+6) ELECTRONIC PROTOTYPING: Prototypes and Production - Open Source versus Closed Source - Prototyping Embedded Devices - Prototyping IoT Projects with Arduino - Prototyping IOT Projects with Raspberry PI (8+8) CASE STUDIES AND IOT DATA ANALYTICS: Real world design constraints - Applications - Asset management, Industry 4.0, Smart grid, Commercial building automation, Smart cities Data Analytics for IoT – Edge analytics - sensor data fusion techniques Cloud Storage Models & Communication APIs - Cloud for IoT - Predictive analytics (8+8) Total L: 30 + T: 30 = 60

73

59th ACM

09.06.2018

REFERENCES: 1. Adrian McEwen and Hakim Cassimally, “Designing the Internet of Things”, John Wiley & Sons Ltd., UK, 2014. 2. Dieter Uckelmann, Mark Harrison and Florian Michahelles, “Architecting the Internet of Things”, Springer, 2011. 3. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick and OmarElloumi, “The Internet of Things: Key Applications and Protocols”, Wiley & Sons Ltd., UK, 2012. 4. David Boswarthick, Omar Elloumi and OlivierHersent, “M2M Communications: A Systems Approach”, John Sons Ltd, UK, 2012

18ZC26 COMPILER DESIGN 3003 LEXICALANALYSIS: Introduction to Compilers - Analysis of the Source Program, The Phases of a Compiler, The Grouping of Phases, Compiler Construction Tools, a Simple One-Pass Compiler, Language Design. The Role of the Lexical Analyzer - Input Buffering, Specification of Tokens, Recognition of Tokens, Regular Expressions - Finite Automata- Deterministic Finite Automata Converting RE to Non Deterministic Finite Automata - Converting NFA to DFA. LEX Specification – Design of Lexical Analyzer for a Sample language. (10) SYNTAX ANALYSIS: The Role of the Parser - Context Free Grammars - Top Down Parsing - Bottom Up Parsing - Recursive Descent Parser - Predictive Parser - Shift Reduce Parser - SLR Parser - LR Parser - LALR Parser - Error Handling and Recovery in Syntax Analyzer - YACC Specification – Design of a Syntax Analyzer for a Sample Languge. (12) SYNTAX DIRECTED DEFINITIONS AND INTERMEDIATE CODE GENERATION: Syntax Directed Definitions: Inherited and Synthesized Attributes - Construction of Syntax Trees - Bottom-Up Evaluation of S-Attributed and L-Attributed Definitions INTERMEDIATE CODE GENERATION: Intermediate Languages- Declarations, Assignment Statements, Boolean Expressions, Case Statements, Back Patching. Storage Management - Runtime Storage Management, Activation Record, Symbol Table Organization. (12) CODE OPTIMIZATION AND CODE GENERATION: Principal Sources of Optimization - Basic Blocks and Flow Graphs - DAG Representation - Optimization of Basic Blocks - Introduction to Global Data Flow Analysis - Peephole Optimization - Issues in the Design of Code Generator - A Simple Code Generator. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Alfred V Aho, Monica S Lam, Ravi Sethi and Jeffrey D Ullman, “Compilers - Principles, Techniques and Tools”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2008. 2. Sudha Sadasivam G, “Compiler Design”, Scitech Publications, Chennai, 2008. 3. Dhamdhere D M, “Compiler Construction Principles & Practice”, Macmillan India Ltd., New Delhi, 2001. 4. Jean Paul Tremblay and Paul G Serenson, “The Theory& Practice of Compiler Writing”, McGrawHill, New Delhi, 2001 5. Dick Grone, Henri E Bal, Ceriel J H Jacobs and Koen G Langendoen, “Modern Compiler Design” , John Wiley &Sons, New Delhi, 2000.

18ZC27/18ZS31 EVOLUTIONARY COMPUTING TECHNIQUES 3003 HEURISTIC AND METAHEURISTIC APPROACHES: Challenges in Solving Complex Problems - Evolutionary algorithms: Principles, Historical development, Features, Classification and Components, Advantages, Applications. Heuristic Search: Problem representation as search - Generate and Test - Breadth First Search - Depth First Search - Hill Climbing: Principles, Local and Global maxima, Ridges, Plateau - Steepest Ascent - Simulated annealing: Annealing schedule, Parameter Selection (12) GENETIC ALGORITHM: Biological Background - Simple Genetic Algorithm (SGA) - Representation types - Recombination Types Mutation types - GA Algorithm - Schema Theorem - Variations of GA: Adaptive GA, Real Coded GA - Differential Evolution: Principles, Mutation, Crossover, Selection (11) SWARM INTELLIGENCE: Particle Swarm Optimization: Swarms, Operating principles, PSO Algorithm, Neighborhood Topologies Variations of PSO: Binary, weighted - Ant Colony Optimization: Ant foraging behavior, Theoretical Considerations, ACO Algorithm, Variations of ACO: Elitist Ant System (EAS), MinMax Ant System (MMAS) and Rank Based Ant Colony System (RANKAS). (11) MULTI-OBJECTIVE OPTIMIZATION: Principles - Classical Methods - Challenges - Evolutionary algorithms for multi-objective optimization - Multimodal function optimization - Non-Dominated Sorting Genetic Algorithm (NSGA): Non-elitist, elitist - Controlled elitism in NSGA (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Eiben AE and Smith JE, “Introduction to Evolutionary Computing”, Springer, Heidelberg, 2015. 2. Rich E and Knight K, “Artificial Intelligence”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited, India, 2011. 3. Deb K, “Multi-Objective Optimization Using Evolutionary Algorithms”, Wiley-Blackwell, USA, 2008. 4. Dorigo M and Stutzle T, “Ant Colony optimization”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2005. 5. Kennedy J and Eberhart RC, “Swarm Intelligence”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, USA, 2001.

74

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18ZC28 INFORMATION RETRIEVAL 3003

INTRODUCTION: The notion of Relevance, The IR problems, Conceptual Models of IR systems, Characteristics of text collections, Term and Language properties for IR collections, Data and File Structures for Information Retrieval, Boolean Retrieval, Evaluation in information retrieval (12) INDEXING: Automatic Indexing, Indexing goals, Lexical Analysis, Stemming algorithms, Part-of-speech tagging and Parsing, Phrase recognition, Thesaurus Construction, Indexing and storage issues, Dictionaries and Tolerant Retrieval, Index Compression (11) RETRIEVAL MODELS AND SCORING: Vector Space Model: Term frequency and weighting, Probabilistic information retrieval: The Binary Independence Model, Language models for information retrieval, Computing Scores: Efficient scoring and ranking, Search Relevance and Query Understanding (11) TEXT CLASSIFICATION and WEB SEARCH: Issues in the classification of text documents, Naive Bayes, Support vector machines, Web Search: Web characteristics, Advertising as the economic model, Web crawling and indexes, Link analysis, Personalization. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. David A. Grossman and Ophir Frieder,” Information Retrieval: Algorithms and Heuristics”, Dordrecht, The Netherlands: Springer, 2014. 2. Bruce Croft W, Metzler D, and Strohman T, “Search Engines: Information Retrieval in Practice”, Addison Wesley, USA, 2013. 3. Gerald K, “Information Retrieval Architecture and Algorithms”, Springer, Heidelberg, 2013. 4. Manning C, Raghavan P, and Schutze H, “Introduction to Information Retrieval”, Cambridge University Press, New Delhi, 2012. 5. Ricardo Baeza-Yates and Berthier Ribeiro-Neto, “Modern Information Retrieval: The Concepts and Technology behind Search”, Addison Wesley, USA, 2012.

18ZC29 NATURAL LANGUAGE PROCESSING 3003 WORDS: Introduction - Mathematical Foundations – Linguistic Essentials - Regular Expressions, Text Normalization, Edit Distance - Finite State Transducers - Language Modeling with N-grams - Naive Bayes Classification and Sentiment - Neural Nets and Neural Language Models - Hidden Markov Models - Neural Sequence Modeling: RNNs and LSTMs - Part-of-Speech Tagging (12) SYNTAX: Formal Grammars of English - Syntactic Parsing – Ambiguity – Cocke Kasami Younger (CKY) algorithm - Partial Parsing - Statistical Parsing (11) SEMANTICS: Vector Semantics - Semantics with Dense Vectors - Computing with Word Senses: WSD and WordNet - Lexicons for Sentiment and Affect Extraction - The Representation of Sentence Meaning - Computational Semantics - Information Extraction Semantic Role Labeling and Argument Structure - Coreference Resolution and Entity Linking (11) PRAGMATICS AND APPLICATIONS: Discourse Coherence – Sequence To Sequence Models and Machine Translation Summarization - Question Answering (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Daniel Jurafsky and James H. Martin, “Speech and Language Processing”, Prentice-Hall, Inc., 2017. 2. Christopher D. Manning, Hinrich Schütze, “Foundations of Statistical Natural Language Processing”, The MIT Press, 2018. 3. Nitin Indurkhya, Fred J. Damerau, “Handbook of Natural Language Processing Machine Learning & Pattern Recognition Series, Chapman & Hall/CRC, Taylor and Francis Group, 2010. 4. Yoav Goldberg, “Neural Network Methods for Natural Language Processing”, Synthesis Lectures on Human Language Technologies, April 2017. 5. Steven Bird, Ewan Klein, and Edward Loper, “Natural Language Processing with Python - Analyzing Text with the Natural Language Toolkit”, O,Reilly.

18ZC30 VIRTUALIZATION 3003 ARCHITECTURE AND EMULATION: Computer architecture - Virtual Machine (VM): Basics and types – Taxonomy- Interpretation - Different types - Interpreting Complex Instruction Set - Binary Translation - Code Discovery and Dynamic Translation - Control Transfer Optimizations - Instruction Set Issues - Dynamic Program Behavior - Profiling - Optimization: Translation Blocks, Framework, Code Reordering and Optimization. (12) VM TYPES: Process VM: Issues, Emulation Types, Code Cache Management, System Environment - High Level Language (HLL) VM: Object Oriented HLL VMs, Java Virtual Machine (JVM), Common Language Infrastructure, Implementation and Issues, High Performance Emulation - Code Signed VM: Mapping, Code Issues and Caching, Traps, I/O. (11)

75

59th ACM

09.06.2018

SYSTEM VIRTUAL MACHINES: Key Concepts - Resource Virtualization: Processors, Memory, I/O - Performance Enhancement. (11) MULTIPROCESSOR VIRTUALIZATION AND CASE STUDY: Partitioning of Multiprocessor Systems - Partitioning: Physical, Logical - Different Host and Guest Instruction Set Architectures - Security - Migration of Computing Environments - Case Study: Virtual Box (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Portnoy M, “Virtualization Essentials”, Sybex, USA, 2012. 2. Ruest N and Ruest D, “Virtualization, A Beginner's Guide”, McGraw-Hill Osborne Media, USA, 2009. 3. Craig ID, “Virtual Machines”, Springer Verlag, Heidelberg, 2006. 4. Smith J E and Nair R, “Virtual Machines: Versatile Platforms for Systems and Processes”, Elsevier, India, 2005. 5. Wolf C and Halter EM, “Virtualization: From the Desktop to the Enterprise”, Apress, USA, 2005.

18ZC31 PROGRAMMING PARADIGMS 3003 BASICS OF PROGRAMMING: Role of Programming Languages - Programming Paradigms - Syntactic Structure - Expression Notations - Abstract Syntax Trees - Lexical Syntax - Context Free Grammars - Grammars for Expressions. Semantic Methods: Synthesized Attributes, Attribute Grammars, Natural Semantics, Denotational Semantics (11) IMPERATIVE AND OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING: Structured Programming - Syntax-Directed Control Flow - Design Considerations - Programming with Invariants - Data Representation - Data Types - Error Checking - Procedure Activations Parameter Passing - Scope and Scope Rules - Activation Records - Object Oriented Constructs - Information Hiding - Design With Modules - Defined Types - Declarations - Inheritance - Polymorphism - Dynamic Allocation – Templates. (11) FUNCTIONAL PROGRAMMING: Static Types and Lambda Calculus: Equality, Substitution, Pure Lambda Terms, Programming Constructs as Lambda Terms, Typed Lambda Calculus, Polymorphic Types. Types, Values and Operations - Expression Evaluation - Lexical Scope - Type Checking - Lists - Function Declaration by Cases - Functions as First-Class Values - ML: Implicit Types Data Types - Exception Handling In ML - Scheme: Structure of Lists, List Manipulation, Simplification of Expressions. (12) LOGIC AND CONCURRENT PROGRAMMING: Computing with Relations - Prolog: Data Structures, Programming Techniques, Control, Cuts - Concurrent Programming: Parallelism in Hardware, Streams and Implicit Synchronization, Concurrency as Interleaving, Liveness Properties - Safe Access to Shared Data. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Sebesta R W, “Concepts of Programming Languages”, Addison-Wesley, USA, 2012. 2. Harper R, “Practical Foundations for Programming Languages”, Cambridge University Press, USA, 2012. 3. Michael L. Scott, "Programming Language Pragmatics”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers Inc, USA, 2009. 4. Sethi R, “Programming Languages: Concepts and Constructs”, Addison-Wesley, USA, 2002.

18ZC32 CRYPTOGRAPHY AND NETWORK SECURITY 3003 SECURITY CONCEPTS & SYMMETRIC CIPHERS: The OSI Security Architecture - Security Attacks, Security Services - Security Mechanisms - A Model for Network Security - Classical Encryption Techniques: Symmetric Cipher model, substitution techniques, Transposition techniques, Steganography. Block Ciphers and Data Encryption Standard: Block Cipher Principles, DES. (10) PUBLIC-KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY: Number Theory: Prime Numbers, Fermat’s and Euler’s Theorems - Principles of Public-Key Cryptosystems - The RSA Algorithm - Diffie - Hellman Key Exchange - Elliptic Curve Cryptography (10) CRYPTOGRAPHIC HASH FUNCTIONS: Applications of Cryptographic Hash Functions - Secure Hash Algorithm (SHA) Message Authentication Codes - Message Authentication Requirements - Message Authentication Functions- Digital Signatures - Digital Signature Standard (DSS). (10) MUTUAL TRUST, NETWORK& INTERNET SECURITY: Key Management and Distribution: Symmetric Key Distribution Using Symmetric Encryption, Asymmetric Encryption - Distribution of Public Keys - X.509 Certificates - Public Key Infrastructure – Transport Level Security - Basic Concepts, Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) - Transport-Level Security, Transport Layer Security (TLS) - HTTPS - Secure Shell (SSH) - Introduction to quantum cryptography - Ethical hacking (15) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. William Stallings, “Cryptography and Network Security: Principles and Practice”, Prentice Hall of India Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2013. 2. AtulKahate, “Cryptography and Network Security”, Tata McGraw Hill Ltd., New Delhi, 2013. 3. Bernard Menezes, “Cryptography and Network Security”, Cengage Learning India, New Delhi, 2010. 4. Behrouz A and Forouzan, “Cryptography and Network Security”, Tata McGraw Hill Ltd., New Delhi, 2008.

76

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18ZC33 CELLULAR NETWORK ENGINEERING 3003

CELLULAR NETWORK and MAC LAYER: Introduction – Mobile IP: IP packet delivery, Agent discovery, tunneling and encapsulation, IPV6-Network layer in the internet-Routing, Destination Sequence distance vector – Cellular Network applications Important Issues and the Need for Medium Access Control (MAC) Protocols - Classification of MAC Protocols - Multiple-Channel MAC Protocols. (12) CELLULAR TRANSPORT LAYER: TCP enhancements for wireless protocols – Traditional TCP: Congestion control, fast retransmit/fast recovery, Implications of mobility – Classical TCP improvements: Indirect TCP, Snooping TCP, Mobile TCP, Time out freezing, Selective retransmission, Transaction oriented TCP – TCP over 3G wireless networks. (11) CELLULAR WIDE AREA NETWORK: Overview of UMTS Terrestrial Radio access network - UMTS Core network Architecture: 3GMSC, 3G-SGSN, 3G-GGSN, Firewall, DNS/DHCP - High speed Downlink packet access (HSDPA) - LTE network architecture and protocol. (11) 4G NETWORKS: Introduction – 4G vision – 4G features and challenges – Applications of 4G – 4G Technologies: Multicarrier Modulation, Smart antenna techniques, OFDM-MIMO systems, Adaptive Modulation and coding with time slot scheduler, Cognitive Radio. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. D.P. Agrawal and Qing-Anzeng, “Introduction to Wireless and Mobile Systems”, CL Engineering, 2010. 2. Subir Kumar Sarkar, T.G. Basavaraju, C. Puttamadappa, “Ad Hoc Mobile Wireless Networks: Principles, Protocols and Applications”, Auerbach Publications, 2013. 3. Jonathan Loo, Jaime Lloret Mauri, Jesús Hamilton Ortiz, “Mobile Ad Hoc Networks: Current Status and Future Trends”, CRC Press, 2012. 4. Radhika Ranjan Roy, “Handbook of Mobile Ad Hoc Networks for Mobility Models”, Springer Science+Business Media, LLC 2011. 5. Joh R. Vacca, “Wireless Broadband Networks Handbook 3G, LMDS and Wireless Internet”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2001.

18ZC34 ADHOC AND SENSOR NETWORKS 3003 AD HOC NETWORKS &MAC: Introduction – Self Organizing behavior – Issues and classification of MAC protocol - MACA MACAW – DBTMA. (12) AD HOC NETWORKS: ROUTING AND TRANSPORT LAYER: Routing challenges in Ad hoc Network- Classification- Proactive, reactive, and hybrid routing protocols -DSDV, AODV, DSR, OLSR, CBRP, FSR. Issues of TCP in Ad hoc Networks - TCP Over Ad Hoc Networks (11) SENSOR NETWORK: Challenges for Wireless Sensor Networks - Single Node Architecture - Hardware Components - Energy Consumption of Sensor Nodes – Single hop versus Multi hop Networks - Sensor Network Applications. Coverage problem in Sensor Network - Types of coverage - OGDC coverage algorithm (11) SENSOR NETWORK: MAC AND ROUTING: Classification of MAC protocols - MAC related properties - MAC performance issues MAC protocols for sensor networks - Issues with the adoption of ad hoc routing protocols - Data-centric routing - Position-based routing - Data aggregation - Clustering-based routing algorithm (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. C Siva Ram Murty & BS Manoj, “Ad HOC Wireless Networks: Architectures & Protocols”, Pearson Education,2004. 2. Mohamed Illayas , “Handbook of Ad Hoc Wireless Network”, CRC Press,2002. 3. Ibrahiem M. M. El Emary, S. Ramakrishnan, “Wireless Sensor Networks: From Theory to Applications”, CRC Press, 2013. 4. Ian Akyildiz, Mehmet Can Vuran, “Wireless Sensor Networks” John Wiley & Sons USA 2010. 5. Kazem Sohraby, Daniel Minoli, Taieb Znati, “Wireless Sensor Networks Technology, Protocols and Applications”, John Wiley & Sons, Online.

18ZC35 MEMETIC ALGORITHM 3003 INTRODUCTION: Optimization - Evolutionary Algorithms: Components, Operation, variants, design and Tuning – Local Search: Basic concepts, Neighborhoods and Local optima, Classifications, Local search in combinatorial and continuous domains (12) MEMETIC ALGORITHM (MA) DESIGN ISSUES: Need for MA - MA template - Design issues - Balancing Global and Local search Time complexity of Local search - Diversity management (11) SELF-ADAPTATIVE AND COEVOLVING MA: Self-adaption and co-evolution - framework, Self adaptation of fixed and varying sized rules - Population size Variation - Handling Uncertainties (11)

77

59th ACM

09.06.2018

MULTI-OBJECTIVE MEMETIC ALGORITHMS (MOMA): Basic Concepts, Adaption of Memetic algorithms for multi-objective optimization, Examples of MOMA, Implementation of MOMA - Applications (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Ferrante Neri, Carlos Cotta, and Pablo Moscato, “Handbook of Memetic Algorithms”, Studies in Computational Intelligence, Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg, 2012. 2. Chi-Keong Goh, Yew Soon Ong , Kay Chen Tan, “Multi-Objective Memetic Algorithms”, Studies in Computational Intelligence, Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg, 2009. 3. William E. Hart, Dr. J. E. Smith, N. Krasnogor, “Recent Advances in Memetic Algorithms”, Studies in Fuzziness and Soft Computing, Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg, 2005.

18ZC36 COMPUTER VISION 3003 INTRODUCTION: Motivation, Difficulty, Image analysis tasks, Image representations, Image digitization, Image properties, Color images, Cameras (11) DATA STRUCTURES AND TEXTURE: Levels of image data representation - Traditional image data structures - Hierarchical data structures - Statistical texture description, Syntactic texture description methods, Hybrid texture description methods, Texture recognition method applications (11) OBJECT RECOGNITION AND 3D VISION: Knowledge representation, Statistical pattern recognition, Neural nets, Syntactic pattern recognition, Recognition as graph matching, Optimization techniques in recognition, Fuzzy systems-3D vision: Tasks - Basics of projective geometry - Scene construction from multiple views, Uses: Shape from X - Full 3D objects - 3D model based vision - 2D view based 3D representation. (12) MOTION ANALYSIS: Differential motion analysis methods, Optical flow, Analysis based on interest points, Detection of specific motion patterns, Video Tracking, Motion models to aid tracking. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Milan Sonka, Vaclav Hlavac and Roger Boyle, “Image Processing, Analysis and Machine Vision”, Cengage Learning, New Delhi, 2014. 2. Wesley E. Synder and Hairong Qi, “Machine Vision”, Cambridge University Press, USA, 2010. 3. Richard Szeliski, “Computer Vision: Algorithms and Applications”, Springer-Verlag, London, 2011. 4. Rafael C Gonzalez, Richard E Woods, Steven L Eddins, “Digital Image Processing”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009.

18ZC37 COGNITIVE COMPUTING 3003 INTRODUCTION TO COGNITIVE SCIENCE AND COGNITIVE COMPUTING WITH AI: Cognitive Computing - Cognitive Psychology - The Architecture of the Mind - The Nature of Cognitive Psychology – Cognitive architecture – Cognitive processes – The Cognitive Modeling Paradigms - Declarative / Logic based Computational cognitive modeling – connectionist models – Bayesian models. Introduction to Knowledge-Based AI – Human Cognition on AI – Cognitive Architectures (12) COGNITIVE COMPUTING WITH INFERENCE AND DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEMS: Intelligent Decision making - Fuzzy Cognitive Maps – Learning algorithms: Non linear Hebbian Learning – Data driven NHL - Hybrid learning – Fuzzy Grey cognitive maps – Dynamic Random fuzzy cognitive Maps (11) COGNITIVE COMPUTING WITH MACHINE LEARNING: Machine learning Techniques for cognitive decision making – Hypothesis Generation and Scoring - Natural Language Processing - Representing Knowledge - Taxonomies and Ontologies - Deep Learning (11) CASE STUDIES: Cognitive Systems in health care – Cognitive Assistant for visually impaired – AI for cancer detection, Predictive Analytics - Text Analytics - Image Analytics -Speech Analytics – IBM Watson - Introduction to IBM’s PowerAI Platform - Introduction to Google’s TensorFlow Development Environment (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Hurwitz, Kaufman, and Bowles, “Cognitive Computing and Big Data Analytics”, Wiley, Indianapolis, 2005. 2. Jerome R. Busemeyer, Peter D. Bruza, “Quantum Models of Cognition and Decision”, Cambridge University Press, 2014. 3. Emmanuel M. Pothos, Andy J. Wills, “Formal Approaches in Categorization”, Cambridge University Press, 2011. 4. Nils J. Nilsson, “The Quest for Artificial Intelligence”, Cambridge University Press, 2009. 5. Neil Stillings, Steven E. Weisler, Christopher H. Chase and Mark H. Feinstein, “Cognitive Science: An Introduction”, MIT Press, 1995.

78

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18ZC38 THEORETICAL COMPUTER SCIENCE 3003

REGULAR LANGUAGES AND FINITE AUTOMATA: Basics of Automata Theory - Chomsky Hierarchy of Grammars and the Corresponding Acceptors. Regular Expression - Deterministic FA - Non deterministic FA - Minimization of DFA - Pumping Lemma of Regular Languages - Decision Problems. Context Free Grammars - Non Deterministic PDA (11) DECISION PROBLEM: Decision properties Turing Machines - Variants of TMs - Programming Techniques for TMs - Non Deterministic TMs - TMs and Computers - Recursive and Recursively Enumerable Languages. (11) COMPUTABILITY THEORY: Hilbert's Problem - Computable Functions – The Recursion Theorem - Decidable Language Universal Turing Machines - Undecidablity - Halting Problem - Rice Theorem - Post Correspondence Problem - Church Turing thesis. (11) TIME AND SPACE COMPLEXITY THEORY: Tractable and Intractable Problems - Time of Tractable Problems – P, NP, NPComplete Classes - Boolean Satisfiability Problem - Polynomial Time Reductions - Proof of NP-completeness : Vertex Cover Problem - Clique Problem - Hamiltonian Circuit problem - TSP - NP hard, Cook LevininTheorem. Space Complexity of tractable problems – Savitch’s theorem – Class PSPACE – PSPACE Completeness – Class L and NL – NL Completeness – coNL. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Michael Sipser, “Introduction to the Theory of Computation”, Thomson course Technology, USA, 2012. 2. John C Martin, “Introduction to Languages and the Theory of Computation”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi, 2007. 3. John E Hopcroft and Rajeev Motwani and Jeffrey D Ullman, “Introduction to Automata Theory, Languages and Computation”, Pearson Education Asia, New Delhi, 2006. 4. Peter Linz, “An Introduction to Formal Language and Automata”, Narosa Publishers, New Delhi, 2006. 5. Harry R Lewis, Christos H Papadimitriou, “Elements of the Theory of Computation”, Prentice Hall of India/Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2003. 6. Christos H Papadimitriou, “Computational Complexity”, Addison-Wesley, New York, 1994.

18ZC39 ADVANCED ALGORITHMS 3003 ADVANCED RANDOMIZATION AND HARDNESS OF APPROXIMATION: Algorithm for Bipartite Matching - Constructing Perfect Matching - Randomized Markov Chains - Ergodicity - Time Reversal. Hardness of Approximation: Reductions from NP-Complete Problems Reductions that Preserve Approximation. (12) MULTITHREADED ALGORITHMS: Dynamic Multithreaded Algorithms - Performance Measures and Scheduling – Analyzing Multithreaded Algorithms - Parallel Loops and Race Conditions - Multithreaded Matrix Multiplication – Merge Sort. (11) ONLINE ALGORITHMS: Investment Problem- Ski Rental Problem – Randomized On-Line Algorithms - Analysis of Marking Algorithm and Finding Lower Bound - The K-Server Problem (11) STRING MATCHING: Notations - Naive String Matching Algorithm - Rabin-Karp Algorithm - String Matching with Finite Automata Knuth-Morris - Pratt Algorithm. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Thomas H Cormen, Charles E Leiserson, Ronald L Rivest and Clifford Stein, “Introduction to Algorithms” ”, PHI learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2010. 2. David P. Williamson and David B. Shmoys, ”The Design of Approximation Algorithms”, Cambridge University Press, 2010 3. Allan Borodin and Ran El-Yaniv, “Online Computation and Competitive Analysis”, Cambridge-UK, Cambridge University Press, 1998. 4. Michel Goemans, “Lecture Notes on Advanced Algorithms”, MIT,1996.

18ZC40 SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORKS 3003 NETWORK FUNCTION VIRTUALIZATION: History and Evolution of Software Defined Networking (SDN): IETF Forces, Active Networking. Control and Data Plane Separation: Concepts, Advantages and Disadvantages, the OpenFlow protocol - Network Function Virtualization: Concepts, Applications, Existing Network Virtualization Framework (VMWare and others), Mininet based examples. (12) CONTROL AND DATA PLANE SEPARATION: Control Plane: Overview, Existing SDN Controllers including Floodlight and OpenDaylight projects - Customization of Control Plane: Switching and Firewall Implementation using SDN Concepts. Data Plane: Software-based and Hardware-based; Programmable Network Hardware. Programming SDNs: Northbound Application Programming Interface, Current Languages and Tools, Composition of SDNs. (11)

79

59th ACM

09.06.2018

SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORKS FOR THE INTERNET-OF-THINGS: Challenges - Understanding the nature of IoT traffic flows in different use cases-A software defined end-to-end IoT Infrastructure - Effective resource provisioning in the IoT Multinetwork environments - Addressing scalability and security issues- Adding SDN automation and verification in IoT infrastructure. (11) USE CASES OF SDNS: Data Centers, Internet Exchange Points, Backbone Networks, Home automation Systems, Industrial automation Systems and Smart grids. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Thomas D. Nadeau, Ken Gray, “SDN: Software Defined Networks, An Authoritative Review of Network Programmability Technologies”, O'Reilly Media, 2013. 2. Paul Goransson and Chuck Black, “Software Defined Networks: A Comprehensive Approach”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2014. 3. Vivek Tiwari, “SDN and OpenFlow for Beginners”, Amazon Digital Services, Inc., 2013. 4. Fei Hu, “Network Innovation through OpenFlow and SDN: Principles and Design”, CRC Press, 2014.

18ZC41/18ZS37 MACHINE LEARNING 3003 COMPUTATIONAL LEARNING THEORY BASICS: Introduction: Types of Learning - Designing a learning system – concept learning - Find-s – Candidate Elimination - PAC Learnabilty- Sample complexity for finite and Infinite hypothesis spaces-VC Dimension - Evaluating Hypothesis - Estimating Hypothesis Accuracy - Error Estimation - Bias-Variance - Confidence Interval Central Limit Theorem (12) LINEAR MODELS: Linear Models For Regression – Linear Regression Models, Maximum Likelihood Estimation - Least Squares, The Bias-Variance Decomposition, Bayesian Linear Regression, Linear Models for Classification, Probabilistic Generative Models, Probabilistic Discriminative Models, Linear Discriminant Analysis. (11) NEURAL NETWORKS: Neural Networks - Feed-forward Networks - Network Training - Delta Rule- Gradient Descent - Error Backpropagation - Regularization in Neural Networks. (11) KERNEL AND GRAPHICAL METHODS: Kernel Methods - Constructing Kernels- Radial Basis Function Networks - Gaussian Processes - Maximum Margin Classifiers – SVM - Graphical Methods – Bayes Theorem - Bayesian Networks - Markov Random Fields - Inference in Graphical Models - Mixture Models – Expectation Maximization. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Christopher Bishop, “Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning”, Springer-Verlag New York, 2013. 2. Tom M. Mitchell, “Machine Learning”, McGraw Hill, 1997. 3. Trevor Hastie, Robert Tibshirani, Jerome Friedman, “The Elements of Statistical Learning - Data Mining, Inference, and Prediction”, Second Edition, Springer Series in Statistics, Springer-Verlag New York, 2013. 4. Yaser S. Abu Mostafa, Malik Magdon Ismail, Hsuan Tien Lin, “Learning From Data A Short Course”, Amlbook.Com, 2012.

AUDIT COURSES 18ZC81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP81

18ZC82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP82

80

59th ACM

09.06.2018

13. Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment ME SOFTWARE ENGINEERING Course Code

Course Title

I SEMESTER 18ZS01 Applied Statistics and Reliability 18ZS02 Advanced Data Structures and Algorithms 18ZS03 Database Management Systems 18ZS04 Open Source Software 18ZS05 Analysis and Design of Software Systems 18ZS51 Advanced Data Structures and Algorithms Laboratory English for Research Paper Writing 18ZS81 Total 23 Hrs II SEMESTER 18ZS06 Data Intensive Computing Systems 18ZS07 Software Testing and Quality Assurance 18ZS08 Software Engineering Management 18ZS09 Software Architecture 18ZS__ Professional Elective 1 18ZS__ Professional Elective 2 18ZS52 Data Intensive Computing Systems Laboratory 18ZS61 Industry Visit & Technical Seminar Research Methodology and IPR 18ZS82 Total 28 Hrs III SEMESTER 18ZS__ Professional Elective 3 18ZS__ Professional Elective 4 18ZS__ Professional Elective 5 18ZS__ Professional Elective 6 18ZS53 Software Development Laboratory 18ZS71 Project Work I Total 20 Hrs IV SEMESTER 18ZS72 Project Work II Total 28 Hrs ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES Group I 18ZS21 User Interface Design 18ZS22 Agile Software Development 18ZS23 Internet of Things Group II 18ZS24 Systems Engineering 18ZS25 Software Reliability 18ZS26 Software Metrics 18ZS27 Design Patterns 18ZS28 Decision Support Systems 18ZS29 Privacy Preserving Data Mining 18ZS30 Agent Based Intelligent Systems 18ZS31 Evolutionary Computing Techniques 18ZS32 Data Integration 18ZS33 Advanced Operating Systems 18ZS34 Advanced Computer Networks 18ZS35 Social Networks Data Analytics 18ZS36 Privacy in Social Networks 18ZS37 Machine Learning

(2018 REGULATIONS) (Minimum No. of credits to be earned: 72*) Hours/Week Maximum Marks Credits CAT Lecture Tutorial Practical CA FE Total 2 3 3 2 3

2 0 2 2 0

0 0 0 0 0

3 3 4 3 3

50 50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100

PC PC PC PC PC

2

50 50 50 50 50 50

0

0

4

100

PC

0 13

0 6

** 4

Grade 18

0 300

0 300

0 600

MC

3 3 3 3 3 3 0 0 0 18

0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2

0 0 0 0 0 0 4 4 ** 14

3 4 3 3 3 3 2 2 Grade 23

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 0 400

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 0 400

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 0 800

PC PC PC PC PE PE PC EEC MC

3 3 3 2 0 0 11

0 0 0 2 0 0 2

0 0 0 0 4 6 10

3 3 3 3 2 3 17

50 50 50 50 50 50 300

50 50 50 50 50 50 300

100 100 100 100 100 100 600

PE PE PE PE PC EEC

0 0

0 0

28 28

14 14

50 50

50 50

100 100

EEC

2 2 2

2 2 2

0 0 0

3 3 3

50 50 50

50 50 50

100 100 100

PE PE PE

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE

* Indicated is the minimum number of credits to be earned by a student.

81

59th ACM

09.06.2018

** - 60 hrs in I semester and 90 hrs in II semester; Grade: Completed / Not Completed CAT – Category; PC – Professional Core; PE - Professional Elective EEC – Employability Enhancement Course; MC- Mandatory Course

SEMESTER I 18ZS01 APPLIED STATISTICS AND RELIABILITY 2203 REGRESSION AND CORRELATION: Curve fitting, method of least squares - inferences based on the least squares estimator correlation - curvilinear regression - multiple regression. (8+7) STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL: Statistical process control – chance and assignable causes of quality variation, statistical basis of control charts - control charts for variables - , R and s charts - control charts for attributes – p, np, c and u charts. (8+7) ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING: Lot-by-Lot acceptance sampling for attributes – single sampling plans for attributes, double, multiple and sequential sampling plans, acceptance sampling by variables - chain sampling, continuous sampling, skip-lot sampling plans. (8+7) RELIABILITY: Failure distribution - reliability function, mean time to failure, hazard rate function, bathtub curve, conditional reliability, constant failure rate model – exponential reliability function, failure models, time dependent failure models - Weibull and normal distributions - serial configuration, parallel configuration, combined series parallel systems, system structure function, minimal cuts and minimal paths, state dependent systems. (8+7) Total L:32 +T: 28 = 60 REFERENCES: 1. Richard A Johnson, Irwin Miller and John Freund’s, “Probability and Statistics for Engineers”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2018. 2. Charles E Ebeling, “An Introduction to Reliability and Maintainability Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2017. 3. Eugene L Grant, Richard S Leavenworth, “Statistical Quality Control”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2016. 4. Trivedi K S, “Probability and Statistics with Reliability, Queueing and Computer Science Applications”, John Wiley & Sons, New Delhi, 2016. 5. Douglas C Montgomery, “Introduction to Statistical Quality Control”, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2009.

18ZS02/18ZC02 ADVANCED DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS 3003 ALGORITHM ANALYSIS: Analysis of iterative and recursive Algorithms – Asymptotic notations – Parallel Algorithms:IntroductionScalar Product of two vectors- Matrix multiplication. (10) TREES: Search Trees – Balanced Search Trees: AVL, RBT, Splay-Heaps: Binary heap, leftist heap, binomial heap, Fibonacci heap, Multi-dimensional data structure: kd tree (15) GRAPHS: Representation – Shortest path algorithms: Unweighted shortest path, Dijikstra’s algorithm, Graphs with negative edge costs, Acyclic graphs, All pairs shortest path – Network Flow problems – Activity Networks – DFS applications: Biconnectivity, Euler Circuits (10) DISJOINT SETS AND HASHING: Disjoint Sets: Representation – Union and find operations - Hashing: Static hashing – Dynamic hashing - Overflow handling - Bloom filters - Locality sensitive hashing (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Thomas H Cormen, Charles E Leiserson, Ronald L Rivest and Clifford Stein, “Introduction to Algorithms”, PHI learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.. 2. Venkatesan R and Lovelyn Rose S, “Data Structures”, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2015. 3. Mark Allen Weiss, “Data structures and Algorithm Analysis in C++”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2013. 4. Ellis Horowitz, SartajSahni, Susan Anderson-Freed, “Fundamentals of Data Structures in C”, Universities Press, Hyderabad, 2012. 5. Peter Brass, “Advanced Data Structures”, Cambridge University Press, New York, 2011.

18ZS03/18ZC03 DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS 3204 RELATIONALDATABASE:Relational database Design - ERDiagram, Extended ER Diagram, Reduction to relational schemas, Normalization- Functional Dependencies, Normal Forms,SQL (12+8) QUERY OPTIMIZATION: Algorithms for Query Processing – external sorting, SELECT and JOIN operation, PROJECT and set operation, aggregate operation and OUTER JOINs, Heuristics of Query Optimization, Cost Based Query Optimization. (11+7)

82

59th ACM

09.06.2018

TRANSACTION AND SECURITY: Properties of Transaction, Serializability, Concurrency Control – locking, timestamp, validation based protocols, Deadlock – prevention, detection, recovery, Database security – issues, access control. (12+7) TRENDS IN DATABASE: Introduction to NoSQL databases - Key-Value Stores – Columnar Stores – Document Stores, Graph database - The Power of Graph Databases - Options for Storing Connected Data -Data Modeling with Graphs-Building a Graph Database Application - Case Study - Neo4J. (11+8) Total L: 45 +T: 30=75 REFERENCES: 1. Thomas Connolly and CarlolynBegg, “Database Systems, A Practical Approach toDesign, Implementation and Management”, Pearson Education,Harlow,2015. 2. Sadalage, P. & Fowler,”NoSQL Distilled: A Brief Guide to the Emerging World of Polyglot Persistence”, Pearson Education,USA,2013 3. R. Elmasri, S.B. Navathe, “Fundamentals of Database Systems”, Pearson Education,USA,2016. 4. Redmond, E. &Wilson, “Seven Databases in Seven Weeks: A Guide to Modern Databases and the NoSQL Movement”,Prsgmatic Programmers, LLC,USA,2012. 5. Ian Robinson, Jim Webber, Emil Eifrem, Graph Databases, , New Opportunities for Connected Data, O'Reilly Media,USA, 2015.

18ZS04 OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE 2203 BASICS OF PYTHON: Python - Variables - Executing Python from the Command Line - Editing Python Files - Python Reserved Words - Basic Syntax-Comments - Strings and Numeric Data Types - Simple Input and Output. Control Flow and Syntax - Indenting - if Statement - Relational Operators - Logical Operators - Bit Wise Operators - while Loop - break and continue - for Loop - Lists – Tuples - Sets - Dictionaries. (8+8) PYTHON PROGRAMMING: Functions - Passing parameters to a Function - Variable Number of Arguments - Scope - Passing Functions to a Function - Mapping Functions in a Dictionary – Lambda - Modules - Standard Modules – sys – math – time - dir Function. Error Handling: Run Time Errors - Exception Model - Exception Hierarchy - Handling Multiple Exceptions - Data Streams Access Modes Writing - Data to a File Reading - Data From a File - Additional File Methods - Using Pipes as Data Streams Handling IO Exceptions - Working with Directories. (7+7) BASICS OF PHP: Introduction to Open Source Programming and Scripting Language PHP - Variables – data types – arrays – array functions - Control structures – String manipulation – anonymous function - File Handling and Data Storage - Working with Forms – development of applications using PHP with Mysql (8+8) WEB SERVERS AND MYSQL: Web Server – Feature – Architectures - Case Study: Apache Web Server - Configuring and Using Web Server - Comparison of Apache Web Server with Commercial Web Servers. MySQL - Internals and Portability - Data Types Security - Scalability - Connectivity – Localization – PostgreSQL - CouchDB - Hbase (7+7) Total L:30 + T:30 = 60 REFERENCES: 1. Julie Meloni, “Teach Yourself PHP, MySQL and Apache All in One”, Pearson Education, USA, 2012. 2. Wesley J Chun, “Core Python Applications Programming”, Prentice Hall, 2012. 3. Allen B Downey, “Think Python”, O’Reilly, 2012. 4. Mark Summerfield, “Programming in Python 3: A Complete introduction to the Python Language”, Addison Wesley Professional, 2009. 5. Martin C. Brown, “PYTHON: The Complete Reference”, McGraw Hill, 2001.

18ZS05/18ZC05 ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF SOFTWARE SYSTEMS 3003 SOFTWARE ENGINEERING CONCEPTS: Software Characteristics –Software Myths – Software life cycle models – The Linear Sequential Model - The Incremental Model - The RAD Model - Evolutionary Software Process Models - The Prototyping Model Spiral Model-Agile methods – Requirement Engineering - Requirement Engineering Tasks. (12) SYSTEM ANALYSIS: Requirement Analysis – Analysis Modelling Approaches – Data Flow Oriented Modelling – Context diagram, Data flow diagrams – Elements of Analysis Model - Data Modeling – Objects and Classes – Object Identification – Relationship among objects – classification . (11) UML MODELING: Unified Software Development Process – Scenario Based Modeling – Class Based Modeling – Behavioral Model – CASE tools. (11) SYSTEM DESIGN: Design Process – Design Concepts – Modularity – Functional Independence - Modular Design – Coupling – Cohesion – Refactoring – Design Model – Architectural Design - Component Level Design Element – Deployment Level Design – Architectural Styles and Patterns – IEEE Standard for Software Design Descriptions. (11)

83

59th ACM

09.06.2018 Total L: 45

REFERENCES: 1. Roger Pressman S, “Software Engineering: A Practitioners”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2014 2. Booch G, Maksimchuk R A, Engel M W, Young B J, Conallen J, Houston K A, “Object Oriented Analysis and Design with Applications”, Addison-Wesley,USA,2007. 3. Booch G, Rumbaugh J and Jacobson I, “The Unified Modeling Language User Guide”, Addison Wesley Professional,USA, 2005. 4. Ian Sommerville, “Software Engineering”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2007. .

18ZS51/18ZC51 ADVANCED DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS LABORATORY 0042 The students will design, analyse and implement suitable data structures like Arrays, linked lists, stacks, queues,Search Trees,Heaps,kd Tree, Graph Algorithms, Sets,Hashing for real world problems. Total P: 60

SEMESTER II 18ZS06/18ZC06 DATA INTENSIVE COMPUTING SYSTEMS 3003 INFRASTRUCTURE: Cloud, Data intensive systems and Industry 4.0 – Cloud Architecture – Virtualisation – Data Virtualisation – Storage Virtualisation – Network Virtualisation: SAS,SAN – File Systems – Big Data Characteristics – Use cases – Data Analytics Life cycle – Case study. (12) STORAGE PLATFORMS: NoSQL – Key-value store - Hadoop Architecture – Map Reduce programming – Examples - Spark; Column-oriented stores – HBase architecture, Hive; Document stores – MongoDB architecture – examples ; Graph stores – Neo4j architecture – examples ; Realtime Processing – Storm (11) THEORY AND METHODS-I: Preprocessing – Statistical measures – Hypothesis testing – ANOVA - feature selection – PCA Regression – linear, logistic – LDA – Association Rule Mining – Text Analysis (11) THEORY AND METHODS-II: Clustering – partitioning and hierarchical approaches – Classification – KNN, Decision trees, Naive Bayes, SVM– Time Series Analysis – ACF, AR, MA, ARMA, ARIMA – Stream Analysis (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. EMC Education Services, “Data Science and Big Data Analytics: Discovering, Analyzing, Visualizing and Presenting Data Big Data Science & Analytics : A Hands-on Approach”, Wiley, 2015. 2. Jared Dean, “Big Data, Data Mining and Machine Learning: Value Creation for Business Leaders and Practitioners”, Wiley, USA, 2014. 3. Gareth James, Daniela Witten, Trevor Hastie and Robert Tibshirani, “An Introduction to Statistical Learning with Applications in R”, Springer, USA, 2013. 4. Nathan Marz and James Warren, “Big Data - Principles and Best Practices of Scalable Realtime Data Systems”, MEAP Began, USA, 2012. 5. Venkata Josyula, Malcolm Orr & Greg Page, “Cloud Computing: Automating the Virtualized Data Center”, CISCO Press, USA, 2011.

18ZS07 SOFTWARE TESTING AND QUALITY ASSURANCE 3204 TESTING FUNDAMENTALS, TECHNIQUES AND STRATEGIES: Objectives and Principles - V Process Model - Testing techniques: White Box Testing: Static testing – Structural Testing - Black Box Testing: Cause Effect Graphing Technique – Orthogonal Array Testing - Testing Strategies for Conventional Software - Testing Strategies for Object Oriented Software – Acceptance Testing – Ad Hoc Testing - Art of Debugging: Debugging Process - Debugging Strategies. (12+8) TEST AUTOMATION AND MANAGEMENT: People and Organizational Issues in Testing - Test Planning – Management – Execution – Reporting - Software Test Automation: Design and Architecture for Testing - Generic requirements for test tool/framework - Selection of Test Tool - Automation for Extreme Programming Model - Challenges in Automation. (11+7) SOFTWARE TESTING TOOLS: Introduction to Selenium – Selenium Components – Introduction to IDE and test scripts creation using IDE – Webdriver: Introduction to locators, WebDriver scripts, WebDriver methods – Get, FindElement, close; WebElement

84

59th ACM

09.06.2018

Methods – SendKeys, clear, click, wait type and window maximize:Browser Verification – getTitle, getCurrentUrl, Interacting with Edit, Buttton, checkbox, Link, Radio button, Dropdown - Interacting with alerts, Frames, Windows, Exceptions. (11+8) SOFTWARE QUALITY CONCEPTS, QUALITY METRICS AND STANDARDS: Views of Quality - Quality Control vs Quality Assurance - Cost of Quality - Quality Assurance Group - Roles and Responsibilities - SQA Activities - Formal Technical Reviews Statistical Approach to Quality Assurance - Software Quality Measurement - Project Metrics – Progress Metrics – Productivity Metrics - Standards: Role of ISO, TMM. (11+7) Total L: 45 +T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Roger Pressman S, “Software Engineering: A Practitioners”, 6th Ed, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2014. 2. Srinivasan Desikan and Gopalaswamy Ramesh, “Software Testing Principles and Practices”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009 3. Rex Allen Jones II, “Absolute Beginner (Part 1) JAVA 4 Selenium WebDriver: Come Learn How to Program for Automation Testing (Practice how to selenium Tutorials)”, Createspace Independent Publishing Platform, 2016 4. MilindLimaye, “Software Quality Assurance”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2011. 5. Glenford J. Myers, “The Art of Software Testing”, Second Edition, John Wiley & Amp; Sons, Inc., Hoboken, New Jersey.

18ZS08 SOFTWARE ENGINEERING MANAGEMENT 3003 SOFTWARE PROCESS AND PEOPLE MANAGEMENT: Process-Process Maturity - Capability Maturity Model and its variants CMMI - PEOPLE MANAGEMENT: Basic organization structures - Decision making - Issues in people management. Effective Team building - Organizational Behavior - Productivity improvement. (9) SOFTWARE ESTIMATION AND FEASIBILITY STUDY: Components of Software Estimation - Problems associated with estimation - Estimation methods - Full Function Points – LOC Estimation- COCOMO II – Putnam Estimation Model - Cost Estimation – Economical, Technical and Operational Feasibility studies. Discounted cash flow and return on investment - Stepwise planning Identifying scope and objectives. (12) PROJECT SCHEDULING AND TRACKING: Principles of project scheduling - Critical Path - Tracking methods - Timeline chart Earned value Analysis. RISK MANAGEMENT: Nature, Type of Software Risks - Risk identification - Risk exposure - Risk prioritization - Risk Mitigation, Monitoring and Management plan. (12) SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT AND MAINTENANCE: Need for Configuration Management - check in check out process - Versions and Variations – Baselines - Software Configuration Audit - Software Maintenance Process, Activities and Categories – Maintenance Measurement – Service Measurement and Benchmarking (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Roger Pressman S, “Software Engineering: A Practitioners”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2014. 2. Gopalaswamy Ramesh and Ramesh Bhattiprolu, “Software Maintenance: Effective Practices for Geographically Distributed Environments”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2009. 3. Rajesh Naik and Swapna Kishore, “Software Requirements and Estimation”, Tata McGraw Hill, India, 2008. 4. Pankaj Jalote, “Software Project Management in Practice”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2005. 5. Watts Humphrey, “Managing the Software Process”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2000.

18ZS09 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE 3003 MIDDLEWARE ARCHITECTURES: Definition – Architecture for Non-Functional Requirements – Role of Software Architect – Technologies – Software Quality Attributes - Classification – Distributed Objects – Message Oriented Middleware – Application Servers – Enterprise Java Beans Architecture. (12) SERVICE ORIENTED ARCHITECTURE: Service Oriented Systems – Web Services – Components – Restful Web Services Advanced Middleware Architectures – Business Process Orchestration, Integrating Architecture Issues, ESB - Message Brokers. (11) SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURAL PROCESS AND MDA: Process – Requirements, Design, Validation-Documentation - UML 2.0, Architectural Views, Component Diagrams, Templates - Aspect Oriented Architecture-Aspects, AOP, Example - Architecture, Aspects and Middleware, Tools, Model Driven Architecture - Need, Tools, MDA and Software Architecture - Requirements, Transformation. (11) ARCHITECTURAL STYLES AND PATTERNS: Patterns in Software Architecture – Layers, Pipes and Filters, Blackboard, Broker, MVC, Presentation – Abstraction - Control, other styles - event-based, data centred, interpreter, message dispatcher, multitier distributed - Adaptable Systems (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Simon Brown, “Software Architecture for Developers”, Lean Publishing, Vancouver, BC, Canada, 2013. 2. Ian Gorton, “Essential Software Architecture”, Springer, New York, 2011.

85

59th ACM 3. 4. 5.

09.06.2018

Mahesh P Matha, “Object Oriented Analysis & Design Using UML - An Introduction to Unified Process & Design Patterns”, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., India, 2010. George Fairbanks, “Just Enough Software Architecture”, Marshall and Bainerd, Boulder, USA, 2010. Frank Buschmann, Regine Muine, Hans Rohner, Peter Sommerlad and Michael Stal, “Pattern Oriented Software Architecture”, John Wiley, England, 2001.

18ZS52/18ZC52 DATA INTENSIVE COMPUTING SYSTEMS LABORATORY 0042 The students will learn to use data intensive computing platforms like Hadoop, Spark, Hbase, MongoDB, Neo4j and R for techniques like MapReduce, Machine Learning, Data Visualization, Regression, Clustering, Association Rule Mining, Classification, Time Series Analysis etc and are then applied to solve a data intensive problem Total P: 60

18ZS61/18ZC61 INDUSTRY VISIT & TECHNICAL SEMINAR 0042 The student will make at least two technical presentations on current topics related to the programme. The same will be assessed by a committee appointed by the department. The students are expected to submit a report at the end of the semester covering the various aspects of his/her presentation together with the observation in industry visits. Total P: 30

SEMESTER III 18ZS53/18ZC53 SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT LABORATORY 0042 The student will demonstrate the ability to design research methodology that adequately addresses the following: 

Idea generation and Concept Selection  Identification of real time problem in the field of computers.  Comparing and contrasting different types of research methods.  Patent search for foolproof concept selection  Time line of activities



Design 



Conceptualizing a research design and propose an innovative solution for the problem identified.

Development and Testing  

Model/prototype development Validation and testing

Report submission and presentation Total P: 60

18ZS71/18ZC71 PROJECT WORK I 0063       

Identification of a real world problem. Conduct literature survey Formulate a solution for the problem based on literature survey. Implementation of the modules Compare the results with existing solutions Write a technical report on the work done Publish the work in reputed national / international conferences Total P: 90

SEMESTER IV 18ZS72/18ZC72 PROJECT WORK II 0 0 28 14   

Problem Identification. Define the scope and objectives of the problem Develop a mathematical model with realistic assumptions.

86

59th ACM     

09.06.2018

Propose a novel and original solution for the identified problem Implementation of the modules Interpretation and validation of results using formal research methods Comparison with existing solutions Publish the work in refereed national / international journals Total P: 420

ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES 18ZS21 USER INTERFACE DESIGN 2203 TASK ORIENTED UI DESIGN: User Interface – Importance-Goals - UI and Software Designer – Human Factors in Design – User Needs and Requirements - Task Oriented UI Design – Principles – Design Evaluation – Choice of Color – Design Phases – Case Study. (7+7) OBJECT ORIENTED DESIGN ANDCSCW UI: Object Oriented UI Design: Design of Icons – Use of Metaphors – GUI Design – Case Study, CSCW Characteristics – Examples – CSCW UI – Method of Specifying and Designing UI for CSCW Systems – Case Study. (8+8) USABILITY AND ACCESSIBILITY: Usability - The Viewpoint of User, Customer and Designer – Usability Specification – Stages in Usability Specification and Evaluation - Accessibility - Need – Incorporating Accessibility – Involving People with Disability – Accessibility in User Centered Design Process (8+8) WEB INTERFACE DESIGN: Designing Web Interfaces - Drag and Drop-Direct Selection-Contextual Tools, Overlays, Inlays and Virtual Tags - Process Flow - Case Studies (7+7) Total L: 30 + T: 30 = 60 REFERENCES: 1. Jeniffer Tidwell,” Designing Interfaces”, O’Reilley, USA, 2011 2. Bill Scott and Theresa Neil, “Designing Web Interfaces”, O’Reilly Media Inc., USA, 2009 3. Ben Schneiderman, “Designing the User Interface”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009. 4. Andrew Sears and Julie A Jacko, “HCI handbook”, Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, New York, 2008. 5. Linda Mcaulay, “HCI for Software Designers”, International Thompson Computer Press, USA, 1998.

18ZS22/18ZC24 AGILE SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT 2203 AGILE PRINCIPLES AND MODELING: Introduction - Traditional, IID and Agile Methodologies – Comparison - Need - Manifesto – Values and Practices – Agile Modeling Values, principles and practices – Agile modeling with RUP (8+8) EXTREME PROGRAMMING: Life Cycle – User Stories – Architecture – Planning – Iteration – Testing – Release – XP Values – XP Practices – Planning – Coding – Pair Programming Model – Refactoring – Agile Modeling and XP – case study (7+7) SCRUM: Introduction – Practices - Applying Scrum – Need – Scrum Values – Practices - Tools in Agile Software Development – Case Study – Applying Scrum for IoT projects, Applying Scrum for Big Data Projects (7+7) OTHER AGILE DEVELOPMENT METHODOLOGIES: FDD – DSDM - Lean and Kanban Software development – Comparison of agile approaches - Case Studies - Defining Data Warehousing Projects for Iterative Development – User stories – agile estimation Adapting Iterative Development for Data warehousing Projects. ` (8+8) Total L: 30 + T: 30 = 60 REFERENCES: 1. Robert Martin, “Agile Software Development: Principles, Patterns, and Practices”, Pearson Education Ltd. 2014. 2. Jim Highsmith, “Agile Data Warehousing Project Management”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2012. 3. Alistair Cockburn, “Agile Software Development: The Cooperative Game”, Pearson Education, USA, 2006. 4. Scott Ambler, “Agile Modeling: Effective Practices for eXtreme Programming and the Unified Process”, Wiley Computer Publishing, 2002. 5. Ken Schwaber and Mike Beedle, “Agile Software Development with Scrum”, Prentice Hall, USA, 2001.

18ZS23/18ZC25 INTERNET OF THINGS 2203 IOT ARCHITECTURE: Introduction to IoT - M2M Architecture - Design Principles for Connected Devices - Definitions and Functional Requirements – Sensors and Actuators IOT Architecture - IETF Architecture for IoT - OGC Architecture Communication Model. (8+6)

87

59th ACM

09.06.2018

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS: Protocol Standardization for IoT – Efforts – M2M and WSN Protocols – SCADA and RFID Protocols – Unified Data Standards – Protocols – IEEE 802.15.4 – BACNET Protocol – MODBUS– Zigbee Architecture – 6LOWPAN – LoRA-COAP - MQTT (8+6) ELECTRONIC PROTOTYPING: Prototypes and Production - Open Source versus Closed Source - Prototyping Embedded Devices - Prototyping IoT Projects With Arduino - Prototyping IOT Projects With Raspberry PI (8+8) CASE STUDIES AND IOT DATA ANALYTICS: Real world design constraints - Applications - Asset management, Industry 4.0, Smart grid, Commercial building automation, Smart cities Data Analytics for IoT – Edge analytics - sensor data fusion techniques Cloud Storage Models & Communication APIs - Cloud for IoT - Predictive analytics (8+8) Total L: 30 + T: 30 = 60 REFERENCES: 1. Adrian McEwen and Hakim Cassimally, “Designing the Internet of Things”, John Wiley & Sons Ltd., UK, 2014. 2. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick and OmarElloumi, “The Internet of Things: Key Applications and Protocols”, Wiley & Sons Ltd., UK, 2012. 3. David Boswarthick, Omar Elloumi and OlivierHersent, “M2M Communications: A Systems Approach”, John Sons Ltd, UK, 2012 4. Dieter Uckelmann, Mark Harrison and Florian Michahelles, “Architecting the Internet of Things”, Springer, 2011.

18ZS24 SYSTEMS ENGINEERING 3003 SYSTEMS ENGINEERING: Systems Engineering and Modern systems - Systems Engineering Landscape – Structure of complex systems (11) SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT PROCESS AND MANAGEMENT: System Life Cycle - Evolutionary Characteristics of the Development Process - Systems Engineering Method - Testing throughout System Development - Managing System Development and Risks – WBS, SEMP, Risk Management - Organization of Systems Engineering (11) CONCEPT DEVELOPMENT: Analysis – Concept Exploration – Concept Definition – Decision analysis and support

(11)

ENGINEERING DEVELPOMENT: Advanced development: Requirements analysis, Risk analysis and reduction, Functional analysis, Prototype development, Software Systems Engineering, Engineering Design, Integration and evaluation (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Alexander Kossiakoff, William N. Sweet, Samuel J. Seymour and Steven M. Biemer, “Systems Engineering Principles and Practice”, Wiley-Interscience, Hoboken, 2011. 2. Ed. Garrett Shea, “NASA Systems Engineering Handbook”, Revision 2, NASA, USA, 2017. 3. Charles S. Wasson, “System Engineering Analysis, Design, and Development: Concepts, Principles, and Practices”, 2nd Edition, Wiley, New York, 2015. 4. Department of Defense, “Systems Engineering Fundamentals”, Defense Acquisition University Press, Fort Belvoir, 2001.

18ZS25 SOFTWARE RELIABILITY 3003 RELIABILITY FUNDAMENTALS AND MATHEMATICS: Need for Reliability – Definition - Causes of Failures - Types of Failures Maintainability and Availability - Reliability Measures - Design for Higher Reliability - Redundancy Techniques - Reliability and Cost Random Experiments - Probability – Random Variables - Distribution Functions - Discrete Distributions - Continuous Distributions. (12) SYSTEM RELIABILITY MODELS: Basics of Component Reliability - Systems with Components in Series – Systems with Parallel Components-K-Out-of-M Systems - Non Series Parallel Systems – Systems with Mixed Mode Failures – Fault Tree Techniques.(11) RELIABILITY PREDICTION: Purpose - Classification – General Requirements – Prediction Methodologies – Software Prediction Packages – Role and Limitation of Reliability Prediction. (11) REDUNDANCY TECHNIQUES IN SYSTEM DESIGN: Component Versus Unit Redundancy – Weakest Link Techniques – Mixed Redundancy – Stand by Redundancy – Redundancy Optimization - Double Failures and Redundancy - Economic Issues – Manufacturer’s Cost – Customer’s Cost – Reliability Achievement Cost Models – Reliability Utility Cost Models – Depreciation Cost Models – Reliability Application – Banking System. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Michael R. Lyu, “Software Reliability Engineering”, McGraw-Hill, New York, 2011. 2. John D Musa, “Reliability Engineering - More Reliable Software, Faster and Cheaper”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2009. 3. John D Musa, “Software Reliability Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2005. 4. Ann Marie Neufelder, “Ensuring Software Reliability”, Marcel Dekkar, New York, 1993. 5. Balagurusamy E, “Reliability Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1984.

88

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18ZS26 SOFTWARE METRICS 3003

QUANTIFICATION IN SOFTWARE ENGINEERING: Measurement in Software Engineering - Measurement Scales and Scale Types - Classification of Software Measures - Software Measurement Validation - Data Analysis – Analysis Methods – Statistical Methods. Software Process and Project Metrics: Metrics in The Process and Project Domains – Building Measurable Process Models – Reconciling Different Metrics Approaches – Metrics for Software Quality – Integrating Metrics within the Software Engineering Process (12) SOFTWARE PRODUCTS AND TECHNICAL METRICS: Measuring of Internal Product Attributes - Measuring External Product Attributes – A Framework for Technical Software Metrics – Metrics for the Analysis Model – Metrics for the Design Model – metrics for Source Code – Metrics for Testing - Metrics for maintenance - Measurement of Quality. (11) RESOURCE MEASUREMENT: Productivity, Teams and Tools - Making Process Predictions - Good Estimates - Models of Effort and Cost - Dealing with Problems of Current Estimation Methods (11) MEASUREMENT AND MANAGEMENT: Planning - Measurement Program - Measurement Tools-Measurers - Analysts - Audience - Measurement in Practice. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Norman E Fenton and Shari Lawrence Pfleeger, “Software Metrics - A Rigorous & Practical Approach”, Thomson Computer Press U S A, 2013. 2. Roger Pressman S, “Software Engineering: A Practitioners”, Tata McGraw Hill, New York, 2009. 3. Stephen H Kan, “Metrics and Models in Software Quality Engineering”, Pearson Education, Boston, 2002. 4. Dick B Simmons and Newton C. Ellis, “Software Measurement”, Prentice Hall, New York, 2002.

18ZS27 DESIGN PATTERNS 3003 INTRODUCTION TO PATTERNS: Introduction to patterns – Describing Design Patterns, Relationship between Design Patterns, Solving Design Problems Using Patterns, Procedure to Apply and Use a Design Pattern (5) INTERFACE PATTERNS: Introduction to interfaces – Adapter – Façade – Composite – Bridge pattern

(7)

RESPONSIBILITY PATTERNS: Introduction to responsibility – Singleton – Observer – Proxy – Mediator - Chain of Responsibility – Flyweight (11) CONSTRUCTION PATTERNS: Introduction to construction - Builder, Factory Method, Abstract Factory, Prototype, Memento

(11)

OPERATION & EXTENSION PATTERNS: Introduction to operations - Template, State, Strategy, Command – ExtensionsDecorator, Iterator, Visitor (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Metsker S J, “The Design Patterns Java Workbook”, Addison-Wesley Longman Publishing, Boston, MA, USA, 2002. 2. Gamma E, Helm R, Johnson R, and Vlissides R, “Design Patterns: Elements of Reusable Object-Oriented Software”, Addison Wessley, Boston, MA, USA, 1998.. 3. Freeman E, Robson E, Bates B and Sierra K, “Head First Design Patterns”, O'Reilly Media, Sebastopol, CA, USA, 2004. 4. Vascaaran sarcar, “Java Design patterns”, Apress, 2015. 5. Kerievsky J, “Refactoring to Patterns”, Addison-Wesley Professional, Boston, MA, USA, 2004

18ZS28 DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEMS 3003 DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEMS (DSS) AND BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE (BI): Introduction to decision support systems framework for business intelligence - tools and techniques for managerial decision support. Decision making Models - phases of decision making process - intelligence phase - design phase - implementation phase. (11) DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEMS CONCEPTS, METHODOLOGIES AND TECHNOLOGIES: Decision support systems configuration and descriptions - characteristics and capabilities – classifications – components - data management subsystem model management subsystem - user interface subsystem - the knowledge based management subsystem Modeling and analysis Management support systems modeling - structure of mathematical models for decision support - certainty, uncertainty and risk.(11) BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE: Data mining for business intelligence: data mining concepts and applications - data mining process and methods - Artificial Neural Networks for Data Mining applications of ANN - Case studies. Text and web mining: Text mining concepts - natural language processing - text mining applications and process - web mining overview. (11)

89

59th ACM

09.06.2018

INTELLIGENT SYSTEMS: Artificial Intelligence and Expert Systems: Structure of expert systems - knowledge engineering problem areas suitable for expert systems - benefits and limitations. Advanced Intelligent systems: Machine learning techniques Case Based Reasoning - intelligent agents - implementing DSS and BI- RFID and new BI application opportunities - cloud computing and BI (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Efraim Turban, Ramesh Sharda, Dursundelen, “Decision Support Systems and Intelligent Systems”, Prentice-Hall of India, 2011. 2. Efraim Turban, Jay E. Aronson, Richard V. McCarthy, “Decision Support Systems and Intelligent Systems”, Prentice-Hall of India, 2007 3. Clyde W. Holsapple and Andrew B. Whinston, “Decision Support Systems, A Knowledge-Based Approach”, West Group, 1996. 4. Vicki L. Sauter , “Decision Support Systems For Business Intelligence”, Wiley,2011.

18ZS29 PRIVACY PRESERVING DATA MINING 3003 INTRODUCTION: Introduction to Data Mining : Data Mining Architecture, Data Preprocessing, Techniques: Association Rule mining – Classification and Prediction – Clustering Social Aspects of Privacy, Legal Aspects of Privacy and Privacy Regulations, Effect of Database and Data Mining technologies on privacy - Privacy issues, Need for PPDM - Applications of PPDM. (12) QUANTIFICATION OF PRIVACY PRESERVING DATA MINING: Metrics for quantifying privacy levels, Metrics for quantifying Hiding failure, Metrics for quantifying Data Quality, Complexity metrics, Selecting a proper metrics, Utility based privacy preserving methods: Types, Anonymization using local recoding, Utility based privacy preservation in classification, Association rule mining. (11) PRIVACY AND SECURITY MODELS: Privacy Models: Privacy models: Randomization - perturbation, Data Swapping, Anonymization Algorithms - K-anonymity, l-diversity, t-closeness, differential privacy. Security Models: Trusted Computing Base, State Machine Model, Information Flow Model, Noninterference Model, Take-Grant Model, Access Control Matrix, Sutherland Model, Graham-Denning Model. (11) PRIVACY PRESERVING DISTRIBUTED DATA MINING: Basic cryptographic Techniques for Privacy Preserving Distributed Data Mining, Common Secure Sub - protocols used, Anonymization for vertically partitioned data and Horizontally partitioned data, Limitations of cryptographic techniques for privacy preserving data mining. Anonymizing Social Networks and Sanitizing Textual Data: Social Networks - Introduction, General Privacy Preservation Strategies, Anonymizing Networks. Textual Data: Introduction ERASE - Health Information De-identification (HIDE) (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. James Michael Stewart ,Mike Chapple , Darril Gibson, ”CISSP (ISC)2 Certified Information Systems Security Professional Official Study Guide,Wiley Publisher, 2015. 2. Jiawei Han, Micheline Kamber and Jian Pei, “Data Mining: Concepts and Techniques, The Morgan Kaufmann Series in Data Management Systems Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, July 2011. 3. Benjamin C.M. Fung, Ke Wang, Ada Wai-Chee Fu and Philip S. Yu, “Introduction to Privacy-Preserving Data Publishing: Concepts and Techniques”, Chapman & Hall/CRC, 2010. 4. Charu C. Aggarwal, “Privacy-Preserving Data Mining: Models and Algorithms”, Springer, 2008. 5. Jaideep Vaidya, Chris Clifton and Michael Zhu, “Privacy Preserving Data Mining”, Springer, 2006.

18ZS30 AGENT BASED INTELLIGENT SYSTEMS 3003 INTRODUCTION: Basic Definitions – Intelligent Agents – Problem Solving Agents – Searching for Solutions – Uninformed Search Strategies – Informed Search Strategies – Implementation (12) KNOWLEDGE REPRESENTATION: Knowledge Based Agents – Propositional Logic (PL) – First-Order Logic (FOL) – Inferences in PL and FOL – Semantic Net (11) PROBABILISTIC AGENTS: Quantifying Uncertainty – Probabilistic Reasoning – Bayesian Network – Probabilistic reasoning over time – Time and Uncertainty – Inference in Temporal Models (11) MULTI–AGENT SYSTEMS: Interaction Between Agents – Reactive Agents – Cognitive Agents – Interaction Protocols – Agent Coordination – Agent Negotiation – Agent Cooperation – Agent Organization – Agent Communication and Agent Oriented Programming – Applications (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Stuart Russel and Peter Norvig, “Artificial Intelligence – A Modern Approach”, Pearson, UK, 2015. 2. Bradshaw, “Software Agents”, MIT, Cambridge, 2010. 3. George F Luger, “Artificial Intelligence – Structures and Strategies for Complex Problem Solving”, Pearson, UK, 2004.

90

59th ACM 4.

09.06.2018

Gerhard Weiss, “Multi Agent Systems – A Modern Approach to Distributed Artificial Intelligence”, MIT Press, Cambridge, 2009.

18ZS31/18ZC27 EVOLUTIONARY COMPUTING TECHNIQUES 3003 HEURISTIC AND METAHEURISTIC APPROACHES: Challenges in Solving Complex Problems - Evolutionary algorithms: Principles, Historical development, Features, Classification and Components, Advantages, Applications. Heuristic Search: Problem representation as search - Generate and Test - Breadth First Search - Depth First Search - Hill Climbing: Principles, Local and Global maxima, Ridges, Plateau - Steepest Ascent - Simulated annealing: Annealing schedule, Parameter Selection (12) GENETIC ALGORITHM: Biological Background - Simple Genetic Algorithm (SGA) - Representation types - Recombination Types Mutation types - GA Algorithm - Schema Theorem - Variations of GA: Adaptive GA, Real Coded GA - Differential Evolution: Principles, Mutation, Crossover, Selection (11) SWARM INTELLIGENCE: Particle Swarm Optimization: Swarms, Operating principles, PSO Algorithm, Neighborhood Topologies Variations of PSO: Binary, weighted - Ant Colony Optimization: Ant foraging behavior, Theoretical Considerations, ACO Algorithm, Variations of ACO: Elitist Ant System (EAS), MinMax Ant System (MMAS) and Rank Based Ant Colony System (RANKAS) (11) MULTI-OBJECTIVE OPTIMIZATION: Principles - Classical Methods - Challenges - Evolutionary algorithms for multi-objective optimization - Multimodal function optimization - Non-Dominated Sorting Genetic Algorithm (NSGA): Non-elitist, elitist - Controlled elitism in NSGA (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Eiben AE and Smith JE, “Introduction to Evolutionary Computing”, Second Edition, Springer, Heidelberg, 2015. 2. Rich E and Knight K, “Artificial Intelligence”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited, India, 2011. 3. Deb K, “Multi-Objective Optimization Using Evolutionary Algorithms”, Wiley-Blackwell, USA, 2008. 4. Dorigo M and Stutzle T, “Ant Colony Optimization”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2005. 5. Kennedy J and Eberhart RC, “Swarm Intelligence”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, USA, 2001.

18ZS32 DATA INTEGRATION 3003 INTRODUCTION: Data Integration – Importance – Types and Complexity – Process. Semantic Technology: Overview – Web Ontology Languages for Semantic Web – RDF schema –An Axiomatic Semantics for RDF and RDF Schema – Traditional Ontology Languages: OWL – SPARQL. (12) BATCH DATA INTEGRATION AND REAL TIME DATA INTEGRATION: ETL – Datawarehousing – Data Conversion – Archiving – Integration Architecture – Provenance Determination – ETL Tools – Case Study. Patterns – Technologies – Modelling – Master Data Management – Data Warehousing with Real – Time Updates – Stream Data – Architecture – Case Study. (11) DATA VIRTUALIZATION AND SCHEMA MAPPING: Introduction – Architecture – Integration – Metadata – Data Virtualization– Bigdata Integration Architecture–Scheme Mapping Approaches – Semantic Approaches – Conceptual Layering – Global and Local as view Data Integration – Metadata Integration. (11) SQL/NoSQL INTEGRATION: Introduction – Architecture of NoSQL Systems – Schema Extraction Approaches – Data Integration Framework – Query Processing – Case Study. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Bo Ma, Tonghai Jiang, “A Novel Data Integration Framework based on Unified Concept Model”, IEEE, 2017. 2. Judith R. Davis, Robert Eve, “Data virtualization - Going beyond Traditional Data Integration to Achieve Business Ability.”Nine Five One Press, USA, 2014. 3. April Reeve, “Managing Data in Motion”, Elsevier, 2013. 4. Chung-Chih Lin, Ping-Yeh Lin, Po-Kuan Lu, Guan-Yu Hsieh, “A Healthcare Integration System for Disease Assessment and Safety Monitoring of Dementia Patients.”, IEEE Transactions On Information Technology In Biomedicine, Vol. 12, No. 5, September 2008. 5. Grigoris Antoniou, Frank Van Harmelen,“A Semantic Web Primer”, The MIT Press Cambridge, 2008.

18ZS33/18ZC07 ADVANCED OPERATING SYSTEMS 3003 PROCESS SCHEDULING & PROCESS SYNCHRONIZATION: Overview, Process scheduling, Operations on process, Inter process communication, Process scheduling criteria, process scheduling algorithms. Process Synchronization: Background, Hardware Support to Process Synchronization, Semaphores, Monitors - Memory Management Techniques. Case study: process scheduling in Linux. (12) DISTRIBUTED OPERATING SYSTEMS: Issues in Distributed Operating System – Architecture – Communication Primitives – Lamport’s Logical clocks – Causal Ordering of Messages – Distributed Mutual Exclusion Algorithms – Centralized and Distributed

91

59th ACM

09.06.2018

Deadlock Detection Algorithms – Agreement Protocols - Case Study: Remote Procedure call in Distributed Computing Environment. (11) DISTRIBUTED RESOURCE MANAGEMENT: Distributed File Systems – Design Issues - Distributed Shared Memory – Algorithms for Implementing Distributed Shared memory–Issues in Load Distributing – Scheduling Algorithms – Synchronous and Asynchronous Check Pointing and Recovery – Fault Tolerance – Two-Phase Commit Protocol – Non blocking Commit Protocol – Security and Protection. (11) REAL TIME AND MOBILE OPERATING SYSTEMS: Basic Model of Real Time Systems - Characteristics- Applications of Real Time Systems – Real Time Task Scheduling - Handling Resource Sharing - Mobile Operating Systems – Micro Kernel Design Client Server Resource Access – Processes and Threads - Memory Management - File system – case study - iOS and Android: Architecture and SDK Framework - Media Layer - Services Layer - Core OS Layer - File System. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. William Stallings, “Operating Systems – Operating System: Internals and Design Principles”, Prentice Hall, 2014. 2. Mukesh Singhal, Niranjan Shivaratri, “Advanced Concepts in Operating Systems”, McGraw Hill, 2011 3. Rajib Mall, “Real-Time Systems: Theory and Practice”, Pearson, 2006. 4. HagitAttiya, Jennifer Welch, “Distributed Computing: Fundamentals, Simulations and Advanced Topics”, McGraw Hill, 2004. 5. Nancy A Lynch, “Distributed Algorithms”, Morgan Kaufmann Series, Elsevier, 1996.

18ZS34/18ZC08 ADVANCED COMPUTER NETWORKS 3003 INTERNET ROUTING, QOS ANALYSIS AND MULTICASTING: Internet Architecture - IP service Model – Routing Domains and Autonomous Systems – Intra Domain Routing Algorithms - Inter Domain-Routing: BGP - BGP Traffic Engineering. Routing Convergence. Need for QoS - End to End QoS - QoS Levels - Performance Measures: Bandwidth - Delay and Jitter - Packet Loss Throughput. Routing Overheads .Multicast: Address Assignments - Multicast Routing – DVMRP- Protocol Independent Multicasting. (12) TCP PERFORMANCE MODELING: TCP Segment format - TCP Sliding Windows - Congestion Control and Queuing - TCP Congestion Control - Analysis of TCP: Buffer Sizing - Throughput - Fairness - Random Early Detection Gateways for Congestion Avoidance. DRR - Core-Stateless Fair Queuing - Congestion Control for High Bandwidth - Delay Product Networks - Variations of TCP. (11) HIGH SPEED NETWORKS: Packet Switching Vs Cell Switching - ATM Networks: ATM Protocol Architecture - Logical Connections - ATM Cells - Service Categories - ATM Adaptation Layer - Traffic and Congestion Control In Frame Relay and ATM Networks. High-Speed LANS - Fast Ethernet - Gigabit Ethernet. (11) WIRELESS NETWORKS: Wireless Networks: Cellular Networks: GSM - UMTS - 3G and 4G Networks – IEEE E 802.11 - Bluetooth - WIMAX – WSN - Characteristics - Architecture – Applications - Network Virtualization and Software Defined Networking (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. James F Kurose, Keith W Ross, “Computer Networking - A Top-Down Approach Featuring the Internet”, Pearson Education, India, 2012. 2. Larry L Peterson and Bruce S Davie, “Computer Networks: A Systems Approach”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers Burlington, USA, 2011. 3. Andrew S Tanenbaum, “Computer Networks”, Prentice Hall, USA, 2010. 4. William Stallings, “High-Speed Networks and Internets: Performance and Quality of Service”, Pearson Education, India, 2002. 5. HolgerKarl , Andreas Willig, “Protocol and Architecture for Wireless Sensor Networks”, John Wiley Publication, 2002.

18ZS35 SOCIAL NETWORKS DATA ANALYTICS 3003 SOCIAL NETWORK MODELS: Social Network data : nodes, relations – social networks as graphs ; mathematical representation of social network data - Social Network Models : ErdosRenyi Model, Watts-Strogatz model, Barabasi-Albert model - Models for social influence analysis: Edge & Node Measures - Social Similarity and Influence: Homophily - Existential Test for Social Influence Influence and Actions, interaction - Influence Maximization - Viral Marketing ; RandomWalks on Graphs: proximity measures, graph theoretic measures, algorithms for hitting, commute times, pageranking, simrank, computing harmonic functions – applications in text analysis, collaborative filtering and link prediction (12) NODE CLASSIFICATION IN SOCIAL NETWORKS: Iterative Classification Method - RandomWalk based Methods: Label Propagation, Graph Regularization, Adsorption - Applying Node Classification to Large Social Networks - variations on node classification – Node clustering models – clustering graphs as objects. (10) LINK PREDICTION IN SOCIAL NETWORKS: Feature based Link Prediction - Bayesian Probabilistic Models: Local - Network Evolution - Hierarchical Probabilistic Models - Probabilistic Relational Models- Relational Bayesian Network - Relational Markov Network - Linear Algebraic Methods - Case studies (11)

92

59th ACM

09.06.2018

COMMUNITY DISCOVERY IN SOCIAL NETWORKS: Methods – quality functions – direct discovery of communities – cliques and bipartite subgraphs - Kernighan-Lin(KL) algorithm - Agglomerative/Divisive Algorithms - Spectral Algorithms Multi-level Graph Partitioning - Markov Clustering – using betweeness measures to find communities – community evolution and tracing – finding overlapping communities – maximum likelihood and affiliation graph models - Neighbourhood properties of graphs; Case studies: Community Discovery in Heterogeneous Networks - Coupling Content and Relationship Information for Community Discovery. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Charu C Agarwal, “Social Networks Data Analytics”, Springer, USA, 2011. 2. Jure Leskovec, Anand Rajaraman, Jeff Ullman, “Mining of Massive Datasets”, 2014. 3. Guandong Xu and Lin Li, “Social Media Mining and Social Network Analysis: Emerging Research”, 2013. 4. David Easley and Jon Kleinberg, “Networks, Crowds, and Markets: Reasoning about a Highly Connected World Cambridge University Press”, New Delhi, 2010. 5. Maksim Tsvetovat, Alexander Kouznetsov, “Social Network Analysis for Startups - Finding Connections on the Social Web”, O’Reilly Media, 2011. 6. Jeroen Bruggeman, “Social Networks: An Introduction”, Routledge, 2008.

18ZS36 PRIVACY IN SOCIAL NETWORKS 3003 INTRODUCTION AND SECURITY ISSUES: Online social networks – model - data collection – challenges – pitfalls – stealing reality - mobile social networks, characteristics, applications – OSN threats and issues. Security Issues: Trust in Online Social Networks: Properties, Components, Social Trust, Trust Evaluation Models - Access Control - Identity management - Identity as Self Presentation - identity disclosure - identity theft – Phishing threat in OSN- Safety challenges in Mobile Social Networks (MSN). (16) PRIVACY BREACHES: Introduction – Types - Statistical methods for inferring information – Crowdsourcing and Ethics Cooperative Data Forwarding Strategy with Privacy Preservation in MSN. (10) PRIVACY-PRESERVING MECHANISMS: k-anonymity, l-diversity and t-closeness, Differential Privacy - Profile Matching Protocol Dynamic social networks privacy preservation - Privacy of Social Recommendation Algorithms - Providing Group Anonymity in Social Networks - Privacy Mechanisms for Affiliation networks, Complex Networks – Encryption for Peer-to-Peer Social Networks case studies (10) MODELING, EVALUATING, AND MANAGING PRIVACY RISKS: Information-sharing Model - Strategic Behavior and Information sharing – issues - case study - Privacy-score Model - Methods for Computing the Privacy Score - Managing Privacy Settings Predicting Users’ Privacy Settings – Recommendation-Based Trustworthy Service Evaluation in MSN (9) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Yaniv Altshuler, Yuval Elovici, Armin B. Cremers, Nadav Aharony, Alex Pentland, “Security and Privacy in Social Networks”, Springer, 2013 2. Yashar Najaflou, Behrouz Jedari, “Safety Challenges and Solutions in Mobile Social Networks”, IEEE Systems Journal, 2013. 3. Xiaohui Liang, Rongxing Lu, Xiaodong Lin, Xuemin (Sherman) Shen, “Security and Privacy in Mobile Social Networks”, Springer, 2013. 4. Elena Zheleva, Evimaria Terzi, Lise Getoor, “Privacy in Social Networks”, Morgan & Claypool Publishers, 2012. 5. Barbara Carminati, Elena Ferrari, and Marco Viviani, “Security and Trust in Online Social Networks”, Morgan & Claypool Publishers, 2012.

18ZS37/18ZC41 MACHINE LEARNING 3003 COMPUTATIONAL LEARNING THEORY BASICS: Introduction: Types of Learning - Designing a learning system – concept learning - Find-s – Candidate Elimination - PAC Learnabilty- Sample complexity for finite and Infinite hypothesis spaces-VC Dimension - Evaluating Hypothesis - Estimating Hypothesis Accuracy - Error Estimation - Bias-Variance - Confidence Interval Central Limit Theorem (12) LINEAR MODELS: Linear Models For Regression – Linear Regression Models, Maximum Likelihood Estimation - Least Squares, The Bias-Variance Decomposition, Bayesian Linear Regression, Linear Models for Classification, Probabilistic Generative Models, Probabilistic Discriminative Models, Linear Discriminant Analysis. (11) NEURAL NETWORKS: Neural Networks - Feed-forward Networks - Network Training - Delta Rule- Gradient Descent - Error Backpropagation - Regularization in Neural Networks. (11) KERNEL AND GRAPHICAL METHODS: Kernel Methods - Constructing Kernels- Radial Basis Function Networks - Gaussian Processes - Maximum Margin Classifiers – SVM - Graphical Methods – Bayes Theorem - Bayesian Networks - Markov Random Fields - Inference in Graphical Models - Mixture Models – Expectation Maximization. (11) Total L: 45

93

59th ACM

09.06.2018

REFERENCES: 1. Christopher Bishop, “Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning”, Springer-Verlag New York, 2013. 2. Tom M. Mitchell, “Machine Learning”, McGraw Hill, 1997. 3. Trevor Hastie, Robert Tibshirani, Jerome Friedman, “The Elements of Statistical Learning - Data Mining, Inference, and Prediction”, Second Edition, Springer Series in Statistics, Springer-Verlag New York, 2013. 4. Yaser S. Abu Mostafa, Malik Magdon Ismail, Hsuan Tien Lin, “Learning From Data A Short Course”, Amlbook.Com, 2012.

AUDIT COURSES 18ZS81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP81

18ZS82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP82

94

th

59 ACM 13. Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment ME APPLIED ELECTRONICS

09.06.2018 (2018 REGULATIONS) (Minimum No. of credits to be earned: 75*) Hours/Week Maximum Marks Credits Lecture Tutorial Practical CA FE Total

Course Course Title Code I SEMESTER 18EA01 Mathematics of Systems Engineering 2 2 0 3 50 50 18EA02 Embedded Controllers and Applications 3 0 0 3 50 50 18EA03 Digital System Design and Testing 3 2 0 4 50 50 18EA04 VLSI Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 18EA05 Object Computing and Data Structures 3 2 0 4 50 50 18EA51 Circuits and Systems Simulation Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 18EA81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 Total 24 hrs 14 6 4 19 300 300 II SEMESTER 18EA06 Analog VLSI Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 18EA07 Advanced Digital Signal Processing 3 2 0 4 50 50 18EA08 Computer Architecture and Parallel Processing 3 0 0 3 50 50 18EA09 Embedded System Design 3 2 0 4 50 50 18EA__ 3 0 0 3 50 50 Professional Elective 1 18EA__ 3 0 0 3 50 50 Professional Elective 2 18EA52 Electronic System Design Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 18EA61 Industrial Visit and Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 50 18EA82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 Total 30 hrs 18 4 8 24 400 400 III SEMESTER 18EA__ 3 2 0 4 50 50 Professional Elective 3 18EA__ 3 0 0 3 50 50 Professional Elective 4 18EA__ 3 0 0 3 50 50 Professional Elective 5 18EA__ 3 0 0 3 50 50 Professional Elective 6 18EA53 Applied Electronics Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 18EA71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 50 50 Total 24 hrs 12 2 10 18 300 300 IV SEMESTER 0 0 28 14 18EA72 Project Work II 50 50 ELECTIVE 3 Associated With Centre of Excellence (One to be opted) 18EA21 Virtual Instrumentation Systems 3 2 0 4 50 50 18EA22 Internet of Things 3 2 0 4 50 50 18EA23 Totally Integrated Automation 3 2 0 4 50 50 ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES(Five to be opted) 18EA24 Algorithms for VLSI Design Automation 3 0 0 3 50 50 18EA25 VLSI Testing and Testability 3 0 0 3 50 50 18EA26 Mixed Signal VLSI Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 18EA27 Hardware Design Verification Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 18EA28 System on Chip 3 0 0 3 50 50 18EA29 ASIC Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 18EA30 Operating Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 18EA31 Linear Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 18EA32 Linux Architecture 3 0 0 3 50 50 18EA33 Wireless Sensor Networks 3 0 0 3 50 50 18EA34 Electronic Product Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 18EA35 Digital Image Processing 3 0 0 3 50 50 18EA36 Digital Video Processing 3 0 0 3 50 50 18EA37 Wavelets and Applications 3 0 0 3 50 50 18EA38 Biosignal Processing 3 0 0 3 50 50 18EA39 Optimization Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 18EA40 Internetworking and Applications 3 0 0 3 50 50 18EA41 Soft Computing 3 0 0 3 50 50 18EA42 Machine Learning and Applications 3 0 0 3 50 50 18EA43 Industrial Drives for Automation 3 0 0 3 50 50 * Indicated is the minimum number of credits to be earned by a student. ** - 60 hrs in I semester and 90 hrs in II semester; Grade: Completed / Not Completed CAT – Category; PC – Professional Core; PE - Professional Elective EEC – Employability Enhancement Course; MC- Mandatory Course

95

CAT

100 100 100 100 100 100 0 600

PC PC PC PC PC PC MC

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 0 800

PC PC PC PC PE PE PC EEC MC

100 100 100 100 100 100 600

PE PE PE PE PC EEC

100

EEC

100 100 100

PE PE PE

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE

th

59 ACM

13. Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment ME APPLIED ELECTRONICS (PART-TIME)

09.06.2018

(2018 REGULATIONS) (Minimum No. of credits to be earned: 75*) Hours/Week Maximum Marks Credits Lecture Tutorial Practical CA FE Total

Course Course Title Code I SEMESTER 18EA01 Mathematics of Systems Engineering 2 2 0 3 50 18EA02 Embedded Controllers and Applications 3 0 0 3 50 18EA03 Digital System Design and Testing 3 2 0 4 50 18EA04 VLSI Design 3 0 0 3 50 18EA81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 Total 18 hrs 14 4 0 200 0 II SEMESTER 18EA05 Object Computing and Data Structures 3 2 0 4 50 18EA06 Analog VLSI Design 3 0 0 3 50 18EA07 Advanced Digital Signal Processing 3 2 0 4 50 18EA51 Circuits and Systems Simulation Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 18EA82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 Total 17 hrs 9 4 4 13 200 III SEMESTER 18EA08 Computer Architecture and Parallel Processing 3 0 0 3 50 18EA09 Embedded System Design 3 2 0 4 50 18EA__ Professional Elective 1 3 0 0 3 50 18EA52 Electronic System Design Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 Total 15 hrs 9 2 4 12 200 IV SEMESTER 18EA__ Professional Elective 2 3 0 0 3 50 18EA__ Professional Elective 3 3 2 0 4 50 18EA__ Professional Elective 4 3 0 0 3 50 18EA53 Applied Electronics Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 Total 15 hrs 9 2 4 12 200 V SEMESTER 18EA__ Professional Elective 5 3 0 0 3 50 18EA__ Professional Elective 6 3 0 0 3 50 18EA61 Industrial Visit and Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 18EA71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 50 Total 16 hrs 6 0 10 11 200 VI SEMESTER 0 0 28 14 18EA72 Project Work II 50 ELECTIVE 3 Associated with Centre of Excellence (One to be opted) 18EA21 Virtual Instrumentation Systems 3 2 0 4 50 18EA22 Internet of Things 3 2 0 4 50 18EA23 Totally Integrated Automation 3 2 0 4 50 ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES (Five to be opted) 18EA24 Algorithms for VLSI Design Automation 3 0 0 3 50 18EA25 VLSI Testing and Testability 3 0 0 3 50 18EA26 Mixed Signal VLSI Design 3 0 0 3 50 18EA27 Hardware Design Verification Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 18EA28 System on Chip 3 0 0 3 50 18EA29 ASIC Design 3 0 0 3 50 18EA30 Operating Systems 3 0 0 3 50 18EA31 Linear Systems 3 0 0 3 50 18EA32 Linux Architecture 3 0 0 3 50 18EA33 Wireless Sensor Networks 3 0 0 3 50 18EA34 Electronic Product Design 3 0 0 3 50 18EA35 Digital Image Processing 3 0 0 3 50 18EA36 Digital Video Processing 3 0 0 3 50 18EA37 Wavelets and Applications 3 0 0 3 50 18EA38 Biosignal Processing 3 0 0 3 50 18EA39 Optimization Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 18EA40 Internetworking and Applications 3 0 0 3 50 18EA41 Soft Computing 3 0 0 3 50 18EA42 Machine Learning and Applications 3 0 0 3 50 18EA43 Industrial Drives for Automation 3 0 0 3 50 * Indicated is the minimum number of credits to be earned by a student. ** - 60 hrs in I semester and 90 hrs in II semester; Grade: Completed / Not Completed CAT – Category; PC – Professional Core; PE - Professional Elective EEC – Employability Enhancement Mandatory Course

96

CAT

50 50 50 50 0 200

100 100 100 100 0 400

PC PC PC PC MC

50 50 50 50 0 200

100 100 100 100 0 400

PC PC PC PC MC

50 50 50 50 200

100 100 100 100 400

PC PC PE PC

50 50 50 50 200

100 100 100 100 400

PE PE PE PC

50 50 50 50 200

100 100 100 100 400

PE PE EEC EEC

50

100

EEC

50 50 50

100 100 100

PE PE PE

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE

Course; MC-

th

59 ACM

09.06.2018 ONE CREDIT COURSES

18EK06 18EK07 18EK13 18EK14 18EK15 18EK16 18EK17 18EK18 18EK19

Field Programmable Analog Array for Analog System Design Automotive Software Testing System Engineering for Automotive Applications Electric Vehicles Phasor Measurement Units & Applications Graphical Programming for Real-Time Applications CAD Tools for VLSI Design Automation Digital Design with Verilog HDL Automotive Electrical System

97

th

59 ACM

09.06.2018 SEMESTER I 18EA01/18EE01/18ED01/18EM01 MATHEMATICS OF SYSTEMS ENGINEERING 2203

VECTOR SPACES: Real vector spaces, subspaces, linear independence – basis and dimension of a vector space - inner product space, orthonormal bases, Gram-Schmidt process. (8+7) LINEAR TRANSFORMATIONS: General linear transformations, kernel and range, inverse linear transformations, matrices of general linear transformations, eigenvalues and eigenvectors, diagonalization. (8+7) CALCULUS OF VARIATIONS: Variational problems of fixed boundaries: Variations and its properties - simplest variational problems – Euler equation – Brachistochrone problem – variational problems involving several unknown functions – Functional involving first and second order derivatives. (8+7) STOCHASTIC PROCESSES: Classification. Markov chain: Transition probability matrices – Chapman Kolmogorov equations classification of states, limiting probabilities, Poisson process - continuous time Markov chains: Birth-death processes. (8+7) Total L:32 + T:28 = 60 REFERENCES: 1. Howard Anton and Chris Rorres, “Elementary Linear Algebra: Applications Version”, Wiley India, New Delhi, 2018. 2. David C Lay, “Linear Algebra and its Applications”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2017. 3. Medhi J., “Stochastic Processes”, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi, 2017. 4. Saeed Ghahramani, “Fundamentals of Probability with Stochastic Processes”, Pearson, New Delhi, 2016. 5. Elsgolts L., “Differential Equation and Calculus of Variation”, MIR Publication, Moscow, 1977.

18EA02 / 18EE02 / 18EM02 EMBEDDED CONTROLLERS AND APPLICATIONS 3003 8051: 8051 microcontroller – Architecture – Instruction sets – Addressing modes – I/O ports – Timer/Counter – Serial Communication – Interrupts – Assembly language programming. (11) PIC18F: PIC18f Micro-controller – Device overview – Pin diagrams. PIC18f micro-controller memory organization – Special Function Registers - I/O ports – Timers – Capture/ Compare/ PWM modules (CCP). Analog to Digital Converter module – Instruction set – Oscillator selection – Reset – Interrupts – Watch dog timer – PIC microcontroller programming. (11) ARM7: ARM7TDMI – Architecture overview - Processor modes – Data types – Registers – Program status registers – ARM Instruction Set – Thumb Instruction Set – Simple programs. (11) REAL WORLD INTERFACING: Master Synchronous Serial Port ((MSSP) structure - Detail study of UART, SPI, I2C, ADC and Comparators, Interfacing of PIC18F serial port - ADC using I2C. - RTC using I2C. – Design of data acquisition System - frequency counter with display on LCD - Digital Multimeter - DC motor control using PWM with signal. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. William Hohl and Christopher Hinds, “ARM Assembly Language Fundamentals and Techniques”, CRC Press, second edition, 2015. 2. Danny Causey, Muhammad Ali Mazidi, and Rolin D. McKinlay, “PIC Microcontroller & Embedded System: Using Assembly and C for PIC18”, Pearson Education India, 2008. 3. MykePredko, “Programming and Customizing the PIC Microcontroller”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 3rd Edition, 2008. 4. M.A. Mazidi, J.G. Mazidi and R.D. McKinlay, “The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems”, Prentice Hall India, 2nd Edition, New Delhi, 2007. 5. ARM System Developer's Guide, “Designing and Optimizing System Software”, Andrew Sloss Dominic Symes Chris Wright, 1st Edition, 2004. 6. John B. Peatman, “Design with PIC Microcontrollers”, Prentice Hall, 2003.

18EA03 / 18EE04 DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN AND TESTING 3204 REVIEW OF DIGITAL LOGIC CIRCUITS: Designing combinational circuit using multiplexer, decoder – Finite State Machines – Mealy Machine- Moore Machine – State Diagram – State table - Design of state machines using Algorithmic State Machines (ASM) chart as a design tool. System Design using PLDs: Basic concepts – Programming technologies - Programmable Logic Element (PLE) - Programmable Array Logic (PLA) - Programmable Array Logic (PAL) – Programmable Logic Architectures – 16L8 – 16R4 – 22V10–Design of combinational and sequential circuits using PLDs. (12+5) VERILOG: Signals, Identifier, Net and variable types, Operators, Gate instantiations, Modules and ports, data flow, gate level, Behavioral level ,Switch level and state machine modeling , Concurrent and procedural statements, UDP, sub circuit parameters, function and task, timing and delays - test benches-- design of combinational and sequential circuits using Verilog. (11+10) CPLD and FIELD PROGRAMMABLE GATE ARRAYS: Complex PLDs (CPLDs) –Xilinx cool runner architecture. Types of FPGA - Xilinx XC4000 series - Logic Cell Array (LCA) – Configurable Logic Blocks (CLB) - Input/output Blocks (IOB) - Programmable Interconnection Point(PIP) Implementing Functions in FPGAs Dedicated Memory in FPGAs – Dedicated Multipliers in FPGAs Mapping, Placement ,and Routing - Verilog based design flow for FPGA. . (11+10)

98

th

59 ACM

09.06.2018

HARDWARE TESTING AND DESIGN FOR TESTABILITY: Defects, errors, faults, Levels of Fault models, Types, Fault Detection in Combinational Logic circuits: Path sensitization method, Boolean difference method. Fault Detection in sequential logic circuit, Design for Testability: Scan path Testing, Boundary Scan Test, Built in Self Test. (11+5) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL : A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis”, Pearson Education Asia, 2014. . 2. Charles H Roth and Lizy Kurian John, “Digital Systems Design Using VHDL”, Cengage Learning, 2013. 3. Bhaskar J., “A Verilog Primer”, Prentice Hall of India Learning, 2012. 4. Micheal D.Ciletti, “Advance Digital Design with the Verilog HDL”, Prentice Hall of India Learning, 2012. 5. Wayne Wolf, “FPGA - Based System Design”, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2012. 6. Michael L Bushnell, Vishwani D Agrawal, “Essentials of Electronic Testing for Digital Memory and Mixed Signal VLSI Circuits”, Springer, 2002.

18EA04 VLSI DESIGN 3003 OVERVIEW OF VLSI DESIGN METHODOLOGY: VLSI design process - Architectural design - Logical design - Physical design Layout styles - Full custom - Semicustom approaches. (2) REVIEW OF MOS FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTORS: Introduction to MOS devices – n channel and p channel MOS transistors – Types – Symbol and Physical operation of enhancement type transistors, current – voltage characteristics – symbol and physical operation of depletion type transistor, current – voltage characteristics. (3) BASIC ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF MOS AND CMOS CIRCUITS: MOS transistor - Threshold voltage equations - Basic DC equations - Second order effects - MOS models - Small signal AC characteristics - NMOS inverter - Depletion mode and enhancement mode pull ups – CMOS inverter - DC characteristics - Inverter delay - Pass transistor - Transmission gate – Power consumption in CMOS gates – Static dissipation – Dynamic Dissipation. (7) VLSI FABRICATION TECHNIQUES: An overview of wafer fabrication – Wafer processing - Oxidation - Patterning - Diffusion - Ion implantation - Deposition – Silicon gate NMOS process - CMOS processes - NWell - PWell - Twintub - Silicon on insulator - CMOS process enhancements - Interconnect - Circuit elements - Latch up - Latchup prevention techniques. (6) LAYOUT DESIGN RULES: Need for design rules - Mead Conway design rules for the silicon gate NMOS process - CMOS based design rules - Simple layout examples - Sheet resistance - Area capacitance - Wiring capacitance - Driving large capacitive loads. (6) LOGIC DESIGN: Switch logic - Pass transistor and transmission gate based design - Gate logic - Inverter - Two input NAND gate NOR gate - Other forms of CMOS logic – Dynamic CMOS logic - Clocked CMOS logic - Precharged domino CMOS logic Structured design - Simple combinational logic design examples - Parity generator - Multiplexers – Clocked sequential circuits Two phase clocking - Charge storage - Dynamic register element - NMOS and CMOS - Dynamic shift register - Semistatic register - JK flip flop circuit. (11) SUBSYSTEM DESIGN PROCESS: General arrangement of a 4-bit arithmetic processor - Design of a 4bit shifter - Design of a ALU subsystem - Implementing ALU functions with an adder - Carry look ahead adders - Multipliers - Serial parallel multipliers – Pipelined multiplier array – Modified Booth's algorithm. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Kamran Eshraghian, Douglas A Pucknell, and Sholeh Eshraghian, “Essentials of VLSI Circuits and Systems”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2013. 2. Sung-Mo Kang and Yusuf Leblebici,” CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits”, Tata McGraw Hill,, New Delhi, 2011. 3. Wayne Wolf," Modern VLSI Design: Systems on Chip Design”, Pearson Education Inc., Indian Reprint, 2007. 4. Neil H E West and Kamran Eshranghian, "Principles of CMOS VLSI Design: A System Perspective", Addision-Wesley, 2004. 5. Jan M Rabaey, Chandrasekaran A and Nikolic B, “Digital Integrated Circuits,” Pearson Education, 2004. 6. Amar Mukherjee, "Introduction to nMOS and CMOS VLSI System Design", Prentice Hall, USA, 1986.

18EA05 / 18EE05 / 18ED05 OBJECT COMPUTING AND DATA STRUCTURES 3204 PRINCIPLES OF OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING: Procedure Oriented Programming, Object Oriented Programming paradigm - Basic concepts and benefits of OOP - Object Oriented Language - Applications of C++ - Operators in C++ - Classes and Objects - Manipulators. Functions in C++- Call by Reference - Return by reference - Inline functions - Default, Const Arguments - Function Overloading - Friend Functions - Member functions - Nesting of Member functions - Private member functions - Static data members - Static Member Functions - Arrays of Objects - Objects as Function Arguments - Friend Functions. (10+7) CONSTRUCTORS: Parameterized Constructor - Copy constructor - Multiple Constructors in a Class – Destructors. INHERITANCE: Defining Derived Classes - Single Inheritance - Making a Private Member Inheritable - Multiple Inheritance - Hierarchical Inheritance – Hybrid Inheritance. POLYMORPHISM: Compile and Run Time Polymorphism – Operator Overloading - Virtual function. (11+7) DATA STRUCTURES: Abstract data Types - Primitive data structures - Analysis of algorithms - Best, worst and average case time complexities – Notation. ARRAYS: Operations - Implementation of one, two, three and multi dimensioned arrays - Sparse and dense matrices - Applications. SORTING: Insertion sort - Selection sort - Bubble sort - Radix sort - Algorithms and their time complexities. (12+7) LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES: STACKS: Primitive operations - Sequential implementation - Applications: Subroutine handling, Recursion-Queues-Primitive operations - Sequential implementation - Applications: Job Scheduling. LISTS: Primitive Operations Singly linked lists, Doubly linked lists, Circular lists – Applications: Addition of Polynomials (10+7) 99

th

59 ACM

09.06.2018

NON-LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES: TREES: Terminologies - Binary Tree traversal.

(2+2) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75

REFERENCES: 1. Herbert Schildt, “C++ - The Complete Reference", Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2012. 2. Nell Dale, “C++ Plus Data Structures”, Jones & Bartlett, Massachusetts, 2011. 3. Harvey M Deitel and Paul J Deitel, “C++ How to Program”, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2010. 4. Stanley B Lippman, Josee Lajoie and Barbara E Moo, “The C++ Primer”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009. 5. Aaron M Tanenbaum, Moshe J Augenstein and Yedidyah Langsam, "Data structures using C and C++", Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009. 6. Sahni Sartaj, "Data Structures, Algorithms and Applications in C++", Universities Press, Hyderabad, 2005.

18EA51 CIRCUITS AND SYSTEMS SIMULATION LABORATORY 0042 LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Simulation of CMOS Digital Circuits using PSPICE Simulation of CMOS Analog circuits using PSPICE Experiments using 8051 Microcontrollers Interfacing using 8051 Microcontrollers Experiments using ARM Processor Mini Project

18EA06 ANALOG VLSI DESIGN 3003 ANALOG CIRCUIT BUILDING BLOCKS: Switches, Active Resistors, Current Sources and Sinks, Current Mirrors – Simple. Wilson, Cascode, Folded – Cascode. Voltage and Current References – General biasing circuits for analog design – Supply Independent biasing, Temperature independent biasing, Bandgap voltage references, Comparators, Multipliers (11) CMOS SINGLE STAGE AMPLIFIERS: MOS inverting amplifier, Improving the performance of inverting amplifer. Single stage MOS amplifiers. T- CS stage, CG stage, Source Follower, Frequency response of amplifiers (11) CMOS MULTI STAGE AMPLIFIERS: Cascode and Folded cascode stage, Current amplifiers, output amplifiers, Differential amplifiers, CMOS operational amplifiers, uncompensated and compensated Op Amps, Noise performance of Op-Amps, Op-Amp design techniques with examples. High performance CMOS Op-Amps. (9) SWITCHED CAPACITOR FILTERS: Introduction to Switched capacitor filters, Switched capacitor resistors.

(3)

DATA CONVERTERS: Data Converter fundamentals, DAC Architectures: Current Switched, Resistive, charge redistribution, Hybrid, Segmented D/A Converters. ADC architectures: Flash, Pipeline, Integrating, Successive Approximation and folding A/D Converters. (8) FIELD PROGRAMMABLE ANALOG ARRAY (FPAA): Overview of analog design – Introduction to Field Programmable analog array (FPAA) and its advantages – Role of EDA tool in Analog Design process. (3) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Phillip Allen and Douglas Holberg, “CMOS Analog Circuit Design”, Oxford University Press, 3rd Edition, Reprint September, 2014. 2. Behzad Razavi, “Design of CMOS Integrated Circuits”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2011. 3. Roubik Gregorian, Gabor C. Temes, “Analog MOS Integrated Circuits for Signal Processing”, John Wiley & Sons, 2013. 4. Randall L Geiger, Phillip E Allen and Noel R Strader, "VLSI Design Techniques for Analog and Digital Circuits", McGraw Hill, International Edition, 1990. 5. David A Johns and Ken Martin, “Analog Integrated Circuit Design”, John Wiley and Sons, 2002, 2nd Edition, 2011. 6. Jacob Baker R, Lee H W and Boyce D E, “CMOS Circuit Design, Layout and Simulation”, Prentice Hall of India, 2nd Edition, 2010.

18EA07 ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING 3204 MULTIRATE DSP: Sampling – Spectral representation: DFT and FFT – Review of Digital filters - Decimation and Interpolation by an integer and rational factors – Multistaging – Decimation and Interpolation with poly phase filters – Realizations – Applications of multirate signal processing. (11+7) FILTER BANKS: Analysis and Synthesis of Filter Banks – Quadrature Mirror Filter (QMF) banks – Filter bank with perfect reconstruction – 2-Channel and M-channel – Paraunitary filter banks – Biorthogonal and Linear phase filter banks – Tree and parallel structured filter banks – Transmultiplexer filter banks – Multi resolution analysis – Subband coding and its applications. (12+8) ADAPTIVE FILTERS: FIR adaptive filters – adaptive filters based on steepest descent method – LMS algorithm – Variants of LMS algorithm – adaptive channel equalization – adaptive echo cancellation – RLS adaptive algorithm. (11+7)

100

th

59 ACM

09.06.2018

WAVELET TRANSFORM: Short-Time Fourier Transform – limitations - time-frequency scaling- Heisenberg’s uncertainty – Continuous Wavelet Transform – Discrete Wavelet Transform – Haar, Daubechy’s wavelets – Multi Resolution Analysis of audio signal. (11+8) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Fliege N.J., “Multirate Digital Signal Processing” John Wiley & Sons Ltd., Reprinted with Correction, 2000. 2. Vaidyanathan P P., “Multirate Systems and Filter Banks”, Pearson Education, 2011. 3. John G Proakis and Dimitris G Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing-Principles, Algorithms and Applications”, Prentice Hall of India, 2013. 4. Rao R.M. and Bopardikar A.S., “Wavelet Transforms: Introduction to Theory and Applications”, Addison Wesley, Reprint, 2003. 5. Soman K.P. and Ramachandran K.I., “Insight into Wavelets-From Theory to Practice”, Prentice Hall of India, 2010.

18EA08 / 18EE24 COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE AND PARALLEL PROCESSING 3003 REGISTER TRANSFER LANGUAGE AND MICRO-OPERATIONS: Register transfer language – Inter-register transfer - Arithmetic micro-operations – Logic micro-operations – Shift micro-operations – Control functions - Data path Organisation - Binary arithmetic unit – BCD arithmetic unit – Floating point arithmetic unit – Processor bus configuration – Data transfer and manipulation – Hardwired and micro-programmed control. (12) MEMORY UNIT AND INPUT-OUTPUT UNIT: Memory hierarchy – Main memory – Back-up storage units – Multiple module memories – Interleaved memory – Associative memory - Virtual memory systems – Structure – Paging – TLB – Segmentation – Replacement strategies – Cache memory: Basic cache structure – Direct, fully associative and set associative mapping – Replacement policies – Multiple caches – Memory management hardware - Characteristics of I/O subsystem – Interrupt mechanisms and special hardware – Direct Memory Access – I/O processors and I/O channels – Asynchronous data transfer. (10) PARALLEL PROCESSING AND PIPELINING: Basic uniprocessor architecture – Parallel processing mechanisms – Levels of parallelism – Balancing of subsystem bandwidth – Parallel computer structures – Architectural classifications – Parallel processing applications -Linear pipelining – Pipeline processors – Instruction and Arithmetic pipelines – Organization of pipelined units – Instruction pre-fetch and branch handling – Pipeline hazards – Reducing branch penalties – Branch prediction strategies – Vector processing: requirements and characteristics – High performance Architectures: Superscalar Architecture – VLIW Architecture. (11) ARRAY PROCESSING AND MULTIPROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE: SIMD array processors – Masking and data routing mechanisms – SIMD Interconnection networks - Multiprocessor Architecture - Functional structures: Loosely and Tightly coupled Multiprocessors – Processor characteristics for multiprocessing – Symmetric Multiprocessors (SMP) – Non Uniform Memory Access (NUMA) – Interconnection structures for multiprocessors – Cache coherence – Thread level parallelism – Multithreading – Clusters. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. John Hennessy and David Patterson, "Computer Architecture: A Quantitative approach", Elsevier India Publishers, 5th Edition, 2017. 2. Kai Hwang and Faye A Briggs, "Computer Architecture and Parallel Processing", McGraw Hill Book Company, 2016. 3. Stallings W, “Computer Organisation and Architecture – Designing for performance”, Pearson Publishers, 9th Edition, 2014. 4. Mano M.M., "Computer System Architecture", Pearson Publishers, 3rd Edition, 2013.

18EA09 EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN 3204 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS: Introduction – Embedded systems versus general computing systems – Classification – Major application areas – Hardware and Software components: CPU of an embedded system – Memory – Input/Output devices, Sensors and actuators – Communication interfaces : I2C, SPI, CAN, and LIN - Firmware, other system components–Characteristics and quality attributes. (12+8) EMBEDDED FIRMWARE DEVELOPMENT: Integrated development environment (IDE) – Cross-compiler - Cross Assembler – Software debugging techniques – In Circuit Emulator – Hardware-software co-design and program modeling - Issues in co-design – Introduction to UML – Hardware-software trade-offs – Code optimization, Fixed point and floating point implementation of algorithms – Analysis and Optimization of CPU Power Consumption. (12+8) RTOS FOR EMBEDDED SYSTEMS: Interrupt driven systems - Need for Real-time Operating System – RTOS Concepts – Tasks, Context switching, Interrupt latency, Memory management, Scheduling, Task synchronization, Shared data issues – Introduction to RTOS APIs – Power optimization strategies for processes – Basic design using RTOS – Response time calculation – Performance Comparison of commercial RTOSs. (12+8) EMBEDDED PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT: Design tools – Development techniques – Embedded product development cycle (EDLC) – Objectives – Phases –Modeling EDLC – Trends in the embedded industry. DESIGN CASE STUDIES: Smartcard reader – Automated meter reading system – Digital Camera – Advanced Driver Assistance Systems. (9+6) Total L: 45 + 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Marilyn Wolf, “Computers as components: Principles of Embedded Computing Design, 4th Edition, Morgan Kaufmann, 2016. 2. Jonathan W Valvano, “Embedded Microcomputer Systems, Real Time Interfacing”, 3rd Edition, CENGAGE Learning, 2012. 3. Shibu K. V., “Introduction to Embedded Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009. 101

th

59 ACM 4.

09.06.2018

David E Simon, “An Embedded Software Primer”, Pearson India, 2008.

18EA52 ELECTRONIC SYSTEM DESIGN LABORATORY 0042 LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Design and Simulation of Digital Circuits using VHDL / Verilog and porting them into FPGA. Layout of Simple NMOS/CMOS Circuits. Study of Dynamically programmed Analog Signal Processers. Applications using DSP Processors. Implementing a basic computer on FPGA (implementing and simulating a common bus/ Data Path block/ control unit) Mini Project.

18EA61 INDUSTRIAL VISIT & TECHNICAL SEMINAR 0042 The student will make at least two technical presentations on current topics related to the specialization. The same will be assessed by a committee appointed by the department. The students are expected to submit a report at the end of the semester covering the various aspects of his/her presentation together with the observation in industry visits. A quiz covering the above will be held at the end of the semester. Total P: 60

18EA53 APPLIED ELECTRONICS LABORATORY 0042 LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Implementation of Digital Circuit Testing Algorithms using C. Implementation of Interprocess communication mechanisms. Design simple placement, partitioning and routing algorithms using C. Simple RTOS Experiment to view multitasking using Keil IDE. Implementation of Image/ Video Processing algorithms using Matlab. Mini Project

18EA71 PROJECT WORK – I 0063    

Identification of a problem. Literature survey of identified problem. Finalization of project specification and requirements Presentation / Demonstration of sub block(s) of the Project ( Hardware / Software / both )

IV SEMESTER 18EA72 PROJECT WORK – II 0 0 28 14   

Project Implementation ( Hardware / Software / both ) Presentation / Demonstration about the work done Consolidated report preparation

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE (ELECTIVE 3 Associated with Centre of Excellence)

18EA21 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS 3204 INTRODUCTION: Concept of virtual instrumentation, virtual instrumentation model, design flow with graphical system design, graphical data flow programming - Modular programming, repetition and loops, arrays, clusters, plotting data, structures, strings, state machines – file I/O- creating LabVIEW executables and projects. (12+8) DATA ACQUISITION: DAQ hardware configuration, DAQ hardware – Sampling and grounding techniques - analog I/O, digital I/O, counter/timer, DAQ software architecture, network data acquisition. Application design using Real Time Targets: PXI, cRIO. (11+7) INSTRUMENT INTERFACES: Virtual Instrumentation Software Architecture (VISA), instrument drivers, serial and parallel interfaces: RS232, USB, firewire, controller area network (CAN), GPIB, Industrial Ethernet. OLE for Process Control (OPC) (11+7) ADVANCED FEATURES IN LabVIEW: System identification and control design, signal processing, image acquisition and processing, data logging and supervisory control, LabVIEW Interface for Arduino, case studies on machine vision, motion control, GSD applications. (11+8) Total: L: 45 T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Jovitha Jerome, “Virtual Instrumentation using LabVIEW”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2010. 2. Rick Bitter, Taqi Mohiuddin and Matt Nawrocki, “LabVIEW Advanced Programming Techniques”, CRC Press, 2009. 102

th

59 ACM 3. 4. 5.

09.06.2018

Mathivanan, N. “PC-Based Instrumentation”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2009. Sanjay Gupta and Joseph John, “Virtual Instrumentation using LabVIEW”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008. Gary Johnson and Richard Jennings, “LabVIEW Graphical Programming”, McGraw Hill Inc., 2006.

18EA22 / 18EE21 / 18ED22 / 18EM23 INTERNET OF THINGS 3204 FUNDAMENTALS OF IoT: Introduction to Internet of Things (IoT) – Machine to Machine (M2M) – Functional Characteristics – Recent Trends in the Adoption of IoT – Societal Benefits of IoT – Consumer IoT vs Industrial Functional Components of a typical IoT System: Sensors, Actuators, Embedded Computation Units, Communication Interfaces, Software Development (9+5) IoT PROTOCOLS: Physical and Data Linnk Layer Protocols: RFID: NFC, FFC, ZigBEE, Bluetooth Low Energy, Z-Wave, Wi-Fi, Wireless HART - Network Layer Protocols: IPv4, IPv6, TCP & UDP, 6LoWPAN - Application Layer Protocols: COAP, MQTT (13+10) CLOUD COMPUTING: NIST Visual Model – Essential Characteristics – Components of Cloud Computing - Service Models – Deployment Models – Service Management and Security – Examples – Basics of Fog Computing (12+7) SECURITY IN IoT: IEEE 802.11 Wireless Networks Attacks: Basic Types, RFID Security – Security Issues in ZigBEE: Bluetooth Security: Threats to Bluetooth Devices and Networks - IoT Applications: Health Care, Connected Vehicles, Smart Grid, Smart Home, and Smart City (11+8) Total: L: 45 T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Vijay Madisetti, Arshdeep Bahga, “Internet of Things (A Hands-on Approach)”, Universities Press, 2015. 2. Adrian McEwen and Hakim Cassimally, “Designing the Internet of Things”, John Wiley and Sons Ltd, UK, 2014. 3. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick and Omar Elloumi, “The Internet of Things: Key Applications and Protocols”, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., UK 2012. 4. Dieter Uckelmann, Mark Harrison, Florian Michahelles, “Architecting the Internet of Things”, Springer, New York, 2011. 5. Johnny Cache, Joshua Wright and Vincent Liu, “Hacking Exposed Wireless: Wireless Security Secrets and Solutions”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2010. 6. Himanshu Dwivedi, Chris Clark and David Thiel, “Mobile Application Security”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2010.

18EA23 / 18EE22 / 18ED23 / 18EM22 TOTALLY INTEGRATED AUTOMATION 3204 INTRODUCTION TO FACTORY & PROCESS AUTOMATION: Evolution of Industrial Versions - Control elements of Industrial Automation - IEC/ ISA Standards for Control Elements – Selection criteria for control elements – Utilisation Category with IEC standards - Construction of Relay Ladder logic with different control elements- Need for PLC - PLC evolution. (6+3) PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS: Architecture of PLC - Types of PLC – PLC modules, PLC Configuration - Scan cycle - Capabilities of PLC- Selection criteria for PLC – PLC Communication - PLC Wiring - Installation of PLC and its Modules. Types of Programming – Bit Instructions - Timers and counters – PLC arithmetic functions PTO / PWM generation - High Speed Counter – Analog Scaling – Encoder Interfacing - Servo drive control – Stepper Motor Control. (12+13) HMI SYSTEMS: Need for HMI in Industrial Automation, Types of HMI – Configuration of HMI, Screen development and navigation, Configuration of HMI elements / objects and Interfacing with PLC. (6+7) NETWORKING: PLC Networking - Networking standards & IEEE Standard - Protocols - Field bus - Process bus and Ethernet – EttherCAT (7+0) SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION: Architecture – Tools – Tag Configuration - Internal & External graphics, Alarm logging – Tag logging – structured tags – Trends – history – Report generation (14+7) Total: 75 L: 45 + T: 30 REFERENCES: 1. W. Bolton, “Programmable Logic Controllers”, Elsevier Ltd., 2015. 2. Frank D Petruzella, “Programmable Logic Controllers ‖”, McGraw Hill, 2011. 3. John R Hackworth and Fredrick D Hackworth Jr., “Programmable Logic Controllers: Programming Methods and Applications ‖”, Pearson Education, 2006.

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES 18EA24 ALGORITHMS FOR VLSI DESIGN AUTOMATION 3003 INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN METHODOLOGIES: VLSI Design problem - The Design Domains-Design methods and Technologies. (3) ALGORITHMIC GRAPH THEORY AND COMPUTATIONAL COMPLEXITY: Data structures for the representation of graphs Computational Complexity - Graph Algorithms - Depth first search - Breadth first search - Dijkstra's shortest path algorithm - Prim's algorithm. (8)

103

th

59 ACM

09.06.2018

PLACEMENT, PARTITIONING AND FLOOR PLANNING: Circuit representation - Types of Placement Problem - Placement Algorithms- Constructive Placement, Iterative Improvement - Partitioning - Kernighan - Lin Partitioning algorithm - Floor Planning Representation - Shape functions and floor plan sizing. (11) ROUTING: Local routing problems - Area routing - Channel routing - Channel Routing Models, The Vertical Constraint Graph, Horizontal Constraints and the Left-edge Algorithm, Channel Routing Algorithms - Global routing - Standard-cell, Building-block Layout and Channel Order, Algorithms for Global Routing. (11) SIMULATION: Gate level modeling and simulation - Compiler driven simulation - Event driven simulation - Switch-level modeling and simulation. (6) HIGH LEVEL SYNTHESIS: Hardware models - Allocation - Assignment - Scheduling - Assignment Problem - High level transformation. (6) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Abramovici M, Brever A and Friendman D, "Digital Systems Testing and Testable Design", Jaico Publishing House, 2014. 2. Naveed Sherwani, "Algorithms for VLSI Physical Design Automation", Springer-Verlag, 2013. 3. Sabih H.Gerez, "Algorithms for VLSI Design Automation", John Wiley & Sons, 2011. 4. Sadiq M Sait and Habib Youssef, "VLSI Physical Design Automation", IEEE Press, New York, 2010. 5. WayneWolf, "Modern VLSI Design: Systems on Chip Design", Pearson Education Inc., Indian Reprint, 2007.

18EA25 VLSI TESTING AND TESTABILITY 3003 FAULT MODELS AND FAULT SIMULATION: Need for testing - Fault models - Fault detection and redundancy - Combinational circuits – Sequential circuits - Fault equivalence - Fault dominance – Logic simulation - Compiler driven Simulation - Event driven Simulation - Fault simulation techniques - Serial, parallel, deductive. (11) TESTING FOR SINGLE STUCK AT - FAULTS: Test generation algorithms for combinational circuits - Fault oriented ATG – Dalgorithm – Examples – PODEM – Fault independent ATG - Random test generation – ATG for SSFs in sequential circuits - TG using iterative array models - Random test generation. (12) DELAY TEST & ANALOG SIGNAL TEST: Delay test problem – Path delay test – Transition faults – Delay test methodologies. Analog And Mixed Signal Test : DSP based analog and mixed signal test – Static ADC and DAC testing methods - Model based Analog and Mixed signal Test - Analog fault models-Analog fault simulation – Analog ATPG (11) DESIGN FOR TESTABILITY: Adhoc design for testability techniques - Controllability and Observability by means of scan registers – Storage cells for scan designs – Level Sensitive Scan Design (LSSD) - Partial Scan – Boundary scan – BIST concepts and architectures. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Abramovici M., Brever A. and Friedman D., "Digital Systems Testing and Testable Design", Jaico Publishing House, 2013. 2. Xiaoqing Wen, Cheng Wen Wu and Laung Terng Wang, “VLSI Test Principles and Architectures: Design for Testability”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2011. 3. Michael L Bushnell and Vishwani D Agarwal, “Essentials of Electronic Testing for Digital, Memory and Mixed Signal Circuits”, Springer, 2002. 4. Parag K Lala, “Fault Tolerant and Fault Testable Hardware Design”, BS Publications, 2002. 5. Stanley L Hurst, “VLSI Testing : Digital and Mixed Analogue Digital Techniques”, Institute of Electrical Engineers,1998.

18EA26 MIXED SIGNAL VLSI DESIGN 3003 SIGMA DELTA CONVERTERS: Over Sampled Converters - Over Sampling With Out Noise & With Noise - Implementation Imperfections - First Order Modulator - Decimation Filters - Higher Order Modulators – Sigma Delta DAC & ADCs (11) CONTINUOUS TIME FILTERS & DIGITAL FILTERS: Introduction to Gm - C filters - bipolar transconductors - CMOS Transconductors using Triode transistors, active transistors - BiCMOS transconductors – MOSFET C Filters - Tuning Circuitry Dynamic range performance - Digital Filters: Sampling – decimation – interpolation - implementation of FIR and IIR filters. (11) PHASE LOCKED LOOPS AND MIXED SIGNAL LAYOUT: Basic Architecture of PLL, Charge Pump PLL, Non-ideal effects in PLLs, Applications. CMOS design rules – Layout of CMOS – Capacitors – Resistors – Mixed layout issues: Floor planning, power supply and ground, fully differential matching, Guard rings and shielding. (12) ANALOG AND MIXED SIGNAL EXTENSIONS TO VHDL: Introduction - Language design objectives - Theory of differential algebraic equations - the 1076 .1 Language - Tolerance groups - Conservative systems - Time and the simulation cycle - A/D and D/A Interaction - Quiescent Point - Frequency domain modeling and examples. (11) Total L : 45 REFERENCES: 1. Phillip Allen and Douglas Holberg “CMOS Analog Circuit Design”, Oxford University Press, 2000, 3rd Edition, 2014. 2. David A Johns and Ken Martin, “Analog Integrated Circuit Design”, John Wiley and Sons, 2002, 2nd Edition, 2011. 3. Behzad Razavi ,“ Design Of Analog Cmos Integrated Circuits”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2011.

104

th

59 ACM 4. 5. 6.

09.06.2018

Jacob Baker, Harry W Li, and David E Boyce “CMOS, Circuit Design Layout and Simulation”, Wiley-IEEE Press, 2nd Edition August, 2010. Rudy van de Plassche “Integrated Analog-to-Digital and Digital-to-Analog Converters”, Springer, 2007. Tsividis Y P, “Mixed Analog and Digital VLSI Devices and Technology”, McGraw Hill, 1996.

18EA27 HARDWARE DESIGN VERIFICATION TECHNIQUES 3003 VERIFICATION TECHNIQUES: Introduction – Testing Versus Verification – Design and Verification reuse. Techniques based on simulation – Analytical and Formal approaches – Function verification – Timing verification – Formal verification – Basic of equivalence checking and model checking. (10) VERIFICATION TOOLS: Linting Tools – Simulators – Waveform viewers – Code Coverage – Functional Coverage – Metrics. VERITIFCATION PLAN: Levels of verification – Verification Strategies – Test cases – Test benches. STIMULUS AND RESPONSE: Transaction Level Interface.

(13)

Reference signals – Simple stimulus – Simple output – Complex Stimulus and response – (11)

ARCHITECTING TEST BENCHES: Test Hardness – VHDL Test Hardness – Design Configuration – Self Checking Test benches – Directed stimulus – Random stimulus – VHDL configuration management. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Andreas Meyer, “Principles of Functional Verification”, Newnes, 2009. 2. Samir Palnitkar, “Design Verification with e”, Pearson Education, 2008. 3. Janick Bergeron, “Writing Test Benches: Functional Verification of HDL Models” Springer 2003. 4. M Kerrel Iran and Robert P Kustbern, “Verification of Digital and Hybrid Systems”, Springer Verlag, 2000. 5. Thomas Kropf “Introduction to Formal Hardware Verification”, Springer Verlag, 1999.

18EA28 SYSTEM ON CHIP 3003 INTRODUCTION: System trade offs and evolution of ASIC Technology – System on chip concepts and methodology – SoC design issues – SoC challenges and components. (4) DESIGN METHODOLOGIC FOR LOGIC CORES: SoC Design Flow – On-chip buses – Design process for hard cores – Soft and firm cores – Designing with hard cores, soft cores – Core and SoC design examples. (8) DESIGN METHODOLOGY FOR MEMORY AND ANALOG CORES: Embedded memories – Simulation modes – Specification of analog circuits – A to D converter – D to A converter – Phase-locked loops – High speed I/O (11) DESIGN VALIDATION: Core level validation – Test benches- SoC design validation – Co-simulation – Hardware/software coverification. (11) SOC TESTING: SoC Test issues – Testing of digital logic cores – Cores with boundary scan – Test methodology for design reuse – Testing of microprocessor cores – Built in self test method – Testing of embedded memories. Case Studies. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Rajanish K Kamat, Santosh A Shinde, Vinod G Shelake, “Unleesh the System-on-Chip using FPGAs and Handle C, Spinger 2009. 2. Laung-Terng Wang, Charles E Stroud and Nur A Toubq, “System on Chip Test Architectures: Nanometer Design for Testability”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2008. 3. Wgel Badawy, Graham A Jullien, “System-on-Chip for Real-Time Applications”, Kluwer Academic Press, 2003. 4. Rochit Rajsuman, “System-on-a-chip: Design and Test”, Artech House, London, 2000.

18EA29 ASIC DESIGN 3003 INTRODUCTION TO ASICS, CMOS LOGIC AND ASIC LIBRARY DESIGN: Types of ASICs - Design flow - CMOS transistors CMOS Design rules - Combinational Logic Cell – Sequential Logic cell - Data path logic cell - Transistors as Resistors - Transistor Parasitic Capacitance - Logical effort - Library cell design - Library architecture. (11) PROGRAMMABLE ASICS: Anti fuse - static RAM - EPROM and EEPROM technology - PREP benchmarks - Actel ACT - Xilinx LCA - Altera FLEX - Altera MAX DC & AC inputs and outputs - Clock & Power inputs - Xilinx I/O blocks. (11) PROGRAMMABLE ASIC INTERCONNECT, PROGRAMMABLE ASIC DESIGN SOFTWARE AND LOW LEVEL DESIGN ENTRY: Actel ACT - Xilinx LCA - Xilinx EPLD - Altera MAX 5000 and 7000 - Design systems - Logic Synthesis - Half gate ASIC Schematic entry - Low level design language – Introduction to PLA tools. (7) LOGIC SYNTHESIS, SIMULATION AND TESTING: VHDL and logic synthesis - types of simulation - boundary scan test - fault simulation automatic test pattern generation. (6)

105

th

59 ACM

09.06.2018

ASIC CONSTRUCTION, FLOOR PLANNING, PLACEMENT AND ROUTING: System partition - FPGA partitioning - partitioning methods - floor planning - placement - physical design flow - global routing - detailed routing - special routing - circuit extraction. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Smith M.J.S., "Application - Specific Integrated Circuits", Addison - Wesley Longman Inc., 2013. 2. Chu P., “FPGA Prototyping by VHDL Examples”, Wiley, 2008. 3. Francis R.J., Rose J., Vranesic Z.G., Brown S.D., “Field Programmable Gate Arrays", Springer Verleg, 2007. 4. Mohammed Ismail and Terri Fiez, "Analog VLSI Signal and Information Processing ", McGraw Hill, 1994. 5. Andrew Brown, "VLSI Circuits and Systems in Silicon", McGraw Hill, 1991. 6. Kung S.Y., Whilo House H.J., Kailath T., "VLSI and Modern Signal Processing", Prentice Hall, 1985.

18EA30 OPERATING SYSTEMS 3003 INTRODUCTION: Operating system structure – Function – Evolutions of Operating Systems - Serial processing, Batch Processing, Multiprocessing, Time-sharing operating systems - Distributed OS - Multiprocessor OS – Real-time OS – Introduction to system calls. (4) PROCESS MANAGEMENT: Introduction to processes –Threads - Scheduling objectives - Scheduling Criteria - Types of scheduling algorithms – Performance comparison – Inter-process communications - Synchronization – Semaphores – Deadlock - Prevention, Recovery, Detection – Avoidance. (9) MEMORY MANAGEMENT: Single contiguous allocation – Partitioned allocation – Paging – Virtual memory concepts – Swapping – Demand paging – Page replacement algorithms – Segmentation – Segmentation with paging. (11) DEVICE AND FILE MANAGEMENT: Principles of I/O hardware – I/O software – Disks – Disk Scheduling Algorithms – File Systems – Files-Directories- File system implementation – Allocation methods – Security – Protection mechanisms. (11) CASE STUDIES: LINUX – History – Design Principles – Kernel modules – Process Management – Scheduling – Memory Management – File Systems – Input and Output – Inter-process Communication – Network Structure – Security. (5) WINDOWS 7 – History – Design Principles – System Components – Terminal Services and Fast User Switching –File System – Networking – Programmer Interface. (5) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, “Modern OS”, Pearson Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2015. 2. Dhamdhere D. M., “Operating Systems- A Concept Based Approach”, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition, 2014. 3. Silberschatz A., Galvin P and Gagne G., “Operating System Concepts”, John Wiley and Sons, Singapore, 2013. 4. Deitel H M., Deitel P J. and Choffnes D R.,” An Introduction to Operating Systems”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2013. 5. William Stallings, “Operating Systems”, Prentice-Hall, 2007. 6. Mukesh Singhal and Niranjan G Shivaratis, “Advanced Concepts in Operating Systems”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2004.

18EA31 LINEAR SYSTEMS 3003 MATHEMATICAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM: Causality, Lumpedness, Linearity, Linearization, Concept of state, state variables and state model, State space representation using physical, phase and canonical variables, Comparison of input-output description and state variable description, MIMO systems, Discretization of a continuous time model. (11) SOLUTION OF STATE EQUATIONS: State transition matrix-Significance, Properties, Computation, solution of continuous time state equation, impulse response matrix, Solution of discrete time state equation, Solution of linear time variant systems, Transfer function from state space model, similarity transformation, decomposition of transfer functions - direct, cascade and parallel decomposition techniques. (12) CONCEPT OF CONTROLLABILITY AND OBSERVABILITY: Kalman`s and Gilbert`s test, State feedback controller design using Ackermann’s formula, Design of full order observer using Ackermann’s formula, Duality, Observer based controller design, Reduced order observer design, Controllability and observability of Discrete LTI systems, Controllability and observability of linear time variant systems, Effect of pole-zero cancellation. (11) STABILITY: Stability in the sense of Lyapunov, asymptotic stability of linear time invariant continuous and discrete systems, Solution of Lyapunov equation, internal stability, stability of linear time variant system. (12) Total: L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Gopal M, “Modern Control System Theory”, New Age International, 2014. 2. Chen CT, “Linear System Theory and Design”, Oxford University Press, 2012. 3. William L Brogan, “Modern Control Theory”, Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2011. 4. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 2010. 5. Benjamin C Kuo, “Automatic Control Systems”, Prentice Hall of India, 2003.

106

th

59 ACM

09.06.2018 18EA32 LINUX ARCHITECTURE 3003

INTRODUCTION: Evolution of Linux OS – Main characteristics of Linux – Typical Linux distributions – Linux directory structure – User and super/root users – access rights – Home directory – Vi editior - Commands – Overview of shell and GUI. (11) LINUX KERNAL ARCHITECTURE: Layer diagram of OS - Hardware Abstraction Layer (HAL) – Memory manager – scheduler – file system – I/O subsystem – Networking subsystem – IPC – user space. (11) LINUX FILE SYSTEM: Layers of Linux file system – structure of inode – process file system – The Ext2 File system – System programming concepts – API & ABIs – C library and compiler. (11) DEVICE DRIVER: System start up (Booting) Methods - PC I/O architecture – classification of Linux devices: character and block devices – port I/O – PCI and ISA bus – polling, interrupt, and waiting queue – Device Files - Device driver Registration – Device driver initialization – I/O operation - typical Linux driver – dynamic and static drivers - kernel modules – Linking and unlinking of modules – On Demand modules linking. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Robert Love, “LINUX System Programming”, Shroff Publishers & Distributors Pvt. Ltd., 2007. 2. Raghavan P., Amol Lad, Sriram Neelakandan, “Embedded Linux System Design and Development”, Tailor & Francis Group, 2006 3. Daniel P. Bovet, Marco Cesati, “Understanding the Linux Kernel”, Shroff Publishers & Distributors Pvt. Ltd., 2005. 4. Tim Jones M., “GNU/Linux Application Programming”, Wiley Dreamtech India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2005. 5. Michael Beck, Harald Bohme, Mirko Dziadzka, Ulrich Kunitz, "Linux Kernel Programming", Pearson Education, 2002.

18EA33 / 18EE29 WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS 3003 CHARACTERISTICS OF WSN: Characteristic requirements for WSN, Challenges for WSNs, WSN vs Adhoc Networks, Sensor node architecture, Commercially available sensor nodes, Physical layer and transceiver design considerations in WSNs, Energy usage profile, Choice of modulation scheme, Dynamic modulation scaling, Antenna considerations. (11) MEDIUM ACCESS AND ROUTING: Fundamentals of MAC protocols, Low duty cycle protocols and wakeup concepts, Contention based protocols, Schedule-based protocols: SMAC - BMAC - Traffic-adaptive medium access protocol (TRAMA), The IEEE 802.15.4 MAC protocol. Routing And Data Gathering Protocols, Routing Challenges and Design Issues in Wireless Sensor Networks, Flooding and gossiping, Data centric Routing, Energy aware routing, Hierarchical Routing, Real Time routing Protocols. (12) LOCALIZATION AND MANIPULATION: Localization and positioning, Coverage and connectivity, Single-hop and multihop localization, Self configuring localization systems, Sensor management. Data Storage and Manipulation, Data centric and content based routing, Storage and retrieval in network, Compression technologies for WSN, Data Aggregation Techniques. (11) OPERATING SYSTEMS AND APPLICATIONS: Operating Systems for Wireless Sensor Networks, Design Issues, Examples of Operating Systems: TinyOS – Mate – MagnetOS – MANTIS. WSN Applications, Home Control, Building Automation, Medical Applications, - Reconfigurable Sensor Networks, Civil and Environmental Engineering Applications Nanoscopic Sensor Applications, Case Study: IEEE 802.15.4 LR-WPANs Standard - Target detection and tracking - Contour/edge detection - Field sampling. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Kazem Sohraby, Daniel Minoli and Taieb Znati, “Wireless Sensor Networks Technology, Protocols, and Applications“, John Wiley & Sons, 2015. 2. Holger Karl and Andreas Willig, “Protocols and Architectures for Wireless Sensor Networks”, John Wiley & Sons, Ltd, 2015. 3. K. Akkaya and M. Younis, “A survey of routing protocols in wireless sensor networks”, Elsevier Ad Hoc Network Journal, Vol. 3, No. 3, pp. 325 - 349, 2005. 4. Anna Ha´c, “Wireless Sensor Network Designs”, John Wiley & Sons Ltd., 2007. 5. Raghavendra, Cauligi S, Sivalingam, Krishna M., Zanti Taieb, “Wireless Sensor Network”, Springer, 2004.

18EA34 ELECTRONIC PRODUCT DESIGN 3003 ELECTRONIC SYSTEM DESIGN: Top down design - product concept - innovation - creativity - validation – communication product requirements - system architecture development - trade-off analysis - cost modelling - circuit design - physical and mechanical design - Tolerance and reliability - Quality control - quality assurance - quality functional deployment - assignment matrices – checklist - quality in the design process - concurrent design - risk analysis - quality in production (11) ELECTRONIC PACKAGING: IC packaging: Leaded package, TABITCP package - COB, flip-chip, BGA, CSP-Discrete components - Board to board connectors - substrates - Escape routing - PCA/module design metrics - Electronic packaging metrics-I/O hardware: buttons, switches, dials and touch screens, speakers, microphones, antennas, and external connectors. (11) ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY & MECHANICAL DESIGN: Electromagnetic fields and human health – EMC Control : Characterizing the threat – Laws and Regulators – EMC Design : Grounding and shielding – Emission Suppression – Susceptibility hardening - EMC Testing - EMI shielding THERMAL MANAGEMENT: High level thermal analysis, thermal issues in notebook computers - mechanical integration - DFMA analysis. (11) 107

th

59 ACM

09.06.2018

PORTABLE ELECTRONICS : Digital and Analog processing: microprocessor, logic devices, microcontrollers, DSP, analog devices, sensors, wireless communication, system memory and mass storage - Displays: Display technologies - Flexible OLED Displays LED-LCD-micro display - pen input - power sources - Battery technologies: Ni-Cd, alkaline, Ni-MH, lithium ion, lithium polymer, photovoltaic cells, fuel cells - product implementation - high level power analysis-Case study: Cellular phones - portable PCs Personal digital assistants - digital imaging products. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Tim Williams, “EMC for Product Designers”, 5th Edition, Copyright@2017 Elsevier Ltd. 2. Bert Haskell, “Portable Electronics Product Design and Development: For Cellular Phones, PDAs, Digital Cameras, Personal Electronics and More”, McGraw Hill, 2010. 3. Tony Ward and James Angus, “Electronic Product Design”, Chapman and Hall publications, 1996.

18EA35 / 18EE33 DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING 3003 IMAGE FORMATION AND ENHANCEMENT: Human visual system – Sampling and Quantization – Color fundamentals – Spatial domain processing – Simple image operations – Point wise intensity transformations - Histogram processing - Linear and non-linear noise smoothening – Sharpening - Derivatives – Laplacian – Combing spatial enhancement methods. (11) FREQUENCY TRANSFORMS AND APPLICATIONS: Frequency domain processing – 2-D transforms: DFT, DCT, and DWT– Properties – Frequency domain filtering techniques–Sub band coding of image compression – Coding techniques: Huffman, Run length and Block transform – JPEG – Performance metrics. (11) IMAGE RESTORATION AND RECONSTRUCTION: Image degradation – Noise models – Image observation models- Spatial filtering: mean filters, order statistics filters, adaptive filters - Inverse filtering - Wiener filtering – Constrained least squares filtering. Image Reconstruction from projections – Radon transform and it’s Application. (11) SEGMENTATION AND FEATURE EXTRACTION: Edge detection: Gradient operators - edge linking and boundary detection: Global processing via Hough transforms, Graph theoretic techniques – Thresholding techniques – K-means Clustering – Feature extraction: Boundary feature descriptors – Region feature descriptors – Principal components – SIFT. Object Recognition applications. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Gonzalez R.C., Woods R.E., “Digital Image Processing”, Fourth Edition, Pearson, 2017. 2. Jayaraman S., Esakkirajan S., Veerakumar T., “Digital Image Processing”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011. 3. Jain A.K., “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”, Prentice Hall of India, 2010.

18EA36 DIGITAL VIDEO PROCESSING 3003 VIDEO FILTERING: Digital video standards: Resolution, frame rate, and interface – Quality assessment - Video format conversion: Down conversion, De-Interlacing - Frame rate conversion - Multi-frame noise filtering - Multi-frame restoration - Super resolution. (11) MOTION ESTIMATION AND COMPENSATION: 2D and 3D motion - Block matching methods - Optical flow estimation - Differential methods: Lucas-Kanade method, Horn-Schunk method - Transform domain phase correlation method - Subpixel and region based motion compensation techniques. (11) COMPRESSION AND STANDARDS: Basics of 2D image compression – JPEG – 3D DCT Transform coding – 3D subband coding using wavelets – Motion compensated transform coding – Scalable video coding – Coding standards: MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG4AVC/ITU-T H.264. (11) SEGMENTATION AND TRACKING: Image Segmentation: Thresholding, Clustering and Active - contour models - Change detection - Background modeling and subtraction - Motion segmentation - Motion tracking: Kanade-Lucas-Tomasi tracking - Mean shift tracking - Tracking performance metrics. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Murat Tekalp, “Digital Video Processing”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2015. 2. John W Woods, “Multidimensional Signal, Image and Video Processing and Coding”, 2nd Edition, Academic Press, USA, 2012. 3. Bovik A., “The Essential Guide to Video Processing”, Academic Press, USA, 2009.

18EA37 WAVELETS AND APPLICATIONS 3003 WAVELETS: Vector spaces – Relationship between functions, Sequences, Vectors – Properties – Fourier transform and nonstationary signals – Limitations – Review of sampling theorem. Haar Wavelet: Analysis of Haar wavelet in function of scale and time – Haar multire solution Analysis: Analysis part and Synthesis part – Frequency domain analysis of Haar filter bank. Daubechies Family: Calculation of scaling function – Daub-4 and Daub–6 design details. (12)

108

th

59 ACM

09.06.2018

CONTINUOUS WAVELET TRANSFORM: The uncertainty principle – Time-bandwidth product – Time-Frequency tiling – STFT and wavelets – CWT-Comparison of STFT and CWT – Interpretation of spectrogram plot – Reconstruction and Admissibility – Discreitization of scale. (11) DISCRETE WAVELET TRANSFORM: Dyadic MRA – Theorem – Inverse DWT computation – Bi-orthogonal and orthogonal filter banks – Construction of Orthogonal filterbank – Variants of MRA: Splines and Wavelet packets. Other Wavelet Families: Mortlet, Mexican Hat, and Gabor – Multi-dimensional wavelets: 2-D Haar wavelet transform. (12) APPLICATIONS: Review and demonstration of different wavelet applications: Compression – Denoising – Analysis of biomedical signals and power signals. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Vikram M Gadre and Aditya S Abhyankar, “Multiresolution and Multirate Signal Processing”, McGraw Hill Education, 2017. 2. Soman K.P. and Ramachandran K.I., “Insight into Wavelets - From Theory to Practice”, Prentice Hall of India, 2010. 3. Mallat S., “A Wavelet Tour of Signal Processing: The Sparse Way”, 3rd Edition, Academic Press, 2009. 4. Rao R.M. and Bopardikar A.S., “Wavelet Transforms: Introduction to Theory and Applications”, Addison Wesley, Reprint, 2003. 5. Gilbert Strang and Truong Nguyen, “Wavelets and Filter Banks”, Wellesley-Cambridge Press, 1997.

18EA38 BIOSIGNAL PROCESSING 3003 BIO SIGNALS: Nature of Biomedical signals, Types: Action Potential, Electroneurogram (ENG), Electromyogram (EMG), Electrocardiogram (ECG), Electroencephalogram (EEG), Electrogastrogram (EGG), Phonocardiogram (PCG), Photoplethysmography (PPG). (11) FILTERING FOR REMOVAL OF ARTIFACTS: Stationary versus non-stationary processes, Noise in event-related potentials, Highfrequency noise in the ECG, Motion artifact in the ECG, Power-line interference in ECG signals, Maternal interference in fetal ECG, Time domain filters, Frequency domain filters, Optimal filtering: The wiener Filter, Adaptive filters for removal of Interference, Application: Removal of Artifacts in the ECG. (12) MODELING STOCHASTIC SIGNALS: Random Processes, Mean and Autocorrelation function of a Random Processes, Stationarity and Ergodicity, General Linear Processes, Yule-Walker Equations, Autoregressive (AR) Processes, Moving Average (MA) Processes, Autoregressive- Moving Average(ARMA) Processes, Harmonic Processes. (12) SIGNAL COMPRESSION: Direct Digital compression Techniques, Transformation Compression Techniques, Other Compression Techniques and Comparison. (10) . Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Rangaraj M. Rangayyan, “Biomedical Signal Analysis, A Case Study Approach”, IEEE Press, 2014. 2. D.C. Reddy, “Biomedical Signal Processing, Principles and Techniques”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2012. 3. Eugene N. Bruce “Biomedical Signal Processing and Signal Modeling”, Wiley Series, 2007. 4. Joseph D Bronzino, “The Biomedical Engineering Handbook, CRC Press, IEEE Press, 2000, 3rd Edition, May 2006. 5. Kenneth E Banner and Gonzalo R Arce, “Nonlinear Signal & Image Processing – Theory Methods & Applications”, CRC Press, New York, 2004. 6. Willis J Tompkins, “Bio Medical Digital Signal Processing”: C Language Example and Lab, Prentice Hall INC, New Delhi, 2004.

18EA39 / 18ED33 / 18EE35 / 18EM32 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES 3003 LINEAR PROGRAMMING: Statement of Optimization problems, Graphical method, Simplex method, Revised simplex method, Two phase simplex method, Duality in linear programming, Sensitivity analysis. (12) NON-LINEAR PROGRAMMING (UNCONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION): Direct search methods - Univariate method, Pattern search method, Simplex method, Descent methods - Steepest Descent method, Conjugate gradient method, Quasi Newton method. (11) NON-LINEAR PROGRAMMING (CONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION): Direct methods - The Complex method, Zoutendijk’s Method of Feasible Directions, Rosen’s Gradient Projection Method, Indirect method - Transformation Techniques, Basic Approach of the Penalty Function Method, Interior Penalty Function Method, Exterior Penalty Function Method. (11) DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING: Multistage decision process, Suboptimization and Principle of Optimality, Computational procedure, Final value problem to initial value problem, Linear Programming as a Case of Dynamic Programming, Continuous dynamic programming (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Sharma J K, “Operations Research: Theory and Applications”, Macmillan Company, New Delhi, 2013. 2. Hamdy A Taha, “Operations Research: An Introduction”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2012. 3. Gupta C B, “Optimization Techniques in Operations Research”, I K International, New Delhi, 2012.

109

th

59 ACM

09.06.2018 18EA40 / 18EE28 INTERNETWORKING AND APPLICATIONS 3003

INTERNETWORKING: Overview of Internetworking, Underlying networking technologies, Concept and Architectural model, Protocol layering – LAN Fundamentals – Wired LANS : ETHERNET Protocol – Wireless LANS : 1EEE 802.11, Bluetooth, WiMax Connecting Devices : Repeaters, Hub, Switches, Routers, Unicast Routing - Multicast Routing (12) NETWORK PROTOCOLS AND APPLICATIONS: Protocols: Network layer introduction - Network layer protocols : IPv4 Datagram Format, IPv4 Addresses, Forwarding IP packets, ICMPv4 – DHCP, Transport layer protocols - Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) – User Datagram Protocols (UDP) - Applications : Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) – Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension (MIME) – World Wide Web and HTTP – Remote login : Telnet, Electronic Mail - Next Generation IP. (11) NETWORK MANAGEMENET AND SECURITY: Areas of Network Management – SNMP – SMI – MIB - ASN.1, Introduction to network security – Confidentiality – Message Integrity - Message Authentication - Digital Signature – Digital Certification – HTTPSEntry Authentication - Key management – Internet Security – Firewalls. (11) MOBILE NETWORKS & MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATIONS: Mobile phone technologies: different generations, Mobile Internet Protocol, Synchronization and replication protocols, WAP Architecture: Introduction, Components, Infrastructure, Security issues, WAP gateways. Multimedia Networking Applications, Streaming stored video, Voice over IP, Protocols for real-time conversational applications, network support for multimedia. (11) Total L : 45 REFERENCES: 1. Behrouz A Forouzan and Firouz Mosharraf, “Computer Network – a Top Down Approach”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2012. 2. Jochen Burkhardt, Horst Henn, Stefan Hepper, Klaus Rindtoroff, Thomas Schaeck, “Pervasive Computing – Technology and Architecture of Mobile Internet Applications”, Pearson, 2012. 3. James F. Kurose, Keith W.Ross, ”Computer Networking – a Top Down Approach”, Pearson, 2012. 4. Behraouz A Forouzan, “TCP/IP Protocol Suite”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2011. 5. Doughlas Comer, “Internetworking with TCP/IP : Principles, Protocols and Architecture”, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2006.

18EA41 / 18EE38 SOFT COMPUTING 3003 FEED FORWARD NETWORKS AND SUPERVISED LEARNING: Fundamentals – Biological neural network – Artificial neuron – Activation function – Learning rules - Perceptron Networks – Adaline – Madaline – Back propagation networks – Learning factors – Linear separability. Hopfield network – Discrete Hopfield networks – Associative memories – Recurrent auto association memory – Bi-directional associative memory – Boltzman machine. (12) UNSUPERVISED LEARNING NETWORKS: Hamming networks – Self-organising feature maps – Adaptive resonance theory network – Instar model – Outstar model – Counter propagation network – Radial basis function networks (10) FUZZY SETS AND RELATIONS: Properties and Operations on Classical and Fuzzy Sets - Crisp and Fuzzy Relations - Cardinality, Properties and Operations, Composition, Tolerance and Equivalence Relations - Fuzzy Ordering - Simple Problems. Features of membership function - Standard forms and Boundaries - fuzzification - membership value assignments - Fuzzy to Crisp Conversions - Lambda Cuts for fuzzy sets and relations – Defuzzification methods (11) GENETIC ALGORITHMS AND SOFT COMPUTING APPLICATIONS: Introduction – Genetic operators – Selection, cross-over and mutation – Fitness function – A simple genetic algorithm – Applications, .Application of Neural Networks: Pattern Recognition Image compression – Communication - Control systems, Applications of Fuzzy Logic: Fuzzy Pattern Recognition - Fuzzy Image compression - Fuzzy Logic controllers. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Sivanandam S N, Sumathi S. and Deepa S. N., “Introduction to Neural Networks using Matlab 6.0”, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, New Delhi, 20th Reprint, 2014. 2. Sivanandam S N, and Deepa S. N., “Principles of Soft Computing”, Wiley India (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2nd Edition, June 2011. 3. Timothy Ross, “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, McGraw Hill, Singapore, 3rd Edition, 2010. 4. Laurene Fausett, “Fundamentals of Neural Networks”, Pearson Education India, New Delhi, 2004. 5. David E Goldberg, “Genetic Algorithms in Search, Optimisation and Machine Learning, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2004. 6. Zimmermann H.J., “Fuzzy set Theory and its Applications”, Springer India (P) Ltd., New Delhi, Nov. 2001.

18EA42 / 18EE39 / 18ED36 / 18EM33 MACHINE LEARNING AND APPLICATIONS 3003 PROBABILITY DISTRIBUTIONS: Basic Definitions, Types of learning, Probability Theory, Probability Reasoning, Model Selection, Curse of Dimensionality, Decision Theory, Information Theory, Binary Variables, Multinomial Variables, Gaussian Distribution, Exponential Family, Nonparametric Methods, Belief Networks. (12) LINEAR MODELS FOR REGRESSION AND CLASSIFICATION: Linear Basis Function Models, Bias-Variance Decomposition, Bayesian Linear Regression, Bayesian Model Comparison, Evidence Approximation, Limitations of Fixed Basis Functions, Discriminant Functions, Probabilistic Generative and Discriminative Models, Laplace Approximation, Bayesian Logistic Regression. (11) 110

th

59 ACM

09.06.2018

NEURAL NETWORKS: Introduction, Reforcement Learning, Feed-forward Network functions, Error Back propagation, Hessian Matrix, Mixture Density Networks, Bayesian Neural Networks, Convolution Neural Network, Dual Representations, Constructing Kernels, Gaussian Processes, Maximum Margin Classifiers, Relevance Vector Machines. (11) APPLICATIONS OF MACHINE LEARNING ALGORITHMS: Content Based Image Retrieval, Machine Learning Approach for face Recognition, Computer Aided Diagnosis, Computer Vision, Speech Recognition, Text Mining, Thinking Machines, Smart Machines, Business Applications of Deep Learning, Software Reliability Prediction, Medical Imaging. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Pradeep Kumar and Arvind Tiwari., “Ubiquitous Machine Learning and Its Applications”, IGI Global, 2017. 2. David Barber., “Bayesian Reasoning and Machine Learning”, Cambridge University Press, New Delhi, 2014. 3. Christopher M Bishop., “Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning”, Springer, New Delhi, 2013.

18EA43 INDUSTRIAL DRIVES FOR AUTOMATION 3003 DYNAMICS OF ELECTRIC DRIVES: Fundamental torque equation - multi-quadrant operation- nature and classification of load torques- modes of operation. Induction Motor Drives: Construction - Principle – performance characteristics – stator voltage control, frequency control, v/f control, rotor resistance control. (10) VECTOR CONTROL OF INDUCTION MOTOR DRIVES: Introduction to Park’s and Clarke’s transformation - Principle of vector control - Direct vector control-indirect vector control - stator flux oriented vector control - rotor flux oriented vector control – sensorless control - Direct torque control. (12) SPECIAL DRIVES: PMSM – principle - PMSM flux density distribution - Controller – SynRM - principle - magnetic flux density and operating point - BLDC - principle, controller – Stepper motor – types, drive circuit. (12) CONFIGURATIONS OF I/O CONTROL: AC drive Hardware Blocks – Control Blocks – Automatic Motor Adaptation – Parameterization of Drives (Local and Remote). Digital input and output - Analog input and Output control - word access - motion control - sequential logic control(SLC) - parameterization of different communication protocol: RS 485 – MODBUS – PROFIBUS. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Gopal K Dubey, "Fundamentals of Electric Drives", Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 2005. 2. John Park, Steve Mackey and Edwin Wright, "Data Communications for Instrumentation and Control", Elsevier, 2003. 3. Ned Mohan, “Advanced Electric Drives: Analysis, Control and Modeling using Simulink”, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., 2001. 4. Bimal K Bose, "Power Electronics and Variable Frequency Drives - Technology and Application", IEEE Press, New York 1997 5. Peter Vas, "Vector Control of AC Machines", Oxford University Press, 1990. 6. T. J. E. Miller, “Brushless Permanent-Magnet and Reluctance Motor Drives”, Clarendon Press Oxford, 1989.

ONE CREDIT COURSE 18EK06 FIELD PROGRAMMABLE ANALOG ARRAY FOR ANALOG SYSTEM DESIGN 1001 INTRODUCTION: Overview of Analog Design - Introduction to Field Programmable Analog Array (FPAA) and its advantages - Role of EDA tool in Analog Design process. (2) CONFIGURABLE ANALOG MODULES: Introduction to Anadigm`s inbuilt Analog Functions (CAM) - Generation of Clock Signals Signal Delay - Performance of CAM. (3) SIMULATION and PHYSICAL REALIZATION: Features of ANADIGMDESIGNER2 EDA tool for simulating the analog design Configuring the FPAA with analog design - Real time verification. (2) FPAA IO INTERFACING: Interfacing of input and output signals to the FPAA - Rauch Filter - Output Buffer.

(2)

STATIC CONFIGURATION: Full Wave Rectifier - Tone Generation and Notch filter - Voltage Controlled Oscillator - Pulse Width Modulation - Phase Detector. (3) DYNAMIC RECONFIGURATION: Reconfigurable Analog design using FPAA, Various methods of Reconfiguration - Real time verification. (3) Total L: 15 REFERENCES: 1. Thomas L. Floyd, “Electronic devices Conventional Current Version” Pearson Education Ltd., Ninth Edition, 2012. 2. Thomas L. Floyd, “Instructor’s Resource Manual to Accompany Electronic Devices”, Pearson Education Ltd., Eighth Edition, 2008. 3. Thomas L. Floyd, “Electronic Devices”, Pearson Education Ltd., Eighth Edition, 2008.

111

th

59 ACM

09.06.2018 18EK07 AUTOMOTIVE SOFTWARE TESTING 1001

BASICS OF AUTOMOTIVE SOFTWARE TESTING: Introduction – Conventional Software Testing Vs Automotive Software Testing - Need for Automotive Software Testing - Major recalls and impact of recalls – Case study. (3) FUNDAMENTALS OF SOFTWARE TESTING: Basics of Software Development Life Cycle – Model Based - Modular - Reusable Design - Static Analysis, Dynamic Analysis - Code Coverage including MC/DC (Modified Condition/Decision Coverage) and LCSAJ (Linear Code Sequence and Jump) - Data Flow and Control Flow analysis - Unit/System/Integration Testing - Code Quality Software Quality metrics - test management - Importance of using qualified software for software testing. (6) CODING STANDARDS: Coding Standards - important - Coding Standard for Automotive Industry – MISRA C: 2012 with Security Amendments - Top 10 secure coding best practices - Advantages of adhering to coding standards. (3) PROCESS STANDARD: Introduction to ISO 26262 – Functional Safety Standard - Details about ASIL (Automotive Safety Integrity Level) - Details about Part 4 and Part 6 of ISO 26262 – Failure Mode Effective analysis (FMEA). (3) Total L: 15 Lab Session (along with Theory Class)  Practical Implementation of Fundamentals of software testing using LDRA Software.  Adhering to MISRA C coding guidelines using LDRA Software.  Achieving compliance to ISO 26262 using LDRA Software.  In case of non-availability of MISRA C document, students may refer to CERT C standard.  Example of Code Coverage and Executing Test Cases on Raspberry Pi or Arduino. REFERENCES: 1. Pradeep Oak and Renu Rajani , “Software Testing – Effective Methods, Tools and Techniques”, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, 2004. 2. Stephen L. Montgomery,”MISRA C: Guidelines for the use of the C Language in Critical Systems”, Motor Industry Research Association,2013. 3. Robert C. Seacord, “The CERT C Secure Coding Standard”, Addison-Wesley Professional, 1st edition, 2008. 4. Justyna Zander, Ina Schieferdecker,Pieter J. Mosterman, “Model-based Testing for Embedded Systems”, CRC Press, Taylor and Francis Group, 2012.

18EK13 SYSTEMS ENGINEERING FOR AUTOMOTIVE APPLICATIONS 1001 INTRODUCTION: Systems, Systems Engineering and System on Systems Design Models flow: Waterfall, Spiral and INCOSEVEE model Product development flow Values of Systems Engineering (4) ROLES OF SYSTEM ENGINEER: Understanding the Systems Engineering goal, Significance of documentation, Knowing about DSM (Design structure matrix), Interdisciplinary role of Systems Engineering, Behavioral aspects of Systems Engineering (3) PROCESS: Requirements process, Baseline creation INNOVATION IN SYSTEM ENGINEERING: Creativity characteristics, About TRIZ, Ideality, Contradictions and approach to resolve Innovation in Technical systems: Architectural Innovation (3) DESIGN PROCESS: Definitions, Axioms, Design Matrices, Types and examples, Constraints

(3)

SYSTEM RELIABILITY: Approach to achieve system reliability, significance of Reuse

(1)

EXAMPLE SYSTEM DESIGN: Designing an Automotive ECU

(1)

Total L: 15 REFERENCES: 1. “INCOSE Systems Engineering Handbook: A Guide for System Life Cycle Processes and Activities”, Wiley, 2015. 2. Alexander Kossiakoff, William N. Sweet, Samuel J. Seymour, Steven M. Biemer, “Systems Engineering Principles and Practice”, 2nd Edition, Wiley, 2011. 3. Benjamin S. Blanchard, John E. Blyler, “System Engineering Management”, 5th Edition, Wiley, 2016.

18EK14 ELECTRIC VEHICLES 1001 INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRIC VEHICLES: Social and environmental importance of electric vehicles. Conventional Vehicles: Basics of vehicle performance, vehicle power source characterization, transmission characteristics, and mathematical models to describe vehicle performance. (3) History of Hybrid Electric Vehicles - Energy consumption Concept of Hybrid Electric Drive – Architecture: Series Hybrid Electric Drive, Parallel hybrid electric drive. Fuel Cell basic principle and operation, Types of Fuel Cells, PEMFC and its operation, Modelling of PEMFC, Super Capacitors. (3)

112

th

59 ACM

09.06.2018

ELECTRIC PROPULSION UNIT: Electric components, Configuration and control of drives: DC Motor - Induction Motor - Permanent Magnet Motor - Switch Reluctance Motor. Drive system efficiency - Energy storage for EV and HEV - Energy storage requirements, Battery parameters, Modelling of Battery. (5) Power Electronic Converter for Battery Charging - Charging methods for battery - Design of Z-converter for battery charging. Case Study: Design of a Battery Electric Vehicle (BEV). (4) Total L: 15 REFERENCES: 1. Sheldon S. Williamson, “Energy Management Strategies for Electric and Plug-in Hybrid Electric Vehicles”, Springer, 2013. 2. Chris Mi, M. Abul Masrur, David Wenzhong Gao, “Hybrid Electric Vehicles Principles and Applications with Practical Perspectives”, Wiley Publication, 2011. 3. Iqbal Husain, “Electric and Hybrid Vehicles: Design Fundamentals”, CRC Press, 2010. 4. M. Ehsani, Y. Gao, S. Gay and Ali Emadi, “Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric, and Fuel Cell Vehicles: Fundamentals, Theory, and Design”, CRC Press, 2009. 5. James Larminie, John Lowry, “Electric Vehicle Technology Explained”, Wiley, 2003. 6. C.C. Chan and K.T. Chau, “Modern Electric Vehicle Technology”, OXFORD University Press, 2001.

18EK15 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNITS AND APPLICATIONS 1001 INTRODUCTION: Phasor Measurement Units (PMUs), Global Positioning System (GPS), Functional requirements of PMUs and Phasor Data Concentrators (PDCs), Phasor estimation of nominal frequency inputs. (2) TRANSIENT RESPONSE: Transient response of Instrument Transformers, Transient response of Filters, Transient response during Electromagnetic and Power Swings, Impact of Transient Response of Phasor Measurements. (2) APPLICATIONS OF PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNITs: Phasor Measurements Unit based Adaptive Protection of Transmission Lines, Out-of-Step protection, Adaptive System Restoration, Phasor Measurement units in Large Scale Integration of Wind and Solar Energy systems, Introduction to Wide Area Monitoring, Protection and Control (WAMPAC). Deployment of large scale PMUs in Utilities, Globally and in Indian Power sector. (8) STANDARDS: Synchrophasor Standards - IEEE C37.118.1-2011, IEEE C37.118a-2014, IEC 61850 & IEEE C37.118, Evaluation / Validation of PMU-Total Vector Error (TVE) both Steady State and Dynamic/Transient conditions. IEEE C37.118.2-2011. (3) Total L: 15 REFERENCES: 1. Phadke A.G., Thorp J.S., “Synchronized Phasor Measurements and Their Applications”, Springer Publications, Second Edition, 2017. 2. IEEE C37.118.1a-2014, IEEE Standard for Syncrophasor Measurements for Power Systems. 3. IEEE C37.242, 2013 - Guide for Synchronization, Calibration, Testing, and Installation of Phasor Measurement Units (PMU) for Power System Protection and Control. 4. IEEE C37.244, 2013 - Guide for Phasor Data Concentrator (PDC) Requirements for Power System Protection, Control, and Monitoring. 5. Phadke A.G., Thorp J.S, “Computer Relaying for Power Systems”, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., Research Studies Press Limited, 2nd Edition, 2009. 6. IEC 61850-90-5, Communication networks and systems for power utility automation – Part 90-5: Use of IEC 61850 to transmit Synchrophasor information according to IEEE C37.118.

18EK16 GRAPHICAL PROGRAMMING FOR REAL-TIME APPLICATIONS 1001 INTRODUCTION TO REAL-TIME CONCEPTS: Concept of Real-Time Systems - Characteristics of Real-Time Systems – Need for Real-Time Operating Systems (2) LabVIEW REAL-TIME HARDWARE: ARCHITECTURE: Overview of Hardware Setup and Installation -Configuration of Network Settings of Real-Time Target and Host Computer - Configuration of Real-Time Target in Measurement and Automation Explorer Configuring Real-Time targets through the LabVIEW Project. (3) PROGRAMMING LabVIEW REAL-TIME MODULE: Accessing I/O using driver APIs or Scan Engine – Multithreading – Sleep Mode -Timing loops in LabVIEW Real-Time. (4) COMMUNICATION: Inter-process Communication: Sharing Data locally on Real-Time Target - Sharing Data between Deterministic and Non-Deterministic Processes - Sharing data between non-deterministic processes - Communication between Real-Time Target and Host Computer – Implementation of Network Communication (4) DEBUGGING AND DEPLOYMENT: Standard Debugging Techniques – Analysis of Memory Consumption – Creating Build Specification – Communication with Deployed Applications. (2) Total L: 15 REFERENCES: 1. Course Manual Titled, “LabVIEW Real-time Application Development”, Published by National Instruments, 2016. 2. Rick Bitter, Taqi Mohiuddin, Matt Nawrocki, “LabVIEW: Advanced Programming Techniques”, Second Edition, 2006. 3. Garry W. Johnson,”LabVIEW Graphical Programming”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2001.

113

th

59 ACM

09.06.2018

18EK17 CAD TOOLS FOR VLSI DESIGN AUTOMATION 1001 INTRODUCTION TO VLSI DESIGN PROCESS: Design flow – Role of CAD tools in the design process.

(3)

DESIGN CAPTURE: Features of Mentor Graphics Design Architect IC a tool for schematic capture, netlisting, simulation setup and results viewing - Creating an Inverter using DA_IC - ELDO simulator. (3) SIMULATION: Features of Advance MS simulator a tool for verification platform for AMS design and verification - Exercises.

(3)

PHYSICAL LAYOUT: Features of the IC Station Tool Suite for full custom IC design flow editing, Schematic - driven layout and top -level floor planning/routing – Exercises. (3) PHYSICAL VERIFICATION: Features of Calibre LVS for physical verification tool, for layout versus schematic – Exercises.

(3)

Total L: 15 REFERENCES : 1. WayneWolf, "Modern VLSI Design: Systems on Chip Design", Pearson Education Inc., Indian Reprint, 2007. 2. Michael John Sebastian Smith, “Application-Specific Integrated Circuits”, Addison-Wesley Publishing Company. 3. http://www.mentor.com/products/ic_nanometer_design.

18EK18 DIGITAL DESIGN WITH VERILOG HDL 1001 INTRODUCTION: Digital Design, Verification and Hardware description languages.

(1)

VERILOG FOR DESIGN: Introduction to Logic Synthesis, Synthesizable Constructs - Inferring Combinational Circuit elements Inferring Sequential Circuit elements - State Machines - Counters - Encoders/Decoders - Synthesis of Loops - Data Path - Design Partitioning / Methodology - Synthesizable Code-care about, Sensitivity list and Simulation Synthesis mismatch conditions. (3) VERILOG FOR VERIFICATION: Delay Modeling in Verilog on Briefly behavioral constructions, Fork-join, Events - Clock Generation - Data Generation, Deterministic, Random - Some Systems Tasks - Test Bench Architecture. (2) DESIGN EXAMPLES: RISC Stored Program Machine - UART Design

(2)

Mini Projects Specification and Scope Discussions

(3)

Review of Projects: Presentation by student groups (15 min per student group)

(3)

Feedback on the Design Project

(1) Total L: 15

REFERENCES: 1. Michael D. Ciletti, “Advanced Digital Design with the Verilog HDL”, Pearson Education, 2003 2. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL: A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis”, Prentice Hall NJ, USA, 2003. 3. Bhaskar J,”A Verilog Primer”, Prentice Hall of India Learning, 2012.

18EK19 AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 1001 INTRODUCTION: Major components of an Automobile Systems and its functions - Overview of four stroke I.C.engine -Four Cylinder Engine – Spark firing sequence. (2) AUTOMOBILE ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS: Block diagram of Automobile electrical system - Typical wiring diagram - Starter system: General layout - Basic starting circuit - Ignition system: Battery and magneto types - Battery ignition system for four cylinder engine - Ignition system circuit - Distributed ignition coil and ignition advance. Charging system: Typical alternator in common use - cut-out and regulator - Lighting & accessories system - Wiper motor – circuit diagram of wind screen wiper motor and washer. (5) SENSORS AND ACTUATORS: Physical Variables to be measured in automobiles: Position sensor: Magnetic reluctance and Hall effect sensor - Temperature sensor: Coolant temperature - Speed sensor – Fuel level sensor - Acceleration sensor - Actuator: Principle of solenoid and Fuel injector. (4) DIAGNOSTICS AND COMMUNICATION BUS: Block diagram of Engine control unit - Diagnostics procedure: Introduction – Diagnostics theory – On board and Off-board diagnostics – Diagnostics Link Connector – Vehicle condition monitoring - CAN bus topology – Data transmission – CAN Protocol – Overview of CAN controller - LIN bus: overview – Data Transmission System – LIN protocol. (4) Total L : 15 REFERENCES: 1. KK Jain , RB Sharma, “Automobile Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, 2011. 2. Ronald K.J., “Automotive Electronics Handbook”, McGraw Hill Publications, USA, 2009. 3. William B. Ribbens, Norman P. Mansour, “Understanding of Automotive Electronics”, Butterworth-Heinemann, United Kingdom 2003. 4. “Automotive Electrics / Automotive Electronics - Ed5”, Robert Bosch GmbH, 2004. 114

th

59 ACM 5. 6.

09.06.2018

EdMay, “Automotive Mechanics Vol -2”, McGraw Hill Publications, Australia 2004. Tom Denton, “Automobile Electrical and Electronics Systems”, Routledge Taylor & Francis Group, London & New York, 2002.

AUDIT COURSES 18EA81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP81

18EA82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP82

115

59th ACM

09.06.2018

13. Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment ME POWER ELECTRONICS & DRIVES

(2018 REGULATIONS) * (Minimum No. of credits to be earned: 75 )

Hours/Week Maximum Marks Credits Lecture Tutorial Practical CA FE Total I SEMESTER 18ED01 Mathematics of Systems Engineering 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 18ED02 Power Semiconductor Devices 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18ED03 Modelling and Control of Power Converters 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18ED04 Power Converters and Analysis 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 18ED05 Object Computing and Data Structures 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 18ED51 Power Converters Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 18ED81 Total 24 hrs 14 6 4 19 300 300 600 II SEMESTER 18ED06 Modeling and Analysis of Electrical Machines 3 0 3 50 50 100 18ED07 Electric Drives and Control 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18ED08 Switched Mode Power Converters 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 18ED09 Power Electronics in Wind and Solar Power Conversion 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 18ED__ 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 Professional Elective 1 18ED__ 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 Professional Elective 2 18ED52 Drives and Controls Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 18ED61 Industrial Visit and Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 18ED82 Total 30 hrs 18 4 8 24 400 400 800 III SEMESTER 18ED__ 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 Professional Elective 3 18ED__ 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 Professional Elective 4 18ED__ 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 Professional Elective 5 18ED__ 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 Professional Elective 6 18ED53 Power Electronic Systems Design Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 18ED71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 Total 24 hrs 12 2 10 18 300 300 600 IV SEMESTER 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 18ED72 Project Work II ELECTIVE 3 Associated with Centre of Excellence (One to be opted) 18ED21 Industrial Approach to Power Converter Design 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 18ED22 Internet of Things 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 18ED23 Totally Integrated Automation 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 ELECTIVE (Five to be opted) 18ED24 Special Machines and Controllers 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18ED25 Digital Controllers for Power Electronic Applications 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18ED26 Advanced Control of Electric Drives 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18ED27 Soft Computing Techniques for Renewable Energy Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18ED28 Flexible AC Transmission system 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18ED29 Power Quality Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18ED30 Advanced Topics in Power Electronics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18ED31 HVDC Transmission 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18ED32 Design of Solar Photovoltaic systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18ED33 Optimization Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18ED34 Digital Signal Processing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18ED35 Virtual Instrumentation Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18ED36 Machine Learning and Application 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18ED37 Pulse Width Modulated Power Electronic Converters 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18ED38 Smart Grid Technologies 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18ED39 Distributed Generation and Micro grids 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18ED40 Hybrid Electric Vehicles 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 * Indicated is the minimum number of credits to be earned by a student. ** - 60 hrs in I semester and 90 hrs in II semester; Grade: Completed / Not Completed CAT – Category; PC – Professional Core; PE - Professional Elective EEC – Employability Enhancement Course; MCMandatory Course Course Code

Course Title

116

CAT PC PC PC PC PC PC MC

PC PC PC PC PE PE 5 EEC MC

PE PE PE PE PC EEC

EEC PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE

59th ACM 18EK01 18EK02 18EK03 18EK04 18EK05 18EK06 18EK07 18EK10 18EK13 18EK14 18EK15 18EK16

09.06.2018 ONE CREDIT COURSES Low Voltage Switchgear Energy Auditing and Conservation Techniques Power Electronics in More Electric Aircraft Power Quality in Industries Solar PV Systems – Design, Simulation and Monitoring and Control Field Programmable Analog Array for Analog System Design Automotive Software Testing Industrial Drives for Automation System Engineering for Automotive Applications Electric Vehicles Phasor Measurement Units & Applications Graphical Programming for Real-Time Applications

117

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18ED01/18EA01/18EE01/18EM01 MATHEMATICS OF SYSTEMS ENGINEERING 2203

VECTOR SPACES: Real vector spaces, subspaces, linear independence – basis and dimension of a vector space - inner product space, orthonormal bases, Gram-Schmidt process. (8+7) LINEAR TRANSFORMATIONS: General linear transformations, kernel and range, inverse linear transformations, matrices of general linear transformations, eigenvalues and eigenvectors, diagonalization. (8+7) CALCULUS OF VARIATIONS: Variational problems of fixed boundaries: Variations and its properties - simplest variational problems – Euler equation – Brachistochrone problem – variational problems involving several unknown functions – Functional involving first and second order derivatives. (8+7) STOCHASTIC PROCESSES: Classification. Markov chain: Transition probability matrices – Chapman Kolmogorov equations classification of states, limiting probabilities, Poisson process - continuous time Markov chains: Birth-death processes. (8+7) Total L:32 + T:28 = 60 REFERENCES: 1. Howard Anton and Chris Rorres, ―Elementary Linear Algebra: Applications Version‖, Wiley India, New Delhi, 2018. 2. David C Lay, ―Linear Algebra and its Applications‖, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2017. 3. Medhi J., ―Stochastic Processes‖, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi, 2017. 4. Saeed Ghahramani, ―Fundamentals of Probability with Stochastic Processes‖, Pearson, New Delhi, 2016. 5. Elsgolts L., ―Differential Equation and Calculus of Variation‖, MIR Publication, Moscow, 1977.

18ED02

POWER SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES 3003

INTRODUCTION & POWER DIODES: Status of Development of power semiconductor Devices - Types of static switches Controlled and uncontrolled - Ideal and real switches – on-state and switching losses. EMI due to switching. Use of heat sinks – selection parameters and mounting techniques Power Diodes: Types - Electrical rating - Switching and steady state characteristics - Switching aid circuits - Series and parallel operation - Schottky diodes - Fast recovery diodes. (11) THYRISTORS: Physics of device operation - Electrical rating. Types of thyristors: Asymmetrical thyristor - Reverse conducting thyristors, light fired thyristors. Turn on & off mechanisms, Gate circuit requirements - Driver circuit- Protection - Switching and steady state characteristics-Switching losses. Series and parallel operation of thyristors. TRIACS, GTOS AND MCTS: Electrical rating - Switching and steady state characteristics - Protection - Gate circuit requirements. (11) POWER TRANSISTORS: Types - Ratings - Static and switching characteristics - Driver circuit - Switching aid circuit - Power Darlington. POWER MOSFETS: Types - Comparison with BJTs - Structure - Principle of operation - Switching losses - Driver circuit - Switching aid circuit. (11) IGBTS: Comparison with power BJT and MOSFET - Structure - Principle of working - Switching characteristics - Gate drive requirements. HV IGBT structure - Principle of working - Comparison with GTO. EMERGING DEVICES: SITs-characteristics Power Integrated circuit – Characteristics - Field controlled thyristors - New semiconductor materials for devices - Intelligent power modules. Integrated Gate commutated Thyristor (IGCT). Comparison of Power semiconductor devices. (12) Total L : 45 REFERENCES: nd 1. MD Singh and K B Khanchandani, "Power Electronics" Tata McGraw Hill, 2 Edition, 2006. 2. Rashid, M.H., "Power Electronics: Circuits, Devices and Applications", Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 3 rd Edition, 2003. 3. Ned Mohan, Tore M. Undeland and William P. Robbins., "Power Electronics: Converters, Applications and Design", John Wiley and Sons, 3rd Edition, 2003. 4. Joseph, Vithayanthil, "Power Electronics: Principles and Applications," McGraw Hill,1995. 5. Williams, B.W., "Power Electronics: Devices, Drivers, Applications and Passive Components", ELBS Oxford University Press, 1992. 6. Sen PC,"Modern Power Electronics ", Wheeler publishing Co, McGraw Hill, 2005.

18ED03 / 18EM35 MODELLING AND CONTROL OF POWER CONVERTERS 3003 STATE SPACE MODELLING: Review of basic control theory – Control design techniques such as P, PI,PID and lead lag compensator design. State space control design approach –Modeling of physical systems - Solution to vector differential equations and state transition matrix.- Controllability and Observability Small signal Model of Power Converters: - Linearizing Averaged Power Stage Dynamics - Frequency Response of Converter Power Stage - Small-Signal Gain of PWM Block - Small-Signal Model for PWM DC-to-DC Converters (12) TRANSFER FUNCTIONS AND STATE SPACE MODEL OF POWER CONVERTER: Bode Plot for Transfer Functions - Power Stage Transfer Functions and State space modelling of Buck Converter, Boost Converter, and Buck/Boost Converter - Empirical Methods for Small-Signal Analysis (11)

118

59th ACM

09.06.2018

DYNAMIC PERFORMANCE AND CLOSED LOOP PERFORMANCE OF POWER CONVERTERS: Frequency Domain Performance Criteria - Time-Domain Performance Criteria, Stability of Power Converters: - Nyquist Criterion - Relative Stability: Gain Margin and Phase Margin Asymptotic Analysis Method – Frequency-Domain Performance - Voltage Feedback Compensation and Loop Gain - Compensation Design and Closed-Loop Performance (11) INTRODUCTION TO NONLINEAR SYSTEMS: Phase plane analysis of nonlinear system using linear approximation - Limit cycle and periodic solutions - Singular points and qualitative behaviour. Stability of nonlinear systems - Lyapunov direct and indirect methods (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Pulsewidth Modulated DC-to-DC Power Conversion Circuits, Dynamics, and Control Designs, Byungcho Choi, IEEE Press, Published by John Wiley & Sons, Inc, 2013. 2. Sira -Ramirez, R.Silva Ortigoza, ‗Control Design Techniques in Power Electronics Devices‘, Springer, 2006. 3. Ogata, K., ‗Modern Control Engineering‘, Prentice Hall of India, 2010. 4. C.T. Chen, ‗Linear Systems Theory and Design‘‘ Oxford University Press, 3rd Edition, 1999. 5. Hassan K. Khalil, ‗Nonlinear Systems‘, Pearson Educational International Inc. Upper Saddle River, 3rd Edition, 2001. 6. Applied Nonlinear Control, Jean-Jacques E. Slotine, Weiping Li, Prentice Hall, 1991 - Technology & Engineering

18ED04 POWER CONVERTERS AND ANALYSIS 3204 AC TO DC CONVERTERS: Single phase and three phase bridge rectifiers, Fully controlled converters with RL, RLE loads, Freewheeling diode, Dual Converter, PWM rectifiers Evaluation of performance parameter, Input harmonics and output ripple, smoothing inductance, power factor, effect of source inductance and overlap, Design of converter circuits – Snubber circuit design - Control circuit strategies. (12+7) DC TO DC CONVERTERS: DC choppers: Step down dc chopper with R, RL and RLE loads - Control strategies- Continuous and discontinuous current operations - Two quadrant and four quadrant DC chopper - Multiphase DC chopper - Switching mode regulators: Buck, Boost, Buck-Boost and CUK regulators - Chopper circuit design – Control circuit strategies. (11+8) AC TO AC CONVERTERS: Principle of phase control, single-phase bi-directional controllers with R, L and R-L loads, 3-phase bidirectional Controllers, different Configurations, Analysis with pure R and L loads. Principle of operation, - single phase and three phase cyclo converters - Control circuit strategies. (11+7) DC TO AC CONVERTERS: Single phase and Three phase bridge inverters - Evaluation of performance parameters –Voltage control and Waveform improvement Techniques – Current source inverters - Inverter circuit design - SVPWM – Introduction to multilevel inverter (11+8) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Rashid M.H., ―Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications ", Prentice Hall India, 3rd Edition, New Delhi, 2013. 2. VedamSubrahmanyam, "Power Electronics", New Age International (P) Limited, New Delhi, 2006. 3. MD Singh and K B Khanchandani,"Power Electronics", McGraw Hill, 2006. 4. Sen PC,"Modern Power Electronics ", Wheeler publishing Co, McGraw Hill, 2005. 5. Ned Mohan, Tore M. Undeland, William P. Robbins, ‖Power Electronics: Converters, Applications, and Design‖, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York, 2003. 6. Ramanarayanan V., "Course Material on Switched Mode Power Conversion", Department of Electrical Engineering, Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore, 2007.

15EA05 / 18ED05 / 15EE05

OBJECT COMPUTING AND DATA STRUCTURES 3 2 0 4

PRINCIPLES OF OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING: Procedure Oriented Programming, Object Oriented Programming paradigm - Basic concepts and benefits of OOP - Object Oriented Language - Applications of C++ - Operators in C++ - Classes andObjects-Manipulators. Functions in C++- Call by Reference - Return by reference - Inline functions - Default, Const Arguments Function Overloading - Friend Functions - Member functions - Nesting of Member functions -Private member functions - Static data members - Static Member Functions - Arrays of Objects -Objects as Function Arguments - Friend Functions. (10+7) CONSTRUCTORS: Parameterized Constructor-Copy constructor - Multiple Constructors in a Class – Destructors. InheritanceDefining Derived Classes - Single Inheritance - Making a Private Member Inheritable - Multiple Inheritance - Hierarchical Inheritance – Hybrid Inheritance. Polymorphism- Compile and Run Time Polymorphism – Operator Overloading - Virtual function. (11+7) DATA STRUCTURES: Abstract data Types - Primitive data structures - Analysis of algorithms - Best, worst and average case time complexities – Notation. ARRAYS: Operations - Implementation of one, two, three and multi dimensioned arrays - Sparse and dense matrices - Applications. SORTING: Insertion sort - Selection sort - Bubble sort - Radix sort - Algorithms and their time complexities. (12+7) LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES: Stacks - Primitive operations - Sequential implementation - Applications: Subroutine handling, Recursion-Queues-Primitive operations - Sequential implementation - Applications: Job Scheduling.Lists- Primitive Operations Singly linked lists, Doubly linked lists, Circular lists – Applications: Addition of Polynomials (10+7)

119

59th ACM

09.06.2018

NON-LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES: Trees- Terminologies- Binary Tree traversal.

(2+2) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75

REFERENCES: 1. Herbert Schildt, ―C++ - The Complete Reference", Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2012. 2. Nell Dale, ―C++ Plus Data Structures‖, Jones & Bartlett, Massachusetts, 2011. 3. Harvey M Deitel and Paul J Deitel, ―C++ How to Program‖, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2010. 4. Aaron M Tanenbaum, Moshe J Augenstein and Yedidyah Langsam, "Data structures using C and C++", Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009. 5. Stanley B Lippman, Josee Lajoie and Barbara E Moo, ―The C++ Primer‖, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009. 6. Sahni Sartaj, "Data Structures, Algorithms and Applications in C++", Universities Press, Hyderabad, 2005.

18ED51 POWER CONVERTERS LABORATORY 0042 LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Study of Characteristics of Power Semiconductor Devices. Performance analysis of AC to DC converter with RL and RLE Load Performance analysis of AC to AC converter with RL and RLE Load Performance analysis of DC to DC converter with RL and RLE Load Performance analysis of DC to AC converter under voltage and v/f control mode. Mini Project Total P: 60

18ED06 MODELING AND ANALYSIS OF ELECTRICAL MACHINES 3003 GENERALIZED THEORY & LINEAR TRANSFORMATION: Conversions – Basic two pole machine – Transformer with movable secondary – Transformer voltage and speed voltage - kron‘s primitive machine - Invariance of power – Transformation from displaced brush axis three phases to two phases. Rotating axes to stationary axes – Transformed impedance matrix – Torque calculations. (11) INDUCTION MACHINES: Generalized representation- Performance equations - Steady state analysis – Transient analysis - Singlephase Induction motor-Transfer function formulation - Double cage machine - Harmonics. (11) SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES: Generalized representation - Steady state analysis-Transient analysis-Electromechanical transients (11) DC & SPECIAL MACHINES: Generalized representation – Operation with displaced brushes - Motor (shunt type only) operation Steady state and transient analysis. Generalized representation and steady state analysis of Reluctance motor –Brushless DC motor-Variable reluctance motor. (12) Total L : 45 REFERENCES: 1. Bimbhra P.S., "Generalised Circuit Theory of Electrical Machines", Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 2002. 2. Krishnan R., ―Electric Motor & Drives: Modeling, Analysis and Control‖, Prentice Hall of India, 2001. 3. Chee-Mun Ong ―Dynamic simulation of electrical machinery using MATLAB‖ Prentice – Hall, Inc, 1998. 4. Krause, P.C., O. Wasynczuk, and S.D. Sudhoff, ―Analysis of Electric Machinery‖, IEEE Press, 1995. 5. Adkins B., ―The Generalized Theory of Electrical Machines‖, Dover Publishers, 1980. 6. Ion Boldea and S.A. Nasar, ―Electric Drives‖, CRC Press LLC, New York, 1999.

18ED07 / 18EM05 ELECTRIC DRIVES AND CONTROL 3003 DYNAMICS & CONTROL OF ELECTRICAL DRIVES: Introduction – Parts of Electrical Drives- Fundamental Torque Equations – Speed Torque Conventions and Multiquadrant Operation – Nature & Classification of Load Torques - Modes of Operation –ClosedLoop Control of Drives. (11) INDUCTION MOTOR DRIVES: Stator Control: control by AC voltage controllers - Variable frequency square wave VSI drives PWM Drives - CSI drives - closed loop control. Rotor Control: Static rotor resistance control - Slip power recovery : Static Kramer drive -Static Scherbius drive. (11) VECTOR CONTROL OF INDUCTION MOTORS: Principle of vector control -Rotor flux - Oriented control, Stator Flux-oriented control, Magnetizing flux-oriented control of Induction machines. Sensorless Vector and Direct Torque Controlled Drives: Basic types of torque controlled drive scheme: vector drives- direct torque controlled drives. (12) SPECIAL DRIVES: Synchronous Motor Drives: Scalar control – True synchronous and self control modes – PMSM Motor and Control - SynRM motor and Control - Switched reluctance motor and control. Configurations of I/O Control: AC drive Hardware Blocks – Control Blocks – Automatic Motor Adaptation – Parameterization of Drives (Local and Remote). (11) Total L : 45

120

59th ACM

09.06.2018

REFERENCES: 1. Gopal K Dubey, "Fundamentals of Electric Drives", Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 2005. 2. Ion Boldea and S.A. Nasar, ―Electric Drives‖, CRC Press LLC, New York, 1999. 3. Bimal K Bose, "Power Electronics and Variable Frequency Drives - Technology and Application", IEEE Press, New York, 1997. 4. Pillai S.K., "Analysis of Thyristor Power Conditioned Motors", University Press, 1992. 5. Peter Vas, "Vector Control of AC Machines", Oxford University Press, 1990. 6. T.J.E. Miller, ―Brushless Permanent-Magnet and Reluctance Motor Drives‖, Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1989.

18ED08 SWITCHED MODE POWER CONVERTERS 3204 DC-DC CONVERTER DYNAMICS: Reactive Elements in Power Electronic Systems, Types of inductor, Types of transformer, Types of Capacitors for power electronic applications - Exact and Approximate Analysis of DC-DC converters, Non-isolated DC to DC Power Converter- Buck, Boost, Buck-Boost, Cuk Converters, Isolated DC to DC Power Converter - Forward, Flyback, Half/Full Bridge Converters – Design and Analysis – Case Study – Steady state model, dynamic model – EMI – EMC Complaints. (12+8) RESONANT CONVERTERS: Classification of resonant converters-resonant load converters - principal of operation - SMPS using resonant circuit- steady state modeling. Resonant switch converters- Buck converter with ZCS and ZVS-operation and analysis. (11+7) CLOSED LOOP CONTROL OF POWER CONVERTERS: Closed Loop Control of Switching Converters - Steady State Error, Control Bandwidth, and Compensator Design - Closed Loop Dynamic Performance Functions - Design of feed - back compensators. (11+7) AC-DC POWER FACTOR CORRECTION SUPPLIES: Single-Phase Single-Stage Non-isolated Boost PFC, Output Capacitor Size, DCM Boost Inductor Selection, CCM Boost Inductor Selection, High-Power PFC and Load Sharing, Surge Protection, Load ShortCircuit Protection, Three-Phase PFC. (11+8) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Marian K. Kazimierczuk, "Pulse-width Modulated DC-DC Power Converters", Wiley, 2008. 2. Ramanarayanan V., "Course Material on Switched Mode Power Conversion", Department of Electrical Engineering, Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore, 2007. 3. Keng Wu, "Switch-Mode Power Converters-Design and Analysis", 1st Edition, Academic Press, 2005. 4. Robert W. Erickson, Dragan Maksimovic ―Fundamentals of Power Electronics‖, Springer, 2005. 5. K.Kit Sum, "Switch Mode Power Conversion: Basic Theory and Design", CRC Press, 1984. 6. Rashid M.H., ―Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications ", Prentice Hall India, 3rd Edition, New Delhi, 2013.

18ED09 / 18EM09 POWER ELECTRONICS IN WIND AND SOLAR POWER CONVERSION 3204 SOLAR PV AND WIND POWER: Trends in energy consumption - World energy scenario – Energy sources and their availability Conventional and renewable sources - Solar PV and Wind potential in India and World – Solar and Wind Data - Policies and Regulations - Standards and codes used for Renewable Energy Systems (11+7) SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC ENERGY CONVERSION: Solar radiation and measurement - Solar cells and their characteristics Classification of Solar PV panels- Influence of insolation and temperature - PV arrays- Maximum power point tracking – Algorithms Power Conditioning Schemes - Charge controllers - Inverters – Classifications and Design - Analysis of PV Systems – BoS components - Stand alone and Grid integrated Solar PV Systems – Building Integrated PV (BIPV) - Synchronized operation with grid supply - Harmonic standards, Harmonic problems. (12+7) WIND ENERGY CONVERSION SYSTEMS: Basic Principle of wind Energy conversion - Nature of Wind - Power in the wind Components of Wind Energy Conversion System (WECS) – Wind farm and its accessories - Generators used in Wind Energy Conversion Systems - Performance of Induction Generators for WECS- Power conditioning schemes - Controllable DC Power from SEIGs - System performance. Grid Connected WECS - Concepts of Grid Integration - Grid related problems - Generator control Performance improvements - Different schemes - AC voltage controllers - Harmonics and PF improvement. (11+8) HYBRID POWER SYSTEMS: Wind / Solar PV integrated systems – Other alternate Systems – Requirements - Optimization of system components Power conditioning schemes for Hybrid Power Systems (HPS) – Design of HPS using software - Storage types and selection methods - Applications of HPS (11+8) Total: 75 L : 45 : T: 30 REFERENCES: 1. S Sumathi, Ashok Kumar L, S Sureka, ―Solar PV and Wind Energy Conversion Systems - An Introduction to Theory, Modeling with MATLAB/SIMULINK, and the Role of Soft Computing Techniques‖, Green Energy and Technology, Springer; 2015. 2. Roger A. Messenger, Jerry Ventre,‖Photovoltaic System Engineering‖CRC Press, 2004. 3. Mukund R Patel, ―Wind and Solar Power Systems‖, CRC Press, 2004. 4. Thomas Markvart and Luis Castaser, ―Practical Handbook of Photovoltaics‖, Elsevier Publications, UK, 2003. 5. Rai, G.D., "Non-conventional Energy Sources", Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2002. 6. Daniel, Hunt, V., "Wind Power - A Handbook of WECS", Van Nostrend Co., New York, 1998.

121

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18ED52 DRIVES AND CONTROLS LABORATORY 0042

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Three-phase SPWM pulse generation using dSPACE Performance analysis of three phase induction motorusing variable frequency drive Performance analysis of Synchronous Reluctance motor using variable frequency drive Performance analysis of SRM/BLDC motor using variable frequency drive Performance analysis of PMSM using variable frequency drive Mini project

18ED61 INDUSTRIAL VISIT & TECHNICAL SEMINAR 0042 The student will make at least two technical presentations on current topics related to the specialization. The same will be assessed by a committee appointed by the department. The students are expected to submit a report at the end of the semester covering the various aspects of his/her presentation together with the observation in industry visits. A quiz covering the above will be held at the end of the semester. Total P: 60

18ED53 POWER ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS DESIGN LABORATORY 0032 LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Design, development and analysis of DC to DC converters using IGBTs, and Power MOSFETs. Design and development of DC to AC converters using IGBTs, and Power MOSFETs. Design, development and analysis of AC to AC converters of various configurations using SCRs, TRIAC, and IGBTs. Design, development and analysis of AC to DC converters using SCR and Diodes. Interfacing of Power converter simulation circuits using dSPACE. Mini Project Total P: 45

18ED71 PROJECT WORK – I 0063    

Identification of a problem. Literature survey of identified problem. Finalization of project specification and requirements Presentation / Demonstration of sub block(s) of the Project ( Hardware / Software / both )

IV SEMESTER 18ED72 PROJECT WORK – II 0 0 28 14   

Project Implementation ( Hardware / Software / both ) Presentation / Demonstration about the work done Consolidated report preparation

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES (ELECTIVE 3 Associated with Centre of Excellence) 18ED21 INDUSTRIAL APPROACH TO POWER ELECTRONIC DESIGN 3003 NEW PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT: Introduction - Product Development Process - Phases and Stages Gates Model, Product Specification - Subsystem Specification - Sub-system Design - Design Verification - Prototype Development - Engineering Verification– Product cost - Design to Cost - Price and Cost - Cost Estimation methods. (7) Power Converter Circuit and PCB Assembly – Introduction to New wide band gap devices –device characterization - Existing Si devices and its limitations - - Power converter prototypes with GaN - Benefit analyses (cost, performance and size) ––PCB Assembly - Material Selection - PCB Layout and Assembly - Thermal Design - Packaging Design – Prototyping. (7) Battery – Types – Charging Circuit – Health monitoring – Sizing Techniques.

122

(3)

59th ACM

09.06.2018

EMBEDDED SYSTEM: Embedded Systems Development Life Cycle - Functional Block Diagram - System Architecture - Control Architecture - Communication Architecture - Firmware Architecture - Firmware Requirement Specifications - Microcontroller Selection - Microcontroller Architecture - Driver Development - Scheduler and Interrupt Design - Digital Control Methods - Power Converter Control Methods - Digital Implementation of Controller - State Machine Design. (8) DESIGN VERIFICATION AND REGULATORY COMPLIANCE: Verification and ValidationProcess -Types of Verification - Case Study –Design Verification Test for power converters - Design Verification and Validation (DVT) Automation - Field Issues and Handling - Service Log - Conditions for Serviceability - Remote Monitoring, Control and performance check - , Worst Case AnalysisVulnerability conditions and Warranty definitions. (7) Product Quality - Regulatory Compliance and Safety - ESD&EMI/EMC - Environmental Regulations - Audible Noise – Reliability Fault Detection & Isolation - Quality management Workflow. (5) MANUFACTURING AND INDUSTRIALIZATION: Product Designation - Manufacturing - Operational map - Industrialization Project Follow-Up - PCBA Design - Make or Buy Analyses - Industrial Expenses - PCBA process - Failure Mode Effects Analysis (FMEA) Manufacturing Tools & Equipment Producing - PCBA Cost Assessment -Design for Manufacturing - Design for Test - Design for Procurement - Part/Product Evaluation Plan - EP Boards Manufacturing- Incoming Inspection Sheet - Pilot Run Boards Manufacturing - Mass Production. (8) REFERENCES: 1. A Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge ( PMBOK® Guide )—Fifth Edition, Project Management Institute 2. V. Kumar, R.R. Joshi, and R.C. Bansal, Advanced Power Electronics, Ashirwad Publications, Jaipur, India, Feb. 2010. 3. Andrzej M Trzynadlowski, Introduction to Modern Power Electronics, Wiley, 2010 4. V. Kumar, R.R. Joshi, and Dr. R.C. Bansal, Power Electronics with Matlab, Himanshu Publications, New Delhi, India, 2009. 5. Mohan, Undeland and Robbins, Power Electronics: converters, applications and design, 3nd ed. John Wiley & Sons, 2003 6. Robert Erickson, DraganMaksimovic, Fundamentals of Power Electronics, 2nd Ed, Kwuler, 2001

18ED22 / 18EM23 / 18EE21 / 18EA22 INTERNET OF THINGS 3204 FUNDAMENTALS OF IoT: Introduction to Internet of Things (IoT) – Machine to Machine (M2M) – Functional Characteristics – Recent Trends in the Adoption of IoT – Societal Benefits of IoT – Consumer IoT vs Industrial Functional Components of a typical IoT System: Sensors, Actuators, Embedded Computation Units, Communication Interfaces , Software Development (9+5) IoT PROTOCOLS: Physical and Data Linnk Layer Protocols: RFID: NFC, FFC, ZigBEE, Bluetooth Low Energy, Z-Wave, Wi-Fi, Wireless HART - Network Layer Protocols: IPv4, IPv6, TCP & UDP, 6LoWPAN - Application Layer Protocols: COAP, MQTT(13+10) CLOUD COMPUTING: NIST Visual Model – Essential Characteristics –Components of Cloud Computing - Service Models – Deployment Models – Service Management and Security – Examples – Basics of Fog Computing (12+7) SECURITY IN IoT: IEEE 802.11 Wireless Networks Attacks: Basic Types, RFID Security – Security Issues in ZigBEE: Bluetooth Security: Threats to Bluetooth Devices and Networks - IoT Applications: Health Care, Connected Vehicles, Smart Grid, Smart Home, and Smart City (11+8) Total:75 L:45 + T:30 REFERENCES: 1. Vijay Madisetti, Arshdeep Bahga, ―Internet of Things (A Hands-on Approach), Universities Press, 2015. 2. Adrian McEwen and Hakim Cassimally, ―Designing the Internet of Things‖, John Wiley and Sons Ltd, UK, 2014. 3. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick and Omar Elloumi, ―The Internet of Things: Key Applications and Protocols‖, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., UK 2012. 4. Dieter Uckelmann, Mark Harrison, Florian Michahelles, ―Architecting the Internet of Things‖, Springer, New York, 2011. 5. Johnny Cache, Joshua Wright and Vincent Liu, ―Hacking Exposed Wireless: Wireless Security Secrets and Solutions‖, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2010. 6. Himanshu Dwivedi, Chris Clark and David Thiel, ―Mobile Application Security‖, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2010.

18EM22 / 18ED23 / 18EE22 / 18EA23 TOTALLY INTEGRATED AUTOMATION 3204 INTRODUCTION TO FACTORY & PROCESS AUTOMATION: Evolution of Industrial Versions - Control elements of Industrial Automation- IEC/ ISA Standards for Control Elements – Selection criteria for control elements –Utilisation Category with IEC standards- Construction of Relay Ladder logic with different control elements- Need for PLC - PLC evolution. (6+3) PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS: Architecture of PLC - Types of PLC – PLC modules, PLC Configuration -Scan cycle Capabilities of PLC- Selection criteria for PLC – PLC Communication - PLC Wiring- Installation of PLC and its Modules. Types of Programming – Bit Instructions -Timers and counters– PLC arithmetic functions PTO / PWM generation- High Speed Counter – Analog Scaling – Encoder Interfacing- Servo drive control – Stepper Motor Control. (12+13) HMI SYSTEMS: Need for HMI in Industrial Automation, Types of HMI – Configuration of HMI, Screen development and navigation, Configuration of HMI elements / objects and Interfacing with PLC. (6+7)

123

59th ACM

09.06.2018

NETWORKING: PLC Networking- Networking standards & IEEE Standard - Protocols - Field bus - Process bus and Ethernet – EttherCAT (7+0) SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION: Architecture – Tools – Tag Configuration - Internal & External graphics, Alarm logging – Tag logging – structured tags – Trends – history – Report generation (14+7) Total:75 L:45 + T:30 REFERENCES: 1. W. Bolton, Programmable logic controllers, Elsevier Ltd, 2015. 2. Frank D Petruzella, Programmable logic controllers‖, McGraw-Hill, 2011. 3. John R Hackworth and Fredrick D Hackworth Jr., Programmable Logic Controllers: Programming Methods and Applications‖, Pearson Education, 2006.

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES 18ED24 / 18EM07 SPECIAL MACHINES AND CONTROLLERS 3003 INTRODUCTION: Need for special electric machines and controllers– Special Applications requirement– Robotics, Aerospace actuators, space explorations roverand high temperature environments. Stepper Motors: Types – Constructional features, principle of operation– modes of excitation–torque production in Variable Reluctance (VR) stepper motor, Permanent Magnet & Hybrid stepper, Static&dynamic characteristics – Speed-Torque characteristics – Drive systems and circuit – introduction, unipolar drive & bipolar drive circuits, open loop and closed loop control of stepper motor. (11) SWITCHED RELUCTANCE MACHINES: Constructional features, principle of operation, Torque equationand characteristics control techniques – Inductance Profile – Commutation timing diagram – starting & running phase excitation – speed controls, general controller structure– determination of rotor position, current profiling for smoother torque. Synchronous Reluctance Machines:Synchronous reluctance motor(SynRM) - operating principle, rotor topologies - Space-vector diagram - basic characteristics of SynRM - Control of SynRM - Power factor, Current angle, saliency ratio– Vector control - constant current control, constant angle control– Development of Permanent Magnet assisted SynRM (12) PERMANENT MAGNET BRUSHLESS DC MACHINES: Commutation in DC motor, Electronic commutation, Hal sensors, Optical sensors, Magnetic circuit model, Multiphase Brushless motor, Square wave permanent magnet brushless motor drives, Torque and emf equation, Torque-speed characteristics,Control by Back-EMF detection circuits, Controllers-Microprocessor based controller, Field Weakening control. (11) PERMANENT MAGNET SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES: Introduction -Motor Morphologies -Principle of operation, EMF, power input and torque expressions, Phasor diagram, Torque -speed characteristics -Parameter Estimation Power controllers, Torque Controllers, , Self-control, Vector control, Current control schemes.Linear Motors: Linear Induction motor (LIM) classification construction - Principle of operation - concept of current sheet - goodness factor - DC Linear motor (DCLM) types - circuit equation DCLM control applications. (11) Total L : 45 REFERENCES: 1. JuhaPyrhonen, Valeria Hrabovcova, Scott semken, ―Electrical Machines Drives Control – An Introduction‖, Wiley, 2016 2. Riazollah Firoozian, ―Servo Motors and Industrial Control Theory‖, Springer, 2014. 3. Paul Acarnley, ―Stepping Motors a guide to theory and practice‖ IET, 2007 4. Kenjo T, "Stepping Motors and their Microprocessor Control", Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1989. 5. Miller T.J.E,"Brushless Permanent Magnet and Reluctance Motor Drives", Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1989. 6. KenjoT and Naganori, S., ―Permanent Magnet and Brushless DC Motors", Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1989.

18ED25 / 18EM36 / 18EE36 DIGITAL CONTROLLERS FOR POWER ELECTRONIC APPLICATIONS 3003 TMS C2XX DSP: Introduction to the C2xx DSP core and code generation. The components of the C2xx DSP core, Peripherals and Peripheral Interface, System configuration registers, Memory , Types of Physical Memory , memory Addressing Modes , Code Composer Studio for C2xx DSP. (12) I/O AND INTERRUPTS: Pin Multiplexing (MUX) and General Purpose I/O Overview, Multiplexing and General Purpose I/O Control Registers, Programming I/O. Introduction to Interrupts, Interrupt Hierarchy, Interrupt Control Registers, Initializing and Servicing Interrupts in Software, Programming Interrupts (11) ADC AND EVENT MANAGERS: ADC Overview , Operation of the ADC in the DSP , Overview of the Event manager (EV), Event Manager Interrupts , General Purpose (GP) Timers , Compare Units, Capture Units And Quadrature Enclosed Pulse (QEP) Circuitry, General Event Manager Information, Programming of ADC and Event Managers (11) DESIGN OF CONTROLLER IN POWER ELECTRONICS: Typical applications: DSP-based implementation of DC-DC buck-boost converter- DSP-based control of permanent magnet brushless DC machines- DSP-based Implementation of clarkes‘s and park‘s transformations- DSP-Based implementation of SPWM, SVPWM inverter pulse generation. (11) Total L: 45

124

59th ACM

09.06.2018

REFERENCES: 1. Hamid.A.Toliyat and Steven G.Campbell ―DSP Based Electro Mechanical Motion Control― CRC Press New York, 2004. 2. TMS320C28x CPU and Instruction Set Reference Guide - SPRU430 3. TMS320x28xx, 28xxx Peripheral Reference Guide - SPRU566 4. TMS320x2833x System Control and Interrupts Reference Guide - SPRUFB0 5. TMS320x2833x Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Reference Guide - SPRU812 6. TMS320x28xx, 28xxx Enhanced Pulse Width Modulator (ePWM) & High-Resolution Pulse Width Modulator (HRPWM) Module Reference Guide - SPRU791 & - SPRU924

18ED26 / 18EM30 ADVANCED CONTROL OF ELECTRIC DRIVES 3003 ADVANCED CONTROLMETHODS: Introduction - Power Converter Control using State-Space Averaged Models - Sliding-Mode Control of Power Converters - Fuzzy Logic Control of Power Converters (11) MOTOR DRIVES: Review - DC Motor Drives - Induction Motor Drives - Synchronous Motor Drives - Reluctance motor Drives – Servo Motor Drives (11) HIGH PERFORMANCE DRIVES: Types of Torque-Controlled Drive Schemes - Vector Drives, Direct-Torque-Controlled Drives – DSP Controlled Drives – DC Drive, AC Drive, Synchronous motor Drive, and Special Motor drive (12) ARTIFICIAL-INTELLIGENCE BASED DRIVES: AI-Based Techniques - Applications in Electrical Machines and Drives - NeuralNetwork-Based Drives - Fuzzy Based Drives - commercial AI based Drives (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Hamid A Toliyat and Steven G. Campbell, ―DSP Based Electromechanical Motion Control‖, CRC Press, 2004. 2. Marcian Cirstea, Andrei Dinu, Malcolm Mc Cormick, Jeen Ghee Khor, ―Neural and Fuzzy Logic Control of Drives and Power Systems, Newnes Publications, 2002. 3. Ned Mohan, ―Advanced Electric Drives: Analysis, Control and Modeling using Simulink‖, John Wiley and Sons Ltd, 2001. 4. Bimal K Bose, "Power Electronics and Variable Frequency Drives - Technology and Application", IEEE Press, 1997. 5. Peter Vas, "Vector Control of AC Machines", Oxford University Press, 1990. 6. Miller T.J.E,"Brushless Permanent Magnet and Reluctance Motor Drives", Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1989

18ED27 / 18EM26 SOFT COMPUTING TECHNIQUES FOR RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEM 3003 INTRODUCTION TO SOFT COMPUTING TECHNIQUES: Fundamentals – Biological neural network – Artificial neuron – Activation function – Learning rules - Single Layer Feedback Networks - Unsupervised Learning Networks - Membership Functions - Features of membership function - Standard forms and Boundaries - fuzzification - membership value assignments. - Toolboxes of MATLAB – Programming and file processing in MATLAB - Model definition and model analysis using SIMULINK - S-Functions - Converting SFunctions to blocks. (11) OPTIMISATION TECHNIQUES FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC ENERGY CONVERSION: Passive filter design using Genetic Algorithm, harmonic elimination in inverters, Tuning of controllers, GA, PSO, DE, optimized fuzzy logic for the Maximum Power Point Tracking, MATLAB/SIMULINK Models of MPPT Techniques, (11) OPTIMISATION TECHNIQUES FOR WIND ENERGY CONVERSION SYSTEMS: MATLAB/SIMULINK model of Wind turbine and Wind Turbine Generators. Prediction of Wind Turbine Power Factor, Pitch Angle Control, MPPT Algorithms, Economic Dispatch For Wind Power System – Related MATLAB/SIMULINK models-FLC based STATCOM - Prediction of Wind Speed based on FLC Fuzzy Logic Controlled SPWM Converter for WECS. (11) GRID INTEGRATION: Integration of small scale generation into distribution grids, Different types of grid interfaces, Issues related to grid Integration systems - Phase Locked Loop for Grid Connected Power System, Grid Connected Inverters, Current Controllers for PWM inverters, MATLAB/SIMULINK model of Grid Integration, and PLL grid connected power system. HYBRID ENERGY SYSTEMS: Need for hybrid energy system, MATLAB/SIMULINK models of Hybrid Solar PV and Wind Energy System- - CUK-SEPIC converter, Boost Converter, Hybrid model of Solar PV and Diesel Energy System,– Hybrid Solar PV and Wind Energy Conversion Systems (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. S. Sumathi, Ashok Kumar.L, P.Sureka, ― ―Solar PV and Wind Energy Conversion Systems - An Introduction to Theory, Modeling with MATLAB/SIMULINK, and the Role of Soft Computing Techniques‖ – Green Energy and Technology, Springer, 2015 edition (20 April 2015). 2. Randall Shaffer., ―Fundamentals of Power Electronics with MATLAB‖ Charles River Media Boston Massachusetts, 2007. 3. Laurene Fausett, ―Fundamentals of Neural Networks‖, Pearson Education India, New Delhi, 2004. 4. Rao S S., "Optimization Theory and Applications", Wiley Eastern Limited, New Delhi, 2003. 5. H.P.Garg and J.Prakash, ―Solar Energy, Fundamentals and Applications‖, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delh, 1997. 6. Mukund R Patel, ―Wind and Solar Power Systems‖, CRC Press, 2004.

125

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18ED28 FLEXIBLE AC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM 3003

INTRODUCTION: Fundamentals of AC power transmission, transmission problems and needs, emergence of FACTS- FACTS control considerations, FACTS controllers, Concepts of voltage sourced and current sourced converters for FACTS devices. (11) SHUNT COMPENSATOR: Principle of operation - types - Variable Impedance type & switching converter type - Static Synchronous Compensator (STATCOM) - configuration, characteristics and control-applications. (11) SERIES COMPENSATOR: Principles of operation- types - static series compensation using GCSC, TCSC and TSSC, Static Synchronous Series Compensator (SSSC) – characteristics and control-applications. VOLTAGE AND PHASE ANGLE REGULATORS: Principles of operation-types-Steady state model and characteristics of a static voltage regulators and phase shifters- Thyristor controlled Voltage and phase angle regulators. Switching converter based voltage and phase angle regulators-applications. (12) UNIFIED POWER FLOW CONTROLLER: Principles of operation – characteristics- independent active and reactive power flow control-applications. Comparison of UPFC with the controlled series compensators and phase shifters. Coordinated control of FACTS Devices. Use of FACTS devices under deregulated environment. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Padiyar K.R., ‗FACTS Controllers for Transmission and Distribution Systems‘ New Age international Publishers, 2007. 2. Loi Lei Lai, ‗Power System Restructuring and Deregulation‘, John Wiley & Sons Ltd. 2003. 3. Mohan R .Mathur and Rajiv Varma K. , ‗Thyristor - based FACTS Controllers for Electrical Transmission Systems‘, IEEE Press, Wiley Inter science , 2002. 4. Hingorani, L.Gyugyi, ‗Understanding FACTS - Concepts and Technology of Flexible AC Transmission Systems‘, IEEE Press New York, 2000. 5. Song, Y.H. and Allan T. Johns, ‗Flexible AC Transmission Systems (FACTS)‘, Institution of Electrical Engineers Press, London, 1999. 6. Joseph Vithayathil, ‖Power Electronics‖, McGraw Hill Series in Electrical and Computer Engineering, USA, 1995.

18ED29 / 18EM37 POWER QUALITY MANAGEMENT 3003 POWER QUALITY PROBLEMS: Definition of power quality – Power quality issues - Sources and Effects – International standards of Power quality and Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC), Computer Business Equipment Manufacturers Associations (CBEMA) curve - Voltage sags - Load influence on voltage sags – Stochastic assessment of voltage sags - Voltage Sags in Continuous Processes - Case Study – Interruptions – Types – Origin - Causes - Transients - Classification- Utility capacitor switching transients – Utility lightning protection – Transients from load switching - Impact on users. (12) HARMONICS AND ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE: Harmonics - Sources and effects of harmonic distortion – Standards – Impacts - Mitigation and control techniques – Devices for controlling harmonic distortion - Simulation using PSCAD. Electromagnetic interference - Frequency classification - High-frequency interference - Electromagnetic interference – Susceptibility - EMI mitigation - Cable shielding to minimize Electromagnetic interference - Health concerns of electromagnetic interference. (11) POWER QUALITY SOLUTIONS: Power quality monitoring considerations - Choosing monitoring locations - monitoring and diagnostic techniques for various power quality problems - modeling of power quality (harmonics and voltage sag) problems by mathematical simulation tools -power line disturbance analyzer –quality measurement equipment - harmonic / spectrum analyzer flicker meters – disturbance analyzer. Applications of expert systems for power quality monitoring. (11) POWER QUALITY CONDITIONERS: Shunt and series compensators - DSTATCOM - dynamic voltage restorer - unified power quality conditioners - Custom power devices and their applications in power system - Operating principles - Detailed modeling and analysis of DSTATCOM and DVR - Compensators to mitigate power quality related problems - Realization of DVR and DSTATCOM by using VSC. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Sankaran.C, "Power Quality", CRC Press, Baco Raton, 2017. 2. Math H J Bollen, "Understanding Power Quality Problems: Voltage Sags and Interruptions", Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2014. 3. Roger C. Dugan, Mark F. McGranaghan Surya Santoso and H. Wayne Beaty, "Electrical Power Systems Quality", Third edition, McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2013. 4. Arindam Ghosh and Gerard Ledwich, ―Power quality enhancement using custom power devices‖, Springer-Verlag, New York, 2012. 5. J. Arrillaga, N.R. Watson and S. Chen, "Power System Quality Assessment", Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2011. 6. Ned Mohan, Undeland, and Robbins, "Power Electronics: Converters, Applications and Design ", John Wiley and Sons (Asia) Pte Ltd., Singapore, 2003.

126

59th ACM

09.06.2018

18ED30 / 18EM31 ADVANCED TOPICS IN POWER ELECTRONICS 3003 RESONANT CONVERTERS: Zero voltage and Zero current switching – Classification of resonant converters - Basic resonant circuit concepts - Load resonant converters - Resonant switch converters - Zero voltage switching, clamped voltage topologies Resonant DC link Inverters and Zero voltage switching - High frequency link integral half cycle converters - Applications in SMPS and lighting. (11) IMPROVED UTILITY INTERFACE: Generation of current harmonics – Current harmonics and power factor - Harmonic standards and recommended practices - Need for improved utility interface - Improved single phase utility interface - Improved three phase utility interface - Electromagnetic interference. (11) FACTS AND CUSTOM POWER: Introduction - Principles of reactive power control in load and transmission line compensation Series and shunt reactive power compensation - Concepts of Flexible AC Transmission System (FACTS) - Static var compensators (SVC) - Thyristor controlled reactor - Thyristor switched capacitor - Solid state power control - Static condensers - Controllable series compensation - Thyristor controlled phase-angle regulator and unified power flow control - Modeling and methods of analysis of SVC and FACTS controllers - System control and protection - Harmonics and filters – Simulation and study of SVC and FACTS under dynamic conditions. (12) EMERGING DEVICES AND CIRCUITS: Power Junction Field Effect Transistors - Field Controlled Thyristors - JFET based devices Vs other power devices - MOS controlled thyristors - Power integrated circuits - New semiconductor materials for power devices. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Rashid, M.H., ―Power Electronics – Circuits, Devices and Applications‖, Pearson Education (Singapore) Pte. Ltd, New Delhi, 2004. Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi. 2. Ned Mohan, Undeland, and Robbins, "Power Electronics: Converters, Applications and Design ", John Wiley and Sons (Asia) Pte Ltd., Singapore, 2003. 3. Mohan Mathur P, Rajiv K Varma, ―Thyristor – Based Facts Controllers for Electrical Transmission Systems‖, John Wiley and Sons Inc., IEEE Press, USA, 2002. 4. Las Zlo Gyugyi, Narain G Hingorani, ―Understanding Facts: Concepts & Technology of Flexible AC Transmission System‖, The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. Inc., New York, 2000. 5. Joseph Vithayathil, ‖Power Electronics‖, McGraw Hill Series in Electrical and Computer Engineering, USA, 1995. 6. Roger C. Dugan, Mark F. McGranaghan Surya Santoso and H. Wayne Beaty, "Electrical Power Systems Quality", Third edition, McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2013.

18ED31 HVDC TRANSMISSION 3003 HVDC TRANSMISSION: Introduction to HVDC transmission, Comparison between HVAC and HVDC systems - Economic, technical and reliability, limitations, Types of HVDC links - monopolar, bipolar and homopolar links, Components of HVDC transmission system. ANALYSIS OF HVDC CONVERTERS: Analysis of HVDC Converters, Rectifier and Inverter operation of Graetz circuit without and with overlap. Output voltage waveforms and DC voltage in both rectifier and inverter operation, Equivalent circuit of HVDC link. (12) HVDC SYSTEM CONTROL: Basic means of HVDC system control, desired features, power reversal, Basic controllers - constant ignition angle, constant current and constant extinction/ advance angle control, power control, high level controllers. Converter malfunctioning - misfire, arc through, commutation failure. (11) HARMONICS IN HVDC SYSTEM: Harmonics in HVDC system - Characteristic and uncharacteristic harmonics - Troubles due to harmonics – Harmonic filters - Active and passive filters - Reactive power control of converters, Protection issues in HVDC, over voltage and over current protection Voltage and current oscillations, DC reactor design, DC Circuit breakers. (11) RECENT TRENDS IN HVDC TRANSMISSION: CSC based HVDC system, VSC based HVDC system – Multi-terminal HVDC systems and HVDC system applications in wind power generation, Interaction between AC and DC systems (11) Total L : 45 REFERENCES: 1. Kamakshaiah, S and Kamaraju, V, ‗HVDC Transmission‘, 1st Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Education, Newdelhi 2011. 2. Padiyar, K.R., ‗HVDC transmission systems‘, Wiley Eastern Ltd., 2010. 3. Vijay K. Sood, ‗HVDC and FACTS Controllers‘, Kluwer Academic Publishers, New York, 2004.

18ED32 DESIGN OF SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM 3003 FUNDAMENTALS OF SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC TECHNOLOGY: Historical review- Basic approaches and objectives Phenomena of light and energy- Energy from the sun - Photovoltaic(PV) cell characteristics - Model of PV cell - Datasheet study.

127

59th ACM

09.06.2018

Solar photovoltaic modules: Design structure of PV modules – Series and parallel connection of cells - Identical cells in series- Nonidentical cells in series - Protecting cells in series - Interconnecting modules in series - Identical cells in parallel-Non-identical cells in parallel - Protecting cells in parallel – I-V and power curve of PV modules - Effect of temperature. (12) SOLAR RADIATION: Insolation and irradiance- Insolation variation with time of day - Solar radiation outside the earth‘s atmosphere - Solar radiation at the earth‘s surface – Solar radiation data - Solar radiation geometry - Effect of solar irradiation - Energy on a horizontal flat surfaces - Energy on a tilted flat surfaces – Energy with atmospheric effects- PV System Emulation. (11) SIZING OF PV: Batteries - Capacity – Factors affecting battery performance - Choice of battery – Battery charging and discharging methods – Battery size. Charge controllers - Types of charge controllers - Maximum Power Point Tracking (MPPT) - Algorithms of MPPT- Impedance control methods, Reference cell, Sampling method, Power slope methods, Hill climbing method – PV module simulation. (11) PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM DESIGN AND APPLICATIONS: Classifications - Standalone, grid connected and hybrid PV systems configurations - working principle - Application examples. Economic Analysis : Payback period-Life cycle costing - Time value of Money-present worth factor -Life cycle cost with example.(11) Total L : 45 REFERENCES: 1. Chetan Singh Solanki, ―Solar Photovoltaics: Fundamental, Technologies and Applications‖, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2015. 2. Parimita Mohanty, Tariq Muneer, Mohan Kolhe, ―Solar Photovoltaic System Applications: A Guidebook for Off-Grid Electrification‖, Springer, 2015. 3. S. Sumathi, L. Ashok Kumar, P. Surekha, ―Solar PV and Wind Energy Conversion Systems: An Introduction to Theory, Modeling with MATLAB/SIMULINK, and the Role of Soft Computing Techniques‖, Springer, 2015.

18ED33 / 18EM32 / 18EA39 / 18EE35 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES 3003 LINEAR PROGRAMMING: Statement of Optimization problems, Principles of single and multi-objective optimization, Graphical method, Simplex method, Revised simplex method, Two phase simplex method, Duality in linear programming, Sensitivity analysis. (12) NON-LINEAR PROGRAMMING (UNCONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION): Direct search methods - Univariate method, Pattern search method, Simplex method, Descent methods - Steepest Descent method, Conjugate gradient method, Quasi Newton method. (11) NON-LINEAR PROGRAMMING (CONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION): Direct methods - The Complex method, Zoutendijk‘s Method of Feasible Directions, Rosen‘s Gradient Projection Method , Indirect method - Transformation Techniques, Basic Approach of the Penalty Function Method, Interior Penalty Function Method, Exterior Penalty Function Method. (11) DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING: Multistage decision process, Suboptimization and Principle of Optimality, Computational procedure, Final value problem to initial value problem, Linear Programming as a Case of Dynamic Programming, Continuous dynamic programming (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Sharma J K, ―Operations Research: Theory and Applications‖, Macmillan Company, New Delhi, 2013. 2. Gupta C B, ―Optimization Techniques in Operations Research‖, I K International, New Delhi, 2012. 3. Hamdy A Taha, ―Operations Research: An Introduction‖, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2012.

18ED34 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING 3003 SPECTRAL ANALYSIS OF SYSTEMS: Fourier Series and Fourier Transform – - Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) – Properties FFT Algorithms – Linear Convolution and Circular Convolution – FFT Applications (10) DESIGN OF DIGITAL FILTERS: Characteristics of IIR and FIR filters - Design techniques for analog filters-frequency transformation-Digital IIR filter design: impulse invariant and bilinear transform methods - FIR filter design using Window functions Realization structures of filters: direct, cascade and parallel forms. (12) MULTIRATE DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING: Decimation by an integer factor-Interpolation by an integer factor-Sampling rate conversion by rational factor-Decimation with poly phase filters-Interpolation with poly phase filters – Multistaging – Realization of Transversal and Polyphase Decimation and Interpolation Filters. (12) GENERAL-PURPOSE DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS: Computer architectures for signal processing – pipelining - hardware multiplier – accumulator - special instructions - extended parallelism : SIMD, VLIW, and super-scalar processing. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Vinay K Ingle & John G Proakis, ― Digital signal processing using MATLAB, Brooks / Cole, 2006. 2. Mitra S K, ―Digital Signal Processing – A Computer based Approach‖, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2005. 3. Ifeachor E C & Jervis B.W, ―Digital Signal Processing: Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2002.

128

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18EM34 / 18ED35

VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS 3003

INTRODUCTION: Concept of virtual instrumentation, virtual instrumentation model, design flow with graphical system design, graphical data flow programming - Modular programming, repetition and loops, arrays, clusters, plotting data, structures, strings, state machines –file I/O- creating LabVIEW executables and projects. (12) DATA ACQUISITION: DAQ hardware configuration, DAQ hardware– Sampling and grounding techniques- analog I/O, digital I/O, counter/timer, DAQ software architecture, network data acquisition. Application design using Real Time Targets: PXI, cRIO. (11) INSTRUMENT INTERFACES: Virtual Instrumentation Software Architecture (VISA), instrument drivers, serial and parallel interfaces: RS232, USB, firewire, controller area network (CAN), GPIB, Industrial Ethernet. OLE for Process Control (OPC) (11) ADVANCED FEATURES IN LabVIEW: System identification and control design, signal processing, image acquisition and processing, data logging and supervisory control, LabVIEW Interface for Arduino, case studies on machine vision, motion control, GSD applications. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Jovitha Jerome, ―Virtual Instrumentation using LabVIEW‖, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2010. 2. Mathivanan, N. ―PC-Based Instrumentation‖, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2009. 3. Rick Bitter, Taqi Mohiuddin and Matt Nawrocki, ―LABVIEW Advanced Programming Techniques‖, CRC Press, 2009.

18ED36 / 18EM33 / 18EE39 / 18EA42 MACHINE LEARNING AND APPLICATIONS 3003 PROBABILITY DISTRIBUTIONS: Basic Definitions, Types of learning, Probability Theory, Probability Reasoning, Model Selection, Curse of Dimensionality, Decision Theory, Information Theory, Binary Variables, Multinomial Variables, Gaussian Distribution, Exponential Family, Nonparametric Methods, Belief Networks. (12) LINEAR MODELS FOR REGRESSION AND CLASSIFICATION: Linear Basis Function Models, Bias-Variance Decomposition, Bayesian Linear Regression, Bayesian Model Comparison, Evidence Approximation, Limitations of Fixed Basis Functions, Discriminant Functions, Probabilistic Generative and Discriminative Models, Laplace Approximation, Bayesian Logistic Regression. (11) NEURAL NETWORKS: Introduction, Reforcement Learning, Feed-forward Network functions, Error Backpropogation, Hessian Matrix, Mixture Density Networks, Bayesian Neural Networks, Convolution Neural Network, Dual Representations, Constructing Kernels, Gaussian Processes, Maximum Margin Classifiers, Relevance Vector Machines. (11) APPLICATIONS OF MACHINE LEARNING ALGORITHMS: Content Based Image Retrieval, Machine Learning Approach for face Recognition, Computer Aided Diagnosis, Computer Vision, Speech Recognition,Text Mining, Thinking Machines, Smart Machines, Business Applications of Deep Learning, Software Reliability Prediction, Medical Imaging. (11) Total: L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Pradeep Kumar and Arvind Tiwari., ―Ubiquitous Machine Learning and Its Applications‖, IGI Global, 2017. 2. David Barber., ―Bayesian Reasoning and Machine Learning‖, Cambridge University Press, New Delhi, 2014. 3. Ethem Alpaydin, ―Introduction to Machine Learning‖, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2014.

18ED37 PULSE WIDTH MODULATION FOR POWER ELECTRONIC CONVERTERS 3003 POWER ELECTRONIC CONVERTERS FOR DC-AC AND AC-DC POWER CONVERSION: Electronic switches, dc-dc buck and boost converters, H-bridge, multilevel converters – diode clamp, flying capacitor and cascaded-cell converters; voltage source and current source converters; evolution of topologies for dc-ac power conversion from dc-dc converters. Applications of voltage source converters - Overview of applications of voltage source converter, motor drives, active front-end converters, reactive compensators, active power filters (11) PULSE WIDTH MODULATION (PWM) AT LOW SWITCHING FREQUENCY: Purpose of PWM- Review of Fourier series, fundamental and harmonic voltages; machine model for harmonic voltages; undesirable effects of harmonic voltages – line current distortion, increased losses, pulsating torque in motor drives; control of fundamental voltage; mitigation of harmonics and their adverse effects- Square wave operation of voltage source inverter, PWM with a few switching angles per quarter cycle, equal voltage contours, selective harmonic elimination, THD optimized PWM, off-line PWM. Triangle-comparison based PWM-Average pole voltages, sinusoidal modulation, third harmonic injection, continuous PWM, bus-clamping or discontinuous PWM. Space vector based PWM -Space vector concept and transformation, per-phase methods from a space vector perspective, space vector based modulation, conventional space vector PWM, bus-clamping PWM, advanced PWM, triangle comparison approach versus space vector approach to PWM (12) ANALYSIS OF PWM CONVERTERS: Analysis of line current ripple - Synchronously revolving reference frame; error between reference voltage and applied voltage, integral of voltage error; evaluation of line current ripple; hybrid PWM for reduced line current ripple. Analysis of dc link current - Relation between line-side currents and dc link current; dc link current and inverter state; RMS dc

129

59th ACM

09.06.2018

current ripple over a carrier cycle; RMS current rating of dc capacitors. Analysis of torque ripple - Evaluation of harmonic torques and RMS torque ripple, hybrid PWM for reduced torque ripple - Inverter loss - Simplifying assumptions in evaluation of inverter loss, dependence of inverter loss on line power factor, influence of PWM techniques on switching loss, design of PWM for low inverter loss. (11) OVERMODULATION & PWM FOR MULTILEVEL INVERTER: Per-phase and space vector approaches to over modulation, average voltages in a synchronously revolving d-q reference frame, low-frequency harmonic distortion. Extensions of sine-triangle PWM to multilevel inverters, voltage space vectors, space vector based PWM, analysis of line current ripple and torque ripple. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Mohan, Undeland and Robbins,‘ Power Electronics; Converters, Applications and Design‘, John Wiley and Sons, 1989. 2. Erickson R W,‘ Fundamentals of Power Electronics‘, Chapman and Hall, 1997. 3. Vithyathil J, ‘Power Electronics: Principles and Applications ‗, McGraw Hill, 1995

18ED38 / 18EM38 / 18EE37 SMART GRID TECHNOLOGIES 3003 SMART GRID ARCHITECTURE AND COMPONENTS: Introduction to Smart Grid, Evolution of Electric Grid, Concept of Smart Grid, Definitions, Need of Smart Grid, Concept of Robust & Self-Healing Grid, Present development & International policies in Smart Grid, Smart Grid Architecture Models, Components of Smart Grid: Smart Generation systems, Smart Transmission Grid : Geographic Information System (GIS). Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED) & their application for Monitoring & Protection. Wide Area Monitoring Protection and Control (WAMPAC), Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) and its applications in Smart Grid. (11) MICROGRIDS AND DISTRIBUTED ENERGY RESOURCES: Micro grid: Concept of Micro grid, Need & Applications of Micro grid. Micro grid Architecture, Issues of interconnection, Protection & Control of Micro-grid. Distributed Energy Resources: Plastic & Organic Solar cells, Thin Film Solar cells. Variable Speed Wind Generators, Fuel cells, Micro turbines, Captive Power plants, Integration of Renewable energy sources. Power Quality issues of Grid connected Renewable Energy Sources. Power Quality Conditioners for Smart Grid. Web based Power Quality monitoring and Power Quality Audit. (12) SMART METERING AND DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM: Smart Distribution Systems: Smart Meters, Automatic Meter Reading (AMR), Advanced Metering Infrastructure (AMI), Real Time Pricing, Smart Appliances. Smart Substations : Substation Automation, Feeder Automation, Outage Management System (OMS). Smart Sensors: Home & Building Automation, Plug in Hybrid Electric Vehicles (PHEV), Algorithms for Vehicle to Grid and Grid to Vehicle Management, Smart Charging Stations. Energy Storage for Smart Grids: Battery Energy Storage Systems (BESS), Superconducting Magnetic Energy Storage (SMES), Compressed Air Energy Storage (CAES). (11) COMMUNICATION NETWORKS AND CYBER SECURITY FOR SMART GRID: Communication Architecture for Smart Grids, Home Area Network (HAN) : IEEE 802.11, IEEE 802.15.4, 6LoWPAN, Neighborhood Area Network (NAN) / Field Area Network (FAN): Radio over Power-Lines (BPL/PLC), IEEE P1901, Wide Area Network (WAN) : Optical Fiber Communication, Cellular Networks, Wi-Max and Wireless Sensor Networks. Big Data Analytics in Smart Grid, Cyber Security Challenges in Smart Grid Load Altering Attacks - False Data Injection Attacks - Defense Mechanisms. (11) Total L : 45 REFERENCES: 1. Ali Keyhani, ―Design of Smart Power Grid Renewable Energy Systems‖, Wiley, 2016 2. Stuart Borlase, ―Smart Grid: Infrastructure, Technology and Solutions‖, CRC Press, 2012. 3. Janaka Ekanayake, Nick Jenkins, KithsiriLiyanage, Jianzhong Wu and Akihiko Yokoyama, ―Smart Grid: Technology and Applications‖, Wiley, 2012.

18ED39 / 18EM39 DISTRIBUTED GENERATION AND MICROGRIDS 3003 DISTRIBUTED GENERATION: Energy Sources and their availability -Trends in Energy Consumption, Conventional and Nonconventional Energy Sources – Review of Solar Photovoltaic – Wind Energy Systems – Fuel Cells , Energy storage systems: Batteries – ultra capacitors – fly wheels – captive power power plants. Distributed Generation – Concept and topologies, Renewable Energy in Distributed Generation. IEEE 1547 Standard for Interconnecting Distributed Generation to Electric Power Systems – DG Installations – Siting and sizing of DGs – optimal placement – Regulatory issues. (11) ISSUES IN GRID INTEGRATION OF DISTRIBUTED ENERGY RESOURCES: Basic requirements of Grid Interconnections – operational Parameters – Voltage, Frequency and THD limits – Grid Interfaces – Inverter based DGs and rotary machines based DGs – Reliability, Stability and Power Quality issues on Grid Integration – Impact of DGs on Protective Relaying and islanding issues in existing distribution Grid. (11) MICROGRIDS: Introduction to Microgrids – types – Structure and configuration of Microgrids – AC and DC Microgrids – Power Electronic Intefaces for Microgrids – Energy Management and Protection Control Strategies of a Microgrid - Case Studies. (11) CONTROL AND OPERATION OF MICROGRID: Modes of operation and control of microgrid: grid connected and islanded mode, Active and reactive power control, protection issues, anti-islanding schemes: passive, active and communication based techniques, microgrid communication infrastructure, Power quality issues in microgrids, regulatory standards, Microgrid economics, Introduction to smart microgrids. (12)

130

59th ACM

09.06.2018 Total L : 45

REFERENCES: 1. Gregory W. Massey, ―Essentials of Distributed Generation Systems‖, Jones & Bartlett Publishers, 2011. 2. Math H. Bollen, ―Integration of Distributed Generation in the Power System‖, John Wiley & Sons, 2011. 3. Ali Keyhani, ―Design of Smart Power Grid Renewable Energy Systems‖, John Wiley & Sons, 2011.

18ED40 / 18EM40 HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES 3003 INTRODUCTION TO HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES: History of hybrid and electric vehicles, social and environmental importance of hybrid and electric vehicles, impact of modern drive-trains on energy supplies. Basics of vehicle performance, vehicle power source characterization, transmission characteristics and mathematical models to describe vehicle performance. (11) DRIVE –TRAIN TOPOLOGIES: Basic concept of hybrid traction, introduction to various hybrid drive-train topologies, power flow control in hybrid drive-train topologies, fuel efficiency analysis. Basic concepts of electric traction, introduction to various electric drive-train topologies, power flow control in hybrid drive-train topologies, fuel efficiency analysis. (11) ELECTRIC COMPONENTS IN HYBRID AND ELECTRIC VEHICLES: Electric Drives in HEV/EVs, Classification and Characteristics, configuration and Control of DC Motor drives, Induction Motor drives, Permanent Magnet Motor drives and Switched Reluctance Motor drives for HEV/EVs applications, Drive System efficiency. Performance matching of Electric Machine and the Internal Combustion Engine (ICE), Sizing the propulsion motor, sizing of power electronic devices and Energy Storage systems.(12) ENERGY MANAGEMENT STRATEGIES: Introduction to energy management strategies used in hybrid and electric vehicle, classification of different energy management strategies, comparison of different energy management strategies - implementation issues. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Iqbal Hussein, Electric and Hybrid Vehicles: Design Fundamentals, CRC Press, 2010. 2. Mehrdad Ehsani, Yimi Gao, Sebastian E. Gay, Ali Emadi, Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric and Fuel Cell Vehicles: Fundamentals, Theory and Design, CRC Press, 2009. 3. Sira -Ramirez, R. Silva Ortigoza, ‗Control Design Techniques in Power Electronics Devices‘, Springer, 2006

ONE CREDIT COURSE 18EK01 LOW – VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR 1001 CONTRACTORS: Introduction to LV Switchgear – Typical industrial electrical layout. Introduction to contractors – Difference between switch and contractor – Types of contactors – Utilization category – Selection of contactors – Nameplate details – Limits of operation – Special types of contactors. (3) RELAYS AND FUSES: Introduction to overload relay – Types of overload relay – Types of motor failures – Utilization category and trip class – Selection of overload relay – Introduction to Fuses. HRC fuse – Types and Utilization category. Introduction to digital protection techniques. (2) SWITCHES AND STARTERS: Introduction to switch – Types of switches – Utilization category – Selection of switches. Introduction to motor starters – Types of starters – Control and Power wiring circuits – Selection of starters – Types of timers. (2) CIRUIT BREAKER: Introduction to circuit breaker – Types of circuit breaker – Selection of Air circuit breaker – Introduction to MCCB and MCB – Difference between relay and release. (2) LABORATORY COMPONENT:  Assembling and maintenance of contactors.  Testing the pick-up and drop-off voltages in contactors.  Testing of thermal overload relay.  Control wiring practice on DOL and Star Delta Starter.

(6)

Total : L:9 + P: 6 = 15 REFERENCES: 1. Wadhwa C L, ―Electrical Power Systems‖, New Age Internationa – 2005. 2. Madhava Rao T S, ―Power Systems Protection : Static Relay with Microprocessors Application‖ , Tata Mcgraw-Hill-2004. 3. Sunil S Rao, ―Switch Gear and Protection‖, Khanna Publishers – 2008.

18EK02 ENERGY AUDITING AND CONSERVATION TECHNIQUES 1001 INTRODUCTION: Mandatory Auditing requirements – Audit purpose, scope and frequency - Energy auditing Conservation concepts and its Importance – Energy conservation opportunities in electrical power supply sector -The Energy Conservation Act, 2001 and its features. (2)

131

59th ACM

09.06.2018

ENERGY AUDIT METHODOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT SYSTEM: Electrical energy audit, tools for electrical energy audit, billing elements, tariff systems, electrical demand and load factor improvement, power factor correction, power demand control and demand shifting- Duties and responsibilities of energy systems auditors (3) ENERGY CONSERVATION IN ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Electrical energy requirements in pumps and fans and lighting, different types of Variable Speed Drives, electrical energy conservation in industrial motors, air conditioning and refrigeration systems, DG Sets, Cabling Techniques for energy conservation. (3) GREEN BUILDINGS: Barriers to green buildings, green building rating tools, material selection, operating energy, façade systems, ventilation systems, transportation, water treatment systems, water efficiency, building economics, Leed and IGBC codes (3) ENERGY AUDITING IN INDUSTRIAL LIGHTING: Choice of lighting, energy saving, control of lighting, lighting standards, lighting audit, use of different lighting technologies, electronic ballast. (1) LABORATORY COMPONENT:  Power factor Measurement & Compensation Techniques  Energy Saving Techniques - Lighting, air conditioning, pumps & fans  Case studies and exercises

(1) (1) (1) Total L: 15

REFERENCES: 1. Rao VVL, Openshaw Taylor E., "Utilization of Electric Energy", Orient Longman Ltd, 2006. 2. Michael E., Brumbach, ―Electronic Variable Speed Drives‖ Thomson Asia (P) ltd., 2002. 3. Donald R Wulfinghoff, ―Energy Efficiency Manual‖, Energy Institute Press, 1999.

18EK03 POWER ELECTRONICS IN MORE-ELECTRIC AIRCRAFT 1001 INTRODUCTION TO AIRCRAFT ELECTRICAL SYSTEM: Power sources: Aircraft Batteries – Lead Acid Batteries, VRLA Batteries, NiCd Batteries, Generators, Main Engine, Auxiliary Power Unit; Primary and Secondary Power Distribution System. (3) MORE ELECTRIC AIRCRAFT ARCHITECTURE: Migration from conventional fixed frequency electrical system to variable frequency electrical system, Advantages of More Electric Aircraft. Introduction to working principle of various Electrical Loads in Conventional and More Electric Aircraft. Electrical Loads in conventional aircraft – Avionics, Cabin Lighting, In-Flight Entertainment, Pumps and Fans. New Electrical Loads in More Electric Aircraft – Cabin Pressurisation Compressor, Air Conditioning, Ice Protection, Flight Control Actuator, Landing Gear, Electrical Taxi System, Braking System, Fuel Pumping. (4) RECTIFIERS, INVERTERS AND MOTOR CONTROLLERS IN AIRCRAFT: Starter Generator System in Aircraft: Main Engine and APU start System. Multipulse Rectifiers – Autotransformer Rectifier Units as front end converter. How design of Inverters for motor controllers in Aircraft is different from that for conventional industrial application. 2-Level and 3-Level inverters for motor control – Brushless DC motor control and Sensorless Vector control. (4) CASE STUDIES & PROJECT: Introduction to DO-160 standard and how that influences the design of power converter in aircraft. Practical Design of Power Electronic converters for real life Aero application: Case Study: Design of Exciter Power Supply – Design for space and weight optimization while meeting DO-160 standard. (4) Total L: 15 + P: 0 = 15 REFERENCES: 1. Aircraft Electricity and Electronics, Sixth Edition (2013), by Thomas Eismin, ISBN-13: 978-0071799157. 2. Recent Advances in Aircraft Technology,(2012), Chapter 13, 14 & 15; Edited by Ramesh K.Agarwal, ISBN 978-953-51-0150-5. 3. R. I. Jones, "The More Electric Aircraft: the past and the future?" IEE Colloquium on Electrical Machines and Systems for the More Electric Aircraft, 1999, pp. 1/1-1/4.

18EK04 POWER QUALITY IN INDUSTRIES 1001 POWER QUALITY: History, concern about power quality, Definition - categories and characteristics of power system electromagnetic phenomenon. (3) SOURCES OF POWER QUALITY PROBLEM: Source of Power Supply & its saturation, Transformer & DG Environment, Sags, Dips & Interruptions & its effect on equipments, Capacitors & Resonance, Case Study – Ill effects of Capacitors. Switching, Non – Linear Loads & Harmonics, Case Study. (3) EFFECTS OF POWER QUALITY PROBLEMS: On Maximum Demand, Contract Demand, Power Factor & Over all operation Case studies. (4) POWER QUALITY STANDARDS: IEEE 519 1991 STDS, EMC & ESD & IEC

(2)

HANDLING OF POWER QUALITY PROBLEMS: Principles of mitigation of harmonics -Passive & Active filter, Dynamic Voltage Regulator & STATCOM. (2)

132

59th ACM

09.06.2018

PRACTICAL CONTENT: Case Study using Power Quality Analyser

(1)

Total L: 14 + P: 1 = 15 REFERENCES: 1. Roger .C. Dugan, Mark F.Mcgranaghan & H.Wayne Beaty, ―Electrical power system Quality‖ McGraw-Hill Newyork Second edition 2003. 2. Snakaran C, ―Power Quality‖, CRC press Washington DC 2002. 3. Math.H.J.Bollen, Understanding Power Quality Problems‖ Voltage sags & Interruptions‖ IEEE Press, Newyork 2000.

18EK05 SOLAR PV SYSTEMS – DESIGN, SIMULATION AND MONITORING AND CONTROL 1001 INTRODUCTION TO PV SYSTEM DEISGN: Solar PV Fundamentals - PV Modules, PV Inverters, DC & AC Configurations, and Parameters & Datasheet approach, MET Parameters, Weather Monitoring stations, Modems & Protocols. (2) SOLAR PRO USER INTERFAC: Setting up of a Solar PV system using Simulation Wizard, 3D CAD interface, File formats, Export / Import capabilities, System requirements, Shortcut keys. Choosing the Data Source - Meteorological data, PV database, Inverter database. (2) CONFIGURATION OF PV SYSTEM: Assessment of loads to be connected, Selection of right Inverters & PV modules. Creating a string, Creating an Array, PV Array configuration, PV Inverter configuration, PV Electrical Assembly configuration, PV Module mounting configuration & PV Module Tracking configuration, Electrical BOM preparation. (4) 3D DESIGN FEATURES: Building and Surrounding Objects - Setting up of building parameters, setting up of surrounding buildings or interfering structures, setting up of plants, trees and vegetation. (2) SIMULATION & REPORT GENERATION: Time Trackers, I-V curve simulation, Shadow analysis, Power generation, PV system cost & Financial analysis, PV Array layout, Power generation and loss diagram, Performance Ratio Analysis. Economic viability and Cost effectiveness of project, Print options and export options of variable parameters. (2) MONITORING OF SOLAR PV POWER PLANT: Remote Monitoring, Real – Time Monitoring, Multiple Inverter Monitoring, Interfacing of Hardware- Solar Link Zero- Modem, Routers, Modbus – Internet Gateway, Cloud Data, RS-485, RS-232 Serial, USB, Ethernet and DVI-D ports. (3) Total L : 15 REFERENCES: 1. Solar Link Monitoring Solutions Manual, Laplace Systems, 2014. 2. Solar Pro:Photovoltaic System Simulation Software Manual, Laplace Systems, 2012. 3. Roger A. Messenger, Jerry Ventre,‖ Photovoltaic System Engineering‖ CRC Press, 2004

18EK06 FIELD PROGRAMMABLE ANALOG ARRAY FOR ANALOG SYSTEM DESIGN 1001 INTRODUCTION: Overview of Analog Design - Introduction to Field Programmable Analog Array (FPAA) and its advantages - Role of EDA tool in Analog Design process. (2) CONFIGURABLE ANALOG MODULES: Introduction to Anadigm`s inbuilt Analog Functions (CAM) - Generation of Clock Signals Signal Delay - Performance of CAM. (3) SIMULATION and PHYSICAL REALIZATION: Features of ANADIGMDESIGNER2 EDA tool for simulating the analog designConfiguring the FPAA with analog design - Real time verification. (2) FPAA IO INTERFACING: Interfacing of input and output signals to the FPAA - Rauch Filter - Output Buffer.

(2)

STATIC CONFIGURATION: Full Wave Rectifier - Tone Generation and Notch filter - Voltage Controlled Oscillator - Pulse Width Modulation - Phase Detector. (3) DYNAMIC RECONFIGURATION: Reconfigurable Analog design using FPAA, Various methods of Reconfiguration - Real time verification. (3) REFERENCES: 1. Thomas L. Floyd ―Electronic devices Conventional Current Version‖ Pearson Education Ltd, Ninth Edition, 2012. 2. Thomas L. Floyd ―Instructor‘s Resource Manual to Accompany Electronic Devices‖ Pearson Education Ltd, Eighth Edition, 2008. 3. Thomas L. Floyd ―Electronic Devices‖ Pearson Education Ltd, Eighth Edition, 2008.

133

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18EK07 AUTOMOTIVE SOFTWARE TESTING 1001

BASICS OF AUTOMOTIVE SOFTWARE TESTING: Introduction – Conventional Software Testing Vs Automotive Software Testing - Need for Automotive Software Testing - Major recalls and impact of recalls – Case study. (3) FUNDAMENTALS OF SOFTWARE TESTING: Basics of Software Development Life Cycle – Model Based - Modular - Reusable Design - Static Analysis, Dynamic Analysis - Code Coverage including MC/DC (Modified Condition/Decision Coverage) and LCSAJ (Linear Code Sequence and Jump) - Data Flow and Control Flow analysis- Unit/System/Integration Testing - Code Quality Software Quality metrics - test management - Importance of using qualified software for software testing. (6) CODING STANDARDS: Coding Standards - important - Coding Standard for Automotive Industry – MISRA C: 2012 with Security Amendments - Top 10 secure coding best practices - Advantages of adhering to coding standards. (3) PROCESS STANDARD: Introduction to ISO 26262 – Functional Safety Standard - Details about ASIL (Automotive Safety Integrity Level) - Details about Part 4 and Part 6 of ISO 26262 – Failure Mode Effective analysis (FMEA). (3) Lab Session (along with Theory Class)  Practical Implementation of Fundamentals of software testing using LDRA Software.  Adhering to MISRA C coding guidelines using LDRA Software.  Achieving compliance to ISO 26262 using LDRA Software.  In case of non-availability of MISRA C document, students may refer to CERT C standard.  Example of Code Coverage and Executing Test Cases on Raspberry Pi or Arduino. REFERENCES: 1. Pradeep Oak and Renu Rajani, ―Software Testing – Effective Methods, Tools and Techniques‖, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, 2004. 2. MISRA Online Resources available at https://www.misra.org.uk/ 3. MISRA C:2012 Amendments URL: https://www.misra.org.uk/Publications/tabid/57/Default.aspx

18EK10 INDUSTRIAL DRIVES FOR AUTOMATION 1001 INTRODUCTION: Construction and Principle of operation of PMSM and SynRM – AC drive Hardware Blocks – Control Blocks – Automatic Motor Adaptation – Parameterization of Drives (Local and Remote). (4) CONFIGURATIONS OF DIFFERENT I/O CONTROL: Digital Input and output – Analog Input and output Control-word access – Motion control - Sequential Logic Control (SLC) - Parameterization for different communication protocol: RS 485 – MODBUS PROFIBUS. (6) CONFIGURATION FOR DIFFERENT APPLICATIONS: AQUA – HVAC – Automation – Master/ Slave control.

(4)

PRACTICAL: Performance characterization of PMSM and SynRM - Conveyor control – Cascaded Pump Control – Synchronization of Drives with Master Slave Control. (4) Total L: 14 + P: 4=18 REFERENCES: 1. Programming Guide for FC Drives by Danfoss Industries Pvt. Ltd. 2. Monograph prepared by PSG-DanfossCoE for Climate and Energy. 3. Ned Mohan, ―Advanced Electric Drives: Analysis, Control and Modeling using Simulink‖, John Wiley and Sons Ltd, 2001.

18EK13 SYSTEM ENGINEERING FOR AUTOMOTIVE APPLICATIONS 1001 INTRODUCTION: Systems, Systems Engineering and System on Systems Design Models flow: Waterfall, Spiral and INCOSEVEE model Product development flow Values of Systems Engineering (4) ROLES OF SYSTEM ENGINEER: Understanding the Systems Engineering goal, Significance of documentation, Knowing about DSM (Design structure matrix), Interdisciplinary role of Systems Engineering, Behavioral aspects of Systems Engineering (3) PROCESS: Requirements process, Baseline creation INNOVATION IN SYSTEM ENGINEERING: Creativity characteristics, About TRIZ, Ideality, Contradictions and approach to resolve Innovation in Technical systems: Architectural Innovation (3) DESIGN PROCESS: Definitions, Axioms, Design Matrices, Types and examples, Constraints

(3)

SYSTEM RELIABILITY: Approach to achieve system reliability, significance of Reuse

(1)

EXAMPLE SYSTEM DESIGN: Designing an Automotive ECU

(1) Total L: 15

REFERENCES: 1. Benjamin S. Blanchard, John E. Blyler, ―System Engineering Management‖, 5th Edition, Wiley, 2016

134

59th ACM 2. 3.

09.06.2018

INCOSE Systems Engineering Handbook: A Guide for System Life Cycle Processes and Activities, Wiley, 2015 Alexander Kossiakoff, William N. Sweet, Samuel J. Seymour, Steven M. Biemer, ―Systems Engineering Principles and Practice‖, 2nd Edition, Wiley, 2011

18EK14 ELECTRIC VEHICLES 1001 INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRIC VEHICLES: social and environmental importance of electric vehicles. Conventional Vehicles: Basics of vehicle performance, vehicle power source characterization, transmission characteristics, and mathematical models to describe vehicle performance. (3) History of Hybrid Electric Vehicles - Energy consumption Concept of Hybrid Electric Drive – Architecture: Series Hybrid Electric Drive, Parallel hybrid electric drive. Fuel Cell basic principle and operation, Types of Fuel Cells, PEMFC and its operation, Modelling of PEMFC, Super Capacitors. (3) ELECTRIC PROPULSION UNIT: electric components, Configuration and control of drives: DC Motor - Induction Motor - Permanent Magnet Motor - Switch Reluctance Motor. Drive system efficiency - Energy storage for EV and HEV - Energy storage requirements, Battery parameters, Modelling of Battery. (5) Power Electronic Converter for Battery Charging - Charging methods for battery- Design of Z-converter for battery charging. Case Study: Design of a Battery Electric Vehicle (BEV). (4) Total : 15 REFERENCES: 1. Sheldon S. Williamson, Energy Management Strategies for Electric and Plug-in Hybrid Electric Vehicles, Springer, 2013. 2. Chris Mi, M. Abul Masrur, David Wenzhong Gao, Hybrid Electric Vehicles Principles And Applications With Practical Perspectives, Wiley Publication, 2011. 3. Iqbal Husain, Electric and Hybrid Vehicles: Design Fundamentals, CRC Press, 2010

18EK15 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNITS AND APPLICATIONS 1001 INTRODUCTION: Phasor Measurement Units (PMUs), Global Positioning System (GPS), Functional requirements of PMUs and Phasor Data Concentrators (PDCs), Phasor estimation of nominal frequency inputs. (2) TRANSIENT RESPONSE: Transient response of Instrument Transformers, Transient response of Filters, Transient response during Electromagnetic and Power Swings, Impact of Transient Response of Phasor Measurements. (2) APPLICATIONS OF PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNITs: Phasor Measurements Unit based Adaptive Protection of Transmission Lines, Out-of-Step protection, Adaptive System Restoration, Phasor Measurement units in Large Scale Integration of Wind and Solar Energy systems, Introduction to Wide Area Monitoring, Protection and Control (WAMPAC). Deployment of large scale PMUs in Utilities, Globally and in Indian Power sector. (8) STANDARDS: Synchrophasor Standards - IEEE C37.118.1-2011, IEEE C37.118a-2014, IEC 61850 & IEEE C37.118, Evaluation / Validation of PMU-Total Vector Error (TVE) both Steady State and Dynamic/Transient conditions. IEEE C37.118.2-2011. (3) Total L : 15 REFERENCES: 1. A.G.Phadke, J.S. Thorp, ‗Synchronized Phasor Measurements and Their Applications‘, Springer Publications, Second Edition, 2017 2. IEEE Synchrophasor Test Suite Specification Version2, 2015 3. IEEE C37.118.1a-2014, IEEE Standard for Syncrophasor Measurements for Power Systems 4. IEEE C37.242, 2013 - Guide for Synchronization, Calibration, Testing, and Installation of Phasor Measurement Units (PMU) for Power System Protection and Control 5. IEEE C37.244, 2013 - Guide for Phasor Data Concentrator (PDC) Requirements for Power System Protection, Control, and Monitoring. 6. IEEE C37.118-2, 2011 - Standard for Synchrophasor Data Transfer for Power Systems

18EK16 GRAPHICAL PROGRAMMING FOR REAL-TIME APPLICATIONS 1001 INTRODUCTION TO REAL-TIME CONCEPTS: Concept of Real-Time Systems - Characteristics of Real-Time Systems – Need for Real-Time Operating Systems (2) LabVIEW REAL-TIME HARDWARE: ARCHITECTURE: Overview of Hardware Setup and Installation -Configuration of Network Settings of Real-Time Target and Host Computer - Configuration of Real-Time Target in Measurement and Automation Explorer Configuring Real-Time targets through the LabVIEW Project. (3) PROGRAMMING LabVIEW REAL-TIME MODULE: Accessing I/O using driver APIs or Scan Engine – Multithreading – Sleep Mode -Timing loops in LabVIEW Real-Time. (4)

135

59th ACM

09.06.2018

COMMUNICATION: Inter-process Communication: Sharing Data locally on Real-Time Target - Sharing Data between Deterministic and Non-Deterministic Processes - Sharing data between non-deterministic processes - Communication between Real-Time Target and Host Computer – Implementation of Network Communication (4) DEBUGGING AND DEPLOYMENT: Standard Debugging Techniques – Analysis of Memory Consumption – Creating Build Specification – Communication with Deployed Applications. (2) Total L : 15 REFERENCES: 1. Course Manual titled, ―LabVIEW Real-time Application Development‖ published by National Instruments, 2016. 2. Rick Bitter, Taqi Mohiuddin, Matt Nawrocki, ―LabVIEW: Advanced Programming Techniques‖, Second Edition, 2006. 3. Jovitha Jerome, ―Virtual Instrumentation using LabVIEW‖, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2010.

AUDIT COURSES 18ED81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP81

18ED82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP82

136

59th ACM

09.06.2018

13. Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment M.E. EMBEDDED AND REAL-TIME SYSTEMS

(2018 REGULATIONS)

*

(Minimum No. of credits to be earned: 75 ) Hours/Week Maximum Marks Credits Lecture Tutorial Practical CA FE Total

Course Course Title Code I SEMESTER 18EE01 Mathematics of Systems Engineering 2 18EE02 Embedded Controllers and Applications 3 18EE03 Real-Time Concepts for Embedded Systems 3 18EE04 Digital System Design and Testing 3 18EE05 Object Computing and Data Structures 3 18EE51 Embedded Controllers Laboratory 0 0 18EE81 English for Research Paper Writing Total 24 hrs 14 II SEMESTER 18EE06 Real-Time Operating Systems 3 18EE07 Embedded System Networks 3 18EE08 Linux Architecture and Device Drivers 3 18EE09 Advanced Embedded Controllers 3 18EE__ Professional Elective 1 3 18EE__ Professional Elective 2 3 18EE52 Real-Time Systems Laboratory 0 18EE61 Industrial Visit and Technical Seminar 0 0 18EE82 Research Methodology and IPR Total 30 hrs 18 III SEMESTER 18EE__ Professional Elective 3 3 18EE__ Professional Elective 4 3 18EE__ Professional Elective 5 3 18EE__ Professional Elective 6 3 18EE53 Embedded System Design Laboratory 0 18EE71 Project Work I 0 Total 24 hrs 12 IV SEMESTER 0 18EE72 Project Work II ELECTIVE 3 Associated with Centre of Excellence (One to be opted) 18EE21 Internet of Things 3 18EE22 Totally Integrated Automation 3 18EE23 Industrial Drives for Automation 3 ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES(Five to be opted) 18EE24 Computer Architecture and Parallel Processing 3 18EE25 Automotive Embedded Systems 3 18EE26 Graphical Programming for Real-Time Applications 3 18EE27 Industrial Networking and Standards 3 18EE28 Internetworking and its Applications 3 18EE29 Wireless Sensor Networks 3 18EE30 Wireless and Mobile Communication 3 18EE31 Cryptography and Network Security 3 18EE32 Advanced Digital Signal Processing 3 18EE33 Digital Image Processing 3 18EE34 Graph Theory and Applications 3 18EE35 Optimization Techniques 3 18EE36 Digital Controllers for Power Electronic Applications 3 18EE37 Smart Grid Technologies 3 18EE38 Soft Computing 3 18EE39 Machine Learning and Applications 3 18EE40 Python Programming 3

2 0 0 2 2 0 0 6

0 0 0 0 0 4 ** 4

3 3 3 4 4 2 Grade 19

50 50 50 50 50 50 0 300

50 50 50 50 50 50 0 300

100 100 100 100 100 100 0 600

PC PC PC PC PC PC MC

0 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 4

0 0 0 0 0 0 4 4 ** 8

3 3 4 4 3 3 2 2 Grade 24

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 0 400

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 0 400

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 0 800

PC PC PC PC PE PE PC EEC MC

2 0 0 0 0 0 2

0 0 0 0 4 6 10

4 3 3 3 2 3 18

50 50 50 50 50 50 300

50 50 50 50 50 50 300

100 100 100 100 100 100 600

PE PE PE PE PC EEC

0

28

14

50

50

100

EEC

2 2 2

0 0 0

4 4 4

50 50 50

50 50 50

100 100 100

PE PE PE

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE

* Indicated is the minimum number of credits to be earned by a student. ** - 60 hrs in I semester and 90 hrs in II semester; Grade: Completed / Not Completed CAT – Category; PC – Professional Core; PE - Professional Elective EEC – Employability Enhancement Course; MCMandatory Course

137

CAT

59th ACM

09.06.2018 ONE CREDIT COURSES

18EK06 18EK07 18EK13 18EK14 18EK15 18EK17 18EK18 18EK19

Field Programmable Analog Array for Analog System Design Automotive Software Testing System Engineering for Automotive Applications Electric Vehicles Phasor Measurement Units & Applications CAD Tools for VLSI Design Automation Digital Design with Verilog HDL Automotive Electrical System

138

59th ACM

09.06.2018 SEMESTER I 18EA01/18EE01/18ED01/18EM01 MATHEMATICS OF SYSTEMS ENGINEERING 2203

VECTOR SPACES: Real vector spaces, subspaces, linear independence – basis and dimension of a vector space - inner product space, orthonormal bases, Gram-Schmidt process. (8+7) LINEAR TRANSFORMATIONS: General linear transformations, kernel and range, inverse linear transformations, matrices of general linear transformations, eigenvalues and eigenvectors, diagonalization. (8+7) CALCULUS OF VARIATIONS: Variational problems of fixed boundaries: Variations and its properties - simplest variational problems – Euler equation – Brachistochrone problem – variational problems involving several unknown functions – Functional involving first and second order derivatives. (8+7) STOCHASTIC PROCESSES: Classification. Markov chain: Transition probability matrices – Chapman Kolmogorov equations classification of states, limiting probabilities, Poisson process - continuous time Markov chains: Birth-death processes. (8+7) Total L:32 +T:28 = 60 REFERENCES: 1. Howard Anton and Chris Rorres, “Elementary Linear Algebra: Applications Version”, Wiley India, New Delhi, 2018. 2. David C Lay, “Linear Algebra and its Applications”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2017. 3. Medhi J., “Stochastic Processes”, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi, 2017. 4. Saeed Ghahramani, “Fundamentals of Probability with Stochastic Processes”, Pearson, New Delhi, 2016. 5. Elsgolts L., “Differential Equation and Calculus of Variation”, MIR Publication, Moscow, 1977.

18EE02 /18EA02/18EM02 EMBEDDED CONTROLLERS AND APPLICATIONS 3003 8051: 8051 microcontroller – Architecture – Instruction sets – Addressing modes – I/O ports – Timer/Counter – Serial Communication – Interrupts – Assembly language programming. (11) PIC18F: PIC18f Micro-controller – Device overview – Pin diagrams. PIC18f micro-controller memory organization – Special Function Registers - I/O ports – Timers – Capture/ Compare/ PWM modules (CCP). Analog to Digital Converter module – Instruction set – Oscillator selection – Reset – Interrupts – Watch dog timer – PIC microcontroller programming. (11) ARM7: ARM7TDMI – Architecture overview - Processor modes – Data types – Registers – Program status registers – ARM Instruction Set – Thumb Instruction Set – Simple programs. (11) REAL WORLD INTERFACING: Master Synchronous Serial Port ((MSSP) structure - Detail study of UART, SPI, I2C, ADC and Comparators, Interfacing of PIC18F serial port - ADC using I2C. - RTC using I2C. – Design of data acquisition System - frequency counter with display on LCD - Digital Multimeter - DC motor control using PWM with signal. (12) REFERENCES: 1. William Hohl and Christopher Hinds, “ARM Assembly Language Fundamentals and Techniques”, CRC Press, Second Edition, 2015. 2. Danny Causey, Muhammad Ali Mazidi and Rolin D. McKinlay, “PIC Microcontroller & Embedded System: Using Assembly and C for PIC18”, Pearson Education India, 2008. 3. MykePredko, “Programming and Customizing the PIC Microcontroller”, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition, 2008. 4. Mazidi M.A., Mazidi J.G. and McKinlay R.D., “The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems”, Prentice Hall India, 2nd Edition, New Delhi, 2007. 5. “ARM System Developer's Guide, Designing and Optimizing System Software”, Andrew Sloss Dominic Symes Chris Wright, 1st Edition, 2004. 6. John B. Peatman, “Design with PIC Microcontrollers”, Prentice Hall, 2003.

18EE03 REAL-TIME CONCEPTS FOR EMBEDDED SYSTEMS 3003 PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE AND TOOLS FOR EMBEDDED SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT: Fundamentals of Embedded Systems – Embedded Software Development Process: Programming Languages - Embedded C Building Blocks – Mixing of Assembly and C – Preprocessor - Compiler – Assembler - Linker and Loader - Cross Platform Development -Compiler Optimization Techniques – Executable File Formats-Concept of Make Utility - Super Loop based Design Approach (12) REAL-TIME OPERATING SYSTEMS: Basic Terminologies of Real-Time Embedded Systems – Concepts of OS-based Software Development – Real-Time Operating Systems: Definition, Characteristics and Structure – Task Management: Definition, Classification, Structure, States, and Scheduling – Concept of Pseudo Multitasking and True Multitasking (11) INTER-TASK SYNCHRONIZATION AND COMMUNICATION: Critical Sections – Atomic Operation – Concept of Reentrancy – Semaphores – Event Flag Registers - Inter-task Communication Methods: Shared Memory Technique, Mailbox, Message Queues, and Pipes – Common Design Problems: Premature Task Deletion, CPU Starvation, Deadlocks, and Unbounded Priority Inversion (11)

139

59th ACM

09.06.2018

INTERRUPT MANAGEMENT, I/O SUBSYSTEMS AND MEMORY MANAGEMENT: Exceptions and Interrupts – Processing of Exceptions and Interrupts – I/O Sub-systems – Memory Management – Dynamic Memory Allocation and Fixed-size Memory Allocation in Embedded Systems - Application Modularization for Concurrency: Outside-In Approach – UML Diagrams - Design Examples (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Bernd Bruegge, Allen Dutoit, “Object-oriented Software Engineering – Using UML, Patterns and Java”, Prentice Hall, USA, 2010. 2. Insup Lee, Joseph Leung, and Sang Son, “Handbook of Real-Time Systems”, Chapman and Hall, 2008. 3. Qing Li, “Real-Time Concepts for Embedded Systems”, CMP Books, 2003. 4. Albert Cheng, “Real-Time Systems: Scheduling, Analysis and Verification”, Wiley Interscience, 2002. 5. David E. Simon, “An Embedded Software Primer”, Addison-Wesley Professional, 1999

18EE04 / 18EA03 DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN AND TESTING 3204 REVIEW OF DIGITAL LOGIC CIRCUITS: Designing combinational circuit using multiplexer, decoder – Finite State Machines – Mealy Machine - Moore Machine – State Diagram – State table - Design of state machines using Algorithmic State Machines (ASM) chart as a design tool. System Design using PLDs: Basic concepts – Programming technologies - Programmable Logic Element (PLE) - Programmable Array Logic (PLA) - Programmable Array Logic (PAL) – Programmable Logic Architectures – 16L8 – 16R4 – 22V10 – Design of combinational and sequential circuits using PLDs. (12+5) VERILOG: Signals, Identifier, Net and variable types, Operators, Gate instantiations, Modules and ports, data flow, gate level, Behavioral level, Switch level and state machine modeling, Concurrent and procedural statements, UDP, sub circuit parameters, function and task, timing and delays - test benches - design of combinational and sequential circuits using Verilog. (11+10) CPLD and FPGA: Complex PLDs (CPLDs) – Xilinx cool runner architecture. Types of Field Programmable Gate Arrays - Xilinx XC4000 series - Logic Cell Array (LCA) – Configurable Logic Blocks (CLB) - Input/output Blocks (IOB) - Programmable Interconnection Point(PIP) Implementing Functions in FPGAs Dedicated Memory in FPGAs – Dedicated Multipliers in FPGAs Mapping, Placement and Routing - Verilog based design flow for FPGA. (11+10) HARDWARE TESTING AND DESIGN FOR TESTABILITY: Defects, errors, faults, Levels of Fault models, Types, Fault Detection in Combinational Logic circuits: Path sensitization method, Boolean difference method. Fault Detection in sequential logic circuit, Design for Testability: Scan path Testing, Boundary Scan Test, Built in Self Test. (11+5) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL : A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis”, Pearson Education Asia, 2014. 2. Charles H Roth and Lizy Kurian John, “Digital Systems Design Using VHDL”, Cengage Learning, 2013. 3. Michael D Ciletti, “Advance Digital Design with the Verilog HDL”, Prentice Hall of India Learning, 2012. 4. Wayne Wolf, “FPGA - Based System Design”, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2012. 5. Bhaskar J., “A Verilog Primer”, Prentice Hall of India Learning, 2012. 6. Michael L Bushnell, Vishwani D Agrawal, “Essentials of Electronic Testing for Digital Memory and Mixed Signal VLSI Circuits”, Springer, 2002.

18EE05 / 18EA05 / 18ED05

OBJECT COMPUTING AND DATA STRUCTURES 3204

.PRINCIPLES OF OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING: Procedure Oriented Programming, Object Oriented Programming paradigm - Basic concepts and benefits of OOP - Object Oriented Language - Applications of C++ - Operators in C++ - Classes and Objects - Manipulators. Functions in C++ - Call by Reference - Return by reference - Inline functions - Default, Const Arguments - Function Overloading - Friend Functions - Member functions - Nesting of Member functions -Private member functions - Static data members - Static Member Functions - Arrays of Objects -Objects as Function Arguments - Friend Functions. (10+7) CONSTRUCTORS: Parameterized Constructor - Copy constructor - Multiple Constructors in a Class – Destructors. Inheritance Defining Derived Classes - Single Inheritance - Making a Private Member Inheritable - Multiple Inheritance - Hierarchical Inheritance – Hybrid Inheritance. Polymorphism - Compile and Run Time Polymorphism – Operator Overloading - Virtual function. (11+7) DATA STRUCTURES: Abstract data Types - Primitive data structures - Analysis of algorithms - Best, worst and average case time complexities – Notation. ARRAYS: Operations - Implementation of one, two, three and multi dimensioned arrays - Sparse and dense matrices - Applications. SORTING: Insertion sort - Selection sort - Bubble sort - Radix sort - Algorithms and their time complexities. (12+7) LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES: Stacks: Primitive operations - Sequential implementation - Applications: Subroutine handling, Recursion- Queues: Primitive operations - Sequential implementation - Applications: Job Scheduling. Lists: Primitive Operations Singly linked lists, Doubly linked lists, Circular lists – Applications: Addition of Polynomials NON-LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES: Trees: Terminologies - Binary Tree traversal. (12+9) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Herbert Schildt, “C++ - The Complete Reference", Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2012. 2. Nell Dale, “C++ Plus Data Structures”, Jones & Bartlett, Massachusetts, 2011.

140

59th ACM

09.06.2018

3. Harvey M Deitel and Paul J Deitel, “C++ How to Program”, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2010. 4. Aaron M Tanenbaum, Moshe J Augenstein and Yedidyah Langsam, "Data structures using C and C++", Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009. 5. Stanley B Lippman, JoseeLajoie and Barbara E Moo, “The C++ Primer”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009. 6. SahniSartaj, "Data Structures, Algorithms and Applications in C++", Universities Press, Hyderabad, 2005.

18EE51 EMBEDDED CONTROLLERS LABORATORY 0042 List of Experiments 1. 2.

3. 4. 5. 6.

On-chip Peripherals Programming in 8051Microcontroller: GPIO, Timers, Serial Port Interfacing of Sensors and Actuators with 8051 Microcontroller a) Sensor Interfacing using External ADC b) Actuator Interfacing: Relay, DC Motor, Stepper Motor and Servo Motor Interrupts and Low Power Modes in 8051 Microcontroller On-chip Peripherals Programming in ARM7 Microcontroller – GPIO, Timers, RTC, ADC, PWM Serial Communication Protocols in ARM7 Microcontroller: USART, SPI, I 2C Mini Project Total P: 60

SEMESTER II 18EE06 REAL-TIME OPERATING SYSTEMS 3003 REAL-TIME SYSTEMS: Basic Terminologies - Limits of Current Real - Time Systems - Desirable Features of Real-Time Systems – Factors affecting Predictability – Types of Task Constraints: Timing Constraints, Precedence Constraints and Resource Constraints - Classification of Scheduling Algorithms - Metrics for Performance Evaluation - Scheduling Anomalies (10) UNIPROCESSOR SCHEDULING ALGORITHMS: Periodic Tasks Scheduling: Cyclic Schedulers, EDF, RMA, and DMA - Aperiodic Task Scheduling: Jackson‟s Algorithm, Horn‟s Algorithm, Bartley‟s Algorithm, Scheduling of Aperiodic Tasks with Precedence Constraints – Hybrid Task Set Scheduling: Foreground and Background Scheduling, Polling Server, Deferrable Server, Priority Exchange Server, Sporadic Server, and Slack Stealing (13) RESOURCE ACCESS CONTROL PROTOCOLS: Problems involved in Resource Sharing: Priority Inversion and Deadlock – Deadlock Detection and Avoidance Algorithm - Non-Preemptive Protocol – Highest Locker Priority Protocol – Priority Inheritance Protocol – Priority Ceiling Protocol – Comparison of Resource Access Control Protocols – Handling Task Dependencies (10) MULTIPROCESSOR SCHEDULING and REAL-TIME KERNEL DESIGN ISSUES: Multiprocessor Task Partitioning and Scheduling Algorithms - Structure of a typical Real-Time Kernel - Data Structures – List Management – Kernel Primitives Standards for Real - Time Operating Systems – Survey of Commercial Real-Time Operating Systems – Development Tools – Performance Anlayzers (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Giorgio C. Buttazzo, “Hard Real-Time Computing Systems”, Springer, New York, 2011. 2. Jean J. Labrosse, “µC/OS-III, The Real-Time Kernel”, Micrium Press, 2009. 3. Jane W. Liu, “Real-Time Systems”, Pearson, New Delhi, 2006.

18EE07 EMBEDDED SYSTEM NETWORKS 3003 THE CAN BUS: Introduction – Concepts of Bus Access and Arbitration – Error Processing and Management – Definition of the CAN Protocol ISO 11898-1 – Error Properties, Detection and Processing – Framing - The Rest of the Frame - CAN 2.0B (11) THE CAN PHYSICAL LAYER: Introduction – Signal Propagation – Bit Synchronisation – Network Speed and Range – High Speed CAN – Low Speed CAN – CAN Components – Event-Triggered and Time-Triggered Protocols - CAN Applications: Application Layers and Development Tools for CAN. (11) LIN, MOST and FLEXRAY: LIN: Introduction - Basic Concept of the LIN 2.0 Protocol - Conformity of LIN – MOST: The MOST (Media Oriented Systems Transport) Bus – General - MOST concept – Flexray: Genesis of FlexRay - FlexRay Consortium - Aim of FlexRay - Physical Time - Local Time - Channels, Cycles, Segments and Slots - Channels and Cycles – Segments Communication Frames - Symbol Window Segment - Network Idle Time Segment. (11) USB AND TCP/IP FOR EMBEDDED SYSTEMS: Introduction – Types of USB Transfers: Control Transfer – Bulk Transfer – Interrupt Transfer – Isochronous Transfer – Introduction to the Enumeration Process – Introduction to USB Development Tools. TCP/IP for Embedded Systems: Introduction – Embedded SMTP Client – Embedded SMTP Server (12) Total L: 45

141

59th ACM

09.06.2018

REFERENCES: 1. Dominique Paret, “Flexray and Its Applications”, A John Wiley & Sons Ltd., Publication Wiley, 2012. 2. Dominique Paret, “Multiplexed Networks for Embedded Systems”, Wiley, 2007. 3. Jan, Axelson, “USB Complete”, Lake View Research, 2005. 4. Edward Insam, “TCP/IP Embedded Internet Applications”, Elsevier, 2003. 5. Tim Jones, “TCP/IP Application Layer Protocols for Embedded Systems”, Charles River Media, 2002. 6. John Hyde, “USB Design by Example”, Intel University Press, 2001.

18EE08 LINUX ARCHITECTURE AND DEVICE DRIVERS 3204 BASIC ARCHITECTURE: Evolution of Linux OS – Main characteristics of Linux – Typical Linux distributions – Linux directory structure – User and super/root users – access rights – Home directory – Vi editior – Commands - Overview of shell and GUI.(11+10) LINUX KERNEL ARCHITECTURE: Layer diagram of OS - Hardware Abstraction Layer (HAL) – Memory manager – scheduler – file system – I/O subsystem – Networking subsystem – IPC – user space. (11+6) LINUX FILE SYSTEM: Layers of Linux file system – structure of inode – process file system – The Ext2 File system – System programming concepts – API & ABIs – C library and compiler. (11+6) DEVICE DRIVER: System start up (Booting) Methods - PC I/O architecture – classification of Linux devices: character and block devices – port I/O – PCI and ISA bus – polling, interrupt, and waiting queue – Device Files - Device driver Registration – Device driver initialization – I/O operation - typical Linux driver – dynamic and static drivers - kernel modules – Linking and unlinking of modules – On Demand modules linking. (12+8) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Michael Beck, Harald Bohme, Mirko Dziadzka, Ulrich Kunitz, "Linux Kernel Programming", Pearson Education, 2002. 2. Raghavan P., Amol Lad, Sriram Neelakandan, “Embedded Linux System Design and Development”, Tailor & Francis Group, 2006 3. Daniel P.Bovet, Marco Cesati, “Understanding the Linux Kernel”, Shroff Publishers & Distributors Pvt. Ltd., 2005. 4. Robert Love, “LINUX System Programming”, Shroff Publishers & Distributors Pvt. Ltd., 2007. 5. Tim Jones M., “GNU/Linux Application Programming”, Wiley Dreamtech India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2005.

18EE09 ADVANCED EMBEDDED CONTROLLERS 3204 ARCHITECTURE OF MIXED SIGNAL PROCESSOR: Introduction to 16-bit Mixed Signal Controller- Important aspects of Mixed Signal Controller‟s Hardware – CPU – Functional Block Diagram - Memory Mapping – Clock System - Addressing Modes Register Mode – Indexed Mode – Introduction to functions – Interrupts - Low Power Modes - Development Environment Programming and Debugging (10+6) PERIPERALS OF MIXED SIGNAL PROCESSOR: Parallel ports - Digital Inputs/ Outputs – Timers - Watchdog Timer Capture/Compare module – Generation of Periodic Signal – Generation of PWM Signal - Operation of the ADC Peripheral (ADC10) - Internal Temperature Sensor – Serial Communication Protocols (12+9) ARCHITECTURE OF ARM CORTEX M x: ARM Cortex-Mx Processor Core overview - Programmers Model - Memory Model Exception and Fault Handling - Power Management - Instruction Set Summary - CMSIS Functions - Hardware-Software Synchronization - Interrupt Synchronization - Multithreading - Register Map - System Timer - Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller Floating Point Unit (FPU) - Optional Memory Protection Unit. (11+6) PERIPHERALS OF ARM CORTEX – Mx CONTROLLER: Cortex-Mx Peripherals - Parallel I/O Ports - Timer Interfacing - Pulse Width Modulation - Frequency Measurement - Binary Actuators - Integral Control of a DC Motor – DAC - ADC - Serial Communication Protocols. (12+9) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Valvano J. W., “Embedded Systems: Real-Time Interfacing ARM Cortex – Microcontrollers”, Fourth edition, Volume 2, ISBN: 978-1477508992, 2014. 2. Valvano J. W., “Embedded Systems: Introduction to ARM Cortex-M Microcontrollers”, Fourth Edition, Volume 1, ISBN: 9781477508992, 2013. 3. Ravikumar C.P., “MSP430 Microcontroller in Embedded System Project”, First Edition, Elite Publishing House Private Ltd., Dec, ISBN: 978-81-88901-46-3, 2011. 4. John H. Davies, “MSP430 Microcontroller Basics”, First Edition, Newnes Publication, ISBN: 978-93-80501-85-7, 2010. 5. Steven F.Barret, Daniel J Pack, “Microcontroller Programming and Interfacing: Texas Instruments MSP430”, Morgan & Claypool Publishers, ISBN: 9781608457137 6. Cortex-M4 Devices, Generic User Guide By ARM.

142

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18EE52 REAL-TIME SYSTEMS LAB 0042

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Creating a Make file for an Embedded Application Task Management and Resource Management using Open Source Real-Time Kernel Inter-task Communication in Open Source Real-Time Kernel Interrupt Management and Memory Management using Open Source Real-Time Kernel Performance Evaluation of Single-core and Multi-core Scheduling Algorithms Mini Project Total P: 60

18EE61 INDUSTRIAL VISIT & TECHNICAL SEMINAR 0042 The student will make at least two technical presentations on current topics related to the specialization. The same will be assessed by a committee appointed by the department. The students are expected to submit a report at the end of the semester covering the various aspects of his/her presentation together with the observation in industry visits. A quiz covering the above will be held at the end of the semester. Total P: 60

SEMESTER III 18EE53 EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN LABORATORY 0042 LIST OF EXPERIMENTS 1. Implementation of Controller Area Network Protocol 2. Development of USB based Driver for an External Storage Device 3. Development of SPI based Driver for Micro SD Card 4. Development of Drivers for Wi-Fi 5. Development of Drivers for Bluetooth Devices 6. Mini Project

18EE71 PROJECT WORK – I 0063    

Identification of a problem. Literature survey of identified problem. Finalization of project specification and requirements Presentation / Demonstration of sub block(s) of the Project ( Hardware / Software / both )

SEMESTER IV 18EE72 PROJECT WORK – II 0 0 28 14   

Project Implementation (Hardware / Software / both) Presentation / Demonstration about the work done Consolidated report preparation

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE (ELECTIVE 3 Associated with Centre of Excellence) 18EE21 / 18EA22 / 18ED22 / 18EM23 INTERNET OF THINGS 3204 FUNDAMENTALS OF IoT: Introduction to Internet of Things (IoT) – Machine to Machine (M2M) – Functional Characteristics – Recent Trends in the Adoption of IoT – Societal Benefits of IoT – Consumer IoT vs Industrial Functional Components of a typical IoT System: Sensors, Actuators, Embedded Computation Units, Communication Interfaces , Software Development (9+5) IoT PROTOCOLS: Physical and Data Linnk Layer Protocols: RFID: NFC, FFC, ZigBEE, Bluetooth Low Energy, Z-Wave, Wi-Fi, Wireless HART - Network Layer Protocols: IPv4, IPv6, TCP & UDP, 6LoWPAN - Application Layer Protocols: COAP, MQTT.(13+10) CLOUD COMPUTING: NIST Visual Model – Essential Characteristics –Components of Cloud Computing - Service Models – Deployment Models – Service Management and Security – Examples – Basics of Fog Computing (12+7)

143

59th ACM

09.06.2018

SECURITY IN IoT: IEEE 802.11 Wireless Networks Attacks: Basic Types, RFID Security – Security Issues in ZigBEE: Bluetooth Security: Threats to Bluetooth Devices and Networks - IoT Applications: Health Care, Connected Vehicles, Smart Grid, Smart Home, and Smart City (11+8) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Vijay Madisetti, Arshdeep Bahga, “Internet of Things (A Hands-on Approach), Universities Press, 2015. 2. Adrian McEwen and Hakim Cassimally, “Designing the Internet of Things”, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., UK, 2014. 3. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick and Omar Elloumi, “The Internet of Things: Key Applications and Protocols”, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., UK 2012. 4. Dieter Uckelmann, Mark Harrison, Florian Michahelles, “Architecting the Internet of Things”, Springer, New York, 2011. 5. Johnny Cache, Joshua Wright and Vincent Liu, “Hacking Exposed Wireless: Wireless Security Secrets and Solutions”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2010. 6. Himanshu Dwivedi, Chris Clark and David Thiel, “Mobile Application Security”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2010.

18EE22 / 18EM22 / 18ED23 / 18EA23 TOTALLY INTEGRATED AUTOMATION 3204 INTRODUCTION TO FACTORY & PROCESS AUTOMATION: Evolution of Industrial Versions - Control elements of Industrial Automation – IEC / ISA Standards for Control Elements – Selection criteria for control elements – Utilisation Category with IEC standards - Construction of Relay Ladder logic with different control elements - Need for PLC - PLC evolution. (6+3) PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS: Architecture of PLC - Types of PLC – PLC modules, PLC Configuration - Scan cycle - Capabilities of PLC - Selection criteria for PLC – PLC Communication - PLC Wiring - Installation of PLC and its Modules. Types of Programming – Bit Instructions - Timers and counters – PLC arithmetic functions PTO / PWM generation - High Speed Counter – Analog Scaling – Encoder Interfacing - Servo drive control – Stepper Motor Control. (12+13) HMI SYSTEMS: Need for HMI in Industrial Automation, Types of HMI – Configuration of HMI, Screen development and navigation, Configuration of HMI elements / objects and Interfacing with PLC. (6+7) NETWORKING: PLC Networking - Networking standards & IEEE Standard - Protocols - Field bus - Process bus and Ethernet – EttherCAT (7+0) SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION: Architecture – Tools – Tag Configuration - Internal & External graphics, Alarm logging – Tag logging – structured tags – Trends – history – Report generation (14+7) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Bolton W., “Programmable Logic Controllers”, Elsevier Ltd., 2015. 2. Frank D Petruzella, “Programmable Logic Controllers ‖”, McGraw Hill, 2011. 3. John R Hackworth and Fredrick D Hackworth Jr., “Programmable Logic Controllers: Programming Methods and Applications ‖”, Pearson Education, 2006.

18EE23 INDUSTRIAL DRIVES FOR AUTOMATION 3204 DYNAMICS OF ELECTRIC DRIVES: Fundamental torque equation - multi-quadrant operation - nature and classification of load torques - modes of operation. Induction Motor Drives: Construction - Principle – performance characteristics – stator voltage control, frequency control, v/f control, rotor resistance control, static rotor resistance control, slip power recovery: Static Krammer drive, Static Scherbius drive. (12+7) VECTOR CONTROL OF INDUCTION MOTOR DRIVES: Introduction to Park‟s and Clarke‟s transformation - Principle of vector control - Direct vector control - indirect vector control - stator flux oriented vector control - rotor flux oriented vector control – sensorless control - Direct torque control. (12+7) SPECIAL DRIVES: PMSM - principle - PMSM flux density distribution - Controller – SynRM - principle - magnetic flux density and operating point - converter VA requirements. (10+8) CONFIGURATIONS AND I/O CONTROL: AC drive Hardware Blocks – Control Blocks – Automatic Motor Adaptation – Parameterization of Drives (Local and Remote). Digital input and output - Analog input and Output control - word access - motion control - sequential logic control(SLC) - parameterization of different communication protocol: RS 485 – MODBUS – PROFIBUS. (11+8) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Gopal K Dubey, "Fundamentals of Electric Drives", Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 2005. 2. Bimal K Bose, "Power Electronics and Variable Frequency Drives - Technology and Application", IEEE Press, New York 1997. 3. Peter Vas, "Vector Control of AC Machines", Oxford University Press, 1990. 4. Miller T. J. E., “Brushless Permanent - Magnet and Reluctance Motor Drives”, Clarendon Press Oxford, 1989. 5. John Park, Steve Mackey and Edwin Wright, "Data Communications for Instrumentation and Control", Elsevier 2003.

144

59th ACM 6.

09.06.2018

Ned Mohan, “Advanced Electric Drives: Analysis, Control and Modeling using Simulink”, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., 2001.

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES 18EE24 / 18EA08 COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE AND PARALLEL PROCESSING 3003 REGISTER TRANSFER LANGUAGE AND MICRO-OPERATIONS: Register transfer language – Inter-register transfer - Arithmetic micro-operations – Logic micro-operations – Shift micro-operations – Control functions - Data path Organisation - Binary arithmetic unit – BCD arithmetic unit – Floating point arithmetic unit – Processor bus configuration – Data transfer and manipulation – Hardwired and micro-programmed control. (12) MEMORY UNIT AND INPUT-OUTPUT UNIT: Memory hierarchy – Main memory – Back-up storage units – Multiple module memories – Interleaved memory – Associative memory - Virtual memory systems – Structure – Paging – TLB – Segmentation – Replacement strategies – Cache memory: Basic cache structure – Direct, fully associative and set associative mapping – Replacement policies – Multiple caches – Memory management hardware - Characteristics of I/O subsystem – Interrupt mechanisms and special hardware – Direct Memory Access – I/O processors and I/O channels – Asynchronous data transfer. (10) PARALLEL PROCESSING AND PIPELINING: Basic uniprocessor architecture – Parallel processing mechanisms – Levels of parallelism – Balancing of subsystem bandwidth – Parallel computer structures – Architectural classifications – Parallel processing applications - Linear pipelining – Pipeline processors – Instruction and Arithmetic pipelines – Organization of pipelined units – Instruction pre-fetch and branch handling – Pipeline hazards – Reducing branch penalties – Branch prediction strategies – Vector processing: requirements and characteristics – High performance Architectures: Superscalar Architecture – VLIW Architecture. (11) ARRAY PROCESSING AND MULTIPROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE: SIMD array processors – Masking and data routing mechanisms – SIMD Interconnection networks -Multiprocessor Architecture - Functional structures: Loosely and Tightly coupled Multiprocessors – Processor characteristics for multiprocessing – Symmetric Multiprocessors (SMP) – Non Uniform Memory Access (NUMA) – Interconnection structures for multiprocessors – Cache coherence – Thread level parallelism – Multithreading – Clusters. (12) Total L : 45 REFERENCES: 1. John Hennessy and David Patterson, "Computer Architecture: A Quantitative Approach", Elsevier India Publishers, 5th Edition, 2017. 2. Kai Hwang and Faye A Briggs, "Computer Architecture and Parallel Processing", McGraw Hill Book Company, 2016. 3. Stallings W., “Computer Organisation and Architecture – Designing for Performance”, Pearson Publishers, 9th Edition, 2014. 4. Mano M.M., "Computer System Architecture", Pearson Publishers, 3rd Edition, 2013.

18EE25 AUTOMOTIVE EMBEDDED SYSTEMS 3003 INTRODUCTION: Current trends in modern automobiles – Drive by wire Systems - Vehicle functional domains and their requirements - Components of an Automobile Electronic system and their functions: Sensors, Actuators, Control Units and Software structure of Control units. (11) POWER TRAIN, BODY AND CHASSIS DOMAIN: Power Train Domain: Gasoline engine management - Body Electronics: Vehicle power supply controllers – Lighting technology – Adaptive lighting system – Automatic wiper system – Door control modules Vehicle to vehicle communication - Chassis Domain: Antilock Braking System (ABS) – Electronic Stability Program (ESP) (11) AUTOMOTIVE INFOTRONICS AND SAFETY & SECURITY SYSTEMS: Automotive Vision System - Advanced Driver Assistant Systems (ADAS) – Multimedia systems- Intelligent Automotive Systems: Navigation Systems – Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Active and Passive safety- Airbag System – Seat belt tightening system - Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) - Lane Departure Warning System - Anti-theft technologies – Electronic Immobilizers – Remote Keyless entry. (12) AUTOMOTIVE NETWORKING AND DIAGNOSTICS: Cross-system functions - Bus systems: Requirements, classification and applications – Review of CAN – LIN – Flexray - MOST On-Board Diagnostics – Off-board diagnostics – Diagnostics Link Connector – Vehicle Condition Monitoring - Diagnostic Interfaces – Connected Vehicles (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Robert Bosch, “Automotive Electrics Automotive Electronics”, Wiley, 5th Edition, 2010. 2. Nicolas Navet and Francoise Simonot-Lion, “Automotive Embedded Systems Handbook”, CRC Press, USA, 2008. 3. LjuboVlacic, Michel Parent & FurnioHarshima, “Intelligent Vehicle Technologies: Theory and Applications”, ButterworthHeinemann publications, 2001. 4. Robert Bosch, “Automotive Hand Book”, SAE, 5th Edition, 2000. 5. Bechhold, “Understanding Automotive Electronics”, SAE, 1998.

145

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18EE26 GRAPHICAL PROGRAMMING FOR REAL-TIME APPLICATIONS 3003

BASICS OF GRAPHICAL PROGRAMMING: Fundamental Concepts of Virtual Instrumentation and Graphical Programming - Data Flow Programming - Data Types – Modular Programming - Debugging Techniques – Customization of VI Properties - VI Documentation PROGRAMMING STRUCTURES: Formula Nodes - Expression Nodes – Loops – Shift Registers – Feedback Nodes - Local and Global Variables – Case and Sequence Structures – Key Navigation-Dialog Boxes - Arrays and Clusters - Graphs and Charts Mechanical Action of Boolean Switches - String and File I/O (14) DATA ACQUISITION AND INTERFACING STANDARDS: Temperature Monitoring System using PC based Data Acquisition System - Motion Control - Image Acquisition and Processing - Communication: RS232 - RS485 - GPIB – System Interface Buses: USB-PXI (9) ADVANCED PROGRAMMING OPTIONS: Event Driven Programming - Diagram Disable Structures- Sound VI‟s- Reentrant VIs- VI server -Web publishing tool- Multithreading in LabVIEW - State Machines – Nest Case Selector- Property Nodes-Invoke NodesLabVIEW Interface for Arduino – Introduction to Object Oriented Programming in LabVIEW (10) REAL-TIME APPLICATIONS: Real-Time Concepts including Determinism and Jitter – Configuration of Real-Time I/O Hardware in MAX - Host & Target VI – Prioritization of Tasks – Timed Programming Structures in LabVIEW Real-Time – Sharing Data between Deterministic & Non-Deterministic Processes – Real-Time Application Deployment using myRIO – Run-time Interaction with Deployed Applications – Running Web Services in myRIO (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Rick Bitter, Taqi Mohiuddin and Matt Nawrocki, “LabVIEW Advanced Programming Techniques”, CRC Press, 2009. 2. Sanjay Gupta and Joseph John, “Virtual Instrumentation Using LabVIEW”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008. 3. Garry W Johnson, "LabVIEW Graphical Programming", Tata McGraw Hill, 2001. 4. Barry Paron, "Sensors, Transducers and LabVIEW", Prentice Hall, 2000.

18EE27

INDUSTRIAL NETWORKING AND STANDARDS 3003

SERIAL INTERFACE STANDARDS: Modern Instrumentation and Control Systems – Open Systems Interconnection Model – EIA232 Interface Standard – Major Elements of EIA-232 – Half-Duplex and Full-Duplex operation of EIA-232 Interface – Overview of EIA-422 and EIA-423 Interface Standards - EIA-485 Interface Standard – Comparison of Serial Interface Standards – Noise problems in serial communication and troubleshooting. (11) HART AND MODBUS PROTOCOL: HART PROTOCOL over 4-20 mA Signal Base – Wireless HART Protocol - MODBUS: Modbus Protocol Structure: Data types, Transmission modes, Messaging Structure–Modbus Function Codes- Fault Handling Mechanisms of Modbus Protocol – Applications of Modbus Protocol (11) FIELD AREA NETWORKING PROTOCOLS: Actuator Sensor Interface: Structure of AS-i slave ICs, AS-i messages, AS-i modulation technique, Troubleshooting - Device Net: Physical Layer Topology – Device Taps – Datalink Layer: Frame Format – Medium Access – Fragmentation- Process Field Bus (PROFIBUS) - Foundation Fieldbus: Physical Layer and Wiring Rules – Datalink Layer – Application Layer – Error Detection and Diagnostics. (11) INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET: Overview – Ethernet Hardware Basics – Ethernet Protocol and Addressing – Introduction to10 Mbps, 100 Mbps and Gigabit Ethernet – Real-time Ethernet for Automation Applications – Time-triggered Ethernet – Security in Industrial Communications (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Perry Marshall and John Rinaldi, “Industrial Ethernet”, The Instrumentation, Systems and Automation Society, 2005. 2. Richard Zurawski, “Industrial Communications Technology Handbook”, CRC Press, 2005. 3. John Park, Steve Mackey, and Edwin Wright, “Data Communications for Instrumentation and Control”, Elsevier, 2003.

18EE28 / 18EA40 INTERNETWORKING AND APPLICATIONS 3003 INTERNETWORKING: Overview of Internetworking, Underlying networking technologies, Concept and Architectural model, Protocol layering – LAN Fundamentals – Wired LANS : ETHERNET Protocol – Wireless LANS : 1EEE 802.11, Bluetooth, WiMax Connecting Devices : Repeaters, Hub, Switches, Routers, Unicast Routing - Multicast Routing (12) NETWORK PROTOCOLS AND APPLICATIONS: Protocols: Network layer introduction - Network layer protocols: IPv4 Datagram Format, IPv4 Addresses, Forwarding IP packets, ICMPv4 – DHCP, Transport layer protocols - Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) – User Datagram Protocols (UDP) - Applications: Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) – Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension (MIME) – World Wide Web and HTTP – Remote login: Telnet, Electronic Mail - Next Generation IP. (11)

146

59th ACM

09.06.2018

NETWORK MANAGEMENET AND SECURITY: Areas of Network Management – SNMP – SMI – MIB - ASN.1, Introduction to network security – Confidentiality – Message Integrity - Message Authentication - Digital Signature – Digital Certification – HTTPSEntry Authentication - Key management – Internet Security – Firewalls. (11) MOBILE NETWORKS & MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATIONS: Mobile phone technologies: different generations, Mobile Internet Protocol, Synchronization and replication protocols, WAP Architecture: Introduction, Components, Infrastructure, Security issues, WAP gateways. Multimedia Networking Applications, Streaming stored video, Voice over IP, Protocols for real-time conversational applications, network support for multimedia. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Behrouz A Forouzan and Firouz Mosharraf, “Computer Network – a Top Down Approach”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2012. 2. Jochen Burkhardt, Horst Henn, Stefan Hepper, Klaus Rindtoroff, Thomas Schaeck, “Pervasive Computing – Technology and Architecture of Mobile Internet Applications”, Pearson, 2012. 3. James F. Kurose, Keith W.Ross, “Computer Networking – a Top Down Approach”, Pearson, 2012. 4. Behraouz A Forouzan, “TCP/IP Protocol Suite”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2011. 5. Doughlas Comer, “Internetworking with TCP/IP : Principles, Protocols and Architecture”, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2006.

18EE29 / 18EA33 WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS 3003 CHARACTERISTICS OF WSN: Characteristic requirements for WSN, Challenges for WSNs, WSN vs Adhoc Networks, Sensor node architecture, Commercially available sensor nodes, Physical layer and transceiver design considerations in WSNs, Energy usage profile, Choice of modulation scheme, Dynamic modulation scaling, Antenna considerations. (11) MEDIUM ACCESS AND ROUTING: Fundamentals of MAC protocols, Low duty cycle protocols and wakeup concepts, Contention based protocols, Schedule-based protocols: SMAC - BMAC - Traffic-adaptive medium access protocol (TRAMA), The IEEE 802.15.4 MAC protocol. Routing And Data Gathering Protocols, Routing Challenges and Design Issues in Wireless Sensor Networks, Flooding and gossiping, Data centric Routing, Energy aware routing, Hierarchical Routing, Real Time routing Protocols. (12) LOCALIZATION AND MANIPULATION: Localization and positioning, Coverage and connectivity, Single-hop and multihop localization, Self configuring localization systems, Sensor management. Data Storage and Manipulation, Data centric and content based routing, Storage and retrieval in network, Compression technologies for WSN, Data Aggregation Techniques. (11) OPERATING SYSTEMS AND APPLICATIONS: Operating Systems for Wireless Sensor Networks, Design Issues, Examples of Operating Systems: TinyOS – Mate – MagnetOS – MANTIS. WSN Applications, Home Control, Building Automation, Medical Applications, - Reconfigurable Sensor Networks, Civil and Environmental Engineering Applications Nanoscopic Sensor Applications, Case Study: IEEE 802.15.4 LR-WPANs Standard - Target detection and tracking - Contour/edge detection - Field sampling. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. KazemSohraby, Daniel Minoli and TaiebZnati, “Wireless Sensor Networks Technology, Protocols, and Applications“, John Wiley & Sons, 2015. 2. Holger Karl and Andreas Willig, “Protocols and Architectures for Wireless Sensor Networks”, John Wiley & Sons, Ltd, 2015. 3. Anna Ha´c, “Wireless Sensor Network Designs”, John Wiley & Sons Ltd., 2007 4. K. Akkaya and M. Younis, “A survey of routing protocols in wireless sensor networks”, Elsevier Ad Hoc Network Journal, Vol. 3, no. 3, pp. 325 - 349, 2005. 5. Raghavendra, Cauligi S, Sivalingam, Krishna M., ZantiTaieb, “Wireless Sensor Network”, Springer, 2004.

18EE30 WIRELESS AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION 3003 PRINCIPLES OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION: Digital modulation techniques – Linear modulation techniques – Spread spectrum modulation – Performance of modulation – Multiple access techniques – TDMA – FDMA – CDMA – SDMA – Overview of cellular networks – Cellular concept – Hand-off strategies – Path loss – Fading and Doppler effect. (10) WIRELESS PROTOCOLS: Issues and challenges of wireless networks – Location management – Resource management – Routing – Power management – Security – Wireless media access techniques – ALOHA – CSMA – Wireless LAN – MAN – IEEE 802.11 - Wireless routing protocols – Mobile IP – IPv4 – IPv6 – Wireless TCP -Protocols for 3G & 4G cellular networks – IMT – 2000 – UMTS – CDMA2000 – Mobility management and handover technologies – All-IP based cellular network . (11) TYPES OF WIRELESS NETWORKS: Mobile networks – Ad-hoc networks – Ad-hoc routing – Sensor networks – Peer-Peer networks – Mobile routing protocols – DSR – AODV – Reactive routing – Location aided routing – Mobility models – Entity based – Group mobility – Random way – Point mobility model. Issues and challenges of mobile networks – Security issues – Authentication in mobile applications – Privacy issues – Power management – Energy awareness computing. Mobile IP and Ad-hoc networks – VoIP applications. (12) CELLULAR TECHNOLOGIES: GSM, GPS, GPRS, CDMA and 3G: Bluetooth – Radio Frequency Identification – Wireless Broadband – Mobile IP – Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) – Java Card – GSM Architecture – GSM Entities – Call Routing in GSM

147

59th ACM

09.06.2018

– PLMN Interfaces – GSM addresses and Identifiers – Network aspects in GSM – Authentication and Security – Mobile computing over SMS – GPRS and Packet Data Network – GPRS Network Architecture – GPRS Network Operations – Data Services in GPRS – Applications for GPRS – Limitations of GPRS – Spread Spectrum technology – Is-95 – CDMA Versus GSM – Wireless Data – Third Generation Networks – Applications on 3G. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Charles E. Perkins, “Ad -Hoc Networking”, Addison – Wesley, December 2008. 2. Lee W. C. Y., “Mobile Communications Engineering: Theory and Applications”, 2nd Edition, TMH, 2006. 3. Stallings W, “Wireless Communications & Networks”, Prentice Hall, 2 Edition, November 2004. 4. Schiller J., “Mobile Communications”, Addison-Wesley, 2003. 5. Pahlavan K. and Krishnamurthy P., “Principles of Wireless Networks”, Prentice Hall, 2002. 6. Theodore S. Rappaport, “Wireless Communications, Principles and Practice”, Prentice Hall, 2nd Edition, December 2001.

18EE31 CRYPTOGRAPHY AND NETWORK SECURITY 3003 SECURITY BASICS: The OSI Security Architectures - Conventional Encryption – Classical Techniques and Modern Techniques Modes of operation - DES, AES, Key Distribution. (11) PUBLICKEY CRYPTOGRAPHY AND HASH FUNCTIONS: Number Theory Concepts – Prime numbers- Modular Arithmetic – Fermat & Euler Theorem – Euclid Algorithm – RSA Algorithm – Diffie Hellman Key Exchange Elliptic Curve Cryptography – Hashing techniques - SHA-HMAC – Digital Signatures - DSS, Digital Signature Algorithm. (12) NETWORK SECURITYAND STANDARDS: Intruders and Intrusion – Viruses and Worms – OS Security – Firewalls – Design Principles – Packet Filtering – Application gateways – Trusted systems - Security Standards: IEEE, RSA and ISO standards Blueprint for Security – Design of Security Architecture. (11) NETWORK ISSUES: Authentication Applications – Kerberos – Electronic Mail Security – PGP – IP Security – Architecture - Web Security - SSL – TLS – SET. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. William Stallings, “Network Security Essentials, Applications and Standards”, Dorling Kindersley I P. Ltd., Delhi, 2008. 2. Behrouz A Forouzan, “Cryptography and Network Security”, Tata McGraw Hill Ltd., New Delhi, 2008. 3. AtulKahate, “Cryptography and Network Security” Tata McGraw Hill Ltd, New Delhi, 2008. 4. William Stallings, “Cryptography and Network Security - Principles and Practice”, Pearson Education, Delhi, 2007. 5. Richard E. Smith, “Internet Cryptography”, Addison – Wesley, 2004. 6. Wenbo Mao, “Modern Cryptography: Theory and Practice”, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2003.

18EE32 ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING 3003 MULTIRATE DSP: Sampling – Spectral representation: DFT and FFT – Review of Digital filters - Decimation and Interpolation by an integer and rational factors – Multistaging – Decimation and Interpolation with poly phase filters – Realizations – Applications of multirate signal processing. (11) FILTER BANKS: Analysis and Synthesis of Filter Banks– Quadrature Mirror Filter (QMF) banks– Filter bank with perfect reconstruction – 2-Channel and M-channel – Paraunitary filter banks – Biorthogonal and Linear phase filter banks – Tree and parallel structured filter banks – Transmultiplexer filter banks – Multi resolution analysis – Subband coding and its applications. (12) ADAPTIVE FILTERS: FIR adaptive filters – adaptive filters based on steepest descent method – LMS algorithm – Variants of LMS algorithm – adaptive channel equalization – adaptive echo cancellation – RLS adaptive algorithm. (11) WAVELET TRANSFORM: Short-Time Fourier Transform – limitations - time-frequency scaling - Heisenberg‟s uncertainty – Continuous Wavelet Transform – Discrete Wavelet Transform – Haar, Daubechy‟s wavelets – Multi Resolution Analysis of audio signal. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. John G Proakis and Dimitris G Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing-Principles, Algorithms and Applications”, Prentice Hall of India, 2013. 2. Vaidyanathan PP., “Multirate Systems and Filter Banks”, Pearson Education, 2011. 3. Soman K.P. and Ramachandran K.I., “Insight into Wavelets - From Theory to Practice”, Prentice Hall of India, 2010. 4. Rao, R.M and Bopardikar A.S., “Wavelet Transforms: Introduction to Theory and Applications”, Addison Wesley, Reprint 2003. 5. Fliege N.J., “Multirate Digital Signal Processing” John Wiley & Sons Ltd., Reprinted with Correction, 2000.

148

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18EE33 / 18EA35 DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING 3003

IMAGE FORMATION AND ENHANCEMENT: Human visual system – Sampling and Quantization – Color fundamentals – Spatial domain processing – Simple image operations – Point wise intensity transformations - Histogram processing - Linear and non-linear noise smoothening - Sharpening - Derivatives – Laplacian – Combing spatial enhancement methods. (11) FREQUENCY TRANSFORMS AND APPLICATIONS: Frequency domain processing – 2-D transforms: DFT, DCT and DWT – Properties – Frequency domain filtering techniques – Sub band coding of image compression – Coding techniques: Huffman, Run length and Block transform – JPEG – Performance metrics. (11) IMAGE RESTORATION AND RECONSTRUCTION: Image degradation – Noise models – Image observation models - Spatial filtering: mean filters, order statistics filters, adaptive filters - Inverse filtering - Wiener filtering – Constrained least squares filtering. Image Reconstruction from projections – Radon transform and it‟s Application. (11) SEGMENTATION AND FEATURE EXTRACTION: Edge detection: Gradient operators - edge linking and boundary detection: Global processing via Hough transforms, Graph theoretic techniques – Thresholding techniques – K-means Clustering – Feature extraction: Boundary feature descriptors – Region feature descriptors – Principal components – SIFT. Object Recognition applications. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Gonzalez R.C. Woods R.E., “Digital Image Processing”, Fourth Edition, Pearson, 2017. 2. Jayaraman S., Esakkirajan S., Veerakumar T., “Digital Image Processing”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011. 3. Jain A.K., “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”, Prentice Hall of India, 2010.

18EE34

GRAPH THEORY AND APPLICATIONS 3003

BASICS: Simple Graph – Finite and infinite Graphs – Incidence and Degree – Isolated and Pendent Vertices – Sub-Graphs – Isomorphism – Paths and Connections – Connected Graphs, Disconnected Graphs and Components – The Shortest Path Problem – Trees – Spanning Tree Algorithms – Cut Edges and Bonds – Cut Vertices – Cayley‟s Formula – The Connector Problem. (11) CUT-SETS, PLANAR AND DUAL GRAPHS AND CONNECTIVITY: Cut-sets – Properties – Connectivity – Blocks – Construction of Reliable Communication Networks – Euler Trees and Hamiltonian Cycles – Planar and Dual graphs – Kuratowski‟s Graphs – Directed Graphs – Euler Digraphs – The Chinese Postman Problem – The Traveling Salesman Problem. (11) MATCHING, COLOURING AND COVERING: Matching – Covering in Bipartite Graphs – Perfect Matching – The Personal Assignment Problem – The Optimal Assignment Problem – Edge Colouring – Edge Chromatic Number – Vizing‟s Theorem – The Time Tabling Problem – Independent Sets and Cliques – Applications – Vertex Colouring – Chromatic Polynomials – Five Colour Theorem – Applications (12) MATRIX REPRESENTATION OF GRAPHS AND GRAPH ENUMERATION: Operations on Graphs – Incidence Matrix – Circuit Matrix – Fundamental Circuit Matrix – Cut-set Matrix – Path Matrix – Adjacency Matrix – Types of Enumeration – Counting Labeled and Unlabeled Trees – Polya‟s Counting Theorem – Graphs Enumeration with Polya‟s Theorem. APPLICATIONS: Network Flows – Transport Networks – Max-Flow Min-Cut Theorem – Activity Networks – Graphs in Game Theory (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. NarsinghDeo, “Graph Theory with Applications to Engineering and Computer Science”, Prentice Hall, 2007. 2. Reinhard Diestel, “Graph Theory”, Springer Publication, 2006. 3. Jonathan Gross and Jay Yellen, “Graph Theory and Its Applications”, Chapman and Hall, 2005.

18EE35 / 18EA39 / 18ED33 / 18EM32 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES 3003 LINEAR PROGRAMMING: Statement of Optimization problems, Graphical method, Simplex method, Revised simplex method, Two phase simplex method, Duality in linear programming, Sensitivity analysis. (12) NON-LINEAR PROGRAMMING (UNCONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION): Direct search methods - Univariate method, Pattern search method, Simplex method, Descent methods - Steepest Descent method, Conjugate gradient method, Quasi Newton method. (11) NON-LINEAR PROGRAMMING (CONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION): Direct methods - The Complex method, Zoutendijk‟s Method of Feasible Directions, Rosen‟s Gradient Projection Method, Indirect method - Transformation Techniques, Basic Approach of the Penalty Function Method, Interior Penalty Function Method, Exterior Penalty Function Method. (11) DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING: Multistage decision process, Suboptimization and Principle of Optimality, Computational procedure, Final value problem to initial value problem, Linear Programming as a Case of Dynamic Programming, Continuous dynamic programming (11) Total L: 45

149

59th ACM

09.06.2018

REFERENCES: 1. Sharma J K., “Operations Research: Theory and Applications”, Macmillan Company, New Delhi, 2013. 2. Hamdy A Taha, “Operations Research: An Introduction”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2012. 3. Gupta C B., “Optimization Techniques in Operations Research”, I K International, New Delhi, 2012.

18EE36 / 18ED25 / 18EM36 DIGITAL CONTROLLERS FOR POWER ELECTRONIC APPLICATIONS 3003 TMS C2XX DSP: Introduction to the C2xx DSP core and code generation. The components of the C2xx DSP core, Peripherals and Peripheral Interface, System configuration registers, Memory, Types of Physical Memory, memory Addressing Modes, Code Composer Studio for C2xx DSP. (12) I/O AND INTERRUPTS: Pin Multiplexing (MUX) and General Purpose I/O Overview, Multiplexing and General Purpose I/O Control Registers, Programming I/O. Introduction to Interrupts, Interrupt Hierarchy, Interrupt Control Registers, Initializing and Servicing Interrupts in Software, Programming Interrupts (11) ADC AND EVENT MANAGERS: ADC Overview, Operation of the ADC in the DSP, Overview of the Event manager (EV), Event Manager Interrupts, General Purpose (GP) Timers, Compare Units, Capture Units and Quadrature Enclosed Pulse (QEP) Circuitry, General Event Manager Information, Programming of ADC and Event Managers (11) DESIGN OF CONTROLLER IN POWER ELECTRONICS: Typical applications: DSP-based implementation of DC-DC buck-boost converter - DSP-based control of permanent magnet brushless DC machines - DSP-based Implementation of clarkes‟s and park‟s transformations - DSP-Based implementation of SPWM, SVPWM inverter pulse generation. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Hamid.A.Toliyat and Steven G.Campbell “DSP Based Electro Mechanical Motion Control“ CRC Press New York, 2004. 2. TMS320C28x CPU and Instruction Set Reference Guide - SPRU430 3. TMS320x28xx, 28xxx Peripheral Reference Guide - SPRU566 4. TMS320x2833x System Control and Interrupts Reference Guide - SPRUFB0 5. TMS320x2833x Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Reference Guide - SPRU812 6. TMS320x28xx, 28xxx Enhanced Pulse Width Modulator (ePWM) & High-Resolution Pulse Width Modulator (HRPWM) Module Reference Guide - SPRU791 & - SPRU924

18EE37 / 18ED38 / 18EM38 SMART GRID TECHNOLOGIES 3003 SMART GRID ARCHITECTURE AND COMPONENTS: Introduction to Smart Grid, Evolution of Electric Grid, Concept of Smart Grid, Definitions, Need of Smart Grid, Concept of Robust & Self-Healing Grid, Present development & International policies in Smart Grid, Smart Grid Architecture Models, Components of Smart Grid: Smart Generation systems, Smart Transmission Grid : Geographic Information System (GIS). Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED) & their application for Monitoring & Protection. Wide Area Monitoring Protection and Control (WAMPAC), Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) and its applications in Smart Grid. (11) MICROGRIDS AND DISTRIBUTED ENERGY RESOURCES: Micro grid: Concept of Micro grid, Need & Applications of Micro grid. Micro grid Architecture, Issues of interconnection, Protection & Control of Micro-grid. Distributed Energy Resources: Plastic & Organic Solar cells, Thin Film Solar cells. Variable Speed Wind Generators, Fuel cells, Micro turbines, Captive Power plants, Integration of Renewable energy sources. Power Quality issues of Grid connected Renewable Energy Sources. Power Quality Conditioners for Smart Grid. Web based Power Quality monitoring and Power Quality Audit. (12) SMART METERING AND DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM: Smart Distribution Systems: Smart Meters, Automatic Meter Reading (AMR), Advanced Metering Infrastructure (AMI), Real Time Pricing, Smart Appliances. Smart Substations : Substation Automation, Feeder Automation, Outage Management System (OMS). Smart Sensors: Home & Building Automation, Plug in Hybrid Electric Vehicles (PHEV), Algorithms for Vehicle to Grid and Grid to Vehicle Management, Smart Charging Stations. Energy Storage for Smart Grids: Battery Energy Storage Systems (BESS), Superconducting Magnetic Energy Storage (SMES), Compressed Air Energy Storage (CAES). (11) COMMUNICATION NETWORKS AND CYBER SECURITY FOR SMART GRID: Communication Architecture for Smart Grids, Home Area Network (HAN) :IEEE 802.11, IEEE 802.15.4, 6LoWPAN, Neighborhood Area Network (NAN) / Field Area Network (FAN): Radio over Power-Lines (BPL/PLC), IEEE P1901, Wide Area Network (WAN) : Optical Fiber Communication, Cellular Networks, Wi-Max and Wireless Sensor Networks. Big Data Analytics in Smart Grid, Cyber Security Challenges in Smart Grid Load Altering Attacks - False Data Injection Attacks - Defense Mechanisms. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Ali Keyhani, “Design of Smart Power Grid Renewable Energy Systems”, Wiley, 2016. 2. Stuart Borlase, “Smart Grid: Infrastructure, Technology and Solutions”, CRC Press, 2012. 3. JanakaEkanayake, Nick Jenkins, KithsiriLiyanage, Jianzhong Wu and Akihiko Yokoyama, “Smart Grid: Technology and Applications”, Wiley, 2012.

150

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18EE38 / 18EA41 SOFT COMPUTING 3003

FEED FORWARD NETWORKS AND SUPERVISED LEARNING: Fundamentals – Biological neural network – Artificial neuron – Activation function – Learning rules - Perceptron Networks – Adaline – Madaline – Back propagation networks – Learning factors – Linear separability. Hopfield network – Discrete Hopfield networks – Associative memories – Recurrent auto association memory – Bi-directional associative memory – Boltzman machine. (12) UNSUPERVISED LEARNING NETWORKS: Hamming networks – Self-organising feature maps – Adaptive resonance theory network – Instar model – Outstar model – Counter propagation network – Radial basis function networks (10) FUZZY SETS AND RELATIONS: Properties and Operations on Classical and Fuzzy Sets - Crisp and Fuzzy Relations - Cardinality, Properties and Operations, Composition, Tolerance and Equivalence Relations - Fuzzy Ordering - Simple Problems. Features of membership function - Standard forms and Boundaries - fuzzification - membership value assignments - Fuzzy to Crisp Conversions - Lambda Cuts for fuzzy sets and relations – Defuzzification methods (11) GENETIC ALGORITHMSANDSOFT COMPUTING APPLICATIONS: Introduction – Genetic operators – Selection, cross-over and mutation – Fitness function – A simple genetic algorithm – Applications. Application of Neural Networks: Pattern Recognition Image compression – Communication - Control systems, Applications of Fuzzy Logic: Fuzzy Pattern Recognition - Fuzzy Image compression - Fuzzy Logic controllers. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Sivanandam S N, Sumathi S., and Deepa S. N., “Introduction to Neural Networks using Matlab 6.0”, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, New Delhi, 20th Reprint, 2014. 2. Sivanandam S N, and Deepa S. N., “Principles of Soft Computing”, Wiley India (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2nd Edition, June 2011. 3. Timothy Ross, “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, McGraw Hill, Singapore, 3rd Edition, 2010. 4. Laurene Fausett, “Fundamentals of Neural Networks”, Pearson Education India, New Delhi, 2004. 5. David E Goldberg, “Genetic Algorithms in Search, Optimisation and Machine Learning, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2004. 6. Zimmermann H.J., “Fuzzy Set Theory and its Applications”, Springer India (P) Ltd., New Delhi, Nov. 2001.

18EE39 / 18EA42 / 18ED 36 / 18EM33 MACHINE LEARNING AND APPLICATIONS 3003 PROBABILITY DISTRIBUTIONS: Basic Definitions, Types of learning, Probability Theory, Probability Reasoning, Model Selection, Curse of Dimensionality, Decision Theory, Information Theory, Binary Variables, Multinomial Variables, Gaussian Distribution, Exponential Family, Nonparametric Methods, Belief Networks. (12) LINEAR MODELS FOR REGRESSION AND CLASSIFICATION: Linear Basis Function Models, Bias-Variance Decomposition, Bayesian Linear Regression, Bayesian Model Comparison, Evidence Approximation, Limitations of Fixed Basis Functions, Discriminant Functions, Probabilistic Generative and Discriminative Models, Laplace Approximation, Bayesian Logistic Regression. NEURAL NETWORKS: Introduction, Reforcement Learning, Feed-forward Network functions, Error Backpropogation, Hessian Matrix, Mixture Density Networks, Bayesian Neural Networks, Convolution Neural Network, Dual Representations, Constructing Kernels, Gaussian Processes, Maximum Margin Classifiers, Relevance Vector Machines. (11) APPLICATIONS OF MACHINE LEARNING ALGORITHMS: Content Based Image Retrieval, Machine Learning Approach for face Recognition, Computer Aided Diagnosis, Computer Vision, Speech Recognition, Text Mining, Thinking Machines, Smart Machines, Business Applications of Deep Learning, Software Reliability Prediction, Medical Imaging. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Pradeep Kumar and Arvind Tiwari, “Ubiquitous Machine Learning and Its Applications”, IGI Global, 2017. 2. Ethem Alpaydin, “Introduction to Machine Learning”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2014. 3. David Barber, “Bayesian Reasoning and Machine Learning”, Cambridge University Press, New Delhi, 2014.

18EE40 PYTHON PROGRAMMING 3003 BASICS OF PYTHON PROGRAMMING: Variables - Keywords - Strings and Numeric Data Types - Lists – Tuples - Sets Dictionaries - Control Statements: if Statement, Relational Operators, Logical Operators, Bit Wise Operators, while Loop, break and continue, for Loop – Functions: Scope - Passing Functions to a Function - Mapping Functions in a Dictionary – Lambda – Modules Standard Functions (12) OBJECT ORIENTED FEATURES AND I/O HANDLING: Classes - Principles of Object Orientation - Creating Classes –Instance Methods – Special Methods - Class Variables – Inheritance – Polymorphism - Type Identification – Data Streams - Access Modes Writing Data to a File - Reading Data from a File - Additional File Methods - Using Pipes as Data Streams (10) ERROR HANDLING AND REGULAR EXPRESSIONS: Run Time Errors - Exception Model - Exception Hierarchy - Handling Multiple Exceptions - Handling IO Exceptions - Regular Expressions: Simple Character Matches - Special Characters - Character Classes – Quantifiers - Dot Character - Greedy Matches – Grouping - Matching at Beginning or End - Match Objects – Substituting -

151

(11)

59th ACM

09.06.2018

Splitting a String - Compiling Regular Expressions.

(11)

APPLICATIONS USING PYTHON: Network programming-Database Access- Creating simple Graphical User Interfaces -Sending e-mail using SMTP Library-Multithreading-CGI Programming - Extensions- Web application development: opening an URL-creating a simple web page- Overview of webapp2 and Flask- Micropython (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Andreas C. Müller, Sarah Guido, “Introduction to Machine Learning with Python: A Guide for Data Scientists” , O‟Reilly, 2016. 2. Sumit Gupta “Building Web Applications with Python and Neo4j”,Packt publishers, 2015 3. Ron DuPlain, “ Instant Flask Web Development “,Packt publishers ,Second edition, 2013 4. Wesley J Chun, “Core Python Applications Programming”, Prentice Hall, 2012. 5. Mark Summerfield. “Programming in Python 3: A Complete introduction to the Python Language”, Addison-Wesley Professional, 2009.

ONE CREDIT COURSE 18EK06 FIELD PROGRAMMABLE ANALOG ARRAY FOR ANALOG SYSTEM DESIGN 1001 INTRODUCTION: Overview of Analog Design - Introduction to Field Programmable Analog Array (FPAA) and its advantages - Role of EDA tool in Analog Design process. (2) CONFIGURABLE ANALOG MODULES: Introduction to Anadigm`s inbuilt Analog Functions (CAM) - Generation of Clock Signals Signal Delay - Performance of CAM. (3) SIMULATION and PHYSICAL REALIZATION: Features of ANADIGMDESIGNER2 EDA tool for simulating the analog designConfiguring the FPAA with analog design - Real time verification. (2) FPAA IO INTERFACING: Interfacing of input and output signals to the FPAA - Rauch Filter - Output Buffer.

(2)

STATIC CONFIGURATION: Full Wave Rectifier - Tone Generation and Notch filter - Voltage Controlled Oscillator - Pulse Width Modulation - Phase Detector. (3) DYNAMIC RECONFIGURATION: Reconfigurable Analog design using FPAA, Various methods of Reconfiguration - Real time verification. (3) Total L : 15 REFERENCES: 1. Thomas L. Floyd “Electronic devices Conventional Current Version” Pearson Education Ltd, Ninth Edition, 2012. 2. Thomas L. Floyd “Instructor‟s Resource Manual to Accompany Electronic Devices” Pearson Education Ltd, Eighth Edition, 2008. 3. Thomas L. Floyd “Electronic Devices” Pearson Education Ltd, Eighth Edition, 2008.

18EK07 AUTOMOTIVE SOFTWARE TESTING 1001 BASICS OF AUTOMOTIVE SOFTWARE TESTING: Introduction – Conventional Software Testing Vs Automotive Software Testing - Need for Automotive Software Testing - Major recalls and impact of recalls – Case study. (3) FUNDAMENTALS OF SOFTWARE TESTING: Basics of Software Development Life Cycle – Model Based - Modular - Reusable Design - Static Analysis, Dynamic Analysis - Code Coverage including MC/DC (Modified Condition/Decision Coverage) and LCSAJ (Linear Code Sequence and Jump) - Data Flow and Control Flow analysis- Unit/System/Integration Testing - Code Quality Software Quality metrics - test management - Importance of using qualified software for software testing. (6) CODING STANDARDS: Coding Standards - important - Coding Standard for Automotive Industry – MISRA C: 2012 with Security Amendments - Top 10 secure coding best practices - Advantages of adhering to coding standards. (3) PROCESS STANDARD: Introduction to ISO 26262 – Functional Safety Standard - Details about ASIL (Automotive Safety Integrity Level) - Details about Part 4 and Part 6 of ISO 26262 – Failure Mode Effective analysis (FMEA). (3) Total L : 15 Lab Session (along with Theory Class)  Practical Implementation of Fundamentals of software testing using LDRA Software.  Adhering to MISRA C coding guidelines using LDRA Software.  Achieving compliance to ISO 26262 using LDRA Software.  In case of non-availability of MISRA C document, students may refer to CERT C standard.  Example of Code Coverage and Executing Test Cases on Raspberry Pi or Arduino.

152

59th ACM

09.06.2018

REFERENCES: 1. Pradeep Oak and Renu Rajani , “Software Testing – Effective Methods, Tools and Techniques”, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, 2004. 2. Stephen L. Montgomery,”MISRA C: Guidelines for the use of the C Language in Critical Systems”, Motor Industry Research Association,2013. 3. Robert C. Seacord, “The CERT C Secure Coding Standard”, Addison-Wesley Professional, 1st edition, 2008. 4. Justyna Zander, Ina Schieferdecker,Pieter J. Mosterman, “Model-based Testing for Embedded Systems”, CRC Press, Taylor and Francis Group, 2012.

18EK13 SYSTEM ENGINEERING FOR AUTOMOTIVE APPLICATIONS 1001 INTRODUCTION: Systems, Systems Engineering and System on Systems Design Models flow: Waterfall, Spiral and INCOSEVEE model Product development flow Values of Systems Engineering (4) ROLES OF SYSTEM ENGINEER: Understanding the Systems Engineering goal, Significance of documentation, Knowing about DSM (Design structure matrix), Interdisciplinary role of Systems Engineering, Behavioral aspects of Systems Engineering (3) PROCESS : Requirements process, Baseline creation INNOVATION IN SYSTEM ENGINEERING: Creativity characteristics, About TRIZ, Ideality, Contradictions and approach to resolve Innovation in Technical systems: Architectural Innovation (3) DESIGN PROCESS : Definitions, Axioms, Design Matrices, Types and examples, Constraints

(3)

SYSTEM RELIABILITY: Approach to achieve system reliability, significance of Reuse

(1)

EXAMPLE SYSTEM DESIGN: Designing an Automotive ECU

(1)

Total L : 15 REFERENCES: 1. Benjamin S. Blanchard, John E. Blyler, “System Engineering Management”, 5th Edition, Wiley, 2016 2. INCOSE Systems Engineering Handbook: A Guide for System Life Cycle Processes and Activities, Wiley, 2015 3. Alexander Kossiakoff, William N. Sweet, Samuel J. Seymour, Steven M. Biemer, “Systems Engineering Principles and Practice”, 2nd Edition, Wiley, 2011

18EK14 ELECTRIC VEHICLES 1001 INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRIC VEHICLES: Social and environmental importance of electric vehicles. Conventional Vehicles: Basics of vehicle performance, vehicle power source characterization, transmission characteristics, and mathematical models to describe vehicle performance. (3) History of Hybrid Electric Vehicles - Energy consumption Concept of Hybrid Electric Drive – Architecture: Series Hybrid Electric Drive, Parallel hybrid electric drive. Fuel Cell basic principle and operation, Types of Fuel Cells, PEMFC and its operation, Modelling of PEMFC, Super Capacitors. (3) ELECTRIC PROPULSION UNIT: Electric components, Configuration and control of drives: DC Motor - Induction Motor - Permanent Magnet Motor - Switch Reluctance Motor. Drive system efficiency - Energy storage for EV and HEV - Energy storage requirements, Battery parameters, Modelling of Battery. (5) Power Electronic Converter for Battery Charging - Charging methods for battery- Design of Z-converter for battery charging. Case Study: Design of a Battery Electric Vehicle (BEV). (4) Total L : 15 REFERENCES: 1. Sheldon S. Williamson, Energy Management Strategies for Electric and Plug-in Hybrid Electric Vehicles, Springer, 2013. 2. Chris Mi, M. Abul Masrur, David Wenzhong Gao, Hybrid Electric Vehicles Principles And Applications With Practical Perspectives, Wiley Publication, 2011. 3. Iqbal Husain, Electric and Hybrid Vehicles: Design Fundamentals, CRC Press, 2010 4. M. Ehsani, Y. Gao, S. Gay and Ali Emadi, Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric, and Fuel Cell Vehicles: Fundamentals, Theory, and Design, CRC Press, 2009 5. James Larminie, John Lowry, Electric Vehicle Technology Explained Wiley, 2003. 6. C.C. Chan and K.T. Chau, Modern Electric Vehicle Technology, OXFORD University Press, 2001.

18EK15 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNITS AND APPLICATIONS 1001 INTRODUCTION: Phasor Measurement Units (PMUs), Global Positioning System (GPS), Functional requirements of PMUs and Phasor Data Concentrators (PDCs), Phasor estimation of nominal frequency inputs. (2)

153

59th ACM

09.06.2018

TRANSIENT RESPONSE: Transient response of Instrument Transformers, Transient response of Filters, Transient response during Electromagnetic and Power Swings, Impact of Transient Response of Phasor Measurements. (2) APPLICATIONS OF PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNITs: Phasor Measurements Unit based Adaptive Protection of Transmission Lines, Out-of-Step protection, Adaptive System Restoration, Phasor Measurement units in Large Scale Integration of Wind and Solar Energy systems, Introduction to Wide Area Monitoring, Protection and Control (WAMPAC). Deployment of large scale PMUs in Utilities, Globally and in Indian Power sector. (8) STANDARDS: Synchrophasor Standards - IEEE C37.118.1-2011, IEEE C37.118a-2014, IEC 61850 & IEEE C37.118, Evaluation / Validation of PMU-Total Vector Error (TVE) both Steady State and Dynamic/Transient conditions. IEEE C37.118.2-2011. (3) Total L: 15 REFERENCES: 1. A.G.Phadke, J.S. Thorp, „Synchronized Phasor Measurements and Their Applications‟, Springer Publications, Second Edition, 2017 2. IEEE Synchrophasor Test Suite Specification Version2, 2015 3. IEEE C37.242, 2013 - Guide for Synchronization, Calibration, Testing, and Installation of Phasor Measurement Units (PMU) for Power System Protection and Control 4. IEEE C37.244, 2013 - Guide for Phasor Data Concentrator (PDC) Requirements for Power System Protection, Control, and Monitoring. 5. A.G.Phadke, J.S. Thorp, „Computer Relaying for Power Systems‟, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., Research Studies Press Limited, 2nd Edition, 2009 6. IEC 61850-90-5, Communication networks and systems for power utility automation – Part 90-5: Use of IEC 61850 to transmit Synchrophasor information according to IEEE C37.118

18EK17 CAD TOOLS FOR VLSI DESIGN AUTOMATION 1001 INTRODUCTION TO VLSI DESIGN PROCESS: Design flow – Role of CAD tools in the design process.

(3)

DESIGN CAPTURE: Features of Mentor Graphics Design Architect IC a tool for schematic capture, netlisting, simulation setup and results viewing - Creating an Inverter using DA_IC- ELDO simulator. (3) SIMULATION: Features of Advance MS simulator a tool for verification platform for AMS design and verification - Exercises.

(3)

PHYSICAL LAYOUT: Features of the IC Station Tool Suite for full custom IC design flow editing, Schematic-driven layout and toplevel floor planning/routing – Exercises. (3) PHYSICAL VERIFICATION: Features of Calibre LVS for physical verification tool, for layout versus schematic – Exercises.

(3)

Total L: 15 REFERENCES: 1. Michael John Sebastian Smith, “Application-Specific Integrated Circuits” Addison-Wesley Publishing Company. 2. WayneWolf," Modern VLSI Design: Systems on Chip Design", Pearson Education Inc., Indian Reprint, 2007. 3. http://www.mentor.com/products/ic_nanometer_design

18EK18 DIGITAL DESIGN WITH VERILOG HDL 1001 INTRODUCTION: Digital Design, Verification, and Hardware description languages.

(1)

VERILOG FOR DESIGN: Introduction to Logic Synthesis, Synthesizable Constructs - Inferring Combinational Circuit elements Inferring Sequential Circuit elements - State Machines - Counters -Encoders/Decoders - Synthesis of Loops - Data Path - Design Partitioning / Methodology - Synthesizable Code-care about, Sensitivity list and Simulation Synthesis mismatch conditions. (3) VERILOG FOR VERIFICATION: Delay Modeling in Verilog on Briefly behavioral constructions, Fork-join, Events - Clock Generation - Data Generation, Deterministic, Random - Some Systems Tasks - Test Bench Architecture. (2) DESIGN EXAMPLES: RISC Stored Program Machine - UART Design

(2)

Mini Projects Specification and Scope Discussions

(3)

Review of Projects: Presentation by student groups (15 min per student group)

(3)

Feedback on the Design Project

(1) Total L : 15

REFERENCES: 1. Michael D. Ciletti, “Advanced Digital Design with the Verilog HDL”, Pearson Education, 2003 2. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL: A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis”, Prentice Hall NJ, USA, 2003. 3. Bhaskar J,”A Verilog Primer”, Prentice Hall of India Learning, 2012.

154

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18EK19 AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 1001

INTRODUCTION: Major components of an Automobile Systems and its functions - Overview of four stroke I.C. engine - Four Cylinder Engine – Spark firing sequence. (2) AUTOMOBILE ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS: Block diagram of Automobile electrical system - Typical wiring diagram - Starter system: General layout - Basic starting circuit - Ignition system: Battery and magneto types - Battery ignition system for four cylinder engine - Ignition system circuit - Distributed ignition coil and ignition advance. Charging system: Typical alternator in common use - cut-out and regulator - Lighting & accessories system - Wiper motor – circuit diagram of wind screen wiper motor and washer. (5) SENSORS AND ACTUATORS: Physical Variables to be measured in automobiles: Position sensor: Magnetic reluctance and Hall effect sensor - Temperature sensor: Coolant temperature - Speed sensor – Fuel level sensor - Acceleration sensor - Actuator: Principle of solenoid and Fuel injector. (4) DIAGNOSTICS AND COMMUNICATION BUS: Block diagram of Engine control unit -Diagnostics procedure: Introduction – Diagnostics theory – On board and Off-board diagnostics – Diagnostics Link Connector – Vehicle condition monitoring - CAN bus topology – Data transmission – CAN Protocol – Overview of CAN controller - LIN bus: overview – Data Transmission System – LIN protocol. (4) Total L: 15 REFERENCES: 1. KK Jain , RB Sharma “Automobile engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, 2011 2. Ronald K.J, “Automotive Electronics Handbook”, McGraw Hill Publications, USA, 2009. 3. William B.Ribbens, Norman P.Mansour, “Understanding of Automotive Electronics”,Butterworth-Heinemann,United Kingdom 2003 4. “Automotive Electrics / Automotive Electronics - Ed5”, Robert Bosch GmbH, 2004. 5. EdMay, “Automotive Mechanics Vol -2”, McGraw Hill Publications, Australia 2004. 6. Tom Denton, “Automobile Electrical and Electronics systems”, Routledge Taylor & Francis Group London & New York, 2002.

AUDIT COURSES 18EE81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP81

18EE82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP82

155

59th ACM

09.06.2018

13. Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment

ME - ELECTRICAL MACHINES (PART-TIME) (Scheme) Course Code

Course Title

(2018 REGULATIONS)

Lecture

I SEMESTER 18EM01 Mathematics of Systems Engineering 18EM02 Embedded Controllers and Applications 18EM03 Modeling and Analysis of Electrical Machines 18EM04 Power Converters and Analysis 18EM81 English for Research Paper Writing Total: 15 hrs. II SEMESTER 18EM05 Electric Drives and Control 18EM06 Mechanical Design of Electrical Machines 18EM07 Special Machines and Controllers 18EM51 Power Converters & Drives Laboratory 18EM82 Research Methodology and IPR Total: 15 hrs.

Hours/Week Tutorial Practical

(Minimum credits to be earned: 74*) Maximum Marks CAT Credits CA FE Total

2 3 3 3 0 11

2 0 2 0 0 4

0 0 0 0 ** 0

3 3 4 3 Grade 13

50 50 50 50 0 200

50 50 50 50 0 200

100 100 100 100 0 400

PC PC PC PC MC

3 3 3 0 0 9

0 2 0 0 0 2

0 0 0 4 ** 4

3 4 3 2 Grade 12

50 50 50 50 0 200

50 50 50 50 0 200

100 100 100 100 0 400

PC PC PC PC MC

3 3 3 0 9

2 2 0 0 4

0 0 0 2 2

4 4 3 1 12

50 50 50 50 200

50 50 50 50 200

100 100 100 100 400

PC PC PE PC

3 3 3 0 9

0 2 0 0 2

0 0 0 4 4

3 4 3 2 12

50 50 50 50 200

50 50 50 50 200

100 100 100 100 400

PE PE PE PE

3 3 0 0 6

0 0 0 0 0

0 0 4 6 10

3 3 2 3 11

50 50 50 50 200

50 50 50 50 200

100 100 100 100 400

PE PE EEC EEC

0

0

14

14

50

50

100

EEC

3 3 3

2 2 2

0 0 0

4 4 4

50 50 50

50 50 50

100 100 100

PE PE PE

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE

III SEMESTER 18EM08 18EM09 18EM__ 18EM52

Design of Special Machines Power Electronics in Wind and Solar Power Conversion Professional Elective 1 Special Electric Machines Laboratory Total: 15 hrs. IV SEMESTER 18EM __ Professional Elective 2 18EM __ Professional Elective 3 18EM __ Professional Elective 4 18EM53 Smart Grid Lab Total: 15 hrs. V SEMESTER 18EM __ Professional Elective 5 18EM __ Professional Elective 6 18EM61 Industrial Visit & Technical Seminar 18EM71 Project Work -I Total: 16 hrs. VI SEMESTER 18EM72 Project Work-II ELECTIVE 3 Associated with Centre of Excellences (One to be opted) 18EM21 CNC Machines and Robotics 18EM22 Totally Integrated Automation 18EM23 Internet of Things ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES (Five to be opted) 18EM24 Design & Simulation of Energy Efficient Electrical Machines 18EM25 Energy Auditing and Conservation 18EM26 Soft Computing Techniques for Renewable Energy System 18EM27 Simulation of Power Electronic Systems 18EM28 Linear Electric Machines 18EM29 Electrical Energy Systems & Management 18EM30 Advanced Control of Electric Drives 18EM31 Advanced Topics in Power Electronics 18EM32 Optimization Techniques 18EM33 Machine Learning & Applications 18EM34 Virtual Instrumentation Systems 18EM35 Modelling and Control of Power Converters 18EM36 Digital Controllers for Power Electronic Applications 18EM37 Power Quality Management 18EM38 Smart Grid Technologies 18EM39 Distributed Generation and Microgrids

156

59th ACM 18EM40

09.06.2018

Hybrid Electric Vehicles 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 * Indicated is the minimum number of credits to be earned by a student. ** - 60 hrs in I semester and 90 hrs in II semester; Grade: Completed / Not Completed CAT – Category; PC – Professional Core; PE - Professional Elective EEC – Employability Enhancement Course; MCMandatory Course

157

PE

59th ACM

09.06.2018 SEMESTER I 18EM01/18EA01/18EE01/18ED01 MATHEMATICS OF SYSTEMS ENGINEERING 2203

VECTOR SPACES: Real vector spaces, subspaces, linear independence – basis and dimension of a vector space - inner product space, orthonormal bases, Gram-Schmidt process. (8+7) LINEAR TRANSFORMATIONS: General linear transformations, kernel and range, inverse linear transformations, matrices of general linear transformations, eigenvalues and eigenvectors, diagonalization. (8+7) CALCULUS OF VARIATIONS: Variational problems of fixed boundaries: Variations and its properties - simplest variational problems – Euler equation – Brachistochrone problem – variational problems involving several unknown functions – Functional involving first and second order derivatives. (8+7) STOCHASTIC PROCESSES: Classification. Markov chain: Transition probability matrices – Chapman Kolmogorov equations classification of states, limiting probabilities, Poisson process - continuous time Markov chains: Birth-death processes. (8+7) Total L:32 + T:28 = 60 REFERENCES: 1. Howard Anton and Chris Rorres, “Elementary Linear Algebra: Applications Version”, Wiley India, New Delhi, 2018. 2. David C Lay, “Linear Algebra and its Applications”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2017. 3. Medhi J., “Stochastic Processes”, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi, 2017. 4. Saeed Ghahramani, “Fundamentals of Probability with Stochastic Processes”, Pearson, New Delhi, 2016. 5. Elsgolts L., “Differential Equation and Calculus of Variation”, MIR Publication, Moscow, 1977.

18EM02/18EA02/18EE02 EMBEDDED CONTROLLERS AND APPLICATIONS 3003 8051: 8051 microcontroller – Architecture – Instruction sets – Addressing modes – I/O ports – Timer/Counter – Serial Communication – Interrupts – Assembly language programming. (11) PIC18F: PIC18f Micro-controller – Device overview – Pin diagrams. PIC18f micro-controller memory organization – Special Function Registers - I/O ports – Timers – Capture/ Compare/ PWM modules (CCP). Analog to Digital Converter module – Instruction set – Oscillator selection – Reset – Interrupts – Watch dog timer – PIC microcontroller programming. (11) ARM7: ARM7TDMI – Architecture overview - Processor modes – Data types – Registers – Program status registers – ARM Instruction Set – Thumb Instruction Set – Simple programs. (11) REAL WORLD INTERFACING: Master Synchronous Serial Port ((MSSP) structure - Detail study of UART, SPI, I2C, ADC and Comparators, Interfacing of PIC18F serial port - ADC using I2C. - RTC using I2C. – Design of data acquisition System - frequency counter with display on LCD - Digital Multimeter - DC motor control using PWM with signal. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. William Hohl and Christopher Hinds, “ARM Assembly Language Fundamentals and Techniques”, CRC Press, Second Edition, 2015. 2. MykePredko, “Programming and Customizing the PIC Microcontroller”, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition, 2008. 3. Danny Causey, Muhammad Ali Mazidi and Rolin D. McKinlay, “PIC Microcontroller & Embedded System: Using Assembly and C for PIC18”, Pearson Education India, 2008. 4. Mazidi M.A., Mazidi J.G. and McKinlay R.D., “The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems”, Prentice Hall India, 2nd Edition, New Delhi, 2007. 5. “ARM System Developer's Guide, Designing and Optimizing System Software”, Andrew Sloss Dominic Symes Chris Wright, 1st Edition, 2004. 6. John B. Peatman, “Design with PIC Microcontrollers”, Prentice Hall, 2003.

18EM03 MODELING AND ANALYSIS OF ELECTRICAL MACHINES 3204 GENERALIZED THEORY & LINEAR TRANSFORMATION: Conversions – Basic two pole machine – Transformer with movable secondary – Transformer voltage and speed voltage - kron’s primitive machine - Invariance of power – Transformation from displaced brush axis three phases to two phases. Rotating axes to stationary axes – Transformed impedance matrix – Torque calculations. (11+7) INDUCTION MACHINES: Generalized representation - Performance equations - Steady state analysis – Transient analysis – Single - phase Induction motor - Transfer function formulation - Double cage machine - Harmonics. (11+7) SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES: Generalized representation - Steady state analysis - Transient analysis - Electromechanical transients (11+8)

158

59th ACM

09.06.2018

DC & SPECIAL MACHINES: Generalized representation – Operation with displaced brushes - Motor (shunt type only) operation Steady state and transient analysis. Generalized representation and steady state analysis of Reluctance motor – Brushless DC motor - Variable reluctance motor. (12+8) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Bimbhra P.S., "Generalised Circuit Theory of Electrical Machines", Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 2002. 2. Krishnan R., “Electric Motor & Drives: Modeling, Analysis and Control”, Prentice Hall of India, 2001. 3. Chee- Mun Ong, “Dynamic Simulation of Electrical Machinery using MATLAB”, Prentice – Hall, Inc, 1998. 4. Krause P.C., Wasynczuk O. and Sudhoff S.D., “Analysis of Electric Machinery”, IEEE Press, 1995. 5. Adkins B., “The Generalized Theory of Electrical Machines”, Dover Publishers, 1980. 6. Ion Boldea and S.A. Nasar, “Electric Drives”, CRC Press LLC, New York, 1999

18EM04 POWER CONVERTERS AND ANALYSIS 3003 AC TO DC CONVERTERS: Single phase and three phase bridge rectifiers, Fully controlled converters with RL, RLE loads, Freewheeling diode, Dual Converter, PWM rectifiers Evaluation of performance parameter, Input harmonics and output ripple, smoothing inductance, power factor, effect of source inductance and overlap, Design of converter circuits – Snubber circuit design - Control circuit strategies. (12) DC TO DC CONVERTERS: DC choppers: Step down dc chopper with R, RL and RLE loads - Control strategies - Continuous and discontinuous current operations - Two quadrant and four quadrant DC chopper - Multiphase DC chopper - Switching mode regulators: Buck, Boost, Buck-Boost and CUK regulators - Chopper circuit design – Control circuit strategies. (11) AC TO AC CONVERTERS: Principle of phase control, single-phase bi-directional controllers with R, L and R-L loads, 3-phase bidirectional Controllers, different Configurations, Analysis with pure R and L loads. Principle of operation - single phase and three phase cyclo converters - Control circuit strategies. (11) DC TO AC CONVERTERS: Single phase and Three phase bridge inverters - Evaluation of performance parameters – Voltage control and Waveform improvement Techniques – Current source inverters - Inverter circuit design - SVPWM – Introduction to multilevel inverter (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Rashid M.H., “Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications", Prentice Hall India, 3rd Edition, New Delhi, 2013. 2. Vedam Subrahmanyam, "Power Electronics", New Age International (P) Limited, New Delhi, 2006. 3. MD Singh and K B Khanchandani, "Power Electronics", McGraw Hill, 2006. 4. Sen PC, "Modern Power Electronics ", Wheeler Publishing Co, McGraw Hill, 2005. 5. Ned Mohan, Tore M. Undeland, William P. Robbins, “Power Electronics: Converters, Applications and Design”, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York, 2003. 6. Ramanarayanan V., "Course Material on Switched Mode Power Conversion", Department of Electrical Engineering, Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore, 2007.

SEMESTER II 18EM05 / 18ED07 ELECTRIC DRIVES AND CONTROL 3003 DYNAMICS & CONTROL OF ELECTRICAL DRIVES: Introduction – Parts of Electrical Drives - Fundamental Torque Equations – Speed Torque Conventions and Multiquadrant Operation – Nature & Classification of Load Torques - Modes of Operation – Closed Loop Control of Drives. (11) Induction Motor Drives: Stator Control: control by AC voltage controllers - Variable frequency square wave VSI drives - PWM Drives - CSI drives - closed loop control. Rotor Control: Static rotor resistance control - Slip power recovery : Static Kramer drive Static Scherbius drive. (11) VECTOR CONTROL OF INDUCTION MOTORS: Principle of vector control - Rotor flux - Oriented control, Stator Flux - oriented control, Magnetizing flux - oriented control of Induction machines. Sensorless Vector and Direct Torque Controlled Drives: Basic types of torque controlled drive scheme: vector drives - direct torque controlled rives. (12) SPECIAL DRIVES: Synchronous Motor Drives: Scalar control – True synchronous and self control modes – PMSM Motor and Control - SynRM motor and Control - Switched reluctance motor and control. Configurations of I/O Control: AC drive Hardware Blocks – Control Blocks – Automatic Motor Adaptation – Parameterization of Drives (Local and Remote). (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Gopal K Dubey, "Fundamentals of Electric Drives", Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 2005. 2. Ion Boldea and Nasar S.A., “Electric Drives”, CRC Press LLC, New York, 1999. 3. Bimal K Bose, "Power Electronics and Variable Frequency Drives - Technology and Application", IEEE Press, New York, 1997. 4. Pillai S.K., "Analysis of Thyristor Power Conditioned Motors", University Press, 1992.

159

59th ACM 5. 6.

09.06.2018

Peter Vas, "Vector Control of AC Machines", Oxford University Press, 1990. Miller T.J.E., “Brushless Permanent-Magnet and Reluctance Motor Drives”, Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1989.

18EM06 MECHANICAL DESIGN OF ELECTRICAL MACHINES 3003 TYPES AND ANALYSIS OF ROTATING ELECTRICAL MACHINES: Different parts, their function, assembly of electrical machines, Types of fit and tolerance -Selection of fits - Geometric tolerances – Drawing Conventions. DESIGN OF FRAME: Design of frame and end covers - Cast fabricated - Different frame size as per BIS - Selection of material, strength analysis - Heat generation and dissipation analysis - Heat balance and cooling - Fractional kW motor construction Aluminium and extruded sections. (11) DESIGN OF SHAFTS: Types of load on shaft - Selection of shaft material – Theories of failure - Design of shaft with bending and torsion – Fatigue limit design. DESIGN AND SELECTION OF BEARINGS: Selection of antifriction bearings for electrical machines - Ball and roller bearings - Life and reliability - Design of hydrodynamic bearings - Application and construction of hydrostatic bearings. (12) STANDARD COMPONENTS: Selection of standard components like screws, bolts, keys, circlips, oil seals, fans, Rotator, commutators. BALANCING AND CRITICAL SPEED: Balancing of rotating masses in single plane and Multiplane - Static and dynamic balancing – Dynamic balancing machine, critical speeds analysis - Rayleigh Ritz and Dunkerly methods. (11) VIBRATION ANALYSIS: Natural frequency, Forced vibration - Single degree of freedom systems - Transmissibility ratio – Vibration Damping - Dynamic absorbers - Vibration measuring instruments. Case studies involving mechanical design of electrical machines. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Robert L. Norton, “Machine Design – an Integrated Approach”, Pearson Publishers, New Delhi, 2003 2. Hall et all, "Machine Design", Schaum Series, McGraw Hill Book Co., 2003. 3. Mechanical Engg. Dept., PSG CT - "Design Data Book", DPV Printers, Coimbatore 2004.

18EM07 / 18ED24 SPECIAL MACHINES AND CONTROLLERS 3003 INTRODUCTION: Need for special electric machines and controllers – Special Applications requirement – Robotics, Aerospace actuators, space explorations roverand high temperature environments. Stepper Motors: Types – Constructional features, principle of operation – modes of excitation – torque production in Variable Reluctance (VR) stepper motor, Permanent Magnet & Hybrid stepper, Static & dynamic characteristics – Speed - Torque characteristics – Drive systems and circuit – introduction, unipolar drive & bipolar drive circuits, open loop and closed loop control of stepper motor. (11) SWITCHED RELUCTANCE MACHINES: Constructional features, principle of operation, Torque equationand characteristics control techniques – Inductance Profile – Commutation timing diagram – starting & running phase excitation – speed controls, general controller structure – determination of rotor position, current profiling for smoother torque. Synchronous Reluctance Machines: Synchronous reluctance motor (SynRM) - operating principle, rotor topologies - Space-vector diagram - basic characteristics of SynRM - Control of SynRM - Power factor, Current angle, saliency ratio– Vector control - constant current control, constant angle control – Development of Permanent Magnet assisted SynRM (12) PERMANENT MAGNET BRUSHLESS DC MACHINES: Commutation in DC motor, Electronic commutation, Hal sensors, Optical sensors, Magnetic circuit model, Multiphase Brushless motor, Square wave permanent magnet brushless motor drives, Torque and emf equation, Torque-speed characteristics, Control by Back-EMF detection circuits, Controllers-Microprocessor based controller, Field Weakening control. (11) PERMANENT MAGNET SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES: Introduction - Motor Morphologies - Principle of operation, EMF, power input and torque expressions, Phasor diagram, Torque - speed characteristics - Parameter Estimation Power controllers, Torque Controllers, Self-control, Vector control, Current control schemes. Linear Motors: Linear Induction motor (LIM) classification construction - Principle of operation - concept of current sheet - goodness factor - DC Linear motor (DCLM) types - circuit equation DCLM control applications. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Juha Pyrhonen, Valeria Hrabovcova, Scott semken, “Electrical Machines Drives Control – An Introduction”, Wiley, 2016. 2. Riazollah Firoozian, “Servo Motors and Industrial Control Theory”, Springer, 2014. 3. Paul Acarnley, “Stepping Motors a Guide to Theory and Practice”, IET, 2007. 4. Kenjo T., "Stepping Motors and their Microprocessor Control", Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1989. 5. Miller T.J.E, "Brushless Permanent Magnet and Reluctance Motor Drives", Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1989. 6. KenjoT and Naganori, S., “Permanent Magnet and Brushless DC Motors", Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1989.

160

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18EM51 POWER CONVERTERS & DRIVES LABORATORY 0042

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Performance analysis of Single phase and three phase Uncontrolled Rectifiers with RLE Load Performance analysis of single phase and three phase AC to AC converter RLE Load Performance analysis of DC to DC converter with RL and RLE Load Performance analysis of DC motor using controlled converter. Performance analysis of induction motor using electric drives. Mini Project Total P: 60

SEMESTER III 18EM08 DESIGN OF SPECIAL MACHINES 3204 BRUSHLESS PERMANENT MAGNET MOTOR: Brushless PM motor operation principle- BLDC/PMSM – Rotor Design – SPM, IPM topology – Number of Phases – Number of Slot/Poles – Permanent Magnet Technical Parameters – B-H Curve – Load line plot – Demagnetization – Winding Design – Distributed, Concentrated – Fractional slot winding machines – Thermal Considerations. (11+7) SYNCHRONOUS RELUCTANCE MOTOR: Machine Configuration – Principle of Torque production – Phasor diagram in dq axes – Rotor geometry – flux barriers – flux carriers – Maximizing Saliency ratio – Number of turns and wire size, slot fill, Multi-layer design, Mechanical limits – Manufacturing. (11+7) SWITCHED RELUCTANCE MOTOR: Machine Configuration – Energy conversion diagram – Choosing poles & phases – Rotor geometry – pole shapes – Inductance profile – Commutation stage – practical winding slot fill (11+8) HYBRID STEPPER MOTOR: Variable reluctance motor – Permanent magnet stepping motor – operation principle, construction – Static torque – Dynamic torque – micro-stepping – Analysis of a Hybrid Stepper Motor – Detent torque, Stiffness torque. NEXT GENERATION ELECTRIC MOTOR: Extreme Environment electric motor – High temperature Environments – High temperature wires, Magnets, Vanadium cobalt iron alloys steel – Introduction to superconducting machines – Magnetic gear, Bearing - less motors. (12+8) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. “The Rediscovery of Synchronous Reluctance and Ferrite Permanent Magnet Motors”, Tutorial Course Notes 2016, by Gianmario Pellegrino, Thomas M. Jahns, Nicola Bianchi, Wen L. Soong, Francesco Cupertino. 2. “Servo Motors and Industrial Control Theory”, Springer 2014, Riazollah Firoozian. 3. “High Temperature Materials and Mechanisms”, CRC Press 2014, Yoseph Bar-Cohen.

18EM09/18ED09 POWER ELECTRONICS IN WIND AND SOLAR POWER CONVERSION 3204 SOLAR PV AND WIND POWER: Trends in energy consumption - World energy scenario – Energy sources and their availability Conventional and renewable sources - Solar PV and Wind potential in India and World – Solar and Wind Data - Policies and Regulations - Standards and codes used for Renewable Energy Systems (11+7) SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC ENERGY CONVERSION: Solar radiation and measurement - Solar cells and their characteristics Classification of Solar PV panels- Influence of insolation and temperature - PV arrays- Maximum power point tracking – Algorithms Power Conditioning Schemes - Charge controllers - Inverters – Classifications and Design - Analysis of PV Systems – BoS components - Stand alone and Grid integrated Solar PV Systems – Building Integrated PV (BIPV) - Synchronized operation with grid supply - Harmonic standards, Harmonic problems. (12+7) WIND ENERGY CONVERSION SYSTEMS: Basic Principle of wind Energy conversion - Nature of Wind - Power in the wind Components of Wind Energy Conversion System (WECS) – Wind farm and its accessories - Generators used in Wind Energy Conversion Systems - Performance of Induction Generators for WECS- Power conditioning schemes - Controllable DC Power from SEIGs - System performance. Grid Connected WECS - Concepts of Grid Integration - Grid related problems - Generator control Performance improvements - Different schemes - AC voltage controllers - Harmonics and PF improvement. (11+8) HYBRID POWER SYSTEMS: Wind / Solar PV integrated systems – Other alternate Systems – Requirements - Optimization of system components Power conditioning schemes for Hybrid Power Systems (HPS) – Design of HPS using software - Storage types and selection methods - Applications of HPS (11+8) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75

161

59th ACM

09.06.2018

REFERENCES: 1. Sumathi S., Ashok Kumar L., Sureka S., “Solar PV and Wind Energy Conversion Systems - An Introduction to Theory, Modeling with MATLAB/SIMULINK, and the Role of Soft Computing Techniques”, Green Energy and Technology, Springer; 2015. 2. Mukund R Patel, “Wind and Solar Power Systems”, CRC Press, 2004. 3. Roger A. Messenger, Jerry Ventre, “Photovoltaic System Engineering”, CRC Press, 2004. 4. Thomas Markvart and Luis Castaser, “Practical Handbook of Photovoltaics”, Elsevier Publications, UK, 2003. 5. Rai G.D., "Non-conventional Energy Sources", Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2002. 6. Daniel Hunt V., "Wind Power - A Handbook of WECS", Van Nostrend Co., New York, 1998. ,

18EM52 SPECIAL ELECTRIC MACHINES LABORATORY 0021 LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Speed control of Stepper Motor. Performance characteristics study on Brushless DC Motor. Performance characteristics study on Switched Reluctance Motor. Performance characteristics study on Synchronous Reluctance Motor. Performance characteristics study on Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor. Mini Project Total P: 45

SEMESTER V 18EM61 INDUSTRIAL VISIT & TECHNICAL SEMINAR 0042 The student will make at least two technical presentations on current topics related to the specialization. The same will be assessed by a committee appointed by the department. The students are expected to submit a report at the end of the semester covering the various aspects of his/her presentation together with the observation in industry visits. A quiz covering the above will be held at the end of the semester. Total P: 60

18EM71 PROJECT WORK – I 0063    

Identification of a problem. Literature survey of identified problem. Finalization of project specification and requirements Presentation / Demonstration of sub block(s) of the Project ( Hardware / Software / both )

SEMESTER VI 18EM72 PROJECT WORK – II 0 0 14 14   

Project Implementation ( Hardware / Software / both ) Presentation / Demonstration about the work done Consolidated report preparation

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE (ELECTIVE 3 Associated with Centre of Excellences) 18EM21 CNC MACHINES AND ROBOTICS 3204 INTRODUCTION: History and Terminology of robotics - Types of industrial robots-Introduction to Numerical control machines, Application of Numerical Control systems. (11+7) STUDY OF SIX AXIS ARTICULATED ROBOT: Power Calculation- Motor and Amplifier Selection - Motion controller selection and development - Robot body design and Assembly - Robotic Application Development. (11+7) ROBOT SIMULATION SOFTWARE: Familiarization of software-Simulation basics - Import robot models - Simulate different applications and visualize robot path-Generation of robot program. (11+8) STUDY OF CNC MACHINES: Functions of CNC, System hardware and software development process. Interfacing with keyboard, monitor, field inputs, outputs and MPG. PC based controllers. FEEDBACK DEVICES AND DRIVE UNITS OF CNC: Applications of feedback devices in CNC. Encoders - Absolute and incremental. Resolvers, Proximity switchs. Introduction to motors and drives - AC and DC servomotors and drives, servo tuning. Use of stepper motors and drives in CNC. Axis drive arrangements, ball screw, timing belts and couplings. (12+8)

162

59th ACM

09.06.2018

LAB SESSION: Execute and Operate Industrial Robot from Remote Location. Programming a CNC machining centre-Fanuc. Programming and simulation of a lathe in Keller software. Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Lab Manual Prepared by Department of Robotics and Automation Engineering, 2015 2. Robert L. Mott, “Machine Elements in Mechanical Design”, Pearson, 2004. 3. James A Rehg, “Introduction to Robotics in CIM Systems‖”, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.

18EM22 / 18ED23 / 18EE22 / 18EA23 TOTALLY INTEGRATED AUTOMATION 3204 INTRODUCTION TO FACTORY & PROCESS AUTOMATION: Evolution of Industrial Versions - Control elements of Industrial Automation - IEC/ ISA Standards for Control Elements – Selection criteria for control elements – Utilisation Category with IEC standards - Construction of Relay Ladder logic with different control elements- Need for PLC - PLC evolution. (6+3) PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS: Architecture of PLC - Types of PLC – PLC modules, PLC Configuration - Scan cycle - Capabilities of PLC - Selection criteria for PLC – PLC Communication - PLC Wiring - Installation of PLC and its Modules. Types of Programming – Bit Instructions - Timers and counters – PLC arithmetic functions PTO / PWM generation - High Speed Counter – Analog Scaling – Encoder Interfacing- Servo drive control – Stepper Motor Control. (12+13) HMI SYSTEMS: Need for HMI in Industrial Automation, Types of HMI – Configuration of HMI, Screen development and navigation, Configuration of HMI elements / objects and Interfacing with PLC. (6+7) NETWORKING: PLC Networking - Networking standards & IEEE Standard - Protocols - Field bus - Process bus and Ethernet – EttherCAT (7+0) SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION: Architecture – Tools – Tag Configuration - Internal & External graphics, Alarm logging – Tag logging – structured tags – Trends – history – Report generation (14+7) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Bolton W., “Programmable Logic Controllers”, Elsevier Ltd., 2015. 2. Frank D Petruzella, “Programmable Logic Controllers‖”, McGraw-Hill, 2011. 3. John R Hackworth and Fredrick D Hackworth Jr., “Programmable Logic Controllers: Programming Methods and Applications‖”, Pearson Education, 2006.

18EM23 / 18EE21 / 18EA22 / 18ED22 INTERNET OF THINGS 3204 FUNDAMENTALS OF IoT: Introduction to Internet of Things (IoT) – Machine to Machine (M2M) – Functional Characteristics – Recent Trends in the Adoption of IoT – Societal Benefits of IoT – Consumer IoT vs Industrial Functional Components of a typical IoT System: Sensors, Actuators, Embedded Computation Units, Communication Interfaces , Software Development (9+5) IoT PROTOCOLS: Physical and Data Linnk Layer Protocols: RFID: NFC, FFC, ZigBEE, Bluetooth Low Energy, Z-Wave, Wi-Fi, Wireless HART - Network Layer Protocols: IPv4, IPv6, TCP & UDP, 6LoWPAN - Application Layer Protocols: COAP, MQTT(13+10) CLOUD COMPUTING: NIST Visual Model – Essential Characteristics –Components of Cloud Computing - Service Models – Deployment Models – Service Management and Security – Examples – Basics of Fog Computing (12+7) SECURITY IN IoT: IEEE 802.11 Wireless Networks Attacks: Basic Types, RFID Security – Security Issues in ZigBEE: Bluetooth Security: Threats to Bluetooth Devices and Networks - IoT Applications: Health Care, Connected Vehicles, Smart Grid, Smart Home, and Smart City (11+8) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Vijay Madisetti, Arshdeep Bahga, “Internet of Things (A Hands-on Approach), Universities Press, 2015. 2. Adrian McEwen and Hakim Cassimally, “Designing the Internet of Things”, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., UK, 2014. 3. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick and Omar Elloumi, “The Internet of Things: Key Applications and Protocols”, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., UK 2012. 4. Dieter Uckelmann, Mark Harrison, Florian Michahelles, “Architecting the Internet of Things”, Springer, New York, 2011. 5. Johnny Cache, Joshua Wright and Vincent Liu, “Hacking Exposed Wireless: Wireless Security Secrets and Solutions”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2010. 6. Himanshu Dwivedi, Chris Clark and David Thiel, “Mobile Application Security”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2010.

163

59th ACM

09.06.2018 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES 18EM24 DESIGN & SIMULATION OF ENERGY EFFICIENT ELECTRIC MACHINES 3003

INTRODUCTION TO EFFICIENCY STANDARDS: Worldwide Efficiency Regulation – Electrical Energy Consumption – IE Class Motor/NEMA Standards – IEC60034-30 & IE60034-31 – Direct Grid/Inverter driven – Induction, Brushless PM Motor, Synchronous Reluctance – Loss Characterization – Core, Copper, Magnet, windage & Bearing Friction, stray. (11) DESIGN STRATEGIES FOR HIGH EFFICIENCY : Single Phase, Three Phase electric motor – Active length, Laminated electrical steel characterization& Grades – AWG Gauge – Phase coils – Slot fill factor – Copper die cast – high energy Magnets – Cooling & Frame design – saliency ratio for reluctance motor. (11) ELECTROMAGNETICS ASPECTS OF DESIGN: Electromagnetic design guidelines for high efficiency – Flux density in cross sectional areas of the core – Core loss theory – Iron losses – Hysteresis, Eddy current losses – Core loss using FEM – Significance of saliency ratio – Reluctance torque, Magnet torque. (12) THERMAL ANALYSIS OF DESIGN: Heat extraction – conduction, convection & Radiation – Heat distribution in winding slots – Cooling system design. MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGIES: Stamping Lamination – Punching, EDM, Cleating, Riveting, Bonding, segmented stator – Stress Relief Annealing – Wire insertion mechanism – Hydraulic Pressing of shaft – Heat shrinking – interlocking mechanism – Induction heating for Bearings. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. “Introduction to AC Machine Design”, Thomas A. Lipo, 2017. 2. “Multiphysics Simulation by Design for Electrical Machines, Power Electronics and Drives” by Marius Rosu, Ping Zhou, Ding Sheng Lin, Dan IONEL, Mircea Popescu, Frede Blaabjerg, Vandana Rallabandi, David Staton, 2017. 3. International Standard IEC 60034-30-1: 2014.

18EM25 ENERGY AUDITING AND CONSERVATION 3003 INTRODUCTION: Trends in energy consumption - classification of energy source and their availability- energy scenario - energy pricing, energy sector reforms. Mandatory Auditing requirements – Audit purpose, scope and frequency - Energy auditing Conservation concepts and its Importance – Energy conservation opportunities in electrical power supply sector - The Energy Conservation Act, 2001 and its Features. (11) ENERGY AUDIT: Electrical energy audit, tools for electrical energy audit, billing elements, tariff systems, energy and demand charge, electrical demand and load factor improvement, power factor correction, power demand control and demand shifting Duties and responsibilities of energy systems auditors. Instruments for Audit and Monitoring Energy and Energy Savings, Types and Accuracy. (11) ELECTRICAL ENERGY CONSERVATION IN DRIVEN EQUIPMENTS: Input electrical energy requirements in pumps, fans, and lighting, load factor estimation in the equipments, different types of Variable Speed Drives, energy conservation potential, electrical energy conservation in industrial motors and A/c systems, operation and maintenance practices for electrical energy conservation in industrial motors, air conditioning and refrigeration systems, DG Sets, Cabling Techniques for energy conservation-waste heat recovery in industrial DG sets. (11) DEMAND SIDE MANAGEMENT (DSM) &GREEN BUILDINGS: Introduction to DSM, Concepts of DSM, benefits from DSM, DSM techniques: time of day pricing, load priority technique, peak clipping, peak shifting, valley filling, strategic conservation, energy efficient equipment, socio-economic awareness programmes. Barriers to green buildings, green building rating tools, material selection, operating energy, façade systems, ventilation systems, transportation, water treatment systems, water efficiency, building economics, Leed and IGBC codes. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. RAO VVL, Openshaw Taylor E., "Utilisation of Electric Energy", Orient Longman Ltd., 2006. 2. Allen J.Wood and Bruce F.Woolenberg, “Power Generation, Operation, and Control'', John Wiley and Sons, 2005. 3. Michael E., Brumbach, “Electronic Variable Speed Drives” Thomson Asia (P) Ltd., 2002. 4. Donald R. Wulfinghoff, “Energy Efficiency Manual”, Energy Institute Press, 1999. 5. Awasthi S.K., “Energy Conservation”, ISTE Publication, 1999. 6. Thiruvengadam S., Srinivasan P.S., “Energy Management In Electrical Energy System”, ISTE Publication, 1999.

18EM26 / 18ED27 SOFT COMPUTING TECHNIQUES FOR RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEM 3003 INTRODUCTION TO SOFT COMPUTING TECHNIQUES: Fundamentals – Biological neural network – Artificial neuron – Activation function – Learning rules - Single Layer Feedback Networks - Unsupervised Learning Networks - Membership Functions - Features of membership function - Standard forms and Boundaries - fuzzification - membership value assignments. - Toolboxes of MATLAB –

164

59th ACM

09.06.2018

Programming and file processing in MATLAB - Model definition and model analysis using SIMULINK - S-Functions - Converting SFunctions to blocks. (11) OPTIMISATION TECHNIQUES FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC ENERGY CONVERSION: Passive filter design using Genetic Algorithm, harmonic elimination in inverters, Tuning of controllers, GA, PSO, DE, optimized fuzzy logic for the Maximum Power Point Tracking, MATLAB/SIMULINK Models of MPPT Techniques, (11) OPTIMISATION TECHNIQUES FOR WIND ENERGY CONVERSION SYSTEMS: MATLAB/SIMULINK model of Wind turbine and Wind Turbine Generators. Prediction of Wind Turbine Power Factor, Pitch Angle Control, MPPT Algorithms, Economic Dispatch for Wind Power System – Related MATLAB/SIMULINK models-FLC based STATCOM - Prediction of Wind Speed based on FLC Fuzzy Logic Controlled SPWM Converter for WECS. (11) GRID INTEGRATION: Integration of small scale generation into distribution grids, Different types of grid interfaces, Issues related to grid Integration systems - Phase Locked Loop for Grid Connected Power System, Grid Connected Inverters, Current Controllers for PWM inverters, MATLAB/SIMULINK model of Grid Integration, and PLL grid connected power system. HYBRID ENERGY SYSTEMS: Need for hybrid energy system, MATLAB/SIMULINK models of Hybrid Solar PV and Wind Energy System- - CUK-SEPIC converter, Boost Converter, Hybrid model of Solar PV and Diesel Energy System,– Hybrid Solar PV and Wind Energy Conversion Systems (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Sumathi S., Ashok Kumar L., Sureka P., “Solar PV and Wind Energy Conversion Systems - An Introduction to Theory, Modeling with MATLAB/SIMULINK, and the Role of Soft Computing Techniques”, Green Energy and Technology, Springer, 2015 Edition, 20 April 2015. 2. Randall Shaffer., “Fundamentals of Power Electronics with MATLAB” Charles River Media Boston Massachusetts, 2007. 3. Laurene Fausett, “Fundamentals of Neural Networks”, Pearson Education India, New Delhi, 2004. 4. Rao S S., "Optimization Theory and Applications", Wiley Eastern Limited, New Delhi, 2003. 5. Garg H.P. and Prakash J., “Solar Energy, Fundamentals and Applications”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 1997. 6. Mukund R Patel, “Wind and Solar Power Systems”, CRC Press, 2004.

18EM27 SIMULATION OF POWER ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS 3003 INTRODUCTION: Need for Simulation - Overview of PSPICE, File formats - Description of circuit elements - Circuit description – Output variables - Dot commands. Overview of MATLAB - SIMULINK Toolboxes - Programming and file processing in MATLAB Model definition and model analysis using SIMULINK - S-Functions - Converting S-Functions to blocks. (11) MODELING AND SIMULATION USING PSPICE, MATLAB SIMULINk: Modeling of diode - Diode with R, R-L, R-C and R-L-C load with AC supply – Modeling of SCR, MOSFET and IGBT in simulation - Simulation of gate/base drive circuits, simulation of snubber circuits. (11) SIMULATION USING PSPICE, MATLAB SIMULINK: Simulation of uncontrolled and controlled rectifiers- AC voltage controllers dc-dc - DC-AC converters with self-commutated devices. State space modeling of Power Converter-Introduction to electrical machine modeling: induction, DC, and synchronous machines. Simulation of converter fed dc motor drives, simulation of chopper fed dc motor drives-stability aspects. (12) Simulation of single and three phase inverters, space vector representation, pulse-width modulation methods for voltage control, waveform control - Simulation of inverter fed induction motor drives. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Randall Shaffer., “Fundamentals of Power Electronics with MATLAB”, Charles River Media Boston Massachusetts, 2007. 2. Issa Batarseh, “Power Electronic Circuits”, John Wiley, 2004. 3. Chee-Mun Ong, "Dynamic Simulation of Electric Machinery: Using MATLAB/ Simulink", Prentice Hall PTR, New Jersey, 1998. 4. Robert Ericson, “Fundamentals of Power Electronics”, Chapman & Hall, 1997. 5. Ramshaw E., Schuuram D. C., “PSpice Simulation of Power Electronics Circuits – An Introductory Guide”, Springer, New York, 1996. 6. Ned Mohan, "Power Electronics: Computer Simulation Analysis and Education using PSPICE", Minnesota Power Electronics Research and Education, USA, 1992.

18EM28 LINEAR ELECTRIC MACHINES 3003 GENERAL ASPECTS: Differences between Linear Electric Machines (LEM) and rotating machines -Traveling magnetic field – Hamilton’s principle of LIM. LINEAR INDUCTION MOTOR (LIM): Classifications - Construction - Concept of Current sheet - Air gap field equation - Air gap flux leakage - Skin effect - Edge effect - End Effect - Goodness Factor.LIM Equivalent circuit - Performance calculations - Selection and Applications - Design considerations - Tubular LIM. (12) SELF OSCILLATING LINEAR MOTORS: Types – Construction - Principle of operation - Applications.

165

59th ACM

09.06.2018

LINEAR SYNCHRONOUS MOTORS (LSM): Principle of operation - Types – Design considerations - Performance equation - LSM control - Applications. (11) DC LINEAR MOTORS (DCLM): Principle of operation - Types - Design guide lines Launchers - DCLM control - Applications.

Circuit equation - Electromagnetic (11)

LINEAR STEPPER MOTORS (LSTM): Principle of operation - Types - Static and holding thrust - Modeling - Design guidelines Drive Control – Applications. LINEAR LEVITATION MACHINES (LLM): Basic configuration - Types - Expression for Levitation and Drag forces - Dynamics Electromagnetic bearings – Applications. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Nasar A and Boldea I, "Linear Electric Motors : Theory, Design and Practical Applications", Prentice-Hall Inc, New Jersey, 1987. 2. Yamamura S, "Theory of Induction Motors", University of TokyoPress, Japan, 1972. 3. Laithwaite E.R., "Induction Machines for Special Purposes", George New York Ltd., London, 1966.

18EM29 ELECTRICAL ENERGY SYSTEMS & MANAGEMENT 3003 INTRODUCTION & ECONOMIC OPERATION: Overall structure of Electrical Systems, Definition and Objective of Energy Management, General Principles of Energy Management, Energy Management Skills, Energy Management Strategy. Economic operation of power generating station - Input-Output curves, Load sharing, Industrial Distribution; Load profiling - Electricity tariff – types - Reactive Power, Power factor, Capacitor Sizing, Capacitor losses, Location/Placement/Maintenance. (11) ELECTRICAL ENERGY MONITORING AND MANAGEMENT: Energy Efficiency, Energy accounting, monitoring and control, Instruments for Audit and Monitoring Energy and Energy Savings, Types and Accuracy. Energy consumption models, Specific Energy Consumption; ECO assessment and Evaluation methods - Supply & Demand Side management. (11) ELECTRICAL ENERGY FOR INDUSTRIAL LIGHTING & EFFICIENT CONTROL OF MOTORS: Transformer Loading/Efficiency analysis, Feeder loss evaluation, Lighting, Energy efficient light sources, Domestic / commercial / industrial lighting, Controls, Energy conservation in Lighting Schemes, Luminaries. Energy efficient buildings. Types and Operating characteristics of Electric Motors, Energy efficient control and starting, Load matching, Selection of Motors, Efficiency and Load Analysis, Energy efficiency / high efficiency Motors. (12) ELECTRICAL ENERGY CONSERVATION AND MANAGEMENT: Industrial Drives, Control Schemes, Variable speed drives and Energy conservation schemes - Efficient Control strategies - Over sizing - Electrolytic Process, Electric heating - Furnace operation and scheduling; Cogeneration Schemes - Optimal operation. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Mehta V.K., Rohit Metha, “Principles of Power System” S.Chand & Company Ltd., Reprint 2009. 2. Allen J.Wood and Bruce Woolenberg F., “Power Generation, Operation and Control'', John Wiley and Sons, 2005. 3. Partab H., “Art and Science of Utilisation of Electrical Energy”, Dhanpat Rai and Sons, New Delhi, 2004. 4. Donald R. W., Energy Efficiency Manual, Energy Institute Press, 1999. 5. Kao Chen, “Energy Management in Illuminating Systems”, CRC Press Publication, 1999. 6. Saluja H.H., “Electric Power Supply and Energy Management in Industry by Optimisation”, ISTE publication, 1999.

18EM30 / 18ED26 ADVANCED CONTROL OF ELECTRIC DRIVES 3003 ADVANCED CONTROLMETHODS: Introduction - Power Converter Control using State-Space Averaged Models – Sliding - Mode Control of Power Converters - Fuzzy Logic Control of Power Converters (11) MOTOR DRIVES: Review - DC Motor Drives - Induction Motor Drives - Synchronous Motor Drives - Reluctance motor Drives – Servo Motor Drives (11) HIGH PERFORMANCE DRIVES: Types of Torque - Controlled Drive Schemes - Vector Drives, Direct – Torque - Controlled Drives – DSP Controlled Drives – DC Drive, AC Drive, Synchronous motor Drive, and Special Motor drive (12) ARTIFICIAL-INTELLIGENCE BASED DRIVES: AI-Based Techniques - Applications in Electrical Machines and Drives - NeuralNetwork-Based Drives - Fuzzy Based Drives - commercial AI based Drives (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Hamid A Toliyat and Steven G. Campbell, “DSP Based Electromechanical Motion Control”, CRC Press, 2004. 2. Marcian Cirstea, Andrei Dinu, Malcolm Mc Cormick, Jeen Ghee Khor, “Neural and Fuzzy Logic Control of Drives and Power Systems”, Newnes Publications, 2002. 3. Ned Mohan, “Advanced Electric Drives: Analysis, Control and Modeling using Simulink”, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., 2001. 4. Bimal K Bose, "Power Electronics and Variable Frequency Drives - Technology and Application", IEEE Press, 1997. 5. Peter Vas, "Vector Control of AC Machines", Oxford University Press, 1990.

166

59th ACM 6.

09.06.2018

Miller T.J.E,"Brushless Permanent Magnet and Reluctance Motor Drives", Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1989

18EM31 / 18ED30 ADVANCED TOPICS IN POWER ELECTRONICS 3003 RESONANT CONVERTERS: Zero voltage and Zero current switching – Classification of resonant converters - Basic resonant circuit concepts - Load resonant converters - Resonant switch converters - Zero voltage switching, clamped voltage topologies Resonant DC link Inverters and Zero voltage switching - High frequency link integral half cycle converters - Applications in SMPS and lighting. (11) IMPROVED UTILITY INTERFACE: Generation of current harmonics – Current harmonics and power factor - Harmonic standards and recommended practices - Need for improved utility interface - Improved single phase utility interface - Improved three phase utility interface - Electromagnetic interference. (11) FACTS AND CUSTOM POWER: Introduction - Principles of reactive power control in load and transmission line compensation Series and shunt reactive power compensation - Concepts of Flexible AC Transmission System (FACTS) - Static var compensators (SVC) - Thyristor controlled reactor - Thyristor switched capacitor - Solid state power control - Static condensers - Controllable series compensation - Thyristor controlled phase-angle regulator and unified power flow control - Modeling and methods of analysis of SVC and FACTS controllers - System control and protection - Harmonics and filters – Simulation and study of SVC and FACTS under dynamic conditions. (12) EMERGING DEVICES AND CIRCUITS: Power Junction Field Effect Transistors - Field Controlled Thyristors - JFET based devices Vs other power devices - MOS controlled thyristors - Power integrated circuits - New semiconductor materials for power devices. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Rashid M.H., “Power Electronics – Circuits, Devices and Applications”, Pearson Education (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., New Delhi, 2004. Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi. 2. Ned Mohan., Undeland and Robbins, "Power Electronics: Converters, Applications and Design", John Wiley and Sons (Asia) Pte Ltd., Singapore, 2003. 3. Mohan Mathur P, Rajiv K Varma, “Thyristor – Based Facts Controllers for Electrical Transmission Systems”, John Wiley and Sons Inc., IEEE Press,USA, 2002. 4. Las Zlo Gyugyi, Narain G Hingorani, “Understanding Facts: Concepts & Technology of Flexible AC Transmission System”, The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc., New York, 2000. 5. Joseph Vithayathil., “Power Electronics”, McGraw Hill Series in Electrical and Computer Engineering, USA, 1995. 6. Roger C. Dugan, Mark F. McGranaghan Surya Santoso and ‎‎ H. Wayne Beaty, "Electrical Power Systems Quality", Third edition, McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2013.

18EM32 / 18ED33 / 18EA39 / 18EE35 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES 3003 LINEAR PROGRAMMING: Statement of Optimization problems, Principles of single and multi-objective optimization, Graphical method, Simplex method, Revised simplex method, Two phase simplex method, Duality in linear programming, Sensitivity analysis. (12) NON-LINEAR PROGRAMMING (UNCONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION): Direct search methods - Univariate method, Pattern search method, Simplex method, Descent methods - Steepest Descent method, Conjugate gradient method, Quasi Newton method. (11) NON-LINEAR PROGRAMMING (CONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION): Direct methods - The Complex method, Zoutendijk’s Method of Feasible Directions, Rosen’s Gradient Projection Method, Indirect method - Transformation Techniques, Basic Approach of the Penalty Function Method, Interior Penalty Function Method, Exterior Penalty Function Method. (11) DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING: Multistage decision process, Suboptimization and Principle of Optimality, Computational procedure, Final value problem to initial value problem, Linear Programming as a Case of Dynamic Programming, Continuous dynamic programming (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Sharma J K, “Operations Research: Theory and Applications”, Macmillan Company, New Delhi, 2013. 2. Hamdy A Taha, “Operations Research: An Introduction”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2012. 3. Gupta C B, “Optimization Techniques in Operations Research”, I K International, New Delhi, 2012.

18EM33 / 18EE39 / 18EA42 / 18ED36 MACHINE LEARNING AND APPLICATIONS 3003 PROBABILITY DISTRIBUTIONS: Basic Definitions, Types of learning, Probability Theory, Probability Reasoning, Model Selection, Curse of Dimensionality, Decision Theory, Information Theory, Binary Variables, Multinomial Variables, Gaussian Distribution, Exponential Family, Nonparametric Methods, Belief Networks. (12)

167

59th ACM

09.06.2018

LINEAR MODELS FOR REGRESSION AND CLASSIFICATION: Linear Basis Function Models, Bias-Variance Decomposition, Bayesian Linear Regression, Bayesian Model Comparison, Evidence Approximation, Limitations of Fixed Basis Functions, Discriminant Functions, Probabilistic Generative and Discriminative Models, Laplace Approximation, Bayesian Logistic Regression (11) NEURAL NETWORKS: Introduction, Reforcement Learning, Feed-forward Network functions, Error Backpropogation, Hessian Matrix, Mixture Density Networks, Bayesian Neural Networks, Convolution Neural Network, Dual Representations, Constructing Kernels, Gaussian Processes, Maximum Margin Classifiers, Relevance Vector Machines. (11) APPLICATIONS OF MACHINE LEARNING ALGORITHMS: Content Based Image Retrieval, Machine Learning Approach for face Recognition, Computer Aided Diagnosis, Computer Vision, Speech Recognition,Text Mining, Thinking Machines, Smart Machines, Business Applications of Deep Learning, Software Reliability Prediction, Medical Imaging. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Pradeep Kumar and Arvind Tiwari, “Ubiquitous Machine Learning and Its Applications”, IGI Global, 2017. 2. David Barber, “Bayesian Reasoning and Machine Learning”, Cambridge University Press, New Delhi, 2014. 3. Ethem Alpaydin, “Introduction to Machine Learning”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2014.

18EM34 / 18ED35

VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS 3003

INTRODUCTION: Concept of virtual instrumentation, virtual instrumentation model, design flow with graphical system design, graphical data flow programming - Modular programming, repetition and loops, arrays, clusters, plotting data, structures, strings, state machines – file I/O - creating LabVIEW executables and projects. (12) DATA ACQUISITION: DAQ hardware configuration, DAQ hardware – Sampling and grounding techniques- analog I/O, digital I/O, counter/timer, DAQ software architecture, network data acquisition. Application design using Real Time Targets: PXI, cRIO. (11) INSTRUMENT INTERFACES: Virtual Instrumentation Software Architecture (VISA), instrument drivers, serial and parallel interfaces: RS232, USB, firewire, controller area network (CAN), GPIB, Industrial Ethernet. OLE for Process Control (OPC) (11) ADVANCED FEATURES IN LabVIEW: System identification and control design, signal processing, image acquisition and processing, data logging and supervisory control, LabVIEW Interface for Arduino, case studies on machine vision, motion control, GSD applications. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Jovitha Jerome, “Virtual Instrumentation using LabVIEW”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2010. 2. Rick Bitter, Taqi Mohiuddin and Matt Nawrocki, “LABVIEW Advanced Programming Techniques”, CRC Press, 2009. 3. Mathivanan N., “PC-Based Instrumentation”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.

18EM35 / 18ED03

MODELLING AND CONTROL OF POWER CONVERTERS 3003

STATE SPACE MODELLING: Review of basic control theory – Control design techniques such as P, PI, PID and lead lag compensator design. State space control design approach – Modeling of physical systems - Solution to vector differential equations and state transition matrix - Controllability and Observability Small signal Model of Power Converters: Linearizing Averaged Power Stage Dynamics - Frequency Response of Converter Power Stage - Small-Signal Gain of PWM Block - Small-Signal Model for PWM DC-to-DC Converters (12) TRANSFER FUNCTIONS AND STATE SPACE MODEL OF POWER CONVERTER: Bode Plot for Transfer Functions - Power Stage Transfer Functions and State space modelling of Buck Converter, Boost Converter, and Buck/Boost Converter - Empirical Methods for Small - Signal Analysis (11) DYNAMIC PERFORMANCE AND CLOSED LOOP PERFORMANCE OF POWER CONVERTERS: Frequency Domain Performance Criteria - Time-Domain Performance Criteria, Stability of Power Converters: Nyquist Criterion - Relative Stability: Gain Margin and Phase Margin Asymptotic Analysis Method – Frequency - Domain Performance - Voltage Feedback Compensation and Loop Gain - Compensation Design and Closed-Loop Performance (11) INTRODUCTION TO NONLINEAR SYSTEMS: Phase plane analysis of nonlinear system using linear approximation - Limit cycle and periodic solutions - Singular points and qualitative behaviour. Stability of nonlinear systems - Lyapunov direct and indirect methods (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. “Pulsewidth Modulated DC-to-DC Power Conversion Circuits, Dynamics, and Control Designs”, Byungcho Choi, IEEE Press, Published by John Wiley & Sons, Inc, 2013 2. Ogata K., “Modern Control Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India, 2010. 3. Sira-Ramirez, R.Silva Ortigoza, “Control Design Techniques in Power Electronics Devices”, Springer, 2006. 4. Hassan K Khalil, “Nonlinear Systems”, Pearson Educational International Inc. Upper Saddle River, 3rd Edition, 2001. 5. Chen C.T., “Linear Systems Theory and Design’’, Oxford University Press, 3rd Edition, 1999.

168

59th ACM 6.

09.06.2018

“Applied Nonlinear Control”, Jean-Jacques E. Slotine, Weiping Li, Prentice Hall, 1991 - Technology & Engineering

18EM36 / 18ED25 / 18EE36 DIGITAL CONTROLLERS FOR POWER ELECTRONIC APPLICATIONS 3003 TMS C2XX DSP: Introduction to the C2xx DSP core and code generation. The components of the C2xx DSP core, Peripherals and Peripheral Interface, System configuration registers, Memory, Types of Physical Memory, memory Addressing Modes, Code Composer Studio for C2xx DSP. (12) I/O AND INTERRUPTS: Pin Multiplexing (MUX) and General Purpose I/O Overview, Multiplexing and General Purpose I/O Control Registers, Programming I/O. Introduction to Interrupts, Interrupt Hierarchy, Interrupt Control Registers, Initializing and Servicing Interrupts in Software, Programming Interrupts (11) ADC AND EVENT MANAGERS: ADC Overview, Operation of the ADC in the DSP, Overview of the Event manager (EV), Event Manager Interrupts, General Purpose (GP) Timers, Compare Units, Capture Units and Quadrature Enclosed Pulse (QEP) Circuitry, General Event Manager Information, Programming of ADC and Event Managers (11) DESIGN OF CONTROLLER IN POWER ELECTRONICS: Typical applications: DSP-based implementation of DC-DC buck - boost converter - DSP-based control of permanent magnet brushless DC machines - DSP-based Implementation of clarkes’s and park’s transformations - DSP-Based implementation of SPWM, SVPWM inverter pulse generation. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Hamid.A.Toliyat and Steven G.Campbell “DSP Based Electro Mechanical Motion Control“ CRC Press New York, 2004. 2. TMS320C28x CPU and Instruction Set Reference Guide - SPRU430 3. TMS320x28xx, 28xxx Peripheral Reference Guide - SPRU566 4. TMS320x2833x System Control and Interrupts Reference Guide - SPRUFB0 5. TMS320x2833x Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Reference Guide - SPRU812 6. TMS320x28xx, 28xxx Enhanced Pulse Width Modulator (ePWM) & High-Resolution Pulse Width Modulator (HRPWM) Module Reference Guide - SPRU791 & - SPRU924

18EM37 / 18ED29 POWER QUALITY MANAGEMENT 3003 POWER QUALITY PROBLEMS: Definition of power quality – Power quality issues - Sources and Effects – International standards of Power quality and Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC), Computer Business Equipment Manufacturers Associations (CBEMA) curve - Voltage sags - Load influence on voltage sags – Stochastic assessment of voltage sags - Voltage Sags in Continuous Processes - Case Study – Interruptions – Types – Origin - Causes - Transients - Classification- Utility capacitor switching transients – Utility lightning protection – Transients from load switching - Impact on users. (12) HARMONICS AND ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE: Harmonics - Sources and effects of harmonic distortion – Standards – Impacts - Mitigation and control techniques – Devices for controlling harmonic distortion - Simulation using PSCAD. Electromagnetic interference - Frequency classification - High-frequency interference - Electromagnetic interference – Susceptibility - EMI mitigation - Cable shielding to minimize Electromagnetic interference - Health concerns of electromagnetic interference. (11) POWER QUALITY SOLUTIONS: Power quality monitoring considerations - Choosing monitoring locations - monitoring and diagnostic techniques for various power quality problems - modeling of power quality (harmonics and voltage sag) problems by mathematical simulation tools - power line disturbance analyzer – quality measurement equipment - harmonic / spectrum analyzer flicker meters – disturbance analyzer. Applications of expert systems for power quality monitoring. (11) POWER QUALITY CONDITIONERS: Shunt and series compensators - DSTATCOM - dynamic voltage restorer - unified power quality conditioners - Custom power devices and their applications in power system - Operating principles - Detailed modeling and analysis of DSTATCOM and DVR - Compensators to mitigate power quality related problems - Realization of DVR and DSTATCOM by using VSC. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Sankaran.C, "Power Quality", CRC Press, Baco Raton, 2017. 2. Math H J Bollen, "Understanding Power Quality Problems: Voltage Sags and Interruptions", Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2014. 3. Roger C. Dugan, Mark F. McGranaghan Surya Santoso and ‎H. Wayne Beaty, "Electrical Power Systems Quality", Third Edition, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2013. 4. Arindam Ghosh and Gerard Ledwich, “Power Quality Enhancement using Custom Power Devices”, Springer-Verlag, New York, 2012. 5. Arrillaga J., Watson N.R. and Chen S., "Power System Quality Assessment", Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2011. 6. Ned Mohan, Undeland, and Robbins, "Power Electronics: Converters, Applications and Design ", John Wiley and Sons (Asia) Pte Ltd., Singapore, 2003.

169

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18EM38 / 18ED38 / 18EE37 SMART GRID TECHNOLOGIES 3003

SMART GRID ARCHITECTURE AND COMPONENTS: Introduction to Smart Grid, Evolution of Electric Grid, Concept of Smart Grid, Definitions, Need of Smart Grid, Concept of Robust & Self-Healing Grid, Present development & International policies in Smart Grid, Smart Grid Architecture Models, Components of Smart Grid: Smart Generation systems, Smart Transmission Grid : Geographic Information System (GIS). Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED) & their application for Monitoring & Protection. Wide Area Monitoring Protection and Control (WAMPAC), Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) and its applications in Smart Grid. (11) MICROGRIDS AND DISTRIBUTED ENERGY RESOURCES: Micro grid: Concept of Micro grid, Need & Applications of Micro grid. Micro grid Architecture, Issues of interconnection, Protection & Control of Micro-grid. Distributed Energy Resources: Plastic & Organic Solar cells, Thin Film Solar cells. Variable Speed Wind Generators, Fuel cells, Micro turbines, Captive Power plants, Integration of Renewable energy sources. Power Quality issues of Grid connected Renewable Energy Sources. Power Quality Conditioners for Smart Grid. Web based Power Quality monitoring and Power Quality Audit. (12) SMART METERING AND DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM: Smart Distribution Systems: Smart Meters, Automatic Meter Reading (AMR), Advanced Metering Infrastructure (AMI), Real Time Pricing, Smart Appliances. Smart Substations : Substation Automation, Feeder Automation, Outage Management System (OMS). Smart Sensors: Home & Building Automation, Plug in Hybrid Electric Vehicles (PHEV), Algorithms for Vehicle to Grid and Grid to Vehicle Management, Smart Charging Stations. Energy Storage for Smart Grids: Battery Energy Storage Systems (BESS), Superconducting Magnetic Energy Storage (SMES), Compressed Air Energy Storage (CAES). (11) COMMUNICATION NETWORKS AND CYBER SECURITY FOR SMART GRID: Communication Architecture for Smart Grids, Home Area Network (HAN) : IEEE 802.11, IEEE 802.15.4, 6LoWPAN, Neighborhood Area Network (NAN) / Field Area Network (FAN): Radio over Power-Lines (BPL/PLC), IEEE P1901, Wide Area Network (WAN) : Optical Fiber Communication, Cellular Networks, Wi-Max and Wireless Sensor Networks. Big Data Analytics in Smart Grid, Cyber Security Challenges in Smart Grid Load Altering Attacks - False Data Injection Attacks - Defense Mechanisms. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Ali Keyhani, “Design of Smart Power Grid Renewable Energy Systems”, Wiley, 2016 2. Stuart Borlase, “Smart Grid: Infrastructure, Technology and Solutions”, CRC Press, 2012. 3. Janaka Ekanayake, Nick Jenkins, KithsiriLiyanage, Jianzhong Wu and Akihiko Yokoyama, “Smart Grid: Technology and Applications”, Wiley, 2012.

18EM39 / 18ED39 DISTRIBUTED GENERATION AND MICROGRIDS 3003 DISTRIBUTED GENERATION: Energy Sources and their availability -Trends in Energy Consumption, Conventional and Nonconventional Energy Sources – Review of Solar Photovoltaic – Wind Energy Systems – Fuel Cells, Energy storage systems: Batteries – ultra capacitors – fly wheels – captive power power plants. Distributed Generation – Concept and topologies, Renewable Energy in Distributed Generation. IEEE 1547 Standard for Interconnecting Distributed Generation to Electric Power Systems – DG Installations – Siting and sizing of DGs – optimal placement – Regulatory issues. (11) ISSUES IN GRID INTEGRATION OF DISTRIBUTED ENERGY RESOURCES: Basic requirements of Grid Interconnections – operational Parameters – Voltage, Frequency and THD limits – Grid Interfaces – Inverter based DGs and rotary machines based DGs – Reliability, Stability and Power Quality issues on Grid Integration – Impact of DGs on Protective Relaying and islanding issues in existing distribution Grid. (11) MICROGRIDS: Introduction to Microgrids – types – Structure and configuration of Microgrids – AC and DC Microgrids – Power Electronic Intefaces for Microgrids – Energy Management and Protection Control Strategies of a Microgrid - Case Studies. (11) CONTROL AND OPERATION OF MICROGRID: Modes of operation and control of microgrid: grid connected and islanded mode, Active and reactive power control, protection issues, anti-islanding schemes: passive, active and communication based techniques, microgrid communication infrastructure, Power quality issues in microgrids, regulatory standards, Microgrid economics, Introduction to smart microgrids. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Gregory W. Massey, “Essentials of Distributed Generation Systems”, Jones & Bartlett Publishers, 2011. 2. Math H. Bollen, “Integration of Distributed Generation in the Power System”, John Wiley & Sons, 2011. 3. Ali Keyhani, “Design of Smart Power Grid Renewable Energy Systems”, John Wiley & Sons, 2011.

18EM40 / 18ED40 HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES 3003 INTRODUCTION TO HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES: History of hybrid and electric vehicles, social and environmental importance of hybrid and electric vehicles, impact of modern drive - trains on energy supplies. Basics of vehicle performance, vehicle power source characterization, transmission characteristics and mathematical models to describe vehicle performance. (11)

170

59th ACM

09.06.2018

DRIVE –TRAIN TOPOLOGIES: Basic concept of hybrid traction, introduction to various hybrid drive-train topologies, power flow control in hybrid drive-train topologies, fuel efficiency analysis. Basic concepts of electric traction, introduction to various electric drive-train topologies, power flow control in hybrid drive-train topologies, fuel efficiency analysis. (11) ELECTRIC COMPONENTS IN HYBRID AND ELECTRIC VEHICLES: Electric Drives in HEV/EVs, Classification and Characteristics, configuration and Control of DC Motor drives, Induction Motor drives, Permanent Magnet Motor drives and Switched Reluctance Motor drives for HEV/EVs applications, Drive System efficiency. Performance matching of Electric Machine and the Internal Combustion Engine (ICE), Sizing the propulsion motor, sizing of power electronic devices and Energy Storage systems. (12) ENERGY MANAGEMENT STRATEGIES: Introduction to energy management strategies used in hybrid and electric vehicle, classification of different energy management strategies, comparison of different energy management strategies - implementation issues. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Iqbal Hussein, “Electric and Hybrid Vehicles: Design Fundamentals”, CRC Press, 2010. 2. Mehrdad Ehsani, Yimi Gao, Sebastian E. Gay, Ali Emadi, Modern Electric, “Hybrid Electric and Fuel Cell Vehicles: Fundamentals, Theory and Design”, CRC Press, 2009. 3. Sira-Ramirez, R. Silva Ortigoza, “Control Design Techniques in Power Electronics Devices”, Springer, 2006

AUDIT COURSES 18EM81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP81

18EM82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP82 .

171

59th ACM 13. Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment ME – COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

09.06.2018

(2018 REGULATIONS) (Minimum No. of credits to be earned: 74*) Hours/Week Maximum Marks CAT Course Course Title Credits Code Lecture Tutorial Practical CA FE Total I SEMESTER 18LC01 Applied Mathematics 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC 18LC02 Information Theory and Coding 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC 18LC03 Advanced Digital Communications 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC 18LC04 Advanced Digital Signal Processing 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC 18LC05 Communication Algorithms on FPGA 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC 18LC51 Advanced Digital Communications Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC 18LC81 English for Research Paper Writing Total 24 Hrs 14 6 4 19 300 300 600 II SEMESTER 18LC06 RF Circuit Design 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC 18LC07 Communication Networks 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC 18LC08 Wireless Communication 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC 18LC09 Embedded System Design and IoT 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC 18LC__ Professional Elective - 1 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18LC__ Professional Elective - 2 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18LC52 Communication Networks Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC 18LC61 Industry Visit & Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 EEC 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC 18LC81 Research Methodology and IPR Total 30 Hrs 18 4 8 24 400 400 800 III SEMESTER 18LC__ Professional Elective - 3 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18LC__ Professional Elective - 4 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18LC__ Professional Elective - 5 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18LC__ Professional Elective - 6 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18LC53 Communication System Design Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC 18LC71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 EEC Total 12 0 10 17 300 300 600 IV SEMESTER 18LC72 Project Work II 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 EEC Total 0 0 28 14 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES (Six to be opted) 18LC21 Detection and Estimation 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18LC22 Cooperative Communications 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18LC23 Cognitive Radio Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18LC24 High Performance Networks 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18LC25 Green Communication 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18LC26 Vehicular Systems and Networks 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18LC27 Communication Protocols for IoT 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18LC28 Radiating systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18LC29 Multirate Signal Processing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18LC30 Adaptive Signal Processing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18LC31 Wavelets and Subband Coding 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18LC32 Digital Image and Video Processing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18LC33 Multimedia Compression 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18LC34 Computer Vision and Machine Learning 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18LC35 Speech Signal Processing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18LC36 Error Control Coding 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18LC37 Evolutionary Computation 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE 18LC38 Data Structures and Algorithms 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PE * Indicated is the minimum number of credits to be earned by a student. ** - 60 hrs in I semester and 90 hrs in II semester; Grade: Completed / Not Completed CAT – Category; PC – Professional Core; PE - Professional Elective EEC – Employability Enhancement Course; MCMandatory Course

172

59th ACM

09.06.2018 I SEMESTER 18LC01 / 18LW01 APPLIED MATHEMATICS 2203

RANDOM VARIABLES: Continuous, Discrete and Mixed random variables, cumulative distribution function - joint distributionmarginal distribution - conditional distribution –statistical independence. (8+7) EXPECTATION AND ESTIMATION: Moments, central moments – mean, variance, Chebyshev and Schwarz inequatlities, Chernoff bound, auto correlation, cross – correlation, covariance, characteristic functions, central limit theorem. (8+7) RANDOM PROCESSES: Classification of Random processes, Poisson process, stationary process, wide sense stationary process, cross correlation, White Gaussian process, linear filter. (8+7) VECTOR SPACES: Real vector spaces and subspaces – linear independence - basis and dimension, inner product space orthonormal bases - Gram-Schmidt process, linear transformations - change of basis - inverse linear transformation, eigenvalues and eigenvectors. (8+7) Total L:32 + T:28 = 60 REFERENCES: 1. Howard Anton and Chris Rorres, ―Elementary Linear Algebra: Applications Version‖, Wiley India, New Delhi, 2018. 2. David C Lay, ―Linear Algebra and Its Applications‖, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2017. 3. Saeed Ghahramani, ―Fundamentals of Probability with Stochastic Processes‖, Pearson, New Delhi, 2016. 4. H. Stark and J.W. Woods, ―Probability and Random Process with Applications to Signal Processing‖, Pearson Education, 2012. 5. Roy D.Yates and David J Goodman, ―Probability and Stochastic Processes - A Friendly Introduction for Electrical and Computer Engineers‖, John Wiley & Sons, 2012.

18LC02 INFORMATION THEORY AND CODING 3003 GAUSSIAN RANDOM VARIABLES: Independence, conditional expectation, Gaussian Random variable, Jointly Gaussian Random Vector and its density function (5) DISCRETE MEMORYLESS CHANNELS: Self information, conditional entropy and mutual information, channel capacity theorem for DMC (5) CONTINUOUS TIME CHANNELS: Average mutual information, AWGN channel capacity, introduction to MIMO channel capacity. (9) SOURCE CODING: Coding of memoryless sources, entropy and source coding theorem, Kraft inequality, Huffman code, LempelZiv coding, introduction to Rate distortion theory (12) CHANNEL CODING: Need for error control coding - Random coding theorem of Shannon, (7,4) Hamming code and syndrome decoding, convolutional codes – Viterbi algorithm – Introduction to Turbo coding principles and parity check codes, Introduction to Network coding (14) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. S Haykin, ―Communication Systems‖, John Wiley & Sons, 2014. 2. Reza F M, "An Introduction to Information Theory", McGraw Hill, 2014. 3. T.Cover and J.Thomas, ―Elements of Information Theory‖, John Wiley, 2013. 4. Proakis J.G and Salehi M ―Fundamentals of Communication Systems‖Pearson, 2011. 5. David Tse and Pramod Viswanath, ―Fundamentals of Wireless Communication‖, Cambridge University Press, 2010.

18LC03 ADVANCED DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS 3003 SIGNALING THROUGH AWGN CHANNEL: Review of Signal Representation and Optimum Receivers, Definitions for SER, BER, SNR, average symbol energy, bit energy and Eb/No, decision boundary and decision regions for AWGN model with/without equal prior probability, Exact symbol error probability for several linear modulation schemes (ASK, FSK, PSK and QAM), union bound argument, Chernoff bound (15) SIGNALING THROUGH BANDLIMITED CHANNELS: Nyquist criterion for zero ISI, Sync and Raised cosine pulse shaping, controlled ISI using duobinary signals (6) SIGNALING THROUGH DISTORTING CHANNELS: ISI, Zero forcing equalization, Linear MMSE equalizers, Decision Feedback Equalizer, Fractionally Spaced Equalizer – Introduction to Adaptive Equalization (6) BLOCK MODULATION SCHEMES: Single carrier, multicarrier, cyclic prefix in the guard interval, OFDM, OFDMA, MC-CDMA, Introduction to Generalized block modulation schemes – GFDM, IFDMA, FBMC (9)

173

59th ACM

09.06.2018

TIMING AND FREQUENCY SYNCHRONISATION: Synchronization of baseband signals, oversampling, early late gate methods, delay locked loop and squaring loop, carrier synchronization, PLL and Costas loop, pilot aided and decision aided approaches. (9) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. S Haykin, ―Digital Communication Systems‖, John Wiley & Sons, 2013. 2. Proakis J.G and Salehi M ―Fundamentals of Communication Systems‖ Pearson ,2011. 3. Lajos L Hanzo and Thomas Keller, ―OFDM and MC-CDMA – A primer‖, John Wiley and Sons Ltd, 2006. 4. Bernard Sklar, "Digital Communications", Pearson Education Asia, Sixth reprint, 2005. 5. Barry S, Lee E A and Messershmitt D J, ―Digital Communications‖, Kluwer Academic Press, 2004. 6. Meyer H, Moeneclacy M, Fechtel S A, "Digital communication receivers ", John Wiley, New York, 1998.

18LC04 ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING 3204 REVIEW OF DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING: DT signals and LTI Systems – Need for frequency domain analysis - Fourier transform for continuous and discrete time signals – Z-Transform - DFT – FFT - Use of FFT for power spectral estimation - Linear phase FIR filters – Realization of FIR filters. (11+6) MULTIRESOLUTION ANALYSIS USING WAVELETS: Need for time frequency analysis - Heisenberg‘s uncertainty principle Short time Fourier transform - Need for wavelets - wavelet basis – concept of scale and its relation with frequency - Continuous time wavelet transform equation - Admissibility condition – Multi resolution analysis – Applications - Signal Denoising - Subband coding. (11 +8) MULTIRATE SIGNAL PROCESSING: Review of Sampling Theory - Down sampling – Upsampling - Noble identities – Decimation and Interpolation with transversal filters and polyphase filters – Fractional sampling rate convertor - multistage implementation Two channel, QMF and Perfect Reconstruction Filter banks - Transmultiplexers - Timing Recovery in a Digital Demodulator. (12+8) ADAPTIVE SIGNAL PROCESSING: Linear MMSE based estimation - Adaptive linear combiner – Performance function – Gradient and Minimum Mean Square error – Gradient search by the method of steepest descent – LMS algorithm – Convergence of LMS algorithm – Applications. (11+8) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 TUTORIAL COMPONENT:  FFT based periodogram with windowing  Time and frequency domain analysis of decimators and interpolators.  Multistage implementation of sampling rate convertors.  Adaptive implementation of LMMSE FIR filter using LMS algorithm  Denoising using Wavelets REFERENCES: 1. K P Soman, ―Insight into Wavelets: From Theory to Practice‖, PHI Learning, 2013. 2. Fliege N J, "Multirate Digital Signal Processing", John Wiley and sons, 2010. 3. Vaidyanathan P P, ―Multirate Systems and Filter banks‖, Prentice Hall, 2008. 4. Bernard Widrow and Samuel D Stearns, ―Adaptive Signal Processing‖, Prentice Hall, 2008. 5. Lonnie.C.Ludeman, ―Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing‖, John Wiley and sons, 2000

18LC05 COMMUNICATION ALGORITHMS ON FPGA 3204 VERILOG HDL: HDL overview - Modules and ports - compiler directives - data types - operands and operators - gate level modeling - data flow modeling - behavioral modeling - structural modeling – primitives-Tasks and functions - Writing test bench – Timing issues. (11+8) FIELD PROGRAMMABLE GATE ARRAYS: Introduction – FPGA Technology – DSP Technology Requirement – Design Implementation – FPGA Architectures – Xilinx – Altera Flex – FPGA implementation issues. (11+6) DSP ALGORITHMS ON FPGA: Fixed and Floating point arithmetic - Design of Binary Adders, Multipliers, Dividers and MAC unit Design of FIR Filters – Design of IIR Filters – DFT and FFT Algorithms, Approximate DSP Algorithms (11+8) DIGITAL COMMUNICATION MODULES ON FPGA: Error Control coders and decoders, encryption, scrambling, LMS Algorithm for channel estimation/equalization, pulse shaping, interpolation, decimation, Digital PLL, CORDIC implementations, Numerically controlled oscillator and SDR. (12+8) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 TUTORIAL COMPONENT:    

Design and implementation of FFT and IFFT algorithm. Design and implementation of programmable PN sequence generator. Implementation of Universal Modulator and Demodulator using CORDIC OFDM Transmitter implementation using model based design

174

59th ACM

09.06.2018

REFERENCES: 1. Samir Palnitkar, ―Verilog HDL: A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis‖, Prentice Hall, 2003. 2. Uwe Meyer Baese, ―Digital Signal Processing with Field Programmable Gate Arrays‖, Springer, 2004. 3. Jeffrey H Reed, ―Software Radio: A Modern Approach to Radio Engineering‖, Pearson Education Asia, 2002. 4. James Tsui, ―Digital Techniques for Wideband Receivers‖, Prentice-Hall of India, 2005. 5. Roger Woods, John Mc Allister, Gaye Lightbody and Ying yi, ―FPGA Based Implementation of Signal Processing Systems‖, Wiley, 2008. 6. Keshab K Parhi, ―VLSI Digital Signal Processing Systems: Design and Implementation‖, John Wiley and Sons, 1999.

18LC51 ADVANCED DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS LABORATORY 0042 In this course the students will be provided with an orientation program on the following equipment/software for duration of 4 hours. After this orientation each student is expected to formulate a complete an activity of interest which has to be derived from the orientation program under the guidance of a faculty. The details like background, problem definition, state of technology/ knowledge in that area by a good literature review (5 latest papers), objectives, methodology, equipment that can be used from the orientation program, results from the experiments and their interpretation with respect to the assumptions or background and a formal conclusion are expected in the report which is to be submitted at the end of the semester. This work is evaluated for the credit assigned. Expected hours needed for this work is 56 hours.      

BER Analysis of basic digital modulation schemes – ASK, FSK, BPSK, QPSK and QAM Adaptive Equalizer Design for signal transmission through distorting channels BER Analysis of multicarrier modulation schemes Vector Signal Analysis of different modulation schemes Analysis of Source Coding and Channel Coding techniques Synchronization in time and frequency domain Total P: 60

II SEMESTER 18LC06

RF CIRCUIT DESIGN 3204

RF FILTER DESIGN: Definition - properties - networks – ABCD, Z, Y, h and S parameters – Filter Design by the insertion loss method – Filter Design by the insertion loss Methods, Filter Transformations, Filter Implementation. Stepped impedance Low pass filters. (12+8) MATCHING NETWORK AND PASSIVE DEVICES: Matching with lumped Elements - Design of T and  matching networkMatching by micro strip line -Stub matching. Single stub matching – Double stub matching. Basic properties of dividers and couplers – T Junction Power divider – Wilkinson Power divider – Quadrature Hybrid – Coupled line Directional Coupler. (9+6) RF ACTIVE DEVICES AND AMPLIFIER DESIGN: The Diode Model – Two Port Design Model: The output terminals of a two port RF Device, The bipolar Transistor, The heterojunction bipolar transistor , The GaAS MESFET, The High Electron Mobility Transistor. RF Amplifier Design - Two port power Gains- Stability circles- Tests for Unconditional stability - Low Noise amplifier Design – Low Noise MOSFET Amplifier –Broad Band Transistor Amplifier Design – Characteristics of Power Amplifiers and Amplifier classes-Design Examples. (12+8) OSCILLATORS AND MIXERS: RF Oscillators –Oscillators using BJT and FET –Dielectric Resonator Oscillators – Oscillator Phase Noise. Mixers – Mixer Characteristics – Single –Ended Diode Mixer – Single-Ended FET Mixer- Balanced Mixer – Image Reject Mixer- Differential FET Mixer and Gilbert Cell Mixer. (12+8) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 TUTORIAL COMPONENT:     

Impedance matching networks Directional couplers. Passive filters. Amplifiers. Oscillator and mixer Circuits for RF Applications.

REFERENCES: 1. David M Pozar, ―Microwave Engineering‖, John Wiley and Sons, 2016. 2. Reinhold Ludwig and Pavel Bretchko, "RF Circuit Design: Theory and Applications‖, Pearson Education, 2011. 3. Rowan Gilmore and Les Besser, ―Practical RF Circuit Design for Modern Wireless Systems‖, Vol II, Passive Circuit and Systems, Artech house, London, 2003.

175

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18LC07 COMMUNICATION NETWORKS 3003

END TO END CONNECTIVITY: Network Edge and core - Protocol Layers and their service models-Principle of network applications - web and HTTP - FTP- Electronic Mail-DNS – SNMP-Connectionless transport, End-to-End Issues, Connection Establishment and Termination. (9) INTERNETWORKING: Switching and bridging, basic internetworking, Internet protocol IPv4, IPv6, Routing algorithms, routing in the internet (RIP, OSPF, BGP), Multiprotocol Label Switching(MPLS) - Broadcast and Multicast routing, routing among mobile devices (9) CONGESTION CONTROL AND RESOURCE ALLOCATION: Issues in Resource Allocation - Queuing Disciplines – Little‘s Theorem -TCP Congestion Control - Congestion-Avoidance Mechanisms - Quality of Service (8) LINKING AND MULTIPLE ACCESS: Link layer services –framing –Error detection –multiple access protocols – Channel partitioning –Random access protocols – Ethernet- CSMA/CD -- Virtual LANs (9) WIRELESS NETWORKS: Bits over Wireless networks – TCP performance over Wireless Links - Adaptive and Cross-Layer Techniques CSMA-CA-IEEE 802.11 standards – Multiple access in 802.11 -Wireless Ad Hoc Networks - Topology and Connectivity. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Larry L Peterson and Bruce SDavie, ―Computer networks: A system approach‖, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers 2010. 2. Kurose James F and Keith W Ross,―Computer Networking: A Top-Down Approach Featuring the Internet‖, Pearson Education, 2009. 3. Behrouz A Forouzan, ―Data Communication and Networking‖, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009. 4. Vijay K Garg, ―Wireless Communication and Networking‖, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers 2008 5. Anurag Kumar, D.Manjunath, Joy Kuri, ―Communication networking - An Analytical Approach‖, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers 2004.

18LC08 WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS 3003 WIRELESS CHANNEL: Physical modeling for wireless channels - Input /output model of the wireless channel- Time and frequency coherence- Statistical channel models- Detection in a Rayleigh fading channel (10) CAPACITY OF WIRELESS CHANNELS: AWGN Channel capacity, Capacity of Flat Fading Channels – Capacity of Frequency Selective Fading Channels– Time varying, Time Invariant Channels – Diversity Techniques - Narrowband MIMO model, Parallel Decomposition of the MIMO Channel, MIMO Channel Capacity – MIMO diversity gain – Space Time Coding. (12) MULTICARRIER COMMUNICATIONS: OFDM based multiple access, Broadband wireless access using OFDM and OFDMA, frequency diversity and multiuser diversity, MIMO-OFDM techniques – closed loop and open loop. (12) CELLULAR SYSTEMS AND STANDARDS: AMPS – GSM – IMT 2000 – Services provided by 3G Cellular Systems – Harmonized 3G Systems – UMTS - 3G UMTS signal processing - WCDMA, HSPA, HSPA+, Towards 4G, LTE and LTE advanced, 5G. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. David Tse and PramodViswanath, ―Fundamentals of Wireless Communication‖, Cambridge University Press, 2010. 2. Singal T L, "Wireless Communications" Tata McGraw Hill, 2010. 3. Theodore S Rappaport, ―Wireless Communications Principles and Practice‖, Pearson Education, Asia, New Delhi, 2009. 4. Andrea Goldsmith, ―Wireless Communications‖, Cambridge University Press, 2009. 5. Lajos L Hanzo and Thomas Keller, ―OFDM and MC-CDMA – A primer‖, John Wiley and Sons Ltd, 2006.

18LC09 EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN AND IOT 3204 COMPONENTS OF EMBEDDED SYSTEMS: Introduction to Embedded Systems, Embedded Design Life Cycle. Overview of ARM Processors. Functional block diagram of ARM Cortex-A, Cortex-R and Cortex-M series controllers and their features. (8+3) PERIPHERAL INTERFACING TECHNIQUES: Memory Management - Program Memory, Data Memory. AHB and APB Bus Structure. GPIOs, Timer/Counters, Capture/Compare Modules, PWM, QEI, RTC, WDT, DMA, EEPROM and PLL. Serial Peripherals: UART, I2C, SPI, CAN and USB. Hardware and Software Interrupts, Analog Peripherals: ADC, DAC and Analog Comparators. (16+15) IOT: Introduction, IoT protocols: MQTT and AMQP, IoT Security: AES and TLS1.2, FOTA, Consumer Electronics IoT, Automotive IoT, Health Care IoT and Industrial IoT. (11+7) CLOUD AND APP FACILITIES FOR IOT: Amazon Web Services Cloud (AWS), MS Azure, IBM Bluemix, Carriots and Thing Speak, GE predix. MIT App Inventor and Android App Development tools. (10+5) 176

59th ACM

09.06.2018 Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75

TUTORIAL COMPONENT:  GPIO interfacing  Interfacing of Smart Sensors  Implementing Serial Communication Protocols  Remote Monitoring and Control through Web Browser using WiFi  Cloud based Data Analysis REFERENCES: 1. Arshdeep Bahga and Vijai Madisetti : A Hands-on Approach ―Internet of Things‖, Universities Press 2015. 2. Jonathan W. Valvano, ―Embedded Systems: Real-Time Interfacing to Arm(r) Cortex -M Microcontrollers: Volume 2‖, CreateSpace Independent Publishing Platform; 5th edition, 2012. 3. Jonathan W. Valvano, ―Embedded Systems: Real-Time Interfacing to Arm(r) Cortex -M Microcontrollers: Volume 1‖, CreateSpace Independent Publishing Platform; 5th edition, 2011. 4. Arnold S. Berger, ―Embedded Systems Design: An Introduction to Processes, Tools, and Techniques‖ CMP Books, 2002. 5. Tiva TM4C123GH6PM Microcontroller Datasheet

18LC52 COMMUNICATION NETWORKS LABORATORY 0042 In this course the students will be provided with an orientation program on the following equipment/software for duration of 4 hours. After this orientation each student is expected to formulate a complete an activity of interest which has to be derived from the orientation program under the guidance of a faculty. The details like background, problem definition, state of technology/ knowledge in that area by a good literature review (5 latest papers), objectives, methodology, equipment that can be used from the orientation program, results from the experiments and their interpretation with respect to the assumptions or background and a formal conclusion are expected in the report which is to be submitted at the end of the semester. This work is evaluated for the credit assigned. Expected hours needed for this work is 56 hours.      

Networking commands (Windows and LINUX) Packet and protocol analysis using Wireshark Performance evaluation of RIP and OSPF protocols using discrete event network simulator Construction of Layer2 and Layer3 protocol packets using traffic generator Configuration and realization of VLAN Design and simulation of MAC & Routing protocol for wireless networks Total P: 60

18LC61 INDUSTRY VISIT & TECHNICAL SEMINAR 0042 The student will make at least two technical presentations on current topics related to the specialization. The same will be assessed by a committee appointed by the department. The students are expected to submit a report at the end of the semester covering the various aspects of his/her presentation together with the observation in industry visits. A quiz covering the above will be held at the end of the semester. Total P: 30

SEMESTER III 18LC53 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM DESIGN LABORATORY 0042 In this course the students will be provided with an orientation program on the following equipment/software for duration of 4 hours. After this orientation each student is expected to formulate a complete an activity of interest which has to be derived from the orientation program under the guidance of a faculty. The details like background, problem definition, state of technology/ knowledge in that area by a good literature review (5 latest papers), objectives, methodology, equipment that can be used from the orientation program, results from the experiments and their interpretation with respect to the assumptions or background and a formal conclusion are expected in the report which is to be submitted at the end of the semester. This work is evaluated for the credit assigned. Expected hours needed for this work is 56 hours.      

Wireless channel estimation and channel modeling Analysis of Space Time Coding Techniques Design and analysis of MIMO systems Implementation and Analysis of security algorithms for communication systems Implementation of a communication system in SDR platform Design and implementation of a Wireless Sensor Network application in embedded platform Total P: 60

177

59th ACM

09.06.2018

18LC71 PROJECT WORK-I 0063      

Identification of a real life problem in thrust area Developing a mathematical model for solving the above problem Finalization of system requirements and specification Proposing different solutions for the problem based on literature survey Future trends in providing alternate solutions Consolidated report preparation of the above Total P: 90

IV SEMESTER 18LC72 PROJECT WORK –II 0 0 28 14 The project work involves the following: Preparing a project- brief proposal including     

Problem identification A statement of system / process specifications proposed to be developed (Block Diagram/ Concept tree) List of possible solutions including alternatives and constraints Cost benefit analysis Time line of activities

A report highlighting the design finalization [based on functional requirements & standards (if any)] A presentation include the following  Implementation phase( Hardware / Software / both)  Testing and validation of the developed system  Learning in the Project Consolidated report preparation Total P: 420

ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES 18LC21 DETECTION AND ESTIMATION 3003 STATISTICAL DECISION THEORY: Bayesian Hypothesis Testing - Likelihood Ratio Tests -Minimax Hypothesis Testing - Neyman Pearson Hypothesis Testing - Composite Hypothesis Testing - M‘ary Hypothesis Testing. (8) SIGNAL DETECTION IN DISCRETE TIME: Deterministic Signals - Stochastic Signals – Models and Detector Structures – Performance Evaluation - Chernoff Bounds - Applications of Detection in Signal Processing (8) PARAMETER ESTIMATION: Fundamentals of Estimation Theory - Minimum Variance Unbiased Estimation – Cramer Rao Lower bound – Best Linear Unbiased Estimators - Linear Least Squares Estimation –Nonlinear Least Squares Estimation - Maximum Likelihood Estimation. (10) BAYESIAN ESTIMATION: Bayesian philosophy – General Bayesian Estimators - Minimum Mean Square Error Estimators – Maximum A Posteriori Estimators – Linear MMSE Estimation . (9) DISTRIBUTION-FREE ESTIMATION: Orthogonality Principle – Autoregressive Techniques - Discrete Wiener Filter, Continuous Wiener Filter, Generalization of Discrete and Continuous Filter Representations, Kalman Filter, Extended Kalman Filter Applications of Estimation in Signal Processing. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Thomas Schonhoff and Arthur AGiordano, ―Detection and Estimation Theory", Prentice Hall, 2007. 2. Kay S M, ―Fundamentals of Statistical Signal Processing, Volume 2: Detection Theory‖, Prentice Hall, 1998. 3. Poor H V, ―An Introduction to Signal Detection and Estimation‖, Springer-Verlang, 1994. 4. Kay S M, ―Fundamentals of Statistical Signal Processing, Volume 1: Estimation Theory‖, Prentice Hall, 1993. 5. ScharfL L, ―Statistical Signal Processing‖, Addison Wesley, 1991.

178

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18LC22 COOPERATIVE COMMUNICATIONS 3003

COOPERATIVE COMMUNICATIONS: Introduction; Definitions and Terminology; Types of relaying protocol; One-way and two-way MIMO relaying protocols; System model and its terminologies; Pros and Cons of cooperation; Cooperative performance bounds; Application Scenarios (9) WIRELESS RELAY CHANNEL: Propagation Modeling; Channel Modeling; Regenerative relay channels; Transparent relay channels; Distributed MIMO channel; Fundamental limits of Cooperative and Relay Networks; Gaussian Relay channels; Single and multi-relay fading channels (9) TRANSMISSION SCHEMES: Cooperative transmission schemes; Two user transmission schemes; Cooperative transmission schemes with multiple relays; Cooperative communications with multiple sources (9) COOPERATIVE RELAYING IN MIMO-OFDM SYSTEMS AND MAC: Overview of OFDM systems; Cooperative OFDM systems; Cooperative OFDM systems with multiple relays; Distributed space frequency codes; MAC control based cooperative networks; Networking and Cross layer issues in Cooperative Networks (9) APPLICATIONS OF COOPERATIVE COMMUNICATION: Cooperative Relaying in multihop cellular networks; Peer-to-Peer-and Mobile AdHoc networks; Wireless Mesh Networks; Wireless Sensor and Actor Networks; Coordinated Multipoint Systems (CoMP); Cooperation for Nest Generation Wireless Networks (9) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Jonathan Rodriguez, ―Fundamentals of 5G Mobile Networks‖, John Wiley & Sons, 2015. 2. Ming Ding and Hanwen Luo, ―Multi-point Cooperative Communication Systems: Theory and Applications‖, Springer-Verlag, 2013. 3. Misha Dohler and Yonghui Li, ―Cooperative Communications: Hardware, Channel and PHY.‖ John Wiley & Sons, 2010. 4. Peter Hong Y W, Huang Wan-Jen and Jay Kuo C C, ―Cooperative Communications and Networking: Technologies and System Design‖, Springer, Newyork, 2010. 5. Yan Zhang, Chen H H, Mohsen and Guizani, ―Cooperative Wireless Communications‖, CRC Press, 2009.

18LC23 COGNITIVE RADIO SYSTEMS 3003 SOFTWARE DEFINED RADIO: Characteristics and Benefits of Software Radio, Design Principles of a Software Radio, Ideal SDR architecture, Radio Frequency Implementation Issues (9) SDR PLATFORMS: Digital Hardware choices for SDR, Hardware platforms for SDR – Universal Software Radio Peripheral, Wireless open Access Research platform, RTL SDR receiver, comparison of different platforms, Software platforms for SDR-GNU Radio (9) COGNITIVE RADIO TECHNOLOGY: Dynamic Spectrum Access; Digital dividend; Types of Cognitive Radio; Spectrum policies and Regulations; Information theoretic perspective on Cognitive Radio networks (9) COGNITIVE RADIO TASKS: Spectrum sensing and its methods; Cooperative Spectrum sensing; Spectrum sharing; spectrum mobility; spectrum management; spectrum trading (9) RESEARCH CHALLENGES AND APPLICATIONS: Optimization Techniques of Dynamic Spectrum Allocation, OFDM based Cognitive Radio; Security issues in cognitive radio; Game theory in Cognitive radio; crosslayer design for cognitive radio networks; applications of cognitive radio; IEEE 802.22 WRAN standard (9) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Ahmed Khattab, Dmitri Perkins, Magdy Bayoumi, "Cognitive Radio Networks: From Theory to Practice", Springer-Verlag New York, 2013. 2. Bruce A Fette, ―Cognitive Radio Technology‖, Elsevier publication, BURLINGTON, 2009. 3. Ekram Hossain, Dusit Niyato, Zhu Han, ―Dynamic Spectrum Access and Management in Cognitive Radio Networks‖, Cambridge University Press, 2009. 4. Kwang-Cheng Chen and Ramjee Prasad, ―Cognitive Radio Networks‖, John Wiley & Sons, 2009. 5. Joseph Mitola III, ―Cognitive Radio Architecture: The Engineering Foundations of Radio XML‖, Wiley Interscience Publication, NEW JERSEY, 2006.

179

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18LC24 HIGH PERFORMANCE NETWORKS 3003

MULTIMEDIA NETWORKING: Streaming stored Audio and Video, VOIP-Best effort service, protocols for real time interactive applications, Beyond best effort, scheduling and policing mechanism, integrated services, and RSVP-differentiated services. (9) NETWORK MANAGEMENT: Infrastructure for network management, The internet standard management framework –SMI, MIB, SNMP, Security and administration, ASN.1. (8) VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORKS: Overview of VPN -Remote-Access VPN, site-to-site VPN, Tunneling to PPP, Security in VPN. MPLS operation, Routing, Tunneling and use of FEC, Traffic Engineering, MPLS based VPN, overlay networks-P2P connections. (9) SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORKING: Fundamental Characteristics of SDN - SDN Operation - SDN Devices - SDN Controller SDN Applications - SDN in Other Environments: SDN Applied to the WAN, SDN Applied to Service Provider and Carrier Networks, SDN Applied to Mobile Networks, SDN Applied to Optical Networks. (10) 6LowPAN: Introduction - 6LoWPAN Architecture - 6LoWPAN Format - Mobility and Routing - Application Protocols - Using 6LoWPAN (9) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Paul Goransson, Chuck Black, Timothy Culver, ― Software Defined Networks: A Comprehensive Approach‖, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers 2017 2. Larry L Peterson and Bruce S Davie, ―Computer networks: A system approach‖, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers 2010. 3. Kurose James F and Keith W Ross, ―Computer Networking: A Top-Down Approach Featuring the Internet‖, Pearson Education, 2009 4. Zach Shelby, Carsten Bormann, ―6LoWPAN: The Wireless Embedded Internet‖, Wiley 2009 5. Nader F.Mir, Computer and Communication Networks, first edition.

18LC25 GREEN COMMUNICATION 3003 COOPERATIVE COMMUNICATIONS AND GREEN CONCEPTS: Network architectures and research issues in cooperative cellular wireless networks; Cooperative communications in OFDM and MIMO cellular relay networks: issues and approaches; Fundamental trade-offs on the design of green radio networks, Green modulation and coding schemes (9) COOPERATIVE TECHNIQUES: Cooperative techniques for energy efficiency, Cooperative base station techniques for cellular wireless networks; Turbo base stations ; Antenna architectures for cooperation; Cooperative communications in 3GPP LTE-Advanced, Partial information relaying and Coordinated multi-point transmission in LTE-Advanced. (9) RELAY-BASED COOPERATIVE CELLULAR NETWORKS: Distributed space-time block codes ; Collaborative relaying in downlink cellular systems ; Radio resource optimization; Adaptive resource allocation ; Cross-layer scheduling design for cooperative wireless two-way relay networks ; Network coding in relay-based networks. (9) GREEN RADIO NETWORKS: Base Station Power-Management Techniques- Opportunistic spectrum and load management, Energy-saving techniques in cellular wireless base stations , Power-management for base stations in smart grid environment, Cooperative multicell processing techniques for energy-efficient cellular wireless communications. (9) ACCESS TECHNIQUES FOR GREEN RADIO NETWORKS: Cross-layer design of adaptive packet scheduling for green radio networks; Energy-efficient relaying for cooperative cellular wireless networks ; Energy performance in TDD-CDMA multihop cellular networks ; Resource allocation for green communication in relay-based cellular networks ; Green Radio Test-Beds and Standardization Activities. (9) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Ekram Hossain, Vijay K. Bhargava, Gerhard P. Fettweis, ―Green Radio Communication Networks‖, Cambridge University Press, 2012. 2. Mazin Al Noor, ―Green Radio Communication Networks Applying Radio-Over-Fibre Technology for Wireless Access‖, GRIN Verlag, 2012. 3. F. Richard Yu, Yu, Zhang and Victor C. M. Leung, ―Green Communications and Networking‖, CRC press, 2012. 4. Mohammad S. Obaidat, Alagan Anpalagan and Isaac Woungang, ―Handbook of Green Information and Communication Systems‖, Academic Press, 2012. 5. Ekram Hossain, Dong In Kim, Vijay K. Bhargava , ―Cooperative Cellular Wireless Networks‖, Cambridge University Press, 2011.

180

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18LC26 VEHICULAR SYSTEMS AND NETWORKS 3003

INTRODUCTION: Vehicular network definition, special characteristics, technical challenges, Evolution and progress, Vehicular network application and services, public safety application, vehicular traffic coordination, road traffic management. (9) MAC PROTOCOLS & HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS COMMUNICATION: DSRC spectrum and applications for vehicular networks, IEEE standards for MAC protocols - A cluster based, A distributed MAC protocol, Priority based secure MAC protocol, Introduction to heterogeneous wireless communications, enabling technologies for vehicular communication networks, platform for design and simulation. (9) ROUTING IN VEHICULAR NETWORKS: Challenges and requirements for routing protocols, classification, basic solutions, Map based solutions, based on trajectories, based on traffic information. Adhoc IP address auto configuration problem, IP address auto configuration solution requirements, Analysis of solution space, IP address auto configuration in vehicular networks (9) MESSAGE SCHEDULING: Context and motivations, congestion control approaches, dynamic message scheduling, Analysis and validation (9) NETWORK MOBILITY: The network mobility problem, NEMO basic support protocol, NEMO route optimization, NEMO in vehicular scenario, Mobile ADhoc NEMO. (9) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. C. Sommer, F. Dressler, ―Vehicular Networking‖, Cambridge University Press, 2015 2. Hassnaa Moustafa and Yan Zhang, ―Vehicular networks – Techniques, Standards and applications‖ CRC Press, New York, 2009. 3. Stephen Olariu and Michele C Weigle, ―Vehicular networks – From theory to Practice‖, CRC Press, New York, 2009. 4. H. Hartensteinand K. P. Laberteaux, ―VANET: Vehicular Applications and InterNetworking Technologies‖, Wiley, 2010

18LC27 COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS FOR IOT 3003 INTRODUCTION: Internet of things overview, Design principles for connected devices, Web thinking for connected devices, Internet Principles. (5) 6LOWPAN AND RPL: 6LoWPAN and RPL Standardization Adaptation Layer RPL Downward Routes, Multicast Membership, Packet Routing

(8)

ZIGBEE SMART ENERGY 2.0: REST Overview, ZigBee SEP 2.0 Overview, Function Sets and Device Types, ZigBee SE 2.0 Security (8) ETSI M2M ARCHITECTURE: Introduction to ETSI TC M2M, System Architecture, ETSI M2M Interactions Overview, Security in the ETSI M2M Framework, Interworking with Machine Area Networks (9) COAP AND MQTT: Constrained application protocol overview, RFC 7252 , MQTT basics, Developing Projects , connecting to server, Controlling Output Devices.

(9)

CASE STUDIES: Smart Grid, Industrial Automation and Building automation, Connected Car, Connected Home, Digital Health, Smart city (6) Total : 45 REFERENCES: 1. Adrian McEwen,Hakim Cassimally ‖Designing the Internet of Things‖ John Wiley and Sons, Ltd , 2014. 2. Jan Holler, Vlasios Tsiatsis, Catherine Mulligan, Stamatis Karnouskos, Stefan Avesand, David Boyle ―From Machine-toMachine to the Internet of Things‖ Introduction to a New Age of Intelligence , Academic Press 2014 3. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick, Omar Elloumi ―The Internet of Things: Key Applications and Protocols‖, 2nd Edition John Wiley & Sons Ltd 2012. 4. Peter Waher ―Learning Internet of Things‖ 2015 Packt Publishing.

18LC28 RADIATING SYSTEMS 3003 ANTENNA FUNDAMENTALS: Antenna fundamental parameters Radiation integrals, Radiation from surface and line current distributions, monopole, loop antenna; Mobile phone antenna - hand set antenna - base station antenna-Radiation Hazards. (6) RADIATION FROM WIRE AND APERTURE ANTENNAS: Radiated fields of infinitesimal and half wave dipole,; Introduction to numerical techniques Field equivalence principle, Radiation from Rectangular and Circular apertures, Uniform aperture distribution on an infinite ground plane; Slot antenna; Horn antenna; Reflector antenna, aperture blockage, and design consideration. (12)

181

59th ACM

09.06.2018

ARRAY ANTENNA: Linear array –uniform array, end fire and broad side array, gain, beam width, side lobe level; Two dimensional uniform array; Phased array, beam scanning, grating lobe, feed network, Linear array synthesis techniques – Binomial and Chebyshev distributions. (9) MICRO STRIP ANTENNA: Radiation Mechanism and Excitation techniques : Microstrip dipole; Patch, Rectangular patch, Circular patch, and Ring antenna – radiation analysis from cavity model; input impedance of rectangular and circular patch antenna; Microstrip array and feed network; Applications of microstrip array antenna. (9) EMC ANTENNA AND ANTENNA MEASUREMENTS: Concept of EMC measuring antenna; Tx and Rx antenna factors; Log periodic dipole, Bi-conical, Ridge guide, Multi turn loop; Antenna measurement and instrumentation – Gain, Impedance and antenna factor measurement; Antenna test range Design. (9) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Balanis A, ―Antenna Theory Analysis and Design‖, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 2009. 2. Krauss J D, ―Antennas‖, John Wiley and sons, New York, 2009. 3. Stutzman W L and Thiele G A, ―Antenna Theory and Design‖, John Wiley and Sons Inc., 1998. 4. Bahl I J and Bhartia P, ―Microstrip Antennas‖, Artech House, Inc.,1980

18LC29 MULTIRATE SIGNAL PROCESSING 3003 INTRODUCTION: Review of sampling rate convertors and filter banks – two channel filter banks - paraunitary, biorthogonal, linear phase and transmultiplexer filter banks. (11) M-CHANNEL FILTER BANKS: Filter banks with tree and parallel structure – complex modulated, cosine modulated and transmultiplexer filter banks. (11) FILTER BANKS WITH POLYPHASE STRUCTURES: Fundamental polyphase structures – polyphase QMF banks – two-channel, M-channel, paraunitary and DFT polyphase filter banks. (11) OCTAVE FILTER BANKS, WAVELETS AND APPLICATIONS: Tree structured and multicomplementary filter banks – filter banks and wavelets – applications – modems – speech and audio coding – image and video coding – multirate techniques with sensors. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Fredric J Harris, ―Multirate Signal Processing for Communication Systems‖, Prentice Hall, 2014. 2. Vikram Gadre and Aditya Abhyankar, ―Multiresolution and Multirate Signal Processing: Introduction, Principles and Applications‖, McGraw Hill, 2013. 3. Ronald E Crochiere and Lawrence R. Rabiner, ―Multirate Digital Signal Processing‖, Prentice Hall, 2013. 4. Fliege N J, "Multirate Digital Signal Processing", John Wiley and sons, 2010. 5. Vaidyanathan P P, ―Multirate Systems and Filter banks‖, Prentice Hall, 2008.

18LC30 ADAPTIVE SIGNAL PROCESSING 3003 INTRODUCTION: Linear Filtering problem – Adaptive filters – Approaches to the development of adaptive filters – cost functions – Wiener filter – orthoganility principle – minimum MSE – Wiener Hopf Equations – error performance surface – linearly constrained minimum variance filter. (11) STOCHASTIC GRADIENT-BASED ALGORITHMS: Steepest descent algorithm – stability analysis - Least Mean Square algorithm – stability and convergence analysis – variants of LMS algorithm (10) RECURSIVE LEAST SQUARE ALGORITHMS: Matrix inversion lemma - Exponentially Weighted RLS – Sliding Window RLS – convergence analysis – operation of RLS in nonstationary environment – comparison of RLS and LMS algorithms. (10) KALMAN FILTER AND FILTERING APPLICATIONS: Recursive minimum mean square estimation – state space model Innovation process – Extended Kalman Filter - Adaptive Modeling & System Identification - Inverse Adaptive Modeling – Deconvolution – Equalization - Adaptive self tuning filter - Adaptive Line enhancer. - Harmonic cancellation with adaptive prediction. (14) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Haykin S, ―Adaptive Filter Theory", Prentice Hall Inc, 2012. 2. Widrow B and Stearns S D, "Adaptive Signal Processing", Prentice Hall inc., 2011. 3. Cowan C F N and Grant P M, "Adaptive Filters", Prentice Hall inc., 2010 4. Farhang Boroujeny, ―Adaptive Filters Theory and Applications‖, John Wiley & Sons, 2010 5. Alexander S T, "Adaptive Signal Processing: Theory and Applications ", Springer – Verlag, 2010.

182

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18LC31 WAVELETS AND SUBBAND CODING 3003

INTRODUCTION: Signal spaces - concept of Convergence - Hilbert spaces for energy signals. Fourier basis & Fourier Transform – Limitations of standard Fourier analysis – Need for Time-Frequency Analysis, Spectrogram plot – Windowed Fourier transform Tiling of the Time-Frequency Plane for STFT – Heisenberg‘s Uncertainty principle – Short time Fourier transform (STFT) Analysis- short comings of STFT- Need for Wavelets. (9) CONTINUOUS WAVELET TRANSFORMS (CWT): Introduction, Continuous Time wavelets, Definition of CWT, The CWT as a correlation, Constant Q-Factor Filtering Interpolation and time frequency resolution, the CWT as an operator, inverse CWT. (9) DISCRETE WAVELET TRANSFORM (DWT) AND MRA: Introduction, Approximation of vectors in nested linear vector spaces, example of an MRA-Bases for the approximations subspaces and Haar scaling function, Bases for detail subspaces and Haar wavelet, Formal definition of an MRA, Construction of a general orthonormal MRA, A wavelet basis for MRA, Interpreting orthonormal MRAs for Discrete time signals, Daubechies Wavelets, Relationship between Filter banks and wavelet basis, Important wavelets: Haar, Mexican hat, Meyer, Shannon, Daubechies (10) ADVANCED TOPICS: Wavelet packets, Non - separable multidimensional wavelets, Bi-orthogonal basis-B-Splines, Lifting scheme of wavelet generation, Multiwavelets, Ridgelets, Curvelets. (9) APPLICATIONS OF WAVELETS: Signal Denoising - Sub-band coding of Speech and music– Image Compression using 2-D DWT- JPEG 2000 standard - Fractal Signal Analysis. (8) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Soman K P and Ramachandran K I, ―Insight into Wavelets from Theory to Practice‖, Prentice Hall India, 2010 2. Jaideva C Goswami and Andrew K Chan, ―Fundamentals of Wavelets – Theory, Algorithms and Applications‖, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., Singapore, 1999. 3. Vetterli M and Kovacevic J, "Wavelets and Subband Coding," Prentice Hall, 1995. 4. Wornell G W, "Signal Processing with Fractals: A Wavelet based Approach‖, Prentice Hall, 1995. 5. Fliege. N J, ―Multirate Digital Signal Processing‖, John Wiley and Sons, Newyork,1994.

18LC32 DIGITAL IMAGE AND VIDEO PROCESSING 3003 DIGITAL IMAGE AND VIDEO BASICS: Human visual system and image perception, Types of Images, Digitization of Images, Sampled Images, Quantized Images, Digital Video, Sampled video and colour vision models, 2D signals and systems; image transforms ‐ 2D DFT, DCT, KLT, Harr transform and discrete Wavelet transform (10) IMAGE AND VIDEO ENHANCEMENT AND RESTORATION: Linear Image Enhancement, Non-Linear Image Enhancement: Weighted median filters, Image Noise cleaning, Image Zooming, Image Sharpening, Edge Detection, Wavelet denoising, Image restoration, Video Enhancement, Filtering and restoration (10) IMAGE AND VIDEO CLASSIFICATION AND SEGMENTATION: Statistical methods of segmentation, Texture classification and segmentation, Gradient and Laplacian type edge detection, Diffusion based edge detectors, video segmentation (8) IMAGE AND VIDEO STORAGE, RETRIEVAL AND COMMUNICATIONS: Image and Video Indexing and retrieval, Video browsing and retrieval, Image and video communication networks, Image watermarking and authentication (9) IMAGE AND VIDEO PROCESSING APPLICATIONS: Pixel-based model. Case study 1: Surveillance system, Space-frequency model. case study 2: Mosaic creation, Geometrical model. case study 3: Video restoration, Region-based model. Case study 4: object tracking (8) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: st 1. Yao wang, Joem Ostarmann and Ya–quin Zhang, ‖Video processing and communication‖ , 1 edition , PHI, 2015 2. Chris Solomon, Toby Breckon ,"Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing A Practical Approach with Examples in Matlab", John Wiley & Sons,2011 3. Gonzaleze and Woods, ―Digital Image Processing‖, 3rd edition , Prentice Hall, 2008 4. Alan Bovik ―Handbook of Image and Video Processing‖ 2nd Edition ,Academic Press, 2005

18LC33 MULTIMEDIA COMPRESSION 3003 INTRODUCTION: Compression Techniques - Overview of information theory - lossless and lossy coding– Modeling and Coding Taxonomy of compression techniques – Rate distortion theory - Huffman coding – Non-Binary Huffman codes – adaptive Huffman coding – Application of Huffman coding. (8) ARITHMETIC CODING AND DICTIONARY TECHNIQUES: Introduction - coding a sequence – generating deciphering the tag – Generating a binary code – Uniqueness of arithmetic code – Algorithm, integer implementation – comparison of Huffman and 183

59th ACM

09.06.2018

arithmetic coding – Applications -Static and Adaptive dictionary – LZ77, LZ78, LZW approach – Applications - Facsimile encoding – run length coding – comparison of MH, MR, MMR and JBIG. Scalar and Vector Quantization (10) AUDIO COMPRESSION: Audio compression techniques - frequency domain and filtering - basic sub-band coding - application to speech coding - G.722 - application to audio coding - MPEG audio - silence suppression - speech compression techniques – Vocoders. (10) IMAGE COMPRESION: Predictive techniques - DPCM, DM - KL transform – discrete cosine, Walsh- Hadamard transform - JPEG, Wavelet based compression: quad-trees, EZW, SPIHT, JPEG-2000. (9) VIDEO COMPRESSION: Video signal representation – Motion compensation – MPEG standards - Motion estimation techniques H.261 family of standards - Motion video compression. (8) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Khalid Sayood, ―Introduction to Data Compression‖, Morgan Kaufman, 2012. 2. Salomon D, ―Data Compression The Complete Reference‖, Springer, 2007. 3. Salomon D, ―A Guide to Data Compression Methods‖, Springer, 2002. 4. Alistar Moffat, ―Compression and Coding Algorithms‖, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2002. 5. Jan Vozer, ―Video Compression for Multimedia‖, AP Press, New York, 1995.

18LC34 COMPUTER VISION AND MACHINE LEARNING 3003 IMAGES AND IMAGING OPERATIONS: Introduction-Image Processing Operations- Image Filtering Operation-Region Growing Methods -Thresholding, Adaptive, Thresholding-Edge Detection-Template Operators-Differential Gradient Operators-Circular Operator-Corner and Interest Point Detection-Basic Approaches to Texture Analysis. (10) SHAPE AND BOUNDARY PATTERN ANALYSIS: Binary Shape Analysis-Connectedness-size filtering -Distance Functions Skeletons and Thinning-Measures for Shape Recognition-Boundary Tracking Procedures- Centroidal Profiles-Occlusion-Boundary Length Measures-Methods of Line, Circle and Ellipse Detection. (9) 3D VISION AND MOTION: 3-D Vision Methods - Projection Schemes for 3D Vision- Photometric Stereo- Shape from Texture Structured Lighting -Three-Dimensional Object Recognition Schemes-Orientation Technique. (8) MACHINE LEARNING TECHNIQUES: Perceptron, multi-layer perceptron, backpropagation algorithm, Unsupervised learning and clustering – k-means clustering, fuzzy k-means clustering, hierarchical clustering, SVM, SIFT, SURF, Adaboost algorithms. (9) MACHINE VISION APPLICATIONS: Case study1: Automated Visual Inspection of objects, Case study2: Inspection of Food Products, Case study3: Surveillance, Case study4: Vehicle Guidance in Agriculture, Case study5: Path Planning, Navigation and Egomotion (9) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Michael Beyeler ―Machine Learning for OpenCV‖, First Edition, Packt Publishers, 2017 2. E. R. Davies, ―Computer and Machine Vision: Theory, Algorithms, Practicalities‖, Fourth Edition, Elsevier Inc, 2012. 3. Szeliski, Richard, ―Computer Vision: Algorithms and Applications‖, First Edition, Springer-Verlag London Limited, 2011. 4. C. Bishop, ―Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning‖, Springer, 2006.

18LC35 SPEECH SIGNAL PROCESSING 3003 SPEECH SIGNAL MODELLING: Speech signal characteristics and classifications - Speech production mechanism - Acoustic Theory of speech production - Source – Filter model - Lossless Tube Models - Digital Model of speech signals. (9) SPEECH SIGNAL ANALYSIS: Time domain Analysis for speech processing – Short time energy and magnitude - short time average zero crossing – Speech vs silence discrimination (9) FRQUENCY DOMAIN ANALYSIS: Pitch period estimation using autocorrelation - Short time Fourier analysis- Definition and properties - Design of digital filter banks - Pitch detection - analysis by synthesis. (9) SPEECH CODING: Linear predictive coding - principle - solution of LPC equation - Cholesky decomposition method - Durbin's method - Lattice formulation –Frequency domain coding – Model based coding – LPC residual coding. (9) SPEECH RECOGNITION: Template training method - Hidden Markov Model-Gaussian Mixture model- connected word recognitionSpeaker identification/Verification. (9) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Rebner LR K and Juang BH, "Fundamentals of Speech Recognition", Pearson Education, First Indian reprint, 2003. 2. Thomas FQuatieri, ―Discrete Time Speech Signal Processing‖, Pearson Education, 2002. 184

59th ACM 3. 4. 5.

09.06.2018

John R Deller, John Hansen and ProakisJG,―Discrete Time Processing of Speech Signals‖, IEEE Press, 1999. Kondoz, "Digital Speech", John Wiley and Sons Ltd., 1994. Rabiner LR and Schaffer RW, "Digital Processing of Speech Signals", Prentice -Hall, Englewod - Clitts, New Jersey, 1986.

18LC36 ERROR CONTROL CODING 3003 FINITE FIELD ARITHMETIC: Set, Group, field, vector spaces, elementary properties of Galois fields, Galois field arithmetic, Addition of polynomials, Subtraction of polynomials, Multiplication of polynomials, Division of polynomials, Irreducible polynomial, Primitive polynomial, Construction of GF (2m). (9) BCH AND REED SOLOMON CODES: Non-binary BCH codes, Berlekamp–Massey Algorithm, Chien Search algorithm, Non-binary RS codes, REED SOLOMON Design, decoding of non-binary codes, Welch—Berlekamp Algorithm. (9) TURBO CODES: Turbo Encoder, Different Types of Interleavers, Turbo Coding Illustration, Turbo Decoder, The BCJR Algorithm, Performance Analysis of the Turbo Codes, Effect of Number of Iterations on the Performance of the Turbo Codes, Effect of Puncturing on the Performance of the Turbo Codes (9) LOW-DENSITY PARITY-CHECK (LDPC) CODES: LDPC code properties, representation using Tanner Graph, LDPC encoding, preprocessing method, LDPC decoding, Bit flipping algorithm, Sum Product algorithm, Min Sum algorithm. (9) LT AND RAPTOR CODES: LT Codes design, Systematic LT codes, Raptor Codes

(9) Total L: 45

REFERENCES: 1. K.Deeraga Rao, "Channel Coding Techniques for Wireless Communications", Springer, 1st edition, 2015. 2. Shu Lin and Daniel J. Costello. Jr, "Error control coding", Pearson, Prentice Hall, 2nd edition, 2004. 3. Peter Sweeney, ―Error Control Coding from Theory to Practice‖, John Wiley and Sons, 2002. 4. Richard B Wells, ―Applied Coding and Information Theory for Engineers‖, Prentice Hall, 1st edition, 1998.

18LC37 EVOLUTIONARY COMPUTATION 3003 INTRODUCTION: Soft Computing, requirement, different tools and techniques, usefulness and applications. Artificial Neural Network: Introduction, basic models, Hebb's learning, Perceptron, Multilayer feed forward network, Back propagation, Different issues regarding convergence of Multilayer Perceptron, Competitive learning, Self-Organizing Feature Maps, SVM, Applications. (10) FUZZY SETS AND FUZZY LOGIC: Introduction, Fuzzy sets versus crisp sets, operations on fuzzy sets, Extension principle, Fuzzy relations and relation equations, Fuzzy numbers, Linguistic variables, Fuzzy logic, Linguistic hedges, Applications, fuzzy database. fuzzy controllers, fuzzy pattern recognition, fuzzy image processing. (9) GENETIC ALGORITHM(GA): Different operators of GA, analysis of selection operations, Hypothesis of building blocks, Schema theorem and convergence of Genetic Algorithm, Advanced operators, Simulated annealing, Applications. (9) ANT COLONY OPTIMIZATION: Ant foraging behavior - Theoretical considerations – ACO Algorithm – ACO Theory and model based search. (8) PARTICLE SWARM & ARTIFICIAL BEE COLONY(ABC)OPTIMIZATION: Principles of bird flocking and fish schooling – Evolution of PSO – Operating principles – PSO Algorithm – Neighborhood Topologies – Convergence criteria – Behavior of real bees, ABC algorithm. (9) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Anupam Shukla, Rahul Kala, and Ritu Tiwari,‖ Real Life Applications of Soft Computing‖, CRC Press, 2010 2. S.N.Sivanadam, S.N.Deepa, ―Introduction to Genetic Algorithms‖ Springer, 2008 3. Marco Dorigo and Thomas Stutzle, ―Ant Colony optimization‖, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi 2005. 4. RajasekaranS and PaiG A V, ―Neural Networks, Fuzzy logic, and Genetic Algorithms,‖ PHI, 2003 5. Kennedy J and Russel C Eberhart, ―Swarm Intelligence‖, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, USA, 2001. 6. GoldbergD E, ―Genetic Algorithms in Search and Optimization, and Machine Learning‖, Addison-Wesley, 1989.

18LC38 DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS 2203 INTRODUCTION: Software Development process – Data structures - Abstract Data Types - Analysis of algorithms - Best, worst and average case time complexities - notations. (4+4) ARRAYS: Operations - Implementation of one, two, three and multi dimensioned arrays – Sparse and dense matrices Applications. (4+6) STACK AND QUEUE: Stack operations - implementations - Applications: Function handling - Recursion – Expression Evaluation. Queue - operations - implementations - Priority Queues - Dequeues - Applications: Job scheduling. (6+4) LISTS: Operations - Singly linked lists, doubly linked lists, Circular lists - Applications – Linked Stacks - Linked queues. 185

(6+4)

59th ACM

09.06.2018

TREES AND GRAPHS: Tree Terminologies - Implementation - Binary Tree: Properties – representation of trees, operations Traversals- Expression trees - Infix, Postfix and Prefix expressions – Dijkstra‘s Algorithms - Floyd‘s Algorithm.GraphTerminologies representations-graph search methods: Breadth first search, Depth first search, Minimum spanning trees-Multistage graph. (6+6) SORTING: Insertion sort - Selection sort - Bubble sort - Radix sort - Algorithms and their time complexities.

(4+6)

TUTORIAL COMPONENT: 1. Analysis of algorithms 2. Implementation of stack and queue 3. Evaluation of expressions 4. Singly and doubly linked lists implementation 5. Binary tree traversal. 6. Single source shortest path algorithm – Dijkstra‘s algorithm, 7. All pairs shortest path problem- Floyd‘s Algorithm 8. Graph search method implementation Total L: 30+T: 30=60 REFERENCES: 1. Robert L Kruse, Bruce P Leung and Clovin L Tondo, ―Data Structures and Program Design in C‖, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009. 2. VijayalakshmiPai G A, ―Data Structures and Algorithms: Concepts Techniques and Applications‖, McGraw-Hill, 2009. 3. A. Chitra P T Rajan ―Data Structures", Tata McGraw Hill Education, 2008. 4. Ellis Horowitz ,SartajSahni and SanguthevarRajasekaran, ‗Computer Algorithms/C++‘, Orient Black Swan, 2008. 5. Mark Allen Weiss, ―Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C‖, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2007. 6. SahniSartaj, "Data Structures, Algorithms and Applications in C++", Universities Press, Hyderabad, 2005.

AUDIT COURSES 18LC81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP81

18LC82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP82

186

59th ACM

09.06.2018

13. Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment

ME VLSI DESIGN Course Code 18LV01 18LV02 18LV03 18LV04 18LV05 18LV51 18LV81

18LV06 18LV07 18LV08 18LV09 18LV__ 18LV__ 18LV52 18LV61 18LV82

Course Title Graph Theory and Optimization Techniques Device Modelling Digital IC Design Designing with FPGAs Low Power VLSI Design VLSI Design Laboratory English for Research Paper Writing Total 24 Hrs Analog VLSI Circuits VLSI Testing Computer Aided Design for VLSI systems Hardware Verification Techniques Professional Elective - 1 Professional Elective - 2 Advanced VLSI Design Laboratory Industry Visit & Technical Seminar Research Methodology and IPR Total 30 Hours

Hours/Week Lecture Tutorial Practical Semester I 2

(2018 REGULATIONS) (Minimum No. of credits to be earned: 74*) Maximum Marks Credits CAT CA FE Total

2

0

3

50

50

100

PC

3 2 3 0 3 2 3 0 0 0 0 0 14 6 Semester II 3 2 3 0 3 0 3 2 3 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 18 4

0 0 0 0 4 ** 4

4 3 4 3 2 Grade 19

50 50 50 50 50 0 300

50 50 50 50 50 0 3000

100 100 100 100 100 0 600

PC PC PC PC PC MC

0 0 0 0 0 0 4 4 ** 8

4 3 3 4 3 3 2 2 Grade 24

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 0 400

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 0 400

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 0 800

PC PC PC PC PE PE PC EEC MC

0 0 0 0 4 6

3 3 3 3 2 3 17

50 50 50 50 50 50 300

50 50 50 50 50 50 300

100 100 100 100 100 100 600

PE PE PE PE PC EEC

28 28

14 14

50 50

50 50

100 100

EEC

0 0

3 3

50 50

50 50

100 100

PE PE

0

3

50

50

100

PE

0 0 0 0 0 0

3 3 3 3 3 3

50 50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE PE PE

0

3

50

50

100

PE

0 0

3 3

50 50

50 50

100 100

PE PE

0

3

50

50

100

PE

0

3

50

50

100

PE

0 0 0

3 3 3

50 50 50

50 50 50

100 100 100

PE PE PE

Semester III 18LV__ 18LV__ 18LV__ 18LV__ 18LV53 18LV71

Professional Elective - 3 Professional Elective - 4 Professional Elective - 5 Professional Elective - 6 VLSI System Design Laboratory Project Work I Total

3 3 3 3 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

Semester IV 0 0 Total 0 0 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES (Six to be opted) 18LV21 Mixed Signal VLSI Design 3 0 18LV22 VLSI Signal Processing 2 2 Semiconductor Memory Design and 18LV23 3 0 Testing 18LV24 VLSI Technology 3 0 18LV25 VLSI for Wireless Communication 3 0 18LV26 RF Circuit Design 3 0 18LV27 MEMS AND NEMS 3 0 18LV28 System on Chip Design 3 0 18LV29 Embedded System Design 2 2 Synthesis and Optimization of Digital 18LV30 3 0 Circuits 18LV31 High Speed Digital Design 3 0 18LV32 Nano Scale Devices 3 0 Modelling and Simulation of Nanoscale 18LV33 2 2 Transistors Advanced Computer Architecture and 18LV34 3 0 Parallel Processing 18LV35 Hardware security 3 0 18LV36 VLSI for Biomedical Systems 3 0 18LV37 Electronic packaging Technologies 3 0 18LV72

Project Work II

187

59th ACM 18LV38 18LV39 18LV40

VLSI For IOT Systems Quantum Dot Cellular Automata NanoTechnology Genetic Algorithms for VLSI Design

09.06.2018 3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PE

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PE

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PE

* Indicated is the minimum number of credits to be earned by a student. ** - 60 hrs in I semester and 90 hrs in II semester; Grade: Completed / Not Completed CAT – Category; PC – Professional Core; PE - Professional Elective EEC – Employability Enhancement Course; MCMandatory Course

188

59th ACM

09.06.2018 SEMESTER I 18LV01 GRAPH THEORY AND OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES 2203

BASIC CONCEPTS IN GRAPH THEORY: Common families of graphs, degree sequence, handshaking lemma, Havel-Hakimi theorem (statement only). Walk, trail and path, connected graph, distance, radius and diameter. Graph isomorphism. Representations of graphs – adjacency and incidence lists - adjacency and incidence matrices. Digraph – orientation, strongly, weakly and unilaterally connected digraphs. (8+7) GRAPH ALGORITHMS: Trees, spanning trees, matrix tree theorem. Search algorithms – depth first search and breadth first search, spanning tree algorithm–Kruskal’s and Prim’s, shortest path algorithm–Dijkstra’s flow networks: flows and cuts in networks, solution of the maximum - flow problem – characterization of maximum flow - Max-flow Min-cut Theorem (statement only), algorithms – maximum flow, augmenting path, and FFEK – maximum flow. (8+7) LINEAR PROGRAMMING: Formulation, simplex method, two phase method, simplex multipliers, dual and primal, dual simplex method. Transportation model – initial basic feasible solution- north-west corner rule, least-cost method, Vogel’s approximation method, and optimum solution of transportation problem. (8+7) DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING: Principle of optimality, backward and forward recursion, calculus method of solution, tabular method of solution, shortest-route problem, Knapsack model. (8+7) Total REFERENCES: 1. West D B, Introduction to graph Theory, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2018. 2. Hamdy A Taha, Operations Research: An Introduction, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2017. 3. Narasingh Deo, Graph Theory: with applications to engineering and computer science, PHI Learning, 2017. 4. Kambo N.S., Mathematical Programming Techniques, East – West Press, New Delhi, 2012 5. Jonathan L Gross and Jay Yellen, Graph Theory and its Applications, Chapman & Hall, New York, 2006.

L:32 + T:28 = 60

18LV02 DEVICE MODELLING 3204 INTRODUCTION TO SEMICONDUCTOR PHYSICS AND DIODE MODELLING: Review of Quantum Mechanics - Boltzmann transport equation - Continuity equation - Poisson equation. Junction and Schottky diodes in monolithic technologies - static and dynamic behavior - small and large signal models - SPICE models. (12+8) INTEGRATED MOS CAPACITANCE: Band diagram- flat band condition and flat band voltage-surface accumulation, surface depletion-threshold condition and threshold voltage, charge versus gate voltage, MOS C-V Characteristics, Poly Si gate depletioneffective Increase In Tox. (8+6) VLSI FABRICATION TECHNIQUES: An overview of wafer fabrication, wafer processing- oxidation - patterning - Diffusion - Ion implantation - Deposition - Silicon Gate nmos process - CMOS process - nwell - pwell -Twin tub - Silicon on Insulator - CMOS process enhancements - Interconnects circuit elements. (10+8) INTEGRATED MOS TRANSISTOR: nMOS and PMOS Transistor - Threshold voltage - Threshold voltage equations - MOS device equations - Basic DC equations Second order effects - Small signal AC Characteristics- MOS models SPICE model, EKV Model, BSIM Model. Technology scaling for cost, speed and power consumption, Subthershold Current –Sub threshold Swing, Threshold voltage Roll Off-Short Channel Leakage, reducing gate insulator electrical thickness And Tunneling Leakage, Short Channel Effects. Ultra Thin body, SOI and Multigate MOSFET - FINFET. MOSFET Compact Model for Circuit Simulation using Verilog A. (15+8) Total L: 45+T: 30 =75 TUTORIAL COMPONENT:    

Modeling of PN junction and Schottky diodes and plotting device characteristics Modeling of PMOS and NMOS devices and plotting transfer and output characteristics. Modeling of SOI, multigate, UTB and FINFET devices plotting transfer and output characteristics. Spice model, EKV Model and BSIM model parameter extractions

REFERENCES: 1. Chenming C.Hu, ”Modern Semiconductors for Integrated Circuits”, Prentice Hall, 2010 2. Neil Weste and David Harris: A Circuits and Systems Perspective”, Pearson, 2010. 3. Tyagi M S, "Introduction to Semi-conductor Materials and Devices", John Wiley, 2008. 4. Richard S. Muller, ‎Theodore I. Kamins, ‎MansunChan,”Device electronics for integrated circuits”, John Wiley, 2003. 5. Yannis Tsividis, "Operation and modeling of the mos transistor” Oxford University Press, 2013.

189

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18LV03 DIGITAL IC DESIGN 3003

OVERVIEW OF VLSI DESIGN METHODOLOGY: VLSI design process - Architectural design - Logical design-Physical designLayout styles - Full custom, Semicustom approaches. Layout design rules: Need for design rules – Layer representations - CMOS nwell / pwell design rules – Design rule backgrounder-Layer assignments - SOI rules. (11) MOS INVERTER: Static characteristics - Resistive load inverter - Inverter with n-type MOSFET load - CMOS inverter - Transient characteristics - Delay time definitions, calculation of delay times. (11) LOGIC DESIGN: Static CMOS Design - Complementary CMOS, Ratioed logic, Pass transistor and transmission gate - Dynamic CMOS logic - . CMOS logic - Precharged domino logic.- Static Sequential circuits - Bistatbility, CMOS static FF, Dynamic sequential circuits – Pseudo static latch, Dynamic two phase FF, Clocked- CMOS latch, NORA CMOS logic, TSPCL logic. (11) VLSI BUILDING BLOCKS DESIGN: Adders, Shifters, Arithmetic logic unit design, Multipliers-Array, Carry Save multiplier, Wallace tree, Booth's algorithm, Modified Booths Algorithm. Designing Memory and Array Structures-Memory peripheral circuit. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Jan M Rabaey, “Digital Integrated Circuits", Prentice Hall, second edition, 2016. 2. Kang, “CMOS Digital integrated Circuits”, McGraw Hill, 2016. 3. Neil Weste and David Harris, “CMOS VLSI Design: A Circuits and Systems Perspective”, Pearson, 4th edition 2015. 4. Douglas A Pucknell, Kamran Eshraghian, "Basic VLSI Design", PHI learning, New Delhi, 2011. 5. Saida M Sait and Habib Youssef, “VLSI Physical Design Automation: Theory and Practice”, World Scientific Publishing Company, 1999.

18LV04 DESIGNING WITH FPGAS 3204 VERILOG: Signals, Identifier, Net and variable types, Operators, Gate instantiations, Modules and ports, data flow, gate level, Behavioral level ,Switch level and state machine modeling , Concurrent and procedural statements, UDP, sub circuit parameters, function and task, timing and delays - test benches-design of combinational and sequential circuits using Verilog. (12+10) FPGA ARCHITECTURES: Design flow using FPGAs, Role and Types of CAD Tools - Architecture of Xilinx and Altera FPGAs – configurable logic blocks, I/O blocks - programmable interconnections - clock circuits – programming technologies – antifuse, SRAM, EPROM, EEPROM - Implementation using FPGA – timing models – critical path - calculation of maximum clock frequency power analysis. (10+5) CONTROL PATH AND DATA PATH DESIGN: Design of memories - ROM, single and dual port RAM - synchronous and asynchronous read - arithmetic circuit design - serial/parallel adder, subtractor, floating point adder/subtractor multiplier - sequential multiplier, array multiplier, signed multiplier – ALU – Hardwired Control Design – Micro programmed Control Design. (10+5) CONTROLLER AND DSP DESIGN: Memory controller, processor control unit, communication controllers - UART, I2C, VGA controller, USB, DSP blocks- FIR and IIR filters. (13+10) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 TUTORIAL COMPONENT:     

Modeling and simulation of combinational and sequential circuits using Verilog. Design and Implementation of arithmetic circuits. Design and implementation of real time clock and controller. Design and implementation of memory modules and filters. Interfacing with ADC/DAC and display modules.

REFERENCES: 1. Morris Mano M, Charles R Kime, “Logic and Computer Design Fundamentals”, Pearson Education, 2015. 2. Charles H. Roth, "Digital system design using VHDL”, Thomson, 2014. 3. Seetharaman Ramachandran, “Digital VLSI systems design”, Springer, 2011. 4. Michael D Ciletti, “Advanced Digital Design with Verilog HDL”, Pearson education, 2005. 5. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL: A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis”, Prentice Hall, 2003.

18LV05 LOW POWER VLSI DESIGN 3003 POWER DISSIPATION IN CMOS: Physics of Power Dissipation in CMOS FET Devices-Sources of power consumption-Static Power dissipation- Dynamic Power dissipation-Leakage power dissipation-Basic Principles of Low Power Design. (8) POWER ANALYSIS AND ESTIMATION: SPICE circuit simulation-Gate level Analysis, Architecture level Analysis, Data Correlation Analysis, Monte-Carlo Simulation, Probabilistic Power Analysis. Statistical Techniques - Estimation of Glitching Power - Sensitivity Analysis - Circuit Reliability - Power Estimation at the circuit level - High level Power Estimation - Information Theory based approaches - Estimation of maximum power. (10)

190

59th ACM

09.06.2018

POWER OPTIMISATION TECHNIQUES: Circuit Level – Transistor and Gate Sizing, Equivalent Pin Ordering, Network Restructuring and Reorganization, Special Latches and Flip Flops, Low Power Digital Cell Library, Adjustable Device Threshold Voltage. Leakage current in deep sub micrometer transistors (4) SPECIAL TECHNIQUES: Gate Reorganization, Signal Gating, Logic Encoding, State Machine Encoding, Precomputational Logic. Architectural and System Level – Power and Performance Management, Switching Activity Reduction, Parallel Architecture with Voltage Reduction, Flow Graph Transformation. Advanced Techniques- Adiabatic Computation, Pass Transistor Logic Synthesis, Asynchronous Circuits, Low power bus – low swing bus, charge recycling bus, delay balancing. (8) LOW POWER MEMORIES: Basics of ROM, Low power ROM Technoloy, Basics of SRAM-Memory Cell-Low Power SRAM Technology-Precharge and Equalisation Circuit-Basics of DRAM-Low Power DRAM Technology. Synthesis for Low PowerBehavioral Level Transform-Logic Level Optimization for Low Power. (9) LOW VOLTAGE BiCMOS CIRCUIT DESIGN: Conventional BiCMOS Logic-BiCMOS Logic Family-Low Voltage BiCMOS Logic family-Low Voltage BiCMOS Applications. (6) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Kaushik Roy and Sharat C Prasad ,“Low Power CMOS VLSI circuit Design”, John Wiley and Sons, 2000. 2. Kuo J B and Lou J H, “Low Voltage CMOS VLSI Circuits”, John Wiley and Sons, Singapore, 1999. 3. Gary B Yeap K, "Practical Low Power Digital VLSI Design”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1998. 4. AbdelatifBelaouar, Mohamed l Elmasry,’Low Power Digital VLSI Design’, Kluwer Academic Press, 1995. 5. Anantha P Chandrakasan and Robert W Brodersen, “Low Power Digital CMOS Design”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, Holland, 1995.

18LV51

VLSI DESIGN LABORATORY 0042

    

Study of MOS and Inverter characteristics Design of static and dynamic digital circuits Design of Memories with Peripherals Model parameter extraction for diode, BJT, MOSFET Layout generation from schematics Total P: 60

SEMESTER II 18LV06 ANALOG VLSI CIRCUITS 3204 ANALOG CIRCUIT BUILDING BLOCKS: Switches, Active resistors, Current sources and sinks, Current mirrors, Voltage references, Comparator, Multiplier, Single source amplifiers – Common source, Common drain and common gate. (11+8) AMPLIFIERS: MOS inverting amplifier - Improving performance of inverting amplifier - CMOS differential amplifiers – Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis, Characterization of Op-Amp - CMOS two stage op-amp -Op-amps with output stage, Folded Cascode opamp, Transconductance Amplifier-Noise and Distortion in Amplifiers. (12+8) PHASE LOCKED LOOPS: Phase Detector-Voltage Controlled Oscillator-Loop Filter. LAYOUT ISSUES: CMOS design rules - layout of CMOS - BJT- Capacitors – Resistors - Mixed layout issues: Floor planning, power supply & ground, fully differential matching, Guard rings and shielding. (11+6) DATA CONVERTER FUNDAMENTALS: Ideal A/D and D/A converters, Quantization noise, Signed codes, Performance limitations. D/A AND A/D CONVERTERS: D/A converter : Current scaling, Voltage scaling and Charge scaling D/A converters -Serial D/A converters -Serial A/D converters, Parallel - A/D converters. (11+8) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 TUTORIAL COMPONENT:  Design and Simulation of analog building blocks,  Design and Simulation of Amplifiers,  Design and Simulation of data converters  Design and Simulation of PLL. REFERENCES: 1. Phillip Allen and Douglas Holberg, “CMOS Analog Circuit Design”, Oxford University Press, 2012. 2. Jacob Baker, “CMOS, Circuit Design Layout and Simulation”, Wiley- IEEE Press, 2011. 3. Randall L Geiger, Phillip E Allen and Noel R Strader, "VLSI Design Techniques for Analog and Digital Circuits", McGraw Hill, International Edition, 2010. 4. David A Johns and Ken Martin, “Analog Integrated Circuit Design”, John Wiley and Sons, 2008. 5. Benhard Razavi, “Data Converters”, Kluwer Publishers, 2005.

191

59th ACM 6.

09.06.2018

Paul R Gray and Robert G Meyer “Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated Circuits”, John Wiley and Son, 2005.

18LV07 VLSI TESTING 3003 FAULT SIMULATION AND COMBINATIONAL CIRCUIT TESTING: Motivation for testing and design for testability - Fault models Fault simulation techniques-Serial, Deductive, Parallel and Concurrent Simulation. Test generation algorithms for combinational logic circuits - Fault Table, Boolean difference, Path sensitization, D - algorithm PODEM, FAN algorithms. Path and delay fault testing (12) SEQUENTIAL CIRCUIT TESTING AND DESIGN FOR TESTABILITY: Functional testing –Fault model based testing- Time frame expansion, Key testability concepts – Ad Hoc design for Testability – scan based design - Signature analysis - Compression techniques-Built-in self-test -Architectures-Boundary scan standard. (11) ANALOG AND MIXED SIGNAL TEST: Analog testing difficulties, Fault models, Analog fault simulation, ADC and DAC testing methods-Analog test bus standard. (11) MEMORY AND SOC TESTING: Memory testing-fault models-test algorithms-BIST architectures for memory, System test functional test - diagnostic test - core based design and test wrapper - test architecture for soc - Testability features for board test FPGA testing. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Wang, Wu and Wen, “VLSI Test Principles and Architectures”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2006. 2. Vishwani D Agarwal, “Essential of Electronic Testing for Digital, Memory and Mixed Signal Circuits”, Springer, 2005. 3. N.K.Jha, S.Gupta, “Testing of Digital systems”, Cambridge university press, 2003. 4. Parag K Lala, “Digital Circuit Testing and Testability”, Academic Press, 1997. 5. Abramovici M, Breuer M A and Friedman A D, “Digital Systems Testing and Testable Design”, Wiley, 1994.

18LV08 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN FOR VLSI SYSTEMS 3003 ALGORITHM & SYNTHESIS: VLSI Design cycle - Role of CAD tools in the VLSI Design process -data structures and algorithms: Complexity of algorithms, dynamic programming, Integer linear programming, Genetic algorithm, Simulated Annealing. Logic synthesis – two level synthesis, Binary decision diagrams, and ROBDD principles. (13) PHYSICAL DESIGN AUTOMATION: Partitioning - KL, FM algorithms, Placement – Simulation based algorithms - Simulated Annealing , Force Directed Algorithm, Partitioning based algorithms- Breuer’s Algorithm, Terminal propagation Algorithm , Cluster Growth Algorithm , Floor planning – slicing floor plan , Constraint Based Floor Planning, Integer Program Based Floor Planning – Pin Assignment. (12) ROUTING: Grid routing – Maze Routing Algorithms, Global routing - Shortest Path Based Algorithms, Steiner tree based Algorithms, detailed routing – Left Edge algorithm, Dog-Leg Algorithm , Greedy Channel Routing, Switch Box Routing algorithmsover the cell routing, Clock Routing. (10) LAYOUT SYNTHESIS AND OPTIMISATION: Layout generation and Optimization of standard cell layout, gate matrix layout and PLA, Layout Compaction – one dimensional and two dimensional compaction. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Sabih H Gerez, “Algorithms for VLSI Design Automation”, John Wiley & Sons, 2008. 2. Sherwani N A, “Algorithms for VLSI Physical Design Automation”, Kluwer, 2007. 3. Sait S M and Youssef H, “VLSI Physical Design Automation”, World Scientific, 2004. 4. Micheli G D, “Synthesis and Optimization of Digital Circuits”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.

18LV09 HARDWARE VERIFICATION TECHNIQUES 3204 VERIFICATION TECHNOLOGIES AND TOOLS: Importance of Verification - Reconvergence Model - The Human Factor - Formal and Functional Verification Approaches - Timing Verification - Testing Versus Verification - Design and Verification Reuse - Linting Simulation - Third Party Models - Verification Intellectual Property - Waveform Viewers - Code Coverage - Functional Coverage Issue Tracking – Metrics - Role of the Verification Plan - Levels of Verification - Verification strategies. (12+8) HIGH-LEVEL MODELING: High-Level Versus RTL Thinking - Structure of High-Level Code - Data Abstraction - Object-Oriented Programming - Parallel Simulation Engine - Race Conditions - Portability Issues. (10+6) TEST CASE GENERATION AND ARCHITECTING TESTBENCHES: Simple Stimulus - Simple Output - Complex Stimulus - BusFunctional Models - Response Monitors - Transaction Level Interface - Verification Harness - Design Configuration - Self-Checking Test benches - Directed Stimulus - Random Stimulus - System Level Verification Harnesses - Transaction Level Models - Managing Simulations - Regression. (12+8)

192

59th ACM

09.06.2018

VERIFICATION METHODOLOGY: Universal Verification Methodology (UVM) – Packages – Components – Environmental Structure – Factory Registration – Reporting. (11+8) Total L: 45+T:30=75 TUTORIAL COMPONENT  Constrained Random Verification  Functional and Code Coverage  Assertion Based Verification  Verification using environment  Verification using UVM REFERNCES: 1. Chris Spear, Greg Tumbush, "System Verilog for Verification - A Guide to Learning the Test bench Language Features" Springer 3rd edition, 2012. 2. Kropf T, “Introduction to Formal Hardware Verification”, Springer Verlag, 2010. 3. Janick Bergeron, “Writing Test Benches Using System Verilog”, Springer 1st Edition, 2009. 4. Mark Glasser, "Open Verification Methodology Cookbook", Springer, 2009. 5. Andreas Meyer, “Principles of Functional Verification”, Newnes, 2003.

18LV52 ADVANCED VLSI DESIGN LABORATORY 0042 

Specification, Design, synthesis and layout design (floor planning, place and route, power and clock distribution, clock tree synthesis, timing analysis, power analysis, signal integrity, post-layout simulation and back annotation, GDS-II generation) of digital building block.



Specification, Schematic Design, simulation, layout generation, Physical verification (LVS, DRC, RC extraction, post layout simulation, back annotation, GDS-II generation) of analog building block. Total P: 60

18LV61 INDUSTRY VISIT & TECHNICAL SEMINAR 0042 The student will make at least two technical presentations on current topics related to the specialization. The same will be assessed by a committee appointed by the department. The students are expected to submit a report at the end of the semester covering the various aspects of his/her presentation together with the observation in industry visits. A quiz covering the above will be held at the end of the semester. Total P: 30

SEMESTER III 18LV53 VLSI SYSTEM DESIGN LABORATORY 0042       

Modeling of System level Design using Processor Soft Cores Development of basic system using tools Interfacing with peripherals Creation of custom peripherals using HDL Enhancement of instruction set with custom instructions Optimizing system architecture through choice of processor enhancements - architecture exploration Mapping designs into System-on-Programmable chips Total P: 60

18LV71 PROJECT WORK-I 0063      

Identification of a real life problem in thrust area Developing a mathematical model for solving the above problem Finalization of system requirements and specification Proposing different solutions for the problem based on literature survey Future trends in providing alternate solutions Consolidated report preparation of the above Total P: 90

193

59th ACM

09.06.2018 SEMESTER IV 18LV72 PROJECT WORK –II 0 0 28 14

The project work involves the following: Preparing a project- brief proposal including     

Problem identification A statement of system / process specifications proposed to be developed (Block Diagram/ Concept tree) List of possible solutions including alternatives and constraints Cost benefit analysis Time line of activities

A report highlighting the design finalization [based on functional requirements & standards (if any)] A presentation include the following  Implementation phase( Hardware / Software / both)  Testing and validation of the developed system  Learning in the Project Consolidated report preparation Total P: 420

ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES 18LV21 MIXED SIGNAL VLSI DESIGN 3003 SWITCHED CAPACITOR C FILTERS: universal active filter (KHN), Switched capacitor filters: Switched capacitor resistors Integrator- amplifiers – comparators - sample & hold circuits –- Biquad. (11) CONTINUOUS TIME FILTERS: Introduction to Gm - C filters - CMOS Transconductors using Triode transistors, active transistors BiCMOS transconductors – MOSFET C Filters - Tuning Circuitry - Dynamic range performance - Elementary transconductor building block- First and Second order filters. (11) DIGITAL TO ANALOG & ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTERS: Non-idealities in the DAC - Types of DAC’s: Current switched, Resistive, Charge redistribution (capacitive), Hybrid, segmented DAC’s - Techniques for improving linearity - Non-idealities in the ADC, Types of ADCs: Flash, two step, pipelined, successive approximation, folding ADC’s. SIGMA DELTA CONVERTERS: Over sampled converters - over sampling without noise & with noise - implementation imperfections - first order modulator - decimation filters - second order modulator - sigma delta DAC & ADC’s. (12) ANALOG AND MIXED SIGNAL EXTENSIONS TO HDL: Introduction - Language design objectives - Theory of differential algebraic equations - the 1076 .1 Language - Tolerance groups - Conservative systems - Time and the simulation cycle A/D and D/A Interaction - Quiescent Point - Frequency domain modeling and examples. Analog extensions to Verilog: Introduction - data types –Expressions – Signals - Analog behavior – Hierarchical Structures – Mixed signal Interaction. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Phillip Allen and Douglas Holberg “CMOS Analog Circuit Design”, Oxford University Press, 2012. 2. Jacob Baker, “CMOS, Circuit Design Layout and Simulation”, Wiley- IEEE Press, 2011. 3. David A Johns and Ken Martin, “Analog Integrated Circuit Design”, John Wiley and Sons, 2008. 4. Benhard Razavi, “Data Converters”, Kluwer Publishers, 2005. 5. Kenneth S Kundert and Olaf Zinke, “The Designers Guide to Verilog AMS”, Kluwer Publications, 2004. 6. Jacob Baker, Harry W Li, and David E Boyce “CMOS, Circuit Design Layout and Simulation”, Wiley- IEEE Press, 1998.

18LV22 VLSI SIGNAL PROCESSING 2203 REALIZATION OF DIGITAL FILTERS: FIR filter design - IIR filter design - Direct form I, II, Cascade, parallel, Ladder - Lattice filters. (7+6) ITERATION BOUND: Introduction, Data flow graph representations, loop bound and iteration bound, Algorithms for computing Iteration bound, iteration Bound of multirate Data - Flow Graphs. PIPELINING AND PARALLEL PROCESSING: Introduction Pipelining of FIR Digital filters - Parallel processing - Pipelining and parallel processing for Low power. (7+8) TRANSFORMATIONS: RETIMING: Introduction - Definitions and Properties - Solving system of Inequalities - Retiming Techniques. UNFOLDING: Introduction - An algorithm for unfolding - Properties of unfolding - Critical path, unfolding and retiming Application of unfolding. FOLDING: Introduction - folding Transformation - Register Minimization Techniques - Register Minimization in folded Architectures. (7 +8)

194

59th ACM

09.06.2018

FAST CONVOLUTION: Cook - Toom algorithm –modified Cook - Toom algorithm Winogard algorithm- modified Winogard algorithm, Algorithmic strength reduction in filters and transforms-parallel FIR filters, Parallel architectures for Rank-order filter. (9+8) Total L: 30 + T: 30 = 60 TUTORIAL COMPONENT:     

Design of Digital filters. Pipelining/Parallel processing of filter. Design and implementation of Lattice filter using Retiming techniques. Design and implementation of filter using Unfolding techniques. Design and implementation of Low power IIR/Lattice filter.

REFERENCES: 1. John G Proakis and Dimitris G Manolakis, “Digital signal processing – Principles, Algorithms and Applications” Pearson, 2014. 2. Uwe Meyer Baese, “Digital Signal Processing with Field Programmable Gate Arrays”, Springer, 2014. 3. Lonnie C Ludeman, “Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing”, Wiley India (P) Ltd., 2010. 4. Peter Pirsch “Architectures for Digital Signal Processing”, Wiley India (P) Ltd., 2009. 5. Keshab K Parhi, “VLSI Digital Signal Processing Systems Design and Implementation”, Wiley - Inter science, 2007.

18LV23 SEMICONDUCTOR MEMORY DESIGN AND TESTING 3003 RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY TECHNOLOGIES: Static Random Access Memories (SRAM): SRAM cell structures, MOS SRAM Architecture, MOS SRAM cell and peripheral Circuit Operation, Bipolar SRAM Technologies, Silicon on insulator (SOI) Technology. Advanced SRAM Architectures and Technologies, Application Specific SRAMs. Dynamic Random Access Memories (DRAM): DRAM Technology Development, CMOS DRAM, DRAM cell theory and advanced cell structures, BiCMOS DRAM, soft error failures in DRAM, Advanced DRAM Design and Architecture, Application Specific DRAM. (11) NON-VOLATILE MEMORIES: Masked Read only Memories (ROM), High Density ROMs, Programmable ROM, Bipolar ROMs, CMOS PROMs, Erasable(UV) Programmable ROM(EPROM), Floating, Gate EPROM Cell, One time Programmable EPROM (OTPEPROM), Electrically Erasable PROMS, EEPROM Technology and Architecture, Non volatile SRAM, Flash Memories (EPROM or EEPROM), Advanced Flash Memory Architecture, Content Addressable Memory. (12) SEMICONDUCTOR MEMORY RELIABILITY AND RADIATION EFFECTS: General Reliability Issues-RAM Failure Modes and Mechanism-Nonvolatile Memory Reliability-Reliability Modeling and Failure Rate Prediction-Design for Reliability-Reliability Test Structures-Reliability Screening and Qualification. Radiation Effects-Single Event Phenomenon (SEP)-Radiation Hardening Techniques-Radiation Hardening Process and Design Issues-Radiation Hardened Memory Characteristics-Radiation Hardness Assurance and Testing - Radiation Dosimetry-Water Level Radiation Testing and Test Structures (11) ADVANCED MEMORY TECHNOLOGIES: Ferroelectric Random Access Memories (FRAMs)-Gallium Arsenide (GaAs) FRAMsAnalog Memories- Magnetoresistive Random Access Memories (MRAMs)-Experimental Memory Devices. Memory Hybrids and MCMs (2D)-Memory Stacks and MCMs (3D)-Memory MCM Testing and Reliability Issues-Memory Cards-High Density Memory Packaging Future Directions. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Jesse Russell and Ronald Cohn, "Content-Addressable Memory", Bookvika Publishing, 2012. 2. Kiyoo Itoh, Masashi Horiguchi and Hitoshi Tanaka, "Ultra-Low Voltage Nano-Scale Memories", Springer, 2007. 3. Ashok K Sharma, “Semiconductor Memories Technology, Testing and Reliability”, Wiley, 2002. 4. Ashok K Sharma “Advanced Semiconductor Memories – Architecture, Design and Applications, Wiley, 2002. 5. Betty Prince, "Emerging Memories - Technologies and Trends", Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2002.

18LV24 VLSI TECHNOLOGY 3003 MATERIAL PROPERTIES & CRYSTAL GROWTH: Crystal structure- axes & planes, Crystal defects-Point defects & dislocations Crystal growth- Bridgman, Czochralski techniques & Zone process, Doping in the melt. DIFFUSION & ION IMPLANTATION: Nature of diffusion-interstitial, Substitutional, interstitial substitutional movements, Diffusion constant, Dissociate process, Diffusion equation- D is constant & function, Diffusion systems, problems in Si Diffusion, Evaluation Techniques Ion Implantation: Penetration range, Implantation Damage, Annealing, Implantation Systems. (12) OXIDATION & EPITAXY OXIDATION: Thermal Oxidation-Intrinsic, Extrinsic silicon Glass, Oxide formation, Kinetics of Oxide growth, Oxidation systems, Faults, Anodic Oxidation. EPITAXY: Vapor Phase Epitaxy (VPE)- transport, reaction and growth, Chemistry of growth, Insitu etching, Selective epitaxy, imperfections, Liquid Phase Epitaxy, LPE system, Evaluation of epitaxial layers. (11) ETCHING & LITHOGRAPHY: LITHOGRAPHY: Pattern generation & Masking, Printing & Engraving - Optical, E-Beam, ion Beam, X-Ray, Photo resists, Defects. ETCHING: Wet chemical etching- anisotropic etchants, Etching for non-crystalline films-Plasma etching, Plasma-assisted etching, cleaning. (11)

195

59th ACM

09.06.2018

DEVICE & CIRCUIT FABRICATION: Isolation- Mesa, Oxide, PN-junction isolations, Self Alignment, Local Oxidation, Planarisation, Metallisation and Packaging. Circuits – N, P and CMOS Transistors, Memory devices, BJT Circuits – Buried Layer, PNP and NPN Transistors, Diodes, Resistors, Capacitors. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Donald Neamen, Dhrubes Biswas, “Semiconductor Physics and Devices” McGraw Hill, New York, Fourth edition, 2017. 2. Massimo Rudan , ,“Physics of Semiconductor Devices”, Springer, second edition,2017 3. Sze S M, “VLSI Technology”, McGraw Hill, New York, second edition, 2017. 4. Sorab K Gandhi, “VLSI Fabrication Principles – Silicon and Gallium Arsenide”, Wiley Interscience Publications, New York 2008. 5. Chang S Y and Sze S M, “ULSI Technology”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2007. 6. Sze S M and Kwok K Ng ,“Physics of Semiconductor Devices”, John Wiley, 2006.

18LV25 VLSI FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 3003 OVERVIEW OF MODULATION SCHEMES: Classical Channel - Wireless Channel Description - Path Loss - Channel Model and Envelope Fading - Multipath Fading: Frequency Selective and Fast Fading - Summary of Standard Translation. (10) RECEIVER FRONT END: Filter Design - Rest of Receiver Front End: Non idealities and Design Parameters - Nonlinearity –Noise Derivation of Noise Figure. AMPLIFIER DESIGN: Low Noise Amplifier Design - Wideband LNA - Design Narrowband LNA Impedance Matching - Automatic Gain Control Amplifiers – Power Amplifiers. (13) MIXERS: Balancing Mixer - Qualitative Description of the Gilbert Mixer - Conversion Gain – Distortion - Low Frequency Case: Analysis of Gilbert Mixer – Distortion - High-Frequency Case – Noise - A Complete Active Mixer. Switching Mixer - Distortion in Unbalanced Switching Mixer - Conversion Gain in Unbalanced Switching Mixer - Noise in Unbalanced Switching Mixer - A Practical Unbalanced Switching Mixer. Sampling Mixer - Conversion Gain in Single Ended Sampling Mixer - Distortion in Single Ended Sampling Mixer - Intrinsic Noise in Single Ended Sampling Mixer - Extrinsic Noise in Single Ended Sampling Mixer- Demodulators. (11) FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZERS: Phase Locked Loops - Voltage Controlled Oscillators - Phase Detector – Analog Phase Detectors – Digital Phase Detectors - Frequency Dividers - LC Oscillators - Ring Oscillators - Phase Noise - A Complete Synthesizer Design Example (DECT Application). Loop filter: General Description - Design Approaches. (11) Total L: 45

REFERENCES: 1. Luzzatto A and Shirazi G, “Wireless Transceiver Design: Mastering the Design of Modern Wireless Equipment and Systems”, Wiley 2007. 2. laskar J, Matinpourand B and Charaborty S, “Modern receiver front ends: Systems, Circuits and integration”, Wiley 2004 3. Bosco H Leung “VLSI for Wireless Communication”, Pearson Education, 2002. 4. Leenearts D, Vander J Tang and Vaucher C S, “Circuit design for RF transceivers”, Springer 2002. 5. Emad N Farag and Mohamed I Elmasry, “Mixed Signal VLSI Wireless Design - Circuits and Systems”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2000.

18LV26 RF CIRCUIT DESIGN 3003 PASSIVE RF COMPONENTS AND TRANSMISSION LINE ANALYSIS: High frequency Resistors, Capacitor and Inductors – Transmission Line Analysis: Line equation, Micro strip line, Voltage Reflection Co-efficient, propagation constant phase velocity and special termination - Smith Chart-Impedance transformation - Analysis of parallel RL circuit and parallel RC circuit. (9) SINGLE AND MULTI PORT NETWORK THEORY AND RF FILTER DESIGN: Definition - properties - interconnection of networks ABCD parameters and S parameters - RF Filter Resonator and filter configuration - Butterworth and chebyshev filters. Design of micro strip filters. (9) DESIGN OF MATCHING NETWORK: Matching by Discrete Components - Design of two-component matching network, Design of T and  matching network- Matching by micro strip line - Design of matching network - Design of stub matching. (9) RF ACTIVE COMPONENTS, THEIR MODELING AND RF AMPLIFIER DESIGN: Components: RF Diode: PIN diode and Gunn Diode. RF Bipolar junction Transistor, RF field effect transistor - Modeling: Diode model, Transistor model, and FET model – RF Amplifier: Characteristics, power relations and Stability considerations. (9) RF OSCILLATOR AND MIXER DESIGN: Basic oscillator model - Design of fixed frequency oscillator - Dielectric resonator oscillator - voltage controlled oscillator - gun element oscillator - Basic concepts - Design of single ended mixer- Double ended mixer. (9) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Razavi B, “RF Micro Electronics”, Prentice Hall PTR, 2011. 2. Reinhold Ludwig and Pavel Bretchko, “RF Circuit Design”, Pearson Education Asia Publication, 2011. 3. Peter P Kenington, “High Linearity RF Amplifier Design”, Artech House, 2007.

196

59th ACM 4. 5.

09.06.2018

Lee T H, “The Design of CMOS Radio Frequency Integerated Circuits”, Cambridge University Press, 2004. Matthew M Radmanesh, “Radio Frequency and Microwave Electronics Illustrated”, Pearson Education, Asia Publication, 2001.

18LV27 MEMS AND NEMS 3003 INTRODUCTION AND SCALING: MEMS and microsystems - development of MEMS technology- MEMS future and applications, microsystems and microelectronics - MEMS challenges - scaling - scaling in geometry, rigid body dynamics, electrostatic forces, electromagnetic forces, electricity, fluid mechanics, heat transfer. (7) MATERIALS FOR MEMS: Introduction - substrates and wafer- silicon substrate - crystal structure, miller indices, properties - silicon compounds - silicon dioxide, silicon carbide, silicon nitride, polycrystalline silicon- gallium arsenide - quartz- piezoelectric crystals polymers - polymers for MEMS, conductive polymers. (7) FABRICATION PROCESS: Physical Vapour Deposition (PVD) - evaporation, sputtering - Chemical Vapour Deposition (CVD) etching process - wet chemical etching, plasma etching, Ion milling - patterning - lithography, lift off process - wafer bonding - silicon fusion bonding, anodic bonding- annealing- chemical mechanical polishing - doping - diffusion, implant. (12) MEMS TECHNOLOGIES AND PACKAGING: Bulk micromachining - Isotropic and anisotropic etching, wet etchants, etch stop, dry etching, comparison of wet and dry etching - surface micromachining - Introduction, process, associated problems - LIGA Process and electroplating - Integration of electronics and MEMS technology- packaging - post fabrication process, package selection, die attach, Wire bond and Sealing. (12) NEMS TECHNIQUES AND APPLICATIONS: Introduction to NEMS and its architecture - carbon nanotube electronics - modeling introduction, analysis and simulation - simulation of Actuators, FET, Pressure transducer - applications and future challenges. (7) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Ananthasuresh G. K, Vinoy. K.J, Gopalakrishnan.S, “Micro and Smart Systems”, Wiley India Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2012. 2. Vijay K. Varadan, Vinoy. K.J, Gopalakrishnan.S, “Smart material Systems and MEMS: Design and Development Methodologies”, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2011. 3. Tai Ran Hsu, “MEMS and Microsystems, Design, Manufacture and Nanoscale Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons, New Jersey. 2008. 4. James J Allen, “Micro Electro Mechanical System Design CRC Press-Taylor & Francis”, New York, 2005. 5. Syergey Edward Lyshevski, “MEMS and NEMS systems, Devices and Structures”, CRC Press, New York, 2002.

18LV28 SYSTEM ON CHIP DESIGN 3003 SOC INTRODUCTION: Components of SoC - Design flow - Nature of hardware & software, driving factors for hardware-software codesign, design space, system specification and modeling- Hardware Software tradeoffs- Co-Design Approaches, Models of Computation - SoC Applications - SYSTEM-LEVEL DESIGN: Processor selection-Concepts in Processor Architecture: Instruction set architecture (ISA) - Soft and Firm processors, Custom-Designed processors - on-chip memory. (10) COMMUNICATION ARCHITECTURES: On-chip Buses: basic architecture, topologies, arbitration and protocols, Bus standards: AMBA, CoreConnect, Wishbone, Avalon - Network-on-chip: Architecture-topologies-switching strategies - routing algorithms - flow control, Quality-of-Service (10) IP BASED SYSTEM DESIGN: Types of IP, IP across design hierarchy, IP life cycle, Creating and using IP - Technical concerns on IP reuse - IP integration - IP evaluation on FPGA prototypes. (10) SOC IMPLEMENTATION: Study of processor IP, Memory IP, wrapper Design - Real-time operating system (RTOS), Peripheral interface and components, High-density FPGAs - EDA tools used for SOC design - SOC TESTING: Manufacturing test of SoC: Core layer, system layer, application layer-P1500 Wrapper Standardization-SoC Test Automation (STAT). (15) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Patrick Schaumont “A Practical Introduction to Hardware/Software Co-design”, Patrick Schaumont, 2nd Edition, Springer, 2012. 2. Michael J Flynn and Wayne Luk, “Computer system Design: System-on-Chip”, Wiley-India, 2012. 3. Patrick Schaumont “A Practical Introduction to Hardware/Software Co-design”, Patrick Schaumont, Springer, 2012. 4. Sudeep Pasricha and Nikil Dutt, “On Chip Communication Architectures: System on Chip Interconnect”, Morghan Kaufmann Publishers, 2008. 5. Wolf W H, “Computers as Components: Principles of Embedded Computing System Design”, Elsevier, 2008. 6. Lin, Y-L S (ed.), “Essential Issues in SOC Design: Designing Complex Systems-on-chip. Springer, 2006.

18LV29 EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN 2203 EMBEDDED DESIGN CYCLE OVERVIEW: Differences between the Desktop PC and typical Embedded System-Examples of Embedded Systems-Major hardware and software modules of an embedded system-Embedded Design Life Cycle. Introduction to

197

59th ACM

09.06.2018

ARM Controllers: ARM Cortex-A, Cortex-R and Cortex-M series microcontrollers.

(4)

PERIPHERAL INTERFACING TECHNIQUES: CPU Core, Program Memory, Data Memory, AHP and APB Bus Structure, System Peripherals: GPIO, Timers, EEPROM, Hibernation Module, WDT and DMA. Serial Peripherals: UART, I2C, SPI, CAN and USB. Analog Peripherals: ADC and Analog Comparator. Motion Control Peripherals: PWM and QEI. Hardware and Software Interrupts, Clock and Reset Generator, Development and debugging Support: JTAG and BDM. (10+10) PERIPHERAL PROGRAMMING TECHNIQUES: Host and Target Machines, Configuring and Programming of System Peripherals, Serial Peripherals, Analog Peripherals and Motion Control Peripherals. Display, Keyboard, Sensors, motors, interfacing and Programming Techniques. (8+10) REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEMS (RTOS): Survey of software architectures, Tasks and Task States, Tasks and Data, Semaphores and Shared Data, Message Queues, Mailboxes and Pipes, Timer functions, Events, Memory Management, Interrupt Routines in RTOS Environment. (8+10) Total L: 30 + T: 30 = 60 TUTORIAL COMPONENT:  GPIO Interfacing.  Analog Peripheral Interfacing  Smart Sensors Interfacing  Motion Control Peripheral Interfacing  Experimenting Serial Communication Protocols REFERENCES: 1. Steve Furber,” ARM System-on-Chip Architecture”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2009. 2. David E Simon, “An Embedded Software Primer” Pearson Education Asia, 2006. 3. Arnold S. Berger, “Embedded Systems Design: An Introduction to Processes, Tools, and Techniques” CMP Books, 2002. 4. https://www.arm.com/products/processors 5. https://www.ti.com/tiva 6. https://www.nordicsemi.com/eng/Products/Nordic-Thingy-52

18LV30 SYNTHESIS AND OPTIMIZATION OF DIGITAL CIRCUITS 3003 INTRODUCTION: Boolean functions, satisfiability and cover. Abstract models, state diagrams. Data flow and sequencing graphs, compilation and behavioural optimization. (8) ARCHITECTURAL SYNTHESIS: Circuit specifications for architectural synthesis. Temporal domain, spatial domain, hierarchical models. Synchronization problems. Area and performance estimation. Strategies for architectural optimization, Data path synthesis of pipelined circuits. (10) SCHEDULING ALGORITHMS: Scheduling with and without constraints. Scheduling algorithms for extended sequencing models. Scheduling pipelined circuits. (8) RESOURCE SHARING AND BINDING: Sharing and binding for resource dominated circuits and general circuits. Concurrent binding and scheduling. Resource sharing and binding for non-scheduled sequencing graphs. (9) SEQUENTIAL LOGIC OPTIMIZATION: Sequential circuit optimization using state based models and network models. Implicit finite state machine. Traversal methods. Testability considerations for synchronous circuits. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Mohanthy S P, Ranganathan N and Kougianos E, “Low Power High Level Synthesis for Nanoscale CMOS Circuits”, Springer, 2010. 2. Philippe Coussy and Adam, “High Level Synthesis: From Algorithm to Digital Circuit”, Springer, 2008. 3. Aarto P, Visegrady T and Jankovits I, “High Level Synthesis of Pipelined Data Paths”, Wiley, 2001. 4. De Micheli G, “Synthesis and optimization of Digital circuits”, McGraw Hill, 1994.

18LV31 HIGH SPEED DIGITAL DESIGN 3003 TRANSMISSION LINES AND CROSSTALK: Transmission line structures, signal propagation, transmission line parameters, line impedance, propagation delay, Transmission line reflections, Cross talk- Mutual inductance, Mutual capacitance, cross talk induced noise, minimizing cross talk. (10) INTERCONNECTS: Interconnect technologies, Multilevel multilayer interconnects, propagation delay, crosstalk analysis POWER DISTRIBUTION: Losses, the need for low-impedance planes and decoupling capacitors and their selection.

(4) (10)

CLOCK DISTRIBUTION AND TIMING: High-quality clock signals to components, boards, and systems, Common clock timing and source synchronous timing (10)

198

59th ACM

09.06.2018

ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (EMC): Designing for EMC, EMC regulations, typical noise path, methods of noise coupling, and methods of reducing interference in systems. (5) GROUNDING: Safety grounds, signal grounds, single-point ground systems, multi-point ground systems, hybrid grounds, functional ground layout, practical low frequency grounding, hardware grounds, grounding of cable shields, ground loops, shield grounding at high frequencies. (6) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Goel A K , “High speed vlsi interconnections” ,Wiley, 2007. 2. Paul CR,”Introduction t Electromagnetic compatability”, Wiley 2006. 3. Howard Johnson, Martin Graham, “High speed Digital design”, Pearson, 2005. 4. Bogatin E, “Signal integrity-simplified”, Prentice Hall, 2003. 5. Hall S , Hall G and McCall J, “ High speed digital system design: A Handbook of Interconnect theory and practices”, Wiley Interscience, 2000 6. Hartman Grabinski, “ Interconnects in VLSI design”, Kluwer, 2000.

18LV32 NANO SCALE DEVICES 3003 OVERVIEW: Nano devices, Nano materials, Nano characterization-Definition of Technology node. Basic CMOS Process flow- MOS Scaling theory, Issues in scaling. MOS transistors: Short channel effects, Description of a typical 65 nm CMOS technologyRequirements for Non classical MOS transistor. MOS CAPACITOR: Role of interface quality and related process techniques, Gate oxide thickness scaling trend, SiO2 vs. High-k gate dielectrics- Integration issues of high-k -Interface states, bulk charge, band offset, stability, reliability - Qbd high field, possible candidates, CV and IV techniques. (10) METAL GATE TRANSISTOR: Motivation, requirements, Integration Issues - Transport in Nano MOSFET, velocity saturation, ballistic transport, injection velocity, velocity overshoot - Ultrathin body SOI - double gate transistors, integration issues - Vertical transistors - FinFET and Surround gate FET. (11) METAL SOURCE/DRAIN JUNCTIONS: Properties of schotky junctions on Silicon, Germanium and compound semiconductors Work function pinning- Germanium Nano MOSFETs: strain, quantization, Advantages of Germanium over Silicon, PMOS versus NMOS. Compound semiconductors - material properties, MESFETs Compound semiconductors MOSFETs in the context of channel quantization and strain, Hetero structure MOSFETs exploiting novel materials, strain, and quantization. (10) SYNTHESIS OF NANOMATERIALS: CVD, Nucleation and Growth, ALD, Epitaxy, MBE. Compound semiconductor hetero-structure growth and characterization - Quantum wells and Thickness measurement techniques - Contact - step height, Optical - reflectance and ellipsometry.AFM. Characterization techniques for nanomaterials: FTIR, XRD, AFM, SEM, TEM, EDAX etc-Applications and interpretation of results. (11) EMERGING NANO MATERIALS: Nanotubes, nanorods and other nano structures, LB technique, Soft lithography etc. Microwave assisted synthesis, Self assembly etc. (3) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Karl Goser, Nanoelectronics and Nanosystems: From Transistors to Molecular and Quantum Devices, Springer, 2005. 2. Waser Ranier, “Nanoelectronics and Information Technology (Advanced Electronic Materials and Novel Devices”, Wiley-VCH, 2005.

18LV33 MODELLING AND SIMULATION OF NANOSCALE TRANSISTORS 2203 ANALYTICAL MODELLING: Introduction - Types of Models - Attributes of Good Compact Models - Model Formulation - Model Implementation in Circuit Simulators - Model Testing - Parameter Extraction - Simulation and Extraction for RF Applications. Analytical Solution Methods: Parabolic Approximation - Variable Separable - Numerical Simulation - Fourier series - Green Function - Bessel Function. (10+4) TECHNOLOGY-ORIENTED CAD & DEVICE CAD: Introduction – Process and Device CAD – Process Simulation Techniques – Interfaces in process and Device CAD – CMOS Technology - Ion Implantation – Oxidation – Impurity Diffusion. DEVICE CAD: Semiconductor Device Analysis – The pn Junction – Equilibrium Conditions – Non-equilibrium Conditions - Bipolar Junction Structures - Carrier Densities – Carrier Transport and Conversation - Field-Effect Structures. The MOS capacitor – Basic MOSFET I-V Characteristics – Threshold Voltage in Nonuniform Substrate – MOS Device Design by Simulation. (13+11) TCAD SIMULATION: Process simulator – Device simulator – Advanced concepts – drift-diffusion, hydrodynamic model, stress models - Structure editor - meshing concepts - work bench – Plotting – Scripting -Monte-carlo simulation - Electromagnetic simulation. (11+7) NOVEL TRANSISTOR ARCHITECTURES: Nanowire transistor - High electron mobility transistor - Tunnel field effect transistor Single electron transistor - Carbon nanotube transistor - Double gate and multi gate MOS transistor - Electron wave transistor Electron spin transistor. (11+8) Total L: 30+ T: 30 = 60

199

59th ACM

09.06.2018

TUTORIAL COMPONENT:  Modeling and simulation of single gate MOSFET.  Modeling and simulation of double gate MOSFET.  Modeling and simulation of multi gate MOSFET.  Modeling and simulation of high electron mobility transistor.  Modeling and simulation of TFET. REFERENCES: 1. Robert W.Dutton and Zhiping Yu, “Technology CAD Computer Simulation of Processes and Devices”, Springer, 2012. 2. Rainer Waser, “Nanoelectronics and Information Technology: Advanced Electronic Materials and Novel Devices”, 3rd Edition, Wiley VchVerlag, Weiheim, 2012. 3. YannisTsividis and Colin McAndrew, "Operation and Modeling of the MOS Transistor", 3rd Edition, Oxford University Press, 2011. 4. Mark S. Lundstrom and Jing Guo, "Nanoscale Transistors: Device Physics, Modeling and Simulation", Springer, 2006. 5. Shunri Oda and David Ferry, “Silicon Nanoelectronics”, CRC Press, New York, 2005. 6. Karl Goser, Peter Glosekotter and Jan Dienstuhl, “Nanoelectronics and Nanosystems”, Springer, 2004.

18LV34 ADVANCED COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE AND PARALLEL PROCESSING 3003 INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING: Evolution of computer systems. Generation of computer systems – Trends towards parallel processing- Parallel processing mechanisms- parallel computer structure- Architectural classification schemes – Application. (8) MEMORY AND I/O SUBSYSTEMS, PIPELINING: Hierarchical Memory structure – Virtual memory system - cache memory management- Memory allocation and management – I/O subsystems pipelining: Principles - Classification of pipeline processors Reservation tables – Interleaved memory organization – Design of arithmetic pipeline – Design of instruction pipeline. (10) VECTOR AND ARRAY PROCESSING: Need – Basic vector processing architecture - Issues in vector processing – Vectorization and optimization methods. Array processing: SIMD Array processors – SIMD interconnection networks – Parallel algorithms for array processors – associative array processing (9) MULTIPROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE: Functional structures - Interconnection network – Multi cache problems and solutions – Exploiting concurrency for multiprocessing (9) PRINCIPLES OF PARALLEL ALGORITHM DESIGN: Design approaches-Design issues-Performance measures and analysisComplexities-Anomalies in parallel algorithms - Pseudo code conventions for parallel algorithms-Comparison of SIMD and MIMD algorithms. (9) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Kai Hwang, Naresh Jotwani: Advanced Computer Architecture - Parallelism, Scalability, Programmability, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011 2. John L Hennessy, “Computer Architecture a Quantitative Approach”, Harcourt Asia Pvt. Ltd., 2011. 3. Seyed Roosta, “Parallel Processing and Parallel Algorithms”, Springer Series, 2000.

18LV35 HARDWARE SECURITY 3003 CRYPTOGRAPHIC ALGORITHMS IMPLEMENTATION AND SIDE CHANNEL ANALYSIS: Introduction - Need for hardware security – Basics and vulnerabilities - Design for security - Hardware Implementation of Public-key Cryptographic Algorithm Private-key Cryptographic Algorithm - Stream Ciphers - Hash Functions – Introduction to Side Channel Analysis - Power Analysis Attack - Timing Attack - Fault Attack - Cache Attack – Scan Chain Based Attack - Design Techniques To Prevent Side Channel Analysis Attacks. (12) HARDWARE TROJANS: Overview - Nomenclature and Operating Modes - Hardware Trojan Detection Techniques - Logic Testing - Countermeasures - Design Technique - Manufacturing Technique. (11) PHYSICALLY UNCLONABLE FUNCTIONS: Introduction – Design Approaches - Modeling of PUFs - Sources of Mismatch and Errors - Testing of PUFs - Practical Realizations - Applications. (11) COUNTERFEIT ICS: Taxonomies - Assessment - Challenges - Detection and Prevention of Recycled ICs - Path Delay Fingerprinting – Secure Hardware Intellectual Properties: - Need for IP protection - Digital Watermarking - Constraint-based Watermarking to Design IP Protection - Watermarking HDL Source Codes by Duplicating Modules. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Debdeep Mukhopadhyay, Rajat Subhra Chakraborty, "Hardware Security - Design, Threats, and Safeguards", CRC Press, 2015. 2. Mohammad Tehranipoor, Hassan Salmani, Xuehui Zhang, "Integrated Circuit Authentication Hardware Trojans and Counterfeit Detection", Springer, 2014.

200

59th ACM 3. 4. 5. 6.

09.06.2018

Christoph Bohm, Maximilian Hofer, "Physical Unclonable Functions in Theory and Practice", Springer, 2013. Mohammad Tehranipoor, Cliff Wang, "Introduction to Hardware Security and Trust", Springer, 2012. K. C. Koc, "Cryptographic Engineering", Springer, 2009. Rodriguez-Henriquez, F., Saqib, N.A., Díaz Pérez, A., Koc, C.K., "Cryptographic Algorithms on Reconfigurable Hardware", Springer, 2007.

18LV36 VLSI FOR BIOMEDICAL SYSTEMS 3003 INTRODUCTION TO BIOMEDICAL SIGNALS: Examples of Biomedical signals - ECG, EEG, and EMG etc - Tasks in Biomedical Signal Processing - Computer Aided Diagnosis. Origin of bio potentials - Review of linear systems – Processing of Random & Stochastic signals-Modeling Stochastic signals as filtered White Noise-Nonlinear models of signals- Properties and effects of noise in biomedical instruments - Filtering in biomedical instruments. (11) CARDIO VASCULAR AND NEUROLOGICAL SIGNALS: Basic ECG - Electrical Activity of the heart- ECG data acquisition – ECG parameters & their estimation - Use of multiscale analysis for ECG parameters estimation – Arrhythmia analysis. Electroencephalogram - EEG rhythms & waveform - categorization of EEG activity - recording techniques - EEG Analysis- EEG applications- Epilepsy, sleep EEG-Data acquisition and classification of sleep stages- EEG segmentation-Fixed SegmentationAdaptive segmentation- coherence analysis of EEG channels. (12) BIOMEDICAL ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS: Ultra-low-power noninvasive medical electronics - Analog integrated-circuit switchedcapacitor model of the heart – the electrocardiogram- A micro power electrocardiogram amplifier - Low-power pulse oximetry Battery-free tags for body sensor networks -Intra-body galvanic communication networks - Biomolecular sensing. (10) LOW-POWER ENERGY-HARVESTING CIRCUITS FOR BIOMEDICAL SYSTEMS: Low power transimpedance amplifiers and photoreceptors- Low power transconductance amplifiers and scaling laws for power in analog circuits- Low-power filters and resonators- Low power current- mode circuits - Ultra-low-power and neuron-inspired analog-to-digital conversion for biomedical system. Wireless inductive power links for medical implants - Energy-harvesting RF antenna power links - Low-power RF telemetry in biomedical implants. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Reddy D C, “Biomedical Signal Processing: Principles and techniques”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2005. 2. Enderle, “Introduction to Biomedical Engineering,” Elsevier, 2005. 3. Rangaraj M. Rangayyan, “Biomedical Signal Analysis”, Wiley, 2012. 4. Rahul Sarpeshkar, “Ultra Low Power Bioelectronics: Fundamentals, Biomedical Applications, and Bio-Inspired Systems” Cambridge University Press, 2011 5. Kris Iniewski, “VLSI Circuit Design for Biomedical Applications”, Artech House Publishers, 2008. 6. Bruce, “Biomedical Signal Processing & Signal Modeling,” Wiley, 2001.

18LV37 ELECTRONIC PACKAGING TECHNOLOGIES 3003 OVERVIEW OF ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS PACKAGING: Packaged Electronics – Technologies- Trends- Products and levels of packaging- Packaging aspects of handheld products. (8) SEMICONDUCTOR PACKAGING: Basics of Semiconductor and Process flowchart; Wafer packaging; Packaging evolution- Chip connection choices -Wire bonding, TAB and flip chip. Single chip packages or modules (SCM). Commonly used packages and advanced packages; Materials in packages- Advances packages Thermal mismatch in packages; Current trends in packagingMultichip modules (MCM)-types; System-in package(SIP)- Packaging roadmaps- Hybrid circuits. (14) ELECTRICAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS IN SYSTEMS PACKAGING: Electrical Issues – Resistive Parasitic - Capacitive and Inductive Parasitic- Layout guidelines and the Reflection problem-Interconnection. (12) THERMAL MANAGEMENT AND RELIABILITY: Heat-transfer fundamentals-. Thermal conductivity and resistance- Conduction, convection and radiation- Cooling –Reliability- Basic concepts- Environmental interactions- Thermal mismatch and fatigue. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Rao R Tummala, “Fundamentals of Microsystems Packaging”, McGraw Hill, NY, 2001. 2. William D Brown, “Advanced Electronic Packaging”, IEEE Press, 1999.

18LV38 VLSI FOR IOT SYSTEMS 3003 INTRODUCTION: Concept of connected world – Need, Legacy systems for connected world – features and limitations, Key features of IoT architecture, Merits and Demerits of IoT technology, Applications driven by IoT technology – examples (9) COMPONENTS OF IOT: Review of classic embedded system architecture, Basic building blocks of an IoT system – Artificial Intelligence, Connectivity, Sensors and Computing nodes. Sensors used in IoT systems – Characteristics and requirements, Types of sensors for IoT systems, Compute nodes of IoT, Connectivity technologies in IoT – Software in IoT systems - features and properties. (12)

201

59th ACM

09.06.2018

IC TECHNOLOGY FOR IOT: SoC architecture for IoT Devices– Application Processors, Microcontrollers, Smart Analog; Memory architecture for IoT – Non Volatile Memories (NVM), Embedded Non-Volatile Memories, Anti-Fuse One Time Programmable (OTP) memories, Power Management - Low Drop Out Regulators, DC-to-DC Converters, Voltage References, Power Management Units (PMUs) in IC’s and Systems, Role of Field Programmability in IoT systems. (12) ELECTRONIC SYSTEM DESIGN FOR IOT: Electronic System Design for IoT – Requirements, Computing blocks in IoT systems – MCU’s, DSPs and FPGA’s, System Power Supply Design for IoT systems, Mixed Signal challenges in hardware systems, Form Factor – Guidelines and prevailing standards, Component models & System Design – Feasibility and challenges, System Level Integration, Operating conditions of IoT devices and impact on Electronic System Design; Hardware Security issues, EMI/EMC, SI/PI and Reliability Analysis in IoT systems. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Alioto, “Enabling the Internet of Things- From Integrated Circuits to Integrated Systems”, Springer Publications, First Edition, 2017. 2. Pieter Harpe, Kofi A. A. Makinwa, Andrea Baschirotto, "Hybrid ADCs, Smart Sensors for the IoT, and Sub-1V & Advanced Node Analog Circuit Design”, Springer International Publishing AG, 2017. 3. Rashid Khan, KajariGhoshdastidar, Ajith Vasudevan, “Learning IoT with Particle Photon and Electron”, Packt Publishing Limited (Verlag), 2016. 4. ApekMulay, “Sustaining Moore’s Law: Uncertainty Leading to a Certainty of IoT Revolution” Morgan and Claypool Publishers, 2015. 5. OrCAD, “P-spice Technology for Internet of Things” - http://www.pspice.com/solution/pspice-technology-internet-things 6. Jim Lipman, Sidense Corp.” NVM memory: A Critical Design Consideration for IoT Applications”- https://www.designreuse.com/articles/32614/nvm-memory-iot-applications.html

18LV39 QUANTUM DOT CELLULAR AUTOMATA NANOTECHNOLOGY 3003 INTRODUCTION: Emerging Nanotechnologies- Electronics beyond Moore's law - Limitations of CMOS technology- Alternatives to MOSFET and Challenges - Emerging Transistor Based Devices-IC Technology beyond CMOS Era- USDM and Quantum computing- QCA modeling approach. (11) QCA TERMINOLOGY: QCA Basics - Schrödinger’s equation in quantum wires - Quantum boxes - Non-zero angular momentum states- Spherical quantum dots -Tiny quantum dots- Cuboidal dots- Dots of arbitrary shape -Approaches to pyramidal dots- Matrix approaches-Transport through dot arrays- Crossovers in QCA -Convergence tests- Efficiency- Tool for QCA Simulation. (11) DESIGN OF DIGITAL CIRCUITS IN QCA: Logic Primitives in QCA- Clocking in QCA - Role and Types -Design of Logic Gates and Multiplexer in QCA - Design of a One-Bit Full-Adder - Flip-Flop in QCA. Adders and Multipliers in QCA –Design of Ripple Carry Adder (RCA) and Prefix Adders in QCA- Design of 16-Bit Hybrid Adder in QCA- Layout Level Implementation of adders and Comparisons. Introduction to Multipliers -Design of a Multiplier in QCA - The Baugh - Wooley Multiplier for 2’s Complement Numbers- Design of Baugh-Wooley Multiplier in QCA. (12) TRANSFORM IN QCA: Discrete Hadamard Transform Computation in QCA - Basics of Discrete Hadamard TransformMathematical Formulation for DHT Computation- QCA Realization - Performance of a Full-Parallel Addition Strategy - Applications of Quantum Dot Cellular Automata Technology. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Paul Harrison, Alex Valavanis -Quantum Wells, Wires and Dots: Theoretical and Computational Physics of Semiconductor Nanostructures, 4th Edition, Wiley, April 2016. 2. K. Sridharan, Vikramkumar Pudi –Design of Arithmetic Circuits in Quantum Dot Cellular Automata Nanotechnology Studies in Computational Intelligence-Springer International Publishing-2015. 3. Fabrizio Lombardi, Jing Huang - Design and Test of Digital Circuits by Quantum-Dot Cellular Automata-Artech House-2007. 4. Kasper, E., Paul, D -Silicon Quantum Integrated Circuits -Silicon-Germanium Heterostructure Devices: Basics and Realisations-Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg 2005.

18LV40 GENETIC ALGORITHMS FOR VLSI DESIGN 3003 GA OPERATORS AND GA FOR PARTITIONING: GA Terminology-steady state algorithm-Genetic Operators-Partitioning-circuit partitioning by genetic algorithm-Hybrid Genetic algorithm for Ratio-cut portioning. (10) GA FOR PLACEMENT AND ROUTING: Standard cell placement-Macro cell placement-Macro cell Routing-Steiner problem in graph-Macro cell Global Routing. (12) FPGA TECHNOLOGY MAPPING: Circuit segmentation and FPGA mapping-circuit segmentation for Pseudo-Exhaustive testing. (6) AUTOMATIC TEST GENERATION: Test generation in a GA framework-Test generation for test application Time ReductionDeterministic/Genetic Test generator Hybrids-use of FSM sequences. (9)

202

59th ACM

09.06.2018

PEAK POWER ESTIMATION: Application of Genetic algorithms to peak power estimation-Estimation of peak single-cycle and ncycle powers-Peak Sustainable power estimation. (8) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Ricardo Sal Zebulum, Macro Aurelio Pacheco, Marley Maria B R Vellasco and Marley Maria Bernard Vellasco, “Evolution Electronics: Automatic Design of Electronic Circuits and Systems Genetic Algorithms”, CRC press, 2001. 2. John R Koza, Forrest H Bennett III, David Andre and Morgan Kufmann, “Genetic Automatic Programming and Circuit Synthesis”, 1999. 3. Pinaki Mazumder, E MRudnick, “Genetic Algorithm for VLSI Design, Layout and test Automation”, Prentice Hall, 1998. 4. Randy L Haupt, Sue Ellen Haupt, “Practical Genetic Algorithms”, Wiley-Interscience, 1977.

AUDIT COURSES 18LV81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP81

18LV82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP82

203

59th ACM 13. Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment ME WIRELESS COMMUNICATION

09.06.2018 (2018 REGULATIONS) (Minimum No. of credits to be earned: 74*)

Course Code

Course Title

18LW01 18LW02 18LW03 18LW04 18LW05 18LW51 18LW81

Applied Mathematics Advanced Digital Communications Wireless Networks Wireless Communication System Design Communication Algorithms on FPGA Wireless Networks Laboratory English for Research Paper Writing Total 24 Hrs

18LW06 18LW07 18LW08 18LW09 18LW__ 18LW__ 18LW52 18LW61 18LW82

Radiating Systems RF and Microwave Circuit Design Filter Design on Digital Signal Processor Embedded System Design and IoT Professional Elective -1 Professional Elective -2 RF System Design using EDA Tools Laboratory Industry Visit and Technical Seminar Research Methodology and IPR Total 30 Hrs

18LW__ 18LW__ 18LW__ 18LW__ 18LW53 18LW71

Professional Elective - 3 Professional Elective - 4 Professional Elective - 5 Professional Elective - 6 Wireless System Design Laboratory Project Work I Total

18LW72

Project Work II

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES 18LW21 Wireless Sensor Networks 18LW22 Optical Networks 18LW23 Wireless Security 18LW24 Digital Signal Processor Architectures 18LW25 Software Defined Radio Architecture 18LW26 Wireless Multimedia Communication 18LW27 Radar Communication 18LW28 Space Time Wireless Communication 18LW29 Spread Spectrum Communication 18LW30 5G Wireless Technologies 18LW31 Free Space Optics 18LW32 Smart Antennas 18LW33 Radio Frequency Integrated Circuit Design 18LW34 Wireless Technologies and Measuring Tools 18LW35 RF MEMS 18LW36 Computational Electromagnetics 18LW37 EMC Testing and Measurements

Hours/Week Lecture Tutorial Practical I SEMESTER 2 2 0 3 0 0 3 0 0 3 2 0 3 2 0 0 0 4 0 0 ** 14 6 4 II SEMESTER 3 0 0 3 0 0 3 2 0 3 2 0 3 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 4 0 0 ** 18 4 8 III SEMESTER 3 0 0 3 0 0 3 0 0 3 0 0 3 0 4 0 0 6 15 0 10 IV SEMESTER 0 0 28

2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2

2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Credits

Maximum Marks CA FE Total

CAT

3 3 3 4 4 2 Grade 19

50 50 50 50 50 50 0 300

50 50 50 50 50 50 0 300

100 100 100 100 100 100 0 600

PC PC PC PC PC EEC MC

3 3 4 4 3 3 2 2 Grade 24

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 0 400

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 0 400

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 0 800

PC PC PC PC PE PE PC EEC MC

3 3 3 3 2 3 17

50 50 50 50 50 50 300

50 50 50 50 50 50 300

100 100 100 100 100 100 600

PE PE PE PE PC EEC

14

50

50

100

EEC

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

* Indicated is the minimum number of credits to be earned by a student. ** - 60 hrs in I semester and 90 hrs in II semester; Grade: Completed / Not Completed CAT – Category; PC – Professional Core; PE - Professional Elective EEC – Employability Enhancement Course; MCMandatory Course

204

PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE

59th ACM

09.06.2018 SEMESTER – I 18LW01/18LC01 APPLIED MATHEMATICS 2203

RANDOM VARIABLES: Continuous, Discrete and Mixed random variables, cumulative distribution function - joint distributionmarginal distribution - conditional distribution –statistical independence. (8+7) EXPECTATION AND ESTIMATION: Moments, central moments – mean, variance, Chebyshev and Schwarz inequatlities, Chernoff bound, auto correlation, cross – correlation, covariance, characteristic functions, central limit theorem. (8+7) RANDOM PROCESSES: Classification of Random processes, Poisson process, stationary process, wide sense stationary process, cross correlation, White Gaussian process, linear filter. (8+7) VECTOR SPACES: Real vector spaces and subspaces – linear independence - basis and dimension, inner product space orthonormal bases - Gram-Schmidt process, linear transformations - change of basis - inverse linear transformation, eigenvalues and eigenvectors. (8+7) Total L:32 + T:28 = 60 REFERENCES: 1. Howard Anton and Chris Rorres, “Elementary Linear Algebra: Applications Version”, Wiley India, New Delhi, 2018. 2. David C Lay, “Linear Algebra and Its Applications”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2017. 3. Saeed Ghahramani, “Fundamentals of Probability with Stochastic Processes”, Pearson, New Delhi, 2016. 4. H. Stark and J.W. Woods, “Probability and Random Process with Applications to Signal Processing”, Pearson Education, 2012. 5. Roy D.Yates and David J Goodman, “Probability and Stochastic Processes - A Friendly Introduction for Electrical and Computer Engineers”, John Wiley & Sons, 2012.

18LW02/18LC03 ADANCED DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS 3003 SIGNALING THROUGH AWGN CHANNEL: Review of Signal Representation and Optimum Receivers, Definitions for SER, BER, SNR, average symbol energy, bit energy and Eb/No, decision boundary and decision regions for AWGN model with/without equal prior probability, Exact symbol error probability for several linear modulation schemes (ASK, FSK, PSK and QAM), union bound argument, Chernoff bound. (15) SIGNALING THROUGH BANDLIMITED CHANNELS: Nyquist criterion for zero ISI, Sync and Raised cosine pulse shaping, controlled ISI using duobinary signals. (6) SIGNALING THROUGH DISTORTING CHANNELS: ISI, Zero forcing equalization, Linear MMSE equalizers, Decision Feedback Equalizer, Fractionally Spaced Equalizer – Introduction to Adaptive Equalization. (6) BLOCK MODULATION SCHEMES: single carrier, multicarrier, cyclic prefix in the guard interval, OFDM, OFDMA, MC-CDMA, Introduction to Generalized block modulation schemes – UMC, GFDM, IFDMA, FBMC. (9) TIMING AND FREQUENCY SYNCHRONISATION: synchronization of baseband signals, oversampling, early late gate methods, delay locked loop and squaring loop, carrier synchronization, PLL and Costas loop, pilot aided and decision aided approaches. (9) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. S Haykin, “Digital Communication Systems”, John Wiley & Sons, 2013. 2. Proakis J.G and Salehi M “Fundamentals of Communication Systems” Pearson, 2011. 3. Lajos L Hanzo and Thomas Keller, “OFDM and MC-CDMA – A primer”, John Wiley and Sons Ltd, 2006. 4. Bernard Sklar, "Digital Communications", Pearson Education Asia, Sixth reprint, 2005. 5. Barry S, Lee E A and Messershmitt D J, “Digital Communications”, Kluwer Academic Press, 2004.

18LW03 WIRELESS NETWORKS 3003 WIRELESS PAN and LAN: Introduction to Bluetooth, Protocol Stack, Network Connection Establishment, Network topology, Bluetooth applications, Zigbee technology. Introduction to Wireless LANs, WLAN Equipment, Topologies, and Technologies. IEEE802.11 : Architecture and Services, Physical Layer, Data Link Layer, MAC sub layer, IEEE 802.16 WiMAX: Roadmap, physical layer, MAC layer and spectrum allocation. (12) WIRELESS WIDE AREA NETWORKS: GSM: Evolution for data, 3G wireless systems, UMTS – Network architecture, CODEC, bearer service and QoS. CDMA: CDMA 2000 layering structure, forward link features, reverse link physical channels, WCDMA, evolution of IS 95 to CDMA 2000, IMT 2000, HSPA, HSPA+, LTE and LTE advanced. (12) ADHOC WIRELESS NETWORKS: Characteristics of Adhoc Networks, Classifications of MAC Protocols - Table driven and Source initiated On Demand routing protocols, DSDV, AODV, DSR and Hybrid Protocols. (11)

205

59th ACM

09.06.2018

FOURTH GENERATION SYSTEMS AND TECHNOLOGIES: 4G vision, features and challenges, applications, 4G technologies: Multicarrier modulation, smart antenna techniques, OFDM – MIMO systems, Adaptive modulation and coding with time slot scheduler, BLAST system, SDR and cognitive radio. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Vijay K Garg, “Wireless Communication and Networking”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2010. 2. Dharma Prakash Agrawal and Qing-An Zeng, "Introduction to wireless mobile systems" Thomson India, 2007. 3. Siva Ram Murthy C and Manoj B S, “Ad Hoc Wireless Networks: Architectures and Protocols”, Prentice Hall, 2004.

18LW04 WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM DESIGN 3204 PATH LOSS, SHADOWING AND MULTIPATH CHANNEL MODELS: Free-Space Path Loss, Two-Ray Model, Simplified Path Loss, Shadow Fading, Path Loss and Shadowing, Cell Coverage Area, Time-Varying Channel Impulse, Narrowband fading models, Autocorrelation, Cross Correlation, and Power Spectral Density, Envelope and Power Distributions, Level Crossing Rate and Average Fade Duration, Wideband Fading Models, Jakes Model, Power Delay Profile, Coherence Bandwidth, Doppler Power Spectrum and Channel Coherence- Capacity in AWGN, Flat Fading, Selective Fading Channels. (12+8) BER ANALYSIS OF WIRELESS CHANNELS: BER: Error Probability for BPSK, QPSK and QAM in AWGN Channel, BER analysis of Fading Channels – Outage Probability, Average Probability of Error, Moment generating function approach to average error probability, Combined outage and average error probability. (12+8) ERROR CONTROL CODING: Linear block codes - Polynomial representation of codes - Cyclic codes - Convolutional codes Viterbi decoding algorithm – Other decoding methods of convolutional codes, Galois fields, BCH codes, Reed Solomon codes, Interleaving and Concatenated codes, Turbo codes, Low- Density Parity-Check codes. (9+6) WIRELESS SYSTEM DESIGN: Cellular System Design, Frequency Reuse in Cellular Systems, Co-channel Interference and its impacts, Erlang-D formula, Trunking efficiency, MIMO, Receiver Sensitivity, Link Budget, Noise Figure, Radio Planning, Wireless Communication System Design Flow, Design Considerations - High Level View of Wireless Communication Systems, 4G Physical Layer Systems, Case Studies from 4G Communication System. (12+8) Total L: 45+ T: 30 = 75 TUTORIAL COMPONENT:    

Pathloss with/without Shadowing Frequency Reuse Flat Fading Frequency Selective Fading.

REFERENCES: 1. Haesik Kim, “Wireless Communications System Design”, John Wiley & Sons, 2015 2. Andreas F Molisch , “Wireless Communications”, John Wiley & Sons, 2012. 3. Andrea Goldsmith, “Wireless Communications”, Cambridge University Press, 2007. 4. Theodore S Rappaport, “Wireless Communications”, Pearson Education, Asia , New Delhi, 2009 5. David Tse and Pramod Viswanath, “Fundamentals of Wireless Communication”, Cambridge University Press, 2005.

18LW05/18LC05 COMMUNICATION ALGORITHMS ON FPGA 3204 VERILOG HDL: HDL overview - Modules and ports - compiler directives - data types - operands and operators - gate level modeling - data flow modeling - behavioral modeling - structural modeling – primitives-Tasks and functions - Writing test bench – Timing issues. (11+8) FIELD PROGRAMMABLE GATE ARRAYS: Introduction – FPGA Technology – DSP Technology Requirement – Design Implementation – FPGA Architectures – Xilinx – Altera Flex – FPGA implementation issues. (11+6) DSP ALGORITHMS ON FPGA: Fixed and Floating point arithmetic - Design of Binary Adders, Multipliers, Dividers and MAC unit Design of FIR Filters – Design of IIR Filters – DFT and FFT Algorithms, Approximate DSP algorithms. (11+8) DIGITAL COMMUNICATION MODULES ON FPGA: Error Control Coders and decoders, encryption, scrambling, LMS Algorithm for channel estimation/equalization, pulse shaping, interpolation, decimation, CORDIC implementations, Numerically controlled oscillator and SDR. (12+8) Total L: 45+ T: 30 = 75 TUTORIAL COMPONENT:  Design and implementation of FFT and IFFT algorithm.  Design and implementation of programmable PN sequence generator.  Implementation of Universal Modulator and Demodulator using CORDIC  OFDM Transmitter implementation using model based design.

206

59th ACM

09.06.2018

REFERENCES: 1. Roger Woods, John Mc Allister, GayeLightbody and Ying yi, “FPGA Based Implementation of Signal Processing Systems”, Wiley, 2008. 2. James Tsui, “Digital Techniques for Wideband Receivers”, Prentice-Hall of India, 2005. 3. Uwe Meyer Baese, “Digital Signal Processing with Field Programmable Gate Arrays”, Springer, 2004. 4. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL: A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis”, Prentice Hall, 2003. 5. Jeffrey H Reed, “Software Radio: A Modern Approach to Radio Engineering”, Pearson Education Asia, 2002.

18LW51 WIRELESS NETWORKS LABORATORY 0042 In this course the students will be provided with an orientation program on the following equipment/software for duration of 4 hours. After this orientation each student is expected to formulate a complete an activity of interest which has to be derived from the orientation program under the guidance of a faculty. The details like background, problem definition, state of technology/ knowledge in that area by a good literature review (5 latest papers), objectives, methodology, equipment that can be used from the orientation program, results from the experiments and their interpretation with respect to the assumptions or background and a formal conclusion are expected in the report which is to be submitted at the end of the semester. This work is evaluated for the credit assigned. Expected hours needed for this work is 56 hours.      

Networking commands (Windows and LINUX) Packet and protocol analysis using Wireshark Performance analysis of MAC and Routing protocols (RIP and OSPF) using NS2/ NS3 Study and performance of CSMA / CA using NS2 / NS3 Performance analysis of Networks with and with out packet latency Mapping of IP packet with LTE packet Total P :60

SEMESTER – II 18LW06/18LC30 RADIATING SYSTEMS 3003 ANTENNA FUNDAMENTALS: Antenna parameters, Radiation integrals, Radiation from surface and line current distributions, monopole, loop antenna; Mobile phone antenna - hand set antenna - base station antenna-Radiation Hazards. (6) RADIATION FROM WIRE AND APERTURE ANTENNAS: Radiated fields of infinitesimal and half wave dipole,; Introduction to numerical techniques, Field equivalence principle, Radiation from Rectangular and Circular apertures, Uniform aperture distribution on an infinite ground plane; Slot antenna; Horn antenna; Reflector antenna, aperture blockage and design consideration. (12) ARRAY ANTENNA: Linear array –uniform array, end fire and broad side array, gain, beam width, side lobe level; Two dimensional uniform array; Phased array, beam scanning, grating lobe, feed network, Linear array synthesis techniques – Binomial and Chebyshev distributions. (9) MICRO STRIP ANTENNA: Radiation Mechanism and Excitation techniques : Microstrip dipole; Patch: Rectangular patch, Circular patch, and Ring antenna – radiation analysis from cavity model; input impedance of rectangular and circular patch antenna; Microstrip array and feed network; Applications of microstrip array antenna. (9) EMC ANTENNA AND ANTENNA MEASUREMENTS: Concept of EMC measuring antenna; Tx and Rx antenna factors; Log periodic dipole, Bi-conical, Ridge guide, Multi turn loop; Antenna measurement and instrumentation – Gain, Impedance and antenna factor measurement; Antenna test range Design. (9) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Balanis A, “Antenna Theory Analysis and Design”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 2015. 2. Krauss J D, “Antennas”, John Wiley and sons, New York, 2008. 3. Stutzman W L and Thiele G A, “Antenna Theory and Design”, John Wiley and Sons Inc., 1998. 4. Bahl I J and Bhartia P, “Microstrip Antennas”, Artech House,Inc.,1980

18LW07 RF AND MICROWAVE CIRCUIT DESIGN 3003 PASSIVE COMPONENTS AND TRANSMISSION LINE ANALYSIS: High frequency Resistors, Capacitor and Inductors – Transmission Line Analysis and its types –Smith Chart-Impedance transformation- single and multiport networks – network parameters –RF Filter design – definition-RF Filter Resonator and filter- configuration -- properties - Butterworth and Chebyshev filters. Design of microstrip filters. (12)

207

59th ACM

09.06.2018

MATCHING NETWORKS AND PASSIVE DEVICES: Matching with lumped Elements – quarter wave transformer- Design of T and  matching network- Matching by micro strip line -Stub matching. Single stub matching – Double stub matching. Basic properties of dividers and couplers – T Junction Power divider – Wilkinson Power divider – Quadrature Hybrid – Coulped line Directional Coupler. (9) LINEAR AND LOW NOISE MICROWAVE AMPLIFER: Introduction power gain definitions- neutralization- unilateral transducer RF circuit stability considerations- bilateral RF amplifier design for maximum small operating gain - design for maximum linear output power . Noise in RF/Microwave circuits- available gain design technique- Smith chart based graphical design aidsbroadband amplifiers. (12) ACTIVE MICROWAVE DEVICES AND THEIR MODELLING: Model- two port devices models-high power amplifiers- Nonlinear circuit simulation techniquesClassification of nonlinear circuit simulators- harmonic - balance method Harmonic balance analysis of oscillators- mixers– Overview of mixers -- frequency multipliers-doublers. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. David M Pozar, “Microwave Engineering”, John Wiley and Sons, 2011. 2. Reinhold Ludwig and Pavel Bretchko, "RF Circuit Design: Theory and Applications”, Pearson Education, 2011. 3. Rowan Gilmore and Les Besser, “Practical RF Circuit Design for Modern Wireless Systems”, Vol II, Passive Circuit and Systems, Artech house, London, 2003.

18LW08 FILTER DESIGN ON DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR 3204 TMS320C6x PROCESSOR: Evolution of DSP Processor. Architecture of the C6X Processor – Instruction Set – DSP Development System: Introduction-DSP Starter Kit Support Tools- Code Composer studio – Support files – programming – TMS320C6748 DSP Development Kit-Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications-Multichannel Audio Serial Port –OMAP-L138 Development system-Programming Examples Using C Code. Review of signal processing – Z-Transform - relationships between system representations - FIR and IIR Systems, Application programs for processing real time signals. (9+6) MULTIRATE SIGNAL PROCESSING: Representation of discrete time signals – down sampling – up sampling - Noble identities – cascading sampling rate convertors - Decimation with transversal filters – interpolation with transversal filters – decimation with polyphase filters – interpolation with polyphase filters – decimation and interpolation with rational sampling factors - multistage implementation of sampling rate convertors. (12+8) FILTER BANKS AND MULTICARRIER TECHNOLOGIES: Two channel filter banks - QMF filter banks - Perfect Reconstruction Filter banks - Filter banks with tree structure and parallel structure – Filter Bank based Multicarrier Technologies – Principles of FBMC Transmission –FBMC Transceiver Design – Pulse Design – Orthogonal Multiple carrier Data transmission – Practical FBMC System Design Issues. (12+8) ADAPTIVE FILTERS: Applications – System identification – Inverse modeling – Prediction - Interference Cancellation - Adaptive linear combiner – Performance function – Gradient and Minimum Mean Square error – Gradient search by the method of steepest descent – LMS algorithm – convergence of LMS algorithm – Learning curve – Misadjustment. (12+8) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 TUTORIAL COMPONENT:  FIR and IIR Filter implementation using digital signal processor.  Time and frequency domain analysis of decimators and interpolators.  Implementation of Filter bank systems.  Implementation of LMS algorithm.  DSP Processor based multirate systems and filter bank implementation. REFERENCES: 1. Hanna B, Adrian K, and Pawel.K “Advanced Multicarrier Technologies for Future Radio Communication”, Willey, 2017. 2. Simon Haykin “Adaptive Filter Theory", Pearson education, 2013. 3. Vaidyanathan P P, “Multirate Systems and Filter banks”, Prentice Hall, 2008. 4. Hayes M H, "Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modeling ", Wiley, New York, 2008. 5. Rulph Chassaing, "Digital Signal Processing and Applications with the C6713 and C6416 DSK", Willey, 2005.

18LW09/18LC09 EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN AND IOT 3204 COMPONENTS OF EMBEDDED SYSTEMS: Introduction to Embedded Systems, Embedded Design Life Cycle. Overview of ARM Processors. Functional block diagram of ARM Cortex-A, Cortex-R and Cortex-M series controllers and its features. (8+3) PERIPHERAL INTERFACING TECHNIQUES: Memory Management - Program Memory, Data Memory. AHB and APB Bus Structure. GPIOs, Timer/Counters, Capture/Compare Modules, PWM, QEI, RTC, WDT, DMA, EEPROM and PLL. Serial Peripherals: UART, I2C, SPI, CAN and USB. Hardware and Software Interrupts, Analog Peripherals: ADC, DAC and Analog Comparators. (16+15) INTERNET OF THINGS: Introduction, IoT protocols: MQTT and AMQP, IoT Security: AES and TLS1.2, FOTA, Consumer Electronics IoT, Automotive IoT, Health Care IoT and Industrial IoT. (11+7)

208

59th ACM

09.06.2018

CLOUD AND APP FACILITIES FOR IoT: Amazon Web Services Cloud (AWS), MS Azure, IBM Bluemix, Carriots and Thing Speak, GE predix. MIT App Inventor and Android App Development tools. (10+5) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 TUTORIAL COMPONENT:  Simple problems simulation using IDE  Smart Sensors Interfacing  Experimenting Serial Communication Protocols  Remote Monitoring and Control through Web Browser using WiFi  Cloud based Data Analysis. REFERENCES: 1. Arshdeep Bahga and Vijai Madisetti “Internet of Things: A Hands-on Approach”, Bahga & Madisetti, 2014. 2. Jonathan W. Valvano, “Embedded Systems: Real-Time Interfacing to Arm(r) Cortex -M Microcontrollers: Volume 2”, Create Space Independent Publishing Platform, 2012. 3. Jonathan W. Valvano, “Embedded Systems: Real-Time Interfacing to Arm(r) Cortex -M Microcontrollers: Volume 1”, Create Space Independent Publishing Platform, 2011. 4. Steve Furber,” ARM System-on-Chip Architecture”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2009. 5. Arnold S. Berger, “Embedded Systems Design: An Introduction to Processes, Tools, and Techniques” CMP Books, 2002. 6. Tiva TM4C123GH6PM Microcontroller Datasheet.

18LW52 RF SYSTEM DESIGN USING EDA TOOLS LABORATORY 0042 In this course the students will be provided with an orientation program on the following equipment/software for duration of 4 hours. After this orientation each student is expected to formulate a complete an activity of interest which has to be derived from the orientation program under the guidance of a faculty. The details like background, problem definition, state of technology/ knowledge in that area by a good literature review (5 latest papers), objectives, methodology, equipment that can be used from the orientation program, results from the experiments and their interpretation with respect to the assumptions or background and a formal conclusion are expected in the report which is to be submitted at the end of the semester. This work is evaluated for the credit assigned. Expected hours needed for this work is 56 hours.     

Design, simulation and analysis of transmission line and impedance matching networks WLAN Application. Design, implementation and fabrication of micro strip Filters, coupler and Patch Antenna for GSM /ISM Band Application using ADS. Design, simulation and analysis of oscillators/mixers for RF Applications. Implementation and analysis of Stepped impedance and Open/Short circuited stub Micro strip Filter for RF Applications and its Field distribution Analysis using 3D structural simulator. Implementation and analysis of micro strip Patch Antenna for GSM & ISM Application and its Radiation Pattern & Field distribution Analysis using 3D structural simulator. Total P :60

18LW61 INDUSTRY VISIT AND TECHNICAL SEMINAR 0042 The student will make at least two technical presentations on current topics related to the specialization. The same will be assessed by a committee appointed by the department. The students are expected to submit a report at the end of the semester covering the various aspects of his/her presentation together with the observation in industry visits. A quiz covering the above will be held at the end of the semester. Total P : 60

SEMESTER –III 18LW53 WIRELESS SYSTEM DESIGN LABORATORY 0042 In this course the students will be provided with an orientation program on the following equipment/software for duration of 4 hours. After this orientation each student is expected to formulate a complete an activity of interest which has to be derived from the orientation program under the guidance of a faculty. The details like background, problem definition, state of technology/ knowledge in that area by a good literature review (5 latest papers), objectives, methodology, equipment that can be used from the orientation program, results from the experiments and their interpretation with respect to the assumptions or background and a formal conclusion are expected in the report which is to be submitted at the end of the semester. This work is evaluated for the credit assigned. Expected hours needed for this work is 56 hours.   

Design and implementation of subband coding Filter Bank Systems using FPGA. Design and implementation of Convolutional Coder Using FPGA. Performance analysis of Raised cosine PAM Signal, Multilevel M-ary PAM signal in an optimum receiver using System Vue.

209

59th ACM 

09.06.2018

Generation of M-ary PSK signals and its performance analysis for the optimum Receiver in AWGN environment using System Vue. Design and implementation of OFDM and FBMC Systems using SystemVue. Single mode Fiber optic Link extension using Fiber Cleaver and Fusion Splicer. Fault diagnosis of Fiber optic Cable link using optical Time domain Reflectometer.

  

Total P: 60

18LW71 PROJECT WORK-I 0063      

Identification of a real life problem in thrust area Developing a mathematical model for solving the above problem Finalization of system requirements and specification Proposing different solutions for the problem based on literature survey Future trends in providing alternate solutions Consolidated report preparation of the above Total P: 90

IV SEMESTER 18LW72 PROJECT WORK –II 0 0 28 14 The project work involves the following: Preparing a project- brief proposal including  Problem identification  A statement of system / process specifications proposed to be developed (Block Diagram/ Concept tree)  List of possible solutions including alternatives and constraints  Cost benefit analysis  Time line of activities A report highlighting the design finalization [based on functional requirements & standards (if any)] A presentation include the following  Implementation phase( Hardware / Software / both)  Testing and validation of the developed system  Learning in the Project Consolidated report preparation Total P: 420

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES 18LW21 WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS 2 2 0 3 INTRODUCTION: Challenges for wireless sensor networks, Comparison of sensor network with ad hoc network, Single node architecture, Hardware components, Energy consumption of sensor nodes, Network architecture, Sensor network scenarios, Design principles. (8+6) SENSOR LOCALIZATION AND TIME SYNCHRONIZATION: Localization and positioning: Possible approaches, single hop localization, positioning in multihop environments. Time synchronization: Time synchronization problem, protocols based on sender to receiver and receiver to receiver synchronization in WSN. (8+6) MAC AND ROUTING PROTOCOLS: Fundamentals of wireless MAC protocols, low duty cycle protocols and wakeup concepts, contention-based protocols, Schedule-based protocols. ROUTING PROTOCOLS - Gossiping and agent-based unicast forwarding, Energy-efficient unicast, Broadcast and multicast, geographic routing, Data centric routing, Data aggregation. (8+10) SENSOR NETWORK PROGRAMMING: Programming Challenges in Wireless Sensor Networks, Tiny Operating System, Contiki OS, Event-Driven Programming, Techniques for Protocol Programming. Simulators: GloMosim, Sensor Sim, ToSSIM and Power TOSSIM. (6+8) TOTAL L: 30 + T: 30 = 60 TUTORIAL COMPONENT:  Basics of WSN programming  Sensing data using WSN motes  Simulation with RTOS (TOSSIM)  Dissemination and over the air programming

210

59th ACM

09.06.2018

REFERENCES: 1. Sitharama Iyengar S, Nandan Parmeshwaran, Balkrishnan N and Chuka D, “Fundaments of Sensor Network Programming, Applications and Technology”, John Wiley & Sons, 2011. 2. Fei Hu and Xiaojun Cao, “Wireless Sensor Networks Principles and Practice”, CRC Press, 2010. 3. Jean Philippe Vasseur and Adam Dunkels, “Interconnecting Smart Objects with IP, The Next Internet”, Morgan Kaufmann, Elsevier, 2010. 4. Holger Karl and Andreas willig, “Protocol and Architecture for Wireless Sensor Networks”, John Willey Publication, Oct 2007. 5. Feng zhao and Leonidas guibas, “Wireless Sensor Networks: an Information Processing Approach”, Elsevier Publication, 2004.

18LW22 OPTICAL NETWORKS 3003 INTRODUCTION: Introduction to WDM and TDM: Wireless Optical Systems; Key Optical Nodes; Evolution of Optical Systems; Key attributes and characteristics of Optical Fiber; The Telecommunications Infrastructure; Timing and Synchronization. (7) OTN AND MPLS: OTN - Architecture, Digital wrappers, Control Planes, Layered model, Encapsulation and Decapsulation operations, Generic Framing Procedure, MPLs – Labels and forwarding, QoS, signaling and routing and carrier transport (11) WDM AND OPTICAL NETWORKS: WDM-DWDM-operations, components. Network topologies, protection schemes, robustness, diversity, 1: N protection channel sharing, BLSR, PONs and Metro Optical networking. MPLS and optical networks, Label switching, Lambda switching, Traffic Engineering. (9) LMP AND OPTICAL ROUTERS: LMP - Link up, LMP messages, connectivity, Fault management. Optical Routers - switching, preferences, OSP, LSP, load increase, technologies, MEMS, Thermo, bubble, Granularity of Labels. (9) OPTICAL INTERNETS: ATM vs. IP in optical internets: IP over ATM & SONET, OSI internet layered model, Encapsulation & its methods, PPP packet, ATM vs. IP debate. Optical Internets: Evolution to 3G architecture, Migration to IP networking, IP subnets, non-optical nodes, routing tables. (9) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Uyless Black, “Optical Networks-Third Generation Transport Systems”, Pearson Education, 2012. 2. Rajiv Ramasami Kumar and Sivarajan N, “Optical Networks : A Practical Perspective”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2011 . 3. Siva Ram Murthy and Mohan Gurusamy, “WDM Optical Networks-Concept, Design and Algorithms”, Prentice-Hall of India Private Limited, New Delhi, 2011. 4. Vivek Alwayn, “Optical Network Design and Implementation”, Pearson Education, 2004. 5. Stamatious V Kartalopoulos, “Understanding SONET/SDH and ATM-communications networks for the next millennium”, PHI India, 1999.

18LW23 WIRELESS SECURITY 3003 WIRELESS THREATS: Introduction to wireless technologies-Wireless data networks-Personal Area Networks - Kinds of security breaches- Eavesdropping-Communication Jamming - RF interference -Covert wireless channels –DOS attack - Spoofing-Theft of services-Traffic Analysis-Cryptographic threats-Wireless security Standards. (9) CRYPTOGRAPHY: Encryption and Decryption - Product ciphers-AES (advanced Encryption Standard) - Stream ciphers ,Pseudorandom number Generator, A5, RC4 - Public key cryptography-ECC (Elliptic Curve Cryptography) - Cryptography in Embedded Hardware. (9) WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN): Introduction to IEEE 802.11 Standard-Security Risks-WEP (wired Equivalence Protocol)- Countermeasures –WPA(Wi- Fi Protected Access)- IEEE 802.11x-Standards-Bluetooth security. (9) SECURITY IN WIREELSS DATA NETWORKS: Wireless Device security issues- GPRS security (General Packet Radio Service)GSM (Global System for Mobile Communication) security –IP-security. (9) WIRELESS TRANSPORT LAYER SECURITY (WTLS): Secure Socket Layer-Wireless Transport Layer Security-WAP Security Architecture-WAP Gateway. (9) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Wolfgang Osterhage ,Wireless security, CRC press‎,2016. 2. William Stallings, “Cryptography and Network Security, Principles and Practices”, Pearson; 7th edition, 2016. 3. Behrouz A Forouzan, “Hill Cryptography and Network Security“, McGraw, 2011. 4. Hakima Chaouchi, Maryline Laurent, Maknavicius,” Wireless and Mobile Network security”, 2010. 5. Merritt Maxim and David Pollino, “Wireless Security”,RSA press series Osborne/McGraw Hill, 2002. 6. Nichols and Lekka, “Wireless Security-Models, Threats and Solutions”, McGraw – Hill, 2002.

211

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18LW24 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR ARCHITECTURES 3003

PROGRAMMABLE DSP HARDWARE: Processing Architectures (von Neumann, Harvard), DSP core algorithms (FIR, IIR, Convolution, Correlation, FFT), IEEE standard for Fixed and Floating Point Computations, Special Architectures Modules used in Digital Signal Processors (like MAC unit,Barrel shifters), On-Chip peripherals, DSP benchmarking. (11) STRUCTURAL AND ARCHITECTURAL CONSIDERATIONS: Parallelism in DSP processing, Texas Instruments TMS320 Digital Signal Processor Families, Fixed Point TI DSP Processors: TMS320C1X and TMS320C2X Family,TMS320C25 –Internal Architecture, Arithmetic and Logic Unit, Auxiliary Registers, Addressing Modes (Immediate, Direct and Indirect, Bit-reverse Addressing), Basics of TMS320C54x and C55x Families in respect of Architecture improvements and new applications fields, TMS320C5416 DSP Architecture, Memory Map, Interrupt System, Peripheral Devices, Illustrative Examples for assembly coding. (12) VLIW ARCHITECTURE: Current DSP Architectures, GPUs as an alternative to DSP Processors, TMS320C6X Family, Addressing Modes, Replacement of MAC unit by ILP, Detailed study of ISA, Assembly Language Programming, Code Composer Studio, Mixed Cand Assembly Language programming, On-chip peripherals, Simple applications developments as an embedded environment. (11) MULTI-CORE DSPS & P-DSP: Introduction to Multi-core computing and applicability for DSP hardware, Concept of threads, introduction to P-thread, mutex and similar concepts, heterogeneous and homogenous multi-core systems, Shared Memory parallel programming –OpenMP approach of parallel programming, PRAGMA directives, OpenMP Constructs for work sharing like for loop, sections, TI TMS320C6678 (Eight Core subsystem). Preliminaries of HPC, MPI, OpenMP, multicore DSP as HPC infrastructure. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Fayez Gebali, “Algorithms and Parallel Computing”,1st Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2011 2. Ann Melnichuk,Long Talk, “Multicore Embedded systems”, 1st Edition, CRC Press, 2010. 3. M. Sasikumar, D. Shikhare, Ravi Prakash, “Introduction to Parallel Processing”, 1st Edition, PHI, 2006. 4. Wayne Wolf, “High Performance Embedded Computing: Architectures, Applications and Methodologies”, 1st Edition, Morgan Kaufman, 2006. 5. Rohit Chandra, Ramesh Menon, Leo Dagum, David Kohr, DrorMaydan, Jeff McDonald,“Parallel Programming in OpenMP”, 1st Edition, Morgan Kaufman, 2000.

18LW25 SOFTWARE DEFINED RADIO ARCHITECTURE INTRODUCTION: Software Defined Radio- SDR concepts & history,- Characteristics and Benefits of Software Radio – Design Principles of a Software Radio, Ideal SDR architecture, SDR Based End-to-End Communication. (9) ARCHITECTURE AND STANDARDISATION OF SDR: Signal Processing Architectures - GPP-Based SDR, FPGA-Based SDR, Architecture for FPGA-Based SDR, Hybrid and Multi-FPGA Architectures, Hardware Acceleration, Multi-Channel SDR; SDR Standardization - Software Communications Architecture – JTRS, STRS, Physical Layer Description and Data Formats. (10) RF SYSTEM DESIGN: Introduction- Principal Challenge of Receiver Design - Enhanced Flexibility of the RF Chain with Software Radios - Noise and Channel Capacity, Transmitter RF Architectures - Receiver RF Front End Architectures, State-of-the-Art SDR Components - SDR Using Test Equipment, SDR Using COTS Components. (9) HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE CENTRIC SDR PLATFORMS: Hardware platforms for SDR – Universal Software Radio Peripheral, Wireless open Access Research platform, RTL SDR receiver. Software platforms for SDR- GNU Radio, Open-Source SCA Implementation: Embedded, Other All-Software Radio Frameworks and Front End for Software Radio. (9) APPLICATIONS OF SDR: Cognitive Radio and Intelligent Wireless Adaptation – Wireless Device Parameters, Vehicular Communication Networks – VDSA overview, Transmitter and Receiver design, VDSA Test bed Implementation, Satellite Communication. (8) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Eugene Grayver, “Implementing Software Defined Radio”, Springer, 2013. 2. Alexander M. Wyglinski, Di Pu, “Digital Communication Systems Engineering with Software-Defined Radio”, Artech House, 2013. 3. Jeffrey H Reed, “Software Radio: A Modern Approach to Radio Engineering”, PEA Publication, 2002. 4. Walter Tuttle bee, “Software Defined Radio: Enabling Technologies”, Wiley Publications, 2002.

18LW26 WIRELESS MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION 3003 INTRODUCTION: Stream characteristics for Continuous media – Temporal Relationship – Object Stream Interactions, Media Levity, Media Synchronization – Models for Temporal Specifications – Streaming of Audio and Video – Jitter – Fixed playout and Adaptive layout – Recovering from packet loss – RTSP –– Multimedia Communication Standards – RTP/RTCP – SIP and H.263. (9)

212

59th ACM

09.06.2018

QOS FOR MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION: End to End QoS provisioning in Wireless Multimedia Networks – Adaptive Framework – MAC layer QoS enhancements in Wireless Networks – A Hybrid MAC protocol for Multimedia Traffic – Call Admission Control in Wireless Multimedia Networks – A Global QoS Management for Wireless Networks. (9) GUARANTEED SERVICE MODEL: Best Effort service model – Scheduling and Dropping policies – Network Performance Parameters – Quality of Service and metrics – WFQ and its variants – Random Early Detection – QoS aware Routing – Admission Control -Resource Reservation – RSVP -Traffic Shaping Algorithms – Caching – Laissez Faire Approach - Possible Architectures – An Overview of QoS Architectures. (9) MULTIMEDIA DATABASES: Audio Databases - A General Model of Audio Data - Capturing Audio Content through Discrete Transformation - Indexing Audio Data. Video Databases - Organizing Content of a Single Video - Querying Content of Video Libraries – Video Segmentation. (9) MEDIA ON DEMAND AND APPLICATIONS: Storage and Media servers, Voice and video over IP, MPEG -2 over ATM / IP, indexing, synchronization of requests, recording and control. MIME, Peer – to – Peer Computing, shared application, Video conferencing, centralized and distributed conference control, Distributed virtual reality, Light weight sessions philosophy. (9) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Kurose and Ross, “Computer Networks : A Top Down Approach’, Pearson Education, 2013 2. Mahbub Hassan and Raj Jain, “High Performance TCP/IP Networking”, Pearson Education, 2004. 3. Jean Warland and Pravin Vareya, “High Performance Communication Networks”, Morgan Kauffman Publishers, 2002 4. William Stallings, “High Speed Networks and Internets: Performance and Quality of Service”, Pearson Education, 2002. 5. Nalin K Sharda, “Multimedia Information Networking”, Prentice Hall of India, 1999.

18LW27 RADAR COMMUNICATION 3003 INTRODUCTION TO RADAR: Basics of radar, EM Waves & properties- applications of radar, radar frequencies-radar block diagram, Radar Coordinates, Radar equation for hard targets and the SNR-radar cross section of targets, Radar Resolution Elements, Pulse, CW and FMCW Radars–configurations, transmitter power- pulse repetition frequency, Duty Ratio, Pulse Compression, Coding. (9) DETECTION OF SIGNALS IN NOISE AND RADAR SIGNALS: Introduction to Noise in detail, probability density functions – probabilities of detection and false alarm-matched filter receiver-detection criteria – integration of radar pulses - constant-false alarm rate receivers - Radar Wave forms, Pulse Compression, Ambiguity Diagram. (9) RADAR TRANMIMTTER AND RECEIVER: Introduction- Types of Transmitters - linear-beam power tubes- solid-state RF power sources- magnetron- Klystron, crossed-filed amplifier- radar receiver- receiver noise figure- super heterodyne receiver, Digital Receivers, duplexers and receiver protectors- radar displays-Human Machine Interface (HMI). (9) RADAR ANTENNA: Functions of radar antenna- antenna parameters- antenna radiation pattern and aperture illumination - reflector antennas- electronically steered phased array antennas- phase shifters – frequency - scan arrays-- architectures for phased arrays , radiators for phased arrays- mechanically steered planar array antennas- radiation pattern synthesis -effect of errors on radiation patterns - low side lobes antennas. (9) MTI AND PULSE DOPPLER RADAR: Introduction to Doppler and MTI radar- delay –line cancellers- staggered pulse repetition frequencies- doppler filter banks- digital MTI processing - Moving target detector- limitations to MTI performance- pulse Doppler radar-MTD, Tracking radar- monopulse tracking- conical scan and sequential lobing- comparison of trackers. tracking accuracylow-angle tracking- Atmospheric & Weather Radars: Precipitation Radars, Doppler Weather Radar, Polarimetric Radar, Clear Air Radars. (9) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Richards M A, Scheer J A and Holm W A, “Principles of Modern Radar”, Yes Dee Publishing Pvt. Ltd., 2012. 2. Merril I Skolnik, “Introduction to Radar Systems”, Mc Graw-Hill, 2008. 3. Bringi V N and Chandrasekar V, “Polarimetric Doppler Weather Radar “, Cambridge University Press, 2001. 4. Richard J Doviak and Dusan S Zrnic, “Doppler Radar and Weather Observations”, Dover Publications, 1993.

18LW28 SPACE TIME WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 3003 MULTIPLE ANTENNA PROPAGATION AND ST CHANNEL CHARACTERIZATION: Wireless channel: free space, fixed transmitting and receive antennas - free space, moving antenna - reflecting wall, fixed antenna - reflecting wall, moving antenna reflection from a ground Plane, Scattering model in macrocells, Channel as a ST random field, Scattering functions, Polarization and field diverse channels, Antenna array topology, Degenerate channels, reciprocity and its implications, Channel definitions, Physical scattering model, Extended channel models, Channel measurements, sampled signal model, ST multiuser and ST interference channels, ST channel estimation. (9) CAPACITY OF MULTIPLE ANTENNA CHANNELS: Capacity of frequency flat deterministic MIMO channel: Channel unknown to the transmitter, Channel known to the transmitter, capacity of random MIMO channels, Influence of ricean fading, fading correlation, XPD and degeneracy on MIMO capacity, Capacity of frequency selective MIMO channels. (9)

213

59th ACM

09.06.2018

SPATIAL DIVERSITY: Diversity gain, Receive antenna diversity, Transmit antenna diversity, Diversity order and channel variability, Diversity performance in extended channels, Combined space and path diversity, Indirect transmit diversity, Diversity of a spacetime- frequency selective fading channel. (9) MULTIPLE ANTENNA CODING AND RECEIVERS: Coding and interleaving architecture, ST coding for frequency flat channels, ST coding for frequency selective channels, Receivers(SISO,SIMO,MIMO),Iterative MIMO receivers, Exploiting channel knowledge at the transmitter: linear pre-filtering, optimal pre-filtering for maximum rate, optimal pre-filtering for error rate minimization, selection at the transmitter, Exploiting imperfect channel knowledge. (9) ST OFDM, SPREAD SPECTRUM AND MIMO MULTIUSER DETECTION: SISO-OFDM modulation, MIMO-OFDM modulation, Signaling and receivers for MIMO- OFDM,SISO-SS modulation, MIMO-SS modulation, Signaling and receivers for MIMO- S.MIMOMAC,MIMO-BC, Outage performance for MIMO-MU,MIMO-MU with OFDM,CDMA and multiple antennas. (9) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. David Tse and Pramod Viswanath, “Fundamentals of Wireless Communication”, Cambridge University Press, 2005. 2. Andrea Goldsmith, “Wireless Communications”, Cambridge University Press, 2005. 3. Paulraj A, Rohit Nabar and Dhananjay Gore, “Introduction to Space Time Wireless Communication Systems”, Cambridge University Press, 2003. 4. Sergio Verdu, “Multi User Detection”, Cambridge University Press, 2003 5. Andre Viterbi, “Principles of Spread Spectrum Techniques”, Pearson, 1995.

18LW29 SPREAD SPECTRUM COMMUNICATION 3003 INTRODUCTION TO SPREAD SPECTRUM SYSTEMS: Communication in the presence of pulse noise jamming - Low probability detection scheme -Direct sequence spread spectrum methods - Frequency Hop spread spectrum methods - Hybrid DS/FH spread spectrum - Complex envelope representation of spread spectrum systems - examples of Spread Spectrum Systems (9) MULTICARRIER SPREAD SPECTRUM SYSTEMS: Amalgamating DS-CDMA and OFDM - Multi-Carrier CDMA techniques – MC CDMA – MC DS CDMA – MT CDMA (8) BINARY SHIFT REGISTER SEQUENCES FOR SPREAD SPECTRUM SYSTEMS: Definition - PN sequence generator fundamentals - Maximal length sequences - Properties, Power spectrum and Polynomial tables for maximal length sequences Gold codes - Rapid Acquisition systems - Non-linear code generators. (9) SYNCHRONIZATION OF SPREAD SPECTRUM SYSTEMS: Optimal tracking of wideband signals - Early-late tracking loops Code tracking loops for FHSS - Optimum synchronization techniques - Multiple dwell and sequential detectors - Synchronization using a matched filter - Synchronization by estimating the received spreading code. (10) PERFORMANCE OF SPREAD SPECTRUM SYSTEM: SS Systems communications models - Performance without coding under AWGN and different jamming environments - spread spectrum systems performances with forward error correction - Block coding Convolutional coding and specific error correcting codes - Inter leaving - Random coding bounds. (9) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Hanzo L and Keller T, “OFDM and MC-CDMA: A Primer”, John Wiley and sons Ltd., 2006. 2. Peterson R L, Ziemer R E and Borth D E, “Introduction to Spread Spectrum Communications”, Prentice Hall, 2005. 3. Dixon R C, “Spread Spectrum Systems with Commercial Applications”, John Wiley & Sons, 1994. 4. Ziemer R E and Peterson R L, "Digital Communication and Spread Spectrum Systems", Macmillan Publishing Co., 1985. 5. Holms J K, "Coherent Spread Spectrum Systems", Wiley Interscience, 1982.

18LW30 5G WIRELESS TECHNOLOGIES 3003 INTRODUCTION AND ROADMAP TO 5G: Historical trend and evolution of LTE technology to beyond 4G – Key building blocks of 5G – 5G use cases and System Concepts – The 5G Architecture – IoT: relation to 5G. (8) RF FRONT END FOR 5G: Millimeter Wave Communications: Hardware technologies for mmW systems – Architecture and Mobility – Massive MIMO: Resource allocation and transceiver algorithms for massive MIMO - Fundamentals of baseband and RF implementations in massive MIMO - Beamforming. (9) 5G WAVEFORMS AND CHANNEL MODELS: 5G Radio Access Technologies: Design principles - Multi-carrier with filtering - Nonorthogonal Multiple Access - Radio access for dense deployments – Radio Access for V2X Communication - Radio access for massive machine-type communication - 5G wireless propagation channel models: Modelling requirements and scenarios - The METIS channel models. (10) NETWORKING IN 5G: Coordinated multi-point transmission in 5G: Joint Transmission CoMP enablers - Distributed cooperative transmission - JT CoMP with advanced receivers - Relaying and network coding in 5G: Multi-flow wireless backhauling - Bufferaided relaying. (9)

214

59th ACM

09.06.2018

EVALUATION OF 5G AND 5G APPLICATIONS: Machine-type communications: Fundamental techniques for MTC - Massive MTC - Ultra-reliable low-latency MTC - Device-to-device (D2D) communications - Multi-hop D2D communications - Multi-operator D2D communication - Simulation methodology: Evaluation methodology – Calibration - New challenges in the 5G modelling. (9) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Wei Xiang, Kan Zheng, Xuemin (Sherman) Shen, - 5G Mobile Communications, Springer, 2017. 2. Afif Osseiran, Jose F. Monserrat and Patrick Marsch, - 5G Mobile and Wireless Communications Technology, Cambridge University Press, 2016. 3. Jonathan rodriguez, - Fundamentals of 5G mobile networks, John Wiley & Sons, Ltd, 2015.

18LW31 FREE SPACE OPTICS 3003 FUNDAMENTALS OF FSO TECHNOLOGY: Introduction – Maxwell’s equations- Electromagnetic Wave Propagation in free space Alternate Bandwidth technologies - fiber Vs FSO- fiber access - Overview of FSO optical transmitters- receivers-subsystemspointing, acquisition and tracking – line of sight analysis. (12) FSO NETWORKS: The role of FSO in the network- factors affecting FSO line of sight- selecting transmission wave integration of FSO in optical networks- installation of FSO systems- Moving towards edge and residential areas. (10) LONG DISTANCE FSO COMMUNICATION: The FSO model - applications- system descriptions and design- introduction to laser satellite communications- characteristics, modulation techniques and radiation effects – laser sources. (11) OPTICAL COMPONENTS AND SIGNAL PROCESSING: Optical waveguides- optical filters, couplers, amplifiers, switches, antennas, interconnecting equipmentsoptical integrated circuitssemiconductor integrated optic devices. Analog and Discrete systems- noise and stochastic processes- filters- power spectra estimation – The ambiguity function, Wigner distribution function and triple correlation. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Pankaj K Das, “Optical Signal Processing”, Narosa Publishing House, 2012 2. Olivier Bouchet, ‎,nuziS evreH‎naitsirhCBoisrobert, "Free-Space Optics" ISTE USA, 2010. 3. Heinz and Willebrand, “Free Space Optics”, Sams, 2002. 4. William H Mott and Robert B Sheldo, “Laser Satellite Communication- The Third Generation”, Green Wood Publishing, 2000. 5. Hiroshi Nishihara, “Optical Integrated Circuits”, McGraw Hill, New York, 1989.

18LW32 SMART ANTENNAS 3003 INTRODUCTION: Antenna gain, Phased array antenna, power pattern, beam steering, degree of freedom, optimal antenna, adaptive antennas, smart antenna - key benefits of smart antenna technology, wide band smart antennas, Digital radio receiver techniques and software radio for smart antennas. (9) NARROW BAND PROCESSING: Signal model conventional beamformer, null steering beamformer, optimal beamformer, Optimization using reference signal, beam space processing. (8) ADAPTIVE PROCESSING: Sample matrix inversion algorithm, unconstrained LMS algorithm, normalized LMS algorithm, Constrained LMS algorithm, Perturbation algorithms, Neural network approach, Adaptive beam space processing, Implementation issues. (9) BROADBAND PROCESSING: Tapped delay line structure, Partitioned realization, Derivative constrained processor, Digital beam forming, Broad band processing using DFT method. (9) DIRECTION OF ARRIVAL ESTIMATION METHODS: Spectral estimation methods, linear prediction method, Maximum entropy method, Maximum likelihood method, Eigen structure methods, Music algorithm – root music and cyclic music algorithm, the ESPRIT algorithm. DIVERSITY COMBINING: Spatial diversity selection combiner, switched diversity combiner, equal gain combiner, maximum ratio combiner, optical combiner. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Robert A Monzingo, Haupt R L and Miller T W, “Introduction to Adaptive Arrays”, Yesdee Publishing Pvt. Ltd., 2012. 2. Balanis, “Antenna Theory: Analysis and Design”, John Wiley and Sons, 2005. 3. Lal Chand Godara, “Smart Antennas” CRC press, 2004. 4. Joseph C Liberti.Jr and Theodore S Rappaport, “Smart Antennas for Wireless Communication: IS-95 and Third Generation CDMA Applications”, Prentice Hall, 1999.

215

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18LW33 RADIO FREQUENCY INTEGRATED CIRCUIT DESIGN 3003

ISSUES IN RFIC DESIGN, NOISE, LINEARITY, and FILTERING: Lower frequency analog design and microwave design versus radio frequency integrated circuit design - Impedance levels for microwave and low-frequency analog design- noise - linearity and distortion in RF Circuits - dynamic range - filtering issue. (9) REVIEW OF TECHNOLOGY: Small -signal model of bipolar transistor - high frequency effects - noise in bipolar transistors - base shot noise-noise sources in the transistor model - bipolar transistor design considerations-CMOS transistor.- impedance matching tapped capacitors and inductors - the concept of mutual inductance - tuning a transformer - bandwidth of an impedance transformation network-quality factor of an LC resonator. (8) DESIGN OF PASSIVE CIRCUIT ELEMENTS IN IC TECHNOLOGIES: Technology backend and metallization in IC technologies sheet resistance and skin effect -parasitic capacitance and inductance -current handling in metal lines-design of inductors and transformers - characterization of inductor-layout of spiral inductors - on-chip transmission lines - high frequency measurements of on-chip passives and common De-Embedding techniques-packaging. (9) LNA AND POWER AMPLIFIER: Basic amplifiers - amplifiers with feed back - noise in amplifiers - linearity in amplifiers - differential pair and other differential amplifiers-low-voltage topologies for LNAs and the use of on-chip transformers - DC bias networks temperature effects - broad band LNA design. Power amplifier: power capability - efficiency calculations - matching considerations Class A,B,C.D.E.F,G,H and S amplifiers -summary of amplifier classes for RF Integrated circuits - AC load line - matching to achieve desired power - packaging -effects and implications of non linearity - linearization techniques - CMOS power amplifier example. (10) MIXERS: Mixing with nonlinearity - basic mixer operation – controlled transconductance mixer - double- balanced mixer - mixer with switching of upper quad - analysis of switching modulator-mixer noise - linearity - improving isolation - image reject and single sideband mixers-alternative mixer designs - general design comments-CMOS mixers. (9) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. John Rogers and Calvin Plett, “Radio Frequency Integrated Circuit Design”, Artech House, 2010. 2. Ferri Losee, “RF Systems, Components and Circuits Handbook”, Artech house, 2005. 3. Stephan A Mass, “Non-Linear Microwave and RF circuits”, Artech House, 2003. 4. Larson L E, “RF and Microwave Circuit for Wireless Applications”, Artech House, 1997.

18LW34 WIRELESS TECHNOLOGIES AND MEASURING TOOLS 3003 MODERN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS: Second Generation, Third Generation mobile Cellular networks – 4G, 5G, LTE, LTE A- Cognitive Radio Technology. (6) RF SIGNAL AND SYSTEM FUNDAMENTALS: Basics of RF and Microwaves - Scattering parameters – Distribution of power – Deterministic & Random signal Power spectral densities – Microwave passive devices –Mixers – Switches – Attenuators – Connectors & adaptors. (9) RF SIGNAL GENERATION: Oscillator Circuits – Direct Digital synthesis – PLL Based Synthesizers – Arbitrary waveform generator – Vector Signal Generator - Phase frequency detector. (10) POWER AND SCATTERING MEASUREMENTS: Power detectors and instrumentation – Primary power standards – power measurement techniques – History of vector network analyzers – Measurement types in VNA – Two port network analyzer calibration. (10) RF MODULAR INSTRUMENTS: Introduction – Understanding software designed systems – Multichannel measurements – Customized measurement systems – Instruments: Spectrum/Signal Analyser – Digital storage Oscilloscope - Mixed signal Oscilloscopes. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Ananjan Basu “An Introduction to Microwave Measurements”, CRC Press, 2015. 2. Valeria Teppati, ‎rerreF‎aerdnAo, ‎ ‎egdirbmaC‎,”seuqinhceT‎tnemerusaeM‎evaworciM‎dna‎FR‎nredoM“‎deyaS‎demahoM .2013‎,sserP‎ytisrevinU 3. Gordon L Stuber, “Principles of Mobile Communication”, Artech House, 2011. 4. Matthew M Radmanesh “RF & Microwave Design Essentials”, Author house, 2007. 5. Hsiao-Hwa Chen and Mohsen Guizani, "Next Generation Wireless Systems and Networks”, John Wiley & Sons, 2006.

216

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18LW35 RF MEMS 3003

MICROELECTROMECHANICAL SYSTEMS(MEMS) AND RADIO FREQUENCY MEMS: Introduction – Microfabrication for MEMS – Electromechanical transducers – Microsensing for MEMS – Materials for MEMS.MEMS Materials and Fabrication TechniquesMetals – Semiconductors – Thin films for MEMS and their deposition techniques – Materials for polymer MEMS – Bulk micromachining for silicon-based MEMS – Silicon surface micromaching – Microstereolithography for polymer MEMS. (10) RF MEMS SWITCHES: Introduction – Switch parameters – Basics of switching – Switches for RF and microwave applications – Electrostatic switching – Approaches for low-actuation –voltage switches – thermal switching –MEMS switch design, modeling and evaluation –MEMS switch design considerations. MEMS Inductors and Capacitors: Introduction – MEMS inductors –MEMS capacitors. (10) MICROMACHINED RF FILTERS AND PHASE SHIFTERS: Introduction – Modeling of mechanical filters - Micromechanical filters – Micromachined phase shifters: Introduction – Types of phase shifters and their limitations – MEMS phase shifters. (9) MICROMACHINED TRANSMISSION LINES AND COMPONENTS: Introduction – Micromachined transmission lines and components – Design, fabrication and measurements. (8) MICROMACHINED ANTENNA: Introduction - Overview of microstrip antenna – Micromachining techniques to improve antenna performance – Micromaching as a fabrication process for small antenna – Micromachined reconfigurable antenna. (8) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Gabriel M Rebeiz, “RF MEMS Theory, Design and Technology “, John Wiley & Sons Ltd, New Jersey, 2004. 2. Vijay K Varadan, Vinoy K J and Jose K A, "RF MEMS and Their Applications“, John Wiley & Sons Ltd, England, 2003. 3. Hector J De Los Santos, “RF MEMS Circuit Design for Wireless communications”, Artech House, 2002.

18LW36 COMPUTATIONAL ELECTROMAGNETICS 3003 ELECTROMAGNETICS REVIEW: E-field, permittivity, Coulombs Law, Flux of a vector field, Gausss Law for E fields (Integral), divergence, Gausss Law for E fields (Differential) B-field, permeability, Biot-Savart law, Gausss law for B fields (integral and differential), Divergence Theorem, circulation of a vector field, curl, Stokes Theorem. Gradient. Laplacian. Poisson and Laplace equations. Ampere-Maxwell Law, Faraday-Maxwell Law. Continuity equation. Constitutive equations. (9) NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION: Forward difference, backward difference, central difference. Higher order derivatives. Partial derivatives. Solution of Linear Systems: Matrix equivalent. Solution sets. Direct vs iterative methods. Sparse matrices. Libraries. Gaussian Elimination. Gauss-Seidel method. Numerical Integration Riemann Sums Left/right-point rules Midpoint, trapezoid, Simpsons rules Error bounds-Numerical Integration Examples (9) METHOD OF MOMENTS: Greens Functions; Surface equivalence principle; Electrostatic formulation; Magnetostatic formulation; Electric Field Integral Equation; Magnetic Field Integral Equation; Direct and Iterative Solvers; (9) FINITE DIFFERENCE TIME DOMAIN METHODS: 1D wave propagation, yee Algorithm, Numerical dispersion and stability, perfectly matched absorbing boundary conditions, Dispersive materials. Antenna and scattering problems with FDTD, non-uniform grids, conformal grids, periodic structures. (10) APPLICATIONS OF CEM: Antennas, biological electromagnetic effects, electronic packing and high speed circuits, microwave devices and circuits, environmental issues. surveillance and intelligence gathering, homeland security, signal integrity. (8) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Walton C Gibson, “The Method of Moments in Electromagnetics”, CRC Press, 2014. 2. Taflove A and Hagness S C, “Computational Electrodynamics: The Finite Difference Time Domain Method”, Artech ouse, 2004. 3. Andrew F Peterson, Scott L Ray and Raj Mittra, “Computational Methods for Electromagnetics”, IEEE Press Series on Electromagnetic Wave Theory,1998. 4. Roger F Harrington, “Field Computation by Moment Methods”, IEEE Press, 1993.

18LW37 EMC TESTING AND MEASUREMENTS 2 203 NATURE AND ORIGINS OF ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY: Introduction – Visualising the EMI problem – Source of EMI – EMI coupling to victim equipments – Intersystem and Intrasystem EMI – Historical background –Technical disciplines and Knowledge areas within EMC – Electrical engineering – Physics –Mathematical modeling – Limited chemical knowledge – System engineering – Legal aspects of EMC. (8+6) EMC STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS: The need for standards and specifications – The need to meet EMC standards – Derivation of military standards – Derivation of commercial standards– Outline of EMC testing – Types of EMC testing – Preconformance test measurements – Implication of repeatability of EMC measurements – Introduction to EMC test sensor – Conduction and Induction couplers – Radiative coupling – EMC antennas. (7+6)

217

59th ACM

09.06.2018

MEASUREMENT DEVICES FOR CONDUCTED EMI: Introduction – Measurement by direct connection –Inductively coupled devices – EMC antennas – Basic antenna parameters – Antennas for radiated emission testing –Wideband antennas – Magnetic field antennas – Use of antennas for radiated susceptibility testing – Type of antennas used in susceptibility testing – Standards requiring immunity tests. (5+6) RECEIVERS, ANALYSERS AND MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT: Introduction – EMI receiver – Spectrum Analyzers – RF power meter – Frequency meters – Instrumentation for susceptibility testing – Automatic EMC tests – Electromagnetic transient testing – Transient types – Continuous and transient signal – ESD-electrostatic discharge. (5+6) DESIGNING TO AVOID EMC PROBLEMS: Intrasystem and Intrasystem EMC – Design for formal EMC compliance – Achieving product EMC :checklists for product development and testing – Introduction – Developing an approach to EMC design – Process flow chart, EMC strategy – Self certification. (5+6) Total L: 30 + T: 30=60 TUTORIAL COMPONENT:  Design of Mathematical Modeling for EMC.  Measurement & Implementation of EMC testing.  Design of conduction & induction couplers.  Design of EMC antennas & analysis.  Measurement of power using RF power meter.  Design of EMC compliance. REFERENCES: 1. Tim Williams, “EMC for Product Designers”, 5th Edition, Newnes Elsevier, 2017. 2. Clayton R. Paul “Introduction to Electromagnetic Compatibility”, Wiley Press, 2014. 3. David Morgan, “A Handbook for EMC Testing and Measurement”, IET Electrical Measurement, 2012.

AUDIT COURSES 18LW81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP81

18LW82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP82

218

59th ACM 13. Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment

09.06.2018

ME CONTROL SYSTEMS (2018 REGULATIONS) (Minimum No. of credits to be earned: 73*) Hours/Week Credits Lecture Tutorial Practical I SEMESTER 18UC01 Mathematics of Systems Engineering 2 2 0 3 18UC02 Smart Sensors and Networks 3 0 0 3 18UC03 Dynamical Systems and Control 4 0 0 4 18UC04 Advanced Process Control 4 0 0 4 18UC05 Embedded Systems 3 2 0 4 18UC51 Object Computing and Data Structures Laboratory 0 0 4 2 0 0 ** Grade 18UC81 English for Research Paper Writing Total 24 Hrs 16 4 4 20 II SEMESTER 18UC06 System Identification 3 0 0 3 18UC07 Nonlinear Control 3 0 0 3 18UC08 State Estimation 3 0 0 3 18UC09 Industrial Automation 3 0 0 3 18UC_ Professional Elective – 1 3 0 0 3 18UC_ Professional Elective – 2 3 0 0 3 18UC52 Industrial Automation Laboratory 0 0 4 2 18UC61 Industry Visit & Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 0 0 ** Grade 18UC82 Research Methodology and IPR Total 26 Hrs 18 0 8 22 III SEMESTER 18UC_ Professional Elective – 3 3 0 0 3 18UC_ Professional Elective – 4 3 0 0 3 18UC_ Professional Elective – 5 3 0 0 3 18UC_ Professional Elective – 6 3 0 0 3 18UC53 Advanced Control Laboratory 0 0 4 2 18UC71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 Total 22 Hrs 12 0 10 17 IV SEMESTER 28 14 18UC72 Project Work II 0 0 Total 28 Hrs 28 14 0 0 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES (Six to be opted) 18UC21 Adaptive Control 3 0 0 3 18UC22 Robust Control 3 0 0 3 18UC23 Industrial Drives and Control 3 0 0 3 18UC24 Applied Soft Computing 3 0 0 3 18UC25 Robotic Systems 3 0 0 3 18UC26 Machine Vision 3 0 0 3 18UC27 Optimal Control 3 0 0 3 18UC28 Advanced Digital Signal Processing 3 0 0 3 18UC29 Optimization Techniques 3 0 0 3 18UC30 Wavelets and Applications 3 0 0 3 18UC31 Multi Sensor Data fusion 3 0 0 3 18UC32 Sliding Mode Control 3 0 0 3 18UC33 Fault Diagnosis and Control 3 0 0 3 18UC34 Mathematical Methods for Process Data Analytics 3 0 0 3 Course Code

Course Title

Maximum Marks CA FE Total

CAT

50 50 50 50 50 50 0 300

50 50 50 50 50 50 0 300

100 100 100 100 100 100 0 600

PC PC PC PC PC EEC MC

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 0 400

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 0 400

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 0 800

PC PC PC PC PE PE PC EEC MC

50 50 50 50 50 50 300

50 50 50 50 50 50 300

100 100 100 100 100 100 600

PE PE PE PE PC EEC

50 50

50 50

100 100

EEC

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE

* Indicated is the minimum number of credits to be earned by a student. ** - 60 hrs in I semester and 90 hrs in II semester; Grade: Completed / Not Completed CAT – Category; PC – Professional Core; PE - Professional Elective EEC – Employability Enhancement Course; MCMandatory Course

219

59th ACM

09.06.2018 I SEMESTER

18EA01/18EE01/18ED01/18EM01/18UC01 MATHEMATICS OF SYSTEMS ENGINEERING 2203 VECTOR SPACES: Real vector spaces, subspaces, linear independence – basis and dimension of a vector space - inner product space, orthonormal bases, Gram-Schmidt process. (8+7) LINEAR TRANSFORMATIONS: General linear transformations, kernel and range, inverse linear transformations, matrices of general linear transformations, eigenvalues and eigenvectors, diagonalization. (8+7) CALCULUS OF VARIATIONS: Variational problems of fixed boundaries: Variations and its properties - simplest variational problems – Euler equation – Brachistochrone problem – variational problems involving several unknown functions – Functional involving first and second order derivatives. (8+7) STOCHASTIC PROCESSES: Classification. Markov chain: Transition probability matrices – Chapman Kolmogorov equations classification of states, limiting probabilities, Poisson process - continuous time Markov chains: Birth-death processes. (8+7) Total L:32 + T:28 = 60 REFERENCES: 1. Howard Anton and Chris Rorres, “Elementary Linear Algebra: Applications Version”, Wiley India, New Delhi, 2018. 2. David C Lay, “Linear Algebra and its Applications”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2017. 3. Medhi J., “Stochastic Processes”, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi, 2017. 4. Saeed Ghahramani, “Fundamentals of Probability with Stochastic Processes”, Pearson, New Delhi, 2016. 5. Elsgolts L., “Differential Equation and Calculus of Variation”, MIR Publication, Moscow, 1977.

18UC02 SMART SENSORS AND NETWORKS 3003 MICRO AND SMART SENSOR: Micro sensors and actuators: Principle, characteristics and application - Smart sensor: construction and characteristics - Integration of Micromachining and Microelectronics - Various sensing Techniques: Capacitive sensing, piezoelectric sensing, Hall effect - Digital output sensors: Incremental optical encoders, Digital techniques - Applications of smart sensors - Design of signal conditioning circuit: 4 to 20 mA transmitter. (12) SMART FIELD DEVICES AND COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS: Smart Transmitters - primary and secondary sensors compensation methods - Handheld communicator - Smart valve positioners - Communications Protocols: CAN protocol, LIN protocol, FlexRay protocol - Protocols in Silicon: MCU with integrated CAN, Ethernet Controller - Industrial Ethernet. (11) STANDARDS FOR SMART SENSING: Setting Standards for Smart Sensors and Systems - IEEE 1451 family of standards Network-Capable Application Processor, Network Communication Models, Smart Transducer Interface Module, Transducer Electronic Data Sheet, Transducer-Independent Interface, Calibration/Correction Engine - Extending System to the Network (11) WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS: Challenges in wireless sensor networks - Single node architecture - Hardware components, energy consumption of sensor nodes - Network architecture - Sensor network scenarios: Types of sources and sinks, single hop versus multi-hop networks, multiple sinks and sources - Design principles and applications of WSNs - Bluetooth sensor networks IEE 802 sensor networks. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Holger Karl and Andreas Willig, “Protocols and Architectures for Wireless Sensor Networks”, John Wiley, 2014. 2. Randy Frank, “Understanding Smart Sensors”, Third Edition, Artech House, 2013. 3. Ananthasuresh G K, Vinoy K J, Gopalakrishnan S, Bhat K N and Aatre V K, “Micro and Smart Systems”, Wiley Publishers, 2011. 4. Gerord C M Meijer, “Smart Sensor Systems”, John Wiley and Sons, 2008. 5. Halit Eren, “Wireless Sensors and Instruments: Networks, Design and Applications”, CRC Press, 2006.

18UC03 DYNAMICAL SYSTEMS AND CONTROL 4004 MATHEMATICAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM: Causality – Lumpedness – Linearity – Linearization- Concept of state, state variables and state model - State space representation using physical, phase and canonical variables - Comparison of input-output description and state variable description- MIMO systems- Discretization of a continuous time model. (15) SOLUTION OF STATE EQUATIONS: State transition matrix – Significance – Properties – Computation, impulse response matrix Simulation of state space model- Solution of discrete time state equation- Solution of linear time variant systems – Discrete time case. Transfer function from state space model- similarity transformation- decomposition of transfer functions: direct, cascade and parallel decomposition techniques. (15)

220

59th ACM

09.06.2018

CONCEPT OF CONTROLLABILITY AND OBSERVABILITY: Kalman`s and Gilbert`s test for controllability– Pole assignment by state feedback using Ackermann’s formula Kalman Canonical form – Controller design using output feedback – Controllability of Discrete LTI systems – Controllability of linear time variant systems. Kalman`s and Gilbert`s test for observability - Design of full order observer using Ackermann’s formula – Observable canonical form – Duality – Observer based controller design – Reduced order observer design – Observability of Discrete LTI Systems – Observability of linear time variant systems (15) STABILITY: Stability in the sense of Lyapunov, asymptotic stability of linear time invariant continuous and discrete systems – Solution of Lyapunov equation – Disturbance rejection, sensitivity and complementary sensitivity functions, internal stability, stability of linear time variant system. SISO Feedback Control: Feedback structures. Nominal sensitivity functions. Stability and polynomial analysis. Nominal stability using frequency response- Relative stability: Stability margins and sensitivity peaks. Synthesis of SISO controllers: polynomial approach. PI and PID synthesis revisited using pole assignment. Frequency-domain design limitations: Bode's integral constraints on sensitivity. Integral constraints on complementary sensitivity. (15) Total L: 60 REFERENCES: 1. William L Brogan, “Modern Control Theory”, Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2011. 2. Graham C Goodwin, Stefan F Graebe and Mario E Salgado, “Control System Design”, Pearson Education, 2009. 3. Chen CT, “Linear System Theory and Design”, Oxford University Press, 1999. 4. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 2016. 5. Benjamin C Kuo, “Automatic Control Systems”, Prentice Hall of India, 2016.

18UC04 ADVANCED PROCESS CONTROL 4004 PROCESS DYNAMICS & CONTROL ACTIONS: Need for Process Control – Continuous and batch processes - Degrees of freedom – Servo and regulator operation - Self regulation – Mathematical model of flow, level and thermal processes – Interacting and non-interacting systems – Linearization of nonlinear systems – Characteristic of ON-OFF, P, P+I, P+D and P+I+D control modes – Digital PID algorithm – Bumpless transfer scheme – Anti-reset windup scheme – P&ID diagrams (15) CONTROLLER TUNING & FINAL CONTROL ELEMENT: Evaluation criteria – Tuning: Process reaction curve method, Continuous cycling method and Damped oscillation method – Auto tuning – Pneumatic and Electric actuators – Types of control valves – Characteristic of control valves – Control valve sizing – Cavitation and flashing (15) COMPLEX CONTROL SCHEMES: Cascade control – Split-range control – Feed-forward control – Ratio control – Inferential control – Override control – Adaptive control schemes – Smith predictor control scheme – Internal Model Control – IMC PID controller – Model Predictive Control (15) MULTI-LOOP CONTROL: Process interaction – Pairing of Inputs and Outputs – Relative Gain Array: Properties and Applications – Multi-loop PID Controller – Biggest Log Modulus Tuning Method – Decoupling of control loops – Case study: Control schemes for CSTR, Distillation column and Four-tank system (15) Total L: 60 REFERENCES: 1. Stephanopoulos G, “Chemical Process Control:An Introduction to theory and Practice”, PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2014. 2. Donald R Coughanowr and Steven E Leblanc, “Process Systems Analysis and Control”, Tata McGraw Hill Inc., 2014. 3. Curtis D Johnson, “Process Control Instrumentation Technology”, Pearson New International Edition, 2013. 4. Wayne Bequette B. “Process Control: Modeling, Design and Simulation”, PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2013. 5. Liptak B G, “Process Control”, Butterworth - Heinemann,1999.

18UC05 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS 3204 INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEMS: Embedded System and its types - Recent Trends in Embedded Systems – Architecture of Embedded Systems: Hardware Architecture – Software Architecture – Application Software – Communication Software – Process of Generating Executable Image – Development / Testing Tools (12+9) HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT TOOLS: Types of Hardware platforms – ARM Processor – Programming for Embedded Systems: GNU Development tools – Bit manipulation using C – Memory Management – Timing of Programs – Device Drivers – Code Optimization – Hardware / Software Co-Design and Program Modeling - UML – Hardware/Software Trade offs (10+8) DIGITAL CONTROLLERS: Digital control system- Sensors and Actuators- Signal conditioning and Driver circuits- - Discretization Digital realization of controllers- Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) Controller-Hardware implementation considerations-. Fixed and Floating point number representation-IEEE 754-Floating point emulation-Fixed point implementation of control algorithms. (10+8) RTOS BASED EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN: Basic concepts of RTOS – Task, Process & threads – Interrupt routines in RTOS – Multiprocessing and Multitasking – Preemptive and non-preemptive scheduling – Task communication – Interprocess Communication – Priority inversion – Comparison of different commercial RTOS – µC/OS-II (10+8) Total: L: 45+T:30=75

221

59th ACM

09.06.2018

REFERENCES: 1. Raj Kamal, “Embedded Systems: Architecture, Programming and Design”, Tata-McGraw Hill, 2013. 2. Alexandru Forrai, “Embedded Control System Design: A Model Based Approach”, Springer, 2013. 3. Andrew N Sloss, Dominic Symes and Chris Wright, “ARM System Developer’s Guide: Designing and Optimizing System Software”, Elseiver Publishers, 2013. 4. Jonathan W Valvano, “Embedded Microcomputer Systems: Real Time Interfacing”, Cengage Learning, 2013. 5. K.V.K.K.Prasad, “Embedded/ Real-Time Systems: Concepts, Design and Programming” , Dreamtech press, 2003

18UC51 OBJECT COMPUTING AND DATA STRUCTURES LABORATORY 0042 LABORATORY COMPONENT: Object Computing and Data Structures Laboratory course highlights the difference between procedure oriented programming and object oriented programming. It gives an idea about the basic concepts of OOP. After completing this course a brief knowledge about the concepts in object-oriented programming can be obtained. This course also gives a clear understanding on Data Structures and its type. It deals with the linear data structures and their algorithms. It explores the basic sorting techniques in data structures with their algorithm. Object Computing (Using C++): Implementation of the following problems: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Implementation of classes and object for simple arithmetic operations. Implementation of array of objects and dynamic objects. Implementation of Static members. Implementation of call by value, call by reference and return by reference. Implementation of friend functions, inline functions and default arguments. Implementation of constructors and destructors. Implementation of inheritance and its types Implementation of polymorphism and its types.

Data Structures (Using C or C++): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Program using arrays. Representation of Sparse & dense Matrix using arrays. Implementation of Stacks using array. Application of Stack: Conversion of infix to postfix expression Implementation of queue using array. Implementation of Linked Lists: Singly linked, doubly linked and Circular lists and applications. Implementation of various sorting algorithms.

Total P: 60 REFERENCES: 1. Herbert Schildt, “C++ - The Complete Reference", Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2012. 2. Aaron M Tanenbaum, Moshe J Augenstein and YedidyahLangsam, "Data structures using C and C++", Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009. 3. Harvey M Deitel,andPaul J Deitel, “C++ How to Program”, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2010. 4. Robert L Kruse, Bruce P Leung and Clovin L Tondo, “Data Structures and Program Design in C”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009 5. Mark Allen Weiss, “Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2007. 6. SahniSartaj, "Data Structures, Algorithms and Applications in C++", Universities Press, Hyderabad, 2005.

II SEMESTER 18UC06 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION 3003 IDENTIFICATION AND MODELS: System Identification Procedure- Identifiability- Signal-to-Noise ratio- Over fitting- Models: Definition of a model, Classification of models, Models for discrete time linear time-invariant Systems, Models for time varying systems and nonlinear systems, Models for Linear Stationary Processes (11) ESTIMATION METHODS: Types of estimation problems - Goodness of Estimators: Fisher information, Bias, Variance, Efficiency, Sufficiency, Cramer-Rao’s inequality, Asymptotic bias, Mean square error, Consistenc y– Estimation methods: Method of moments estimators- Least squares estimators- Non-linear least squares- Maximum likelihood estimators- Bayesian estimators. (11) NON-PARAMETRIC AND PARAMETRIC MODELS FOR IDENTIFICATION: Non-parametric descriptions and parametric descriptions - Identification of Parametric Time-Series Models: Estimation of AR models- Estimation of MA models - Identification of Non-Parametric Input-Output Models: Impulse response estimation- Step response estimation- Estimation of frequency response function- Identification of Parametric Input-Output Models: Prediction-error minimization (PEM) methods - Properties (12)

222

59th ACM

09.06.2018

STATE SPACE MODEL IDENTIFICATION: Informative Data- Input design for identification- Data pre-processing- Model development- Identification of State-Space Models: Kalman filter- Foundations for subspace identification- - Subspace identification algorithms (11) Total: L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Thomas Kailath, Ali H Sayed and Babak Hassibi, “Linear Estimation”, Pearson, 2016. 2. Arun K Tangirala, “Principles of System Identification: Theory and practice”, CRC Press, 2014. 3. Brian Rofel and Ben Betlem, “Advanced Practical Process Control”, Springer, 2008. 4. Ljung L, “System Identification: Theory for the User”, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, Second Edition, 1999. 5. Jer Nan Juang, “Applied System Identification”, Pearson Education, 1994.

18UC07 NONLINEAR CONTROL 3003 INTRODUCTION AND DESCRIBING FUNCTION ANALYSIS: Nonlinear system behavior- Common Nonlinearities in control systems- Autonomy. Describing Function Fundamentals -Describing functions of common nonlinearities – Describing function analysis of nonlinear systems: Existence and stability of limit cycles. (11) PHASE PLANE ANALYSIS AND LYAPUNOV STABILITY THEORY: Singular points - Construction of phase plane using Isocline, delta methods - Existence of Limit cycles: Poincare index and Bendixon theorems - Stability. Concepts of Stability-Linearization and Local Stability-Lyapunov’s Direct Method –Generation of Lyapunov functions: Krasovski’s, Lure’s and Variable Gradient MethodPopov’s stability criterion. LaSalle's invariance principle. (12) FEEDBACK LINEARIZATION: Method of feedback linearization-Mathematical tools: Lie derivatives, lie brackets, involutive condition, Frobenius theorem- Input-state linearization of SISO systems- Input-output linearization of SISO Systems- Internal dynamics and zero dynamics. (11) SLIDING MODE CONTROL AND BACKSTEPPING CONTROL: Basic concepts of variable structure systems - Sliding surfacesFilippov’s construction of equivalent dynamics- Conditions for existence of sliding regions. Backstepping control- Case Study:back stepping method for non-feedback linearizable systems . (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Gopal M “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”, Tata McGraw- Hill Ltd, New Delhi, 2004. 2. Zoran Vukic, Ljubomir Kuljaca, Dali Donlagic and Sejid Tesnjak, “Nonlinear Control Systems”, Marcel Dekker Inc, 2003. 3. Horacio J Marquez, “Nonlinear Control Systems: Analysis and Design”, John Wiley & Sons Inc, 2003. 4. Wilfrid Peruquetti and Jean Pierre Barabot, “Sliding Mode Control in Engineering”, Marcel Dekker Inc, 2002. 5. Jean Jacques Slotine and Weiping Li, “Applied Nonlinear Control”, Prentice Hall Inc., 1991.

18UC08 STATE ESTIMATION 3003 INTRODUCTION TO STATE ESTIMATION AND KALMAN FILTER: Review of state observers for deterministic System- Least Square Estimation - Discrete Kalman Filter- Kalman filter generalization – correlated process and measurement noise- limitations of Kalman filter – Case Studies. (11) NONLINEAR KALMAN FILTERS: Linearized Kalman filter – Extended Kalman filter –Second order Extended Kalman filter – Constrained Extended Kalman filter. Unscented Kalman filter - Unscented transformation - Simplex unscented transformation – Spherical unscented transformation - Constrained Unscented Kalman filter – Case Studies. (12) PARTICLE FILTER : Particle filtering - SIS filtering algorithm - Degeneracy phenomenon-SIR Particle filter - Implementation issues:Sample Impoverishment – Selection of proposal density:- Particle filter with EKF as proposal - Unscented Particle filter-Case Studies. (11) DECENTRALIZED ESTIMATION FOR MULTISENSOR SYSTEMS: Multisensor systems - Decentralized systems - Information Filter - Decentralized Estimators - Decentralized information filter - Decentralized Kalman filter - Limitations of fully connected Decentralization. (11) Total L:45 REFERENCES: 1. Bruce P. Gibbs, "Advanced Kalman Filtering, Least-Squares and Modeling: A Practical Handbook" John Wiley and Sons, 2011. 2. Dan Simon, “Optimal State Estimation Kalman, H-infinity and Non-linear Approaches”, John Wiley and Sons, 2006. 3. Branko Ristic, Sanjeev Arulampalam, Neil Gordon, “Beyond the Kalman Filter: Particle filters for Tracking Applications” Artech House Publishers, Boston, London, 2004. 4. Arthur G O Mutambara, “Decentralized Estimation and Control for Multisensor Systems”, CRC Press, 1998 5. Brian D. O. Anderson, John B. Moore, “Optimal Filtering”, Prentice Hall, 1979

223

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18UC09 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION 3003

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC) BASICS AND PROGRAMMING: Overview of PLC systems - input/output modules-power supplies and isolators - Memory mapping -PLC programming Languages- PLC ladder diagram programming using timers and counters - Programming using advanced PLC functions. (11) PLC APPLICATIONS & SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEMS (SCADA): Analog PLC operation - PID function - Design of interlocks and alarms using PLC – Safety PLCs- Case study on industrial applications of PLC - Elements of SCADA - Functionality of SCADA -Master Terminal Unit (MTU) - Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) -Interfacing PLC and SCADA using communication link. (11) DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM AND INDUSTRIAL COMMUNICATION STANDARDS: Different architectures – Local Control unit - Operator Interface – Displays - Engineering interface - Redundancy concept -Factors to be considered in selecting DCS Communication facilities: HART Protocol, Wireless HART. Foundation Field bus, PROFIBUS, MODBUS - Case Study of any one DCS. (12) ADVANCES IN INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION: Process data analytics, Cloud based automation, Industrial Internet of Things (IIoT) (11) Total: L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Frank D Petruzella, “Programmable Logic Controllers”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2016. 2. Stuart A Boyer, “SCADA: Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition Systems”, ISA Press, 2010. 3. Lukcas M P, “Distributed Control Systems”, Van Nostrand Reinhold Co., New York, 1986. 4. John Park, Steve Mackay, Edwin Wright, “Practical Data Communications for Instrumentation and Control”, Elsevier, 2003 5. Alasdair Gilchrist, “Industry 4.0: The Industrial Internet of Things” Kindle Edition, Apress, New York, 2016

18UC52 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION LABORATORY 0042 In this course, students initially will be provided with an orientation program about the hardware pilot process plant and software used for process automation. In addition to this, every week students will be given theoretical inputs related to the problems defined for about two hours. These problems are about development of ladder logic for sequential control applications using programmable logic controllers and development of control strategies for continuous control of pilot process plants using distributed control system. Each student is expected to solve a control problem given to them and simulate to test the performance of the solution provided by them and, finally implement in real time. A report is to be submitted based on the results obtained with inference. Total: P: 60

18UC61 INDUSTRY VISIT & TECHNICAL SEMINAR 0042 The student will make at least two technical presentations on current topics related to the specialization. The same will be assessed by a committee appointed by the department. The students are expected to submit a report at the end of the semester covering the various aspects of his/her presentation together with the observation in industry visits. A quiz covering the above will be held at the end of the semester. Total: P: 60

III SEMESTER 18UC53 ADVANCED CONTROL LABORATORY 0042 In this course students will be provided with an orientation program on the equipment and software facilities available in the department connected with this lab. In addition to this, every week students will be given theoretical inputs related to the problems defined for about two hours. Based on which every student is instructed to work with different mathematical models of systems for the problems defined. These models should be minimum of order four and can represent stable/unstable, minimum/non-minimum phase systems, and should have been obtained from standard literature. The focus of the problems defined are to implement state estimator, multivariable controller, optimal and adaptive controllers on the models considered. Few of the above exercise is also carried out based on the mathematical models of bench mark systems available in the department, to perform real time control. A report is to be submitted based on the results obtained with inference. Total: P: 60

224

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18UC71 PROJECT WORK - I 0063

     

Identification of a real life problem in thrust areas Developing a mathematical model for solving the above problem Finalisation of system requirements and specification Proposing different solutions for the problem based on literature survey Future trends in providing alternate solutions Consolidated report preparation of the above Total P: 90

IV SEMESTER 18UC72 PROJECT WORK – II 0 0 28 14 The project involves the following: 

Preparing a project - brief proposal including  Problem Identification  A statement of system / process specifications proposed to be developed (Block Diagram / Concept tree)  List of possible solutions including alternatives and constraints  Cost benefit analysis  Time Line of activities



A report highlighting the design finalization [based on functional requirements & standards (if any)



A presentation including the following:   



Implementation Phase (Hardware / Software / both) Testing & Validation of the developed system Learning in the Project

Consolidated report preparation Total P: 420

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES 18UC21 ADAPTIVE CONTROL 3003 GAIN SCHEDULING CONTROLLER: Adaptive Schemes - The adaptive Control Problem - Applications - Parameter estimation in dynamical systems: - Least squares and regression methods - Gain scheduling: Principle, Design of gain scheduling controllers, Nonlinear transformations, Applications - Auto-tuning techniques- Methods based on Relay feedback (12) DETERMINISTIC SELF-TUNING REGULATORS: Pole Placement design - Indirect Self-tuning regulators – Continuous-time self tuners - direct self-tuning regulators – Disturbances with known characteristics (11) STOCHASTIC AND PREDICTIVE SELF-TUNING REGULATORS: Design of minimum variance controller - Design of moving average controller - stochastic self-tuning regulators - Unification of direct self tuning regulators - Linear Quadratic STR - Adaptive Predictive Control. (11) MODEL REFERENCE ADAPTIVE SYSTEM: MIT rule – Determination of adaptation gain – Lyapunov theory – Design of MRAS using Lyapunov theory – Relation between MRAS and STR- Case Studies. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Karl J Astrom and Bjorn Wittenmark, “Adaptive Control”, Pearson Education Inc., New Delhi, 2009. 2. Shankar Sastry and Marc Bodson, “Adaptive Control – Stability, Convergence and Robustness”, Dover Publisher Inc, New York, 2009. 3. Ioannou P A and Sun J, “Robust Adaptive Control”, Prentice Hall, 1996. 4. Krstic M, Kanellakopoulos I and Kokotovic P, “Nonlinear and Adaptive Control Design”, Wiley -Interscience , 1995. 5. Chalam V V, “Adaptive Control Systems – Techniques and Applications”, Marcel Dekkar Inc., New Jersey, 1987.

225

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18UC22 ROBUST CONTROL 3003

UNCERTAINTY AND ROBUSTNESS: Concepts of model uncertainty, including both parametric and dynamic uncertainty Fundamental concept of robustness and the relationship between physical systems and mathematical models - Mathematical background including norms for vectors, matrices, signals, and systems - Co prime Factorization and stabilizing controllers, singular value decomposition and its application to perturbation analysis. (11) MODELLING OF UNCERTAIN SYSTEMS: Unstructured Uncertainties - Parametric Uncertainty - Linear fractional transformations and canonical forms - Structured Uncertainty - Robust stability and performance problems. (11) ROBUST DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS: Small gain theorem and Robust Stabilization, Performance Consideration, Structured Singular Values. H – infinity design: Mixed Sensitivity H-infinity Optimization. H-infinity suboptimal solutions, Discrete time case H-infinity loop shaping design: Robust Stabilization against normalised Coprime Factor Perturbations, Loop Shaping Design, Mixed Optimization Design Method with LSDP. µ- Analysis and Synthesis: Consideration of Robust performance, µ-synthesis- D-K Iteration method, µ-K Iteration method. (12) LOWER ORDER CONTROLLERS: Absolute-error Approximation Methods, Reduction via Fractional Factors, Relative-error Approximation Methods, Frequency Weighted Approximation Methods. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Skogestad and Postlethwaite, “Multivariable Feedback Control: Analysis and Design”,Wiley India Pvt.Ltd, 2015. 2. Mackenroth U “Robust Control Systems, Theory and Case Studies”, Springer India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2010. 3. Gu D W, Petkov and Konstantinov M M, “Robust Control with MATLAB”, Springer, 2009. 4. Kemin Zhou and John Doyle, “Essentials of Robust Control”, Prentice-Hall Inc., 1998. 5. Zhou K, Doyle J C and Glover K, “Robust and Optimal Control”, Prentice-Hall Inc., 1996.

18UC23 INDUSTRIAL DRIVES AND CONTROL 3003 DC MOTOR DRIVES: Electrical drives, Fundamental torque equations, Speed torque conventions and multiquadrant operation, Components of load torques, Nature and classification of load torques, State space model of DC motor drive, Single-phase and Three-phase drives: Half converter, Semi converter, Full converter and Dual converter fed drives- Two quadrant and four quadrant chopper controlled drives – Closed loop control of DC drives (12) INDUCTION MOTOR DRIVES: Performance characteristics, Stator Control: Stator voltage control, Rotor voltage control, Frequency control, Voltage and frequency control, Current control, Voltage, current and frequency control - Rotor resistance control: Conventional methods, Static rotor resistance control - Slip power recovery: Static Kramer drive, Static Scherbius drive. (11) VECTOR CONTROL OF INDUCTION MOTOR DRIVES: Principle of vector control – Direct vector control - Flux vector estimation – Indirect vector control – Vector control of line-side PWM rectifier – Stator flux oriented vector control – Vector control of current fed inverter drive. (11) SYNCHRONOUS AND SPECIAL DRIVES: Synchronous Motor Drives: Open loop volts/hertz control, Self control model Permanent magnet ac motor drives, Brushless dc motor drives, Sensorless control - Stepper motor and Switched reluctance motor drives. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Ion Boldea and Nasar S A, “Electric Drives”, CRC Press LLC, New York, 2017. 2. Gopal K Dubey, “Fundamentals of Electric Drives”, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 2016. 3. Muhammad H Rashid, “Power Electronics Handbook”, Butterworth-Heinemann-Elsevier, 2014 4. Krishnan R, “Electric Motor Drives: Modelling, Analysis and Control”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2009. 5. Bimal K Bose, “Power Electronics and Variable Frequency Drives - Technology and Application”, Standard Publishers Distributers, 2000.

18UC24 APPLIED SOFT COMPUTING 3003 ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS AND CONTROL: Review of basic concepts of Artificial Neural Nets – Architecture of learning algorithm – MLP Architecture: Back Propagation Algorithm – Radial Basis Function Nets – Kohonen Self-Organizing Nets - Non Linear optimization - Representation of nonlinear Systems – Nonlinear system identification and monitoring with Artificial Neural Networks – Modeling and control of nonlinear system using ANN - Adaptive neuro controller – case studies. (12) FUZZY LOGIC AND CONTROL: Basics of Fuzzy sets - Fuzzy operations- Fuzzy Relations – Fuzzification – Defuzzification Linguistic Hedges – Model based fuzzy control : Fuzzy modeling - Development of membership functions – Modeling of nonlinear systems using fuzzy models - Design of fuzzy logic controller – Case studies. (11) NEURO-FUZZY CONTROL 1: Feedback control systems and Neuro-Fuzzy control - Inverse learning - Specialized learning - Back propogation through time and Real-time recurrent learning - Case studies: The inverted pendulum system. (11)

226

59th ACM

09.06.2018

NEURO-FUZZY CONTROL 2: Reinforcement learning control – Gradient free optimization – Gain scheduling Fuzzy controller – Feedback linearization of sliding control - Case studies: Cart and pole system with a varying pole length. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Timothy J Ross, “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd, 2015. 2. J.-S.R. Jang, C.-T. Sun, E. Mizutani, “Neuro-Fuzzy & Soft Computing”, Pearson. 2015 3. Laurene V Fausett, “Fundamentals of Neural Networks, Architecture, Algorithms and Applications”, Pearson Education, 2011. 4. Jin Y, “Advanced Fuzzy systems Design & Applications “Springer, New Delhi, 2010. 5. Kecman V, “Learning and Soft Computing, Support Vector Machines, Neural Networks and Fuzzy Logic Models”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2004.

18UC25 ROBOTIC SYSTEMS 3003 ROBOTICS AND KINEMATICS: Robots Classifications –Elements of Robotics: Joints, Actuators and Sensors –End effectors – Applications – Kinematics: Matrix representation – Homogeneous transformation – DH representation of standard robots – Inverse kinematics. (11) ROBOT DYNAMICS: Velocity kinematics – Jacobian and inverse Jacobian – Lagrangian formulation – Eulers Lagrangian formulation – Robot equation of motion-Trajectory planning. (11) ROBOTIC VISION: Image formation -Image processing and analysis - Vision applications: Detection, Recognition and TrackingCamera geometry and calibration (11) JOINT CONTROL: Linear control of robotic manipulators – Second-order systems – Modeling and control of single joint – Performance of feedback control system-Implementation issues- Architecture of industrial robotic controllers - Case studies (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Craig, “Introduction to Robotics Mechanics and Control”, Pearson Education, Asia, 2016. 2. Ashitava Ghosal, “Robotics: Fundamental Concepts and Analysis”, Oxford University Press, 2013. 3. Mikell P. Groover, Mitchell Weiss, Roger N Nagel and Nicholas G Odrey, “Industrial Robotics: Technology, Programming and Applications”, Mc-Graw Hill Publisher, 2012. 4. Davis E R, “Machine Vision: Theory, Algorithms and Practicalities”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2006. 5. Saeed B Niku, “Introduction to Robotics Analysis, Systems, Applications", Pearson Education, 2003

18UC26 MACHINE VISION 3003 IMAGE FORMATION AND TRANSFORM: Digital image – image sensor- image model – perspective geometry - image file formats - neighbours of a pixel - Fourier transform- Discrete Cosine Transform- Karhunen-Loeve (KL) transform - Singular Vale Decomposition-Hough transform-Affine transform-scale invariant feature transform. (12) IMAGE ENHANCEMENT AND RESTORATION: Spatial domain enhancement: gray level transformations - histogram processingedge detection - Frequency domain enhancement: filtering in frequency domain- smoothing frequency domain filters-sharpening frequency domain filters- homomorphic filtering- Noise models- Restoration by order statistics filter - Inverse filtering - Wiener filtering. (11) IMAGE REPRESENTATION AND SEGMENTATION: Chain code – Fourier descriptor- Bspline representation- Convex hullDetection of discontinuities: point, line and edge detection-Edge linking and boundary detection-Thresholding: global thresholdingoptimal thresholding- local thresholding- thresholds based on several variables- Region based segmentation: basic formulationregion growing- region splitting and merging. (11) PATTERN RECOGNITION AND CLASSIFICATION: Feature –Feature vector – Feature extraction – Principal Component Analysis – Linear Discriminant Analysis – transform based feature extraction - Statically pattern recognition – Bayes classifier- k-nearest Neighbor classifier - Syntactic Pattern Recognition– Support Vector Machine. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Sonka, Hlavac and Boyle, “Image Processing, Analysis, and Machine Vision”, Cengage INDIA Learning Pvt Ltd, 2016. 2. Duda R, Hart P and Stork D, “Pattern Classification”, Wiley, 2014. 3. Anil K Jain, "Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing" PHI Learning, New Delhi, 2010. 4. Forsyth and Ponce, “Computer Vision: A Modern Approach”, PHI Learning, 2009. 5. Rafael C Gonzalez and Richard E Woods, "Digital Image Processing", Peace Publishers,New Delhi, 2001.

227

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18UC27 OPTIMAL CONTROL 3003

CALCULUS OF VARIATIONS AND OPEN LOOP OPTIMAL CONTROL: State variable representation of systems- Performance measures for optimal control problems - Selection of performance measures – Calculus of variations – Definitions– The basic variational problem - Extrema of functions and functional with conditions – Variational approach to optimal control system- Discrete time optimal control system:- Variational calculus, Fixed final state and Free-final state open loop optimal control (12) LINEAR QUADRATIC OPTIMAL CONTROL SYSTEM: Problem formulation – Finite time Linear Quadratic regulator – Infinite time LQR system: Time Varying case- Time-invariant case – Stability issues of Time-invariant regulator – Linear Quadratic Tracking system: Fine time case and Infinite time case - Discrete time linear state regulator system – Steady state regulator system-Case studies (11) PONTRYAGIN MINIMUM PRINCIPLE: Dynamic Programming:- Principle of optimality, optimal control using Dynamic Programming – Optimal Control of Continuous time and Discrete-time systems – Hamilton-Jacobi-Bellman Equation – LQR system using Hamilton-Jacobi-Bellman Equation (11) CONSTRAINED OPTIMAL CONTROL SYSTEMS: Optimal control systems with control constraints: Time optimal control systems, Fuel Optimal Control Systems ,Energy optimal control systems – Optimal control systems with state constraints (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Kirk D E, “Optimal Control Theory: An Introduction”, BSB Books P Ltd, Hyderabad, 2016. 2. Frank L Lewis, “Optimal Control”, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2012. 3. Gopal M, “Modern Control System Theory”, New Age International P Ltd, New Delhi, 2012. 4. Desineni Subbaram Naidu, “Optimal Control Systems”, CRC Press, 2009. 5. Jeffrey B Burl, “Linear Optimal Control”, Addison-Wesley, California, 1999.

18UC28 ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING 3003 SPECTRAL ESTIMATION: Nonparametric methods – The periodiogram – Performance of the periodiogram – The Modified Periodiogram – Bartlett’s method –Welch Method – Blackman-Tukey method- Performance comparisons – Parametric methods. (12) ADAPTIVE FILTERS: FIR adaptive filters – adaptive filters based on steepest descent method – LMS algorithm – Variants of LMS algorithm – adaptive channel equalization – adaptive echo cancellation – RLS adaptive algorithm (11) MULTIRATE SIGNAL PROCESSING: Downsampling- Upsampling – Commutativity of upsampling and down sampling- Multirate identities – Polyphase representation – Fracational sampling rate conversion - Multistage implementation of decimation and interpolation- Two channel filter bank, M channel filter bank:Perfect reconstruction criterion- Applications of filter bank in speech and image coding. (11) WAVELET TRANSFORM: Need for time-frequency representation – Short-Time Fourier Transform: Properties, filterbank realization – Continuous Wavelet Transform: Properties, Admissibility condition – Discrete Wavelet transform – Multi resolution analysis. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Vikram M Gadre and Aditya S. Abhyankar, “Multiresolution and Multirate Signal Processing”, McGraw Hill, 2017. 2. Monson H Hayes, “Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modeling,” John Wiley and Sons, 2014. 3. Behrouz Farhang-Boroujeny, “Adaptive Filters:Theory and Applications” Wiley, 2013. 4. Vaidyanathan P P, “Multirate Systems and Filter Banks”, Pearson Education, 2011. 5. Bernard Widrow and Samuel D Stearns, “Adaptive Signal Processing,” Prentice Hall, 2009.

18UC29 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES 3003 LINEAR PROGRAMMING: Statement of Optimization problems, Graphical method, Simplex method, Revised simplex method, Two phase simplex method, Duality in linear programming, Sensitivity analysis. (12) UNCONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION: Direct search methods - Univariate method, Pattern search method, Simplex method, Descent methods - Steepest Descent method, Conjugate gradient method, Quasi Newton method. (11) CONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION: Direct methods - The Complex method, Zoutendijk’s Method of Feasible Directions, Rosen’s Gradient Projection Method , Indirect method - Transformation Techniques, Basic Approach of the Penalty Function Method, Interior Penalty Function Method, Exterior Penalty Function Method. (11) DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING: Multistage decision process, Suboptimization and Principle of Optimality, Computational procedure, Final value problem to initial value problem, Linear Programming as a Case of Dynamic Programming, Continuous dynamic programming. (11)

228

59th ACM

09.06.2018 Total L:45

REFERENCES: 1. Sharma J K, “Operations Research: Theory and Applications”, Trinity Press, New Delhi, 2016. 2. Singaresu S Rao, “Engineering Optimization: Theory and Practice”, New Age International, New Delhi, 2014. 3. Gupta C B, “Optimization Techniques in Operations Research”, I K International, New Delhi, 2008. 4. Hamdy A Taha, “Operations Research: An Introduction”, Prentice Hall, 2008. 5. Nash S G and Ariela Sofer, "Linear and Nonlinear Programming", McGraw Hill, New York, 1996.

18UC30 WAVELETS AND APPLICATIONS 3003 SIGNAL DECOMPOSITION: Vector space and inner product – orthogonal basis - Hilbert space- Fourier basis and Fourier Transform – Limitations of Fourier Transform – Need for Time-Frequency Analysis - Heisenberg’s Uncertainty principle – Wigner Ville distribution - Short time Fourier transform (STFT) Analysis - short comings of STFT- Need for wavelets. (12) CONTINUOUS WAVELET TRANSFORM: Wavelet basis – concept of scale and its relation with frequency, Continuous time Wavelet Transform equation – series expansion using wavelets – CWT – Admissibility condition – Multi Resolution Analysis (MRA) (11) DISCRETE WAVELET TRANSFORM: Series expansion of discrete-time signals- design and analysis of filter banks - Perfect Reconstruction condition – orthogonal and biorthogonal filter banks – tree structured filter bank - relationship between wavelets and filter banks – lifting scheme. (11) APPLICATIONS OF WAVELETS: Power signal analysis - Signal Denoising - Sub-band coding of speech and music – Image Compression (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Vikram M Gadre and Aditya S. Abhyankar, “Multiresolution and Multirate Signal Processing”, McGraw Hill, 2017. 2. Vaidyanathan P P, “Multirate Systems and Filter Banks”, Prentice Hall, 2011. 3. Vetterli M and Kovacevic J, "Wavelets and Subband Coding," Prentice Hall, 2008. 4. Stephane G Mallat, “A Wavelet Tour of Signal Processing”, Academic Press, 2006. 5. Sidney Burrus C, Ramesh A. Gopinath and Haitao Guo, “Introduction to Wavelets and Wavelet Transforms: A Primer”, Prentice Hall, 1998.

18UC31 MULTI SENSOR DATA FUSION 3003 FOUNDATIONS OF DATA FUSION: Sensors and sensor data, Use of multiple sensors, Fusion applications. The inference hierarchy: output data. Data fusion model. Architectural concepts and issues. Benefits of data - Limitation of Data Fusion. Mathematical tools used: Algorithms, co-ordinate transformations, rigid body motion. Dependability and Markov chains, Meta heuristics. (11) TAXONOMY OF ALGORITHMS FOR MULTISENSOR DATA FUSION: Data association and correlation. Process Model for Correlation, Positional Fusion Algorithms, Identity Fusion Algorithms, Hypothesis Generation, Hypothesis Evaluation, Hypothesis Selection Techniques, Ancillary Support Algorithms (12) DECENTRALIZED ESTIMATION FOR MULTISENSORY SYSTEMS: Multi sensor systems, Decentralized systems, Decentralized estimators, limitations of fully connected decentralization. Scalable decentralized estimation – Nodal transformation. Distributed and decentralized Kalman and Information Filters. (11) HIGH PERFORMANCE DATA STRUCTURES: Tessellated, trees, graphs and function. Representing ranges and uncertainty in data structures. Designing optimal sensor systems with in dependability bounds. Implementing data fusion system. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. David L. Hall, “Mathematical techniques in Multisensor data fusion”, Artech House, Boston, 1992. 2. R.R. Brooks and S.S.Iyengar, “Multisensor Fusion: Fundamentals and Applications with Software”, Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey, 1998. 3. Arthur G.O. Mutambara, “Decentralized Estimation and Control for Multisensor Systems” First Edition, CRC Press; 1998. 4. H M Mitchell, “Data Fusion: Concepts and Ideas”, Second Edition, Springer, 2012. 5. Jitendra R. Raol, “Multi-sensor Data Fusion with MATLAB”, First Edition, CRC Press; 2009.

18UC32 SLIDING MODE CONTROL 3003 INTRODUCTION: Properties of sliding motion, different controller designs, pseudo-sliding with a smooth control action, state space approach. Sliding mode control problem statement, existence of solution and equivalent control, properties of sliding motion. Reachability problem, single input and multivariable case. Unit vector approach, continuous approximations. (11)

229

59th ACM

09.06.2018

DESIGN APPROACHES: Regular form based approach, robust eigen structure assignment, quadratic minimisation, direct eigen structure assignment. Incorporation of tracking requirement, model reference approach , integral action approach. (12) CONTROLLER DESIGN USING OUTPUT INFORMATION: Problem formulation, special case square plants. General frame work, hyperplane design, control law synthesis. Dynamic compensation, model reference system using only outputs. (11) HIGHER ORDER SLIDING MODES: Definitions, higher order sliding modes in control systems, sliding order and dynamic actuators, 2-sliding controllers, arbitrary order sliding controllers. Sliding mode observers (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Yuri Shtessel, Christopher Edwards and Leonid Fridman, “Sliding Mode Control and Observation”, Birkhauser; 2014 2. Wilfrid Perruquetti and Jean Pierre Barbot, “Sliding Mode Control in Engineering”, Marcel Dekker, Inc, 2002. 3. Christopher Edwards and Sarah K. Spurgeon, “Sliding Mode Control: Theory and Applications”, Taylor and Francis Ltd., 1998. 4. Utkin V. I., “Sliding Modes in Control Optimization”, Springer – Verlag, 1992. 5. Zinober A. S. I.and Dorling C. M., “Deterministic Control of Uncertain Systems”, Peter Peregrinus, 1990.

18UC33 FAULT DIAGNOSIS AND CONTROL 3 0 0 3 INTRODUCTION & ANALYTICAL REDUNDANCY CONCEPTS: Types of faults and different tasks of Fault Diagnosis and Implementation - Different approaches to FDD: Model free and Model based approaches- Mathematical representation of Faults and Disturbances: Additive and Multiplicative types – Residual Generation: Detection, Isolation, Computational and stability properties – Design of Residual generator – Residual specification and Implementation. (11) DESIGN OF STRUCTURED RESIDUALS & DIRECTIONAL STRUCTURED RESIDUALS: Residual structure of single fault Isolation: Structural and Canonical structures- Residual structure of multiple fault Isolation: Diagonal and Full Row canonical concepts – Introduction to parity equation implementation and alternative representation - Directional Specifications: Directional specification with and without disturbances – Parity Equation Implementation. (11) FAULT DIAGNOSIS USING STATE ESTIMATORS: State observer – state estimators – Norms based residual evaluation and threshold computation – statistical methods based evaluation and threshold settings: Generalized Likelihood Ratio approachMarginalized Likelihood Ratio approach. (11) FAULT TOLERANT CONTROL: Passive Fault-tolerant Control- Active Fault tolerant Control - Actuator and Sensor Fault tolerance Principles:- Compensation for actuator – Sensor Fault-tolerant Control Design – Fault-tolerant Control Architecture - Fault-tolerant Control design against major actuator failures - case studies. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Steven X. Ding, “Model based Fault Diagnosis Techniques: Schemes, Algorithms, and Tools”, Springer Publication, 2012. 2. Rolf Isermann, “Fault-Diagnosis Systems an Introduction from Fault Detection to Fault Tolerance”, Springer Verlag, 2011. 3. Hassan Noura, Didier Theilliol, Jean-Christophe Ponsart, Abbas Chamseddine, “Fault-Tolerant Control Systems: Design and Practical Applications”, Springer Publication, 2009. 4. Mogens Blanke, “Diagnosis and Fault-Tolerant Control”, Springer, 2003. 5. Janos J. Gertler, “Fault Detection and Diagnosis in Engineering systems”, Second Edition, Marcel Dekker, 1998.

18UC34 MATHEMATICAL METHODS FOR PROCESS DATA ANALYTICS 3 0 0 3 REGRESSION: Introduction to Process Data Analytics – Linear Regression: Simple Linear Regression, Multiple Linear Regression – K-nearest neighbours regression – Practical Consideration in the Regression Model – Validation methods to assess model quality:- The Validation set approach, Leave-one-out Cross Validation, k-Fold Cross Validation – Bias-variance Trade-off for k-Fold Cross Validation. (11) LINEAR MODEL SELECTION AND REGULARIZATION: Subset selection:- Best Subset Selection, Step-wise Selection and Choosing the Optimal Model – Shrinkage Methods:-LASSO, Ridge regression, Elastic nets – Dimension Reduction Methods:Principal Components Regression, Partial Least Squares (11) SUPERVISED LEARNING WTH REGRESSION AND CLASSIFICATION TECHNIQUES: Logistic regression – Linear Discriminant Analysis – Quadratic Discriminant Analysis – Regression & Classification Trees – Support Vector Machines – Random forests, Bagging and Boosting – Neural Networks – Deep Learning. (11) APPLICATIONS: Process data analysis for System identification (under open loop) – Controller Performance Monitoring – Principal Components Analysis (PCA) for Process Monitoring and Partial Least Squares (PS) for Soft-sensor Design – Data -based CausalitAnalysis for Identification of Process Topology. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Thomas A. Runkler, “Data Analytics: Models and Algorithms for Intelligent Data Analysis”, Springer Vieweg, Second Edition, 2016. 2. Arun K. Tangirala, “Principles of System Identification – Theory and Practice”, CRC Press, 2015.

230

59th ACM 3. 4. 5.

09.06.2018

Fan Yang, Pig Duan, Sirish L Shah, Tongwen Chen, “Capturing Connectivity and Causality in Complex Industrial Processes”, Springer, 2014. Gareth James, Daniela Witten, Trevor Hastie, Robert Tibshirani, “An Introduction to Statistical Learning with Applications in R”, Springer Texts in Statistics, 2013. EthemAlpaydin, “Introduction to Machine Learning”, MIT Press, 2013.

AUDIT COURSES 18UC81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP81

18UC82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP82

231

59TH ACM

09.06.2018

13. COURSES OF STUDY AND SCHEME OF ASSESSMENT ME ENGINEERING DESIGN

Course Code

Course Title

I SEMESTER 18MD01 Applied Numerical Methods 18MD02 Deterministic and Probabilistic Design 18MD03 Machinery Vibration and Diagnostics 18MD04 Mechanisms and Robot Kinematics 18MD05 Mechatronics System Design 18MD51 Vibration Engineering Laboratory 18MD81 English for Research Paper Writing Total 24 hrs II SEMESTER 18MD06 Applied Elasticity and Plasticity 18MD07 Finite Element Analysis in Mechanical Design 18MD08 Design and Failure Analysis 18MD09 Design for Manufacture and Assembly 18 MD_ Professional Elective 1 18MD_ Professional Elective 2 18MD52 Computer Aided Engineering Laboratory 18MD61 Industry Visit and Technical Seminar 18MD82 Research Methodology and IPR Total 28 hrs III SEMESTER 18MD_ Professional Elective 3 18MD_ Professional Elective 4 18MD_ Professional Elective 5 18MD_ Professional Elective 6 18MD53 Sensor Interface and Robotics Laboratory 18MD71 Project Work I Total 22 hrs IV SEMESTER 18MD72 Project Work II PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES 18MD21 Modeling of Dynamic Systems 18MD22 Mechanics of Composites and Smart Materials 18MD23 Industrial Tribology 18MD24 Geometric Modeling 18MD25 Strategies for Product Development 18MD26 Design of Automotive Systems 18MD27 Design and Analysis of Thermal Systems 18MD28 Biomechanics of Tissues and Joints 18MD29 Micro Electro Mechanical Systems 18MD30 Nano Materials and Nanotechnology 18MD31 Production Tool Design 18MD32 Human Factors Engineering 18MD33 Rotor Dynamics 18MD34 Optimum Design of Mechanical Systems 18MD35 Computational Fluid Dynamics 18MD36 Artificial Intelligence and Expert Systems 18MD37 Advanced Strength of Materials 18MD38 Design of Pressure Vessels 18MD39 Fracture Mechanics 18MD40 Experimental Stress Analysis 18MD41 Design of Press Tools 18MD42 Human Body Vibration Diagnostics 18MD43 Advanced Finite Element Analysis

(2018 REGULATIONS) * (Minimum No. of credits to be earned: 73 ) Hours/Week Maximum Marks Credits TOTA CAT Lecture Tutorial Practical CA FE L 2 3 3 3 3 0 0 14

2 0 0 2 2 0 0 6

0 0 0 0 0 4 ** 4

3 3 3 4 4 2 Grade 19

50 50 50 50 50 50 0 300

50 50 50 50 50 50 0 300

100 100 100 100 100 100 0 600

PC PC PC PC PC PC MC

3 3 3 3 3 3 0 0 0 18

0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 2

0 0 0 0 0 0 4 4 ** 8

3 3 3 4 3 3 2 2 Grade 23

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 0 400

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 0 400

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 0 800

PC PC PC PC PE PE PC

3 3 3 3 0 0 12

0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 4 6 10

3 3 3 3 2 3 17

50 50 50 50 50 50 300

50 50 50 50 50 50 300

100 100 100 100 100 100 600

0

0

28

14

50

50

100

EEC

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE

232

EEC

MC

PE PE PE PE PC EEC

59TH ACM

09.06.2018

* Indicated is the minimum number of credits to be earned by a student. ** - 60 hrs in I semester and 90 hrs in II semester; Grade: Completed / Not Completed CAT – Category; PC – Professional Core; PE - Professional Elective EEC – Employability Enhancement Course; MCMandatory Course

18MD01 APPLIED NUMERICAL METHODS 2203 NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF SYSTEM OF EQUATIONS: Solving system of linear equations –Thomas algorithm, Gauss Jacobi and Gauss Seidel methods, successive over relaxation method, system of non-linear equations - Newton Raphson method, eigenvalues - power method and inverse power method. Curve fitting - linear regression, multiple linear regression, cubic splines Bezier curves and B-splines. (8+7) NUMERICAL SOLUTION TO ODE: Boundary value problem - Shooting method, finite difference method, derivative boundary conditions. Finite Element Method - Rayleigh-Ritz method, Collocation and Galerkin methods (8+7) NUMERICAL SOLUTION TO PDE: Finite difference method: Liebmann’s method for Laplace and Poisson equations, alternating direct implicit method, irregular and non-rectangular grids, explicit method and Crank-Nicolson method for parabolic equations, explicit method for hyperbolic equations. (8+7) MODELLING AND SIMULATION: Simulating deterministic behaviour, area under a curve, generating random numbers, simulating probabilistic behaviour, inventory model: gasoline and consumer demand. (8+7) Total L:32 + T:28 = 60 REFERENCES: 1. John H Mathews and Kurtis D Fink, Numerical Methods using MATLAB, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2018. 2. Steven C Chapra and Raymond P Canale, Numerical Methods for Engineers, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2017. 3. Frank R Giordano, William P Fox and Steven B Horton, A first course in Mathematical Modeling, Cengage Learning, New Delhi, 2014. 4. Curtis F Gerald and Patrick O Wheatley, Applied Numerical Analysis, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2013. 5. Douglas J Faires and Richard Burden, Numerical Methods, Cengage Learning, New Delhi, 2013.

18MD02 DETERMINISTIC AND PROBABILISTIC DESIGN 3003 STATIC AND DYNAMIC FORCE ANALYSIS: Review of basics of work, energy, torque, power, load analysis, external and internal forces, equilibrium equations, free-body diagrams; Force analysis in single rigid bodies and multi-body assemblies, inertia force analysis; Force flow concept, locating critical sections, practical considerations. (10) DESIGN AGAINST STATIC LOAD: Design against simple and combined stresses: theories of elastic failure, modified Mohr theory, design against static loading of machine elements in typical assemblies; Design of bolted joints – elastic analysis of bolted joints; Light construction based on strength and stiffness: material saving by form design, possible weight and cost reduction. (11) CYCLIC AND IMPACT LOADING: Design against cyclic loading: effect ofstress concentration, low cycle and high cycle fatigue, endurance limit modification factors, cumulative damage; Influence of non-zero mean stress: Gerber line, Goodman line, Soderberg line, yield line, modified Goodman diagram, design of machine elements and bolted joints under cyclic load; Design against impact loading. (12) STATISTICAL CONSIDERATIONS IN DESIGN: Statistics and design, frequency distribution and its characteristics, probability distribution, analysis of variance, regression analysis, overview of response surface methodology, probabilistic approach to design. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 6. Robert C Juvinall, “Fundamentals of Machine Component Design”, Wiley, 2017. 7. Bernard J Hamrock, Steven R Schmid, Bo O Jacobson, “Fundamentals of Machine Elements”, McGraw-Hill, 2014. 8. Michael Ashby, Hugh Shercliff and David Cebon, “Materials Engineering, Science, Processing and Design”, ButterworthHeinemann, 2013. 9. Myer Kutz, “Environmentally Conscious Mechanical Design”, Wiley, 2007. 10. Gustav Niemann, “Machine Elements: Design and calculation in Mechanical Engineering”, Springer-Verlag, 1980. 11. Lipson and Sheth, “Statistical design and analysis of engineering experiments”, 1973.

18MD03 MACHINERY VIBRATION AND DIAGNOSTICS 3003 FUNDAMENTALS OF VIBRATION: Introduction, sources and effects of vibration, types of vibration, harmonic analysis, transient time function, random time function, frequency spectrum; Single Degrees of Freedom System: free vibration, free damped vibration, forced vibration: nature of exciting forces, critical speeds, quality of balance, vibration Isolation. (12) TWO AND MULTIPLE DEGREES OF FREEDOM SYSTEMS: Normal mode vibration, co-ordinate coupling, Lagrange’s equation,

233

59TH ACM

09.06.2018

free harmonic vibration, tuned un-damped vibration absorbers;MDOF: influence coefficients, orthogonality, matrix iteration, Holzer method, branched system, geared system, Rayleigh's principle, Dunkerley's principle. (12) TRANSIENT AND RANDOM VIBRATION: Impulse and arbitrary excitation, base excitation, Laplace transform formulation, response spectrum; Random vibration: frequency response function, spectral density, probability distribution, correlation, Fourier transform. (10) VIBRATION AND NOISE - MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL: Vibration analysis overview, measuring instruments: selection of sensors, acceleration mountings, vibration exciters; Experimental methods in vibration analysis: free and forced tests, FFT analyzer, methods of vibration control, excitation reduction at source, balancing of rigid, flexible and variable mass rotors; Dynamic properties and selection of structural materials: viscoelastic polymers; Noise sources and control: noise in centrifugal fans and blowers, gears, chain drives and bearings, reduction measures, machine enclosures, silencers and mufflers. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Thomson W T, "Theory of Vibration with Applications", Prentice Hall of India, 2018. 2. Lewis H Bell, “Industrial Noise Control Fundamentals and Applications”, Marcel Dekkev Inc., 2017. 3. Singiresu S Rao "Mechanical Vibrations", Prentice Hall, 2016. 4. Ashok Kumar Mallik, "Principles of Vibration Control", Affiliated East-West Press, 1990. 5. Tse Hinkle and Morse, "Mechanical Vibrations", OBS Publishers and Distributors, 1983.

18MD04 MECHANISMS AND ROBOT KINEMATICS 3204 KINEMATIC ANALYSIS AND DYNAMICS OF MECHANISMS: Kinematic analysis: Analysis of complex mechanisms, Goodman analysis, auxiliary point method; Dynamics of mechanisms: inertia force in linkages, kineto-static analysis by complex numbers, superposition and matrix methods, virtual work. (12+8) KINEMATIC SYNTHESIS: Graphical synthesis, motion, path and function generation: two, three and four prescribed positions, overlay method, analytical synthesis techniques; Complex number modeling in kinematic synthesis, the dyad or standard form, three prescribed positions for motion, path and function generation, circle point and center point circles, ground pivot specification, Freudenstein’s equation. (12+8) SPATIAL MECHANISMS: Introduction, transformations describing planar finite displacements, planar finite transformations, identity transformation, planar matrix operator for finite rotation, homogeneous co-ordinates and finite planar translation - concatenation of finite displacements - rotation about an axis not through the origin, rigid body transformations, spatial transformations, analysis of spatial mechanisms. (10+6) ROBOTICS: Topology arrangements of robotic arms, forward kinematics, treatment of inverse position analysis and inverse velocity and acceleration analysis, robot, actuator force analysis; Parallel kinematic machines: serial and parallel systems, configurations and characteristics, degrees of freedom, design principles, kinematic modeling. (11+8) Total L: 45 + T:30 =75 REFERENCES: 1. Uicker G R, Pennock J and Shigley J E, “Theory of Machines and Mechanisms”, Oxford University Press, 2016. 2. Dan B Marghitu, “Mechanisms and Robots Analysis with MATLAB”, Springer, 2009. 3. Arthur G. Erdman, George N. Sandor, Sridhar Kota, “Mechanism Design: Analysis and Synthesis”, Prentice Hall, 2004. 4. Xiao-Ping Susan Su, Computer-aided Kinematic and Dynamic Analysis of Spatial Mechanisms, Davis, 1997 5. Asok Kumar Mallik, AmitabhaGhosh and Günter Dittrich, “Kinematic Analysis and Synthesis of Mechanisms”, CRC Press, 1994.

18MD05 MECHATRONICS SYSTEM DESIGN 3204 REVIEW OF MECHATRONIC SYSTEMS: Elements of mechatronic systems, design process, actuators – magnetostrictive, fluidic and electrical (PMDC, AC induction, Stepper, Servo), valves, selection of motors. (10+7) FLUIDIC SYSTEM DESIGN: Cascade, KV-Map and step counter methods; Integration of fringe condition modules, sizing of components in hydraulic andpneumatic systems, synchronizing circuits, regenerative circuits, Accumulators. (13+8) PLCs, SENSORS and CONTROLLERS: Servo valves and Proportional valves; Sensors: proximity, displacement, velocity, acceleration, force, torque, temperature and flow measurements; PLCs: construction and working, programming using ladder logic diagram; Microprocessor and Micro controller. (12+8) REAL TIME INTERFACING: Data acquisition systems, Virtual Instrumentation, interfacing of sensors/actuators with PC, condition monitoring, adaptive control and SCADA systems. (10+7) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. W.Bolton, “Mechatronics: Electronic Control Systems in Mechanical and Electrical Engineering”, Pearson Education, Sixth edition, 2014. 2. Anthony Espisito, “Fluid Power with Application”, Pearson, 2013.

234

59TH ACM 3. 4. 5. 6.

09.06.2018

David W.Pessen, “Industrial Automation: Circuit Design and Components”, Wiley India, 2011. DevdasShetty and Richard AKolk, “Mechatronics System Design”, Cengage Learning, Second edition, 2010. Sanjay Gupta and Joseph John, “Virtual Instrumentation using Lab VIEW”, Tata McGraw Hill Education, Second edition, 2010. Jovitha Jerome, “Virtual Instrumentation Using LabVIEW”, Prentice Hall, 2010.

18MD51 VIBRATION ENGINEERING LABORATORY 0042 In this course, students will be provided with an orientation on the following topics for a duration of 12-16 hours. Each student is expected to perform a case study by formulating and completing an activity of interest derived from the orientation under the guidance of faculty. The details expected in the final report to be submitted at the end of the semester are: Problem definition, literature review, objectives, methodology, analysis and interpretation of results and conclusions. TOPICS FOR ORIENTATION 1. Introduction to VI software and Data Acquisition (DAQ) systems. 2. Vibration response of a given structure using free and forced vibration test- FRF, Damping ratio with and without smart materials. 3. Vibration response of a balanced and unbalanced system. 4. Shock response of a system subjected to impact loading. 5. Sound level measurement using (a) Sound level meter and (b) Microphone and VI software. 6. Determination of mass ratio in tuned dynamic vibration absorber.

CASE STUDY Experimental modal analysis of components / assemblies of mechanical systems. Total P: 60

SEMESTER II 18MD06 APPLIED ELASTICITY AND PLASTICITY 3003 ANALYSIS OF STRESS AND STRAIN: Introduction to general theory of elasticity, assumptions and applications of linear elasticity, stress tensor, Cauchy’s stress principle, principal stresses, octahedral stresses, equations of equilibrium, strain tensor, principal strains, kinematic equations and compatibility conditions, Generalized Hooke’s law, plane stress and plane strain conditions, elasticity theorems, strain energy in elastic body. (12) ELASTICITY PROBLEMS AND EXPERIMENTAL STRESS ANALYSIS: Transformation of compatibility condition from strain components to stress components, Airy’s stress function, two dimensional problems in cartesian and polar coordinate systems, axisymmetric problems, stress concentration, effect of circular holes on stress distribution in plates; Fundamental concepts in measurements, grid method, brittle coating method, strain gages, rubber model method and Fischer’s method for stress concentration, photo elasticity and Moiré fringes. (13) CONTINUUM PLASTICITY I: Introduction to the concept of plastic deformation, role of geometry and thermodynamics in plastic deformation, stress-strain curve of real materials, plastic flow, hardening rules, strain hardening and parameters, Bauschinger effects, yield criterion, rate dependent and rate independent plasticity. (10) CONTINUUM PLASTICITY II: Equivalent stresses, Prandtl-Reuss and Levy-Mises equations, theory of stability under plastic flow, effect of strain rate on strain hardening, effect of power law on strain hardening, plane problems: Introduction to slip line field theory and applications. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. George E Dieter, “Mechanical Metallurgy”, McGraw Hill Education, Third edition 2017. 2. Chakrabarthy J, “Theory of Plasticity”, Butterworth Heinemann Publications 2012. 3. Timoshenko S P and Goodier J N, “Theory of Elasticity” Tata McGraw Hill Publications, 2010. 4. Ramesh K, “Digital Photo elasticity”, Springer Publications, 2000 5. Durelli A J, Phillips E A and Tsao C H, “Introduction to Theoretical and Experimental analysis of stress and strain” , McGraw Hill Publications,1958.

18MD07 FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS IN MECHANICAL DESIGN 3003 STATIC ANALYSIS USING ONE DIMENSIONAL ELEMENTS: Concepts of finite element method, finite element formulation using variational, weighted residual and weak form techniques; Static analysis using one dimensional elements: Linear and quadratic spar elements, truss and beam elements, beams on elastic foundation - treatment of boundary condition and temperature effects, solution of problems. (12)

235

59TH ACM

09.06.2018

STATIC ANALYSIS USING TWO DIMENSIONAL ELEMENTS: Triangular element: Formulation of stiffness matrix and load vectors, temperature effects, torsion of circular and non-circular cross-sections; Quadrilateral element: Evaluation of stiffness and stress matrices by Gaussian quadrature based on isoparametric formulation; Solution of plane stress and plane strain problems; Axisymmetric triangular element: Formulation of stiffness matrix and load vectors, problem modelling and boundary conditions, solution of problems; Higher order elements; Overview of three dimensional stress analysis. (11) EIGENVALUE ANALYSIS: Formulation and solution of undamped and damped free vibration problems - lumped and consistent mass matrices, solution of longitudinal, transverse and torsional vibration problems using 1D elements; Formulation and solution of buckling problems using 1D element. (11) HEAT TRANSFER ANALYSIS: Review of differential equations of heat transfer, one dimensional and two-dimensional finite element formulation using variational and Galerkin’s methods, solution of steady state heat transfer problems, analysis of tapered fin. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Reddy J.N, “An Introduction to Finite Element Method”, McGraw Hill Education, 2015. 2. Bhavikatti SS, “Finite Element Analysis”, New Age International Publishers, 2015. 3. Chandrupatla T R and Belegundu A D, “Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2011. 4. Logan D L, “A First Course in the Finite Element Method”, Thomson Learning, 2010. 5. Dixit U.S, “Finite Element Methods for Engineers”, Cengage Learning India Pvt. Ltd, 2009. 6. Cook, R.D., Malkus, D. S., Plesha,M.E., and Witt,R.J “ Concepts and Applications of Finite Element Analysis”, Wiley, 2007.

18MD08 DESIGN AND FAILURE ANALYSIS 3003 MATERIALS AND DESIGN: Factors affecting the behavior of materials in components, effect of component geometry and shape factors, designing with high strength and low toughness materials, designing for hostile environments, the design process, materials selection in design, processes and their influence on design, systematic process selection; Material selection forsustainability: material life cycle assessment and energy, selecting materials for eco design. (11) FRACTURE MECHANICS: Ductile fracture, brittle fracture, cleavage-fractography, ductile-brittle transition, fracture mechanics approach to design-energy criterion, stress intensity approach;Time dependent crack growth and damage;Linear elastic fracture mechanics: Griffith theory, energy release rate, instability and R-curve, stress analysis of cracks-stress intensity factor, K-threshold, crack growth instability analysis, crack tip stress analysis; Elastic plastic fracture mechanics: crack tip opening displacement (CTOD), J-integral, relationship between J and CTOD. (12) DYNAMIC AND TIME-DEPENDENT FRACTURE: Dynamic fracture, rapid loading of a stationary crack, rapid crack propagation, dynamic contour integral, creep crack growth-C Integral, viscoelastic fracture mechanics, viscoelastic J integral; Determination of fracture toughness values: experimental determination of plane strain fracture toughness, K- R curve testing, J measurement, CTOD testing, effect of temperature, strain rate on fracture toughness. (11) WEAR FAILURES AND FAILURE ANALYSIS TOOLS: Wear failures: Types of wear, different methods of wear measurement, analysis of wear failures, wear at elevated temperatures, wear on different materials, role of friction on wear, stick slip friction, creep, stress rupture, elevated temperature fatigue, environmental induced failure;Failure analysis tools:Reliability concept and hazard function, life prediction, life extension, application of Poisson, exponential and Weibull distributions for reliability, bath tub curve, parallel and series systems, MTBF, MTTR, FMEA-design FMEA, process FMEA, analysis causes of failure, modes, ranks of failure modes; Fault tree analysis; Industrial case studies on FMEA. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Anderson T L, “Fracture Mechanics: Fundamentals and Applications”, Taylor and Francis, Fourth Edition 2017. 2. Michael F Ashby, “Materials Selection in Mechanical Design”, Butterworth – Heinemann, 2016. 3. Michael F Ashby, Hugh Shercliff and David Cebon, “Materials – Engineering, Science, Processing and Design”, Butterworth – Heinemann, 2013. 4. Shigley and Mische, "Mechanical Engineering Design", McGraw Hill, 2011. 5. Balbir S. Dhillon “Applied Reliability and Quality: Fundamentals, Methods and Procedures” (Springer Series in Reliability Engineering), 2010. 6. ASM Metals Handbook, "Failure Analysis and Prevention", ASM Metals Park, Ohio, USA, Vol. 11, 2002.

18MD09 DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURE AND ASSEMBLY 3204 DFMA TOOLS: Rules and methodologies used to design components for manual, automatic and flexible assembly, traditional design and manufacture vs concurrent engineering, DFA index, poka-yoke, lean principles, six sigma concepts, DFMA as the tool for concurrent engineering, three DFMA criteria for retaining components for redesign of a product; Computer-aided design for assembly; Process capability, process capability metrics, Cp, Cpk, cost aspects. (10+6) TOLERANCE ANALYSIS: Geometric tolerancing for manufacture as per Indian standards and ASME Y 14.5 standard, surface finish, review of relationship between attainable tolerance grades and different machining processes; Cumulative effect of tolerances, dimensional chain analysis -equivalent tolerances method, equivalent standard tolerance grade method, equivalent influence method; Limits and fits, interchangeable part manufacture; Selective assembly – Model-I: group tolerances of mating parts

236

59TH ACM

09.06.2018

equal; Model-II: total and group tolerances of shaft equal; Control of axial play - introducing secondary machining operations, laminated shims, selective assembly, examples. Datum features - functional and manufacturing, redimensioning to suit manufacturing. (12+8) DATUM SYSTEMS AND TRUE POSITION THEORY: Degrees of freedom, grouped datum systems - different types, two and three mutually perpendicular grouped datum planes; Grouped datum system with spigot and recess, pin and hole; Grouped datum system with spigot - recess pair and tongue - slot pair - computation of translational and rotational accuracy, geometric analysis and applications; True position theory - comparison between coordinate and conventional method of feature location, tolerancing and true position tolerancing, virtual size concept, floating and fixed fasteners, projected tolerance zone, zero true position tolerance, compound assembly. Functional inspection techniques using CMM and paper layout gauging. (12+8) REDESIGN, TOLERANCE CHARTING AND DFE: Redesign of castings based on parting line considerations, minimising core requirements, redesigning cast members using weldments, design guidelines for welding. Redesign of components to facilitate machining; Tolerance charting: Operation sequence for typical shaft type of components, preparation of process drawings for different operations, tolerance worksheets and centrality analysis, examples; Design for the Environment - environmental objectives, global issues, regional and local issues-basic DFE methods-design guidelines-examples of application. (11+8) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Boothroyd G, Dewhurst P and Knight W, “Product Design for Manufacture and Assembly”, Marcell Dekker, 2010. 2. Matousek, "Engineering Design - A Systematic Approach", Blackie and Son Ltd., London, 2006. 3. T. E. Graedel, Braden R. Allenby, “Design for environment” Prentice Hall, 1998. 4. James G. Bralla, “Design for Manufacturability Handbook”, McGraw Hill Professional, 1999. 5. Harry Peck, "Designing for Manufacture", Pitman Publications, 1983. 6. Spotts M F, "Dimensioning and Tolerance for Quantity Production", Prentice Hall Inc., 1983.

18MD52 COMPUTER AIDED ENGINEERING LABORATORY 0042 In this course, students will be provided with an orientation on the following topics for a duration of 12-16 hours. Each student is expected to perform a case study by formulating and completing an activity of interest derived from the orientation under the guidance of faculty. The details expected in the final report to be submitted at the end of the semester are: Problem definition, literature review, objectives, methodology, analysis and interpretation of results and conclusions. TOPICS FOR ORIENTATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Linear static analysis and non-linear analysis using FEM Dynamic analysis using FEM Transient thermal analysis using FEM Fluid flow analysis using FEM Fatigue analysis of mechanical components using FEM FEA for sustainable design

CASE STUDY Finite Element analysis of sub-systems/complex components of typical mechanical systems followed by design sensitivity analysis Total P: 60 REFERENCES: 1. 2.

Laboratory Manual prepared by Department of Mechanical Engineering. Nitin S. Gokhale, “Practical finite element analysis”, Finite to Infinite 2008.

18MD53 SENSOR INTERFACE AND ROBOTICS LABORATORY 0042 In this course, students will be provided with an orientation on the following topics for a duration of 12-16 hours. Each student is expected to perform a case study by formulating and completing an activity of interest derived from the orientation under the guidance of faculty. The details expected in the final report to be submitted at the end of the semester are: Problem definition, literature review, objectives, methodology, analysis and interpretation of results and conclusions. TOPICS FOR ORIENTATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Calibration of sensors using Virtual Instrumentation software Sensor interface using Virtual Instrumentation software Control of actuators using Virtual Instrumentation software Programming of a typical pick and place robot System control using PI and PID controllers

237

59TH ACM

09.06.2018

CASE STUDY Interface and integration of sensors/ actuators for development of mechatronic systems

Total P: 60 REFERENCES: 1. Laboratory Manual prepared by Department of Mechanical Engineering, PSG college of Technology. 2. Frank Lamb, “Industrial Automation Hands On”, McGraw Hill Book Company,2013 3. Terry L M Bartelt, “Industrial Automated Systems: Instrumentation and Motion Control”, Cengage Learning, New Delhi, 2011

18MD61 INDUSTRY VISIT AND TECHNICAL SEMINAR 0042 This course, likened to a mini-intern, requires each student to identify a manufacturing or service industry and pursue the solution of an industrial problem consistent with the credits allotted for the course. Students are expected to study the problem, survey pertinent literature, gather relevant data and carry out engineering and scientific analysis followed by a detailed presentation both oral and written. The report submitted for final assessment should be in line with that required for Project Work. Total P: 60

SEMESTER III 18MD71 PROJECT WORK I 0063      

Identification of a real-life problem in thrust areas Developing a mathematical model for solving the above problem Finalization of system requirements and specification Proposing different solutions for the problem based on literature survey Future trends in providing alternate solutions Consolidated report preparation of the above Total P: 90

SEMESTER IV 18MD72 PROJECT WORK II 0 0 28 14 The project work involves the following: Preparing a project - brief proposal including     

Problem Identification A statement of system / process specifications proposed to be developed (Block Diagram / Concept tree) List of possible solutions including alternatives and constraints Cost benefit analysis Time Line of activities

A report highlighting the design finalization [Based on functional requirements &standards (if any)] A presentation including the following:   

Implementation Phase (Hardware / Software / both) Testing & Validation of the developed system Learning in the Project

Consolidated report preparation Total P: 420

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES 18MD21 MODELING OF DYNAMIC SYSTEMS 3003 MATHEMATICAL MODELS OF PHYSICAL SYSTEMS: Introduction to control systems: differential equations of physical systems, dynamics of robotic mechanisms, transfer functions, block diagram algebra, signal flow graphs; Feedback characteristics of control systems: feedback and non-feedback systems, reduction of parameter variations, control over system dynamics, control of the

238

59TH ACM

09.06.2018

effects of disturbance signals, linearizing effect, regenerative feedback.

(11)

COMPONENTS OF CONTROL SYSTEMS AND FREQUENCY RESPONSE ANALYSIS: Linear approximation of non-linear systems: stepper motors, hydraulic systems, pneumatic systems; Frequency response analysis and stability in frequency domain: correlation between time and frequency response- polar plots- bode plots, all-pass and minimum-phase systems; Experimental determination of transfer functions: log-magnitude versus phase plots, Nyquist stability criterion, assessment of relative stability, closed loop frequency response, sensitivity analysis. (12) TIME RESPONSE ANALYSIS AND STABILITY IN TIME DOMAIN: Standard test signals: time response of first-order systems, time response of second-order systems, steady-state errors and error constants, effect of adding a zero to a system; Design specifications of second-order systems; Design considerations for higher-order system: performance indices, robotic control systems, approximation of higher-order systems by lower order systems; State variable analysis: concept of stability, necessary conditions, Routh stability criterion, relative stability analysis. (11) DESIGN AND STATE VARIABLE ANALYSIS: Preliminary considerations, realization of basic compensators: cascade compensation in time domain and frequency domain, feedback compensation, robust control system design; State variable analysis and design: concepts of state, state variables and state model, state models for linear-continuous-time systems, state variables and linear discrete-time systems, solutions of state equations; concepts of controllability and observability, pole placement by state feedback. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Nagrath I J and Gopal M, “Control Systems Engineering”, 6th Edition, New Age International Publishers, 2017. 2. Gopal M, "Control Systems – Principles and Design", 4th Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2012. 3. Norman S Nise, “Control System Engineering”, International Student Version, 6thEdition, Wiley Publications, 2012. 4. Okata K, “Modern Control Engineering”, 5th Edition, Pearson Publications, New Delhi, 2009. 5. Sergey Edward Lyshevski, “Control Systems – Theory with Engineering Applications”, 1st Edition, Jaico Publishing House, 2004.

18MD22 MECHANICS OF COMPOSITES AND SMART MATERIALS 3003 COMPOSITES AND SMART MATERIALS: Modern materials in design, types, metals, polymers, ceramics, composites, classification of composites, advantages, applications and limitations, Matrix and reinforcement-their roles, principal types of fiber and matrix materials; Smart materials: rheological, piezoelectric, shape-memory and magnetostrictive materials; Material characteristics of smart materials; Application ofsmart materials for design of intelligent structures. (11) MANUFACTURE OF COMPOSITE COMPONENTS: Lay-up and curing, open and closed mould processes, bag moulding, filament winding, pultrusion, pulforming, thermoforming, injection moulding, blow moulding; An overview of metal matrix composite processing and ceramic matrix composite processing. (10) MICRO AND MACRO MECHANICAL BEHAVIOUR OF A LAMINA: Volume and mass fractions, evaluation of elastic moduli, strength of unidirectional lamina, Hooke's law for different types of materials, engineering constants for orthotropic materials; Stress, strain relations for plane stress in an orthotropic material and in a lamina of arbitrary orientation, strength of an orthotropic lamina, basic strength theories. (12) MACRO MECHANICAL BEHAVIOUR OF A LAMINATE: Classical lamination theory, lamina stress; Strain behaviour; Resultant forces and moments in a laminate, types of laminates, strength and stiffness of laminates, inter laminar stresses in laminates; Analysis of composite structures: Fatigue, fracture mechanics-basic principles, fracture initiation, crack growth and crack growth modes, toughening mechanisms, environmental effects, composite joints-bonded, bolted and bonded-bolted joints. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Ronald F Gibson, “Principles of Composite Material Mechanics", McGraw Hill Book Co, 2016. 2. Autar K Kaw, "Mechanics of Composite Materials", CRC Press, NY, 2006. 3. Matthews F L and Rawlings R D, “Composite Materials: Engineering and Science”, Woodhead Publishing, 1999. 4. Robert M Jones, "Mechanics of Composite Materials", Taylor and Francis, 1999. 5. Srinivasan A V and Michael McFarland, “Smart Structures: Analysis and Design”, Cambridge University Press, UK, 2001.

18MD23 INDUSTRIAL TRIBOLOGY 3003 REVIEW OF TRIBODESIGN AND LUBRICATION: Specific principles, Tribological problems in machine design, Surface topography, tribological processes: contact process-contact mechanics, Hertzian and Non Hertzian contact,friction process-sliding and rolling friction, wear process-wear mechanisms, Stick-slip effects, Friction and wear test methods, tribological properties of materials, tribological materials;Lubrication: Purpose of lubrication, Basic modes of lubrication-Stribeck curve, hydrodynamic lubrication, Elastodynamic lubrication, Mixed lubrication, Boundary lubrication; Hydrostatic lubrication, Properties of lubricant, Additives, Choice of lubricant, oil, grease and solid lubricants, lubrication systems and their selection, oil conservation. Surface Engineering: Surface modifications – transformation hardening, surface fusion - thermo chemical processes - surface coatings plating and anodizing - fusion processes - vapour phase processes. (12)

239

59TH ACM

09.06.2018

SELECTION OF BEARINGS: Rolling contact bearings:Nominal life, static and dynamic capacity, equivalent load, probabilities of survival - cubic mean load, Selection of ball and roller bearings, bearing mounting details, preloading of bearings;Hydrodynamic Bearings: Fundamentals of fluid film formation, Mechanisms of pressure development in oil film, Reynold’s equation, Hydrodynamic journal bearing- Sommerfeld number, bearing performance, temperature rise; Hydrodynamic thrust bearings - Raimondi and Boyd Method, fixed and tilting pads, single and multiple pad bearings. (11) HYDROSTATIC BEARINGS: Arrangement, advantages and limitations, Hydrostatic step bearing analysis-energy losses, optimum design, temperature rise; Hydrostatic conical thrust bearing, pad coefficients; Hydrostatic journal bearings - design procedures; Hydrostatic squeeze film bearings-analysis; Aerostatic bearings: principle, requirement, merit, demerit and application, thrust bearings and journal bearings - design procedure; Seals: Different types - mechanical seals, lip seals, packed glands, soft piston seals, mechanical piston rod packing, labyrinth seals and throttling bushes, oil flinger rings and drain grooves - selection of mechanical seals. (12) COMPUTATIONAL HYDRODYNAMICS: Finite difference equivalent of the Reynolds equation, Numerical analysis of hydrodynamic lubrication in idealized journal and partial arc bearings, Vibrational stability in journal bearings-determination of stiffness and damping coefficients; Elasto-Hydrodynamic Lubrication: Pressure-viscosity term in Reynold’s Equation - Hertz theory - Ertel-Grubin Equation, lubrication of spheres, introduction to thermo-hydrodynamic lubrication. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. GwidonStachowiak, ‎W‎werdnABatchelor, “Engineering Tribology”,Butterworth-Heinemann, 2013 2. Phakatkar H G and Ghorpade RR, “Tribology”, NiraliPrakashan, 2009. 3. Prasanta Sahoo “Engineering Tribology” PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd. 2005 4. Basu S K, Sengupatha S N and Ahuja D B, “Fundamentals of Tribology”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 2005. 5. Neale M J,“Tribology Handbook”, Elsevier, 1995 6. Hutchings I M, “Tribology-Friction and Wear of Engineering Material”, Edward Arnold, London, 1992.

18MD24 GEOMETRIC MODELING 3003 OVERVIEW OF CAD SYSTEMS AND GRAPHICS TRANSFORMATION: Conventional and computer aided design processes, subsystems of CAD-CAD hardware and software, analytical and graphics packages, CAD workstations. networking of CAD systems, generative, cognitive and image processing graphics, static and dynamic data graphics; Transport of graphics data: graphic standards, generation of graphic primitives, display and viewing, transformations, customizing graphics software. (12) MATHEMATICAL REPRESENTATION OF CURVES AND SURFACES: Introduction, wireframe models, parametric representation of curves-analytic - synthetic, curve manipulation; Surface models: types of surfaces, introduction to parametric representation of surfaces, design examples. (11) MATHEMATICAL REPRESENTATION OF SOLIDS: Fundamentals of solid modeling, boundary representation, constructive solid geometry, solid manipulations, solid modeling based applications. (10) VISUAL REALISM AND COMPUTER ANIMATION: Model cleanup, hidden line removal, shading, computer animation, animation systems, design applications, mass property calculations, geometrical propertyformulation, mass property formulation, design and engineering applications. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Donald D. Hearn, M. Pauline Baker, Warren Carithers, “Computer Graphics with OpenGL”, 4 th Edition, Pearson Education, 2015. 2. M. Morris Mano, Michael D. Ciletti, “Digital Design” 5th Edition, Pearson Prentice Hall, 2013 3. Radhakrishnan P, Subramanyan S and Raju V, “CAD/CAM/CIM”, New Age Internationals, 2012. 4. Ibrahim Zeid, "CAD/CAM Theory and Practice", McGraw Hill Inc., New Delhi, 2009. 5. Michael E Mortenson, "Geometric Modeling", John Wiley and Sons Inc., 2006. 6. Radhakrishnan P and Kothandaraman C P, "Computer Graphics and Design", DhanpatRai and Sons, 1997.

18MD25 STRATEGIES FOR PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 3003 PRODUCT DESIGN APPROACHES AND REVERSE ENGINEERING: Product design: characteristics of successful product development, challenges of product development, phases of design process, product development versus design, types of design and redesign, concept of CPC, PDM/PLM;Product design approaches: quality function deployment, axiomatic design, failure mode and effect analysis, concurrent engineering; Reverse engineering: scanning methods for reverse engineering, cloud points, NURBS surfaces, reengineering, tear down approach, bench marking, case studies. (12) NEW PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT: Design creativity, innovations in design alternatives, S-curve, gathering customer needs, organizing and prioritizing customer needs, establishing product function, FAST method, establishing system functionality; Concept generation: information gathering, brain ball, C-sketch/6-3-5 method, morphological analysis; Concept selection, technical feasibility, ranking, measurement theory, case studies; Role of rapid prototyping in product development. (12) MATERIALS SELECTION FOR PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT: Performance characteristics of materials, the material selection process, economics of materials, methods of material selection, materials performance indices, material selection by expert

240

59TH ACM

09.06.2018

systems, value analysis, cradle to cradle reuse practices, composites and advanced materials, case studies.

(11)

INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY AND PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT ECONOMICS: Intellectual property, steps in patenting, preparation of patent application, case studies; Product development economics: elements of economic analysis, economic analysis process, case studies. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Michael F Ashby, “Materials Selection in Mechanical Design”, Butterworth – Heinemann, 2016 2. Karl T Ulrich and Steven D Eppinger, “Product Design and Development”, McGraw Hill, 2015. 3. Nigel Cross, “Engineering Design Methods: Strategies for Product Design”, John Wiley and Sons, 2008. 4. Chitale A K and Gupta R C, “Product Design and Manufacturing”, Prentice Hall of India, 2010. 5. Michael Grieves, “Product Life Cycle Management”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006. 6. Kevin Otto and Kristin Wood, “Product Design”, Pearson, 2003.

18MD26 DESIGN OF AUTOMOTIVE SYSTEMS 3003 DESIGN OF PROPULSION SYSTEMS: Review of design considerations for components under static and dynamic loading; Design of I.C engine components - cylinder, piston, connecting rod, crankshaft, flywheel, valves and valve springs; Design principles of electric vehicle. (10) DESIGN OF TRANSMISSION ELEMENTS AND BRAKES: Clutches: power transmission requirements of clutches, design of single and multi-plate clutches, diaphragm clutch, cone clutch and centrifugal clutch; Design of gear box and drive lines; Concepts of variable transmission systems; Design of power train for vibration; Brakes: brake power requirements, design of drum and disc brakes, principles of regenerative and anti-lock braking systems. (12) DESIGN OF STREERING AND SUSPENSION SYSTEMS: Design of steering systems, power assisted steering; Suspension systems: classification of suspension, design of springs – coil springs, leaf springs, air springs; Design of steering and suspension systems for vibration. (11) AUTOMOTIVE BODY DESIGN: Automotive body structural elements: design of automotive beam sections, torsion of thin-wall members, thin-wall beam section design in automobiles, buckling of thin-walled members, design for body bending and body torsion- strength and stiffness requirements; Principles of body panel design; Structural requirements for crashworthiness; Design of body structure for vibration. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Bhandari V.B., “Design of Machine Elements”, Fourth Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2017. 2. Donald E. Malen, “Fundamentals of Automobile Body Structure Design”, SAE International, 2011. 3. Heinz Heisler, “Vehicle and Engine Technology”, Second Edition. SAE International, 2011. 4. Smith J.H., “An Introduction to Modern Vehicle Design”, Butterworth-Heinmann, 2002. 5. Wang J.Y., “Theory of Ground Vehicles”, Second Edition. John Wiley, 2001. 6. Matchinsky W., “Road Vehicle suspensions”, PEP, 2000.

18MD27 DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF THERMAL SYSTEMS 3003 SYSTEMS AND MATHEMATICAL MODELLING: Design Principles, workable systems, optimal systems, matching of system components, economic analysis, depreciation, gradient present worth factor; Equation fitting, nomography, empirical equation, regression analysis, different modes of mathematical models, selection, computer programmes for models. (11) MODELLING THERMAL EQUIPMENTS: Modelling heat exchangers, evaporators, condensers, absorption and rectification columns, compressor, pumps, simulation studies, information flow diagram, solution procedures. (12) DYNAMIC BEHAVIOUR OF THERMAL SYSTEM: Steady state simulation, Laplace transformation, feedback control loops, stability analysis, non-linearities. (10) SYSTEMS OPTIMIZATION: Objective function formulation, constraint equations, mathematical formulation, Calculus method, dynamic programming, geometric programming, linear programming methods, solution procedures. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: rd 1. Stoecker W F, “Design of Thermal Systems”, 3 Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2011. 2. Nagrath., Gopal M., Control systems engineering, Fourth Edition, Wiley Student Edition, 2008 3. Kapur J N, “Mathematical Modeling”, New Age International Publishers, 2005. 4. McQuiston F C and Parker T D, “Heating, Ventilating and Air conditioning, Analysis and Design”, John Wiley and Sons, 6 th Edition (2004), USA. 5. Bejan, A., Tsatsaronis, G. and Michel, M., Thermal Design and Optimization, John Wiley and Sons (1996). 6. Stoecker W F, “Refrigeration and Air-conditioning”, TMH, 1985.

241

59TH ACM

09.06.2018 18MD28 BIOMECHANICS OF TISSUES AND JOINTS 3003

PRINCIPLES OF MECHANICS: Review of the principles of mechanics, vector mechanics, resultant forces of coplanar and noncoplanar and concurrent and non-concurrent forces, parallel force in space, equilibrium of coplanar forces, Newton’s laws of motion, work and energy, moment of inertia. (12) HARD AND SOFT TISSUE MECHANICS: Bone structure and composition, mechanical properties of bone, cortical and cancellous bones, viscoelastic properties, Maxwell and Voight models- anisotropy, electrical properties of bone, fracture mechanisms; Soft tissue mechanics:pseudo elasticity, nonlinear stress-strain relationship, viscosity, structure, function and mechanical properties of skin, ligaments and tendons. (12) BIOMECHANICS OF JOINTS: Skeletal joints, skeletal muscles, basic considerations, basic assumption and limitations, mechanics of the elbow, mechanics of shoulder, mechanics of spinal column, mechanics of hip, mechanics of knee, mechanics of ankle. (11) LOCOMOTION: Human locomotion, gait analysis and goniometry, ergonomics, foot pressure measurements – Pedobarograph; Force platform, mechanics of foot, total hip prosthesis: requirements, different types of components, stress analysis and instrumentation, knee prosthesis. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. NihatOzkaya and Margareta Nordin, “Fundamentals of Biomechanics: Equilibrium, Motion, And Deformation”, springer- Verlag; 2016. 2. Susan JHall, “Basic Biomechanics”, McGraw hill, Columbus- oh, 2015. 3. Fung Y C, “Biomechanics: Mechanical Properties of Living Tissues”, Springer-Verlag, 2013. 4. Author T Johnson, “Biomechanics & Exercise Physiology”, John Wiley & sons, NY, 2007. 5. GhistaD N, “Biomechanics of Medical Devices”, Macel Dekker, 1982.

18MD29 MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 3003 MEMS,MICROSYSTEMS AND SCALING LAWS IN MINIATURIZATION: Review ofMEMS and microsystem products,working principles of Microsystems: microsensors, microactuators, MEMS and microactuators, microaccelerometer; SCALING LAWS IN MINIATURIZATION: Scaling in geometry, Scaling in rigid body dynamics, the trimmer force scaling, vector-scaling in electrostatic forces, electromagnetic forces, scaling in electricity and fluidic dynamics, scaling in heat conducting and heat convection. (10) MATERIALS AND ENGINEERING MECHANICS FOR MICROSYSTEMS DESIGN: Review of Substrates and wafers, single crystal Silicon and wafers crystal structure, Si, silicon compounds-SiO2, SiC, Si3N4 and polycrystalline Silicon, Silicon piezoresistors, gallium arsenside, quartz-piezoelectric crystals; Polymers for MEMS; Conductive polymers; Engineering mechanics: Static bending of thin plate: circular plates with edge fixed, rectangular plate with all edges fixed and square plates with all edges fixed; Mechanical vibration and Resonant vibration, Microaccelerometers: design theory and damping coefficients; Thermomechanics and thermal stresses; Fracture mechanics: stress intensity factors, fracture toughness and interfacial fracture mechanics. (12) FLUID MECHANICS IN MACRO/MESO SCALES AND MICROSYSTEM FABRICATION PROCESS: Viscosity, flow patterns, Reynolds number, basic equation in continuum fluid dynamics, laminar fluid flow in circular conduits, incompressible fluid flow in microconduits: surface tension, capillary effect and micropumping; Fluid flow in sub micrometer and nanoscale-rarefied gas, Kundsen and Mach number and modelling of microgas flow, Heat conduction in multilayered thin films and solids in submicrometer scale; Thermal conductivity of thin films, heat conduction equation for thin films; Microsystem fabrication process:Photolithography, Photoresist, light sources, Ion implanation, diffusion process, thermal oxidation, chemical vapour deposition: principle, reactants in CVD; Enhanced CVD physical vapour deposition, sputtering, etching: chemical and plasma etching. (13) MICROMANUFACTURING AND MICROSYSTEM PACKAGING: Review of Bulk micromachining, Isotropic and anisotropic etching: wet etchants, etch stops, dry etching; Surface micromachining; process, LIGA process, SLIGA process; Microsystem packaging and its general considerations, essential packaging technologies, die preparation, surface bonding, wire bonding and sealing, threedimensional packaging; Assembly of microsytems and selection of packaging materials. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Hans H. Gatzen, Volker Saile, Jürg Leuthold, “Micro and Nano Fabrication”, Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg, 2015 2. Mark Madou, “Fundamentals of Microfabrication”, Taylor & Francis, 2011. 3. Tai-Ran Hsu, “MEMS and Microsystems Design and Manufacture “, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009. 4. Sze S M, “Semiconductor Devices”, Wiley India, 2008 5. Julian W. Gardner, Vijay K. Varadan , Osama O. Awadelkarim, “Microsensors, MEMS, and Smart Devices”, John Wiley and Sons Ltd, 2001. 6. Julian W Gardner, “Microsensors: Principles and Applications”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 2001.

18MD30 NANOMATERIALS AND NANOTECHNOLOGY 3003 ZERO AND ONE-DIMENSIONALNANOSTRUCTURES: Zero– dimensional nanostructures: nanoparticles through homogenous

242

59TH ACM

09.06.2018

nucleation, nanoparticles through the heterogeneous nucleation, kinetically confined synthesis of nanoparticles, epitaxial core – shell nanoparticles; One dimensional nanostructure- nanowires and Nanorods: spontaneous growth, template-based synthesis, electro spinning, and lithography. (10) TWO-DIMENSIONAL NANOSTRUCTURES AND FABRICATION: Two-dimensional nanostructures-thin films: fundamentals of film growth, vacuum science, Physical Vapor Deposition(PVD), Chemical Vapor Deposition(CVD), Atomic Layer Deposition (ALD), Electrochemical Deposition, Sol-Gel films.Nanostructures fabrication: lithography, nano manipulation and nanolithography, soft lithography, assembly of nanoparticles and nanowires, other methods of micro fabrication. (12) NANOMECHANICS AND NANO ELECTRONICS: Nanomechanics: ahigh-speed review of motion: displacement, velocity, acceleration and force, Nano mechanical oscillation, feeling faint forces; Nano Electronics: Electron energy bands, electrons in solids: conductors, insulation and semiconductors, Fermi energy, the density of states for solids, quantum confinement, tunneling, single electron phenomenon, molecular electronics. (11) NANOSCALE HEAT TRANSFER AND FLUID MECHANICS: Nanoscale heat transfer: Nanoscale heat, conduction, convection, radiation; Nanoscalefluid mechanics: fluids at the Nanoscale- major concepts, flow fluids flow at the Nano scale, applications of Nanofluidics; Nanophotonics: photonics properties of Nanomaterials, near-field light, optical tweezers, photonic crystals. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Rogers, Pennathur and Adams, “Nanotechnology: Understanding Small Systems”, CRC Press, 3rd edition, 2015. 2. Guozhong Cao and Ying Wang, “Nanostructures and Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties, and Applications” 2 nd edition, World Scientific, 2011

18MD31 PRODUCTION TOOL DESIGN 3003 DESIGN OF CUTTING TOOLS: Cutting tool materials, properties, classification, selection, tool wear, tool life; Single point tool: nomenclature, types and styles, design of tools for turning, boring, shaping, planing and slotting operations, form tools, tools and holders for CNC applications; Multipointcutters: nomenclature, classification and selection of drills, reamers, taps, dies and milling cutters; design of broaches and hobs. (11) DESIGN OF JIGS AND FIXTURES: Principles of locating and clamping, design of drill jigs for conventional, SPM and CNC machining centres, different type of jigs, jig bushes, calculation of drilling forces, process capabilities in drilling, chip disposal; Fixtures - estimation of machining forces, pneumatic and hydraulic clamping, variable clamping force vices, vacuum chucks, hydraulic work supports, tool setting gauges; Design of turning, milling and grinding fixtures; Fixtures for inspection, assembly, welding and heat treatment; Modular fixtures. (11) DESIGN OF PRESS TOOLS: Study of CNC shearing, press brake, mechanical and hydraulic power presses, accessories for power presses-coiler and de-coiler, straightening, feed units, fundamentals of blanking and piercing, tool clearances, estimation of tonnage, standard die sets, design of simple and compound tools, design of progressive tools with manual and auto feed, die materials, bending, drawing and forming tools. (11) DESIGN OF DIES: Plastic injection moulding dies: plastic materials, shrinkage, two plate mold design, standard mold plates, parting line, runner and gate design, mold cooling, ejection methods, tool materials, runner less molds, multi-color injection molding, simulation of mold flow; Introduction to Thermo Setting dies, blow molding dies, extrusion dies, forging dies, pressure die casting dies, powder metallurgy dies and rubber molding dies. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Joshi P H, “Jigs and Fixtures”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2013. 2. Ostergaurd D E, “Basic Die Making”, McGraw Hill, 2013. 3. Donaldson.C and LeCain.C.H, "Tool Design", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2012. 4. Pye R C W, “Injection Mold Design”, East West Press, 2000. 5. Kempster M H A, “An Introduction to Jig and Tool Design”, Viva Books Pvt. Ltd, 1998. 6. Arshinov.V and Alekseev.G, "Metal cutting Theory and Cutting Tool Design", MIR Publishers, Moscow, 1976.

18MD32 HUMAN FACTORS ENGINEERING 3003 INTRODUCTION: Definition, human technological system, multidisciplinary engineering approach, human–machine system, manual, mechanical, automated system, human system reliability, conceptual design, advanced development, detailed design and development, human system modeling; Information Input:input and processing, text, graphics, symbols, codes, visual display of dynamic information, auditory, tactual, olfactory displays, speech communications; Human output and control:physical work, manual material handling, motor skill, human control of systems, controls and data entry devices, hand tools and devices. (12) WORKPLACE DESIGN: Applied anthropometry, workspace design and seating, arrangement of components within a physical space, interpersonal aspects of work place design, design of repetitive task, design of manual handling task, work capacity, stress, fatigue. (11) ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: Illumination, climate, temperature, noise, motion, sound, vibration; Human factors applications: Human error, accidents, human factors and the automobile, organizational and social aspects, steps according to ISO/DIS6385,

243

59TH ACM

09.06.2018

OSHA’s approach, virtual environments.

(10)

BIOMECHANICSAND BIO-THERMODYNAMICS: Biostatic mechanics, statics of rigid bodies, upper extremity of hand, lower extremity and foot, bending, lifting and carrying, biodynamic mechanics, human body kinematics, kinetics, impact and collision; Biothermodynamics and Bioenergitics: Bio-thermal fundamentals, human operator heat transfer, human system bioenergetics, thermoregulatory physiology, human operator thermos-regularity, passive operator, active operator, heat stress. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Bridger R S, “Introduction to Ergonomics”, Taylor and Francis, London, 2017. 2. Mark S Sanders, “Human Factors in Engineering and Design”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2013. 3. Neville Anthony Stanton, Alan Hedge, KarelBrookhuis, Eduardo Salas, Hal W. Hendrick “Handbook of Human Factors and Ergonomics Methods” CRC Press, 2004 4. Chandler Allen Phillips, “Human Factors Engineering”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 2000.

18MD33 ROTOR DYNAMICS 3003 ROTOR DYNAMICS AND MODELS: Co-ordinate systems: steady state rotor motion, elliptical motion, single degree of freedom systems, free and forced vibrations, total motion; The Laval-Jeffcott rotor model: the two degrees of freedom rotor system, translational motion, natural frequencies and natural modes; steady state response to unbalance, the effect of flexible support. (12) TORSIONAL VIBRATION IN ROTATING MACHINERY: Modeling of rotating machinery shafts of multi degree of freedom systems, determination of natural frequencies and mode shapes of branched systems. (10) RIGID ROTOR DYNAMICS AND CRITICAL SPEEDS: Rigid disk equation: rigid rotor dynamics, rigid rotor on flexible shaft; Whirling of an unbalanced simple elastic rotor: simple shafts with several disks, effect of axial stiffness, and determination of bending critical speeds. (12) BALANCING AND CONDITION MONITORING OF ROTORS: Balancing: single plane balancing, multi-plane balancing, balancing of rigid rotors, balancing of flexible rotors; Condition monitoring - noise spectrum, real time analysis, knowledge based expert systems. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Timoshenko S, Young D H and Weaver W, “Vibration Problems in Engineering”, John Wiley, 2017. 2. Yamamoto T and Ishida Y, “Linear and Nonlinear Rotor Dynamics: A Modern Treatment with Applications”, John Wiley and Sons Inc., New York, 2013. 3. WengJeng Chen and Edger J Gunter, “Introduction to Dynamics of Rotor – Bearing Systems”, Trafford Publishing Ltd., London, 2007 4. Rao J S, “Rotor Dynamics”, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi, 2004. 5. Tondl A, “Some Problems of Rotor Dynamics”, Chapman and Hall limited, New York, 1973.

18MD34 OPTIMUM DESIGN OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 3003 NONLINEAR OPTIMIZATION: Unconstrained optimization: one-dimensional optimization- elimination methods- Dichotomous Search Method- Fibonacci method-golden section methods- quadratic interpolation method-direct root methods; Multivariable optimization: direct search methods, univariate method, pattern search methods, Hookes and Jeeves method, descent methods, steepest descent, newton methods; Solving design optimisation and process optimisation problems. (11) CONSTRAINED MULTIVARIABLE OPTIMIZATION: Multivariable optimization: direct methods, cutting plane method, indirect methods, transformation techniques, and basic approach of penalty function method, Khun-Tucker conditions, Lagrangianmethod; Solving design optimisation and process optimisation problems. (12) INTEGER AND DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING: Integer programming: solution techniques-graphical method- the branch and bound technique; Dynamic programming: Principle of optimality, computational procedure, calculus method of solution; Solving design optimisation and process optimisation problems. (11)

NON-TRADITIONAL OPTIMIZATION: Genetic algorithms, simulated annealing, neural networks, particle swarm optimization,Teaching–learning-based optimization (TLBO); Solving design optimisation and process optimisation problems. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Kalyanmoy Deb, “Optimization for Engineering Design”, Prentice-Hall India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2012. 2. Singiresu S Rao, “Engineering Optimization: Theory and Practice”, Wiley-Interscience, 2009. 3. David E Goldberg, “Genetic Algorithms in Search, Optimization and Machine Learning”, Addison-Wesley Pub Co., 1989. 4. Harvey M Salkin, “Integer Programming”, Addison-Wesley Pub. Co. 1989. 5. Dimitri P Bertsekas, “Dynamic Programming: Deterministic and Stochastic Models”, Prentice Hall, 1987.

244

59TH ACM

09.06.2018 18MD35 COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS 3003

CFD AND THERMO-FLUIDS: Review to the physics of thermo-fluids, governing equations - continuity, momentum, and energy conservation - modelling, grid generation, simulation, and high-performance computing. (10) COMPUTATIONAL APPROACH: Finite difference method, forward, backward and central difference schemes, explicit and implicit methods, properties of numerical solution methods, stability analysis, and error estimation, difference between FDM and FVM, approximation of surface integrals, approximation of volume integrals, interpolation practices, implementation of boundary conditions, specification for a CFD simulation, requirements for accurate analysis and validation for multi scale problems. (12) CFD TECHNIQUES: Mathematical classification of flow, hyperbolic, parabolic, elliptic and mixed flow types, Lax - Wendroff technique, MacCormack’s technique, relaxation technique, artificial viscosity, ADI technique, pressure correction technique, SIMPLE algorithm, upwind schemes, flux vector splitting. (12) TURBULENCE MODELING AND CFD APPLICATIONS: Turbulence energy equation, one-equation model, two-equation models (k-ω and k- ε models), review on advanced turbulence models, applications to fluid flow and heat transfer problems. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Chung T J, “Computational Fluid Dynamics”, Cambridge University Press, 2010. 2. Muralidhar K and Sundararajan T, “Computational Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer”, Narosa Publications, 2009. 3. Versteeg H K and Malalasekara W, “An Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics” - The Finite Volume Method', Longman, 2007. 4. Joel H Ferziger and MilovanPeric, “Computational Methods for Fluid Dynamics”, Springer Publications, 2002. 5. John D Anderson, “Computational Fluid Dynamics – The Basics with Applications”, McGraw Hill, 1995.

18MD36 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE AND EXPERT SYSTEMS 3003 HUMAN AND MACHINE INTELLIGENCE AND SMART SYSTEMS: Concepts of fifth generation computing, programming in AI environment, developing artificial intelligence system, natural language processing, neural networks; Forward chaining, backward chaining, use of probability and fuzzy logic, Semantic nets, structure and objects, ruled systems for semantic nets; certainty factors, automated learning. (12) LANGUAGES USED IN AI AND EXPERT SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT: Using PROLOG to design expert systems, converting rules to PROLOG, conceptual example, introduction to LISP, function evaluation, lists, predicates, rule creation; Definition, choice of domain, collection of knowledge base, selection of inference mechanism, case studies of expert system development in design and manufacturing. (12) EXPERT SYSTEM TOOLS: Expert systems, controlling reasoning, rule based system, canonical systems, rules and meta rules, associative nets and frame systems, graphs trees and networks, representing uncertainty, probability in expert systems-learning, forms of learning, inductive learning, decision trees, knowledge in learning, heuristic classification, heuristic matching, case studies in expert systems, MYCIN, Meta-Dendral, general structure of an expert system shell, examples of creation of an expert system using an expert system tool, fundamentals of object oriented programming, creating structure and object, object operations, invoking procedures, programming applications, object oriented expert system. (11) INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION OF AI AND EXPERT SYSTEMS: Robotic vision systems, image processing techniques, application to object recognition and inspection, automatic speech recognition. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Robert Levine et al, "A Comprehensive Guide to AI and Expert Systems", McGraw Hill Inc., 1988. 2. Henry C Mishkoff, "Understanding AI", BPB Publication, New Delhi, 1988. 3. Peter Jackson, “Introduction to Expert Systems”, Addison Wesley, 2000. 4. Stuart Russell and Peter Norvig, “Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach”, Prentice Hall, 1995. 5. Elaine Rich et al, “Artificial Intelligence”, McGraw Hill, 2009.

18MD37ADVANCED STRENGTH OF MATERIALS 3003 CURVED BEAMS AND BEAMS ON ELASTIC SUPPORTS: Circumferential stress at a point in a curved beam, correction of circumferential stresses in curved beams, deflection of curved Beams, Wrinklerbach formula-limitations, curved beam with restrained ends; Closed ring subjected to a concentrated load and uniform load: beam with a concentrated load; Use of principle of superposition. beam supported on equally spaced separate elastic supports; UDL over part of the beam, semi-infinite beam subjected to loads at its end with concentrated load near its end. (12) FLAT PLATES IN BENDING: Plates in which bending action is dominant, small deflections. stress in a circular plate with UDL, simply supported and fixed edges-concentrated load; Stresses in square and rectangular plates with UDL, concentrated load at center, strain energy of a plate. (11)

245

59TH ACM

09.06.2018

ROTATING DISKS ANDTORSION OF NON-CIRCULARSECTIONS: Solid disk, disk with a central hole with external and internal pressures, disks of uniform strength, plastic collapse of rotating disks; Rotating cylinders (circular); Disk of varying thickness: torsion of bar having rectangular sections, elastic membrane (soap film) analogy hollow thin walled tubes, thin wall torsion members with restrained ends, elastic torsion of a circular cross section. (11) THICK WALLED CYLINDERS: Lame solution for principal stresses, maximum stresses, radial deflection, failure theories, applications, methods of increasing the elastic strength by pre-stressing, analysis of effects of stresses of shrinking a hollow cylinder made of thin walled laminations, auto frettage, stress components and radial displacements for constant temperature. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Ghosh D, Advanced Strength of Materials”, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi, 2015. 2. Srinath L S, “Advanced Mechanical of Solids”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi 2011. 3. Pachauri and Simant, “Advanced Strength of Materials”, PragatiPrakashan, 250001(India), 2008. 4. Boresi A P and Sidebottom O M, “Advanced Mechanics of Materials”, John Wiley and Sons, New Delhi, 2002. 5. Cook R D and Young, “Advanced Mechanics of Materials”, John Wiley Co., New Delhi, 1998. 6. Den Hartog, “Advanced Strength of Materials”, McGraw Hill Inc., New Delhi, 1987.

18MD38 DESIGN OF PRESSURE VESSELS 3003 CATEGORIZATION OF STRESSES IN PRESSURE VESSELS: Overview of pressure vessels, development of pressure vessel construction codes, factor of safety, design by rule, design by analysis, modes of failure, design for cyclic loading, stress intensity, stress limits, practical aspects of stress categorization, shape factor considerations. (11) DESIGN OF CYLINDRICAL SHELLS: Introduction, thin-shell equations, thick-shell equations, buckling of cylindrical shells, discontinuity stresses in pressure vessels, design of heads and covers, hemispherical heads under internal pressure; Stress concentration about a circular hole: cylindrical and spherical shell with a circular hole under internal pressure; Reinforcement of openings; Case Studies: Sizing of a pressure vessel, nozzle reinforcement assessment. (12) FATIGUE ASSESSMENT OF PRESSURE VESSELS: Introduction, exemption from fatigue analysis, S–N curves, local strain approach to fatigue, design fatigue curves, cumulative damage, cycle counting, fatigue evaluation procedure, example of fatigue evaluation, bolted flange connections, gasket joint behaviour, design of bolts, closure: Case Studies: fatigue evaluation using elastic analysis, fatigue evaluation using the simplified inelastic analysis method. (12) DESIGN OF VESSEL SUPPORTS: Lug support, support skirts, saddle supports, simplified inelastic methods in pressure vessel design- Elastic analysis incorporating modified Poisson’s ratio, Elastic analysis to address plastic strain intensification; Case Studies: Structural evaluation of a reactor vessel support. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Stanley, M. Wales, “Chemical process equipment, selection and Design. Buterworths series in Chemical Engineering, 2016. 2. Somnath Chattopadhyay, “Pressure Vessels Design and Practice”, CRC Press 2004. 3. John F. Harvey, Theory and Design of Pressure Vessels, CBS Publishers and Distributors, 2001. 4. William. J., Bees, “Approximate Methods in the Design and Analysis of Pressure Vessels and Piping”, Pre ASME-Pressure Vessels and Piping Conference, 1997. 5. Henry H. Bedner, “Pressure Vessels, Design Hand Book, CBS publishers and Distributors, 1991.

18MD39 FRACTURE MECHANICS 3003 FRACTURE MECHANISMS IN METALS AND NONMETALS: Linear elastic fracture mechanics, elastic plastic fracture mechanics, fracture toughness testing; Fracture mechanisms in metals: Ductile fracture, cleavage, the ductile-brittle transition, intergranular fracture; Fracture mechanisms in non-metals: Structure and properties of polymers, yielding and fracture in polymers, fiberreinforced plastics, ceramics and ceramic composites, concrete and rock. (10) CREEP: Mechanics of creep, inter-granular, trans-granular creep, creep test, creep strain rate-time curves, deformation mechanism map, high temperature properties of materials long time creep-stress-time relations creep contribution to the fracture mechanism; DVM, DVL German-standard, Hatifield time yield test. (12) APPLICATION TO STRUCTURES: Linear elastic fracture mechanics, CTOD design curve, failure assessment diagrams - original concept, J-based FAD, application to welded structures, probabilistic fracture mechanics. (11) FATIGUE CRACK PROPAGATION AND COMPUTATIONAL FRACTURE MECHANICS: Similitude in fatigue, empirical fatigue crack growth equations, crack closure, growth of short cracks, micro-mechanisms of fatigue, fatigue crack growth experiments, damage tolerance methodology. Computational fracture mechanics: Overview of numerical methods, traditional methods in computational fracture mechanics, the energy domain integral, mesh design, linear elastic convergence study, analysis of growing cracks. (12) Total L: 45

246

59TH ACM

09.06.2018

REFERENCES: 1. Surjya Kumar Maiti, “Fracture Mechanics: Fundamentals and Applications”, Cambridge University Press, 2015. 2. Prashant Kumar, “Elements of Fracture Mechanics”, McGraw Higher Ed, 2009. 3. TribikramKundu, “Fundamentals of Fracture Mechanics”, Taylor & Francis, 2008. 4. Anderson T L, “Fracture Mechanics: Fundamentals and Applications”, Taylor and Francis, 2005. 5. ASM Handbook- Vol.10, "Failure Analysis and Prevention", Metals Park, Ohio, USA, 1995.

18MD40 EXPERIMENTAL STRESS ANALYSIS 3003 OVERVIEW OF EXPERIMENTAL STRESS ANALYSIS: Optical methods work as optical computers, multi-scale analysis in experimental mechanics; Stress, strain and displacement fields; Physical principle of strain gauges, photoelasticity and Moiré; Moiré, brittle coatings and holography; Hologram interferometry and speckle methods; Introduction to shearography, TSA, DIC and caustics, fringe patterns – richness of qualitative information, multi-scale analysis in experimental mechanics; selection of an experimental technique. (11) TRANSMISSION PHOTOELASTICITY: Ordinary and extraordinary rays, light ellipse, passage of light through a crystal plate, retardation plates, stress-optic law, plane polariscope, Jones calculus, circular polariscope, determination of photoelastic parameters at an arbitrary point; Tardy’s method of compensation, calibration of photoelastic materials, fringe thinning methodologies, fringe ordering in photoelasticity; Miscellaneous topics in transmission photoelasticity: Resolving the ambiguity on the principal stress direction, determination of the sign of the boundary stress, compatibility conditions, role of elastic constants on stress field, model to prototype relations, properties of photoelastic model materials. (11) THREE DIMENSIONAL PHOTOELASTICITY AND DIGITAL PHOTOELASTICITY: overview of digital photoelasticity; Photoelastic coatings: Introduction, correction factors for photoelastic coatings, coating materials, selection of coating thickness, industrial application of photoelastic coatings, calibration of photoelastic coatings; Brittle coatings: Introduction to brittle coatings, analysis of brittle coatings. (11) STRAIN GAUGES: Introduction to strain gauges, strain sensitivity of a strain gauge, bridge sensitivity, rosettes, strain gauge alloys, carriers and adhesives, performance of strain gauge system, temperature compensation, two-wire and three-wire circuits; Strain gauge selection, bonding of a strain gauge; Applications: soldering, accounting for transverse sensitivity effects, correction factors for special applications; Special gauges- environmental effects, torque gauge, stress gauge, single element strain gauge as stress gauge; Evaluation of SIF by strain gauges, strip gauge, single element strain gauge to evaluate SIF. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Sadhu Singh, “Experimental Stress Analysis”, Khanna Publishers, 2009. 2. K. Ramesh, “E-Book on Experimental Stress Analysis”, IIT Madras, 2009. 3. W.N. Sharpe (Ed.), “Springer Handbook of Experimental Solid Mechanics”, Springer, 2008. 4. J.W. Dally and W.F. Riley,” Experimental Stress Analysis”, McGraw-Hill, 1991. 5. G.S. Holister, “Experimental Stress Analysis, Principles and Methods”, Cambridge University Press, 1987. 6. L.S. Srinath, M.R. Raghavan, K. Lingaiah, G. Gargesa, B. Pant, and K. Ramachandra, “Experimental Stress Analysis”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 1984.

18MD41 DESIGN OF PRESS TOOLS 3003 SHEET METAL BEHAVIOR AND FUNDAMENTALS OF DIES: Sheet metal and its behavior in metal stamping process, plasticity theories, external influences on the part and their impact on plastic deformation, shear of metal in cutting operation, Bending and forming of sheet metal material - movement of metal; Metal stamping die: description of a die, dies according to their construction, dies according to their effect on the structure of material, new methods in metalworking, fine blanking. (11) METALWORKING MACHINERY AND CONSTRUCTION OF DIES: Parts of the press, press operating parameters, classification of presses, press mounting, performance and productivity, electro-erosive machining; Metal stamping dies: tolerancing systems, fabrication and assembly of die components, mounting of blocks, machining of blocks, heat treatment. (11) BLANKING AND PIERCING OPERATIONS: Sheet metal cutting process, forces involved in the sheet metal cutting process, alignment of cutting tools, design of sheet metal cutting tools, cutting clearances, punching and blanking pressure, cutting force with inclined cutting surfaces, stripping pressure, scrap and hole size recommendations, practical advices and restrictions, progressive die design. (12) BENDING AND FORMING OPERATIONS: Stress, strain, elongation and compression during bending, bend radius, radius of forming tools, edge formability, types of bending operations, spring back, surface flatness after bending, forming, bending and forming pressure calculations. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Cyril Donaldson, George H.Lecain, V.C. Goold, JoyjeetGhose, “Tool Design”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishers, 2012. 2. IvanaSuchy, “Handbook of Die Design”, McGraw Hill, 2006. 3. David A Smith, “Die Design Handbook”, Society of Manufacturing Engineers, 1990.

247

59TH ACM

09.06.2018 18MD42 HUMAN BODY VIBRATION DIAGNOSTICS 3003

WHOLE BODY VIBRATION: Vibration and human response, Categorization of vibration (deterministic, random), effects of vibration-criteria, limits, vibration analysis procedure, human vibration-definition, types; standardization bodies-ISO, CEN, National, BSI; Sources-Road, off-road, marine, rail transports; Exposure to whole body vibration-Vibration discomfort Measurement parameters and quantification of the vibration level, frequency response of human whole body vibration , vibration measurementsetup and stimuli, transducers used , vehicle human interface mathematical model-half car, quarter car, equation of motion (multi degree of freedom)-Lagrange’s approach, matrix approach.. (12) BIODYNAMICS, SEATING DYNAMICS AND HAND ARM VIBRATION: Body transmissibility- apparent mass, models, Transmissibility, SEAT value, Seat Testing, Biomechanical models; Sources, exposure to hand arm vibration-White finger syndrome, frequency response of hand arm vibration, vibration measurement - setup and stimuli, transducers used, machine human interface model, equation of motion (Multi degree of freedom)-Lagrange’s approach, matrix approach. (12) MEASUREMENT EVALUATION AND ASSESSMENT OF HUMAN VIBRATION: Frequency analysis, digital frequency weighting, amplitude analysis,ISO evaluation of human exposure to whole body vibration - fatigue decreased proficiency boundary, exposure limit, reduced comfort boundary-BS 6841, ISO 2631, standards for assessment of hand arm vibration-BS 6842 (1987) and ISO 5349 (1986),ISO 5349 (2001)standards for determining the vibration emission value of tools and hand-guided machines-ISO 8662(1, 2, 3…14),standards for testing the dynamic performance of antivibration gloves-ISO 13753, ISO10819, 1/3 octave frequency analysis. (11) HEALTH EFFECTS OF VIBRATION, THEIR DIAGNOSIS, AND PREVENTION: Vascular disorders-primary Raynaud's disease, secondary Raynaud's phenomenon, trauma, Occlusive vascular disease, neurogenic, Stockholm workshop scale, preventative measures- managerial, technical, medical, and individual, treatments for injury and disease. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Neil.J. Mansfield, "Human response to vibration", CRC Press, 2005. 2. Thomson W T, "Theory of Vibration with Applications", Prentice Hall of India, 1997. 3. M J Griffin,"Handbook of Human Vibration", Academic Press, 1990. 4. P M Nelson,"Transportation Noise Reference Book", Butterworths, 1987. 5. K D Kryter, "The Effects of Noise on Man, Academic Press", 1985. 6. ISO 2631/1. “Evaluation of human exposure to whole-body vibration”, Geneva: ISO, 1985.

18MD43 ADVANCED FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS 3003 BENDING OF PLATES AND SHELLS: Review of elasticity equations; Bending of plates and shells – finite element formulation of plate and shell elements, conforming and non-conforming elements, C0 and C1 continuity elements, degenerated shell elements, application and examples. (11) NON-LINEAR ANALYSIS: Introduction, non-linear differential equation, solution procedures for non-linear problems, linearization and directional derivative; Material non-linearity: Analysis of axially loaded bars, significance of sampling rate, material models for isotropic, orthotropic, anisotropic, hyper-elastic, hardening rules; Geometric non-linearity: Basic continuum mechanics concepts, governing differential equations and weak forms; Introduction to contact problems. (12) TIME-DEPENDENT ANALYSIS: Numerical integration in time, natural frequencies of one dimensional bar, time dependent onedimensional bar analysis; Time dependent heat transfer -transient thermal analysis; Solution of one dimensional problems. (12) ERROR, ERROR ESTIMATION AND CONVERGENCE: Sources of error, ill-conditioning, the condition number, diagonal decay test, residuals, discretization error, convergence rate, multi-mesh extrapolation, mesh revision methods, gradient recovery and smoothing, A-Posteriori error estimate, adaptive meshing. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Reddy J.N, “An Introduction to Finite Element Method”, McGraw Hill Education, 2015. 2. Rao S S, “The Finite Element Method in Engineering”, Elsevier, 2014. 3. Ashgar Bhatti M, “Fundamental Finite Element Analysis and Applications”, Wiley India, 2012. 4. Logan D L, “A First Course in the Finite Element Method”, Thomson Learning, 2010. 5. Cook, R.D., Malkus, D. S., Plesha,M.E., and Witt,R.J “ Concepts and Applications of Finite Element Analysis”, Wiley, 2007. 6. Bathe K.J., “Finite Element Procedures in Engineering Analysis”, Prentice Hall, 1990.

AUDIT COURSES 18MD81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP81

18MD82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP82

248

59th ACM 13. Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment ME INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING Course Course Title Code I SEMESTER 18MN01 Applied Statistics and Reliability 18MN02 Advanced Operations Research 18MN03 Enterprise Resource Planning 18MN04 Simulation Modeling and Analysis 18MN05 Operations Management 18MN51 Operations Research Laboratory 18MN81 English for Research Paper Writing Total 22 hrs II SEMESTER 18MN06 Engineering Economic Analysis 18MN07 Quality Engineering and Work Study 18MN08 Supply Chain Management Modeling and Analysis of Advanced 18MN09 Manufacturing Systems 18MN_ Professional Elective – 1 18MN_ Professional Elective – 2 18MN52 Industrial Engineering Laboratory 18MN61 Industry Visit and Technical Seminar 18MN82 Research Methodology and IPR Total 26 hrs III SEMESTER Professional Elective – 3 18MN_ 18MN_ Professional Elective – 4 18MN_ Professional Elective – 5 18MN_ Professional Elective – 6 18MN53 Manufacturing Systems Design Laboratory 18MN71 Project Work I Total 22hrs IV SEMESTER 18MN72 Project Work II PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE COURSES 18MN21 Business Models and Entrepreneurship 18MN22 Computer Integrated Manufacturing 18MN23 E Business 18MN24 Advanced Optimization Techniques 18MN25 Facilities Location and Design 18MN26 Financial and Cost Accounting 18MN27 Knowledge Management 18MN28 Lean Six Sigma in Manufacturing and Service 18MN29 Logistics and Distribution Management 18MN30 Marketing Management 18MN31 Pricing and Revenue Management 18MN32 Product Analysis and Cost Optimization 18MN33 Project Management 18MN34 Safety and Environment Management System 18MN35 Sequencing and Scheduling 18MN36 Service and Operations Management 18MN37 Total Productive Maintenance 18MN38 Value Engineering Waste Disposal Management and Occupational 18MN39 Hazards 18MN40 Human Factors Engineering

09.06.2018 (2018 REGULATIONS) * (Minimum No. of credits to be earned: 71 )

Hours/Week Credits Lecture Tutorial Practical

Maximum Marks CA FE Total

CAT

2 3 3 3 3 0 0 14

2 2 0 0 0 0 0 4

0 0 0 0 0 4 ** 4

3 4 3 3 3 2 Grade 18

50 50 50 50 50 50 0 300

50 50 50 50 50 50 0 300

100 100 100 100 100 100 0 600

PC PC PC PC PC PC MC

3 3 3

0 0 0

0 0 0

3 3 3

50 50 50

50 50 50

100 100 100

PC PC PC

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PC

3 3 0 0 0 18

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 4 4 ** 8

3 3 2 2 Grade 22

50 50 50 50 0 400

50 50 50 50 0 400

100 100 100 100 0 800

PE PE PC EEC MC

3 3 3 3 0 0 12

0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 4 6 10

3 3 3 3 2 3 17

50 50 50 50 50 50 300

50 50 50 50 50 50 300

100 100 100 100 100 100 600

PE PE PE PE PC EEC

0

0

28

14

50

50

100

EEC

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 3 3 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PE

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PE

* Indicated is the minimum number of credits to be earned by a student. ** - 60 hrs in I semester and 90 hrs in II semester; Grade: Completed / Not Completed CAT – Category; PC – Professional Core; PE - Professional Elective EEC – Employability Enhancement Course; MCMandatory Course

249

59th ACM

09.06.2018 SEMESTER I 18MN01 APPLIED STATISTICS AND RELIABILITY 2203

REGRESSION AND CORRELATION: Curve fitting, method of least squares- inferences based on the least squares estimator correlation - curvilinear regression - multiple regression. (8+7) STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL: Statistical process control – chance and assignable causes of quality variation, statistical basis of control charts - control charts for variables - 𝑋, R and s charts - control charts for attributes – p, np ,c and u charts. (8+7) ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING: Lot-by-Lot acceptance sampling for attributes – single sampling plans for attributes, double, multiple and sequential sampling plans, acceptance sampling by variables - chain sampling, continuous sampling, skip-lot sampling plans. (8+7) RELIABILITY: Failure distribution - reliability function, mean time to failure, hazard rate function, bathtub curve, conditional reliability, constant failure rate model – exponential reliability function, failure models, time dependent failure models - Weibull and normal distributions - serial configuration, parallel configuration, combined series parallel systems, system structure function, minimal cuts and minimal paths, state dependent systems. (8+7) Total L:32 + T:28 = 60 REFERENCES: 1. Richard A Johnson, Irwin Miller and John Freund’s, “Probability and Statistics for Engineers”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2018. 2. Charles E Ebeling, “An Introduction to Reliability and Maintainability Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2017. 3. Eugene L Grant, Richard S Leavenworth, “Statistical Quality Control”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2016. 4. Trivedi K S, “Probability and Statistics with Reliability, Queueing and Computer Science Applications”, John Wiley & Sons, New Delhi, 2016. 5. Douglas C Montgomery, “Introduction to Statistical Quality Control”, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2009.

18MN02 ADVANCED OPERATIONS RESEARCH 3204 LINEAR PROGRAMMING: Review of the principles of operations research; Linear programming: Formulation of linear programming problems, simplex algorithm, degeneracy, cycling and bland anti-cycling rules, revised simplex method, duality; dual simplex method – primal dual method; sensitivity analysis. (11+8) TRANSPORTATION AND ASSIGNMENT PROBLEMS: Formulation of a general transportation problem ,types of transportation problem: North-west corner method, Least cost method, Vogel’s approximation method, Stepping stone method - MODI algorithm, loops in a transportation problem, optimality in transportation problem, variations of a transportation problem and trans-shipment problem; Assignment problem :Mathematical formulation and solution methods of the assignment problem, variations of the assignment problem. (12+8) PROJECT MANAGEMENT: Project planning, project scheduling, project controlling, constructing the project network, dummy activities and events, rules for network construction, critical path, floats, project evaluation and review techniques, applications PERT/Cost analysis, costs and networks and lean cost scheduling rules. (10+6) GAME THEORY: Two people zero sum games: maximin and minimax principles - mixed strategies, expected pay-off, method of oddments - dominance principle, game by matrix method; Two person zero sum 2 x n game - graphical method, 2 x n or m x 2 game - linear programming method, algebraic method; 3 x 3 games with mixed strategy by the method of oddment and iterative; Markov chains: matrices and matrix multiplication, transition matrix, modelling a situation with a Markov chain UNCONVENTIONAL OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES: Genetic algorithms, simulated annealing, particle swarm optimization, ant colony optimization, neural networks – algorithms and applications, case studies in industrial engineering using genetic algorithms and simulated annealing. (12+8) Total L: 45+T: 30=75 REFERENCES: 1. Hamdy A. Taha, “Operations Research: An Introduction”, Pearson Education India, 9th edition, 2014. 2. R. Panneerselvam, “Operations Research”, PHI Learning, 2009. 3. F. Hillier and G. Lieberman, “Introduction to Operations Research”, McGraw-Hill, 8th edition, 2004. 4. Wayne L. Winston, “Operations Research: Applications and Algorithms”, Brooks/Cole, 4th edition, 2003.

18MN03 ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING 3003 FUNDAMENTALS OF ERP SYSTEMS: ERP an overview, enterprise an overview, ERP as integrated management information system; Evolution of ERP, benefits of ERP, ERP vs. traditional information systems, advantages of ERP; MRP II model and organizational processes. (10)

250

59th ACM

09.06.2018

BUSINESS PROCESS REENGINEERING (BPR) SYSTEM: Need and challenges, management concerns about BPR, BPR to build the business; Model for ERP, basic constituents of ERP, selection criteria for ERPpackages; Procurement – Systematic way for ERP package, features of various modules of ERP. (10) ERP IMPLEMENTATION: ERP – implementation, lifecycle, implementation methodology, hidden costs in implementation, organizing the implementation, vendors, consultants and users, project management and monitoring, issues in customizing ERP systems for organizations, need for training; Finance – manufacturing ,human resource, plant maintenance, materials management, quality management, sales and distribution. (13) ERP PACKAGES AND CASE STUDIES: SAP-R/3 – SAP HANA – MFG/PRO – IFS/AVALON – ORACLE. Comparison between different ERP packages; Survey of Indian ERP packages regarding their coverage, performance and cost – top management concerns and ERP systems – extended ERP (ERP II) - HRM, finance, production, materials, sales and distribution; Advance planning optimization through Internet of Things. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. David L OLSON, “Managerial Issues of Enterprise Resource Planning Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 2004. 2. Rahul V Altekar, “Enterprise Wide Resource Planning – Theory and Practice”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2004. 3. Alexis Leon, “ERP Demystified”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company, 2003. 4. Vinod Kumar Garg and Venkitakrishnan N K, “Enterprise Resource Planning-Concepts and Practice”, Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, 2003.

18MN04 SIMULATION MODELING AND ANALYSIS 3003 SYSTEM SIMULATION: Definition, history, nature of computer modeling and simulation, limitations of simulation, areas of application, components of a system, types of simulation, discrete and continuous systems, steps in simulation study; Simulation of Queuing Systems - single server and multi-server models, simulation of inventory system, simulation of reliability problem. (10) RANDOM NUMBER GENERATION AND TESTING: Techniques for generating random numbers:midsquare method,midproduct method, constant multiplier technique, additive congruential method, linear congruential method, combined linear congruential generators, feedback shift register generators; Tests for random numbers:Frequency test, Kolmogorov-Smirnov test, chi-square test; Independence test: runs up and runs down, runs above and below the mean;Autocorrelation test, Gap test, Poker test. (12) RANDOM VARIATE GENERATION: Inverse transform technique: Exponential distribution, uniform distribution;Weibull distribution, Triangular distribution. Empirical continuous distribution, generating approximate normal variates, Erlangdistribution, empirical discrete distribution, discrete uniform distribution, Poisson distribution, geometric distribution; Acceptance - rejection technique Poisson distribution, gamma distribution. (11) MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS SIMULATION: Input Modeling:Steps to build a useful model of input data, data collection, identifying the distribution with data, parameter estimation, suggested estimators, goodness of fit tests, selecting input models without data, models of arrival processes; Variance reduction techniques: antithetic variables, calibration and validation of models; Types of simulation with respect to output analysis: stochastic nature of output data, measures of performance and their estimation, output analysis for terminating simulation, output analysis for steady state simulation, objectives and performance measures of manufacturing systems modeling, modeling system randomness,sources of randomness, machine downtime; Case studies -Study of various simulation software, simulation of manufacturing systems, material handling system. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Law A M, “Simulation Modeling and Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008. 2. NarsinghDeo, “System Simulation with Digital Computer”, Prentice Hall of India, 2007. 3. Jerry Banks, John S, Carson II, Barry L Nelson and David M Nicol, “Discrete Event System Simulation”, Prentice Hall Inc., 2006. 4. Gordon G, “Systems Simulation”, Prentice Hall Ltd., 2006. 5. Francis Neelamkovil, “Computer Simulation and Modeling”, John Wiley and Sons, 1987.

18MN05 OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 3003 OPERATIONS AND PRODUCTION PROCESS: Operations: Operations function, globalization, factors affecting operation management, new trends in operation management. Operations strategy – forming operation strategies, strategy deployment, world class manufacturing practices; understanding processes: Design of processes – types of production processes, major factors affecting process design decisions. Process Planning- steps in process planning, make-or-buy decision, process analysis, automated process plan, productivity measurement, product design and process selection (11) DESIGNING, PLANNING AND CONTROL OF OPERATIONS: Facilities layout : globalization of operations, factors affecting location decisions, location planning methods, other issues, basic layout, designing product, process layout, hybrid layout, layout design procedures- CRAFT and ALDEP; Capacity Planning : capacity and strategy, managing demand, break-even analysis; Forecasting : strategic role of forecasting, components of forecasting demand, forecasting methods- time series methods, regression methods, seasonal forecasting, cyclic forecasting, accuracy of forecasts. Aggregate Production Planning - framework, basic strategies, approaches to aggregate planning, graphical, empirical and linear programming. (12)

251

59th ACM

09.06.2018

INVENTORY ANALYSIS AND CONTROL: Definitions, elements of inventory management, Inventory classification & control systems - ABC, XYZ, FSN, VED. Material management, inventory control, Lot sizing techniques, models of inventory, purchase model with instantaneous replenishment and without shortages, manufacturing models without shortages, purchase model with Service level, inventory models with price breaks, quantity discounts, inventory order policies, Inventory models under uncertainty. (10) SCHEDULING OPERATIONS and APPLICATION OF LEAN PRODUCTION SYSTEM: Scheduling and control in the job shop, priority rules and techniques, shop floor control, Gantt chart, tools of shop floor control constraints in a manufacturing system, DrumBuffer-Rope (DBR) methodology; Lean Management: Philosophy of Lean Management, creating Lean Enterprise, waste elimination; JIT :Elements of JIT, Changes in the manufacturing architecture, lot-size reduction, set-up reduction through SMED, Kanban as a control tool; Production planning and control in JIT : push and pull scheduling, kanban system, design of kanban quantities; Continuous improvement : Task force for continuous improvement, quality circle, project based small group improvement activities (PBSGIA), visual control aids for improvement. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Jay Heizer and Barry Render, “Operations Management”, Pearson Education India, 11th edition, 2015. 2. Roberta S Russell and Bernard W Taylor III, “Operations Management”, Wiley India Private Limited 7 th edition, 2012. 3. Mahadevan B, “Operations Management; Theory and Practice”, Pearson Education India, 2nd edition, 2010. 4. Pannerselvam R, “Production and Operations Management”, Prentice Hall India, 2 nd Edition, 2008. 5. Norman Gaither and Greg Frazier, “Operations Management” by Norman Gaither and Greg Frazier; Cengage Learning 9th edition, 2002. 6. Bedworth D K, “Integrated Production Control Systems Management, Analysis, Design”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1982.

18MN51 OPERATIONS RESEARCH LABORATORY 0042 In this course, students will be provided with an orientation on the following topics for a duration of 12-16 hours. Each student is expected to perform a case study by formulating and completing an activity of interest derived from the orientation under the guidance of faculty. The details expected in the final report to be submitted at the end of the semester are: Problem definition, literature review, objectives, methodology, analysis and interpretation of results and conclusions. TOPICS FOR ORIENTATION: 1. Linear and non-linear optimization, inventory and project management. 2. Use of statistical software for design of experiments, control charts, FMEA, reliability and forecasting. Total P: 60 REFERENCES: 1. Laboratory Manual prepared by the Department of Mechanical Engineering, PSG College of Technology. 2. Frederick S. Hillier, Gerald J. Lieberman, Bodhibrata Nag and Preetam Basu, “Introduction to Operations Research”, McGrawHill Education New Delhi, India, 2012.

SEMESTER II 18MN06 ENGINEERING ECONOMIC ANALYSIS 3003 TIME VALUE OF MONEY AND EVALUATION OF TANGIBLE ALTERNATIVES: Interest and time value of money : Simple interest, compound interest, nominal interest rates, effective interest rates, continuous compounding ,compound interest factors, cash flow diagrams ,calculation of time value equivalences, single payments, multiple payments, continuous interest payments. Present worth comparison: Conditions for PW comparison, Rule 72, Present Worth comparison patterns, PW equivalence, Net Present Worth; Comparison of assets, unequal lives, infinite lives, comparison of deferred investments; Valuation: bond valuation, equivalent annual worth comparison ,situations for EUAC; Rate of return calculations: Internal rate of return(IRR), Minimum acceptable rate of return(MARR). (11) STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS AND REPLACEMENT ANALYSIS: Development of alternatives, classification of alternatives, IRR analysis of mutually exclusive alternatives, analysis of independent alternatives, alternatives with unequal lives, reinvestment dependent alternatives. Replacement studies: Current salvage value of the defender, defender and challenger with unequal lives, replacement due to deterioration, replacement due to obsolescence, replacement due to inadequacy; Economic life for cyclic replacements zero interest rates, non zero interest rates, group replacement. (12) DEPRECIATION BREAKEVEN AND MULTI STAGE SEQUENTIAL DECISION ANALYSIS: Depreciation :Causes of declining value, basic methods of computing depreciation charges ,straight line method, declining balance method; MACRS depreciation, MACRS declining balance depreciation, MACRS recovery percentages. Basic concepts of break even analysis: Linear break even analysis, break even charts, algebraic relationships, break even point alternatives, dumping, multiproduct alternatives. Including risk in economic analysis, probability concepts, expected value, measures of variation, coefficient of variation; Application of probability concepts: Payoff table, EV of perfect information; Probability concepts of decision tree – Formulation of a discounted decision tree, application of decision trees. (10)

252

59th ACM

09.06.2018

PROJECT FEASIBILITY ANALYSIS: Marketing feasibility: Types of market, identification of investment opportunities, market and demand analysis, forecasting demand (review),forecast control, secondary sources of information. Technical feasibility: Product design, concept of concurrent engineering, make Vs buy decisions, BPO; Value analysis - FAST approach; Product life cycle management. Financial feasibility: Means of financing, financial institutions, profitability, cash flows of a project, tax factors in investment analysis, effects of inflation in economic analysis, Case study, report preparation. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. James L Riggs, David D Bedworth and Sabah U Randhawa, “Engineering Economics”, McGraw Hill Book Company, New Delhi, 2004. 2. Prasanna Chandra, “Projects Preparation, Appraisal and Implementation", Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2004. 3. William G Sullivan, Elin M Wicks and Patrick Koelling C “Engineering Economy”, Pearson Education Inc., Delhi, 2001. 4. Leland T Blank and Anthony J Tarquin, "Engineering Economy", McGraw Hill Book Company, 1998. 5. John A White et. al, "Principles of Engineering Economic Analysis", John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1998. 6. Norman N Barish, "Economic Analysis for Engineering and Managerial Decision Making", McGraw Hill Book Company, 1983.

18MN07 QUALITY ENGINEERING AND WORK STUDY 3003 LOSS FUNCTION: Derivation – loss function for products/system- justification of improvements - loss function and inspectionquality evaluations and tolerances-N type, S type, L type. (10) ON-LINE QUALITY CONTROL: On-line feedback quality control variable characteristics-control with measurement interval- one unit, multiple units-control systems for lot and batch production. On-line process parameter control variable characteristics- process parameter tolerances- feedback control systems- measurement error and process control parameters. (12) ON-LINE QUALITY CONTROL ATTRIBUTES CHARACTERISTICS AND METHODS FOR PROCESS IMPROVEMENTS: Checking intervals- frequency of process diagnosis. Production process improvement method- process diagnosis improvement method- process adjustment and recovery improvement methods. (11) TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT: Definition of Quality, Quality assurance, Quality Control, TQM and Deming’s principles, Old and New Quality Tools. WORK STUDY: Introduction on Work study, method study, time study, determination of standard time. Case study in lathe operation, assembling of electric motor. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. George Kanawaty “ Introduction to Work Study” Universal Book Corporation, Bombay, 2014. 2. Kaniska Bedi, “Quality Management” Oxford University Press, Chennai, 2007. 3. Logothetics N, "Managing for Total Quality - From Deming to Taguchi and SPC", Prentice Hall Ltd., New Delhi, 1997. 4. Pyzdek T and Berger R W, “Quality Engineering Handbook”, Tata-McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1996. 5. Taguchi G, Elsayed E A and Hsiang, T.C.,”Quality Engineering in Production Systems”, McGraw-Hill Book company, Singapore, 1989.

18MN08 SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT 3003 SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT, SUPPLY CHAIN PERFORMANCE MEASURE AND SUPPLY CHAIN NETWORK DESIGN: Definition, house of supply chain – customer satisfaction, integration, coordination - decision phases in a supply chain, objectives of SCM, examples of supply chains, supply chain drivers, supply chain performance measures;Supply chain network design:Data collection – data aggregation, transportation modes and rates, mileage estimation, warehouse costs, warehouse capacity, potential warehouse locations, service level requirements and future demand; Network design in the supply chain – factors influencing the network design, framework for network design decisions, models for facility location and capacity allocation – capacitated plant location model, gravity location model, allocating demand to production facilities, simultaneous location of plants and warehouses – impact of uncertainty on network design. (12) INVENTORY MANAGEMENT AND RISK POOLING: Single warehouse inventory model - cycle inventory – economies of scale to exploit fixed costs, quantity discounts, short term discounting, multi-echelon inventory, example problems. managing uncertainty – safety inventory in the supply chain –safety level estimation, impact of supply uncertainty, impact of aggregation, impact of replenishment policies, managing safety inventory in multi echelon supply chain, managing safety inventory in practice – product availability – optimal level, affecting factors, supply chain contracts – risk pooling – examples; Value of information – Bullwhip effect, information and supply chain technology. (11) DISTRIBUTION NETWORK DESIGN AND STRATEGIES: Role of distribution in supply chain – distribution network design – factors influencing distribution network design. push strategy – pull strategy – Kanban replenishment systems, types, implementation, and push–pull strategy – demand driven strategy – impact of internet on supply chain strategy;Distribution networks in practice – direct shipment, cross docking, warehousing, transhipment; Framework for strategic alliance - 3PL and 4PL – retailersupplier partnerships – distribution integration – procurement and outsourcing – benefits, make/buy decisions, E-Procurement, supplier relationship management – supplier scoring and assessment, supplier selection and contracts – E-Business and the supply chain; Design for logistics: Reverse logistics, case studies in paper and furniture industry;Supplier integration into new product development – mass customization. (12)

253

59th ACM

09.06.2018

CUSTOMER VALUE AND GLOBAL SUPPLY CHAINS: Customer value – dimensions, strategic pricing, customer value measures, information technology and customer value – customer relationship management. global supply chains – introduction, driving factors, risks and advantages, issues, regional differences in logistics.Information technology for supply chain - Goals – standardization – infrastructure – interface devices, communications, databases, system architecture – system components – integrating the supply chain information technology - DSS for supply chain management. (10) Total L: 45

REFERENCES: 1. Simchi – Levi Davi, Kaminsky Philip and Simchi-Levi Edith, “Designing and Managing the Supply Chain”, Tata 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi, 2003. Chopra S and Meindl P, “Supply Chain Management: Strategy, Planning, and Operation”, Prentice Hall India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2007. Sahay B S, “Supply Chain Management”, Macmillan Company, 2000. David Brunt and David Taylor, “Manufacturing Operations and Supply Chain Management: The Lean Approach”, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi, 2001. HartmudStadler and ChristophKilger, “Supply Chain Management and Advanced Planning: Concepts, Models, Software”, Springer-Verlag, 2000. David F Ross, “Introduction to E-Supply Chain Management”, CRC Press, 2003.

18MN09 MODELING AND ANALYSIS OF ADVANCED MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS 3003 MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS AND DESIGN: Types and principles of manufacturing systems, types and uses of manufacturing models, physical models, mathematical models, model uses, model building; Assembly lines - reliable serial systems; Approaches to line balancing – largest candidate rule, Kilbridge and Wester method, ranked positional weight heuristic, COMSOAL, sequencing mixed models; Transfer lines and general serial systems – paced lines with and without buffers, unpaced lines. (10) FACILITY LAYOUT AND FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS: Types of layout, advantages, limitations, systematic layout planning, layout design procedures - quadratic assignments approach, graph theoretic approach; Robotics and automated assembly; Cellular systems -Group technology, coding schemes, assigning machines to groups, production flow analysis, binary ordering algorithm, single pass heuristic, similarity coefficient method; System components – planning and control hierarchy, system design, system setup, scheduling and control – flow shop scheduling, job shop scheduling; Flexible inspection system. (12) MATERIAL HANDLING AND STORAGE: Material handling principles, equipments, conveyor analysis, AGV systems; Warehousing – warehouse components, analysis of storage and retrieval systems, carousal storage systems; Introduction to material handling and storage software. (11) GENERIC MODELING APPROACHES: Queuing models – notations, performance measures, m/m/1 queue, m/m/m queue, batch arrival queuing systems, queues with breakdowns; Queuing networks – open and closed networks, central server model; Petri net modeling - classical petrinets, transformation firing and reachability, reachability graphs, representation schemes, timed Pertinets, modeling of manufacturing systems. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 7. Mikell P. Groover, “Automation, Production Systems, and Computer-Integrated Manufacturing”, Pearson Education India, 2016 8. Mengchu Zhou, “Modeling, Simulation and Control of Flexible Manufacturing Systems: A Petri Net Approach”, World Scientific Publishing Company Pvt. Ltd., 2000. 9. Brandimarte P and Villa A, “Modeling Manufacturing Systems” Springer Verlag, Berlin, 1999. 10. Jean Marie Proth and XiaolanXie, “Petri Nets: A Tool for Design and Management of Manufacturing Systems”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1996. 11. Ronald G Askin, “Modeling and Analysis of Manufacturing Systems”, John Wiley and Sons, Inc, 1993. 12. Viswanatham N and Narahari Y “Performance Modeling of Automated Manufacturing Systems”, Prentice Hall Inc., 1992.

18MN52 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY 0042 In this course, students will be provided with an orientation on the following topics for a duration of 12-16hours. Each student is expected to perform a case study by formulating and completing an activity of interest derived from the orientation under the guidance of faculty. The details expected in the final report to be submitted at the end of the semester are: Problem definition, literature review, objectives, methodology, analysis and interpretation of results and conclusions. TOPICS FOR ORIENTATION: 1. Use of statistical software for hypothesis testing, gauge repeatability and reproducibility and process capability. 2. Use of ergonomics tools for human anthropometric studies, force, noise, illumination and postural analysis. 3. Use of lean tools for line balancing, Poka-Yoke, time and method study. Total P: 60 REFERENCE: 1. Laboratory Manual prepared by the Department of Mechanical Engineering, PSG College of Technology.

254

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18MN61 INDUSTRY VISIT AND TECHNICAL SEMINAR 0042

This course, likened to a mini-intern, requires each student to identify a manufacturing or service industry and pursue the solution of an industrial problem consistent with the credits allotted for the course. Students are expected to study the problem, survey pertinent literature, gather relevant data and carry out engineering and scientific analysis followed by a detailed presentation both oral and written. The report submitted for final assessment should be in line with that required for Project Work. Total P: 60

SEMESTER III 18MN53 MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS DESIGN LABORATORY 0042 In this course, students will be provided with an orientation on the following topics for a duration of 12-16hours. Each student is expected to perform a case study by formulating and completing an activity of interest derived from the orientation under the guidance of faculty. The details expected in the final report to be submitted at the end of the semester are: Problem definition, literature review, objectives, methodology, analysis and interpretation of results and conclusions. TOPICS FOR ORIENTATION: 1 .Use of simulation software for layout analysis and optimization, scheduling and inventory management 2. Use of simulation software for random number generation and study of manufacturing system 3. Use of simulation software for value stream mapping and study of service system Total P: 60 REFERENCE: 1. Laboratory Manual prepared by the Department of Mechanical Engineering, PSG College of Technology.

18MN71 PROJECT WORK I 0063 Project work involves the following:      

Identification of a real life problem in thrust areas Developing a mathematical model for solving the above problem Finalisation of system requirements and specification Proposing different solutions for the problem based on literature survey Future trends in providing alternate solutions Consolidated report preparation of the above Total P: 90

SEMESTER IV 18MN72 PROJECT WORK II 0 0 28 14 Project work involves the following: Preparing a project - brief proposal including     

Problem Identification A statement of system / process specifications proposed to be developed (Block Diagram / Concept tree) List of possible solutions including alternatives and constraints Cost benefit analysis Time Line of activities

A report highlighting the design finalization [based on functional requirements & standards (if any ] A presentation including the following:   

Implementation Phase (Hardware / Software / both) Testing & Validation of the developed system Learning in the Project

Consolidated report preparation

255

59th ACM

09.06.2018 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES 18MN21 BUSINESS MODELS AND ENTREPRENEURSHIP 3003

BUSINESS EXCELLENCE MODELS: Business Excellence Concepts – Need for BE models – Pioneers in the model MBNQA, EFQM and DEMING award - MBNQA Criteria : Leadership, Strategic planning, Customer and Market focus, Measurement analysis and Knowledge Management, Human resource focus, process management , business results. (12) IMPLEMENTING BUSINESS EXCELLENCE MODEL: Basic concepts – Training -Report writing – Internal audit-Report submission – Initial assessment - Site visit – Scoring – Criteria for Award, Award finalization - Case Study-Development of business excellence model for industrial application in production systems, inventory systems, maintenance. (10) ENTREPRENEURAL COMPETENCE, ENVIRONMENT AND BUSINESS PLAN PREPARATION: entrepreneurship concept – entrepreneurship as career – entrepreneurial personality - characteristics of successful, entrepreneur – knowledge and skills of entrepreneur. Business environment - role of family and society - entrepreneurship development training and other support organizational services - central and state government industrial policies and regulations - international business. Sources of product for business - prefeasibility study - criteria for selection of product - ownership - capital - budgeting project profile preparation - matching entrepreneur with the project - feasibility report preparation and evaluation criteria. (12) LAUNCHING AND MANAGEMENT OF SMALL BUSINESS: Finance and Human Resource Mobilization Operations Planning Market and Channel Selection - Growth Strategies - Product Launching – Incubation, Venture capital, IT startups. Monitoring and Evaluation of Business - Preventing Sickness and Rehabilitation of Business Units- Effective Management of small Business. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Hisrich, “Entrepreneurship”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2014. 2. S.S.Khanka, “Entrepreneurial Development”, S.Chand and Company Limited, New Delhi, 2013. 3. Donald F Kuratko, T.V Rao, “Entrepreneurship: A South Asian perspective”,Cengage, 2012. 4. Mark Graham Brown, Baldrige, “Award Winning Quality”, CRC press, 2008. 5. Mathew Manimala, “Entrepreneurship Theory at the Crossroads”, Paradigms & Praxis, Biztrantra, 2nd Edition,2005 6. P.Saravanavel, “Entrepreneurial Development”, Ess Pee kay Publishing House, Chennai, 1997.

18MN22 COMPUTER INTEGRATED MANUFACTURING 3003 CONCEPTS OF CIM: Definition of CIM, CIM wheel, evolution of CIM, development of numerical control, computers, computer– aided design (CAD), computer-aided manufacturing (CAM), islands of automation, evolution of the CIM concept, CIM II, benefits of CIM; Manufacturing: An Overview: Standard industrial classifications. Types of manufacturing - continuous of discrete manufacturing, variety and volume, raw material to final product. Needs of CIM hardware, CIM software. (10) FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS: Definition of an FMS - principal objectives – basic component – characteristics of FMS types of FMS – equipments and its functions. FMC vs. FMS. Types of flexibility and performance measures. Economic and technological justification for FMS. Planning phases - integration - system configuration - FMS layouts - simulation - FMS project development steps. Project management - equipment development - host system development – functions of FMS host computer – FMS host and area controller function distribution - planning - hardware and software development. (12) DISTRIBUTED NUMERICAL CONTROL AND PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS: Types of communications. Fundamentals of computer communications, representation of data, coding, transmission, medium, types of communication lines, communications hardware. Network architectures - the seven layers-OSI model, local area network (LAN), manufacturing automation protocol (MAP), DNC system - communication between DNC computer and machine control unit - hierarchical processing of data in DNC system - features of DNC systems, PLC - control system architecture - elements of programmable controllers: languages, control system flowchart, comparison of programming methods. (11) PROCESS PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT OF CIM: Computer-aided cost estimating, production planning and control – MRP II, History of Group Technology – role of GT in CAD/CAM Integration – part families classification and coding – DCLASS and MCLASS and OPTIZ coding systems – facility design using GT – benefits of GT – cellular manufacturing. Process planning - role of Process, planning in CAD/CAM Integration – approaches to computer aided process planning – variant approach and generative approaches. Role of management in CIM, cost justification, expert systems, participative management. Impact of CIM on personnel, role of manufacturing engineers - CIM engineer and technologist, CIM technicians, Roles of institutions. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Radhakrishnan P, Subramanyam S and Raju V, ―” CAD/CAM/CIM”, New Age International, 2008. 2. Rao P N, “CAD/CAM Principles and Applications”, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, 2007. 3. Groover M P, “Automation, Production Systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, Prentice Hall India Pvt. Ltd, 2002. 4. Parrish D J, “Flexible Manufacturing”, Butter Worth Heinemann Ltd, Oxford, 1993. 5. Tien-Chienchang, Richard A Wysk, “An Introduction to Automated Process Planning Systems”, Prentice Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1985.

256

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18MN23 E-BUSINESS 3003

E-BUSINESS SYSTEM: Entrepreneurship: Entrepreneur - entrepreneurial process, understanding Internet economy - e commerce vs. e business - advantages and opportunities - Critical Factors. e business models - e business plan - e governance - ERP in e Business. (10) E-BUSINESS INFRASTRUCTURE AND STRATEGY: Components - Five layer Model-Internet Technology - Internet standards Web Technology - Web Architecture - Common Gateway Interface (CGI) - Client server Communication - Architecture - Managing E business Infrastructure: Wireless access standards- devices. Strategy process models - strategy analysis -Types - Assessing competitive threats - Strategic objectives - Strategic decisions: types. Strategy implementation - Success factors - Failure strategies (12) E-PROCUREMENT AND MARKETING: Understanding procurement process - Types of Procurement - Procurement Drivers Estimating E Procurement cost - E auction - E tendering: Architecture - Reverse auction. E marketing : Definition - objectives strategy - Rules for E marketing - E Marketing Communication. Business Intelligent Systems - Online market research - E Procurement Implementation barriers and risks. (11) E-CRM: Introduction, benefits, conversion marketing, online buyer behaviour, customer acquisition management, social CRM strategy, customer retention management, customer extension, technology solutions for CRM,partner relationship management, E service management; E payment systems: types, protocols; E check transaction, E-cash-smart card,electronic fund transfer; Introduction to cyber Laws: general provisions. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Dave Chaffery,”E business and E commerce Management”, Pearson Publication, 5th edition, 2013. 2. Jonafnan Reynolds, “E business: A management Perspective”, Oxford university press, 2010. 3. V.P.Gupta,”E business”, Research Book Center, 2006. 4. H. Albert Napier,”Creating a winning E business”, Course Technology, 2001. 5. Ravi Kalakota,”E business: Roadmap for success”, Pearson Education Asia, 2000.

18MN24 ADVANCED OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES 3204 UNCONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES: Introduction, Statement of an optimization problem, classification, analytical methods -Necessary and sufficient conditions for optimality; One-dimensional minimization methods:elimination methods, interpolation methods, direct root methods; Unconstrainedoptimization techniques: Direct search methods, descent methods.case studies in unconstrained optimization. (11+8) CONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES: Necessary and sufficient conditions for optimality, constrained optimization techniques:Method of Lagrange multipliers, sequential linear programming, method of feasible directions, penalty function method, case studies in constrained optimization. (12+8) INTEGER AND DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING: Integer Programming:Graphical representation of integer programming problem, Gomory’s cutting plane method, branch and bound technique, integer nonlinear programming;Dynamic programming: Onedimensional and multi-dimensional allocation processes, case studies in industrial engineering using integer and dynamic programming. (11+7) UNCONVENTIONAL OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES: Genetic algorithms, simulated annealing, particle swarm optimization, ant colony optimization, neural networks – algorithms and applications,case studies in industrial engineering using genetic algorithms and simulated annealing. (11+7) TotalL: 45+T: 30=75 REFERENCES: 1. Richard E. Bellman and Stuart E Dreyfus, “Applied Dynamic Programming”, Princeton University Press, 2016. 2. Singiresu S Rao, “Engineering Optimization: Theory and Practice”, Third Edition, New Age International Publishers, 2013. 3. Kalyanmoy Deb, “Optimization for Engineering Design”, Second Edition, Prentice Hall India Pvt. Ltd., 2012. 4. Maurice Clerc, “Particle Swarm Optimization”, Wiley- ISTE, 2006. 5. Marco Dorigo and Thomas Stutzle, “Ant Colony Optimization”, MIT Press, 2004.

18MN25 FACILITIES LOCATION AND DESIGN 3003 SINGLE AND MULTI FACILITY LOCATION: Introduction, nature of facilities location problem, distance measures in location problems, relevant costs, types of single facility location problem - straight line distance problem, rectangular distance problem,

lp

distance problem; Variants of single facility location problems: Points and area destinations with rectangular distance, location of a linear

facility,

probabilistic

destination

locations;

Multi-Facility

(12)

257

location:

rectangular

and

l p distance

models

59th ACM

09.06.2018

FLOOR LAYOUT: Quadratic assignment problem, Branch and bound technique, heuristic procedures, the Hall m-dimensional quadratic placement algorithm. (11) FLOW, SPACE AND ACTIVITY RELATIONSHIP: Departmental planning, flow patterns and measurement, space requirements. (11) LAYOUT PLANNING MODELS: Design cycle – SLP procedure, computerized layout planning procedure – ALDEP, CORELAP, and CRAFT. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Tompkins, White,Bozer and Tanchoco, “Facilities planning”, John Wiley, Fourth Edition, 2010. 2. Richard Francis. L. and John A.White, “Facilities Layout and location – an analytical approach”, PHI., 2002. 3. Robert F Love, James G Morris and George O Wesolowsky,”Facilities Location – Models and Methods”, Elsevier, 1988. 4. James Apple, M. “Plant layout and Material Handling”, John Wiley, 1977.

18MN26 FINANCIAL AND COST ACCOUNTING 3003 ACCOUNTING PRINCIPLES AND RECORDING PROCESS: Uses of accounting data- Brief history of accounting- Distinguish between book keeping and Accounting – Building blocks of Accounting: Ethics, A fundamental business concept – Generally Accepted Accounting principles Basic Accounting Equation- transaction analysis – income statement – Balance sheet – statement of cash flows. Recording process: The Account: Debits and credits – Debit and Credit procedures – stockholders equity relationships – expansion of basic equation – Steps in the Recording process: The journal – The ledger – The Trial balance: Limitation of a trial balance – LocatingErrors. (12) INVENTORIES AND CONCEPTUAL FRAMEWORK OF COST ACCOUNTING: Inventory Basics:Classifying InventoryDetermining inventory quantities – inventory accounting systems – Periodic Inventory System: Recording transactions – Recording purchase of merchandise – recording sales of Merchandise – Valuing inventory.Cost accounting and management accounting – Cost concepts and classifications. (10) ELEMENTS AND ACCOUNTING OF COST AND COSTING METHODS: Materials Control – Materials costing – Labour Costs Accounting and Control – Factory overheads distribution – Administrative and selling and distribution overheads – Activity Based Costing (ABC). Cost control Accounts – integrated accounting system – reconciliation of cost and financial accounts. Single or Output Costing – Job, Contract and Batch costing – process Costing – service costing. (12) COST ANALYSIS FOR DECISION MAKING AND CONTROL: Marginal (variable) Costing – Alternative choices decisions – Pricing decisions – Standard Costing – Budgeting – working capital- financial ratios– Responsibility Accounting and Divisional performance measurement. Profit and Loss Account, Balance sheet statement, Cash flow and fund flow analysis. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Weygandt ,Kieso and Kimmel, “Finance Accounting”, Wiley, India Edition. 2. JawaharLal andSeema Srivastava, “Cost Accounting", McGraw Hill Book Company, New Delhi, 2013. 3. Rajasekaran V, “Cost Accounting”, Pearson Education, 2010. 4. I.M. Pandey, “Financial Management”, Vikas Publishing House, Tenth edition, 2010. 5. Ashok Banerjee, “Financial Accounting”, Excel Books India, 2009. 6. Cheng-F Lee, “Advances in Quantitative Analysis of Finance and Accounting”, Airiti Lab, 2009.

18MN27 KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT 3003 OVERVIEW OF KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT (KM): Evolution of KM, types of knowledge, life cycles for KM systems, Integrative framework involving technology, person and organization, Nonaka’smodel of knowledge creation and transformation,managing knowledge in organizations, ethics in KM. (12) TOOLS AND METHODS FOR KM: Building the learning organization, Internet search engines, data mining, telecommunications and networks, information mapping, coding and retrieval,repackaging information. (11) KM SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT: KM Codification, KM system analysis, design and development, knowledge transfer and sharing, team, infrastructure and audit. (11) EVALUATION OF KM SYSTEMS: Metrics to evaluate KM effectiveness, managerial, ethical and legal issues, KM Innovation and case studies from leading organizations. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. KimizDalkir, “Knowledge Management in Theory and Practice”, Routledge, 2013. 2. Ashok Jashapara, “Knowledge Management: An Integrated Approach”Pearson Education, Canada, 2010. 3. Thomas H Davenport and Laurence Prusak, “Working Knowledge: How Organizations Manage What They Know”, Harvard Business School Press, Boston, 2000. 4. Elias M.Awad and Hassan M. Ghaziri, “Knowledge Management”, Pearson Education, India, 2007. 5. Andreas Tolk, “Complex Systems in Knowledge-Based Environments: Theory, Models and Applications”; Springer, 2009

258

59th ACM 6.

09.06.2018

Adrian A. Hopgood, “Intelligent Systems for Engineers and Scientists”, CRC Press, 2011.

18MN28 LEAN SIX SIGMA IN MANUFACTURING AND SERVICE 3003 CONCEPTS OF LEAN SIXSIGMA: Lean Principles, eight major wastes; Six-Sigma: Concept, methodology, definition, origin, common terms; Lean six sigma: four keys, five laws of lean six sigma,types - DMAIC, DMADV,project selection;Selection of team members; Six Sigma roles &responsibilities; Team: stages,characteristics of effective teams, six sigma training plan; Six-sigma metrics: DPMO calculation; Quality cost:cost of poor quality, cost of quality; Roadmap for implementation: Plan, issues, management strategies. (12) DEFINE AND MEASURE PHASE: Customer identification,voice of customer(VOC),VOC data collection, Critical to quality(CTQ) ; Value Stream Mapping; SIPOC ; Project charter; Types of measures;Types of data; Applications of old and new 7 QC tools; Measurement system analysis; Process capability calculations. (12) ANALYSE PHASE: Inferential and Descriptive Statistics; Patterns of Variation; Normality Analysis, multi-varianalysis; Hypothesis testing for Normal Data: Selection and application problems; Introduction to statistical software; Failure mode and effects analysis applications; Analysis of Lean Wastes. (11) IMPROVE AND CONTROL PHASE: Process redesign principles; Generating improvement alternatives; Quality Function Deployment (QFD); Theory of Inventive Problem Solving (TRIZ); Introduction to design of experiments;Lean waste elimination methods,cycle time reduction; Cost/benefit analysis; Process scorecard: Control Plan. Case studiesin manufacturing and service sectors. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Jay Arthur, “Lean Six Sigma – Demystified”, Tata McGraw Hill Companies Inc, 2011. 2. Donald W Benbow andKubiak T M, “Certified Six Sigma Black Belt Handbook”, Pearson Education, 2007. 3. Joseph De Feo, William Barnard, Juran Institute, “Juran Institute’s Six Sigma Breakthrough and Beyond”, The McGraw-Hill Companies, 2004. 4. Michael L George, David T Rowlands, and Bill Kastle, “What is Lean Six Sigma”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2004. 5. Kai Yang and BasemEl,Haik, “Design for Six Sigma”, McGrawHill, New York, 2004. 6. Thomas Pyzdek, “Six Sigma Handbook: Complete Guide for Greenbelts, Blackbelts and Managers at All Levels”, Tata McGraw Hill Companies Inc,2003.

18MN29 LOGISTICS AND DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT 3003 LOGISTICS, DISTRIBUTION AND PLANNING FOR LOGISTICS: Introduction to logistics and distribution- Integrated logistics and the supply chain- Integrated logistics and the supply chain- Customer service and logistics- Channels of distribution – Key issues and challenges for logistics. Planning framework for logistics -Logistics processes -Supply chain segmentation- Logistics network planning - Logistics management and organization - Manufacturing and materials management. (12) WAREHOUSING AND STORAGE: Principles of warehousing Storage and handling systems (palletized and non-palletized) – Order picking and replenishment- Receiving and dispatch - Warehouse design- Warehouse management and information. (11) FREIGHT TRANSPORT AND OPERATIONAL MANAGEMENT: International logistics: modal choice - Maritime transport - Air transport - Rail and intermodal transport- Road freight transport: vehicle selection, vehicle costing and planning and resourcing – International transportation systems in Global perspective. Cost and performance monitoring- Benchmarking- Information and communication technology in supply chain- Outsourcing: services and decision criteria, the selection process – Outsourcing management- Security and safety in distribution - Logistics and the environment. (12) MAINTENANCE LOGISTICS: Human factors – Maintenance staffing: Learning curves – Simulation – Maintenance resource requirements: Optimal size of service facility – Optimal repair effort – Maintenance planning and scheduling – Spare parts planning. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Alan Rushton,PhilCroucher and Peter Baker(Eds.) “The Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management”,Kogan Page, 4thEdition,2010. 2. Jean-Paul Rodrigue, Claude Comtois and Brian Slack, “The geography of transport systems”, New York, 2009. 3. Andrew K.S.Jardineand Albert H.C.Tsang, “Maintenance, Replacement and Reliability”, Taylor and Francis, 2006. 4. BikasBadhury&S.K.Basu, “Tero Technology: Reliability Engineering and Maintenance Management”, Asian Books, 2003. 5. Seichi Nakajima, “Total Productive Maintenance”, Productivity Press, 1993.

18MN30 MARKETING MANAGEMENT 3003 MARKETING: Core concepts of marketing, product concept, selling concept and marketing concept, marketing process, analyzing market opportunities, designing marketing strategies, planning marketing programmes, organizing, implementing and controlling the marketing effort, marketing planning, current marketing situation, opportunity and issue analysis, action programmes, profit and loss

259

59th ACM

09.06.2018

statement. Concepts in demand measurement, estimating current demand, estimating future demand, market segmentation, general approach to segmenting a market, patterns of market segmentation. (12) PRODUCTS AND SERVICES: New product development, effective organizational arrangements, idea generation, idea screening, concept development and testing, product development, market testing, commercialization, consumer adoption process, product life cycle - introductory stage, growth stage, maturity stage and decline stage. Managing product lines, brands and packaging, product mix decisions, product line decisions, brand decisions, packaging and labeling decisions, managing service businesses and ancillary services. (12) MARKETING CHANNELS: Nature of marketing channels, channel design decision, channel management decisions, channel dynamics, channel co-operation, conflict and competition, retailing, wholesaling and distribution systems, nature and importance of retailing, types of retailers, wholesaling and physical distribution. (11) COMMUNICATION AND PROMOTION-MIX STRATEGIES: The communication process, steps in developing effective communication, measuring promotion results, managing the sales force, designing the sales force, principles of personal selling.(10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Philip Kotler, "Marketing Management Analysis, Planning, Implementation and Control", Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2004. 2. Ekzel M J and Walkar B J, "Marketing", McGraw Hill, 1997. 3. Stanton and William. "Fundamentals of Marketing", McGraw Hill, Tokyo, 1995. 4. RamanujMajundar, "Marketing Research", Wiley Eastern Ltd, 1991. 5. Boyd and Kapoor, "Readings in Marketing Management", McGraw Hill Book Co. Ltd., 1989.

18MN31 PRICING AND REVENUE MANAGEMENT 3003 MARKET COMPETITION AND PRICING: Market Structure – Various forms – Equilibrium of a firm – Perfect competition – Monopolistic competition – Oligopolistic competition. Overview of pricing, buyer behavior. Pricing of products under different market structures –Methods of pricing –Factors affecting pricing decision – Differential pricing– Price discrimination – Pricing of Joint products-Government Intervention and pricing. (12) REVENUE MANAGEMENT: Overview of Revenue Management (RM) and its applications, Quantity based RM- Introduction to dynamic programming, capacity allocation and protection levels for a single leg with single and multiple fare classes-overbooking (11) PRICE BASED AND NETWORK BASED REVENUE MANAGEMENT: Price based RM; Basic pricing theory – dynamic pricing, Network based RM; decomposition methods-approximate dynamic programming-stochastic approximate techniques. (11) CHOICE BASED REVENUE MANAGEMENT AND JOINT DEMAND ESTIMATION: Choice based RM; Choice models- assortment optimization – Joint demand estimation- dynamic pricing with demand learning-the multi-armed bandit paradigm-contextual bandits. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. A. RamachandraAryasry and V.V. Ramana Murthy,“Engineering Economics and Financial Accounting”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2013. 2. R. V. Vohra and L. Krishnamurthi, “Principles of Pricing”, Cambridge University Press, 2012. 3. K. T. Talluri and G. J. Van Ryzin, “The Theory and Practice of Revenue Management”, Springer (Kluwer Academic Publishers), 2005. 4. Robert L. Phillips, “Pricing and Revenue Optimization”, Stanford Business Books, 2005.

18MN32 PRODUCT ANALYSIS AND COST OPTIMIZATION 3003 ELEMENTS OF COSTING: Elements of cost – estimation – differences – types of costing – cost classification – depreciation – different methods; Types of cost: Labour cost – direct, indirect - labour variances - material cost - direct, indirect - material cost variances with examples, overhead cost. Elements in over heads, machine hour rate, apportioning methods - variance – examples. (11) ACTIVITY BASED COSTING AND TARGET COSTING: Introduction - traditional approach, comparison- examples– activity based management; introduction to target costing, market driven, product driven and component driven target costing. (10) COST CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS: Cost calculation for machined components, welding, casting and forged components plastic moulded, powder metallurgy parts – illustrations – calculation of sales cost- cost of refection – case studies – use ofcomputers in cost estimation; Cost analysis techniques: Analytical, graphical and incremental methods for single and multi variable situations – learning curves. (12) PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND PROCESS SELECTION: New products, new product strategy - market definition, idea generation - introduction to the design process – quality function deployment - forecasting sales potential - product engineering and markets, monopoly, competitive; Manufacturing planning: Selection of optimum process, standardization. - Process capability analysis - break even analysis - application and area of use - problems - multi - product analysis. (12) Total L: 45

260

59th ACM

09.06.2018

REFERENCES: 1. Glen L Urban and John R Hauser, “Design and Marketing of New Products”, Prentice Hall, New Jersey,2004. 2. Banga T R, Sharma S C, “Mechanical Estimating and Costing (Including Contracting and Process Planning)”, Khanna Publishers, 2015. 3. Kannappan D, Ag Augustine, Paranthaman D, “Mechanical Estimating and Costing”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2003. 4. Yasuhiro Monden, “Cost Management in the New Manufacturing Age”, Productivity Press, 1992. 5. Narang G B S and Kumar V, “Production and Costing”, Khanna Publishers, Fourth edition, 2014.

18MN33 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 3003 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND INITIATION: Definition of Project, why project management, Project Life Cycle, Selecting Projects Strategically – Project Management maturity, Project selection and criteria of choice, the nature of project selection models, types of project selection models, analysis under uncertainty-the management of risk, project portfolio process, project proposals. Role of project managers – project management and project manager, special demands on the project manager, problems of cultural differences, impact of institutional environments, multicultural communication and managerial behavior. Working and partnering with others – Nature of negotiation, partnering, chartering and scope change, conflict and the project life cycle, requirements and principles of negotiation. Role of Projects in organization – projects as part of functional organization, pure project organization, the matrix organization, mixed organizational systems, choosing an organizational form, the project team. (11) PROJECT PLANNING AND CONTROL: Initial project coordination and the project plan, systems integration, the action plan. Project costs and Budgets – estimating project budgets, expert opinion, analogy, parametric estimate; cost engineering – example, contingency amount, elements of budgets and estimates improving the process of cost estimation. The planning, monitoring and controlling cycle, information needs and reporting, earned value analysis, computerized PMIS. Controlling Project execution – fundamental purpose of control, types of control processes, design of control system, control of change and scope creep. (10) TOOLS AND RESOURCE MANAGEMENT: Case studies in Network diagram, PERT/CPM and crashing a project. WBS, responsibility matrix, events and milestones, Gantt charts. Allocating resources on the project – Case resource loading, resource leveling, constrained resource scheduling, multi-project scheduling and resource allocation. INTER FUNCTIONAL KNOWLEDGE IN PROJECT MANAGEMENT: Active listening Applicable laws and regulations, Brainstorming techniques, Communication - channels, tools, techniques, and methods, Data gathering - techniques, Diversity and cultural sensitivity, Expert judgment technique, Information - management tools, techniques, and methods, Leadership - tools, techniques, and skills, Organizational and operational awareness, Presentation - tools and techniques, Quality assurance and control techniques, Situational awareness, Stakeholder management techniques, Team-building techniques, Virtual/remote team management. (12) RISK AND EVALUATION: Risk analysis – objectives of risk analysis, identify the risk, determine the most important risk, identify control measures. Performing risk analysis – objectives and desired result, design of risk analysis, activities and time frame for implementing risk analysis. Risk management – choosing, implementing and evaluating control measures, Performing risk management, Implementing Risk management. Project evaluation – goals of the system, project audit, construction and use of audit report, project audit life cycle, essentials of audit/evaluation, measurement. Completing the project – varieties of project termination, when to terminate a project, termination process, final report. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Jack R Meredith, Samuel J Mantel, “Project management: A Managerial Approach”, John Wiley & Sons Inc., New Delhi, 2010. 2. D Van Well-Stam, FLindenaar, S Van Kinderen, B Van Den Bunt, “Project Risk Management: An Essential Tool for Managing and Controlling Projects”, Kogan page Ltd, Great Britain, 2004. 3. John M Nicholas, “Project Management for Business and Technology”, Prentice Hall India Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2002. 4. Vasant Desai, “Project Management”, Himalaya Publishing House, 2001. 5. Dennis Lock, “The Essentials of Project Management”, Gower Publishing Ltd., 1997.

18MN34 SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 3003 SAFETY SYSTEMS: Definitions, safety systems: basic concepts, definition of accidents, analysis of causes of accident. Hazard analysis, General hazard analysis: electrical, physical and chemical hazard, fault tree analysis. Managing for safety: Safety inspection, procedure, periodicity, checklist, report forms. Planning for safety and productivity, safety sampling, safety audit, Work permit and lock out system, elimination of hazard and accident, safety education, communication, safety performance analysis. Personal protective equipment testing, usage. (12) SAFETY IN MATERIAL HANDLING: Selection of material handling equipment, equipment used, ropes, chains, slings, hooks, clamps, procedure for testing and checking as per standard. Design conservation, conveyor systems, belt, roller chain and elevator and lifts, industrial hoists, mobile crane, forklift, operation maintenance and checking procedure. (11) FIRE PREVENTION SYSTEM: Automated fire fighting system: water sprinkler, fire hydrant, alarm and detection system. Suppression system, CO2 system, foam system, DCP system, halon system, portable fire extinguisher. Safety in process:Design for safety, safety in use of power press. Safety in foundry, forging, welding, hot working and cold working, electroplating and boiler operation. (10) SAFETY LEGISLATION: Provisions in factory act for safety, explosive act, workmen compensation act, compensation calculation. Boiler act and pollution control act, electrical safety, electricity act and rules.

261

59th ACM

09.06.2018

Environment impact assessment: (EIA): Introduction, legal provisions, methods of EIA – checklist studies, ISO14001:2004 EMS standards.

analysis of alternatives – case (12) Total L: 45

REFERENCES: 1. Ken whitelaw,”ISO 14001:2004” Standards, Routledge; 2 edition, 2004. 2. Heinrich H W, “Industrial Accident Prevention”, National Safety Council, McGraw Hill Inc, Chicago, 1998. 3. National Safety Council “Personal Protective Equipment”, Bombay, 1998. 4. John Ridley, “Safety at Work”, Butter Work Publisher, Oxford, 1997. 5. National Safety Council “Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations”, Chicago, 1995. 6. Derek James, “Fire Prevention Handbook”, Buttes Worths and Co., Oxford, 1991.

18MN35 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING 3003 SINGLE AND PARALLEL MACHINE SCHEDULING: Scheduling as a function and theory, scheduling problem, sequencing objective, constraints, difference between sequencing and scheduling; Single machine models -Characteristics, terminology, theorems, SPT and EDD sequences, minimizing in - process inventory, mean flow time, weighted mean flow time, number of tardy jobs and mean tardiness, Hodgson's algorithm, Wilkerson -Irwin algorithm, applications of dynamic programming and branch and bound techniques, minimizing total cost, non-simultaneous arrivals, dependent jobs, sequence dependent set up time, use of assignment model, heuristic solutions; Parallel Machine Models -Minimizing make span, independent jobs- McNaughton's algorithm, heuristic procedures, minimizing weighted mean flow time, jobs- Hu's algorithm, Muntz-Coffman algorithm. (11) FLOW SHOP AND JOB SHOP SCHEDULING: Flow shop-Permutation schedule, Johnson's problem, branch and bound algorithms, dominance properties for make span problems, heuristic approaches, flow shops without intermediate queues, other performance measures; Job shop -Types of schedules, schedule generation - branch and bound approach, heuristic procedures, integer programming approach. (11) RESOURCE CONSTRAINED PROJECT SCHEDULING AND SIMULATION: Extending job shop model - extending project model, integer programming approach - heuristic methods; Project Scheduling -Logical constraints, network constructions, temporal analysis, probabilistic network analysis, time/cost trade-off, resource allocation; Simulation -Elements of simulation models, reducing mean flow time, meeting due dates, case studies. (12) RESOURCE SCHEDULING: Interval scheduling, reservations and timetabling -Reservation without slack, reservation with slack,timetabling with workforce, operator constraints - Case study; Planning, scheduling and timetabling in transportation -Tanker andaircraft scheduling, train scheduling; workforce scheduling -Day-off scheduling,shift scheduling- cyclic staffing problem,operator scheduling in a callcenter. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Michael L Pinedo, “Planning and Scheduling In Manufacturing and Services”, Springer Science and Business Media,2005. 2. French S, “Sequencing and Scheduling”, John Wiley and Sons Inc, 1982. 3. Baker K, “Introduction to Sequencing and Scheduling”, John Wiley and Sons, 1974. 4. Convay R W, Maxwell W L and Miller L N, “Theory of Scheduling”, Addison-Wesley, Mass., 1967.

18MN36 SERVICE AND OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 3003 SERVICES AND CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIPS: Introduction, types of services, types of service processes, the service concept – defined, service concept as a strategic tool, focused and unfocused service operations. Customers, customer segmentation, customer retention, managing customer and business relationships. Customer expectation and satisfaction – defining expectations, finding expectation and assessing satisfaction, managing perceptions. (12) SUPPLIER RELATIONSHIPS AND SERVICE DELIVERY: Managing supply relationships – types of supply relationships, managing service supply chains, managing through intermediaries, supply partnerships, service level agreements. Service processes, understanding the nature of service processes, Engineering service processes, Controlling service process, repositioning service process. Service people – understanding the pressure on service providers, managing and motivating service providers, managing customers. (10) SERVICE MANAGEMENT AND PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT: Resource utilization – capacity management, operations planning and control, managing bottlenecks and queues, managing the coping zone, improving resource utilization. Networks, performance and information – how it is transforming service, managing physical and virtual networks, managing technology and information flows, integrating networks, technology and information. Purpose of performance measurement, balance of measures, interlinking, targets and rewards, benchmarking. Linking operations decisions to business performance – relationship, service performance network, key stages in developing a network, world-class service. Driving operational improvement – approaches to operational improvement, service recovery, service guarantees. (12) MANAGING STRATEGIC CHANGE: Service strategy – service as competitive advantage, turning performance objectives into operational priorities, strategy formulation and development, sustaining a strategy. Service culture – understanding organizational culture, types of culture, national cultures, management of change and service delivery. Operational Complexity – operational sequence of complexity. (11) Total L: 45

262

59th ACM

09.06.2018

REFERENCES: 1. Bill Hobins and Sadie Shinkins, “Managing Service Operations”, Sage Publications India Ltd., New Delhi, 2006. 2. Robert Johnson and Graham Clark, “Service Operations Management: Improving Service Delivery”, Pearson Education Ltd., New Delhi,2005. 3. Nevan Wright J and Peter Race, “The Management of Service Operations”, Thomson Learning, 2005. 4. William J Glynn and James G Barnes, “Understanding Service management: Integrating marketing, Operational Behaviour”, 1995.

18MN37TOTAL PRODUCTIVE MAINTENANCE 3003 CONCEPTS OF TOTAL PRODUCTIVE MAINTENANCE (TPM): Six basic principles, TPM definition, development stages of TPM, principle of learning –improving machine performance zero defects and TPM. Overall Equipment Effectiveness: Power of OEE, six major losses, OEE metrics, OEE calculation for a single machine, plant OEE calculations, process average method, weighted process average method, total equipment effectiveness equipment performance (TEEP), financial aspects of OEE. (12) RESTORING EQUIPMENT TO ‘NEW’ CONDITION: Specific goals for equipment, operators, technicians, detecting minor machine defects, setting comp. standards, typical examples, machine tags, and one point lessons –typical examples. Autonomous Maintenance: Seven levels - initial cleaning, preventive cleaning machines, cleaning and lubrication standard, general inspection, autonomous inspection, process disciple, independent autonomous maintenance. (12) MACHINE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PLAN: Elements of a complete preventive maintenance, PM checklist, PM schedules, inspection specification, replacement parts numbers, PM procedure, part logs, quality checks, PM Master-plan. (10) TPM IMPLEMENTATION: Introduction of TPM to the organization, creation of organization structure, Basic TPM policies and aids, master plan, Kick start. TPM implementation stages: Small group activities, implementing AM, establishing planned maintenance, training and education, developing equipment management program, perfecting TPM implementation – raising TPM levels, case studies. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Andrew K.S.Jardineand Albert H.C.Tsang, “Maintenance, Replacement and Reliability”, Taylor and Francis, 2006. 2. BikasBadhury&S.K.Basu, “Tero Technology: Reliability Engineering and Maintenance Management”, Asian Books, 2003. 3. Hansen R C, “Overall Equipment Effectiveness: A Powerful Production Maintenance Tool”, Industrial Press, USA, 2001. 4. Robinson C J and Ginder A P, “Implementing TPM: The North American Experience”, Productivity Press, USA, 1995. 5. Seichi Nakajima, “Total Productive Maintenance”, Productivity Press, 1993.

18MN38 VALUE ENGINEERING 3003 CONCEPTS OF VALUE ENGINEERING (VE): Introduction – status of VE in India and origin country – impact of VE application – types of values – types of function – function identification on product – function matrix – function analysis – elements of costs – calculation of costs – cost allocation to function – evaluation of worth in VE methodology. Determining the functional cost and worth of piston and piston rings of IC Engine. (11) TECHNIQUES OF VE: General techniques: brain storming – Godson feasibility ranking – morphological analysis – ABC analysis – probability approach – make or buy. Function – cost worth analysis – function analysis – system techniques – function analysis matrix – customer oriented FAST diagram – fire alarm – long range plan – evaluation methods – matrix in evaluation – Conduct of Brain storming session for increasing the life of “V” belt in a critical machine. (11) VALUE ENGINEERING IN JOB PLAN: Orientation phase – information phase – functional analysis – creative phase – evaluation phase – recommendation phase – implementation phase and audit phase. Development of software modules for each phase of VEJP. (11) TEAM APPROACH IN VE: Team structure – team building – selection of team remembers – conduct of VE project study – task flow diagram – pre study phase – workshop phase, host study phase. VE in service: Enhancing value through improvement in water treatment plant – electric motor – two wheeler – restaurant and hospital. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Mukhophadhyaya A K, “Value Engineering”, Sage Publications Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2003. 2. Richard J Park, “Value Engineering – A Plan for Inventions”, St.Lucie Press, London, 1999. 3. Larry W Zimmesman P E, “VE –A Practical Approach for Owners Designers and Contractors”, CBS Publishers, Delhi, 1992. 4. Arthur E Mudge, “Value Engineering”, McGraw Hill Book Company, 1971.

18MN39 WASTE DISPOSAL MANAGEMENT AND OCCUPATIONAL HAZARDS 3003 SOURCES OF WASTE: Definitions of waste, waste arising, municipal solid waste(MSW), hazardous waste, sewage sludge, other wastes, waste containers, collection systems and transport. Waste recycling, examples of waste recycling, economic considerations, life cycle analysis of materials recycling. (10)

263

59th ACM

09.06.2018

SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT: Sources of solid waste, effects of solid waste, types of solid waste, quantities and characteristics, objective of solid waste management, functional activities of solid waste disposal, hazardous waste, biomedical waste, refuserecycling-reduction-and recovery of solid wastes, theory of biogas generation, various solid conversion and utilization, red mud. (11) ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION AND RELATED ISSUES: Environmental impact assessment, environmental management planning(EMP), some examples of impact assessments conducted in India, information for assessing EIA of a proposed project, notification on environment impact assessment, environmental protection acts, man and environmental pollution, use of pesticides and their impacts on environment, pollution control methods, green technology, life cycle assessment, ISO14000 series environmental management systems, environmental audit, conservation of natural resources. (12) OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND OCCUPATIONAL PHYSIOLOGY: Concept and spectrum of health - functional units and activities of occupational health services, pre employment and post-employment medical examinations - occupational related diseases, levels of prevention of diseases- occupational work capacity – aerobic and anaerobic work – evaluation of physiological requirements of jobs – parameters of measurements – categorization of job heaviness – work organization – stress – strain – fatigue – shift work – personal hygiene. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Paul T. Williams “Waste Treatment and Disposal”, second edition, Wiley publications,2012. 2. A.K. Chatterjee “Water supply, waste disposal and environmental engineering” Eighth edition, Khanna publications, 2010. 3. S.P.Mahajan, “Pollution control in process industries”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company,New Delhi, 1993. 4. Rao, CS, “Environmental pollution engineering:, Wiley Eastern Limited, New Delhi, 1992. 5. The Environment Act (Protection) 1986, Commercial Law Publishers (India) Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi. 6. Encyclopedia of “Occupational Health and Safety”, Vol.I and II, International LabourOffice, Geneva, 1985.

18MN40 HUMAN FACTORS ENGINEERING 3003 INFORMATION INPUT: Human Factors: Definition, focus and objectives; Man-Machine Systems: characteristics and components; Information: Types of information, displaying information, display modality selection, compatibility, attention, display of static and dynamic information-visual, auditory and tactual. (11) HUMAN OUTPUT AND CONTROL: Muscle and Work Physiology, measures of physiological strain, physical workload, manual materials handling; Biomechanics of human motion, compatibility- Spatial, movement and modality; Controls: Functions, factors in control design, design of hand and foot-operated controls, principles of hand tool and device design. (11) ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: Illumination: Visibility, effects of lighting on performance, distribution of light, glare; Noise: Sound level, psychophysical indices, equivalent sound level, physiological effects of noise, effects of noise on performance, noise exposure limits; Climate: Heat exchange process, factors influencing heat exchange, heat and cold stress. (11) WORKPLACE DESIGN: Anthropometry: Static and dynamic dimensions, use of anthropometric data; Work spaces, design of work surfaces; Seating: principles of seat design; Arrangements of components within a physical space-Principles, methodologies; General location of controls and displays within workspace. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Bridger R S, “Introduction to Ergonomics”, Taylor and Francis, 2008. 2. Martin Helandar, “A Guide to Human Factors and Ergonomics”, Taylor and Francis, 2006. 3. Nemeth CP, “Human Factors Methods for Design”, Taylor and Francis, 2004. 4. Chandler Allen Phillips, “Human Factors Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons, 2000. 5. Martin Helandar, “A Guide to Ergonomics of Manufacturing”, Taylor and Francis, 1995. 6. Mark S Sanders, “Human Factors in Engineering and Design”, McGraw-Hill, 1993.

AUDIT COURSES 18MN81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP81

18MN82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP82

264

59th ACM

09.06.2018

13. Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment ME COMPUTER INTEGRATED MANUFACTURING (2018 REGULATIONS) * (Minimum no. of credits to be earned: 74 ) Course Course Title Code I SEMESTER Statistical Quality Control and Design of 18MC01 Experiments 18MC02 Smart Manufacturing 18MC03 Design for Manufacture and Assembly 18MC04 Integrated Product Development 18MC05 Industrial Automation and Control 18MC51 Sensor Interface and Robotics Laboratory 18MC81 English for Research Paper Writing Total 24 Hrs II SEMESTER 18MC06 Business Operations Integration 18MC07 Production Tooling and Cost Estimation 18MC08 Industrial Robotics 18MC09 Computer Controlled Machine Tools 18MC__ Professional Elective-1 18MC__ Professional Elective-2 18MC52 CAD/CAM/CAE Laboratory 18MC61 Industry Visit and Technical Seminar 18MC82 Research Methodology and IPR Total 30 Hrs III SEMESTER 18MC__ Professional Elective- 3 18MC__ Professional Elective- 4 18MC__ Professional Elective-5 18MC__ Professional Elective-6 18MC53 Manufacturing Simulation and IoT laboratory 18MC71 Project Work Total 22 Hrs IV SEMESTER Project Work II 18MC72 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE COURSES 18MC21 Data Structures and Computer Programming 18MC22 Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning 18MC23 Virtual Manufacturing 18MC24 Automatic Control Systems 18MC25 Industrial Internet of Things 18MC26 Additive Manufacturing 18MC27 Advanced Manufacturing Process 18MC28 Metrology and Automated Inspection 18MC29 Sheet Metal Cutting and Bending Technologies Modeling and Analysis of Advanced 18MC30 Manufacturing Systems 18MC31 Simulation Modeling and Analysis 18MC32 Operations Management 18MC33 Lean Six Sigma in Manufacturing and Service 18MC34 Engineering Economic Analysis 18MC35 Geometric Modeling 18MC36 Safety and Environment Management System 18MC37 Supply Chain Management

Hours/Week Credits Lecture Tutorial Practical

Maximum Marks CA FE Total

CAT

2

2

0

3

50

50

100

PC

3 3 3 3 0 0 14

0 2 0 2 0 0 6

0 0 0 0 4 ** 4

3 4 3 4 2 Grade 19

50 50 50 50 50 0 300

50 50 50 50 50 0 300

100 100 100 100 100 0 600

PC PC PC PC PC MC

3 3 3 3 3 3 0 0 0 18

2 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 4

0 0 0 0 0 0 4 4 ** 8

4 3 3 4 3 3 2 2 Grade 24

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 0 400

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 0 400

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 0 800

PC PC PC PC PE PE PC EEC MC

3 3 3 3 0 0 12

0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 4 6 10

3 3 3 3 2 3 17

50 50 50 50 50 50 300

50 50 50 50 50 50 300

100 100 100 100 100 100 600

PE PE PE PE PC EEC

0

0

28

14

50

50

100

EEC

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PE

3 3 3 3 3 3 3

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 3 3 3 3 3 3

50 50 50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE PE PE PE

* Indicated is the minimum number of credits to be earned by a student. ** - 60 hrs in I semester and 90 hrs in II semester; Grade: Completed / Not Completed CAT – Category; PC – Professional Core; PE - Professional Elective EEC – Employability Enhancement Course; MCMandatory Course 265

59th ACM

09.06.2018 I SEMESTER 18MC01 STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL AND DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS 2203

STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL: Methods and philosophy of statistical process control – chance and assignable causes of quality variation, statistical basis of control charts - control charts for variables - 𝑋, R, and s charts - control charts for attributes – p, np, c and u charts. (8+7) ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING: Lot-by-Lot acceptance sampling for attributes – single sampling plans for attributes, double, multiple and sequential sampling plans, acceptance sampling by variables - chain sampling, continuous sampling, skip-lot sampling plans. (8+7) DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS: Fundamentals of experimental design, guidelines for designing experiments, analysis of variance, experiments with one factor, completely randomized design, randomized block design, factorial experiments, Latin square design. (8+7) RESPONSE SURFACE METHODOLOGY: Empirical models – linear regression models, estimation of parameters in linear regression models, confidence interval and hypothesis testing in multiple regression, 2-level factorial design – 23 design, general 2k design, single replication of 2k design, design for fitting second order models – class of central composite design. (8+7) Total L:32 + T:28 = 60 REFERENCES: 1. Amitava Mitra, Fundamentals of Quality Control and Improvement, John Wiley and Sons, New Jersey, 2016. 2. Eugene L Grant, Richard S Leavenworth, Statistical Quality Control, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, New Delhi, 2016. 3. Raymond H. Myers, Douglas C. Montgomery, Christine M. Anderson Cook, Response Surface Methodology: process and product optimization using experimental designs, John Wiley and Sons, 2016. 4. Ronald E Walpole, Raymond H Myers, Sharon L Myers and Keying Ye, Probability and Statistics for Engineers and Scientists, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2016. 5. Douglas C Montgomery, Introduction to Statistical Quality Control, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2009.

18MC02 SMART MANUFACTURING 3003 CIM SYSTEMS: Architecture of CIM, Industry 4.0- Scope; FMS: Equipment, Tool management system, system layouts, Reconfigurable machines and systems. (10) COMPUTER AIDED PROCESS PLANNING AND MATERIAL HANDLING SYSTEMS: Approaches to CAPP, variant approach and generative approach, Feature recognition techniques; AI and Expert systems, SAP-R3/PP module, Material handling systems: AGV; Storage systems: ASRS; Automatic data collection: Bar code technology, Radio frequency identification. (12) DATABASE AND INFORMATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS: Telecommunications, the Internet, and Wireless Technology, Components and Devices – Hub, switches, TCP/IP protocol structure, internet protocol, transmission protocol, applications; Case studies: Networking of machine tools, Securing Information Systems, shop floor communications. (11) SMART MANUFACTURING AND CONNECTED ENTERPRISE: ISA 95, Functional and physical sub-divisions, Global connected supply chain, mass customization, customer co-creation. Case studies of information systems for key manufacturing functions: Life cycle, supply chain, enterprise, quality, maintenance, materials, energy and sustainability information systems. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Radhakrishnan P and Subramanyan S, “CAD/CAM/CIM”, New Age International Ltd., 2016. 2. T. O. Boucher and A. Yalçin, Design of Industrial Information Systems, 1st edition, Elsevier, 2006. 3. R. Zurawski, Integration Technologies for Industrial Automated Systems, 1st edition, CRC Press, 2006. 4. F. Cecelja, Manufacturing Information and Data Systems, 1st edition, Butterworth Heinemann, 2002.

18MC03 DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURE AND ASSEMBLY vide Engineering Design 18MD09

18MC04 INTEGRATED PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 3003 PRODUCT LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT: Paradigm, system architecture, scope, characteristics, drivers, stages - introductory stage, growth stage, maturity stage and decline stage, S- Curve; Bathtub curve; Product Data Management (PDM): Product data, structure, interaction in PLM. (11)

266

59th ACM

09.06.2018

CONCEPTUALIZATION AND PROTOTYPING: Customer needs, problem statement, bench marking and establishing engineering specifications; Idea generation: brainstorming, mind-map; Concept generation: systematic exploration, C-sketch/6-3-5 method, morphological analysis; Prototyping: methods, types, case studies. (11) PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT APPROACHES AND TOOLS: Challenges and constraints in product development; PESTEL analysis; SWOT analysis; Requirement Engineering; Requirement pyramid; Types of requirements; Quality function deployment (QFD);Product development methodologies; Theory of inventive problem solving (TRIZ);Establishing product function: FAST method, subtract and operate procedure; Failure Mode and Effects Analysis (FMEA): PFMEA, poka-yoke. . (12) SUSTENANCE ENGINEERING AND IPR: Maintenance: Activities, objectives, Classification; Obsolescence Management: Objectives, mitigation measures, design for obsolescence. : Types of IPR, Patentability criteria, Steps in patenting, Formulating claims, Pursue application, Issues and challenges. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Karl T Ulrich and Stephen D Eppinger, "Product Design and Development", Tata McGraw Hill, Fifth Edition, New Delhi, 2017. 2. Chitale A K and Gupta R C, “Product Design and Manufacturing”, Prentice Hall of India, 2014. 3. Kevin Otto and Kristin Wood, “Product Design”, Pearson Education, 2007. 4. Michael Grieves, “Product Life Cycle Management”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006. 5. Nigel Cross, “Engineering Design Methods: Strategies for Product Design”, John Wiley and Sons, 2000.

18MC05 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION AND CONTROL 3204 SENSORY SYSTEMS: Industrial automation and control: Architecture, elements of mechatronics system, role of mechatronics in automation; Sensors and measurement systems in automation: Static and dynamic characteristics of sensors, transducers for measurement - displacement, strain, position, velocity, noise, flow, pressure, temperature, humidity, vibration, vision sensors; Selection of sensors for different applications. (12+8) ACTUATORS, CONTROL VALVES AND FLUIDIC SYSTEM DESIGN: Actuators: Pneumatic, hydraulic, electrical, magnetostrictive and memory-metal actuators; Servo and stepper motors: Control valves: direction, pressure and flow proportional valves, control of servo valves, fluidic muscles, actuators, shape memory alloys; Fluidic system design: Fluid power circuits – cascade, KV-map and step counter method; Fringe condition modules; Sizing of components in pneumatic and hydraulic systems; Analysis of hydraulic circuits. (11+8) CONTROL SYSTEMS: Programmable Logic Controller (PLC):PLC ladder logic diagram, programming of PLC; Microcontrollers and micro processors, (11+7) REAL TIME INTERFACING: Data acquisition systems: Industry Interfacing devices, virtual instrumentation, interfacing of various sensors and actuators with PC; Condition monitoring; Adaptive control; Supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) systems; Human Machine Interface (HMI) systems;, Application case studies. (11+7) Total L: 45 + T: 30 =75 REFERENCES: 1. Sanjay Gupta and Joseoh John, “Virtual Instrumentation using Lab VIEW”, Tata McGraw Hill Publications Co. Ltd., 2017. 2. Mikell P Groover, “Automation, Production Systems and Computer-Integrated Manufacturing”, Pearson, 2016. 3. W Bolton, “Mechatronics - Electronic Control Systems in Mechanical and Electrical Engineering”, Pearson India., 2010. 4. DevdasShetty and Richard A Kolk, “Mechatronics System Design”, PWS Publishing Company, 2010. 5. Anthony Esposito, “Fluid Power with Application”, Pearson Education India, 2013.

18MC51 SENSOR INTERFACE AND ROBOTICS LABORATORY 0042 In this course, students will be provided with an orientation on the following topics for a duration of 12-16 hours. Each student is expected to perform a case study by formulating and completing an activity of interest derived from the orientation under the guidance of faculty. The details expected in the final report to be submitted at the end of the semester are: Problem definition, literature review, objectives, methodology, analysis and interpretation of results and conclusions. TOPICS FOR ORIENTATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Calibration of sensors using Virtual Instrumentation software Sensor interface using Virtual Instrumentation software Control of actuators using Virtual Instrumentation software Programming of a typical pick and place robot System control using PI and PID controllers

CASE STUDY Interface and integration of sensors/ actuators for development of mechatronic systems 267

59th ACM

09.06.2018 Total P: 60

REFERENCES: 1. Laboratory Manual prepared by Department of Mechanical Engineering, PSG college of Technology. 2. Frank Lamb, “Industrial Automation Hands On”, McGraw Hill Book Company,2013 3. Terry L M Bartelt, “Industrial Automated Systems: Instrumentation and Motion Control”, Cengage Learning, New Delhi, 2011

II SEMESTER 18MC06 BUSINESS OPERATIONS INTEGRATION 3204 BUSINESS PROCESS: Processes, business functions, functional areas of operation, business process concepts, process view; Business operations, key terms – Engineering Change Note (ECN); Information flow: marketing and sales, supply chain management, accounting and finance, human resources; Functional area information system; Business Process Reengineering (BPR): background, elements, steps in BPR, challenges and best practices, business impact – case studies. (11+4) ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING (ERP): Evolution of ERP, business benefits of ERP; ERP system: design process, architecture, features; Selecting an ERP system; ERP implementation factors; Hidden cost: cost benefit analysis, issues in customizing ERP systems; Training: Need, methods. (10+4) ERPSOFTWARES AND CASESTUDIES: Analysis of ERP packages, survey of Indian ERP packages - coverage, performance and cost; Extended ERP (ERP II)/advanced planning systems, business intelligent systems; IoT applications in ERP – case studies. (12+4) ERP MODULES: Detailed analysis of ERP modules: Sales order processing, purchasing, production planning, manufacturing, financial accounting, human resource, simulation using typical ERP package; ERP case studies: Manufacturing and education domain. (12+18) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. David L Olson, “Managerial Issues of Enterprise Resource Planning Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 2017. 2. Mary Summer, “Enterprise Resource Planning”, Pearson Education Limited, 2014 3. Alexis Leon, “ERP Demystified”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, 2014. 4. Karl E. Kurbel, “Enterprise Resource Planning and Supply Chain Management”, Springer, 2013 5. Ellen F.Monk and Bret J.Wagner, “Concepts in Enterprise Resource Planning”, Course Technology, Cengage Learning, 2012.

18MC07 PRODUCTION TOOLING AND COST ESTIMATION 3003 TOOLING SELECTION: Interpretation of blue prints: Dimensions, geometrical features, material, surface finish, tolerances; Process selection, Selection of machines: machine capability- parameters to be considered; Tooling selection: Factors, specifications, classification, tools – cutting tools, finishing tools, forming tools, tool holders; Development of process plan, instrumentation for inspection, Case studies for turning centers, milling centers, injection molding, Electrical Discharge Machining, sheet metal operation, etc. (12) JIGS AND FIXTURES: Degrees of freedom, principles of location and clamping, elements of jigs and fixtures, classification of jigs and fixtures, selection of jigs and fixtures, modular fixtures for assembly and inspection; Case studies for selecting fixtures for machining, joining, assembly, inspection and testing processes. (10) COSTING: Elements of cost: R&D cost, material cost, labor cost, capital cost – space, power, machine, tools, dies, fixtures, packing and shipping, overhead cost, sales cost, after-sale cost; Types of costing: Batch costing, contract costing, departmental costing and process costing; Cost classification: Direct, indirect - capital depreciation, factory overheads, administrative overheads, sales overheads, distribution overheads; Case studies to identify the cost elements for machining, joining, assembly, inspection and testing processes. (10 ) COST CALCULATION: Calculation of machine hour rate- calculation of machining time, calculation of labor hour rate, Calculation of material cost- raw material, material handling cost, procurement cost; Calculation of tooling cost: tool cost – procurement and handling costs, tool life, Jigs and Fixtures cost; Calculation of cost for assembly, inspection and testing, calculation of overhead cost- material, labor, administrative and distribution, software tools for cost estimation, Case studies for calculation of cost per piece, sub-assembly and total product. (13) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Mikell. P .Groover, “Fundamentals of Modern Manufacturing – Materials Processes and Systems”, John Wiley & Sons, 6th Edition, 2016 2. SC Sharma & TR Banga, “Mechanical Estimating and Costing – including contracting”, Khanna Publishers Pvt. Ltd., 2015 3. SME, "Manufacturing Engineers Hand Book", 1998. 268

59th ACM 4. 5. 6.

09.06.2018

Riggs, J.L ., Dedworth, Bedworth, D.B, Randhawa, S.U, “Engineering Economics”, McGraw Hill International Edition, 1996 Narang CBS and Kumar V, “Production and Costing”, Khanna Publishers, 2005 Peter Scallan, “Process Planning: The Design/Manufacture Interface”, Butterworth Heinemann, 2003

18MC08 INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS 3003 ROBOTICS, DRIVES AND CONTROLLERS: Robotics: Evolution, laws of robotics, anatomy of robot, specification of robots, classification of robots, robot drives; Selection of drive systems: electrical, hydraulic and pneumatic drives - characteristics of actuating systems; Robot controllers: motion control of robots: PID, PI; Types of robot controls. (12) SENSORS FOR ROBOTS: Characteristics and selection of sensor: Position sensors, velocity sensors, acceleration sensors, force and pressure sensors, torque sensors, micro switches, light and infrared sensors, touch and tactile sensors, proximity and range sensors, sniff sensors, voice recognition devices, voice synthesizers. (10) TRANSFORMATIONS, KINEMATICS AND ROBOT PROGRAMMING: Co-ordinate reference frames, homogeneous transformations, the forward and inverse kinematics, motion generation, manipulator dynamics, D.H Parameters, D.H matrices; Robot Programming: Programming methods. (13) ROBOT CELL LAYOUT AND INSTALLATION: Robot cell layout, Classification, considerations in work cell design, safety monitoring; Robot installation: Feasibility of the robotization plan, evaluation strategies, planning for robot installation; Case studies. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Mikell P Groover, Mitchell Weiss, Oger N Nagel and Nicholasg Odrey, ”Industrial Robotics - SIE: Technology - Programming and Applications”, Tata McGraw Hill education Pvt.ltd.”, 2017 2. Deb SR and Sankha deb, “Robotics Technology And Flexible Automation”, TataMc Graw Hill education Pvt. Ltd., 2012. 3. Saeed B Niku, “Introduction To Robotics Analysis, Systems, Applications” , Pearson education (Singapore) Pvt. Ltd.2nd Edition, 2011 4. Richard DKlafter, Thomas AChmielewski and Michael Negin, "Robotic Engineering - An Integrated Approach", Eastern economy edition, Prentice hall Pvt. Ltd., 2009

18MC09 COMPUTER CONTROLLED MACHINE TOOLS 3204 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES OF CNC MACHINE TOOLS: Role of CNC machine tools in CAM; Elements of CNC system: characteristics, selection criteria; Machining centers: features, Automatic Tool Changers (ATC), tool magazines, Automatic Pallet Changers (APC), attachments. (12) CNC PART PROGRAMMING: Axes definition, datum, methods of programming, G and M functions, motion types, tool length compensation, cutter radius compensation, tool wear compensation, canned cycles, sub-programming, mirroring, scaling; Part program examples: turning, milling, drilling; Automatically Programmed Tool (APT). (11+20) CNC CONTROL SYSTEMS: Structure of CNC system, open loop and closed loop systems, Adaptive control systems: adaptive control with constraints, adaptive control with optimization; microprocessor based CNC systems, Interpolators: linear interpolation, circular interpolation; DDA algorithm and Bresenham algorithm, calculation of Basic Length Unit (BLU), pulses, pulse frequency. (11+5) CALIBRATION AND CONDITION MONITORING OF CNC MACHINE TOOLS: Precision and accuracy, machine specifications, Calibration, ISO standards, geometric accuracy of machines, repeatability of positioning CNC machine tools, determination of thermal effects, circular test for CNC machine tools, determination of noise emission, axes of rotation, determination of vibration levels; Measurement of uncertainty, tool wear monitoring methods ,Compensation: backlash, pitch error, thermal error. (11+5) Total L:45 + T:30 =75 REFERENCES: 1. YoramKoren, “Computer Control of Manufacturing Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill Book Co., 2017. 2. Peter Smid, "CNC Programming Handbook”, Industrial Press, 3rd Edition, Inc, 2015 3. ISO standards ISO-230 series, 2015 4. Radhakrishnan P, “Computer Numerical Control (CNC) Machines”, New Central Book Agency, 2013. 5. Alan Overby,“CNC Machining Handbook: Building, Programming, and Implementation”, McGraw-Hill Education TAB, 2010

18MC52 CAD/CAM/CAE LABORATORY 0042 In this course, students will be provided with an orientation on the following topics for a duration of 12-16 hours. Each student is expected to perform a case study by formulating and completing an activity of interest derived from the orientation under the guidance of faculty. The details expected in the final report to be submitted at the end of the semester are: Problem definition, literature review, objectives, methodology, analysis and interpretation of results and conclusions. 269

59th ACM

09.06.2018

TOPICS FOR ORIENTATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Part modeling and preparation of production drawing Industrial robotics: Path planning and simulation CNC part programming and tool path analysis Static and dynamic analysis of industrial components using FEA software Transient thermal analysis of industrial components/processes using FEA software Total P: 60

REFERENCES: 1. CAD/CAM/CAE Laboratory Manual, Department of Mechanical Engineering, PSG college of Technology, 2018. 2. NitinS.Gokhale and‎‎Sanjay S.Deshpande,“Practical Finite Element Analysis”, Finite To Infinite,2008

18MC61 INDUSTRY VISIT AND TECHNICAL SEMINAR 0042 This course, likened to a mini-intern, requires each student to identify a manufacturing or service industry and pursue the solution of an industrial problem consistent with the credits allotted for the course. Students are expected to study the problem, survey pertinent literature, gather relevant data and carry out engineering and scientific analysis followed by a detailed presentation both oral and written. The report submitted for final assessment should be in line with that required for Project Work. Total P: 60

SEMESTER III 18MC53 MANUFACTURING SIMULATION AND IoT LABORATORY 0042 In this course, students will be provided with an orientation on the following topics for a duration of 12-16 hours. Each student is expected to perform a case study by formulating and completing an activity of interest derived from the orientation under the guidance of faculty. The details expected in the final report to be submitted at the end of the semester are: Problem definition, literature review, objectives, methodology, analysis and interpretation of results and conclusions. TOPICS FOR ORIENTATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Product/process layout simulation and performance analysis Material handling system simulation and inventory analysis Measurement systems analysis and process capability analysis Machine tool condition monitoring using IoT devices. Sensor data analytics in IoT devices

Total P: 60 REFERENCES: 1. Manufacturing Simulation and IoT Laboratory Manual, Department of Mechanical Engineering, PSG college of Technology, 2018. 2. Malcolm Beaverstock, Applied Simulation: Modeling and Analysis Using FlexSim, FlexSim Software Products, 2011

18MC71 PROJECT WORK I 0063      

Identification of a real life problem in thrust areas Developing a mathematical model for solving the above problem Finalization of system requirements and specification Proposing different solutions for the problem based on literature survey Future trends in providing alternate solutions Consolidated report preparation of the above Total P: 90

SEMESTER IV 18MC72 PROJECT WORK II 0 0 28 14 

The project work involves the following: 

Preparing a project - brief proposal including 270

59th ACM      

A report highlighting the design finalization [based on functional requirements & standards (if any) ]    



09.06.2018

Problem Identification A statement of system / process specifications proposed to be developed (Block Diagram / Concept tree) List of possible solutions including alternatives and constraints Cost benefit analysis Time Line of activities

A presentation including the following: Implementation Phase (Hardware / Software / both) Testing & Validation of the developed system Learning in the Project

Consolidated report preparation Total P: 420

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES 18MC21 DATA STRUCTURES AND COMPUTER PROGRAMMING 3003 DATA STRUCTURES, ARRAYS AND LINKED LISTS: Data structures: Definition, types of data structures, abstract data types, algorithms; Arrays: array representation, algorithms - linear and binary search, insertion and bubble sort; Linked lists: linked list representation, polynomial addition and sparse matrices, algorithms. (11) STACKS, QUEUES AND TREES: Stacks: representation, expression handling, algorithms; Queues: Queue representation, types of queues – circular queue, dequeue, priority queue, algorithms; Trees: Terminologies, Binary trees – types, representation, binary tree searching operations, binary heaps, heap sort, multi-way search trees, algorithms. (10) OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING: Review of object oriented programming language-C++: Concepts of OOP; Functions: function prototyping, call by reference, return by reference, overloading functions, case study; Classes and objects: creation of classes, creation and data allocation for objects, arrays of objects, member functions of classes, inheritance – defining derived classes and single inheritance, case studies. (12) JAVA PROGRAMMING: Data types, operators, control structures, arrays and strings, functions and abstract functions, classes and abstract classes, case studies . (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Jean Paul Tremblay and Sorenson, “An Introduction to Data Structures with Applications”, McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi, 2017. 2. Venkatesan R and Lovelyn Rose S, “Data Structures”, Wiley India Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2015. 3. Mark Allen Weiss, “Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C++”, Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2013. 4. BjarneStroustrup, “The C++ Programming Language”, Addison Wesley, 2013. 5. Cay S Horstmann and Gary Cornell, “Core Java Volume 1 & 2”, Pearson Education, 2013. 6. Aho, Hopcroft and Ullman, “Data Structures and Algorithms”, Pearson Education, 2002.

18MC22 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE AND MACHINE LEARNING 3003 SEARCH ALGORITHMS: Agents and environments, structure of agents, problem-solving agents, formulating problems, general tree-search and graph-search algorithms, Infrastructure for search algorithms, Measuring problem-solving performance; Uninformed search strategies: Breadth-first search, uniform-cost search, depth-first search, depth-limited search, iterative deepening depth-first search, bidirectional search; Informed search strategies: Greedy best-first search, A* search, Recursive best-first search (RBFS), Hill-climbing search; Knowledge representation; Case studies for practical problems with programming. (12) META-HEURISTIC ALGORITHMS: Genetic algorithms, simulated annealing, tabu search, ant colony optimization, particle swarm optimization, differential evolution, harmony search, bee algorithms; Case studies for practical problems with programming. (12) MACHINE LEARNING TECHNIQUES: Supervised learning: classification - support vector machines, linear discriminant analysis, naive bayes k-nearest neighbor, Regression - Linear Regression, generalized linear model, decision trees; Unsupervised learning: Clustering- k-Means clustering, hierarchical clustering, apriori algorithm; Case studies for practical problems with programming. (11) DEEP LEARNING WITH NEURAL NETWORKS: Nodes and layers of neural network, training of single layer neural networks, training of multi-layer networks, architectures of deep networks, building deep networks; Case studies for practical problems with programming. (10) Total L: 45

271

59th ACM

09.06.2018

REFERENCES: 1. Omid Bozorg-Haddad,‎Mohammad Solgi,‎‎ Hugo A. Loáiciga, “Meta-heuristic and Evolutionary Algorithms for Engineering Optimization”, Wiley; 1 edition, 2017 2. Phil Kim, “MATLAB Deep Learning: With Machine Learning, Neural Networks and Artificial Intelligence”, Apress, 1st edition, 2017 3. Josh Patterson, “Deep Learning: A Practitioner's Approach”, O'Reilly; First edition, 2017 4. Stuart Russell and Peter Norvig, “Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach”, Pearson Education Limited, England, Third edition, 2016. 5. Ethem Alpaydm, “Introduction to Machine Learning”, MIT Press, 2014 6. Peter Harrington, “Machine Learning in Action”, Manning Publications Co, 2012

18MC23 VIRTUAL MANUFACTURING 3003 VIRTUAL REALITY AND VIRTUAL MANUFACTURING: Virtual reality: overview, four I’s of VR, components of VR system; Augmented reality: overview, virtual reality versus augmented reality; Virtual manufacturing: physical prototype versus virtual prototype, virtual environment, virtual machine, virtual factory. (9) HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE FOR VIRTUAL MANUFACTURING: Input devices: trackers, navigation and manipulation interfaces, gesture interfaces; Output devices: graphics displays, sound displays, haptic feedback; VR toolkits: VRPN, VR programming; multi modal interaction, simulators. (12) MODELING AND SIMULATION: Geometric modeling: virtual object shapes, visual appearance, object hierarchies, model management, LOD; Simulation: physical modeling, bounding volumes, handling collision detection; Response: transformation, force computation, surface deformation, haptic texturing. (12) VALIDATION AND ANALYSIS: Design validation, verification by simulation, analysis of manufacturing processes, material handling and storage system, process layout, plant maintenance. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Timothy Jung, “Augmented Reality and Virtual Reality: Empowering Human, Place and Business”, Springer, 2018 2. Grigore C. Burdea, and Philippe Coiffet, “Virtual Reality Technology”, John Wiley & Sons Inc. 2006 3. Gerard Jounghyun Kim, “Designing Virtual Systems: The Structured Approach”, Springer, 2005 4. Oliver Bimber and Ramesh Raskar, “Spatial Augmented Reality: Meging Real and Virtual Worlds”, 2005. 5. William R Sherman and Alan B Craig, “Understanding Virtual Reality: Interface, Application and Design (The Morgan Kaufmann Series in Computer Graphics)”. Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, San Francisco, CA, 2002.

18MC24 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEMS 3003 CONTROL SYSTEMS: Components, open loop and closed loop systems; Transfer function: modeling of physical systems, mechanical systems, translational and rotational systems, thermal, hydraulic systems and electrical systems, DC servomotor, AC servomotor, potentiometer, tacho-generator; Stepper motor: Block diagram - reduction techniques, signal flow graph – Mason’s gain formula. (11) TIME DOMAIN ANALYSIS: Continuous time signals, standard test signals; Classification of continuous time systems: Linearnonlinear, Time variant, Time invariant, Static – Dynamic; Time response of second order system; Time domain specifications; Steady state error constants; Generalized error series; Introduction to P, PI and PID modes of feedback control. (12) STATE SPACE ANALYSIS: Limitations of conventional control theory; Concepts of state, state variables and state model; state model for linear time invariant systems; Introduction to state space representation using physical; Phase and canonical variables; State equations; Transfer function from the state model; Solutions of the state equations; State transition matrix; Concepts of controllability and observability, System stability; Basic concepts of stability. (11) FREQUENCY RESPONSE OF SYSTEMS: Frequency domain specifications; Estimation for second order systems; Correlation between time and frequency domain specifications for second order systems; Frequency domain analysis; Bode plot: determination of transfer function from bode plot. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Smarajit Ghosh, “Control Systems Theory and Applications”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2012. 2. Norman S Nise, “Control System Engineering”, 6th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Singapore, 2012. 3. Richard C Dorf and Robert H Bishop, "Modern Control Systems”, 12th Edition, Addison-Wesley, New Delhi, 2010. 4. S Palani, “Control Systems Engineering”, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2010. 5. Ogata K, "Modern Control Engineering", 5th Edition, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009. 6. Nagrath I J, and Gopal M, 'Control Systems Engineering”, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2008.

272

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18MC25 INDUSTRIAL INTERNET OF THINGS 3003

INTERNET OF THINGS (IoT) ARCHITECTURE: Concepts: IoT, Industrial Iot (IIot); M2M Architecture, IoT Architecture: Definitions, functional requirements, sensing, actuation, wireless sensor networks, advancements in IoT; Use cases. (10) COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKING PROTOCOLS: Internet Communication: IP Addresses, MAC Addresses, Wi-Fi, Zigbee, low energy Bluetooth, Lora, 6LOWPAN,TCP, UDP- MQTT. (12) ELECTRONIC PROTOTYPING: Prototypes production: Open Source, closed Source; Prototyping embedded devices, embedded computing basics, Prototyping IoT projects: with arduino, with arduino and raspberry Pi; Industry IoT Case studies. (12) IOT DATA ANALYTICS: Cloud: Types, edge analytics, fog computing; Sensors: Sensor data aggregation, sensor data mining, big data analytics, predictive analytics. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Alasdair Gilchrist , “Industry 4.0: The Industrial Internet of Things”, Apress; 1st edition, 2017 2. HwaiyuGeng, "Internet of Things and Data Analytics Handbook", Wiley-Blackwell, 2017 3. AgusKurniawan, "Smart Internet of Things Projects", Packt Publishing Limited, 2016 4. Adrian McEwen and Hakim Cassimally, “Designing the Internet of Things”, John Wiley & Sons Ltd., UK, 2014.

18MC26 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING 3003 ALGORITHMS FOR ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING (AM): Generalized AM process chain, classification of AM processes, comparison of AM with CNC machining; Stages in AM, STL files :Format, errors and repairs, algorithm; Slicing algorithms- tool path generation; Effect of invalid models; Software used for AM. (11) AM PROCESS FOR POLYMERS: Vat photo polymerization processes: vector scan, mask projection and two photon approach, materials, scan patterns; Sheet lamination processes: Bond-Then-Form processes, Form-Then-Bond processes, materials; Fused Deposition Modeling (FDM), process parameters, influence of process parameters in the mechanical properties of prototype; Case studies on automobile and medical applications. (12) METAL ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING: Ultrasonic Additive manufacturing: Working principle, process parameters, microstructures and mechanical properties; Powder bed fusion (PBF) processes: Direct metal laser sintering (DMLS), Electron beam melting (EBM), Selective heat sintering (SHS), Selective laser melting (SLM) and Selective laser sintering (SLS); PBF processes challenges, process parameters, power handling systems, characteristics; Case studies for aerospace applications. (12) POST-PROCESSING AND DESIGN FOR AM: Support material removal methods, hot isostatic pressing (HIP); Design for additive manufacturing: requirements, framework, methods, systems, technologies. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Ian Gibson, David Rosen, Brent Stucker, “Additive Manufacturing Technologies: 3D Printing, Rapid Prototyping, and Direct Digital Manufacturing”, second edition, Springer, 2014. 2. Andreas Gebhardt, “Understanding Additive Manufacturing: Rapid Prototyping, Rapid Tooling, Rapid Manufacturing”, Hanser, 2012. 3. D.T Pham, S.S. Dimov, “Rapid Manufacturing: The Technologies and Applications of Rapid Prototyping and Rapid Tooling”, Springer Science & Business Media, 2012 4. Chee Kai Chua, Kah Fai Leong, Chu Sing Lim, “Rapid Prototyping: Principles and Applications”, World Scientific, 2010.

18MC27 ADVANCED MANUFACTURING PROCESSES 3003 MECHANICAL ENERGY BASED PROCESSES: Ultrasonic Machining (USM), Abrasive Jet Machining (AJM), Abrasive Water Jet Machining (AWJM); Process principles, equipments, effect of process parameters, selection of elements; Mathematical models for MRR, selection of process parameters. (11) THERMAL ENERGY BASED PROCESSES: Electron Beam Machining (EBM), Plasma Arc Machining (PAM), Laser Beam Machining (LBM); Process principles, equipments, effect of process parameters, selection of elements; Mathematical models and selection of parameters. (10) THERMO-ELECTRICAL AND CHEMICAL MACHINING PROCESSES: Electrical Discharge Machining (EDM) - electrical circuits, electrolytes, electrode materials, Electro Chemical Machining (ECM) - chemistry of the process, electrolytes, Electro Chemical Grinding (ECG);Process principles, equipments, effect of process parameters, selection of elements; Mathematical models and selection of parameters. (12) MICRO MACHINING AND NANO FABRICATION: Micromachining: principle, chip formation-size effect in micromachining, microturning, micro-milling, micro-drilling, micro EDM, Micro-wire EDM, micro ECM, laser micro-machining; Process principles, 273

59th ACM

09.06.2018

equipments, effect of process parameters, selection of elements; Mathematical models and selection of parameters. Nano fabrication: LIGA, ion beam etching, molecular manufacturing techniques, nano machining techniques, sub micron lithographic technique. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. John R. Walker, “Modern Metalworking”, Goodheart-Willcox Publishing, 2017 2. Vijay K.Jain, “Advanced Machining Processes”, Allied Publishers, 2017 3. Gary F Benedict, “Nontraditional Manufacturing Process”, CRC Press, 2015 4. Pandey P C, "Modern Machining Systems", Tata McGraw Hill Publication, 2012. 5. McGeough, J.A.," Advanced methods of Machining",Springer,2011 6. Madou, M.J., “Fundamentals of Micro fabrication: The Science of Miniaturization”, Second Edition, CRC Press, 2006. 7. Hassan Abdel-Gawad El-Hofy, “Advanced Machining Processes: Non-traditional and Hybrid Machining Processes”, McGrawHill Education, 2005

18MC28 METROLOGY AND AUTOMATED INSPECTION 3003 MEASUREMENT CONCEPTS AND SURFACE FINISH MEASUREMENT: Review of measurement concepts, standards of measurement, errors in measurement, accuracy and precision; Calibration of instruments: Calibration procedure for vernier caliper and micrometer; Measurement of Surface Finish: Types of Surface Texture, surface roughness measurement methods, profilometer, 3D Surface roughness measurement. (13) INTERFEROMETRY AND LASER METROLOGY: Review of Interferometry: Principles of light interference, types of interferometers, measurement and calibration using Interferometer; Laser Metrology: laser Micrometer, laser scanning gauge, laser interferometry. (10) MACHINE VISION: Solid state camera, three-dimensional vision, commercial machine vision system, smart Cameras, Image processing: Overview, Image acquisition and digitizing, segmentation, thresholding, edge detection, feature extraction, interpretation. (12) ADVANCED INSPECTION SYSTEM: Tool makers microscope, micro-hite, coordinate measuring machine; Non contact and inprocess inspection; Case studies: Ultrasonic sensor for automated inspection, automated inspection for packaging product, automatic inspection of engine block, multi-gauging, robotic testing and inspection- automobile body gauging. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Graham T.Smith, “Industrial Metrology”, Springer, 2016 2. Gupta.I.C, “A text book of Engineering Metrology”‖, DhanpatRai publications, New Delhi, eighth revised edition, 2015. 3. J. Beyerer, Fernando P.L., Christian F., “Machine Vision – Automated Visual Inspection Theory Practice and Applications”, Springer, 2015. 4. Milan Sonka, Vaclav Hlavac and Roger Boyle, “Image Processing, Analysis, and Machine Vision”, Cengage-Engineering, 3rd edition, 2013. 5. Beckwith.T.G,Roy D. Marangoni, John H. Lienhard, “Mechanical Measurements”, Prentice Hall, sixth edition, 2011 6. David Vernon, “Machine vision - Automated Visual Inspection and Robot Vision”, Prentice Hall

18MC29 SHEET METAL CUTTING AND BENDING TECHNOLOGIES 3003 SHEET METAL CUTTING TECHNIQUES: Growth of sheet metal industry, terminology, blanking operations, selection of punch presses, calculation of tonnage, cutting operations, Selection of cutting processes and machinery: Laser cutting, water-jet cutting, plasma cutting, oxy-fuel cutting; Specifications, selection process parameters; (11) NESTING PROCESS: Concepts, factors to be considered, objectives, strategies, evaluation of different layout generation methods, Nesting algorithms: Heuristics, expert systems, Artificial Intelligent methods; Case studies with CAM packages. (11) SHEET METAL BENDING TECHNIQUES: Terminology, types of bending operations, types of press brakes, constructional features, specifications, press brake tooling, types of punches, selection of die, development of unfold. (12) SHEET METAL BENDING PLAN AND DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS: Bending sequence generation methods, tooling stages and setup, back-gauge positioning, collision check methods, optimization concepts, software packages, design considerations, product handling methods, protection and packaging methods. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. David J. Gingery, “Sheet Metal Technology”, David J Gingery Publishing; First edition, 2016. 2. Vukota Boljanovic, “Sheet Metal Forming Processes and Die Design”, Industrial Press Inc., 2nd Revised edition, 2014. 3. Ramesh Babu A and Ramesh Babu N, “Effective Nesting of Complex Two Dimensional Shapes - Genetic and Heuristic Approaches, LAP LAMBERT Academic Publishing, GMBH & Co. Germany, 2012, ISBN No: 978-3-659-10975-1 4. Steve D. Benson, “Press Brake Technology: A Guide to Precision Sheet Metal Bending”, Society of Manufacturing Engineers, 1st edition, 1997 274

59th ACM 5.

09.06.2018

“Bending Technique: New Knowhow on Sheet-metal Fabrication”, Amada Sheet Metal Working Research Association, Machinist Publicaitons,1980

18MC30 MODELING AND ANALYSIS OF ADVANCED MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS vide Industrial Engineering 18MN09

18MC31 SIMULATION MODELING AND ANALYSIS vide Industrial Engineering 18MN04

18MC32 OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT vide Industrial Engineering 18MN05

18MC33 LEAN SIX SIGMA IN MANUFACTURING AND SERVICE vide Industrial Engineering 18MN28

18MC34 ENGINEERING ECONOMIC ANALYSIS vide Industrial Engineering 18MN06

13MC35 GEOMETRIC MODELLING vide Engineering Design 18MD24

13MC36 SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM vide Industrial Engineering 18MN34

13MC37 SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT vide Industrial Engineering 18MN08

AUDIT COURSES 18MC81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP81

18MC82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP82

275

59th ACM

09.06.2018

13. Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment

M.E. LEAN MANUFACTURING (2018 REGULATIONS) * (Minimum No. of credits to be earned: 71 ) Course Course Title Code I SEMESTER 18ML01 Applied Statistics and Reliability 18ML02 Operations Management 18ML03 Lean Manufacturing Tools and Techniques 18ML04 Lean Supply Chain Management 18ML05 Information Systems for Manufacturing 18ML51 Manufacturing Simulation Laboratory English for Research Paper Writing 18ML81 Total 20 hrs II SEMESTER 18ML06 Lean Six Sigma in Manufacturing and Service 18ML07 Lean Product Design and Development 18ML08 Total Productive Maintenance 18ML09 Costing and Engineering Economics 18ML-Professional Elective 1 18ML-Professional Elective 2 18ML52 Lean Manufacturing Laboratory 18ML61 Industry Visit and Technical Seminar Research Methodology and IPR 18ML82 Total 28 hrs III SEMESTER 18ML-Professional Elective 3 18ML-Professional Elective 4 18ML-Professional Elective 5 18ML-Professional Elective 6 18ML53 Operations Research Laboratory 18ML71 Project Work I Total 22 hrs IV SEMESTER Project Work II 18ML72 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE COURSES 18ML21 Human Factors Methods 18ML22 Entrepreneurship Development 18ML23 Agile Project Management 18ML24 Management of Service Operations 18ML25 Inventory and Warehouse Management 18ML26 Human Resource Management 18ML27 Marketing Management and Strategy 18ML28 Facilities Design and Analysis 18ML29 Sequencing and Scheduling 18ML30 Enterprise Resource Planning 18ML31 Advanced Optimization Techniques 18ML32 Advanced Operations Research

Hours/Week Lecture Tutorial Practical

Credits

Maximum Marks CA FE Total

CAT

2 3 3 3 3 0 0 14

2 0 0 0 0 0 0 2

0 0 0 0 0 4 ** 4

3 3 3 3 3 2 Grade 17

50 50 50 50 50 50 0 300

50 50 50 50 50 50 0 300

100 100 100 100 100 100 0 600

PC PC PC PC PC PC MC

3 3 3 3 3 3 0 0 0 18

2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2

0 0 0 0 0 0 4 4 ** 8

4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 Grade 23

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 0 400

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 0 400

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 0 800

PC PC PC PC PE PE PC EEC MC

3 3 3 3 0 0 12

0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 4 6 10

3 3 3 3 2 3 17

50 50 50 50 50 50 300

50 50 50 50 50 50 300

100 100 100 100 100 100 600

PE PE PE PE PC EEC

0

0

28

14

50

50

100

EEC

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE

* Indicated is the minimum number of credits to be earned by a student. ** - 60 hrs in I semester and 90 hrs in II semester; Grade: Completed / Not Completed CAT – Category; PC – Professional Core; PE - Professional Elective EEC – Employability Enhancement Course; MC- Mandatory Course

276

59th ACM

09.06.2018

SEMESTER I 18ML01 APPLIED STATISTICS AND RELIABILITY vide Industrial Engineering 18MN01 18ML02 OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT vide Industrial Engineering 18MN05 18ML03 LEAN MANUFACTURING TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES 3003 PRINCIPLES OF LEAN MANUFACTURING: Review of manufacturing paradigm; Objectives of lean manufacturing, key principles and implications of lean manufacturing, traditional versus lean manufacturing characteristics; Value creation and waste eliminationmajor kinds of manufacturing waste, concept of takt time, continuous flow , continuous improvement, single piece flow. (12) LEAN MANUFACTURING TOOLS AND METHODOLOGIES: Values stream mapping: Current state and future state value stream mapping; Standard work: Communication of standard work to employees, visual controls; Quality at the source, 5S principles, Total Productive Maintenance, Changeover and setup time reduction; Production leveling-Failure mode and effect analysis, line balancing, mistake proofing, case studies. (11) GROUP TECHNOLOGY AND JUST IN TIME MANUFACTURING: Group technology philosophy: Part family, Machine cell design and analysis; JIT-Elements of JIT, Kanban, case studies. (11) LEAN MANUFACTURING IMPLEMENTATION: Road map for lean manufacturing implementation; Reconciling lean with other systems-Lean six sigma, integrating lean principles in ERP and PLM; Lean production in Industry 4.0: Impact of industry 4.0 on lean production system, case studies. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Beata Mrugalska, Magdalena K. Wyrwicka, “Towards Lean Production in Industry 4.0”, Procedia Engineering, 182, 2017. 2. S. R. Devadasan, V. Sivakumar, “Lean and Agile Manufacturing: Theoretical, Practical and Research futurities”, PHI, 2012. 3. Askin R G, Goldberg J B, “Design and Analysis of Lean Production Systems”, John Wiley and Sons Inc., 2003. 4. Micheal Wader, “Lean Tools: A Pocket Guide to Implementing Lean Practices”, Productivity and Quality Pub, 2002. 5. Kenichi Sekine, “One-Piece Flow”, Productivity Press, Portland, Oregon, 1992. 6. Alan Robinson, “Continuous Improvement in Operations”, Productivity Press, Portland, Oregon, 1991.

18ML04 LEAN SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT 3003 LEAN SUPPLY CHAIN AND INVENTORY MANAGEMENT: Lean opportunities in supply chain and logistics, Examples of JIT in the Supply chain, competitive strategy, logistics and customer value, measuring logistics cost and performance; Traditional inventory management versus lean inventory management, kanban sizing, WIP inventory: FIFO management, lot sizing in lean ,one piece, Every Part Every Interval ,lot sizing as part of scheduling, reducing pipeline inventory: kanban, visual car, inventory reduction through reducing lot sizes, point of sales data. (12) LEAN SUPPLY CHAIN DESIGN: Principles, lean layouts, lean production schedules, lean service, traditional physical control of inventories, traditional relationships packaging, preparing an item for shipment, overall warehouse setup and item locations, traditional logistics, skill, freight cost, distribution requirements planning, lean warehousing, contractor management: selection of contractors, induction, onsite management, risk management, lean logistics : product availability and its effect on logistics ,collaboration: visibility and reliability, the impact of globalization, enterprise resource planning, leveraging enterprise resource planning in supply chain, sales and operations planning, lean supply chain tools for the perfect order (12) LEAN SUPPLY CHAIN EXECUTION: E-Commerce, QR, ECR, and CPFR, collaborative planning, forecasting, replenishment, vendor-managed inventory, other potential areas for collaboration, future opportunities , logistics of a global supply chain, value stream mapping to identify waste, areas to reduce waste policies and procedures, relevant lean supply chain and logistics metrics, balanced scorecard, display and control metrics, barriers to supply chain integration ,trends in lean supply chain, data analytics, supply chain analytics and lean, potential obstacles to lean thinking in the supply chain. (11) CASE STUDIES: Reverse logistics, warehouse management using lean concept, lean supply chain management of an automobile component manufacturing industry, introducing lean concept in E-procurement. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Paul Myerson “Lean Supply Chain and Logistics Management”, McGraw-Hill Education, 2012. 2. Robert Jacobs F,Richard B Chase “Operations and Supply Chain Management” McGraw-Hill Irwin, 2012. 3. Martin Christopher, “Logistics and Supply Chain Management, Pearson publications, 2011. 4. Bill Kerber, Brian J Dreckshage, “Lean Supply Chain Management Essentials: A Framework for Materials Managers”, CRC Press, 2011. 5. Baudin Michel, “Lean Logistics: The Nuts and Bolts of Delivering Materials and Goods”, Productivity Press, New York, 2005.

277

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18ML05 INFORMATION SYSTEMS FOR MANUFACTURING 3003

INFORMATION SYSTEMS AND NETWORKING: Role of information technology in manufacturing: Role of internet, Intranet and extranet, present market constraints, extended enterprises, B2C and B2B. Types of server: Client/Server, architecture, database, data model, database management systems. Networking concepts: Networking devices, Network topologies, Wireless communication (12) PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND ISSUES: Software Engineering: Software development life-cycle, Product life cycle management- Sequential engineering versus concurrent engineering - Global product - Product development – Quality assurance issues and complexity (12) MANUFACTURING MODELS: Engineer to order, make to order, assemble to order, made to stock, and configure to order. Faster design throughput: Web based design, changing design approaches, engineering change management, product configuration management. Enterprise application and integration for product lifecycle management, risk management - case studies (10) IT ENABLED PROCESS AND RESOURSE PLANNING: Process planning: Structure of process planning software, Information requirements for process planning. Role of Manufacturing Resource Planning (MRP), Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) – case studies (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. John Stark, “Global Product Strategy, Product Lifecycle Management and Billion Customer Question”, Springer Publisher, 2007. 2. John Stark, “Product Lifecycle Management: 21st century for Product Realisation”, Springer Publisher, 2005. 3. Franjo Cecelja,” Manufacturing Information and Data systems, Design and Practice‟‟ Penton Press Publisher, 2002. 4. Radhakrishan P,Subramanyan P, Raju V, “CAD/CAM/CIM”, New Age International Publishers, 2002.

18ML51 MANUFACTURING SIMULATION LABORATORY 0042 In this course, students will be provided with an orientation on the following topics for a duration of 12-16 hours. Each student is expected to perform a case study by formulating and completing an activity of interest derived from the orientation under the guidance of faculty. The details expected in the final report to be submitted at the end of the semester are: Problem definition, literature review, objectives, methodology, analysis and interpretation of results and conclusions. TOPICS FOR ORIENTATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Manufacturing system simulation and performance measurement using simulation software Solving inventory problems using simulation software Solving transportation and assignment problems Project evaluation and review based on time and cost Measurement system analysis , process capability analysis , gauge repeatability and reproducibility using statistical software

CASE STUDY Manufacturing simulation of advanced manufacturing systems Total P: 60 REFERENCES: 1. 2. 3. 4.

W. David Kelton, .‎2005‎,noitacudE‎rehgiH‎lliH‎warGcM‎,”anerA‎htiw‎noitalumiS”,kcorrutS‎.T‎divaD‎,ikswodaS‎lladnaR‎ Jerry Banks, John S, Carson II, Barry L Nelson, David M Nicol, “Discrete Event System Simulation”, Prentice Hall Inc., 2006. Law A M, “Simulation Modeling and Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill Companies Inc, 2008. Francis Neelamkavil, “Computer Simulation and Modeling”, John Wiley and Sons, 1987.

SEMESTER II 18ML06 LEAN SIX SIGMA IN MANUFACTURING AND SERVICE 3204 CONCEPTS OF LEAN SIX SIGMA: Overview of six sigma concept: definition, origin, terms. Foundations of lean six sigma –four keys, five laws of lean six sigma, types of lean six sigma: DMAIC versus DMADV – lean six sigma project selection: selection of team members, six sigma roles and responsibilities; Team stages: characteristics of effective teams, six sigma training plan; Six sigma metrics: DPMO calculation, quality cost, cost of poor quality- roadmap for implementation; Common implementation issues and management strategies. (12)

278

59th ACM

09.06.2018

DEFINE AND MEASURE PHASE: Customer identification, Voice of customer (VOC), VOC data collection, Critical To Quality (CTQ) – Value Stream Mapping - SIPOC – project charter, types of measures, types of data, applications of QC tools, measurement system analysis, Process capability calculations. (12) ANALYSE PHASE: Inferential and Descriptive Statistics, Patterns of Variation, Normality Analysis, Multi-Vari Analysis; Hypothesis testing for Normal Data: Selection and application problems; Introduction to statistical software, failure mode and effects analysis, analysis of lean wastes. (11) IMPROVE AND CONTROL PHASE: Process redesign principles, Generating improvement alternatives, Quality Function Deployment (QFD), Theory of Inventive Problem Solving (TRIZ); Design of experiments; Waste elimination methods, Cycle time reduction, Cost/benefit analysis; Process scorecard – Control Plan. (10) Total L: 45 T:15 60 REFERENCES: 1. Jay Arthur, “Lean Six Sigma – Demystified”, Tata McGraw Hill Companies Inc, 2011. 2. Joseph De Feo, William Barnard, “Juran Institute‟s Six Sigma Breakthrough and Beyond”, McGraw-Hill, 2004. 3. Betsiharris Ehrlich, “Transactional Six Sigma and Lean Servicing”, St. Lucia Press, 2002. 4. Michael L George, David T Rowlands, Bill Kastle, “What is Lean Six Sigma”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2004. 5. Kai Yangand Basem El, Haik, “Design for Six Sigma”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2004. 6. Donald W Benbow, Kubiak T M, “Certified Six Sigma Black Belt Handbook”, Pearson Education, 2007.

18ML07 LEAN PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT 3003 INTEGRATED PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT: Product development system, process particularities, performance drivers, metrics; integrated product development-sequential product design and integrated product design; Rescue movement, tools and teams; lean thinking, value on product development, waste in product development. Green manufacturing: lean sustainability, continuous improvement. (12) LEAN PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT- ORGANIZATIONAL CULTURE: Lean enabling organizational culture-hard on the problem, soft on the people; power of communication, lean product development organization knowledge management organized to learn (and to lean); knowledge identification-creation- representation-distribution, enabling; A3 report planning method- problem-solving A3. (11) LEAN PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT PROCESS: Process and its phases, portfolio management activities; value identification, proposition, delivery planning, design and development, production/ramp-up, product/process follow-up and product process discontinuation activities; product development and visual management; value function deployment, identification activities, planning activities ;board to guide the value delivery planning; execution phase - board to guide the design and developmentproduction. (11) LEAN JOURNEY: Setting attitude and plan; breaking the roots from the traditional paradigm; thermo baby development project; robot based flight simulator development project; product development performance drivers, case studies. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Marcus Vinicius Pereira Pessôa, Luís Gonzaga Trabasso, “The Lean Product Design and Development Journey- A Practical View”, Springer International Publishing AG 2017. 2. Ronald Mascitelli, “The Lean Product Development Guidebook”, Technology Perspectives, 2014. 3. Ronald Mascitelli, “Mastering Lean Product Development-A Practical, Event-Driven Process for Maximizing Speed, Profits, and Quality”, Technology Perspectives, 2011. 4. Michael Grieve, “Product Lifecycle Management: Driving the next generation of lean thinking”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.

18ML08 TOTAL PRODUCTIVE MAINTENANCE 3003 PRINCIPLES OF TOTAL PRODUCTIVE MAINTENANCE: Review of TPM concept-Objectives and functions, Reliability centered maintenance, Maintainability prediction, availability and system effectiveness, maintenance cost. (12) TPM IMPLEMENTATION: Developing the TPM implementation plan; Preventive maintenance, Minimal repair, Maintenance types, Balancing PM and breakdown maintenance. (11) ZERO BREAK DOWN: Zero defects and TPM, Maximizing equipment effectiveness, Autonomous maintenance program, Pillars of TPM, TPM small group activities, TPM organization, Improving maintenance efficiency and effectiveness. (11) HUMAN FACTORS IN MAINTENANCE: Maintenance manuals, Maintenance staffing methods, Simulation, Spare parts management; Maintenance planning and scheduling; Condition monitoring techniques. Maintenance management information systems, total economic maintenance, team-based maintenance, fault diagnosis, TPM online diagnostics. (11) Total L: 45

279

59th ACM

09.06.2018

REFERENCES: 1. Tina Kanti Agustiady, Elizabeth A. Cudney, „Total Productive Maintenance: Strategies and Implementation Guide‟, Productivity Press, 2015. 2. Kern Peng, „Equipment Management in the Post-Maintenance Era: A New Alternative to Total Productive Maintenance (TPM), Productivity Press, 2012. 3. Fumio Gotoh, MasajiTajiri, „Autonomous maintenance in Seven Steps: Implementing TPM on the Shop Floor‟, Productivity Press, 1999. 4. David J. Sumanth, „Total Productivity Management: A Systematic and Quantitative Approach to Compete in Quality, Price and Time‟, Productivity Press, 1997. 5. Japan Institute of Plant Maintenance, „Autonomous maintenance for Operators‟, Productivity Press, 1997.

18ML09 COSTING AND ENGINEERING ECONOMICS 3003 COST CONCEPTS: Cost structure: Labor, material, overhead cost; Nature of overhead Cost, Overhead absorption methods: Direct labor, direct material, number of pieces, labor hour rate, machine hour rate methods – Cost control: labor, material, overhead variance analysis. (10) ECONOMICS: Present economic policy: liberalization, privatization, globalization, scope for industrial growth, interest and time value of money, cash-flow diagram, simple interest, compound interest, single payments: uniform series payments - interest factors and tables - nominal and effective interest rates - continuous compounding - uniform continuous payments. Present worth comparison - equal, unequal lived assets - study period – assets with infinite life - capitalized cost. Equivalent uniform annual cost comparison – situations for EUAC. (12) REPLACEMENT ANALYSIS: Review of conventional approach – group replacement - analysis with time value accounting – replacement due to deterioration, obsolescence, inadequacy – economic life for cyclic replacements - current salvage value of the defender - defender and challenger with different lives - additional one year assessment. (11) PROJECT FEASIBILITY ANALYSIS: Case study - report preparation. Depreciation - reasons - depreciation accounts - causes of declining value - depreciation methods, multi product break even analysis. - review of project management - PERT - CPM - crashing - cost system. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Leland T Blank, Anthony J Tarquin, "Engineering Economy", McGraw Hill Book Company, 2012. 2. John A White, "Principles of Engineering Economic Analysis", John Wiley and Sons, 2012. 3. T.R. Banga, S.C. Sharma, “Mechanical Estimating and Costing Including Contracting”, Khanna Publishers, 2011. 4. William G Sullivan, “Engineering Economy”, Pearson Education Inc., 2010. 5. James L Riggs, David D Bedworth, Sabah U Randhawa, “Engineering Economics”, McGraw Hill Book Company, 2004.

18ML52 LEAN MANUFACTURING LABORATORY 0042 In this course, students will be provided with an orientation on the following topics for a duration of 12-16 hours. Each student is expected to perform a case study by formulating and completing an activity of interest derived from the orientation under the guidance of faculty. The details expected in the final report to be submitted at the end of the semester are: Problem definition, literature review, objectives, methodology, analysis and interpretation of results and conclusions. TOPICS FOR ORIENTATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Facility layout design and study of layout performance Value Stream Mapping: Study of current state and future state diagrams Ergonomic study of human performance Study of lean factory (cycle time, WIP, time and motion study, Poka-Yoke) Process capability study and use of six sigma Study of failure mode and effects analysis

Case study: Implementation of lean techniques in a manufacturing industry and perform lean audit. Total P: 60 REFERENCES: 1. 2. 3.

Askin R G, Goldberg J B, “Design and Analysis of Lean Production Systems”, John Wiley and Sons Inc., 2003 Micheal Wader, “Lean Tools: A Pocket Guide to Implementing Lean Practices”, Productivity and Quality Pub, 2002 Beata Mrugalska, Magdalena K. Wyrwicka, “Towards Lean Production in Industry 4.0”, Procedia Engineering, 182 (2017)

280

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18ML61 INDUSTRY VISIT AND TECHNICAL SEMINAR 0042

This course, likened to a mini-intern, requires each student to identify a manufacturing or service industry and pursue the solution of an industrial problem consistent with the credits allotted for the course. Students are expected to study the problem, survey pertinent literature, gather relevant data and carry out engineering and scientific analysis followed by a detailed presentation both oral and written. The report submitted for final assessment should be in line with that required for Project Work. Total P: 60

SEMESTER III 18ML53 OPERATIONS RESEARCH LABORATORY vide Industrial Engineering 18MN51

18ML71 PROJECT WORK I 0063      

Identification of real life problem in thrust areas Developing a mathematical model for solving the selected problem Finalisation of system requirements and specification Proposing different solutions for the problem based on literature survey Future trends in providing alternate solutions Consolidated report preparation Total P: 90

IV SEMESTER 18ML72 PROJECT WORK II 0 0 28 14 The project work involves the following: Preparing a project - brief proposal including     

Problem identification A statement of system / process specifications proposed to be developed (Block diagram / Concept tree) List of possible solutions including alternatives and constraints Cost benefit analysis Time Line of activities

A report highlighting the design finalization [based on functional requirements and standards (if any) ] A presentation including the following:   

Implementation phase (Hardware / Software / both) Testing and validation of the developed system Learning in the project

Consolidated report preparation Total P: 420

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES 18ML21 HUMAN FACTORS METHODS 3003 HUMAN FACTORS: Goals and Scope of human factors, Systems thinking, Human centered design, Steps in performing task analysis, Iterative design and refinement, Evaluation methods – Purpose and types of evaluation, Factorial designs with interactions, Analysis of data, Statistical and practical significance. (12) COGNITIVE ELEMENTS: Visual environment and receptor system, sensory processing characteristics, Influence of vision on cognition, Auditory environment, Noise and annoyance, Tactile and Haptic senses; Information processing model of cognition, Working and Long term memory, Divided attention and time sharing. (11) HOMINAL SYNERGY WITH WORKSPACE: Theories for interface and interaction design, Types of automation; Fifteen principles

281

59th ACM

09.06.2018

of human centered automation, problems with automation; Principles of workspace design, Use of anthropometric data in design, Standing and seated workplace. (11) BIOMECHANICS OF WORK: Biomechanical models, Low-back problems, Cumulative trauma disorders, Work load assessment, Energy cost of work, Whole body fatigue, Work capacity, Environmental and Psychological stressors, Remedies for overload, Vigilance, fatigue and sleep disruption, Safety and accident prevention – OSHA and NIOSH. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. John D. Lee,‎Christopher D. Wickens,‎‎ Yili Liu, " An Introduction to Human Factors Engineering ", Create Space Independent Pub., 2017. 2. Stephen.J.Guastello, Human Factors Engineering and Ergonomics: A Systems Approach, Second Edition, 2017. 3. L. P. Singh, Arvind Bhardwaj, "Human Factor Engineering", Galgotias Pvt. Ltd, 2016. 4. Neville A. Stanton, "Human Factors Methods: A Practical Guide for Engineering and Design", Taylor & Francis, 2013 5. Chandler.A.Philips,” Human Factors Engineering”, First edition, 2000.

18ML22 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT 3003 FUNDAMENTALS OF ENTREPRENEURSHIP: Forms of ownership, systematic business transformation, innovation in entrepreneurship, seven sources for innovative opportunity, social and psychological factors, types, competencies and prerequisites of entrepreneurs. (12) ENTREPRENEURIAL MOTIVATION: Propensity to taking risks, McClelland‟s need–Achievement Theory, Herjburg‟s theory, McGragor‟s Theory, thematic apperception test – stress management, use of E-commerce in business (11) STRATEGIES FOR BUSINESS: Market assessment, value chain analysis, SWOT analysis, porter‟s 5-forces model, sources of finance, financial statement analysis, manpower planning, tools and techniques for performance appraisal, process of image building, promotion and distribution. (11) ETIQUETTES AND ETHICS: Effective presentation styles and body language, employee rights and gender issues, customer care, grievance redressal, values and morals at workplace, case study of successful entrepreneurs. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Sharma Sangeeta, “Entrepreneurship Development”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd,2016 2. Peter Drucker, "Innovation and Entrepreneurship", Harper Collins India, 2015 3. Gordon E, Natarajan K ,”Entrepreneurship Development”, Himalaya Publications House,2014 4. Byrd, Megginson, "Small Business Management: An Entrepreneur's Guidebook", McGraw Hill Education, 2013

18MN23 AGILE PROJECT MANAGEMENT 3003 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND INITIATION: Definition of Project, Project Life Cycle, Selecting Projects Strategically – Project Management maturity, Project selection and criteria of choice, the nature of project selection models, types of project selection models,. Role of project managers, Nature of negotiation, partnering, chartering and scope change, conflict and the project life cycle, requirements and principles of negotiation. (12) PROJECT PLANNING, TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES: Initial project coordination and the project plan; Project costs and Budgets – estimating project budgets, expert opinion, analogy, parametric estimate; cost engineering – example, contingency amount, elements of budgets and estimates improving the process of cost estimation. Network diagram and Network Techniques; Risk analysis – objectives of risk analysis, identify the risk; Risk management – choosing, implementing and evaluating; Project control, evaluation and termination. (11) AGILE PROJECT MANAGEMENT: Agile revolution‟s impact on product development- Agile Project Management, Agile values and principles for organization; Optimizing all five stages of the agile project: Envision, Speculate, Explore, Adapt, and Close (11) AGILE ENTERPRISE FRAMEWORK: Governance, project and iteration management, technical practices; Organizational and product-related processes for scaling agile, agile project governance solutions; The “Agile Triangle”: measuring performance, changing role of the agile project leader. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Mark C. Layton “Agile Project Management”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc, 2012 2. Jim Highsmith, “Agile Project Management: Creating Innovative Products”, Addison‐Wesley Professional, 2009 3. John M Nicholas, “Project Management for Business and Technology”, Prentice Hall India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2002. 4. Vasant Desai, “Project Management”, Himalaya Publishing House, 2001. 5. Dennis Lock, “The Essentials of Project Management”, Gower Publishing Ltd., 1997. 6. Anastasia Pagnoni, “Project Engineering – Computer Oriented Planning and Operational Decision Making”, Springer Verlag, 1990.

282

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18ML24 MANAGEMENT OF SERVICE OPERATIONS 3003

SERVICE CHARACTERISTICS: Services – Importance, role in economy, service sector – growth; Nature of services -Service classification , Service Package, distinctive characteristics , open-systems view; Service strategy – Strategic service vision, competitive environment, generic strategies, winning customers; Role of information technology; stages in service firm competitiveness; Internet strategies - Environmental strategies. (12) SERVICE DESIGN: New service development: Design elements, Service blue-printing, process structure, generic approaches, value to customer. Retail design strategies: store size- Network configuration; managing service experience: economy, key dimensions, vehicle routing and scheduling. (11) SERVICE QUALITY: Service quality- dimensions, service quality gap model; measuring service quality- quality service by design service recovery - service guarantees; service encounter – triad, creating service orientation, service profit chain; front-office backoffice interface – service decoupling. (10)

SERVICE STRATEGIC CHANGE: Managing demand – strategies; managing capacity – basic strategies, supply management tactics, operations planning and control; yield management; inventory management in services– retail discounting model, newsvendor model; managing waiting lines –queuing systems, psychology of waiting; managing for growth- expansion strategies, franchising , globalization. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Bill Hobins, Sadie Shinkins, “Managing Service Operations”, Sage Publications India Ltd., New Delhi, 2006. 2. Robert Johnson, Graham Clark, “Service Operations Management: Improving Service Delivery”, Pearson Education Ltd., 2005. 3. Nevan Wright J,Peter Race, “The Management of Service Operations”, Thomson Learning, 2005. 4. William J Glynn, James G Barnes, “Understanding Service management: Integrating marketing, Operational Behavior”, Wiley Publishers, 1995.

18ML25 INVENTORY AND WAREHOUSE MANAGEMENT 3003 INVENTORY MANAGEMENT AND TOOLS: Types of inventory, types of inventory demand, reorder point, techniques, safety stock, safety time, Economic Order Quality; Inventory cost-purpose of inventory, types of stocks; Inventory Strategy: replenishment, fulfillment, customization and outsourcing, framework of Inventory management; Obsolete Inventory: obsolete inventory identification, disposal, presentation and NCNR inventory reduction; Case study on total landed cost. Inventory record accuracy - fill rates; Tools to uncover system dysfunction: run charts, flow charts, logic charts, variance report - cycle count: annual inventory, cycle count methodologies. (12) WAREHOUSE MANAGEMENT AND PROCESS: Types of warehouse operations, supply chain trends affecting warehouse, transportation issues; Assets, activities; Warehouse manager role: warehouse trade-offs, challenges, people management, attracting and retaining warehouse employees and training: receiving, pre-receipt, in-handling, preparation, offloading, checking, cross-checking; Pick preparation: preparation and warehouse layout. (12) WAREHOUSE MANAGEMENT TOOLS: Warehouse audit, 5S or 5C (Gemba Kanri), Pareto analysis, ABC analysis and XYZ analysis for warehouse design, Order picking strategy, choice of picking system, cross docking, slotting or item profiling, resource planning, task inventory, selection of warehouse storage equipment, warehouse location number, selection of material handling equipments, warehouse space calculation, selection of warehouse management system. (11) OUTSOURCING, AUTOMATION IDENTIFICATION AND ROLE OF INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY: Decision for outsourcing, core activity/ core competence, cost reduction, labor relation, financial strategy, flexibility; Role of third-party contractors, future of outsourcing, basics of bar coding - elements of bar code symbols - bar code applications. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Steven Bragg, “Inventory Management”, Accounting Tools LLC, USA, 2013. 2. Gwynee Richards,Susan Grinsted, “The logistics and Supply chain toolkit”, Gwynne Richards Publications, USA, 2013. 3. Max Muller, “Essentials of Inventory Management”, American Management Association, 2011. 4. Russell G Broeckelmann, “All in Inventory Classification Innovation: Paving the way for Electronic commerce and Vendor managed inventory”, CRC Press, 1999.

18ML26 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT 3003 NATURE AND SCOPE OF HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT: Meaning and definition of HRM, objectives and functions of HRM, models of HRM, HRM in a changing environment, role of globalization in human resource management; Job analysis – job specification – recruitment – induction – selection – placement: role in HRM, process, methods, selection and placement. (11)

283

59th ACM

09.06.2018

TRAINING AND DEVELOPMENT: Principles of learning, objectives, types and training methods, multi-skilling, management development: meaning, scope and objectives; Process: methods, factors that distort appraisal, methods to improve performance, role of performance in the performance management process, performance appraisal versus potential appraisal. (12) WAGE AND SALARY ADMINISTRATION: Principles and techniques of wage fixation, job evaluation, incentive schemes; Morale: importance of moral-employee attitudes and behaviour and their significance to employee productivity; Motivation methods of employees, empowerment: factors affecting empowerment – process – benefits. (12) WORK ENVIRONMENT AND TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF EMPLOYMENT: Fatigue, safety, accident prevention accident records, industrial relations; Model variables that outline difference between local and international HRM: approaches to IHRM, linking HRM to international expansion strategies; HR outsourcing: Human resource information system – management of turnover and retention. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Bernardin H John, “Human Resource Management – An Experiential Approach”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008. 2. Dezenzo A David, Robbins P Robbins, “Human Resource Management”, John Wiley and Sons, 2007. 3. Gary Dessler, “Human Resource Management”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2003. 4. Aswathappa K, “Human Resource and Personnel Management – Text and Cases”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2002. 5. Rao V S P, “Managing People”, Excel Books, New Delhi, 2002.

18ML27 MARKETING MANAGEMENT AND STRATEGY 3003 MANAGEMENT OBJECTIVES: Objectives and success: stakeholders‟ objectives and constraints, developing balanced objectives, developing a strategy, criteria for strategic success, strategic intent core competences, organizational dimensions. Theory of marketing: the customer-led business, focus on needs, competitive advantage, customers as assets, creating the customer-led business. (11) STRATEGIC MARKET PLANNING: Adapting to change, evolution of planning systems, corporate strategy, business unit strategy. Market dynamics and competitive strategy: cycles of confusion, market dynamics, evolution of markets, formulating marketing strategies, niche companies. (12) COMMUNICATION STRATEGY: Communications and buyer behavior: advertising planning, direct response marketing, interactive marketing, sales promotion, public relations, communications mix. Sales management: selling process, negotiations, managing account relationships. (12) MARKETING IN SERVICE: Nature of services: service characteristics, service tasks, services marketing strategy. Marketing: a recapitulation, changing marketing environment, market prediction, corporate responsibility .Case studies. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Philip Kotler and Kevin Lane, “Marketing Management”, PHI Publications, 2008. 2. Azhar Kazmi, “Strategic Management & Business Policy”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008. 3. Peter Doyle and Philip Stern, “Marketing Management and Strategy”, Pearson Education Limited, 2006. 4. Lawerence G. Hrebiniak,” Making strategy work”, Pearson Education Limited, 2005.

18ML28 FACILITIES LOCATION AND DESIGN vide Industrial Engineering 18MN25

18ML29 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING vide Industrial Engineering 18MN35

18MN30 ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING vide Industrial Engineering 18MN03

18ML31 ADVANCED OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES vide Industrial Engineering 18MN24

18ML32 ADVANCED OPERATIONS RESEARCH vide Industrial Engineering 18MN02

AUDIT COURSES 18ML81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP81

18ML82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP82

284

59th ACM

09.06.2018

13. Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment ME ENERGY ENGINEERING (2018 REGULATIONS) (Minimum No. of credits to be earned: 71) * Hours/Week Course Course Title Credits Code Lecture Tutorial Practical I SEMESTER 18SE01 Applied Numerical Methods 2 2 0 3 18SE02 Selection of Energy Equipment 3 0 0 3 18SE03 Energy Conservation and Management 3 0 0 3 18SE04 Instrumentations for Energy Systems 3 0 0 3 18SE -Stream Specific Core 1 3 0 0 3 18SE51 Energy Engineering Laboratory 0 4 2 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 18SE81 Total 20 hrs 14 2 4 17 II SEMESTER 18SE07 Energy Resources, Economics and Environment 3 0 0 3 18SE08 Computational Fluid Dynamics 3 0 0 3 18SE -Stream Specific Core 2 3 0 0 3 18SE -Stream Specific Core 3 3 2 0 4 18SE -Professional Elective 1 3 0 0 3 15SE -Professional Elective 2 3 0 0 3 18SE52 Computational Fluid Dynamics Laboratory 0 0 4 2 18SE61 Industry Visit and Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 18SE82 Total 28 hrs 18 2 8 23 III SEMESTER 18SE -Professional Elective 3 3 0 0 3 18SE -Professional Elective 4 3 0 0 3 18SE -Professional Elective 5 3 0 0 3 18SE -Professional Elective 6 3 0 0 3 18SE53 Energy Simulation Laboratory 0 0 4 2 18SE71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 Total 22hrs 12 0 10 17 IV SEMESTER Project Work II 0 0 28 14 18SE72 STREAM SPECIFIC CORE COURSES STREAM SPECIFIC CORE 1 (one to be opted) 18SE05 Industrial Combustion Systems 3 0 0 3 18SE06 Modeling and Control of Power Converters 3 0 0 3 STREAM SPECIFIC CORE 2 (one to be opted) 18SE09 Thermal Systems Design 3 0 0 3 18SE10 Modeling and Analysis of Electrical Machines 3 0 0 3 STREAM SPECIFIC CORE 3 (one to be opted) 18SE11 Design of Renewable Energy Systems 3 2 0 4 Power Electronics in Wind and Solar Power 18SE12 3 2 0 4 Conversion PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE COURSES COMMON FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING STREAMS Cleaner Production and Clean Development 18SE21 3 0 0 3 Mechanism 18SE22 Green Buildings 3 0 0 3 18SE23 Design of Solar Systems 3 0 0 3 18SE24 Waste Management and Energy Recovery 3 0 0 3 18SE25 Hydrogen Energy and Fuel Cells 3 0 0 3 18SE26 Bio-Energy Conversion Technologies 3 0 0 3 18SE27 Energy Storage Systems 3 0 0 3

285

Maximum Marks CA FE Total

CAT

50 50 50 50 50 50 0 300

50 50 50 50 50 50 0 300

100 100 100 100 100 100 0 600

PC PC PC PC PC PC MC

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 0 400

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 0 400

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 0 800

PC PC PC PC PE PE PC EEC MC

50 50 50 50 50 50 300

50 50 50 50 50 50 300

100 100 100 100 100 100 600

PE PE PE PE PC EEC

50

50

100

EEC

50 50

50 50

100 100

PC PC

50 50

50 50

100 100

PC PC

50

50

100

50

50

100

PC PC

50

50

100

50 50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE PE PE PE

59th ACM MECHANICAL ENGINEERING STREAM 18SE31 Turbulence and Boundary Layer Theory 18SE32 Energy Conservation in HVACR Systems 18SE33 Aerodynamics of Streamlined and Bluff Bodies 18SE34 Design of Wind Energy Systems ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING STREAM 18SE41 Soft Computing Techniques for Renewable Energy Systems 18SE42 Advanced Virtual Instrumentation 18SE43 Optimization Techniques 18SE44 Hybrid Electric Vehicles 18SE45 Distributed Generation and Micro grids 18SE46 Smart Grid Technologies 18SE47 Flexible AC Transmission system

09.06.2018

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

3 3 3

0 0 0

0 0 0

3 3 3

50 50 50

50 50 50

100 100 100

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

3 3 3 3 3 3

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

3 3 3 3 3 3

50 50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100 100

* Indicated is the minimum number of credits to be earned by a student. ** - 60 hrs in I semester and 90 hrs in II semester; Grade: Completed / Not Completed CAT – Category; PC – Professional Core; PE - Professional Elective EEC – Employability Enhancement Course; MC- Mandatory Course

286

PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE

59th ACM

09.06.2018 I SEMESTER 18SE01 APPLIED NUMERICAL METHODS 2203

NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF SYSTEM OF EQUATIONS: Solving system of linear equations –Thomas algorithm, Gauss Jacobi and Gauss Seidel methods, successive over relaxation method, system of non-linear equations - Newton Raphson method, eigenvalues - power method and inverse power method. Curve fitting - linear regression, multiple linear regression, cubic splines Bezier curves and B-splines. (8+7) NUMERICAL SOLUTION TO ODE: Boundary value problem - Shooting method, finite difference method, derivative boundary conditions. Finite Element Method - Rayleigh-Ritz method, Collocation and Galerkin methods (8+7) NUMERICAL SOLUTION TO PDE: Finite difference method: Liebmann‟s method for Laplace and Poisson equations, alternating direct implicit method, irregular and non-rectangular grids, explicit method and Crank-Nicolson method for parabolic equations, explicit method for hyperbolic equations. (8+7) MODELLING AND SIMULATION: Simulating deterministic behaviour, area under a curve, generating random numbers, simulating probabilistic behaviour, inventory model: gasoline and consumer demand. (8+7) Total L:32 + T:28 = 60 REFERENCES: 1. John H Mathews and Kurtis D Fink, Numerical Methods using MATLAB, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2018. 2. Steven C Chapra and Raymond P Canale, Numerical Methods for Engineers, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2017. 3. Frank R Giordano, William P Fox and Steven B Horton, A first course in Mathematical Modeling, Cengage Learning , New Delhi, 2014. 4. Curtis F Gerald and Patrick O Wheatley, Applied Numerical Analysis, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2013. 5. Douglas J Faires and Richard Burden, Numerical Methods, Cengage Learning, New Delhi, 2013.

18SE02 SELECTION OF ENERGY EQUIPMENT 3003 FLUID MACHINERY SIZING AND SELECTION: Mass and momentum balance, continuity equation, Euler‟s and Bernoulli‟s equation, major and minor losses, Navier - Stokes equation, principles of operation and selection of fluid machinery, hydraulic turbines and pumps. (12) SIZING OF HEAT TRANSFER EQUIPMENT: Conduction: One dimensional steady state heat conduction, composite walls, critical thickness; Convection: free convection, forced convection; Radiation: Physical mechanism, radiation properties, radiation shape factors; principles of operation and sizing of heat exchangers and cooling tower. (12) SELECTION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: Working principle and selection: Transformer, Induction motor and generators; Speed control techniques; DC machines; Power Systems: generation, distribution and transmission, Power converters. (10) RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS Working principle and resource assessments: Solar, Wind, Biomass, Ocean - thermal, tide, wave; OTEC, geo-thermal, energy storage systems. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Wylie, E. Benjamin, and Victor Lyle Streeter, "Fluid Mechanics" ,McGraw-Hill International Book Co., 2017. 2. Bergman, Theodore L., and Frank P. Incropera, “Fundamentals of heat and mass transfer”, John Wiley and Sons, 2017. 3. El-Wakil, Mohamed Mohamed, “Power plant technology”. Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2013. 4. Sukhatme S P, “A Text book on Heat Transfer”, Orient Longman, 2005. 5. Wilde, Theodore, "Electrical Machines, Drives and Power System", 2005.

18SE03 ENERGY CONSERVATION AND MANAGEMENT 3003 ENERGY MANAGEMENT: Scope of energy audit, types of energy audit, detailed energy audit methodology, role of energy managers in industries; Energy Management System (EnMS): ISO standards, implementing energy efficiency measures, detailed project report, energy monitoring and targeting, identification of energy conservation measures / technologies, economic and cost benefit analysis, ESCOS. (11) ENERGY EFFICIENCY IN THERMAL UTILITIES: Steam engineering in thermal and cogeneration plants- steam traps and various energy conservation measures; Boilers- losses and efficiency calculation methods, controls. Furnaces- heat balance in furnaces, furnace efficiency calculations, energy conservation opportunities in furnaces, Insulation and Refractories. (11)

287

59th ACM

09.06.2018

ENERGY EFFICIENCY IN ELECTRICAL UTILITIES: Electrical system, motor, harmonics, diesel generator, centrifugal pumps, fans and blowers, air compressor, lighting system – energy consumption and energy saving potentials, design considerations. (11) PERFORMANCE ASSESSMENT: Industrial case studies – assessment of energy generation/consumption in thermal station, steel industry, cement industry, textile industry, etc. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Energy Audit Manual The Practitioner‟s Guide, EMC-Kerala and NPC 2017. 2. Bureau of Energy Efficiency - Energy Management Series, 2006. 3. Openshaw Taylor E, "Utilisation of Electric Energy", Orient Longman Ltd, 2003. 4. Donald R Wulfinghoff, “Energy Efficiency Manual”, Energy Institute Press, 1999. 5. Eastop T.D and Croft D.R, “Energy Efficiency for Engineers and Technologists”, Logman Scientific and Technical, 1990. 6. Reay D.A, “Industrial Energy Conservation”, Pergamon Press, 1979.

18SE04 INSTRUMENTATION FOR ENERGY SYSTEMS 3003 INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM AND ELECTRICAL ENERGY MEASUREMENT: Measurement terminologies, precision, range, accuracy, span, linearity, sensitivity, resolution, random errors, systematic errors, relative and absolute errors, uncertainty analysis of single and multiple measurements – calibration of instruments – range –resolution – span – linearity, sensitivity- signal conditioning system; Electrical Energy Measurement: Power factor, load factor, harmonic analyzer, lighting and lamination measurement, digital data processing and data acquisition system. (12) TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE MEASUREMENT: Working principle of various temperature devices, thermocouples, thermistor, RTD, measurement analysis, infrared camera; Working principle of pressure transducers and laser induced fluorescence (LIF), quantification, basics of algorithm used for quantification- calibration of Pressure measuring equipment, principles and operation of various vacuum pumps and gauges. (12) FLOW MEASUREMENT: Variable head flow meters- rota meters-working principle of hot wire/film anemometry and particle image velocimetry, quantification, electromagnetic flow meters, ultrasonic flow meters. (11) AIR POLLUTION AND ENERGY MEASUREMENTS: Particulate sampling techniques, SO2, Combustion Products, opacity, odour measurements; Measurement of liquid level, Humidity, O2, CO2 in flue gases- pH measurement, moisture analyzer. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Sawhney A K and Puneet Sawhney, “A Course in Mechanical Measurements and Instrumentation”, Dhanpat Raiand Co 2017. 2. Doebelin EO, “Measurement Systems - Application and Design”, McGraw-Hill, 2017. 3. Rangan C S, Sharma G R and Mani V S V, “Instrumentation Devices and Systems”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2016. 4. Holman JP, “Experimental methods for engineers”, McGraw-Hill, 2011. 5. Bechwith, Marangoni and Lienhard, “Mechanical Measurements” Addison-Wesley, 2009.

STREAM SPECIFIC CORE COURSES STREAM SPECIFIC CORE ELECTIVE 1 18SE05 INDUSTRIAL COMBUSTION SYSTEMS 3003 COMBUSTION THEORY: Stoichiometry, lean and rich mixture, basic reaction chemistry, chemistry of combustion, energetics, types of flame, pre mixed, diffusion, laminar and turbulent flames, adiabatic flame temperature, burners and types. (12) COMBUSTION IN FURNACE: Furnace types and classification, aerodynamic and heat transfer in furnaces, the single gas-zone model, the "long" furnace and other multi-zone models, effect of operating variables, reduction of furnace-wall losses, temperature control in industrial furnaces, oxygen enrichment in combustion processes. (11) COMBUSTION IN INDUSTRIAL BOILERS: Sectional, shell and water-tube boilers, design features of shell boilers, boiler water treatment and conditioning, gas-side corrosion and fouling problems, oil and gas-firing of boilers, coal firing, wastes as boiler fuel, boiler efficiency and part-load operation, condensing boilers. (11) FORMATION OF FLUE GAS AND ANALYSIS: Formation of unburnt combustibles, NOx, SOx, particulates; Thermal oxidizer, scrubber, thermo-gravity analyzer, Fourier-transform infrared spectroscopy (FTIR), cyclone separator, precipitator (11)

288

59th ACM

09.06.2018 Total L: 45

REFERENCES: 1. Winterbone D and Elesaier, “Advanced Thermodynamics for Engineers”, 2015. 2. Colin R Ferguson and Allan T Kirk Patrick, “Internal Combustion Engines”, John Wiley and Sons. Inc. 2015. 3. Stephen R Turns, “Introduction to Combustion: Concepts and Applications”, McGraw Hill, 2011. 4. Gary L Borman and Kenneth W Ragland, “Combustion Engineering”, McGraw Hill, 2011. 5. Kenneth Kuan-yunKuo, “Principles of Combustion”, Wiley - Interscience, 2005.

18SE06/18ED03 MODELLING AND CONTROL OF POWER CONVERTERS 3003 INTRODUCTION TO STATE SPACE MODELLING: Review of basic control theory, control design techniques such as P, PI, PID and lead lag compensator design, state space control design approach, modeling of physical systems, solution to vector differential equations and state transition matrix, Controllability and Observability. (8) SMALL SIGNAL MODEL OF POWER CONVERTERS: Linearizing averaged power stage dynamics, frequency response of converter power stage, small-signal gain of PWM block, small-signal model for PWM, DC to DC converters. (9) TRANSFER FUNCTIONS AND STATE SPACE MODEL OF POWER CONVERTER: Bode plot for transfer functions, power stage transfer functions and state space modeling of buck converter, boost converter, and buck/boost converter, empirical methods for small-signal analysis. (9) DYNAMIC PERFORMANCE AND CLOSED LOOP PERFORMANCE OF POWER CONVERTERS: Frequency domain performance criteria, time-domain performance criteria; Stability of power converters - nyquist criterion; Relative stability: gain margin and phase margin. (6) Asymptotic analysis method, frequency domain performance, voltage feedback compensation and loop gain, compensation design and closed-loop performance. (5) INTRODUCTION TO NONLINEAR SYSTEMS: Phase plane analysis of nonlinear system using linear approximation - Limit cycle and periodic solutions - Singular points and qualitative behavior; Stability of nonlinear systems - Lyapunov direct and indirect methods. (8) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Pulsewidth Modulated DC-to-DC Power Conversion Circuits, Dynamics, and Control Designs, Byungcho Choi, IEEE Press, Published by John Wiley & Sons, Inc, 2013. 2. Ogata, K., „Modern Control Engineering‟, Prentice Hall of India, 2010. 3. Sira -Ramirez, R.Silva Ortigoza, „Control Design Techniques in Power Electronics Devices‟, Springer, 2006. 4. Hassan K. Khalil, „Nonlinear Systems‟, Pearson Educational International Inc. Upper Saddle River, 2001. 5. Chen C.T., „Linear Systems Theory and Design‟‟ Oxford University Press, 1999. 6. Applied Nonlinear Control, Jean-Jacques E. Slotine, Weiping Li, Prentice Hall, 1991 -Technology & Engineering.

18SE51 ENERGY ENGINEERING LABORATORY 0

0 4 2

In this course, students will be provided with an orientation on the following topics for duration of 12-16 hours. Each student is expected to perform a case study by formulating and completing an activity of interest derived from the orientation under the guidance of faculty. The details expected in the final report to be submitted at the end of the semester are: Problem definition, literature review, objectives, methodology, analysis and interpretation of results and conclusions. TOPICS FOR ORIENTATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Performance evaluation of solar thermal system Performance evaluation study of biomass digester/gasifier Energy consumption and lumen measurement of lights and ballasts Power quality measurements of electrical power systems Performance evaluation of wind energy systems Aerodynamic performance study of bluff and streamlined bodies Total P: 60

REFERENCES: 1. Energy engineering laboratory manual, Department of Mechanical Engineering, PSG College of Technology. 2. Solar concentrator training system, Experimental manual, Ecosense world, New Delhi. 3. Wind energy training system, Experimental manual, Ecosense World, New Delhi.

289

59th ACM

09.06.2018 II SEMESTER 18SE07 ENERGY RESOURCES, ECONOMICS AND ENVIRONMENT 3003

ENERGY RESOURCES: Current trends in energy production and consumption, world energy flows, energy and economic growth, supply and availability; Electric utilities and regulations, cost structure analysis, economics of energy use in agriculture, transport, building, Industry and energy substitution, cost benefit analysis – carbon credit and footprint. (10) ENERGY MODELING AND FORECASTING: Modeling concepts like simulation, equilibrium, optimization, concept of energy multipliers and implications of energy multipliers for analysis of regional, national energy policy, energy and environmental input – output analysis including I-O model, interfile substitution models, SIMA model, Markal model for energy policy analysis, methodology for energy demand analysis including regression, econometric energy demand modeling, end-use method of energy demand analysis, time series method, techno-economic approach to forecasting, case studies on forecasting energy needs. (12) ENERGY ECONOMICS: Simple payback period, time value of money, IRR, NPV, life cycle costing, cost of saved energy, and cost of energy generated, examples from energy generation and conservation, energy chain, primary energy analysis, life cycle assessment, net energy analysis, case studies on life cycle costing. (10) ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS OF ENERGY USE: Global warming - sources of emissions, CO2 emissions, impacts, mitigation and sustainability. environmental standards, legislation and audits, air pollution - SOx, NOx, CO, particulates, solid and water pollution, formation of pollutants, measurement and controls; Effect of operating and design parameters on emission, control methods, exhaust emission test and procedures, case studies on analysis of energy projects for environmental impact assessment and mitigation. (12) Total L : 45 REFERENCES: 1. Robert Ristirer, and Jack P. Kraushaar., “Energy and the environment”,Willey,2005. 2. Energy and the Challenge of Sustainability, World energy assessment, UNDP New York, 2004. 3. Nebojsa Nakicenovic, Arnulf Grubler and Alan McDonald “Global energy perspectives”, Cambridge University Press, 1999. 4. AKN Reddy, RH Williams, TB Johansson, Energy after Rio, Prospects and challenges, UNDP, United Nations Publications, New York, 1997. 5. Fowler, J.M ., “Energy and the environment”, McGraw Hill,1984.

18SE08 COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS 3003 CFD AND THERMO-FLUIDS: Review on the physics of thermo-fluids, governing equations -continuity, momentum, and energy conservation - modeling, grid generation, simulation, and high performance computing. (10) COMPUTATIONAL APPROACH: Finite difference method, forward, backward and central difference schemes, explicit and implicit methods, properties of numerical solution methods, stability analysis, and error estimation, difference between FDM and FVM, approximation of surface integrals, approximation of volume integrals, interpolation practices, implementation of boundary conditions, specification for a CFD simulation, requirements for accurate analysis and validation for multi scale problems. (12) CFD TECHNIQUES: Mathematical classification of flow, hyperbolic, parabolic, elliptic and mixed flow types, Lax - Wendroff technique, MacCormack‟s technique, relaxation technique, artificial viscosity, ADI technique, pressure correction technique, SIMPLE algorithm, upwind schemes, flux vector splitting. (12) TURBULENCE MODELING AND CFD APPLICATIONS: Turbulence energy equation, one-equation model, two-equation models (k-ω and k- ε models), review on advanced turbulence models, applications to fluid flow and heat transfer problems. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Chung T J, “Computational Fluid Dynamics”, Cambridge University Press, 2010. 2. Versteeg H K and Malalasekara W, “An Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics - The Finite Volume Method', Longman, 2007. 3. Muralidhar K and Sundararajan T, “Computational Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer”, Narosa Publications, 2009. 4. Joel H Ferziger and MilovanPeric, “Computational Methods for Fluid Dynamics”, Springer Publications, 2002. 5. John D Anderson, “Computational Fluid Dynamics – The Basics with Applications”, McGraw Hill, 1995.

18SE52 COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS LABORATORY 0042 In this course, students will be provided with an orientation on the following topics for a duration of 12-16 hours. Each student is expected to perform a case study by formulating and completing an activity of interest derived from the orientation under the

290

59th ACM

09.06.2018

guidance of faculty. The details expected in the final report to be submitted at the end of the semester are: Problem definition, literature review, objectives, methodology, analysis and interpretation of results and conclusions. TOPICS FOR ORIENTATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Flow simulation - Internal flow – Laminar region Flow simulation - External flow – Laminar region Flow simulation - Internal flow – Turbulence region Flow simulation - External flow – Turbulence region Flow simulation - Internal flow with heat transfer Flow simulation - External flow with heat transfer

CASE STUDY: Simulation of fluid flow/ heat transfer based systems. Total P: 60 REFERENCE: 1. CFD laboratory manual, Department of mechanical engineering, PSG College of Technology.

18SE61 INDUSTRY VISIT AND TECHNICAL SEMINAR 0042 This course, likened to a mini-intern, requires each student to identify an energy intensive industry and pursue the solution of an industrial problem consistent with the credits allotted for the course. Students are expected to study the problem, survey pertinent literature, gather relevant data and carry out engineering and scientific analysis followed by a detailed presentation both oral and written. The report submitted for final assessment should be in line with that required for Project Work. Total P: 60

III SEMESTER 18SE53 ENERGY SIMULATION LABORATORY 0042 In this course, students will be provided with an orientation on the following topics for a duration of 12-16 hours. Each student is expected to perform a case study by formulating and completing an activity of interest derived from the orientation under the guidance of faculty. The details expected in the final report to be submitted at the end of the semester are: Problem definition, literature review, objectives, methodology, analysis and interpretation of results and conclusions. TOPICS FOR ORIENTATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Time series forecasting of solar radiation using numerical tool Time series forecasting of wind speed using numerical tool Load resource analysis for the optimization of hybrid solar-wind systems using numerical tool Scheduled Heat Gain estimation using building energy management software Windows and day lighting estimation using building energy management software Air movement and green features simulation using HVAC simulator

CASE STUDY: Modeling and simulation of energy systems using application software. Total P: 60 REFERENCE: 1. Energy simulation laboratory manual, Department of mechanical engineering, PSG College of Technology.

18SE71 PROJECT WORK I 0063    

Identification of a real life problem in thrust areas. Developing a mathematical model for solving the above problem. Finalization of system requirements and specification. Proposing different solutions for the problem based on literature survey.

291

59th ACM  

09.06.2018

Future trends in providing alternate solutions. Consolidated report preparation of the above.

IV SEMESTER 18SE72 PROJECT WORK II 0 0 28 14 The project work involves the following:      

Preparing a project - brief proposal including Problem Identification A statement of system / process specifications proposed to be developed (Block Diagram / Concept tree) List of possible solutions including alternatives and constraints Cost benefit analysis Time Line of activities

A report highlighting the design finalization [based on functional requirements and standards (if any) ]    

A presentation including the following: Implementation Phase (Hardware / Software / both) Testing & Validation of the developed system Learning in the Project

Consolidated report preparation

STREAM SPECIFIC CORE ELECTIVE 2 18SE09 THERMAL SYSTEMS DESIGN 3003 THERMAL SYSTEMS: Energy systems, heat exchangers – classification, review of different design methodologies, pressure drop analysis, thin fin analysis, fouling, corrosion, and erosion, design and operational issues, exergy analysis, surface comparisons, size and weight relationships. (12) MODELLING OF THERMAL SYSTEMS: Design of energy systems- mathematical analysis - thermodynamic modeling and analysis of energy conversion equipments - heat exchangers, motors, fans, pumps, compressors, turbines, piping, ducts, etc. and efficiency analysis. (12) HEAT TRANSFER ENHANCEMENT TECHNIQUES: Flow misdistribution and header design, reduction of non-uniform heat transfer in heat exchangers, reduction of fouling, role of pitch analysis in a thermal system. (11) WASTE HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEMS: Sources of waste heat, selection of waste heat recovery technologies and financial considerations, design aspects of waste heat recovery systems. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Robert F Boehm, “Developments in the Design of Thermal Systems”, Cambridge University Press, 2016. 2. Stoecker W G, “Design of Thermal Systems”, McGraw Hill, 2011. 3. Ramesh K Shah and Dusan P Sekulic, “Fundamentals of Heat Exchanger Design”, Wiley Publications, 2007. 4. Ralph L WebbandNae – Hywn Kim, “Principles of Enhanced Heat Transfer”, Taylor and Francis, 2005. 5. SadikKakac and Hongtanliu, “Heat Transfer Enhancement of Heat Exchangers”, Kluwer academic publishers, 1998.

18SE10/18ED06 MODELING AND ANALYSIS OF ELECTRICAL MACHINES 3003 GENERALIZED THEORY AND LINEAR TRANSFORMATION: Conversions, basic two pole machine, transformer with movable secondary, transformer voltage and speed voltage, kron‟s primitive machine, invariance of power, transformation from displaced brush axis three phases to two phases, rotating axes to stationary axes, transformed impedance matrix, torque calculations. (11) INDUCTION MACHINES: Generalized representation, performance equations, steady state analysis, transient analysis, single phase induction motor, transfer function formulation, double cage machine, harmonics. (11) SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES: Generalized representation, steady state analysis, transient analysis, electromechanical transient. (11)

292

59th ACM

09.06.2018

DC AND SPECIAL MACHINES: Generalized representation, operation with displaced brushes, motor (shunt type only) operation, steady state and transient analysis, generalized representation and steady state analysis of reluctance motor, brushless DC motor, variable reluctance motor. (12) Total L : 45 REFERENCES: 1. Krause, P.C., O. Wasynczuk, and S.D. Sudhoff, “Analysis of Electric Machinery”, IEEE Press, 2002. 2. Bimbhra P.S., "Generalised Circuit Theory of Electrical Machines", Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 2002. 3. Krishnan R., “Electric Motor & Drives: Modeling, Analysis and Control”, Prentice Hall of India, 2001. 4. Chee- Mun Ong “Dynamic simulation of electrical machinery using MATLAB” Prentice – Hall, Inc, 1998. 5. Adkins B., “The Generalized Theory of Electrical Machines”, Dover Publishers, 1980.

STREAM SPECIFIC CORE ELECTIVE 3 18SE11 DESIGN OF RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS 3204 SOLAR THERMAL CONVERSION: Properties of solar radiation, absorption of light by the atmosphere, spectral distribution of sunlight, thermo-dynamical description of solar collectors, optical properties of solar collectors, technologies for fabrication of solar collectors, design of solar thermal systems for different applications. (12) WIND AND WIND RESOURCE: The nature of the wind, geographical variation in the wind resource, long-term wind-speed variations, annual and seasonal variations, Synoptic and Diurnal variations; Turbulence - the boundary layer; Wind-speed prediction and forecasting. (11) WIND POWER CONVERSION: Aerodynamic concepts, Betz's law of maximum power, rotor blade theory, design of blade Geometry and rotor diameter, performance curves, wind turbine siting and issues. . (11) BIOMASS AND BIOGAS: Concepts and systems, sources, energy plantations; Design: pyrolysis, gasification and liquefaction systems; biogas, fermentation and wet processes, chemicals from biomass and biotechnology, biofuels. (11) Total L:45+T:30=75 REFERENCES: 1. Frank Kreith and Yogi Goswami D, “Handbook of Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy”, CRC Press, 2017. 2. Sukhatme S P and Nayak J K, “Solar Energy - Principles of Thermal Collection and Storage”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2017. 3. Kothari P, Singal K C and RakeshRanjan, “Renewable Energy Sources and Emerging Technologies”, PHI Pvt. Ltd., 2011. 4. Bent Sorensen, “Renewable Energy”, Academic Press, 2011. 5. Tony Burton, David Sharpe, Nick Jenkins, Ervin Bossanyi, “Wind Energy Handbook”, John Wiley and Sons, 2011. 6. Abbasi S A and NaseemaAbbasi, “Renewable Energy Sources and their Environmental Impact”, PHI Private Limited, 2010. 7. Rai G D, "Non Conventional Sources of Energy", Khanna Publishers, 2009.

18SE12/18ED09 POWER ELECTRONICS IN WIND AND SOLAR POWER CONVERSION 3204 SOLAR PV AND WIND POWER: Trends in energy consumption, world energy scenario, energy sources and their availability, conventional and renewable sources, solar PV and wind potential in india and world, solar and wind data, policies and regulations, standards and codes used for renewable energy systems. (11) SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC ENERGY CONVERSION: Solar radiation and measurement, solar cells and their characteristics, classification of solar PV panels, influence of insolation and temperature, PV arrays, maximum power point tracking algorithms, power conditioning schemes, charge controllers, inverters – classifications and design, analysis of PV systems, BOS components, stand alone and grid integrated solar PV systems, building integrated PV (BIPV), synchronized operation with grid supply, harmonic standards, harmonic problems. (12) WIND ENERGY CONVERSION SYSTEMS: Basic principle of wind energy conversion, nature of wind, power in the wind, components of wind energy conversion system (WECS), wind farm and its accessories, generators used in wind energy conversion systems, performance of induction generators for WECS, power conditioning schemes, controllable DC power from seigs, system performance, grid connected WECS, concepts of grid integration, grid related problems, generator control , performance improvements, different schemes, ac voltage controllers, harmonics and PF improvement. (11) HYBRID POWER SYSTEMS: Wind / solar PV integrated systems – other alternate systems – requirements - optimization of system components power conditioning schemes for hybrid power systems (HPS) – design of HPS using software - storage types and selection methods - applications of HPS. (11) Total L:45+T:30=75

293

59th ACM

09.06.2018

REFERENCES: 1. S Sumathi, Ashok Kumar L, S Sureka, “Solar PV and Wind Energy Conversion Systems - An Introduction to Theory, Modeling with MATLAB/SIMULINK, and the Role of Soft Computing Techniques”, Green Energy and Technology, Springer; 2015. 2. Mukund R Patel, “Wind and Solar Power Systems”, CRC Press, 2004. 3. Roger A. Messenger, Jerry Ventre,” Photovoltaic System Engineering” CRC Press, 2004. 4. Thomas Markvart and Luis Castaser, “Practical Handbook of Photovoltaics”, Elsevier Publications, 2003. 5. Rai, G.D., "Non-conventional Energy Sources", Khanna Publishers, 2002. 6. Daniel, Hunt, V., "Wind Power - A Handbook of WECS", Van Nostrend Co., 1998.

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES 15SE21 CLEANER PRODUCTION AND CLEAN DEVELOPMENT MECHANISM 3003 CLEANER PRODUCTION (CP): Industrial and commercial sector development and related energy and environmental issues, energy economy interactions in stabilizing greenhouse gases emission, long term strategies for reducing GHG emission, CP in industrial and commercial sectors, sustainability, life cycle analysis, pollution prevention and control, overview, approaches and technologies, industrial waste evaluation, sankey diagram for CP processes and case studies. (11) PROCESS INTEGRATION: Process optimization by integrating energy and environmental aspects, energy management concepts and measures to improve energy efficiency. Energy and water pinch as waste minimization tool, occupational health and safety, quality of product, and other aspects of CP. (11) CLEAN DEVELOPMENT MECHANISM (CDM): Carbon credit, CER, Baselines in CDM, its context, key elements and concepts, additionality assessment, investment analysis, barrier analysis, common practice analysis, impact of CDM registration, baseline for small scale CDM projects, small scale CDM project criteria and types, project categories and approved methodologies. (11) CDM PROJECTS AND EVALUATION: Establishing baselines for large scale CDM projects, procedures for the submission and approval of new methodologies. Baselines for a forestation and reforestation projects, sequestration projects, determining eligibility and establishing the baseline tools and models for estimating baseline emissions, estimation of energy savings and GHG emissions reductions, carbon credit, case study - Green energy concept. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Anne Offit, Pollution Prevention and Sustainability, Syrawood Pub House, 2018. 2. Biagio F. G, Cecilia M. V. B. A, Feni A, “Advances in Cleaner Production”, Nova Science Publishers Inc, 2016. 3. Klemes J, Handbook of Process Integration, Woodhead Publishing, 2013. 4. Ian C. K, Pinch Analysis and Process Integration, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2006. 5. Ram M. S, Sudhir Sharma, Govinda R. T, Kumar S, Baseline Methodologies For Clean Development Mechanism Projects, UNEP Risø Centre, 2005.

18SE22 GREEN BUILDINGS 3003 GREEN BUILDING CONCEPTS: High-performance green buildings - Impacts of building construction, operation, and disposal Methods and tools for building assessment, LEED, Green Globes, Living Building Challenge, Green Building Coalition. (10) BUILDING ASSESSMENT AND THE GREEN BUILDING PROCESS: Design and construction relationships -project managementBREEAM, CASBEE, green star, DGNB - site and landscape strategies, building energy system strategies, low energy buildings, renewable energy systems, building hydrologic cycle strategies, case studies on energy assessment. (11) GREEN MATERIALS AND STRATEGIES: Materials selection strategies - multi-attribute standards (MAS) - life cycle assessment indoor environmental quality (IEQ) analysis and strategies - construction team responsibilities and controls - building commissioning strategies - site operations. (12) COST ANALYSIS AND STANDARDS: Carbon Accounting - economic issues and analysis - life cycle costing - business case for green buildings - green building codes and standards - International Green Construction Code ASHRAE 189P, ANSI/GG 01 - green building specifications - future directions in green high performance building technologies. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Charles J. Kibert,” Sustainable Construction: Green Building Design and Delivery” John Wiley and Sons 2016. 2. Francis D. K. Ching, Ian M. Shapiro, “Green Building Illustrated” Wiley-2014. 3. Abe Kruger, Carl Seville, “Green Building: Principles and Practices in Residential Construction”, Wiley, 2012. 4. The World Business Council on Sustainable Development (WBCSD) website: http://www.wbcsd.org.

294

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18SE23 DESIGN OF SOLAR SYSTEMS 3003

DESIGN OF SOLAR COLLECTORS: Solar constant, penetration depth, characteristics of radiation, classification - air, liquid heating collectors, testing of flat plate collectors, analysis of concentric tube collector, concentrator collectors – classification, concentrator mounting, focusing solar concentrators, heliostats, parabolic and dish. (12) SELECTION OF PHOTO-VOLTAIC SYSTEMS: Physics, material, characteristics, cell arrays, power electric circuits for output of solar panels, choppers, inverters, batteries, charge regulators, thermoelectric, stand alone, off/on grid, hybrid systems and construction concepts, performance analyzer and applications. (11) ANALYSIS OF SOLAR THERMAL SYSTEMS: Steady state and dynamic analysis, solar pond, modeling of solar thermal systems and simulations in process design of active systems by f-chart and utilization methods. Water heating systems: active and passive, passive heating and cooling of buildings, solar distillation, solar drying. (10) SOLAR ENERGY UTILIZATION: Solar powered vapor absorption air condition system, solar cooler, solar power station, water pump, chimney, dryer, dehumidifier, still, desalination, furnaces, cooker, swimming pool, and solar energy economic analysis, performance analysis and system design. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Sukhatme S. P., “Solar Energy - Principles of thermal collection and storage” Tata McGraw-Hil, 2017. 2. Duffie J. A. and Beckman W. A., “Solar Engineering of Thermal Processes”, John Wiley, 2013. 3. Goswami D. Y., Kreith F. and Kreider J. F., “Principles of Solar Engineering”, Taylor and Francis, 2000. 4. Sodha M. S., Bansal N. K., Bansal P. K., and Malik M. A. S., “Solar Passive Building: science and design”, Pergamon Press,1986. 5. Malik M. A. S., Tiwari G. N., Kumar A. and Sodha M.S., “Solar Distillation”, Pergamon Press, 1982.

18SE24 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND ENERGY RECOVERY 3003 WASTE CHARACTERISTICS AND OPERATIONS FOR WASTE HANDLING: Sources, types, composition, generation, estimation techniques, characterization, types of collection system, transfer stations, transfer operations. Separation and Processing: Size reduction - separation through density variation, magnetic/electric field; Densification - physical, chemical and biological properties and transformation technologies. (11) WASTE DISPOSAL TECHNIQUES, TRANSFORMATION TECHNOLOGIES AND VALUE ADDITION OF WASTES: Landfill, landfill gas - generation, extraction, gas usage techniques, leachates formation, UNFCCC model for land fill gas prognosis and reclamation; Physical Transformation: Component separation and volume reduction; Chemical Transformation: combustion, gasification, pyrolysis; Energy Recovery: biological transformation, aerobic composting, anaerobic digestion. (12) HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT AND WASTE RECYCLING: Definition, sources and classification; incineration vs combustion technology; RDF / mass firing, material recycling, disposal of white goods and E-wastes, carbon credit calculations and economic analysis of waste disposal and transformation techniques. (11) MANAGEMENT OF LIQUID AND GASEOUS WASTES: Liquid Waste: Sewage treatment - Dilution, mechanical treatments, biological treatments and chemical treatments, removal of ammonia; Gaseous waste management and control measures. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Howard S. Peavy et al, “Environmental Engineering”, McGraw Hill International Edition, 2013. 2. Manoj Datta, “Waste Disposal in Engineered Landfills”, Narosa Publishing House,1997. 3. Tchobanoglous, Theisen and Vigil, “Integrated Solid Waste Management”, McGrawHill, 1993. 4. Stanley E. Manahan. “Hazardous Waste Chemistry, Toxicology and Treatment”, Lewis Publishers, 1990. 5. Parker, Colin and Roberts, “Energy from Waste – An Evaluation of Conversion Technologies”, Elsevier Applied Science, 1985.

18SE25 HYDROGEN ENERGY AND FUEL CELLS 3003 SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT: Definition of sustainable development, factors affecting sustainable development like air pollution, water source degradation, population explosion, agriculture and land degradation, global warming and climate change, strategies for sustainability, energy and climate change. (11) HYDROGEN ENERGY: Introduction to hydrogen economy, production, storage and transportation systems, hydrogen from fossil fuels, electrolysis of water, thermo chemical cycles, transmission and infrastructure requirements, safety and environmental impacts, economics of transition to hydrogen systems. (11)

295

59th ACM

09.06.2018

FUEL CELLS: Concept, key components, physical and chemical phenomena in fuel cells, advantages and disadvantages, different types of fuel cells and applications, characteristics, Nernst equation, relation of the fuel consumption versus current output. (11) FUEL CELL DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE: Stoichiometric coefficients and utilization percentages of fuels and oxygen, mass flow rate calculation for fuel and oxygen in single cell and fuel cell stack, total voltage and current for fuel cells in parallel and serial connection, over-potential and polarizations, DMFC operation scheme, general issues-water flooding and water management, polarization in PEMFC. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. John Wiley and sons., “Fuel cell fundamentals”, Willey 2016. 2. Peter Hoffman, “Tomorrow‟s Energy – Hydrogen Fuel Cells and the Prospects for Cleaner Planet”, MIT, 2012. 3. Viswanathan B and Aulice Scibioh, “Fuel cells: Principles and Applications”, University Press, 2008. 4. Prashukumar G P, “Hydrogen – A fuel for Automatic Engines”, ISTE, 1999. 5. Hart A B and Womack G J, “Fuel Cells: Theory and Applications”, Chapman and Hall, 1967.

18SE26 BIO-ENERGY CONVERSION TECHNOLOGIES 3003 ANALYSIS OF BIOMASS: Biomass resources and biomass properties, biomass classification, availability, estimation of availability, consumption and surplus biomass ; energy plantations, proximate analysis, ultimate analysis, thermo gravimetric analysis and summative analysis of biomass and briquetting. (12) PYROLYSIS: A pyrolysis plant, pyrolysis products, pyrolyser types, pyrolysis product yields and its influencing factors, pyrolysis kinetics, kinetic models. (10) GASIFICATION: Biomass gasification plant, gasifiers, fixed bed system, downdraft and updraft gasifiers, fluidized bed gasifiers design, construction and operation, gasifier burner arrangement for thermal heating, gasifier engine arrangement and electrical power, equilibrium and kinetic consideration in gasifier operation, gasifier product yields and its influencing factors. (12) COMBUSTION: Biomass combustion, fixed bed combustors, inclined grate combustors fluidized bed combustors, design, construction and operation and operation of all the above biomass combustors, biomass stoves, improved challahs, types. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Prabir Basu, “Biomass Gasification and pyrolysis, a practical guide”, Academic press, 2018. 2. Desai and Ashok V, “Non Conventional Energy”, Wiley Eastern Ltd., 2008. 3. WereKo-Brobby C Y and Hagan E B, “Biomass Conversion and Technology”, John Wiley and Sons, 1996. 4. Challal D S, “Food, Feed and Fuel from Biomass”, IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd., 1992. 5. Khandelwal K C and Mahdi S S, “Biogas Technology - A Practical Hand Book - Vol. I and II”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., 1989.

18SE27 ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEMS 3003 ENERGY STORAGE MODES: Potential energy, Pumped hydro storage; KE and Compressed gas system: Flywheel storage, compressed air energy storage; Electrical and magnetic energy storage: Capacitors, electromagnets; Chemical Energy storage: Thermo-chemical, photo-chemical, bio-chemical, Superconducting Magnet Energy Storage (SMES) systems. (12) ELECTROCHEMICAL ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEMS: Batteries- primary, secondary, Lithium;Solid-state and molten solvent batteries; Lead acid batteries; Nickel Cadmium batteries; Advanced batteries, Role of carbon nano-tubes in electrodes. (11) ELECTRIC ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEMS: Capacitor and Batteries: Comparison and application; Super capacitor: Electrochemical Double Layer Capacitor (EDLC), principle of working, structure, performance and application, role of activated carbon and carbon nano-tube. (10) SENSIBLE AND LATENT HEAT STORAGE: SHS mediums; Stratified storage systems; Rock-bed storage systems; Thermal storage in buildings; Earth storage; Energy storage in aquifers, Phase Change Materials (PCMs); Selection criteria of PCMs; solar thermal LHTE systems. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Luisa F.Cabeza.,”Advances in thermal energy storage systems, Woodhead publications 2014 2. Yves Brunet., “Energy storage”, Wiley publications, 2013 3. Ru-shiliu, Leizhang, Xueliang sun, “Electrochemical technologies for energy storage and conversion”, Wiley Publications, 2012. 4. Ibrahim Dincer and Mark A Rosen, “Thermal Energy Storage Systems and Applications”, John Wiley and Sons 2011. 5. James Larminie and Andrew Dicks, “Fuel cell systems Explained”, Wiley Publications, 2003.

296

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18SE31 TURBULENCE AND BOUNDARY LAYER THEORY 3003

BOUNDARY LAYER THEORY: Boundary layer concept, displacement thickness, momentum thickness, laminar boundary layer on a flat plate, turbulent boundary layer on a flat plate, boundary layer thickness using Blasius solution and Von Karman approach, effect of pressure gradient and separation, Flow past bluff bodies and airfoil, concept of lift and drag. (11) TURBULENT BOUNDARY LAYERS: Fully developed turbulent flow in a pipe, turbulent shear stress, turbulent velocity profile, internal flows – couette flow – two-layer structure of the velocity field – universal laws of the wall– friction law – channel flow, couettee – poiseuille flows. (11) TURBULENCE AND TURBULENCE MODELS: Nature of turbulence – averaging procedures – characteristics of turbulent flows – scales of turbulence, integral length scale, energy spectra, Kolmogorov‟s theory, Kolmogorov‟s scales, eddy viscosity and Prandtl‟s mixing length, Reynolds Average Navier Stokes equation (RANS), Two-equation models, low – reynolds number models, large eddy simulation. (11) STATISTICAL THEORY OF TURBULENCE AND TURBULENT FLOWS: Ensemble average – isotropic turbulence and homogeneous turbulence – kinematics of isotropic turbulence – Taylor‟s hypothesis – dynamics of isotropic turbulence –grid turbulence and decay – turbulence in stirred tanks. TURBULENT FLOWS: Wall Turbulent shear flows – structure of wall flow – turbulence characteristics of boundary layer – free turbulence shear flows – jets and wakes – plane and axi-symmetric flows. kinetic energy budget in a turbulent flow, turbulence production and cascade. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Schlichting H and Klaus Gersten, “Boundary Layer Theory”, Springer 2017. 2. Garde R.J. and Turbulent Flow, “New Age International (p) Limited”, Publishers, 2013. 3. Biswas G. and Eswaran E., “Turbulent Flows, Fundamentals, Experiments and Modelling”, Narosa Publishing House, 2002. 4. Rajaratnam N. and Turbulent Jets, “Elsevier Scientific Publishing Company”, 1976. 5. Hinze J.O., “Turbulence”, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1975. 6. Launder B. E. and Spalding D. B., “Mathematical Models of Turbulence”, Academic Press, 1972.

18SE32 ENERGY CONSERVATION IN HVACR SYSTEMS 3003 REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT: Refrigerants-refrigeration cycles-refrigeration equipments-reciprocating, rotary, scroll, screw, centrifugal systems –refrigeration system components expansion coils and valves, evaporators, condensers and other auxiliary elements- sizing and selection of components. (12) AIR CONDITIONING AND AIR SYSTEMS: Psychrometrics -thermal comfort-air conditioning process, classification, systems and sub systems, components selection- air systems, fans, coils, filters and humidifiers, air handling units(AHU),air ducts and space diffusion systems. (13) HEATING AND VENTILATING SYSTEMS: Heat pumps and heat recovery systems, air-source heat pump, ground water heat pump systems, ground water coupled surface water heat pump, gas cooling and cogeneration, basics and constant-volume systems- variable-air-volume systems, VAV systems- fan combination, system pressure and smoke control- minimum ventilation and VAV systems controls- indoor air quality. (10) I S STANDARDS, ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL: IS code and standards: Air-condition equipments, pipes and fittings, pumps and valves, refrigeration and lubricants, insulation, ventilation, International codes and practices, automatic control systemscontrol loop and control methods-control modes-sensors and transducers- controllers and actuators-system architectureinteroperability-artificial network-functional controls and fault detection and diagnostics, BMS. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. ISHRAE “HVAC Data book” ISHRAE 2017. 2. Plant Engineers and Manager‟s Guide to Energy Conservation, Fair Mount Press, 2011. 3. Arora C.P., “Refrigeration and Air Conditioning”, Tata McGraw Hill Pub. Company, 2010. 4. Carrier Air conditioning Co., “Hand Book of Air conditioning System Design”, McGraw-Hill, 2001. 5. Shan.K.Wang, “Handbook of air conditioning and refrigeration” McGraw-Hill, 2000. 6. Edward Hartmann, “Maintenance Management, Productivity and Quality Publishing Pvt. Ltd”., 1995.

297

59th ACM

09.06.2018 15SE33 AERODYNAMICS OF STREAMLINED AND BLUFF BODIES 3003

INVISCID AND INCOMPRESSIBLE FLOW: Lift, Drag, Moment and related coefficients conservation equations, flow lines, velocity functions, boundary layer, Bernoulli's equation, low-speed wind tunnel flows; Governing equations and boundary conditions; Elementary flows (uniform, sources, sinks and vortex); Ideal flow past a cylinder, conformal mapping, Kutta-Joukowski theorem and lift generation; Source panel method for non-lifting flows; D'Alembert's paradox. (13) INCOMPRESSIBLE FLOW OVER AIRFOILS: Kutta condition; Thin airfoil theory (symmetric, cambered); Aerodynamic centre; Vortex panel method for lifting flows; Effect of viscosity and Stokes‟ second problem. (10) FINITE WING THEORY: Downwash and induced drag; Biot-Savart Law and Helmholtz's theorems; Prandtl's lifting line theory; Numerical lifting-line method. (10) AERODYNAMICS AND WIND TUNNEL EXPERIMENTATION: Aerodynamics of horizontal-axis wind turbines, aerodynamics of bluff bodies, building aerodynamics, wind tunnel experiments, case studies. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Houghton E. L., Carpenter P. W. and Daniel T. Valentine, "Aerodynamics for Engineering students", Elsevier Ltd., 2013. 2. John D Anderson., "Fundamentals of Aerodynamics", McGraw Hill Book Co., 2011. 3. Lawson T, “Builing Aerodynamics”, Imperial College Press, 2010. 4. Tom L. Building Aerodynamics, World Scientific; 2010. 5. Hucho W H, “Aerodynamic of Road vehicles ", Butterworth Co. Ltd., 1998. 6. Pope A, “Wind Tunnel Testing ", John Wiley and Sons, 1974.

18SE34 DESIGN OF WIND ENERGY SYSTEMS 3003 DESIGN OF WIND TURBINE ROTOR: Basic aerodynamics-wind turbine model-blade element method-airfoil aerodynamicsboundary conditions-aerodynamic design of rotor-numerical simulation of wind turbine flow, rotor blades- polymer materialsprocessing technology-sandwich materials-material characterization. (11) DESIGN OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS: Rotor hub, blade pitch mechanism, rotor bearing concepts, rotor brake, gear box, nacelle, yaw system, assembly and performance testing, tower design. (11) SELECTION OF ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL SYSTEMS: Synchronous and asynchronous generator, assessment criteria for electrical generators, fixed speed generators, variable speed generator systems, directly rotor-driven systems, total electrical system of wind turbine, control systems and operation sequence control, wind measurement system, yaw control, power and speed control by blade pitching, power limiting by aerodynamic stall, supervisory control and operational states, simulation and hardware of control systems. (11) WIND TURBINE OPERATION, MAINTENANCE AND ECONOMICS: Wind farms, project development, planning, transportations, erection, grid connection, commissioning, operation and monitoring, safety aspects, maintenance and repair offshore wind energy, power optimization, power curve, annual energy yield, environmental impact, economics: factors influencing the wind energy, the present worth approach, cost of wind energy, benefits of wind energy, Case studies; yard sticks and tax advantages, carbon credit. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Hansen MO,”Aerodynamics of wind turbines”, Routledge, 2015. 2. Mathew S, Philip GS, “Advances in wind energy and conversion technology” Berlin, Springer, 2013. 3. Burton T, Jenkins N, Sharpe D, Bossanyi E. “Wind energy handbook” John Wiley and Sons,2011 . 4. Hau E, von Renouard H, “Wind turbines: fundamentals, technologies, application, economics”. Springer,2003 5. Johnson GL. Wind energy systems, Englewood Cliffs (NJ): Prentice-Hall,1985

AUDIT COURSES 18SE81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP81

18SE82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP82

298

59th ACM

09.06.2018

13. Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment ME INDUSTRIAL METALLURGY (FULL TIME)

Course Code

Course Title

I SEMESTER 18YN01 Statistical Quality Control and Design of Experiments

(2018 REGULATIONS) (Minimum credits to be earned: 72*) Hours/Week Maximum Marks Credits CAT Lecture Tutorial Practical CA FE Total 2

2

0

3

50

50

100

PC

Phase Transformations 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 Mechanical Metallurgy 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 Characterization Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 Casting Technology 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 Microstructural Analysis Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 18YN81 English for Research Paper Writing Total 26 Hrs 14 4 4 18 300 300 600 II SEMESTER 18YN06 Thermodynamics and Kinetics of 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 Materials 18YN07 Joining of Materials 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18YN08 Physical Metallurgy of alloys 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18YN09 Forming and Particulate Technology 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18YN__ Professional Elective – 1 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18YN__ Professional Elective – 2 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18YN52 Materials Testing and Characterization 50 50 0 0 4 2 100 Laboratory 18YN61 Industry Visit and Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 18YN82 Research Methodology and IPR Total 28 Hrs 18 2 8 23 400 400 800 III SEMESTER 18YN__ Professional Elective – 3 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18YN__ Professional Elective – 4 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18YN__ Professional Elective – 5 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18YN__ Professional Elective – 6 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18YN53 Computational Materials lab 50 50 0 0 4 2 100 18YN71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 Total 22 Hrs 12 0 10 17 300 300 600 IV SEMESTER 0 0 28 14 18YN72 Project Work II 50 50 100 Total 28 Hrs 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES (Six to be opted - out of which two may be electives from other ME / MTech programmes) Welding 18YN10 Welding Metallurgy 3 0 0 3 50 50 100

PC PC PC PC PC MC

18YN02 18YN03 18YN04 18YN05 18YN51

18YN11 18YN12 18YN13 18YN14 18YN15 18YN16 18YN17 18YN18

Welding Procedures and Qualifications Welding Codes and Standards Welding Consumables Design of Weldments Welding of Nickel alloys CASTING Advanced Casting Techniques Foundry Metallurgy Casting Design and Simulation

PC PC PC PC PE PE PE EEC MC

PE PE PE PE PE EEC

EEC

PE

3 3 3 3 3

0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0

3 3 3 3 3

50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE PE

3 3 3

0 0 0

0 0 0

3 3 3

50 50 50

50 50 50

100 100 100

PE PE PE

299

59th ACM 18YN19 18YN20

18YN21 18YN22 18YN23 18YN24 18YN25 18YN26 18YN27 18YN28 18YN29 18YN30 18YN31 18YN32 18YN33 18YN34 18YN35 18YN36 18YN37 18YN38 18YN39 18YN40 18YN41

09.06.2018

Quality Control in Foundries Foundry Practice for ferrous and Non ferrous castings MATERIALS ENGINEERING Iron and Steel Making Principles of Non-Ferrous Extraction Metallurgy Physical Metallurgy of Stainless Steels Physical Metallurgy of Structural Steels Heat Treatment and Surface Modification Environmental Degradation of Metals Non-Destructive Testing Ceramics and Polymers Composites Nanostructured Materials Emerging Materials Materials Selection Powder Metallurgy Coating Technology Metallurgical Failure Analysis and Life assessment Materials Modeling Metal Additive Manufacturing Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS) Laser and Plasma Processing of Materials Process Modelling Quality System Management

3 3

0 0

0 0

3 3

50 50

50 50

100 100

PE PE

3 3

0 0

0 0

3 3

50 50

50 50

100 100

PE PE

3 3 3

0 0 0

0 0 0

3 3 3

50 50 50

50 50 50

100 100 100

PE PE PE

3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE

3 3 3

0 0 0

0 0 0

3 3 3

50 50 50

50 50 50

100 100 100

PE PE PE

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PE

3 3

0 0

0 0

3 3

50 50

50 50

100 100

PE PE

* Indicated is the minimum number of credits to be earned by a student. ** - 60 hrs in I semester and 90 hrs in II semester; Grade: Completed / Not Completed CAT – Category; PC – Professional Core; PE - Professional Elective EEC – Employability Enhancement Course; MC- Mandatory Course

LANGUAGE ONE CREDIT COURSES 18OK01 18OK03

Research Writing in Engineering Sciences Personality Development

300

59th ACM

09.06.2018

13. Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment ME INDUSTRIAL METALLURGY (PART TIME)

Course Code

Course Title

I SEMESTER 18YN01 Statistical Quality Control and Design of Experiments

(2018 REGULATIONS) (Minimum credits to be earned: 72*) Hours/Week Maximum Marks Credits CAT Lecture Tutorial Practical CA FE Total 2

2

0

3

50

50

100

PC

Phase Transformations 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 Mechanical Metallurgy 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 Microstructural Analysis Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 18YN81 English for Research Paper Writing Total 16 Hrs 8 4 4 12 200 200 400 II SEMESTER 18YN04 Characterization Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18YN05 Casting Technology 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18YN06 Thermodynamics and Kinetics of 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 Materials 18YN52 Materials Testing and Characterization 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 Laboratory 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 18YN82 Research Methodology and IPR Total 15 Hrs 9 2 4 12 200 200 400 III SEMESTER 18YN07 Joining of Materials 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18YN08 Physical Metallurgy of alloys 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18YN09 Forming and Particulate Technology 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18YN53 Computational Materials lab 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 Total 13 Hrs 9 0 4 11 200 200 400 IV SEMESTER 18YN__ Professional Elective – 1 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18YN__ Professional Elective – 2 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18YN__ Professional Elective – 3 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18YN61 Industry Visit and Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 Total 11 Hrs 9 0 4 11 200 200 400 V SEMESTER 18YN__ Professional Elective – 4 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18YN__ Professional Elective – 5 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18YN__ Professional Elective – 6 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 18YN71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 Total 15 Hrs 9 0 6 12 200 200 400 VI SEMESTER 0 0 28 14 18YN72 Project Work II 50 50 100 Total 28 Hrs 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES (Six to be opted - out of which two may be electives from other ME / MTech programmes) Welding 18YN10 Welding Metallurgy 3 0 0 3 50 50 100

PC PC PC MC

18YN02 18YN03 18YN51

18YN11 18YN12 18YN13 18YN14 18YN15

Welding Procedures and Qualifications Welding Codes and Standards Welding Consumables Design of Weldments Welding of Nickel alloys

3 3 3 3 3

0 0 0 0 0 301

0 0 0 0 0

3 3 3 3 3

50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100

PC PC PC PE MC

PC PC PC PE

PE PE PE EEC

PE PE PE EEC

EEC

PE PE PE PE PE PE

59th ACM 18YN16 18YN17 18YN18 18YN19 18YN20

18YN21 18YN22 18YN23 18YN24 18YN25 18YN26 18YN27 18YN28 18YN29 18YN30 18YN31 18YN32 18YN33 18YN34 18YN35 18YN36 18YN37 18YN38 18YN39 18YN40 18YN41

09.06.2018

CASTING Advanced Casting Techniques Foundry Metallurgy Casting Design and Simulation Quality Control in Foundries Foundry Practice for ferrous and Non ferrous castings MATERIALS ENGINEERING Iron and Steel Making Principles of Non-Ferrous Extraction Metallurgy Physical Metallurgy of Stainless Steels Physical Metallurgy of Structural Steels Heat Treatment and Surface Modification Environmental Degradation of Metals Non-Destructive Testing Ceramics and Polymers Composites Nanostructured Materials Emerging Materials Materials Selection Powder Metallurgy Coating Technology Metallurgical Failure Analysis and Life assessment Materials Modeling Metal Additive Manufacturing Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS) Laser and Plasma Processing of Materials Process Modelling Quality System Management

3 3 3 3 3

0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0

3 3 3 3 3

50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE PE

3 3

0 0

0 0

3 3

50 50

50 50

100 100

PE PE

3 3 3

0 0 0

0 0 0

3 3 3

50 50 50

50 50 50

100 100 100

PE PE PE

3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE

3 3 3

0 0 0

0 0 0

3 3 3

50 50 50

50 50 50

100 100 100

PE PE PE

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PE

3 3

0 0

0 0

3 3

50 50

50 50

100 100

PE PE

* Indicated is the minimum number of credits to be earned by a student. ** - 60 hrs in I semester and 90 hrs in II semester; Grade: Completed / Not Completed CAT – Category; PC – Professional Core; PE - Professional Elective EEC – Employability Enhancement Course; MC- Mandatory Course

LANGUAGE ONE CREDIT COURSES 18OK01 18OK03

Research Writing in Engineering Sciences Personality Development

302

59th ACM

09.06.2018 SEMESTER I

18YN01 STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL AND DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS 2203 STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL: Methods and philosophy of statistical process control – chance and assignable causes of quality variation, statistical basis of control charts - control charts for variables - , R, and s charts - control charts for attributes – p, np, c and u charts. (8+7) ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING: Lot-by-Lot acceptance sampling for attributes – single sampling plans for attributes, double, multiple and sequential sampling plans, acceptance sampling by variables - chain sampling, continuous sampling, skip-lot sampling plans. (8+7) DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS: Fundamentals of experimental design, guidelines for designing experiments, analysis of variance, experiments with one factor, completely randomized design, randomized block design, factorial experiments, Latin square design. (8+7) RESPONSE SURFACE METHODOLOGY: Empirical models – linear regression models, estimation of parameters in linear regression models, confidence interval and hypothesis testing in multiple regression, 2-level factorial design – 23 design, general 2k design, single replication of 2k design, design for fitting second order models – class of central composite design. (8+7) Total L:32 + T:28 = 60 REFERENCES: 1. Amitava Mitra, Fundamentals of Quality Control and Improvement, John Wiley and Sons, New Jersey, 2016. 2. Eugene L Grant, Richard S Leavenworth, Statistical Quality Control, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, New Delhi, 2016. 3. Raymond H. Myers, Douglas C. Montgomery, Christine M. Anderson Cook, Response Surface Methodology: process and product optimization using experimental designs, John Wiley and Sons, 2016. 4. Ronald E Walpole, Raymond H Myers, Sharon L Myers and Keying Ye, Probability and Statistics for Engineers and Scientists, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2016. 5. Douglas C Montgomery, Introduction to Statistical Quality Control, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2009.

18YN02 PHASE TRANSFORMATIONS 3003 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY & PHASE EQUILIBRIA: Crystal systems-Detailed discussion of common crystal structures in metals. Crystal defects: Point, line, area and volume defects. Voids-types and location in BCC, FCC and HCP structures. Solution theory Types of solid solutions and compounds-Hume-Rothery rules for formation of substitutional solid solutions. Introduction to phase diagrams and detailed discussion on Fe-C equilibrium diagram. (11) FUNDAMENTALS OF PHASE TRANSFORMATIONS: Time Scale for phase transformations, types of transformations-spinoidal, nucleation & growth, theory of transformation kinetics- kinetics of solid state reactions occurring at elevated temperatures , liquid, solid state and dissociation reactions, nucleation and growth-nucleation kinetics, homogeneous nucleation, heterogeneous nucleation, growth and overall transformation kinetic - Sintering & crystallization in ceramics and glass forming systems. (12) SOLID STATE DIFFUSIVE TRANSFORMATION: Classification, Nucleation and growth - homogeneous and heterogeneous mechanism, Precipitate growth under different conditions, Age hardening, Spinoidal decomposition, Precipitate coarsening, Transformation with start range diffusion, Moving boundary transformations recrystallization, grain growth, eutectoid transformation, discontinuous reactions (11) PEARLITIC AND BAINITIC TRANSFORMATION: Factors influencing pearlitic transformation, Mechanism of transformation, Nucleation and growth, Orientation relationship. Bainite-mechanism of transformation, Nucleation and growth, Orientation relationships, Surface relief, Classical and non-classical morphology, Effect of alloying elements. DIFFSIONLESS TRANSFORMATION: Characteristics of Martensitic transformation, Thermodynamics and kinetics, Nucleation and growth, Morphology, Crystallography, Nonferrous martensite. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Reed Hill. R. E and Reza Abbaschian, University of Florida, "Physical Metallurgy Principles", Thomson Asia, Singapore 2003. 2. Porter. D. A and Easterling K E “Phase Transformations in Metals and Alloys", Chapman and Hall, London, 1992. 3. Sharma. R. C, Phase Transformations in Materials, CBS Publisher, 2002. 4. Raghavan. V, “Phase Transformations", Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1990. 5. Smallman. R. E and Bishop R J, “Metals and Materials", Butterworth-Heinemann Ltd., New Delhi, 1995.

18YN03 MECHANICAL METALLURGY 3003 PLASTIC DEFORMATION OF MATERIALS: Theoretical Cohesive strength and practically measured strength, Dislocations, Burger's Vector, Stress fields and Energies of dislocations, Deformation by slip – Critical resolved shear stress, Deformation by twinning, Perfect and imperfect dislocations, Forces between dislocations, Intersection and cutting of dislocations, Dislocation multiplication – Frank-Read sources, Dislocation pile-up‟s. (12) STRENGTHENING MECHANISMS- Grain size strengthening-solid solution strengthening-factors affecting solid solution strengthening. martensitic strengthening, precipitation hardening-conditions for precipitation hardening-aging-formation of precipitates-coarsening of precipitates, mechanism of strengthening-dispersion strengthening. (11) 303

59th ACM

09.06.2018

FRACTURE: Types of fracture, Brittle fracture - Griffith theory, Fractography, Dislocation theories of brittle fracture, Ductile fracture Notch effects - Effect of temperature, stress raisers and strain rate on fracture behavior of materials. Fracture Mechanics: Stress intensity factor - fracture toughness – Plane strain toughness testing - crack opening displacement - probabilistic aspects of fracture mechanics. (11) MECHANICAL TESTING OF MATERIALS: Tension test - constitutive equation - Instability - Notch tensile test - anisotropy of tensile properties. Hardness test - types - Micro hardness testing - concept of Nano indentations. Torsion test - torsional failures Structural aspects of torsional failures. Impact testing – DBTT, Instrumented charpy test - ASTM standards for the above testing Fatigue - S-N curve - Effect of mean stress on fatigue - structural features of fatigue failure - Miner's Rule - Effect of metallurgical variables - Creep - creep curve - Mechanism of creep deformation - Deformation mechanism maps - presentation of creep data prediction of long-time properties-creep test. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Dieter G E, “Mechanical Metallurgy”, Third edition, McGraw Hill Book Co., 2001. 2. Hull, "Introduction to Dislocation", John Wiley & Sons, N.Y, 2001. 3. Reed Hill R E, “Physical Metallurgy Principles”, Prentice Hall, N.Y., 2003. 4. Cottrell, "Theoretical Structural Metallurgy", ELBS, London, 2000.

18YN04 CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES 3003 LIGHT MICROSCOPY: Macro examination, principle and working of optical microscope, specimen preparation, optical principles numerical aperture, resolving power, depth of focus, depth of field, aberrations in optical microscopes and their remedial measures, different microscopic techniques-dark field microscopy, phase-contrast microscopy, polarized light microscopy, interference microscopy, high temperature microscopy; quantitative metallography. (11) X-RAY DIFFRACTION: X-Ray Radiation–Properties, Generation of X-rays, X-ray absorption, Diffraction-Bragg's law, Reciprocal Lattice, Laue‟s, rotating crystal and powder diffraction methods, X-ray diffractometer - principle, equipment and applications, X-ray filters and counters, Applications- Determination of crystal structure, lattice parameter, Crystallite Size calculation, Residual stress measurements. (11) TECHNIQUES OF ELECTRON MICROSCOPY: Electron specimen interactions, electron optical instruments, transmission electron microscopy - specimen preparation, imaging modes, applications, selected area diffraction, scanning electron microscopy operating modes and applications, electron probe microanalyser-qualitative and quantitative analysis, vacuum systems for electron microscopy. (11) ADVANCED MICROSCOPIC TECHNIQUES: Scanning probe microscopy-Scanning Tunneling Microscopy, Atomic force microscopy- principle, instrumentation and applications, field ion microscopy - principle, instrumentation and applications. SPECTROSCOPY: Optical emission spectroscopy, X-ray fluorescence spectroscopy - principle, equipment and applications. Auger Electron Spectroscopy–principle, instrumentation and applications in metallurgy; X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy - principle, instrumentation and applications; secondary ion mass spectroscopy - principle, instrumentation and applications. THERMAL ANALYSIS TECHNIQUES: Differential thermal analysis, Differential scanning calorimetry and Thermo-Gravimetric analysis principles, instrumentation, results interpretation. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Angelo P C, “Materials Characterization”, Reed Elsevier India Pvt Ltd, 2013. 2. Yang Leng, “Materials Characterization -Introduction to Microscopic and Spectroscopic Methods”, John Wiley & Sons Pte Ltd Singapore, 2008. 3. Cullity B D and Stock S R, “Elements of X-ray Diffraction”, Prentice Hall, Inc, 2001. 4. Hebbar K R, “Basics of X-Ray Diffraction and its Applications”, I.K. International Publishing House, New Delhi, 2007. 5. ASM Handbook, “Materials Characterisation”, ASM international, Volume 10, USA, 2017.

18YN05 CASTING TECHNOLOGY 3003 INTRODUCTION, PATTERNS, FOUNDRY SANDS: Types and foundries, various operations involved in foundries, Comparison of Solidification route with other manufacturing routes. Patterns - Types, design of patterns, Allowances, material selection and manufacture of patterns. Foundry Sand: Functional requirements moulding sand, types of moulding sand, preparation of mould sands, testing of moulding sand, Cores – types, core sand preparation, core supports. (10) MOULDIING AND CASTING PROCESSES: Classification of moulding processes, mould materials, bonds formed in moulding aggregates, green sand moulds, dry sand moulding, loam moulding, CO2 molds, shell moulding, Resin binder processes, plaster moulding processes, ceramic moulding processes, investment casting processes, graphite moulding processes, permanent mould casting processes, die casting processes, centrifugal casting processes, continuous casting processes, Squeeze casting, semi solid metal casting, directional solidification processes, CLA process, Thixocasting and Rheocasting processes. (12) MELTING FURNACES AND ENERGY CALCULATIONS: Types of furnaces, Construction and operation of electric arc furnace [Direct and Indirect Arc]. Core and core less induction furnace, cupola, rotary and crucible furnaces-Furnace design- cupola, crucible, Induction furnace - Energy audit, energy calculations, metal utilization, energy utilization-simple problems. (11)

304

59th ACM

09.06.2018

DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS AND CASTING DEFECTS: Casting design, methoding, Gating and Risering calculations, improvement of yield and efficiency, simple problems in gating and risering for steels and cast irons. Casting defects - Identification, analysis and Remedies. Fish bone diagram, FMEA and Y - Y analysis. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Srinivasan N K, “Foundry Engineering”, Khanna Tech. Publication Co, New Delhi, 2011. 2. Jain P L, “Principles of Foundry Technology”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co., Ltd, New Delhi, 2009. 3. Heine R W, Loper and Rosenthal, “Principles of Metal Casting”, Tata McGraw Hill Publication. Co., 2012. 4. ASM Hand Book, “Casting”, ASM international, Volume 15, USA, 2017. 5. Beelay PR, “Foundry Technology”, London, 2001. 6. Chakrabarti A K, “Casting Technology and Casting Alloys”, PHI Publishing Co, New Delhi, 2009.

18YN51 MICROSTRUCTURAL ANALYSIS LABORATORY 0042 LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: 1. Macro and Micro Examination of Castings and Welds. 2. Inclusion rating of Steels and Grain size measurement in Ferritic and Austenitic Steels. 3. Assessment of morphology and characteristics of graphite in various cast irons. 4. Identification of plain carbon and alloy steels from their microstructures. 5. Determination of mechanical working and heat treatment condition of steels. 6. Evaluation of ferrite and austenite content in different types of stainless steels. 7. Determination of susceptibility to IGC of Austenitic Stainless Steels by ASTM A262 Practice A - Oxalic acid Test. 8. Microstructural examination of Al – Si Cast Alloys, Brasses and Bronzes. 9. Microstructural examination of Inconel, Stellite and Alpha – Beta Titanium. 10. Investigations on surface modified and hardened steels and tool steels. Total P: 60 REFERENCES: 1. Laboratory manual prepared by the Department of Metallurgical Engineering. 2. ASM Handbook: Metallography and Microstructures”, ASM Internationals, Volume 9, USA, 2017.

SEMESTER II 18YN06 THERMODYNAMICS AND KINETICS OF MATERIALS 3204 INTRODUCTION FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS : System and surrounding, classification of systems, path and state properties, thermodynamic processes - First law of thermodynamics thermodynamic equilibrium, reversible and irreversible processes, intensive and extensive properties, Heat and work, internal energy, heat capacity of materials, enthalpy, thermo chemistry, Hess's law, Kirchoff's law. (10+3) SECOND, THIRD AND ZEROTH LAWS LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS: Carnot cycle, entropy-statistical interpretation of entropy, combined statement of first and second laws- Free energy- thermodynamic functions-Maxwell's relations, Gibbs-Helmholtz equation, effect of temperature on the thermodynamic properties. Third and Zeroth laws of thermodynamics, applications. (11+3) THERMODYNAMIC POTENTIALS, SOULTIONS AND EQUILIBRIA IN PHASE DIAGRAMS: Fugacity, activity and equilibrium constant. Clausius-Clayperon equation: effect of pressure on the equilibrium temperatures (water and iron systems). Le Chatelier's principle, Vant Hoff's equation - Thermodynamics of Solutions: Gibbs - Duhem equation, partial and integral molar quantities, ideal solutions - Raoult's law, real solutions, activity coefficient, Henry's law, alternative standard states, Sievert's law, mixing functions and excess functions, regular solutions, applications of Gibbs-Duhem equation - Ellingham diagram free energy- composition diagrams to the study of alloy systems. Free energy-temperature diagram for metastable phases- thermodynamic factors behind the iron carbon phase diagram. (12+5) KINETICS: First, second and third order reactions- Arrhenius equation-activation energy. Determination of order of the reaction types of processes- Kinetics at high temperatures, Kinetics of heterogeneous reactions, Kinetics of homogeneous reactions, variation of reaction rate with concentration and temperature. Theory of absolute reaction rate, Problems, Gas–solid and gas–liquid interfacial reactions. Fick‟s first law, Generalized diffusion equation, Steady state, Pseudo steady state, Unsteady state diffusion – One dimensional cases, Diffusion coefficient, Examples of Pseudo steady state diffusion and unsteady state diffusion (12+4) Total =L: 45+T: 15= 60 REFERENCES: 1. David R Gaskell, "Introduction to the Thermodynamics of Materials", Taylor and Franhs, 2003. 2. Upadhyaya G S and Dube R K, "Problems in Metallurgical Thermodynamics and Kinetics", Pergamon, 1977. 3. Gokcen, Reddy R G,"Thermodynamics", Plenum Press, New York, 1996. 4. David V Ragone, "Thermodynamics of Materials”, John Wiley and Sons, 1995. 5. Darken L S and Gurry R W, "Physical Chemistry of Metals", McGraw Hill, 1987. 6. Parker R H, "An introduction to Chemical Metallurgy", Perganon press, New York, 1978. 305

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18YN07 JOINING OF MATERIALS `

3003

INTRODUCTION: Joining techniques, Welding processes and grouping, welding terms, AWS specifications for classification ARC PHYSICS: Plasma, electron emission and ionization potential, arc temperature, influence of magnetic fields on arcs, arc blow, metal transfer, effect of polarity, effect of shielding gases. POWER SOURCES: Static and dynamic characteristics, CC and CV power source designs, current and voltage relationships, solid state power sources, wave form controlled power sources. (11) HEAT FLOW IN WELDING: Heat transfer in weldments, dissipation of welding heat, cooling rates, weld metal cooling curves, peak temperature, calculating width of heat affected zones, solidification rate and effects of heat input. PROCESSES: Shielded metal arc welding, gas metal arc welding, flux cored arc welding, gas tungsten arc welding: process equipment, control of parameters, consumable, specifications for electrodes and filler metals and applications. (12) PROCESSES: plasma arc welding, submerged arc welding, stud arc welding. process equipment, control of parameters, consumable, specifications for electrodes and filler metals and applications Oxy-fuel gas welding, Electro Slag Welding, Resistance welding, Electron Beam Welding, Laser beam Welding, Thermit welding, Allied process. (11) SOLID STATE WELDING PROCESSES – friction welding, friction stir welding, explosive welding, ultrasonic welding, diffusion welding. Weld overlay, thermal cutting and thermal spraying. Brazing and Soldering, WELDING DEFECTS: Causes and remedial methods, Residual Stresses and Distortion, Safety in Welding Introduction to Welding Metallurgy (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. ASM Handbook, “Welding, Brazing and Soldering”, ASM international, Volume 6, USA, 2017. 2. Nadkarni S V, “Modern Arc Welding Technology”, Oxford IBH Publishers, 1996. 3. Howard B Cary, “Modern Welding Technology”, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2002. 4. Parmar R S, “Welding Engineering and Technology”, Khanna Publishers, 2003. 5. AWS Welding Handbook, “Welding Processes - Part 1”, American Welding Society, 2004. 6. AWS Welding Handbook, “Welding Processes- Part 2”, American Welding Society, 2004.

18YN08 PHYSICAL METALLURGY OF ALLOYS 3003 ALLOY STEELS: Introduction to plain carbon steels, effect of alloying elements in Fe- Fe3C diagram - Physical metallurgy, composition, structure, property, effect of alloy elements, heat treatment and applications of maraging steels, HSLA and micro alloyed steels, armour steels, DP steels, IF steels, TRIP steels, bainitic steels, silicon steels, high manganese steels, tool steels and steels for high temperature application. (12) STAINLESS STEELS: Physical metallurgy, composition, structure, property, effect of alloy elements, heat treatment and applications of ferritic, martensitic, austenitic, precipitation hardening, duplex, Nickel free stainless steels, high nitrogen stainless steels (HNS) - Sensitization- causes and remedial measures for stainless steels - classifications by AISI system. (10) ALUMINIUM, COPPER AND MAGNESIUM ALLOYS: Classification, designation, composition, heat treatment, microstructure, properties physical metallurgy and composition of pure aluminium and its alloys strengthening mechanisms in non-heat treatable alloys and heat treatable alloys; introduction to Al-Li alloys - Classification, designation, physical metallurgy, composition, heat treatment, microstructure, properties and composition of pure copper and its alloys. - Properties and applications of magnesium and magnesium alloys; influence of alloying elements-Al, Mn, Zn, Si, Ag, Th, Zr; classification-cast alloys and wrought alloys. (13) TITANIUM AND NICKEL: Classification, effect of alloying elements, heat treatment, microstructure, physical metallurgy, properties and applications of Titanium and its alloys -Alpha stabilisers; beta stabilisers; Metallurgy of nickel base alloys-Alloying elements and their effects-Nickel base super alloys, types, composition, physical metallurgy, properties and applications.Other nonferrous alloys zinc, tin, lead, refractory materials, zirconium alloys, rare earth metals. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Balram Gupta, “Aerospace Materials volume 1- 4”, S Chand and Co., New Delhi, 2002. 2. Clark and Varney, “Physical Metallurgy for Engineers”, Affiliated East West press, New York, 1987. 3. Lula R, “Stainless Steels”, ASM, Ohio, 1990. 4. Brick, Gordon and Pense, “Structure and Properties of Engineering Materials”, McGraw Hill Book Co., New York, 1992. 5. ASM Hand Book, “Casting”, ASM international, Volume 15, USA, 2017.

18YN09 FORMING AND PARTICULATE TECHNOLOGY 3003 FORMING: Fundamentals of Metal forming: Components of stress - principal stresses - Von Mises, Tresca yield criteria, flow-stress determination, effect of temperature, strain rate, microstructure, residual stresses and defects in materials – hydrostatic pressure, friction and lubrication. (11) FORMING OPERATIONS: Forging, rolling, extrusion, drawing : classification – equipment - forming load calculations – deformation zone geometry - problems and defects, sheet metal forming: methods, forming limit diagram, defects. (11)

306

59th ACM

09.06.2018

SEVERE PLASTIC DEFORMATION: methods: Equal Channel Angular Pressing, High Pressure Torsion, Accumulated Roll bonding, Repeated corrugation and straightening and Twist Extrusion - applications – super plastic forming – High velocity forming – methods, advantages and applications. (11) POWDER METALLURGY: Introduction – brief description on stages in P/M processing – production - consolidation: compaction and sintering, plastic forming-rolling, extrusion and forging, secondary and finishing operations, applications. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Dieter G E, “Mechanical Metallurgy”, McGraw Hill, 2001. 2. William F Hasford and Robert M Caddell, “Metal Forming: Mechanics and Metallurgy”, Cambridge University Press P. ltd., London, 2007. 3. Angelo P C and Subramanian R, “Powder Metallurgy Science, Technology and Applications”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2012. 4. Upadhayaya G S, Upadhyaya A and Tagaki K, “Powder Metallurgy-Science Technology and Materials”, Universities Press, UK, 2011.

18YN52 MATERIALS TESTING AND CHARACTERIZATION LABORATORY 0042 LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: 1. Hardness test, Impact test and Tension Test. 2. Wear Test 3. Non Destructive Testing 4. Corrosion Test 5. Quantitative Metallography and Optical emission spectroscopy 6. Determination of crystal structure, lattice parameter using XRD 7. Determination of crystallite size and lattice strain using XRD 8. Scanning Electron Microscopy imaging and EDS 9. Failure analysis using Scanning Electron Microscopy 10. Transmission Electron Microscope sample preparation, demonstration and SAD pattern indexing. Total P: 60 .

18YN61 INDUSTRY VISIT & TECHNICAL SEMINAR 0042 VISIT TO INDUSTRIES: Study tour/Industry visit. Reports are to represent the observations of the students after the visits with their personal comments/suggestions. TECHNICAL SEMINAR : Lectures by experts preferably from industries to highlight the recent technical and soft skill trends.

SEMESTER III 18YN53 COMPUTATIONAL MATERIALS LAB 0042 LIST OF EXPERIMENTS 1. Introduction to CALPHAD approach and Thermo Calc software, Free energy calculation. 2. Construction of binary and ternary phase diagrams and label primary phases using Thermo Calc software. (Fe-Fe3C system, Fe- Cr system, Al-Si system, Fe-Cr-Ni system and etc) 3. Construction of the property diagram and calculation of amount of phases for multi component alloy systems using Thermo Calc software. (Alloy steels and nonferrous alloys) 4. Construction of isothermal and non- isothermal cooling curves for various ferrous alloys using TC-PRISMA. 5. Study of precipitation kinetics in alloy steels using TC- PRISMA. 6. Study of precipitation kinetics in non ferrous alloys using TC- PRISMA. 7. Simulation of Scheil Solidification of ferrous and non ferrous alloys using Thermo Calc software. 8. Study of diffusion behavior of carbon in steels using DICTRA. 9. Study of homogenization of a binary Fe-Ni alloy using DICTRA. 10.Study of diffusion behavior of dissimilar weldments using DICTRA. Total P: 60

18YN71 PROJECT WORK - I 0063 COURSE CONTENT: 1. Identification of a real life problem in thrust areas of metallurgy and materials. 2. Developing a suitable methodology for solving the above problem. 3. Finalisation of system requirements and specification. 4. Proposing satisfactory solutions for the problem based on literature survey. 5. Conducting experiments, analyzing, and interpret the results. 6. Consolidated report 307

59th ACM

09.06.2018 SEMESTER IV 18YN72 PROJECT WORK – II 0 0 28 14

Identification of a real life problem in thrust areas, literature survey, experimental work, results and discussion, paper writing, thesis writing.

ELECTIVES WELDING 18YN10 WELDING METALLURGY 3003 WELD SOLIDIFICATION AND TRANSFORMATION IN WELDMENTS: Weld solidification, Absorption of gases, liquid metal reactions, solid state transformations in weldments, strengthening mechanisms in weld metals, heat affected zones WELDABILITY AND WELDABILITY TESTING: Factors affecting weldability, cold cracking tests, hot cracking tests, Gleeble test, Mechanical tests (emphasis on tension and bend tests) (11) WELDING OF CARBON STEELS AND LOW ALLOY STEELS: Phase transformation, Hydrogen induced cracking, carbon equivalent, preheating and post heating, solidification cracking, lamellar cracking, reheat cracking. WELDING OF CAST IRONS: Weld metal and HAZ microstructures, Defects and remedies, Filler metal selection. (11) WELDING OF STAINLESS STEELS: Welding of austenitic, ferritic, martensitic, duplex and precipitation hardenable stainless steels. General Welding characteristics, Weld microstructures, Weld cracking and other metallurgical difficulties, Use of Constitution diagrams (Schaeffler, Delong, WRC-1992), Filler metal selection, Dissimilar welds with stainless steels. WELDING OF ALUMINIUM ALLOYS: Oxide formation, Hydrogen solubility, Difficulties due to electrical and thermal characteristics, sensitivity to weld cracking. Filler metal selection. Weldability of heat treatable and non-heat-treatable aluminium alloys. (12) WELDING OF NICKEL ALLOYS, TITANIUM ALLOYS AND COPPER ALLOYS: Weld metal and HAZ microstructures, Defects and Remedies, Filler metal selection. WELDING OF SPECIAL ALLOYS: Welding of magnesium alloys, tool steels and clad metals. WELDING QUALIFICATIONS: Welding Procedure Specification, Procedure qualification and welder qualification. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Lancaster J F, “Metallurgy of Welding”, George Allen Co, Boston, 1980. 2. ASM Handbook, “Welding, Brazing and Soldering”, ASM international, Volume 6, USA, 2017. 3. Linnert G E, “Welding Metallurgy”, AWS, New York, 1995. 4. AWS Welding Handbook, “Materials and Applications - Part 1”, AWS, USA, 2004. 5. AWS Welding Handbook, “Materials and Applications - Part 2”, AWS, USA, 2004. 6. Sindo Kou, “Welding Metallurgy”, John Wiley & Sons, 2003.

18YN11 WELDING PROCEDURES AND QUALIFICATIONS 3003 PROCESSES & WELDING METALLURGY: OVERVIEW OF SELECTED PROCESSES: SMAW, GTAW, GMAW, FCAW, SAW: AWS: Fundamentals, Equipments, Electrodes / Filler metals Classifications as per AWS. Review of welding metallurgy of selected metals – Carbon steels, low alloy steels, stainless steels, Ni alloys, Cu alloys, Al alloys, ASME B&PV Code – Sections IIC and IX CODE PRACTICE Familiarization of codes: Section IIC, Section IX of ASME B&PV Essential variables, non-essential variables, Supplementary essential variables WPS formats, PQR formats and WPQ formats Test requirements; Range qualified for varying values of essential values (12) WELDING PROCEDURE SPECIFICATIONS (WPS) – FERRITIC STEELS Preparation of WPS‟s for metal joining for Process variation: SMAW, GTAW, GTAW+SMAW, GMAW, SAW, SMAW+SAW, GTAW+SAW Material variation: Carbon steels, Low Alloy Steels, Cr-Mo Steels Post Weld Heat Treatment: No PWHT, Stress Relieving, Other Heat Treatments Thickness: 2 to 200 mm. Model WPSs of all the above categories and combinations to be prepared. (11) WELDING PROCEDURE SPECIFICATIONS (WPS) – STAINLESS STEELS AND NON-FERROUS ALLOYS Preparation of WPS‟s for metal joining for Process variation: SMAW, GTAW, GTAW+SMAW, GMAW, SAW, SMAW+SAW, GTAW+SAW Material variation: Stainless steels, Nickel alloys, Copper alloys, Titanium alloys, Al Alloys. Preparation of WPS‟s for dissimilar metal joining for Process variation. SMAW, GTAW+SMAW Material combination: Carbon steel to low alloy steels, Stainless steels to carbon steels, Copper alloys to carbon steels, Low alloy steels to another low alloy steel. Preparation of WPS‟s for weld overlaying of Stainless steels over carbon steel, Nickel alloys over carbon steels, Cu alloys over carbon steels, Stellite over carbon steels / stainless steels Model WPS of all the above categories and combinations to be prepared. (11) PQRS AND WPQS Preparation of PQRs for selected WPSs Preparation of WPQs for selected WPSs for various processes, material thicknesses, positions for butt welding, fillet welding and weld overlay.Model PQRs to be prepared for WPSs for butt welding, fillet welding and weld overlay. (11) 308

59th ACM

09.06.2018 Total L: 45

REFERENCES: 7. ASM Handbook, “Welding, Brazing and Soldering”, ASM international, Volume 6, USA, 2017. 1. Sindo Kou, “Welding Metallurgy”, John Wiley & Sons, 2003. 2. “ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code Section IIC”, ASME International, 2015. 3. “ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code Section IX”, ASME International, 2015. 4. API Standard 1104, “Welding of Pipelines and Related Facilities”, API, 2013. 5. AWS D1.1, “Structural Welding Code”, American Welding Society, 2010.

18YN12 WELDING CODES AND STANDARDS 3003 WELDING PROCEDURE AND PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATION: General tests for welding qualifications, Procedure qualifications, Welding Procedure Qualifications, Essential variables for processes like SMAW, SAW, FCAW, GTAW, PAW. Test coupon prepration, specimen preparation, testing and acceptance limits, Procedure qualifications, Range qualified. Practice for preparation of WPS for various processes and material combinations. Main code: ASME B&PV IX. (11)

MATERIALS AND CONSUMABLES: Classification of materials: Ferrous and Non Ferrous, Compositions, mechanical properties, for various shapes – plates, forgings, castings, wires, rods and pipes. As per ASTM, ASME B&PV II A and IIB Classification of welding electrodes and filler metals for various processes like SMAW, GMAW, GTAW, SAW and for materials like carbon steels, low alloy steels, stainless steels, cast irons, hard facing alloys, nickel alloys, copper alloys, alumnium alloys and titanium alloys. Compositional features, mechanical properties and other tests. Consumable qualifications. As per AWS Specs / ASME B&PV IIC (9) STRUCTURAL WELDING CODES: General requirements of structural fabrications, welding symbols, Welded connections, nontubular and tubular members, static loading, cyclic loading, Joint configurations, Groove welds, Fillet welds, plug and slot welds, Built up members, calculation of stresses, stress ranges, Prequalification of WPS, Temperature requirements, Minimum preheat and interpass temperatures, PWHT, Welding personnel qualifications, Weld types, preparation of WPSs, Testing and acceptance criteria for SPS qualifications, welding consumable and electrode testing, distortion control, Inspection, NDT, As per AWS D1.1 (9) PETROLEUM PIPING FABRICATION : Qualification of welding procedures for welds containing filler metal additives, Procedure qualifications, Welding of test joints, Butt welds, Testing of butt welds, Welding of Test Joints-Fillet Welds , Testing of Welded JointsFillet Welds, Qualification of welders, Single Qualification Multiple Qualification, Visual Examination, Destructive Testing , Radiography-Butt Welds, Retesting, Design and preparation of a joint for production welding , Alignment , As per API 1104. (9) PRESSURE VESSEL FABRICATION: Pressure vessel materials, Design, Openings and Reinforcements, Braced and Stayed Surfaces, Fabrication, Inspection and Tests, Marking and Reports, Overpressure Protection, Design requirements fabrication methods, joint categories, welding and inspection, post weld heat treatment and hydrotesting. As per ASME B&PV VIII-1. (9) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. ASM Handbook, “Welding, Brazing and Soldering”, ASM international, Volume 6, USA, 2017. 2. ASME B&PV Code Section IX and Sections I, IIC, VIII Div 1, IX, 2015 3. API Code 1104: Welding of pipelines and related facilities. 4. AWS code D1.1 Structural welding – steel.

18YN13 WELDING CONSUMABLES 3003 FLUX COATED ELECTRODES: SMAW electrodes for carbon steels, low alloy steels, stainless steels, Al alloys, Cu alloys, Ni alloys – Classification as per AWS, Requirements of mechanical properties, chemical composition, testing requirements, intended use of important electrodes Problems based on selection of flux coated electrodes based on flux characteristics, material to be welded, properties required / applications. Filler metal qualification as per Section IIC. (11) BARE WELDING ELECTRODES AND RODS: Bare welding electrodes and rods for carbon steels, low alloy steels, stainless steels, Al alloys, Ni alloys, Cu alloys, Ti alloys– Classification as per AWS, Requirements of mechanical properties, chemical composition, testing requirements, intended use of important electrodes. Problems based on selection of bare welding electrodes and rods based on material to be welded, properties required / applications. Filler metal qualification as per Section IIC. (11) ELECTRODES AND FLUXES FOR SAW AND FLUX CORED ELECTRODES: SAW electrodes for carbon steels, low alloy steels, Fluxes, manufacturing methods, chemical nature; FCAW electrodes for Carbon steels, Low alloy steels, Stainless steels, Ni alloys. Classification as per AWS, Requirements of mechanical properties, chemical composition, testing requirements, intended use of important electrodes. Problems based on selection of electrodes and fluxes based on flux characteristics, material to be welded, properties required / applications. Filler metal qualification as per Section IIC. (11) SURFACING ELECTRODES, CAST IRON ELECTRODES AND RODS: Classification as per AWS, Requirements of mechanical properties, chemical composition, testing requirements, intended use of important electrodes Problems based on selection of electrodes / rods based on material to be welded, properties required / applications. Filler metal qualification as per Section IIC.BRAZING METALS, BRAZING FLUXES, TUNGSTEN ELECTRODES, SHIELDING GASES: Classification as per AWS, 309

59th ACM

09.06.2018

intended use, testing requirements, Shielding gases - Types, characteristics, physical properties, shielding properties, applications. Problems based on brazing metals, brazing fluxes, tungsten electrodes, shielding gases based on material to be joined, properties required / applications. Filler metal qualification as per Section IIC. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. ASME Boiler and pressure Vessel Code – Part II C – Specifications for Welding Rods, Electrodes and Filler metals, 2013. 2. Larry Jeffus, “Welding principles and applications”, Delmer Cengage learning, 2012. 3. Lancaster, “Metallurgy of welding”, ELS, 2012. 4. Granjon, “Fundamental of welding metallurgy”, Abington, 1991. .

18YN14 DESIGN OF WELDMENTS 3003 DESIGN BASICS: Types of joints, Types of welds, variants of joints, selection of weld type, weld joints for structural tubular connections, welding symbols, weld dimensions, NDT symbols. Principles of weld joint design – General and specific design principles. FAILURE ANALYSIS: Failure analysis – methodology, approaches, tools and techniques of failure analysis, modes of failure, failure data retrieval, procedural steps for investigation of a failure for failure analysis. Case studies in welding. (12) WELD DESIGN FOR STATIC LOADING: Material or section properties, Weld design stress calculation for welds, design under different types of loading like tension, compression, bending, shear, torsion and shock (11) WELD DESIGN FOR DYNAMIC LOADING: Basic details of fatigue and fatigue failure, S-N curve, Goodman diagram, factors affecting fatigue life of welded joint , methods of improving fatigue life of welded structures-design for fatigue loading, weld design using fracture toughness value (KIC). (11) DISTORTION AND RESIDUAL STRESSES: Welding residual stresses-causes, occurrence, effects-thermal and mechanical relieving. Types of distortion – factors affecting distortion –distortion control methods-prediction- correction, jigs, fixtures and positioners. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Bladgett O W, “Design of Weldments”, James F. Lincoln Arc Welding Foundation, 1991 2. Parmar R S, “Welding Engineering and Technology” 1st edition,1997. 3. Gurney T R. Fatigue of Welded Structures. Cambridge University Press, 1979. 4. Rolfe T., Barsom. J., Fracture and Fatigue Control of Structures-Applications of Fracture Mechanics, Prentice Hall, 1977. 5. ASM Metals Hand Book. Failure Analysis and Prevention. ASM international, Volume 11, USA, 2017. 6. Das A K., Metallurgy of Failure Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1992.

18YN15

WELDING OF NICKEL ALLOYS 3003

SOLID-SOLUTION STRENGTHENED NI-BASE ALLOYS: Standard Alloys and Consumables, Welding Metallurgy ,Microstructural Evolution in the Fusion Zone, Heat Affected Zone, Mechanical Properties of Weldments, Postweld Heat Treatment, Weldability, Fusion Zone Solidification Cracking, HAZ Liquation Cracking, Ductility-Dip Cracking. (12) PRECIPITATION-STRENGTHENED NI-BASE ALLOYS -Standard Alloys and Consumables, Welding Metallurgy , Microstructural Evolution in the Fusion Zone, Heat-Affected Zone, Postweld Heat Treatment, Mechanical Properties of Weldments, Weldability ,Solidification Cracking, HAZ Liquation Cracking, Strain-Age Cracking. (11) OXIDE DISPERSION STRENGTHENED ALLOYS AND NICKEL ALUMINIDES - Oxide Dispersion Strengthened Alloys , Physical and Mechanical Metallurgy , Welding Metallurgy, Nickel Aluminide Alloys,Physical and Mechanical Metallurgy,Weldability of the NiAluminides. (11) Dissimilar Welding-Application of Dissimilar Welds, Influence of Process Parameters on Fusion Zone Composition in Carbon, Low Alloy and Stainless Steels, Determining Weld Metal Constitution, Fusion Boundary Transition Region, Postweld Heat Treatment. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1.John C. Lippold, Samuel D. Kiser, John N. DuPont,”Welding Metallurgy and Weldability of Nickel-Base Alloys”, 1st Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2009. 2. AWS Welding hand books, 9th Edition, Volume1 to Volume 5, American Welding Society. 3. ASM Handbook, “Welding, Brazing and Soldering”, ASM international, Volume 6, USA, 2017.

310

59th ACM

09.06.2018

CASTING 18YN16 ADVANCED CASTING TECHNIQUES 3003 INVESTMENT CASTING: Investment casting -pattern and mould materials-types of waxes-tests for pattern waxes- dewaxing methods – additives, resins, fillers used in investment casting-purpose of addition-process parameters- techniques and production of investment moulds- shaw process-full mould process- CLA and CLV processes-replicast-applications of investment casting process. (10) SHELL MOULDING AND CENTRIFUGAL CASTING PROCESSES: Shell moulding machines-Pattern equipment - sands, resins and other materials used for shell moulding, - preparation of resin and sand mixture-process parameters- application of shell moulding - advantages of shell moulding- Types of centrifugal casting processes - calculation of mould rotary speeds - techniques, equipments and production processes-Advantages and limitations of centrifugal casting methods. (11) DIE CASTING AND OTHER CASTING PROCESSES: Methods, Permanent moulding, LPDC, PDC, VDC - Die casting machinesoperation and details-Die materials-metals cast by die casting method-advantages of die casting - Fluid sand process, V process Graphite moulding process, Magnetic Moulding, Impulse moulding, high pressure moulding, ceramic moulding, cement bonded moulding. (11) SEMI SOLID METAL CASTING: Introduction, Rheology and Thixotropy, difference between conventional casting and semi solid metal casting processes, physical metallurgy of semi solid casting alloys, Slurry processing - Thixo Processes and Rheo processes, Mould and die preparation, furnaces, methods, machines, die casting materials and applications - Squeeze casting - methods and applications - Mechanical stirring, Magneto Hydrodynamic stirring (MHD), Non agitation: Cooling Slope casting - Solid route - Strain Induced Melt Activated (SIMA), Recrystallisation and Partial Melting (RAP), Direct Partial Remelting (DPRM), strip casting process. (13) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Beeley P R, ”Foundry Technology", Butterworths, London, 2001. 2. Clegg A J,"Precision Casting Processes", Pergamon Press, London, 1991. 3. David H. Kirkwood, Michel Suéry, Platon Kapranos, Helen V. Atkinson, Kenneth P. Young “Semi-solid Processing of Alloys”, Springer Science & Business Media, 2009. 4. Shahrooz Nafisi, Reza Ghomashchi “ Semi-Solid Processing of Aluminum Alloys” Springer, 2016 5. Anacleto de Figueredo “Science and technology of semi-solid metal processing “North American Die Casting Assoc., 2001.

18YN17 FOUNDRY METALLURGY 3003 SOLIDIFICATION OF METALS AND ALLOYS: Solidification of castings, solidification patterns of metals and alloys - microstructure development. Effect of composition, moulding materials and cooling rate on solidification pattern, segregations in castings, segregation patterns in steel ingot. Shrinkage of casting, types- linear and volume shrinkages, - theoretical calculations of linear and column shrinkages, shrinkage cavities, location, shape and size of shrinkage cavities – calculation of solidification time in metals and alloys - directional solidification of castings. (11) METALLURGY OF CAST METALS AND ALLOYS: Types, microstructures, properties, compositions, specifications IS, BS,EN and ASTM standards of various cast irons, steels, aluminum, copper, magnesium and zinc base alloys. (13) HEAT TREATMENT OF CASTINGS: Annealing, normalising, hardening and tempering of steels, microstructures of steels in as cast and various heat treated conditions. Construction of TTT and CCT diagrams – Austempering, martempering. Heat treatment practices for cast irons, aluminum, copper and other non ferrous alloys. (13) GASES IN CASTINGS, FLUIDITY, RESIDUAL STRESSES IN CASTINGS: Gases in metals and alloys, measurements of gases and Degassing Techniques - Fluidity - Definition, factors affecting fluidity and measurement of fluidity. Residual stresses in castings - Origin, effects and stress relieving operations. (8) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Heine R W Loper and Rosenthal, “Principles of Metal Casting”, Tata McGraw Hill. Publication. Co., 2012. 2. ASM Handbook, “Casting”, ASM international, Volume 15, USA, 2017. 3. Peter Beelay, “Foundry Technology”, Butterworth, London, UK, 2001. 4. John Campbell, “Casting”, Elsevier Publishing Amsterdam, 2011.

18YN18 CASTING DESIGN AND SIMULATION 3003 OVERVIEW OF CASTING PROCESSES: Introduction to casting simulations, types of casting simulation software, methoding and requirement for design of castings. Optimization of casting defects- Cause and effect diagram, Fish bone diagram, WHY method and FMEA. (12) CASTING DESIGN AND ANALYSIS: Minimum section thickness, hot spots and hot tears, junctions, ribs, and bosses. Design for moulding, core making and cleaning. Design for continuous casting. (11) 311

59th ACM

09.06.2018

COMPUTER SIMULATION OF CASTING PROCESSES: Mould filling simulation, solid modeling, thermal analysis, solidification simulation, feeder size and weight calculations and cost benefits of solidification simulation. Mold-metal filling optimization. (12) DESIGN FOR CASTABILITY: Product design for castability, process- friendly design and castability analysis. Prediction of cooling curves, local microstructures and mechanical properties for metals and alloys. Prediction of mould erosions, sand burnt-on, sand penetration and sand inclusions. (10) REFERENCES: 1. Ravi. B, Metal Casting Computer-Aided Design and Analysis, PHI learning Private Limited, 2011. 2. Complete casting hand book metal casting processes, metallurgy, techniques and design, John Campbell Butterworth – Heinemann publication, 2015.

18YN19 QUALITY CONTROL IN FOUNDRIES 3003 INTRODUCTION TO QUALITY CONTROL: Definition of quality control- need for quality improvement and control- dissemination of quality information- quality and cost analysis-quality control and inspection-responsibility for quality control- quality control through standardization- quality control organization. Quality planning, record and documents. Reliability engineering. (12) STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL: Introduction- probability- probability distribution- Binomial distribution-Poisson distributionnormal distribution-statistical quality control (SQC)-statistical process control (CPC) in foundries- Process capability indices- process variables in foundries acceptance control charts-applications of control charts in foundries -simple problems. (11) METHODS OF INSPECTION AND QUALITY APPRAISAL: Requirement for inspections – inspection of castings, equipment and techniques to be used- methods to reduce energy consumption in foundry-Environmental pollution control- inspection of castingsExperts system for casting defects analysis- accuracy evaluations and analysis of dimensions-quality function deployment (QFD)case studies on casting defect analysis. (11) QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND TOTAL QUALITY CONTROL: Quality policy- quality system and its activities -Reporting and review- quality control system quality system documentation-corrective and preventive actions-third party inspection- Planning and management of foundry–quality assurance system-- ISO standards for quality system- Important clauses in ISO:9000 specifications, ISO 9001/9002 (IS 14002) specifications – essential steps in implementing the quality system for ISO:9000- QS:9000 quality system- some case studies. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Jain P L, “Quality Control and Total quality Management”, Tata McGraw Hill publishing company limited, New Delhi, 2006 2. Jain P L, “Principles of Foundry technology”, Tata McGraw Hill publishing company limited, New Delhi, 2003 3. Ramana Rao T V, “Metal Casting Principles and Practice”, New Age International Publishers, 2010. 4. Srinivasan N K, ”Foundry Engineering”, Kanna Publishers, Fourth Edition- 2012.

18YN20 FOUNDRY PRACTICE FOR FERROUS AND NON FERROUS CASTINGS 3003 CAST IRONS: Introduction to cast irons, types of cast irons, specifications and standards. Melting practice for grey cast iron, SG iron, Malleable and white cast irons, ADI CGI, -High chromium high carbon cast irons, Ni-hard, Ni-resist and High Silicon. Charge calculations, charge additions and Simple calculations. Methods of melting- furnaces, modes of operations, lining materials and lining procedures. Treatment of liquid metal before casting- Inoculations, Mg treatment, degassing and modification. Post casting operations- cleaning, finishing operations, and heat treatment processes. Quality inspections- destructive and non destructive testing. (12). STEELS: Introduction to plain carbon steels and alloys steels, classifications of steels, specifications and standards. Melting practice for plain carbon, Ni-steels, Cr-Mo steels, Cr-Mo-V steels, high Mn steels, stainless steels, and maraging steels and low density steels. Melting techniques -charge calculations, charge additions, furnaces, modes of operations, lining materials and lining procedures. Refinement of liquid metal- deoxidation, and degassing. Post casting operations- fettling, cleaning, finishes operations, and heat treatment processes. Quality inspections and testing-destructive and non destructive testing. (12) LIGHT METAL CAST ALLOYS: Introduction to Al, Mg and Ti alloys, classification, specification and standards. Moulding- sand casting, chill casting and pressure die-casting; melting- furnaces, raw materials, fluxes, dross formation and lining materials and lining conditions. Refining of molten metal -degassing, grain refinement and modifications; Post casting operations- Fettling and heat treatment, Quality control- microstructure analysis, destructive and non destructive testing, defect analysis. (11) COPPER AND NICKEL CAST ALLOYS: Introduction to Copper and Nickel cast alloys– effect of alloying elements, classifications as per cast designations, specification and standards. Foundry practice for Brasses, Bonzes, Monel , Inconel and Hastelloys. Moulding methods- sand casting, centrifugal casting and continuous casting. Melting techniques- furnaces, raw materials, fluxes, dross formation and lining. Refining –deoxidation, degassing, grain refinement and structural modifications, Post casting operationsFettling and heat treatment, Quality control (10) 312

59th ACM

09.06.2018

REFERENCES: 1. ASM Handbook, “Casting”, ASM international, Volume 15, USA, 2017. 2. Heine R W Loper and Rosenthal, “Principles of Metal Casting”, Tata McGraw Hill. Publication. Co., 2012. 3. John R. Brown, Foseco Foundrymen‟s “Handbook for Ferrous and Non ferrous”, 11Th edition, Butterworth Heinemann, 1999. 1. Mahi Sahoo and Sudhari Sahu, “Principles of Metal casting” Mcgraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited, New Delhi, 2014.

MATERIALS ENGINEERING 18YN21 IRON AND STEEL MAKING 3003 INTRODUCTION: History of iron and steel making, evolution of modern steel making, overview of steel making in India and aboard, general layout of integrated steel plants; RAW MATERIALS AND THEIR PREPARATION: metallurgical coal, Coke manufacture by-product coke ovens, iron ores, iron ore beneficiation, agglomeration methods - principle and mechanism of sintering, pelletisation, fluxes, testing of raw materials, raw materials for steel making, steel making refractories, pre-treatment of hot metal prior to steel making. (11) PHYSICAL-THERMAL-CHEMICAL PROCESSES IN IRON MAKING: physical, thermal and chemical profiles, physical chemistry of blast furnace reactions - carbon-oxygen reaction, gas-solid reactions, slag-metal reactions, desulphurisation and desiliconisation, RAFT calculation; BLAST FURNACE PLANT AND PROCESS: Layout, constructional features of the blast furnace, charging equipment, burden distribution, gas cleaning, hot blast stove, operational irregularities, metal and slag, High top pressure, bell-less top, pulverised coal injection, humidification of blast, pre-reduced ore; ALTERNATE IRON MAKING: Sponge iron production methods and smelting reduction processes. (12) PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY OF STEEL MAKING: Thermodynamics, kinetics and transport phenomena in steel making, refining slags, slag - metal refining reactions. STEEL MAKING PROCESSES : Overview of Bessemer converters, open hearth practice, Electric arc furnace steel making, LD process - plant and equipment, steel making practice, slag-metal-gas interaction, oxygen bottom blown process, combined blowing processes, CONARC process, EOF process. (11) SECONDARY STEEL MAKING: Deoxidation, desulphurization, ladle furnace, decarburization methods, vacuum degassing methods, Injection metallurgy. STEEL INGOTS - fundamentals of solidification, rimming, capped and killed steels, ingot defects; CONTINUOUS CASTING OF STEEL - heat transfer and solidification in continuous casting, tundish design and operation, continuous casting of slabs and blooms, metallurgical defects. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Ahindra Ghosh and Amit Chatterjee, “Iron Making and Steel Making - Theory and Practice”, PHI Learning Private Ltd., New Delhi, 2015. 2. Wakelin D H (ed), “The Making, Shaping and Treating of Steel: Iron Making”, The AISE Steel Foundation, 2004. 3. Fruehan.J.R (ed.), “The Making, Shaping and Treating of Steel: Steel making, The AISE Steel Foundation, 2004. 4. Tupkary R J and Tupkary V R, “An Introduction to Modern Iron Making”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2015. 5. Tupkary R J and Tupkary V R, “An Introduction to Modern Steel Making”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2015.

18YN22 PRINCIPLES OF NON FERROUS EXTRACTION METALLURGY 3003 THERMODYNAMIC PRINCIPLES OF METAL EXTRACTION: Zeroth law, first law, second law. Concepts of internal energy, enthalpy, entropy and their changes with temperature. Concept of spontaneity of processes. Free energy and its variation with pressure and temperature. Concepts of fugacity , activity and equilibrium constant. Standard free energy diagram fro oxides, sulphides, chlorides and their uses. Thermodynamics of solutions. (12) METHODS OF EXTRACTION: Ore, mineral, methods of beneficiation and their principles. Pyrometallurgy-calcination, roasting and smelting, hydrometallurgy-leaching, solvent extraction, ion exchange and precipitation, electrometallurgy- electrolysis and electro refining, material and energy balance. (11) REFINING: methods of refining –ion exchange , solvent extraction, gaseous reduction, cementation, liquid –liquid extraction, liquation, zone refining. Extraction metals from oxide ores- magnesium, aluminium, tin. (11) METAL EXTRACTION: extraction of metals from sulphide ores- copper,zinc,nickel. Extraction of metals from halides ore-titanium and rare earth metals, uranium,thorium. Extraction of precious metals –gold, silver and platinum. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Ray H S , Gosh A ,”Principles of Extractive Metallurgy”, New Age International Publishers,2007. 2. David R Gaskell,”Introduction to the Thermodynamics of Materials‟‟,Taylor & Francis, UK, 2003. 3. Pehike R D,” Unit Processes in Extractive Metallurgy”, Elsevier, USA, 1993. 4. Ray H S, Sridhar R and Abraham A P,” Extraction of Non Ferrous Metals”, Affiliated East west Press Pvt Ltd, New Delhi 1985 5. Upadhayaya G S and Dube R K,” Problems in metallurgical thermodynamics and Kinetics”, Pergamon ,1997.

18YN23 PHYSICAL METALLURGY OF STAINLESS STEELS 3003 INTRODUCTION: Types of Stainless steels, Specifications of stainless steels, Properties of Stainless Steels, manufacturing methods of stainless steels. Effect of alloying elements in stainless steels, Fe-Cr system, Fe-Cr-Ni ternary phase diagram, effect of 313

59th ACM

09.06.2018

various intermetallic phases in stainless steels, Heat treatment processes of stainless steels, effect of rare earth metals in stainless steels. (12) CORROSION BEHAVIOUR OF STAINLESS STEELS : Atmospheric and Aqueous Corrosion ,Stress-Corrosion Cracking and Hydrogen Embrittlement, IGC, Pitting corrosion, PREN, passivation behavior of stainless steel, High-Temperature Corrosion, Corrosion of Cast Stainless Steels, ASTM and EN standards on corrosion resistance testing, Electrochemical methods. (11) RECENT DEVELOPMENTS IN STAINLESS STEELS: Nitrogen alloyed stain less steels - Austentic stainless steels, Duplex stainless steels and Martensitic stainless steels – Manufacture, Heat Treatment, solubility of nitrogen in stainless steels, Alumina forming Austenitic stainless steels. (11) SELECTION OF STAINLESS STEELS: Selection of stainless steels – marine, constructional, chemical storage tanks, Bio medical implants, instruments in medical, high temperature applications, instrumentation, case studies. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Davis J R “Stainless steels”, ASM specialty Hand Book ASTM International, 1996 2. ASM, “Source Book of Stainless Steel”, ASM Publisher, 1977. 3. Peckner.D and Bernstein.I.M, “Handbook of Stainless Steel”, McGraw Hill Book Co. New York, 1977. 4. Lula R A, James Gordon Parr, “Stainless steels” American Society for Metals, 1986.

18YN24 PHYSICAL METALLURGY OF STRUCTURAL STEELS 3003 FUNDAMENTAL: Types of structures steels. Principles involved in alloys of iron. Factors affecting metallurgical design and control of properties and microstructure. Methodology used in the design of alloys based on sound metallurgical principles. Factors affecting the strength of C-Mn steels and austenitic steel. (10) HIGH STRENGTH STRIP STEELS: Low carbon strip steels and factors affecting cold formability, cold forming behavior process route followed for production of low carbon steel strip and effect of alloying elements on yield strength after temper rolling – Formability of high strength strip steel, coating of steel and Applications. (10) MICRO ALLOYED STEELS: Recent trends, Strengthening mechanism and Modern concepts of thermo mechanical controlled processing. Physical metallurgy concepts in explaining Strengthening mechanisms. Microstructural control to restrict brittle fracture in high strength line pipe steels, nano size particles and its effects (12) MEDIUM STRENGTH AND HIGH STRENGTH STEELS: Secondary hardened steels and maraging steels, Effect of alloying elements such as Cr, Mo, Ti and Al on the microstructure, strength and fracture resistance of maraging steel. Recent trends in Secondary hardened steels. Third generation of AHSS steels, TWIP steels and TRIP steels and their applications. Low density steels and electrical steels and recent developments (13) Total L : 45 REFERENCES: 1. Nina Forstein “ Advanced high strength sheet steels- physical metallurgy, design, processing and properties, Springer International Publishing Switzerland, 2015. 2. Llwellyn , D T, “Steels Metallurgy and Applications”, Butterworth, Heinmann, 1992. 3. Gladman.T,” The Physical metallurgy of microalloyed steels”, The Institute of Materials, London, 1997.

18YN25 HEAT TREATMENT AND SURFACE MODIFICATION 3003 HEAT TREATMENT EQUIPMENT: Furnaces, Calibration of thermocouple, Quenching methods, fixtures, control of furnace atmosphere, temperature control, Design of heat treatment furnaces. (9) HEAT TREATMENT OF STEEL: Effect of alloying elements on Fe-Fe3C diagram, Annealing (different types), normalizing, hardening - Quenching media - Martensite formation.TTT and CCT diagrams. Hardenability and measurement of hardenability-Influence of alloying elements. Tempering-Temper brittleness, Sub zero treatment-Control of retained austenite. Austempering, Martempering and Thermo-mechanical treatments. (12) HEAT TREATMENT OF FERROUS ALLOYS: Stainless steels, Tool steels and Cast irons, maraging steels, HSLA steels and dual phase steels. HEAT TREATMENT OF NON-FERROUS ALLOYS: Aluminium alloys, Magnesium alloys, Titanium alloys, and Ni-base alloys. Design for heat treatment. HEAT TREATMENT DEFECTS: Causes and remedies for defects (12) SURFACE MODIFICATION TECHNIQUES: Flame and induction hardening. Carburising, nitriding, carbonitriding, boriding, electron beam and laser beam hardening .PVD and CVD processes, sputter coating, ion plating, ion implantation, spray coatings , shot peening, laser cladding, plasma coating . (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Rajan and Sharma, “Heat Treatment, Principles and Techniques”, Prentice Hall of India, 2010. 314

59th ACM

09.06.2018

2. Vijendra singh, “Heat treatment of metals”, Standard Publishers distributors”, 2009. 3. Prabhudev K H, “Handbook of Heat Treatment of Steels”, Tata-McGraw Hill Publications. Co. Ltd., 1988. 4. American Society of Metals, “Metals Handbook”, Volume IV, A.S.M., Metals park, Ohio, USA, 1991. 5. Sudharsan T S, “Surface Engineering”, Ohio State University, 1992. 6. Karl Eric Thelning, “Steel and its heat treatment”, Butterworth Publications, 2000.

18YN26 ENVIRONMENTAL DEGRADATION OF METALS 3003 THERMODYNAMICS AND KINETICS OF CORROSION: Electrode potential-standard and reference electrodes, electrode and cell representations – electrochemical cells – galvanic and concentration cells. Nernst equation, EMF series – free energy criteria for corrosion reaction – thermodynamic Vs kinetic considerations-Pourbaix diagram (Fe, Ni, Al& Zn).Faradays laws,corrosion rates expressions. Corrosion current density and corrosion rate, exchange current density–activation and concentration polarization-Tafel equation, mixed potential theory and behaviour of galvanic couples, Passivity-potentiostatic polarization curves. Pilling-Bedworth ratio. (15) FORMS OF CORROSION: Atmospheric corrosion, galvanic corrosion, general biological corrosion. Localized corrosion-filiform corrosion, crevice corrosion, pitting corrosion, localized biological corrosion. Metallurgically influenced corrosion-inter granular corrosion, de-alloying. Mechanically assisted corrosion-erosion corrosion, cavitation corrosion, fretting corrosion, corrosion fatigue, environmentally induced cracking-mechanisms of stress corrosion cracking and hydrogen embitterment. (9) CORROSION MONOTORING AND TESTING: Purpose and classification, weight loss method, salt spray test, tests for intergranular corrosion, and stress corrosion cracking. Electrochemical polarization techniques, Tafel extrapolation, linear polarization, AC impedance methods- electrochemical impedance spectroscopy. Application of -NDT techniques, Outline of on stream and off stream corrosion monitoring methods. (10) PREVENTION OF CORROSION: corrosion control by design, selection of materials-alloying-stainless steel and brass, oxidation resistant materials, cathodic and anodic protection methods, corrosion inhibitors, anodic, cathodic and mixed inhibitors-vapour phase inhibitors, applications, surface conversion processes. Metallic coatings, ceramic coatings. Super hydrophobic and self heating coatings. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Chatterjee U K, “Environment degradation of metals”, Marcel Dekker Inc.,2001. 2. Raj Narayan, “Metallic Corrosion and Prevention”, Oxford Publications,1988. 3. Mars G Fontana, “Corrosion Engineering”, McGraw Hill Inc.,1987. 4. Herbert H Uhligand Winston Revie, “Corrosion and Corrosion Control - An Introduction to Corrosion Science and Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons,1985. 5. Kenneth R Trethewey and John Chamberlain, “Corrosion for Science and Engineering”, Longman Inc., 1996. 6. Denny A Jones, “Principles and Prevention of Corrosion”, Prentice Hall Inc.,1996.

18YN27 NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING 3003 NDE AS QUALITY TOOL: Historical disasters that affected the development of NDT, Concepts of Non-Destructive testing, NDT Qualification and Certification, Discontinuities and Defects, Introduction to codes and standards for NDT. SURFACE TECHNIQUES: Visual Testing (VT). Direct and remote inspection. LASER Shearography. Penetrant Testing (PT): Principle and mechanics Applicability and limitations, Dyes, developers and cleaners, Fluorescent penetrant test. Practical demonstrations on VT and PT. (11) MAGNETIC AND ELECTROMAGNETIC TECHNIQUES: Magnetic Particle Testing (MPT): Principles, applications, magnetization methods. MPT Equipment and media. Practical demonstrations on MPT. Principle, Instrumentation and applications of Magnetic Flux Leakage Testing (MFL). Principle, Instrumentation and applications of Eddy Current Testing (ECT) and Remote Field Testing (RFT). (12) PENETRATING SOUND WAVES TECHNIQUES: Ultrasonic Testing (UT): Ultrasonic wave characteristics, Transducers, Inspection methods and types of scanning. Evaluation of flaw characteristics. Time of Flight Diffraction (TOFD) technique, Guided Wave testing (GWT), Phased Array ultrasonic Testing (PAUT) LASER ultrasonic testing, UT Calibration. Inspection of welds and Castings. Practical demonstrations on UT. Acoustic Emission Testing (AET). (11) PENETRATING LIGHT RAYS TECHNIQUES: X-ray and Gamma ray Radiography (RT). RT Equipment and producing a radiograph. Film Radiography and Digital Radiography. Exposure factors. Factors affecting Contrast, Resolution and Sensitivity. Determination of resolution and sensitivity of images by IQI (Penetrameters), RT of castings, welds and pipes. Safety in radiography, Practical demonstrations on RT film interpretation. Principle, Instrumentation and applications of Infra Red Thermography (IRT). (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. ASM Handbook, “Non-Destructive Evaluation and Quality Control”, ASM international, Volume 17, USA, 2017. 2. Louis Cartz, “Non-Destructive Testing”, ASM International, Metals Park Ohio, USA, 1995. 3. Baldev Raj T, Jayakumar, Thavasimuthu M, „‟ Practical Non-destructive Testing‟‟, Woodhead Publishing, 2002.

315

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18YN28 CERAMICS AND POLYMERS 3003

CERAMICS CRYSTAL SYSTEMS: Crystal Structures of Ceramics (Pauling's Rules),Silicate Structures, Structures of Covalent ceramics, problems on crystal systems ,Structures of Glasses and properties . Simple problems involving Packing Fraction, critical radius ratio and density. Defects In Ceramics-Problems. PROPERTIES AND APPLICATIONS OF ENGINEERING CERAMICS: Mechanical properties-Electrical Properties- Thermal properties-Optical Properties of engineering ceramics –Simple problems - examples and applications. (12) PRODUCTION AND FORMING TECHNIQUES: Solution synthesis routes-Sol gel, Combustion, Precipitation methods-Solid state methods - slip and slurry casting-applications- Powder processing equipment and process details of hot pressing, Hot Isostatic Pressing and Cold Isostatic Pressing, Sintering-Liquid Phase sintering. MECHANICAL BEHAVIOUR OF CERAMICS: Elasticity and brittle fracture- Toughening Mechanisms, Weibull Statistics and Design, Thermal Shock Resistance- Glass – elastic behaviour, strength and fracture. (12) INTRODUCTION TO POLYMERS: Classification-thermoset, thermoplastics and elastomers. Structure of polymers- crystalline and amorphous polymers - concept of Glass Transition Temperature (Tg), Polymerization- types and mechanisms with examples, Degree of polymerization - molecular weight of polymers-problems, Polymer additives-Examples and properties, Applications of engineering plastics. Elastomers - types, properties, examples. and application. (10) MECHANICAL BEHAVIOUR OF POLYMERS: Viscoelasticity-creep and stress relaxation in polymers. Yielding and fracture of polymers, Crazing of polymers. PROCESSING & SELECTION OF POLYMERS: Processing of thermoset and thermoplastic polymers-blow moulding, Injection moulding, Vaccum forming ,Thermoforming, compression moulding-Selection Criteria for Polymers with Examples. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Gowariker VR, Viswanathan NV and Jayadev Sreedhar,“Polymer Science”, New Age International P Ltd.,2005. 2. Michael Barsoum,“Fundamentals of Ceramics”, McGraw Hill Publishing Co., Inc.,1997. 3. William F Smith,“Foundations of Materials Science and Engineering”, McGraw-Hill Inc, New York.,1993. 4. Nobuka Ichinose, “Introduction to Fine Ceramics”, John Wiley & Sons, USA, 1987. 5. Chawla KK, “Ceramic Matrix Composites”, Chapman and Hall, UK,1993. 6. Kingery WD, “Introduction to Ceramics”, John Wiley, USA,1960.

18YN29 COMPOSITES 3003 INTRODUCTION: Composite material – definition – classification. Examples and applications for each class. FIBER COMPOSITES: Constituents - functions of fiber and matrix - Properties of fibers - Critical fiber length - Aligned and random fiber composites. Property prediction - Rule of Mixtures - Simple problems. Production of fibers : Glass fibers, boron, carbon, alumina, metallic fibers, and ceramic fibers. Matrix materials: metallic, polymer and ceramic matrix materials - Concept of interfaces and interfacial reactions in fiber composites. Tensile strength of continuous and discontinuous composites. Concept of fracture modes in fiber composites. (12) POLYMER MATRIX COMPOSITES: Types- Processing-Thermal matrix composites – Hand layup and spray technique, filament winding, Pultrusion, resin transfer moulding, autoclave moulding-Thermoplastic matrix composites-Injection moulding, film stacking – Diaphragm forming – Thermoplastic tape laying, Mechanical properties –.Applications. METAL MATRIX COMPOSITES: Matrices and reinforcements. Processing – Solid state, liquid state, deposition and insitu techniques MMCs applications. (11) CERAMIC MATRIX COMPOSITES: Ceramic matrix materials – Processing – Hot pressing, liquid infiltration technique, Lanxide process, in-situ chemical reaction techniques – CVD, CVI, sol-gel process. Interface in CMCs. Mechanical properties– Applications. CARBON / CARBON COMPOSITES: Processing, Properties and Applications. (11) PARTICULATE COMPOSITES: Types - True particulate and Dispersion strengthened composites - Function and examples of dispersoids - Particle size - interparticle spacing calculation- Examples of particulate composites. LAMINAR COMPOSITES: Types - Layered and honeycomb structures – examples manufacture and applications. Joining of composite materials, design of composites. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Mathews F L and Rawlings R D, “Composite Materials: Engineering and Science”, CRC Press and Wood head Publishing Limited, 2002. 2. Krishnan K Chawla, “Composite Materials Science and Engineering”, Springer, 2001. 3. Derek Hull, “Introduction to Composite Materials”, Cambridge University Press, 1988. 4. “ASM Handbook, “Composites”, ASM international, Volume 21, USA, 2017.

18YN30 NANOSTRUCTURED MATERIALS 3003 STRUCTURE AND PROPERTIES OF NANOMATERIALS: Definition-classification of nano materials-structure of nano materialscomparison with conventional materials; basic concepts - relationship between grain size and properties - physical properties- color, conductivity, Thomson effect, optical properties - surface plasmon effect, chemical properties - reactivity, mechanical properties strength, hardness of nano sized particles. (11) 316

59th ACM

09.06.2018

SYNTHESIS AND CHARACTERIZATION: Basic approaches-top down and bottom up approaches-various methods for producing nano materials – zero, one, two and three dimensional materials, solid State (mechanical methods): Mechanical Alloying (MA) and Mechanical Milling (MM) - Severe Plastic Deformation (SPD); chemical synthesis: combustion synthesis and precipitation techniques, physical methods: Electrolysis, microwave and plasma synthesis, Physical Vapor Deposition (PVD). Important nano materials characterization techniques – X-Ray Diffraction (XRD), Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) – imaging and diffraction modes, Atomic Force Microscopy (AFM) / STM, Nano indentation technique. (12) CONSOLIDATION AND SPECIFIC NANOMATERIALS: Problems in consolidation, use of glove box, FAST technique – process variables, examples; High pressure shock consolidation – explosive forming, nano coatings – dip, plasma spray; Nano structures with high application potential: carbon nano structures – fullerenes, nano tubes, Quantum dots, GaN wires, nano TiO 2, nano ZnO – properties, applications and advantages. (11) APPLICATIONS: Structural – Continuous coatings for corrosive environments, electronic and optical applications-thin and multi layer capacitors, sensors and quantum dots, energy storage devices – fuel cells, catalysts, solar cells, efficient micro batteries, biomedical- valves for artificial hearts, internal drug release devices, case studies. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Murthy B.S, Shankar P and Baldev Raj, “Textbook of Nanoscience and Technology”, Springer, 2012. 2. Parag Diwan and Ashish Bharadwaj, “Nano structured Materials”, Pentagon Press, 2006. 3. Charles P Poole and Frank J Owens, “Introduction to Nanotechnology”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 2003. 4. Michael Wilson, Kamali Kannagara and Geoff Smith, “Nanotechnology: Basic Science and Emerging Technology”, Chapman and Hall, New York, 2002. 5. Pradeep T, “Nano: The Essentials”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi, 2007. 6. Ying J, “Nanostructured Materials”, Academic Press, New York, 2001.

18YN31 EMERGING MATERIALS 3003 HIGH TEMPERATURE MATERIALS: Introduction– High and low temperature materials, superconductors, supra magnetic materials, high entropy alloys, dispersion strengthened alloys - their advantages and applications, intermetallics, superalloys, Refractories, (10) NANOMATERIALS: Introduction-structure and properties of nano materials, carbon nano structures - production methods – physical and chemical synthesis – high energy ball milling-examples. Nano materials for optical, bio, electrical, magnetic, mechanical and structural functions - applications. (10) METALLIC ANDCERAMICS MATERIALS: High strength alloys, quasicrystals, immiscible alloy systems and in-situ composites, metallic glasses, single crystals, metallic foams, shape memory alloys-advantages and applications. insulators, ceramic matrix composites, biomaterials - their need, advantages and properties. Thin films, coatings, Glass Ceramics. (10) MATERIALS PROCESSING and CONSOLIDATION TECHNIQUES: Various methods - Mechanical alloying, Rapid Solidification Processing, Melt spinning, atomization techniques, sol-gel, Self Propagating High Temperature Synthesis - processing capabilities process parameters - examples of material synthesized – Advantages. Consolidation techniques for ceramics and metallic powders - Cold and Hot Isostatic Pressing, Powder extrusion, Equal Channel Angle Process, spark plasma sintering. (15) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. ASM Handbook, “Powder Metallurgy”, ASM international, Volume 7, USA, 2017. 2. Nobru. H Ichinose, “Introduction to Fine Ceramics”, Butterworth-Heinman Ltd, NY,1992. 3. Reed R C, “The Superalloys: Fundamentals and Applications”, Cambridge,2006. 4. Liebermann. H. H, “Rapidly Solidified Alloys: Processes, Structure, Properties, Applications”, Marcel Dekker,Inc,1993. 5. Brian cantor, “Automotive Engineering: Light weight, functional and novel materials”, Taylor and Francis,1993. 6. Fujiwara. T and Ishii. Y, “Quasicrystals-Handbook of Metal physics”, Elsevier, 2008.

18YN32 MATERIALS SELECTION 3003 FACTORS AFFECTING SELECTION PROCESS: Technical and Non Technical Factors. Design process - types of design, design requirements, Function, Material attributes. Displaying material properties using materials selection charts. Shape and Manufacturing processes - Materials processing and design processes and their influence on design, Process attributes, Systematic process selection, Process selection diagrams, Process cost, Energy consumption for production, Material costs, Availability, Recyclability, Environmental consideration. (11) MATERIALS SELECTION PROCESS: Materials selection methods: Screening, Ranking- weighted ranking, Performance indicesMaterials selection charts, Deriving property limits and material indices, Structural indices. Shape factors, Efficiency of standard sections, Material limits for shape factors, Material indices which include shape, The microscopic or microstructural shape factor, Co-selecting material and shape. (11) CASE STUDIES ON KNOWN APPLICATIONS: Automobile materials (Body and Crank shaft), Marine structural materials (Hull and Propeller), Aircraft structural materials (Wings and landing gears), Materials for space (Gas turbines and Nose), Materials for power 317

59th ACM

09.06.2018

generation machinery (Boilers and Pressure vessels), Materials for medical applications (Surgical knives and Bone replacements), Chemical and petrochemical industries (Acid storage tanks and Fuel carrying pipes). (13) MATERIALS SELECTION PROJECT: Students will carry out a materials selection exercise for a hypothetical design project, identifying selection parameters and potential materials with the help of materials selection software. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Ashby M F, “Materials Selection in Mechanical Design”, Butterworth - Heineman, New York, 2005. 2. Dieter G E, “Engineering Design: A Materials and Processing Approach”, McGraw-Hill, 2000. 3. ASM Handbook, “Materials Selection and Design”, ASM international, Volume 20, USA, 2017. 4. Charles J A and Crane F A A, “Selection and Use of Engineering Materials”, Butterworth-Heinemann Ltd., 1989.

18YN33 POWDER METALLURGY 3003 COMMERCIAL METHODS OF POWDER PRODUCTION: atomization, electrolysis, sol-gel, novel powder preparation techniques self propagating high temperature synthesis, hydrothermal, solvent vaporization, Mechanical Alloying - preparation, composition, recent developments in powder mixing and classification. (11) POWDER CHARACTERISATION: individual particle characteristics, particle flow and packing characteristics – rheological behaviour of slurries - Newtonian fluid, plastic flow, dilatant liquid, thixotropy, deflocculation, zeta potential, applications in ceramic processing, Recent Developments. (11) CONSOLIDATION: Dry pressing – powder flow and die filling, compaction behaviour, ejection and transfer, die wall effects, control of compaction defects, cold isostatic Pressing. Casting process - slip casting, drying processes, mechanisms, defects. shaping, surface finishing, glazing. firing – firing system, pre sintering processes, sintering and vitrification (11) HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER IN powders, specific application to drying, Powder flow regimes: from fixed bed to fluidisation and transport systems. sintering models and mechanisms. Factors controlling sintering kinetics, Recrystallisation and grain growth, Pressure assisted sintering: Hot pressing and Hot Isostatic Pressing (HIP), Spark Plasma Sintering and Severe Plastic Deformation Processing. Development of microstructure. Finishing operations: Carburizing, Carbonitriding, Nitriding , Hardening, Induction Hardening Precipitation Hardening. Case Studies and P/M design. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Angelo PC, Subramanian R, “Powder Metallurgy”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, 2013. 2. Anish Upadhyaya, Gopal Shankar Upadhyaya, “Powder Metallurgy”, CRC Press, 2011. 3. Randall M.German, “Powder Metallurgy of iron and steel”, Metal Powder Industry, 1994. 4. Isaac Chang, Yuyuan Zhao, Advances in Powder Metallurgy”, Woodhead Publishing, 2013.

18YN34 COATING TECHNOLOGY 3003 ELECTROCHEMICAL TECHNIQUES: Chemical conversion coatings, phosphating, chromating, chemical colouring, anodizing of aluminium alloys, deposition of copper, zinc, nickel and chromium - principles and practices, alloy plating, Electro deposition- Electro composite plating. (10) HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS: Thermal spray- Plasma spray-HVOF- D Gun, laser cladding, diffusion coatings, Overlay Coatings. (10) THIN FILM COATINGS: Chemical Vapour Deposition, Physical Vapour Deposition- Electron Beam- Physical Vapour Deposition, Pulsed Laser Deposition, Sputtering- magnetic sputtering, Electron beam evaporation, Diamond Like Coatings (DLC). (10) SOLUTION BASED COATING TECHNIQUES: Slurry coating - dip coating, spin coatings, spray coating – spray pyrolysis and cladding, Specific Industrial applications. COATING CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES: Surface modification – wear, abrasion, oxidation resistance. Coatings –measurement of coating thickness-porosity-hardness, fracture toughness, elastic modulus – adhesion-bending strength-fracture strength- tensile strength, coating tribology, corrosion measurement, phase analysis and microstructural evaluation. (15) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Lech Paw Lowski , Science and engineering of thermal spray coatings, John wiley and sons Inc., 1999 2. Klein, L., (Ed), Sol-Gel Technology for Thin Films, Fibres, Performs, Electronic and Speciality Shapes, 1988, Noyes Publications, New Jersey, USA. 3. Bunshah.R.F. (Ed), Films and Coatings for Technology, Noyes Date Corp., New Jersey, USA,1982. 4. Sudarshan T S, „Surface modification technologies - An Engineer‟s guide‟, Marcel Dekker, Newyork, 1989

318

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18YN35 METALLURGICAL FAILURE ANALYSIS AND LIFE ASSESSMENT 3003

INTRODUCTION: Concepts of failure analysis, root-cause analysis, design deficiencies, material defects, manufacturing defects, service life anomalies, charting methods of root cause analysis, categories of failures, failure prevention concepts; Practice of failure analysis: Scope and planning, stages of failure analysis, tools and techniques, fractography (11) FRACTURE & FAILURES: Mechanisms of deformation and fracture, ductile and brittle fractures, fatigue fracture, intergranular fracture, thermo-mechanical fatigue, overloaded failures, fatigue failures creep and stress rupture failures; corrosion related failures: forms of corrosion, hydrogen embrittlement, stress corrosion cracking, Wear failures: types of wear, impact wear, erosion wear; distortion failures (11) MANUFACTURING ASPECTS OF FAILURE: defects in weldments, castings, formed and heat treated components, failure related to welding, casting, metal forming, and heat treatment; Case studies on analysis of industrial components like shafts, bearings, springs, tools and dies, gears , pipelines, metallic orthopedic implants, components of boilers, pressure vessels, gas turbine engines, automobile components, aircraft components (12) STRUCTURAL LIFE ASSESSMENT METHODS: failure analysis and life assessment of structural components and equipment, failure analysis diagrams, analysis methods for probabilistic life assessment, non destructive evaluation and life assessment, fatigue life assessment, elevated temperature life assessment (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Becker .W.T and Shipley.R.J, “ASM Handbook Volume 11: failure analysis and prevention”, ASM International, USA, 2002. 2. Colangelo V J and Heiser F A, “Analysis of Metallurgical Failures”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., USA, 1987. 3. Das A K, “Metallurgy of Failure Analysis”, McGraw-Hill Professional, USA, 1997. 4. Charlie R B and Choudhury A, “Metallurgical Failure Analysis”, McGraw Hill, USA, 1993.

18YN36 MATERIALS MODELING 3003 CONCEPT OF SPECIFIC HEAT, ENTHALPY, ENTROPY AND FREE ENERGY - Maxwell‟s relations. Thermodynamics of pure systems - Gibb‟s free energy change with temperature in a single component system - Clausius Clayperon equation - Surface Energy & under cooling, Nucleation – homogeneous & heterogeneous nucleation. (10) Thermodynamic parameters in a binary system – solution thermodynamics – ideal solution - configurational entropy – regular solution model – chemical potential - free energy composition diagram - evolution of phase diagrams based on regular solution model - quasichemical theory – Sub regular solution model. (10) Thermodynamics and phase diagrams of multicomponent system - Redlitch-kister polynomial – muggianu and kohler extrapolation. Crystallography in thermodynamics – crystal structure - Order and disorder structure – antisite defect and vacancies. Compound energy formalism – Interstitial and substitutional phases – line and stoichiometric compounds – non – stoichiometric compounds. CALPHAD modeling of non - metallic system. (12) Brief introduction to experimental methods of determining thermodynamic parameters and phase diagrams. Phase diagram determination by the diffusion couple technique. Solidification of pure metals and alloys – planar front and dendritic solidification. Concepts of equilibrium solidification - scheil solidification – constitutional undercooling. (13) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. David A. Porter, Kenneth E. Easterling and Mohamed Sherif , “Phase Transformations in Metals and Alloys”, 3 rd Edition, CRC Press, 2009. 2. David R. Gaskell, “Introduction to the Thermodynamics of Materials”, 5th Edition,CRC Press, 2008. 3. Saunders & Miodownik , “CALPHAD (Calculation of Phase Diagrams): A Comprehensive Guide”, 1st Edition, Pergamman Press, 1998. 4. Suzana G. Fries and Bo Sundman, “Computational Thermodynamics: The Calphad Method, by Hans Lukas”,, Cambridge University Press, 2007.

18YN37 METAL ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING 3003 INTRODUCTION - CAD & REVERSE ENGINEERING: Overview – History Classification - Rapid Prototyping Process Chain: Fundamental Automated Processes, Process Chain-AM Technology in product development-Materials for Additive Manufacturing Technology – Tooling - Applications. CAD & REVERSE ENGINEERING: Basic Concept – Digitization techniques – Model Reconstruction – Data Processing for Additive Manufacturing Technology: CAD model preparation – Part Orientation and support generation – Model Slicing –Tool path Generation – Softwares for Additive Manufacturing Technology: MIMICS, MAGICS. (11) LIQUID BASED AND SOLID BASED ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS: Classification – Liquid based system – Stereo lithography Apparatus (SLA)- Principle, process, advantages and applications- Solid ground curing (SGC) - Solid based system – Fused Deposition Modeling - Principle, Process, advantages and applications, Laminated Object Manufacturing. Case studies: SLA, FDM , LOM. (11) POWDER BASED ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS: Selective Laser Sintering – Principles of SLS process - Process, advantages and applications, Three Dimensional Printing - Principle, process, advantages and applications- Laser Engineered Net 319

59th ACM

09.06.2018

Shaping (LENS), Electron Beam Melting. Introduction to Direct Rapid Tooling and Indirect Rapid tooling. Case studies: SLS, 3D Printing, LENS. (11) DESIGN FOR AM AND APPLICATIONS: Motivation, DFMA concepts and objectivess, AM unique capabilities, Exploring design freedoms, Design tools for AM, Part Orientation, Removal of Supports, Hollowing out parts, Inclusion of Undercuts and Other Manufacturing Constraining Features, Interlocking Features, Reduction of Part Count in an Assembly, Identification of markings/ numbers. Application: Material Relationship, Application in Design, Application in Engineering, Analysis and Planning, Aerospace Industry, Automotive Industry, Jewelry Industry, Coin Industry. Application examples for aerospace, defense, automobile, RP Medical and Bioengineering and general engineering industries. (12) REFERENCES: 1. Liou L.W. and Liou F.W., “Rapid Prototyping and Engineering applications: A tool box for prototype development”, CRC Press, 2007. 2. Kamrani A.K. and Nasr E.A., “Rapid Prototyping: Theory and practice”, Springer, 2006. 3. Hilton P.D. and Jacobs P.F., “Rapid Tooling: Technologies and Industrial Applications”, CRC press, 2000. 4. Ian Gibson, David W. Rosen, Brent Stucker. Additive Manufacturing Technologies: Rapid Prototyping to Direct Digital Manufacturing, 2nd Ed. (2015), 5. Chua C.K., Leong K.F., and Lim C.S., “Rapid prototyping: Principles and applications”, Third Edition, World Scientific Publishers, 2010. 6. Gebhardt A., “Rapid prototyping”, Hanser Gardener Publications, 2003.

18YN38 MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEMS (MEMS) 3 003 MEMS AND MICROSYSTEMS SCALING LAWS IN MINIATUIZATION: MEMS and microsystem products. Evaluation of microfabrication. Microsystems and microelectronics. Applications of microsystems. Working principles of microsystemsmicrosensors, microactuators, MEMS and microactuators, microaccelerometers.introduction to Scaling in geometry. Scaling in rigid body dynamics. The trimmer force scaling vector-scaling in electrostatic forces, electromagnetic forces, scaling in electricity and fluidic dynamics, scaling in heat conducting and heat convection. (11) MATERIALS FOR MEMS AND MICROSYSTEMS: Substrates and wafers-silicon as a substrate material, ideal substrates for MEMS. Single crystal Silicon and wafers crystal structure. Mechanical properties of Si. Silicon compounds-SiO2, SiC, Si3N4 and polycrystalline Silicon. Silicon piezoresistors. Gallium arsenside. Quartz-piezoelectric crystals. Polymers for MEMS. Conductive polymers. (10) ENGINEERING MECHANICS FOR MICROSYSTEMS DESIGN: Introduction. Static bending of thin plates-circular plates with edge fixed, rectangular plate with all edges fixed and square plates with all edges fixed. Mechanical vibration. Resonant vibration. Microaccelerometers-design theory and damping coefficients. Thermomechanics. Thermal stresses. Fracture mechanics-stress intensity factors, fracture toughness and interfacial fracture mechanics. Viscosity of fluids-flow patterns, reynolds number. Basic equation in continuum fluid dynamics. Laminar fluid flow in circular conduits. Computational fluid dynamics. Incompressible fluid flow in microconducts-surface tension, capillary effect and micropumping. Fluid flow in submicrometer and nanoscale-rarefied gas, Kundsen and Mach number and modelling of microgas flow. Heat conduction in multilayered thin films. Heat conduction in solids in submicrometer scale. Thermal conductivity of thin films, heat conduction equation for thin films. (11) MICROSYSTEM FABRICATION PROCESS WITH MICROMANUFACTURING AND MICROSYSTEM PACKAGING:: Photolithography. Photoresist and applications. Light sources. Ion implanation. Diffusion process. Oxidation-thermal oxidation. Silicon diode. Thermal oxidation rates. Oxide thickness by colour. Chemical vapour deposition-principle, reactants in CVD. Enhanced CVD physical vapour deposition. Sputtering. Deposition by epitaxy. Etching-chemcial and plasma etching. Bulk micromachining. Isotropic and anisotropic etching-wet etchants, etch stops, dry etching comparison of wet and dry etching. Surface micromachining-process in general, problems associated in surface micromachining. The LIGA process-description, materials for substrates and photoresists, electroplating, the SLIGA process. Microsystem packaging-general considerations. The three levels of microsystem packaging-die level, device level and system level. Essential packaging technologies-die preparation-surface bonding, wire bonding and sealing. Three dimensional packaging. Assembly of Microsystems - selection of packaging materials. (13) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Tai-Ran Hsu, “MEMS and Microsystems Design and Manufacture“, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 2002. 2. Mark Madou “Fundamentals of Microfabrication”, CRC Press, New York, 1997. 3. Julian W Gardner, “Microsensors: Principles and Applications”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 2001. 4. Sze S M, “Semiconductor Sensors”, McGraw Hill, New York, 1994. 5. Chang C Y and Sze S M, “VLSI Technology”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2000.

18YN39 LASER AND PLASMA PROCESSING OF MATERIALS 3003 PRINCIPLES OF INDUSTRAL LASERS: Principle of laser generation, optical resonators, LASER beam modifications and types of industrials lasers. LASER metallurgy -Process microstructure- fusion zone, zone of partial melting, HAZ, discontinuities- porosity, cracking, lack of fusion, incomplete penetration and undercut. (13)

320

59th ACM

09.06.2018

LASER WELDING AND SURFACE MODIFICATION : Process mechanisms (Key hole and Plasmas) – operating characteristics – process variations – imperfections- industrial applications –recent developments LASER surface heat treatment, LASER surface melting- Glazing, LASER direct Metal deposition– LASER surface alloying, LASER surface cladding and Hard coatings, LASER physical vapour deposition and LASER shock peening. (12) PRINCIPLES AND SURFACE MODIFICATION OF PLASMA: Principle of Plasma generation, transferred and non-transferred arc torches and their characteristics. Plasma hardening, plasma Nitriding, plasma spray coatings, plasma transferred arc deposition. (11) THIN FILM COATING AND OTHER TECHNIQUES: Plasma assisted PVD techniques – evaporation, sputtering, ion implantation. Plasma assisted CVD techniques .Plasma Arc welding and cladding process. Plasma cutting (9) References: 1. Ellijah kannatey-Asibu, Jr,” Principles of Laser Material Processing “, John Wiley & Sons,2009. 2. Jacques Perriere, Eric Millon, Eric Fogarassy,” Recent Advances in Laser Processing of Materials” Elsevier, 2006 3. Joseph M. Proud, “Plasma Processing of Materials: Scientific Opportunities and Technological Challenges” National Research Council, Washington, 1991. 4. Mohan Sankaran R, “Plasma processing of Nanomaterials” CRC Press,2012. 5. Kenneth Budinski G, "Surface Engineering for Wear Resistance", Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliff, 1990.

18YN40 PROCESS MODELLING 3003 Introduction to modelling and simulation. Fundamentals of modelling and simulation, mathematical and physical basis of modelling, methodology.Examples of metallurgical and materials processes, simultaneous solutions. Mass and energy balances, materials properties and simultaneous solutions. Basic steps of modeling and simulation, modeling approaches, Modeling and Simulation in Materials Science, Application of the methodology for materials behavior and processing problems. (11) Description of important extractive metallurgical processes (roasting, smelting, leaching, precipitation, electrolysis and refining) steps in their mathematical modelling. Concepts of batch and continuous processes in metallurgy.Determining the effect of controlling parameters, such as composition, temperature and particle size, concentration, pressure, gas/liquid/solid flow rate, stirring speed, current density and their Mathematical modeling. Case Studies on Modeling and Simulation of important metallurgical Processes. Melting of Scrap, Refining of Melt, Solidification, Re-heating, Heat Treatment, Fluid Flow in Laddle and Tundish. (12) Modelling of forming operations: Simple numerical models- Slab Method and the Upper Bound Method- Modelling of metal casting processes shape casting, direct chill casting and continuous casting (11) Modelling of Welding processes: Thermal modeling - single domain approach - handling phase change- Analytical solutions, Fluid flow in the weld pool-Zones in a weldment, Numerical Solutions- Solute segregation profiles. Microstructure evolution Defects in fusion welds, Dissimilar welding- Integrated approach (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES 1. Barber Z.H., “Introduction of Materials Modeling”, Maney Publishing, 2005. 2. King P.R., “Modeling and Simulation of Mineral Processing Systems”, ISBN:0-7506- 4884-8, 2001. 3. Mosterman P. J., “Realtime simulation technologies: principles, methodologies, and applications”, (Eds. Popovici K., Mosterman P. J.), Taylor & Francis Group, LLC., CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, USA. ISBN : 978-1-4398-4665-0, 2013 4. Ghasem N., “Computer methods in chemical engineering”, Taylor & Francis Group, LLC., CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, USA. ISBN : 978-1-439-84999-6, 2012. 5. Guo X.Z. (Ed.), “Multiscale Materials Modelling: Fundamental and Applications”, Woodhead Publishing Limited, Cambridge, 2007.

18YN41 QUALITY SYSTEM MANAGEMENT 3003 FOUNDATIONS OF TQM: Understanding quality, quality, competitiveness and customers, building quality chains, managing quality, quality in all functions, models and frame works for total quality management, Early TQM frameworks - quality award models - the four Ps and three Cs of TQM - a new model for TQM. Leadership And Commitment: The TQM approach - commitment and policy - creating or changing the culture - effective leadership - excellence in leadership. (10) DESIGN FOR QUALITY: Design, innovation and improvement - the design process - quality function deployment (QFD) - the house of quality - specifications and standards - design in the service sectors - failure mode effect and criticality analysis (FMECA) - The links between good design and managing the business. (10) PROCESS REDESIGN / ENGINEERING: Reengineering the organization - process for redesign - the redesign process - the people and the leaders. Human Resource Management: Introduction - strategic alignment of HRM policies - effective communication employee empowerment and involvement - training and development - teams and team work - review, continuous improvement and conclusions - organizing people for quality - quality circles or kaizen teams. (13) COMMUNICATIONS, INNOVATION AND LEARNING: Communicating the quality strategy - communicating the quality message communication, learning, education and training - a systematic approach to education and training for quality - turning educations and training into learning - the practicalities of sharing knowledge and learning. Implementing TQM- quality And Environmental Management Systems: Benefits of ISO registration - ISO 9000 series of standards - sector specific standards - ISO 9001 321

59th ACM

09.06.2018

requirements - - ISO 14000 series standards - concepts of ISO 14001 - requirements of ISO 14001 - relationship between health and safety. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Besterfield D H et al, “Total Quality Management”, Pearson Education Private Limited, 2004. 2. Oakland J S, “Total Quality Management - Text with Cases”, Butterworth - Heinemann - An Imprint of Elseiver, First Indian Print, 2003.

AUDIT COURSES 18YN81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP81

18YN82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP82

322

59th ACM 13. Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment ME MANUFACTURING ENGINEERING Course Code 18PP01 18PP02 18PP03 18PP04 18PP05 18PP51 18PP81

18PP06 18PP07 18PP08 18PP09 18PP_ 18PP_ 18PP52 18PP61 18PP82

18PP_ 18PP_ 18PP_ 18PP_ 18PP53 18PP71

18PP72

Course Title Statistical Quality Control and Design of Experiments Computer Numerical Control and Robotics Futuristic Materials and their Processing Geometric Modeling for Manufacturing Design for Manufacture and Assembly Object Computing and Data Structures Laboratory English for Research Paper Writing Total 26 hrs Finite Element Applications in Manufacturing Engineering Economics Automation in Manufacturing Advanced Metrology Elective - 1 Elective - 2 Manufacturing and Metrology Laboratory Industry Visit and Technical Seminar Research Methodology and IPR Total 29 hrs Elective - 3 Elective - 4 Elective - 5 Elective - 6 Automation and Smart Manufacturing Laboratory Project Work I Total 22 hrs

Project Work II Total 28 hrs ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES (Six to be opted) 18PP21 Production and Operations Management 18PP22 Mechanics of Robot 18PP23 Tool Design 18PP24 Additive Manufacturing 18PP25 Applied Hydraulics and Pneumatics 18PP26 Optimization Techniques 18PP27 Non-Traditional Machining Processes 18PP28 Product Development Strategies 18PP29 Image Processing and Machine Vision 18PP30 Mechatronics System 18PP31 Logistics and Supply Chain Management 18PP32 Industrial Internet of Things 18PP33 Lean Six Sigma 18PP34 Mechanics of Polymer Matrix Composites 18PP35 Industrial Ergonomics 18PP36 Precision Machining 18PP37 Research Methodology

09.06.2018

(2018 REGULATIONS) (Minimum No. of credits to be earned: 74*) Hours/Week Maximum Marks CAT Credits Lecture Tutorial Practical CA FE Total I SEMESTER 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC 3 3 3 3

2 0 2 2

0 0 0 0

4 3 4 4

50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100

0

0

4

2

50

50

100

0 0 14 8 II SEMESTER

** 4

Grade 20

0 300

0 300

0 600

3

0

4

50

50

100

0 0 0 0 0 4 4 ** 8

3 3 3 3 3 2 2 Grade 23

50 50 50 50 50 50 100 0 450

50 50 50 50 50 50 0 0 350

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 0 800

PC PC PC PE PE PC EEC MC

0 0 0 0

3 3 3 3

50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100

4

2

50

50

100

PE PE PE PE PC

6 10

3 17

100 350

0 250

100 600

EEC

28 28

14 14

50 50

50 50

100 100

EEC

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE

2

3 0 2 2 3 0 3 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 17 4 III SEMESTER 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 0

0

0 0 12 0 IV SEMESTER 0 0 0 0 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

* Indicated is the minimum number of credits to be earned by a student. ** - 60 hrs in I semester and 90 hrs in II semester; Grade: Completed / Not Completed CAT – Category; PC – Professional Core; PE - Professional Elective EEC – Employability Enhancement Course; MC- Mandatory Course

323

PC PC PC PC EEC MC

PC

59th ACM

09.06.2018

ONE CREDIT COURSES OFFERED BY THE DEPARTMENT OF PRODUCTION ENGINEERING 18PK01 18PK02 18PK03 18PK04 18PK05 18PK06

Process Improvement and Product Design through Lean Six Sigma Design and Optimization Technology Theory of Constraints and its Thinking Process Press Tool Design Injection Mold Design Advanced Metrology and Calibration

SCIENCE ELECTIVES 18ID01 18ID02 18ID03 18ID04 18ID05 18ID06 18ID07 18ID08 18ID09

Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS) Sensors for Engineering Applications Laser Processing of Materials Plasma Technology Nanosensor and its Applications Nano Magnetism and Spintronics Corrosion Science and Engineering Instrumental Methods of Chemical Analysis Polymeric Materials

HUMANITIES AND LANGUAGES ONE CREDIT COURSES 18OK01 18OK02 18OK03 18OK04

Research Writing in Engineering Sciences Indian Ethos and Human Values Personality Development Financial Accounting and Cost Accounting

324

59th ACM 13. Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment ME PRODUCTION ENGINEERING (PART TIME)

09.06.2018 (2018 REGULATIONS) (Minimum No. of credits to be earned: 74*)

Course Code

18PP01 18PP02 18PP03 18PP51 18PP81

Course Title

Statistical Quality Control and Design of Experiments Computer Numerical Control and Robotics Futuristic Materials and their Processing Object Computing and Data Structures Laboratory English for Research Paper Writing Total 16 hrs

Hours/Week Credits Lecture Tutorial Practical I SEMESTER 2 2 0 3

3 3 0 0 8 II SEMESTER 18PP07 Engineering Economics 3 18PP08 Automation in Manufacturing 2 18PP09 Advanced Metrology 3 18PP52 Manufacturing and Metrology Laboratory 0 18PP82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 Total 14 hrs 8 III SEMESTER 18PP04 Geometric Modeling for Manufacturing 3 18PP05 Design for Manufacture and Assembly 3 18PP61 Industry Visit and Technical Seminar 0 Total 14 hrs 6 IV SEMESTER 18PP06 Finite Element Applications in Manufacturing 3 18PP_ Elective - 1 3 18PP_ Elective - 2 3 18PP53 Automation and Smart Manufacturing Laboratory 0 Total 15 hrs 9 V SEMESTER 18PP_ Elective - 3 3 18PP_ Elective - 4 3 18PP_ Elective - 5 3 18PP_ Elective - 6 3 18PP71 Project Work I 0 Total 18 hrs 12 VI SEMESTER 18PP72 Project Work II 0 Total 28 hrs 0 ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES (Six to be opted) 18PP21 Production and Operations Management 3 18PP22 Mechanics of Robot 3 18PP23 Tool Design 3 18PP24 Additive Manufacturing 3 18PP25 Applied Hydraulics and Pneumatics 3 18PP26 Optimization Techniques 2 18PP27 Non-Traditional Machining Processes 3 18PP28 Product Development Strategies 3 18PP29 Image Processing and Machine Vision 3 18PP30 Mechatronics System 3 18PP31 Logistics and Supply Chain Management 3 18PP32 Industrial Internet of Things 3 18PP33 Lean Six Sigma 3 18PP34 Mechanics of Polymer Matrix Composites 3 18PP35 Industrial Ergonomics 3

325

Maximum Marks CA FE Total

CAT

50

50

100

PC

2 0 0 0 4

0 0 4 ** 4

4 3 2 Grade 12

50 50 50 0 200

50 50 50 0 200

100 100 100 0 400

PC PC EEC MC

0 2 0 0 0 2

0 0 0 4 ** 4

3 3 3 2 Grade 11

50 50 50 50 0 200

50 50 50 50 0 200

100 100 100 100 0 400

PC

2 2 0 4

0 0 4 4

4 4 2 10

50 50 100 200

50 50 0 100

100 100 100 300

PC PC EEC

2 0 0 0 2

0 0 0 4 4

4 3 3 2 12

50 50 50 50 200

50 50 50 50 200

100 100 100 100 400

PC PE PE PC

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 6 6

3 3 3 3 3 15

50 50 50 50 100 300

50 50 50 50 0 200

100 100 100 100 100 500

PE PE PE PE EEC

0 0

28 28

14 14

50 50

50 50

100 100

EEC

0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE

PC PC PC MC

59th ACM 18PP36 18PP37

09.06.2018

Precision Machining Research Methodology

3 3

0 0

0 0

3 3

50 50

50 50

* Indicated is the minimum number of credits to be earned by a student. ** - 60 hrs in I semester and 90 hrs in II semester; Grade: Completed / Not Completed CAT – Category; PC – Professional Core; PE - Professional Elective EEC – Employability Enhancement Course; MC- Mandatory Course

ONE CREDIT COURSES OFFERED BY THE DEPARTMENT OF PRODUCTION ENGINEERING 18PK01 18PK02 18PK03 18PK04 18PK05 18PK06

Process Improvement and Product Design through Lean Six Sigma Design and Optimization Technology Theory of Constraints and its Thinking Process Press Tool Design Injection Mold Design Advanced Metrology and Calibration

SCIENCE ELECTIVES 18ID01 18ID02 18ID03 18ID04 18ID05 18ID06 18ID07 18ID08 18ID09

Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS) Sensors for Engineering Applications Laser Processing of Materials Plasma Technology Nanosensor and its Applications Nano Magnetism and Spintronics Corrosion Science and Engineering Instrumental Methods of Chemical Analysis Polymeric Materials

HUMANITIES AND LANGUAGES ONE CREDIT COURSES 18OK01 18OK02 18OK03 18OK04

Research Writing in Engineering Sciences Indian Ethos and Human Values Personality Development Financial Accounting and Cost Accounting

326

100 100

PE PE

59th ACM

09.06.2018 I SEMESTER

18PP01 STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL AND DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS 2203 STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL: Methods and philosophy of statistical process control – chance and assignable causes of quality variation, statistical basis of control charts - control charts for variables - 𝑋, R, and s charts - control charts for attributes – p, np, c and u charts. (8+7) ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING: Lot-by-Lot acceptance sampling for attributes – single sampling plans for attributes, double, multiple and sequential sampling plans, acceptance sampling by variables - chain sampling, continuous sampling, skip-lot sampling plans. (8+7) DESIGN OF EXPERIMENT: Fundamentals of experimental design, guidelines for designing experiments, analysis of variance, experiments with one factor, completely randomized design, randomized block design, factorial experiments, Latin square design. (8+7) RESPONSE SURFACE METHODOLOGY: Empirical models – linear regression models, estimation of parameters in linear regression models, confidence interval and hypothesis testing in multiple regression, 2-level factorial design – 23 design, general 2k design, single replication of 2k design, design for fitting second order models – class of central composite design. (8+7) Total L: 32 + T:28 = 60 REFERENCES: 1. Amitava Mitra, Fundamentals of Quality Control and Improvement, John Wiley and Sons, New Jersey, 2016. 2. Eugene L Grant, Richard S Leavenworth, Statistical Quality Control, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, New Delhi, 2016. 3. Raymond H. Myers, Douglas C. Montgomery, Christine M. Anderson Cook, Response Surface Methodology: process and product optimization using experimental designs, John Wiley and Sons, 2016. 4. Ronald E Walpole, Raymond H Myers, Sharon L Myers and Keying Ye, Probability and Statistics for Engineers and Scientists, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2016. 5. Douglas C Montgomery, Introduction to Statistical Quality Control, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2009.

18PP02 COMPUTER NUMERICAL CONTROL AND ROBOTICS 3204 CONSTRUCTION of CNC MACHINES: Types of CNC machines, construction of CNC Machines - structures, guide ways, ball screws, turret, ATC, APC, Control system: Feedback devices, spindle and feed drives, servo motors, control system, types of interpolators, maintenance, testing of CNC machines. (12) PROGRAMMING of CNC MACHINES: Cutting Tools for CNC machines, ISO and EIA standards, G codes, M codes, turning centre programming, machining centre programming, canned cycles, programming for industrial components, generation of CNC program using CAM software. (12) ROBOTICS: History and present status, Law of robotics, robot definitions, robotic systems and robot anatomy, humans systems and robotics, specifications of robots, safety measures in robotics. (10) ROBOT KINEMATICS: Forward and reverse kinematics, Robot Drives, End effectors, Sensors and application of robots in industrial environment, artificial Intelligence. (11) TUTORIALS: 1. Facing and Turning exercise using CNC - Horizontal Turning Centre 2. Linear, Circular interpolation - Face and End milling exercise using CNC – VMC Machine 3. Profile milling exercises incorporating sub programs in CNC VMC 4. Canned cycle exercises for CNC VMC 5. Determination of maximum and minimum position of links using a Robot 6. Estimation of accuracy, repeatability and resolution of a robot.

(30)

Total L: 45+ T: 30 =75 REFERENCES: 1. Mikell P Groover, Mitchel Weiss and Roger N Nagel, “Industrial Robotics”, McGraw Hill, 2017 2. Deb S.R. and ‎Sankha Deb, “Robotics Technology and Flexible Automation”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2017. 3. Michael Mattson, “CNC Programming: Principles and Applications”, Cengage Learning India P. Ltd., New Delhi, 2014. 4. Hans B Kief Helmut A Roschiwal, “CNC Handbook” McGraw Hill Company, New York, 2013. 5. HMT, “Mechatronics”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012. 6. Peter Smid, “CNC Programming Hand Book”, Industrial Press Inc., New York, 2007.

18PP03 FUTURISTIC MATERIALS AND THEIR PROCESSING 3003 AUTOMOBILE MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURE: Requirement of Automotive materials, Aluminium alloys, High performance Steels, Intermetallic Titanium alloys, Magnesium alloys, Ti-MMC, High performance polymers, Automotive composites -GFRP, CFRP. Additive manufacturing materials, High pressure die casting, Laser and Electron beam welding, Additive Manufacturing techniques- SLS, SLM, Stereolithography, Inkjet printing. (12) AEROSPACE MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURE: Anatomy of an aircraft, Distribution of material usage in airframe, Aluminium, Magnesium, Titanium and steel alloys, Ceramics , Composites - GFRP, Carbon and graphene composites, Glare, Digital composites – cellular solids, Metal foams. Laser beam welding and friction stir welding, Additive Manufacturing of

327

59th ACM

09.06.2018

Ceramics, Automatic tape laying, automatic fibre placement, Resin Infusion, Resin Transfer Moulding and Resin Film Infusion processes. (12) ENERGY MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURE: Need for high performance energy materials, Carbon nanostructures: CNTs, Graphenes, and Fullerenes for energy conversion and storage. Nano-materials for Solar Cells Applications, Next generation battery materials - Li-ion, Ni-Metal Hydride and Ni-Hydrogen. Synthesis of Nanostructures- Top down and Bottom up approaches, Physical methods - high energy ball milling, Physical Vapour Deposition (PVD), Laser ablation, sputter deposition methods (Qualitative), Chemical Vapour Deposition (CVD). Chemical methods-Sol-gel technique, Hydrothermal synthesis. (11) HEALTHCARE MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURE: Human Implants and Prosthetics, Metallic, ceramic and polymer implant materials, Biocomposites, Metamaterials. Laser cutting of metal tubes, selective laser melting, additively manufacturing of biomaterials, micromachining and micro moulding. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Bhushan Bharat, “Springer Handbook of Nanotechnology”, Springer, 2017 2. Sohel Rana and Raul Fangueiro, “Advanced Composite Materials for Aerospace Engineering: Processing, Properties and Applications”, Woodhead Publishing, 2016. 3. Rowe Jason, “Advanced Materials in Automotive Engineering”, Woodhead Publishing, 2016. 4. Cantor Brian, Hazel Assender and Patrick Grant, “Aerospace Materials”, CRC Press, 2015. 5. Park Joon and Roderic S. Lakes, “Biomaterials: an Introduction”, Springer Science & Business Media, 2007. 6. Cao Guozhong, “Nanostructures & Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties & Applications”, Imperial College Press, 2004.

18PP04 GEOMETRIC MODELING FOR MANUFACTURING 3204 ELEMENTS OF GEOMETRIC MODELING: Introduction, Definition, Introduction to C graphics, Mathematical foundations (linear algebra, geometry, transformations, set theory), analytic and synthetic curves, Bezier and B-Spline curves, analytic and synthetic surfaces. (12) SOLID MODELING: Fundamentals of solid modeling, boundary representation, constructive solid geometry, parametric solid modeling, features of solid Modeling Packages. (10) FEATURE-BASED PRODUCT MODELING AND RECOGNITION: Introduction to manufacturing features, Role of features in design and manufacturing, Feature creation techniques, Feature - properties, Recognizing manufacturing features and feature topologies (11) AUTOMATED PROCESS PLANNING: Introduction to Process Planning, Approaches to Computer Aided Process Planning, Process ontology, Automated Feature Extraction, Ruled based methods, case based methods (12) TUTORIALS: 1. Programming for generation of Line using C-graphics 2. Programming for generation of Circle using C-graphics 3. Programming for generation of Ellipse using C-graphics 4. Programming for generation of Geometric Transformation (Scaling, Translation, Rotation) using C-graphics 5. Programming for generation of Bezier Curve using C-graphics 6. Programming for generation of Beizer Surface C-graphics

(30)

Total L: 45+ T: 30 =75 REFERENCES: 1. Ibrahim Zeid and Sivasubramanian R, “CAD/CAM: Theory & Practice”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009. 2. Agoston and Max K, “Computer Graphics & Geometric Modeling”, Springer-Verlag London Limited, 2005. 3. Gerald Farin, “Curves and Surfaces for CAGD - A Practical Guide”, 5th Edition, Morgan-Kaufmann, 2002. 4. Shah J J and Mantyla M, “Parametric and Feature-based CAD/CAM”, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1995.

18PP05 DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURE AND ASSEMBLY 3204 DFM APPROACH: DFM approach, guidelines, standardization – comparison, design for assembly, DFA index, Cumulative effect of tolerances - Worst case method, root sum square method, dimensions following truncated normal distributions, Tolerance synthesis, non linear tolerance tolerance analysis, tolerance cost relationships. Process capability, Interchangeable part manufacture and selective assembly, deciding the number of groups - Control of axial play - introducing secondary machining operations, laminated shims, examples. (13) GEOMETRIC DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING: Introduction to Model Based Definition, ISO 16792 and ASME Y 14.41 standards – Standards for Geometric tolerance ASME Y 14.5 and ISO 1101 - Examples for application of geometric tolerances - True Position Theory - Comparison between co-ordinate and convention method of feature location, tolerancing and true position tolerancing, virtual size concept, floating and fixed fasteners, projected tolerance zone, zero true position tolerance, functional gauges, paper layout gauging, compound assembly, examples. Datums, datum feature, simulate datum feature, datum targets - Grouped datum system with spigot and recess, pin and hole - computation of translational and rotational accuracy, geometric analysis and applications. (12) FORM DESIGN OF CASTINGS AND WELDMENTS: Redesign of castings based on parting line considerations, minimising core requirements, redesigning cast members using weldments, form design aspects of sheet metal components. (10) TOLERANCE CHARTING: Operation sequence for typical shaft type of components. Preparation of process drawings for different operations, tolerance worksheets and centrality analysis, examples design features to facilitate machining, datum

328

59th ACM

09.06.2018

features - functional and manufacturing, component design - machining considerations, redesign for manufacture, examples – design features to facilitate machining, datum features - functional and manufacturing, component design-machining considerations, redesign for manufacture, examples. (10) TUTORIALS: 1. Tolerances stack up analysis of a 2D assembly. 2. Problems on Model I and Model II type selective assembly. 3. Redesign of casting. 4. Redesign for machining 5. Tolerance charting.

(30)

Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Alex Krulikowski, “Fundamentals of Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing”, Delmar Cengage Learning International Edition, 2012. 2. Bryan R.Fischer, "Mechanical Tolerance Stackup and Analysis", CRC Press, 2011. 3. Paul J Drake, “Dimensioning and Tolerancing Handbook”, McGraw Hill Publications, 1999 4. Creveling C M, "Tolerance Design - A Hand Book for Developing Optimal Specifications", Addison Wesley Longman 5. Harry Peck, “Designing for Manufacture”, Pitman Publications, 1983. 6. James G Bralla, “Hand Book of Product Design for Manufacturing”, McGraw Hill Publications, 1983.

18PP51 OBJECT COMPUTING AND DATA STRUCTURES LABORATORY 0042 LABORATORY COMPONENT Object Computing (Using Python) Implementation of the following problems: 1. Implementation of classes and object for simple arithmetic operations. 2. Implementation of string manipulations. 3. Implementation of objects using list, set and dictionary. 4. Implementation of parameter passing mechanisms. 5. Implementation of user defined functions 6. Implementation of constructors and destructors. 7. Implementation of inheritance. 8. Implementation of polymorphism. Data Structures (Using Python) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Program using arrays. Representation of Sparse & dense Matrix using arrays. Implementation of various sorting algorithms Implementation of Stacks. Implementation of queue. Implementation of Linked Lists: Singly linked, doubly linked and Circular lists and applications.

Total P: 60 REFERENCES: 1. Vijayalakshmi Pai G A., “Data Structures and Algorithms: Concepts Techniques and Applications”, McGraw Hill, 2017. 2. Goodrich T. and‎Roberto Tamassia, “Data Structures and Algorithms in Python”, Wiley, Michael, 2016. 3. Wesley J Chun, “Core Python Applications Programming”, Prentice Hall, 2012. 4. Mark Summerfield, “Programming in Python 3: A Complete Introduction to the Python Language”, Addison-Wesley Professional, 2009. 5. Martin C. Brown, “PYTHON: The Complete Reference”, McGraw Hill, 2001. 6. Allen B Downey, “Think Python”, O’Reilly, 2012.

II SEMESTER 18PP06 FINITE ELEMENT APPLICATIONS IN MANUFACTURING 3204 FINITE ELEMENT PROCEDURES: Need for FEA in manufacturing, Concept of elements, 1D, 2D and 3D models element connectivity, Stiffness matrix, Shape functions, Review of numerical methods to solve PDEs, concepts of Variational calculus, Plane stress and Plane strain models in manufacturing problems, Understanding manufacturing processes as an interaction of material, stress and strain energy, Derivation of strain rate matrix. (11) MODELING OF FORMING: General governing equations for metal forming, Modeling of forging process, derivation of governing equation and boundary conditions, extending forging process model to other forming processes, FEA based case studies. (12) MODELING OF CASTING PROCESS: Modeling of solidification process, types of elements used for casting problems, boundary and initial conditions, FEA based case studies. (10) MODELING OF WELDING PROCESS & MACHINING PROCESS: Modeling of arc welding problem using FEA, moving heat source, boundary conditions, friction models in machining process, finite element formulation of chip formation, Application of Boundary Conditions, Solution Procedure and Evaluation of Secondary Quantities. (12)

329

59th ACM

09.06.2018

TUTORIALS: 1. Static structural analysis of a 1D bar problem. 2. Steady-state thermal analysis of a 1D bar. 3. Dynamic analysis of a sheet metal forming process. 4. Nonlinear transient analysis of solidification of casting process. 5. Static structural analysis of weld joints under thermal expansion.

(30)

Total L: 45 + T: 30 =7 5 REFERENCES: 1. Prakash M. Dixit and Uday S. Dixit, “Modeling of Metal Forming and Machining Processes”, Springer – Verlag London Limited, UK, 2008. 2. Reddy J N., “Introduction to Finite Element Method”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2005. 3. Sindo Kou, “Transport Phenomena and Materials Processing”, John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York, 1996. 4. Edward R Champion, “Finite Element Analysis in Manufacturing Engineering”, McGraw Hill, New York, 1992. 5. Shiro Kobayashi, Soo Ikoh and Taylan Altan, “Metal Forming and the Finite Element Method”, Oxford and IBH Publishing, New Delhi, 1989. 6. Owen D R J and Himton E., “Finite Elements in Plasticity, Theory and Practice”, Pinevidge Press Limited, U.K, 1980.

18PP07 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS 3003 INTEREST AND TIME VALUE OF MONEY: Present economic policy, liberalization, privatization, and globalization, scope for industrial growth, Cash-flow diagram, simple interest, compound interest, single payments, uniform series payments, interest factors and interest tables, nominal and effective interest rates, continuous compounding, and uniform continuous payments. Methods for evaluation of alternatives: Present worth comparison - equal, unequal lived assets, study period, assets with infinite life, capitalized cost and bond valuation. Equivalent uniform annual cost comparison, Rate of return comparison. (12) REPLACEMENT ANALYSIS: Review of conventional approach, group replacement, analysis with time value accounting, replacement due to deterioration, obsolescence, inadequacy, economic life for cyclic replacements, current salvage value of the defender, defender and challenger with different lives, additional one year assessment. Depreciation: reasons, depreciation accounting, causes of declining value, Methods of depreciation. (11) COST MANAGEMENT: Cost structure of a product - direct, indirect cost - overheads - factory, administrative, selling and distribution overheads – absorption - Target costing. Cost, volume, profit analysis: Analysis with time value accounting, linear, non-linear, multi product break even analysis. Project management, PERT - CPM, crashing, cost system. Risk and multi stage sequential decision analysis: Recognizing risk, including risk in economic analysis, expected value, payoff table, decision tree, discounted decision tree. (11) PROJECT FEASIBILITY ANALYSIS: Case study, report preparation. Marketing feasibility: Types of market, identification of investment opportunities, market and demand analysis, forecasting demand, forecast control, secondary sources of information. Technical feasibility: QFD, Product design, concept of concurrent engineering; plant design, make vs buy decisions; value analysis, FAST approach. Financial feasibility: Means of financing, financial institutions, all India, state level; Profitability: cash flows of a project, financial leverage of a business. Tax factors in investment analysis, effects of inflation in economic analysis. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. William G Sullivan et al., “Engineering Economy”, Pearson Education Inc., 2015. 2. John A White et al, “Principles of Engineering Economic Analysis”, John Wiley and Sons, 2012. 3. Leland T Blank and Anthony J Tarquin, “Engineering Economy”, McGraw Hill Book Company, 2012. 4. James L Riggs, David D Bedworth and Sabah U Randhawa, “Engineering Economics”, McGraw Hill Book Company, 2011. 5. Prasanna Chandra, “Projects - Preparation, Appraisal and Implementation”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011.

18PP08 AUTOMATION IN MANUFACTURING 2203 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION: Historical perspective of industrial automation - Origin - Evolution, current and future trends – Automation strategies and principles – Production concepts and Mathematical models. (6) TRANSFER LINES AND ASSEMBLY: Automated flow lines, buffers, part feeding systems, quantitative analysis of transfer lines and assembly systems. Material handling - AGV, AS/RS. Automated inspection. (7) SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS: Contact and non contact measurement of presence, displacement, temperature, velocity, acceleration, vibration, force, pressure, liquid flow. Fiber optics and Laser in measurement. (8) PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS: Evolution - Architecture - Scanning principle - different types of I/O modules Interfacing real world devices with PLC - Communication possibilities - Software development: Features, different methodologies and strategies adopted for logic development. Basics of HMI and SCADA systems. (9) TUTORIALS: 1. Measurement of temperature using thermocouple, thermistor and RTD 2. Measurement of displacement using LVDT 3. Position and velocity measurement using encoders 4. Force, Pressure and vibration measurement 5. Exercises using PLC controls 6. Interfacing sensors with PC

330

(30)

59th ACM 7. 8.

09.06.2018

Use of Automation Studio software Study of modularity in production systems Total: L: 30 + T: 30 = 60

REFERENCES: 1. Frank D Petruzella, “Programmable Logic Controllers”, McGraw Hill Book, company, 2016. 2. Mikell P Groover, “Automation, Production Systems and Computer-Integrated Manufacturing”, Prentice Hall, 2015. 3. Charles H Roth Jr, “Fundamentals of Logic Design”, Jaico Publishing house, 2013. 4. Bolton W., “Mechatronics”, Pearson Education Asia, New Delhi, 2011. 5. Nanua Singh, “Systems Approach to Computer-Integrated Design and Manufacturing”, John Wiley & Sons, 1996.

18PP09 ADVANCED METROLOGY 3003 CALIBRATION AND EVALUATION OF UNCERTAINTY: Measurement principle, calibration, standards, environmental conditions required, traceability of measurement, calibration procedure for vernier calliper, micrometer, dial gauge, slip gauges and surface plate, evaluation of uncertainty of measurement, Inter-laboratory comparisons and proficiency testing. (10) FORM MEASUREMENT AND COORDINATE METROLOGY: Computational metrology, types of filter used in surface roughness measuring instruments and form measuring instruments, Geometric data fitting: Least-square best-fit line, plane and circle, measurement of straightness, flatness and circularity errors. COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE: Need, types of CMM, modes of operation, types of probe, probe calibration, dimensional measurement in CMM, reverse engineering applications, computer-aided inspection planning (CAIP). (12) NON-CONTACT MEASUREMENT SYSTEM: MACHINE VISION SYSTEM: Need, applications, algorithms for vision based inspection. LASER METROLOGY: Interferometry, measurement of displacement, flatness, parallelism and gauge block calibration. MICRO AND NANO METROLOGY: Atomic Force Microscopy, Scanning Electron Microscopy and scanning white light interferometry. (13) MODEL BASED DEFINITION: Introduction to model based definition, digital product definition data, creation of model based definition model, generation of probe path planning for CMM. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Connie Dotson and Roger Harlow, “Fundamentals of Dimensional Metrology”, Cengage Learning, 2016. 2. Gupta S. V., “Measurement Uncertainties: Physical Parameters and Calibration of Instruments”, Springer Berlin Heidelberg, 2014. 3. Herron J.B., “Re-Use Your CAD: The Model-Based CAD Handbook”, Action Engineering, 2013 4. Horst Czichos, Tetsuya Saito and Leslie Smith, “Springer Handbook of Metrology and Testing”, Springer, 2011. 5. Bala Muralikrishnan and ‎Jayaraman Raja, “Computational Surface and Roundness Metrology”, Springer, 2008. 6. Alexander Hornberg, “Handbook of Machine Vision”, John Wiley & Sons, 2007.

18PP51 MANUFACTURING AND METROLOGY LABORATORY 0042 In this course, students will be provided with an orientation programme on relevant equipment/software for a duration of 10 hours. After this orientation, each student is expected to formulate and complete an activity of interest which has to be derived from the orientation programme under the guidance of a faculty. The details like background, problem definition, state of technology/knowledge in that area by a literature review (minimum 5 latest papers), objectives, methodology, equipment that can be used (from the orientation programme), results from the experiments and their interpretation with respect to the assumptions/background and a formal conclusion are expected in the report which is to be submitted at the end of the semester. This work is evaluated for the credit assigned. Expected hours needed for this work is 20 hours. Topics for orientation programme 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Exercise on metal forming Exercise on Plastic Injection Moulding Manufacturing of components by subtractive rapid prototyping/ 3D printing Exercise on welding – ultrasonic, TIG Exercise on electro discharge machining Measurement using dynamometer and accelerometer Wear Measurement using Pin on Disc apparatus Dimensional and Form measurements using CMM Computer aided inspection using Machine Vision System Measurement of surface roughness parameters using surface roughness tester Total P: 60

18PP61 INDUSTRY VISIT AND TECHNICAL SEMINAR 0042 Every student shall make a technical presentation on an appropriate topic allotted by the department and submit a report on dates announced by the department. The seminar and the report will be evaluated by a review committee constituted by the HoD.

331

59th ACM

09.06.2018

A minimum of two industrial visits are to be arranged as part of the course and the candidates are expected to make a presentation of their learnings in the industrial visit. There will be a viva-voce examination on the dates announced by the department to verify the depth of understanding of the candidate in both the industrial visits and the technical topic. Total P: 60

III SEMESTER 18PP52 AUTOMATION AND SMART MANUFACTURING LABORATORY 0042 In this course, students will be provided with an orientation programme on relevant equipment/software for a duration of 20 hours. After this orientation, each student is expected to formulate and complete an activity of interest which has to be derived from the orientation programme under the guidance of a faculty. The details like background, problem definition, state of technology/knowledge in that area by a good literature review (5 latest papers), objectives, methodology, equipment that can be used (from the orientation programme), results from the experiments and their interpretation with respect to the assumptions/background and a formal conclusion are expected in the report which is to be submitted at the end of the semester. This work is evaluated for the credit assigned. Expected hours needed for this work is 40 hours. Topics for orientation programme 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Simulation of pneumatic sequential circuit along with fringe conditions Simulation of electro pneumatic sequential circuit Simulation of PLC based sequential circuit Simulation of hydraulic circuits using software Exercise on Modular Manufacturing System – DIY kits IIoT Exercise 1 (CNC machines) IIoT Exercise 2 (Energy monitoring) IIoT Exercise 3 (Injection moulding machine) IIoT Exercise 4 (Hydraulic Press) IIoT Exercise 5 (Modular Manufacturing System) Total P: 60

18PP71 PROJECT WORK I 0063 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Identification of a real life problem in thrust areas Developing a mathematical model for solving the above problem Finalisation of system requirements and specification Proposing different solutions for the problem based on literature survey Future trends in providing alternate solutions Consolidated report preparation Total P: 90

IV SEMESTER 18PP72 PROJECT WORK II 0 0 28 14 The project work involves the following: Preparing a project - brief proposal including I.

Problem Identification 1. 2. 3. 4.

A statement of system / process specifications proposed to be developed (Block Diagram / Concept tree) List of possible solutions including alternatives and constraints Cost benefit analysis Time Line of activities

II.

A report highlighting the design finalization [based on functional requirements and standards (if any)]

III.

A presentation including the following: 1. 2. 3.

IV.

Implementation Phase (Hardware / Software / both) Testing and Validation of the developed system Learning in the Project

Consolidated report preparation Total P: 420

332

59th ACM PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES (SIX TO BE OPTED)

09.06.2018

18PP21 PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 3003 CAPACITY PLANNING: Long-range capacity planning, Economies of scale, Facility location, Factors influencing facility location, Single facility location problem, Multi facility location problem, Minimax location problem, Gravity location problem, Euclidean distance location problem, Classification of layout, Systematic layout design procedure, CRAFT. (11) PRODUCTION PLANNING AND INVENTORY MANAGEMENT: Aggregate planning - graphical, heuristic and transportation model, Development of a master production schedule, Make-to-stock, Assemble-to-order, Make-to-order/engineer-to-order, Material requirement planning, Lot sizing in MRP, Manufacturing resource planning and Enterprise resource planning. Need for inventory, Types of inventory, Continuous and periodic review policies, EOQ, EMQ models, Inventory model with purchase discounts, Inventory models with uncertain demand and lead times, ABC analysis. (12) SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING: Single machine models - SPT and EDD sequences, mean flow time, weighted mean flow time, number of tardy jobs and mean tardiness, Parallel machine models - minimizing make span and weighted mean flow time, Flow shop models - Johnson’s algorithm, Job shop models - branch and bound approach. Line balancing – Largest candidate rule, Kilbridge and Wester’s method, Ranked positional weights method. (11) LEAN PRODUCTION AND SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT: Elements of lean production, MRP Vs JIT, cycle time, takt time, KANBAN, SMED, 5S, theory of constraints, Agile manufacturing, Maintenance management: Statistics of failure, Time to failure and probability distributions, bath tub curve, Weibull’s probability distribution, reliability engineering, Preventive maintenance, Total productive maintenance, Overall equipment effectiveness, Supply chain management: Definition, global optimization, bullwhip effect, push-pull supply chain, delayed differentiation, downward substitution, product and process modularity, mass customization. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Richard B. Chase, Ravi Shankar, F. Robert Jacobs, Nicholas J. Aquilano, “Operations and Supply Management”, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited, 2013. 2. Panneerselvam R., “Production and Operations Management”, Prentice Hall India, New Delhi, 2012. 3. Jay Heizer, Barry Render and Jagadeesh Rajashekhar, “Operations Management”, Pearson Education, 2010. 4. Norman Gaither and Greg Frazier, “Operations Management”, Cengage Learning India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.

18PP22 MECHANICS OF ROBOT 3003 ROBOT: Definition - Robot Anatomy - Co-ordinate Systems, Work Envelope, types and classification - Specifications - Joint Notations, Speed of Motion, Pay Load. Spatial transformations, Homogeneous coordinates, homogeneous transformation forward solution, inverse solution. (12) JACOBIAN: Joint velocities, motion generation, singularity, static forces in the manipulator, transformations of velocities and static forces in Cartesian space (11) DYNAMICS: Newton’s equation, Euler’s equation, closed form dynamic equations, Lagrangian formulation, manipulator dynamics in Cartesian space. (11) TRAJECTORY GENERATION: Joint space, Cartesian space, collision free path generation, path planning. Mechanism design – manipulator mechanism, actuation schemes, stiffness and compliance, position and force sensing. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Mikell P Groover, “Industrial Robotics - Technology, Programming and Applications”, McGraw Hill Education, 2017. 2. John Craig, “Introduction to Robotics, Mechanics and Control”, Pearson Education, 2008. 3. Richaerd D Klafter, Thomas Achmielewski and MickaelNegin, “Robotic Engineering - An Integrated Approach”, Prentice Hall India, New Delhi, 2001. 4. Richard Paul, “Robot Manipulators: Mathematics, Programming and Control”, MIT Press, 1981.

18PP23 TOOL DESIGN 3003 DESIGN OF CUTTING TOOLS: Cutting tool material, Single point cutting tool, Form tool, Hole making cutting tools, Milling cutter, Broaching tool, Grinding wheel, ISO standard for inserts, Tool holders, Selection of inserts and tool holders for specific applications, Automatic tool changers, Tool positioners and tool presetting in CNC machines. (11) DESIGNOF JIGS AND FIXTURES: Principles of location, clamping and support, Drill bushes, General considerations for design of jigs and fixtures, Types of drill jigs, Milling fixture, Turning fixture, Welding fixture, Modular fixture, Broaching fixture, Grinding fixture, Design of drill jig and fixture. (12) DESIGN OF PRESS TOOLS: Power presses, Press operations, Press tonnage, Elements of press tool die, Types of dies, Clearance, Methods of reducing cutting forces, Strip layout, Selection of standard die set, Centre of pressure, Design of blanking and piercing die, Sheet metal bending methods, Bending force, Bend allowance, Spring back, Design of bending die, Drawing operations, Metal flow during drawing, Drawing force, Design of drawing die. (11)

333

59th ACM

09.06.2018

DESIGN OF INJECTION MOULD: Elements of mould, Types of injection mould, Mould material, Number of cavities, Selection of mould and moulding machine, Parting line and surface, Feed system, Ejection system, Temperature control system, Design of two plate and three plate mould. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Cyril Donaldson, George H LeCain, Goold V.C. and Joyjeet Ghose, “Tool Design”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited, New Delhi, 2012. 2. Sanjay K Nayak, Pratap Chandra Padhi, Y Hidayathullah, “Fundamentals of Plastics Mould Design”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited, New Delhi, 2012. 3. Joshi P.H., “Jigs and Fixtures”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited, New Delhi, 2010. 4. Joshi P.H., “Press Tools Design and Construction”, S.Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.

18PP24 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING 3003 INTRODUCTION AND DATA PROCESSING FOR ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING: Fundamentals of Additive Manufacturing (AM), classifications of Additive Manufacturing systems, Information workflow in Additive Manufacturing, impact of AM on Product development, reverse engineering - digitization techniques, model reconstruction, data Processing for Additive Manufacturing, Additive Manufacturing data formats - STL Format, STL file problems, consequences of building a valid and Invalid tessellated model, STL file repair. (10) SOLID AND LIQUID BASED ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS: Principle, details of processes, process variables, types, products, materials, advantages, applications and case studies: Fused Deposition Modeling (FDM), Laminated Object Manufacturing (LOM) – bonding mechanisms, Ultrasonic Consolidation (UC) – modeling of UC process, microstructures and mechanical properties of UC parts, Polyjet printing. Stereolithography (SLA), Solid Ground Curing (SGC), Shape Deposition Manufacturing (SDM), Ballistic Particle Manufacturing (BPM), Direct write technologies, JP-System 5. (13) POWDER BASED AND OTHER ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS: Principle, details of processes, process variables, types, products, materials, advantages, applications and case studies: Selective Laser Sintering (SLS) – Powder fusion mechanisms in SLS, Selective Laser Melting (SLM), Electron Beam Melting (EBM), Powder based beam deposition processes, Printing processes- Three Dimensional Printing (3DP) – droplet formation technology, printing process modeling. (12) ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING APPLICATIONS AND RAPID TOOLING: Applications of additive manufacturing in aerospace industry, automotive manufacturing industry, medical field – magics software. Rapid tooling – direct and indirect tooling, soft tooling Vs hard tooling - investment casting, sand casting, permanent-mold casting, silicone rubber tooling, spray metal tooling, and powder metallurgy tooling. Process optimisation - factors influencing accuracy- data preparation errors, part building errors, errors in finishing, influence of part build orientation. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Gibson I., Rosen D.W. and Stucker B., “Additive Manufacturing Methodologies: Rapid Prototyping to Direct Digital Manufacturing”, Springer, 2015. 2. Frank W. Liou, “Rapid Prototyping and Engineering Applications: A Tool Box for Prototype Development”, CRC Press, 2011. 3. Chua C.K., Leong K.F. and Lim C.S., “Rapid Prototyping: Principles and Applications”, 2nd Edition, World Scientific Publishers, 2010. 4. Hilton P.D. and Jacobs P.F., “Rapid Tooling: Technologies and Industrial Applications”, CRC press, 2005. 5. Pham D.T. and Dimov S.S., “Rapid Manufacturing”, Verlag, 2001.

18PP25 APPLIED HYDRAULICS AND PNEUMATICS 3003 COMPONENTS OF FLUID POWER SYSTEMS: Pneumatic and hydraulics, Symbols of fluid power elements. Pumps and compressors - types, selection. Cylinders - types, typical construction details. Valves - direction control, flow, pressure, types, typical construction details. (11) SPECIFICATIONS OF A FLUID POWER CIRCUIT: Selection of elements based on force, speed, travel and time. Sizing of pipes, piping layout and accessories. Accumulators, intensifiers. Maintenance and troubleshooting of fluid power circuits. (11) PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS DESIGN: General approach, travel step diagram. Sequential circuit design, cascade method, step counter method. K.V. Mapping for minimization of logic equation, fringe condition modules. Typical industrial applications of pneumatic systems: Metal working, handling, clamping, application with counters. (12) ELECTRICAL CONTROL CIRCUITS: Electro-pneumatics, ladder diagram. PLC - construction, types, operation, programming. PLC timers and counters. Servo and proportional valves - types, operation, application, hydro-mechanical servo systems. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. David W Pessen, “Industrial Automation – Circuit Design and Components”, Wiley India, 2011. 2. Anthony Espisito, “Fluid Power with Application”, Pearson Education Private Limited, 2008. 3. Majumdar S R., “Oil Hydraulic Systems: Principles and Maintenance”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited, 2003. 4. Majumdar S R., “Pneumatic Systems : Principles and Maintenance”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited, 2003.

334

59th ACM 5. 6.

09.06.2018

Peter Rohner, “Fluid Power Logic Circuit Design - Analysis, Design Method and Worked Examples”, The Macmillan Press Limited, 1979. Werner Deppert and Kurt Stoll, “Pneumatic Controls : An Introduction to Principles”, Vogel-Druck Wurzburg, 1975.

18PP26 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES 2203 UNCONSTRAINED NONLINEAR PROGRAMMING: Unimodal function, single variable optimization algorithms - exhaustive search, region - elimination method - interval halving method – Fibonacci method. Multivariable optimization algorithms - Direct search method - univariate method, pattern search methods - Hooke and Jeeves method, descend method- conjugate gradient method. (8+7) CONSTRAINED NONLINEAR PROGRAMMING: Characteristics of constrained problem – constrained optimization algorithms - Khun-Tucker conditions, direct search methods – complex search and random search, linearized search techniques – cutting plane method. (8+7) DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING: Principle of optimality, backward and forward recursion, calculus method of solution, tabular method of solution, shortest-route problem, knapsack model. (8+7) NONTRADITIONAL OPTIMIZATION ALGORITHMS: Genetic Algorithm – Working Principle, Fitness function, GA operators – differences and similarities between GA and traditional method – GA for constrained optimization. Simulated Annealing – algorithm and examples. (8+7) Total L: 32 + T: 28 = 60 REFERENCES: 1. David E Goldberg, “GA: In Search Optimization and Machine Learning”, Pearson, New Delhi, 2017. 2. Hamdy A Taha, “Operations Research – An Introduction”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2017. 3. Kalyanmoy Deb, “Optimization for Engineering Design, Algorithms and Examples”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2016. 4. Singiresu S. Rao, “Engineering Optimization Theory and Practice”, New Age International, New Delhi, 2016. 5. Kambo N. S., “Mathematical Programming Techniques”, East-West Press, New Delhi, 2012.

18PP27 NON-TRADITIONAL MACHINING PROCESSES 3003 MECHANICAL MACHINING PROCESSES: Abrasive jet machining, abrasive water jet machining, abrasive flow machining, process variables, mechanism of material removal, process capabilities, applications and limitations. Ultrasonic Machining: mechanics of cutting, process parameters, grain growing model, grain hammering model, analysis, capabilities. (12) THEROMOELECTRIC PROCESSES: Electro Discharge Machining (EDM): principle, components and functions process parameters, electrical circuit, material removal rate, process characteristics and application. Wire EDM: Principle, characteristics and applications. Electron Beam Machining (EBM): Elements and their functions, process parameters, process capabilities and applications. Laser beam machining (LBM): Laser production, types, process characteristics and applications. Plasma Arc Machining (PAM): elements, plasma arc torches, parameters, process capabilities. (14) CHEMICAL AND ELECTRO CHEMICAL MACHINING: Chemical machining (CM): Principle, masks, etchants, applications, advantages and limitations. Electro chemical Machining (ECM): Principle, components and functions, process parameters, material removal rate, inter electrode gap,tool design, electrolyte, applications and limitations. (7) ADVANCED PROCESSES: Magneto Rheological Finishing (MRF), Magneto rheological Abrasive Flow Finishing (MRAFF) and Magneto rheological Jet Finishing (MRJF). Micromachining, classifications, Electrochemical Micromachining. Hybrid processes Electro Chemical Spark Micro Machining (ECSMM), equipments, process parameters, capabilities and applications. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Gary F Benedict, “Non Traditional Manufacturing Process”, Routledge, 2017. 2. Vijay K Jain, “Advanced Machining Processes”, Allied Publications Private Limited, 2016. 3. JainVK, “Introduction to Micromachining”, Alpha Science International Ltd., 2014. 4. McGeoughJ A, “Advanced Methods of Machining”, Springer, 2011. 5. Hassan Abdel and Gaward El-Hofy, “Advanced Machining Processes”, McGraw Hill Publications, 2005. 6. James Brown, “Advanced Machining Technology Handbook”, McGraw Hill, 1998.

18PP28 PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT STRATEGIES 3003 CUSTOMER NEED GATHERING AND ESTABLISHING PRODUCT FUNCTION: Product development versus design, types of design and redesign, S-curve, gathering customer needs, organizing and prioritizing customer needs, quality function deployment- house of quality, establishing product function, FAST method, benchmarking and establishing engineering specifications, product portfolios. (10) CONCEPT DEVELOPMENT AND EMBODIMENT DESIGN: Information gathering, brain ball, C-sketch/6-3-5 method, morphological analysis, -TRIZ- axiomatic design. concept selection - Pugh chart, weighted decision matrix ,analytic hierarchy process, introduction to embodiment design –product architecture, configuration design, parametric design. Advanced methods -system modeling, FMEA - linking fault states to system modeling, fault tree analysis. (12) PHYSICAL PROTOTYPES AND EXPERIMENTATION: Types of prototypes, use of prototypes, rapid prototyping - technique, classification and working principle, scale, dimensional analysis and similitude, physical model and experimentation - Design of

335

59th ACM

09.06.2018

Experiments (DOE), statistical analysis of experiments, product applications of physical modeling and DOE, design for robustness. (12) PRODUCT TEARDOWN AND REVERSE ENGINEERING: Overview, product teardown methods and applications. Reverse engineering: reverse engineering phases, data collection, mesh reconstruction, surface fitting, computer vision - structured light range imaging systems, reverse engineering hardware and software, applications of reverse engineering in automotive, aerospace and medical industries. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Kevin Otto and Kristin Wood, “Product Design - Techniques in Reverse Engineering and New Product Development”, Pearson Education, 2016. 2. Vignesh Raja, Kiran J. Fernandes, Reverse Engineering: An Industrial Perspective, Springer 2008 3. George E Dieter, “Engineering Design, A Materials and Processing Approach”, McGraw Hill Education, 2012. 4. Karl T Ulrich and Stephen D Eppinger, “Product Design and Development”, McGraw Hill, 2011.

18PP29 IMAGE PROCESSING AND MACHINE VISION 3003 DIGITAL IMAGES: Image formation, binary, gray and color images, steps in digital image processing, human vision and machine vision, image sampling and quantization, image enhancement - gray level transformations, histogram processing, image sharpening and smoothing, spatial and frequency domain filters, image restoration - noise models, noise reduction by spatial and frequency domain filtering. (12) IMAGE ANALYSIS: Image segmentation - edge and line detection, thresholding, region-based segmentation, image representation, feature extraction, object recognition. Study of various image operations, 2D and 3D measurements. (10) MACHINE VISION: Image sensing and acquisition, types of cameras and their principles, lightings, designing a machine vision system- selection of lens, camera and illumination, laser vision system, software’s for image processing. (12) INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS: Machine vision in factory automation, dimensional inspection, defects identification, pattern recognition applications, sorting of components, surface finish analysis, tool wear measurement, robot guidance, safety monitoring. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Alexander Hornberg, “Handbook of Machine and Computer Vision: The Guide for Developers and Users”, John Wiley & Sons, 2017. 2. Scott E Umbaugh, Digital Image Processing and Analysis: Human and Computer Vision Applications with CVIP tools, CRC Press, 2016. 3. Davies E R., “Computer and Machine Vision: Theory, Algorithms, Practicalities”, Academic Press, 2012. 4. Bhabatosh Chanda and Dutta Majumder D., “Digital Image Processing and Analysis”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2011. 5. Rafael G Gonzalez and Richard E Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, Pearson Education, 2009.

18PP30 MECHATRONICS SYSTEM 3003 MECHATRONICS: Need and applications, elements of mechatronic systems, role of mechatronics in automation, manufacturing and product development. Measurement: Importance of sensors in Mechatronics, Static and Dynamic characteristics of sensors, errors and output impedance of sensors, transducers for measurement of displacement, strain, position, velocity, noise, flow, pressure, temperature, humidity, vibration, liquid level, vision sensors. Linear and rotary drives – types and selection criteria (11) MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND DESIGN: Mechatronic approach - Control program control, adaptive control and distributed systems - Design process - Types of Design - Integrated product design - Mechanisms, load conditions, design and flexibility Structures, load conditions, flexibility and environmental isolation - Man machine interface, industrial design and ergonomics, information transfer from machine to man and man to machine, safety. (12) REAL TIME INTERFACING AND DATA ACQUISITION: Introduction - Elements of data acquisition and control Overview of I/O process - Installation of I/O card and software - Installation of application software - Over framing. General configuration: single channel and multichannel data acquisition system, Digital Filtering, data logging, data conversion, introduction to digital transmission systems PC based data acquisition system. (11) MECHATRONICS SYSTEM INTEGRATION: Transducer calibration system for Automotive applications, Strain Gauge weighing system - Solenoid force - Displacement calibration system - Rotary optical encoder - Inverted pendulum control - Pick and place robot - pH control system - Case studies on design of Mechatronic products - Motion control using D.C. Motor, A.C. Motor & Solenoids - Car engine management - Barcode reader. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Sabri Cetinkunt, “Mechatronics”, John Wiley, 2007. 2. Bolton, “Mechatronics - Electronic Control Systems in Mechanical and Electrical Engineering”, Addison Wesley Longman Ltd., 1999. 3. Devdas Shetty and Richard A Kolk, “Mechatronics System Design”, PWS Publishing Company, 1997.

336

59th ACM 4. 5.

09.06.2018

Brian Morriss, “Automated Manufacturing Systems - Actuators, Controls, Sensors and Robotics”, McGraw Hill International Edition, 1995. Bradley Dawson D., Burd N.C. and Loader A.J., “Mechatronics: Electronics in Products and Processes”, Chapman and Hall, London, 1991.

18PP31 LOGISTICS AND SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT 3003 LOGISTICS: Definition of logistics and supply chain management - Role of distribution in supply chain, distribution network design, factors influencing distribution network design, distribution networks in practice, network design in the supply chain, factors influencing the network design, framework for network design, models for facility location and capacity allocation, Impact of uncertainty on network design. (10) COORDINATED PRODUCT AND SUPPLY CHAIN DESIGN: Decision phases in a supply chain, objectives of SCM, examples of supply chains, supply chain drivers, supply chain integration, supply chain performance measures. General framework Design for logistics - Standardization - Push-pull boundary - Supplier integration into New Product Development - Keys to effective supplier integration - Mass Customization - Meaning - Mass Customization and Supply Chain Management. (10) STRATEGIC ALLIANCES AND INVENTORY MANAGEMENT: Framework for strategic alliances - Third Party Logistics - 3PL issues and requirements - Retailer - Supplier Partnerships - Issues in Retailer - Supplier Partnerships - Distributor Integration Types and issues of Distributor Integration. Cycle inventory, economies of scale to exploit fixed costs, quantity discounts, example problems, multi-echelon inventory, safety inventory in supply chain, safety level estimation, supply uncertainty, data aggregation, replenishment policies, managing safety inventory in practice, product availability, optimal level, affecting factors, supply chain contracts - Bull whip effect. (15) TECHNOLOGIES FOR SCM: Information Technology (IT) - Infrastructure - Interface devices - System architecture - Electronic commerce - IT for supply chain excellence - Service oriented architecture - Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) - Impact of internet. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Sunil Chopra, Peter Meindl and Dharam VirKalra, “Supply Chain Management”, Pearson India Education Services Private Limited, New Delhi, 2016. 2. Donald Bowersox‎M. Bixby Cooper and David Closs, “Supply Chain Logistics Management”, McGraw Hill, Education, New Yorks, 2012. 3. Simchi - Levi Davi, Kaminsky Philip and Simchi-Levi Edith, “Designing and Managing the Supply Chain”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2012. 4. Sadler I., “Logistics and Supply Chain Integration”, Sage Publishers, 2007.

18PP32 INDUSTRIAL INTERNET OF THINGS 3003 IOT ARCHITECTURE: Introduction to IoT - IoT vs industrial IoT (IIoT) - m2m architecture - IoT architecture - definitions and functional requirements sensing, actuation, wireless sensor networks - future developments - possible architecture for the future IoT use cases. (9) BASICS OF COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKING PROTOCOLS: Internet communication - IP addresses - mac addresses- Wifi – Zigbee – low energy bluetooth – LORA - 6LOWPAN TCP and UDP - MQTT (12) ELECTRONIC PROTOTYPING: Prototypes and production - open source versus closed source - prototyping embedded devices - embedded computing basics - protpotyping IoT projects with Arduino - protpotyping IoT projects with Arduino and Raspberry PI - industry IoT case study. (12) IOT DATA ANALYTICS: Sensor- cloud – types of cloud - edge analytics and fog computing - sensor data aggregation – sensor data mining techniques – big data analytics - predictive analytics. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Adrian McEwen and Hakim Cassimally, “Designing the Internet of Things”, John Wiley & Sons Ltd., UK, 2014. 2. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick and Omar Elloumi, “The Internet of Things: Key Applications and Protocols”, John Wiley & Sons Ltd., UK, 2012. 3. David Boswarthick, Omar Elloumi and Olivierhersent, “M2M Communications: A Systems Approach”, John Wiley & Sons Ltd, UK, 2012. 4. Dieter Uckelmann, Mark Harrison and Florian Michahelles, “Architecting the Internet of Things”, Springer, New York, 2011.

18PP33 LEAN SIX SIGMA 3003 ELEMENTS OF LEAN SIX SIGMA: Definition, need of fusion of Lean and Six Sigma, unique features, benefits, value proposition, framework, MRP and ERP, total process. scalable Lean Six Sigma, emergence of transactional enterprises. (10) SIX SIGMA PROCESS AND IMPROVEMENT TOOLS: DMAIC phases, tools, Design of Experiments, e-Infrastructure, Six Sigma as a metric, critical success factors for Six Sigma, customer centricity, financial results, management engagement, infrastructure, predicting team success, preventing team failure. Six Sigma culture. key messages of Six Sigma. (12)

337

59th ACM

09.06.2018

LEAN MANUFACTURING: Essentials, Cycle Efficiency, cost reduction and its sources, speeding of processes, application in service industry, manufacturing time traps, finding and removing the hidden time traps, velocity of the process, third law of lean Six Sigma for supply chain acceleration, second law of lean Six Sigma for supply chain acceleration, major lean improvement tools, pull systems, setup reduction, Total Productive Maintenance, determination of 20% waste using value stream map, creating a value stream map, lean enterprise. (13) IMPLEMENTATION OF LEAN SIX SIGMA: Road map of Lean Six Sigma, need for executive engagement, securing CEO/executive commitment, role of CEO, value stream selection, drivers of shareholder value, net present value for project selection, destruction of shareholder value, competing with Lean Six Sigma. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Michael L. George, David T. Rowlands and Bill Kastle, “What is Lean Six Sigma”, McGraw Hill, Education, New York, 2012. 2. Terence T. Burton, “Accelerating Lean Six Sigma Results – How to Achieve Improvement Excellence in the New Economy”, J. Ross Publishing, Mexico City, 2011. 3. Donald H. Sheldon, “World Class Master Scheduling – Best Practices and Lean Six Sigma Continuous Improvement”, J. Ross Publishing, Mexico City, 2006. 4. Michael L. George, “Lean Six Sigma: Combining Six Sigma Quality with Lean Production Speed”, McGraw Hill, Education, New York, 2002.

18PP34 MECHANICS OF POLYMER MATRIX COMPOSITES 3003 MANUFACTURE OF COMPOSITE COMPONENTS: Modern materials in design, types, metals, polymers, ceramics, composites, Matrix and reinforcement-their roles, principal types of fibre and matrix materials. Processing of PMC: Lay up and curing, open and closed mould processes, bag moulding, filament winding, pultrusion, pulforming, thermoforming, injection moulding, blow moulding, an overview of metal matrix composite processing and ceramic matrix composite processing. (11) MICRO MECHANICAL BEHAVIOUR OF A LAMINA: Volume and mass fractions, evaluation of elastic moduli, strength of unidirectional lamina. (11) MACRO MECHANICAL BEHAVIOUR OF A LAMINA: Hooke's law for different types of materials, engineering constants for orthotropic materials. Stress, strain relations for plane stress in an orthotropic materials and in a lamina of arbitrary orientation, strength of an orthotropic lamina, basic strength theories. (11) MACRO MECHANICAL BEHAVIOUR OF A LAMINATE: Classical lamination theory - lamina stress - strain behaviour resultant forces and moments in a laminate - types of laminates - strength and stiffness of laminates – inter laminar stresses in laminates. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Ronald F Gibson, “Principles of Composite Material Mechanics", McGraw Hill Book Co, 2007. 2. Autar K Kaw, "Mechanics of Composite Materials", CRC Press, NY, 2006. 3. Matthews F. L. and Rawlings R. D., “Composite Materials: Engineering and Science”, Woodhead Publishing, 1999. 4. Robert M Jones, "Mechanics of Composite Materials", Taylor and Francis, 1999.

18PP35 INDUSTRIAL ERGONOMICS 3003 ANTHROPOMETRY: History of ergonomics, interdisciplinary nature, ergonomics for productivity, safety, health and comfort, Need for anthropometry, body planes, body movement ranges, measuring procedures, measurement tools, anthropometric measurements, percentile calculation, ergonomic guidelines for design use, anthropometry in applications. (12) INDUSTRIAL DESIGN: Manual lifting, revised NIOSH lifting equation, material handling devices, work posture - sitting, standing or sit-standing, horizontal work surface design, console design for standing operator, seat design, hand tool design, fitting the task, designing for the user, design guidelines for hand tools, design of VDT workstations, information display modalities, design of controls, coding of controls, compatibility. (11) RISK ASSESSMENT: Physical methods - QEC, RULA, REBA, strain index, Borg rating, Psychophysiological methods electromyography, heart rate, heart rate variability, energy expenditure, cognitive methods – focus groups, hierarchical task analysis, SHERPA, environmental methods - thermal conditions measurements, cold and heat stress indices, thermal comfort analysis. (11) ILLUMINATION, NOISE AND VIBRATION: Illumination, measurement of light, concept of visibility, effects of lighting on performance, recommended levels of illumination, distribution of light, glare, Noise, measurement of sound, noise and loss of hearing, analysis and reduction of noise, effect of noise on performance, noise exposure limits, handling noise problems, whole body vibration, attenuation, amplification and resonance, effects of vibration, limits for exposure to whole-body vibration. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Bridger R S., “Introduction to Human Factors and Ergonomics”, CRC Press, 2017. 2. Neville Stanton, “Handbook of Human and Ergonomics Methods”, CRC Press, 2004. 3. Debkumar Chakrabarti, “Indian Anthropometric Dimensions for Ergonomic Design Practice”, NID, 1997. 4. Martin Helandar, “A Guide to Ergonomics of Manufacturing”, Taylor and Francis, 1995. 5. Mark S Sanders, “Human Factors in Engineering and Design”, McGraw Hill, 1993

338

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18PP36 PRECISION MACHINING 3003

PRECISION MACHINING: Principle - Need for precision machining-development perspective - classes of achievable machining accuracy: conventional machining, precision machining, ultra precision machining - examples. ELEMENTS: Guideways - drive systems: Nut and screw transmission, linear motor drive- direct spindle drive - bearings - capabilities. (12) TOOLING FOR PRECISION MACHINING: Collet chucks tool holders-work holding devices: fixtures, step and TOE clamp cutting tool materials - characteristics - alignment of machine tool elements - CAD/CAM integration - tool path generation – simulation n-post processing - examples. (12) HIGH SPEED MACHINING: Principle- Need for High speed/high velocity machining - Determinants: fast machining, smart machines, tools and processes. Characteristics - high speed spindle elements - High cutting speed-machining parameters. Precision tooling interface- dry and near dry machining process. (12) APPLICATIONS: Mould and die making: automotive forging die, injection and blow moulds. Medical applications: biocompatibility, osseointegration, surface topography, implants classification, specialized dental and orthopedic implants – custom prototype parts production - hard machining - one pass machining- examples. (9) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Murty R.L., “Precision Engineering in Manufacturing”, New Age International Pvt. Ltd., 2015. 2. Venkatesh V. C. and Sudin Izman, “Precision Engineering”, McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., 2014. 3. Dale Mickelson, “Guide to Hard Milling & High Speed Machining”, Industrial Press Inc., 2007. 4. Bert P ERDEL, “High- Speed Machining”, Society of Manufacturing Engineers, 2003. 5. Robert I King, ”Hand book of High-Speed Machining Technology”, Chapman and Hall Ltd., 1985.

18PP37 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY 3003 REVIEWING OF LITERATURE AND PROBLEM IDENTIFICATION: Source material, reviewing of literature. Preparing: list of reference reading, materials concerning the area of specialization, topic of research, critical evaluation, review of research work - primary and secondary sources or materials, techniques to be adopted in the collection of primary data. (10) METHODS OF PHILOSOPHY: Types of field research - significance of field research - tolls necessary for field research qualifications of a field researcher - data elicitation - recording and transcribing - establishing rapport with informants - data processing and analysis. Research Methods: Types of research methods: logical methods, specific method, descriptive methods, historical methods, comparative method, contrastive method. Formation of hypotheses - framing suitable research method for the topic concerned. (15) RESEARCH ETHICS AND TECHNICAL RESEARCH: Ethics - ethical issues related to publishing. Layout of research paper citation counting, peer reviewed journals, Impact Factor, Scopus, Web of Science, SCI/SCIE, H-index, DOI, ORCID ID and Plagiarism. Intellectual property rights (IPR) and patent. Common scientific software’s for computations and analysis. (10) REPORTING THE RESEARCH: Tentative models to be framed - different levels and their presentation in the report, final format for research findings, observations - discussion with research guide and other experts - review of sample work, preliminary work - making necessary corrections and changes, structure of various chapters subsections - lists of tables, charts, bibliography, referencing and foot notes, appendices, graphs. Thesis formatting and making effective presentation - LaTex. (10 ) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. John Creswel. W, “Research Design, Qualitative and Quantitative and Mixed Methods Approaches”, Sage Publications India Pvt. Ltd, 2011. 2. C.R. Kothari, “Research Methodology - Methods and Techniques”, New Age International (P) Ltd., 2004. 3. Ram Ahuja, “Research Methods”, Rawat Publications, New Delhi, 2001. 4. Kate Tubain L., “A Manuel for Writers of Term Papers, Thesis and Dissertations”, The University of Chicago Press, Chicago, 1996. 5. Wilkinson and Bhandarkar, “Methodology and Techniques of Social Research”, Himalaya publishing House, Bombay, 1984.

AUDIT COURSES 18PP81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING 0040 Planning and preparation, word order, breaking up of long sentences, structuring paragraphs and sentences, being concise and removing redundancy, avoiding ambiguity and vagueness, clarifying who did what, highlighting the findings, hedging and criticising, paraphrasing and plagiarism. (15) Sections of a paper - Abstract, introduction, review of the literature, methods, results and discussions, conclusions, acknowledgements, references and the final check. (10)

339

59th ACM

09.06.2018

Key skills needed to write title, abstract, introduction, review of the literature, methods, results and discussions, and conclusions of a research paper. (20) Use of appropriate phrases to ensure the research paper is as good as it could possibly be the first- time submission.

(15)

Total P: 60 REFERENCES: 1. Adrian Wallwork, “English for Writing Research Papers”, Springer New York Dordrecht Heidelberg London, 2011. 2. Goldbort R., “Writing for Science”, Yale University Press, 2006. 3. Day R., “How to Write and Publish a Scientific Paper”, Cambridge University Press, 2006 4. Highman N., “Handbook of Writing for the Mathematical Sciences”, SIAM, Highman’s Book, 1998.

18PP82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR 0060 Meaning of research problem, sources of research problem, criteria and characteristics of a good research problem, errors in selecting a research problem, scope and objectives of research problem, approaches of investigation of solutions for research problem, data collection, analysis and interpretation. (25) Effective literature studies approaches, analysis of plagiarism, research ethics, effective technical writing, how to write report, developing a research proposal, format of research proposal, presentation of research proposal for assessment by a review committee. (20) Nature of intellectual property: Patents, designs, trade and copyright. Process of patenting and development: Technological research, innovation, patenting, development, international cooperation on intellectual property, procedure for grants of patents, patenting under PCT. (20) Patent rights: scope of patent rights, licensing and transfer of technology, patent information and databases, geographical indications. New developments in IPR: Administration of patent system, IPR of biological systems and computer software, traditional knowledge case studies on IPR. (25) Total P: 90 REFERENCES: 1. Robert P. Merges, Peter S. Menell, Mark A. Lemley, “Intellectual Property in New Technological Age”, 2016. 2. Ranjit Kumar, “Research Methodology: A Step by Step Guide for Beginners”, Sage Publication, 2nd Edition, 2010. 3. Ramappa T., “Intellectual Property Rights Under WTO”, S Chand Publication, 2008. 4. Halbert, “Resisting Intellectual Property”, Taylor & Francis Ltd, 2007. 5. Wayne Goddard and Stuart Melville, “Research Methodology: An Introduction”, 2001. 6. Stuart Melville and Wayne Goddard, “Research Methodology: An Introduction for Science & Engineering Students”, 1996. 7. Mayall, “Industrial Design”, McGraw Hill, 1992. 8. Niebel, “Product Design”, McGraw Hill, 1974.

ONE CREDIT COURSES OFFERED BY THE DEPARTMENT OF PRODUCTION ENGINEERING 18PK01 PROCESS IMPROVEMENT AND PRODUCT DESIGN THROUGH LEAN SIX SIGMA 1001 LEAN SIX SIGMA FUNDAMENTALS • Definition of term Sigma, Z Score, CTQ, Opportunity, Defect, DPMO • Types of data…importance of measurement, repeatability and reproducibility • Six Sigma Quality Level, Relationship between DPMO and Process Capability, Short/Long term Six Sigma, Z Shift • Six Sigma’s focus on inputs (X’s) over outputs (Y’s) using the formula Y=f (X) • Structure of execution team, Rhythm to sustain the improvement • Intro to DMAIC, DMADOV, Lean….how it is different from Traditional Quality ISO (4) METHODOLOGIES OF LEAN SIX SIGMA • DMAIC • DMADOV (DFSS) • Lean

(5)

TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES DMAIC • QFD • FMEA • Fishbone Diagram • Hypothesis Test • DoE • SPC DFSS • •

Kano Model Decision Making Tools • Pugh Matrix • Robust Design Tools

340

59th ACM LEAN • •

09.06.2018

Value Stream Mapping 5S

(6) Total L: 15

REFERENCES: 1. Alastair K Muir, “Lean Six Sigma Statistics”, McGraw Hill, 2006. 2. James T Schutta, “Business Performance through Lean Six Sigma”, ASQC Quality Press, 2006.

18PK02 DESIGN AND OPTIMIZATION TECHNOLOGY 1001 OPTIMIZATION TECHNOLOGY • Fundamentals and requirements of design optimization (what, when and why of optimization) • Optimization semantics, terminologies • Optimization techniques in practice • Discussion on Gradient based vs. Stochastic based optimization techniques • Fundamentals, requirements and challenges in multiple objectives design optimization • Demonstration of optimization using EXCEL solver

(5)

TRANSFER FUNCTIONS • Fundamental concepts of transfer function generation • Introduction to design of experiments • Importance of meta models in design optimization  What is a meta model?  Why meta models?  How to generate a meta model?  When to use a meta model?

(4)

ROBUST DESIGN • Fundamental concepts of robust design methods • Uncertainty quantification - how variation impacts performance • Discussion on the importance of maintaining design margins on customer CTQ’s • Linking probabilistics with optimization – driving robust designs

(4)

CASE STUDIES Two case studies to be worked out in the class Tool – Excel Solver

(2)

Total L: 15 REFERENCES: 1. “Optimization in Practice”, Altair Users Conference, Bangalore, India, August 2007. 2. “Dace based Probabilistic Optimization of Mechanical Components”, Proceedings of GT2006 ASME Turbo Expo 2006 : Power for Land, Sea & Air, Barcelona, Spain, May 8 – 11, 2006. 3. Kalyanmoy Deb, “Optimization for Engineering Design, Algorithms and Examples”, Prentice Hall, 2004. 4. Ashok D Belegundu and Tirupathi R Chandrupatla, “Optimization Concepts and Applications in Engineering”, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 1999. 5. Singiresu S Rao, “Engineering Optimization Theory and Practice”, New Age International, 1996.

18PK03 THEORY OF CONSTRAINTS AND ITS THINKING PROCESS 1001 FUNDAMENTALS OF THEORY OF CONSTRAINTS: 5 step process of TOC - Understanding the term “Bottleneck” Identifying Bottlenecks - Project vs Process Environments (a) Drum buffer rope methodology (b) Critical chain project management. (3) TOC TOOLS: Swim Lane Diagrams - Storyboarding - 5 Whys Technique - Root Cause Analysis - Pareto Analysis and Queuing Models. (2) ACCOUNTING AND TOC: Throughput - Operating expense - Productivity ratio - COGS

(4)

INTEGRATING TOC WITH LEAN: 5 S – Tooling - 6 sigma - Total Productivity Maintenance

(2)

BUSINESS SIMULATION GAME

(2)

IMPLEMENTATION CASE STUDY

(2)

Total L: 15 REFERENCES: 1. Eliyahu M Goldratt and Jeff Cox, “The Goal – Process of Ongoing Improvement”, Productivity & Quality Publishing Private Limited, 2010. 2. Eliyahu M Goldratt, “The Goal 2 – It’s Not Luck”, Productivity & Quality Publishing Private Limited, 2010. 3. Eliyahu M Goldratt, “Critical Chain”, Productivity & Quality Publishing Private Limited, 2010. 4. Anthony A Atkinson, Robert S Kaplan, Ella Mae Matsumura and Mark S Young, “Managerial Accounting”, Prentice Hall, 2007.

341

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18PK04 PRESS TOOL DESIGN 1001

Metal Cutting Theory, Materials and Criteria for Selection.

(2)

TYPES OF PRESS TOOLS: Piercing and Blanking, Progressive, Bending, Multislide etc.

(2)

DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS BENDING: Die - Basics + Practical

(2)

DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS: Selection of Tool Type, Presses, Strip Layouts

(3)

PIERCING AND BLANKING DIE DESIGN - PART 1: Blank Development, Cutting Load Calculations, Strip Layouts, Cutting Clearances. (2) PIERCING AND BLANKING DIE DESIGN - PART 2: Design of Stripper, Punch, Die, Frame Design, Material Selection and Heat Treatment. (2) Latest developments in press tooling.

(2) Total L: 15

REFERENCES: 1. Joshi P H, “Press Tools - Design and Construction”, S Chand, New Delhi, 2010. 2. Cyrll Donaldson, George H Lecain and Goold V C, “Tool Design”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2009. 3. Vukota Boljanovic, Paquin and Crowley, “Die Design Fundamentals”, Industrial Press, New York, 2006. 4. Vukota Boljanovic, “Sheet Metal Forming Processes and Die Design”, Industrial Press, 2004. 5. Ivana Suchy, “Handbook of Die Design”, McGraw Hill, Inc., 1998.

18PK05 INJECTION MOLD DESIGN 1001 Tooling materials and Heat treatment.

(1)

BASICS: Various Engineering and Commercial Grade Thermoplastics: Properties and Applications.

(2)

BASICS: Moulding Process, Parts of a Mould, Mould Materials.

(2)

FUNDAMENTALS OF MOULD DESIGN - PART 1: Introduction to Subsystems: Feed Systems and Ejection Systems.

(2)

FUNDAMENTALS OF MOULD DESIGN - PART 2: Introduction to Subsystems: Cooling Systems, Guidance Systems.

(2)

DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS - PART 1: Selection of Cavity Layouts, 2 Plate, 3 Plate, Parting Line Selection, Standard and Custom Mold Bases and other aspects of design. (2) DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS - PART 2: Selection of Machines, Sections, Sizes, Materials and their selection criteria.

(2)

Design Discussions with an Example.

(2) Total L: 15

REFERENCES: 1. Pye R G W, “Injection Mould Design”, East West Press, 2000. 2. Prabodh C Bolur, “A Guide to Injection Moulding of Plastics”, Allied Publishers Limited, 2000. 3. Bown J, “Injection Moulding of Plastic Components : A Guide”, McGraw Hill, Inc., 1979. 4. Athalye A S, “Injection Moulding”, Multi-Tech Publishers and Company, Mumbai, 1997. 5. Whelan A, “Injection Moulding Machines”, CBS Publishers & Distributors, 1984.

18PK06 ADVANCED METROLOGY AND CALIBRATION 1001 GENERAL INTRODUCTION:  Automotive and Aerospace requirements in areas of Metrology  Measurement systems Errors- Explanations with Examples  Traceability and its importance  Introduction and important clauses ISO Standard 17025:2005  Selection of Length Standards  Advancement in CMM technology and its calibration  Drawing Study (GD & T)  Calibration of Verniers, Micrometers  Calibration of Dial gauges, Lever Dials. Height gauges PRACTICAL WITH EXERCISE:  NABL criteria for Accommodation and Environment (Metrology lab requirements)  Selection of MASTER EQUIPMENT and REFERENCE MATERIALS  Calibration of non contact measuring Instruments  Calibration of Plain and Thread gauges

342

59th ACM     

09.06.2018

Calibration of machines (VMC etc) Fixing Calibration periodicity Interpretation of Calibration Reports/Certificates Surface Roughness Uncertainty Calculations as per latest NABL 141

Total L: 15 REFERENCES: 1. “Metrology Manual” by Tespa Tools Pvt. Ltd. 2. Hume K J, “Engineering Metrology”, Macmillan Company Publishers. 3. Connie Dotson and Roger Harlow, “Fundamentals of Dimensional Metrology”, Thomson Learning Publishers, New York, 2003. 4. Galyer J F W and Shotbolt C R, “Metrology for Engineers”, Cassel and Company publishers, London, 1990. 5. Astme and Wilson A W, “Hand Book of Industrial Metrology”, Prentice Hall, INC publishers, New Delhi, 1988. 6. Parsons S H J, “Metrology and Gauging”, Macmillan Company Publishers, London, 1960. 7. Hume K J and Sharp G H, “Practical Metrology - Vol 1 & VoL 2”, Macmillan Company Publishers

SCIENCE ELECTIVES 18ID01 MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEMS (MEMS) 3003 MEMS AND MICROINTEGRATEDSYSTEMS: Introduction, history of MEMS development, intrinsic characteristics of MEMS. Devices: Sensors and Actuators. Overview of microfabrication, microelectronics fabrication process, silicon based MEMS processes, new materials and fabrication processes. Points of consideration for processing. (7) SCALING LAWS AND MINIATURIZATION: Introduction. Scaling in geometry. Scaling in rigid body dynamics. The trimmer force scaling vector – scaling in electrostatic forces, electromagnetic forces, scaling in electricity and fluid dynamics, scaling in heat conducting and heat convection. (7) PRINCIPLES OF SENSING AND ACTUATION: Sensors. Classification of sensors. Signal conversion. Ideal characteristics of sensors. Mechanical sensors. Introduction to electrostatic sensors and actuators. Parallel plate capacitors – equilibrium position of electrostatic actuator under bias – pull in effect of parallel plate actuators. Applications: accelerometer, pressure sensor and flow sensor. (7) THERMAL AND MAGNETIC ACTUATORS: Thermal sensors and thermal actuators – applications: Inertia sensors and IR sensors. Magnetic actuators. Principles of micro magnetic actuators. MEMS magnetic actuators. Principles of piezoelectric sensing and actuation. Acoustic sensors and tactile sensors. (7) MICROMACHINING: Photolithography. Photoresist and applications. Light sources. X-ray and electron beam lithography. Oxidation, thermal oxidation. Silicon di oxide. Thermal oxidation rates. Oxide thickness by colour.Bulk micromachining. Isotropic and anisotropic etching. Wet etchants, etch stops, dry etching comparison of wet and dry etching. Dry etching – physical etching – reactive ion etching, comparison of wet and dry etching. Surface micromachining – process in general, problems in surface micromachining. The LIGA process – description, materials for substrates and photoresists, electroplating, the SLIGA process. (10) MICROSYSTEM PACKAGING:The three levels of microsystem packaging – die level, device level and system level. Essential packaging technologies – die preparation – surface bonding, wire bonding and sealing. Three dimensional packaging. Assembly of Microsystems – selection of packaging materials. (7) Total L : 45 REFERENCES: 1. Chang Liu, Foundations of MEMS, Pearson International Edition, 2006. 2. Tai-Ran Hsu, “MEMS and Microsystems Design and Manufacture”, Tata Mcgraw Hill Publishing Co Ltd, New Delhi, 2002. 3. Mark Madou, Fundamentals of microfabrication, CRC Press, New York, 1997.

18ID02 SENSORS FOR ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS 3003 SENSOR CHARACTERISTICS: Transfer function, full scale input and full scale output, accuracy, calibration, error in calibration, hysteresis, non-linearity, saturation, repeatability, resolution, environmental factors and reliability. (7) STRAIN AND PRESSURE MEASUREMENT: Resistance strain gauge, piezoelectric pressure gauge, characteristics. Electronic circuits for strain gauge, load cells. Interferometer, fibre-optic methods. Pressure gauges – aneroid capacitance pressure gauge, ionization gauge. (8) MOTION SENSORS: Capacitor plate sensor. Inductive sensors, LVDT accelerometer systems, rotation sensors, drag cup devices, piezoelectric devices. Rotary encoders (7) OPTICAL SENSORS: optical bridge. Proximity detector with polarized light. Linear optical sensors. photomultiplier, photo resistor and photoconductors. Photodiodes, photo transistors, photovoltaic devices. Fiber-optic sensor, fabry perot sensor, solid-state transducers (7) TEMPERATURE SENSORS: Bimetallic strip, bourdon temperature gauge, thermocouples, thermoresistive sensors. Resistance temperature detectors. Thermistors. NTC thermistors. Self-heating effect in NTC thermistors. PTC thermistors. Bolometer, pyroelectric detector. (8)

343

59th ACM

09.06.2018

ELECTRONIC SENSORS: Proximity detectors, inductive and capactive, ultrasonic, photo beam detectors, reed switch, magnet and Hall-effect units, Doppler detectors, liquid detectors, flow sensors, smoke sensors. (8) Total L : 45 REFERENCES: 1. Doeblin E O, “Measurement systems, application and design”, McGraw Hill, 2004. 2. Jacob Freden, “Handbook of Modern Sensors: Physics, Design and Applications”, Springer-Verlag, 2003. 3. Ian R Sinclair, “Sensors and transducers” Newnes Publishers, 2001.

18ID03 LASER PROCESSING OF MATERIALS 3003 BASICS OF LASERS AND LASER OPTICS: Overview of laser technology, energy distribution, laser resonators – longitudinal and transverse modes, Bandwidth mechanism, Q-switching – four types of Q- switches, mode-locking- time domain, frequency domain. (9) LASER MATERIAL INTERACTION: Basic considerations, types of laser- CO2, Nd:YAG, Excimer. Heat in solids- electronic and Lattice dynamics. Laser material interactions- single photon and multi photon process, laser reflection and absorption, temperature profiles, vaporization, recondensation, plasma formation. (10) LASER PLASMA INTERACTION: Fundamentals – process in nanosecond laser plasma interaction - laser induced gas breakdown, plasma shielding during laser material processing, laser supported absorption waves, plasma shutter for optical limitation, plasma interaction with femtosecond laser pulses – laser beam filamentation, generation of XUV radiation by laser plasma, plasma mirror. (9) CREATING NANOSTRUCTURES WITH LASERS: Fundamentals – plasma –gas interaction at increasing gas pressure in nanosecond pulsed laser deposition, nanoparticle synthesis, controlled deposition of 2D nanoparticle arrays. Applications – direct writing, laser LIGA, laser etching, pulsed laser deposition, MAPLE, lasers for MEMS. (9) LASER MICROMACHINING: Basic consideration, processing limits, materials and processes – polymers, glass, ceramics, metals, layer ablation, indirect ablation, hole drilling, patterning of thin films – dielectric masks, diffractive optical elements, fabrication of micro optics and micro fluidics –grating, micro lenses, micro fluidics. (8) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Laser Processing of Materials – Fundamentals, Applications and Developments, Peter Schaaf, Springer 2010. 2. Introduction to Laser Technology – Breck Hitz, J J Ewing, Jeff Hecht, 2001 3. Laser Material Processing – William M Steen, Jyotirmoy Mazumder, Springer 2010 4. Physics of Laser Processing Materials – Theory and Experiment, Gennady G.Gladush, Igor Smurov, Springer 2011.

18ID04 PLASMA TECHNOLOGY 3003 GASES AND COLLISION PROCESS: Masses and Number of atoms, kinetic energy and temperature, mean speed , pressure, Avogadro’s Laws, number density of gases, impingement flux, monolayer formation time, mean free path, probability of collision, energy transfer and collision frequency, Energy transfer in Binary collisions, gas flow types. Collision cross section, Elastic and inelastic collision. Ionization, excitation, relaxation, recombination, dissociation, electron attachment, Ion-neutral collisions, Metastable collisions. (10) GLOW DISCHARGE: Plasma species, Electron and Ion temperature, plasma potential. Glow discharges: DC discharges, RF discharges, Microwave discharges, Dielectric barrier discharges, ECR discharges. Conduction in ionized gases, Diffusion: Diffusion and mobility, ambipolar diffusion, diffusion in combined electric and magnetic field: parallel field and perpendicular field. General structures and feature; V-I characteristics- Glow discharge: cathode layer, positive column, Anode sheath. (11) ARC DISCHARGE: Characteristic features of an arc discharge. Types of arcs – Arc with hot thermionic cathode, Arc with external cathode heating, Arcs with cold cathode and cathode spots, vacuum arcs, High pressure arcs, Low pressure arcs. Arc initiation- methods of arc initiation, Transition from glow to arc discharge. Plasma temperature and V-I characteristics of high pressure arc columns. (10) PLASMA SOURCES AND PLASMA DIAGNOSTICS: Low temperature plasma generation, transferred and non-transferred arc torches, plasma torches. Plasma diagnostics: Electrical probe techniques, spectroscopic methods, Optical emission Spectroscopy, Magnetic diagnostics. (7) APPLICATIONS: Plasma spraying of ceramic, alloys and metals, plasma reduction of ores and minerals, plasma disassociation of compound oxides, plasma refining and remelting, plasma furnace in steel making, plasma cutting, sputtering, plasma enhanced chemical vapour deposition, plasma nitriding and surface cleaning, Plasma surface modification. (7) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Francis F Chen, “Introduction to Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion”, Springer Publications, 2006. 2. Milton O’Ring, “Materials Science of Thin Films”, Academic Press, 2002. 3. Reece Roth J, “Industrial Plasma Engineering Vol.1 : Principles”, Taylor & Francis, 1995. 4. Brainan Chapman, “Glow Discharge Processes : Sputtering and Plasma Etching”, John Wiley and Sons, 1980. 5. George Schmidt, “Physics of High Temperature Plasma”, Academic Press, 1979.

344

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18ID05 NANOSENSOR AND ITS APPLICATIONS 3003

NANOMATERIALS FOR SENSORS: Introduction: Quantum layers, wells, dots and wires- Carbon nanotube (CNT)-Structures: Arm chair, Zigzag, Chiral - Fabrications: Laser ablation, Electric arc discharge method, Chemical vapour deposition - Properties and applications of CNT. (7) FUNDAMENTALS OF NANO-SENSORS: Sensing principles, sensor types and classification - mechanical, acoustic, magnetic, thermal, chemical, radiation; micro sensors; sensors based on surface-acoustic wave devices. principles of design, fabrication and characterization of miniature sensors, biosensor, micro fluids, MEMS and NEMS; Method of packaging at zero level, dye level and first level Sensors. (10) SENSORS FOR AEROSPACE AND DEFENSE: Accelerometer, Pressure Sensor, Night Vision System, Nano tweezers, nanocutting tools, Integration of sensor with actuators and electronic circuitry, Civil applications: metrology, bridges and other industrial applications. (10) CHEMICAL SENSORS: Nanomaterials for chemical sensors, physical transducing principles for sensors, gravimetric sensors, electrical and electrochemical sensors, optical sensors, Resistive/semiconductive sensor materials, specific conductivity/semiconductor sensors, Electrochemical sensors - Galvanic cell thermodynamics, Electrode kinetics, Gas sensors. (10) BIOSENSORS: Clinical Diagnostics, generation of biosensors, immobilization, characteristics, applications, conducting Polymer based sensor, miniaturized biosensor - Nano pH sensors, calcium sensors, sodium sensors, glucose sensors, oxygen sensors (8) Total L : 45 REFERENCES: 1. Larry Nagahara, Nongjian Tao and Thomas Thundat, "Introduction to Nanosensors Series: Nanostructure Science and Technology", Springer-Verlag New York Inc, 2008. 2. Vijay K.Varadan, "Nanosensors,Microsensors,and Biosensors and Systems", SPIE- International Society for Optical Engine”, 2007. 3. Zikang Tang and Ping “Nanoscience & Technology: Novel Structure and Phenomena”, CRC, 2003. 4. Ananthasuresh G. K., “Optimal Synthesis Methods for MEMS”, Springer, 2003. 5. Rai Choudhury P “MEMS & MOEMS Technology and Applications” SPIE, 2000. 6. Meixner H and R.Jones “Sensors: Micro & Nanosensor technology, Trends in Sensor Market” (Part 1&2), VCH, 1995.

18ID06 NANO MAGNETISM AND SPINTRONICS 3003 MAGNETISM: Introduction - Types of magnetism-weak magnetism, ferromagnetism, antiferromagnetism, Magnetic materials – B-H loop and magnetic domain, soft magnetic materials, hard magnetic materials, recording media. (8) QUANTUM PHENOMENOLOGY OF MAGNETISM: Quantum mechanics and magnetism – spin, spin-orbit interaction, Hund’s rule – Exchange interaction - Magnetic Anisotropy - Magnetic domain walls and domain – Magnetization Process (8) SPINTRONICS: Introduction – spin injection and spin dependent tunnelling – spin orbit coupling in semiconductors – spin transport and spin transfer - spin relaxation – spin dephasing - materials for spin electronics (8) SPINTRONIC DEVICES: Giant Magnetoresistance – Tunneling magnetoresistance – Spin valve – Spin based transistors – carbon nano tube devices (10) ORGANIC SPINTRONICS: Introduction to organic semiconductors – Spin-polarized transport in organic semiconductors – Organic magnetoresistance - Spintronic applications of organic materials - Magnetic field effects in π-conjugated systems Investigating spin-dependent processes in organic semiconductors - Organic spintronics: Toward sensor and memory applications. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Zeev Valy Vardeny, “Organic Spintronics”, CRC Press, 2010 2. Brutting W., “Physics of Organic Semiconductors”, Wiley-VCH Verlag Gmbh & Co, 2005. 3. O’ Handley R.C., “Modern Magnetic Materials”, John Wiley & Sons, 2000. 4. Ziese M. and Thornton M., “Spin Electronics”, Springer – Verlag Berlin Heidelberg, 2000. 5. Jiles D., “Introduction to Magnetism and Magnetic Materials”, Chapman & Hall, 1998.

18ID07 CORROSION SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING 3003 THERMODYNAMICS OF AQUEOUS CORROSION: Electrode processes – electrode potential, free energy, emf series applications, potential measurements, three electrode systems. Chemical Vs electrochemical mechanisms of corrosion reactions, corrosion rate expressions. Construction of Pourbaix diagrams of Fe, Al, Ni and Zn, practical use of E-pH diagrams. Galvanic corrosion – galvanic series – factors affecting galvanic corrosion. (9) KINETICS OF AQUEOUS CORROSION: Corrosion current density and corrosion rate, exchange current density. Polarization activation control, Butler-Volmer equation, tafel equation, mass transport control, mixed potential theory, effect of oxidizer,

345

59th ACM

09.06.2018

combined polarization, factors affecting polarizations and rate of corrosion. Passivity, potentiostatic polarization curves, factors affectng passivity, mechanism of action of passivators. (9) FORMS OF CORROSION: General corrosion - atmospheric corrosion, general biological corrosion. Localized corrosion filiform corrosion, crevice corrosion, pitting corrosion, localized biological corrosion. Metallurgical influenced corrosion-inter granular corrosion, de-alloying. Mechanically assisted corrosion - erosion corrosion, fretting corrosion, corrosion fatigue. Environmentally induced cracking – mechanisms of stress corrosion cracking and hydrogen embitterment. (9) PREVENTION AND CONTROL OF CORROSION: Corrosion control by design. Selection of corrosion resistant materials – alloying, stainless steel and brass. Oxidation resistant materials, control of high temperature oxidation. Cathodic and anodic protection methods. Alloys for marine applications. Use of inhibitors-types, applications. Corrosion in cold water pipes Langalier saturation index. (9) CORROSION MONITORING AND TESTING: On-stream monitoring – electrical resistance, linear polarization, hydrogen test probe, ultrasonic testing, radiography and corrosion coupons - specimen preparation, test conditions and evaluation of results for overall corrosion. Off-stream monitoring equipments – acoustic emission testing, eddy current inspection, liquid penetration inspection. Electrochemical techniques, Tafel extrapolation and polarization resistance – AC impedance methods (EIS). (9) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Roberge P R., “Corrosion Engineering Principles and Practice”, Mc Graw Hill Publishers, 2008. 2. Ahamed Z., “Principles of Corrosion Engineering and Corrosion Control”, Elsiever science and technology books, 2006. 3. Mars G Fontana, “Corrosion Engineering”, TATA McGraw Hill Publishers, 2005 4. Uhlig H H and Revie R W., “Corrosion and Corrosion Control – An Introduction to Corrosion Science and Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons, 1985. 5. ASM Hand Book – Vol 13: Corrosion, ASM International, 2001. 6. Rajnarayan, “Metallic Corrosion and Prevention”, Oxford Publications, 1983.

18ID08 INSTRUMENTAL METHODS OF CHEMICAL ANALYSIS 3003 SEPARATION TECHNIQUES: Chromatographic methods - principles, classification - Column chromatography, Liquid chromatography, Paper chromatography, HPLC, Thin layer chromatography, Ion-exchange chromatography, Gas chromatography, GC-MS, Electrochromatography, Supercritical fluid chromatography; Capillary electrophoresis - principle, instrumentation and applications. (10) THERMAL ANALYSIS: Thermogravimetric analysis and differential gravimetric analysis - Instrumentation, factors affecting TGA and DTA curves, comparison and applications of TGA and DTA. Derivative thermogravimetry - principle and applications. Differential scanning calorimetry - principle, instrumentation and applications. (7) UV-Visible SPECTROSCOPY: Basic principle – Instrumentation - absorption laws – types of electronic transitions – effects of solvent and H bonding on max and max values –Woodward rules – applications. (4) INFRA-RED SPECTROSCOPY: Basics-theory-Instrumentation-modes of vibration- characteristic IR absorptions of different functional groups – factors influencing IR absorption. Interpretation of spectra of simple organic compounds. (5) 1

H-NMR SPECTROSCOPY: Basic principle – number of signals – chemical shift – factors influencing the chemical shift – peak areas – spin-spin coupling – coupling constant – factors influencing the coupling constant. Analysis of NMR Spectra-First order, non-first order spectra-AB, AB2, AMx, ABx, ABC. (6) 13

C-NMR SPECTROSCOPY: Basic principle – comparison with 1H NMR – noise decoupling, off resonance decoupling – factors affecting the intensity of signals – gamma gauche effect – additivity relationship – calculation of chemical shifts for aliphatic hydrocarbons up to five carbon atoms. (6) MASS SPECTROMETRY: Mass spectrometry - basic principles- Instrumentation – types of mass analysers - GC-MS, types of ionisation-base peak – molecular ion peak – metastable peak – isotopic peaks – general rules for fragmentation pattern – McLafferty rearrangement – retro Diels-Alder reaction – ortho effect – fragmentation pattern of simple compounds. (7) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Skoog D.A, West D.M, Holler F.J and Crouch S.R, “Fundamentals of Analytical Chemistry”, Thomson Brooks/Cole Pub., Singapore, 2004. 2. Willard H.H,Merritt L.L, Dean J.A and Settle F.A, “Instrumental Methods of Analysis”, CBS Pub. New Delhi, 2004. 3. Settle F.A, “Hand Book of Instrumental Techniques for Analytical Chemistry”, Prentice-Hall Inc, 1997. 4. Sawyer D.T, Heineman W.R and Beebe J.M, “Chemistry Experiments for Instrumental Methods”, John Wiley and Sons, USA, 1984. 5. Akhnazarova S.L and Kafarov V.V, “Experiment Optimization in Chemistry and Chemical Engineering”, Mir Publishers, Mascow, 1982.

18ID09 POLYMERIC MATERIALS 3003 INTRODUCTION: History of Polymers – Basics of Polymer – Classification, Polymerisation coordination polymerization, polycondensation, polyaddition, ring-opening polymerizations.

346

free radical, ionic and (5)

59th ACM

09.06.2018

POLYMER MORPHOLOGICAL STRUCTURES: Stereo chemistry of polymers – Molecular interactions – Polymer crystals – Amorphous Bulk state – Polymer structure – Property relationships – crystalline and Amorphous combinations – degree of crystallinity, factors affecting crystalisability. Glass Transition temperature (Tg) – factors affecting Tg. (6) MOLECULAR WEIGHT OF POLYMERS: Introduction – Solubility – Average Molecular weight values – Molecular weightMechanical properties relation - Fractionation of Polymers. Molecular weight determination – Chromatography – Osmometry – End group analysis – Ebulliometry and cryometry – Light scattering measurements – Ultra centrifugation. (6) COMPOUNDING OF POLYMERS: Fillers and reinforcements, Plasticizers, anti oxidants, heat stabilizers, UV stabilizers, flame retardants – flame retardant mechanism, curing agents, antistatic agents, lubricants. (4) POLYMER TECHNOLOGY: Fibres, Elastomers – Fillers and sheets. Polymeric foams – Molding, casting, Extrusion. Polymer matrix composites: Moulding method - Hand Method, Pultrusion, Filament winding. Nano composites, Adhesives – Classification, bonding strength. Pressure sensitive adhesives – Cyanoacrylates. (8) CHARACTERISATION & TESTING: Thermal Properties by TGA, DSC, TMA. Testing - tensile strength – IZOD impact, compressive strength, hardness, vicot softening point, electrical resistance, dielectric constant, dissipation factor, arc resistance and dielectric strength. Flammability – Limiting oxygen index. (8) SPECIALITY POLYMERS AND POLYMER WASTE MANAGEMENT: Polymers for electronic applications – conducting polymer, photonic polymers, liquid crystalline polymers. Membranes for reverse osmosis. Flame retardant polymers. Polymer waste management : Recycling, incineration and biodegradation – biodegradable polymers. (8) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Billmeyer F.W, “Text Book of polymer Science”, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2008. 2. Barbara H. Stuart, “Polymer Analysis”, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2003. 3. Joel R. Fried, “Polymer Science and Technology”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 2009. 4. Srinivasan.K, “Composite Materials”, Narosa Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2009. 5. Brydson J A, “Plastic materials”, Butterworth, 2006. 6. Charles E. Carraher, Jr. “Seymour/ Carraher’s Polymer Chemistry”, Marcel Dekker, New York,2003.

HUMANITIES AND LANGUAGES ONE CREDIT COURSES 18OK01 RESEARCH WRITING IN ENGINEERING SCIENCES 1001 RESEARCH WRITING: Fundamentals of research language, structure, style, format, information and Language conventions of an engineering research paper & thesis. (5) DRAFTING PARTS OF THESIS/RESEARCH PAPERS: Writing effective literature reviews, Drafting materials and methods section, Presenting results and conclusions, Documenting sources. (5) NUANCES OF LANGUAGE: Hedging, Use of Tenses and modals in different parts of thesis/research papers, Use of active/passive and other features of language. (5) Total L: 15 REFERENCES: 1. Wei Wei, “Scholarly Communication in Science and Engineering Research in Higher Education”, Taylor & Francis Inc, UK, 2013. 2. David J. Bennett, Ed., “Successful Science Communication: Telling It Like It Is”, Cambridge University Press, New Delhi, 2011. 3. Dawkins, Richards, “The Oxford book of modern science writing”, OUP Oxford: New York: Oxford University Press, 2008.

18OK02 INDIAN ETHOS AND HUMAN VALUES 1001 HUMAN VALUES AND ETHICS FOR HOLISTIC MANAGERIAL EXCELLENCE: Basic Managerial Skills, Holistic Approach, Total Quality Management

Introduction, need for value education, (4)

PROFESSIONAL SKILLS: Introduction, Prevention of Stress in Work Life, Work Ethics, Leadership and Team Work in Organisations, Employer – Employee Relationship.

(6)

INDIAN HERITAGE: Introduction, Indian Ethos, Managing Cross-cultural work environment

(5)

Total L: 15 REFERENCES: 1. Mihai I. Spariosu/Jorn Rusen (eds.), “Exploring Humanity – Intercultural Perspectives on Humanism”, National Taiwan University Press, 2012. 2. Vasudha Dalmia and Rashmi Sadana, “The Cambridge Companion to Modern Indian Culture”, Cambridge University Press, 2012. 3. VSP Rao and V Hari Krishnan, “Management”, Excel Book, New Delhi, 2010. 4. Fred E Luthans, “Organisational Behaviour”, International Edition, McGraw Hill Companies, New York, 2010.

347

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18OK03 PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT 1001

KNOWING ONESELF: Explore habits, attitudes, preferences and experience and tune them to suit the organizations, Become aware of strengths and weaknesses, talents and problems, emotions and ideas, Know your ambitions, goals and values, IQ,EQ & SQ. (5) SELF MANAGEMENT: Time management, Ability to Socialize.

(2)

INTEGRATED PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT: Recognizing the growth of different dimensions of one’s personality such as, Physical, Intellectual, Emotional, Moral, Social and Spiritual. (4) PERSONAL COMPETENCES: Developing rapport, Listening skills, Developing tem spirit, Assertiveness and negotiation skills, Leadership Skills, Giving and receiving constructive Criticism, Positive thinking and creative thinking, Interview techniques and grooming. (4) Total L: 15 REFERENCES: 1. RajivK Mishra, “Personality Development”, Rupa & Co., 2008. 2. Selvam S. K. P., “Personality Development”, Aph Publishing Corporation, 2010. 3. Materials provided by Guest Speakers.

18OK04 FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING AND COST ACCOUNTING 1001 INTRODUCTION OF ACCOUNTING: Branches of Accounting – Types of Accounting Concepts and Conventions – Subsidiary Books. (3) TRADING, PROFIT & LOSS ACCOUNT: Balance Sheet.

(3)

COST ACCOUNTING: Concepts – Objectives – Methods of Costing. Cost Sheet – Elements of Cost – Cost Concepts – Classification – Cost Sheet. (3) JOB ORDER COSTING: Features Objectives – Procedure – Job Cost Sheet. Applications.

Activity Based Costing – Methodology (3)

CURRENT TRENDS IN ACCOUNTING: Annual Reports – Skill Application.

(3) Total L: 15

REFERENCES: 1. Grewal T.S., “Double Entry Book-Keeping”, Sultan Chand & Sons, 2012. 2. Gaur & Narang, “Cost Accounting”, Kalyani Publishing Co., Ltd., New Delhi, 2011. 3. Shukla, “Principles of Accounting”, Sultan Chand & Sons, New Delhi, 2005.

348

59th ACM 13. Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment ME PRODUCT DESIGN AND COMMERCE Course Code 18PD01 18PD02 18PD03 18PD04 18PD05 18PD51 18PD81

Course Title Computational Mathematics Material Selection for Product Design Geometric Modeling and Computer Aided Design Product Reliability Design for Manufacture and Assembly Object Computing and Data Structures Laboratory English for Research Paper Writing Total 24 hrs

18PD06 18PD07 18PD08 18PD09 18PD__ 18PD__ 18PD52 18PD61 18PD82

Product Lifecycle Management Engineering Economics Finite Element Analysis Human Factors for Product Design Elective - 1 Elective - 2 Engineering Design Laboratory Industry Visit and Technical Seminar Research Methodology and IPR Total 30 hrs

18PD__ 18PD__ 18PD__ 18PD__

Elective - 3 Elective - 4 Elective - 5 Elective - 6 Product Design and Development Laboratory Project Work I Total 22 hrs

18PD53 18PD71

18PD72

Project Work II Total 28 hrs ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES (Six to be opted) 18PD21 Production and Operations Management 18PD22 Computational Fluid Dynamics 18PD23 Object Oriented Analysis and Design 18PD24 Additive Manufacturing 18PD25 Database Management Systems 18PD26 Optimization Techniques 18PD27 Enterprise Computing 18PD28 Product Development Strategies 18PD29 Noise, Vibration and Harshness 18PD30 Metallurgical Failure Analysis 18PD31 Logistics and Supply Chain Management 18PD32 Industrial Internet of Things 18PD33 Total Quality Management 18PD34 Mechanics of Polymer Matrix Composites 18PD35 Design Optimization

09.06.2018

(2018 REGULATIONS) (Minimum No. of credits to be earned: 74*) Hours/Week Maximum Marks CAT Credits Lecture Tutorial Practical CA FE Total I SEMESTER 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC 3

2

0

4

50

50

100

PC

3 3

0 2

0 0

3 4

50 50

50 50

100 100

PC PC

0

0

4

2

50

50

100

EEC

** 4

Grade 19

0 300

0 300

0 600

MC

0 0 0 0 0 0 4 4 ** 8

3 3 4 4 3 3 2 2 Grade 24

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 100 0 450

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 0 0 350

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 0 800

PC PC PC PC PE PE PC EEC MC

0 0 0 0

3 3 3 3

50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE

4

2

50

50

100

PE

6 10

3 17

100 350

0 250

100 600

EEC

28 28

14 14

50 50

50 50

100 100

EEC

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 3 4 3 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE

0 0 14 6 II SEMESTER 3 0 3 0 3 2 3 2 3 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 18 4 III SEMESTER 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 0

0

0 0 12 0 IV SEMESTER 0 0 0 0 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

0 0 2 0 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

* Indicated is the minimum number of credits to be earned by a student. ** - 60 hrs in I semester and 90 hrs in II semester; Grade: Completed / Not Completed CAT – Category; PC – Professional Core; PE - Professional Elective EEC – Employability Enhancement Course; MC- Mandatory Course

348

59th ACM

09.06.2018

ONE CREDIT COURSES OFFERED BY THE DEPARTMENT OF PRODUCTION ENGINEERING 18PK01 18PK02 18PK03 18PK04 18PK05 18PK06

Process Improvement and Product Design through Lean Six Sigma Design and Optimization Technology Theory of Constraints and its Thinking Process Press Tool Design Injection Mold Design Advanced Metrology and Calibration

SCIENCE ELECTIVES 18ID01 18ID02 18ID03 18ID04 18ID05 18ID06 18ID07 18ID08 18ID09

Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS) Sensors for Engineering Applications Laser Processing of Materials Plasma Technology Nanosensor and its Applications Nano Magnetism and Spintronics Corrosion Science and Engineering Instrumental Methods of Chemical Analysis Polymeric Materials

HUMANITIES AND LANGUAGES ONE CREDIT COURSES 18OK01 18OK02 18OK03 18OK04

Research Writing in Engineering Sciences Indian Ethos and Human Values Personality Development Financial Accounting and Cost Accounting

349

59th ACM

09.06.2018 I SEMESTER 18PD01 COMPUTATIONAL MATHEMATICS 2203

NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF SYSTEM OF EQUATIONS: Solving system of linear equations - Gauss Jacobi and Siedel methods, successive over relaxation method, system of non-linear equations – Newton‟s method. Interpolation: Cubic spline interpolation, Bezier curves and B-spline curves, least squares approximations. (8+7) NUMERICAL SOLUTION TO ODE: Initial value problem: Runge Kutta method, Milne‟s method. Boundary value problem: Finite Element Method: The Rayleigh-Ritz method, Collocation and Galerkin methods. (8+7) NUMERICAL SOLUTION TO PDE: Finite Difference Method: Liebmann‟s method for Laplace equation and Poisson equation, explicit method and Crank-Nicolson method for parabolic equations, explicit method for hyperbolic equations. (8+7) MODELLING AND SIMULATION: Simulating deterministic behaviour, area under a curve, generating random numbers, simulating probabilistic behaviour, inventory model: gasoline and consumer demand. (8+7) Total L: 32 + T: 28 = 60 REFERENCES: 1. John H Mathews and Kurtis D Fink, “Numerical Methods using MATLAB”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2018. 2. Steven C Chapra and Raymond P Canale, “Numerical Methods for Engineers”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2017. 3. Frank R Giordano, William P Fox and Steven B Horton, “A First Course in Mathematical Modeling”, Cengage Learning, New Delhi, 2014. 4. Curtis F Gerald and Patrick O Wheatly, “Applied Numerical Analysis”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2013. 5. Douglas J Faires and Richard Burden, “Numerical Methods”, Cengage Learning, New Delhi, 2013.

18PD02 MATERIAL SELECTION FOR PRODUCT DESIGN 3003 MATERIALS AND ALLOY SELECTION: Materials classification, Ceramics and glasses, Hybrids, High performance materials, Super Alloys , Shape memory alloys. Principles of material selection, Selection strategy - function, objectives and constraints, performance maximizing criteria. Tools used in material selection - Material indices, Material property charts. Case studies on materials selection. (12) SELECTION OF MATERIALS AND SHAPE: Shape factors, elastic bending and twisting, failure in bending and twisting, axial loading and column buckling, efficiency of standard sections, limits for shape factors, microscopic shape factors. Case studies on co-selection of materials and shape. (10) SELECTION OF MATERIALS FOR PERFORMANCE: Fracture - mechanical failures, fatigue failure, elevated temperature failures - creep & thermal fatigue, corrosion and wear failures. Selection of materials for static strength, fatigue resistance, high temperature resistance, corrosion and wear resistance. (12) SELECTION OF PROCESS AND ENVIRONMENT: Families and classes of manufacturing processes, Process Information Maps, Process attributes, Systematic process selection. Case studies on process selection. Material life cycle, Material and energy-consuming systems, eco-attributes of materials. Case studies on Eco-selection. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Mahmoud M Farag, “Materials and Process Selection for Engineering Design”, CRC Press, 2014. 2. Courtney T H, “Mechanical Behavior of Materials”, Overseas Press (India) Private Limited, 2006. 3. Michael F Ashby, “Materials Selection in Mechanical Design”, Butterworth Heinemann, 2005. 4. Kara Johnson and Mike Ashby, “Materials and Design: The Art and Science of Material Selection in Product Design”, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2002. 5. William D Callister, “Material Science and Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons Inc, 1997. 6. Guy A G,” Elements of Physical Metallurgy”, Oxford & IBH Pub. Co., New Delhi, 1990.

18PD03 GEOMETRIC MODELING AND COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN 3204 COMPUTER GRAPHICS AND GRAPHICS SYSTEMS: Origin, history, goals and applications. 3D graph essentials, 3D world, Graphics API‟s and software, graphics input and output devices, Raster devices. DDA, Bresenham algorithm for straight lines, Midpoint algorithm for conics and curves, Filled area – scan line, boundary and flood fill. Primitive attributes. (10) TRANSFORMATIONS: Coordinate system, Graphics pipeline, Translation, scaling, rotation, reflection and shear transformations. Combined, modeling and co-ordinate transformation. Viewing and clipping - 3D viewing pipeline, Coordinates and volume, Parallel and perspective projections, Projection and view-port transformation, clipping. Camera, normalized view volume. (11) CURVES & SURFACES: Lagrange, hermite and spline interpolation, cubic, Bezier and b-spline curves, composite curves and geometric continuity, non-linear splines, curve fairing, recursive subdivision of curves. Implicit and quadric surfaces, surface of revolution, sweep, ruled, bilinear and coons surfaces. Bicubic patch. Bezier, b-spline and cyclide surfaces. Surface fairing, recursive subdivision of surfaces. (12) SOLID MODELING: Solid Modeling and their representation. Data exchange format, shake based format, product based format, GKS, PHIGS, IGES, PDES, DXF, CGM, STL, VRML, XML files. Interactive Computer Programming - Introduction to

350

59th ACM

09.06.2018

elementary level - on screen menu - high level - database level - device level and object oriented programming.

(12)

TUTORIALS: 1. Generation of analytical curves using „C‟ language 2. Transformation exercises using „C‟ language 3. Generation of synthetic curves using „C‟ language 4. Generation of analytical surfaces using „C‟ language 5. Generation of synthetic surfaces using „C‟ language 6. Combining the above exercises into a basic CAD package

(30)

Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Donald Hearn and Pauline Baker, “Computer Graphics C Version”, Pearson Education, 2004. 2. Michael E Mortenson, “Geometric Modeling”, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 2004. 3. David F Rogers and Alan Adams J, “Mathematical Elements in Computer Graphics”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2002. 4. James D Foley, Andries Van Dam, Steven K Feiner and John F Hughes, “Computer Graphics Principles and Practice”, Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 2000. 5. Martti Mantyla, “An Introduction to Solid Modeling”, Springer Verlag, 1987.

18PD04 PRODUCT RELIABILITY 3003 INTRODUCTION: Definitions, stage gate approach, Reliability characteristics, Bathtub curve, reliability models - Component reliability and Hazard models, system reliability models, reliability mathematics - Statistical methods in reliability, reliability predictive modeling. (11) CONCEPTS IN ACCELERATED TESTING: Time acceleration factor, influence of acceleration factor in test planning, application to acceleration test, high temperature operating life acceleration model, temperature humidity bias acceleration model, temperature cycle acceleration model, vibration accelerator model, failure free accelerated test planning. Accelerated reliability growth testing (12) FMEA AND RELIABILITY ESTIMATION: Goal and vision, concepts and types of Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA) evaluations, fault tree model. Test design by failure modes and aging stresses. Aging due to cyclic force, Miner‟s rule. Reliability estimation - parametric and non parametric methods, (12) PRODUCT MAINTAINABILITY AND SOFTWARE RELIABILITY: Maintainability concepts and analysis measures of maintainability, design for serviceability, supportability and maintainability, preventive maintenance scheduling. Introduction to software reliability, waterfall lifecycle, techniques to improve software reliability, software reliability models. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Michael Pecht, “Product Reliability, Maintainability and Supportability Handbook”, CRC Press, 2009. 2. Naikan V N A, “Reliability Engineering and Life Testing”, PHI Learning Private Limited, 2009. 3. Prabhakar Murthy D N and Marvin Rausand, “Product Reliability”, Springer-Verlag London Limited, 2008. 4. Wayne Nelson and John A., “Accelerated Testing Statistical Models, Test Plans and Data Analyses”, John Wiley & Sons Inc., 2008. 5. Alex Porter, “Accelerated Testing and Validation Testing, Engineering and Management Tools for Lean Development”, Elsevier Inc., 2004. 6. Dana Crowe and Alec Feinberg, “Design for Reliability”, CRC Press, 2001.

18PD05 DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURE AND ASSEMBLY vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP05

18PD51 OBJECT COMPUTING AND DATA STRUCTURES LABORATORY vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP51

II SEMESTER 18PD06 PRODUCT LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT 3003 MOTIVATION AND INTRODUCTION: e-commerce, B to B, B to C forms of business, extended enterprise, concepts in PDM product life cycle, business objects, Object oriented approach in product development solutions , phase gate process in product design, information flow model in product development, engineering bill of materials and manufacturing bill of materials. Cases for preparation of combined BoM and other reports (10) COMPONENTS OF PLM SOLUTIONS AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT: Work flows, work list, versions, views, Base lines, product structure, Engineering change Management, disparate databases and connectivity, use of EAI technology (middleware), Component supplier management and sourcing. (12) PRODUCT VISUALISATION AND ROLE OF PLM IN INDUSTRIES: CAD neutral environment and visualisation of products, standard softwares, use of visualisation in several stages of lifecycle, reviews, mark up - case studies. Role of PLM in industries : (like auto, aero, electronic) - other sectors, ten step approach to PLM, benefits of PLM. (11)

351

59th ACM

09.06.2018

MODEL BASED DEFINITION (MBD) AND CUSTOMISATION OF PLM SOFTWARE: Need for MBD in a PLM environment, Product and manufacturing information (PMI), Propagation of PMI through a product‟s life cycle. Product design based on MBD. Integrated workflow based on MBD and PLM, Creation and management of MBD models using PLM system. Integrated and collaborative product development environment (Model Based Enterprise) through MBD. Customisation of PLM software. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Kevin N Otto and Kristin L Wood, “Product Design”, Pearson, 2016. 2. J B Herron, “Re-Use Your CAD: The Model-Based CAD Handbook”, Createspace Independent Pub, 2013. 3. John Stark, “Product Lifecycle Management: 21 Century Paradigm for Product Realization”, Springer Publisher, 2011. 4. John Stark, “Global Product: Strategy, Product Lifecycle Management and the Billion Customer Question”, Springer Publisher, 2007. 5. Michael Grieves, “Product Life Cycle Management”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006. 6. Antti Saaksvuori, Anselmi Immonen, “Product Life Cycle Management”, Springer, 2004.

18PD07 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP07

18PD08 FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS 3204 FINITE ELEMENT PROCEDURES AND FORMULATION: Discretization of the domain, basic element shapes, discretization process, node numbering scheme, Stiffness matrix, assemblage of element equations and incorporation of boundary conditions, shape function. Generalized Hooke's law, Strain Energy density function, Elastic symmetry, Stress strain relationship, strain displacement relationship, boundary conditions, compatibility equations, Equilibrium equations, Governing heat transfer equations, one dimensional conduction and convection problem. (15) INTERPOLATION MODELS: Polynomial form of interpolation functions, selection of the order of the interpolation polynomial, simplex, complex and multiplex elements, interpolation polynomial in terms of nodal degrees of freedom, convergence requirements, linear interpolation polynomials in terms of global coordinates and for vector quantities, coordinate transformation. (8) ENERGY AND VARIATIONAL PRINCIPLE: Calculus of variations: The Variational operator, Extremum of functional, Natural and essential boundary conditions, Principle of virtual displacements, Principle of total potential energy, Principle of virtual forces and complimentary potential energy, Hamilton principle, Castigliano's theorems. (8) ANALYSIS OF SOLID MECHANICS PROBLEMS: Analysis of bar, space truss, beam, plates - triangular membrane, rectangular, Isoparametric formulation and axisymmetric formulation, case studies of static analysis, Dynamic equations of motion, consistent and lumped mass matrices, free vibration analysis, dynamic response using finite element method, case studies of dynamic analysis. (14) TUTORIALS: 1. Static structural analysis of a 1D bar problem. 2. Steady-state thermal analysis of a 1D bar. 3. Static structural analysis of a 1D beam problem. 4. Static structural analysis of a 2D triangular plate problem. 5. Dynamic structural analysis of a bar under free vibration.

(30)

Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Klaus Jurgen Bathe, “Finite Element Procedures”, Prentice Hall Inc, 2012. 2. Reddy J N., “An Introduction to the Finite Element Method”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012. 3. Saeed Moaveni, “Finite Element Analysis, Theory and Application with ANSYS”, Pearson Publication, 2011. 4. Singerasu S Rao, “The Finite Element Method in Engineering”, Butterworth Heinemann, 2010. 5. David V Hutton, “Fundamentals of Finite Element Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill Companies, 2010. 6. Reddy J N., “Energy Principles and Variational Methods in Applied Mechanics”, John Wiley & Sons, 2002.

18PD09 HUMAN FACTORS FOR PRODUCT DESIGN 3204 INFORMATION INPUT: History of Human Factors, Multi-disciplinary engineering, human machine system, characteristics of system, information theory, types of information, selection of display modality, coding of information, compatibility, memory, decision making, attention, text, graphics, symbols, quantitative visual display, representational display, auditory, tactual and olfactory displays. (12) ANTHROPOMETRY: Need for anthropometry, data collection methodology, measuring procedures, tools, statistical analysis of data for percentile calculation, anthropometric measurements, percentile calculation, usage of the anthropometric percentile values, ergonomic guidelines for products, equipment and accessories, anthropometry in applications. (10) BIOMECHANICS: Biostatics – static equilibrium equations, musculoskeletal system, problems in mechanics of upper extremity and hand, lower extremity and foot, bending, lifting and carrying, Biodynamics – linear kinematics, angular kinematics, human body kinetics, human body impact and collision, surface electromyogram, electrocardiogram and heart rate measurement. (12) VIRTUAL ERGONOMICS: Digital Human Modeling (DHM), anthropometric models, models for production design, biomechanical models, anatomical models, cognitive models, DHM packages – selection strategies, Functionalities, Virtual

352

59th ACM

09.06.2018

ergonomics evaluation techniques – Rapid Upper Limb Assessment, field of vision, reach envelopes, accessibility and clearance analysis, discomfort analysis, Applications of DHM. (11) TUTORIALS: (30) 1. Measurement of static anthropometric data 2. Optimizing horizontal and vertical work surface dimensions 3. Physical workload measurement using Heart Rate Monitor (HRM) 4. Evaluation of muscle fatigue using surface Electromyography (sEMG) 5. Product evaluation using Digital Human Modeling (DHM) software Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Duffy V G, “Hand Book of Digital Human Modeling: Research for Applied Ergonomics and Human Factor Engineering”, Taylor & Francis, 2009. 2. Chandler Allen Phillips, “Human Factor Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2000. 3. D Chakrabarti, “Indian Anthropometric Dimensions for Ergonomic Design Practice”, National Institute of Design, Ahmedabad, 1997. 4. G Salvendy, “Handbook of Human Factors and Ergonomics”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1997. 5. M S Sanders and E J McCormick, “Human Factors in Engineering and Design”, McGraw-Hill, Inc., 1993.

18PD52 ENGINEERING DESIGN LABORATORY

0042 In this course, students will be provided with an orientation programme on the relevant equipment/software for duration of 20 hours. After this orientation, each student is expected to formulate and complete an activity of interest which has to be derived from the orientation programme under the guidance of a faculty. The details like background, problem definition, state of technology/knowledge in that area by a literature review (minimum 5 latest papers), objectives, methodology, equipment that can be used (from the orientation programme), results from the experiments and their interpretation with respect to the assumptions/background and a formal conclusion are expected in the report which is to be submitted at the end of the semester. This work is evaluated for the credit assigned. Expected hours needed for this work is 40 hours. TOPICS FOR ORIENTATION PROGRAMME 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Static analysis of an automotive component Modal analysis and design optimisation to improve natural frequencies using FEA. Random vibration analysis of a automotive component and estimation of fatigue life using FEA Steady state thermal analysis Unsteady state thermal analysis Steady state fluid flow analysis Mold flow analysis of a injection molded component Casting process analysis using software Harmonic analysis of aircraft structure Stress analysis of an electronic component under thermal cycling/shock loads and estimation of fatigue life. Total P: 60

18PD61 INDUSTRY VISIT AND TECHNICAL SEMINAR 0042 Every student shall make a technical presentation on an appropriate topic allotted by the department and submit a report on dates announced by the department. The seminar and the report will be evaluated by a review committee constituted by the HoD. A minimum of two industrial visits are to be arranged as part of the course and the candidates are expected to make a presentation of their learnings in the industrial visit. There will be a viva-voce examination on the dates announced by the department to verify the depth of understanding of the candidate in both the industrial visits and the technical topic. Total P: 60

III SEMESTER 18PD53 PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT LABORATORY

0042 PROJECT Identify a consumer product as needed by the market, develop concept, develop CAD model, simulate in CAE environment, optimize, develop tooling and make a physical prototype. Prepare a detailed report. (The fabricated models may be in the form of RP models, clay models, sheet metal models or card-board models etc…) DEMONSTRATION EXERCISE: 1. Study of reverse engineering concepts 2. Demonstration of 3D scanning 3. Study of rapid prototyping machines 4. Demonstration of Fusion Deposition Modeling 5. Demonstration of Selective Laser Sintering

353

59th ACM 6. 7.

09.06.2018

Demonstration of Vacuum casting Demonstration of Virtual Reality Total P: 60

REFERENCES: 1. Kevin N Otto and Kristin L Wood, “Product Design : Techniques in Reverse Engineering and New Product Development”, Pearson Education, 2016. 2. Karl T Ulrich and Steven D Eppinger, “Product Design and Development”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Private Limited, 2012.

18PD71 PROJECT WORK I 0063 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Identification of a real life problem in thrust areas Developing a mathematical model for solving the above problem Finalisation of system requirements and specification Proposing different solutions for the problem based on literature survey Future trends in providing alternate solutions Consolidated report preparation Total P: 90

IV SEMESTER 18PD72 PROJECT WORK II 0 0 28 14 The project work involves the following: I.

Preparing a project - brief proposal including 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Problem Identification A statement of system / process specifications proposed to be developed (Block Diagram / Concept tree) List of possible solutions including alternatives and constraints Cost benefit analysis Time Line of activities

II.

A report highlighting the design finalization [based on functional requirements and standards (if any)]

III.

A presentation includes the following: 1. 2. 3.

Implementation Phase (Hardware / Software / both) Testing and Validation of the developed system Learning in the Project

IV. Consolidated Report Preparation Total P: 420

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES (SIX TO BE OPTED) 18PD21 PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP21

18PD22 COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS 3003 BASICS OF FLUID FLOW: Derivation of fluid flow governing equations - conservation of mass, momentum and energy – relationship between mathematical terms and characteristics of fluid flow, Mathematical classification of flow, hyperbolic, parabolic, elliptic and mixed flow types (12) DISCRETISATION: Choice of grid - Finite difference method – Finite Volume Method - forward, backward and central difference schemes, explicit and implicit methods - Properties of numerical solution methods, stability analysis, error estimation – applications in heat transfer problems. (11) NEED FOR CFD TECHNIQUES: Impact of nonconservation terms over the solution, artificial viscosity, upwind schemes, Cell Reynolds number, courant number - Lax - Wendroff technique, MacCormack‟s technique, relaxation technique, ADI technique. (11) CFD TECHNIQUE FOR INCOMPRESSIBLE FLUID FLOW: Checker board distribution, staggered grid - pressure correction technique, SIMPLE algorithm, applications in fluid flow problems. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Muralidhar K and Sundararajan T., “Computational Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer”, Narosa Publications, 2003. 2. Chung T J., “Computational Fluid Dynamics”, Cambridge University Press, 2002. 3. Joel H Freziger and Milovan Peric, “Computational Methods for Fluid Dynamics”, Springer Publications, 1999. 4. John D Anderson, “Computational Fluid Dynamics - The Basics with Applications”, McGraw Hill, 1995.

354

59th ACM 5.

09.06.2018

Versteeg H K and Malalasekara W, “An Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics - The Finite Volume Method', Longman, 1995.

18PD23 OBJECT ORIENTED ANALYSIS AND DESIGN 3204 OVERVIEW OF OOAD: Objects – Operations and Methods – Encapsulation – Classes - Inheritance – Polymorphism - Object oriented programming languages – Rational Unified Process – Software Development cycle with RUP- UML – Advantages of UML- Requirement – Requirements Gathering – Requirements Management – Timing of Requirements Workflow – Cost of Requirements Errors – Problem Analysis and Understanding User needs – Use cases – Prototyping - Use Case Analysis - Use cases – Classification – Benefits – Steps in Use case modeling – Scope – Actors – Goal list – Finding use cases – Documenting use cases – Notations – Relationships – Analysis Workflow – Analysis Workflow – Analysis Deliverables – Class Analysis. (11) USE CASE ANALYSIS: Architectural analysis – Packages – Post Analysis - Class Identification – Identifying classes – Entity class – Control Class – Boundary class – Good and bad classes – Finding classes and their relationships – Responsibility – Collaboration – Class diagrams – Notations - Class Relationship Analysis – UML Diagrams – Class diagram – Object Diagram – Types of Class relationship – Reading Class associations – Multiplicity – Aggregation – Composition – Qualification – Association class – Package diagram - Object state Analysis – Object State – UML and State – State Machine Diagrams – Notations- State Transitions – Types of triggers – Signals (11) OBJECT ACTIVITY ANALYSIS: Activity Diagrams – Branch – Signals – Partition Diagrams – Interaction Diagrams – Sequence Diagrams - Design Workflow – Analysis and Design – Design in RUP – Design classes – class removal – Use case design – construction - Object Design – Generalization – Modeling with Generalization – Modeling with Encapsulation – Interfaces – Roles – Object Persistence – Active Objects - Synchronization - Template classes - System Design – Collaborations - Modeling the Relationships of Collaborations - Using Collaborations in the Realization of Use Cases - Systems and Subsystems – Components – Component diagrams – Deployment diagrams – Modeling the architecture of a system Other UML Diagrams - Composite Structure Diagram - Timing Diagram - State-as-Line Timing Diagram - State-As-Area Timing Diagram - Interaction Overview Diagram (14) SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT USING RUP: Software development methodologies – Dimensions of the RUP Process – Inception phase – Elaboration phase – Construction phase – Transition phase Refactoring – Steps for performing code refactoring – Anti-patterns – Extract super class – Extract sub class - Software Reuse – What is software Reuse – Why reuse software – Basic Techniques of Reuse – Techniques for Reuse asset management – Domain model and Domain architecture Domain analysis and design (9) TUTORIALS: 1. Activity Diagram for order Processing 2. State diagram for ATM application 3. State diagram for CPU execution 4. Collaboration diagram for database browser 5. Deployment diagram for TCP/IP layout 6. Class diagram for electronic shopping cart 7. Use case diagram for credit card processing 8. Package diagram for web server connection 9. Sequence diagram for database broachers 10. Interaction diagram for grocery shopping

(30)

Total L: 45+ T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Scott W. Ambler, Larry L. Constantine, “The Unified Process: Elaboration Phase: Best Practices in Implementing the UP”, Focal Press, 2017 2. Chris Marshall, “Enterprise Modeling with UML: Designing Successful Software through Business Analysis”, Addison Wesley, 2016. 3. Craig Larman, “Applying UML and Patterns : An Introduction to Object-Oriented Analysis and Design and Iterative Development”, Prentice Hall PTR; 3rd Edition, 2016 4. Daryl Kulak and Eamonn Guiney, “Use Case: Requirements Context”, Addison Wesley, 2016 5. Grady Booch, James Rumbaugh, Ivar Jacobson, “Unified Modeling Language User Guide”, Addison-Wesley Professional, 1st Edition, 2015 6. Grady Booch, “Object-Oriented Analysis and Design with Applications”, Addison-Wesley Professional, 2015 7. Martin Fowler, “UML Distilled: A Brief Guide to the Standard Object Modeling Language (Object Technology Series)”, Addison-Wesley Professional; 3rd Edition, 2014.

18PD24 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP24

18PD25 DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS 3204 BASIC CONCEPTS: Introduction to databases - Conventional file Processing - Purpose of Database system - Characteristics of database approach - Advantages of using DBMS - Database concept and architecture - Data Abstraction - Data Models Instances and schema - Data independence - schema architecture - Components of a DBMS - Database Languages Database Manager - Database Administrator - Database Users. (7) DATA MODELING,RELATIONAL DATABASE MANIPULATION: Introduction - Data Associations - entities, attributes,

355

59th ACM

09.06.2018

relationships - Type role and structural constraints Weak and Strong entity types - Design of Entity relationship data models (ERD) - Generalization - Aggregation - Conversion of ERD into tables - Applications - Introduction to Network data model and Hierarchical data model - Introduction to Relational Data Model - Basic Concepts - Enforcing Data Integrity Constraints Relational Algebra Operations - Extended Relational Algebra Operations - Triggers - Introduction to views. Introduction to Structured Query Language (SQL) - SQL Commands for Defining Database, Constructing Database, Manipulations on Database - Basic Data Retrieval Operations - Advanced Queries in SQL Functions in SQL - Aggregation Categorization - Updates in SQL - Views in SQL (18) DATA BASE DESIGN THEORY: Data base design process - Relational Database Design - Relation Schema - Anomalies in a database - Functional dependencies - Axioms - Normal forms based on primary keys - Second Normal form, Third Normal form, Boyce - Codd Normal form - Examples - Multi-valued dependencies - Fourth Normal form - Practical database design tuning. (8) FILE ORGANIZATION,DATABASE SECURITY, INTEGRITY CONTROL: Storage Device Characteristics - Constituents of a file - Operations on file - Serial Files - Sequential Files - Index Sequential Files - Direct Files - Data Retrieval - Indexing using Tree Structures - Security and Integrity threats - Defense mechanisms - Transaction and concurrency control mechanisms. (12) TUTORIALS: 1. DDL, DML commands of SQL. 2. TCL commands. 3. Working with PL/SQL. 4. Triggers and stored procedures. 5. Packages in SQL 6. Applications illustrating Concurrency

(30)

Total L: 45+ T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Elmasri Rand Navathe SB, "Fundamentals of Database Systems", Pearson Education, 2016. 2. Silberschatz A andKorth Hand Sudarshan S, "Database System Concepts", McGraw Hill, 2011. 3. Raghu Ramakrishnan and Johannes Gehrke, "Database Management System", McGraw Hill, 2010. 4. Thomas Condly and Carolyn Begg, "Database System", Pearson Education, 2009. 5. Date C J, "An Introduction to Database Systems", Pearson Education Asia, 2008. 6. Graeme C Simsion, "Data Modeling Essentials", Dreamtech, 2006.

18PD26 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP26

18PD27 ENTERPRISE COMPUTING 3003 ENTERPRISE DATA ENABLING: Enterprise Architectural overview - object oriented software development for enterprise Component Based software development for enterprise - Enterprise Data - Basis of JDBC, Drivers, Connection, Statement, Result Set, Advanced JDBC features. (13) ENTERPRISE WEB ENABLING: Web Browsers and Web Servers in Enterprise. Web Programming, Java Servlets - Java Server pages, JavaServer Faces. (10) MULTITIER ENTERPRISE COMPUTING: Java Beans, Enterprise Java Beans, Stateless Session Beans, Stateful Session Beans, Message Driven Beans, Entity, (10) ENTERPRISE ASYNCHRONOUS COMMUNICATION: Web Service standards, Describing and publishing, JAX-WS, WSDL, SOAP, XML processing API - Java Message Service, Point to Point Messaging, Publish Subscribe Messaging, Java Script, AJAX (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Eric Jendrock, Ian Evans, Devika Gollapudi, Kim Haase, Chinmayee Srivathsa, Ricardo Cervera-Navarro and William Markito, “The Java EE 7 Tutorial”, Addison Wesley, 2014. 2. Steven Holzner, "Ajax : A Beginner's Guide", McGraw Hill, 2013. 3. David Geary, Cay S. Horstmann, "Core JavaServer Faces", Pearson, 2013. 4. George Reese, “Database programming with JDBC and Java”, O'Reily, 2012.

18PD28 PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT STRATEGIES vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP28

18PD29 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS

3003 INTRODUCTION: Relevance of and need for vibrational analysis. Mathematical modeling of vibrating systems - single degree of freedom systems, free and forced vibrations, Transient Vibration - Impulse and arbitrary excitation, Laplace transform formulation, response spectrum. (12) TWO DEGREES OF FREEDOM SYSTEMS: Generalized co-ordinates, principal co-ordinates, derivation of equations of motion, co-ordinate coupling, Lagrange‟s equation. , Influence coefficients. (10)

356

59th ACM

09.06.2018

MULTI DEGREES OF FREEDOM SYSTEMS: Derivation of equations of motion, orthogonality principle, calculation of natural frequencies by Raleigh, Stodala, Dunkerley, Holzer and matrix iteration methods, geared system. (15) NOISE, VIBRATION MEASUREMENTS AND CONTROL: Sound wave and its propagation, sound measurement, Reverberation time and absorption of sound, sound isolation- machine enclosures, silencers and mufflers. Noise in gears, bearings and chains, Transducers for vibration measurement – Mechanical Exciters, Electrodynamic Shaker – Dynamic Testing of Machines and Structure – Experimental Modal Analysis, Methods of vibration control - excitation reduction at source, undamped and damped dynamic vibration absorbers, vibration isolation. (8) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Lewis H Bell and Douglas H Bell, “Industrial Noise Control Fundamentals and Applications”, Marcel Dekker Inc., New York, 2017. 2. Rao S S., "Mechanical Vibrations", Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2012. 3. Ashok Kumar Mallik, “Principles of Vibration Control”, Affiliated East-West Press (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 1990. 4. Seto, “Mechanical Vibrations", Schaum Outline Series, McGraw Hill Book Company, New York, 1990. 5. Grover G K., "Mechanical Vibrations ", New Chand and Brothers, Roorkey, 1989. 6. Tse Morse and Hinkle, “Mechanical Vibration”, Prentice Hall of India Ltd., New Delhi, 1987.

18PD30 METALLURGICAL FAILURE ANALYSIS 3003 FRACTURE: Stresses in body - Two dimensional and three dimensional states of stress, Mohr‟s circle - two and three dimensions, hydrostatic stress, Von-mises, maximum shear stress (Tresca), octahedral shear stress. Fracture - Types of fracture, Griffith crack theory, stress analysis of cracks, metallographic aspects of fracture. Brittle, ductile fractures, notch effects, fracture curve, R curve, fracture under combined stresses, effect of hydrostatic pressure on fracture, probabilistic aspects of fracture mechanics, toughness of materials. (12) FATIGUE: Statistical nature of fatigue, S-N curve, low cycle fatigue, strain life equations, structural feature of fatigue, fatigue crack propagation, effect of stress concentration, size, surface properties, metallurgical variables on fatigue, case studies, designing against fatigue, improvements after failure and service, fatigue of bolts, welded and adhesive joints. (12) CORROSION AND WEAR FAILURES: Factors influencing corrosion failures, analysis of corrosion failures, overview of various types of corrosion, stress corrosion cracking - sources, characteristics of stress corrosion cracking, analysis of stress corrosion cracking, various types of hydrogen damage failures, corrective and preventive action. Types of wear, role of friction in wear, lubricated and non-lubricated wear, analysis of wear failures. (10) ELEVATED TEMPERATURE FAILURES: Creep, stress rupture, elevated temperature fatigue, metallurgical instabilities, environment induced failure, tests for analysis of failure at elevated temperatures. FMEA: Definition - analysis causes of failure - modes - ranks of failure modes - fault tree analysis - case studies. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. George E Dieter, “Mechanical Metallurgy”, Create Space Independent Publishing Platform, 2014 2. Richard W Hertzberg, “Deformation and Fracture Mechanism of Engineering Materials”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2012. 3. Courtney T H., “Mechanical Behavior of Materials”, Overseas Press (India) Private Limited, 2006. 4. Jaap Schijve, “Fatigue of Structures and Materials”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2001. 5. William D Callister, “Material Science and Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons Inc, 1997. 6. ASM Metals Handbook, “Failure Analysis and Prevention”, ASM Metals Park, USA, Vol. 10, 1995.

18PD31 LOGISTICS AND SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP31

18PD32 INDUSTRIAL INTERNET OF THINGS Vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP32

18PD33 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT 3003 FOUNDATIONS OF TQM: Understanding quality, quality, competitiveness and customers, building quality chains, managing quality, quality in all functions, models and frame works for total quality management, Early TQM frameworks - quality award models - the four Ps and three Cs of TQM - a new model for TQM. Design, innovation and improvement - the design process quality function deployment (QFD) - the house of quality - specifications and standards - design in the service sectors - failure mode effect and criticality analysis (FMECA) - The links between good design and managing the business. (15) PROCESS REDESIGN / ENGINEERING: Reengineering the organization - process for redesign - the redesign process - the people and the leaders. Human Resource Management (HRM) - strategic alignment of HRM policies - effective communication - employee empowerment and involvement - training and development - teams and team work - review, continuous improvement and conclusions - organizing people for quality - quality circles and kaizen teams. (10) COMMUNICATIONS, INNOVATION AND LEARNING: Communicating the quality strategy - communicating the quality message - communication, learning, education and training - a systematic approach to education and training for quality turning educations and training into learning - the practicalities of sharing knowledge and learning. TQM and the management of change - planning the implementation of TQM - sustained improvement. (10)

357

59th ACM

09.06.2018

QUALITY AND ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS: ISO 9000 series of standards - sector specific standards ISO 9001 requirements - implementation - documentation - writing the documents - internal audits - registration - ISO 14000 series standards - concepts of ISO 14001 - requirements of ISO 14001 - benefits of EMS - integrating ISO 14000 with ISO 9000 - relationship between health and safety. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Mukherjee P.N., “Total Quality Management”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2006. 2. Besterfield D H et al, “Total Quality Management”, Pearson Education Private Limited, 2004. 3. Oakland J S., “Total Quality Management - Text with Cases”, Butterworth - Heinemann - An Imprint of Elseiver, First Indian Print, 2003. 4. Joseph Berk and Susan Berk, “Total Quality Management: Implementing Continuous Improvement”, Sterling Publisher, 1993.

18PD34 MECHANICS OF POLYMER MATRIX COMPOSITES vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP34

18PD35 DESIGN OPTIMIZATION 3003 INTRODUCTION TO OPTIMIZATION: Defining the optimization problem, Kuhn tucker conditions, lagrangian and duality, Single objective function - functions of one variable, unconstrained functions in N variables, constrained functions in N variables, linear programming – simplex method. (12) APPROXIMATION TECHNIQUES: Genetic Algorithm, Artificial Neural Network, simulated annealing, Ant Colony Optimization. (10) MULTI-OBJECTIVE FUNCTION PROBLEMS: Introduction, salient features, pareto optimality, global function/weighted sum, epsilon - constraint and lexicographic methods, goal programming, Min-max solutions. (12) MULTIDISCIPLINARY DESIGN OPTIMIZATION ARCHITECTURE: Introduction, terminology and notations, decomposition into subtasks, structuring the underlying information, system Analysis, Multidisciplinary design optimization methods. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Jaroslaw Sobieszczanski-Sobieski, Alan Morris and Michel van Tooren, “Multidisciplinary Design Optimization Supported by Knowledge Based Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons, Pondicherry, 2015. 2. Teofilo F. Gonzalez, “Handbook of Approximation Algorithms and Metaheuristics”, Chapman and Hall/CRC, 2007. 3. Vanderplaats, G. N., “Numerical Optimization Techniques for Engineering Design: With Applications”, McGraw Hill, New York, 1984.

AUDIT COURSES 18PD81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP81

18PD82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP82

ONE CREDIT COURSES OFFERED BY THE DEPARTMENT OF PRODUCTION ENGINEERING For the detailed Syllabi of all the one credit courses offered by Production Engineering department which are listed in this programme scheme refer to the syllabi of M.E Manufacturing Engineering programme.

SCIENCE ELECTIVES For the detailed syllabi of the science electives offered by Science Departments which are listed in this programme scheme refer to the syllabi of M.E Manufacturing Engineering programme.

HUMANITIES AND LANGUAGES ONE CREDIT COURSES For the detailed syllabi of the one credit courses offered by Humanities department which are listed in this programme scheme refer to the syllabi of M.E Manufacturing Engineering programme.

358

59th ACM

09.06.2018

13. Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment ME VIRTUAL PROTOTYPING AND DIGITAL MANUFACTURING (2018 REGULATIONS) (Minimum No. of credits to be earned: 73*) Course Code 18PM01 18PM02 18PM03 18PM04 18PM05 18PM51 18PM81

18PM06 18PM07 18PM08 18PM09 18PM__ 18PM__ 18PM52 18PM61 18PM82

18PM__ 18PM__ 18PM__ 18PM__ 18PM53 18PM71

18PM72

Course Title Linear Systems Theory Digital Manufacturing Geometric Modeling and Computer Aided Design Computer Graphics for Virtual Reality I Modeling and Simulation of Virtual Reality Systems Object Computing and Data Structures Laboratory English for Research Paper Writing Total 24 hrs Product Lifecycle Management Computer Graphics for Virtual Reality II Mathematical Modeling and Computer Aided Engineering Scientific and Engineering Data Visualization Elective -1 Elective - 2 Virtual Modeling and Simulation Laboratory Industry Visit and Technical Seminar Research Methodology and IPR Total 28 hrs Elective - 3 Elective - 4 Elective - 5 Elective - 6 Virtual Prototyping and Design Laboratory Project Work I Total 22 hrs

Project Work II Total 28 hrs ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES (Six to be opted) 18PM21 Simulation and Modeling Techniques 18PM22 Mechanics of Robot 18PM23 Object Oriented Analysis and Design 18PM24 Additive Manufacturing 18PM25 Database Management Systems 18PM26 Data Analytics 18PM27 Enterprise Computing 18PM28 Human Computer Interaction 18PM29 Image Processing and Machine Vision 18PM30 Mechatronics System 18PM31 Machine Learning 18PM32 Industrial Internet of Things

Hours/Week Lecture Tutorial Practical I SEMESTER 2 2 0 3 2 0

Credits

Maximum Marks CA FE Total

3 4

50 50

50 50

100 100

CAT

PC PC PC

3

2

0

4

50

50

100

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

0

0

4

2

50

50

100

0 0 14 6 II SEMESTER 3 0 3 0

** 4

Grade 19

0 300

0 300

0 600

MC

0 0

3 3

50 50

50 50

100 100

PC PC

3

2

0

4

50

50

100

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

0 0 4 4 ** 8

3 3 2 2 Grade 23

50 50 50 100 0 450

50 50 50 0 0 350

100 100 100 100 0 800

PE PE PC EEC MC

0 0 0 0 4 6 10

3 3 3 3 2 3 17

50 50 50 50 50 100 350

50 50 50 50 50 0 250

100 100 100 100 100 100 600

PE PE PE PE PC EEC

28 28

14 14

50 50

50 50

100 100

EEC

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 3 4 3 4 4 3 3 3 3 3 3

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE

3 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 18 2 III SEMESTER 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 12 0 IV SEMESTER 0 0 0 0 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

0 0 2 0 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0

* Indicated is the minimum number of credits to be earned by a student. ** - 60 hrs in I semester and 90 hrs in II semester; Grade: Completed / Not Completed CAT – Category; PC – Professional Core; PE - Professional Elective EEC – Employability Enhancement Course; MC- Mandatory Course

359

PC PC EEC

PC PC

59th ACM

09.06.2018 SCIENCE ELECTIVES

18ID01 18ID02 18ID03 18ID04 18ID05 18ID06 18ID07 18ID08 18ID09

Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS) Sensors for Engineering Applications Laser Processing of Materials Plasma Technology Nanosensor and its Applications Nano Magnetism and Spintronics Corrosion Science and Engineering Instrumental Methods of Chemical Analysis Polymeric Materials

HUMANITIES AND LANGUAGES ONE CREDIT COURSES 18OK01 18OK02 18OK03 18OK04

Research Writing in Engineering Sciences Indian Ethos and Human Values Personality Development Financial Accounting and Cost Accounting

360

59th ACM

09.06.2018 I SEMESTER 18PM01 LINEAR SYSTEMS THEORY 2203

VECTOR SPACES: Real vector spaces, subspaces, linear independence, basis and dimension, inner product space, orthonormal bases, Gram-Schmidt process, linear transformation, eigenvalues and eigenvectors, diagonalization. (8+7) STATE SPACE LINEAR SYSTEMS AND SOLUTION TO STATE EQUATIONS: State space linear systems, block diagrams, linearization of nonlinear systems, linear time variant (LTV) system, linear time invariant (LTI) system, solution to homogeneous system, solution to non-homogeneous linear system, solving continuous time system. (8+7) SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROLLABILITY: Matrix norms, Lyapunov stability, eigenvalue conditions for Lyapunov stability, Lyapunov stability theorem, BIBO stability, time domain conditions for BIBO stability, BIBO versus Lyapunov stability, controllable and reachable subspaces, reachability and controllability Gramians, controllable systems, eigenvector test for controllability, Lyapunov test for controllability. (8+7) OBSERVABILITY AND MINIMAL REALIZATIONS: Output feedback, unobservable subspaces, unconstructible subspace, observability and constructability Gramians, observability tests, minimal realizations, Markov parameters, similarity of minimal realizations, order of a minimal SISO realization. (8+7) Total L: 32 + T: 28 = 60 REFERENCES: 1. Howard Anton and Chris Rorres, “Elementary Linear Algebra: Applications Version”, John Wiley & Sons, New Delhi, 2018. 2. David C Lay, “Linear Algebra and Its Applications”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2017. 3. Chen C T., “Linear System Theory and Design”, Oxford University Press, USA, 2009. 4. João and P Hespanha, “Linear Systems Theory”, Princeton University Press, Princeton, New Jersey, 2009. 5. Panos J Antsaklis and Anthony N Michel, “A Linear Systems Primer”, Birkhäuser, Boston, 2007.

18PM02 DIGITAL MANUFACTURING 3204 VIRTUAL PROTOTYPING AND DIGITAL MANUFACTURING: History, Need for digital manufacturing, Virtual prototyping in product development, Virtual prototyping tools, Digital technologies, Impact on economy, Digital technology in manufacturing, Architecture of digital manufacturing system, Operation mode and applications of digital manufacturing. (12) CAD/CAM/CAE: Role of CAD in design, Types and applications of design models, Need for reverse engineering, Reverse engineering process, Reverse engineering hardware and software, CNC - Tool path generation and simulation, CMM – History, economy, functions and operation method, Additive manufacturing – Need, applications and types – FEM – Node generation techniques, Mesh generation techniques. (12) DIGITAL FACTORY AND VIRTUAL MANUFACTURING: Scope, Methods and tools used in virtual manufacturing, Benefits, Virtual factory simulation (10) INTERNET OF THINGS: Applications, IoT data management requirements, Architecture of IoT, Technological challenges, RFID and Electronic Product Code (EPC) network, The web of things, Issues in implementation of IoT. (11) TUTORIALS: 3D Modeling of assemblies and systems, Simulation of machining processes using CAM packages, Reverse Engineering of engineering components. (30) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Adrian McEwan and Hakim Cassimally, “Designing the Internet of Things”, Wiley, 2013. 2. Frank W Liou, “Rapid Prototyping and Engineering Application – A Toolbox for Prototype Developments”, CRC Press, 2011. 3. Vinesh Raja and Kiran J Fernandes, “Reverse Engineering-An Industrial Perspective”, Springer-Verlag, 2008. 4. Gerard Jounghyun Kim, “Designing Virtual Systems: The Structured Approach”, Springer, 2005. 5. James WCortada, “The Digital Hand - How Computers Changed the Work of American Manufacturing, Transportation, and Retail Industries”, Oxford University Press, 2003.

18PM03 GEOMETRIC MODELING AND COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN vide Product Design and Commerce 18PD03

18PM04 COMPUTER GRAPHICS FOR VIRTUAL REALITY I 3003 GRAPHICS SYSTEM AND MODELS: Applications of Computer Graphics, Graphics System, Physical and Synthetic Images, Imaging Systems, Graphics Architectures. OpenGL GRAPHICS PROGRAMMING: The OpenGL API, Primitives and Attributes, Color, Control functions, Adding Interaction. (11) VIEWING: Positioning of the Camera, Parallel Projections, Perspective Projections, OpenGL Projection Matrices. GEOMETRIC OBJECTS AND TRANSFORMATIONS: Scalars, Points, and Vectors, Three-Dimensional Primitives, Coordinate Systems and Frames, Frames in OpenGL, Matrix and Vector Classes, Modeling a Colored Cube, Affine Transformations - Translation, Rotation, and Scaling, Transformations in Homogeneous Coordinates, Concatenation of Transformations, Transformation Matrices in OpenGL, Interfaces to Three-Dimensional Applications, Quaternion. (12)

361

59th ACM

09.06.2018

VERTICES TO FRAGMENTS: Basic Implementation Strategies, Four Major Tasks, Clipping - Line Clipping, Polygon Clipping, Clipping of Other Primitives, Clipping in Three Dimensions, Polygon Rasterization, Hidden-Surface Removal, Antialiasing, Display Considerations. LIGHTING AND SHADING: Light and Matter, Light Sources, The Phong Reflection Model, Computation of Vectors, Polygonal Shading, Approximation of a Sphere by Recursive Subdivision. (11) LIGHTING AND SHADING: Specifying Lighting Parameters, Implementing a Lighting Model, Shading of the Sphere Model, Per-Fragment Lighting, Global Illumination. HIERARCHICAL MODELING: Symbols and Instances, Hierarchical Models, A Robot Arm, Trees and Traversal, Use of Tree Data Structures, Other Tree Structures, Scene Graphs, Open Scene Graph. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Edward Angel, “Interactive Computer Graphics: A Top-Down Approach Using WegGL”, 7th Edition, Addison-Wesley, 2014 2. John F. Hughes, James D. Foley, “Computer Graphics: Principles and Practice”, Addison-Wesley, 2014. 3. Donald Hearn and Pauline Baker, “Computer Graphics C Version”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2011. 4. David Shreinerand Bill TheKhronos OpenGL ARB Working Group. “OpenGL Programming Guide: The Official Guide to Learning OpenGL, Versions 3.0 and 3.1” Pearson Education, 2009. 5. David F Rogers, “Procedural Elements for Computer Graphics”, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill, 2001.

18PM05 MODELING AND SIMULATION OF VIRTUAL REALITY SYSTEMS 3003 VIRTUAL REALITY AND ADVANCES IN 3D USER INTERFACES: The historical development of VR: Scientific landmarks Computer Graphics, Real-time computer graphics, Flight simulation, Virtual environments, Requirements for VR, benefits of Virtual reality, 3D User Interfaces for the Real World, AR Interfaces as 3D Data Browsers, 3D Augmented Reality Interfaces, Augmented Surfaces and Tangible Interfaces, Agents in AR, Transitional AR-VR Interfaces - The future of 3D User Interfaces, Mixed reality. (9) VIRTUAL REALITY HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE: Input device characteristics, Desktop input devices, Tracking Devices, Special Purpose Input Devices, Direct Human Input, Home- Brewed Input Devices, Choosing Input Devices for 3D Interfaces World Space, World Coordinate, World Environment, Objects - Geometry, Position/Orientation, Hierarchy, Bounding Volume, Scripts and other attributes, Tessellated Data, Cullers and Occluders, Lights and Cameras, Scripts, Interaction - Simple, Feedback, Graphical User Interface, Room/Stage/Area Descriptions, World Authoring and Playback, VR toolkits, Available software in the market. (12) 3D INTERACTION TECHNIQUES: Structured Approach to Interaction / Interface Design, Metaphors, Multimodality, Interaction Techniques for 3D Manipulation, Design Guidelines - 3D Travel Tasks, Travel Techniques, Theoretical Foundations of Wayfinding, User Centered Wayfinding Support, Environment Centered Wayfinding Support, Evaluating Wayfinding Aids, System Control, Classification, Graphical Menus, Voice Commands, Gestural Commands, Tools, Multimodal System Control Techniques. (12) DESIGNING AND DEVELOPING VIRTUAL SYSTEMS: Strategies for Designing and Developing the system, Modeling an object, scene construction, reference frames, modeling of function and behavior, estimating the performance of system, LOD, tuning the system, Handling Collision, Collision Detection with Line Segments, Collision Among Polygonal Models, Bounding Volumes, Collision Among Bounding Volumes, Motion and Collision Response, Deformation, Motion Control, Forward and Inverse Kinematics. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Alan B Craig, William R Sherman and Jeffrey D Will, “Developing Virtual Reality Applications: Foundations of Effective Design”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2009. 2. Gerard Jounghyun Kim, “Designing Virtual Systems: The Structured Approach”, 2005. 3. Doug A Bowman, Ernest Kuijff, Joseph J LaViola, Jr and Ivan Poupyrev, “3D User Interfaces, Theory and Practice”, Addison Wesley, USA, 2005. 4. Burdea, Grigore C and Philippe Coiffet, “Virtual Reality Technology”, Wiley Interscience, India, 2003. 5. William R Sherman and Alan B Craig, “Understanding Virtual Reality: Interface, Application and Design (The Morgan Kaufmann Series in Computer Graphics)”.Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, San Francisco, CA, 2002. 6. John Vince, “Virtual Reality Systems”, Addison Wesley, 1995.

18PM51 OBJECT COMPUTING AND DATA STRUCTURES LABORATORY vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP51

II SEMESTER 18PM06 PRODUCT LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT vide Product Design and Commerce 18PD06

18PM07 COMPUTER GRAPHICS FOR VIRTUAL REALITY II 3003 COLOR MODELS AND COLOR SUMMARY APPLICATIONS: Properties of Light – Standard Primaries and the Chromaticity Diagram – Intuitive Color Concepts – RGB Color Model – CMY Color Model – HSV Color Model – Conversion between HSV

362

59th ACM

09.06.2018

and RGB Models – Conversion Between HSV and RGB Models – Color Selection and Applications. DISCRETE TECHNIQUES: Buffers – Digital Images – Writing into Buffers – Mapping Methods. (10) DISCRETE TECHNIQUES: Texture Mapping – Texture Mapping in OpenGL – Texture Generation – Environment Maps – Reflection Map – Bump Mapping – Compositing Techniques – Sampling and Aliasing. ADVANCED RENDERING: Going Beyond Pipeline Rendering – Ray Tracing – Building a Simple Ray Tracer – The Rendering Equation - Radiosity – RenderMan - Parallel Rendering – Volume Rendering – Isosurfaces and Marching Cubes – Mesh Simplification – Direct Volume Rendering – Image-Based Rendering. (12) FRACTALS: Modeling – Sierpinski Gasket – Coastline Problem – Fractal Geometry – Fractal Dimension – Recursively defined curves – Koch curves – C curves – Dragons – Space filling curves – Turtle graphics – Grammar based models –Graftals– Volumetric Examples – k-midpoint subdivision – Fractal Brownian Motion – Fractal Mountains – Iteration in the Complex plane – Mandelbrot Set. COMPUTER ANIMATION: Design of Animation Sequences – General Computer-Animation – Functions – Raster Animations (11) ANIMATION: Computer-Animation Languages – Key-Frame Systems – Motion Specifications, Kinematics and Dynamics. VIRTUAL REALITY MODELLING LANGUAGE: Introduction, exploring and building a world, building object, lighting, sound and complex shapes, animation and user interaction, colors, normals and textures, nodes references. Special Applications: Stereo display programming, multiport display systems, multi-screen display system, fly mode navigation, walk through navigation, virtual track ball navigation. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Ann Latham Cudworth, “Virtual World Design”, CRC Press, 2014. 2. Edward Angel, “Interactive Computer Graphics: A Top-Down Approach Using WegGL”, 7th Edition, Addison-Wesley, 2014. 3. John F. Hughes, James D. Foley, “Computer Graphics: Principles and Practice”, Addison-Wesley, 2014. 4. Donald Hearn and Pauline Baker, “Computer Graphics C Version”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2011. 5. Jed Hartman, Silicon Graphics Incorporated, Josie Wernecke, “The VRML 2.0 Handbook: The Official Guide to Constructing Virtual Worlds”, Addison-Wesley Longman, 1996.

18PM08 MATHEMATICAL MODELING AND COMPUTER AIDED ENGINEERING 3204 PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS AND NUMERICAL METHODS TO SOLVE PDEs: Elliptic, parabolic and hyperbolic equations - physical significance – Use of Central Differences, Central differences, Crank-Nicolson and ADI methods examples - Stability and error of numerical schemes. (10) VARIATIONAL CALCULUS AND FINITE ELEMENT METHOD: Introduction, Solutions selected differential equations by variational methods, Rayleigh - Ritz method - Finite element method - Concepts, nodes, elements, connectivity, Coordinate systems, shape functions, stiffness matrix, Global stiffness matrix, Isoparametric elements, solution methods – Examples - Use of software . (10) FLUID FLOW: Introduction to computational fluid dynamics (finite difference, finite element techniques) - Formulation of fluid flow problems (simple cases only) - Navier-Stokes equation - solution techniques - examples, solution of fluid flow problems and Multi-physics Problems using software. (15) HEAT TRANSFER: Derivation of energy equation in general form -Solutions using numerical methods (finite difference and finite element techniques), solutions using FEA and CFD techniques for conductive and convective heat transfer problems. (10) TUTORIALS: Plotting of fields graphically and using software, modeling and analysis of deformation of rigid bodies using FEA, modeling and analysis simple fluid flow problems, modeling and analysis of fluid flow problems with multi-physics approach. (30) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Reddy J N., “An Introduction to the Finite Element Method”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006. 2. Singerasu S Rao, “The Finite Element Method in Engineering”, Butterworth Heinemann, 2005. 3. Curtis F Gerald Patrick O Wheatley, “Applied Numerical Analysis”, Pearson, 2004. 4. Muralidhar K and Sundararajan T., “Computational Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer”, Narosa Publications, 2003. 5. Patankar and Suhas V., “Numerical Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow”, Hemisphere Publishing Corporation, 1980. 6. Elsgolts L., “Differential Equations and the Calculus of Variations”, MIR Publishers, 1977.

18PM09 SCIENTIFIC AND ENGINEERING DATA VISUALIZATION 3003 SCALAR VISUALIZATION TECHNIQUES: Nature of scientific and engineering data, Visualization Goals, Representation of mesh and results data, mapping analysis results to Visualizations, One dimensional, two dimensional and three dimensional Scalar fields - Element face colour coding - contour display - isosurface techniques - Marching Cubes algorithm - Particle sampling. (12) VISUALIZATION OF FLOW DATA: Tensors - Visualization mappings of flow data, Vector mapping - elementary icons particle traces – streaklines, streamlines – streamribbons and streamtubes - global icons - Tensor mappings - elementary icons - global icons. (11) CONTINUUM VOLUME DISPLAY: Acquisition Techniques, Volume rendering Terminology, Surface and Volume rendering techniques, Optimisation, Applications. (12)

363

59th ACM

09.06.2018

APPLICATIONS OF ENGINEERING DATA VISAULIZATION AND FUTURE TRENDS: Case studies on construction, Product design, Healthcare - Trends in Computing Hardware, Animation, Video and multi-media, software trends in Visualization. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Gavin Carver and Christine White, “Computer Visualization for the Theater – 3D Modelling for the Designers”, Taylor & Francis, 2016. 2. Torsten Möller and Bernd Hamann Robert D Russell, “Mathematical Foundations of Scientific Visualization, Computer Graphics and Massive Data Exploration”, Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg, 2009. 3. Helen Wright, “Introduction to Scientific Visualization”, Springer, 2007. 4. Richard S Gallagher, “Computer Visualization: Graphics Techniques for Engineering and Scientific Analysis”, CRC Press, CRC Press LLC, 1994. 5. Elsgolts L., “Differential Equations and the Calculus of Variations”, MIR Publishers, 1977.

18PM52 VIRTUAL MODELING AND SIMULATION LABORATORY 0042 In this course, students will be provided with an orientation programme on relevant hardware/software for a duration of 20 hours. After this orientation, each student is expected to formulate and complete an activity of interest which has to be derived from the orientation programme under the guidance of a faculty. The details like background, problem definition, state of technology/knowledge in that area by literature review (minimum 5 latest papers), objectives, methodology, hardware and software that can be used (from the orientation programme), results from the experiments/simulation and their interpretation with respect to the assumptions/background and a formal conclusion are expected in the report which is to be submitted at the end of the semester. This work is evaluated for the credit assigned. Expected hours needed for this work is 40 hours. Topics for orientation programme 1. Introduction to virtual reality hardware and software. 2. Conversion of CAD models into virtual reality models. 3. Adding behavior to 3D models. Total P: 60

18PM61 INDUSTRY VISIT AND TECHNICAL SEMINAR 0042 Students will make presentations on current topics related to their specialization and prepare a report for the same. The presentation and the report will be evaluated by a review committee constituted by the Head of the Department .A minimum of two industrial visits are to be arranged as part of the course and the students are expected to make a presentation on their learning from the industrial visit. A viva-voce will be held at the end of the course. Total P: 60

III SEMESTER 18PM53 VIRTUAL PROTOTYPING AND DESIGN LABORATORY 0042 In this course, students will be provided with an orientation programme on relevant hardware/software for a duration of 20 hours. After this orientation, each student is expected to formulate and complete an activity of interest which has to be derived from the orientation programme under the guidance of a faculty. The details like background, problem definition, state of technology/knowledge in that area by literature review (minimum 5 latest papers), objectives, methodology, hardware and software that can be used (from the orientation programme), results from the experiments/simulation and their interpretation with respect to the assumptions/background and a formal conclusion are expected in the report which is to be submitted at the end of the semester. This work is evaluated for the credit assigned. Expected hours needed for this work is 40 hours. Topics for orientation programme 1. Creation of assemblies and systems in virtual environment. 2. Creation of digital mockup to study ergonomic and aesthetic aspects. 3. Use of VR hardware peripherals to create immersive environment for assemblies and systems evaluation. Total P: 60

18PM71 PROJECT WORK I 0063 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Identification of a real life problem in thrust areas Developing a mathematical model for solving the above problem Finalisation of system requirements and specification Proposing different solutions for the problem based on literature survey Future trends in providing alternate solutions Consolidated report preparation Total P: 90

364

59th ACM

09.06.2018 IV SEMESTER 18PM72 PROJECT WORK II 0 0 28 14

The project work involves the following: I.

Preparing a project - brief proposal including 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Problem Identification A statement of system / process specifications proposed to be developed (Block Diagram / Concept tree) List of possible solutions including alternatives and constraints Cost benefit analysis Time Line of activities

II.

A report highlighting the design finalization [based on functional requirements and standards (if any)]

III.

A presentation includes the following: 1. 2. 3.

Implementation Phase (Hardware / Software / both) Testing and Validation of the developed system Learning in the Project

IV. Consolidated Report Preparation Total P: 420

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES (SIX TO BE OPTED) 18PM21 SIMULATION AND MODELING TECHNIQUES 3 003 INTRODUCTION TO SIMULATION: Advantages and disadvantages of simulation, areas of application, systems and system environment, components of a system, discrete and continuous system, model of a system, types of models (10) RANDOM NUMBER GENERATION: Properties of random numbers, Techniques for generating random numbers, linear congruential method, combined linear congruential generators - Random number streams, midsquare method, feedback shift register generators, tests for random numbers- Frequency tests - the Kolmogorov_Smirnov test, the Chi-square tests. (12) RANDOM VARIATE GENERATION: Inverse transform technique, exponential distribution, uniform distribution, Weibull distribution. Empirical continuous distributions - Empirical discrete distribution, discrete uniform distribution, geometric distribution, acceptance - rejection technique - Poisson distribution, gamma distribution, discrete transformation for the normal and lognormal distributions, convolution method. (13) SIMULATION OF QUEUEING and INVENTORY SYSTEMS: Simulation of a single server queue, simulation of a two server queue. Elements of inventory theory, inventory models, simulation of inventory control. CASE STUDIES: Simulation of manufacturing and material handling system, simulation of computer systems, simulation of computer networks. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Averil M Law, “Simulation Modeling and Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2011. 2. Narsingh Deo, “System Simulation with Digital Computer”, PHI Learning, New Delhi, 2011. 3. Jerry Banks, John S Carson, Barry L Nelson, David M Nicol and Shahabudeen P, “Discrete-Event System Simulation”, Pearson, New Delhi, 2011. 4. Andrew F Seila, Vlatko Ceric, Pandu R and Tadikamalla, “Applied Simulation Modeling”, Thomson Learning, University of California, 2003. 5. Feurzeig, Wallace, Roberts and Nancy, “Modeling and Simulation in Science and Mathematics Education”, Springer –Verlag, New York, 1999.

18PM22 MECHANICS OF ROBOT vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP22

18PM23 OBJECT ORIENTED ANALYSIS AND DESIGN vide Product Design and Commerce 18PD23

18PM24 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP24

18PM25 DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS vide Product Design and Commerce 18PD25

18PM26 DATA ANALYTICS 3204

365

59th ACM

09.06.2018

INTRODUCTION AND LIFECYCLE: Types of digital data – Classification of digital data – Characteristics of data – Evolution of Big Data – Definition of Big Data – Challenges with Big Data – Volume –Velocity – Variety – Big Data overview – State of the practice in analytics - Data analytics lifecycle overview – Discovery – Preparation – Model planning. (12) DATA AND PREDICTIVE ANALYTICS: Model building – Communication results – Operationalize – Data collection - Sampling - Preprocessing - Linear regression - Logistic regression - Support Vector Machines - Ensemble methods - Multiclass classification techniques - Evaluating predictive models - Case Study: Credit risk modeling, Recommender systems. (11) SOCIAL NETWORK ANALYTICS: Social network definitions - Social network metrics - Social network learning - Relational neighborhood classifier - Probabilistic relational neighborhood classifier - Relational logistic regression - Collective inferencing Egonets – Bigraphs - Case Study: Web analytics, Social media analytics – Business process analytics. (11) ADVANCED ANALYTICS TECHNOLOGY AND TOOLS: Streaming data analytics - Map Reduce framework - Hadoop, Twister, SPARK, Tools: Pig - Hive - Mahout - Sqoop – Flume, Open source databases: Hbase - MongoDB. - Neo4j. (11) TUTORIALS: 1. Map Reduce using Hadoop. 2. Predict using Apache Mahout. 3. Social Network Analytics using Spark. 4. Model development for retail, finance, fraud detection, stock market analysis, banking 5. Model development for social network, medical diagnosis, natural language processing

(30)

Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. EMC Education Services, “Data Science and Big Data Analytics: Discovering, Analyzing, Visualizing and Preserving Data”, Wiley, USA, 2015. 2. Mohammed Guller, “Big Data Analytics with Spark”, A Press, USA, 2015. 3. Seema Acharya, Subhashini Chellapan, “Big Data and Analytics”, Wiley, USA, 2015. 4. Bart Baesens, “Analytics in a Big Data World: The Essential Guide to Data Science and its Applications”, Wiley, USA, 2014. 5. Peter Zadrozny and Raghu Kodali, “Big Data Analytics using Splunk”, USA, 2013. 6. Eelco Plugge, Tim Hawkins, Peter Membrey, “The Definitive Guide to Mongodb: The NoSQL Database for Cloud and Desktop Computing”, Apress, USA, 2010.

18PM27 ENTERPRISE COMPUTING vide Product Design and Commerce 18PD27

18PM28 HUMAN COMPUTER INTERACTION 3003 INTRODUCTION AND DESIGN ISSUES: Introduction to Human-Computer Interaction as an emerging field : Disciplines contributing to HCI, Human Information Processing Psychology of everyday things, Importance of human factors in design – cultural , emotional, technological, business, Need Satisfaction curve of technology, Levels of human computer interaction DESIGN ISSUES: Graphical user interface – popularity of graphics, the concept of direct manipulation, graphical system, Characteristics, Web user – Interface popularity, characteristics - Principles of user interface. Quality of Service, Introduction: Models of Response - Time Impacts, Expectations and Attitudes, User Productivity, Variability in Response Time, Frustrating Experiences - Error Messages, Display Design, Balancing Function and Fashion. (12) INTERACTION STYLES: Screen Designing:- Design goals – Screen planning and purpose, organizing screen elements, ordering of screen data and content – screen navigation and flow – Visually pleasing composition – amount of information – focus and emphasis – presentation information simply and meaningfully – information retrieval on web – statistical graphics – Technological consideration in interface design. Direct Manipulation and Virtual Environments - Examples of Direct Manipulation, Discussion of Direct Manipulation-3D Interfaces, Teleportation, Virtual and Augmented Reality. Overview of Menu Selection, Form Fill-in and Dialog Boxes. (10) MOBILE HCI: Mobile Ecosystem: Platforms, Application frameworks - Types of Mobile Applications: Widgets, Applications, Games - Mobile Information Architecture, Mobile 2.0, Mobile Design: Elements of Mobile Design, Tools. (10) EVALUATING INTERFACE DESIGNS: Introduction - Software tools – Specification methods, interface Expert Reviews Usability Testing and Laboratories - Survey Instruments, Acceptance Tests - Evaluation During Active Use - Controlled Psychologically Oriented Experiments, Navigation schemes selection of window, selection of devices based and screen based controls. Interaction Devices – Keyboard and function keys – pointing devices – speech recognition digitization and generation – image and video displays. (13) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Ben Shneidermann, “Designing the User Interface”, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education Asia, 2016. 2. Rogers, Sharps and Wiley Dreamtech, “Interaction Design Prece”, 2015. 3. Olsen D.R., “Human – Computer Interaction”, Cengage Learning, 2010. 4. Alan Dix, Janet Fincay, Gre Goryd, Abowd and Russell Bealg, “Human – Computer Interaction”, Pearson Education, 2009. 5. Wilbert O Galitz and Wiley DreamTech, “The Essential Guide to User Interface Design”, 2007. 6. Soren Lauesen, “User Interface Design”, Pearson Education, 2004.

18PM29 IMAGE PROCESSING AND MACHINE VISION vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP29

366

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18PM30 MECHATRONICS SYSTEM vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP30

18PM31 MACHINE LEARNING 3 003 INTRODUCTION: Overview of machine learning - related areas – applications - software tools. PARAMETRIC REGRESSION: Linear regression - polynomial regression - locally weighted regression - numerical optimization - gradient descent - kernel methods. (10) GENERATIVE LEARNING: Gaussian parameter estimation - maximum likelihood estimation - Bayesian estimation. DISCRIMINATIVE LEARNING: Linear discrimination - logistic regression- logit and logistic functions. (10) NEURAL NETWORKS: The perceptron algorithm - multilayer perceptrons – back propagation - nonlinear regression multiclass discrimination - training procedures - localized network structure - dimensionality reduction interpretation - Support vectormachines. (10) GRAPHICAL AND SEQUENTIAL MODELS: Bayesian networks - conditional independence - Markov random fields - inference in graphical models - belief propagation - Markov models - hidden Markov models - decoding states from observations learning HMM parameters. DIMENSIONALITY REDUCTION: Feature selection - principal component analysis - linear discriminant analysis - factor analysis - independent component analysis - multidimensional scaling - manifold learning. (15) Total L : 45 REFERENCES: 1. Shai Shalev Shwartz, ‎Shai Ben-David, “Understanding‎Machine‎Learning: From Theory to Algorithms" University Press, 2014. 2. Alpaydin E., “Machine Learning”, MIT Press, 2010. 3. Mitchell T., “Machine Learning”, McGraw-Hill, 2010. 4. Bishop C, “Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning”, Springer, 2006. 5. Hastie T., Tibshirani R. and Friedman J., “Elements of Statistical Learning”, Springer, 2001. 6. Duda R., Hart E and Stork D, “Pattern Classification”, Wiley-Interscience, 2000.

, Cambridge

18PM32 INDUSTRIAL INTERNET OF THINGS vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP32

AUDIT COURSES 18PM81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP81

18PM82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP82

SCIENCE ELECTIVES For the detailed syllabi of the science electives offered by Science Departments which are listed in this programme scheme refer to the syllabi of M.E Manufacturing Engineering programme.

HUMANITIES AND LANGUAGES ONE CREDIT COURSES For the detailed syllabi of the one credit courses offered by Humanities department which are listed in this programme scheme refer to the syllabi of M.E Manufacturing Engineering programme.

367

59th ACM 13. Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment M E BIOMETRICS AND CYBER SECURITY Course Code

Course Title

I SEMESTER 18NB01 Mathematical Foundations for Cyber Security 18NB02 Advanced Algorithms and Analysis 18NB03 Cyber Investigations 18NB04 Applied Cryptography 18NB05 Biometric Technologies 18NB51 Cyber Investigations Laboratory English for Research Paper Writing 18NB81 Total 24 Hrs II SEMESTER 18NB06 Cyber Physical Systems

09.06.2018

(2018 REGULATIONS) (Minimum No. of credits to be earned: 73*) Lectures/Week Maximum Marks Credits CAT Lecture Tutorial Practical CA FE Total 2 3 3 3 3 0 0 14

2 2 0 0 2 0 0 6

0 0 0 0 0 4 ** 4

3 4 3 3 4 2 Grade 19

50 50 50 50 50 50 0 300

50 50 50 50 50 50 0 300

100 100 100 100 100 100 0 600

FC FC PC PC PC PC MC

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PC

18NB07

Biometric Image Processing

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PC

18NB08

3

2

0

4

50

50

100

PC

3

2

0

4

50

50

100

PC

18NB__

Digital Forensics Cloud Security sProfessional Elective -1

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PC

18NB__

Professional Elective - 2

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PE

18NB52

Biometric Image Processing Laboratory

0

0

4

2

50

50

100

PC

18NB61

Industrial Visit and Technical Seminar

0

0

4

2

50

50

100

EEC

18NB82

Research Methodology and IPR

0

0

**

Grade

0

0

0

MC

18

4

8

24

400

400

800

18NB09

Total 30 Hrs III SEMESTER 18NB__ 18NB__

Professional Elective - 3

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PE

Professional Elective - 4

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PE

18NB__

Professional Elective - 5

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PE

18NB__

Professional Elective - 6

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PE

18NB53

Security and Penetration Testing Laboratory

0

0

4

2

50

50

100

PC

18NB71

Project Work I

0

0

6

3

50

50

100

EEC

12

0

10

17

300

300

600

0

0

28

14

50

50

100

EEC

Total 22 Hrs IV SEMESTER 18NB72

Project Work II

ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES (Six to be opted) 18NB21 18NB22

Advanced Persistent Threat

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PE

Machine Vision

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PE

18NB23

Information Ethics and Laws

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PE

18NB24

Operating Systems Security

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PE

18NB25

Speech Processing

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PE

18NB26

Deep Learning

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PE

18NB27

Secure Coding

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PE

18NB28

Pattern Recognition

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PE

18NB29

Digital Watermarking and Steganography Design and Analysis of Security Protocols

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PE

18NB30

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PE

18NB31

Security in Internet of Things

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PE

368

59th ACM 18NB32 18NB33 18NB34 18NB35 18NB36 18NB37

09.06.2018

Cyber Security Governance, Risk Management and Compliance.

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PE

Content Based Image Retrieval

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PE

Human Computer Interaction

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PE

Hardware Implementation of Cryptosystems

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PE

Filter Bank Designs for Biomedical Applications

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PE

Malware Analysis and Reverse Engineering

3

0

0

3

50

50

100

PE

* Indicated is the minimum number of credits to be earned by a student. ** - 60 hrs in I semester and 90 hrs in II semester; Grade: Completed / Not Completed CAT – Category; PC – Professional Core; PE - Professional Elective EEC – Employability Enhancement Course; MC- Mandatory Course

369

59th ACM

09.06.2018 SEMESTER I 18NB01 MATHEMATICAL FOUNDATIONS FOR CYBER SECURITY 2203

NUMBER THEORY: The fundamental theorem of arithmetic, Division algorithm, Euclidean algorithm, Extended Euclidean algorithm. Arithmetical function - Euler totient function – Congruence, Residue classes and complete residue system, Linear congruences, Euler- Fermat theorem, Chinese remainder theorem, Probabilistic primality tests – Solovay - Strassen test - Miller-Rabin test. (8+7) ALGEBRAIC STRUCTURES: Groups – cyclic groups, subgroups and cosets, modulo groups - primitive roots - discrete logarithms. Rings – sub rings, fields – finite fields, elliptic curve cryptosystem, lattices- basic concepts, shortest vector problem, lattice basis reduction algorithm. (8+7) PROBABILITY THEORY: One dimensional random variables - families of discrete random variables - Bernoulli, Binomial, Poisson, Geometric, families of continuous random variables - Uniform, Normal, Exponential, Usage of probability in encryption. (8+7) RANDOM NUMBER AND RANDOM VARIATE GENERATION: LCG, In distinguishability of probability distributions - Next Bit Predictors - The Blum-Blum-Shub Generator – security of the BBS Generator, Random variates generation – Bernoulli, uniform, normal, exponential. (8+7) Total L:32 + T:28 = 60 REFERENCES: 1. Douglas Stinson, Cryptography – Theory and Practice, CRC Press, New York, 2017. 2. Nigel Smart, Cryptography Made Simple, Springer International Publishing, Switzerland, 2016. 3. Roy D.Yates and David J Goodman, “Probability and Stochastic Processes - A Friendly Introduction for Electrical and Computer Engineers”, John Wiley & Sons, 2012. 4. Andrew F.Seila, Vlatko Ceric, PanduTadikamalla, Applied Simulation Modelling, Thomson learning, New York 2003. 5. Tom M Apostol, Introduction to Analytic Number theory, Narosa Publising House, New Delhi, 1998. 6. D. S. Malik, J. Mordeson, M. K. Sen, Fundamentals of abstract algebra, Tata McGraw Hill, 1997.

18NB02 ADVANCED ALGORITHMS AND ANALYSIS vide Information Technology 18NN02

18NB03 CYBER INVESTIGATIONS 3003 COMPUTER SECURITY: Threats, Vulnerabilities, Controls, Identification and Authentication , Various Attack methods- Passive Attack, Active Attack, Cyber stalking, Basic Encryption methods-Symmetric Encryption, Public key Encryption. (10) SECURITY ATTACKING TECHNIQUES: Anti forensics methods, Tunneling techniques- HTTP, DNS, ICMP, Fraud TechniquesOnline frauds and offenses, Rogue Antivirus, Exploitation: Techniques to gain a foothold - Misdirection, Reconnaissance and disruption methods, Malicious codes: Self-replicating codes - Evading detection and elevating privileges - Stealing information and exploitation. (13) DEFENSE AND ANALYSIS TECHNIQUES: Memory forensics: Importance - Capabilities - Framework - Dumping physical memory - Installing and using volatility - Finding hidden process - Volatility analyst pack, Honeypots, Malicious code naming and automated analysis system – DNS, Firewalls -Terrorist Network Analysis, Security operation centre. (11) CYBERCRIME DETECTION AND LAWS: Network Vs Host based detection, Anatomy and process, Network based and host based intrusion detection systems: Architecture - Detection engine - Operational concept, Detection mechanism, Signatures, Traffic analysis, Intrusion detection, IT Act, Digital laws and legislation, Law enforcement roles and responses, Indian evidence act: IPC CrPC - Electronic communication privacy act, Legal policies. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Charles P. Pfleeger and Shari Lawrence Plleeger ,”Analyzing Computer Security – A threat/vulnerability / Counter measure approach”,Pearson,UK,2014. 2. Nina Godbole, SunitBelapure,” Cyber Security ”,Wiley,India,2013. 3. James Graham,Richard Howard and Ryan Olson, “Cyber Security Essentials”, CRC Press, USA, 2011. 4. VivekSood, “Cyber Law Simplified”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2008. 5. Paul E Proctor, “The Practical Intrusion Detection Handbook”, Prentice Hall, USA, 2007. 6. Bernadette H Schell and Clemens Martin, “Cybercrime”, ABC – CLIO Inc, California, 2004.

18NB04 APPLIED CRYPTOGRAPHY 3003 INTRODUCTION TO CRYPTOGRAPHY: Modular arithmetic functions, Shannon ciphers and perfect secrecy, Security services, Threat model, Security attacks, Substitution ciphers, Transposition ciphers, Symmetric versus asymmetric techniques, Block versus stream ciphers,Cryptanalysis: Linear and differential cryptanalysis. (8)

370

59th ACM

09.06.2018

SYMMETRIC TECHNIQUES: Block ciphers: Feistel versus non feistel cipher- DES and its variants- AES- Modes of operation, Stream ciphers: RC5- Stream ciphers based on Linear Feedback Shift Registers (LFSRs),Key establishment and management. (12) ASYMMETRIC TECHNIQUES:Principles of public key cryptosystems, Encryption, Key exchange, Digital signatures: properties and requirements, RSA, ElGamal, Diffie-Hellman, Elliptic curve cryptography. (12) INTEGRITY,AUTHENTICITY AND IDENTIFICATION SCHEMES: Cryptographic hash functions: requirements and security, Uses of hash functions, Secure hash algorithm, Message digest algorithm, MD5, Message Authentication Codes(MAC), MAC from hash functions, MAC from block ciphers, Identification Schemes: Challenge-response identification, Customized and zero-knowledge identification protocols, Digital Signature Standard, Basics of PostQuantum Cryptography. (13) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. William Stallings, “Cryptography and Network Security Principles and practice”, Pearson Education Asia, 2017. 2. Nigel P.Smart, “Cryptography made simple”,Springer, USA, 2016. 3. Bruce Schneier, “Applied Cryptography: Protocols, Algorithms and Source Code in C”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 2015. 4. Jeffrey Hoffstein, “An Introduction to Mathematical Cryptography”, Springer, USA, 2014. 5. Douglas R. Stinson, “Cryptography: Theory and Practice”, Chapman & Hall/CRC, USA, 2010. 6. Wenbo Mao, “Modern Cryptography - Theory and Practice”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2003. 7. Alfred J. Menezes, “Handbook of Applied Cryptography”,CRC Press, USA,1997.

18NB05 BIOMETRIC TECHNOLOGIES 3204 BIOMETRIC FUNDAMENTALS AND STANDARDS: Biometrics versus traditional techniques, Characteristics, Processes, Performance measures,Assessing the privacy risks of biometrics - Designing privacy sympathetic biometric systems, Biometric standards, Applications and properties, Biometrics in medicine. (10+7) PHYSIOLOGICAL TRAITS: Face, Ear, Retina, Iris, Finger, Automated fingerprint identification system, Palm print, Hand vascular geometry analysis, Knuckle, DNA, Dental,Cognitive Biometrics: ECG, EEG, Case Study. (14+8) BEHAVIOURAL TRAITS: Signature, Keystroke, Voice, Gait, Gesture recognition, Video face, Mapping the body technology, Case Study. (10+7) USER INTERFACES: Biometric interfaces: Human machine interface - BHMI structure, Human side interface: Iris image interface Hand geometry and fingerprint sensor, Machine side interface: Parallel port - Serial port - Network topologies, Spoofing methods Securing Biometric templates - Cancellable biometrics. (11+8) Total L:45 + T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Paul Reid, “Biometrics for Network Security”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2013. 2. Samir Nanavati, Michael Thieme and Raj Nanavati, “Biometrics – Identity Verification in a Networked World”, John Wiley and Sons, New Delhi, 2012. 3. Anil K Jain, Patrick Flynn and Arun A Ross, “Handbook of Biometrics”, Springer, USA,2010. 4. John R Vacca, “Biometric Technologies and Verification Systems”, Elsevier, USA,2009. 5. John D Woodward, Nicholas M Orlansand Peter T Higgins,“Biometrics: The Ultimate Reference”, Dream Tech, New Delhi,2009. 6. David D Zhang, “Automated Biometrics: Technologies and Systems”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, New Delhi,2000.

18NB51 CYBER INVESTIGATIONS LABORATORY 0042 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Network Analysis Malicious codes Sniffer tools Password cracking Misdirection, Reconnaissance and disruption methods Total P:60

SEMESTER II 18NB06 CYBER PHYSICAL SYSTEMS 3003 INTRODUCTION: Cyber Physical system concepts-Design challenges-Mobile cyber physical systems-Design principles-Physical system controls-Intelligence application of HDP-HMM in recognition of dynamic hand gestures. (12) MODELING IN CYBER PHYSICAL SYSTEMS: Introduction to models of computation-Languages and tools for system designPhysical System Modeling on cognitive Unmanned Aerial vehicle-Concurrent models of computation-Continuous time modelAcausal model-Mixed model-Hybrid systems. (10)

371

59th ACM

09.06.2018

SENSOR BASED CYBER PHYSICAL SYSTEMS: Wireless Sensor and Actuator Networks for Cyber Physical SystemsApplications-Community Sensing-Wireless Embedded/Implanted Micro Systems-Architecture and Security-The Application of Machine Learning in monitoring - Robotics - Transportation (10) CIVILIAN CYBER PHYSICAL SYSTEM APPLICATIONS: Energy efficient building Cyber Physical System for Smart Grid Applications-Cyber Physical System for transportation applications-Video communications - Digital Manufacturing/Industry 4.0 IEEE 802.1 AS standards (13) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Rajeev Alur“Principles of Cyber Physical Systems”, MIT Press, USA, 2015. 2. E. A. Lee and S. A.Seshia, “Introduction to Embedded Systems, A Cyber -Physical Systems Approach”, MIT Press, USA, 2015. 3. Rolf Drechsler and Ulrich Kühne, “Formal Modeling and Verification of Cyber-Physical Systems”, Springer, USA, 2015. 4. FeiHu ,“Cyber-Physical Systems: Integrated Computing and Engineering Design”, CRC Press, India, 2013. 5. Stefan Posald, “Ubiquitous Computing: Smart Devices, Environments and Interactions”, John Wiley Sons Ltd, New Jersey,2009.

18NB07 BIOMETRIC IMAGE PROCESSING 3003 INTRODUCTION: Digital image representation, Fundamental steps in image processing, Elements of digital image processing system, Image sensing and acquisition, Sampling and quantization, Basic relationship between pixels, Transformation technology: Fourier transform - Discrete cosine transform-.Discrete Wavelet Transform (10) IMAGE PROCESSING AND ANALYSIS: Spatial domain methods: Basic gray level transformations - Histogram equalization Smoothing spatial filter - Sharpening spatial filters -Laplacian, Frequency domain methods: Smoothing and sharpening filters – Ideal - Butterworth - Gaussian filters.Point- Line and edge detection - Thresholding - Global and multiple thresholding, Region splitting and merging, Boundary following.Morphological Image Processing, Fundamental concepts and operations, Dilation and Erosion, Compound operations, Morphological filtering, Basic morphological algorithms, Grayscale morphology. (13) 2D AND 3D FACE BIOMETRICS: Global face recognition techniques: Principal component analysis - Face recognition using PCA Linear discriminant analysis - Face recognition using LDA, Local face recognition techniques: Geometric techniques - Elastic graph matching techniques, Hybrid face recognition techniques. 3D FACE IMAGE: Acquisition, Preprocessing and normalization, 3D face recognition. (10) HAND AND IRIS BIOMETRICS: Characterization by minutiae extraction: Histogram equalization, Binarization, Skeletonization, Detection of minutiae, Matching, Performance evaluation, Preprocessing of iris images: Extraction of region of interest Construction of noise mask – Normalization - Features extraction and encoding - Similarity measures between two iris codes. Fusion in Biometrics, Multi-biometrics, Levels of fusion: Sensor level - Feature level - Rank level - Decision level fusion - Score level fusion. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Rafael C Gonzalez, Richard E Woods and Steven L Eddins, “Digital Image Processing”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2016. 2. Anil K Jain, "Fundamentals of Image Processing", Pearson Eductaion, Noida, 2016. 3. Amine Nait Ali and Regis Fournier, “Signal and Image Processing for Biometrics”, John Wiley and Sons, UK, 2012. 4. Arun A Ross, KarthikNandakumar and Jain A K, “Handbook of Multi-biometrics”, Springer, New Delhi, 2011. 5. Oge Marques, “Practical Image and Video Processing using MATLAB”, John Wiley and Sons, New Jersey, 2011.

18NB08 DIGITAL FORENSICS 3204 INTRODUCTION: System Forensics, Overview of Computer Crime, Types of Computer Crime, Sources of Cybercrime threats, Challenges of Cyber Forensics, Cyber law and IT Act, System Forensic Technologies: Role of Forensics in businesses, Common Forensic Tools. (9+7) COMPUTER EVIDENCE: Controlling Forensic Investigation- Preserving Digital Crime Scene - Securing Physical evidence, Collecting, Seizing and Protecting evidence, Information Hiding Techniques, Data Recovery, Live Forensic Acquisition - Volatile Memory Analysis, Network Forensics : Network Basics, Network related attacks, Investigating Network Traffic, Investigating router attacks, Using Network Tools: Unix Tools, Packet Sniffers. (14+8) DIGITAL EVIDENCE ON OPERATING SYSTEMS: Windows: File systems - Data recovery - Log files - Registry - Internet traces Program analysis, UNIX: Evidence acquisition boot disk - File systems - Overview of tools - Log files - File system traces and Internet traces. (12+8) E-MAIL AND MOBILE DEVICE FORENSICS: Email Forensics: Role of email in investigation - Investigating E-mail Crimes and Violations - E-mail Servers, E-mail Forensic Tools, Social Media Forensics, Mobile Device Forensics: Basics - Evidence Acquisition Procedures - Mobile Device Forensic Tools. (10+7) Total L:45 + T: 30 = 75

372

59th ACM

09.06.2018

REFERENCES: 1. Bill Nelson, Amelia Phillips and EnfingerSteuart, “Computer Forensics and Investigations”, Cengage Learning, New Delhi, 2016. 2. John Sammons, "Basics of Digital Forensics: The primer for getting started in Digital Forensics", Elsevier, USA, 2015. 3. John R Vacca and K Rudolph, “System Forensics, Investigation, and Response”, Jones and Bartlett Learning, USA, 2011. 4. Eogen Casey, “Digital Evidence and Computer Crime”, Elsevier, USA, 2011. 5. Cory Altheide and Harlan Carvey, “Digital Forensics with Open Source Tools”, Elsevier, USA, 2011.

18NB09 CLOUD SECURITY 3204 INTRODUCTION: Roots of cloud computing: Distributed computing – Grid computing, Cloud characteristics, Architecture, Layers of cloud, Deployment models: Public cloud, Private cloud, Hybrid cloud, Community cloud, Refactoring, Data centers, Case study: Amazon web services (AWS), OpenStack. (8+7) CLOUD INFRASTRUCTURE AND VULNERABILITIES: Virtualization –Types, Virtual machine provisioning and manageability, Virtual machine migration, Cloud storage device: Cloud storage levels, Network storage interfaces, Database storage interfaces, Operational planning, Threat expectations – Threat Agents – Cloud security threats: Threats to infrastructure and data, Cybersecuritycasestudies: Energy– Healthcare– Banking – Military. (16+8) CLOUD SECURITY MANAGEMENT AND RISKS: Security management in cloud, CIA triad, Privacy and compliance risks – Information privacy and privacy laws,Managing risk in the cloud: Risk management framework –Cloud providers risks and management process, Cloud consumers risk management process, API Security. (11+8) CLOUD SECURITY MECHANISMS: Cloud security services, Design principles, Security policy implementation – Policy types, Virtualization security management – VM security recommendations, Identity and access management, Data Security, Cloud Security Alliance(CSA) - Certificate of Cloud Security Knowledge (CCSK). (10+7) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 REFERENCES: 1. Melvin B Greer and Kevin L Jackson, “Practical Cloud Security: A Cross Industry View”,CRC Press, Boca Raton, 2017. 2. Ronald L Krutz and Russel Dean Vines, “Cloud Security: A Comprehensive Guide to Secure Cloud Computing”, Wiley India, New Delhi, 2016. 3. RajkumarBuyya, James Broberg and AndrzejGoscinski, “Cloud Computing: Principles and Paradigms”, Wiley India, New Jersey, 2016. 4. Thomas Erl, ZaighamMahmood and Ricardo Puttini, “Cloud Computing: Concepts, Technology and Architecture”, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2013. 5. John W Rittinghouse and James F Ransome, “Cloud Computing: Implementation, Management and Security”, CRC Press, Boca Raton, 2013. 6. Tim Mather, SubraKumaraswamy and ShahedLatif, “Cloud Security and Privacy”, ShroffPublishers, Mumbai, 2011.

18NB52 BIOMETRIC IMAGE PROCESSING LABORATORY 0042 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Data Compression/ Feature Extraction using Image Transformation Techniques Image Enhancement for Noise Removal ROI Extraction using Image Segmentation and Morphological Image Processing Develop an Biometric Image Processing pipeline for hand, face and iris images Construct an uni-modal / multi-modal biometric system Total P:60

18NB61 INDUSTRY VISIT AND TECHNICAL SEMINAR 0042 The student will make atleast two technical presentations on current topics related to the specialization. The same will be assessed by a committee appointed by the department. The students are expected to submit a report at the end of the semester covering the various aspects of his/her presentation together with the observation in industry visits. A quiz covering the above will be held at the end of the semester. Total P:30

SEMESTER III 18NB53 SECURITY AND PENETRATION TESTING LABORATORY 0042 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Reconnaissance, Foot printing, Port scanning Exploitation,SQL Injection, post-exploitation, Reporting Hacking web applications / Web Servers,OWASP Exploiting the vulnerabilities in a LAN environment. Antivirus programming Total P:60

373

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18NB71 PROJECT WORK - I 0063

     

Identification of a real life problem in thrust areas Developing a mathematical model for solving the above problem Finalization of system requirements and specification Proposing different solutions for the problem based on literature survey Future trends in providing alternate solutions Consolidated report preparation of the above Total P: 90

SEMESTER IV 18NB72 PROJECT WORK - II 0 0 28 14 The project involves the following: Preparing a project – brief proposal including    

Problem Identification A statement of system / process specifications proposed to be developed (block Cost benefit analysis Time Line of activities

Diagram / Concept tree)

A report highlighting the design finalization [based on functional requirements & standards (if any) ] A presentation including the following:   

Implementation Phase (Hardware / Software / both) Testing & Validation of the developed system Learning in the project

Project Report

ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES (Six to be opted out of which two may be an open elective from other M.E/M.TechProgrammes)

18NB21 ADVANCED PERSISTENT THREAT 3003 INTRODUCTION: Threat – Current landscape – Proactive vs. reactive security, APT: Cyber cancer – Characteristics of APT, APT vs. traditional threat, APT attacks – Stuxnet, Duqu, Flame, Iran certificate attack. (8) APT MULTI-PHASED APPROACH: AHM components, Core steps: Reconnaissance – Enumeration – Exploitation – Maintaining access – Clean up – Progression – Exfiltration, Reconnaissance Data – Technical – Non technical, Social engineering tactics – Spear-phishing methods, Remote targeting: Client hacking, Spear phishing, Physical infiltration – Physical social engineering – Defeating physical security controls. (15) CYBER SECURITY TRENDS: Risk-based approach – Formal risk model, Protecting data, Prevention – Inbound prevention – outbound detection, Threat intelligence: TAR Ideal concepts, Victim Intelligence, Incident response – 6-step process, End-to-end solution for APT. (12) ADVANCED ATTACKS: Password cracking,Session management attacks, Attacking data stores – Injectors, Cross-site scripting attacks, Side-channel attacks, Database attacks. (10) Total L :45 REFERENCES: 1. Tyler Wrightson, “Advanced Persistent Threat Hacking”,McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2015. 2. Eric Cole, “Advanced Persistent Threat”, Syngress, USA, 2013. 3. Mike Shema, “Anti-Hacker Tool Kit”,McGraw Hill, USA, 2014. 4. Charles P Pfleeger and Shari Lawrence Pfleeger, “Analyzing Computer Security: A Threat, Vulnerability, Countermeasure Approach”, Pearson, New Delhi, 2014. 5. DafyddStuttard and Marcus Pinto, “The Web Application Hacker’s Handbook”, John Wiley & Sons, Indiana, 2011.

374

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18NB22 MACHINE VISION 3003

DIGITAL IMAGE FORMATION AND LOW-LEVEL PROCESSING: Overview and State-of-the-art, Fundamentals of Image Formation, Transformation: Orthogonal, Euclidean, Affine, Projective, Fourier Transform, Convolution and Filtering, Image Enhancement, Restoration, Histogram Processing. (10) FEATURE EXTRACTION AND IMAGE SEGMENTATION : Edges - Canny, LOG, DOG; Line detectors (Hough Transform), Corners - Harris and Hessian Affine, Orientation Histogram, Scale-Space Analysis - Region Growing, Edge Based approaches to segmentation, Graph-Cut, Mean-Shift, MRFs, Texture Segmentation. (12) MOTION ANALYSIS: Background- Subtraction and Modeling, KLT, Spatio-Temporal Analysis, Dynamic Stereo; Motion parameter estimation. (11) OPTICAL FLOW: Dealing with the aperture problem - regularization, Horn and Shunck method - algorithm using discrete formulation, steps of Jacobi's method for matrix inversion, limitations, Lucas-Kanade algorithm for optical flow, Applications of optical flow. (12) Total L :45 REFERENCES: 1. Mark Nixon and Alberto S. Aquado, “Feature Extraction & Image Processing for Computer Vision”, Academic Press,USA, 2012. 2. Jan Erik Solem, “Programming Computer Vision with Python: Tools and algorithms for analyzing images”, O'Reilly Media,USA, 2012. 3. Richard Szeliski, Computer Vision: Algorithms and Applications, Springer-Verlag London Limited, UK, 2011. 4. Computer Vision: A Modern Approach, D. A. Forsyth, J. Ponce, Pearson Education,UK, 2003.

18NB23 INFORMATION ETHICS AND LAWS 3003 COMPUTER ETHICS INTRODUCTION AND COMPUTER HACKING: Computer ethics, Identifying an ethical issue, Ethics and law, Ethical theories, Professional Code of conduct, An ethical dilemma, A framework for ethical decision making, Computer hacking, Destructive programs, hacker ethics , Professional constraints, BCS code of conduct, Ethical positions on hacking. (11) ASPECTS OF COMPUTER CRIME AND INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: Aspects of computer crime, Computer security measures, Professional duties and obligations, Intellectual Property Rights, The nature of Intellectual property, Intellectual Property – Patents,Trademarks,Trade Secrets, Software Issues, Copyright, The Extent and nature of software piracy – Ethical and professional issues. (11) COMPUTER TECHNOLOGIES AND ACCESSIBILITY ISSUES: Principle of equal access, Obstacles to access for individuals, professional responsibility, Empowering computers in the workplace, computers and employment, computers and quality of work, computerized monitoring in the work place, telecommuting, social, legal and professional issues, Use of Software, Computers and Internet-based Tools, Liability for Software errors, Documentation Authentication and Control, Software engineering code of ethics and practices: IEEE-CS –ACM Joint task force. (12) SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT AND SOCIAL NETWORKING: Software Development, strategies for engineering quality standards, Social Networking, Company owned social network web site, the use of social networks in the hiring process, Social Networking ethical issues, Cyber bullying, cyber stalking, Online virtual world, Crime in virtual world, digital rights management, Online defamation , Piracy, Fraud. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. George W Reynolds, “Ethics in Information Technology”, Cengage Learning, USA, 2012. 2. CarolineWhitback, “Ethics in Engineering Practice and Research”, Cambridge University Press, UK,2011. 3. Deborah G. Johnson, ”Computer Ethics, Pearson Education”, New Delhi, 2009. 4. PennyDuquenoy, Simon Jones and Barry G Blundell, “Ethical, legal and professional issues in computing”, Middlesex University Press,UK, 2008. 5. Richard Spinello, “Case Studies in Information and Computer Ethics”, Prentice Hall, USA, 2003. 6. JohnWeckert and Douglas Adeney, “Computer and Information Ethics”, Prentice Hall, USA, 1997.

18NB24 OPERATING SYSTEMS SECURITY 3003 PROCESS AND MEMORY MANAGEMENT: Introduction: Operating System Structures – Operations – Services, Process management: Process concept - Interprocess communication - CPU scheduling algorithms – Deadlocks, Memory management: Paging - Page replacement algorithms. (11) STORAGE MANAGEMENT: Disk structure, Disk scheduling algorithms, File concept, Access methods, File system structure, File system implementation, Allocation methods, Free space management. (11)

375

59th ACM

09.06.2018

PROTECTION AND SECURITY: Protection: Goals – Principles – Domain - Access matrix - Access control - Revocation of access rights - Capability-based systems, Kernel patch protection, Security: Program threats - System and network threats - User authentication - Security defenses Implementation - Firewalling to protect systems and networks,OS security patches, CASE STUDY: Linux system. (12) SECURITY TOOLS: Windows OS: Malicious software removal tool – Microsoft baseline security analyzer – Url scan security tool, Linux OS: ClamAV – Snort – Wireshark- Chkrootkit–Nessus, Other tools: Sqlmap – OpenVAS. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Silberschatz A, Galvin P and Gagne G, “Operating Systems Concepts”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 2016. 2. William Stallings, “Operating Systems: Internals and Design Principles”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2014. 3. Pradeep K Sinha, “Distributed Operating Systems”, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2014. 4. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, “Modern Operating systems”, PHI learning, New Delhi, 2013. 5. Deitel H M, “Operating System”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2011.

18NB25 SPEECH PROCESSING 3003 MECHANICS OF SPEECH: Speech Fundamentals: Articulatory Phonetics – Production and Classification of Speech Sounds; Acoustic Phonetics – acoustics of speech production - Speech signal, Speech stack, Discrete time signals and systems, Digital filters, Sampling, Short time Fourier representation of speech. (11) TIME AND FREQUENCY DOMAIN METHODS: Short time analysis of speech, Energy and magnitude, Zero crossing rate, Autocorrelation function, Average magnitude difference function, Frequency domain methods: Discrete-time and short time Fourier analysis Filter bank summation method of synthesis, Implementation using FFT, Time decimated filter banks, Two channel filter banks. (12) SPEECH ANALYSIS: Features, Feature Extraction and Pattern Comparison Techniques: Speech distortion measures– mathematical and perceptual – Log–Spectral Distance, Cepstral Distances, Weighted Cepstral Distances and Filtering, Likelihood Distortions, Spectral Distortion using a Warped Frequency Scale, LPC, PLP and MFCC Coefficients, Time Alignment and Normalization – Dynamic Time Warping, Multiple Time – Alignment Paths. (11) SPEECH RECOGNITION AND SYNTHESIS: Large Vocabulary Continuous Speech Recognition: Architecture – acoustics and language models – n-grams, context dependent sub-word units; Text-to-Speech Synthesis: Concatenative and waveform synthesis methods, sub-word units for TTS, intelligibility and naturalness – role of prosody. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Daniel Jurafsky and James H Martin, “Speech and Language Processing – An Introduction to Natural Language Processing, Computational Linguistics, and Speech Recognition”, Prentice Hall, USA, 2008. 2. Quatieri T F, “Discrete Time Processing of Speech Signals”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2005. 3. Rabiner L R, and Schaffer R W, “Digital Processing of Speech Signals”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2004. 4. Ben Gold and Nelson Morgan, “Speech and Audio Signal Processing”, John Wiley and Sons, Singapore, 2004. 5. Lawrence Rabiner and Biing-Hwang Juang, “Fundamentals of Speech Recognition”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2003. 6. Frederick Jelinek, “Statistical Methods of Speech Recognition”, MIT Press, USA, 1997.

18NB26 DEEP LEARNING 3003 vide Information Technology 18NN26

18NB27 SECURE CODING 3003 INTRODUCTION: Security Concepts, Common String Manipulation Errors and Vulnerabilities - Stack overflow, Heap overflow, Offby-one vulnerabilities , Integer Vulnerabilities , Memory management errors - Format string vulnerabilities - Concurrency and File I/O - Race conditions , Rules and recommendations of SEI CERT C and CERT Java coding Standards. (9) THREAT MODELLING: Identifying the Threats by Using Attack Trees and rating threats using DREAD, Defence in Depth and Principle of Least Privilege, Compiler security features, Static Analysis. (6) DATABASE AND WEB APPLICATION SECURITY: OWASP Top 10 flaws, Cross Site Scripting (XSS) and its types- Persistent and Non persistent attack, XSS Countermeasures, Injection flaws and Remedies, CSRF, Clickjacking - Mitigation Techniques - Web application hacker's methodology. (9) SECURE SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PRINCIPLES AND TESTING SECURE APPLICATIONS: Secure Software Development Cycle (S-SDLC) -Security Requirements Engineering- Use/Misuse case, SD3 Practices(Secure by design, default and deployment), DevSecOps, Testing Secure Applications: Security code overview, Secure software installation, Building the Security Test Plan, Software Assurance overview, Testing threat categories, Assessing Risk, Secure Testing Methodologies - Attacking Dependencies, Attacking through the User Interface, Attacking Design, Attacking Implementation. (12) Total L: 45

376

59th ACM

09.06.2018

REFERENCES: 1. Robert C. Seacord, “The CERT C Coding Standard: 98 Rules for Developing Safe, Reliable, and Secure Systems”, Pearson Education,UK, 2014. 2. Robert C. Seaford, “Secure Coding in C and C++”, Pearson Education, Inc,UK, 2013. 3. DafyddStuttard, and Marcus Pinto, “The Web Application Hacker's Handbook: Finding and Exploiting Security Flaws”, John Wiley &Sons,USA, 2011. 4. Gene Spafford Matt Messier John Viega“Secure Programming Cook Book For C And C++”, Shroff Publishers and Distributors,India, 2006. 5. Michael Howard and David LeBlanc, “Writing Secure Code”,Microsoft Press,USA, 2004.

18NB28 PATTERN RECOGNITION 3003 REPRESENTATION: Introduction to pattern recognition, Data sets for pattern recognition, Pattern representation, Cluster representation, Feature extraction, Analysis, Feature selection, Applications of pattern recognition. (7) CLASSIFICATION TECHNIQUES: Nearest neighbor algorithm, Variants of the NN algorithm, Use of the nearest neighbor algorithm, Branch and bound algorithm, Data reduction, Prototype selection - BAYES CLASSIFIER: Introduction, Continuous features, Minimum error rate classification, Classifiers, Discriminant functions and decision surfaces, Normal density and its discriminate function, Discrete features, Estimation of probabilities. (15) HIDDEN MARKOV MODELS: Markov models for Classification, Hidden Markov models: HMM parameters - Learning HMMs, Classification using HMMs. (8) DECISION TREES: Decision trees for pattern classification, Construction of decision trees, Splitting at the nodes, Over fitting and pruning- CLUSTERING:Partitional clustering, Hierarchical Algorithms- Divisive clustering - Agglomerative clustering, Clustering large data sets. (15) Total L:45 REFERENCES: 1. NarasimhaMurty M andSusheela Devi V, “Pattern Recognition: An Algorithmic Approach”, University Press, India, 2011. 2. SergiosTheodoridisandKonstantinosKoutroumbas, “Pattern Recognition”, Elsevier, New Delhi,2011. 3. Christopher M Bishop,“Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning”, Springer, USA,2011. 4. Richard O Duda, Peter E Hart and David G Stork,“Pattern Classification”, Wiley India, New Delhi,2010.

18NB29 DIGITAL WATERMARKING AND STEGANOGRAPHY 3003 INTRODUCTION OF WATERMARKING: Information hiding, Properties of watermarking, Embedding effectiveness, Fidelity, Data payload, Blind or Informed detection, False-positive rate, Robustness, Security, Cipher and Watermark keys, Modification and Multiple watermarks, Cost, Evaluating watermarking systems, Benchmarking, Scope of testing. (10) WATERMARKING MODELS: Communications, Components of communications systems, Classes of transmission channels, Secure transmission, Communication, Models of watermarking: Basic Model, Watermarking as communications with side information, Geometric models of watermarking: Distributions and Regions in media space, Marking spaces, Modeling watermark detection by correlation: Linear correlation, Normalized correlation, Applications of watermarking: Broadcast Monitoring, Owner Identification, Transaction Tracking, Device Control. (12) STEGANOGRAPHIC PRINCIPLES: Properties of Steganographic and Steganalysis systems: Embedding, steganographic capacity ,Embedding capacity, Embedding efficiency and Data payload, Blind or Informed extraction, Blind or targeted steganalysis, Statistical undetectability, False alarm Rate, Robustness, Security, Stegokey, Evaluating and Testing steganographic systems. (10) TECHINQUES IN STEGANOGRAPHY: Steganographic communication, Channel, Building blocks, Information-Theoretic foundations of steganography, Cachin’s definition of steganographic security, Steganographic methods, Statistics preserving Steganography, Model based steganography, Masking embedding as Natural processing, Minimizing the embedding impact, Matrix embedding, Nonshared selection rule, Applications of steganography: Steganography for dissidents, Steganography for criminals. (13) Total L:45 REFERENCES: 1. Naskar R andChakraborty R S, “Reversible Digital Watermarking: Theory and Practices”, Morgan Claypool, USA, 2014. 2. Frank Y Shih, “Digital Watermarking and Steganography: Fundamentals and Techniques”, CRC Press, Boca Raton, 2012. 3. Ram Kumar and Singh AmitAsthana, “Steganography: A New Technique to Hide Information Within Image File”, Lambert Academic Publishing, Germany, 2012. 4. Ingemar J. Cox, Matthew L. Miller, Jeffrey A. Bloom, Jessica FridrichandTonKalker, “Digital Watermarking and Steganography”, Margan Kaufmann Publishers, New York, 2010. 5. Katzenbeisser, Stefan, Petitcolas, Fabien, A.P. “Information Hiding Techniques for Steganography and Digital Watermarking”,ArtechHouse,USA, 2000.

377

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18NB30 DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF SECURITY PROTOCOLS 3003

MATHEMATICAL FOUNDATIONS: Probability and information theory, Computational complexity: Deterministic polynomial time, Probabilistic polynomial time, Non-deterministic polynomial time, Algebraic foundations, Number theory: Congruences and residue classes – Quadratic residues. (9) CRYPTOGRAPHIC TECHNIQUES, SECURITY NOTIONSAND DEFINITIONS: Zero-knowledge proof, Semantic security, Provable security: Standard model, Group model, Random oracle model, Unconditional security, Security properties, Symmetric techniques, Asymmetric techniques, Data integrity techniques: Hash functions – Digital signatures. (14) MODELING AUTHENTICATION PROTOCOLS: Authentication types and techniques, Modeling authentication protocol: EKE – PAKE–SSH – SSL/TLS, Typical attacks and vulnerabilities. (8) ANALYSIS OF SECURITY PROTOCOLS: Formal methods: Formal specification of protocols, Formal proof of security: Computational model, Symbolic manipulation view: Theorem proving–Protocol and adversary models, Formal analysis techniques: Model checking, NRL protocol analyzer, CSP approach, FDR, Formal analysis tools:Murphi, AVISPA, Hermes, PRISM, ProVerif, Scyther, Limitations of formal analysis. (14) Total L : 45 REFERENCES: 1. Hans Delfs and Helmut Knebl, “Introduction to Cryptography” Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 2015. 2. Wenbo Mao, “Modern Cryptography: Theory and Practice”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2013. 3. Ling Dong and Kefei Chen, “Cryptographic Protocol”, Springer, Beijing, 2012. 4. Giampaolo Bella, “Formal Correctness of Security Protocols”, Springer, New York, 2007. 5. Peter Ryan, Steve A. Schneider, “Modelling& Analysis of Security Protocols”, Addison-Wesley, New York, 2001.

18NB31 SECURITY IN INTERNET OF THINGS 3003 INTERNET OF THINGS: Cyber Security versus IoT security – IoT attacks and Countermeasures – Common IoT attack types, Attack trees, Fault trees and CPS-Attacks, Wireless reconnaissance and mapping, Security Protocol attacks, Physical security attacks, Application security attacks - Security Engineering for IoT Development (12) SECURING THE INTERNET OF THINGS:Security Architecture in Internet of Things, Security Requirements in IoT - Vulnerabilities – Secrecy and Secret-Key Capacity - Authentication/Authorization for Smart Devices - Transport Encryption – Attack & Fault trees Identity lifecycle – Authentication credentials (11) CRYPTOGRAPHIC FUNDAMENTALSFOR IOT: IoT IAM infrastructure – Authorization with Publish / Subscribe schemes , access control - Cryptographic primitives and its role in securing IoT –key management fundamentals – cryptographic controls for IoT protocols. (11) CLOUD SECURITY & PRIVACY FOR IOT: Cloud services and IoT –IoT offerings from cloud service providers– Cloud IoT security controls – An enterprise IoT cloud security architecture – New directions in cloud enabled IoT computing - Privacy challenges introduced by the IoT – PbD principles – Privacy engineering recommendations -IoT Node Authentication. (11) Total L:45 REFERENCES 1. Shancang Li, Li Da Xu, “Securing the Internet of Things”, Elsevier,USA, 2017 2. Brian Russell, Drew Van Duren, ”Practical Internet of Things Security”,Packt Publishing, USA,2016. 3. FeiHu,”Security and Privacy in Internet of Things (IoTs): Models, Algorithms, and Implementations”, CRC Press,USA,2016. 4. HimanshuDwivedi, Chris Clark and David Thiel, “Mobile Application Security”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2010. 5. Johnny Cache, Joshua Wright and Vincent Liu, “Hacking Exposed Wireless: Wireless Security Secrets and Solutions”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2010.

18NB32 CYBER SECURITYGOVERNANCE, RISK MANAGEMENT AND COMPLIANCE 3003 INFORMATION SECURITY: Foundations of Information Security – Security Mindset – Information Systems Strategy – Strategic Planning - Value of IT – Implementing IT Portfolio – Policies. (10) GOVERNANCE OF IT: Governance of Enterprise IT – Good Practices for Governance of Enterprise IT - Frameworks – Audit Role in Governance of Enterprise IT – Information Security Governance. (12) MANAGEMENT OF IT: Information Security Management – IS Management System – IS Management Roles and Responsibilities – Classification of Information Assets – Is Control Design – System Access Permissions – Privacy Principles and Role of IS Auditors. (11)

378

59th ACM

09.06.2018

AUDITING NETWORK INFRASTRUCTURE: Auditing Remote Access – Auditing Internet points of Presence – Network Penetration tests – Full Network Assessment – Development & Authorization of Network changes – Unauthorized changes-Risk Management Process and Analysis Methods –ISO 27000 & SABSA Model. (12) Total L:45 REFERENCES: 1. Michael Whitman, Herbert Mattord, “Management of Information Security”, CENGAGE Learning, USA, 2017. 2. Jason Andress, Steven Winterfeld, “The Basics of Information Security: Understanding the Fundamentals of Infosec in Theory and Practice”, Elsevier, USA,2014. 3. Mark Stamp, “Information Security Principles and Practice”, Wiley, USA, 2012. 4. Charles P. Pfleeger and Shari Lawrence Pfleeger, “Analyzing Computer Security: A Threat / Vulnerability / Countermeasure Approach”, Pearson Education, New Delhi,2012. 5. Matt Bishop, Sathyanarayana S. Venkatramanayya, “Introduction to Computer Security” , Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2006.

18NB33 CONTENT BASED IMAGE RETRIEVAL 3003 INTRODUCTION: Fundamentals of Images - Image Content Analysis – Feature Extraction – Image Segmentation - Shape Description – Color histograms, GCH, Image searching. (11) TECHNIQUES: Shape based CBIR, SVD, Contourlet transforms, Exact Legendre Moments (ELMs), Fuzzy and textQuery methods. (12) CBIR FOR MEDICAL IMAGES: Similarity in images – Image retrieval in Radiology, Scalable techniques, prediction of inter reader accuracy, Blood cell images, Dental X Rays - developing statistical models, sparse matrices, medical decision support systems, Case study. (11) CBIR USING AI: Need for automated Learning, SVMs, Unsupervised Learning, CNN Deep learning techniques, Human interaction and Semantic retrieval,Deploying a case study in MATLAB. (11) Total L:45 REFERENCES: 1. Er. GauravJaswal, “Content Based Image Retrieval using Color Space Approaches: CBIR An Image Search Engine”, Lap Lambert Academic Publishing GmbH KG, USA,2013. 2. ChanamalluSrinivasaRao, SamayamantulaSrinivas Kumar, “Content Based Image Retrieval Fundamentals & Algorithms”, Lap Lambert Academic Publishing,USA, 2012. 3. TinkuAcharya, Ajoy k. Ray, “Image Processing, Principles and Applications”, Published by John Wiley & Sons, Inc. Hoboken, New Jersey, Canada, 2005. 4. Milan Petkovic, Willem Jonker, “Content Based Video Retrieval: A Database Perspective ”, Kluwer Academic Publishers,USA, 2004. 5. Oge marques, BorkoFurht,“Content Based Image and Video Retrieval”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, USA,2002.

18NB34 HUMAN COMPUTER INTERACTION 3003 INTRODUCTION: Overview of HCI -Mental models -Cognitive architecture -Task loading and stress -Human error identification. (9) INPUT TECHNOLOGIES: Sensor and recognition based input, Haptic interfaces- Non speech auditory output- Network based interactions- Visual design principles, Intercultural user interface designs -Conversational speech interface, Multimodal interface adaptive interfaces and agents. (12) DATA GATHERING, ANALYSIS AND PRESENTATION: Key issues –Data recording –Interviews –Questionnaires –Observation – Choosing and combining Techniques-Qualitative and quantitative –Simple quantitative analysis-Tools –Theoreticalframeworks. (12) EVALUATION FRAMEWORK: Goals of evaluation –Types of evaluation –Evaluation case studies: A framework to guide evaluation –Usability testing –Conducting experiments, Field studies –Inspections-Heuristic evaluation and walkthroughs, Analytics –Predictive models. Applications: Healthcare, Deaf and Hard of learning users. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Jan Noyes, Chris Baber, “User Centered Design of Systems”, Springer, Germany, 2013. 2. Alan Dix, Janet Finlay, Gregory D Abowd, Russell Beale, “Human Computer Interaction”, Pearson, New Delhi, 2012. 3. John Helen Sharp, Yvanno Rogers and Jenny preece, “Interaction Design: Beyond Human Computer Interaction”, Wiley,USA,2011. 4. Ben Shneiderman, “Designing the User Interfaces Strategies for Effective Human Computer Interaction”, Pearson, New Delhi,2009. 5. Andrew sears Julie A, Jacko, Lawrence Erlbaum, “The Human Computer Interaction Hand Book: Fundamentals, Evolving Technologies and Emerging Applications”, CRC Press, USA, 2008.

379

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18NB35 HARDWARE IMPLEMENTATION OF CRYPTO SYSTEMS 3003

VERILOG: Introduction to Verilog –Hierarchical modeling concepts – Lexical conventions: Modules and Ports - Gate Level Modeling – Data Flow Modeling – Behavioral Modeling – Timing controls -Language Elements – Functions and Tasks –Useful Modeling Techniques – Logic synthesis - Test Benches. (13) PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC DEVICES: Basics, Programming Technologies – Programmable Logic Array (PLA), Programmable Array Logic (PAL) , Programmable Logic Array (PLA), Design of State Machine using ASM Chart as a design Tool. (10) FIELD PROGRAMMABLE GATE ARRAYS: Introduction – FPGA Technology – DSP Technology Requirement – Design Implementation – FPGA Architectures – Xilinx – Altera Flex – Design Principles using FPGAs – Implementing DSP Functions in FPGA- FPGA Applications - Design of FIR Filter (10) FPGA IMPLEMENTATION OF CRYPTOGRAPHIC ALGORITHMS: Block Ciphers, AES, Blowfish. Stream Ciphers - Encryption and decryption with Stream ciphers, Shift - register based stream ciphers. Public Key Cryptography: RSA, ElGamal, Diffe-Hellman Key exchange, ECC. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Blaine Readler, "Verilog by Example: A Concise Introduction for FPGA Design", Full ARC Press, USA, 2015. 2. William Stallings, "Crytography and Network Security", Prentice-Hall of India, India,2014. 3. Samir Palnitkar, "Verilog HDL: A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis", Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2013. 4. Uwe Meyer Baese, "Digital Signal Processing with Field Programmable Gate Arrays", Springer, Germany, 2012. 5. Volnei A. Pedroni, "Circuit Design and Simulation with VHDL", MIT Press, USA, 2010.

18NB36 FILTER BANK DESIGNS FOR BIOMEDICAL APPLICATIONS 3003 DIGITAL FILTERS: Introduction-Filter design specifications-FIR filter design-IIR filter design-All pass filters-Special types of filtersIIR filters based on two all pass filters. (10) IIR FILTER DESIGN: Review of classical analog filter design (Butterworth. Chebyshev, Elliptic)-design of digital filters based on continuous-time filters-mapping of differentials-impulse invariant transformation-modified impulse invariant transformation-bilinear transformation-matched z-transform technique-Pade approximation-Prony’s method-Shank’s method-spectral transformation for digital filters.FIR Filter Design: Review of conditions needed for precise linear phase-design techniques for linear phase FIR filters: windowing method- frequency sampling- weighted Chebyshev approximation. (13) UNIFORM FILTER BANK: Quadrature Mirror Filter Bank (QMFB)- Orthogonal Filter Bank (OFB)- Biorthogonal Filter Bank(BFB)Multidimensional Logarithmic Number System (MDNLS) Filter bank.Non-uniform Filter banks: Interpolated Filter Bank –Multi-rate filter Bank- Reconfigurable Filter Bank- Adjustable filter bank- Warped filter bank- Design parameters for filter bank designs: Filter Bank suitable for noise reduction-Power aware filter bank- Low delay filter bank designs. (13) FILTER BANKS FOR BIOMEDICAL APPLICATIONS: Signal processing-Evolution and history of biomedical devicesClassification-Device models-Importance of filter banks in Biomedical applications. (9) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Leland B.Jackson, “Digital Filters and Signal Processing”, Kluwer Academic, Boston, MA, 2013. 2. PP Vaidyanathan, "Multirate Systems And Filter Banks", Prentice Hall-Signal Processing Series, USA,2013. 3. Dietrich Schlichthärle, "Digital Filters: Basics and Design", Springer-Verlag, Germany, 2011. 4. John G.Proakis,DimitrisG.Manolakis, "Digital Signal Processing-Principles, Algorithms and Applications”, Pearson Prentice Hall,New Delhi,2009. 5. Wing –KuenLing,"Non-Linear Digital Filters-Analysis and Applications ",Academic Press,USA,2007.

18NB37 MALWARE ANALYSIS AND REVERSE ENGINEERING 3003 INTRODUCTION: Malware Analysis, Goals, Malware Analysis Techniques, Basic Analysis: Static Analysis - Malware Analysis in Virtual Machines - Dynamic Analysis, Types of Malware, General Rules. (10) ADVANCED ANALYSIS: Static Analyis: x86 Architecture - IDA Pro - Recognizing C code constructs - Analyzing malicious window programs, Dynamic Analysis: Debugging – OllyDbg - Kernel debugging with WinDBG, Rootkit Techniques: Hooking - Patching, Modern Rootkit Analysis. (13) MALWARE FUNCTIONALITY: Malware Behavior, Covert Malware Launching, Data Encoding: Goal - Common Cryptographic Algorithms - Custom Encoding - Decoding, Malware-Focused Network Signatures: Network Countermeasures - Safely Investigate an Attacker Online - Content-Based Network Countermeasures - Combining Dynamic and Static Analysis Techniques. (12)

380

59th ACM

09.06.2018

ANTI-REVERSE-ENGINEERING: Anti-Disassembly, Anti-Debugging, Anti-Virtual Machine Techniques, Packers and Unpacking, Shell code Analysis. (10) Total L:45 REFERENCES: 1. Christopher C. Elisan, “Advanced Malware Analysis”, McGraw-Hill, USA, 2015 2. Michael Hale Ligh, Andrew Case, Jamie Levy, AAron Walters, " The Art of Memory Forensics: Detecting Malware and Threats in Windows, Linux, and Mac Memory", Wiley, USA, 2014. 3. Heng Yin, Dawn Song, “Automatic Malware Analysis: An Emulator Based Approach”, Springer, USA, 2013. 4. Michael Sikorski, Andrew Honig, “Practical Malware Analysis: The Hands-On Guide to Dissecting Malicious Software”, No Starch Press, San Francisco, 2012. 5. Michael Ligh, Steven Adair, Blake Hartstein, Matthew Richard, “Malware Analyst's Cookbook and DVD: Tools and Techniques for Fighting Malicious Code”, Wiley, USA, 2010.

AUDIT COURSES 18NB81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP81

18NB82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP82

381

59th ACM

09.06.2018

13. Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment M.TECH NANOSCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY (2018 REGULATIONS) (Minimum No. of credits to be earned: 74*) Course Course Title Code I SEMESTER 18LN01 Computational Mathematics 18LN02 18LN03 18LN04 18LN05 18LN51 18LN81

Fundamentals of Nanoscience and Technology Synthesis of Nanomaterials Materials Science Industrial Nanotechnology Synthesis of Nanomaterials Laboratory English for Research Paper Writing Total 28 Hrs II SEMESTER 18LN06 Characterization of Nanomaterials 18LN07 Nanofabrication 18LN08 Nanoelectronics 18LN09 Nanobiotechnology 18LN__ Professional Elective 1 18LN__ Professional Elective 2 18LN52 Nanofabrication laboratory 18LN61 Industrial Visit and Technical Seminar Research Methodology and IPR 18LN82 Total 30 Hrs III SEMESTER 18LN__ Professional Elective 3 18LN__ Professional Elective 4 18LN__ Professional Elective 5 18LN__ Professional Elective 6 18LN 53 Nanodevice design laboratory 18LN71 Project Work - I Total 22 Hrs IV SEMESTER 18LN72 Project Work – II

Lecture

Hours/Week Tutorial Practical

Credits

Maximum Marks CA FE Total

CAT

PC PC PC PC PC MC

PC

2 3 3 3 3 0 0 14

2 2 0 2 0 0 0 6

0 0 0 0 0 4 ** 8

3 4 3 4 3 2 Grade 19

50 50 50 50 50 50 0 300

50 50 50 50 50 50 0 300

100 100 100 100 100 100 0 600

3 3 3 3 3 3 0 0 0 18

2 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 4

0 0 0 0 0 0 4 4 ** 8

4 3 4 3 3 3 2 2 Grade 24

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 0 400

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 0 400

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 0 800

PC PC PC PC PE PE PC EEC MC

3 3 3 3 0 0 12

0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 4 6 10

3 3 3 3 2 3 17

50 50 50 50 50 50 300

50 50 50 50 50 50 300

100 100 100 100 100 100 600

PE PE PE PE PE EEC

0

0

28

14

50

50

100

EEC

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE

50

100

PE

50 50

100 100

PE PE

ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES(Six to be opted) 18LN21 Nanostructures in Medicine 3 0 0 3 50 18LN22 Nanotherapeutics 3 0 0 3 50 18LN23 Regenerative Medicine 3 0 0 3 50 18LN24 Photovoltaic Technology 3 0 0 3 50 18LN25 Biomolecular Nanotechnology 3 0 0 3 50 18LN26 Polymer Nanocomposites 3 0 0 3 50 18LN27 Nanophotonics 3 0 0 3 50 18LN28 Biomaterials and Tissue Engineering 3 0 0 3 50 18LN29 Polymer Electronics 3 0 0 3 50 18LN30 Nanobiomaterials 3 0 0 3 50 18LN31 Nanotoxicology 3 0 0 3 50 18LN32 Nanotechnology for Energy systems 3 0 0 3 50 18LN33 Nanocomputing 3 0 0 3 50 Product Design, Management Techniques and 18LN34 3 0 0 3 50 Entrepreneurship 18LN35 Nanosensors and Devices 3 0 0 3 50 18LN36 Data Structures and Algorithms 2 2 0 3 50 * Indicated is the minimum number of credits to be earned by a student. ** - 60 hrs in I semester and 90 hrs in II semester; Grade: Completed / Not Completed CAT – Category; PC – Professional Core; PE - Professional Elective EEC – Employability Enhancement Mandatory Course

382

Course; MC-

59th ACM

09.06.2018 SEMESTER I 18LN01 COMPUTATIONAL MATHEMATICS 2203

NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF SYSTEM OF EQUATIONS: Solving system of linear equations – Gauss Jacobi and Gauss Siedel methods, successive over relaxation method, system of non-linear equations – Newton’s method. Interpolation: cubic spline interpolation, Bezier curves and B-spline curves, least squares approximations. (8+7) NUMERICAL SOLUTION TO ODE: Initial value problem: Runge Kutta method, Milne’s method. Boundary value problem: Finite Element Method - Rayleigh-Ritz method, Collocation and Galerkin methods. (8+7) NUMERICAL SOLUTION TO PDE: Finite difference method: Liebmann’s method for Laplace equation and Poisson equation, explicit method and Crank-Nicolson method for parabolic equations, explicit method for hyperbolic equations. (8+7) MODELLING AND SIMULATION: Simulating deterministic behaviour, area under a curve, generating random numbers, simulating probabilistic behaviour, inventory model: gasoline and consumer demand. (8+7) Total L:32 + T:28 = 60 REFERENCES: 1. John H Mathews and Kurtis D Fink, Numerical Methods using MATLAB, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2018. 2. Steven C Chapra and Raymond P Canale, Numerical Methods for Engineers, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2017. 3. Frank R Giordano, William P Fox and Steven B Horton, A first course in Mathematical Modeling, Cengage Learning, New Delhi, 2014. 4. Curtis F Gerald and Patrick O Wheatly, Applied Numerical Analysis, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2013. 5. Douglas J Faires and Richard Burden, Numerical Methods, Cengage Learning, New Delhi, 2013.

18LN02 FUNDAMENTALS OF NANOSCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY 3204 NANO EVOLUTION: Scientific evolution - Feynman’s quantum electrodynamics – Taniguchi’s nanotechnology – Drexler’s engines of creation – Definition of a nanosystem – Dimensionality and size dependent phenomena - Nanostructures – Naturally occurring nanomaterials - Nanoscale properties - Magnetic Moment in clusters/Nanoparticles – Coercivity – Thermal activation and superparamagnetic effects, Excitonic binding and recombination Energies, Capacitance in a nanoparticle, Optical properties Surface Plasmon Resonance, Nanotechnology Initiatives – challenges and future prospects of nanoscience. (12+6) QUANTUM CONCEPTS: Inadequacies of Classical Mechanics – Duality nature of electromagnetic radiation – De Broglie hypothesis for matter waves – Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle – Schrödinger's wave equation - Energy levels of a particle, Density of states (DOS) - DOS of 3D, 2D, 1D and 0D materials - Quantum confinement - Penetration of a barrier, Tunnel effect Ballistic transport - Coulomb blockade. (11+8) INTERMOLECULAR AND INTRAMOLECULAR FORCES: Atomic structure - bonds, chemical bonds, ionic interactions, covalent bonds, metal bonds, hydrogen bonds – covalent and coulomb interactions – electrostatic stabilization - surface charge density electric potential at the proximity of solid surface - van der Waals forces - dipole-dipole interactions – repulsive forces - hydrophobic and hydrophilic interactions, super-hydrophobicity. (11+8) TRANSPORT IN THE NANOSCALE: Size effect on electronic properties – phonons in nanostructures - size effect on electron – phonon coupling, evolution of band structures and Fermi surface - fraction of surface atoms – surface energy and surface stress, size-induced metal-insulator-transition (SIMIT)- electron transport and kinetics in zero, one and two dimensional nanostructures nanocrystalline materials, effect of grain size and grain boundaries. (11+8) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 TUTORIAL COMPONENTS:  Size dependendent optical properties of nanoparticles  Tunneling measurements  Surface morphology and grain size measurement  Compression and hardness tests REFERENCES: 1. Pradeep T, ―Nano: The Essentials Understanding Nanoscience and Nanotechnology‖, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, New Delhi, 2012. 2. Masaru Kuno, ―Introductory Nanoscience: Physical and Chemical Concepts‖, Taylor and Francis, New York, 2012. 3. Aruldhas G, ―Quantum Mechanics‖, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi. 2013. 4. Hornyak G L, Tibbals H F and Dutta J, ―Introduction to Nanoscience and Nanotechnology‖, CRC Press, London, 2009. 5. Mathews P M and Venkatesan K, ―A Text book of Quantum Mechanics‖, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2017.

383

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18LN03 SYNTHESIS OF NANOMATERIALS 3003

GENERAL CHEMISTRY: Acidity – basicity and pKa – measurement of acid and base strength surface energy, chemical potential as a function of surface curvature- electrostatic stabilization – steric stabilization – coagulation – aggregation, functional groupsclassification of nanomaterials. (11) SELF ASSEMBLY AND ELECTROCHEMICAL APPROACH: Self assembly – classification of self assembly process, Self Assembled Monolayer, Monolayers of organosilicon, alkanethiols and sulfides, Langmuir Blodgett (LB) films – micelle formation– Biomemmitic approach-lotus effect surfaces. Electrochemical approach: Electrochemical Deposition, Electrophoretic deposition, Electrospinning. (11) CHEMICAL APPROACH: Homogeneous Nucleation-wet chemical reduction-Influence of stabilizer- vapor phase reaction-solid phase reactions, Nanoparticles through Heterogeneous Nucleation, Spray pyrolysis- Fundamental aspects of VLS and SLS growth, Atomic Layer Deposition , Chemical vapor deposition- plasma enhanced chemical vapor deposition, Sol-Gel. (12) PHYSICAL APPROACH: Thin Film Growth modes- importance of Vacuum - Physical Vapor Deposition - Evaporation- Molecular beam epitaxy (MBE)-Sputtering-Comparison of evaporation and sputtering, Pulsed Laser Deposition , Ball milling process, Template-based synthesis- liposomes- Epitaxial Core-Shell Nanoparticles- Track etched alumina- polycarbonate membranes. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Vikas Mittal, ―Characterization Techniques for Polymer Nanocomposites‖, Wiley-VCH, Germany, 2012. 2. Cao G, ―Nanostructures and Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties and Applications‖, World Scientific Publishing, Singapore, 2011. 3. Pradeep T, ―Nano: The essentials, Understanding Nanoscience and Nanotechnology‖, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2007. 4. Rao C N R, Muller A and Cheetham A K, ―The Chemistry of Nanomaterials Synthesis, Properties and Applications‖, WileyVCH, Germany, 2006. 5. Nalwa H S, ―Encyclopedia of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology‖, American scientific, New York, 2004.

18LN04 MATERIALS SCIENCE 3204 STRUCTURE OF CRYSTALLINE SOLIDS: Atomic bonding – crystalline state of solids-Crystal structure – Unit cell – Bravais Lattice-Crystal systems-Lattice parameters-Crystallographic planes and directions- Miller Indices- Diffraction of X-rays by simple space lattice- Bragg’s law- Experimental methods of X-ray diffraction- Diffraction of electrons from crystals- Diffraction of neutrons from crystals. Crystal imperfections. (11+6) ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES: Free electron theory – Fermi Dirac distribution- Density of States- Sommerfeld’s theory of electrical conductivity- Kronig-Penny model – Brillouin zones- Band model for metals, semiconductors and insulators. Dielectric properties: static dielectric constant – Complex dielectric constant- Dielectric losses and relaxation time- ferroelectrics and piezoelectrics: Classification and properties of ferroelectrics, piezoelectric materials and applications. (11+8) SEMICONDUCTORS AND MAGNETIC MATERIALS: Electronic degeneracy in semiconductors- Carrier concentration in intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors- Law of Mass action-Fermi level- Hall effect and its applications-I-V Characteristics of nanomaterials, size effects on electrical properties of materials-Origin of magnetism-Types of magnetic materials- ferromagnetism- Domain theoryMagnetic hysteresis- Weiss molecular field theory- Hard and soft magnetic materials-applications –Anti-ferromagnetism – FerritesSuperconductors - Meissner effect-Type I and II superconductors-Josephson effect -SQUID. Size effects on magnetic and superconducting properties of materials. (12+8) OPTICAL AND THERMAL PROPERTIES: Optical Reflectance: Kramer-Kronig relations- Excitons and their types, luminescence – types of decay mechanisms- Types of luminescence–Einstein’s theory of specific heat- Debye theory- Elastic waves in an infinite 1D array of identical atoms- vibrational modes of a finite 1D lattice of identical atoms, Size effects on optical and thermal properties of materials. (11+8) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 TUTORIAL COMPONENTS  Indexing of diffraction patterns and identification of crystal structure  I-V characteristics and dielectric measurements through impedance analysis  Characterisation of semiconductors through hall effect  Optical studies using photoluminescence measurement REFERENCES: 1. Charles Kittel, ―Introduction to Solid State Physics‖, Wiley India P. Ltd.,2013. 2. Dekker A J, ―Solid State Physics‖, Macmillan Publications,2012. 3. Callister W D, ―Materials Science and Engineering‖, Wiley Publications,2010. 4. V. Raghavan, ―Materials Science and Engineering: A First Course", Prentice Hall, 2006 5. Pillai S O, ―Solid State Physics, New Age International‖, 2005. 6. Michael Shur, ―Physics of Semiconductor Devices‖, Prentice Hall,1995.

384

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18LN05 INDUSTRIAL NANOTECHNOLOGY 3003

NANOTECHNOLOGY IN ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES: Advantages of nano devices, electronic circuit chips, lasers, micro and nano electromechanical systems (MEMS) -optical switches - bio-MEMS - diodes and nano-wire transistors - data memory - lighting and displays - energy storage - fuel cells and photo-voltaic cells. (11) NANOTECHNOLOGY IN BIOMEDICAL AND PHARMACEUTICAL INDUSTRIES: Nanoparticles in bone substitutes and dentistry reconstructive intervention - nanorobotics in surgery - photodynamic therapy - nanosensors in diagnosis - protein engineering - drug delivery - therapeutic applications. (11) NANOTECHNOLOGY IN THE CHEMICAL INDUSTRY: Nanocatalysts, smart materials, heterogeneous nanostructures and composites, nanostructures for molecular recognition (quantum dots, nanorods, nanotubes), molecular encapsulation and its applications - nanoporous zeolites – self assembled nano-reactors - organic electroluminescent displays. (11) NANOTECHNOLOGY IN AGRICULTURE, TEXTILES AND COSMETICS: Precision farming - smart delivery system – nano fertilizers - food processing - safety and biosecurity -contaminant detection - nanofibre production - tissue engineering application lotus effect - nano finishing in textiles – cosmetics - color cosmetics. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Udo H. Brinker, Jean-Luc Mieusset (Eds.), Molecular Encapsulation: Organic Reactions in Constrained Systems, Wiley Publishers, 2013. 2. W.N. Chang, Nanofibres fabrication, performance and applications, Nova Science Publishers Inc. 2012. 3. P. J. Brown and K. Stevens, Nanofibers and Nanotechnology in Textiles, Woodhead Publishing Limited, Cambridge, 2007. 4. Jennifer Kuzma and Peter VerHage, Nanotechnology in agriculture and food production, Woodrow Wilson International Center, 2006. 5. Neelina H. Malsch (Ed.), Biomedical Nanotechnology, CRC Press, 2005. 6. Bharat Bhushan, Springer Handbook of Nanotechnology, Barnes and Noble, 2004.

18LN51 SYNTHESIS OF NANOMATERIALS LABORATORY 0042 PREAMBLE:  Preparation of nanofibre using Electrospinning method and to characterize it using AFM  Preparation of metal nanoparticles using chemical reduction method and characterize it using UV-Vis spectroscopy  Preparation of Metal oxide nanomaterials  Fabrication of nanofilms-chemical method  Measurement of resistance using Omnicant  Demonstration of Ball Milling process Total P: 60

SEMESTER II 18LN06 CHARACTERIZATION OF NANOMATERIALS 3204 OPTICAL ANALYSIS: Interaction of electromagnetic radiation with materials, UV-Visible Spectroscopy - Fluorescence spectroscopy, flame emission spectroscopy, X-ray fluorescence. (11+5) MORPHOLOGY ANALYSIS: Optical microscopy, scanning electron microscopy, transmission electron microscopy, atomic force microscopy, scanning tunnelling microscopy, Dynamic light scattering. (11+10) COMSPOSITION AND MICROSTRUCTURAL ANALYSIS: Infra red spectrometry - Raman spectroscopy, Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy, Secondary ion mass spectroscopy, Auger emission spectra, X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy, Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy , Energy Dispersive spectroscopy, X-ray diffraction, Selected area electron diffraction. (12+10) THERMAL ANALYSIS AND MECHANICAL ANALYSIS: Differential scanning calorimetry –thermogravimetric analysis-differential thermal analysis-thermomechanical analysis, dynamic mechanical analysis - micro hardness - nanoindendation, Friction force microscopy. (11+5) Total L: 45+T: 30 = 75 TUTORIAL COMPONENT:  Interpretation of UV-Vis Spectra. Electron microscopy sample preparation techniques.  Signals and Artefacts in thermo mechanical analysis, Differential scanning calorimetry  Interpretation of Particles size analysis data, FTIR, and Raman Spectra

385

59th ACM 

09.06.2018

Indexing SAED ring pattern and XRD crystal structure

REFERENCES: 1. Yang leng, ―Materials Characterization: Introduction to Microscopic and Spectroscopic Methods‖, Wiley, 2013. 2. Goddard W, ―Handbook of NanoScience, Engineering and Technology‖, CRC Press, 2007. 3. Cao G., ―Nanostructures and Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties and Applications‖, Imperial College Press, 2004. 4. Willard, ―Instrumental Methods of Analysis‖, Van Nostrand, 2000. 5. Gaponenko S V, ―Optical Properties of semiconductor Nanocrystals‖, Cambridge University Press, 1998.

18LN07 NANOFABRICATION 3003 PATTERNING OF THIN FILMS: Introduction, clean rooms- necessity - types of clean rooms - construction and maintenance, lithography - optical lithography -optical projection lithography, photo mask – fabrication – inspection - defects - repair-resists for nanolithography. (11) RESOLUTION ENHANCEMENT TECHNIQUES: Phase shift mask lithography, off-axis illumination, optical proximity correction, immersion lithography, sub-resolution assist feature enhancement, zone plate array lithography, laser micromachining. (11) ALTERNATIVE NANOLITHOGRAPHIC TECHNIQUES: Electron beam lithography - scattering with angular limitation projection ebeam lithography (SCALPEL) -projection reduction exposure with variable axis immersion lenses (PREVAIL), ion beam lithography, extreme ultraviolet lithography, dip pen lithography, soft lithography. (11) MEMS – FABRICATION PROCESSES AND PACKAGING: Materials for MEMS – MEMS fabrication processes – deposition and etching– ion milling, micromachining, LIGA, integration of electronics and MEMS, packaging, post fabrication processes -package selection – die attach – wire bonding – sealing. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Vijay K. Varadan, Vinoy. K.J., Gopalakrishnan.S, ―Smart material Systems and MEMS: Design and Development Methodologies‖, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 2011. 2. Mark Madou, ―Fundamentals of microfabrication‖, CRC press, 2013. 3. Sami Franssila, ―Introduction to Microfabrication‖, John Wiley and Sons, London, 2012. 4. Tai Ran Hsu, ―MEMS and Microsystems, Design, Manufacture and Nanoscale Engineering‖, John Wiley and Sons, New Jersey. 2008. 5. Harry J Levinson, ―Principles of Lithography‖, SPIE, New Jersey, 2005. 6. James J Allen, ―Micro Electro Mechanical System Design CRC Press-Taylor and Francis‖, New York, 2005.

18LN08 NANO ELECTRONICS 3204 EVOLUTION OF NANOELECTRONICS: Moore’s Law – Silicon Electronics - Limitations – Silicon MOS Transistor from Micro to Nano – Scaling principles, limits to scaling, power constrained scaling limits - Capabilities of nano electronics - physical fundamentals of nano electronics, mean free path, ballistic transport, tunnelling, energy quantization, electrostatic phenomena, and Coulomb blockade. (11+8) INTEGRATION ISSUES AND NANOELECTRONIC DEVICES: Short channel effects - SiO2 vs High-k gate dielectrics - Integration issues of high-k interface states – Metal Source Drain Junctions – Schottky Barrier-Work function pinning - Transistor fundamentals, MOS Electrostatistics, Requirements for Non Classical MOS Transistors, Nano MOSFET, Single Electron Transistors, Carbon Nanotube Field Effect Transistors, Resonant Tunnel Diodes . (12+8) SPINTRONICS: Spin orbit interaction - Spin polarization - spin relaxation - spin dependent transport - materials for spin electronics spin valve and spin tunneling devices, Spin Field Effect Transistor, Quantum Dot Cellular Automata. (11+6) MEMORY DEVICES AND SENSORS: Nano ferroelectrics - Ferroelectric random access memory - Fe-RAM circuit design ferroelectric thin film properties and integration - calorimetric sensors - electrochemical cells - surface and bulk acoustic devices gas sensitive FETs - resistive semiconductor gas sensors - electronic noses. (11+8) Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75 TUTORIAL COMPONENTS:  Process design and development of 30 nm CMOS inverter.  Process and Device Simulation of Single-Electron Transistor  Spin relaxation in metals and semiconductors

386

59th ACM 

09.06.2018

Simulation study of nanowire TFET device.

REFERENCES: 1. George W. Hanson, ―Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics‖, Prentice Hall, 2014. 2. Rainer Waser, ―Nanoelectronics and Information Technology: Advanced Electronic Materials and Novel and Devices‖, Wiley Vch Verlag, Weiheim, 2012. 3. Shunri Oda and David Ferry, ―Silicon Nanoelectronics‖, CRC Press, New York, 2005. 4. Karl Goser et.al, ―Nanoelectronics and Nanosystems: From Transistors to Molecular and Quantum devices‖, Springer, 2005.

18LN09 NANOBIOTECHNOLOGY 3003 BASICS OF BIOLOGY: cell, Organelles-Tissues- Nucleic Acids as Genetic-Material. Biomacromolecules - Carbohydrates, Lipids, Proteins and Nucleic Acids, cell-Nanostructure Interactions.transport across membranes- Endocytosis, exocytosis, phagocytosispinocytosis-receptor mediated endocytosis. Cell differentiation-proliferation- cell migration- apoptosis. Stem cells, ECM. (11) PROTEINS AND DNA BASED NANOSTRUCTURE: S-layer as template for arrangement of nanoparticles. Engineered nanoporessupported Bilayers-membrane arrays-Alternative protein pores. DNA-protein Nanostructure-DNA templated electronics-sequence specific molecular lithography- DNA-gold Nanoparticles conjugates- Molecular processor - DNA analyzer as biochip - molecular electronics- DNA as smart glue, DNA computers. (11) NANOPARTICLES IN THERAPEUTICS: Introduction-polymers–nondegradable synthetic polymers- polyethylene,polypropylene, polytetrafluoroethylene, poly methyacrylates poly hydroxylmethyl acrylates, poly Nisopropyl acrylamide, biodegradable polymers, lipid based colloidal system- factors affecting carrier system-drug load-drug release, stability , dosage. Targeting Approaches. (11) NANOANALYTICS: Quantum dot biolabeling - nanoparticle molecular labels - analysis of biomolecular structure by AFM and molecular pulling - force spectroscopy - biofunctionalized nanoparticles for Surface Enhanced Raman Scattering and Surface Plasmon Resonance. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. David S Goodsell, ―Bionanotechnology: Concepts, Lessons from Nature‖, Wiley-Liss, New Jersey, 2014. 2. Goser K, Glosekotter P and Dienstuhl J, ―Nanoelectronic and Nanosystems - From Transistors to Molecular Quantum Devices‖, Springer, New Delhi, 2014. 3. Reza Arshady and Kenji Kono, ―Smart Nanoparticles in Nanomedicine‖, Kentus Books, London, 2006. 4. Greco R S, Prinz and Smith R. L., ―Nanoscale Technology in Biological Systems‖, CRC Press, London, 2005. 5. Niemeyer C M and Mirkin C A, ―Nanobiotechnology, Concepts, Applications and Perspectives‖, Wiley-Vch, Germany, 2004.

18LN52 NANOFABRICATION LABORATORY 0042 PREAMBLE:     

Fabrication and characterization of thin film organic solar cells and MEMS transistors. Design and fabrication of 3D printed components. Fabrication and characterization of nanocomposite sensors. Biotemplating of nanostructures using bacteria and diatoms. Simulation of electronic devices and fabrication using sputtering. Total P: 60

18LN61 INDUSTRIAL VISIT AND TECHNICAL SEMINAR 0042 The student will make at least two technical presentations on current topics related to the specialization. The same will be assessed by a committee appointed by the department. The students will also be taken on an industrial visit to an external as well as internal industry specializing in nanotechnology related functions. The students are expected to submit a report at the end of the semester covering the various aspects of his/her presentation together with the observation in industry visits. A test covering the above will be held at the end of the semester. Total P: 60

SEMESTER III 18LN53 SIMULATION AND DESIGN LABORATORY 0042 PREAMBLE: 

Study of simulation tools and device design optimization techniques

387

59th ACM 

09.06.2018

Design and analysis of  Micro needles and micro fluidic channels for biomedical applications  MEMS microphone and micromirror for electronic applications  Gyroscope and accelerometer for industrial applications  Electrochemical biosensor and meniscal scaffolds for diagnostic and therapeutic applications Total P: 60

18LN71 PROJECT WORK - I 0063      

Identification of a real life problem in thrust area Developing a mathematical model for solving the above problem Finalization of system requirements and specification Proposing different solutions for the problem based on literature survey Future trends in providing alternate solutions Consolidated report preparation of the above Total P: 90

IV SEMESTER 18LN72 PROJECT WORK - II 0 0 28 14 The project work involves the following: Preparing a project- brief proposal including  Problem identification  A statement of system / process specifications proposed to be developed (Block Diagram/ Concept tree)  List of possible solutions including alternatives and constraints  Cost benefit analysis  Time line of activities A report highlighting the design finalization [based on functional requirements and standards (if any)] A presentation include the following  Implementation phase( Hardware / Software / both)  Testing and validation of the developed system  Learning in the Project Consolidated report preparation Total P: 420

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES 18LN21 NANOSTRUCTURES IN MEDICINE 3003 NANOMEDICINE: Development of nano medicines - Nano Shells - Nano pores - Tectodendrimers - Nanoparticle drug system for oral administration - Drug system for nasal administration -Drug system for ocular administration -Nanotechnology in diagnostic application. (11) SMART ASSEMBLIES: Nano and microparticulate delivery systems-the homing device challenge, nanoparticles in biomedical screening and molecular imaging-analyte detection and screening-gold oligonucleotide nanoprobes-fluorescent silica nanoprobes, molecular imaging, targeted radionuclide imaging. (11) SITE SPECIFIC DRUG DELIVERY: Opsonization of polymer surface-blood compatibility of polymer surfaces-nanospecific bloodnanoparticle interaction-complement activation and cell opsonization-leukocyte activation, suppression of opsonization and nonspecific cell-particle interaction, clinical evaluation of long circulating nanocapsules, (11) NANOSTRUCTURED MICROCAPSULES AND NANOGELS: Microcapsules with nanochanneled thermoresponsive layers, microcapsules with sandwiched thermoresponsive membranes, nanogel-matrix membranes, thermocontrolled protein delivery devices. Preparation of nanogels-microemulsion polymerization-chemical crosslinking-physiochemical crosslinking, stimuli responsive nanogels, nanogel applications in drug delivery. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Alf Lamprecht, ―Nanotherapeutics Drug Delivery Concepts in Nanosience‖, Pan Stanford Publishing, Singapore, 2014.

388

59th ACM 2. 3. 4. 5.

09.06.2018

Mingjun Zhang and Ning Xi, ―Nanomedicine: A Systems Engineering Approach‖, Pan Stanford Publishing, Singapore, 2012. Kewal K Jain, ―The Handbook of Nanomedicine‖, Humana Press, New Delhi, 2008. Reza Arshady and Kenji Kono, ―Smart Nanoparticles in Nanomedicine‖, MML series volume 8, Knetus Books, London, 2006. Robert A and Freitas Jr, ―Nanomedicine Volume IIA: Biocompatibility‖, S Karger Ag, Switzerland, 2003.

18LN22 NANOTHERAPEUTICS 3003 BIOLOGICAL MECHANISM: Opsonization-Complement activation-classical pathway-lectin pathway- Hypersensitivity-I, II, II, and IV, Enhanced permeation and retention. (11) VIRUS LIKE NANOPARTICLES FOR GENE THERAPY: Introduction-polycations for gene delivery In vitro-single plasmid complexes surfactant assisted plasmid complexation-DNA complexation with novel surfactant-morphology, stability and pharmokinetics of DNA-surfactant complexes. Surface modification startigies-Targeting PEG-folate modified DNA nanoparticles.(11) ULTRASOUND TARGETING OF NANOCARRIER: Energy deposition pattern in the body-modes of ultrasound applicationsultrasound transient cavitations-effect of Doxorubicin in transient cavitation-pluronics-optison microbubbles-ultrasound interaction with cells- Drug release – synergistic effect. In vivo evaluation-mechansim of ultrasound targeting of nanocarrier. (12) NANOPARTICLES IN CANCER THERAPY: Magnetic nano and microparticles for embolotherapy - hyperthermic therapy-delivery of chemotherapeutic drugs-brachytherapy, Thermoresponsive liposomes for hyperthermic chemotherapy assemblies. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Mingjun Zhang and Ning Xi, ―Nanomedicine: A Systems Engineering Approach‖, Pan Stanford Publishing, Singapore, 2013. 2. Alf Lamprecht, ―Nanotherapeutics Drug Delivery Concepts in Nanosience‖, Pan Stanford Publishing, Singapore, 2009. 3. Kewal K Jain, ―The Handbook of Nanomedicine‖, Humana Press, New Delhi, 2012. 4. Reza Arshady and Kenji Kono, ―Smart Nanoparticles in Nanomedicine‖, MML series volume 8, Knetus Books, London, 2006. 5. Robert A and Freitas Jr, ―Nanomedicine Volume IIA: Biocompatibility‖, S Karger Ag, Switzerland, 2003.

18LN23 REGENERATIVE MEDICINE 3003 MOLECULES THAT ORGANIZE CELLS: Changes in cell-cell adhesion- Changes in cell-ECM adhesion- Changes in cell polarity and stimulation of cell motility- Invasion of the basal lamina. (11) CELL-ECM INTERACTIONS IN REPAIR AND REGENERATION: Composition and Diversity of the ECM- Receptors for Extracellular Matrix Molecules, Signal Transduction Events during Cell- ECM Interactions, Cell-ECM Interactions during Healing of Skin Wounds, Cell- ECM Interactions During Regeneration- Fetal wound healing- Liver regeneration. (11) DESIGN PRINCIPLES IN BIOMATERIALS AND SCAFFOLDS: Introduction-selection of biomaterials, biodegradable and nonbiodegradable synthetic polymers-fabrication of macroporous biodegradable scaffolds-surface immobilization-sustain release of bioactive molecules. Hydrogels in regenerative medicine. (11) CELL AND TISSUE THREAPY: Biomineralization and bone regeneration, cell therapy for blood substitutes-articular cartilagemyoblast transplantation in skeletal muscles.Fetal tissues, cardiac tissues, extracorporeal renal replacement, regenerative medicine for cornea and respiratory tract, Regulations and ethics. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Fisher J P, Mikos A G and Bronzino J D, ―Tissue Engineering‖, CRC Press, Boca Raton, 2012. 2. Robert Neeram, Thomson ,Lanza and Atala, ―Principles of regenerative medicine‖, Elseiver, Canada, 2011. 3. Sujata V Bhat, ―Biomaterials‖, Narosa Publication House, New Delhi, 2012. 4. Cato T Laurencin and Lakshmi S Nair, ―Nanotechnology and Tissue Engineering: The Scaffold‖, CRC Press, Boca Raton. 2008 5. Lanza R, Langer R and Vacanti J, ―Principles of Tissue Engineering‖, Elsevier Intl, Amsterdam, 2007.

18LN24 PHOTOVOLTAIC TECHNOLOGY 3003 SEMICONDUCTOR PROPERTIES FOR PV: First, second and third generation photovoltaics - Optical absorption and carrier photo generation- Direct vs. indirect bandgaps- Heavy doping effects – Moss Burstein and Bandgap Narrowing - Minority carrier transport properties- Carrier recombination-lifetime and defects- Band to band and Shockley-Read-hall - High injection effects- Surface and interface recombination - PN homojunctions and carrier transport under broad spectrum illumination- Photocurrent and spectral response- Current transport models. (12)

389

59th ACM

09.06.2018

SOLAR CELL DESIGN: Solar Cell parameters - Efficiency calculations for ideal cells - Non-idealities: series resistance, shunt resistance - Optical and electrical loss mechanisms - Basics of solar cell device design - Lateral and vertical design - Optical versus electrical tradeoffs and optimization. (11) SILICON AND THIN FILM PHOTOVOLTAIC CELLS: Si photovoltaics - High efficiency single crystal Si PV designsPolycrystalline/microcrystalline Si solar cells- Amorphous Si-Heterojunctions – Thin film II-VI photovoltaics - Polycrystalline heterojunctions - CdTe/CdS and CuInGaSe2 /CdS thin film cell technologies III-V Heterojunction and Heterinterface Cells. (11) HIGH EFFICIENCY PHOTOVOLTAICS: III-V multi-junction solar cells- Spectral splitting and the GaInP/GaAs/Ge triple junction solar cell - Bandgap profile optimization and solar spectrum matching - Tunnel junctions and current matching limitations Concentrator Photovoltaics - Space photovoltaics- Radiation effects in semiconductors and solar cells - Organic (Polymer) photovoltaics - Dye sensitized solar cells-GaAs - New concepts – quantum dots, wires, intermediate band, multiple exciton. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Fonash S. J., ―Solar Cell Device Physics‖, Academic, 2013. 2. Green M. A. ―Third Generation Photovoltaics: Advanced Solar Energy Conversion‖ Springer, 2006. 3. T. Markvart.‖Solar Electricity‖, Wiley, 2014. 4. Moller H.J. ―Semiconductors for Solar Cells‖ Artech House, 1993. 5. Goetzberger, J. Knobloch, and B. Voss ―Crystalline Silicon Solar Cells‖, Wiley, 1998. 6. Fahrenbruch A.L. and R.H. Bube ―Fundamentals of Solar Cells‖, Academic, 1983.

18LN25 BIOMOLECULAR NANOTECHNOLOGY 3003 BIOLOGICAL MOLECULES IN NANODEVICES: Significance of nanobiological devices, Design of nanobiological devices, nucleic acids in nanobiological devices-Nucleic Acid Hybridization: Structure and Assembly-Biologically Functional Nucleic Acid Nanodevices, proteins in nanodevices-Polypeptide Affinity Reagents:Targeting, Triggering, and Assembly. (11) DNA ELECTRONICS: Charge transport mechanism in DNA-indirect measurement of charge transport in DNA-Direct Measurements of Current–Voltage Characteristics-DNA applications in nano scale electronics-DNA Nano scale Wires-DNA Self-Assembly. (11) DNA-BASED NANODEVICES: DNA technology-Force Generation-Branch Migration, A Device Based on the B–Z Transition-Design of the Device-Characterization of the Device—Fluorescence Resonance Energy Transfer, DNA Actuators-DNA Tweezers-DNA Scissors-A Three-State Device, A Device Based on Crossover Junctions-Design and Operation Scheme of the Device - Formation of G-Quartets-Design and Operation of the G-Quartet Device-An Operation Principle for Free-Running DNA Motors. (11)

PROTEIN NANOTECHNOLOGY: S-layer proteins, secondary cell wall polymers, s-layer fusion proteins, s-layer monolayer formation on solid surfaces, s-layer templating of nanoparticle arrays, spatial control of the s-layer reassembly, lipid membranes, planar lipid membranes, s-layer ultrafiltration membrane (sum)-supported Lipid membranes, solid-supported Lipid membranes. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Chunhai Fan, ―DNA nanotechnology from structure to function‖, Springer, London, 2013. 2. Yoseph Bar Cohen, ―Biomimetics: Biologically Inspired Technologies‖, CRC Press, Boca Raton, 2006. 3. Itamar Willner, Eugenii Katz, ―Bioelectronics: From Theory to Applications,‖ Wiley-VCH,Germany, 2005 4. David S Goodsell, ―Bionanotechnology: Concepts, Lessons from Nature‖, Wiley-Liss, New Jersey, 2004. 5. Niemeyer C M and Mirkin C A, ―Nanobiotechnology, Concepts, Applications and Perspectives‖, Wiley-Vch, Germany, 2004.

18LN26 POLYMER NANOCOMPOSITES 3003 PREPARATION OF POLYMER NANOCOMPOSITES: Definition of nanocomposite, polymer matrix, nanofillers, classification of nanofillers, carbon and non-carbon based nanofillers- synthesis and properties of fillers, Nanofibers, Electrospinning, Composites manufacturing, Synthesis of Nanocomposites: Dispersion, Direct Mixing, Solution Mixing, In-Situ Polymerization, In-Situ Particle Processing, Nanocomposite fiber, Nanocomposite coating, Modification of Interfaces, Modification of Nanotubes, Modification of Nanoparticles (12) CHARACTERIZATION OF POLYMER NANOCOMPOSITES: Characterization techniques for polymer nanocomposites – DLS, TEM, SEM, AFM, XRD, etc, Mechanical Properties, Modulus, Failure Stress and Strain, Toughness, Thermo-mechanical behavior, Abrasion and Wear Resistance, Permeability, Dimensional Stability Contents, Thermal Stability and Flammability, Conductivity, Percolation threshold, Resistivity, Permittivity and Breakdown Strength (11) PROPERTIES OF POLYMER NANOCOMPOSITES: Properties of various polymer nanocomposites: Carbon nanofiller/Polymer Composites, Metal/ceramic nanoparticle based composites, Layered Filler/Polymer Composites, Biodegradable polymer nanocomposites, Barrier properties, Electrical and Optical Properties, Permeation and diffusion models (10)

390

59th ACM

09.06.2018

ADVANCED POLYMER NANOCOMPOSITES: Multi-scale nanocomposites, Nanocomposite nanofibers, Hybrid nanoparticles, Nanoencapsulation, Wear resistant polymer nanocomposites, Surface treatments, Application of Polymer Nanocomposites – Automobiles, Aerospace, Injection Molded Products, Coatings, Adhesives, Fire-retardants, Packaging Materials, Microelectronic Packaging, Integrated Circuits, Drug Delivery, Sensors, Membranes, Medical Devices, Implants, Consumer Goods, Nanoemulsion, etc. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Yiu-Wing Mai and Zhong-Zhen Yu, Polymer nanocomposites, Woodhead Publishing Limited, 2006,. 2. M. Joshi and A. Bhattacharyya, Nanotechnology – A New Route to High Performance Functional Textiles, Textile Progress, 2011. 3. Rakesh K Gupta, Elliot Kennan and Kwang Jea Kim, Polymer nanocomposites Handbook, CRC Press, 2014 4. Joseph H Koo, Polymer Nanocomposites: Processing and applications,McGraw Hill, 2012.

18LN27 NANOPHOTONICS 3003 LINEAR AND NONLINEAR PHOTONICS: Optical luminescence and fluorescence from direct bandgap semiconductor nanoparticles, light emission from indirect semiconductors, Maxwell’s Equations, Photonic Band Gap and Localized Defect States, Transmission Spectra, Nonlinear Optics in Linear Photonic Crystals, Guided Modes in Photonic Crystals Nonlinear Photonic Crystal Analysis. (11) PLASMONICS: Plasmonics, merging photonics and electronics at nanoscale dimensions, single photon transistor using surface plasmon, nanowire surface plasmons-interaction with matter, single emitter as saturable mirror, photon correlation, and integrated systems. (11) NANOSTRUCTURE PHOTONICS: Surface Structures - Random Surfaces - Controlled Random Surfaces - Black Silicon, Thin Film Structures and Optical Coatings, Photonic Crystals, Optical Properties of Materials Including Quantum Structures - Frequency Conversion - Charge Carrier Generation - Multiple Exciton Generation - Optical Properties of Thin Films and Quantum Dots, Nanoplasmonics. (12) APPLICATIONS: Optical modulation by plasmonic excitation of quantum dots, Channel plasmon-polariton guiding by sub wavelength metal grooves, Near-field photonics: surface plasmon polaritons and localized surface plasmons, slow guided surface plasmons at telecom frequencies, Graphene photonics and optoelectronics. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Mool Ch, Gupta and John Ballato, The Handbook of Photonics, CRC Press, 2013. 2. Valery V Tuchin, Handbook of Photonics for Biomedical Science, CRC Press, 2010. 3. Ralf Menzel, Photonics: Linear and Nonlinear Interactions of Laser Light and Matter, Springer, 2012. 4. Shalaev, V M and Kawata, S, Nanophotonics with Surface Plasmons, Elsevier Science Publishing, Boston, 2007.

18LN28 BIOMATERIALS AND TISSUE ENGINEERING 3003 BIOLOGICAL MATERIALS: Biocompatibility- introduction to biological fluids- material response: swelling and leaching, corrosion and dissolution, deformation and failure, friction and wear - host response: the inflammatory process - coagulation and hemolysisapproaches to thrombo- resistant materials development. (11) ORTHOPAEDIC IMPLANT MATERIALS: Bone composition and properties - joint replacement - biomaterials used in bone and joint replacement: metals and alloys - ceramics: carbon, alumina, zirconia, bioactive calcium phosphates, bioglass and glass ceramics polymers - bone cement - composites. - materials for oral and maxillofacial surgery. (11) VASCULAR AND OTHER IMPLANT MATERIALS: Vascular implants - vascular graft, cardiac valve prostheses, cardiac pacemakers - blood substitutes - extracorporeal blood circulation devices. Biomaterials in ophthalmology - viscoelastic solutions, contact lenses, intraocular lens materials. Teeth composition and mechanical properties - fillings and restoration materials -dental cements and dental amalgams - dental adhesives. (11) TISSUE ENGINEERING: Cell - extracellular matrix - cell as therapeutic agent - cell number and growth rate - cell differentiation cell migration - cell death - types of tissues - tissue dynamics - homeostasis in highly prolific tissue - tissue repair – nanomaterials for cell engineering - nano structured extra cellular matrix - electrospun nanofibrous polymeric scaffold - neural tissue engineering cardiovascular tissue engineering. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Fisher, J P, Mikos, A G and Bronzino, J D, Tissue Engineering, CRC Press, Boca Raton, 2012. 2. Temenoff , J S and Mikos , A G ,Biomaterials: The Intersection of Biology and Materials Science, Pearson, 2012.

391

59th ACM 3. 4. 5.

09.06.2018

Sujata, V Bhat, Biomaterials, Narosa Publication House, 2009. Cato T Laurencin and Lakshmi S Nair, Nanotechnology and Tissue Engineering: The Scaffold, CRC Press, 2008. Lanza, R, Langer, R and Vacanti, J, Principles of Tissue Engineering, Elsevier Intl, 2007.

18LN29 POLYMER ELECTRONICS 3003 POLYMERIC MATERIALS: Origin, classification, formation of polymers - chain growth and step growth polymerization, copolymerization - Thermoplastics and thermosets - Micro structures in polymers - polymer length, molecular weight, amorphous and crystalline, thermal transitions in plastics. (11) ELECTRONICALLY CONDUCTING POLYMERS: Band theory, insulators, semiconductors, metals, semimetals, poly (sulfur nitride) and polyacetylene - Synthesis, structure and morphology- Conductivity doping, Phenylene polymers - Polypyrrole and Polythiophene - Polyaniline - Stacked phtalocyanine polymers, polymers with transition metals. (11) FABRICATION OF ORGANIC ELECTRONIC DEVICES: Technology, Materials, Printing and Patterning Techniques, Devices, Printed Electrodes for All-Printed Thin-Film Transistor Applications: Surface Roughness and Edge Waviness in Printed Electrodes Solution-Processing for Organic TFT , Roll-to-Roll Printing, Gravure Printing, Screen Printing of Cathode, OLEDS, Roll-to-Roll Printed OLED Demonstrators. (12) SCALING EFFECTS IN ORGANIC TRANSISTORS AND SENSORS: Scaling Behavior- Charge Transport - Characterization Channel Length and Temperature Dependence of Charge Transport - Field-Dependent Mobility Model - Charge Transport in sub10-nm Organic Transistors - Chemical and Vapour Sensing with Organic Transistors. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Frances Gardiner and Eleanor Carter, ―Polymer Electronics- A flexible Technology‖, iSmithers Rapra Technology Pub. Akron, 2013. 2. Ruth Shinar and Joseph Shinar, ―Organic Electronics in Sensors and Biotechnology‖, Mc Graw Hill, New Jersey, 2013. 3. Cousins K and Keith Cousins, ―Polymers in Electronics‖, Smithers Rapra Technology Publishers, Akron, 2006. 4. Harry R Allcock, Frederick W Lampe and James E Mark, ―Contemporary Polymer Chemistry‖, Pearson, New Delhi, 2003.

18LN30 NANOBIOMATERIALS 3003 NATURAL NANOBIOMATERIALS: Mineral Constituents of the living systems - major elements, minor and trace elements, toxic elements, biomineralization principles, architecture of bone and teeth, nanohydroxyapatite, nanosilica, silk as nanobiomaterial, microstructure of cocoon silk and spider silk, biomimetic nanomaterials - Biologically inspired electro spun nano fibre and nano tubes, Biomimetic formulation of synergistic nanocomposite materials, biomimetic adhesive design and manufacturing. (11) DIAGNOSTIC NANOBIOMATERIALS: Intrinsic biocompatibility of nanoparticle in cellular system - Nanobiomaterial as contrast agent, photosensitizer, degradable and non-degradable polymers, degradable and resorbable materials, biocompatible polymer coated magnetic nanoparticles for MRI imaging, gold and silver loaded bioconjugated carbon nanotube and graphene for tumor targeting, Silica / CdSe / CdS / ZnO core - shell nanostructures for optical diagnostics and imaging – multifunctional nanobiomaterials for multi imaging modality approaches. (12) THERAPEUTIC NANOBIOMATERIALS: Nanobiomaterial as therapeutic agent - Targeted, non-targeted delivery; controlled drug release; exploiting novel delivery routes using nanoparticles, Cytotoxicity mechanisms and their potential use in therapy, gene therapy using nanobiomaterials; nanostructures for antibiotics; diseased tissue destruction using nanoparticles, Photodynamic therapy, Magnetically induced hyperthermia. (11) FUNCTIONAL NANOBIOMATERIALS: Goals of nanomaterial use in healthcare, areas of application- nanovectors, nanobiogenerators, nanobiosensors, implantable drug delivery devices, status of tissue engineering of specific organs - bone marrow, skeletal muscle, and cartilage, design and engineering of mesoporous scaffold for hard tissue replacement, choice of materials and process techniques, fabrication of hybrid microswimmers, bionanomaterial applications in environmental remediation. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Ramakrishna S, Murugan Ramalingam, and Kumar T. S. S., ―Biomaterials: A Nano Approach‖, CRCPress, London, 2014. 2. Astrid Sigel, Helmut Sigel and Roland K. O. Sigel, ―Biomineralization: From Nature to Application‖, John Wiley, 2012. 3. Bikramjit Basu and Ashok Kumar K., ―Advanced Biomaterials: Processing and Applications‖, John Wiley, New Jersey, 2009. 4. Cato T. Laurencin, Temenoff J. S. and Mikos A. G., ―Biomaterials: The Intersection of Biology and Materials Science‖, Pearson, New Delhi, 2009. 5. Yoseph Bar Cohen, ―Biomimetics: Biologically Inspired Technologies‖, CRC Press, Boca Raton, 2006. 6. Hari Singh Nalwa, ―Handbook of Nanostructured Biomaterials and Their Applications in Nanobiotechnology‖, American Scientific Publishers, 2005.

392

59th ACM

09.06.2018 18LN31 NANOTOXICOLOGY 3003

TOXICOLOGY AT NANO SCALE: Size-specific behavior of nanomaterials - nanotoxicology challenges - carbon nanotubes in practice - postproduction processing of carbon nanotubes - physicochemical properties of nanomaterials as mediators of toxicity characterization of administered nanomaterials during toxicity studies - C60 - Graphene issues. (11) NANOPARTICLE EXPOSURE: Physicochemical determinants in particle toxicology - nanoparticles vs. micron-size particles nanoparticle toxicity comparison to larger counterparts - requirement for appropriate model particles - exposure assessment, exposure pathways and their significance - documenting the occurrence and nature of exposures. (11) INTERACTION WITH BIOMEMBRANES: Bio-distribution of nanoparticles - localization of particles in tissues - relevance of drug targeting to nanotoxicology Interaction of nanoparticles with lipid bilayers - cell-level studies of nanoparticle - induced membrane permeability - internalization of cation nanoparticles into cells - placental biological barrier model for evaluation of nanoparticle transfer - transport across placental barrier - assessment of placental transfer. (11) BIOLOGICAL MECHANISM AND ETHICS: Nanoparticle disposition - outline of gene-cellular interactions of nanomaterials overview of dermal effects of nanomaterials - toxicity of nanoparticles in the eye - scientists as moral agents - the business community and corporations as moral agents - policy makers and regulators as moral agents. ethical and societal implications - the public interface of science technology and human values - origins of the precautionary principle. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Nancy A, ―Monteiro Riviere Lang Tran‖, Nanotoxicology, CRC Press, 2014. 2. Deb Bennett Woods, ―Nanotechnology: Ethics and Society‖, CRC Press, Taylor and Francis Group, 2008. 3. Lynn Goldman and Christine Coussens, ―Implications of Nanotechnology for environmental Health Research, National Academic Press, Washington,2007. 4. Patrick Lin, Fritz Allhoff, ―Nano-ethics: The Ethical and Social Implications of Nanotechnology‖, John Wiley and Sons, New Jersey.

18LN32 NANOTECHNOLOGY FOR ENERGY SYSTEMS 3003 SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAICS: Solar radiation, evolution of solar cells, amorphous and crystalline silicon, Thin films, Cadmium telluride solar cell, Copper indium gallium selenide solar cell, Gallium arsenide multi-junction solar cell, Dye-sensitized solar cell, Quantum Dot Solar Cells (QDSCs), Organic/polymer solar cells, hybrid photovoltaic system. (11) MICRO BATTERIES: Super ionic solids - Nano-ionic materials - thin film battery- electrolyte thin films- capacity of a cell - power and energy density of a cell - polymer electrolytes - super capacitors. Primary lithium batteries - Secondary lithium batteries - Li-ion electrode materials - Applications of Lithium batteries in electronic devices and industries. (11) FUEL CELL TECHNOLOGY: Types of fuel cells and their characteristics, physical and chemical phenomena in fuel cells, integration and performance for micro-fuel cell systems - design methodologies - micro-fuel cell power sources, fuel cells for stationary and dynamic applications. (11) HYDROGEN STORAGE METHODS: Metal hydrides - hydrogen storage capacity - hydrogen reaction kinetics - carbon-free cycle gravimetric and volumetric storage capacities - hydriding / dehydriding kinetics - thermal management during the hydriding reaction size effects - distinctive chemical and physical properties - multiple catalytic effects. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Kothari D P, Singal K C and Rakesh Ranjan, ―Renewable Energy Sources and Emerging Technologies‖, PHI Learning, New Delhi, 2013. 2. Leon Freris and David Infield, ―Renewable Energy in Power Systems‖, John Wiley and Sons, London, 2009. 3. Viswanathan B and Aulice Scibioh M, ―Fuel Cells: Principles and Applications‖, Universities Press, Hyderabad, 2009. 4. Chetan Singh Solanki, ―Solar Photovoltaics: Fundamentals, Technologies and Applications‖, PHI Learning, New Delhi, 2009. 5. Kiehne H A, ―Battery Technology Handbook‖, Marcel Dekkar, New York, 2003.

18LN33 NANOCOMPUTING 3003 TECHNOLOGIES AND IMPERFECTIONS: Digital signals and gates - Silicon nanoelectronics - Nanocomputing in the presence of defects and faults - error detection, masking and reconfiguration - Defect tolerance - approaches for achieving defect tolerance in nanometer domain, tool flow required to achieve defect tolerance, testing, placement and routing - Quadrillion transistor logic systems - cell matrix, overcoming manufacturing defects. (11) PROBABILISTIC BASED DESIGN FOR NANOSCALE COMPUTATION AND RELIABILITY ISSUES: Introduction - Markov Random Field (MRK) design for structural based faults, design for signal based errors- Tools and techniques for evaluating reliability

393

59th ACM

09.06.2018

issues for nano architectures - NANOLAB, NANOPRISM, and reliability evaluation of multiplexing based majority systems.

(11)

NANOSCALE QUANTUM COMPUTING: Nano information processing, prospects and challenges - quantum computation, error correction, computing technologies, fabrication and test challenges, architectural challenges - quantum dot cellular automata – computing, clocking and design rules. (11) OTHER COMPUTING TECHNIQUES AND VERIFICATION OF NANO SYSTEMS: Brief overview of molecular electronics and molecular computing - Use of optics in computing and optical computing paradigms - Role of non linear optics in optical computing Verification of large scale nanosystems - scalable verification, scalable unbounded and bounded model checking, verification in the presence of unknowns and uncertainties. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Vishal Sahni and Debabrata Goswami, Nanocomputing: The Future of Computing, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2014. 2. Sandeep K Shukla and Iris Bahar, R, Nano, Quantum and Molecular Computing: Implications to high level design and verification, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2012. 3. Goser K, Glosekotter P and Dienstuhl, J, Nanoelectronics and Nanosystems : From Transistors to Molecular Quantum Devices, Springer, 2008.

18LN34 PRODUCT DESIGN, MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES AND ENTREPRENEURSHIP 3003 PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT: Concept generation - product architecture - Industrial design process - criteria for selection of product - product development process - design for manufacture - estimate the manufacturing cost - reduce the support cost - prototyping - economics of product development projects - elements of economic analysis - financial models. (11) MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES: Technology management - scientific management - development of management thought principles of management - functions of management - planning - organization - directing, staffing and controlling - management by objective - SWOT analysis - enterprise resource planning and supply chain management. (12) ENTREPRENEURIAL COMPETENCE AND ENVIRONMENT: Concept of entrepreneurship - entrepreneurship as a career personality characteristic a successful entrepreneur - knowledge and skill required for Entrepreneur - Business environment entrepreneurship development training - centre and state government policies and regulations - international business. (11) MANAGEMENT OF SMALL BUSINESS: Pre feasibility study - ownership - budgeting - project profile preparation - feasibility report preparation - evaluation criteria - market and channel selection - product launching - monitoring and evaluation of business effective management of small business. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Robert D Hisrich and Michael P Peters, ―Entrepreneurship‖, McGraw Hill, 2013. 2. Karal T Ulrich and Steven D Eppinger, ―Product Design and Development‖, McGraw- Hill, 2008. 3. Koontz H and Cyril O Donnellm, ―Essentials of Management‖, McGraw Hill, 2008. 4. Joseph L Massie, ―Essentials of Management‖, Prentice Hall, 2012.

18LN35 NANOSENSORS AND DEVICES 3003 SENSOR CHARACTERISTICS: Active and passive sensors - static characteristic - accuracy, error, precision, resolution, sensitivity, selectivity, noise, drift, detection limit - reproducibility, hysteresis, stability, response time, recovery time, dynamic range - dynamic characteristics - zero order, first and second order sensors. (11) TRANSDUCTION PRINCIPLES: Photoelectric effect - photo dielectric effect - photoluminescence effect - electroluminescence effect - chemiluminescence effect - Doppler effect - Barkhausen effect - Hal effect - Ettinshausen effect - thermoelectric effect peizoresistive effect – piezoelectric effect - pyroelectric effect -Magneto-mechanical effect (magnetostriction) - Magneto resistive effect. (11) INORGANIC SENSORS: Density of states (DOS) - DOS of 3D, 2D, 1D and 0D materials - gas sensing with nanostructured thin films - absorption on surfaces, metal oxide modifications by additives, surface modifications - Nano optical sensors- Nano mechanical sensors- Magnetically engineered spintronic sensors. (11) ORGANIC SENSORS: Surface interactions-covalent coupling,adsorption,physical entrapment,chemical entrapment - using protein in nanodevices - antibodies in sensing - antibody in nano particle conjugates - enzymes in sensing - enzyme nanoparticles hybrid sensors - transmembrane sensors. Nanosensor based on Nucleotides and DNA - DNA decoders and microarrays - DNA protein conjugate based sensors- DNA sequencing with nanopores- Sensors based on molecules with dendritic architectures. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Vijay K. Varadan, Linfeng Chen and Sivathanupillai, ―Nanotechnology Engineering in Nano and Biomedicine‖, John Wiley, Canada, 2011.

394

59th ACM 2. 3. 4. 5.

09.06.2018

Kourosh Kalantar – Zadeh and Benjamin Fry, ―Nanotechnology- Enabled Sensors‖, Springer, 2014. Bassi.A.S and Knopf.G.K, ―Smart Biosensor Technology‖, CRC Press, 2012. Rajmohan Joshi, ―Biosensor‖, Isha Books, 2006. Brain R. Eggins, ―Chemical Sensors and biosensors‖, John-Wiley, 2002.

18LN36 DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS 2203 INTRODUCTION: Software Development process –Data structures - Abstract Data Types - Analysis of algorithms - Best, worst and average case time complexities - notations. (4+4) ARRAYS: Operations - Implementation of one, two, three and multi dimensioned arrays – Sparse and dense matrices Applications. (4+6) STACK AND QUEUE: Stack operations - implementations - Applications: Function handling - Recursion – Expression Evaluation. Queue - operations - implementations - Priority Queues - Dequeues - Applications: Job scheduling. (6+4) LISTS: Operations - Singly linked lists, doubly linked lists, Circular lists – Applications-Linked Stacks-Linked queues.

(6+4)

TREES AND GRAPHS: Tree Terminologies - Implementation - Binary Tree: Properties – representation of trees, operations Traversals - Expression trees - Infix, Postfix and Prefix expressions – Dijkstra’s Algorithms-Floyd’s Algorithm,Graph Terminologiesrepresentations-graph search methods-Breadth first search, Depth first search,Minimum spanning trees-Multistage graph. (6+6) SORTING: Insertion sort - Selection sort - Bubble sort - Radix sort - Algorithms and their time complexities.

(4+6)

TUTORIAL COMPONENTS:  Analysis of algorithms  Implementation of stack and queue  Evaluation of expressions  Singly and doubly linked lists implementation  Binary tree traversal  Single source shortest path algorithm-Dijikstra’s algorithm  All pairs shortest path problem-Floyd’s Algorithm  Graph search method implementation Total L: 30 + T: 30 = 60 REFERENCES: 1. Alfred V Aho, John E Hopcraft and Jeffrey D Ullman, ―Data structures and Algorithms‖, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009. 2. Robert L Kruse, Bruce P Leung and Clovin L Tondo, ―Data Structures and Program Design in C‖, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009. 3. Aaron M Tanenbaum, Moshe J Augenstein and Yedidyah Langsam, "Data structures using C and C++", Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009. 4. Mark Allen Weiss, ―Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C‖, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2007. 5. Sahni Sartaj, "Data Structures, Algorithms and Applications in C++", Universities Press, Hyderabad, 2005.

AUDIT COURSES 18LN81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP81

18LN82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP82

395

59th ACM

09.06.2018

13. Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment M.TECH BIOTECHNOLOGY 2018 REGULATION (Minimum No. of credits to be earned: 72*)

M. Tech. BIOTECHNOLOGY – 2018 Regulations Course Code Semester I 18BT01 18BT02 18BT03 18BT04 18BT05 18BT51 18BT81

Course Title

(Minimum No. Of credits to be earned: 71 ) Hours/Week Practi Lecture Tutorial cal

Maximum Marks

Credit s

CA

FE

Total

CAT

Biostatistics Technologies and Strategies in OMICs Research Genetic Engineering and Recombinant Products Process Engineering Principles Advanced Bioprocess Engineering Data Mining & Analysis Laboratory English for Research Paper Writing Total 21 hrs

3 3 3 3 3 0 0 15

0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2

0 0 0 0 0 4 ** 4

3 3 3 3 4 2 Grade 18

50 50 50 50 50 50 0 300

50 50 50 50 50 50 0 300

100 100 100 100 100 100 0 600

PC PC PC PC PC PC MC

Bioseparation Technology Quality Assurance, Industrial and Bio-Safety Instrumental Methods of Analysis Laboratory Molecular Cloning and Expression Laboratory Elective 1 Elective 2 Biological Big Data Analysis Laboratory Industrial Visit and Technical Seminar Research Methodology and IPR Total 32 hrs

3 3 0 0 3 3 0 0 0 12

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 6 6 0 0 4 4 ** 20

3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 Grade 22

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 0 400

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 0 400

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 0 800

PC PE PC PC PE PE PC EEC MC

Elective 3 Elective 4 Elective 5 Elective Laboratory Industrial Biotechnology Laboratory Project Work I Total 27 hrs

3 3 3 0 0 0 9

0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 6 6 6 18

3 3 3 3 3 3 18

50 50 50 50 50 50 300

50 50 50 50 50 50 300

100 100 100 100 100 100 600

PE PE PE PE PC EEC

Project Work II 0 0 28 14 50 50 Total 28 hrs 0 0 28 14 50 50 ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES (Five to be opted) 18BT21 Molecular Principles of Cellular Properties 3 0 0 3 50 50 18BT22 Vaccines and Therapeutic Proteins 3 0 0 3 50 50 18BT23 Protein Chemistry and Engineering 18BT24 Advanced Topics in Plant Molecular Biology 3 0 0 3 50 50 18BT25 Techniques In Molecular Subtyping of Pathogens 3 0 0 3 50 50 18BT26 Biomaterials and Tissue Engineering 3 0 0 3 50 50 18BT27 Membrane Separation 3 0 0 3 50 50 18BT28 Biofuels 3 0 0 3 50 50 18BT29 Industrial Waste Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 18BT30 Bioreactor Designs 3 0 0 3 50 50 18BT31 Fundamentals of Cellular Mechanics 3 0 0 3 50 50 18BT32 Techniques in Epidemiological Data Analyses 3 0 0 3 50 50 18BT33 Pharmacogenomics 3 0 0 3 50 50 18BT34 Metagenomics and Epigenomics 3 0 0 3 50 50 18BT35 Systems Biology: Theory and Applications 3 0 0 3 50 50 18BT36 Analytical Instrumentation Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 18BT37 Algorithms in Bioinformatics 3 0 0 3 50 50 ELECTIVE LABORATORY COURSES (One to be opted) 18BT54 Animal Cell Culture Laboratory 0 0 6 3 100 0 18BT55 Plant Tissue Culture Laboratory 0 0 6 3 100 0 18BT56 Protein Purification and Analysis Laboratory 0 0 6 3 100 0 18BT57 Biofuel Laboratory 0 0 6 3 100 0 * Indicated is the minimum number of credits to be earned by a student. ** - 60 hrs in I semester and 90 hrs in II semester; Grade: Completed / Not Completed CAT – Category; PC – Professional Core; PE - Professional Elective EEC – Employability Enhancement Course; MC- Mandatory Course

100 100

EEC

100 100

PE PE

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE

100 100 100 100

PE PE PE PE

Semester II 18BT06 18BT07 18BT08 18BT09 18BT_ 18BT_ 18BT52 18BT61 18BT82 Semester 3 18BT_ 18BT_ 18BT_ 18BT_ 18BT53 18BT71 Semester 4 18BT72

396

59th ACM

09.06.2018

SEMESTER I 18BT01 BIOSTATISTICS 3003 INTRODUCTION TO DECISION MAKING: Biological / clinical research and statististics: data sources and organizing investigational studies. Communication of information. Interpretation of published data. Data in the form of proportion, survival, measures. Study designs – prospective and case control. (12) HYPOTHESIS TESTING: Statistical significance; interpretation of p values; multiple comparisons, nonparametric methods.

(10)

CLINICAL STUDY DESIGN: Health science research, plan and approval process, different types of research including observational, clinical, community, and interventional research. Sample size determination; survival analysis (8) RELATIONSHIPS AND MODELS: Determinants, causations and correlations. Measure of robustness. regression; BAYESIAN LOGIC: Laboratory tests and diagnosis. Genetic counseling. Clinical research.

Linear and non-linear (15)

Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Forthofer RN, Lee ES and Hernandez M. ―Biostatistics: A guide to design, analysis and discovery‖, Academic Press, 2007. 2. Motulsky H. ―Intuitive Biostatistics‖, Oxford University Press, 2004. 3. Glantz, SA. ―Primer of Biostatistics‖, McGraw Hill, 1997. 4. Ambrosius WT. ‖Topics in Biostatistics: Methods in Molecular Biology‖, Humana Press, 2010. 18BT02 TECHNOLOGIES AND STRATEGIES IN OMICS RESEARCH 3003 TECHNOLOGIES IN GENOMIC AND PROTEOMIC ANALYSIS: Genome sequencing technologies – EST, SAGE, MPSS, microarray technologies, Next generation sequencing; Proteomics technologies: 2D-electrophoresis, MALDI-TOF mass spectrometry. (12) GENOME ANALYSIS: Genome assembly and annotation, Genomic browsers and databases, Comparative genomics — miRNA and target genes identification, metagenomics – analysis and applications, Epigenetic analysis. (12) TRANSCRIPTOMICS: Expression data bases and analysis tools, Examples in transcriptome analysis and applications.

(10)

PROTEOMICS: Databases and computational methods for proteome analysis, Protein-protein interactions — yeast two-hybrid system. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Sandy B Primrose, Richard M Twyman. ―Principles of Genome Analysis and Genomics‖, Blackwell Publications, London, 2003. 2. Jianping Xu., ―Next-generation Sequencing: Current Technologies and Applications‖, Caister Academic Press, 2014. 3. John R Yates, Daniel C Liebler ―Introduction to Proteomics:Tools For The New Biology‖, Humana Press, New Jersey, 2002. 4. Sandor Suhai.‖Genomics and Proteomics: Functional and Computational Aspects‖, Springer , New York, 2002. 5. Malcolm Campbell A , Laurie J Heyer. ―Discovery Genomics, Proteomics and Bioinformatics‖, Pearson, 2004. 6. Norbert W. Lutz , Jonathan V. Sweedler , Ron A. Wevers, ―Methodologies for Metabolomics: Experimental Strategies and Techniques‖, Cambridge University Press, 2013. 18BT03 GENETIC ENGINEERING AND RECOMBINANT PRODUCTS 3003 INTRODUCTION: Overview of tools and technique used in rDNA. Large scale production of heterolous protein in prokaryotic and eukaryotic systems – problems and solutions. Biosafety and regulations concerning genetically modified organisms (10) RECOMBINANT BACTERIA AND TRANSGENIC BACTERIAL PRODUCTS TRANSGENIC FUNGAL APPLICATIONS: Recombinant rhizobia, azospirilla, and agrobacteria; Medicine — Insulin, Hepatitis B Vaccine, Human growth hormone; Industrial products- xanthan gum, plastics (Synechocystis), Remediation-oil spill, CO2 trapping, explosive removal, mercury removal. Vector control – mosquito control; CASE STUDY 1. Recombinant Fungi — Biocontrol agent, biological insecticide, GM Arbuscular mycorrhizae , -GM fungi that fight against malaria, dengue, vaccines — M-M-RVAXPRO (Measles, mumps and rubella vaccine.) CASE STUDY 2, 3 (13) GENETICALLY MODIFIED PLANT: Resistance to biotic stress (pests and diseases)- Bt cotton, corn and Brinjal, ; Resistance to abiotic stress (environmental); Improved nutritional qualities- proteins of high value ,baking quality, oil quality, starch quality. Yield parametersShort duration, indefinite flowering, high photosynthetic efficiency. CASE STUDY 4, 5, 6, 7 (12) TRANSGENIC ANIMAL TECHNOLOGIES: Transgenic mice, poultry, livestock, insects, spider, silk worm, - medicine, nutritional quality, silk quality, therapeutic products- erythropoietin, study models for Alzheimers, Huntingtons disease, developmental models –frog metamorphosis. CASE STUDY 8. (10) LIST OF CASE STUDIES 1. Walsh, Gary,‖Therapeutic insulins and their large-scale manufacture‖. Appl. Microbiol. Biotechnol. 67 (2): 151–159, 2005. 2. Fang W, Vega-Rodríguez J, Ghosh A, Jacobs-Lorena M, Kang A, and St. Leger R. Development of Transgenic Fungi That Kill Human Malaria Parasites in Mosquitoes. Science. 2011. 3. Brunner,K. Zeilinger,S. Ciliento,R. WooS.L., Lorito,M., Kubicek C.P., Mach, R.L, ―Improvement of the Fungal Biocontrol Agent Trichoderma atroviride To Enhance both Antagonism and Induction of Plant Systemic Disease Resistance Appl Environ Microbiol. 2005 July; 71(7): 3959–3965, 2005. 397

59th ACM

4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

09.06.2018

Liu et al.: A gene cluster encoding lectin receptor kinases confers broad-spectrum and durable insect resistance in rice. Nature Biotechnology volume 33, pages 301–305 (2015) Geddes et al., 2015, ―Use of plant colonizing bacteria as chassis for transfer of N2-fixation to cereals‖. Current Opinion in Biotechnology: 32: 216-222 (2015) Rakszegi M., Bekes F., Lang L., Tamas L., Shewry P.R. & Bedo Z, ―Technological quality of transgenic wheat expressing an increased amount of a HMW glutenin subunit‖, Journal of Cereal Science, Vol 42, No. 1, (Jul), pp. 15-23, 2005. Ye, X; Al-Babili, S; Klöti, A; Zhang, J; Lucca, P; Beyer, P; Potrykus, I, ―Engineering the provitamin A (beta-carotene) biosynthetic pathway into (carotenoid-free) rice endosperm‖. Science 287 (5451): 303–5, 2000. Cabot, R. A.; Kühholzer, B.; Chan, A. W. S.; Lai, L.; Park, K. —W.; Chong, K. —Y.; Schatten, G.; Murphy, C. N. et al., ―Transgenic Pigs Produced Using in Vitro Matured Oocytes Infected with a Retroviral Vector‖. Animal Biotechnology 12 (2): 205–214, 2001. Total L: 45

REFERENCES: 1. Glick B R, Pasternak J J and Patten C L, ―Molecular Biotechnology: Principles and Applications of Recombinant DNA‖, ASM Press, Washinton D.C, 2010. 2. Primrose S B and Twyman R, ―Principles of Gene Manipulation and Genomics‖, John Wiley & Sons, USA, 2013. 3. Alexander N Glazer and Hiroshi Nikaido, ―Microbial Biotechnology: Fundamentals of Applied Microbiology‖, Cambridge, University Press, 2007. 4. Brown T A, ―Gene Cloning and DNA Analysis: An Introduction‖, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2013. 18BT04 PROCESS ENGINEERING PRINCIPLES 3003 METABOLIC STOICHIOMETRY: Stoichiometry of cell growth and product formation, Types of material balance problems, Balances in systems involving recycle, purge, and bypass streams, Elemental balance, Electron balance and Energy balance calculations, Heat of reaction for processes with biomass production, Energy balance equations for cell culture, Fermentation Energy balance (12) FLUID FLOW AND MIXING: Properties and classification of fluids, Bernoulli‘s equation and its application, Mechanism of mixing, flow patterns in agitated vessels, calculation of power consumption in an agitated vessel, Improving mixing in fermenters. (10) HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER : Mechanisms of heat transfer, Process design of heat exchangers, Diffusion theory, Film theory, Packing materials used in distillation column, Methods of distillation and design calculations using Mccabe thiele method (12) CHEMICAL REACTION ENGINEERING:, Homogeneous and heterogeneous reactions, Classification of chemical reactors, Interpretation of batch reactor datas, Recycle reactors (11) Total L: 45 References 1. 2. 3. 4.

Pauline M.Doran, Bioprocess Engineering Principles, 2nd Edition, Academic Press, 2012 McCabe W L, Smith J C and Harriot P, ―Unit operations of Chemical Engineering‖, McGraw Hill Publishers, 2005. Octave Levenspiel, ―Chemical Reaction Engineering‖, John Wiley and sons, 2004. Christie John Geankoplis, ―Transport Processes and Separation Process Principles (Includes Unit Operations)‖, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003 18BT05 ADVANCED BIOPROCESS ENGINEERING 3204

BIOREACTORS: Submerged fermentation: Operation and application – Stirred tank reactors, reactors in series, reactors with recycle, packed bed reactors, plug flow reactors, airlift reactors, bubble column reactors, membrane reactors, disposable reactors. Solid state fermentation: Reactors for SSF, features, advantages and limitations. (6+3) KINETIC MODELS: Growth and product kinetic models: Unstructured models – Monod model, multiple substrate models, LuedekingPiret model. Application of kinetics models in batch, fed-batch and continuous processes. Structured models – Compartment models, Cellular energetic and metabolism models. Segregation models – Age distribution model, Single cell models. Models for gene expression and regulation, Models for plasmid expression and replication. Microbial interaction kinetics: Microbial competition, predator kinetics. (13+9) MASS TRANSFER IN BIOREACTORS: Gas-liquid mass transfer – Oxygen transfer in reactors, Factors affecting oxygen solubility and oxygen transfer rate, Mass transfer coefficient determination, Gas phase dynamics. Solid-liquid mass transfer, Immobilized system, Kinetics and factor affecting, External and internal transfer limitation, Thiele modulus, effectiveness factor, partitioning effects. Mass transfer with biological reactions: slow reaction regime, fast reaction regime, Mass transfer in microbial flocs and films. (13+9) HEAT TRANSFER AND MIXING IN BIOREACTORS: Heat generation in bioprocess systems, metabolic heat evolution, Design equations for heat transfer systems – pipe exchangers and reactors. Sterilization of media – Kinetics of thermal death, Batch sterilization, continuous sterilization, operation and design. Impellers – Rushton, Propellers, Pitched blade, curved blade, hydrofoil, mixing patterns. Power requirements – Gassed and ungassed system for Newtonian and non-Newtonian fluids. Effect of agitation on oxygen transfer in reactors and towers. Mixing time and residence time distribution in aerated tanks. Multiple impeller system. Influence of agitation of microbial, plant animal cells. (13+9) Total = L: 45 + T: 30=75 REFERENCES: 1. Pauline M Doran, ―Bioprocess Engineering Principles – Second Edition‖, Academic press, 2012. 2. Anton Moser, ―Bioprocess Technology: Kinetics and Reactors‖, Springer Science and Business Media, 2012. 3. Najafpour G.D, ―Biochemical Engineering & Biotechnology‖, Second Edition, Elsevier, 2015. 4. Truskey G.A, Yuan F and Katz D.F, ―Transport Phenomena in Biological Systems‖, Pearson Prentice Hall, 2007 398

59th ACM

09.06.2018

18BT51 DATA MINING AND ANALYSIS LABORATORY 0 0 4 2 Students will be carrying out two projects. One project will involve the computational analysis of genomics and proteomics data thereby deriving the structural, functional and phylogenetic inferences. Second project will pertain to the modeling and simulation of biochemical engineering problems using numerical methods and MATLAB programming. Total P: 60 REFERENCES: 1. Michael Agostino, ―Practical Bioinformatics‖ Garland Science, Taylor & Francis Group, New York, 2013. 2. Syed Ibrahim, K., Gurusubramanian, G., Zothansanga, Yadav, R.P., Senthil Kumar, N., Pandian, S.K., Borah, P., Mohan, S, ―Bioinformatics-A Student‘s Companion‖ Springer, New Delhi, 2016. 3. Kenneth Beers, ―Numerical Methods for Chemical Engineering: Applications in MATLAB‖, Cambridge University Press, 2006 SEMESTER II 18BT06 BIOSEPARATION TECHNOLOGY 3003 SOLID-LIQUID SEPARATION: Classification of bio-products,; Pre-treatment of fermentation broth; Unit operations involved in the development of a bio-product; Cell harvesting techniques, Filtration and centrifugation equipments; Batch and continuous filtration process, biomass separation using rotary drum filter, cake washing, Scale-up of filtration and centrifugation. (12) MEMBRANE BASED SEPARATION PROCESS: Principles, operation and application of microfiltration; Ultrafiltration; Nanofiltration, Reverse osmosis, Dialysis and Electro-dialysis process (11) PRODUCT ISOLATION: Adsorption, Equilibrium relationships for adsorption, Performance characteristics of fixed bed absorber; Concept of breakthrough curve, Engineering analysis of fixed bed adsorber, Aqueous two phase liquid extraction; Examples of ATP systems, Separation of protein and enzymes using ATP systems ,Super-critical fluid extraction for separation of biomolecules. (10) PURIFICATION: Chromatography column selection; Packing material selection; Testing procedure for packed columns; Calculation for number of theoretical plates; Asymmetry and design aspects; Theory, practices and application of Affinity chromatography, Gel permeation chromatography, Ion exchange chromatography and Hydrophobic interaction chromatography. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Belter PA ,‎‎Cussler EL,‎‎Wei-Shou Hu, ―Bioseparations: Downstream Processing for Biotechnology‖, Wiley Blackwell, 1988. 2. Raja Ghosh, ―Principles of Bioseparations Engineering‖, World Scientific Publishers, 2006 3. Sivasankar, B. ―Bioseparations : Principles and Techniques‖. PHI, 2005. 4. Roger G. Harrison, Paul W. Todd, Scott R. Rudge, and Demetri P. Petrides, ―Bioseparations Science and Engineering‖, Oxford University Press, 2015 18BT07 QUALITY ASSURANCE, INDUSTRIAL AND BIO-SAFETY 3003 QUALITY IN BIOPROCESS INDUSTRIES: Historical perspectives, contemporary trends, quality in business environment, methods of quality control. Regulatory bodies and processes, Food industry, Chemicals, Pharmaceuticals, Agroproducts, GMP (10) INDUSTRIAL SAFETY: Industrial chemicals, hazardous chemicals and industrial biological – handling, processing, management and disposal issues. Industrial effluents. Regulatory bodies and regulations and effluent standards (10) BIOSAFETY: Safety Classification, Bio-safety regulations – international conventions and protocols, Indian regulatory bodies and processes. Toxicology: mutagenicity, teratology, susceptibility to toxic agents. Food allergens — Food allergy and related factors. General characteristics of allergens: physical, chemical, stability, epitopes. In vitro assays, transgenic foods, amino acid sequence homologies, (Bt) altered foods. GMO biosafety (13) AGRICULTURE AND ENVIRONMENT: Regulatory oversight, safety assessment, substantial equivalence, gene expression product, safety criteria, toxicity, antimutagenicity effects, allergenicity, marker genes; Fertilizers and pesticides regulations; Biofertilizers and biopesticdes; Environmental monitoring, EIA, ERA (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Collins C. H. and. Beale A. J (Eds): ―Safety in Industrial Microbiology and Biotechnology‖ Butterworth and Heinmann, Oxford, 2015 2. Thomas J A, ―Biotechnology and Safety Assessment‖ 3rd edition, Academic Press, 2002 3. Joshi R ―Biosafety and bioethics‖ Isha Books Delhi, 2006 4. Watson RR and Preedy VR. ―Genetically Modified Organisms in Food Production, Safety, Regulation and Public Health‖ Elsevier USA 2016

399

59th ACM

09.06.2018

18BT08 INSTRUMENTAL METHODS OF ANALYSIS LABORATORY 0 0 4 2 Students will qualitatively and quantitatively analyze the analytes present in any biological samples using analytical techniques like HPLC, GC, PCR, Flame photometry, Lyophilizer by performing the following steps: a. b. c. d.

Standard Operating Procedures Sample Preparation Techniques Varying Precursors/Operational Parameters. Data collection, analysis and interpretation

Additionally, students will be taught to interpret spectral/imaging data collected from high end instruments like SEM, TEM, AFM, FT-IR, Mass Spectrometry Total P: 60 REFERENCES: 1. Richard F. Venn, ―Principles and Practice of Bioanalysis‖, Taylor and Francis Publishers, 2000. 2. Wilson and Walker, ―Principle and Techniques of Biochemistry and Molecular Biology‖, Cambridge University Press, 2010. 18BT09 MOLECULAR CLONING AND EXPRESSION LABORATORY 0 0 6 3 Students will clone and express a heterologous gene in either prokaryotic or eukaryotic system and analyse the recombinant products. The techniques used will include: retrieval of DNA sequence from NCBI, primer designing, DNA isolation, gene amplification, DNA manipulation, transformation, RTPCR, Southern, Northern and/or Western Hybridization analysis of expression. Total P: 90 Reference Sambrook J. F. and Russell D. W. (Ed.), Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, 3rd ed., Vols 1,2 and 3 Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, 2001 18BT52 BIOLOGICAL BIG DATA ANALYSIS LABORATORY 0042 Course Description: Students will design workflow for functional analysis of biological big data with the aid of computational platforms and programming languages and derive statistically significant inferences. Total P: 60 References: 1. Bernd Mayer, ―Bioinformatics for Omics Data‖, Humana Press, 2011. 2. Paul Teetor, ―R Cookbook‖, O′Reilly, 2011

18BT61 TECHNICAL SEMINAR AND INDUSTRIAL VISIT 0 0 2 1 Students shall make a technical presentation on appropriately chosen topics approved by the department and submit a report on the same. The seminar and the report will be evaluated by a faculty review committee. A minimum of two industries are to be visited as part of the course and the students are to present their observations and findings during the visit. Total P: 30 SEMESTER III 18BT53 INDUSTRIAL BIOTECHNOLOGY LABORATORY 0 0 6 3 Students in small groups will develop a process for the manufacturing of bioproducts. The experimentation would include: a. Survey and selection of source and microbial strain. b. Optimization of conditions for growth and product formation. c. Downstream processing strategy for product recovery and purification. d. Economical analysis of the process developed. Total P: 90 REFERENCES: 1. Mukhopadhyay S N, ―Process Biotechnology, Theory and Practice‖, TERI, New York, 2012. 18BT71 PROJECT WORK – I 0 0 6 3 A theme / discipline specific topic is to be selected or assigned; a state of the art development in the field is to be studied and a review is to be prepared; a specific problem within the topic is to be identified and the possible solution options are to be presented to a review committee. Preliminary experiments, models, algorithmic principles are to be developed; a summarizing report is to be submitted. 400

59th ACM

09.06.2018

SEMESTER IV 18BT72 PROJECT WORK – II 0 0 24 12 A proposal based on the developments of PROJECT WORK – I is to be submitted, including time lines and milestones. Progress in project will be evaluated based on details of analyses, consistency and quality of findings, ability to interpret progress and trouble shoot obstacles. ELECTIVES 18BT21 MOLECULAR PRINCIPLES OF CELLULAR PROPERTIES 3003 THE IMPORTANCE OF MEMBRANES: Transport of small molecules; principles of membrane transport; channels and electrical properties of membranes (9) CYTOSKELETONS, JUNCTIONS AND MATRIX: Actin and related proteins; myosin; microtubules; cellular polarization and migration; cell-cell junctions; extracellular matrix; plant cell wall (9) CELL FUNCTION ANALYSES: Regulatory networks and molecular interactions; mathematics of transient behavior; negative feedback and oscillations; cooperative activation; positive feedback and bistability; system robustness (9) INTRACELLULAR COMMUNICATION: Principles of cellular signaling; G protein coupled signaling; enzyme mediated signals; gene control through alternate signaling; signaling in plants; INTRACELLULAR TRAFICS: Cellular compartmentalization; movement between nucleus and cytosol; proteins into mitochondria. Molecular mechanisms of membrane transport and compartmental diversity; endocytosis and exocytosis (18) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Alberts B et al., ―Molecular Biology of the Cell‖, 6th Edition, Garland Science, 2015. 2. Lodish H et al., ―Molecular Cell Biology‖, 8th Edition, WH Freeman, 2016. 3. De Robertis EDP, De Robertis EMF, ‖Cell and Molecular Biology‖ Lippincott Publication, 2010 4. Walker JM and Gingold EB, ―Molecular Biology and Biotechnology‖, Panther Books, 2008 18BT22 VACCINES AND THERAPEUTIC PROTEINS 3 3 0 3 BIOPHARMACEUTICAL PROTEINS: Therapeutic protein production from bacterial, yeast and mammalian systems, recovery of therapeutic proteins from inclusion bodies. Recombinant hormones: insulin, erythropoietin, growth hormone, follicle stimulating hormone – production by recombinant methods and applications. Recombinant cytokines and their receptors: granulocyte colony stimulating factor, interferon - 1 b, TNF  receptors. (12) RECOMBINANT ENZYMES, ENZYME ACTIVATORS AND INHIBITORS: tPA, coagulation factor VIII, asparaginase, biosimilars..

(12)

RECOMBINANT VACCINES: Modern types of vaccines- subunit vaccines, recombinant vaccines, hepatitis B vaccine, yeast, recombinant vector vaccines, DNA vaccines, plantibodies, QC in vaccine production. (10) MONOCLONAL ANTIBODIES: Therapeutic applications of monoclonal antibodies, clinical overview, human recombinant antibody production, production of anti idiotypic antibodies, expression of antibody fragments, immunotherapy with genetically engineered antibodies. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Dembowsky K and Stadler P, ― Novel therapeutic proteins- selected case studies‖. Culinary and hospitality industry publication services, 2005. 2. Mark Smales, C and David Cameron James, ―Therapeutic proteins- methods and protocols‖, Humana press, 2005. 3. Myron M Levin, ―New generation vaccines, Informa health care, 2010. 4. Biotechnology Completely Revised Edition Edited by H.-J. Rehm and G. Reed in cooperation with A. Puhler and F? Stadler Volume 5a Recombinant Proteins, Monoclonal Antibodies and Therapeutic Genes Edited by A. Mountain, U. Ney and D. Schomburg 8 WILEY-VCH Weinheim - New York . Chichester . Brisbane . Singapore Toronto , 1999 15BT23 PROTEIN CHEMISTRY AND ENGINEERING 3003 PROTEIN STRUCTURE: Structural implications of peptide bonds, Primary structure and its determination- peptide mapping, peptide sequencing- automated Edman method, mass spectrometry, High throughput protein sequencing setup, polypeptide synthesis, secondary structures and its determination by CD, super secondary structures. (10) PROTEIN FOLDING: Folding pathways, thermodynamics and kinetics of protein folding, Molecular Chaperones, protein folding diseases; Protein stability, tertiary structure and its determination by X-ray crystallography; post translational modifications, Glycoprotein and phosphoprotein analysis, Protein evolution – In vitro evolution. (10)

401

59th ACM

09.06.2018

PROTEIN CONJUGATES : Protein modification- group specific reagents for amino acid modifications, Biotinylated enzymes, Liposome conjugates, Fluorescent conjugates, Colloidal gold labeled proteins; STRUCTURAL FUNCTION RELATIONSHIP OF PROTEINS: Enzymes, antibodies, Protease inhibitors, membrane protein, receptors. (15) ENGINEERING PROTEINS: Protein engineering methods- Directed and random mutagenesis, Engineering thermal stability, specificity and other properties; Antibody engineering; Therapeutic insulin- case study 1, Engineering subtilisin and other industrial enzymes — case study 2 & 3, ;Engineering with non natural amino acids – case study 4, Protein design — Basic concepts in design and construction of new protein/enzyme molecule. (10) LIST OF CASE STUDIES: Case study 1: Recombinant DNA technology in the treatment of Diabetes: Insulin Analogs, Endocrine Reviews 22(5)706-717 2001. Case study 2: Directed evolution of a maltogenic α-amylase from Bacillus sp. TS-25‘ Journal of Biotechnology, 134 (3-4), 325-333, 2008 Case study 3: Protein Engineering- Case studies of commercialized engineered Products, Biochemistry and Molecular Biology Education 35 (1), 2-8,2007. Case study 4: Protein engineering with non-natural amino acids – Chapter 11-―Protein Engineering‖ by Kaumaya P: In Tech 2012. Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Branden C and Tooze J ―Introduction to Protein structure‖ Second Edition , Garland Publishing Incv, NY 1999. 2. Schulz G.E. and Schirmer R. H.‖ Principles of Protein structure‖, Springer-Verlag,2003. . 3. Kaumaya P ―Protein Engineering‖ In Tech 2012. 4. Alberghina L, ―Protein engineering in Industrial Biotechnology‖ Harwood Academic Publishers, Chur, Switzerland, 2003. 5. Hermanson G T ‖Bioconjugate Techniques‖ Academic Press Third Edition 2013. 18BT24 ADVANCED TOPICS IN PLANT MOLECULAR BIOLOGY 3003 PLANT GENOME AND PHYSIOLOGY: Genome organization and gene expression; organelle genomes, Gene regulation, Protein targeting. Photosynthesis, lipid metabolism, Respiration, Secondary metabolites. CASE STUDY 1 (13) TRANSGENIC PLANTS: Gene manipulation; genome and Plastid transformation; Plant functional Genomics; activation tagging, RNAi, transposon tagging, molecular pharming Biosafety of transgenic plants. CASE STUDY 2 (12) STRESS RESPONSE SIGNAL TRANSDUCTION: Biotic, abiotic- salinity, drought, heat, cold, UV radiation, heavy metals, pathogen and pest infestation. CASE STUDY 3 (10) HORMONES AND GROWTH REGULATION: Plant development, Flowering, Tissue culture. CASE STUDY 4

(10) Total L: 45

CASE STUDIES: 1. Elisabeth Veeckman, Tom Ruttink, Klaas Vandepoele (2016): Are We There Yet? Reliably Estimating the Completeness of Plant Genome Sequences. The Plant Cell. 2. Long et al., (2015): Meeting the Global Food Demand of the Future by Engineering Crop Photosynthesis and Yield Potential. Cell: 161 (10: 56-66 3. Zhu JK (2016): Abiotic Stress Signaling and Responses in Plants. Cell 167 (2): 313-324 4. Ren H and Gray WM (2016): SAUR Proteins as Effectors of Hormonal and Environmental Signals in Plant Growth. Molecular Plant: 8(8): 1153-1164 REFERENCES: 1. Palmiro Poltronieri , Natalija Burbulis and Corrado Fogher (Eds): From Plant Genomics to Plant Biotechnology. Woodhead Publishing Limited, Oxford, 2013 2. Mitsue Miyao,, ―Molecular evolution and genetic engineering of C4 photosynthetic enzymes‖, J. Exp. Bot., 54: 179 – 189, 2003. 3. Shujun Yang, Barbara Vanderbeld, Jiangxin Wan, and Yafan Huang, ―Narrowing Down the Targets: Towards Successful Genetic Engineering of Drought-Tolerant Crops‖, Mol Plant, 3: 469 – 490, 2010. 4. Hiroyuki Nonogaki, ―Micro RNA Gene Regulation Cascades during Early Stages of Plant Development‖, Plant Cell Physiol., 51: 1840 – 1846, 2010. 5. TakehitoInaba and Yasuko Ito-Inaba, ―Versatile Roles of Plastids in Plant Growth and Development‖, Plant Cell Physiol., 51: 1847 – 1853, 2010. 18BT25 TECHNIQUES IN MOLECULAR SUBTYPING OF PATHOGENS 3003 Overview – Phenotyping methods – Characteristics of Ideal typing methods — limitations of traditional methods

(9)

DNA based Techniques: DNA hybridization , PCR based approaches, Electrophoresis based methods, Bead based nucleic acid assay, Plasmid Analysis (12) DNA Sequencing based Techniques: MLST, SNP, VNTR, MLVA, IS analysis, Pyrosequencing, Ribotyping, Microarray, CRISPR, NGS (12) Omics based Techniques: Protein based methods, Transcriptome analysis, Proteomic profiling, Microbial Lipid Analysis

(12) Total L: 45

402

59th ACM

09.06.2018

REFERENCES: 1. DNA Methods in Food Safety: Molecular Typing of Foodborne and Waterborne Bacterial Pathogens, Sara Lomonaco and Daniele Nucera, John Wiley and Sons, 2014. 2. Lin T, Lin L, ZhangF (2014). Review on Molecular Typing Methods of Pathogens, Open Journal of Medical Microbiology, 4, 147-152 3. Shariat N and Dudley EG (2014) CRISPRs: Molecular Signatures Used for Pathogen Subtyping, Applied and Environmental Microbiology, 80(4) 430–439 4. Croucher J N et al (2015). Bacterial Genomes in Epidemiology – Present and future. 5. Castro et al, (2015) Identification and Typing Methods for the Study of Bacterial Infections: a Brief Review and Mycobacterial as Case of Study, 17:1-10 6. Harald H. Kessler (Ed): ―Molecular Diagnostics of Infectious Diseases‖, Walter De Gruyter & Co, 2014 18BT26 BIOMATERIALS AND TISSUE ENGINEEERING 3003 INTRODUCTION: tissue architecture, cell organization, ECM molecules, Cell-Cell adhesion, Cell matrix adhesion, Matrix molecules and their ligands, Growth factors and their functions. Repair and regeneration; STEM CELLS: Embryonic and adult, cell lineages, cell determination and differentiation. Induced pluripotent stem cells, application of stem cells in tissue engineering. (16) FUNCTIONAL TISSUE ENGINEERING: Tissue culture principles, bioreactors in tissue engineering. Mass transfer studies- nutrients, growth factors and other regulatory molecules. Molecular and cell transport-diffusion, convection, cell migration. Cell & tissue mechanicselasticity, viscoelasticity, pseudoelasticity, measurements of mechanical properties (10) BIOMATERIALS: Scaffolds/substrates for tissue regeneration, Metals, Ceramics, synthetic Polymers, biopolymers- Characteristics and applications. Nanomaterials Microscale patterning of cells and environment, Polymer scaffold fabrication, micro and nanoscale fabrication, Surface Modification- Objectives, biological coating (10) CASE STUDIES: Musculoskeletal, Skin, Hematopoietic system

(9)

Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Robert Lanza, Robert Langer and Joseph P. Vacanti eds., Principles of Tissue Engineering, Academic Press, 2013. 2. Alberts B., Lewis J., Johnson A., ―Molecular Biology of the Cell‖, 5th edition, Garland Publishing, Inc., London, 2008 3. Robert P Lanza, Anthony Atala ―Methods Of Tissue Engineering‖, Academic Press, New York, 2006 4. Larry L Hench ed. Julian R Jones ―Biomaterials, Artificial Organs and Tissue Engineering‖, Woodhead Publishing Limited, England, 2005 18BT27 MEMBRANE SEPARATIONS 3003

REVERSE OSMOSIS: Types of membranes, Membrane process, Theoretical background, Membranes and materials, Membrane selectivity, Membrane modules, Membrane fouling, control and cleaning, Applications. (10) ULTRAFILTRATION AND MICROFILTRATION: Characterization of Ultrafiltration membranes, Concentration polarization and membrane fouling, Membrane cleaning, membrane modules and system design, Applications. Microfiltration: Types and application. (12) ELECTRODIALYSIS AND DIALYSIS: Chemistry of Ion-exchange membranes, Transport in electro dialysis membranes, system design. Dialysis, Donnan dialysis and diffusion dialysis. Membrane reactors. Control drug delivery. (12) CASE STUDIES: Membrane processes in production of functional whey components, Separation and fractionation of milk fat globules, Fractionation of milk proteins for making cheeses, caseins and whey proteins and for milk protein standardization, Sewage treatment using membrane bioreactors, Membrane separations for removal of microorganisms, Desalination of sea water using RO and Electrodialysis (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Richard W Baker, ―Membrane Technology and application‖, John Wiley and Sons, Ltd. Third Edition, 2012. 2. Seader JD, Henley EJ and Roper DK, ―Separation process principles-Chemical and biochemical operations‖,Wiley Interscience, third Edition, 2011. 3. Ladisch MR, ―Bioseparations Engineering: Principles, Practice, and Economics‖, Wiley Interscience, 2001. 4. Ahmad Fauzi Ismail Mukhlis A. Rahman Mohd Hafiz Dzarfan Othman Takeshi Matsuura, ―Membrane Separation Principles and Applications‖, Elsevier, First edition, 2018 18BT28 BIOFUELS 3003 BIODIESEL: , First, second and third generation biofuels, Biorefinery concepts,Transesterification reaction mechanism, Basics and chemistry of fats and oil, oil resources and feedstock, methods for biodiesel production, Different types of catalysts employed, heterogeneous catalysis, treen-borne oil biodiesel, enzyme based biodiesel and microalgae based biodiesel, Physiochemical properties and biodiesel characterization techniques. (11) BIOETHANOL AND BIOBUTANOL: Different feedstocks for Bioethanol and biobutanol production, Fermentation process, Sugarcane molasses and other sources for fermentation process. Lignocelluloses pretreatment methods, Hydrolysis, Hydration, Lignin upgradation, Simultaneous Saccharification and fermentation (SSF), Co-fermentation and economics of bioethanol production, ABE Fermentation, Recent development in bioethanol and biobutanol commercialization (12)

403

59th ACM

09.06.2018

BIOHYDROGEN AND BIOGAS: Thermo-chemical conversion of lignocellulosic biomass, Biohydrogen production process: Chemical method and Biological method, Factors affecting biohydrogen production, Characteristics of biohydrogen, Feedstocks for biogas production, Microbial and biochemical aspects, Operating parameters for biogas production, Digesters for rural application (12) MICROBIAL FUEL CELLS AND BIOELECTROGENESIS : Mechanism of Bioelectrogenesis, Basics of Bioelectricity generation in Microbial Fuel Cell, Exoelectrogens and electron transfer mechanism, Available architectures, Voltage and power generation, Kinetics and mass transfer in Microbial Fuel Cell, Applications of Microbial Fuel Cell. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Riazi MR, David Chiaramonti, ―Biofuels Production and Processing Technology‖, CRC Press, 2017 2. Sunggyu Lee, Shah YT, ―Biofuels and Bioenergy: Processes and Technologies‖, CRC Press, 2012 3. David M Mousdale, ―Introduction to Biofuels‖, CRC Press, 2010. 4. Bruce E. Logan, ―Microbial Fuel Cells‖, John Wiley and Sons, 2008. . 18BT29 INDUSTRIAL WASTE MANAGEMENT 3003 MICROBIAL ECOLOGY: Ecological principles relevant in treatment of waste; capability of microbial process for pollutant management. (15) INDUSTRIAL LIQUID WASTE MANAGEMENT: Waste generation and characterization; collection and handling; reactor and operational principles; biological processes – non intensive treatment; and fish ponds; treated waste disposal; plant design and operation. (12) SOLID AND HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT: Bioprocess solid wastes, characterization and value estimation, combustion, solid state fermentation, vermiculture. Chemical wastes and their sources, waste characteristics; principles in generation, containment and treatment. (12) AIR POLLUTION MANAGEMENT: Criteria pollutants, methods for pollutant characterization; methods in treating gaseous pollutants; role of technology towards air pollution. Odour and aerosol control; Carbon sequestration and carbon credits (6) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Rittman B E and McCarty P L, ―Environmental Biotechnology‖, McGraw Hill International, New York, 2001. 2. Tchobanoglous G et al, ―Solid Wastes Engineering Principles and Management‖, McGraw Hill, Inc, 2004. 3. Denevers N, ―Air Pollution Control Engineering‖, McGraw Hill International Edition, New York, 2000 4. Martin Alexander, ―Biodegradation and Bioremediation — ED 2‖, Elsevier Amsterdam, 2013. 18BT30 BIOREACTOR DESIGNS 3 0 0 3 DESIGN OF BIOREACTOR VESSEL AND UTILITIES: Bioreactors: Materials, Standard size, design consideration and specifications. Utilities for reactors: Sterilization system, cooling system – types, materials, Piping and valves design specifications and sizing. (10) DESIGN OF DIFFERENT BIOREACTORS: Pneumatic agitated bioreactors – bubble column and airlift reactors, Immobilized cell reactors, Photo-bioreactors. Design of reactors for solid state fermentation. Scale up — Fundamental, Semi-fundamental, Dimensional analysis and rule of thumb approaches, Scale up based on mass transfer coefficient, power consumption, shear and mixing. (14) BIOREACTORS FOR ANIMAL AND PLANT CELLS: Characteristics of animal and plant cells, Types of reactors: reactors for mammalian cells, reactors for hairy root culture. Design considerations – mass transfer, effect of shear, scale up of reactors for animal cells and plant cells. (11) BIOPROCESS MONITORING AND CONTROL: Sensors to monitor fermentation process: Biomass, temperature, pH, dissolved oxygen, foam, flow measurements, pressure and gas analysis. Biosensors in monitoring process. Controllers: Feedback and feed forward controllers, PID controllers. Process Analytical Technology: CQA, CPP, QbD concept, Biocalorimetry and Dielectric spectroscopy in real time bioprocess monitoring. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Lydersen B K, Nancy A D and Nelson K L, ―Bioprocess Engineering – Systems, equipments and facilities‖, Wiley India PVt. Ltd., 2010. 2. Impre JFMV, Vanrolleghem PA and Iserentant DM, ―Advanced Instrumentation, Data Interpretation and Control of Biotechnological Processes‖, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2010. 3. Mansi, E.M.T.EL., Bryce, C.F.A., Demain, A.L. and Allman, A.R., ―Fermentation Microbiology and Biotechnology‖, Third edition Taylor and Francis, 2012. 4. Tapobrata Panda, ―Bioreactors: Analysis and Design‖, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited, 2011 18BT31 FUNDAMENTALS OF CELLULAR MECHANICS 3 0 0 3 MOLECULAR MECHANICS: Forces in Biology; Molecular motors and force generation, Single molecule mechanics; Biopolymers — Properties of DNA, Protein, Cytoskeletal polymers, Chain Models, functional implications. (12) CELLULAR MECHANICS: Mechanics of cell andy organelle membrane ; Cytoskeleton and cortex; Static and dynamic cell processes; Cell motility, adhesion, migration and contraction. Quantitative aspects of cell mechanics — continuum mechanics, models of viscoelasticity, single cell mechanical models. (15) 404

59th ACM

09.06.2018

MECHANOTRANSDUCTION: Mechanical Signals, Mechanosensing, Intracellular signaling initiated by mechanical signals.

(8)

EXPERIMENTAL METHODS: Single molecule — optical and magnetic traps, force spectroscopy, AFM; Cellular level — passive and active rheology, motility and adhesion assays. Case Studies — cancer, malaria, and sickle cell anemia. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Boal, D. ―Mechanics of the Cell‖. Cambridge University Press, 2001. 2. Grodzinsky, A. Fields, ―Forces and Flows in Biological Systems‖. Garland Science, 2011 3. Howard, J. ―Mechanics of Motor Proteins and the Cytoskeleton‖. Sinauer Associates, 2001. 4. Jackson, M. B. ―Molecular and Cellular Biophysics‖. Cambridge University Press, 2006. 5. Mofrad, M., and R. Kamm. ―Cytoskeletal Mechanics: Models and Measurements in Cell Mechanics‖. Cambridge University Press, 2011. . 6. Mofrad, M., and R. Kamm. ―Cellular Mechanotransduction: Diverse Perspectives from Molecules to Tissues‖. Cambridge University Press, 2009. 18BT32 TECHNIQUES IN EPIDEMIOLOGICAL DATA ANALYSES 3 0 0 3 PATTERN RECOGNITION: Trend analysis – chi-square and regression models: congenital malformation in infants over time: surveillance data. Cross sectional data – 2 by k tables, summary odds ratios and logistic regression: risk of low birth weight and exposure to cigarette smoke. (9) CLINICAL INTERROGATION: Prospective study – relative risk and poisson regression: behavior type and risk of coronary disease. Randomized trial – t-tests and computer intensive approaches: memory loss rates in Alzheimer‘s disease patients. (10) FITTING MODELS: Goodness of fit – Pearson chi-square tests: Mendel‘s ornamental flowers. Multivariate linear regression models: pregnancy weight gain and birth weight.CLUSTER ANALYSIS: Graphic cluster analysis, PCA with contour plots: race/ethnicity and gene frequencies. (20) BIAS AND MISCLASSIFICATION: Simple linear regression and correlation: bias in repeated blood pressure measurement.

(6)

Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Selvin S. ―Epidemiologic Analysis – a case oriented approach‖. Oxford University Press, New York, 2001. 2. Forthofer, R & Lee ES, ―Biostatistics:: Design, Analysis and Discovery‖, Elsevier Acad Press, 2006 3. Vittinghoff E, Lidden GV & Shiboski SC, ―Regression Methods: Linear, Logistic, Survival, Repeated Measure Models‖, Springer, 2012 4. Daniel WW, ―Biostatistics‖, John-Wiley, 1999 18BT33 PHARMACOGENOMICS 3 0 0 3 PHARMACOGENETICS: Case studies in Polymorphic genes encoding drug metabolizing enzymes, transporters, receptors and other drug targets in man and animals. Effects of genetic polymorphisms on the disposition and metabolism of drugs, environmental, endogenous chemicals and other xenobiotics. Regulation of drug metabolizing enzymes — examples. (15) PHARMACOGENOMICS IN DRUG DISCOVERY: Drug discovery principle, target identification, screening methodologies and assays, mechanism-based design, structure-based design, in vitro and in vivo testing, chemical analogs and development issues (10) PHARMACOGENOMICS IN DRUG DEVELOPMENT: Genome wide studies to understand the genetic basis for differences in drug response. Genetic variability in drug receptors, transporters and enzymes as well as regulatory proteins involved in promoting and inhibiting transcription and translation. Toxicogenomics. (10) REGULATORY AND ETHICAL ASPECTS: Case studies, clinical trials, FDA, Pharmacogenomic Data Submission, Guidance and other regulatory guidelines (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Robert Nussbaum Roderick McInnes Huntington Willard Thompson & Thompson Genetics in Medicine‖, 8th Edition, 2015. 2. Pharmacogenomics: Applications to Patient Care, Third Ed. 2009 ISBN: 978-1-932658-699,Editors: Julie A. Johnson, Vicki L. Ellingrod, Deanna L. Kroetz, Grace M. Kuo 3. Sata F, Sapone A, Elizondo G, et al. CYP3A4 allelic variants with amino acid substitutions in exons 7 and 12: evidence for an allelic variant with altered catalytic activity. Clin Pharmacol Ther 2000;67:48-56. 4. Choo EF, Leake B, Wandel C, et al. Pharmacological inhibition of P-glycoprotein transport enhances the distribution of HIV-1 protease inhibitors into brain and testes. Drug Metab Dispos 2000;28:655-660 18BT34 METAGENOMICS AND EPIGENOMICS 3 0 0 3 TECHNIQUES AND STRATEGIES FOR METAGENOMIC ANALYSIS: Types of metagenomes — Amplicon, Shotgun and Functional. Tools used for identifying diversity, searching for novel genes and gene products, and investigating relationships among genes, mRNAs, and proteins in microbial communities. NGS for metagenome analysis. Metagenomic bioinformatics tools enabled genome assembly and classification of large-scale sequencing data. (14) 405

59th ACM

09.06.2018

EPIGENETIC AND EPIGENOME REGULATION: Histones and nucleosomes, chromatin organization, Histone modifications and epigenetic information, transcription in chromatin environment, Techniques used in the study of transcription factor binding and DNA methylation, chromatin remodelers, regulation of gene expression – non-coding RNAs, small non-coding RNAs. Molecular regulation of genomic imprinting, genetic control of epigenomics, methylomes, role of environment in epigenome regulation (10) TECHNIQUES USED IN EPIGENOME ANALYSIS: ChIP, ChIP on chip,ChIP sequence, ChIP- PCR, sequencing, enzyme based methods, NGS based sequencing of the epigenome. Epigenome systems – Human epigenome, epigenomics in plants, fungi (10) APPLICATIONS OF METAGENOMICS AND EPIGENOMICS: Metagenomic applications in agriculture, environment and health. Plantmicrobe interactions, bioremediation, industrial bioproducts, epigenetic regulation in stem cells, epigenetics of the immune system, epigenetics in neuronal diseases, Cancer epigenomics. (11) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Diana Marco, editor. ―Metagenomics: Theory, methods, and applications‖. Caister Academic Press, Norfolk, UK; 2010. 2. Nessa Carey, ―The epigenetic regulation‖, Columbia University Press, 2011. 3. Robert A Myers, ―Epigenetic regulation and epigenomics‖, Wiley- Blackwell, 2012. 4. Kalia, Vipin Chandra, Yogesh Shouche, Hemant J. Purohit, and Praveen Rahi, eds. ―Mining of Microbial Wealth and MetaGenomics”, Springer, 2017. 18BT35 SYSTEMS BIOLOGY: THEORY AND APPLICATIONS 3003 INTRODUCTION : Biological Systems and Processes – Reductionism – Modern experimental techniques and Biological Databases — Need for systems biology — Mathematical Models — Systems level understanding of biological systems — Basic principles and concepts – Systems Biology Work Flow — Applications — Scope and Future. (6) FOUNDATIONS OF SYSTEMS BIOLOGY: Linear Algebra – Probability Theory – Network and Graph Theory – Dynamical Systems Theory – Stochastic Processes — Control of Linear Dynamical Systems — Biological Thermodynamics – Linear and Nonlinear Time series Analysis — Statistics — Multivariate Statistics (20) MODELLING AND APPLICATIONS: Modelling Theory: Goals, inputs and initial exploration — Modelling Strategies (Structural models, Network Approach, Kinetic, Discrete, Stochastic and Spatio-temporal models) — Model Design and Fitting — Model testing and Selection — Local & Global Sensitivity Analysis — Model Reduction and Extension – Model Optimisation and Control. (16) DATABASES, DATA FORMATS, STANDARDS AND SIMULATION TOOLS : Biological Databases, Systems Biology Markup Language — BioPAX –Systems Biology Graphical Notation – Simulation Tools for Systems Biology (COPASI, CellDesigner, Virtual Cell, Cytoscape etc.) (3) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Edda Klipp, Wolfram Liebermeister, Christoph Wierling, Axel Kowald ―Systems Biology: A Text Book‖, Wiley-Blackwell Publishing, 2016. 2. Eberhard Voit, ―A First Course in Systems Biology‖, Garland Science,2012. 3. Brian P Ingalls, ―Mathematical Modelling in Systems Biology‖, MIT Press,2013 4. Uri Alon, ‗Introduction to Systems Biology – Design Principles of Biological Systems‘,CRC Press, 2006. 18BT36 ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTATION TECHNIQUES 3003 SPECTROSCOPIC AND IMAGING TECHNIQUES: Concepts, Sample Preparation and Characterization - Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy, Infrared, , Energy DispersiveX-ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy; Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Integrated Approaches: Structural aspects of protein- NMR-FT-IR technique, chemical state identification and elemental quantification – AAS-EDX-XPS technology, Microscopic Techniques: Atomic force microscopy, Confocal Microscopy, Fluorescence microscopy, Scanning Electron Microscopy, Transmission Electron Microscopy; Innovative TEM coupled approaches for cell study: FLEC-TEM, CT-TEM, TEMNanoSIMS, TEM diffraction; (15) CHROMATOGRAPHY AND MASS SPECTROMETRY: Concepts on liquid chromatography and its variants (HPLC, Capillary LC, reverse phase LC, 2D-LC), Applications: Food Analysis, Characterization of antibody-drug conjugates, determination of fungicides, TLC-HPLC as an integrated approached for determination of complex molecules from soil/water samples; Integrated Approaches on Mass spectrometry – GC-MS and LC-MS . (10) ELCTROPHORETIC APPLICATIONS: Concepts on Capillary and Pulsed Field Gel electrophoresis; PFGE Applications: Profiling of Serovars using PFGE, Investigation of Epidemology; Capillary electrophoresis: Analysis of Vitamins, separation of enantiomers, drug discovery; Electrophoresis-Colorimetry integrated technique (10) APPLIED ELECTROCHEMISTRY: Transmembrane Electrochemistry (SECM, STM, Voltametry), Integrated Approach – Oxidative Electrochemistry-LC-Mass spec for peptide/protein modification, separation and identification. (10) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Wilson and Walker, "Principle and Techniques of Practical Biochemistry", Cambridge University Press, Oxford, 2000 2. Richard F. Venn, "Principles and Practice of Bioanalysis", Taylor and Francis, 2000 3. Skoog D A, Holler F J and Nieman T A, "Principles of Instrumental Analysis", Barace College Publishing, DC, 2006 406

59th ACM

09.06.2018

4.Khandpur R S,‖Handbook of Analytical Instruments‖, McGraw Hill, 2006 18BT37 ALGORITHMS IN BIOINFORMATICS 3003 BIOLOGICAL DATABASES: Scope and history of Bioinformatics; DNA, Protein and Structural Databases; Secondary databases and their construction with case study (7) SEQUENCE ALIGNMENT ALGORITHMS: Pairwise sequence alignment: Dot matrix; K-tuple methods: BLAST, FASTA;; Dynamic Programming; Multiple sequence alignment: Progressive methods - Clustal W, Iterative methods – HMM; Scoring matrices: PAM, BLOSSUM, PSSM. (14) GENE AND PHYLOGENETIC PREDICTION: Gene prediction: Asymmetry statistics, Neural networks; Phylogenetic prediction: Distance methods; (12) PROTEIN AND RNA STRUCTURE PREDICTION: RNA structure prediction: Minimum free energy methods and co-variation site analysis; Protein structure Prediction: two dimensional structure-Neural networks, three dimensional structure-Rosetta Method, HMMSTR. (12) Total L: 45 REFERENCES: 1. Marketa Zvelebil & Jeremy Baum, ―Understanding Bioinformatics‖. 1st edition, Garland Science, 2007 2. Jonathan Pevsner, ―Bioinformatics and Functional Genomics‖. 3rd edition, Wiley-Blackwell, 2015 3. David W Mount, ―Bioinformatics: Sequence and Genome Analysis‖, 2nd edition, CBS publishers, 2004. 4. Sung, W.K., ―Algorithms in bioinformatics: a practical introduction‖, CRC Press, 2009 ELECTIVE LABORATORY 18BT54 ANIMAL CELL CULTURE LABORATORY 0 0 6 3 Course content 1. Aseptic technique 2. Morphology of various mammalian cell types 3. Routine subculture 4. Cell counting and viability assays 5. Freezing and thawing cells Total P: 90 REFERENCES: 1. Ian Freshney R., ‗Culture 0f Animals Cells: A Manual of Basic Technique‘ John-Wiley & Sons Inc 2005 18BT55 PLANT TISSUE CULTURE LABORATORY 0 0 6 3 Course content 1. Aseptic technique 2. Media composition and formulation 3. Callus induction and sub-culturing 4. Suspension culture induction and maintenance 5. Microporpagation 6. Agrobacterium mediated transformation and confirmation 7. Hairy root induction Total P: 90 REFERENCES: 1. Roberta H. Smith: Plant Tissue Culture, Third Edition: Techniques and Experiments. Academic Press. 2012. 2. Razdan Mk, ‗Introduction To Plant Tissue Culture‘ Oxford and IBH Publishing Co Pvt Ltd 2003 18BT56 PROTEIN PURIFICATION AND ANALYSIS LABORATORY 0 0 6 3 Course content 1. Induction of recombinant protein in Bacteria/ yeast 2. Assay of enzymes / recombinant protein analysis by western hybridization 3. Protein purification using FPLC - Affinity chromatography/ Ion-exchange chromatography 4. Analysis, Fraction pooling and sample concentration 5. Purity analysis by HPLC Total P: 90 References: 1. Roe S ― Protein Purification Techniques : A Practical approach‖ , Second Edison, Oxford University Press, 2001, New York 2. Rosenberg I M ― Protein analysis and purification: benchtop techniques - ED 2, Birkhauser 2007 Boston 407

59th ACM

3.

09.06.2018

Hardin C , Riell A And Pinczes J, ― Cloning gene expression and protein purification: experimental procedures and process rationale‖, Oxford University Press 2008, New York 18BT57 BIOFUEL LABORATORY 0 0 6 3

Course content 1. Biomass screening, size reduction and particle size distribution analysis 2. Determination of cellulose, hemicellulose, and lignin content from lignocellulosic biomass 3. Estimation of crystallinity index in raw and pretreated sample 4. Non-edible/Algal oil extraction using Soxhlet apparatus 5. Biodiesel production from vegetable oils 6. Fatty acid profile analysis and data interpretation using GC 7. Sugar analysis and data interpretation using HPLC 8. Quantification of ethanol and data interpretation using HPLC Total P: 90 REFERENCES: 1. Anju Dahiya, ―Bioenergy: Biomass to Biofuels‖, Academic Press, 2014 2. Ashok Pandey , Christian Larroche, Steven Ricke, Claude-Gilles, Dussap Edgard Gnansouno, ―Biofuels‖, Academic Press, 2011

AUDIT COURSES 18BT81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP81

18BT82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP82

408